Skip to main content

Full text of "Pliny's Natural history. In thirty-seven books"

See other formats


~ 


-;*>; 

>;.-^»>^ 

frZSK** 
-•#>£ 

•»»o 
s*> :. 


!>"^ 

>      » 

> 


-Ai^>^>^> 
^^E*8**^-^  — 


^  > 

>»  >;• 

/;-»  > 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 


* 

->   '•    >• ' 

>       ->_>  I 


PRESENTED  BY 

PROF.  CHARLES  A.  KOFOID  AND 
MRS.  PRUDENCE  W.  KOFOID 


:.>'    ,'-^K 


-^ja»o.>3jfc      •   >.;> . 


^~>> 


-  .  >  •• 


s 

»»     >>  .     i 

>) 


CASE 


PLINY'S 
NATURAL    HISTORY. 

IN 

THIRTY-SEVEN   BOOKS. 

n         ' 

A  TRANSLATION 

ON  THE  BASIS  OF  THAT  BY  DR.  PHILEMON  HOLLAND, 
ED.  1601. 

WITH  CRITICAL   AND  EXPLANATORY  NOTES. 

VOL.  I. 


bp  tf)e  WUcnurtan  Club. 


PRINTED  FOE  THE  CLUB 

BY 

GEOKGE  BAKCLAY,  CASTLE  STEEET,  LEICESTER  SQUARE. 


1847-48. 


184-1 
v.l-3 


PURSUANT  to  a  Resolution  to  the  following  effect,  passed  at  a  meeting  of 
the  Committee  held  on  Wednesday,  3rd  February,  1847 : — 

"  The  best  thanks  of  the  Club  are  hereby  presented  to  — 

JONATHAN  COUCH,  Esq.  F.L.S.,  the  Superintending  Editor  of  this 
Publication,  and  Translator  of  the  Work. 

Also  to  the  following  Gentlemen,  viz. : — 

In  the  Department  of  Astronomy, 
SIR  JOHN  F.  W.  HERSCHEL,  BART.  F.R.S. 

In  the  Department  of  Classical  Literature, 

Rev.  GEORGE  MUNI-ORD,  M.A. 
W.  G.  V.  BARNEWALL,  Esq.  M.A. 
Rev.  T.  FULCHER,  B.A. 

In  the  Departments  of  Antiquities  and  Geography, 

JONATHAN  COUCH,  Esq.  F.L.S. 
C.  J.  B.  ALDIS,  Esq.  M.D. 
OCTAVIUS  A.  FERRIS,  Esq. 
CHARLES  MOXON,  Esq. 

For  the  Editorial  Assistance  rendered  by  them  in  the  preparation  of  the 
accompanying  Work." 


PREFACE, 


INCLUDING   A 


MEMOIR   OF  THE   AUTHOR. 


fAIUS  PLINIUS  SECUNDUS,  usually 
called  the  Elder,  to  distinguish  him  from 
his  nephew  of  the  same  name,  who  was 
equally  eminent  in  letters,  but  in  a  dif- 
ferent field,  was  born  of  an  illustrious 
family  of  Verona,  in  the  23rd  year  of  the  Christian  era. 
According  to  the  custom  of  Roman  youths,  he 
served  in  the  army,  where  he  was  honoured  with  the 
regards  of  Titus,  son  of  Vespasian,  and  afterwards 
emperor,  to  whom  he  dedicated  his  great  work  on  the 
"  History  of  Nature." 

To  one  of  his  inclinations  and  tastes,  the  military 
career  was  probably  little  suited  ;  yet  every  Roman 
was  called  on  to  enter  it,  whatever  department  of  the 
public  service  he  might  afterwards  occupy.  With  the 
army  in  Germany  he  acquired  distinction.  On  his 
return  to  Rome  he  was  enrolled  in  the  College  of 
Augurs  —  a  post  which  favoured  his  philosophic  in- 


VI  PREFACE. 

quiries  ;  and  he  was  subsequently  appointed  Procu- 
rator, or  Vice-Governor,  in  Spain. 

It  has  been  remarked,  that  none  labour  more 
strenuously  in  any  favourite  pursuit  than  those  whose 
time  appears  absorbed  in  the  necessary  affairs  of  life  ; 
none  are  so  idle  as  those  whose  business  is  slight 
enough  to  afford  leisure  for  every  occupation.  Of  this 
truth  history  furnishes  no  example  more  striking  than 
is  visible  in  the  varied  pursuits,  the  diligence,  and  the 
research  of  Pliny ;  while  there  can  be  no  doubt  also 
but  that  his  public  services  acquired  additional  value 
from  the  wide  range  which  his  mind  embraced,  and 
the  rich  stores  of  knowledge  which  it  was  his  habit  to 
accumulate  and  arrange. 

Such  was  the  spirituality  of  his  nature,  that  bodily 
requirements — much  more  bodily  indulgences — seemed 
extinct  in  him.  His  relaxation  from  official  business 
was  a  change  of  labour.  The  greater  portion  of  his 
nights  was  devoted  to  study ;  his  very  meals  were  an 
abstraction  ;  for,  lest  he  should  forget  the  higher  aim 
of  existence,  his  amanuensis  read  to  him  in  their  pro- 
gress ;  and,  instead  of  walking,  he  drove  in  the  cha- 
riot —  his  secretary  beside  him  —  to  save  time  and 
escape  distraction  from  his  contemplations.  So  nume- 
rous and  valued  were  his  extracts,  remarks,  and  an- 
notations, that  Lartius  Lutinius  offered  the  philoso- 
pher a  sum  equivalent  to  more  than  three  thousand 
pounds  sterling  for  the  possession  of  them ;  but  they 
were  more  nobly  bequeathed  to  his  beloved  and  distin- 
guished nephew.  In  the  vast  realms  of  Nature  and 
Art  no  object  was  indifferent  to  him  ;  in  the  province 
of  the  Fine  Arts,  the  accuracy  of  his  judgment  and 
the  fidelity  of  his  details  seemed  only  to  be  outmea- 


PREFACE.  Vll 

sured  by  the  extent  of  his  acquirement ;  and  as  a  his- 
tory, a  critique,  and  a  catalogue,  nothing  more  pre- 
cious in  letters  than  his  34th,  35th  and  36th  books, 
has  escaped  the  ruin  in  which  the  fall  of  the  Roman 
empire  had  nearly  involved  all  of  enlightenment  that 
had  grown  up  and  flourished  with  it.  To  his  huma- 
nity and  scientific  curiosity  combined,  he  became  one 
of  the  most  memorable  martyrs  that  stand  on  record. 
The  events  of  the  day  that  closed  his  mortal  career, 
in  the  79th  year  of  the  Christian  era,  are  minutely  and 
touchingly  detailed  to  Tacitus  the  historian,  in  one  of 
the  most  elegant  of  the  epistles  penned  by  a  nephew 
who  was  the  worthy  inheritor  of  the  wealth,  the  fame, 
and  the  virtues  of  his  uncle.  The  body  was  found 
three  days  after  its  destruction  by  the  eruptions  of 
Vesuvius,  and  interred  at  Misenum,  in  face  of  the  fleet 
which  he  had  quitted  for  the  prosecution  of  his  phy- 
sical investigations.  For  the  emulation  of  those  who 
delight  to 

"  Look  from  nature  up  to  nature's  God," 

as  the  best  eulogy  that  can  be  pronounced  on  Pliny 
himself,  and,  at  the  same  time,  as  a  sentiment  evincing 
his  nephew's  exalted  mind,  the  subjoined  extract  of 
the  memorable  letter  cannot  be  too  often  and  too  long 
remembered  :  —  "  Equidem  beatos  puto,  quibus  Deo- 
rum  datum  est,  aut  facere  scribenda,  aut  scribere 
legenda ;  beatissimos  vero  quibus  utrumque." 

No  impulse  short  of  an  intense  love  of  nature 
could  have  actuated  a  man  so  deeply  engaged  in  the 
high  offices  of  the  state  to  snatch  at  every  fragment  of 
his  time  —  as  his  nephew,  in  a  letter  to  a  friend,  de- 
scribes him  —  and  appropriate  it  to  forming  a  digest  of 


Vlll  PREFACE. 

the  scattered  rays  of  natural  knowledge.  The  subject 
was  scarcely  popular  with  his  countrymen  ;  and  its 
materials  were  to  he  sifted  from  Greek  writers  of 
every  school,  with  a  toil  and  patience  which  few  can 
duly  estimate.  The  abstracts  thus  made  filled  one 
hundred  and  sixty  closely  written  volumes,  and  though 
the  sentiments,  or,  as  we  should  now  term  them,  the 
theories,  of  his  authors  were  not  a  little  discordant,  he 
was  well  able  to  separate  their  matter  from  their 
opinions  ;  and,  if  sometimes  found  to  have  hastily 
adopted  hypotheses  for  facts,  it  must  be  remembered 
that  there  existed  then  no  standard  for  the  test  of 
fact — that  what  he  had  abstracted  had  the  sanction  of 
venerable  names — and  that  the  period  of  sound  criticism 
comes  in  only  when  vast  stores  of  facts  and  incidents 
have  been  collected  ;  and  Pliny  was  then  the  most  dili- 
gent accumulator  for  a  riper  age.  To  him  belongs 
the  glory  of  having  harvested  the  materials  for  future 
science.  Where  attempts  at  explanation  were  made, 
occult  causes,  in  the  ignorance  of  experiment,  were 
the  only  resource ;  and  even  the  great  Galileo  took 
refuge  in  "  Nature's  abhorrence  of  a  vacuum,"  for  the 
only  solution  he  could  give  of  an  operation  which  now 
admits  of  such  rational  explanation.  Even  the  errors 
of  these  authors  are  a  portion  of  the  "  History  of 
Nature,"  and  Pliny's  record  of  them  becomes  valuable, 
where  otherwise  his  narrative  tempts  only  to  a  smile. 

The  light  of  modern  science  clears  away  the  mist ; 
yet  few,  even  of  ourselves,  are  privileged,  from  our 
higher  sphere  of  advancement,  to  look  down  con- 
temptuously on  the  erroneous  conjectures  or  super- 
stitious feelings  exemplified  in  this  cyclopaedia  of  the 
Roman  naturalist :  for  too  many  such  failings  are  still 


PREFACE.  IX 

visible  amongst  ourselves,  and  these  from  a  wrong  and 
sometimes  cherished  bias  in  us,  which  were  only  an 
inability  to  penetrate  more  deeply  in  themselves. 

To  Pliny's  especial  honour  be  it  mentioned  (and 
instances  of  the  merit  will  be  frequently  referred  to  in 
the  notes),  wherever  a  rational  explanation  of  natural 
appearances  can  be  given,  he  uniformly  prefers  it  to 
the  traditionary  and  the  vulgar,  however  the  latter  may 
have  been  interwoven  with  the  religion  of  the  state,  to 
which,  on  other  occasions,  he  paid  the  homage  which 
it  required :  a  practice  like  this  demanded  no  ordinary 
courage,  when  it  might  easily  have  provoked  the 
charge  of  scepticism  and  profanity  ;  and  his  escape 
from  this  may  not,  perhaps,  unreasonably  be  traced  to 
the  support  he  obtained  for  his  remarks  from  Greek 
authors,  to  whom,  in  points  of  speculation,  the  Romans 
peculiarly  deferred. 

By  many  it  was  feared,  that  if  what  the  people 
were  accustomed  to  worship  as  deities  were  shewn  to 
their  understandings  as  only  natural  influences,  they 
might  sink  into  atheism,  and  the  little  restraint  winch 
this  worship  exercised  over  their  morals  have  been  en- 
tirely dissipated.  The  Rationalism  of  the  philosophers 
thus  appeared  a  formidable  evil ;  and  the  prevalence  of 
the  notion  that  certain  remarkable  natural  causes  pro- 
ductive of  great  good  or  great  evil,  according  to  our 
limited  judgment,  were  deities  themselves,  is  amply 
illustrated  by  the  fact,  that  it  was  triumphantly  asked 
of  the  first  Christians  to  shew  their  God ;  and  much 
of  the  contempt,  persecution,  and  reproach  of  atheism 
they  incurred,  may  have  had  its  origin  in  this  seeming 
incapacity  to  conform  to  this  demand. 

To  modern  eyes,  Pliny's  mode  of  conducting  his 


X  PREFACE. 

investigations  has  changed  its  aspect ;  and  his  credu- 
lity is  gravely  urged  against  him  as  a  crime  which  his 
exposure  of  much  error  and  superstition  is  not  thought 
sufficient  to  outweigh.  Some  of  the  matters  which  he 
announces,  it  is  true,  might  well  have  shaken  the 
strongest  tendency  to  belief :  and  Herodotus,  when  re- 
porting similar  occurrences  which  had  been  narrated 
to  him,  is  known  to  have  carefully  separated  between 
what  was  given  on  the  authority  of  others,  and  on  his 
own  responsibility.  On  the  other  hand,  it  must  be 
borne  in  mind,  that  a  proneness  to  belief  in  the  case  of 
natural  wonders  was  the  feature  -of  the  age ;  and  had 
these  been  omitted,  the  author  would  have  incurred 
censure  on  this  ground  —  an  accusation,  the  reverse, 
doubtless,  of  what  is  now  advanced,  but  which  would, 
nevertheless,  have  affected  his  character  for  fidelity. 

There  is,  moreover,  reason  to  believe  that  he  has 
softened  down  much  of  the  wonderful  which  he  ex- 
tracted from  other  authors,  and  the  following  coinci- 
dence may  be  regarded  as  giving  confirmation  to  this 
estimate  of  Pliny's  discretion.  When  Aulus  Gellius 
landed  at  Brundusium,  on  his  passage  from  Athens  to 
Rome,  he  found  on  the  book-stalls  some  bundles  of 
Greek  works,  which  he  read  with  eager  curiosity.  But, 
with  every  disposition  to  credit  the  authorities,  he  calls 
some  of  the  narratives  of  Aristeas,  Isigonius,  Ctesias, 
Onesicritus,  Polystephanus,  and  Hegesias,  unheard 
of  and  incredible.  Accordingly,  in  making  extracts 
from  these  volumes,  which  bore  marks  of  having  been 
much  read,  it  would  appear  that  he  passed  by  those 
incidents  which  were  most  absurd,  and  selected  such 
only  as  he  deemed  worthy  of  further  inquiry.  The 
selections  thus  made  are  found  remarkably  to  corre- 


PREFACE.  XI 

spond  with  those  which  Pliny  has  introduced  in  his 
own  work. 

Narratives  of  similar  stamp  and  character  gained 
equal  credit  in  Europe  during  the  middle  ages :  the 
famous  traveller,  Maundeville,  believed  what  he  nar- 
rated, and  found,  as  he  expected,  readers  ready  to  be- 
lieve him ;  and  the  more  so,  perhaps,  for  the  marvels 
which  the  history  of  his  tour  contains.  Indeed,  in  the 
infancy  of  observation,  when  the  Causes  of  Natural 
Phenomena  were  little  known,  so  much  was  seen  as  to 
render  every  thing  probable,  and  so  little  understood, 
that  any  explanation  was  alike  satisfactory. 

Rapid  as  is  the  foregoing  sketch  of  the  great  natu- 
ralist's life  and  character,  enough,  it  is  hoped,  has  been 
glanced  at  to  commend  the  revival  of  the  volume  be- 
fore us,  and  to  secure  for  its  author  among  ourselves  a 
reverence  as  great  as  is  the  undying  interest  given  by 
his  name  to  the  cities  of  Herculaneum  and  Pompeii, 
which  perished  with  him. 

The  following  translation  may  be  regarded  as  that 
of  Dr.  Philemon  Holland,  who  flourished  in  the  reign 
of  Elizabeth,  and  is  the  only  writer  who  has  given  a 
complete  rendering  of  Pliny's  works  in  English.  Some 
liberties  have  been  taken  with  the  original  translation. 
An  attempt  has  been  made  to  reduce  its  verbosity,  and 
to  approximate  it  more  closely  to  the  brevity  and  terse- 
ness of  the  Latin  text ;  while  the  Editor  has  been  at 
the  same  time  studious  of  not  interfering  unnecessarily 
with  the  simplicity  of  style  by  which  writers  of  that  day 
were  distinguished.  The  notes  are  given  by  various 
members  of  the  Club,  to  whom  application  has  been 
severally  made  by  the  general  Editor,  according  to 
the  department  in  which  each  may  be  found  most 


Xll 


PREFACE. 


competent.  The  contributions  have  received  the 
approval  of  the  Committee,  and  been  specially  ac- 
knowledged in  each  volume. 

The  first  and  thirty-third  books  of  Pliny  were 
translated  by  Dr.  Bostock  in  1828,  as  specimens  of 
a  new  version,  which,  but  for  his  death,  would  in  all 
probability  have  been  completed.  Of  the  notes  ap- 
pended to  these  sample  chapters,  such  use  has  been 
made  as  subserves  the  purposes  of  our  republishing 
Pliny  in  English  ;  but,  in  the  main,  they  are  found  to 
be  more  critical  than  explanatory. 


SSternerfan 


Bone  Ticket  of  Admission  to  the  Amphitheatre,  found  at  Pompeii 


THE  FIRST  BOOK 


NATURAL    HISTORY 


BY  C.  PLINIUS  SECUNDUS. 


The  Preface  to  Vespasian\  his  [friend']  C.  Plinius 
Secundus  sendeth  greeting. 

HESE    Books,  containing   the 
History   of  Nature,  which  a 
few   days  since  I  brought  to 
Light   (a   new    work  among 
the  Romans,  your  Citizens), 
I  purpose  by  this  Epistle  of 
mine  to  present   and  conse- 
crate  unto  you,  most  gentle 
Prince    (for    this   Title2    ac- 
cordeth  fittest  unto  you,  seeing  that  the  Name  of 
[Most  mighty3]  sorteth  well  with  the  Age  of  your 
Father:)  which  haply  might  seem  boldness  and 
presumption  in  me,  but  that  I  know  how  at  other 
Times  you  were  wont  to  have  some  good  Opinion  of 
my  light  Matters*.    Where,  by  the  Way,  you  must 
give  me  Leave  to  soften  a  little  the  Verses  which 

1   Titus.  8  Suavissimm.  3  Maxim-its. 

"  Namque  tu  solebas, 
Mcas  esse  aliquid putare  nugas" 


14  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.          [BooK  1. 

I  borrow  of  my  Tent-fellow,  Catullus  (to  this  Term  of  Camps1 
you  are  no  Stranger)  :  for  he,  as  you  know  well,  changing 
the  former  Syllables  of  his  Verses2,  one  for  another,  made 
himself  somewhat  more  harsh  than  he  would  seem  to  be 
unto  the  fine  Ears  of  his  familiar  Friends,  the  Veranioli  and 
Fabulli.  And  I  would  be  thought  by  this  my  intrusive 
Writing  to  you,  to  satisfy  one  point,  which,  as  you  com- 
plained in  your  Answer  of  late  to  another  bold  Letter  of 
mine,  I  had  not  performed,  that  is,  that  all  the  World  might 
see  (as  it  were  upon  Record)  how  the  Empire  is  managed  by 
you  and  your  Father  equally  :  and  notwithstanding  this 
Imperial  Majesty  whereunto  you  are  called,  yet  is  your 
Manner  of  conversing  with  your  old  Friends  affable,  and 
the  same  that  always  heretofore  it  had  been.  For  although 
you  have  triumphed  with  him  for  your  noble  Victories,  ful- 
filled the  Office  of  Censor,  and  also  six  times  that  of  Consul3, 
shared  the  Authority  of  Tribune,  Patrons,  and  Protectors  of 
the  Commons  of  Rome,  together  with  him  :  although,  I  say, 
you  have  otherwise  shewed  your  noble  Heart  in  honouring 
and  gracing  both  the  Court  of  the  Emperor  your  Father, 
and  also  the  whole  State  of  the  Knights  and  Gentlemen  of 
Rome,  whilst  you  were  Captain  of  the  Guard,  and  Grand 
Master  of  his  House  and  royal  Palace  (in  all  which  Places 
you  demeaned  yourself  in  respect  to  the  Good  of  the  Com- 
monwealth), yet  to  all  your  Friends,  and  especially  to  my- 
self, you  have  borne  the  same  Countenance  as  in  former 
Times,  when  we  served  under  the  same  Colours,  and  lodged 
together  in  one  Tent.  In  all  the  Greatness  to  which  you  are 
elevated,  there  is  no  other  Change  seen  in  your  Person  but 
this  :  That  your  Power  is  now  commensurate  with  your  Will, 
and  you  are  able  now  to  perform  that  Good  which  you  have 
ever  intended. 

1  Conterranewn. 

2  It  seemeth  that  Pliny  read  thus  in  Catullus : 

"  Tuputare  namque, 
Nugus  esse  aliquid  meas  solebas" 
which,  indeed,  was  but  an  hard  composition  and  couching  of  the  words. 

3  Sexies,  or  rather  Septies;  out  of  Suetonim. 


BOOK  I.]  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian .  15 

And  however  this  great  Majesty  resplendent  in  you  on 
every  Side,  in  regard  of  those  high  Dignities,  may  induce  the 
World  at  large  to  reverence  your  Person,  yet  1  for  my  part 
am  aided  only  with  the  strength  of  Confidence  to  shew  my 
Duty  in  a  more  familiar  manner  than  others  :  and,  therefore, 
this  my  Boldness  you  will  impute  unto  your  own  Courtesy ; 
and  if  it  be  a  Fault  in  me,  you  will  seek  your  Pardon  from 
yourself.  I  have  laid  Bashful  ness  aside,  but  to  no  Purpose. 
For  although  your  Gentleness  and  Humanity  induce  me  to 
draw  near  to  your  Presence,  yet  you  appear  in  other  re- 
spects in  great  Majesty :  for  the  Sublimity  of  your  Mind, 
your  high  Attainments,  set  me  as  far  behind  as  if  the  Lictors 
marched  before  you.  Was  there  ever  any  Man,  whose 
Words  passed  from  him  more  powerfully,  and  who  more 
truly  might  be  said  to  flash  forth  as  Lightning  the  Force  of 
Eloquence  ?  What  Tribune  was  ever  known  more  effectu- 
ally to  move  the  People  with  agreeable  Language  ?  How 
admirably  you  thundered  out  the  Praise  of  the  worthy  Acts 
of  your  Father !  What  a  Testimony  of  Love  to  your  Bro- 
ther! How  skilful  in  Poetry!  How  ingeniously  you  find 
means  to  imitate  your  Brother1  in  this  respect2!  But  who  is 
able  boldly  to  give  sufficient  Estimate  of  these  Gifts  ?  How 
may  any  One  enter  into  the  due  Consideration  of  them  with- 
out Fear  of  the  exact  Judgment  of  your  Wit,  especially  being 
challenged  therunto  as  you  are  ?  For  the  case  of  such  as 
publish  a  Work  in  general  is  unlike  theirs  who  dedicate  it 
by  Name  to  yourself.  For  had  I  set  forth  this  my  Book 
without  any  personal  Dedication,  I  might  have  said,  Sir, 
why  should  a  mighty  Commander  and  General3  busy  him- 
self to  read  such  Matters  ?  These  Treatises  were  written  for 
the  lower  Classes,  for  rude  Husbandmen  and  Peasants  of 
the  Country,  for  the  Mass  of  Artisans,  and  those  who  had 
Leisure  for  studying  them.  Why  should  you  make  yourself 

1  For  Domitian  Vespasian  was  reputed  an  excellent  Poet. 

2  The  sense  of  the  passage,  as  seen  by  supplying  the  ellipsis  of  the 
original,  is  this  :  "  With  what  testimony  of  love  you  set  forth  the  praises 
of  your  brother  to  the  full." —  Wern.  Club. 

'A  Iraperator. 


16  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.          [BooK  L 

a  Censor  of  this  Work?  When  I  first  thought  of  this  Enter- 
prise of  mine,  I  never  reckoned  you  in  the  Number  of  those 
Judges  that  should  stoop  to  pass  sentence  upon  these  Writ- 
ings. It  is  a  common  case,  and  incident  to  Men  of  deep 
Learning,  that  their  Judgment  be  rejected  in  this  behalf. 
Even  that  illustrious  Orator,  M.  Tullius,  who  for  Wit  and 
Learning  had  not  his  Fellow,  useth  the  Benefit  of  this 
Liberty  :  and  (whereat  we  may  well  marvel)  maintaineth  the 
Action  by  an  Advocate,  taking  Example  (for  his  Defence) 
from  Lucilius :  for  in  one  Part  of  his  Works  thus  he  saith, 
/  wish  not  the  learned  Persius  to  read  these  Books  of  mine ; 
but  I  prefer  Lcelius  Decimus.  Now  if  such  a  one  as  Lucilius, 
who  was  the  first  that  durst  control  the  Writings  of  others, 
had  reason  thus  to  say ;  if  Cicero  borrowed  the  same  Speech 
in  his  Treatise  of  the  Republic1,  how  much  greater  Cause 
have  I  to  decline  the  Censure  of  a  competent  Judge?  But 
I  am  cut  off  from  this  refuge,  in  that  I  expressly  make 
choice  of  you  in  this  Dedication  of  my  Work  :  for  it  is  one 
Thing  to  have  a  Judge,  either  selected  by  Plurality  of 
Voices,  or  cast  upon  a  Man  by  drawing  Lots  ;  arid  another 
Thing  to  choose  and  nominate  him  from  all  others  :  and 
there  is  great  Difference  between  that  Provision  which  we 
make  for  a  Guest  solemnly  bidden  and  invited,  and  the 
sudden  Entertainment  which  is  ready  for  a  Stranger  who 

1  This  work  of  Cicero,  entitled  "  De  Republica,"  is  more  than  once 
referred  to  by  Pliny.  The  high  standard  of  morals  which  it  upheld 
caused  it  to  be  much  respected  by  the  most  eminent  Fathers  of  the  Latin 
Church  :  insomuch  that  it  is  thought  to  have  suggested  to  St.  Augustine 
the  idea  of  his  celebrated  work,  "  De  Civitate  Dei."  During  the.  dark 
ages,  however,  the  Treatise  "  De  Republica  "  was  so  completely  lost,  that 
upon  the  revival  of  letters,  not  a  single  manuscript  of  it  could  be  any 
where  discovered.  At  length,  about  thirty  years  since,  a  large  portion  of 
it  was  found  by  Angelo  Ma'i,  then  Librarian  of  the  Vatican,  in  a  parch- 
ment manuscript.  The  parchment  had  been  washed,  and  again  used  for 
a  manuscript ;  but  the  original  writing  was  so  far  from  having  been  en- 
tirely effaced  by  the  ablution,  that  the  large  Roman  letters  were  soon 
rendered  legible  again  by  the  aid  of  a  peculiar  process.  The  recovered 
portion  of  this  valuable  work,  being  about  one-third  of  the  entire  Trea- 
tise, was  printed  in  London  in  one  volume,  8vo.  1823. —  Wern.  Cluib. 


BOOK  l.J  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.  17 

cometh  to  our  House  unlocked  for.  Cato,  that  professed 
Enemy  of  Ambition,  who  took  as  great  Contentment  in 
those  Estates  and  Dignities  which  he  refused  as  in  them 
which  he  enjoyed,  attained  to  such  a  good  Name  of  upright- 
ness, that  when  in  the  hottest  Contention  about  the  Election 
of  Magistrates,  they  that  contested  for  these  Offices  put  into 
his  Hands  their  Money  upon  Trust,  as  an  Assurance  of  their 
Integrity  and  Fidelity  in  this  respect;  they  professed  that  they 
did  it  in  Testimony  of  their  Opinion  of  his  Equity  and  Inno- 
cence :  whereupon  ensued  that  noble  and  memorable  Exclam- 
ation of  M.  Cicero  in  these  Words  :  "  Oh !  happy  M.  Portius, 
whom  no  Man  would  ever  venture  to  solicit  to  any  thing 
contrary  to  right!"  When  L.  Scipio,  surnamed  Asiaticus, 
appealed  to  the  Tribunes,  and  besought  their  lawful  Favour 
(among  whom,  C.  Gracchus  was  one,  a  Man  whom  he  took 
for  his  mortal  Enemy),  he  exclaimed,  "That  his  very  Ene- 
mies, if  they  were  his  Judges,  could  not  choose  but  give  Sen- 
tence on  his  Side."  Thus  every  Man  maketh  him  the  supreme 
Judge  of  his  Cause,  whom  himself  hath  chosen  :  which  Man- 
ner of  Choice  the  Latins  call  an  Appeal  (Provocatio).  As 
for  yourself,  who  are  set  in  the  most  eminent  Place,  and 
endued  with  the  highest  Eloquence  and  deepest  Learning,  it 
is  no  Wonder  if  those  who  do  their  Duty  unto  you  approach 
with  the  utmost  Respect  and  Reverence:  in  which  regard, 
exceeding  Care  above  all  Things  would  be  had,  that  what- 
soever is  said  or  dedicated  unto  you,  may  become  your  Per- 
son, and  be  worthy  your  Acceptance.  And  yet  the  Gods 
reject  not  the  humble  Prayers  of  country  Peasants,  yea,  and 
of  many  Nations,  who  offer  nothing  but  Milk  unto  them  : 
and  such  as  have  no  Incense,  find  grace  with  the  Oblation 
of  a  Cake  made  only  of  Meal  and  Salt ;  and  never  was  any 
Man  blamed  for  his  Devotion  to  the  Gods,  if  he  offered  ac- 
cording to  his  best  Ability. 

I  may  be  more  challenged  for  my  inconsiderate  Boldness, 
in  that  I  would  seem  to  present  these  Books  unto  you,  com- 
piled of  such  slender  Matter  :  for  in  them  can  be  comprised 
no  great  Ability  (which  otherwise  in  me  was  ever  meagre), 
neither  admit  they  any  Digressions,  Orations,  and  Discourses, 


18  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.          [BooK  I. 

nor  wonderful  Incidents  and  variable  Issues ;  nor  any  other 
Circumstances  that  may  be  agreeable  to  rehearse,  or  pleasant 
to  hear.  The  Nature  of  all  Things  in  this  World,  that  is  to 
say,  Matters  concerning  our  ordinary  Life,  are  here  deli- 
neated ;  and  that  in  barren  Terms,  without  any  Show  of 
Phrases :  and  what  I  have  noted  concern  the  commonest 
Points  thereof,  so  that  I  am  to  deliver  the  Matter  either 
in  rustic,  or  foreign,  nay,  even  barbarous  Language,  such 
as  may  not  well  be  uttered,  but  with  Apology  to  the  Reader. 
Moreover,  the  Way  that  I  have  pursued  hath  not  been 
trodden  before  by  other  Writers ;  being  indeed  so  strange, 
that  no  one  would  willingly  travel  therein.  No  Latin  Author 
among  us  hath  hitherto  ventured  upon  the  same  Argument, 
no  Grecian  whatsoever  hath  handled  all :  and  that  because 
most  study  rather  to  pursue  Matters  of  Delight  and  Plea- 
sure. It  may  be  confessed,  that  others  have  made  profession 
of  doing  so,  but  they  have  done  it  with  such  Subtilty  and 
Deepness,  that  their  Efforts  lie  as  if  buried  in  Darkness.  I, 
therefore,  take  upon  me  to  gather  a  complete  Body  of  Arts 
and  Sciences  (which  the  Greeks  call  lyptuxXcwra/ds/og),  that  are 
either  altogether  unknown  or  have  been  rendered  doubtful 
through  too  great  Refinement  of  Ingenuity ;  other  Matters 
are  dealt  with  in  such  long  Discourses,  that  they  are  ren- 
dered tedious  to  the  Readers.  It  is  a  difficult  Enterprise 
to  make  old  Matters  new,  to  give  Authority  and  Credit  to 
Novelties,  to  polish  that  which  is  obsolete,  to  set  a  Lustre 
upon  that  which  is  dim,  to  grace  Things  disdained,  to 
procure  Belief  to  Matters  doubtful,  and,  in  one  Word,  to 
reduce  all  to  their  own  Nature.  And  to  make  the  Attempt 
only,  although  it  be  not  effected,  is  a  fair  and  magnificent 
Enterprise.  I  am  confidently  of  opinion,  that  the  greatest 
Credit  belongs  to  those  learned  Men  who  have  forced  their 
Way  through  all  Difficulties,  and  have  preferred  the  Profit 
of  instructing  to  the  Grace  of  pleasing,  the  Gratification  of 
mere  Desire  of  pleasing  the  present  Age;  and  this  I  have 
aimed  at,  not  in  this  Work  only,  but  in  other  of  rny  Books. 
And  I  wonder  at  T.  Livius,  a  very  celebrated  Writer,  who, 
in  a  Preface  to  one  of  his  Books  of  the  Roman  History, 


BOOK  I.]          Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.  19 

which  he  compiled  from  the  Foundation  of  Rome,  thus  pro- 
tested :  That  he  had  gotten  Glory  enough  by  his  former 
Writing,  and  might  now  be  at  ease,  but  that  his  Mind  was 
so  little  able  to  abide  Repose,  that  it  could  not  subsist  but  in 
labour.  But,  surely,  in  finishing  those  Chronicles,  he  should 
have  respected  the  Glory  of  a  People  of  Conquerors,  who 
had  advanced  the  Honour  of  the  Roman  Name,  rather  than 
displayed  his  own  Praise :  his  Merit  had  been  the  greater  to 
have  continued  his  History  for  Love  of  the  Subject,  rather 
than  his  private  Pleasure;  to  have  preferred  the  Gratification 
of  Rome  to  his  own  mere  Pleasure.  As  touching  myself 
(forasmuch  as  Domitius  Piso  saith,  "  That  Books  ought  to  be 
Treasuries,  and  not  bare  Writings"),  I  will  be  bold  to  say, 
that  in  Thirty-six  Books  I  have  comprised  20,000  Things 
that  are  worthy  of  Consideration,  and  these  I  have  collected 
out  of  about  2000  Volumes  that  I  have  diligently  read  (and 
of  which  there  are  few  that  Men  otherwise  learned  have 
ventured  to  meddle  with,  for  the  deep  Matter  therein  con- 
tained), and  those  written  by  one  hundred  several  excellent 
Authors  ;  besides  a  Multitude  of  other  Matters,  which  either 
were  unknown  to  our  former  Writers,  or  Experience  has  lately 
ascertained.  And  yet  we  cannot  doubt  but  there  are  many 
Things  which  we  have  overlooked  :  for  we  are  Men,  and 
employed  in  a  Multiplicity  of  Affairs ;  and  we  follow  these 
Studies  at  vacant  Times;  that  is  to  say,  by  Night  Season 
only  ;  so  that  you  may  know,  that  to  accomplish  this  we 
have  neglected  no  Time  which  was  due  to  your  Service. 
The  Days  we  assign  to  your  Person  ;  we  sleep  only  to  satisfy 
Nature,  contenting  ourselves  with  this  Reward,  that  whilst 
we  study  (as  Varro  saith)  these  Things,  we  gain  so  many 
Hours  to  our  Life ;  for  surely  we  live  then  only  when  we 
are  awake.  Considering  those  Occasions  and  Hindrances,  I 
had  no  Reason  to  promise  much  ;  but  as  you  have  embol- 
dened me  to  dedicate  my  Books  to  you,  yourself  supply  what- 
ever in  me  is  wanting ;  not  that  I  place  Dependency  on  the 
Worth  of  the  Work ;  so  much  as  that  by  this  Means  it  will 
be  better  esteemed,  for  many  Things  there  be  that  appear 


20  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  1\  Vespasian.  [BooK  I. 

the  more  precious  only  because  they  are  consecrated  in  the 
sacred  Temples. 

We,  indeed,  have  written  of  you  all — your  Father,  your- 
self, and  your  Brother,  in  an  adequate  Volume,  which  we 
compiled  touching  the  History  of  our  Times,  beginning  at 
the  Place  where  Aufidius  Bassus  ended.  If  you  inquire  of 
me,  Where  that  History  is  ?  I  answer,  That  it  is  long  since 
finished,  and  by  this  Time  is  justified  and  approved  by  your 
Deeds :  otherwise  I  was  determined  to  leave  it  unto  my 
Heir,  and  I  gave  Order  that  it  should  be  published  only 
after  my  Death,  to  remove  the  Suspicion  that  it  had  been 
written  to  obtain  some  selfish  End.  And  by  so  doing,  I  do 
both  them  a  great  Favour,  who,  perhaps,  were  inclined  to 
publish  the  like  Chronicle ;  and  Posterity,  also,  who,  I  well 
know,  will  compete  with  us  as  we  have  done  with  our  Pre- 
decessors. A  sufficient  Argument  of  this  my  Mind  you  shall 
have  by  this,  that  in  the  Front  of  these  Books  now  in  Hand, 
I  have  set  down  the  Names  of  those  Writers  whose  Help  I 
have  used  in  the  compiling  of  them :  for  I  am  of  Opinion, 
that  it  is  the  Part  of  an  honest  Man,  and  one  that  has  a 
Claim  to  any  Modesty,  to  confess  by  whom  he  hath  pro- 
fited ;  and  not  as  many  of  those  Persons  have  done,  whom  I 
have  alleged  for  my  Authors.  For,  to  tell  you  the  Truth,  in 
conferring  them  together  about  this  Work  of  mine,  I  have 
met  with  some  of  our  modern  Writers,  who,  Word  for  Word, 
have  copied  out  whole  Books  of  old  Authors,  and  never 
vouchsafed  so  much  as  the  Naming  of  them  ;  but  have  taken 
their  Labours  to  themselves.  And  this  they  have  not  done 
in  the  Spirit  to  imitate  and  match  them,  as  Virgil  did 
Homer:  much  less  have  they  shewed  the  Simplicity  and 
Openness  of  Cicero,  who,  in  his  Books  on  the  Common- 
wealth, professeth  himself  to  follow  Plato;  in  his  consola- 
tory Epistle  written  to  his  Daughter,  he  saith,  "  I  follow 
Crantor"  and  Pancetius  likewise,  in  his  Treatise  concerning 
Offices.  Which  Volumes  of  his  (as  you  know  well)  deserve 
not  only  to  be  handled,  but  read  daily,  and  committed  en- 
tirely to  Memory.  It  is  the  Part  of  a  base  and  servile  Mind 


BOOK  I.]  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.  21 

to  choose  rather  to  be  taken  in  a  Theft,  than  to  bring  Home 
borrowed  Goods,  or  to  repay  a  due  Debt ;  especially  when 
the  Interest  thereof  hath  gained  a  Man  as  much  as  the 
Principal. 

In  the  Titles  and  Inscriptions  of  Books,  the  Greeks  have 
a  happy  Art.  Thus  one  has  been  entitled  K»j£/ov,  whereby 
they  would  give  us  to  understand  of  a  Honeycomb:  others1 
Kygag  A^aXSs/ag,  that  is  to  say,  the  Horn  of  Plenty ;  so  that 
whosoever  readeth  these  goodly  Titles  must  hope  for  some 
great  Matters ;  and  as  the  Proverb  goes,  look  to  drink  there 
a  Draught  of  Hen's  Milk2.  You  shall  have,  moreover,  their 
Books  set  out  with  these  glorious  Inscriptions !  The  Muses, 
The  Pandects3,  Enchiridion4,  As/^wv5,  r/vax/<rr/oi/6:  so  that  one 
might  even  consent  to  forfeit  a  Recognisance  or  Obligation 
in  a  Court  of  Law,  to  turn  over  the  Leaf.  But  let  a  Man 
enter  into  them,  and  behold,  what  a  Nothing  shall  he  find 
within  !  As  for  our  Countrymen,  they  are  gross  in  Compa- 
rison of  them  in  giving  Titles  to  their  Books  :  for  they  come 
with  their  Antiquities,  Examples,  and  Arts ;  and  those  also 
be  such  Authors  as  are  of  finest  Invention  amongst  them. 
Valerius,  who  (as  I  take  it)  was  named  AntiaSj  both  for  that 
he  was  a  Citizen  of  Antium,  and  also  because  his  Ancestors 
were  so  called,  was  the  first  that  gave  to  a  Book  the  Title  of 
Lucubratio,  or  Night  Study.  Varro  terms  some  of  his  Satires 
Sesculyxes  and  Flex'ibulce.  Diodorus,  among  the  Greeks, 
laid  aside  such  empty  Titles,  and  entitled  his  Book,  JBiblio- 
theca,  or,  a  Library.  Apion7,  the  Grammarian,  whom  Tiberius 

1  To  wit,  Helius  Melissus. 

3  "  Lac  gallinaceum  summa  felicitate  olim  usurpabatur." — STBABO,  lib. 
xiv.  "  Eos,  qui  Sami  fcecunditatem  laudabant,  ei  proverbium  accommo- 
dasse  tradit,  quo  aiunt  <p'.gi*>  ogvduv  ><«>.«." — DAUBCHAMPIUS. —  Wern.  Club. 

"  Proverbium  de  re  singular!  et  admodum  rara." — Note  in  Valpy,  p.  18. 
—  Wern.  Club. 

3  Containing  all  things,  as  Tyro  Tuttius  did. 

4  A  Manual  to  be  carried  always  in  Hand. 

5  Meadow.  6  A  Table  or  Index. 

7  Apion,  sometimes  called  Appion,  was  an  Egyptian,  but  he  had  a 
great  desire  to  be  regarded  as  of  Greek  extraction.  His  works  were 
numerous,  and  among  them  was  one  on  all  the  wonders  he  had  seen  or 


22  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.          [BOOK  I. 

CcBsar  called  the  Cymbal  of  the  World  (whereas,  indeed,  he 
deserved  to  be  rather  named  the  Drum  of  public  Fame),  was 
so  vainglorious,  that  he  professed  to  confer  Immortality  on 
all  those  whom  he  mentioned  in  his  Writings.  I  am  not 
ashamed  I  have  not  devised  a  prettier  Title  for  my  Book ; 
yet  because  I  would  not  be  thought  altogether  to  condemn 
the  Greeks,  I  am  willing  to  be  regarded  in  this  Behalf  like 
those  excellent  Masters  in  Greece  for  Painting  and  Statuary, 
whom  you  shall  find  in  these  Reports  of  mine,  to  have  enti- 
tled their  rare  and  perfect  Pieces  of  Work  (which  the  more 
we  look  upon,  the  more  we  admire)  with  Half-Titles  and  im- 
perfect Inscriptions,  in  this  Manner :  Apelles  worked  at  this 
Picture*:  or,Polycletus  undertook  this  Image:  as  if  they  were 
but  begun  and  never  finished,  and  laid  out  of  their  Hands : 
which  was  done  (no  doubt)  to  this  End,  that  for  all  the 
Diversity  of  Men's  Judgments  scrutinising  their  Work,  yet 
the  Artificer  thereby  had  Recourse  to  an  Apology,  as  if  he 
meant  to  have  amended  any  Thing  therein  amiss,  in  Case  he 
had  not  been  prevented.  These  noble  Workmen,  therefore, 

heard  of  in  Egypt.  It  seems  to  have  been  his  practice  to  regard  every 
thing  in  proportion  to  the  wonders  it  would  enable  him  to  relate.  He  is 
the  sole  authority  for  some  curious  facts  in  Natural  History ;  which  Pliny 
seems  to  have  taken  from  him.  Aulus  Gellius  admits  that  he  was  prone 
greatly  to  embellish  the  truth ;  and  Josephus  has  given  evidence  of  his 
emptiness  and  scurrility,  which  he  poured  out  abundantly  against  the 
Jews,  to  whom  he  bore  a  mortal  antipathy.  He  had  an  opportunity  of 
displaying  this  in  an  address  before  the  Emperor  Caligula,  when  he  repre- 
sented their  refusal  to  worship  him  as  a  god  as  a  proof  of  their  disaffec- 
tion to  his  person  and  government ;  by  which  he  excited  the  indignation 
of  the  emperor  against  the  illustrious  Philo  and  his  companions.  His 
notoriety  for  reviling  and  noisy  opposition  was  such  as  to  cause  his  name 
to  be  selected  by  a  Christian  writer  of  the  third  century,  who  assumed 
the  name  of  Clement  of  Rome,  as  the  fictitious  opponent  of  St.  Peter,  in 
a  disputation  concerning  the  Christian  religion :  as  mentioned  by  Eusebius 
and  Lardner.  His  conceit  appears  from  what  Pliny  says  of  him ;  and 
it  would  have  been  to  him  the  deepest  mortification,  could  he  have  been 
told  that  he  would  only  be  known  to  posterity  through  the  mention  made 
of  him  by  his  opponents.  He  is  sometimes  called  Plistonicus  and  Poly- 
histor.—  Wern.  Club. 
1  Apelles  faciebat. 


BOOK  I.]         Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.  23 

shewed  great  Modesty,  that  the  Inscriptions  on  their  Works 
were  as  if  they  had  been  their  last  Pieces,  and  their  Perfec- 
tion was  hindered  by  their  Death  :  for  there  were  not  known 
( I  believe )  above  three  which  had  their  absolute  Titles 
written  upon  them  in  this  Form  :  Ille  fecit,  or,  This  Apelles 
finished :  and  those  Pictures  I  will  specify  in  the  proper 
Place.  By  which  it  appeared  evidently,  that  the  said  three 
Pictures  were  so  fully  finished,  that  the  Workman  was 
highly  satisfied  with  their  Perfection,  and  feared  the  Censure 
of  no  Man:  no  Marvel,  then,  if  all  three  were  so  much 
admired  throughout  the  World,  and  every  Man  desired  to 
be  Master  of  them. 

For  myself,  I  confess  that  many  more  Things  may  be 
added,  not  to  this  Story  alone,  but  to  all  the  Books  that  I 
have  published  before  :  which  I  say,  because  I  would  antici- 
pate those  Fault-finders  and  Scourgers1  of  Homer  (for  surely 
that  is  their  very  Name) ;  because  I  hear  say  there  be  certain 
Stoic  Philosophers,  professed  Logicians,  and  Epicureans  also 
(for  at  the  Hands  of  Critics  I  never  looked  for  any  other), 
who  are  in  Labour  to  be  delivered  of  somewhat  against  my 
Books  which  I  have  published  on  Grammar :  and  the  Space 
of  Ten  Years  has  produced  nothing  but  Abortion,  when  the 
Elephant  is  not  so  long  in  producing  her  young  one.  But 
this  does  not  trouble  me  ;  for  I  am  not  ignorant  that  a 
Woman  wrote  against  Theophrastus*,  though  he  was  a  Man 
of  such  Eloquence  that  from  thence  he  obtained  his  divine 
Name,  Theophrastus :  from  whence  arose  this  Proverb,  "Then 
go  choose  a  Tree  to  hang  thyself."3  I  cannot  refrain,  but  I 

1  Homeromastiges. 

*  Her  name  was  Leontium,  and  she  studied  philosophy  under  Epi- 
curus, where  she  became  more  celebrated  for  her  talents  than  her  virtue. 
The  elegancy  of  her  style  is  praised  by  Cicero. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  There  is  a  passage  in  Plutarch's  "  Life  of  Antony,"  which  shews  how 
lamentably  the  antients  were  addicted  to  the  crime  of  suicide,  and  at  the 
same  time  illustrates  this  proverb.  It  is  thus  translated  by  Langhorne  :— 
"  Once,  in  an  assembly  of  the  people,  he  (Timon  of  Athens)  mounted  the 
rostrum,  and  the  novelty  of  the  thing  occasioned  an  universal  silence  and 
expectation  :  at  length  he  said,  '  People  of  Athens,  there  is  a  fig-tree  in 
my  yard,  on  which  many  worthy  citizens  have  hanged  themselves ;  and 


24  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian.  [BoOK  I. 

must  set  down  the  very  Words  of  Cato  the  Censor,  so  perti- 
nent to  this  purpose  ;  whereby  it  may  appear,  that  even 
Cato  himself,  who  wrote  of  Military  Discipline,  who  had 
been  trained  to  War  under  Scipio  Africanus,  or  rather,  in- 
deed, under  Hannibal;  who,  in  the  end,  could  not  endure 
Africanus  himself,  but  was  able  to  control  him  in  martial 
Affairs  ;  and  who,  besides  having  the  Conduct,  as  Imperator, 
of  the  Roman  Army,  achieved  the  Superiority  over  his  Ene- 
mies in  the  Field,  and  returned  with  Victory  :  this  Cato 
could  not  avoid  such  Slanderers ;  but  knowing  that  there 
would  be  many  of  them  ready  to  purchase  to  themselves 
some  Reputation  by  reproving  the  Knowledge  and  Skill  of 
others,  brake  out  into  a  certain  Speech  against  them  :  and 
what  was  it  ?  "I  know  well"  (says  he,  in  that  Book)  "that  if 
these  Writings  be  published  to  the  World,  many  will  step 
forth  to  cavil  at  them,  and  those  soonest  who  are  themselves 
void  of  all  Praise.  But  I  let  their  Words  flow  by."  It  was 
well  said  by  Plancus,  when  being  informed  that  Asinius 
Pollio  was  framing  certain  Orations  against  him,  which 
should  be  published  either  by  himself  or  his  Children,  after 
the  Decease  of  Plancus,  that  they  might  not  be  answered  by 
him  ;  he  remarked  :  "  That  none  but  Bugbears1  fight  with 
the  Dead  :"  with  which  Word  he  gave  those  Orations  such  a 
Rebuff,  that  (by  the  Judgment  of  the  Learned)  none  were 


as  I  have  determined  to  build  on  the  spot,  I  thought  it  necessary  to 
give  this  public  notice,  that  such  as  choose  to  have  recourse  to  this  tree 
for  the  aforesaid  purpose,  may  repair  to  it  before  it  is  cut  down.'" — 
Wem.  Club. 

1  Bugbears.  Larvae.  —  It  was  supposed  that  the  soul  of  man,  when 
freed  from  the  bonds  of  the  body,  and  not  obliged  to  perform  its  func- 
tions, became  a  kind  of  demon,  and  this  was  denominated  generally 
Lemur.  Of  these  Lemures,  those  who  were  kind  to  their  families,  and 
preserved  them  in  peace,  were  called  Lares  familiar es,  or  domestic  Lares; 
but  those  who,  for  punishment  of  their  crimes  committed  during  life, 
were  condemned  to  continual  wandering,  without  finding  a  place  of  rest, 
frightening  good  men  and  plaguing  the  wicked,  were  denominated  Larvce. 
The  sarcasm  consisted  in  comparing  Asinius  Pollio  to  such  a  perturbed 
spirit.  In  the  singular  number,  Larva  signifies  a  mask,  used  to  terrify 
children. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  I.]  Pliny  s  Epistle  to  T.  Vespasian, 


25 


accounted  more  Impudent  than  they.  Therefore,  feeling 
myself  secure  against  these  Busy-bodies,  (and  verily  Cato 
hath  given  such  Fellows  a  proper  Name  when  he  called 
them  Vitilitigatores,  by  a  Term  elegantly  compounded  of 
Vices  and  Quarrels:  for  to  say  a  Truth,  what  do  they  else 
but  pick  Quarrels  and  make  Brawls?)  I  will  proceed  in 
my  intended  Purpose. 

To  conclude  my  Epistle :  knowing  that  for  the  Good  of 
the  Commonwealth  you  ought  to  be  spared  in  any  private 
Business  of  your  own,  and  especially  in  perusing  these  long 
Volumes  of  mine ;  to  prevent  such  a  Trouble,  therefore,  I 
have  adjoined  to  this  Epistle,  and  prefixed  before  these 
Books,  the  Summary  or  Contents  of  every  one :  and  care- 
fully have  I  endeavoured,  that  you  should  not  need  to  read 
them  throughout  to  ascertain  their  Contents ;  whereby  alt 
others  also,  after  your  Example,  may  ease  themselves  of  the 
like  Labour:  and  as  any  Man  is  desirous  to  know  this  or 
that,  he  may  readily  find  in  what  Place  to  meet  with  the 
same.  This  Plan  I  learned  of  Valerius  Sorranus,  one  of  our 
own  Latin  Writers,  who  hath  done  the  like  before  me  in 
those  Books  which  he  entitled 


Brass  coin  of  T.  Vespasian,  in  the  possession  of  Mr.  Coticft. 


IN   THE   SECOND    BOOK 


IS    CONTAINED    THE 


DISCOURSE   OF   THE    WORLD,    OF   CELESTIAL    IMPRESSIONS    AND 

METEORS,  AS  ALSO  OF  THOSE  THAT  APPEAR  IN  THE 

AIR,   AND  UPON   EARTH. 


CHAP. 

1 .  Whether  the  World  be  limited  ? 

and  whether  there  be  but  one  ? 

2.  The  Form  of  the  World. 

3.  The  Motion  of  Heaven. 

4.  Why  the  World  is  called  Mun- 

dus? 

5.  Of  the  Four  Elements. 

6.  Of  the  Seven  Planets. 

7.  Concerning  God. 

8.  The  Nature  of  the  fixed  Stars 

and  Planets :  their  Revolution. 

9.  The  Nature  of  the  Moon. 

10.  The  Eclipse  of  Sun  and  Moon: 

also  of  the  Night. 

11.  The  Magnitude  of  Stars. 

12.  The  divers  Discoveries  of  Men 

and  their  Observations  of  the 
Celestial  Bodies. 

13.  Of  Eclipses. 

14.  The  Motion  of  the  Moon. 

15.  General  Rules  concerning  Pla- 

nets and  Lights. 

16.  The    Reason    why    the    same 

Planets  seem  higher  or  lower 
at  sundry  times. 

17.  General  Rules  concerning  the 

Planets. 

18.  What  is  the  Cause  that  Planets 

change  their  Colours  ? 

19.  The  Course  of  the  Sun:  his  Mo- 

tion :  and  whence  proceedeth 
the  Inequality  of  Days. 

20.  Why  Lightnings  are  assigned 

to  Jupiter. 


CHAP. 

21.  The    Distances    between    the 

Planets. 

22.  The  Harmony  of  Stars. 

23.  The  Geometry  of  the  World. 

24.  Of  Stars  appearing  suddenly. 

25.  Of  Comets  and  other  prodi- 

gious Appearances  in  the 
Sky :  their  Nature,  Situa- 
tion, and  Kinds. 

26.  The  Opinion  of  Hipparchus  of 

the  Stars,  Torches,  Lamps, 
Pillars  or  Beams  of  Fire, 
burning  Darts,  Gapings  of 
the  Sky:  with  Instances. 

27.  Strange  Colours  appearing  in 

the  Sky. 

28.  Flames  seen  in  the  Sky. 

29.  Circles  or  Garlands  in  the  Sky. 

30.  Of  Celestial  Circles  and  Gar- 

lands of  short  Duration. 

31.  Of  many  Suns. 

32.  Of  many  Moons. 

33.  Of  Nights  as  light  as  Day. 

34.  Of   Meteors    resembling  fiery 

Shields. 

35.  A  wonderful    Appearance    in 

the  Sky. 

36.  The  extraordinary  Shooting  of 

Stars. 

37.  Of  the  Stars  named  Castor  and 

Pollux. 

38.  Of  the  Air. 

39.  Of  certain  set  Times  and  Sea- 

sons. 


Contents  of  the  Second  Book. 


27 


CHAP. 

40.  The  Power  of  the  Dog- Star. 

41.  The  Influences  of  Stars  accord- 

ing to  the  Seasons  and  De- 
grees of  the  Signs. 

42.  The  Causes  of  Rain,  Wind,  and 

Clouds. 

43.  Of  Thunder  and  Lightning. 

44.  Whereupon   cometh   the  Re- 

doubling of  the  Voice,  called 
Echo. 

45.  Of  Winds  again. 

46.  Considerations  on  the  Nature 

of  Winds. 

47.  The  Kinds  of  Winds. 

48.  Of  sudden  Blasts. 

49.  Other  strange  Kinds  of  Tem- 

pests. 

50.  In  what  Regions  there  fall  no 

Thunderbolts. 

5 1 .  Divers  Sorts  of  Lightnings,  and 

wondrous  Accidents  by  them 
occasioned. 

52.  The  Observations  [of  the  Tus- 

cans   in    old    Time]    about 
Lightning. 

53.  Of  causing  Lightning. 

54.  General      Rules      concerning 

Lightning. 

55.  What  Things  are  not  struck 

by  Lightning. 

56.  Of    monstrous     Showers     of 

Milk,    Blood,    Flesh,    Iron, 
Wool,  Brick,  and  Tile. 

57.  The  rattling  of  Armour :  and 

the  Sound  of  Trumpets  heard 
from  the  Sky. 

58.  Of   Stones   falling    from    the 

Sky. 

59.  Of  the  Rainbow. 

60.  Of  Hail,  Snow,  Frost,  Mists, 

and  Dew. 

61.  Of  Shapes  represented  in  the 

Clouds. 

62.  The    particular  Properties   of 

the  Sky  in  certain  Places. 

63.  The  Nature  of  the  Earth. 

64.  The  Figure  of  the  Earth. 


CHAP. 

65.  Of  the  Antipodes:   and  whe- 

ther there  be  such.  Also,  of 
the  Roundness  of  the  Water. 

66.  How  the  Water  resteth  upon 

the  Earth. 

67.  Of  Seas  and  Rivers  of  Naviga- 

tion. 

68.  What  Parts  of  the  Earth  be 

habitable. 

69.  That  the  Earth  is  in  the  Midst 

of  the  World. 

70.  Whence    proceedeth    the   In- 

equality in  the  Rising  of  the 
Stars.  Of  the  Eclipse :  where 
it  is,  and  why. 

71.  The  Reason  of  Daylight  upon 

Earth. 

72.  A  Discourse  thereof  according 

to  the  Gnomon :  also  of  the 
first  Sun-dial. 

73.  Where  and  when  no  Shadows 

are  cast. 

74.  Where  the  Shadows  fall  oppo- 

site twice  in  the  Year. 

75.  Where  the  Days  are  longest, 

and  where  shortest. 

76.  Likewise  of  Dials. 

77.  The  divers   Observations  and 

Acceptations  of  the  Day. 

78.  Reasons  of  the  Difference  of 

Nations. 

79.  Of  the  Earthquake. 

80.  Of  Openings  in  the  Earth. 

81.  Signs  of  an  Earthquake. 

82.  Helps      against      approaching 

Earthquakes. 

83.  Strange   Wonders    seen    only 

once  in  the  Earth. 

84.  Miraculous  Accidents  of  Earth- 

quakes. 

85.  In  what  Parts  the  Seas  went  back 

86.  Islands  appearing  new  out  of 

the  Sea. 

87.  What  Islands  have  thus  shewed, 

and  at  what  Times. 

88.  Into  what  Lands  the  Seas  have 

forcibly  broken. 


28 


Contents  of  the  Second  Book. 


CHAP. 

89.  What  Islands  have  been  joined 

to  the  Continent. 

90.  What  Lands  Jmve  become  all 

Sea. 

91.  Of  Lands  that  have  been  swal- 

lowed up  of  themselves. 

92.  What  Cities  have  been  over- 

flowed by  the  Sea. 

93.  Wonderful  Things  of  Lands. 

94.  Of  Lands  that  always  suffer 

Earthquake. 

95.  Of  Islands  that  float  continu- 

ally. 

96.  In   what  Countries    it    never 

raineth  :  also,  of  Miracles,  as 
well  of  the  Earth  as  other 
Elements,  accumulated  to- 
gether. 

97.  The  Reason  of  the  Sea- tides, 

as  well  ebbing  as  flowing, 
and  where  the  Sea  floweth 
extraordinarily. 


CHAP. 

98.  Wonderful  Things  in  the  Sea. 

99.  The  Power  of  the  Moon  over 

Sea  and  Land. 

100.  The  Power  of  the  Sun :  and 

why  the  Sea  is  salt. 

101.  Also  of  the  Nature  of  the 

Moon. 

102.  Where  the  Sea  is  deepest. 

103.  Remarkable   Observations  of 

the    Waters,    of  Fountains, 
and  Rivers. 

104.  Remarkable   Things  in   Fire 

and  Water  jointly  together  : 
also  of  Maltha. 

105.  Of  Naphtha. 

106.  Of  Places  that  burn  continu- 

ally. 

107.  Wonders  of  Fire  alone. 

108.  The  Dimension  of  the  Earth, 

in  length  and  breadth. 

109.  The    harmonical    Circumfer- 

ence of  the  World. 


In  Sum,  there  are  in  this  Book,  of  Histories  and  Observations,  Four 
Hundred  and  Eighteen  in  Number. 


LATIN  AUTHORS  ABSTRACTED  IN  THIS  BOOK  : 

M.  Varro,  Sulpitius  Gallus,  Tiberius  Ccesar  the  Emperor,  Q.  Tubero, 
Tullius  Tiro,  L.  Piso,  T.  Livius,  Cornelius  Nepos,  Statins,  Sebosus,  Ccelius 
Antipater,  Fabianus,  Antias,  Mutianus,  Cecina  (who  wrote  of  the  Tuscan 
Learning),  Tarquitius,  L.  Aquila,  and  Sergius  Paulus  !. 

FOREIGN  AUTHORS  : 

Plato,  Hipparchus,  Timceus,  Sosigenes,  Petosiris,  Necepsus,  Pythagoras, 
Posidonius,  Anaximander,  Epigenes,  Gnomonicus,  Euclides,  Cceranus  Philo- 
sophus, Eudoxus,  Democritus,Crisodemus,  Thrasyllus, Serapion, Diccearchus, 
Archimedes,  Onesicritus,  Eratosthenes,  Pytheas,  Herodotus,  Aristoteles, 
Ctesias,  Artemidorus  Ephesius,  Isidorus  Characenus,  Theopompus. 

1  Sergius  Paulus.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  this  writer  on  Natural 
Philosophy— whose  works  are  lost— is  the  same  person  that  is  mentioned 
in  the  13th  Chapter  of  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles;  and  from  the  nature  of 
his  pursuits  we  are  enabled  to  perceive  the  reason  why,  at  one  time,  he 
was  the  patron  of  Elymas  the  Sorcerer.  The  greater  portion  of  the  Im- 
postors-of  those  days  were  accustomed  to  found  their  claims  to  regard  on 
their  acquaintance  with  some  branches  of  Philosophy,  in  which  Sergius 
Paulus  was  an  inquiring  student.  We  do  not  find  the  name  of  the  Sorcerer 
among  the  numerous  authors  referred  to  by  Pliny.— Wern.  Club. 


THE  SECOND  BOOK 


HISTORY    OF    NATURE 


WRITTEN    BY 


C.   PLINIUS   SECUNDUS. 


CHAPTER  I. 
Whether  the  World  be  finite,  and  but  one. 

HE  World1,  and  that  which,  by  another  Name. 
Men  have  thought  Good  to  call  Heaven 
(under  the  Compass  of  which  all  Things  are 
covered),  we  ought  to  believe,  in  all  Reason,  to 
be  a  Divine  Power,  eternal,  immense,  without 
Beginning,  and  never  to  perish.  What  is  beyond  the  Compass 

1  The  Author  manifests  a  philosophic,  as  well  as  pious  spirit,  in  begin- 
ning his  work  with  a  reference  to  Divine  power ;  but  in  giving  this  idea 
of  the  nature  of  the  world,  and  representing  it  as  a  separate  and  inde- 
pendent divinity,  he  adopts  an  ancient  speculative  opinion  derived  from  the 
Oriental  philosophy,  in  preference  to  the  popular  opinion  of  his  country, 
which  is  selected  by  Ovid  in  his  Introduction  to  the  "  Metamorphoses;"  and 
which  ascribed  the  creation  of  the  world  to  an  already  existing  or  eternal 
God  —  "  whichever  God  he  was :"  though  not  to  the  highest  in  rank  of  the 
Heathen  Mythology ;  for  the  latter  is  represented  as  descended  from  pre- 
viously existing,  or  humanly  deified,  parents,  and  consequently  was  of  a 
subsequent  age.  The  knowledge  of  the  Great  Eternal  having  been  left 


30  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  II. 

thereof,  neither  is  it  fit  for  Men  to  search,  nor  within  Man's 
Understanding  to  conceive.  Sacred  it  is,  everlasting,  infi- 
nite, all  in  all,  or  rather  itself  all  and  absolute  :  limited,  yet 
seeming  infinite  :  in  all  Motions,  certain ;  though  in  Appear- 
ance uncertain  :  comprehending  in  itself  all  both  without 
and  within  :  Nature's  Work,  and  yet  very  Nature  itself.  It 
is  Madness  that  some  have  thought  in  their  Mind  to  mea- 
sure it ;  yea,  and  durst  in  Writing  set  down  the  Dimensions 
thereof:  that  others  again,  by  Occasion  hereupon  taken, 
or  on  this  founded,  have  taught,  That  there  are  Worlds  in- 
to slip  from  the  minds  of  learned  Heathens,  through  their  speculations 
into  occult  causes,  and  the  wrapping  up  of  religion  from  the  inquiries  of 
the  vulgar,  as  being  too  high  for  their  comprehension,  they  were  led  to 
the  conception  of  what,  in  fact,  was  no  more  than  a  mere  abstraction,  and 
destitute  of  all  proper  personality :  a  simple,  unconscious  fatality,  with 
little  volition :  and,  in  truth,  no  better  than  a  diffusive  aether,  or,  as  it 
would  now  be  denominated,  galvanic  influence.  The  philosophy  of 
Pythagoras  was  derived  from  the  East;  "But  it  was  this,"  says  Lord 
Bacon  ("  Natural  History,"  10th  century),  "  which  did  first  plant  a  mon- 
strous imagination,  which  afterwards  was,  by  the  school  of  Plato  and 
others,  watered  and  nourished.  It  was,  that  the  world  was  one,  entire, 
perfect,  living  creature  ;  insomuch  as  Apollonius  of  Tyana,  a  Pythagorean 
prophet,  affirmed  that  the  ebbing  and  flowing  of  the  sea  was  the  respira- 
tion of  the  world,  drawing  in  water  as  breath,  and  putting  it  forth  again. 
They  went  on,  and  inferred,  that  if  the  world  were  a  living  creature,  it 
had  a  soul  and  spirit ;  which  also  they  held,  calling  it '  spiritus  mundij  the 
spirit  or  soul  of  the  world.  By  which  they  did  not  intend  God  (for  they 
did  admit  of  a  deity  besides),  but  only  the  soul,  or  essential  form,  of  the 
universe.  This  foundation  being  laid,  they  might  build  upon  it  what 
they  would;  for  in  a  living  creature,  though  never  so  great  (as,  for 
example,  in  a  great  whale),  the  sense  and  the  effects  of  any  one  part  of 
the  body  instantly  make  a  transcursion  throughout  the  whole  body.  So 
that  by  this  they  did  insinuate,  that  no  distance  of  place,  nor  want  nor 
indisposition  of  matter,  could  hinder  magical  operations ;  but  that,  for 
example,  we  mought  here  in  Europe  have  sense  and  feeling  of  that  which 
was  done  in  China ;  and  likewise  we  mought  work  any  effect  without  and 
against  matter;  and  this  not  holden  by  the  co-operation  of  angels  or 
spirits,  but  only  by  the  unity  and  harmony  of  nature."  This  was  the 
occult  cause,  to  which  all  the  otherwise  unaccountable  operations  of 
nature  might  easily  be  referred.  We  have  a  curious  instance  of  such  a 
method  of  explanation  at  the  end  of  the  ninety-third  chapter  of  this  book. 
—  Wern.Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  3 1 

numerable :  as  if  we  are  to  believe  so  many  Natures  as  there 
are  Heavens :  or  if  all  were  reduced  to  one,  yet  there  should 
be  so  many  Suns  and  Moons,  with  the  Rest  also  of  those 
immeasurable  and  innumerable  Stars  in  that  one :  as  though 
in  this  plurality  of  Worlds  we  should  not  always  meet  with 
the  same  Question  still  at  every  Turn  of  our  Thought,  for 
Want  of  some  End  to  rest  upon  :  or,  if  this  infiniteness  could 
possibly  be  assigned  to  Nature,  the  Work-mistress  of  all ; 
the  same  might  not  be  understood  more  easily  in  that  one 
Heaven  which  we  see  ;  so  great  a  Work  as  it  is.  Now  surely 
it  is  more  than  Madness  to  quit  this,  and  to  keep  seeking 
without,  as  if  all  Things  within  were  well  and  clearly  known 
already :  as  if  any  Man  could  take  the  Measure  of  another 
Thing,  who  knoweth  not  his  own :  or  the  Mind  of  Man 
might  see  those  Things  which  the  World  itself  may  not 
receive. 

CHAPTER  II. 
Of  the  Figure  of  the  World. 

THAT  the  Form  of  the  World  is  round1,  in  the  Figure  of 
a  perfect  Globe,  its  Name  in  the  first  Place,  and  the  Consent 
of  all  Men  agreeing  to  call  it  in  Latin  Orbis  (a  Globe),  as 
also  many  natural  Reasons,  evidently  shew.  For  not  only 
because  such  a  Figure  every  Way  falleth  and  bendeth  upon 
itself,  is  able  to  uphold  itself,  includeth  and  containeth  itself, 
having  need  of  no  joints  for  this  purpose,  as  finding  in  any 
Part  thereof  no  End  or  Beginning :  or  because  this  Form 
agreeth  best  to  that  Motion,  whereby  continually  it  must 
turn  about  (as  hereafter  will  appear) :  but  also  because  the 
Eyesight  doth  approve  the  same ;  because,  look  which  Way 
soever  you  will,  it  appeareth  convex,  and  even  on  all  sides; 
a  Thing  not  incident  to  any  other  Figure. 

1  That  it  was  an  oblate  spheroid,  flattened  at  the  poles,  was  little 
likely  to  be  known  by  observers,  however  acute,  whose  opinion  of  the 
uninhabitable  nature  of  the  frigid  and  torrid  zones  would  lead  them  to 
limit  their  practical  inquiries  to  the  temperate.  The  good  sense  of  Pliny 
induced  him  to  prefer  the  opinion  of  the  rotundity  of  the  globe,  to  that  of 
Epicurus,  that  it  was  an  extended  plane. —  Wern.  Club. 


32  History  oj  Nature.  [^OOK  **• 

CHAPTER  III. 
The  Motion  of  the  World. 

THAT  the  World  thus  framed,  in  a  continued  Circuit, 
with  unspeakable  Swiftness  turneth  round  in  the  Space  of 
four-and-twenty  Hours,  the  ordinary  Rising  and  Setting  of 
the  Sun  leaves  no  Room  to  doubt.  Whether  it  being  in 
Height  exceedingly  great,  and  therefore  the  Sound  of  so 
huge  a  Frame,  whilst  it  is  whirled  about  unceasingly,  cannot 
be  heard  with  our  Ears,  I  cannot  easily  imagine  :  no  more, 
by  Hercules !  than  1  may  vouch  the  Ringing  of  the  Stars  that 
are  driven  round  therewith,  and  roll  their  own  Spheres :  or 
determine,  that  as  the  Heaven  movetb,  it  represents  a  plea- 
sant and  incredibly  sweet  Harmony  :  although  to  us  within, 
by  Day  and  Night,  it  seemeth  to  roll  on  in  Silence.  That 
there  is  imprinted  on  it  the  Figures  of  living  Creatures,  and 
of  all  Kinds  of  Things  besides  without  Number,  as  also  that 
the  Body  thereof  is  not  all  over  smooth  and  slippery  (as  we 
see  in  Birds'  Eggs),  which  excellent  Authors  have  termed 
Tenerum,  is  shewn  by  Arguments ;  for  by  the  Fall  of  natural 
Seeds  of  all  Things  from  thence,  and  those  for  the  most  Part 
mixed  one  with  another,  there  are  produced  in  the  World, 
and  in  the  Sea  especially,  an  immense  Number  of  monstrous 
Shapes.  Besides  this,  our  Sight  testifieth  the  same  ;  for  in 
one  Place  there  appeareth  the  Resemblance  of  a  Chariot,  in 
another  of  a  Bear,  or  a  Bull,  and  of  a  Letter  (A),  and  prin- 
cipally the  middle  Circle  over  our  Head,  where  it  is  more 
white  than  the  Rest. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Why  the  World  is  called  Mundus. 

FOR  my  own  Part,  I  arn  ruled  by  the  general  Consent  of 
all  Nations.  For,  the  World,  which  the  Greeks,  by  the 
Name  of  Ornament,  called  Ko<r/y,o$,  we,  for  the  perfect  Neat- 
ness and  absolute  Elegance  thereof,  have  termed  Mundus. 
And  we  have  named  the  Sky  Calum,  because  it  is  engraven, 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  33 

according  as  M.  Varro  interpreteth  it.  Arid  the  Order  of 
Things  therein  contributes  to  this,  and  especially  the  defined 
Circle  called  Signifer,  or  the  Zodiac,  divided  by  the  Forms 
of  Twelve  living  Creatures,  through  which  is  the  Sun's  Track  ; 
preserving  the  same  Course  for  so  many  Ages. 

CHAPTER  V. 
Of  the  four  Elements l. 

I  SEE  no  doubt  regarding  the  Number  of  the  Elements, 
that  they  are  four.  The  highest,  Fire  :  from  whence  are 
those  bright  Eyes  of  so  many  shining  Stars.  The  next, 
Spirit,  which  the  Greeks  and  our  Countrymen  by  one  Name 
called  Air :  this  Element  is  vital,  and  it  soon  passeth  through 
all,  and  is  intrinsically  mixed  in  the  Whole :  by  the  Power 
whereof,  the  Earth  hangeth  suspended  in  the  midst,  together 
with  the  fourth  Element,  of  Water.  Thus,  by  a  mutual  em- 
bracing of  each  other,  divers  Natures  are  linked  together : 
and  so  the  light  Elements  are  restrained  by  the  heavier,  that 
they  do  not  fly  off:  and,  on  the  contrary,  the  massier  are 
held  up,  that  they  fall  not  down,  by  means  of  the  lighter, 
which  seek  to  mount  aloft.  So,  through  an  equal  Endeavour 
to  the  Contrary,  each  of  them  holds  its  own,  bound  as  it 
were  by  the  restless  Circuit  of  the  World  itself:  which,  run- 
ning evermore  upon  itself,  the  Earth  falleth  to  be  lowest, 
and  in  the  Middle  of  the  Whole :  and  the  same  hanging 
steadily  by  the  Pole  of  the  Universe,  poiseth  those  Ele- 
ments by  which  it  hangeth.  Thus  it  alone  resteth  un- 
movable,  whilst  the  whole  Frame  of  the  World  turneth 

1  The  idea  here  conveyed  of  the  existence  of  four  elements,  which 
enclose  each  other,  each  heavier  one  in  succession  subsiding  below  the 
other,  is  more  fully  expressed  by  Ovid,  in  his  account  of  the  creation 
of  the  world  at  the  beginning  of  the  first  book  of  his  "  Metamorphoses." 
The  opinion  was  generally  entertained,  of  these  elements  being  the  con- 
stituents of  all  things,  until  modern  chemical  analysis  demonstrated  that 
themselves  are  compounded  of  other  and  more  simple  elements.  Yet 
the  language  of  the  ancient  opinion  has  not  altogether  ceased  from  use, 
even  at  the  present  time. —  Wern.  Club. 

C 


34  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  II. 

about  it :  and  as  it  is  united  by  all,  so  all  of  them  rest  upon 
the  same. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Of  the  seven  Planets. 

BETWEEN  the  Earth  and  Sky,  there  hang  in  the  Air  above- 
named,  seven  Stars,  divided  one  from  another  at  distinct 
Distances ;  and  these,  on  account  of  their  variable  Motion, 
we  call  Wandering  Planets ;  whereas,  indeed,  none  wander 
less  than  they.  In  the  midst  of  them  the  Sun  taketh  his 
Course,  as  being  the  greatest  and  most  powerful  of  all :  the 
very  Ruler,  not  of  Times  and  Seasons  only,  and  of  the  Earth, 
but  also  of  the  Stars  and  Sky  itself.  We  ought  to  believe 
this  Sun1  to  be  the  very  Life  and  (to  speak  more  plainly)  the 
Soul  of  the  whole  World,  and  the  principal  Governance  of 
Nature;  and,  considering  his  Operations,  nothing  less  than  a 
divine  Power.  He  it  is  that  giveth  Light  to  all  Things,  and 
scatters  their  Darkness  :  he  hideth  the  other  Stars  ;  he  or- 
dereth  the  Seasons  in  their  alternative  Course  ;  he  tempereth 
the  Year,  which  ariseth  ever  fresh  again  for  the  Good  of  the 
World.  He  disperseth  the  Sadness  of  the  Sky,  and  cleareth 
the  Cloudiness  of  the  Mind  of  Man  ;  to  other  Stars,  likewise, 
he  lendeth  his  own  Light.  Most  excellent  and  glorious  he 
is,  as  seeing  all,  and  hearing  all ;  as,  I  see,  is  the  Opinion  of 
Homer*  (the  Prince  of  Learning)  regarding  him  alone. 

1  We  find  the  ascription  of  Divinity  to  be  the  last  resource  in  ex- 
plaining the  operation  of  a  hidden  cause  in  nature.  A  false  divinity  was, 
therefore,  the  foundation  of  errors  in  philosophy ;  and  the  latter  again 
reacted  on  the  former. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Pliny  here  refers  to  a  passage  in  the  eleventh  hook  of  the  "  Odys- 
sey," where  Ulysses  descends  into  Hell,  and  meets  with  Tiresias,  who,  in 
recounting  the  future  fortunes  of  the  hero,  says :  "  You  shall  find  feeding 
the  oxen  and  fat  sheep  of  the  sun,  who  sees  and  hears  all  things:"  or, 
more  diffusively,  by  Pope  ;  where  — 

u  Graze  numerous  herds  along  the  verdant  shores ; 
Though  hunger  press,  yet  fly  the  dangerous  prey ; 
The  herds  are  sacred  to  the  god  of  day, 
Who  all  surveys  with  his  extensive  eye, 
Above,  below,  on  earth  and  in  the  sky."  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  35 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Of  God. 

I  SUPPOSE,  therefore,  that  to  seek  after  any  Shape  of  God1, 
and  to  assign  a  Form  and  Image  to  him,  is  a  Proof  of  Man's 
Folly.  For  God,  whosoever  he  be  (if  haply  there  be  any  other, 
but  the  World  itself),  and  in  what  Part  soever  resident,  all 
Sense  He  is,  all  Sight,  all  Hearing  :  He  is  the  whole  of  the  Life 
and  of  the  Soul,  all  of  Himself.  And  to  believe  that  there  be 
Gods  innumerable,  and  those  according  to  Men's  Virtues  and 
Vices,  as  Chastity,  Concord,  Understanding,  Hope,  Honour, 
Clemency,  Faith  ;  or  (as  Democritus  was  of  Opinion)  that 
there  are  two  Gods  only,  that  is,  Punishment  and  Benefit : 
these  Conceits  render  Men's  idle  Negligence  the  greater.  But 
frail  and  wearisome  mortal  Men,  remembering  their  own 
Infirmity,  have  digested  these  Things  apart,  to  the  End  that 
each  one  might  from  thence  choose  to  worship  that  whereof 
he  stood  most  in  need.  And  hence  it  is,  that  in  different 
Nations  we  find  the  Gods  named  diversely  :  and  in  the  same 
Region  there  are  innumerable  Gods.  The  infernal  Powers, 
likewise,  and  Diseases,  yea,  and  many  Plagues,  have  been 
ranged  in  Divisions,  and  reckoned  for  Gods ;  which,  with 

1  In  this  chapter  the  author  openly  asserts  his  disbelief  of  the  truth  of 
the  established  system  of  religion  of  his  country ;  and  his  manner  of  doing 
this  sufficiently  shews  the  confidence  he  felt,  of  finding  sympathy  in  his 
scepticism  among  the  learned  and  refined  classes  of  society.  This  system 
was,  indeed,  singularly  destitute  of  evidence ;  and  the  reasons  he  gives 
for  his  disbelief  shew  it  to  have  been  as  absurd  to  the  eye  of  examination 
as  it  was  unsupported  by  argument.  That  the  chief  deities  of  the  Hea- 
then were  no  more  than  deceased  men  who  had  benefited  the  world  in 
their  lives,  or  at  least  acquired  human  respect,  is  asserted  by  many  other 
ancient  authors ;  but  it  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  author  should  so  far 
join  in  the  error  as  from  it  to  find  occasion  for  thereby  mixing  up  with 
it  the  flattery  of  a  court.  The  treatise  of  Cicero,  "  On  the  Nature  of  the 
Gods,"  and  the  remarks  of  Pliny,  are  proofs  that  the  ancient  Heathens 
were  not  slow  to  discern  the  errors  of  the  popular  system  of  religion, 
though  they  were  incapable  of  discovering  or  appreciating  the  true. — 
Wern.  Club. 


36  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

trembling  Fear,  we  have  desired  to  pacify.  This  Superstition 
hath  caused  a  Fane  to  be  dedicated  to  Fever,  in  the  Palatine 
Mount,  by  Order  of  the  State  ;  and  likewise  an  Altar  to 
Orbona,  near  the  Temple  of  the  Lares:  besides  another 
erected  to  Bad  Fortune  on  the  Esquiline.  By  this  it  may  be 
conceived  that  there  are  a  greater  Number  of  Gods  in  Hea- 
ven than  of  Men  upon  Earth,  since  every  one  makes  as  many 
Gods  as  he  pleases,  fitting  himself  with  Junoes  and  Genii  for 
his  Patrons.  There  are  certain  Nations  that  account  Beasts, 
and  even  some  filthy  Things,  for  Gods ;  yea,  and  many  other 
Matters  more  shameful  to  be  spoken  :  swearing  by  stinking 
Meats,  by  Garlic,  and  such-like.  But,  surely,  to  believe 
that  Gods  have  contracted  Marriage,  and  that  in  so  long  a 
Time  no  Children  should  be  born  to  them  :  also  that  some 
are  aged,  and  ever  grey-headed :  others,  again,  young  and 
always  Children  :  that  they  be  black  of  Complexion,  winged, 
lame,  hatched  of  Eggs,  living  and  dying  on  each  alternate 
Day ;  are  mere  childish  Fooleries.  But  it  exceedeth  all  Im- 
pudency  to  imagine  Adulteries  among  them :  and  presently, 
also,  scolding,  and  Malice ;  and  more  than  that,  how  there 
be  Gods  that  are  Patrons  of  Theft  and  Wickedness.  He  is 
a  God  to  a  Man  that  helpeth  Him :  and  this  is  the  true  Way 
to  everlasting  Glory.  In  this  Way  went  the  Romans  in  old 
Time  :  and  in  this  Track,  at  this  Day,  goeth,  with  heavenly 
Pace,  Vespasian  Augustus,  with  his  Children ;  the  most 
mighty  Ruler  of  the  whole  World  :  relieving  the  afflicted 
State  of  the  Empire.  And  this  is  the  most  ancient  Manner 
of  Requital  to  such  Benefactors,  that  they  should  be  enrolled 
with  the  Gods.  And  hereof  came  the  Names  as  well  of  all 
other  Gods,  as  of  the  Stars  (which  I  have  mentioned  before), 
in  Recognisance  of  Men's  good  Deserts.  As  for  Jupiter  and 
Mercury,  and  others  ranged  among  the  Gods,  who  doubteth 
that  they  were  called  otherwise  among  themselves  ?  and  who 
confesseth  not  how  these  be  celestial  Denominations,  to  ex- 
press and  interpret  their  Nature  ? 

To  suppose  that  the  sovereign  Power,  whatsoever  it  is, 
should  exercise  Care  over  Mankind,  is  ridiculous.  For  can 
we  choose  but  believe  that  the  Godhead  must  be  polluted 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  37 

with  so  base  and  manifold  a  Ministry  ?  And  hardly  can  it 
be  judged,  whether  it  be  better  for  Mankind  to  believe  that 
the  Gods  have  Regard  of  us,  or  that  they  have  none  ;  con- 
sidering that  some  Men  have  no  Respect  and  Reverence  for 
the  Gods,  and  others  so  much  that  their  Superstition  is  a 
Shame  to  them.  These  are  devoted  to  them  by  foreign  Cere- 
monies .-  they  wear  their  Gods  upon  their  Fingers  in  Rings, 
yea,  they  worship  Monsters  :  they  forbid  some  Meats ;  and 
yet  they  devise  others.  They  impose  upon  them  hard 
Charges,  riot  suffering  them  to  rest  and  sleep  in  quiet.  They 
choose  neither  Marriages,  nor  Children,  nor  any  one  Thing 
else,  but  by  the  Allowance  of  sacred  Rites.  Others  are  so 
godless,  that  in  the  very  Capitol  they  use  Deceit,  and  for- 
swear themselves  even  by  the  Thunder  of  Jupiter.  And  as 
some  speed  well  with  their  Irreligion,  so  others  suffer  from 
their  own  holy  Ceremonies. 

Between  these  Opinions,  Men  have  found  out  a  Medium 
of  Divine  Power,  to  the  End  that  there  should  be  a  still  more 
uncertain  Conjecture  regarding  God.  For  throughout  the 
whole  World,  in  every  Place,  at  all  Times,  and  in  all  Men's 
Mouths,  Fortune  alone  is  called  upon  :  she  only  is  named ; 
she  alone  is  blamed  and  accused.  None  but  she  is  thought 
upon ;  she  only  is  praised,  she  only  is  rebuked  ;  yea,  and 
worshipped  with  railing :  and  even  when  she  is  taken  to  be 
mutable  :  and  of  the  most  sort  supposed  also  to  be  blind : 
roving,  inconstant,  uncertain,  variable,  and  favouring  the 
Unworthy :  whatever  is  spent  and  lost,  whatever  is  gotten  : A 
and  in  all  Men's  Accounts  she  makes  up  the  Book.  Even 
the  very  Chance  of  Lots  is  taken  for  a  God,  by  which  God 
himself  is  shewn  to  be  uncertain. 

There  is  another  Sort  that  reject  Fortune,  but  attribute 
Events  to  their  Stars,  and  the  ascendant  of  their  Nativity : 
affirming  that  the  same  shall  ever  happen  which  once  hath 
been  decreed  by  God  :  so  that  he  for  ever  after  may  remain 
at  Rest.  And  this  Opinion  now  takes  deep  Root,  insomuch 
as  both  the  learned  and  the  ignorant  Multitude  agree  to  it. 

1  "  Won  and  gotten,"  to  balance  "  spent  and  lost." 


38  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

From  hence  proceed  the  Admonitions  of  Lightnings,  the 
Foreknowledge  by  Oracles,  the  Predictions  of  Aruspices, 
yea,  and  other  contemptible  Things,  as  Auguries  of  Sneezing, 
and  stumbling  with  the  Foot.  Divus  Augustus  Ccesar  hath 
recorded  that  his  left-foot  Shoe  was  untowardly  put  on  be- 
fore the  right,  on  that  very  Day  when  he  had  like  to  have 
suffered  in  a  Mutiny  among  his  Soldiers. 

Thus  all  these  Things  entangle  silly  Mortals,  so  that  this 
only  point  remaineth  certain — that  Nothing  is  certain :  nei- 
ther is  there  any  Thing  more  wretched  and  proud  than 
Man.  For  all  living  Creatures  beside  take  Care  only  for 
their  Food  :  wherein  Nature's  Goodness  of  itself  is  sufficient : 
which  one  Point  is  to  be  preferred  before  all  good  Things 
whatsoever,  inasmuch  as  they  never  think  of  Glory,  Riches, 
Ambition,  nor,  beyond  all  the  rest,  of  Death.  However,  the 
Belief  that  in  these  Matters  the  Gods  have  care  of  Men's 
Estate,  is  profitable  to  the  Course  of  Life :  as  also  that  the 
Punishment  of  Malefactors  will  come,  though  late  (whilst 
God  is  busily  occupied  in  so  huge  a  Frame  of  the  World), 
but  that  it  never  misseth  in  the  End :  and  that  Man  was  not 
made  so  near  in  Degree  unto  God,  for  this,  that  he  should 
be  almost  as  base  as  the  brute  Beasts.  Moreover,  the  chief 
Comfort  that  Man  hath,  for  his  Imperfections  in  Nature,  is 
this,  that  even  God  himself  cannot  do  all  Things.  For  nei- 
ther is  He  able  to  work  his  own  Death,  if  even  He  desired  it, 
as  He  hath  given  to  Man  as  his  best  Gift  when  he  is  weary 
of  the  Miseries  of  his  Life ;  nor  endow  Mortals  with  ever- 
lasting Life ;  nor  recall  the  Dead  to  Life  again ;  nor  bring  to 
pass  that  one  who  lived  did  not  live  ;  nor  he  that  bore 
honourable  Offices,  has  not  borne  them.  Nay,  He  hath  no 
Power  over  Things  past,  save  only  Oblivion  :  no  more  than 
He  is  able  to  effect  (to  come  with  Arguments  to  prove  our 
Fellowship  therein  with  God)  that  twice  ten  should  not  make 
twenty :  and  many  similar  Things.  Whereby  is  evidently 
proved  the  Power  of  Nature,  and  how  it  is  she  only  which  we 
call  God.  I  thought  it  not  impertinent  thus  to  digress  to 
these  Points,  by  Reason  of  ordinary  Questions  regarding  the 
Essence  of  God. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  39 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
Of  the  Nature  of  Planets,  and  their  Circuit. 

LET  us  return  now  to  the  Rest  of  Nature's  Works.  The 
Stars,  which  we  said  were  fixed  in  the  World,  are  not  (as  the 
common  Sort  thinketh)  assigned  to  every  one  of  us ;  namely, 
the  bright  for  the  rich ;  the  less  for  the  poor :  the  dim  for 
the  weak  and  feeble  :  neither  shine  they  out  more  or  less, 
according  to  the  Fortune  of  every  one,  nor  arise  they  each 
one  together  with  that  Person  unto  whom  they  are  appro- 
priated ;  and  die  likewise  with  the  same :  nor  yet  as  they  set 
and  fall,  do  they  signify  that  any  Body  is  dead.  There  is 
not  so  great  a  Society  between  Heaven  and  us,  that,  together 
with  the  Necessity  of  our  Death,  the  Light  of  the  Stars 
should  fade.  When  they  are  thought  to  fall,  they  do  but 
shoot  from  them  a  Quantity  of  Fire  out  of  that  Abundance 
of  Nutriment  which  they  have  gotten  by  the  Attraction  of 
Moisture  unto  them  :  like  as  we  also  observe  in  lighted 
Lamps  with  the  Liquor  of  Oil1.  The  celestial  Bodies,  which 
frame  the  World,  and  are  compact  together,  have  an  im- 
mortal Nature  :  and  their  Power  extendeth  much  to  the 
Earth  :  which  by  their  Operations,  Light  and  Greatness, 
might  be  known,  though  they  are  so  subtle  ;  as  we  shall  in 
due  Place  make  Demonstration.  The  Mariner  likewise  of  the 
heavenly  Circles  shall  be  shewn  more  fitly  in  our  "Geogra- 
phical Treatise  of  the  Earth  ;"  forasmuch  as  the  Consideration 
thereof  appertaineth  wholly  thereunto :  only  we  will  not  put 
off  the  Devisers  of  the  Zodiac,  wherein  the  Signs  are  placed. 

The  Obliquity  of  this,  Anaximander  the  Milesian  is 
reported  to  have  observed  first,  and  thereby  opened  the  Pas- 
sage to  Astronomy,  and  the  Knowledge  of  these  Things  : 
and  this  happened  in  the  fifty-eighth  Olympiad.  Afterwards 
Cleostratus  marked  the  Signs  therein  ;  and  those  first  of 
Aries  and  Sagittarius.  As  for  the  Sphere  itself,  Atlas  devised 
it  long  before.  For  the  present  we  will  leave  the  Body  of 

1  See  note  2,  p.  63. 


40  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

the  starry  Heaven,  and  treat  of  all  the  rest  between  it  and 
the  Earth. 

The  Planet  which  they  call  Saturn*  is  the  highest,  and 
therefore  seemeth  to  be  least :  also  he  performeth  his  Revo- 
lution in  the  greatest  Circle  of  all  :  and  it  is  certain,  that  in 
thirty  Years'  Space  he  retnrneth  again  to  the  Point  of  his 
first  Place.  Moreover,  the  Motion  of  all  the  Planets,  and 
also  of  the  Sun  and  Moon,  go  a  contrary  Course  to  that  of 
the  starry  Heaven  ;  namely,  to  the  left  hand  [i.  e.  eastward]  ; 
whereas  the  said  Sky  itself  always  hasteneth  to  the  right 
[i.  e.  westward].  And  whereas  in  that  continual  turning 
with  exceeding  Celerity,  those  Planets  be  lifted  up  aloft,  and 
hurried  by  it  into  the  West,  and  there  set :  yet  by  a  contrary 
Motion  of  their  own,  they  pass  every  one  through  their 
several  Ways  eastward  ;  and  this  because  that  the  Air,  roll- 
ing ever  one  Way>  and  to  the  same  Part,  by  the  continual 
turning  of  the  Heaven,  should  not  grow  stagnant  whilst  the 
Globe  thereof  resteth  idle ;  but  should  be  minutely  divided 
by  the  violent  adverse  Action  of  these  Stars.  The  Planet 
Saturn  is  of  a  cold  and  frozen  Nature,  but  the  Circle 
of  Jupiter  is  much  lower  than  it,  and  therefore  his  Revo- 
lution is  performed  with  a  more  speedy  Motion,  in  twelve 
Years.  The  third,  of  Mars,  which  some  call  Hercules,  is 
fiery  and  ardent,  by  Reason  of  the  Sun's  Vicinity,  and  run- 
neth his  Race  in  about  two  Years.  And  it  is  by  the  exceed- 
ing Heat  of  Mars,  and  the  Cold  of  Saturn,  that  Jupiter,  who 
is  placed  betwixt,  is  well  tempered  of  them  both,  and  so  be- 
cometh  salutary.  Next  to  them  is  the  Course  of  the  Sun, 
consisting  of  360  Parts  [or  Degrees]  :  but  that  the  Observa- 
tion of  the  Shadows  which  he  casteth  may  return  again  to 
their  former  Marks,  five  Days  be  added  to  every  Year,  with 
the  fourth  Part  of  a  Day  over  and  above.  Whereupon,  in 
every  fifth  Year  one  odd  Day  is  added  to  the  Rest ;  to  the 
End  that  the  Reckoning  of  the  Seasons  may  agree  with  the 

1  The  planets  since  discovered  —  two  of  them,  Herschel,  or  Uranus, 
and  the  new,  and  as  yet  unnamed,  star,  still  more  remote  than  it,  and  the 
others  exceedingly  small  —  must  have  been  beyond  the  reach  of  ancient 
observation,  from  ignorance  of  the  telescope.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  41 

Course  of  the  Sun.  Beneath  the  Sun  there  is  a  large  Star 
called  Venus,  which  wandereth  this  Way  and  that,  by  turns ; 
and  by  her  Names  testifieth  her  Emulation  of  the  Sun  and 
Moon.  For  while  she  anticipateth  the  Morning,  and  riseth 
Orientally,  she  taketh  the  Name  of  Lucifer,  as  a  second  Sun 
hastening  the  Day.  Contrariwise,  when  she  shineth  from 
the  West,  lengthening  the  Daylight,  and  supplying  the  Place 
of  the  Moon,  she  is  named  Vesper.  This  Nature  of  hers, 
Pythagoras  of  Samos  first  found  out,  about  the  42nd 
Olympiad  ;  which  was  the  142nd  Year  after  the  Foundation 
of  Rome.  Now  this  Planet,  in  Greatness,  exceedeth  all  the 
other  Stars :  and  so  shining  also,  that  the  Beams  of  this  Star 
only  cast  Shadows  upon  the  Earth.  And  hereupon  cometh 
such  great  Diversity  of  the  Names  thereof;  for  some  have 
called  it  Juno,  others  Isis,  and  others  the  Mother  of  the 
Gods.  By  the  natural  Efficacy  of  this  Star  all  Things  are 
generated  on  Earth.  For  whether  she  rise  in  the  East  or 
West,  she  sprinkleth  all  the  Earth  with  prolific  Dew,  and 
not  only  filleth  the  same  with  Seed,  but  stirreth  up  to  in- 
crease the  Nature  of  all  living  Creatures.  This  Planet  goeth 
through  the  Circle  of  the  Zodiac  in  348  Days,  departing 
from  the  Sun  never  above  46  Degrees,  as  Timceus  was  of 
Opinion.  Next  unto  it,  but  Nothing  of  that  Bigness  and 
Power,  is  the  Star  Mercury,  of  some  called  Apollo :  carried 
along  in  an  inferior  Circle,  after  the  like  Manner,  but  in 
a  swifter  Course  by  nine  Days  ;  shining  sometimes  before  the 
Sun  rising,  at  others  after  his  setting,  never  farther  distant 
from  him  than  23  Degrees,  as  both  the  same  Timceus  and 
Sosigenes  teach.  And  therefore  these  two  Planets  have  a 
peculiar  Consideration  from  others,  and  not  common  with 
the  rest  above-named.  For  those  are  seen  from  the  Sun 
a  fourth,  yea,  and  third  Part  of  the  Sky  :  oftentimes  also  in 
Opposition  against  the  Sun.  And  all  of  them  have  other 
greater  Circuits  of  full  Revolution,  which  are  to  be  spoken 
in  of  the  Discourse  of  the  great  Year1. 

1  The  enumeration  of  the  planets  here  given  is  on  the  Ptolemaic  sys- 
tem of  astronomy,  which  supposes  the  earth  to  be  fixed  in  the  centre  of 


42  .History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Of  the  Moons  Nature. 

BUT  the  Moon,  being  the  last  of  all,  most  familiar  with 
the  Earth,  and  devised  by  Nature  for  the  Remedy  of  Dark- 
ness, exceedeth  the  Admiration  of  all  the  rest.  She  with  her 
changing  in  many  Shapes,  hath  troubled  much  the  Minds  of 
Beholders,  angry  because  that  of  this  Star,  the  nearest  of  all, 
they  should  be  the  most  ignorant;  growing  as  it  doth,  or 
else  wasting  continually.  One  while  she  bended  into  Horns  ; 
another  while  divided  in  the  half,  and  again  moulded  into  a 
rounded  Figure :  spotted  sometime,  arid  soon  after,  on  a 
sudden,  exceeding  bright :  one  while  large  and  full,  and  sud- 
denly nothing  to  be  seen.  Sometime  shining  all  Night  long, 
and  at  others  late  ere  she  riseth ;  she  also  helpeth  the  Sun's 
Light  some  Part  of  the  Day;  eclipsed,  and  yet  visible  in 
that  Eclipse.  The  same  at  the  Month's  End  lieth  hidden, 
at  which  Time  (it  is  supposed)  she  laboureth  not.  At  one 
Time  she  is  below,  and  presently  aloft :  and  that  not  after 
one  Manner,  but  one  while  reaching  up  to  the  highest  Hea- 
ven, and  another  while  close  to  the  Mountains  ;  now  mounted 
to  the  North,  and  again  brought  down  to  the  South.  Which 
several  Motions  in  her,  the  first  Man  that  observed  was 
Endymion :  and  hence  sprung  the  Report  that  he  was  ena- 
moured of  the  Moon.  We  are  not  thankful,  as  we  ought  to 
be,  to  those  who  by  their  Labour  and  Care  have  given  us 
Light  in  this  Light ;  but  we  are  delighted  rather  (such  is  the 
wicked  Disposition  of  Man)  to  record  in  Chronicles,  Blood- 
shed and  Murders:  that  Men's  mischievous  Deeds  should  be 
known,  while  we  are  ignorant  of  the  World  itself.  The 
Moon  being  next  to  the  Centre,  and  therefore  of  least  Com- 
pass, performeth  the  same  Course  in  seven-and-twenty  Days, 
and  one-third  Part  of  a  Day :  which  Saturn,  the  highest 
Planet,  runneth  (as  we  said  before)  in  thirty  Years.  After 

their  orbits ;  and  which,  in  ancient  times,  was  commonly  received  without 
dispute.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  1 1 .]  History  of  Nature.  43 

this,  remaining  in  conjunction  with  the  Sun  two  Days,  forth 
she  goeth,  and  by  the  thirtieth  Day,  at  the  most,  returneth 
to  the  same  Point  again  :  the  Mistress,  if  I  may  so  say,  and 
the  Teacher  of  all  Things  that  may  be  known  in  the  Sky. 
By  her  means  are  we  taught  that  the  Year  ought  to  be 
divided  into  twelve  Months  :  forasmuch  as  the  Moon  over- 
taketh  the  Sun  so  many  Times  before  he  returneth  to  the 
Point  where  he  began  his  Course.  Likewise  that  she  loseth 
her  Light  (as  the  Rest  of  the  Planets)  by  the  Brightness  of 
the  Sun  when  she  approacheth  near.  For  she  shineth  by  bor- 
rowing of  him  her  Light,  much  like  to  that  which  we  see  in 
the  Reflexion  of  the  Sunbeams  from  the  Water.  And  here- 
upon it  is  that  she,  by  her  more  mild  and  imperfect  Power 
dissolveth,  and  also  increaseth,  so  much  Moisture  ;x  which 
the  Sunbeams  may  consume.  Hence  it  cometh  also,  that 
her  Light  is  not  equal  in  Sight,  because  it  is  only  when  she 
is  opposite  to  the  Sun  that  she  appeareth  full :  but  in  all 
other  days  she  sheweth  no  more  to  the  Earth  than  she  con- 
ceiveth  from  the  Sun.  In  Time  of  Conjunction,  she  is  not 
seen  at  all  :  for  that  whilst  she  is  turned  away,  all  the 
Draught  of  Light  she  casteth  back  again  from  whence  she 
received  it.  That  these  Stars  are  fed  with  earthly  Moisture, 
is  evident  by  the  Moon ;  which,  so  long  as  she  appeareth  by 
the  Half,  never  sheweth  any  Spots,  because  as  yet  she  hath 
not  her  full  Power  of  Light  sufficient  to  draw  Humour 
unto  her.  For  these  Spots  be  nothing  else  but  the  Dregs 
of  the  Earth,  caught  up  with  other  Moisture  among  the 
Vapours.2 

1  Lucretius  supposes  that  all  animals,  and  all  the  stars,  are  fed  by 
exhalations  from  earth  and  air.  Lucian  also  expresses  the  same  idea.  And 
as  Pliny  was  of  an  adverse  sect  to  the  Epicureans,  and  consequently  did 
not  derive  it  from  them,  we  may  suppose  the  opinion  to  have  been  gene- 
rally received.    See  the  beginning  of  chapter  Ixviii. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  The  reader  will,  of  course,  accept  of  these  remarks  and  explanations, 
as  well  of  the  moon  as  of  the  other  planets,  as  descriptive  of  the  condition 
of  the  astronomical  philosophy  of  the  day ;  which  it  is,  at  least,  amusing 
to  compare  with  the  results  of  modern  observation. —  Wern.  Club. 


44  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

CHAPTER  X. 
Of  Eclipses  of  the  Sun  and  Moon :  and  of  the  Night1. 

THE  Eclipse  of  the  Moon  and  Sun  is  a  Thing  throughout 
the  universal  Contemplation  of  Nature  most  marvellous,  and 
resembling  a  Prodigy,  and  shews  the  Magnitude  and  Shadow 
of  these  two  Planets.  For  it  is  evident  that  the  Sun  is  hidden 
by  the  Intervention  of  the  Moon ;  and  the  Moon  again  by 
the  Opposition  of  the  Earth  :  as  also  that  the  one  doth  equal 
the  other,  in  that  the  Moon,  by  her  Interposition,  bereaveth 

1  The  opinions  of  the  ancients  on  the  subject  of  Eclipses  were  two- 
fold:— that  of  the  vulgar  was  built  on  the  supposition  that  certain  sorce- 
rers, working  by  magic  art,  were  able  to  draw  this  planet  from  her  orbit, 
even  to  the  earth,  to  accomplish  their  nefarious  purposes  in  inflicting 
injury  on  particular  persons  or  on  communities.  They  were  supposed  to 
have  a  further  object  in  view,  by  compelling  her  to  deposit  on  some 
appropriate  herbs  a  foam  that  was  useful  in  magic  arts  :  as  we  learn  from 
Apuleius  and  Lucan.  Horace  represents  his  witch  Canidia  as  thus  en- 
gaged, in  his  5th  and  17th  Epodes.  Under  these  circumstances  the  moon 
was  supposed  to  labour  in  agony ;  and  the  method  taken  to  relieve  her 
throes,  and  prevent  her  total  extinction,  was  by  making  such  a  clamour 
that  the  verse  or  influence  might  not  ascend  to  her  sphere ;  and  by  not 
hearing,  her  dread  might  be  relieved.  Livy  speaks  of  this  clamour  as  an 
ordinary  occurrence  (lib.  xxvi.) ;  but  it  does  not  seem  to  have  been  an 
official  proceeding.  Another  opinion  was  founded  on  the  doctrines  of 
Divinity,  and  therefore  formed  a  portion  of  the  religion  of  the  state  :  the 
phenomena  being  regularly  observed,  reported,  and  registered  by  consti- 
tuted officers.  According  to  this  idea,  every  unusual  appearance  in  the 
sky  was  a  portent  of  some  coming  event  —  usually  of  an  awful  nature  — 
and  which  it  became  the  priesthood  to  avert,  by  those  processions,  sacri- 
fices, and  supplications,  that  were  appointed  in  the  sacred  books,  as  appro- 
priate to  each  appearance.  It  was  no  small  effort  of  courage,  as  well  as 
skill,  in  the  philosophers  whose  names  are  given  by  Pliny,  to  venture  to 
inquire  into  the  nature  and  causes  of  phenomena  which  must  have 
appeared  inscrutable  to  one  portion  of  the  public,  and  too  sacred  to  be 
meddled  with  to  the  other.  The  operation  of  both  opinions  appears  in 
the  narrative  that  Plutarch  gives  of  the  proceedings  of  Paulus  Emilius, 
preparatory  to  the  battle  with  the  Macedonians,  where,  while  the  aid  of 
the  philosopher,  Sulpitius  Gallus,  was  used  to  remove  their  fears,  his 
own  office  of  augur  was  not  neglected  to  work  on  their  superstitious 
confidence.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  45 

the  Earth  of  the  Sun's  Rays,  and  the  Earth  again  doth  the 
like  by  the  Moon.  Neither  is  the  Night  any  Thing  else  but 
the  Shade  of  the  Earth.  The  Figure  of  this  Shadow  resem- 
bleth  a  Pyramid  pointed  forward,  or  a  Top  turned  upside 
down :  namely,  when  it  falleth  upon  it  with  its  sharp  End, 
and  goeth  not  beyond  the  Heights  of  the  Moon ;  for  no  other 
Star  is  in  that  Manner  darkened :  and  such  a  Figure  as  this 
always  endeth  in  a  Point.  And  that  Shadows  grow  to  No- 
thing in  a  great  Distance,  appeareth  by  the  exceeding  high 
Flight  of  some  Birds.  So  the  Confines  of  these  Shadows  is 
the  utmost  Bound  of  the  Air,  and  the  Beginning  of  Mther. 
Above  the  Moon  all  is  pure  and  lightsome  continually.  And 
we  in  the  Night  see  the  Stars  as  other  Lights  from  out  of 
Darkness.  For  these  Causes  also  the  Moon  is  eclipsed  only 
in  the  Night.  But  the  Reason  why  the  Sun  and  Moon  are 
not  both  in  the  Eclipse  at  set  Times  and  Monthly,  is  the 
Obliquity  of  the  Zodiac,  and  the  wandering  Turnings  of  the 
Moon  (as  hath  been  said):  and  because  these  Planets  do  not 
always  in  their  Motion  meet  just  in  the  Points  of  the  ecliptic 
Line,  that  is,  in  the  Head  or  Tail  of  the  Dragon. 

CHAPTER  XI. 
Of  the  Magnitude  of  Stars. 

IT  is  this  Reason  that  lifteth  up  Men's  Minds  into  Hea- 
ven :  and  as  if  they  looked  down  from  thence,  discovereth 
unto  them  the  Magnitude  of  the  three  greatest  Parts  of 
Nature.  For  the  Sun's  Light  could  not  wholly  be  taken 
away  from  the  Earth,  by  the  Moon  coming  between,  if  the 
Earth  were  bigger  than  the  Moon.  But  the  Immensity  of 
the  Sun  is  more  certainly  known,  both  by  the  Shadow  of  the 
Earth  and  the  Body  of  the  Moon  :  so  that  it  is  needless  to 
inquire  into  the  Magnitude  thereof,  either  by  the  Proof  of 
Eyesight,  or  by  Conjecture  of  the  Mind.  How  immea- 
surable it  is,  appeareth  by  this,  that  Trees  which  are  planted 
in  Limits  from  East  to  West,  cast  Shadows  equal  in  Propor- 
tion ;  although  they  are  many  Miles  asunder  in  Length :  as 
if  the  Sun  were  in  the  Midst  of  them  all.  This  appeareth 


46  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

also  at  the  Time  of  the  Equinox  in  all  Regions  of  the  same 
Meridian,  when  the  Sun  shineth  directly  over  Men's  Heads, 
and  causeth  no  Shadow.  In  like  Manner,  the  Shadows  of 
them  that  dwell  northerly  under  the  solstitial  Circle,  fall  all 
at  Noontide,  northward,  but  at  Sunrising,  westward ;  which 
could  not  be  possible  unless  the  Sun  were  far  greater 
than  the  Earth.  Moreover,  when  he  riseth,  he  surpasseth 
in  breadth  the  Mountain  Ida,  encompassing  the  same  at 
large  both  on  the  right  Hand  and  the  left,  which  only  is 
from  being  so  far  distant.  The  Eclipse  of  the  Moon  sheweth 
also  the  Magnitude  of  the  Sun,  by  an  infallible  Demon- 
stration ;  as  his  own  Eclipse  declareth  the  Littleness  of  the 
Earth.  For  as  there  are  of  Shadows  three  Forms,  and  it  is 
evident,  that  if  the  dark  material  Body  which  casteth  a  Sha- 
dow be  equal  in  Bigness  to  the  Light,  then  the  Shadow  is 
fashioned  like  a  Pillar,  and  hath  no  Point  at  the  End :  if  it 
be  greater,  it  yieldeth  a  Shadow  like  a  Top  standing  upon 
the  Point,  so  as  the  lower  Part  thereof  is  narrowest,  and 
then  the  Shadow  likewise  is  of  infinite  length :  but  if  the 
Body  be  less  than  the  Light,  then  is  represented  a  pyramidal 
Figure,  falling  out  sharp-pointed  in  the  Top  ;  which  Manner 
of  Shadow  appeareth  in  the  Moon's  Eclipse :  it  is,  without 
doubt,  therefore,  that  the  Sun  is  much  larger  than  the 
Earth,  as  the  same  is  seen  by  the  silent  Proofs  of  Nature 
itself.  For  why,  in  dividing  the  Times  of  the  Year,  departeth 
the  Sun  from  us  in  the  Winter?  even  because  by  means 
of  the  Night's  length  he  may  refresh  the  Earth,  which 
otherwise  he  would  have  burnt  up  :  for,  notwithstanding 
this,  he  burneth  it  in  some  measure,  from  his  excessive 
Greatness. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

The  Inventions  of  Men  in  the  Observation  of  the  Heavens. 

THE  first  Roman  that  published  the  true  Reason  of  both 
Eclipses  was  Sulpitius  Gallus,  who  afterwards  was  Consul 
with  M.  Marcellus:  but  at  that  Time  being  a  Tribune,  the 
Day  preceding  that  on  which  King  Perseus  was  vanquished 
by  Paulus,  he  was  brought  by  the  General  into  open  Audi- 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  47 

ence  before  the  whole  Army,  to  foretel  the  Eclipse  which 
was  about  to  happen  :  whereby  he  delivered  the  Army  from 
Anxiety;  and  presently  after  he  compiled  a  Book  of  the 
same.  But  among  the  Greeks,  Thales  Milesius1  was  the  first 
that  investigated  it ;  who,  in  the  fourth  Year  of  the  48th 
Olympiad  did  foreshew  the  Sun's  Eclipse  that  happened  in 
the  Reign  of  Halyattes,  and  in  the  170th  Year  after  the 
Foundation  of  the  City  of  Rome.  After  them,  Hipparchus 
compiled  his  "  Ephemerides,"  containing  the  Course  and 
Aspects  of  both  these  Planets,  for  six  hundred  Years  en- 
suing :  comprehending  also  the  Months  according  to  the 
Reckonings  of  sundry  Nations,  the  Days,  the  Hours,  the 
Situation  of  Places,  the  Aspects,  and  Latitudes  of  divers 
Towns  and  Countries ;  as  the  World  will  bear  him  witness : 
and  that  no  less  assuredly,  than  if  he  had  been  privy  to 
Nature's  Counsels.  Great  Persons  and  excellent  these 
were,  doubtless,  who,  above  the  Reach  of  the  Capacity  of 
mortal  Men,  found  out  the  Reason  of  the  Course  of  such 
mighty  Stars  and  divine  Powers  :  and  whereas  the  Mind  of 
Men  was  before  at  a  Loss,  fearing  in  these  Eclipses  of  the 
Stars  some  great  Violence,  or  the  Death  of  the  Planets,  they 
secured  them  in  that  behalf :  in  which  dreadful  Fear  stood 
Stesickorus  and  Pindarus  the  Poets  (notwithstanding  their 
lofty  Style),  and  particularly  at  the  Eclipse  of  the  Sun,  as 
will  appear  by  their  Poems.  As  for  the  Moon,  Mortals 
imagine  that  at  that  Time  by  Charms  she  is  enchanted,  and 
therefore  help  her  by  dissonant  ringing  of  Basins.  In  this 
Terror,  Nicias,  the  General  of  the  Athenians  (as  a  Man  igno- 
rant of  the  Cause),  feared  to  set  sail  with  his  Fleet  out  of 


1  The  minuteness  of  observation  displayed  by  these  illustrious  philo- 
sophers, from  whom  Pliny  has  borrowed  his  materials,  appears  to  imply 
the  existence  of  instruments  of  no  small  accuracy,  though  we  have  no 
account  of  their  possessing  such.  Of  the  telescope,  we  have  evidence  that 
they  were  ignorant. 

As  the  account  given  by  Pliny  of  ancient  astronomy  will  be  read 
chiefly  for  its  curiosity,  we  have  no  need  to  do  more  than  refer  to 
modern  treatises  on  the  subject  for  correction  of  what  is  mistaken. 
— Wem.  Club. 


48  History  of  Nature.  [Boo*  II. 

the  Harbour,  and  thus  greatly  distressed  the  State  of  his 
Country.  Be  ye  prosperous,  then,  for  your  excellency, 
O  noble  Interpreters  of  the  Heavens !  capable  of  Nature's 
Works,  and  the  Devisers  of  that  Reason  whereby  ye  have 
subdued  both  Gods  and  Men.  For  who  is  he  that,  seeing 
these  Things,  and  the  ordinary  Labours  (since  that  this  Term 
is  now  taken  up)  of  the  Stars,  would  not  bear  with  his  own 
Infirmity,  and  excuse  this  Necessity  of  being  born  to  die  ? 
Now,  for  this  present,  I  will  briefly  and  summarily  touch 
those  principal  Points  which  are  acknowledged  concerning 
the  said  Eclipses,  having  lightly  rendered  a  Reason  thereof  in 
the  proper  Places  :  for  neither  doth  such  proving  and  argu- 
ing of  these  Matters  belong  properly  to  our  purposed  Work  ; 
neither  is  it  less  Wonder  to  be  able  to  yield  the  Reasons  and 
Causes  of  all  Things  than  to  be  constant  in  some. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
Of  Eclipses. 

IT  is  certain,  that  all  Eclipses  in  222  Months  have  their 
Revolutions,  and  return  to  their  former  Points :  as  also  that 
the  Sun's  Eclipse  never  happeneth  but  either  in  the  last  of 
the  old,  or  first  of  the  new,  Moon ;  which  they  call  the  Con- 
junction :  and  that  the  Moon  is  never  eclipsed  but  in  the 
full,  and  always  somewhat  anticipateth  the  former  Eclipse. 
Moreover,  that  every  Year  both  Planets  are  eclipsed  at  cer- 
tain Days  and  Hours  under  the  Earth.  Neither  be  these 
Eclipses  seen  in  all  Places  when  they  are  above  the  Earth, 
by  Reason  sometimes  of  cloudy  Weather,  but  more  often,  for 
that  the  Globe  of  the  Earth  hindereth  the  Sight  of  the  Con- 
vexity of  the  Heaven.  Within  these  two  hundred  Years  it 
was  found  out  by  the  Sagacity  of  Hipparchus,  that  the  Moon 
sometime  was  eclipsed  twice  in  five  Months'  Space,  and  the 
Sun  likewise  in  seven.  Also  that  the  Sun  and  Moon  twice 
in  thirty  Days  were  darkened  above  the  Earth  :  though  this 
was  not  seen  equally  in  all  Quarters,  but  by  Men  in  divers 
Places :  and  that  which  is  most  surprising  in  this  Wonder, 
is,  that  when  it  is  agreed  that  the  Moon's  Light  is  dimmed 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  49 

by  the  Shadow  of  the  Earth,  at  one  Time  this  Eclipse  hap- 
peneth  in  the  West,  and  at  another  in  the  East :  as  also,  by 
what  Reason  it  happeneth,  that  seeing  after  the  Sun  is  up, 
that  Shadow  which  hideth  the  Light  of  the  Moon  must 
needs  be  under  the  Earth  :  it  fell  out  once,  that  the  Moon 
was  eclipsed  in  the  West,  and  both  Planets  were  seen  at  once 
above  the  Ground.  For  that  in  twelve  Days  both  these 
Lights  were  missing,  and  neither  Sun  nor  Moon  were  seen  :  it 
happened  in  our  Time,  when  both  the  Vespasians  (Emperors) 
were  Consuls,  the  Father  the  third  Time,  and  the  Son  the 
second. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Of  the  Moons  Motion. 

IT  is  clear  that  the  Moon,  always  in  her  increasing,  hath 
her  Horns  turned  from  the  Sun  toward  the  East :  but  in  her 
decrease,  contrariwise  westward ;  and  also  that  she  shineth 
(the  first  Day  of  her  Appearance)  three  quarters  and  the 
twenty-fourth  Part  of  one  Hour,  and  so  riseth  in  Proportion 
the  second  Day  forward  unto  the  full :  likewise  decreasing  in 
the  same  Manner  to  the  Change.  She  is  also  always  hidden 
in  the  Change  within  fourteen  Degrees  of  the  Sun.  By 
which  Argument  we  collect,  that  the  Magnitude  of  the  other 
Planets  is  greater  than  that  of  the  Moon,  because  they  ap- 
pear when  they  be  but  seven  Degrees  off.  But  the  Cause 
why  they  shew  less,  is  their  Altitude  :  like  the  fixed  Stars, 
which  by  Reason  of  the  Sun's  Brightness  are  not  seen  in 
the  Daytime  :  whereas,  indeed,  they  shine  as  well  by  Day  as 
Night:  and  that  is  manifestly  proved  by  Eclipses  of  the  Sun, 
and  by  exceeding  deep  Pits1,  for  so  they  are  to  be  seen  by 
Daylight. 

1  In  the  absence  or  imperfection  of  optical  instruments,  this  expedient 
was  necessarily  resorted  to,  for  the  purpose  here  stated ;  but  the  improve- 
ment of  the  telescope  has  superseded  this  contrivance.  There  was  for- 
merly, at  the  Royal  Observatory  at  Greenwich,  a  well  of  this  kind,  a 
hundred  feet  in  depth,  with  a  winding  staircase  of  stone  leading  to  the 
bottom ;  it  is  now  arched  over. —  Wern.  Club. 

D 


50  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  II. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

General  Rules  concerning  the  Motions  and  Lights  of  other 

Planets. 

THOSE  three  Planets  which  we  say  are  above  the  Sun, 
are  hidden  when  they  go  their  Course  with  him.  They  rise 
in  the  Morning,  and  never  depart  farther  than  eleven  De- 
grees. Afterwards  meeting  with  his  Rays,  they  are  covered  : 
and  in  their  triple  Aspect  retrograde,  they  make  their  Morn- 
ing Stations  120  Degrees  off,  which  are  called  the  first :  and 
by  and  by,  in  a  contrary  Aspect,  180  Degrees  off,  they  rise 
in  the  Evening,  and  appear  as  Evening  Stars.  In  like  Sort 
approaching  from  another  Side  within  120  Degrees,  they 
make  their  evening  Station,  which  also  they  call  the  second, 
until  he  overtake  them  within  twelve  Degrees ;  and  so  hide 
them  :  and  these  are  called  the  Evening  Settings.  The 
Planet  Mars,  as  he  is  nearer  to  the  Sun,  feeleth  the  Sun- 
beams by  a  quadrant  Aspect,  from  ninety  Degrees :  where- 
upon that  Motion  took  the  Name  called  the  first  and  second 
Nonagenary,  from  both  Risings.  The  same  Planet  keepeth 
this  stationary  Residence  six  Months  in  the  Signs :  whereas 
otherwise,  of  his  own  Nature,  he  would  do  it  but  two  Months. 
But  the  other  Planets  in  both  Stations  continue  not  four 
Months  each.  The  other  two  inferior  Planets  are  hidden 
after  the  same  Manner  in  the  evening  Conjunction  :  and 
leaving  the  Sun  in  as  many  Degrees,  they  make  their  morn- 
ing Rising  :  and  from  the  farthest  Bounds  of  their  Distance, 
they  follow  after  the  Sun  :  and  after  they  have  once  over- 
taken him,  they  set  again  in  the  Morning,  and  so  outgo 
him.  And  by  and  by  keeping  the  same  Distance,  in  the 
Evening  they  rise  again  unto  the  same  Limits  which  we 
named  before,  from  whence  they  return  to  the  Sun,  and  by 
the  evening  Setting  they  be  hidden.  The  Star  Venus  like- 
wise maketh  two  Stations,  according  to  the  two  Manners  of 
her  Appearance,  Morning  and  Evening,  when  she  is  in  far- 
thest Bounds  of  her  Distance.  But  Mercury  keepeth  his 
Stations  so  small  awhile,  that  they  cannot  be  observed.  This 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  5 1 

is  the  Order,  as  well  of  the  Appearances  of  the  Planets  as  of 
their  Occultations  and  their  mere  Motion,  enfolded  within 
many  strange  Wonders.  For  they  change  their  Magnitudes 
and  Colours,  and  sometimes  they  approach  to  the  North, 
sometimes  they  go  back  toward  the  South,  and,  all  on  a  sud- 
den, they  appear  one  while  nearer  to  the  Earth,  and  another 
while  to  the  Heaven  :  wherein,  if  we  shall  deliver  many 
Points  otherwise  than  former  Writers,  yet  we  confess,  that 
for  these  Matters  we  are  beholden  unto  them,  who  first  made 
Demonstration  of  seeking  out  the  Ways  thereto  :  and  there- 
fore let  no  Man  despair  of  profiting  and  going  forward  in 
Knowledge  from  Age  to  Age.  For,  these  strange  Motions 
fall  out  upon  many  Causes.  The  first  is  by  Reason  of  those 
Circles  in  the  Stars,  which  the  Greeks  call  Absides :  for  we 
are  compelled  to  use  the  Greek  Terms.  Each  one  of  the 
Planets  hath  a  particular  Circle  by  itself,  and  these  different 
from  those  of  the  starry  Heaven  :  because  the  Earth  from 
those  two  Points  which  they  call  Poles,  is  the  Centre  of  the 
Heaven,  as  also  of  the  Zodiac,  situated  obliquely  between 
them.  All  which  Things  are  certainly  known  to  be  so  be- 
yond Question  by  the  Compass.  And  therefore  from  every 
Centre  there  arise  their  own  Absides,  and  so  they  have 
diverse  Circuits  and  different  Motions,  because  of  necessity 
the  interior  Absides  must  be  shorter. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

Why  the  same  Planets  seem  sometimes  higher,  and  sometimes 

lower. 

THE  highest  Absides,  therefore,  from  the  Centre  of  the 
Earth  are  of  Saturn,  in  the  Sign  Scorpio :  of  Jupiter  in 
Virgo :  of  Mars  in  Leo :  of  the  Sun  in  Gemini :  of  Venus  in 
Sagittarius:  of  Mercury  in  Capricorn:  and  in  the  Middle  of 
the  said  Signs :  and  contrariwise  the  said  Planets  in  the 
same  Degrees  of  the  opposite  Signs  are  lowest  and  nearest 
to  the  Centre  of  the  Earth.  So  it  happeneth  that  they  seem 
to  move  more  slowly  when  they  go  their  highest  Circuit :  not 
for  that  natural  Motions  do  either  hasten  or  slacken,  which 


52  History  of  Nature.  [Boon.  ii. 

be  certain  and  several  to  every  one,  but  because  the  Lines 
which  are  drawn  from  the  Top  of  the  Absis  must  needs 
approach  each  other  about  the  Centre,  as  the  Spokes  in 
Wheels  :  and  the  same  Motion,  by  Reason  of  the  Nearness 
of  the  Centre,  seemeth  in  one  Place  greater,  in  another  less. 
The  other  Cause  of  their  Sublimities  is,  for  that  in  other 
Signs  they  have  the  Absides  elevated  highest  from  the 
Centre  of  their  own  eccentric  Circles.  Thus  Saturn  is  in  the 
greatest  Height  in  the  20th  Degree  of  Libra,  Jupiter  in  the 
15th  of  Cancer,  Mars  in  the  28th  of  Capricorn,  the  Sun  in 
the  29th  of  Aries,  Venus  in  the  1 6th  of  Pisces,  Mercury  in 
the  15th  of  Virgo,  and  the  Moon  in  the  4th  of  Taurus.  The 
third  Reason  of  their  Altitude  is  not  taken  from  their  Circles, 
but  understood  by  the  Convexity  of  the  Sky,  for  that  these 
Planets  seem  to  the  Eye,  as  they  rise  and  fall,  to  mount  up 
or  settle  downward  through  the  air.  To  this  is  united  an- 
other Cause  also,  which  is,  the  Zodiac  Obliquity  and  Latitude 
of  the  Planets,  in  Regard  of  the  Ecliptic  :  for  through  it  the 
Stars  which  we  called  wandering  do  take  their  Course. 
Neither  is  there  any  Place  inhabited  upon  Earth,  but  that 
which  lieth  under  it.  For  all  the  Rest  without  the  Poles  are 
desert.  Only  the  Planet  Venus  goeth  beyond  the  Circle  of 
the  Zodiac,  two  Degrees  :  which  is  supposed  to  be  the  effi- 
cient Cause,  that  certain  living  Creatures  are  bred  even  in 
the  desert  Parts  of  the  World.  The  Moon  likewise  rangeth 
throughout  all  the  Breadth  of  it,  but  never  goeth  out  of  it. 
Next  after  these  the  Star  Mercury  hath  the  largest  Scope 
in  the  Zodiac,  but  yet  so,  as  of  twelve  Degrees  (for  that  is  the 
Breadth  thereof)  he  wandereth  but  eight,  and  those  not 
equally,  but  two  in  the  midst,  four  above,  and  two  beneath. 
Then  the  Sun  in  the  midst,  goeth  always  between  the  two 
Extremities  of  the  Zodiac ;  but  in  his  declining  Course  he 
seemeth  to  wind  unequally,  after  the  Manner  of  Serpents. 
Mars  leaveth  the  ecliptic  Line  four  half  Degrees,  Jupiter 
two  Degrees  and  a  half,  Saturn  two,  like  as  the  Sun.  Thus 
you  see  the  Manner  of  the  Latitudes,  as  they  descend  south- 
ward, or  ascend  northward.  And  upon  this  is  the  Reason 
grounded  of  the  third  Opinion  of  them,  who  imagine  that 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  53 

the  Planets  do  rise  and  mount  from  the  Earth  upward  into 
Heaven.  For  very  many  have  thought,  although  untruly, 
that  they  climb  in  this  Manner.  But  to  the  End  that  they 
may  be  confuted,  we  must  lay  open  an  immense  Subtlety, 
which  containeth  all  those  Causes  and  Reasons  abovesaid. 
First,  therefore,  this  is  admitted,  that  these  Stars  in  their 
Evening  Setting  are  nearest  to  the  Earth,  both  in  Latitude 
and  Altitude  :  and  when  they  be  farthest  from  the  Earth,  as 
well  in  Latitude  as  Elevation,  they  appear  in  the  Morning 
before  the  Sun  :  as  also  that  then  they  are  Stationaries  in  the 
middle  Points  of  the  Latitudes,  which  they  call  Ecliptics. 
Likewise  it  is  acknowledged,  that  so  long  as  the  Planets  are 
near  to  the  Earth,  their  Motion  increaseth  :  and  as  they  de- 
part on  hi«:h  it  decreaseth.  And  this  Reason  is  confirmed 
principally  by  the  Elevations  of  the  Moon.  And  it  is  beyond 
a  Doubt,  that  every  Planet  in  its  Morning  Rising  riseth 
every  Day  higher  than  the  former.  The  superior  three 
above  the  Sun  diminish  from  their  first  Stations  unto  the 
second.  Which  being  so,  it  will  plainly  appear,  that  every 
Planet  rising  before  the  Sun  ascendeth  to  the  Latitudes :  so 
that  from  the  Time  they  begin,  their  Motion  increaseth  by 
little  and  little  more  sparely.  But  in  the  first  Stations,  they 
are  at  the  highest  Altitude :  for  then  first  the  Numbers  begin 
to  be  withdrawn,  and  the  Planets  to  go  backward  ;  whereof 
a  particular  Reason  may  be  given  in  this  Manner :  the 
Planets  being  smitten  in  that  Part  whereof  we  spoke,  they 
are  both  restrained  by  the  triangular  Beams  or  trine  Aspect 
of  the  Sun,  to  hold  on  a  direct  Course,  and  are  raised  up 
aloft  by  the  fiery  Power  of  the  said  Sun.  This  cannot  im- 
mediately be  understood  by  our  Eyesight :  and  so  they  are 
supposed  to  stand,  and  hence  the  Name  of  Stations  is  de- 
rived. Then  proceedeth  forward  the  Violence  of  the  Sun's 
Beams,  and  the  Vapour  thereof,  by  Repercussion,  forceth 
them  to  go  backward.  And  much  more  is  this  perceived 
in  their  Evening  Rising,  when  the  Sun  is  wholly  against 
them,  and  they  be  driven  to  the  very  Top  of  their  Absides, 
and  so  not  seen  at  all,  because  they  are  at  the  highest,  and 
are  carried  on  by  their  least  Motion,  which  is  so  much  the 


54  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  II. 

less,  when  it  happeneth  in  the  highest  Signs  of  their  Absides. 
From  the  evening  Rising  the  Latitude  descendeth,  for  now  the 
Motion  less  diminisheth,  but  yet  increaseth  not  before  the 
second  Stations :  because  they  are  forced  to  descend  by  Rea- 
son of  the  Sunbeams  coming  from  the  other  Side  ;  and  the 
same  Force  beareth  them  downward  to  the  Earth,  which  by 
the  former  triangular  Aspect  raised  them  aloft  toward  Hea- 
ven. Of  so  much  Importance  is  it  whether  these  Beams 
come  from  beneath  or  above.  The  same  happeneth  much 
more  in  the  Evening  Setting.  This  is  an  Explanation  of 
the  Motions  of  the  superior  Planets;  but  the  Theory  of  the 
rest  is  more  difficult,  and  hath  by  no  Man  before  us  been 
delivered. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

General  Rules  concerning  the  Planets. 

FIRST,  therefore,  let  us  set  down  the  Cause  why  Venus 
never  departeth  from  the  Sun  more  than  forty-six  Degrees, 
and  Mercury  not  above  twenty-three  :  and  why  oftentimes 
they  retire  back  unto  the  Sun  within  that  Space.  To  be 
resolved  in  this  Point,  we  must  remark,  that  both  of  them 
have  their  Absides  turned  opposite  to  the  rest,  as  being 
seated  under  the  Sun  :  and  so  much  of  their  Circles  is  under- 
neath, as  the  forenamed  were  above ;  and  therefore  farther 
off  they  cannot  be,  because  the  Curvature  of  their  Absides 
in  that  Place  hath  no  greater  Longitude.  Therefore  both 
Margins  of  their  Absides,  by  a  like  Proportion,  keep  Mean, 
and  their  Course  is  limited :  but  the  short  Spaces  of  their 
Longitudes  they  compensate  by  the  wandering  of  their  Lati- 
tudes. But  what  is  the  Reason  that  they  reach  not  always 
to  forty-six  Degrees,  and  to  twenty-three?  They  do  so  truly: 
but  here  the  Explanation  fails.  For  it  is  apparent,  that  their 
Absides  also  move,  because  they  never  overpass  the  Sun. 
And  therefore  when  their  Margins  from  either  Side  are  per- 
ceived to  fall  upon  the  very  Point,  then  the  Planets  also  are 
understood  to  reach  unto  their  longest  Distances  :  but  when 
their  Margins  be  short  so  many  Degrees,  the  Stars  them- 
selves are  thought  to  return  more  speedily  in  their  Retro- 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  55 

gradation  than  in  their  direct  Course  forward,  though  their 
utmost  Extremity  is  ever  the  same.  And  from  hence  is  the 
Reason  understood  of  the  contrary  Motions  of  these  two 
Planets.  For  the  superior  Planets  move  most  swiftly  in  the 
Evening  Setting,  but  these  most  slowly.  They  be  highest 
above  the  Earth,  when  they  move  slowest ;  and  these,  when 
they  go  swiftest :  for  as  in  the  former  the  Nearness  of  the 
Centre  hasteneth  them,  so,  in  these,  the  Extremity  of  the 
Circle  :  they,  from  their  Morning  Rising,  begin  to  slacken 
their  Celerity ;  but  these  to  increase  it :  they  return  back 
from  their  Morning  Station  to  their  Evening  Mansion ;  but 
Venus,  contrariwise,  is  retrograde  from  the  Evening  Station 
to  that  of  the  Morning.  But,  she  from  the  Morning  Rising 
beginneth  to  climb  the  Latitude  :  but  to  follow  the  Altitude 
and  the  Sun  from  the  Morning  Station  :  as  being  most  swift 
and  at  the  highest  in  the  Morning  Setting.  Moreover  she 
beginneth  to  digress  in  Latitude,  and  to  diminish  her  Motion, 
from  the  Morning  Rising :  but  to  be  retrograde,  and  to  digress 
in  Altitude,  from  the  Evening  Station.  Again,  the  Planet 
Mercury  rising  in  the  Morning,  beginneth  both  Ways  to 
climb,  but  to  digress  in  Latitude  from  the  Evening  Rising : 
and  when  the  Sun  hath  overtaken  him  within  the  Distance 
of  fifteen  Degrees,  he  standeth  still  for  four  Days  almost 
immovable.  Presently,  he  descendeth  from  his  Altitude, 
and  goeth  back  from  the  Evening  Setting  to  that  of  the 
Morning.  This  Star  only,  and  the  Moon,  descend  in  as 
many  Days  as  they  ascend.  But  Venus  ascendeth  up  to  her 
Station  in  fifteen  Days  and  a  little  more.  Again,  Saturn  and 
Jupiter  are  twice  as  long  descending,  and  Mars  four  Times. 
So  great  Variety  is  in  their  Nature,  but  the  Reason  thereof  is 
evident.  For  they  which  go  against  the  Vapour  of  the  Sun 
do  also  descend  with  Difficulty.  Many  Secrets  more  of 
Nature,  and  Laws  whereunto  she  is  obedient,  might  be  shewn 
about  these  Things.  As,  for  Example:  the  Planet  Mars, 
whose  Course,  of  all  others,  can  be  least  observed,  never 
maketh  Station  but  in  quadrate  Aspect :  and  Jupiter,  in 
triangular  Aspect ;  and  very  seldom  separated  from  the  Sun 
sixty  Degrees,  which  Number  maketh  six  angled  Forms  of 


56  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

the  Heaven  (that  is,  it  is  the  sixth  Part  of  the  Heaven) : 
neither  doth  Jupiter  shew  his  rising  in  any,  save  only  two 
Signs,  Cancer  and  Leo.  The  Planet  Mercury  seldom  hath 
his  Evening  Rising  in  Pisces,  but  very  often  in  Virgo  ;  and 
the  Morning  Rising  in  Libra.  In  like  Manner,  the  Morning 
Rising  is  in  Aquarius,  but  very  seldom  in  Leo.  Neither 
becometh  he  retrograde  in  Taurus  and  Gemini  :  and  in 
Cancer,  not  under  the  twenty-fifth  Degree.  As  for  the 
Moon,  she  entereth  not  twice  in  Conjunction  with  the  Sun 
in  any  other  Sign  but  Gemini :  and  sometime  hath  no  Con- 
junction at  all,  and  that  only  in  Sagittarius.  As  for  the  last 
and  first  of  the  Moon,  to  be  seen  in  the  same  Day  or  Night, 
happeneth  in  no  other  Sign  but  in  Aries,  and  few  Men  have 
had  the  Chance  to  see  it.  And  hereupon  came  Linceus  to  be 
so  famous  for  his  Eyesight.  Also,  the  Planets  Saturn  and 
Mars  appear  not  in  the  Heaven  at  the  most  170  Days: 
Jupiter  36,  or  at  least  ten  Days  wanting  :  Venus  69,  or  when 
least,  52 :  Mercury  13,  or  at  least,  17. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
What  is  the  Cause  that  the  Planets  alter  their  Colours  ? 

THE  Reason  of  the  Planet's  Altitudes  is  it  that  tetnpereth 
their  Colours,  for  they  take  the  Likeness  of  the  Air,  into 
which  they  enter ;  and  the  Circle  of  another  Planet's  Motion 
coloureth  them  as  they  approach  either  Way,  ascending  or 
descending.  The  colder  setteth  a  pale  Colour,  the  hotter  a 
red,  and  the  windy  a  fearful  Hue.  Only  the  Points  and 
Conjunctions  of  iheAbsides,  and  the  utmost  Circumferences, 
shew  a  dark  black.  Each  Planet  hath  a  several  Colour; 
Saturn  is  white,  Jupiter  clear  and  bright,  Mars  a  fiery  red, 
Venus  glowing,  when  Lucifer;  when  Occidental,  or  Vesper, 
resplendent  ;  Mercury  sparkling,  the  Moon  pleasant,  the 
Sun  when  he  riseth,  burning,  afterwards  radiating1.  Upon 

1  Many  of  the  colours  here  mentioned  are  only  optical  deceptions,  but 
that  of  the  planet  Mars  must  proceed  from  something  inherent  in  the 
planet  itself,  or  the  atmosphere  by  which  it  is  surrounded ;  for  while 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  57 

these  Causes  the  Sight  is  entangled,  and  discovereth  those 
Stars  also  which  are  fixed  in  the  Sky.  For  one  while  a 
Number  of  them  appear  about  the  Half-moon,  when  in  a 
clear  and  calm  Night  she  gently  beautlfieth  them ;  and  at 
another  they  are  seen  but  here  and  there,  insomuch  that  we 
may  wonder  how  they  are  fled  upon  the  full  Moon,  which 
hideth  them  ;  or  when  the  Beams  either  of  the  Sun  or  other 
abovesaid  have  dazzled  our  Sight.  Yea,  the  Moon  herself 
perceiveth  the  Sun's  Beams,  as  they  come  upon  her :  for 
those  Rays  that  come  sidelong,  according  to  the  Convexity 
of  the  Sky,  give  but  an  obscure  Light  to  the  Moon,  in  Com- 
parison of  them  that  fall  directly  with  straight  Angles.  And, 
therefore,  in  the  quadrangular  Aspect  of  the  Sun  she  ap- 
peareth  divided  in  Half;  in  the  triangular  she  is  well  near 
environed,  but  her  Circle  is  half  empty ;  but  in  Opposition 
she  appeareth  full.  And  again,  as  she  is  in  the  Wane,  she 
representeth  the  same  Forms,  decreasing  by  Quarters  as  she 
increased  :  with  like  Aspects  as  the  other  three  Planets 
above  the  Sun. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Reason  of  the  Suns  Motion,  and  the  Inequality  of  Days. 

THE  Sun  himself  hath  four  Differences  in  his  Course  : 
twice  in  the  Year,  in  Spring  and  Autumn,  making  the  Night 
equal  to  the  Day ;  for  then  he  falleth  on  the  Centre  of  the 
Earth,  in  the  eighth  Degree  of  Aries  and  Libra.  Twice 
likewise  he  exchangeth  the  Compass  of  his  Race  :  to  lengthen 
the  Day  from  the  Bruma,  or  Midwinter,  in  the  eighth  De- 
gree of  Capricorn;  and  again  to  lengthen  the  Night  from  the 
summer  Solstice,  being  in  as  many  Degrees  of  Cancer.  The 
Cause  of  unequal  Days  is  the  Obliquity  of  the  Zodiac:  when 
the  one  Half  of  the  World  is  at  all  Times  above  and  under 
the  Earth.  But  (hose  Signs  which  mount  upright  in  their 

it  reflects  to  us  a  red  tinge,  the  light  it  obtains  from  the  sun  is  the  same 
with  that  which  comes  to  us  from  the  sun,  and  in  which  the  prismatic 
rays  produce  a  colourless  mixture.— Wern.  Club. 


58  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

Rising,  hold  Light  in  a  longer  Tract,  and  make  the  Days 
longer:  whereas  they  which  arise  obliquely  pass  away  in 
shorter  Time. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

Why  Lightnings  are  attributed  to  Jupiter. 

MOST  Men  are  ignorant  of  that  Secret  which,  by  great 
Study  of  the  Heavens,  Men  of  deep  Learning  have  found 
out :  namely,  that  it  is  the  Fires  of  the  three  uppermost 
Planets,  which,  falling  to  the  Earth,  carry  the  Name  of 
Lightnings  ;  but  those  especially  which  are  seated  in  the 
midst,  because  participating  in  the  excessive  Cold  and  Mois- 
ture from  the  upper  Circle,  and  the  immoderate  Heat  from 
the  lower,  by  this  Means  he  dischargeth  the  Superfluity : 
and  hereupon  it  is  commonly  said,  that  Jupiter  darteth 
Lightnings1.  Therefore,  as  out  of  burning  Wood  a  Coal  of 
Fire  flieth  forth  with  a  Crack,  so  from  a  Star  is  spit  out  this 
celestial  Fire,  carrying  with  it  Presages  of  future  Things :  so 
that  it  sheweth  Divine  Operations,  even  in  these  Portions 
which  are  cast  away  as  superfluous.  And  this  most  com- 
monly happeneth  when  the  Air  is  troubled;  either  because 
the  collected  Moisture  stirreth  that  Abundance  to  fall ;  or 
because  it  is  disquieted,  as  it  were,  with  a  Birth  from  a 
pregnant  Star. 

1  Much  of  the  religious  system  of  the  ancients  was  founded  on  the 
persuasion  that  every  appearance  of  lightning  and  thunder,  as  well  as 
other  aerial  phenomena,  were  direct  manifestations  of  Divine  interposition 
in  the  affairs  of  men ;  and  a  college  of  officers  (augurs)  was  appointed  to 
observe,  record,  report,  and  explain  such  appearances,  for  the  guidance  of 
the  state  in  its  most  important  proceedings.  From  a  slight  expression  of 
Pliny  in  the  course  of  this  chapter,  it  appears  that  he  hesitated  to  deny 
this  popular  idea  in  a  direct  manner  :  in  apprehension,  perhaps,  of  laying 
himself  open  to  the  charge  of  infidelity.  But  by  implication,  he  expresses 
his  disbelief  of  what  was  so  generally  credited;  for  the  ascribing  to  the 
natural  effect  of  Jupiter  as  a  planet,  what  was  believed  by  the  priests  and 
the  state  to  be  a  voluntary  action  of  Jupiter,  the  supreme  deity,  can  be 
regarded  as  little  better  than  a  subterfuge.  For  a  natural  explanation  of 
thunder  and  lightning,  such  as  it  is,  the  reader  is  referred  to  chapter 
xliii.  of  this  book  ;  and  for  other  curious  particulars,  to  the  chapters  l.-lv. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  59 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
The  Distances  of  the  Planets. 

MANY  have  endeavoured  to  find  out  the  Distance  and 
Elevation  of  the  Planets  from  the  Earth,  and  have  set  down 
in  Writing,  that  the  Sun  is  distant  from  the  Moon  eighteen 
Degrees,  as  the  Moon  is  also  from  the  Earth.  But  Pytha- 
goras, a  Man  of  much  Sagacity,  hath  collected,  that  there 
are  126,000  Stadia1  from  the  Earth  to  the  Moon,  and  a 
double  Distance  from  her  to  the  Sun,  and  from  thence  to  the 
twelve  Signs  three  Times  so  much.  Of  which  Opinion  was 
also  our  countryman,  Gallus  Sulpitius. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Of  the  Music  of  the  Planets. 

BUT  Pythagoras  at  the  same  Time  uses  the  Terms  of 
Music,  by  calling  the  Space  between  the  Earth  and  the 
Moon  a  Tone ;  saying,  that  from  her  to  Mercury  is  Half  a 
Tone :  and  from  him  to  Venus  about  the  same  Space.  But 
from  her  to  the  Sun  so  much  and  a  Half  more  :  but  from  the 
Sun  to  Mars  a  Tone,  that  is  to  say,  as  much  as  from  the 
Earth  to  the  Moon.  From  him  to  Jupiter  Haifa  Tone: 
likewise  from  him  to  Saturn  Half  a  Tone  :  and  so  from 
thence  to  the  Zodiac  so  much  and  a  Half  more.  Thus  are 
composed  seven  Tunes,  which  Harmony  they  call  Diapason; 
that  is  to  say,  the  Universality  of  Consent.  In  this,  Saturn 
rnoveth  by  the  Doric  Tune ;  Mercury  by  Phthongus,  Jupiter 
by  the  Phrygian,  and  the  Rest  likewise :  a  Subtlety  more 
pleasant  than  needful2. 

1  The  Stadium  differed  in  different  countries ;  but  the  standard  may 
be  fixed  at  a  furlong ;  as  may  be  seen  in  chapter  xxiii.    One  hundred  and 
twenty-five  paces  make  a  stadium.    In  the  larger  numbers,  therefore,  it 
has  been  sometimes  judged  best  to  translate  the  equivalent  expressions 
into  miles.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Ideas  of  the  harmony  of  creation  seem  to  have  entered  deeply  into 
the  opinions  of  Pythagoras,  on  the  system  of  creation,  and  especially  on 


60 


History  of  Nature. 


[BooK  II. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 
The  Geometry  of  the  World. 

A  STADIUM  maketh  of  our  Paces  125,  that  is  to  say,  625 
Feet.  Posidonius  saith,  that  from  the  Earth  it  is  no  less  than 
forty  Stadia  to  that  Height  wherein  thick  Weather,  Winds, 
and  Clouds  are  formed.  Above  this,  the  Air  is  pure,  clear, 
and  light,  without  any  troubled  Darkness.  But  from  the 
cloudy  Region  to  the  Moon  is  2,000,000  Stadia :  from  thence 
to  the  Sun,  5000.  By  means  of  which  Interval  it  cometh  to 
pass,  that  so  exceeding  great  as  the  Sun  is,  he  burneth  not 

the  order  and  distances  of  the  planets,  the  motions  of  which  he  appears  to 
have  compared  to  the  graceful  and  measured  dances  of  the  ancients  to 
the  sound  of  the  harp.  But,  as  often  happens,  when  philosophers  confine 
their  views  of  Nature  to  a  single  aspect,  what  has  a  shadow  of  truth  in 
itself  becomes,  when  thus  interpreted,  egregious  trifling.  The  supposition 
enounced  is,  that  not  only  are  the  motions  performed  according  to  musical 
time,  but  the  intervals  between  the  chords  (of  each  planet's  path)  are 
properly  measured  by  their  relative  tones.  The  following  diagram,  taken 
from  the  notes  to  Dalechamp's  edition  of  Pliny,  will  more  clearly  repre- 
sent the  ideas  of  this  eminent  Greek  philosopher : — 


12THESPH, 


TERRA      THE     EARTH 


The  tone  or  unit  of  Pythagoras  is  taken  for  125,000  stadia,  or  15,625 
miles. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  If.]  History  of  Nature.  61 

the  Earth.  Many  there  be,  however,  who  have  taught  that 
the  Clouds  are  elevated  to  the  Height  of  900  Stadia.  These 
Points  are  undiscovered,  and  beyond  Man's  Reach  ;  but  they 
may  now  be  delivered  to  others,  as  they  have  been  taught : 
in  which,  notwithstanding,  one  infallible  Reason  of  a  geome- 
trical Collection  cannot  be  rejected,  if  a  man  would  search 
deep  into  these  Matters.  Neither  need  a  Man  to  seek  an 
exact  Measure  hereof  (for  to  desire  that  is  a  foolish  Idleness), 
but  only  to  make  an  Estimate  of  Probability.  For,  whereas 
it  is  clear  by  the  Course  of  the  Sun,  that  the  Circle  through 
which  he  passeth  containeth  three  hundred,  threescore,  and 
almost  six  Degrees  ;  and  it  is  a  Rule  that  the  Diameter 
formeth  a  third  Part  of  the  Circumference,  and  little  less 
than  a  seventh  Part  of  a  third :  it  is  plain,  that  deducting 
one  Half  thereof  (because  the  Earth,  situated  in  the  Centre, 
cometh  between),  about  the  sixth  Part  of  this  great  Circuit 
which  he  maketh  about  the  Earth  (so  far  as  our  Mind  doth 
comprehend),  is  the  very  Height  from  the  Earth  up  to  the 
Sun,  but  the  twelfth  Part  to  the  Moon,  because  she  runneth 
so  much  a  shorter  Circuit  than  the  Sun  ;  whereby  it  ap- 
peareth,  that  she  is  in  the  Midst  between  the  Earth  and  the 
Sun.  It  is  a  Wonder  to  see  how  far  the  Presumption  of  the 
Heart  of  Man  will  proceed  when  instigated  by  some  little 
Success,  as  in  the  abovenamed  Matter.  The  Reason  whereof 
ministereth  plenteous  Occasion  of  Impudency,  for  they  who 
dared  to  give  a  Guess  at  the  Space  between  the  Sun  and  the 
Earth  are  so  bold  as  to  do  the  like  from  thence  to  Heaven. 
For,  presuming  that  the  Sun  is  in  the  Midst,  they  have  at 
their  Fingers'  Ends  the  very  Measure  of  the  whole  World. 
For  how  many  seven  Parts  the  Diameter  hath,  so  many 
twenty-two  Parts  hath  the  whole  Circle :  as  if  they  had  got- 
ten the  certain  Measure  of  the  Heaven  by  the  Plumb-line. 
The  Egyptians,  according  to  the  Reckoning  which  Petosiris 
and  Necepsos  have  invented,  do  collect,  that  every  Degree  in 
the  Circle  of  the  Moon,  which  is  the  least  (as  hath  been  said) 
of  all  other,  containeth  thirty-three  Stadia,  and  somewhat 
more;  in  Saturn^  the  greatest  of  all,  double  as  much  ;  and  in 
the  Sun,  which  we  said  was  the  midst,  the  Half  of  both  Mea- 


62  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

sures.  And  this  Computation  hath  very  great  Importance, 
for  he  that  will  reckon  the  Distances  between  the  Circle  of 
Saturn  and  the  Zodiac,  by  this  Calculation  shall  multiply  an 
infinite  Number  of  Stadia. 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 
Of  Sadden  Stars. 

THERE  remain  yet  a  few  Points  concerning  the  World  : 
for  in  the  very  Heaven  there  be  Stars  that  suddenly  appear, 
whereof  there  are  many  Kinds1. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

Of  Comets  and  Celestial  Prodigies ,  their  Nature,  Situation, 
and  Kinds. 

THESE  Stars  which  the  Greeks  call  Cometas,  our  Romans 
term  Crinitas  (hairy)  :  dreadful,  with  bloody  Hair,  and 
shagged  like  the  Bush  of  Hair  upon  the  Top  of  the  Head.  The 
same  Greeks  call  those  Stars  Pogonias*,  which  from  the  lower 
Part  have  a  Mane  hanging  down  like  a  long  Beard.  Those 

1  This  important  fact  in  astronomy,  that  stars  have  suddenly  appeared, 
remained  for  a  time  visible  in  a  fixed  position,  and  then  have  either  be- 
come of  less  apparent  brightness  or  disappeared  altogether,  is  established 
by  the  observations  of  modern  as  well  as  ancient  astronomers ;  and  to 
ascertain  beyond  doubt  whether  such  a  phenomenon  might  be  repeated, 
was  the  first  motive  for  which  a  map  of  the  heavens  and  a  catalogue  of 
the  known  stars  were  constructed.     Hipparchus  (chap,  xxvi.)  is  the  first 
that  is  known  to  have  observed  this  phenomenon ;   a  detection  of  the 
occurrence  is  no  slight  proof  of  the  minuteness  of  inquiry  of  the  ancient 
astronomers.     But  it  is  to  be  remarked,  that  Pliny  classes  meteors  and 
shooting  stars,  not  only  with  comets,  but  also  among  the  more  permanent 
or  fixed  stars. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  The  various  names  and  comparisons  here  applied  to  what,  for  the 
most  part,  are  mere  meteoric  appearances  have  probably  a  reference  to 
the  classification  by  which  the  augurs  divided  them,  for  the  purposes  of 
divination ;  for  certainly  a  strong  imagination  is  required  to  discern  any 
likeness  between  these  aerial  appearances  and  those  material  objects  from 
which  they  derive  their  names. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  63 

named  Acontice,  shake  like  a  Spear,  signifying  great  Swift- 
ness. This  was  it  whereof  Tiberius  Ccesar,  the  Emperor, 
wrote  an  excellent  Poem  in  his  fifth  Consulship  ;  the  last 
that  ever  was  seen  to  this  Day.  The  same,  if  they  be  shorter 
and  sharp-pointed  at  the  Top,  are  called  Xiphias,  which  are 
the  palest  of  all,  and  glittering  like  a  Sword,  but  without  any 
Rays:  which  another  Kind  of  them,  named  .Disceus  (resem- 
bling a  Disc  or  Quoit,  whereof  it  beareth  the  Name,  but  in 
Colour  like  to  Amber),  putteth  forth  here  and  there  out  of 
its  Margin.  Pitheus  is  in  the  Form  of  Tuns  environed  in 
the  Cavity  of  a  smoky  Light.  Ceratias  resembleth  a  Horn  : 
and  such  an  one  appeared  when  Greece  fought  the  Battle  of 
Salamis.  Lampadias  is  like  to  burning  Torches  :  and  Hip- 
peus  to  Horses'  Manes,  very  swift  in  Motion,  and  revolving 
in  a  Globe.  There  is  also  a  white  Comet  with  silver  Hair, 
so  bright  and  shining  that  it  can  hardly  be  looked  at ;  and 
in  Man's  Shape  it  sheweth  the  very  Image  of  a  God.  More- 
over, there  be  blazing  Stars  that  become  all  shaggy,  com- 
passed round  with  a  hairy  Fringe  like  a  Mane.  One  of  these, 
appearing  in  the  Form  a  Mane,  changed  into  that  of  a  Spear, 
in  the  hundred  and  eighth  Olympiad,  and  the  three  hundred 
and  ninety-eighth  Year  from  the  Foundation  of  Rome.  It 
hath  been  observed,  that  the  shortest  Time  of  their  Appear- 
ance is  seven  Days,  and  the  longest  eighty  Days.  Some  of 
them  move  like  the  Planets ;  others  are  immovably  fixed. 
Almost  all  are  seen  under  the  very  North  Star ;  some  in  no 
certain  Part  thereof,  but  especially  in  that  white  which  hath 
taken  the  Name  of  the  Milky1  Way.  Aristotle  saith2,  that 

1  Galaxy. 

3  The  author  is  here  referring  to  those  appearances  which  are  now 
denominated  shooting  stars ;  and  which,  in  ancient  times,  were  believed 
to  be  the  very  things  the  modern  name  denotes.  St.  John  refers,  figura- 
tively, to  this  idea  (Book  of  Revelation,  vi.  13):  "  And  the  stars  of 
heaven  fell  unto  the  earth."  Modern  opinion  has  varied  greatly  with 
regard  to  the  nature  and  cause  of  these  appearances ;  and  the  diversity  of 
explanation  is  a  proof  how  little  satisfactory  any  of  them  is  judged  to  be. 
There  have  been  times,  chiefly  in  the  autumn,  and  at  long  intervals,  when 
these  meteors  have  been  particularly  abundant,  and  it  appears  that 
Aristotle  refers  to  such  a  luminous  shower ;  the  rarity  of  which  may  be 


64  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

many  are  seen  together;  a  Thing  that  no  Man  but  he  hath 
known,  so  far  as  I  can  learn.  They  signify  boisterous  Winds, 
and  very  hot  Weather.  They  are  seen  also  in  Winter,  and 
about  the  South  Pole  :  but  in  that  Place  without  any  Beams. 
A  terrible  one  likewise  was  seen  by  the  People  in  Ethiopia 
and  Egypt,  which  the  King  who  reigned  in  that  Age,  named 
Typhon.  It  resembled  Fire,  and  was  twisted  like  a  Wreath, 
hideous  to  the  Sight ;  and  not  to  be  counted  a  Star,  but  truly 
a  Ball  of  Fire.  Sometimes  the  Planets  and  other  Stars  are 
spread  over  with  Hairs ;  but  a  Comet J  is  never  seen  in  the 
West  Part  of  the  Heaven. 

A  fearful  Star,  for  the  most  Part,  this  Comet  is,  and  not 
easily  expiated2  :  as  it  appeared  by  the  late  civil  Troubles 
when  Octavius  was  Consul :  as  also  a  second  Time  by  the 
War  of  Pompey  and  Ccesar.  And  in  our  Days  about  the 
Time  that  Claudius  Ccesar  was  poisoned,  and  left  the  Empire 
to  Domitius  Nero  ;  in  the  Time  of  whose  Reign  there  was 
another  almost  continually  seen,  and  always  terrible.  It  is 
thought  to  be  material  for  Presage,  to  observe  into  what 
Quarters  it  shooteth,  or  what  Star's  Power  and  Influence  it 
receiveth  :  also  what  Similitudes  it  resernbleth,  and  in  what 
Parts  it  first  shineth  out.  For  if  it  be  like  unto  Flutes 
( Tibice},  it  portendeth  somewhat  to  Musicians :  if  it  appear 
in  the  obscene  Organs  of  the  Signs,  it  threatens  filthy  Per- 


concluded  from  Pliny's  incredulity.  Modern  theory  would  refer  this 
abundance  of  shooting  stars  to  a  very  limited  period  of  the  month  of  No- 
vember ;  but  on  the  only  occasion  in  which  the  Editor  was  an  observer  of 
a  very  remarkable  quantity,  the  observation  was  made  on  the  second  or 
third  day  of  October ;  when,  in  a  ride  of  more  than  two  hours,  the  sky 
was  never  free  from  them  ;  although  no  more  than  three  were  visible  at 
any  one  time. —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Dalechamp  remarks,  that  in  this  observation  Pliny  has  mistaken 
the  meaning  of  Aristotle,  whom  he  is  copying.     The  latter  says,  that  a 
comet  disappears,  or  is  dissipated,  before  it  sinks  so  low  as  the  horizon.— 
Wern.  Club. 

2  This  expiation  was  the  business  of  the  priests ;  and  in  the  affair  of  a 
comet  could  only  be  judged  to  have  taken  effect  when  the  awful  manifest- 
ation had  disappeared:  and  consequently  not  until  after  a  considerable 
period. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  65 

sons.  It  regards  Men  of  Talents  and  Learning,  if  it  put  forth 
a  triangular  or  four-square  Figure,  with  even  Angles,  to  any 
Situations  of  the  fixed  Stars.  It  sprinkleth  Poison,  if  seen  in 
the  Head  of  the  Dragon,  either  North  or  South. 

In  one  only  Place  of  the  whole  World,  namely,  in  a 
Temple  at  Rome,  a  Comet  is  worshipped  :  even  that  which 
by  Divus  Augustus  Ccesar  himself  was  judged  fortunate  to 
him:  who,  when  it  began  to  appear,  acted  in  Person  as 
Overseer  in  those  Games  which  he  made  to  Venus  Genetrix, 
not  long  after  the  Death  of  his  father,  Ccesar,  in  the  College 
by  him  erected.  For,  that  Joy  of  his  he  testified  in  these 
Words :  In  those  very  Days  of  my  Games,  there  was  seen  a 
Comet  for  seven  Days  together,  in  that  Region  of  the  Sky 
which  is  under  the  North  Star.  It  arose  about  the  eleventh 
Hour  of  the  Day,  bright  and  clear,  and  evidently  seen  in  all 
Lands.  By  that  Star  it  was  signified  (as  the  common  Sort 
believed)  that  the  Soul  of  (Julius)  Csesar  was  received  among 
the  Divine  powers  of  the  immortal  Gods.  In  which  regard, 
that  Mark  of  a  Star  was  set  on  the  Head  of  the  Statue  of 
Julius  Caesar,  which  soon  after  we  dedicated  in  the  Forum. 
These  Words  he  published  abroad  :  but  in  a  more  inward 
Joy  to  himself,  he  interpreted  that  this  Comet1  was  made  for 

1  It  is  a  strong  proof  of  the  popular  bias  at  that  time,  as  well  as  of  the 
political  tact  of  Augustus,  that  he  was  so  far  able  to  dissipate  the  appre- 
hensions usually  entertained  on  the  appearance  of  a  comet,  as  to  convert 
the  phenomenon  into  a  prognostic  of  especial  good  to  his  government ; 
and  to  associate  with  it,  what  he  wished  them  to  believe  of  the  Divine 
adoption  of  his  deceased  uncle,  the  Dictator.     The  latter  had,  indeed,  al- 
ready given  him  some  examples  of  the  art  of  overruling  a  portent,  when 
its  understood  meaning  did  not  correspond  with  his  wishes ;  and  Suetonius 
observes,  that  no  ominous  presage  could  ever  deter  or  divert  him  from 
the  prosecution  of  his  designs.    That  this  celestial  phenomenon,  which 
appeared  about  an  hour  before  sunset,  and  was  seen  for  seven  successive 
days,  excited  much  attention,  appears  from  Ovid  ("  Metamorphoses," 
b.  xv.),  who  speaks  of  it  as  if  he  wished  to  avoid  the  dreaded  name  of 
Comet,  a  word  which,  in  the  original,  Pliny  also  does  not  use : — 
"  Dumque  tulit,  lumen  capere,  atque  ignescere  sensit, 
Emisitque  sinu.     Luna  volat  altius  ilia, 
Flammiferumque  trahens  spatioso  limite  crinem 
Stella  micat." 


66  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

him,  and  that  himself  was  born  in  it.  And  if  we  may  con- 
fess a  Truth,  a  happy  Presage  that  was  to  the  whole  World. 
Some  there  he  who  believe  that  these  Stars  be  perpetual,  and 
go  their  Course  round  ;  but  are  not  seen,  unless  they  be  left 

"  (She)  bore  it  upwards  to  its  native  skies : 
Glowing  with  newborn  fire  she  saw  it  rise : 
Forth  springing  from  her  bosom,  up  it  flew, 
And  kindling  as  it  soar'd,  a  (sparkling  star  it)  grew ; 
Above  the  lunar  sphere  it  took  its  flight, 
And  shot  behind  it  a  long  trail  of  light." 

But  the  particular  object  of  Augustus  seems  to  have  been  to  connect  this 
appearance  of  a  star  with  his  family  in  their  claim  of  Divine  honour,  as 
being  directly  descended  from  the  goddess  Venus,  whose  particular  ensign 
this  was.  Dalechamp  mentions  a  Roman  coin,  bearing  on  the  obverse 
the  head  and  inscription  of  the  deified  Caesar,  and,  on  the  reverse,  a  temple 
of  Venus,  with  a  star,  and  a  statue  of  Caesar  in  the  augural  dress,  and  an 


(From  a  Coin  in  the  British  Museum.) 

altar  for  offerings  and  vows,  with  the  inscription,  "  Divo  Julio."  It  was 
because  of  this  alleged  consanguinity  to  the  goddess,  that  at  his  funeral 
the  Repository  was  made  in  the  form  of  the  temple  of  this  divinity.  The 
origin  of  this  story  of  the  star  of  Venus  may  be  traced  to  a  Phoenician  or 
Trojan  source ;  for  we  find,  in  the  Fragments  of  Sanchoniatho,  the  fol- 
lowing account : — "  But  travelling  about  the  world,  she  found  a  star  fall- 
ing from  the  sky ;  which  she,  taking  up,  consecrated  in  the  Holy  Island 
Tyre.  And  the  Phoenicians  say,  that  Astarte  is  she  who  is  amongst  the 
Greeks  called  Aphrodite:' — (Bishop  Cumberland's  Trans,  p.  36.)  This 
Tyrian  or  Trojan  deity  was  the  Marine  Venus,  and  is  to  be  distinguished 
from  Venus  Urania,  the  heavenly,  the  greatest ;  who,  according  to  Cicero, 
(N.  D.  iii.  23.)  and  other  authority,  was  the  Syrian  Astarte,  and  the 
Ashteroth  of  sacred  Scripture ;  whose  ensigns  were :  on  her  head,  the 
horns  of  a  bull ;  about  her,  thunderbolts ;  and  round  her,  many  stars. 
Lucian,  describing  her  statue,  which  he  had  seen,  says :  "  She  had  a  splen- 
did stone  on  her  head,  which  was  called  xvx»b,  which  in  the  night  gave 
much  light  to  the  temple,  but  shone  weakly  in  the  day-time,  and  looked 
like  fire.  Nor  were  these,  the  Roman  deities  Venus  and  Juno,  the  only 
powers  that  were  designated  by  a  star.  The  prophet  Amos  (chap.  v.  26) 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  67 

by  the  Sun.  Others,  again,  are  of  opinion,  that  they  are  pro- 
duced casually  by  some  Humour  and  the  Power  of  Fire,  and 
thereby  do  consume  away. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

The  Opinion  of  Hipparchus  concerning  the  Stars.  Also, 
historical  Examples  of  Torches,  Lamps,  Beams,  Fiery 
Darts,  Opening  of  the  Firmament. 

HIPPARCHUS,  the  aforesaid  Philosopher  (a  man  never 
sufficiently  praised,  as  being  he  that  more  than  any  other 
proved  the  Affinity  of  Stars  with  Men ;  affirming  also,  that 
our  Souls  were  Parcel  of  Heaven),  discovered  and  observed 
a  new  Star  produced  in  his  Time,  and  by  the  Motion  thereof 
on  the  Day  it  first  shone,  he  was  led  into  a  doubt,  whether  it 
happened  not  very  often  that  new  Stars  should  arise  ?  and 
whether  those  Stars  also  moved  not,  which  we  imagine  to  be 
fixed  ?  The  same  Man  went  so  far,  that  he  attempted  (a 
Thing  even  hard  for  God  to  perform)  to  deliver  unto  Pos- 
terity the  exact  Number  of  the  Stars.  He  brought  the  said 
Stars  within  the  Compass  of  Rule,  by  devising  certain  In- 
struments to  take  their  several  Places,  and  set  out  their 
Magnitudes  :  that  thereby  it  might  be  easily  discerned,  not 
only  whether  the  old  died,  and  new  were  born,  but  also 
whether  they  moved,  and  which  Way  they  took  their  Course? 
likewise,  whether  they  increased  or  decreased?  Thus  he  left 
the  Inheritance  of  the  Sky  unto  all  Men,  if  any  one  haply 
could  be  found  able  to  enter  upon  it  as  lawful  Heir. 

There  be  also  certain  flaming  Torches  shining  out  in  the 
Sky,  though  they  are  never  seen  but  when  they  fall.  Such 
an  one  was  that  which,  at  the  Time  that  Germanicus  Ccesar 
exhibited  a  Show  of  Gladiators,  passed  at  Noontide  in  the 

refers  to  a  male  deity,  that,  so  early  as  the  days  of  Moses,  was  worshipped 
in  a  portable  shrine  by  the  people  of  Israel,  and  by  them  probably  derived 
from  Egypt.  A  star  thus  became  associated  with  the  idea  of  Divine 
benignity ;  and  how  widely  so,  appears  from  the  history  of  the  Magi, 
who  came  from  the  East  to  Jerusalem,  to  seek  out  the  Desire  of  all  Nations, 
in  pursuance  of  a  prophecy  that  must  have  been  of  the  highest  antiquity. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


68  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

Sight  of  all  the  People.  And  there  are  two  Sorts  of  them. 
One  is  Lampades,  which  they  call  plain  Torches ;  and  the 
other,  Bolides,  or  Lances,  such  as  the  Mutinians  saw  in  their 
Calamity.  They  differ,  in  that  those  Lamps  or  Torches  form 
long  Trains,  of  which  the  forepart  only  is  on  Fire.  But 
Bolis  burneth  all  over,  and  draweth  a  longer  Tail.  There 
shine  out,  after  the  same  Manner,  certain  Beams,  which 
the  Greeks  call  Docus ;  which  appeared  when  the  Lacede- 
monians, being  vanquished  in  a  Sea-fight,  lost  the  Dominion 
of  Greece.  The  Firmament  also  is  seen  to  open  ;  and  this  they 
name  Chasma. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Of  the  strange  Colours  of  the  Shy. 

THERE  appeareth  in  the  Sky  also  a  Resemblance  of 
Blood1,  and  (than  which  Nothing  is  more  dreadful  to 
Mortals)  a  burning,  falling  from  Heaven  to  Earth :  as  it 
happened  in  the  third  Year  of  the  hundred  and  seventh 
Olympiad,  when  King  Philip  terrified  all  Greece.  And 
these  Things  I  suppose  to  come  at  certain  Times  by  Course 
of  Nature,  like  other  Things;  and  not,  as  the  most  Part 

1  Showers  of  blood  have  been  recorded  in  chronicles  of  various  ages ; 
and  in  those  turbulent  times  it  was  never  difficult  to  find  some  public 
evil  which  such  unwonted  phenomena  might  be  supposed  to  have  fore- 
told. By  modern  inquiry  these  appearances  have  been  ascribed  to  the 
excrements  of  a  mighty  swarm  of  butterflies — to  the  extraordinary  abun- 
dance of  an  animalcula,  called  Oscellatoria  Vubesuns —  and  to  the  red 
vegetable  Protococcus  Nivalis,  swept  up  by  winds  from  the  snow,  on  which 
it  naturally  grows.  None  of  these  explanations,  however,  appear  to  an- 
swer so  completely  to  Pliny's  account,  as  the  following;  to  which  the 
Editor  was  once  a  witness.  On  the  15th  of  February,  1837,  when  the 
weather  had  long  been  damp,  misty,  and  rather  windy  —  the  direction  of 
the  wind  being  South  of  West  —  at  a  quarter  of  an  hour  after  five  in  the 
evening,  there  came  in  a  mist,  of  a  bright  red  colour ;  which  attracted 
attention,  through  a  window,  by  the  glare  of  light  it  diffused.  On  pro- 
ceeding to  examine  it  in  the  open  air,  it  was  observed  to  have  become  of 
a  pink  colour ;  and  presently  passing  into  violet,  it  settled  into  a  grey ;  in 
which  tint  it  remained  until  the  evening  hid  it  from  view.  No  refraction 
of  sunbeams  can  be  allowed  to  account  for  this  appearance ;  for  the  sun 
had  long  before  been  hidden  by  intervening  hills  from  the  valley  in 
which  this  beautiful  coloured  mist  appeared.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  69 

think,  of  sundry  Causes,  which  the  Wit  of  ingenious  Men  is 
able  to  devise.  They  have,  indeed,  been  Forerunners  of  ex- 
ceeding great  Miseries ;  but  I  suppose  those  Calamities  to 
have  happened,  not  because  these  Appearances  were  seen,  but 
these  were  procreated  to  foretell  the  Accidents  that  ensued 
afterward.  Now,  it  is  because  they  fall  out  so  seldom,  that 
the  Reason  of  them  is  hidden,  as  is  the  Case  with  the 
Rising  of  Planets  abovesaid,  the  Eclipses,  and  many  other 
Things. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Of  the  Flame  of  Heaven. 

LIKEWISE  there  are  seen  Stars  with  the  Sun1  all  Day  long : 
yea,  and  very  often  about  the  Compass  of  the  Sun,  other 
Flames,  like  unto  Garlands  of  Ears  of  Corn  :  also,  Circles  of 
various  Colours,  such  as  those  were  when  Augustus  C&sar, 
in  the  Prime  of  his  Youth,  entered  the  City  of  Rome  after 
the  Decease  of  his  Father,  to  take  upon  him  his  great 
Name. 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

Of  Celestial  Crowns.2 

ALSO  the  same  Garlands  appear  about  the  Moon,  and 
the  brighter  Stars  which  are  fixed  in  the  Firmament.  Round 

1  The  only  star  seen  near  the  sun  at  mid-day  is  the  planet  Venus  :  — 
"  No  stars  beside  their  radiance  can  display 
In  Phoebus'  presence,  the  dread  lord  of  day ; 
E'en  Cynthia's  self,  the  regent  of  the  night, 
Is  quite  obscur'd  by  his  emergent  light ; 
But  Venus  only,  as  if  more  divine, 
With  Phoebus  dares  in  partnership  to  shine." 

Wern.  Club. 

3  None  of  the  appearances  in  this  and  the  following  chapters,  to  the 
37th,  can  be  regarded  as  unusual ;  and  the  explanation  of  them  is  to  be 
found  in  the  fact,  of  the  refraction  of  the  light  by  peculiar  conditions  of 
the  air.  Records  of  those  things  would  scarcely  have  been  found  in  the 
books  of  the  augurs,  if  some  political  object  had  not  been  mixed  with  the 
report  of  the  occurrences.  It  is  well  known  that  during  the  Republican 
days  of  Rome,  the  reckoning  of  dates  by  the  years  of  the  consuls  was 
the  common  order  of  chronology.  The  consulship  of  L.  Opimius  and 
Q.  Fabius  Maximus  was  in  the  630th  year  of  Rome,  and  123  years  before 


70  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  II. 

about  the  Sun  there  was  seen  an  Arch,  when  Lu.  Opimius 
and  Q.  Fabius  were  Consuls ;  and  a  Circle,  when  L.  Porcius 
and  M.  Acilius  were  Consuls. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 
Of  Sudden  Circles. 

THERE  appeared  a  Circle  of  red  Colour,  when  L.  Julius 
and  P.  Rutilius  were  Consuls.  Moreover,  there  are  strange 
Eclipses  of  the  Sun,  continuing  longer  than  ordinary ;  which 
happened  when  Ccesar  the  Dictator  was  slain.  In  the  Wars 
of  Antony  also,  the  Sun  continued  almost  a  whole  Year,  with 
a  pale  and  wan  Colour. 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 
Many  Suns. 

AGAIN,  many  Suns  are  seen  at  once,  neither  above  nor 
beneath  the  Body  of  the  true  Sun,  but  obliquely:  never  near, 
nor  directly  against,  the  Earth ;  neither  in  the  Night,  but  when 
the  Sun  either  riseth  or  setteth.  Once  they  are  reported  to 
have  been  seen  at  Noon-day  in  the  Bosphorus,  and  they  con- 
tinued from  Morning  to  the  Evening.  Three  Suns  together 
our  Ancestors  have  often  beheld ;  as,  for  instance,  when 
Sp.  Posthumius  with  Q.  Mutius,  Q.  Martins  with  M.  Porcius, 
M.  Antonius  with  P.  Dolabella,  and  Mar.  Lepidus  with 
L.  Plancus,  were  Consuls.  And  our  Age  hath  seen  the  like  in 
the  Time  of  Divus  Cl.  Ccesar  s  Sovereignty  and  joint-Consul- 
ship, with  Cornelius  Orfitus,  his  Colleague.  More  than  three 
we  never  to  this  Day  find  to  have  been  seen  together. 

the  Christian  era.  That  the  former  of  these  consuls  was  capable  of  any 
violence  or  fraud,  to  secure  political  preponderance,  appears  from  his  his- 
tory in  connexion  with  the  Gracchi.  He  was  openly  accused  of  forging 
portents ;  and  when  one  of  his  lictors  had  knocked  down  Tiberius  Grac- 
chus, whose  person  as  tribune  was  sacred,  in  the  riots  that  followed  he 
offered  a  reward,  of  its  weight  in  gold,  for  the  head  of  his  opponent.  The 
bribe  was  successful :  the  head  was  found  to  weigh  171bs.  8oz. ;  and  to 
shew  his  pious  gratitude  for  the  result,  as  well,  perhaps,  as  to  divert 
public  attention,  he  built  a  temple  to  Concord.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  I L]  History  of  Nature.  7 1 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 
Many  Moons. 

THREE  Moons  also  appeared  at  once,  when  Cn.  Domitius 
and  C.  Fannius  were  Consuls ;  and  these  most  Men  call 
Night  Suns. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

Daylight  in  the  Night. 

OUT  of  the  Firmament  by  Night,  there  was  seen  a  Light1, 
when  C.  Coelius  and  Cn.  Papyrius  were  Consuls ;  and  often- 
times besides,  so  as  the  Night  seemed  as  light  as  the  Day. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 
Burning  Shields. 

A  BURNING  Shield  ran  sparkling  from  the  West  to  the 
East,  at  the  Sun's  Setting,  when  L.  Valerius  and  C.  Marius 
were  Consuls. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 

A  strange  Sight  in  the  Shy. 

BY  Report  there  was  once  seen,  and  never  but  once, 
when  Cn.  Octavius  and  C.  Scribonius  were  Consuls,  a  Spark 
to  fall  from  a  Star :  and  as  it  approached  the  Earth  it  waxed 
greater,  and  after  it  came  to  the  Bigness  of  the  Moon,  it 
shone  out  and  gave  Light,  as  in  a  cloudy  Day :  then,  being 
retired  again  into  the  Sky,  it  became  a  burning  Lamp 
(Lampas).  This,  Licinius  Syllanus,  the  Pro-consul,  saw, 
together  with  his  Attendants. 

1  This  remarkable  phenomenon  is  rarely  noticed  in  modern  times,  and 
is  in  itself  rare ;  but  one  or  two  instances  have  been  related  by  living 
witnesses.  On  one  occasion,  in  a  very  dark  night,  two  or  three  indivi- 
duals, scarcely  able  to  grope  their  way,  were  surprised  at  finding  them- 
selves able  to  see  every  object  as  clearly  as  in  a  moderate  daylight.  They 
were  so  much  astonished  and  alarmed  at  the  sudden  brightness,  that, 
being  engaged  in  an  exploit,  in  which  they  had  no  desire  of  recognition, 
they  were  glad  to  hurry  off  with  hasty  expedition.—  Wern.  Club. 


72  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 
The  extraordinary  Shooting  of  Stars  in  the  Sky. 

STARS  are  also  seen  to  shoot  hither  and  thither,  but 
never  to  any  purpose  :  for,  from  the  same  Quarter  where 
they  appear,  there  rise  terrible  Winds,  and  after  them  Tem- 
pests both  by  Sea  and  Land. 

CHAPTER  XXXVII. 
Of  the  Stars  called  Castor  and  Pollux1. 

I  HAVE  seen  myself,  in  the  Camp,  from  the  Sentinels  in 
the  Night-watch,  the  Resemblance  of  Lightning  to  fix  on  the 
Spears  set  before  the  Rampart.  They  settle  also  upon  the 
Yards,  and  other  Parts  of  the  Ship,  at  Sea  :  making  a  Kind 
of  vocal  Sound,  and  shifting  their  Places  as  Birds  do  which 
fly  from  Bough  to  Bough.  They  are  dangerous  when  they 
come  singly,  for  they  sink  those  Ships  on  which  they  alight ; 

1  Luminous  meteors  are  mostly  seen  at  night ;  since  daylight  is  too 
powerful  to  allow  them  to  be  seen.  They  have  not  been  studied  as  the 
subject  deserves ;  and  hence  the  futility  of  the  explanations  generally 
given  to  their  causes.  There  is  little  doubt,  that  they  differ  greatly  in 
nature.  Some  are  undoubtedly  electric;  as  may  be  judged  from  their 
sudden  explosion,  sometimes  with  signs  of  great  violence.  The  appear- 
ances termed  Castor  and  Pollux,  and  among  modern  sailors  Corbisant,  or 
Corpo  Santo,  is  exceedingly  rare  on  land,  and  in  the  British  seas ;  but 
common  in  warmer  latitudes  than  Britain.  Light  of,  perhaps,  the  same 
nature,  is  sometimes  seen  on  the  ears  of  animals,  as  the  horse,  when  tra- 
velling in  stormy  weather.  Pliny  speaks  of  being  himself  an  eye-witness 
to  the  settling  of  meteors  on  the  military  spears  ;  and  there  is  a  record  of 
a  similar  appearance  in  the  sixth  volume  (p.  38)  of  Hearne's  edition  of 
Leland's  Itinerary:  "In  the  yere  of  our  Lord  1098,  Corborant,  admiral 
to  the  Soudan  of  Perce,  was  faught  with  at  Antioche,  and  discumfited  by 
the  Christianes.  The  night  cumming  on  yn  the  chace  of  this  bataile,  and 
waxing  dark,  the  Christianes  beying  4  miles  from  Antioche,  God  willing 
the  saufte  of  the  Christianes,  shewid  a  white  starre  or  molette  of  fy  ve 
pointes  on  the  Christen  host,  which  to  every  manne's  sighte  did  lighte  and 
arrest  upon  the  standard  of  Alboy  the  3rd,  there  shining  excessively." — 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  73 

or  they  set  them  on  Fire  if  they  fall  upon  the  Bottom  of  the 
Keel.  But  if  the  Pair  appear,  they  are  salutary,  and  foretel 
a  prosperous  Voyage ;  for  by  their  coming,  it  is  supposed  that 
the  dreadful  and  threatening  Meteor  called  Helena,  is  driven 
away.  And  therefore  it  is,  that  Men  assign  this  mighty 
Power  to  Castor  and  Pollux,  and  invocate  them  as  Gods  at 
Sea.  Men's  Heads,  also,  in  the  Evening  are  seen  to  shine 
round  about ;  which  presageth  some  great  Matter.  Of  all 
these  Things  there  is  no  certain  Reason  to  be  given  ;  but  they 
are  hidden  in  the  Majesty  of  Nature. 

CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 
Of  the  Air. 

HITHERTO  we  have  treated  of  the  World  itself,  and  the 
Stars.  It  remaineth  now  to  speak  of  other  memorable 
Things  observed  in  the  Sky.  For  even  that  Part  also  have 
our  Forefathers  called  Cesium,  or  the  Sky,  which  otherwise 
they  name  the  Air :  even  all  that  Portion  which  seeming 
like  a  void  and  empty  Place,  yieldeth  this  vital  Spirit 
whereby  all  Things  do  live.  This  Region  is  seated  beneath 
the  Moon,  and  far  under  that  Planet  (as  I  observe  it  is,  in 
Manner,  by  all  Men  agreed  upon).  And  mingling  together 
an  infinite  Portion  of  the  superior  celestial  Nature  of  Air, 
with  very  much  of  earthly  Vapours,  it  doth  participate  con- 
fusedly of  both.  From  hence  proceed  Clouds,  Thunders, 
and  those  terrible  Lightnings.  From  hence  come  Hail, 
Frosts,  Rain,  Storms,  and  Whirlwinds :  from  hence  arise 
most  of  the  Calamities  of  mortal  Men,  and  the  continual 
War  that  Nature  maketh  with  herself.  For  these  gross 
Exhalations,  as  they  mount  upward  to  the  Heaven,  are 
beaten  back  by  the  Violence  of  the  Stars  :  and  the  same 
again  draw  up  to  them  those  Matters,  which  of  their  own 
Accord  ascend  not.  For  thus  we  see,  that  Showers  of  Rain 
fall,  Mists  arise,  Rivers  are  dried  up,  Hail-storms  came  down 
amain,  the  Sunbeams  scorch  the  ground,  and  drive  it  every 
where  to  the  midst :  but  the  same  again  unbroken,  and  not 
loosing  their  Force,  rebound  and  take  up  with  them  whatso- 


74  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  II. 

ever  they  are  able.  Vapours  fall  from  aloft,  and  return  again 
on  high:  forcible  Winds  come  empty,  but  return  with  a 
Booty.  So  many  living  Creatures  draw  their  Breath  from 
above :  but  the  same  laboureth  contrariwise,  and  the  Earth 
infuseth  into  the  Air  a  Spirit  as  if  it  were  empty.  Thus,  while 
Nature  goeth  to  and  fro,  as  forced  by  some  Engine,  by  the 
Swiftness  of  the  Heaven  the  Fire  of  Discord  is  kindled. 
Neither  can  she  stand  to  the  Fight,  but  being  continually 
carried  away  she  is  rolled  about,  and  as  she  spreadeth  about 
the  Earth,  with  an  immeasurable  Globe  of  the  Heaven,  so 
ever  and  anon  through  the  Clouds  she  frameth  another  Sky. 
And  this  is  that  Region  where  the  Winds  reign.  And  there- 
fore their  Kingdom  principally  is  there  where  they  execute 
their  Forces.  For  Thunderbolts  and  Lightnings  most  Men 
attribute  to  their  Violence.  Nay,  and  so  it  is  supposed  that 
sometimes  it  raineth  Stones,  which  may  be  taken  up  first  by 
the  Wind  ;  and  many  similar  Appearances.  Wherefore  many 
Matters  besides  are  to  be  treated  of  together. 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 
Of  Ordinary  Sedsons. 

IT  is  manifest  that  of  Seasons,  as  also  of  other  Things, 
some  Causes  be  certain  ;  others,  casual ;  or,  such  as  yet  the 
Reason  thereof  is  unknown.  For  who  doubteth  that  Sum- 
mers and  Winters,  and  those  alternative  Seasons  which  we 
observe  by  yearly  Course,  are  occasioned  by  the  Motion  of 
the  Planets?  As,  therefore,  the  Sun's  Nature  is  understood 
by  tempering  and  ordering  the  Year,  so  the  rest  of  the  Stars 
have  every  one  their  peculiar  Power,  and  the  same  effectual 
to  perform  their  own  Nature.  Some  are  fruitful  to  bring 
forth  Moisture,  that  is  turned  into  liquid  Rain  :  others  to 
yield  an  Humour  either  congealed  into  Frosts,  or  gathered 
and  thickened  into  Snow,  or  else  frozen  into  Hail  :  some 
afford  Winds ;  others  Warmth  :  some  hot  and  scorching 
Vapours ;  some,  Dews ;  and  others,  Cold.  Neither  ought 
these  Stars  to  be  esteemed  no  more  than  they  shew  in  Sight, 
seeing  that  none  of  them  is  less  than  the  Moon  ;  as  may 


BOOK  1 1 .]  History  of  Nature.  75 

appear  by  the  Reason  of  their  exceeding  Height.  All  of 
them,  then,  every  one  in  its  own  Motion,  exercise  their 
several  Natures :  which  appeareth  manifestly  by  Saturn 
especially,  who  setteth  open  the  Gates  for  Rain  and  Showers 
to  pass.  And  not  only  the  seven  Wandering  Stars  possess 
this  Power,  but  many  of  them  also  that  are  fixed  in  the  Fir- 
mament ;  so  often  as  they  be  either  driven  by  the  Approach 
of  those  Planets,  or  provoked  by  the  Casting  and  Influence 
of  their  Beams  :  like  as  we  find  it  happeneth  in  the  seven 
Stars  called  Suculce,  which  the  Grecians,  of  Rain,  name 
Hyades  (because  they  ever  bring  foul  Weather).  Howbeit 
some  of  their  own  Nature,  and  at  certain  set  Times,  do  cause 
Rain ;  as  the  Rising  of  the  Kids.  The  Star  Arcturus  very 
rarely  appeareth  without  some  tempestuous  Hail1. 

CHAPTER  XL. 
The  Power  of  the  Dog- Star. 

WHO  knoweth  not,  that  when  the  Dog-Star  ariseth,  the 
Heat  of  the  Sun  is  fiery  and  burning?  the  effects  of  which 
Star  are  felt  exceeding  much  upon  the  Earth.  The  Seas  at 
his  Rising  do  rage,  the  Wines  in  Cellars  are  troubled,  stand- 
ing Waters  are  moved.  A  wild  Beast  there  is  in  Egypt, 
called  Orix~,  which  the  Egyptians  say,  doth  stand  full  against 

1  It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  warn  the  modern  reader,  that  throughout 
these  observations  on  the  weather,  an  influence  is  ascribed  to  the  rising  of 
certain  stars,  from  no  better  cause  than  the  coincidence  of  the  occurrences. 
—Wern.  Club. 

2  Pliny  mentions  this  animal  in  book  x.  c.  73 ;  and  again  in  book  xi. 
c.  46  ;  but  modern  naturalists  have  failed  to  identify  it  with  any  creature 
known  at  the  present  time.    Indeed,  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  more 
than  one  creature  has  been  thus  designated  by  the  ancients ;  for  it  has 
been  described  as  having  only  one  horn;  which  would  make  it  either 
a  species  of  rhinoceros,  or  the  animal  resembling  a  stag  or  horse,  so  often 
spoken  of  under  the  name  of  Unicorn.    It  has  also  been  compared  to  an 
ox ;  and  four  horns  have  been  ascribed  to  it.  But,  more  precisely,  it  is  said 
to  be  white,  with  horns  and  a  beard ;  which  renders  it  probable  that  it 
was  of  the  goat  kind.    As  the  religion  of  the  ancient  Heathens  was  merely 
ceremonial,  the  imputing  to  the  creature,  in  the  practice  of  sneezing,  an 
act  of  adoration  to  Anubis,  or  the  Dog- Star,  one  of  the  chief  deities  of  the 


76  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

the  Dog-Star  when  it  riseth,  looking  wistly  upon  it,  and  tes- 
tifieth  by  sneezing,  a  Kind  of  Worship.  As  for  Dogs,  no 
Man  doubteth  but  all  the  Time  of  the  canicular  Days  they 
are  most  ready  to  run  mad. 

CHAPTER  XLI. 

That  the  Stars  have  their  several  Influences  in  sundry  Parts 
of  the  Signs,  and  at  divers  Times. 

MOREOVER1,  the  Parts  of  certain  Signs  have  their  peculiar 
Force,  as  appeareth  in  the  autumnal  Equinox,  and  in  Mid- 
Winter  ;  at  which  Time  we  perceive  that  the  Sun  maketh 
Tempests.  And  this  is  proved,  not  only  by  Rains  and  Storms, 

Egyptians,  will  appear  less  absurd  than  at  the  first  mention  would 
appear.  For  a  similar  reason  Pliny  ascribes  religion  to  elephants,  and 
even  poultry. 

In  his  28th  book,  the  Author  (ch.  2)  has  some  observations  on  the 
superstition  of  the  Romans,  relative  to  the  act  of  sneezing ;  and  it  is 
not  a  little  remarkable,  that  a  similar  practice,  of  imprecating  a  bless- 
ing in  such  case,  is  not  even  now  uncommon  among  ourselves. —  Wern. 
Club. 

1  In  this  chapter  there  is  a  confusion  of  cause  and  effect  that  is  diffi- 
cult to  unravel ;  and  which  can  only  be  accounted  for  by  involving  what 
are  undoubtedly  natural  influences  —  in  modern  times  easily  explained  — 
with  occult  causes,  the  bounds  of  which  the  ancients  were  not  able  to 
define.  The  influence  of  the  sun's  heat  on  currents  of  air,  constituting 
winds  and  tempests,  and  even  its  simple  action  on  the  texture  of  a 
membrane,  are  thus  confounded  with  the  powers  which  the  Signs  of 
the  Zodiac  were  supposed  to  exert  on  the  functions  of  the  organs  or  re- 
gions of  the  human  body.  According  to  this  philosopy,  each  of  the 
twelve  signs  exerted  a  peculiar  influence  on  a  distinct  portion  ;  beginning 
with  the  head,  which  was  governed  by  Aries;  and  proceeding  downward 
by  regular  spaces,  each  opposite  sign  in  the  Annual  Circle  became  the 
monarch  of  its  season,  until  the  Twins,  opposite  to  Aries,  displayed  their 
power  over  the  feet.  To  the  reproach  of  modern  science,  these  imaginary 
influences,  which  derived  their  origin  in  popular  opinion,  from  a  supposed 
sympathetic  connexion  of  the  spirit  pervading  these  signs  —  a  portion  of 
the  great  soul  of  the  world  (Note  to  ch.  1),  and  therefore  a  portion  of 
a  very  ancient  idolatry — maintains  its  place  in  the  popular  almanacs, 
published  under  the  superintendence  of  a  public  company  especially 
instituted  for  the  promotion  of  an  improved  literature. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  77 

but  by  many  Experiments  in  Men's  Bodies,  and  Accidents  to 
Plants  in  the  Country.  For  some  Men  are  struck  by  the 
Planet,  and  blasted  :  others  are  troubled  at  certain  Times  in 
their  Bowels,  Sinews,  Head,  and  Mind.  The  Olive  Tree,  the 
White  Poplar,  and  Willows,  turn  their  Leaves  about  at 
Midsummer,  at  the  Solstice.  And  contrariwise,  in  Mid- 
winter, the  Herb  Pennyroyal  flowereth  fresh,  even  as  it 
hangs  dry  within  the  House.  At  which  Time  all  Parch- 
ments are  so  stretched  with  the  Wind  that  they  burst.  A 
Man  might  marvel  hereat  who  marketh  not  by  daily  Expe- 
rience, that  one  Herb  called  Heliotropium1,  looketh  toward 
the  Sun,  ever  as  he  goeth,  turning  with  him  at  all  hours, 
notwithstanding  he  be  shadowed  under  a  Cloud.  It  is  cer- 
tain also,  that  the  Bodies  of  Oysters,  Mussels,  Cockles,  and 
all  Shell-fishes,  grow  and  waste  by  the  Power  of  the  Moon ; 
and  some  have  found  out  by  diligent  Search,  that  the  Fibres 
in  the  Livers  of  Rats  and  Mice  answer  in  Number  to  the 
Days  of  the  Moon's  Age  :  also  that  the  very  little  Creature, 
the  Emmet,  feeleth  the  Power  of  this  Planet,  and  always  in 
the  Change  of  the  Moon  ceaseth  from  Work.  It  is  the  more 
Shame  to  Man  to  be  ignorant,  especially  seeing  that  he  must 
confess,  that  some  labouring  Beasts  have  certain  Diseases  in 
their  Eyes,  which  with  the  Moon  do  grow  and  decay.  How- 
beit  the  excessive  Greatness  of  the  Heaven  and  exceeding 
Height  thereof,  divided  as  it  is  into  seventy-two  Signs,  make 
for  him,  and  serve  for  his  Excuse.  These  Signs  are  the 
Resemblances  of  Things,  or  living  Creatures,  into  which  the 
skilful  Astronomers  have  digested -the  Firmament.  For  Ex- 
ample, in  the  Tail  of  Taurus  there  be  seven,  which  they 
have  named  Veryilice*;  in  the  Forehead  other  seven  called 
SuculcB :  and  Bootes  who  followeth  after  the  great  Bear 
(Septentriones). 

1  This  plant  is  again  referred  to  (b.  xxii.  c.  21)  as  a  good  country- 
man's weather-glass.  It  is  a  question  whether  it  belong  to  the  genus 
Heliotropium  of  Linnaeus,  or  be  not  rather  the  Caltha  PalustriSj  or  Marsh 
Mary  gold. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Better  known  by  the  name  of  Pleiades. —  Wern.  Club. 


78  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  It. 

CHAPTER  XLIL 
The  Causes  of  Rain,  Showers,  Winds,  and  Clouds. 

I  CANNOT  deny,  but  without  these  Causes  there  arise 
Rains  and  Winds :  for  it  is  certain  there  is  exhaled  from  the 
Earth  a  Mist,  sometimes  moist,  at  other  Times  smoky,  by 
Reason  of  hot  Vapours.  Also,  that  Clouds  are  produced  by 
Vapours  which  are  gone  up  on  high,  or  else  of  the  Air 
gathered  into  a  watery  Liquor :  that  they  be  thick,  and  of  a 
bodily  Consistence,  we  collect  by  no  doubtful  Argument, 
considering  that  they  overshadow  the  Sun,  which  otherwise 
may  be  seen  through  Water;  as  they  know  well  that  dive  to 
any  good  Depth, 

CHAPTER  XLIII. 
Of  Thunder  and  Lightning.1 

I  WOULD  not  deny,  therefore,  that  the  fiery  Impressions 
from  Stars  above,  may  fall  upon  these  Clouds,  such  as  we 
oftentimes  see  to  shoot  in  clear  and  fair  Weather :  by  the 
forcible  Stroke  whereof,  good  Reason  it  is.  that  the  Air 
should  be  mightily  shaken,  seeing  that  Darts  when  they  are 
discharged,  make  a  Noise  as  they  fly.  But  when  they  en- 
counter a  Cloud,  there  ariseth  a  Vapour  with  a  dissonant 
Sound  (as  when  a  red-hot  Iron  maketh  an  Hissing  when 
thrust  into  Water),  and  Smoke  rolls  up  in  Waves.  Hence 
Storms  are  bred.  And  if  this  Flatus,  or  Vapour,  do  struggle 
within  the  Cloud,  Thunder  is  given  out ;  if  it  break  through 
still  burning,  then  flieth  out  the  Thunderbolt :  if  it  be  a 

1  An  attempt  to  explain  the  cause  of  thunder  and  lightning  could 
scarcely  be  otherwise  than  futile,  in  the  entire  absence  of  a  knowledge  of 
the  existence  of  such  a  matter  as  electricity.  But  any  attempt  at  a  natural 
explanation  was  an  effort  of  courage,  and  far  in  advance  of  the  popular 
opinion.  On  this  account  the  Author  is  entitled  to  pardon,  when,  at  the 
conclusion  of  the  chapter  he  finds  himself  disposed  to  make  some  conces- 
sion, in  admitting  it  to  be  possible,  that  some  of  these  phenomena  were 
premonitory,  and  direct  from  the  gods. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  79 

longer  Time  in  struggling,  then  Lightning-flashes  are  seen. 
With  these  the  Cloud  is  cloven ;  with  the  other,  burst  in 
sunder.  The  Thunders  are  the  Blows  given  by  the  Fires 
beating  hard  upon  the  Clouds :  and  therefore  presently  the 
fiery  Rifts  of  those  Clouds  do  flash  and  shine.  It  is  possible, 
also,  that  the  Wind,  elevated  from  the  Earth,  being  repelled, 
and  kept  down  by  the  Stars,  and  so  restrained  within  a 
Cloud,  may  thunder,  while  Nature  choketh  the  rumbling 
Sound  all  the  while  it  striveth ;  but  sendeth  forth  a  Crash 
when  it  breaketh  out,  as  we  see  in  a  Bladder  puffed  up  with 
Wind.  Likewise  it  may  be,  that  the  same  Wind  or  Spirit  is 
set  on  Fire  by  Attrition,  as  it  violently  passeth  headlong 
down.  It  may  also  be  stricken  by  the  Conflict  of  the  Clouds, 
as  if  two  Stones  hit  one  against  another ;  and  so  the  Flashes 
sparkle  forth.  But  all  these  are  Accidents.  And  from  hence 
come  those  insignificant  and  vain  Lightnings,  which  have  no 
natural  Cause.  With  these  are  Mountains  and  Seas  smitten  : 
and  of  this  Kind  be  all  other  Explosions  that  do  no  Hurt  to 
living  Creatures.  Those  that  come  from  above,  and  of  fixed 
Causes,  yea,  and  from  their  proper  Stars,  foretel  future 
Events.  In  like  Manner,  it  may  be  that  the  Winds,  or  rather 
Blasts,  proceed  from  a  dry  Exhalation  of  the  Earth,  void  of 
all  Moisture  :  neither  will  I  deny  that  they  arise  from  Waters 
breathing  out  an  Air,  which  neither  can  thicken  into  a  Mist, 
nor  gather  into  Clouds :  also  they  may  be  driven  by  the 
Impulsion  of  the  Sun,  because  the  Wind  is  conceived  to  be 
Nothing  else  but  the  flowing  of  the  Air,  and  that  by  many 
means.  For  some  we  see  to  rise  out  of  Rivers,  Snows,  and 
Seas,  even  when  they  be  still  and  calm  :  as  also  others  out  of 
the  Earth,  which  Winds  they  name  Altani.  And  those  verily 
when  they  come  back  again  from  the  Sea,  are  called  Tropcei: 
if  they  go  onward,  Apogcei. 

CHAPTER  XLIV. 
What  is  the  Reason  of  the  Resounding  of  the  Echo. 

BUT  the  Windings  of  Hills,  and  their  close  Turnings, 
their  many  Tops,  their  Ridges  also  bending  like  an  Elbow, 


80  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

and  arched,  as  it  were,  into  Shoulders,  together  with  the 
Hollows  of  Vallies,  do  cut  unequally  the  Air  that  reboundeth 
from  them  :  which  is  the  Cause  of  reciprocal  Voices  called 
Echoes,  answering  one  another  in  many  Places. 

CHAPTER  XLV. 
Of  Winds  again. 

THERE  are,  again,  certain  Caves1  which  breed  Winds  with- 
out end  :  such  as  that  one  which  is  in  the  Edge  of  Dalmatia, 
gaping  with  a  wide  Mouth,  and  leading  to  a  deep  Cavern : 
into  which,  if  there  be  cast  any  Matter  of  light  Weight,  be 
the  Day  never  so  calm,  there  ariseth  presently  a  Tempest  like 
a  Whirlwind.  The  Place's  Name  is  Senta.  Moreover,  in 
the  Province  Cyrenaica  there  is  reported  to  be  a  Rock  con- 
secrated to  the  South-wind,  which  without  Profanation  may 
not  be  touched  with  Man's  Hand  ;  but  if  it  be,  presently  the 
South-wind  doth  arise  and  cast  up  Heaps  of  Sand.  Also  in 
many  Houses  there  be  hollow  Places  devised  by  Man's  Hand 
for  the  Receipt  of  Wind  ;  which  being  enclosed  with  Shade, 
gather  their  Blasts.  Whereby  we  may  see  how  all  Winds 
have  a  Cause.  But  great  Difference  there  is  between  such 
Blasts  and  Winds.  As  for  these,  they  be  settled,  and  conti- 
nually blowing ;  which,  not  some  particular  Places,  but 
whole  Lands  do  feel ;  which  are  not  light  Gales  nor  stormy 
Puffs  of  the  Sea,  named  Aurce  and  Procellce,  but  properly 

1  That  there  is  an  intimate  connexion  between  the  interior  of  the 
earth  and  the  atmosphere,  operating  in  the  production  or  direction  of  the 
nature  or  force  of  winds,  is  exceedingly  probable ;  although  the  particular 
instances  here  given  are  either  imaginary,  or  strangely  misinterpreted. 
A  simple  change  in  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  —  a  meteorological 
phenomenon  of  which  the  ancients  were  ignorant,  from  not  being  aware 
that  air  possessed  positive  weight  —  will  account  for  many  of  these  sudden 
gusts  from  caverns ;  and  for  those  hollow  murmurs  that  have  been  popu- 
larly remarked  in  hilly  countries,  before  the  approach  of  a  storm ;  and 
the  utility  of  these  outbursts  will  appear  when  we  remember,  that  with- 
out them,  poisonous  exhalations,  as  marsh  miasmata,  and  carbonic  acid 
gas,  would  be  suffered  to  accumulate,  to  the  destruction  of  a  neighbour- 
hood.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  81 

called  Winds,  by  the  masculine  Name  Venti :  which,  whether 
they  arise  by  the  continual  Motion  of  the  Heaven,  and  the 
contrary  Course  of  the  Planets ;  or  whether  this  Wind  be 
that  Spirit  of  Nature  that  engendereth  all  Things,  wandering 
to  and  fro,  as  it  were,  in  some  Womb  ;  or  rather  the  Air, 
beaten  and  driven  by  the  unlike  Influences  of  the  Planets, 
and  the  Multiplicity  of  their  Beams  :  or  whether  all  Winds 
come  from  their  own  nearer  Stars  ;  or  rather  fall  from  them 
that  be  fixed  in  the  Firmament :  plain  it  is,  that  they 
are  guided  by  an  ordinary  Law  of  Nature,  not  altogether 
unknown,  although  it  be  not  yet  thoroughly  known. 

CHAPTER  XLVI. 
The  Natures  and  Observations  of  the  Winds. 

MORE  than  twenty  of  the  old  Greek  Writers  have  re- 
corded their  Observations  of  the  Winds.  I  marvel  so  much 
the  more,  that  the  World  being  so  at  Discord,  and  divided 
into  Kingdoms,  that  is  to  say,  dismembered  ;  so  many  Men 
have  employed  their  Care  to  seek  after  these  Things,  so  diffi- 
cult to  be  found  out ;  and  the  more  especially  in  Time  of 
Wars,  and  amid  those  Places  where  was  no  safe  Abode ;  and 
especially  when  Pirates,  those  common  Enemies  to  Mankind, 
held  well  near  all  Passages  of  Communication  :  I  marvel, 
also,  that  at  this  Day  each  Man  in  his  own  Tract  of  Country 
obtaineth  more  Knowledge  of  some  Things  by  their  Com- 
mentaries, who  never  set  Foot  there,  than  he  doth  by  the 
Skill  and  Information  of  home-born  Inhabitants  ;  whereas 
now  in  Time  of  such  blessed  and  joyous  Peace,  and  under  a 
Prince  who  taketh  such  Delight  in  the  Progress  of  the  State 
and  of  all  good  Arts,  no  new  Thing  is  learned  by  farther 
Inquisition  ;  nay,  nor  so  much  as  the  Inventions  of  old  Wri- 
ters are  thoroughly  understood.  And  verily  it  cannot  be 
said,  that  greater  Rewards  were  in  those  Days  given,  consi- 
dering that  the  Bounty  of  Fortune  was  dispersed  :  and  in 
truth,  most  of  these  learned  Men  sought  out  these  Secrets 
for  no  other  Regard  than  to  do  good  to  Posterity.  But 
now  Men's  Customs  are  waxed  old  and  decay  :  and  notwith- 

F 


82  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

standing  that  the  Fruit  of  Learning  be  as  great  as  ever  it 
was,  yet  Men  are  become  idle  in  this  behalf.  The  Seas  are 
open  to  all,  an  infinite  Multitude  of  Sailors  have  discovered 
all  Coasts  whatsoever ;  they  sail  through  and  arrive  fami- 
liarly at  every  Shore  ;  but  all  is  for  Gain,  nothing  for  the 
Sake  of  Knowledge.  Their  Minds  altogether  blinded,  and 
bent  upon  nothing  but  Covetousness,  never  consider  that  the 
same  might  with  more  Safety  be  performed  by  Science.  And 
therefore,  seeing  there  be  so  many  thousand  Sailors  that 
hazard  themselves  on  the  Seas,  I  will  treat  of  the  Winds  more 
curiously  than,  perhaps,  would  otherwise  be  necessary  to  the 
present  Work. 

CHAPTER  XLVII. 
Many  Sorts  of  Winds. 

THE  Ancients  observed  four  Winds1  only,  according 
to  so  many  Quarters  of  the  World  (and  therefore  Homer 
nameth  no  more)  :  a  feeble  Reason  this,  as  soon  after  it  was 
judged.  The  Age  ensuing  added  eight  more,  and  they  were 
on  the  other  Side  in  their  Conceit,  too  subtle  and  concise. 
The  modern  Sailors  have  found  a  Mean  between  both :  and 
they  put  unto  that  short  Number  of  the  first,  four  Winds 
and  no  more  ;  which  they  took  out  of  the  latter.  Therefore 
every  Quarter  of  the  Heaven  hath  two  Winds  to  itself. 
From  the  equinoctial  Sun-rising  bloweth  the  East  Wind,  Sub- 
solanus:  from  the  Rising  thereof  in  Midwinter  the  South-east, 
Vulturnus.  The  former  of  these  two  the  Greeks  call  Apeliotes, 
and  the  latter  Eurus.  From  the  Midday  riseth  the  South 
Wind :  and  from  the  Sun-setting  in  Midwinter  the  South-west, 
Africus.  They  also  name  these  two,  Notus  and  Libs.  From 
the  equinoctial  going  down  of  the  Sun,  the  West  Wind, 

1  The  impression  of  this  precise  number  of  winds  appears  to  have  been 
popular ;  and  is  referred  to  in  the  Book  of  Revelation  by  St.  John,  vii.  1 : 
"  I  saw  four  angels  standing  on  the  four  corners  of  the  earth,  holding  the 
four  winds  of  the  earth."  Pliny  evidently  supposes  that  the  winds  were 
not  simply  determined  according  to  the  quarter  from  which  they  blew, 
but  by  separate  and  inherent  qualities  of  heat,  moisture,  violence,  health, 
or  sickness. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  83 

JFavonius,  cometh :  but  from  that  in  Summer,  the  North- 
west, Corns:  and  by  the  Greeks  they  are  termed  Zephyrus 
and  Argestes.  From  the  North  bloweth  the  North  Wind,  Sep- 
tentrio:  between  which  and  the  Sunrising  in  Summer  is  the 
North-east  Wind,  Aquilo,  named  Aparctias  and  Boreas  by  the 
Greeks.  A  greater  Reckoning  than  this  for  Number  is 
brought  in  by  some,  who  have  thrust  in  four  more  between : 
namely,  Thracias  between  the  North  and  the  Summer  Setting 
of  the  Sun  ;  in  like  Manner  Ccecias,  in  the  midst  between  the 
North-east,  Aquilo,  and  that  of  the  Sunrising  in  the  equi- 
noctial, Sub-solanus.  Also,  after  the  Sunrising  in  Summer, 
Phceniceas  in  the  midst,  between  the  South-east  and  the  South. 
Last  of  all,  between  the  South  and  the  South-west,  Lybo- 
notus,  just  in  the  midst,  compounded  of  them  both,  namely, 
between  the  Meridian  and  the  Sun-setting  in  Winter.  But 
here  they  did  not  end.  For  others  have  set  one  more,  called 
Mese,  between  the  North-east  Wind  Boreas  and  Ccecias:  also 
JSuronotuSj  between  the  South  and  South-west  Winds.  Besides 
all  these,  there  be  some  Winds  peculiar  to  every  Nation, 
and  which  pass  not  beyond  one  certain  Region  :  as,  namely, 
Scyros  among  the  Athenians,  declining  a  little  from  Argestes; 
a  Wind  unknown  to  other  Parts  of  Greece.  In  some  other 
Place  it  is  more  aloft,  and  the  same  then  is  called  Olympias 
(as  coming  from  the  Mountain  Olympus).  But  the  usual 
Manner  of  Speech  understandeth  by  all  these  Names  Ar- 
gestes only.  Some  call  Ccecias  by  the  Name  of  Hellespontias, 
and  give  the  same  Winds  in  sundry  Places  divers  Names. 
In  the  Province,  likewise,  of  Narbonne,  the  most  notorious 
Wind  is  Circius,  and  for  violence  inferior  to  none,  driving 
directly  before  it,  very  often,  the  Current  at  Ostia  into  the 
Ligurian  Sea.  The  same  Wind  is  not  only  unknown  in  all 
other  Parts  of  the  Heaven,  but  reacheth  not  so  much  as  to 
Vienna,  a  City  in  the  same  Province.  As  great  and  bois- 
terous a  Wind  as  this  is  otherwise,  yet  it  meets  with  a  Re- 
straint before  it  come  thither,  and  is  kept  within  narrow 
Bounds  by  the  Opposition  of  a  small  Hill.  Fabianus  also 
avoucheth,  that  the  South  Winds  enter  not  so  far  as  into 
Egypt.  Whereby  the  Law  of  Nature  sheweth  itself  plainly, 
that  even  Winds  have  their  Times  and  Limits  appointed. 


84  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

To  proceed,  then,  the  Spring  openeth  the  Sea  for  Sailors: 
in  the  Beginning  whereof,  the  West  Winds  mitigate  the  Win- 
ter Weather  at  the  Time  when  the  Sun  is  in  the  25th  Degree 
of  Aquarius,  and  that  is  the  sixth  Day  before  the  Ides  of 
February.  And  this  Order  holdeth  for  the  most  Part  with 
all  other  Winds,  which  I  will  set  down  one  after  another :  so 
that  in  every  Leap  Year  we  anticipate  and  reckon  one  Day 
sooner,  and  then  again  keep  the  same  Rule  throughout  all 
the  four  Years  following.  Some  call  Favonius  (which  begin- 
neth  to  blow  about  the  seventh  Day  before  the  Calends  of 
March)  by  the  Name  of  Chelidonius,  upon  the  Sight  of  the 
first  Swallows1:  but  many  name  it  Orinthias,  coming  the 
seventy-first  Day  after  the  shortest  Day  in  Winter ;  by  occa- 
sion of  the  coming  of  Birds :  which  Wind  bloweth  for  nine 
Days.  Opposite  to  Favonius  is  the  Wind  which  we  called 
Sub-solanus.  Unto  this  Wind  is  attributed  the  Rising  of  the 
Vergilice,  or  Seven  Stars,  in  as  many  Degrees  of  Taurus,  six 
Days  before  the  Ides  of  May ;  which  Time  is  a  southerly 
Constitution  :  and  to  this  Wind  the  North  is  contrary. 
Moreover,  in  the  hottest  Season  of  the  Summer  the  Dog-star 
ariseth,  when  the  Sun  entereth  into  the  first  Degree  of  Leo, 
which  commonly  is  the  fifteenth  Day  before  the  Calends  of 
August.  Before  the  Rising  of  this  Star  for  eight  Days' 
Space,  or  thereabout,  the  North-east  Winds  blow ;  which  the 
Greeks  call  Prodromi,  or  Forerunners.  And  two  Days  after 
it  is  risen,  the  same  Winds  hold  still  more  stiffly  for  the 
Space  of  forty  Days,  which  they  name  Etesia.  The  Sun's 

1  Ovid  ("  Fasti ")  says,  on  the  day  which  is  equivalent  to  about  the 
25th  of  February:— 

"  Fallimur  ?  an  veris  praenuntia  venit  hirundo  ? 
Et  metuit,  nequa  versa  recurrat  hyems  ?  " 

"  Am  I  deceived  ?  is  that  the  swallow's  wing  ? 
That  flits  along,  the  herald  of  the  spring. 
Fearful  of  cold,  she  still  seeks  shelter  here  ; 
And  dreads  that  winter  may  reclaim  the  year." 

In  Sardinia  it  is  noted  on  the  last  day  of  the  same  month,  in  the  "  Calendar 
of  the  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Brussels."  But  these  are 
early  appearances ;  and  in  general  this  bird  arrives  in  Italy  in  the  first 
ten  days  of  March.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  85 

Vapour,  redoubled  by  the  Hotness  of  that  Star,  is  thought  to 
be  assuaged  by  them :  and  no  Winds  keep  their  set  Times 
better  than  they.  Next  after  them  come  the  South  Winds 
again,  which  are  usually  up,  until  the  Star  Arcturus  riseth, 
and  that  is  eleven  Days  before  the  autumnal  Equinox.  With 
it  entereth  Corns,  and  thus  Corns  beginneth  the  Autumn  ; 
and  to  this  Vulturnus  is  contrary.  After  that  Equinox  about 
four-and-forty  Days,  the  Vergilice  go  down  and  begin  Win- 
ter, which  Season  usually  falleth  upon  the  third  Day  before 
the  Ides  of  November.  This  is  the  Winter  North-east  Wind, 
which  is  far  unlike  to  that  in  Summer,  opposite  and  contrary 
to  Africus.  Seven  Days  before  the  Midwinter  Day,  and  as 
much  after,  the  Sea  is  allayed  and  calm  for  the  Sitting  and 
Hatching  of  the  Birds  Halciones1,  from  which  these  Days 
took  the  Name  Alcionis:  the  Time  behind  belongs  to  Winter. 
And  yet  these  boisterous  Seasons,  full  of  Tempests,  shut  not 
up  the  Sea :  for  Pirates  at  first  forced  Men,  with  Peril  of 
Death,  to  run  headlong  upon  their  Death,  and  to  hazard 
themselves  in  Winter  Seas ;  and  now  Covetousness  compels 
them  to  do  the  like. 

The  coldest  Winds  of  all  other  are  those  which,  we  said, 
blow  from  the  North,  and  together  with  them  their  Neigh- 
bour, Corns.  These  Winds  allay  all  others,  and  drive  away 
Clouds.  Moist  Winds  are  Africus,  and  especially  the  South 
Wind  of  Italy,  called  Auster.  Men  report  also,  that  Ccecias 
in  Pontus  gathereth  to  itself  Clouds.  Corns  and  Vulturnus 
are  dry,  but  only  when  they  cease.  The  North-east  and  the 
North  produce  Snow.  The  North  Wind  also  bringeth  Hail, 
as  doth  Corns.  The  South  Wind  is  exceeding  hot.  Vulturnus 
and  Favonius  be  warm.  They  also  be  drier  than  the  East : 

1  Ovid  relates  the  fable  of  the  origin  of  the  Halcyon,  or  Alcyon, 
"  Metamorphoses,"  book  xi.  fable  10;  and  Pliny  describes  the  bird  in  his 
book  x.  c.  32.  2Elian  also  speaks  of  it,  book  i.  c.  36  ;  and  he  describes  the 
wonders  of  the  nest,  b.  ix.  c.  17,  in  a  manner  which  the  ancients  gene- 
rally appear  to  have  regarded  as  substantially  true;  but  it  is  scarcely 
necessary  to  remark,  that  modern  observation  has  not  corroborated  this 
belief  in  any  particular.  In  book  xxxii.  c.  8,  Pliny  speaks  of  a  medicine 
which  was  supposed  to  be  prepared  from  the  nest  of  the  Alcyon,  or  King- 
fisher.— Wern.  Club. 


86  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  II. 

and  generally  all  Winds  from  the  North  and  West  are  drier 
than  from  the  South  and  East.  Of  all  Winds  the  Northern 
is  most  healthful :  the  Southern  Wind  is  noisome,  and  the 
rather  when  it  is  dry ;  haply,  because  that  when  it  is  moist 
it  is  the  colder.  During  the  Time  that  it  bloweth,  living- 
Creatures  are  thought  to  be  less  hungry.  The  Etesice  give 
over  ordinarily  in  the  Night,  and  arise  at  the  third  hour  of 
the  Day.  In  Spain  and  Asia  they  blow  from  the  East :  but 
in  Pontus,  from  the  North  :  in  other  Quarters,  from  the 
South.  They  blow  also  after  the  Midwinter,  when  they  be 
called  OrinthicB ;  but  those  are  more  mild,  and  continue 
fewer  Days.  Two  there  be  that  change  their  Nature  with 
their  Place  :  the  South  Wind  in  Africa  bringeth  fair  Weather, 
and  the  North  Wind  there  is  cloudy.  All  Winds  keep  their 
Course  in  Order  for  the  more  Part,  or  else  when  one  ceaseth 
the  contrary  beginneth.  When  some  are  laid  and  the  next 
to  them  arise,  they  go  about  from  the  left  Hand  to  the  right, 
according  to  the  Sun.  Of  their  Manner  and  Order  monthly, 
the  fourth  Day  after  the  Change  of  the  Moon  doth  most 
commonly  determine.  The  same  Winds  will  serve  to  sail 
contrary  Ways,  by  means  of  setting  out  the  Sails  :  so  as  many 
Times  in  the  Night,  Ships  in  sailing  run  one  against  another. 
The  South  Wind  raiseth  greater  Billows  than  the  North :  for 
that  the  South  Wind  ariseth  below,  from  the  Bottom  of  the 
Sea ;  the  other  descends  from  on  high.  And,  therefore,  after 
Southern  Winds,  Earthquakes  are  most  hurtful.  The  South 
Wind  in  the  Night  Time  is  more  boisterous,  the  Northern 
Wind  in  the  Day.  The  Winds  blowing  from  the  East  con- 
tinue longer  than  those  from  the  West.  The  Northern  Winds 
give  over  commonly  with  an  odd  Number :  which  Observa- 
tion serveth  to  good  use  in  many  other  Parts  of  natural 
Things,  and  therefore  the  male  Winds  are  judged  by  the  odd 
Number.  The  Sun  both  raiseth  and  also  allayeth  the  Winds. 
At  rising  and  setting  he  causeth  them  to  blow :  at  Noontide 
he  represseth  them  in  Summer.  And  therefore  at  Mid-day 
or  Midnight  commonly  the  Winds  are  allayed  ;  for  both  Cold 
and  Heat,  if  they  be  immoderate,  do  consume  them.  Also, 
Rain  doth  lay  the  Winds  :  and  most  commonly  from  thence 
they  are  looked  for  to  blow,  where  Clouds  break  and  lay 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  87 

open  the  Sky.  And  Eudoxus  is  of  opinion  (if  we  list  to  ob- 
serve the  least  Revolutions)  that  after  the  End  of  every 
fourth  Year,  not  only  all  Winds,  but,  for  the  most  Part,  other 
Tempests  and  Constitutions  of  the  Weather,  return  again  to 
the  same  Course  as  before.  And  always  the  Lustrum1  or  Com- 
putation of  the  five  Years,  beginneth  at  the  Leap  Year,  when 
the  Dog-star  doth  arise.  And  thus  much  concerning  general 
Winds. 

CHAPTER  XLVIII. 

Of  Sudden  Blasts. 

Now  will  we  speak  of  sudden  Blasts :  which  being  raised 
(as  hath  been  said  before)  by  Exhalations  of  the  Earth,  and 
cast  down  again,  in  the  meanwhile  appear  of  many  Fashions, 
enclosed  within  a  thin  Course  of  Clouds.  For  such  as  be  wan- 
dering and  rushing  in  Manner  of  Land-floods  (as  some  Men 
were  of  opinion,  as  we  have  shewed),  bring  forth  Thunder 
and  Lightning.  But  if  they  come  with  a  greater  Force  and 
Violence,  and  cleave  a  dry  Cloud  asunder,  they  breed  a 
Storm,  which  of  the  Greeks  is  called  Ecnephias:  but  if  the 
Breach  be  not  great,  so  that  the  Wind  be  constrained  to  re- 
volve in  his  Descent  without  Fire,  that  is  to  say,  Lightning, 
it  makes  a  Whirlwind  called  Typhon,  that  is  to  say,  the 
vibrated  Ecnephias.  This  snatches  with  it  a  Piece  broken 
out  of  a  congealed  cold  Cloud,  turning  and  rolling  it  round, 
and  with  that  Weight  inaketh  its  own  Fall  more  heavy,  and 
changeth  from  Place  to  Place  with  a  vehement  Whirling. 
It  is  the  greatest  Danger  that  Sailors  have,  breaking  not 
only  their  Yards,  but  also  wrecking  the  very  Ships  to  twisted 
Fragments  :  and  yet  a  small  Matter  is  the  Remedy  for  it, 
namely,  the  casting  of  Vinegar  out  against  it  as  it  cometh  ; 
which  is  of  very  cold  Nature.  The  same  Storm  beating  upon 
a  Thing  is  itself  smitten  back  again  with  Violence,  and 
snatcheth  up  whatever  it  meeteth  in  the  Way  aloft  into  the 
Sky,  carrying  it  back,  and  swallowing  it  up  on  high.  But  if 
it  break  out  from  a  greater  Hole  of  the  said  Cloud,  by  it  so 

1  This  space  of  time  came  round  at  the  beginning  of  every  fifth  year ; 
at  which  period,  originally,  the  census  was  taken,  and  the  taxes  fixed 
until  the  recurrence  of  the  same  period.—  Wern.  Club. 


88  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  II. 

borne  down,  and  yet  not  altogether  so  broad,  as  the  above- 
named  Storm  Procella  doth,  nor  without  a  Crack,  they  call 
this  boisterous  Wind  Turbo,  which  overthroweth  all  that  is  near 
it.  The  same,  if  it  be  more  hot  and  catching  Fire  as  it  rageth, 
is  named  Prester;  burning  and  laying  along  whatsoever  it 
encountereth. 

CHAPTER  XLIX. 

Other  prodigious  Kinds  of  Tempests. 

No  Typhon  cometh  from  the  North,  nor  any  Ecnephias 
with  Snow,  or  while  Snow  lieth  on  the  Ground.  If  this  tem- 
pestuous Wind  when  it  broke  the  Cloud,  burned  fiercely, 
having  Fire  of  its  own  before,  and  catched  it  not  afterward, 
it  is  true  Lightning;  and  diifereth  from  Prester  only  as  Flame 
from  a  Coal  of  Fire.  Again,  Prester  spreadeth  widely  with  a 
Flash  ;  the  other  gathereth  into  a  Globe  with  Violence.  Vor- 
tex differeth  from  Turben  in  flying  back  :  and  as  much  as  a 
Crash  from  a  Crack.  The  Storm  Procella  differs  from  them 
both  in  Breadth,  and  rather  scattereth  than  breaketh  the 
Cloud.  There  riseth  also  a  dark  Mist,  resembling  a  mon- 
strous Beast ;  and  this  is  ever  a  terrible  Cloud  to  Sailors. 
Another,  likewise,  is  called  a  Pillar1,  when  the  Humour  is  so 
thick  and  congealed  that  it  standeth  compact  of  itself.  Of 
the  same  Sort  also  is  that  Cloud  which  draweth  Water  to  it, 
as  it  were,  into  a  long  Pipe. 

CHAPTER  L. 
In  what  Lands  Lightnings  fall  not. 

IK  Winter  and  Summer  seldom  are  there  any  Lightnings, 
because  of  contrary  Causes :  for  in  Winter  the  Air  is  con- 
densed, and  thickened  with  a  deeper  Course  of  Clouds :  and  all 
the  Exhalations  from  the  Earth  being  chilled  and  frozen  hard, 
extinguish  what  fiery  Vapour  soever  otherwise  they  receive  : 
which  is  the  Reason  that  Scythia,  and  other  frozen  Countries 

1  The  Author  clearly  means  what,  in  modern  times,  is  denominated  a 
Water-spout :  a  phenomenon  not  uncommon  in  the  Mediterranean  Sea, 
and  in  other  warm  climates ;  but  exceedingly  rare,  if  at  all  occurring,  in 
northern  regions.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  89 

thereabout,  are  free  from  Lightnings.  And  Egypt1,  likewise, 
from  a  contrary  Cause,  is  exempt  from  Lightnings,  the  Rea- 
son being  its  excessive  Heat :  for  the  hot  and  dry  Exhalations 
of  the  Earth  gather  into  very  slender,  thin,  and  weak  Clouds. 
But  in  the  Spring  and  Autumn,  Lightnings  are  more  rife ; 
because  in  both  those  Seasons  the  Causes  as  well  of  Summer 
as  Winter  are  corrupt.  And  this  is  the  Reason  that  Light- 
nings are  common  in  Italy ;  for  the  Air  being  more  mov- 
able, by  Reason  of  a  milder  Winter  and  a  cloudy  Summer,  is 
always  of  the  Temperature  of  Spring  or  Autumn.  In  those 
Parts,  also,  of  Italy,  which  lie  off  from  the  North,  and  in- 
cline to  Warmth  (as,  namely,  in  the  Tract  about  Rome  and 
Campania),  there  is  Lightning  in  Winter  and  Summer  alike, 
which  happeneth  in  no  other  Part  thereof. 

CHAPTER  LI. 
Sundry  Sorts  of  Lightnings,  and  Wonders  thereof. 

VERY  many  Kinds  of  Lightning  are  set  down  by  Authors. 
Those  that  come  dry  burn  not,  but  only  disperse.  They  that 
come  moist  do  not  burn,  but  blast  and  embrown.  A  third 
Kind  there  is,  which  they  call  Bright  and  Clear;  and  that  is 
of  a  wonderful  Nature,  whereby  Tuns  are  drawn  dry,  and 
their  Sides,  Hoops,  and  Heads  never  touched,  nor  any  other 
Token  thereof  is  left  behind.  Gold,  Copper,  and  Silver2  are 

1  The  circumstance  that  Egypt  is  naturally  exempt  from  lightning, 
must  have  greatly  heightened  the  terrors  of  the  Seventh  Plague  with 
which  God  visited  this  land  in  the  days  of  the  Exodus.     But  though 
very  rare,  thunder  and  lightning  are  not  unknown  in  Egypt,  at  least 
in  modern  times.     Thevenot  mentions  a  man  who  was  killed  by  light- 
ning at  Cairo,  when  he  was  there ;  —  but  such  a  circumstance  had  never 
been  known  before.      Rain,  and  even  hail,  have  also  been  seen;  but 
all  these  phenomena  are  less  severe  than  in  other  countries. — Wern. 
Club. 

2  The  facts  here  mentioned  must  have  appeared  as  unaccountable  as 
stupendous,  before  the  modern  discoveries  of  Franklin  and  others,  relative 
to  the  attractions  of  the  electric  fluid :  the  existence  of  which,  as  an  agent 
of  Nature,  was  not  dreamt  of  in  the  philosophy  of  Pliny  and  the  ancient 
observers.  —  Wern.  Club. 


90  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  II. 

melted  in  the  Bags,  and  the  Bags  themselves  unscorcbed ; 
and  not  even  the  Wax  of  the  Seal  defaced.  Martia,  a  noble 
Lady  of  Rome,  being  great  with  Child,  was  struck  with 
Lightning :  the  Child  she  went  with  was  killed  within  her, 
and  she  survived  without  any  Harm.  Among  the  Catiline 
Prodigies  it  is  found  upon  Record,  that  M.  Herennius  (a 
Counsellor  of  the  incorporate  Town  Pompeianum)  was  in  a 
fair  and  clear  Day  smitten  with  Lightning. 

CHAPTER  LII. 
Of  Observations  touching  Lightning. 

IT  is  held  in  the  Writings  of  the  ancient  Tuscans1,  that 
there  be  nine  Gods  that  send  forth  Lightnings,  and  those 
of  eleven  Sorts  :  for  Jupiter  (say  they)  casteth  three  at  once. 
The  Romans  have  observed  two  of  them,  and  no  more;  attri- 
buting those  in  the  Day-time  to  Jupiter,  and  those  of  the 
Night  to  Summanus  or  Pluto.  And  these  verily  be  more 
rare,  for  the  Cause  before-named ;  namely,  the  Coldness 
of  the  Air  above.  In  Etruria,  they  suppose  that  some 
Lightnings  break  out  of  the  Earth,  which  they  call  Infera, 
or  Infernal ;  and  such  be  made  in  Midwinter.  And  these 
they  take  to  be  earthly,  and  of  all  most  mischievous  and  exe- 
crable :  neither  be  those  general  and  universal  Lightnings, 
nor  proceeding  from  the  Stars,  but  from  a  very  near  and 
more  troubled  Cause.  And  this  is  an  evident  Argument 
for  Distinction,  that  all  such  as  fall  from  the  upper  Sky  strike 
obliquely :  but  those  which  they  call  earthly,  smite  straight. 
But  the  Reason  why  these  are  thought  to  issue  from  the 
Earth  is,  because  they  fall  from  out  of  a  Matter  nearer  to 
the  Earth ;  forasmuch  as  they  leave  no  Marks  of  a  Stroke 

1  This  people  was  famed  for  the  study  of  prognostications  from  natural 
appearances :  an  art  they  had  probably  derived  from  Egypt  or  Assyria, 
and  which  the  neighbouring  nations  learned  from  them.  It  consisted  in 
minutely  observing  every  unusual  occurrence,  and  in  deducing  thence, 
according  to  rules  known  only  to  the  proper  authorities,  the  will  of  the 
gods,  or  the  indications  of  a  fixed  necessity.  This  science  is  farther  spoken 
of  in  the  seventh  book.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  91 

behind:  which  are  occasioned  by  Force  not  from  beneath, 
but  coming  full  against.  Such  as  have  searched  more  closely 
into  these  Matters  are  of  opinion  that  these  Lightnings 
come  from  the  Planet  Saturn,  as  the  burning  Lightning  from 
Mars;  and  with  such  Lightning  was  Volsinii  (a  very  wealthy 
City  of  the  Tuscans),  entirely  burnt  to  Ashes.  The  Tuscans 
call  those  Lightnings  familiar  which  presage  the  Fortune 
of  some  Race,  and  are  significant  during  their  whole  Life  ; 
and  such  are  they  that  come  first  to  any  Man,  after  he  is 
newly  entered  into  his  own  Family.  However,  their  Judg- 
ment is,  that  these  private  Lightnings  do  not  portend  for 
above  ten  Years :  unless  they  happen  either  upon  the  Day  of 
first  Marriage,  or  on  a  Birth-day.  Public  Lightnings  be  not 
of  Force  above  thirty  Years,  except  they  chance  at  the  very 
Time  that  Towns  or  Colonies  be  erected  and  planted. 

CHAPTER  LIII. 
Of  calling  out  Lightnings. 

IT  appeareth  upon  Record  in  Chronicles,  that  by  certain 
Sacrifices  and  Prayers1,  Lightnings  may  be  either  compelled 

1  There  are  many  proofs  of  imposture  in  these  ancient  ceremonies ;  but 
when  modern  science  is  able  to  produce  some  of  the  effects  ascribed  to 
these  Etrurian  priests,  it  seems  just  to  conclude  that  they  may  have  pos- 
sessed the  secret  of  a  method  of  drawing  the  electric  fluid  from  the  sky. 
The  danger  attending  a  failure  in  the  requisite  proceedings,  as  in  the  case 
of  Tullius  Hostilius,  would  necessarily  confine  the  practice  to  an  instructed 
few ;  whose  credit  for  sanctity  would,  therefore,  be  highly  exalted.  Ovid, 
in  his  third  book  of  the  "  Fasti,"  obscurely  intimates  the  acquaintance  of 
Numa  with  such  arts : — 

"  Jupiter  hue  veniet,  valida  perductus  ab  arte  .  .  . 

....  quid  agant,  quae  carmina  dicant, 
Quoque  trahant  superis  sedibus  arte  Jovem." 

"  To  thee,  by  powerful  art  compelled, 
Shall  Jupiter  approach  .  .  . 

....  And  then  they  tell 

What  deeds,  what  powerful  charms,  the  Man  must  use, 
To  draw  the  God  compell'd  from  seats  above." 

The  secret  consisted  in  Numa's  being  a  scholar  of  Pythagoras,  and  studying 
"  Quae  sit  rerum  Natura." 

Wern.  Club. 


92  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

or  obtained  by  Entreaty.  There  is  an  ancient  Report  in 
Etruria,  that  such  a  Lightning  was  procured  by  Entreaty, 
when  there  entered  into  the  City  Volsinii  (after  all  the  Terri- 
tory about  it  was  destroyed)  a  Monster,  which  they  named 
Volta.  Also,  that  another  was  called  forth  by  P  or  senna, 
their  King.  Moreover,  L.  Piso  (a  Writer  of  good  Credit) 
reporteth  in  his  first  Book  of  Annals,  that  Numa  before  him 
performed  the  same  Act  many  a  Time :  and  when  Tullius 
Hostilius  would  have  imitated  him  (for  that  he  observed  not 
all  the  Ceremonies  accordingly),  he  was  himself  struck  with 
Lightning.  And  for  this  Purpose,  we  have  sacred  Groves, 
Altars,  and  Sacrifices.  And  among  the  Jupiters  surnamed 
Statores,  Tonantes,  and  Peretrii,  we  have  heard  that  one 
also  was  called  Elicius.  Men's  Opinions  are  various  con- 
cerning this  Point,  and  every  Man  according  to  his  own 
Liking.  To  believe  that  Nature  may  be  compelled,  is  a  very 
audacious  Opinion  :  but  it  is  as  senseless  on  the  other  Side 
to  make  her  Benefits  of  no  effect ;  considering  that  in  the 
Interpretation  of  Lightning,  Science  hath  thus  far  proceeded 
as  to  foretell  when  they  will  come  at  a  prescribed  Day  :  and 
whether  they  will  frustrate  the  Dangers  pronounced,  or 
rather  open  other  Destinies,  which  lie  hidden  in  innumerable 
public  and  private  Experiments  of  both  Kinds.  And  there- 
fore (since  it  hath  so  pleased  Nature)  let  some  of  these  Things 
be  certain,  others  doubtful :  some  proved,  and  others  con- 
demned. As  for  us,  we  will  not  omit  the  Rest  which  in 
these  Matters  are  worth  Remembrance. 

CHAPTER  LIV. 
General  Rules  of  Lightning. 

THAT  the  Lightning  is  seen  before  the  Thunderclap  is 
heard,  although  they  come  indeed  jointly  together,  is  cer- 
tain. And  no  Wonder,  for  Light  is  more  rapid  than  Sound. 
And  yet  Nature  doth  so  modulate,  that  the  Stroke  and 
Sound  shall  accord  together.  But  when  there  is  a  Noise1, 

1  Ovid  refers  to  this  also,  as  the  popular  opinion.  But  silent  lightning 
in  a  clear  sky  was  judged  to  be  unaccountable,  except  as  coming  from  the 
gods.  Hence  Horace,  though  disposed  to  the  doctrines  of  Epicurus,  found 


BOOK  1 1 .]  History  of  Nature.  93 

it  is  a  Sign  of  the  Lightning  proceeding  of  some  natural 
Cause,  and  not  sent  by  some  God  :  and  yet  a  Breath  cometh 
before  the  Thunderbolt :  and  hereupon  it  is,  that  every  Thing 
is  shaken  and  blasted  before  it  is  smitten  :  neither  is  any 
Man  struck,  who  either  saw  the  Lightning  before,  or  heard 
the  Thunderclap.  Those  Lightnings  that  are  on  the  left 
Hand  are  supposed  to  be  prosperous,  for  that  the  East  is  the 
left  Side  of  the  World  :  but  the  Coming  thereof  is  not  so 
much  regarded  as  the  Return  :  whether  it  be  that  the  Fire 
leap  back  after  the  Stroke  given ;  or  whether  after  the  Deed 
done  and  Fire  spent,  the  Spirit  abovesaid  retire  back  again. 
In  that  respect  the  Tuscans  have  divided  the  Heaven  into 
sixteen  Parts.  The  first  is  from  the  North  to  the  Sun's 
Rising  in  the  Equinoctial  Line  :  the  second,  to  the  Meridian 
Line,  or  the  South :  the  third,  to  the  Sun-setting  in  the 
Equinoctial :  and  the  fourth  taketh  up  all  the  Rest  from  the 
said  West  to  the  North  Star.  These  Quarters  again  they 
have  parted  each  into  four  Regions :  of  which  eight  from  the 
Sun-rising  they  called  the  Left ;  and  as  many  again  from 
the  contrary  Part,  the  Right.  Those  Lightnings  are  most 
dreadful  which  from  the  Sun-setting  reach  into  the  North : 
and  therefore  it  is  of  much  importance  from  whence  Light- 
nings come,  and  whither  they  go :  the  best  Thing  observed 
in  them,  is  when  they  return  into  the  easterly  Parts.  And, 
therefore,  when  they  come  from  that  principal  Part  of  the 
Sky,  and  return  again  into  the  same,  it  portends  the  highest 
Good  :  and  such  was  the  Sign  given  (by  report)  to  Sylla 
the  Dictator.  In  all  other  Parts  of  the  World,  they  be  less 
fortunate  or  dreadful.  They  believe  that  there  be  Light- 
nings, which  to  utter  abroad  is  held  unlawful ;  as  also  is  to 
give  Ear  unto  them,  unless  they  be  declared  either  to  Parents 
or  to  a  Friend.  How  great  is  the  Folly  of  this  Observation 
was  found  at  Rome  upon  the  blasting  of  Juno's  Temple  by 
Scaurus,  the  Consul,  who  soon  after  was  President  of  the 
Senate.  It  lightneth  without  Thunder,  more  in  the  Night 

his  confidence  staggered  by  this  phenomenon ;  and  Suetonius  informs  us, 
that  it  was  viewed  by  Titus  as  a  portent  of  evil  to  himself,  just  before  his 
death;  and  his  spirits  became  proportionally  depressed.  —  Wern.  Club. 


94  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  II. 

than  by  Day.  Of  all  Creatures,  Man  only  it  doth  not  always 
kill ;  the  Rest  it  despatcheth  instantly.  This  Honour  we  see 
Nature  hath  given  to  him  ;  whereas  many  great  Beasts  sur- 
pass him  in  Strength.  All  other  Creatures  smitten  with 
Lightning  fall  down  upon  the  contrary  Side ;  Man  only  (un- 
less he  turn  upon  the  Parts  stricken)  dieth  not.  Those  that 
are  smitten  from  above  upon  the  Head,  sink  down  directly. 
He  that  is  struck  watching,  is  found  dead  with  his  Eyes  close 
shut:  but  whoever  is  smitten  sleeping,  is  found  with  his  Eyes 
open.  A  Man  thus  coming  by  his  Death,  may  not  by  Law 
be  burned  :  Religion  hath  taught  that  he  ought  to  be  buried 
in  the  Earth.  No  living  Creature  is  set  on  Fire  by  Light- 
ning, unless  it  is  breathless  first.  The  Wounds  of  them 
that  be  smitten  with  Lightning  are  colder  than  all  the  Body 
besides. 

CHAPTER  LV. 

What  Things  are  not  Smitten  with  Lightning. 

OF  all  those  Things  which  grow  out  of  the  Earth,  Light- 
ning blasteth  not  the  Bay-tree  ;  nor  doth  it  enter  at  any  Time 
above  five  Feet  deep  into  the  Ground :  and,  therefore,  Men 
fearful  of  Lightning,  suppose  the  deeper  Caves  to  be  the 
most  safe :  or  else  Booths  made  of  Skins  of  Beasts,  which 
they  call  Sea-Calves1;  for  of  all  Creatures  in  the  Sea,  this 
alone  is  not  subject  to  the  Stroke  of  Lightning :  like  as  of 
all  Birds,  the  Eagle  (which  for  this  Cause  is  feigned  to  be 
the  Armour-bearer  of  Jupiter,  for  this  Kind  of  Weapon).  In 
Italy,  between  Tarracina  arid  the  Temple  of  Feronia,  they 
gave  over  in  Time  of  War  to  build  Towers  ;  for  not  one  of 
them  escaped  being  overthrown  with  Lightning. 

1  Seals  (Phocae)  are  the  creatures  here  intended ;  and,  probably,  not 
any  particular  species.  Suetonius  informs  us,  that  Augustus  Caesar,  who 
was  greatly  afraid  of  thunder,  was  accustomed  to  carry  the  skin  of  a  seal 
along  with  him,  wherever  he  went.  Tiberius  always  wore  a  crown  of 
bay-leaves  on  his  head,  with  the  same  object. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  95 


CHAPTER  LVI. 

Of  strange  and  prodigious  Rain1,  of  Milk,  Blood,  Flesh, 
Iron,  Wool,   Tiles,  and  Bricks. 

BESIDES  these  Things  in  this  lower  Region  under  Hea- 
ven, we  find  recorded  on  Monuments  that  it  rained  Milk 
and  Blood  when  M.  Acilius  and  C.  Porcius  were  Consuls. 
And  many  Times  beside  it  rained  Flesh  ;  as,  namely,  whilst 
L.  Volumnius  and  Serv.  Sulpitius  were  Consuls  :  and  what 
of  it  the  Fowls  of  the  Air  carried  not  away,  never  putrified. 
In  like  Manner,  it  rained  Iron  in  Lucania,  the  Year  before 
that  in  which  M.  Crassus  was  slain  by  the  Parthians;  and 

1  A  coloured  mist  has  been  mentioned,  in  a  note  to  chap,  xxvii.  Ruysch 
mentions  a  flight  of  butterflies  in  1543,  which  sprinkled  the  herbage,  roofs 
of  houses,  and  human  clothing,  with  drops  of  their  dung,  like  blood.  A 
similar  circumstance  in  England,  recorded  by  Pennius,  was  supposed 
to  have  presaged  the  plague.  There  are  sufficient  modern  proofs  that 
living  fishes,  frogs,  and  other  creatures  or  materials,  have  fallen  in 
showers  :  in  the  former  instance,  remote  from  the  sea  or  any  great  river. 
These  things  can  only  be  explained  by  supposing  them  to  have  been  first 
taken  up  by  some  whirlwind,  or  sudden  gust ;  and  it  is  not  unlikely  that 
the  ashes  of  a  volcano  were  the  materials  of  some  of  these  showers.  Ovid, 
by  poetic  license,  accumulates  all  the  bad  omens  on  record  or  in  tradition, 
hi  the  alarming  prognostications  of  the  death  of  Julius  Caesar  ("  Meta- 
morphoses," b.  xv.) ;  and  it  may  be  a  principal  reason  why  Pliny  specifies 
the  times  of  these  occurrences,  to  shew  that  Ovid's  narrative  is  only  a 
poetic  fiction. 

The  following  translation  of  a  paragraph  in  the  "  Museum  Wormi- 
anum"  (p.  17,  De  Terris  Miracvlusis),  is  a  specimen  of  the  manner  in 
which  such  extraordinary  events  were  regarded,  even  at  a  very  modern 
date  : — "  In  the  year  1619,  when  the  preposterous  fashion  of  neck-bands, 
kerchiefs,  and  other  female  ornaments  of  linen,  dyed  of  cerulean  blue,  in- 
vaded Denmark,  and  in  spite  of  the  remonstrances  of  the  ministers  of 
God  obstinately  persisted,  by  adding  pride  to  luxury,  Almighty  God, 
that  he  might  by  all  means  declare  how  abhorrent  this  sin  was  to  him, 
and  recall  mortals  to  repentance  by  a  miracle,  in  many  places  of  Scania 
rained  down  abundantly  a  kind  of  earth  of  a  blue  colour,  very  similar 
to  a  sort  sold  by  the  dealers  in  spices.  A  small  quantity  of  this  was 
given  to  me  at  the  time  by  my  good  friend,  Dr.  Fincking,  professor 
of  medicine  at  Copenhagen,  &c."  It  probably  proceeded  from  Hecla. — 
Wern.  Club. 


96  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

together  with  him  all  the  Lucani  his  Soldiers,  of  whom  there 
were  many  in  his  Army.  That  which  came  down  in  this 
Rain  resembled  in  some  sort  Sponges  :  and  the  Aruspices 
gave  Warning  to  take  Heed  of  Wounds  from  above.  But  in 
the  Year  that  L.  Paulus  and  C.  Marcellus  were  Consuls,  it 
rained  Wool  about  the  Castle  Carissa,  near  to  which,  a  Year 
after,  T.  Annius  Milo  was  slain.  At  the  Time  that  the  same 
Mito  pleaded  his  own  Cause  at  the  Bar,  there  fell  a  Rain  of 
Tiles  and  Bricks,  as  is  related  in  the  Records  of  that  Year. 

CHAPTER  LVII. 

Of  the  Rustling  of  Armour,  and  the  Sound  of  Trumpets  heard 
from  Heaven. 

IN  the  Time  of  the  Cimbrian  Wars,  we  have  been  told 
that  Armour  was  heard  to  rustle,  and  the  Trumpet  to  sound, 
out  of  Heaven.  And  this  happened  very  often,  both  before 
and  after  those  Wars.  But  in  the  third  Consulship  of 
Marius,  the  Amerines  and  Tudertes  saw  Men  in  Arms  in  the 
Sky1,  rushing  one  against  another,  from  the  East  and  West ; 
and  those  of  the  West  were  discomfited.  That  the  very 
Firmament  itself  should  be  on  Fire  is  no  Wonder,  for  often 
it  hath  been  seen  when  Clouds  have  caught  any  great  deal 
of  Fire. 

CHAPTER  LVIII. 

Of  Stones  falling  from  the  Sky*. 

THE  Greeks  greatly  celebrate  Anaxagoras  Clazomenius, 
who,  by  the  Learning  that  he  had  in  Astronomy,  foretold  in 

1  This  was  probably  the  Aurora  Borealis,  or  Northern  Lights;  a 
phenomenon  rarely  seen  so  far  to  the  South.    It  is,  perhaps,  the  same 
that  is  referred  to  by  Josephus,  in  his  narrative  of  the  terrors  sent  by 
God  before  the  fatal  siege  of  Jerusalem.     The  account  of  what  was  seen 
in  the  county  of  Cumberland,  immediately  preceding  the  invasion  of 
England  by  the  Pretender,  will  shew  how  nearly  aerial  appearances  may 
approach  to  realities. — Wern.  Club. 

2  For  a  long  time  the  fall  from  the  sky,  of  what  are  denominated 
Meteorolites,  was  deemed  too  preposterous  to  be  believed ;  but  since  the 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  97 

the  second  Year  of  the  Seventy-eighth  Olympiad,  what  Time 
a  Stone  would  fall  from  the  Sun :  and  the  same  happened 
accordingly,  in  the  Daytime,  in  a  Part  of  Thracia,  near  the 
River  .ZEgos ;  which  Stone  is  shewed  at  this  Day  as  big  as  a 
Wain-load,  carrying  a  burnt  Colour :  at  which  Time  a  Comet 
also  burned  by  Night.  Which  if  any  Man  believe  that  it 
was  fore-signified,  he  must  needs  also  confess,  that  this  fore- 
telling by  Anaxagoras  was  more  miraculous  than  the  Thing 
itself:  and  that  it  destroyed  the  Knowledge  of  Nature's 
Works,  and  confounds  all  Things,  if  we  should  believe  that 
either  the  Sun  were  a  Stone,  or  that  ever  any  Stone  were  in 
it.  But,  that  Stones  fall  often,  no  Man  will  make  any  doubt- 
In  the  public  Place  of  Exercise  in  Abydos,  there  is  one  at 
this  Day  upon  the  same  Cause  preserved,  and  held  in  great 
Reverence  :  it  is  but  of  small  size,  yet  it  is  reported  to  be  the 
same  that  Anaxagoras  foretold  to  be  about  to  fall  in  the 
midst  of  the  Earth.  There  is  one  revered  also  at  Cassandria, 
which  was  called  Potidsea,  a  Colony  from  thence  deducted. 
I  myself  have  seen  another  in  the  Territory  of  the  Vocantians, 
which  was  brought  thither  but  a  little  before. 

CHAPTER  LIX. 
Of  the  Rainbow. 

THOSE  which  we  call  Rainbows,  are  seen  often  without  any 
Wonder,  or  betokening  Portent :  for  they  foretel  not  so  much 

facts  are  no  longer  doubted,  the  instances  recorded  by  Pliny  become 
valuable  evidences  of  their  antiquity.  A  still  more  ancient  instance  is 
found  in  the  Book  of  Joshua,  x.  11,  where,  in  the  conquest  of  Canaan, 
the  Lord  threw  down  great  stones  from  heaven  on  the  enemy,  and  dis- 
comfited them.  The  miraculous  nature  of  this  last  transaction  does  not 
remove  it  from  the  class  of  natural  occurrences ;  for  Nature  itself  is  only 
an  instrument  in  the  hands  of  its  Creator.  With  regard  to  the  prognos- 
tication of  Anaxagoras,  it  can  only  be  taken  to  signify  the  high  reputation 
of  this  philosopber ;  which  led  the  public  to  believe  that  they  could  not 
attribute  too  much  to  his  insight  into  the  occurrences  of  Nature.  There 
is  reason  to  suppose  that  some  of  the  images  which  were  said  to  have  fallen 
down  from  Jupiter  (Acts  of  the  Apostles,  xix.  35)  were  derived  from  tbis 
source. —  Wern.  Club. 


98  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  1 1 . 

as  rainy  or  fair  Days,  in  a  Manner  that  we  can  trust  them. 
But  it  is  manifest  that  the  Sunbeams  striking  upon  an  hollow 
Cloud,  when  their  Edge  is  repelled,  are  beaten  back  against 
the  Sun :  and  thus  ariseth  a  Variety  of  Colours  by  the  Mix- 
ture of  Clouds,  Air,  and  fiery  Light.  Certainly,  they  never 
are  known  but  opposite  to  the  Sun  ;  nor  at  any  Time  other- 
wise than  in  Form  of  a  Semicircle ;  nor  yet  in  the  Night 
Season,  although  Aristotle  saith1  there  was  a  Rainbow  seen 
by  Night :  however  he  confesseth,  that  it  could  not  possibly 
be  but  at  the  full  of  the  Moon.  They  happen  for  the  most 
Part  in  Winter,  chiefly  from  the  Autumnal  Equinox,  as  the 
Days  decrease.  But  as  Days  grow  longer  after  the  Spring 
Equinox,  they  be  not  seen,  no  more  than  about  the  Summer 
Solstice,  when  the  Days  are  longest.  But  in  Bruma,  that  is 
to  say,  when  they  be  shortest,  they  appear  often.  The  same 
appear  aloft  when  the  Sun  is  low  ;  and  below,  when  he  is 
aloft.  Also,  they  be  of  narrower  Compass  when  the  Sun 
either  riseth  or  setteth,  but  their  Body  spreadeth  broad  :  and 
at  Noon  they  are  narrower,  but  wider  in  Circumference.  In 
Summer  they  be  not  seen  about  Noon,  but  after  the  Autumnal 
Equinox  at  all  hours ;  and  never  more  than  two  at  once. 
The  Rest  of  the  same  Nature,  I  see  few  Men  do  make  any 
doubt  of. 

CHAPTER  LX. 
Of  Hail ,  Snow,  Frost,  Mist,  and  Dew. 

HAIL  is  formed  of  Rain,  congealed  into  Ice :  and  Snow 
of  the  same  Humour  grown  together,  but  not  so  hard.  Frost 
is  made  of  Dew  frozen.  In  Winter  Snows  fall,  and  not  Hail. 
It  haileth  oftener  in  the  Daytime  than  in  the  Night ;  yet  Hail 
sooner  melteth  by  far  than  Snow.  Mists  be  not  seen  either 
in  Summer,  or  in  very  cold  Weather.  Dews  shew  not  either 
in  Frost  or  in  hot  Seasons,  neither  when  there  is  Wind ;  but 

1  A  rainbow  by  night  is  so  far  from  being  rare,  that  it  is  only 
the  difference  of  climate  that  will  explain  why  Aristotle  and  Pliny 
speak  so  doubtfully  about  it.  It  is  usually  void  of  colour.  —  Wern. 
Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  99 

only  after  a  calm  and  clear  Night.  Frosts  dry  up  moisture  ; 
for  when  the  Ice  is  thawed  the  like  Proportion  of  Water  is 
not  found. 

CHAPTER  LXI. 

Of  the  Shapes  of  Clouds. 

A  VARIETY  of  Colours  and  Shapes  are  seen  in  Clouds, 
according  as  the  Fire  intermingled  therein  is  either  more  or 
less. 

CHAPTER  LXII. 
Of  the  Properties  of  Weather  in  various  Places. 

MOREOVER  there  are  many  Properties  of  the  Weather 
peculiar  to  certain  Places.  The  Nights  in  Africa  be  dewy  in 
Winter;  in  Italy,  about  Locri  and  the  Lake  Velinus,  there  is 
not  a  Day  but  a  Rainbow  is  seen.  At  Rhodes  and  Syracuse, 
the  Air  is  never  so  cloudy,  but  one  Hour  or  other  the  Sun 
shineth  out.  But  such  Things  as  these  shall  be  related  more 
fitly  in  due  Place.  Thus  much  of  the  Air. 

CHAPTER   LXIII. 
Of  the  Nature  of  the  Earth. 

THE  Earth  followeth  next :  unto  which  alone  of  all  Parts 
of  the  World,  for  her  especial  Benefits,  we  have  given  the 
reverend  Name  of  Mother1.  For  like  as  the  Heaven  is  the 

1  The  earth  was  so  commonly  termed  Mother  by  Greek  and  Roman 
writers,  in  prose  and  verse,  that  it  is  unnecessary  to  refer  to  particular  in- 
stances. And  it  is  not  to  be  regarded  as  merely  a  poetic  metaphor  or 
idle  declamation,  for  it  was  their  belief  that  the  earliest  origin  of  mankind 
was  from  the  ground,  by  an  inherent  property ;  as  explained  by  Lucre- 
tius in  his  Second  Book  on  the  "  Nature  of  Things : "  so  that  each  primi- 
tive nation  arose  from  its  own  soil.  And  even  the  renewal  of  the  earth 
with  inhabitants  after  the  flood,  from  the  stones  cast  by  Deucalion  and 
Pyrrha,  was  not  popularly  regarded  as  a  fable ;  although  it  is  probable 
that  a  mystical  meaning  was  also  supposed  to  be  couched  in  the  narrative. 
But  by  Pliny  this  idea  of  maternity  was  extended  more  widely  through 
his  adoption  of  the  Pythagorean  notion  of  the  earth's  being  a  living 


100  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  11. 

(Mother)  of  God,  even  so  is  she  of  Men.  She  it  is  that 
taketh  us  when  we  are  coming  into  the  World,  nourisheth  us 
when  we  are  new  born  :  and  once  being  come  abroad,  ever 
sustaiueth  us:  and  at  the  last,  when  we  are  rejected  of  all 
the  World  besides,  she  embraceth  us  :  then  most  of  all,  like 
a  kind  Mother,  she  covereth  us  all  over  in  her  Bosom  :  by 
no  Merit  more  sacred  than  by  it,  wherewith  she  maketh  us 
sacred  !;  even  bearing  our  Tombs  and  Titles,  continuing  our 
Name,  and  extending  our  Memory  against  the  Shortness  of 
our  Age:  whose  last  Power  we,  in  our  Anger,  wish  to  be 
heavy  unto  our  Enemy2,  and  yet  she  is  heavy  to  none;  as  if 
we  were  ignorant  that  she  alone  is  never  angry  with  any 
Man.  Waters  ascend  into  Clouds;  they  harden  into  Hail, 
swell  into  Waves,  and  hasten  headlong  into  Torrents.  The 
Air  is  thickened  into  Clouds,  and  rageth  with  Storms.  But 
She  is  bountiful,  mild,  and  indulgent ;  ready  at  all  Times  to 
attend,  as  a  Handmaid,  upon  the  Good  of  Mortals.  See 
what  she  breeds  being  forced !  nay,  what  she  yieldeth  of  her 
own  accord  !  what  odoriferous  Smells,  and  pleasant  Tastes ! 
what  Juices,  what  soft  Things,  what  Colours  !  how  faithfully 
doth  she  repay,  with  Usury,  that  which  was  credited  out  unto 
her  !  Finally,  what  Things  doth  she  nourish  for  our  sake  ! 
for  hurtful  Creatures,  when  the  vital  Breath  was  to  blame  in 
giving  them  Life,  she  could  not  refuse  to  receive,  after  they 

being;  and  as  such,  feeling  and  producing,  by  a  kind  of  intelligence, 
all  the  effects  of  pleasure  or  pain  that  can  be  ascribed  to  a  sensitive  being. 
—  Wern.  Club. 

1  To  few  things  were  the  ancients  more  sensitive  than  to  the  honour 
or  unhappiness  of  interment  after  death.  In  various  parts  of  the  sacred 
Scriptures  the  exposure  of  the  inanimate  body  is  threatened  as  a  dreadful 
calamity ;  as  in  the  instance  of  Goliath  to  David  (1  Sam.  xvii.  44) ;  and 
its  infliction  was  felt  to  be  a  reproach,  by  both  Israelites  and  Philistines, 
in  the  case  of  Saul  (1  Sam.  xxxi.  12,  13).  The  instance  of  Elpenor,  in  the 
eleventh  book  of  the  "  Odyssey,"  and  of  Antigone,  in  the  celebrated 
Greek  play  of  "  Sophocles,"  are  proofs  how  strongly  the  same  feeling 
existed  in  Greece.  An  ancient  law  of  the  Romans  said :  "  Where  the 
body  is  interred,  let  the  spot  be  sacred." — Wern.  Club. 

a  "  Sit  tibi  terra  levis"  was  the  earnestly  expressed  wish  of  the  Romans 
over  the  ashes  of  their  friends  ;  and  that  it  might  lie  heavy  on  their  foes, 
was  an  equally  grave  denunciation.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  101 

were  sown  in  her  ;  and  being  once  bred,  to  sustain  them. 
That  they  proved  venomous  the  Fault  was  to  be  laid  upon 
the  Parents  that  engendered  them,  and  not  to  her.  For  she 
entertaineth  no  more  a  Serpent l  after  it  hath  stung  a  Man  : 
nay,  she  requireth  punishment  for  them  that  are  slow  and 
negligent  of  themselves  to  seek  it.  She  bringeth  forth  mecli- 
cinable  Herbs,  and  evermore  produces  Something  good  for 
Man.  Moreover,  it  may  be  believed,  that  in  compassion  to 
us,  she  appointed  Poisons2,  that  when  we  were  weary  of  Life, 
cursed  Famine  (most  adverse  of  all  others  to  the  Merits  of 
the  Earth)  should  not  consume  us  with  pining  Consump- 
tion ;  that  lofty  Precipices  should  not  dash  our  Bodies  to 
pieces  ;  nor  the  preposterous  Punishment  by  the  Halter  dis- 
tort our  Necks,  and  stop  that  Breath  which  we  seek  to  be  rid 
of:  last  of  all,  that  we  might  not  seek  our  Death  in  the  Sea, 
and  so  be  Food  for  Fishes  ;  nor  yet  the  Edge  of  the  Sword 
mangle  our  Body,  and  so  inflict  extreme  Pain.  It  is,  there- 
fore, in  Compassion  to  us  that  she  hath  brought  forth  that 
by  which,  in  one  gentle  and  easy  Draught,  we  might  die 
without  any  Hurt  of  our  Body,  and  without  diminishing  one 
Drop  of  our  Blood  :  without  grievous  Pain,  and  like  them 
that  be  athirst:  that  being  in  this  Manner  dead,  neither 
Fowl  of  the  Air,  nor  wild  Beast,  prey  upon  our  Bodies,  but 

1  We  have  not  met  with  any  thing  to  support  this  strange  opinion  of 
Pliny,  unless  the  following  from  Sir  T.  Browne's  "  Vulgar  Errors  "  may 
be  thought  to  do  so  :— "  Some  veins  of  the  earth,  and  also  whole  regions, 
not  only  destroy  the  life  of  venomous  creatures,  but  also  prevent  their 
productions." — Wern.  Club. 

2  It  was  among  the  most  awful  of  the  customs  of  the  Heathen,  that 
suicide  was  resorted  to  by  even  the  most  excellent  men,  on  very  slight 
occasions.     Not  only  are  there  instances  where  diseases  of  no  great 
severity  were  regarded  as  authorising  this  last  resource,  but  on  the  least 
disappointment  or  failure  of  success  in  a  public  undertaking  it  was  consi- 
dered as  a  point  of  honour,  and  an  instance  of  commendable  courage ;  of 
which  the  case  of  the  illustrious  stoic  Brutus,  at  Philippi,  is  an  eminent 
instance.     Pliny  seems  not  to  have  imagined  that  no  substance  in  nature 
is  really  a  poison,  and  that  the  plants  and  minerals  so  denominated  are 
only  injurious  when  wrongly  or  too  powerfully  administered  ;  their  more 
concentrated  strength,  when  properly  used,  only  rendering  them  the 
better  instruments  of  good.—  Wern.  Club. 


102  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

that  he  should  be  reserved  for  the  Earth,  who  perished  by 
himself  and  for  himself:  and,  to  confess  the  Truth,  the  Earth 
had  bred  the  Remedy  of  all  Miseries,  however  we  have 
made  it  a  Poison  to  our  Life.  For  in  the  same  Manner  we 
also  employ  Iron,  which  we  cannot  possibly  be  without.  And 
yet  we  should  not  do  justly  to  complain,  if  she  had  brought 
it  forth  to  do  hurt.  Surely  to  this  only  Part  of  Nature  we 
are  unthankful,  as  though  she  served  not  Man's  Turn  for  all 
Dainties ;  not  for  Reproach  to  be  misused.  She  is  thrown 
into  the  Sea,  or  to  let  in  Arms  of  the  Sea,  eaten  away  with 
Water.  With  Iron  Tools,  with  Wood,  Fire,  Stone,  Burthens 
of  Corn,  she  is  tormented  every  Hour :  and  all  this  much 
more  for  our  Pleasures  than  to  serve  us  with  Food  and 
Necessaries.  And  yet  these  Misusages  which  she  abideth 
above,  and  in  her  outward  Skin,  may  seem  in  some  Sort 
tolerable.  But  we  pierce  into  her  very  Bowels  in  search  of 
Veins  of  Gold  and  Silver,  Copper  and  Lead.  And  to  seek 
out  Gems  and  some  little  Stones,  we  sink  Pits  deep  in  the 
Ground.  Thus  we  pluck  the  very  Bowels  from  her  to  wear 
on  our  Finger  one  Gem  to  fulfil  our  Pleasure,  How  many 
Hands  are  worn  with  digging,  that  one  Joint  of  our  Finger 
may  shine !  Surely,  if  there  were  any  infernal  Spirits  be- 
neath, ere  this  Time  these  Mines  (to  feed  Covetousness  and 
Luxury)  would  have  brought  them  above  Ground.  Do  we 
wonder,  then,  if  she  hath  brought  forth  some  Things  hurt- 
ful ?  But  savage  Beasts  (I  think)  preserve  her ;  they  keep 
sacrilegious  Hands  from  doing  her  Injury.  Dig  we  not 
amongst  Dragons  and  Serpents  ?  and,  together  with  Veins  of 
Gold,  handle  we  not  the  Roots  of  poisonous  Herbs  ?  Never- 
theless, this  Goddess  we  find  the  more  appeased  for  all  this 
Misusage,  because  the  End  of  all  this  Wealth  tendeth  to 
Wickedness,  to  Murders,  and  Wars,  and  her  whom  we 
drench  with  our  Blood,  we  cover  also  with  unburied  Bones. 
Which,  nevertheless,  as  if  she  did  reproach  us  for  this  Fury, 
she  herself  covereth  in  the  End,  and  hideth  even  the  Wick- 
edness of  Mortals.  Among  other  Imputations  of  an  un- 
thankful Mind,  I  may  allege  this  also,  that  we  be  ignorant 
of  her  Nature. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  103 

CHAPTER  LXIV. 
Of  the  Form  of  the  Earth. 

THE  first  Thing  that  offereth  itself  to  be  considered,  is 
her  Figure,  in  which  by  a  general  Consent  we  all  agree. 
For  surely  we  utter  nothing  more  commonly  than  the  round 
Ball1  of  the  Earth  ;  and  confess  that  it  is  a  Globe  enclosed 
within  two  Poles.  But  yet  the  Form  is  not  that  of  a  perfect 
Globe,  considering  so  great  Height  of  Mountains,  and  such 
Extent  of  Plains;  nevertheless,  if  the  Compass  thereof  might 
be  taken  by  Lines,  the  End  of  those  Lines  would  meet  just 
in  Circuit,  and  prove  the  Figure  to  be  an  accurate  Circle. 
And  this  the  very  Consideration  of  natural  Reason  doth 
convince,  although  there  were  not  those  Causes  which  we 
alleged  about  the  Heaven.  For  in  it  the  hollow  Convexity 
declineth  upon  itself,  and  on  every  Side  resteth  upon  the 
Centre  thereof,  which  is  that  of  the  Earth.  But  this  being 
solid  and  compact,  ariseth  as  if  it  swelled,  and  is  stretched 
without.  The  Heaven  inclineth  toward  the  Centre,  but  the 
Earth  goeth  from  the  Centre ;  whilst  the  World,  with  con- 
tinual Volubility  and  turning  about  it,  driveth  the  huge 
Globe  thereof  into  the  Form  of  a  round  Ball. 

1  The  Egyptian  Cosmogony,  as  delivered  by  Diodorus  Siculus,  de- 
scribes the  earth  as  "rolled  within  itself,  and  turned  continually;"  although 
a  subsequent  idea  was  founded  on  its  being  merely  an  extended  surface, 
where  the  earth  was  inclosed  within  a  field  of  waters,  which  was  again 
encompassed  with  darkness  and  impenetrable  mist.  But  after  what 
Pliny  has  said  in  this,  and  the  immediately  following  chapters,  on  the 
form  of  the  earth,  and  the  proofs  he  has  given  of  its  being  a  globe,  it 
seems  surprising  that  a  contrary  opinion  should  have  prevailed,  even  to 
comparatively  modern  times;  and  especially  among  men  accustomed  to 
regard  every  thing  delivered  by  the  ancients  as  unquestionably  true.  This 
perversity  can  only  be  accounted  for  by  having  made  a  religious  dogma 
of  the  contrary  idea,  on  the  authority  of  some  ill-understood  passages  of 
Scripture.—  Wern.  Club. 


104  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 


CHAPTER  LXV. 

Of  the  Antipodes,  whether  there  be  any  such.     Also  of  the 
Roundness  of  Water. 

THERE  is  here  great  Debate  between  learned  Men ;  and 
contrariwise  of  the  ignorant  Multitude  :  for  they  hold,  that 
Men  are  overspread  on  all  Parts  upon  the  Earth,  and  stand 
one  against  another,  Foot  to  Foot :  also  that  the  Summit  of 
the  Heaven  is  alike  unto  all :  and  in  what  Part  soever  Men 
be,  they  still  tread  after  the  same  Manner  in  the  midst.  But 
the  common  Sort  ask,  How,  then,  it  happeneth,  that  they 
who  are  opposite  against  us,  do  not  fall  into  Heaven  ?  as  if 
there  were  not  a  Reason  also  ready,  That  the  Antipodes 
again  should  wonder  why  we  also  fell  not  off?  Now  there  is 
Reason  that  cometh  between,  carrying  a  Probability  with  it, 
even  to  the  untaught  Multitude,  that  in  a  Globe  of  the  Earth, 
with  many  Ascents,  as  if  its  Figure  resembled  a  Nut  of  the 
Pine  Tree;  yet,  nevertheless,  it  may  be  well  inhabited  in 
every  Place.  But  what  Good  doth  all  this,  when  another 
great  Wonder  ariseth  ?  namely,  that  itself  hangeth,  and 
falleth  not  with  us:  as  if  the  Power  of  that  Spirit1  especially 
enclosed  in  the  World  were  doubted:  or  that  any  Thing 
could  fall  when  Nature  is  repugnant  thereto,  and  affordeth 
no  Place  whither  to  fall :  for  as  there  is  no  Seat  of  Fire,  but 
in  Fire ;  of  Water,  but  in  Water ;  of  Air  and  Spirit,  but  in 
Air ;  even  so  there  is  no  Room  for  Earth  but  in  Earth,  see- 
ing all  the  Elements  besides  are  ready  to  repel  it  from  them. 
Nevertheless,  it  is  wonderful  still  how  it  should  become  a 
Globe,  considering  so  great  Flatness  of  Plains  and  Seas.  Of 
which  Opinion,  Dicearchus  (a  Man  of  the  first  Rank  in 
Learning,)  is  a  Favourer  ;  who,  to  satisfy  the  curious  Inquiry 
of  Kings,  had  a  Commission  to  take  the  Measure  of  Moun- 
tains :  of  which  he  said  that  Pelion,  the  highest,  was  a  Mile- 
and-a-half  high  by  the  Plumb-line;  and  collected  thereby, 

1  What  we  now  know  to  arise  from  the  power  of  gravity,  Pliny  as- 
cribes to  the  Anima  Mundi,  or  vivifying  effect  of  the  soul  of  the  world ; 
with  him,  an  answer  to  all  difficulties.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  1 05 

that  its  Proportion  was  Nothing  in  Comparison  of  the  uni- 
versal Rotundity  of  the  Whole.  But  to  me  this  was  an 
uncertain  Guess  of  his,  since  I  am  not  ignorant  that  certain 
Tops  of  the  Alps,  for  a  long  Tract,  arise  not  under  fifty  Miles 
in  Height. 

But  this  is  it  that  the  common  People  resist  the  most,  if 
they  should  be  forced  to  believe  that  the  Form  of  Water  also 
gathereth  itself  round  at  the  Top.  And  yet  there  is  Nothing 
in  the  Nature  of  Things  more  evident  to  the  Sight ;  for  the 
Drops  every  where,  not  only  as  they  hang,  appear  like  little 
round  Balls ;  but  also  if  they  light  upon  Dust,  or  rest  upon 
the  Down  of  Leaves,  we  see  them  keep  a  perfect  Roundness. 
Also  in  Cups  that  are  filled  brimful,  the  middle  Part  in  the 
Top  swelleth  most.  Which  Things,  considering  the  Thinness 
of  the  Fluid,  and  its  Softness  settling  upon  itself,  are  sooner 
found  out  by  Reason  than  the  Eye.  And  this  is  more  won- 
derful, that  when  Cups  are  filled  to  the  full,  if  a  very  little 
more  Liquor  be  added,  the  overplus  will  run  over  all  about : 
but  it  falleth  out  the  contrary,  if  you  put  in  any  solid 
Weights,  even  if  it  were  to  the  Weight  of  Twenty  Denarii. 
The  Reason  is,  that  Things  received  within,  lift  up  the  Li- 
quor aloft  to  the  Top,  but  poured  upon  the  Tumour  that 
beareth  aloft  above  the  Edges,  it  must  needs  glide  off.  The 
same  is  the  Reason  why  the  Land  cannot  be  seen  by  them 
that  stand  on  the  Deck  of  a  Ship,  but  very  plainly  at  the 
same  time  from  the  Top  of  the  Masts.  Also  as  a  Ship  goeth 
off  from  the  Land,  if  any  Thing  that  shineth  be  fastened  on 
the  Top  of  the  Mast,  it  seemeth  to  go  down  into  the  Sea  by 
little  and  little,  until  at  last  it  is  hidden  entirely.  Last  of 
all,  the  very  Ocean,  which  we  confess  to  be  the  utmost  Bound 
environing  the  whole  Globe  :  by  what  other  Figure  could  it 
hold  together,  since  there  is  no  Bank  beyond  it  to  keep  it 
in?  And  this  also  cometh  to  be  a  Wonder  how  it  happeneth, 
although  the  Sea  grow  to  be  round,  that  the  utmost  Edge 
thereof  falleth  not  down  ?  Against  which,  if  that  the  Seas 
were  plain,  and  of  the  Form  they  seem  to  be,  the  Greek 
Philosophers,  to  their  own  great  Joy  and  Glory,  prove  by 
geometrical  Demonstration,  that  it  cannot  possibly  be  that 
the  Water  should  fall.  For  seeing  that  Waters  run  naturally 


106  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  II. 

from  above  to  the  lower  Parts,  and  that  all  Men  confess  that 
this  is  their  Nature,  and  no  Man  doubteth  that  the  Water  of 
the  Sea  hath  always  come  on  any  Shore  so  far  as  the  Sloping 
would  have  suffered :  doubtless  it  appeareth,  that  the  lower 
a  Thing  is,  the  nearer  it  is  to  the  Centre ;  and  that  all  the 
Lines  which  from  thence  are  sent  out  to  the  next  Waters,  are 
shorter  than  those  which  from  the  first  Waters  reach  to  the 
utmost  Extremity  of  the  Sea.  Hereupon  the  whole  Water, 
from  every  Part  thereof,  bendeth  to  the  Centre,  and  there- 
fore falleth  not  away,  because  it  inclineth  naturally  to  the 
inner  Parts.  And  this  we  must  believe,  that  Nature,  the 
Work-mistress,  framed  it  so  :  to  the  End  that  the  Earth, 
which  being  dry  could  not  by  itself,  without  some  Moisture, 
keep  any  Consistence ;  and  the  Fluid,  likewise,  which  could 
not  abide,  unless  the  Earth  upheld  it,  might  mutually  em- 
brace one  another  ;  the  one  opening  all  the  Creeks,  and  the 
other  running  wholly  into  the  other,  by  the  Means  of  secret 
Veins  within,  without,  and  above,  like  Bands  to  clasp  it ; 
yea,  and  so  break  out  at  the  Tops  of  the  Hills :  whither 
being  partly  carried  by  a  Spirit,  and  partly  expressed  by  the 
Weight  of  the  Earth,  it  mounteth,  as  it  were,  in  Pipes :  and 
so  far  is  it  from  Danger  of  falling  away,  that  it  leapeth  up 
to  the  highest  and  loftiest  Things.  By  which  Reason  it  is 
evident,  why  the  Seas  do  not  increase,  although  so  many 
Rivers  daily  run  into  them. 

CHAPTER  LXVI. 
How  the  Water  is  united  to  the  Earth. 

THE  Earth,  therefore,  in  its  whole  Globe,  is  in  the  midst 
thereof  hemmed  in  with  the  Sea,  that  flows  round  about  it. 
And  this  needeth  not  to  be  sought  out  by  Argument,  for  it  is 
known  already  by  Experience. 

CHAPTER  LXVII. 
Navigation  upon  the  Sea  and  great  Rivers. 

FROM  Gades  and  the  Pillars  of  Hercules,  the  whole  of  the 
West  Sea  is  at  this  Day  sailed  over  in  the  whole  Compass  of 


BOOK  1 1 .]  History  of  Nature.  107 

Spain  and  France.  But  the  North  Ocean  was  for  the  most 
Part  discovered,  under  the  Conduct  of  Divus  Augustus 
Casar1,  who,  with  a  Fleet,  compassed  Germany,  and  as  far 
as  to  the  Cape  of  the  Cimbrians :  and  from  thence  having 
viewed  the  vast  Sea,  or  taken  Knowledge  thereof  by  Report, 
he  passed  to  the  Scythian  Climate  and  those  cold  Coasts 
abounding  with  too  much  Moisture.  For  which  Cause  tKere 
is  no  likelihood,  that  in  those  Parts  the  Seas  are  at  an  End, 
where  the  Power  of  Moisture  predominates.  And  near  it, 
from  the  East,  out  of  the  Indian  Sea,  that  whole  Part  under 
the  same  Clime  which  bendeth  toward  the  Caspian  Sea,  was 
sailed  throughout  by  the  Macedonian  Armies,  when  Seleucus 
and  Antiochus  reigned,  who  commanded  that  Seleucida 
and  Antiochida  should  bear  their  Names.  About  the  Caspian 
Sea,  also,  many  Coasts  of  the  Ocean  have  been  discovered ; 
and  by  Piecemeal,  rather  than  all  at  once,  the  North  of  one 
Side  or  other  hath  been  sailed  or  rowed  over.  But  to  put 
all  out  of  Conjecture,  there  is  a  great  Argument  collected  by 
the  Palus  Maeotis,  whether  it  be  a  Gulf  of  that  Ocean  (as 
many  have  believed)  or  an  overflowing  of  the  same,  divided 
from  it  by  a  narrow  Piece  of  the  Continent.  In  another  Side 
of  Gades,  from  the  same,  West,  a  great  Part  of  the  South 
Gulf,  round  about  Mauritania,  is  at  this  Day  sailed.  And, 
indeed,  the  greater  Part  of  it,  as  well  as  of  the  East,  also  the 
Victories  of  Alexander  the  Great  encompassed  on  every  Side, 
as  far  as  to  the  Arabian  Gulf.  Wherein,  when  Cams  Ccesar 
the  son  of  Augustus  warred  in  those  Parts,  the  Marks  are 
reported  to  have  been  seen  remaining  from  the  Spaniards' 
Shipwreck.  Hanno,  likewise,  in  the  Time  that  the  Power  of 
Carthage  flourished,  sailed  round  from  Gades  to  the  utmost 
Bounds  of  Arabia2,  and  set  down  that  Voyage  in  Writing : 

1  This  can  only  refer  to  an  expedition,  mentioned  by  Suetonius  in  his 
life  of  the  Emperor  Claudius,  of  Drusus,  the  son  of  Livia ;  who,  while 
commanding  in  the  Rhetian  and  German  wars,  was  the  first  of  the  Romans 
that  navigated  the  Northern  Ocean. —  Wem.  Club. 

2  The  only  fragment  of  the  geographical  knowledge  of  the  Cartha- 
ginians that  has  come  down  to  our  times  is  the  "  Periplus"  of  Hanno.    It 
is  printed  in  Hudson's  "  Geographic  Veteris  Scriptores  Graeciae,"  4  vols. 


108  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

like  as  also  Himilco,  at  the  same  Time,  was  sent  out  to  dis- 
cover the  remote  Coasts  of  Europe.  Moreover,  Cornelius 
Nepos  writeth,  that  in  his  Time  a  certain  Eudoxus1,  when  he 
fled  from  King  Lathyrus,  departed  out  of  the  Arabian  Gulf, 

8vo.  Leipsic ;  and  has  been  investigated  by  three  competent  geographers. 
First,  by  Bougainville,  who  conceives  Hanno  to  have  reached  the  Gulf  of 
Benin ;  next,  by  Major  Rennell,  who  carries  his  course  only  to  a  little 
beyond  Sierra  Leone ;  and  lastly,  by  M.  Gosselin,  who  insists  upon  termi- 
nating it  about  the  river  Nun.  According  to  these  authorities,  Pliny  has 
greatly  extended  the  voyage  of  Hanno,  when  he  says  he  reached  the  utmost 
bounds  of  Arabia.  Herodotus  does  not  seem  to  have  been  informed  of  this 
voyage  of  Hanno,  he  merely  says  ("  Melpomene,"  xliii.) : — "  The  Cartha- 
ginians affirm,  that  they  ascertained  that  Libya  is  surrounded  by  the  sea." 
— Wern.  Club. 

1  Strabo  has  thrown  some  discredit  on  the  voyage  of  Eudoxus  to  make 
the  circuit  of  Africa :  but  he  does  not  seem  to  adduce  any  argument  strong 
enough  to  controvert  the  general  belief  of  antiquity,  that  repeated  at- 
tempts were  made  by  Eudoxus  to  explore  the  unknown  coasts  of  the 
African  continent.  He  was  a  native  of  Cyzicus,  and  employed  first  by 
Ptolemy  Euergetes,  and  afterwards  at  his  own  instigation,  in  several 
maritime  expeditions.  A  digest  of  the  narratives  of  Strabo  respecting 
these  voyages  of  Eudoxus,  may  be  seen  in  Murray's  "  Encyclopedia  of 
Geography,"  p.  14. 

That  the  circumnavigation  of  Africa  was  really  accomplished,  even 
prior  to  the  time  of  Herodotus,  we  learn  from  "  Melpomene,"  xlii.  "  For 
Libya  is  clearly  surrounded  by  the  sea,  except  so  much  of  it  as  borders  on 
Asia ;  this,  Neco,  king  of  the  Egyptians,  was  the  first  we  know  of  to 
demonstrate.  That  prince,  having  ceased  his  excavations  for  the  canal 
leading  out  of  the  Nile  into  the  Arabian  Gulf,  despatched  certain  natives 
of  Phoenicia  on  shipboard,  with  orders  to  sail  back  through  the  Pillars 
of  Hercules,  even  into  the  North  Sea,  and  so  make  good  their  return  into 
Egypt.  The  Phosnicians  of  consequence  having  departed  out  of  the  Ery- 
threan  Sea,  proceeded  on  their  voyage  in  the  Southern  Sea  :  when  it  was 
autumn,  they  would  push  ashore,  and  sowing  the  land,  whatever  might 
be  the  part  of  Libya  they  had  reached,  await  the  harvest  time :  having 
reaped  their  corn,  they  used  to  continue  their  voyage :  thus,  after  the 
lapse  of  two  years,  having  in  the  third  doubled  the  Pillars  of  Hercules, 
they  came  back  into  Egypt ;  and  stated  what  is  not  credible  to  me,  but 
may  be  so,  perhaps,  to  some,  that  in  their  circumnavigation  of  Libya  they 
had  the  sun  on  the  right.  Thus  was  Libya  first  known  to  be  surrounded 
by  the  sea." — LAURENT'S  Herodotus. 

"  Herodotus,"  says  Murray,  "  seems  inclined  to  credit  this  information, 
unless  on  the  ground  of  one  general  statement,  -<-  that  they  had  the  sun 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  109 

and  held  on  his  Course  as  far  as  Gades.  And  Ccelius  Antipater, 
long  before  him,  reporteth,  that  he  saw  the  Man  who  had 
sailed  from  Spain  to  Ethiopia,  in  pursuit  of  Merchandise. 
The  same  Nepos  maketh  Report  concerning  the  compassing 
about  of  the  North,  that  unto  Qu.  Metellus  Celer  (Colleague 
to-C.  Afranius  in  the  Consulship,  but  at  that  Time  Proconsul 
in  Gaul)  certain  Indians  were  given  by  a  King  of  the  Sue- 
vians1,  who,  as  they  sailed  out  of  India,  for  Traffic,  as  Mer- 

on  the  right ;  which  being  the  very  thing  that  should  have  happened, 
and  disbelieved  only  through  his  ignorance,  strongly  fortifies  our  inclina- 
tion to  credit  the  story." — Wern.  Club. 

1  At  an  early  period  the  Phoenicians,  and  probably  the  Greeks,  did 
not  scruple  to  entrap,  and  sell  for  slaves,  strangers  and  others  who  had 
never  kindled  their  resentment.  In  the  fourteenth  book  of  the  "  Odys- 
sey," Ulysses  represents  himself  as  having  narrowly  escaped  a  snare  of  this 
kind;  and  as  the  whole  narrative  is  an  artful  fiction,  intended  to  have 
the  appearance  of  truth  to  an  Ithacan  peasant,  the  practice  of  kidnapping 
slaves  could  not  then  have  appeared  incredible  to  any  inhabitant  of  that 
island : — 

"  A  false  Phoenician,  of  insidious  mind, 
Versed  in  vile  arts,  and  foe  to  humankind, 
With  semblance  fair  invites  me  to  his  home ; 
I  seized  the  proffer  (ever  fond  to  roam)  : 
Domestic  in  his  faithless  roof  I  stay'd, 
Till  the  swift  sun  his  annual  circle  made. 
To  Libya  then  he  meditates  the  way ; 
With  guileful  art  a  stranger  to  betray, 
And  sell  to  bondage  in  a  foreign  land : 
Much  doubting,  yet  compell'd,  I  quit  the  strand. 
*  *  *  *  * 

*  *    but  Jove's  intent 

Was  yet  to  save  the  oppress'd  and  innocent." — POPE. 

Tacitus  ("Agricola,"  cap.  xxviii.)  mentions  an  instance  of  shipwrecked 
persons  having  been  treated  as  pirates,  and  sold  into  slavery.  He  is  speak- 
ing of  a  cohort  of  the  Usipians  serving  in  Britain,  who,  having  left  the 
island  in  three  light  galleys,  became  the  sport  of  winds  and  waves.  In 
this  distress  they  sailed  round  the  extremity  of  the  island,  and,  through 
want  of  skill  in  navigation,  were  wrecked  on  the  Continent,  where  they 
were  treated  as  pirates,  first  by  the  Suevians,  and  afterwards  by  the  Fri- 
sians. Being  sold  to  slavery,  and  in  the  way  of  commerce  turned  over  to 
different  masters,  some  of  them  reached  the  Roman  settlements  on  the 
banks  of  the  Rhine,  and  there  grew  famous  for  their  sufferings,  and  the 


110  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

chants,  were  driven  by  tempestuous  Weather,  and  cast  upon 
Germany.  Thus  the  Seas  flowing  on  every  Side  about  this 
divided  Globe,  bereave  us  of  a  Part  of  the  World :  so  that 
neither  from  thence  hither,  nor  from  hence  thither,  is  there 
a  Passage.  The  Contemplation  of  this,  serving  to  discover 
the  Vanity  of  Men,  seenieth  to  require  that  I  should  submit 
to  the  Eye,  how  great  this  is,  whatever  it  be ;  and  wherein 
there  is  nothing  sufficient  to  satisfy  the  Appetite  of  every 
Man. 

CHAPTER  LXVIII. 

What  Portion  of  the  Earth  is  habitable. 

Now,  in  the  first  Place,  it  seems  to  be  computed  as  if  the 
Earth  were  the  just  Half  of  the  Globe,  and  that  no  Portion 
of  it  were  cut  off  by  the  Ocean:  which  notwithstanding, 
clasping  round  about  all  the  midst  thereof,  yielding  forth 
and  receiving  again  all  other  Waters,  and  what  Exhalations 
go  out  into  Clouds,  and  feeding  the  very  Stars,  so  many  as 
they  be,  and  of  such  great  magnitude  ;  what  a  mighty  Space 
will  it  be  thought  to  take  up,  and  how  little  can  there  be  left 
for  men  to  inhabit !  Surely  the  possession  of  so  vast  a  Mass 
must  be  excessive  and  infinite.  Add  to  this,  that  of  that 
which  is  left,  the  Heaven  hath  taken  away  the  greater  Part. 
For  whereas  there  be  of  the  Heaven  five  Parts,  which  they 

bold  singularity  of  their  voyage.  —  See  the  "  Agricola  "  of  Tacitus,  cap. 
xxviii.,  translated  by  Murphy. 

It  would  even  appear  that  such  distressed  strangers  were  deemed  a 
proper  sacrifice  to  the  gods :  Herodotus  reports  it  as  a  tradition  (book  ii.) 
that  when  Hercules,  in  his  journeyings,  arrived  in  Egypt,  the  Egyptians 
crowned  him  with  a  garland,  and  designed  to  sacrifice  him  to  Jupiter,  if 
he  had  not  delivered  himself  by  his  great  strength.  The  objection  of  the 
historian  to  this  story,  on  the  ground  of  the  unbloody  sacrifices  of  the 
Egyptians,  is  sufficiently  answered  by  the  fact  that  they  were  in  the  habit 
of  sacrificing  red-haired  men  to  their  evil  deity.  Again,  in  his  fourth  book, 
he  says,  that  the  Taurians,  a  people  of  Scythia,  were  accustomed  to  sacrifice 
to  a  virgin  all  strangers  that  suffered  shipwreck  on  their  coast,  and  all 
Grecian  sailors  they  were  able  to  seize.  The  people  of  Israel,  on  the  con- 
trary, were  commanded  by  their  law  kindly  to  welcome  strangers;  for 
they  themselves  had  been  strangers  in  a  foreign  land. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  1 1 1 

call  Zones1 :  all  that  lieth  under  the  two  utmost,  on  both 
Sides  about  the  Poles,  namely,  the  one  which  is  called  Sep- 
tentrio,  or  the  North,  and  the  other  over  against  it,  named 
the  South,  is  overcharged  with  extreme  Cold  and  perpetual 
Frost.  In  both  Zones  it  is  always  dim,  and  because  the 
Aspect  of  the  milder  Planets  is  diverted  from  thence,  the 
Light  that  is,  sheweth  but  little,  and  appeareth  white  with  the 
Frost  only.  But  the  Middle  of  the  Earth,  in  which  the  Sun 
keepeth  his  Course,  scorched  and  burnt  with  Flames,  is  pre- 
sently parched  with  its  hot  Gleams2.  Those  two  only  on 
either  Side,  between  this  burnt  Zone  and  the  two  frozen,  are 
Temperate :  and  even  those  have  not  a  Passage  one  to  the 

1  The  poetical  account  of  Ovid,  in  his  "  Metamorphoses,"  expresses 
the  belief  of  the  ancients  in  this  division. —  Wern,  Club. 

2  Whatever  acquaintance  with  the  remote  regions  of  the  earth  the 
Phoenicians  and  Carthaginians  might  have  acquired,  was  concealed  from 
the  rest  of  mankind  with  mercantile  jealousy ;  and  every  thing  relative 
to  the  course  of  their  navigation  was  not  only  a  mystery  of  trade,  but  a 
secret  of  state.     Hence  the  ignorance  of  geography  manifested  by  Pliny 
and  other  writers,  long  after  these  celebrated  voyagers  had  effected  the 
circumnavigation  of  Africa.     Polybius,  whose  history  was  written  about 
150  years  B.  c.,  and  who  was  particularly  distinguished  by  his  attention 
to  geographical  researches,  affirms  that  it  was  not  known,  in  his  time, 
whether  Africa  was  a  continued  continent  stretching  to  the  south,  or 
whether  it  was  encompassed  by  the  sea.     Strabo  mentions,  indeed,  the 
voyage  of  Eudoxus,  but  treats  it  as  a  fabulous  tale :  and  Ptolemy,  the 
most  inquisitive  and  learned  of  all  the  ancient  geographers,  was  equally 
unacquainted  with  any  parts  of  Africa  situated  a  few  degrees  beyond  the 
Equinoctial  Line ;  for  he  supposes  that  this  great  continent  was  not 
surrounded  by  the  sea,  but  that  it  stretched,  without  interruption,  to- 
wards the  South  Pole ;  and  he  so  far  mistakes  its  true  figure,  that  he 
describes  it  as  becoming  broader  and  broader  as  it  advances  towards  the 
South. 

The  notion  of  the  ancients  concerning  such  an  excessive  degree  of  heat 
in  the  Torrid  Zone  as  rendered  it  uninhabitable,  and  their  persisting  in 
this  error  long  after  they  began  to  have  some  commercial  intercourse  with 
several  parts  of  India  lying  within  the  Tropics,  is  very  extraordinary. 
Pliny,  in  this  chapter,  falls  in  with  both  these  errors  :  and  Cicero  ("  Som- 
nium  Scipionis")  holds  the  same  opinion, — and  other  authorities  might  be 
adduced. — See  the  Notes  to  Robertson's  "  History  of  America,"  where  he 
attempts  to  account  for  the  apparent  inconsistency  of  the  ancients  with 
respect  to  their  theory  and  experience. — Wern.  Club. 


1 12  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II . 

other,  by  .Reason  of  the  burning  Heat  of  the  Planet.  Thus 
the  Heaven  hath  taken  from  the  Earth  three  Parts  :  and 
what  the  Ocean  hath  plucked  from  it  besides,  is  uncertain. 
And  even  that  one  Portion  remaining  unto  us,  I  know  not 
whether  it  be  not  even  in  greater  Danger.  For  the  same 
Ocean  entering  (as  we  will  shew)  into  many  Creeks,  keepeth 
a  Roaring  against  the  other  Seas  within  the  Earth,  and 
so  near  cometh  unto  them,  that  the  Arabian  Gulf  is  not  from 
the  Egyptian  Sea  above  115  Miles:  the  Caspian  likewise 
from  the  Pontic  no  more  than  375.  And  the  same  floweth 
between,  and  entereth  into  so  many  Arms,  as  thereby  it 
divideth  Africa,  Europe,  and  Asia  asunder.  What  a  Quan- 
tity of  the  Land  it  taketh  up  may  be  reckoned  at  this  Day 
by  the  Measure  of  so  many  Rivers  and  Marshes.  Add 
thereto  the  Lakes  and  Pools :  and  take  also  from  the  Earth 
the  high  Mountains,  bearing  their  Heads  aloft  into  the  Sky, 
so  as  hardly  the  Eye  can  reach  their  Heights;  with  the 
Woods  and  steep  Descents  of  the  Valleys,  the  Wildernesses, 
and  Wilds  left  desert  for  a  thousand  Causes.  These,  so  many 
Pieces  of  the  Earth,  or  rather  as  most  have  written,  this  little 
Point  of  the  World  (for  surely  the  Earth  is  nothing  else  in 
Comparison  of  the  whole)  is  the  only  Matter  and  Seat  of  our 
Glory  :  here  we  seek  for  Honours,  here  we  exercise  our 
Dominion  :  here  we  covet  Wealth :  here  all  Mankind  is  set 
upon  Turbulence  :  here  we  raise  Wars  even  between  Citizens 
of  the  same  Country :  and  with  mutual  Murders  we  make 
more  Room  in  the  Earth^  And  to  let  pass  the  public  Fury 
of  Nations  abroad,  this  is  it  wherein  we  drive  out  our  Neigh- 
bours on  our  Borders,  and  by  Stealth  dig  Turf  from  our 
Neighbour's  Soil  to  put  it  unto  our  own :  and  when  a  Man 
hath  extended  his  Lands,  and  gotten  Countries  to  himself  far 
and  near,  what  a  goodly  deal  of  the  Earth  doth  he  enjoy ! 
but  if  he  extends  his  Bounds  to  the  full  of  his  Covetous- 
ness,  what  Portion  thereof  shall  he  hold  when  at  last  he  is 
dead? 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  113 


CHAPTER  LXIX. 
That  the  Earth  is  in  the  midst  of  the  World. 

THAT  the  Earth  is  in  the  midst  of  the  whole  World, 
appeareth  by  undoubted  Reasons :  but  most  evidently  by  the 
equal  Hours  of  the  Equinox.  For,  unless  it  were  in  the 
midst,  the  Instruments  called  Dioptrce  have  proved  that 
Nights  and  Days  could  not  be  found  equal :  and  those  In- 
struments, above  all  other,  confirm  the  same  :  seeing  that  in 
the  Equinox,  by  the  same  Line,  both  Rising  and  Setting  of 
the  Sun  are  seen  ;  but  the  Summer  Sun  rising,  and  the  Win- 
ter setting,  by  their  own  several  Lines.  Which  could  by  no 
means  happen  if  the  Earth  resteth  not  in  the  Centre. 

« 

CHAPTER  LXX. 

Of  the  Unequal  Rising  of  the  Stars:  of  the  Eclipse,  both 
where  and  how  it  cometh. 

THERE  are  three  Circles  closed  within  the  Zones  afore- 
named, which  distinguish  the  Inequalities  of  the  Days : 
which  are,  the  (Summer)  Solstitial  Tropic,  from  the  highest 
Part  of  the  Zodiac,  in  regard  of  us,  toward  the  North  Clime  ; 
and  against  it,  another  called  the  Winter  Tropic,  toward  the 
Southern  Pole  :  and  in  like  Manner  the  Equinoctial,  which 
goeth  in  the  midst  of  the  Zodiac  Circle.  The  Cause  of  the 
rest,  which  we  wonder  at,  is  in  the  Figure  of  the  Earth  itself, 
which,  together  with  the  Water,  is,  by  the  same  Arguments, 
known  to  be  like  a  Globe :  for  so,  doubtless,  it  cometh  to 
pass,  that  with  us  the  Stars  about  the  North  Pole  never  set ; 
and  those  contrariwise  of  the  South,  never  rise.  And  again, 
those  which  are  here  be  not  seen  of  them,  by  Reason  that  the 
Globe  of  the  Earth  swelleth  up  in  the  midst  between.  Again, 
Trogloditine,  and  Egypt  bordering  upon  it,  never  see  the 
North  Pole  Stars :  neither  hath  Italy  a  Sight  of  Canopus,  or 
that  which  they  name  Berenice's  Hair.  Likewise  another, 
which,  under  the  Empire  of  Augustus,  men  surnamed  Ccesaris 

H 


1 14  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  1 1 . 

Thronon*:  which  yet  are  remarkable  Stars.  And  so  evidently 
bendeth  the  Convexity  of  the  Earth,  that  Canopus  at  Alex- 
andria seemeth  to  the  Beholders  elevated  above  the  Earth 
almost  one-fourth  Part  of  a  Sign  ;  but  at  Rhodes,  the  same 
appeareth  almost  to  touch  the  very  Horizon,  and  in  Pontus, 
where  the  Elevation  of  the  North  Pole  is  highest,  it  is  not 
seen  at  all :  yea,  and  this  same  Pole  at  Rhodes  is  hidden, 
but  more  in  Alexandria.  In  Arabia  it  is  all  hid  at  the  first 
Watch  of  the  Night  in  November ;  but  at  the  second,  it  is 
visible.  In  Meroe,  at  Midsummer,  in  the  Evening,  it  ap- 
peareth for  a  while  ;  but  some  few  Days  before  the  Rising 
of  Arcturus  it  is  seen  with  the  very  Dawning  of  the  Day. 
Sailors,  by  their  Voyages,  come  to  the  Knowledge  of  these 
Stars  most  of  any  other,  by  Reason  that  some  Seas  are  oppo- 
site unto  some  Stars ;  but  others  lie  flat  and  incline  forward 
to  others  :  so  that  also  those  Pole  Stars  appear  suddenly,  as 
rising  out  of  the  Sea,  which  lay  hidden  before  under  the 
winding  Compass  of  a  Ball.  For  the  Heaven  (Mundus) 
riseth  not  aloft  in  this  higher  Pole,  as  some  Men  have  said ; 
for  if  so,  these  Stars  should  be  seen  in  every  Place  :  but  those 
that  to  the  nearest  Observers  are  supposed  to  be  higher,  the 
same  seem  to  them  afar  off  to  be  immersed  in  the  Sea.  And 
as  this  North  Pole  seemeth  to  be  aloft  to  those  that  are 
situated  directly  under  it,  so  to  them  that  be  removed  so  far 
as  the  other  Devexity  or  Fall  of  the  Earth,  those  abovesaid 
Stars  rise  up  aloft  there,  while  these  decline  downward  which 
here  were  mounted  on  high.  Which  Thing  could  not  possibly 
fall  out  but  in  the  Figure  of  a  Ball.  And  hence  it  is,  that 
the  Inhabitants  of  the  East  perceive  not  the  Eclipses  of  the 
Sun  and  Moon  in  the  Evening,  no  more  than  those  that 
dwell  West  in  the  Morning :  but  those  that  be  at  Noon  in  the 
South  they  often  see.  At  the  Time  that  Alexander  the  Great 
obtained  his  famous  Victory  at  Arbela,  it  is  said  that  the 
Moon  was  eclipsed  at  the  second  Hour  of  the  Night :  but  this 
Eclipse  was  at  the  Time  of  her  Rising  in  Sicily.  The  Eclipse 

1  Ccesaris  Thronon:  a  new  name  affixed  to  an  old  constellation  by 
some  flattering  Greek ;  but  of  which  no  further  clue  remains.  The  name 
is  not  found  in  any  other  writer. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  115 

of  the  Sun  which  happened  before  the  Kalends  of  May,  when 
Vipsanus  and  Fonteius  were  Consuls  (and  that  was  not  many 
Years  past)  was  seen  in  Campania  between  the  seventh  and 
eighth  Hours  of  the  Day  :  but  Corbulo  (a  Commander  then 
in  Armenia)  made  Report,  that  it  was  seen  there  between  the 
tenth  and  eleventh  Hours  of  the  same  Day :  which  was  be- 
cause the  Compass  of  the  Globe  discovereth  and  hideth  some 
Things  to  some,  and  other  to  others.  But  if  the  Earth  were 
level,  all  Things  should  appear  at  once  to  all  Men  ;  for  neither 
would  one  Night  be  longer  than  another,  nor  would  the  Day  of 
twelve  Hours  appear  equal  to  any  but  to  those  that  are  seated 
in  the  midst  of  the  Earth,  which  now  in  all  Parts  agree  toge- 
ther alike. 

CHAPTER  LXXI. 

What  is  the  Reason  of  the  Daylight  upon  the  Earth? 

AND  hence  it  is,  that  it  is  neither  Night  nor  Day  at  one 
Time  in  all  Parts  of  the  World ;  because  the  Opposition  of 
the  Globe  bringeth  Night,  and  the  Circuit  thereof  the  Day. 
This  is  known  by  many  Experiments1.  In  Africa  and  Spain 
there  were  raised  by  Annibal,  high  Watch-towers  :  and  in 
Asia,  for  the  Fear  of  Pirates,  the  like  Help  of  Beacons  was 
erected.  Wherein  it  was  observed  oftentimes,  that  the  Fires 
giving  Warning  before  (which  were  set  on  Fire  at  the  sixth 
Hour  of  the  Day),  were  descried  by  them  that  were  farthest 
off  in  Asia,  at  the  third  Hour  of  the  Night.  Philonides,  the 
Courier  of  the  same  Alexander,  despatched  in  nine  Hours  of 
the  Day  1200  Stadia,  as  far  as  from  Sicyone  to  Elis :  and 
from  thence  again  (although  he  went  down  Hill  all  the  Way) 
he  returned  oftentimes,  but  not  before  the  third  Hour  of  the 
Night.  The  Cause  was,  because  he  had  the  Sun  with  him  in 
his  Setting  out ;  and  in  his  Return  to  Sicyon  he  went  against 
it,  and  ere  he  came  home,  left  it  in  the  West  behind.  Which 
is  the  Reason  also,  that  they  who  by  Daylight  sail  Westward 
in  the  shortest  Day  of  the  Year,  pass  along  more  Way  than 
those  who  sail  all  the  Night  long  at  the  same  Time,  because 
the  others  accompany  the  Sun. 

1  These  effects  of  longitude  are  either  greatly  exaggerated  or  untrue. 
-—  Wem.  Club. 


116  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  II. 

CHAPTER  LXXII. 

The  Gnomonic  Art  of  the  same  Matter :  and  also  of  the  first 

Dial 

ALSO  the  Instruments  serving  for  the  Hours  will  not 
serve  for  all  Places  :  but  in  every  300  Stadia,  or  500  at  the 
farthest,  the  Shadows  that  the  Sun  casteth  are  changed  ;  and 
therefore  the  Shadow  of  the  Style  in  the  Dial,  which  they 
call  the  Gnomon,  in  Egypt,  at  Noon,  in  the  equinoctial  Day, 
is  little  more  in  length  than  half  the  Gnomon.  But  in  the 
city  of  Rome  the  Shadow  wanteth  the  ninth  Part  of  the 
Gnomon.  In  the  Town  of  Ancona  it  is  longer  by  a  thirty- 
fifth  Part.  But  in  that  Part  of  Italy  which  is  called  Venice, 
at  the  same  Time  and  Hour  the  Shadow  and  the  Gnomon 
are  of  one  Length. 

CHAPTER  LXXIII. 
Where  and  when  there  be  no  Shadows. 

IN  like  Manner  they  say,  that  in  the  Town  of  Syene 
(which  is  above  Alexandria  fifty  Stadia),  at  Noon,  in  the 
midst  of  Summer,  there  is  no  Shadow :  and  that  for  Experi- 
ment thereof,  a  Well  that  was  sunk  in  the  Ground  was  lighted 
to  the  Bottom ;  whereby  it  appeareth  that  the  Sun  at  that 
Time  is  directly  over  that  Place.  Which  also  at  the  same 
Time  happeneth  in  India,  above  the  River  Hypasis,  as  Onesi- 
critus  hath  written.  And  it  is  known  that  in  Berenice,  a 
City  of  the  Trogloditse,  and  from  thence  4820  Stadia  in  the 
same  Country,  at  the  Town  of  Ptolemais  (which  was  built  at 
first  on  the  Border  of  the  Red  Sea,  for  the  Pleasure  of  hunt- 
ing Elephants),  the  same  is  to  be  seen  forty-five  Days  before 
the  Summer  Solstice,  and  as  long  after  :  so  that  for  the 
Space  of  ninety  Days  all  Shadows  are  cast  toward  the  South. 
Again,  in  the  Island  of  Meroe,  which  is  the  capital  Place  of 
the  Ethiopian  Nation,  and  is  inhabited  5000  Stadia  from 
Syene,  upon  the  River  Nile,  twice  in  the  Year  the  Shadows 
disappear ;  which  is,  when  the  Sun  is  in  the  eighteenth  De- 
grees of  Taurus ,  and  in  the  fourteenth  of  Leo.  In  the  Coun- 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  1 1 7 

try  of  the  Oretes,  in  India,  there  is  a  Mountain  named  Maleus, 
near  which  the  Shadows  in  Summer  are  cast  into  the  South, 
and  in  Winter  to  the  North.  There,  for  fifteen  Nights  only, 
the  Constellation  Septentrio  is  to  be  seen.  In  the  same 
India,  at  Patales  (a  famous  Port),  the  Sun  riseth  on  the 
right  Hand,  and  Shadows  fall  to  the  South.  While  Alex- 
ander was  there,  Onesicritus,  an  Officer  of  his,  wrote  that  it 
was  observed  there,  that  the  North  Star  was  seen  the  first 
Part  only  of  the  Night :  also  that  in  such  Places  of  India  where 
there  were  no  Shadows,  the  North  Star  did  not  appear :  and 
that  those  Quarters  were  called  Ascia*9  where  they  kept  no 
Reckoning  of  Hours. 

CHAPTER  LXXIV. 

Where  Twice  in  the  Year  the  Shadows  fall  in  contrary 
Directions. 

BUT  throughout  all  Trogloditice,  -Eratosthenes  hath  writ- 
ten, that  the  Shadows  twice  a- Year,  for  forty-five  Days,  fall 
in  contrary  Directions. 

CHAPTER  LXXV. 
Where  the  Day  is  longest,  and  where  shortest. 

IT  cometh  thus  to  pass,  that  by  the  variable  Increment  of 
the  Daylight,  the  longest  Day  in  Meroe  doth  comprehend 
twelve  equinoctial  Hours,  and  eight  Parts  of  one  Hour:  but 
in  Alexandria,  fourteen  Hours ;  in  Italy,  fifteen ;  in  Britain, 
seventeen,  where,  in  Summer,  the  Nights  being  light,  by 
infallible  Experience  shew  that  which  Reason  forceth  to  be- 
lieve :  namely,  that  at  Midsummer,  as  the  Sun  approacheth 
near  to  the  Pole  of  the  World,  the  Places  of  the  Earth  lying 
underneath,  have  Day  continually  for  six  Months:  and  con- 
trariwise, Night,  when  the  Sun  is  remote  as  far  as  Bruma. 
And  this,  Pythias  of  Massiles  hath  written  of  Thule2,  an 
Island  distant  Northward  from  Britain  six  Days'  sailing  ;  and 

1  That  is,  without  shadow. 

2  This  is  judged  to  be  Iceland.    The  geography  of  Britain  will  be 
found  in  the  fourth  book.  —  Wern.  Club. 


118  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  II. 

some  affirm  the  same  of  Mona,  which  is  an  Island  distant 
from  Camalodunum,  a  Town  of  Britain,  about  two  hundred 
Miles. 

CHAPTER  LXXVI. 

Of  the  Horologium,  or  Dial. 

THIS  Understanding  of  Shadows,  and  what  is  named 
Gnonomice,  Anaximenes  the  Milesian,  the  Disciple  of  Anaxi- 
mander  above-named,  discovered  :  and  he  was  the  first  also 
that  shewed  in  Lacedsemon  the  Horologe  (or  Dial1)  which 
they  call  Sciotericon. 

CHAPTER  LXXVII. 
How  the  Days  are  observed. 

THE  very  Day  itself  Men  have,  after  divers  Manners, 
observed.  The  Babylonians  count  for  Day  all  the  Time  be- 
tween two  Sun-risings  ;  the  Athenians  between  the  Set- 
tings ;  The  Umbrians  from  Noon  to  Noon  :  but  all  the 
common  Sort  from  Daylight  until  it  be  dark  :  the  Roman 
Priests,  and  those  that  have  defined  a  Civil  Day,  and  likewise 
the  Egyptians  and  Hipparchus,  from  Midnight  to  Midnight2. 
That  the  Spaces  between  Lights  are  greater  or  less  betwixt 
Sunrisings,  near  the  Solstices,  than  the  Equinoctials  ap- 
peareth  by  this :  that  the  Position  of  the  Zodiac,  about  the 
Middle  Parts  thereof,  is  more  oblique ;  but  toward  the  Sol- 
stice more  direct. 

CHAPTER  LXXVIII. 
The  Reason  of  the  Difference  of  Nations. 

HEREUNTO  we  must  annex  such  Things  as  are  linked  to 
celestial  Causes.  For  it  is  beyond  doubt  that  the  Ethiopians, 

1  The  Greeks  were  accustomed  to  regard  as  discoverers  those  who  first 
made  any  thing  known  to  their  nation.     But  the  dial  was  in  use  at  the 
palace  of  Ahaz  at  Jesusalem,  nearly  150  years  before  the  time  that  Pliny 
mentions. — Wern.  Club. 

2  The  Jews  began  their  day  from  the  first  appearance  of  stars  in  the 
evening  ;  believing  this  to  mark  the  period  when  creation  began  to  be  set 
in  order,  and  time  to  be  measured.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  1 19 

by  Reason  of  the  Sun's  Vicinity,  are  scorched  with  the  Heat 
thereof,  like  to  them  that  be  burnt,  having  their  Beards  and 
Hair  curled.  Also,  that  in  the  opposite  Climate  of  the 
World  to  it,  in  the  frozen  Regions,  the  People  have  white 
Skins,  Hair  growing  long,  and  straight,  and  yellow;  but  they 
be  fierce  by  Reason  of  the  rigorous  Cold  :  howbeit,  the  one, 
as  well  as  the  other,  in  this  Change,  are  dull :  and  the  very 
Legs  argue  the  Temperature.  For  in  the  Ethiopians  the 
Juice  is  drawn  upward  again  by  the  Nature  of  Heat :  but 
among  the  northern  Nations  the  same  is  driven  to  the  infe- 
rior Parts,  because  Moisture  is  apt  to  fall  downward.  Here 
are  bred  hurtful  wild  Beasts :  but  there  are  found  Crea- 
tures of  a  Variety  of  Shapes ;  and  especially  Fowls  and  Birds 
of  many  Forms :  they  are  tall  of  Stature,  as  well  in  one  Part 
as  the  other :  in  the  hot  Regions,  by  occasion  of  the  natural 
Tendency  of  Fire  ;  in  the  other,  through  the  Nourishment  by 
Moisture.  But  in  the  Midst  of  the  Earth  there  is  an  whole- 
some Mixture  from  both  Sides ;  the  whole  Tract  is  fruitful 
for  all  Things,  and  the  Habit  of  Men's  Bodies  of  a  balanced 
Constitution.  In  the  Colour,  also,  there  existeth  a  great 
Temperature.  The  Manners  of  the  People  are  gentle,  their 
Senses  clear,  their  Capacity  fertile  and  capable  of  all  Things 
within  the  Compass  of  Nature.  They  also  bear  sovereign 
Rule,  and  sway  Empires,  which  those  uttermost  Nations 
never  had :  yet  true  it  is,  that  even  they  who  are  out 
of  the  Temperate  Zones  may  not  consent  to  be  subject  nor 
accommodate  themselves  unto  these  :  for  such  is  their 
savage  Nature  that  it  urgeth  them  to  living  solitary  by 
themselves. 

CHAPTER  LXXIX. 

Of  Earthquakes*. 

THE  Babylonians  were  of  Opinion,  that  Earthquakes  and 
Chasms,  and  all  other  Occurrences  of  this  Nature,  are  occa- 

1  The  definition  of  an  earthquake  is,  —  the  transit  of  a  wave  of  elastic 
compression  in  any  direction,  from  vertically  upwards,  to  horizontally  in 
any  azimuth,  through  the  surface  and  crust  of  the  earth,  from  any  centre 
of  impulse  (whether  producing  flexure  or  fracture),  or  from  more  than 


120  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  IF. 

sioned  by  the  Influence  of  the  Planets  :  bat  of  those  three 
only  to  which  they  attribute  Lightnings.  And  it  is  effected 
by  the  Means  of  their  keeping  their  Course  with  the  Sun,  or 
meeting  with  him :  and  especially  when  this  Concurrence  is 
about  the  Quadratures  of  the  Heaven.  And  if  it  be  true,  as 
it  is  reported,  of  Anaximander,  the  Milesian  Natural  Philo- 
sopher, his  Foreknowledge  of  Things  was  excellent  and  wor- 
thy of  Immortality  :  for  they  say  he  forewarned  the  Lacede- 
monians to  look  well  to  their  City  and  Dwelling-houses,  for 
that  an  Earthquake  approached ;  which  fell  out  accord- 
ingly :  when  not  only  their  whole  City  was  shaken,  but  also 
a  great  Part  of  the  Mountain  Taygetus,  which  projected  like 

one ;  and  which  may  be  attended  with  tidal  and  sound  waves,  dependent 
upon  the  former,  and  upon  circumstances  of  position  as  to  sea  and  land.— 
MALLET  :  Transactions  of  Royal  Irish  Academy,  vol.  xix. 

The  causes,  and  many  of  the  attending  phenomena,  are  as  much  a 
matter  of  conjecture  now  as  when  Pliny  wrote ;  but  he  does  not  even 
deem  worthy  of  notice  the  popular  supposition,  that  the  giants  who  had 
rebelled  against  the  gods  were  buried  beneath  these  mountains,  where 
by  their  struggles  they  gave  occasion  to  those  commotions  :  nor  that  the 
shop  of  Vulcan  was  beneath  Etna,  of  which  the  crater  was  the  chimney. 
It  is  more  remarkable  that  he  makes  no  reference  to  the  idea  of  Pytha- 
goras (Ovid's  "  Metamorphoses,"  b.  xv.),  that  the  phenomena  of  volcanic 
eruption  was  a  vital  action  of  the  earth,  regarded  as  an  animal ;  for  that 
the  earth  was  such  we  find  Pliny  expressing  a  decided  opinion.  But  the 
concluding  explanation  of  the  poet,  however,  was  that  which  best  suited 
his  inquiries. 

Ceremonies  concerning  Earthquakes. — Whilst  it  was  a  maxim  of  the 
state  religion,  that  earthquakes  were  caused  by  the  displeasure  of  some 
divinity,  it  was  still  necessary  that  each  occurrence  of  such  phenomenon 
should  be  fully  announced  by  the  proper  officers,  before  the  religious 
observances  appropriate  to  the  case  could  be  required  ;  and  thus  was  se- 
cured a  guard  against  such  alarms  as  might  agitate  the  public  mind,  if 
any  neglect  might  seem  to  arise.  The  ceremonies  were  by  public  an- 
nouncement ;  and  they  were  so  imperative  upon  all,  that  any  one  engaging 
in  ordinary  work  at  the  time  of  these  feriae  would  be  judged  to  have 
violated  them.  The  salutation  to  the  divine  power  that  may  have  caused 
the  shock  was,  "  Si  Deo,  si  Dea,"  &c.,  to  obviate  the  danger  of  an  error 
regarding  which  god,  or  which  sex  of  these  deities,  had  caused  the  calamity. 
And  this  was  of  importance,  because  if  a  wrong  name  were  called,  so  far 
from  being  pacified,  the  real  author  might  become  still  more  offended. — 
From  Aulus  Gellius.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  If.]  History  of  Nature.  121 

the  Poop  of  a  Ship,  being  broken  from  the  Rest,  came  down, 
and  with  the  Fall  covered  over  the  other  Ruins.  There  is  re- 
ported another  Conjecture  byPherecydes,  who  was  the  Teacher 
of  Pythagoras;  and  the  same  was  likewise  of  divine  character; 
for,  by  drawing  Water  out  of  a  Well  he  both  foresaw  and 
foretold  an  Earthquake  there.  Which,  if  they  be  true,  how 
far  off,  I  pray  you,  may  such  Men  seem  to  be  from  God,  even 
while  they  live  upon  Earth  ?  But  I  leave  these  Things  free 
for  every  Man  to  weigh  according  to  his  Judgment :  and  for 
my  own  Part,  I  suppose  that,  without  Doubt,  the  Winds  are 
the  proper  Cause.  For  the  Earth  never  quakes  but  when 
the  Sea  is  still,  and  the  Weather  so  calm  that  Birds,  in  their 
flying,  cannot  hover  in  the  Air;  because  all  the  Spirit  which 
should  bear  them  up,  is  withdrawn  :  nor  yet  at  any  Time,  but 
after  the  Winds  are  laid ;  namely,  when  the  Blast  is  hidden 
within  the  Veins  and  Caves  of  the  Earth.  Neither  is  this 
Shaking  in  the  Earth  any  other  Thing  than  is  Thunder  in  the 
Cloud  :  nor  the  Chasm  thereof  aught  else,  but,  like  the  Cleft 
out  of  which  the  Lightning  breaketh,  when  the  Spirit  enclosed 
within  struggleth  and  stirreth  to  go  forth  at  Liberty. 

CHAPTER   LXXX. 
Of  Chasms  of  the  Earth. 

VARIOUSLY,  therefore,  the  Earth  is  shaken,  and  thereupon 
ensue  wonderful  Effects.  In  one  Place  the  Walls  of  Cities 
are  laid  prostrate  :  in  another  they  are  swallowed  up  in  a  deep 
Chasm  :  here  are  cast  up  mighty  Heaps  of  Earth  ;  there  are 
poured  out  Rivers  of  Water;  sometimes  Fire  doth  burst  forth, 
and  hot  Springs  :  and  again  the  Course  of  Rivers  is  turned 
away  backward.  There  goeth  before  and  cometh  with  it  a 
terrible  Noise  :  one  while  a  Rumbling  more  like  the  lowing 
of  Beasts :  and  then  again  it  resembleth  a  Man's  Voice,  or 
the  clattering  and  rustling  of  Armour  and  Weapons;  accord- 
ing to  the  Quality  of  the  Matter  that  receiveth  the  Noise,  or 
the  Fashion  either  of  the  hollow  Caverns  within,  or  the 
Cranny  by  which  it  passeth  ;  whilst  in  a  narrow  Way  it 
soundeth  with  a  more  slender  Tone  :  and  the  same  keepeth 
an  hoarse  Din  in  winding  Caves  ;  rebounding  again  in  hard 


122  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

Passages ;  roaring  in  moist  Places ;  waving  and  floating  in 
standing  Waters ;  boiling  against  solid  Things.  And  there- 
fore, oftentimes  a  Noise  is  heard  without  an  Earthquake  : 
and  never  doth  it  shake  after  exactly  the  same  Manner,  but 
trembleth  and  vibrateth.  The  gaping  Chink  sometimes  re- 
maineth  wide  open,  and  sheweth  what  it  hath  swallowed  up ; 
and  at  other  Times  it  closeth  up  the  Mouth,  and  hideth  all : 
and  the  Earth  is  brought  together  so  again  that  there  remain 
no  Marks  to  be  seen  :  notwithstanding  many  a  Time  it  hath 
devoured  Cities,  and  drawn  into  it  a  whole  Tract  of  Country. 
Maritime  Regions,  most  of  all,  feel  Earthquakes  :  neither 
are  the  hilly  Countries  without  this  Calamity.  I  myself 
have  known  by  examination,  that  the  Alps  and  Apennines 
have  oftentimes  trembled.  In  the  Autumn  and  Spring  there 
happen  more  Earthquakes  than  at  other  Times,  the  same  as 
Lightnings.  And,  therefore,  Gallia  and  Egypt  least  of  all  be 
shaken :  for  in  Egypt  the  continual  Summer1,  and  in  Gallia 
the  Winter,  is  against  it.  Also,  Earthquakes  are  more  rife 
by  Night  than  by  Day.  But  the  greatest  Shocks  are  in  the 
Morning  and  Evening.  Toward  Daylight  there  be  many : 
and  if  by  Day,  it  is  usually  about  Noon.  They  are  also 
when  the  Sun  and  Moon  are  eclipsed,  because  then  Tempests 
are  laid  to  Rest:  but  especially,  when  after  much  Rain  there 
followeth  a  great  Heat;  or  after  Heat,  much  Rain. 

CHAPTER  LXXXI. 
Signs  of  Approaching  Earthquakes. 

SAILORS  also  perceive  it  by  an  undoubting  Conjecture, 
when  the  Waves  swell  suddenly  without  any  Gale  of  Wind, 
or  when  they  feel  a  Shock.  And  then  do  the  Things  quake 

1  It  has  been  contended  that  the  internal  actions  of  the  earth,  causing 
or  affected  by  volcanic  motion,  are  intimately  connected  with  changes  in 
the  atmosphere  and  the  variety  of  the  seasons ;  giving  rise  also  to  epidemic 
diseases,  both  in  man  and  animals,  and  even  in  vegetables :  and  on  the 
other  hand,  that  the  actions  of  the  earth,  in  earthquakes  and  volcanoes, 
are  connected  with  what  we  now  denominate  the  electric  state  of  the 
atmosphere.  Several  coincidences  of  this  kind  have  been  remarked; 
and  in  either  case  they  are  applicable  to  Egypt  above  other  countries. — 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  123 

which  are  within  the  Ships,  just  as  those  in  Houses,  and  with 
their  rustling  give  Warning  beforehand.  Birds,  likewise, 
sit  not  quietly  without  Fear.  In  the  Sky,  also,  there  is  a 
Sign,  for  there  goeth  before,  either  in  Daytime,  or  soon  after 
the  Sun  is  gone  down  in  Serenity,  a  thin  Streak  or  Line  of  a 
Cloud  stretched  out  in  great  Length.  Moreover,  the  Water 
in  Wells1  is  more  troubled  than  ordinary,  and  not  without 
an  offensive  Smell. 

CHAPTER  LXXXII. 
Helps  against  approaching  Earthquakes. 

BUT  there  is  a  Remedy  for  the  same,  such  as  Caverns  in 
many  Places  do  yield :  for  they  discharge  the  Wind  that  was 
conceived  there  before :  a  Thing  observed  in  certain  Towns, 
which  because  they  stand  hollow,  and  have  many  Sinks  dug 
to  convey  away  their  Filth,  are  less  shaken.  And  in  the 
same  Towns,  those  Parts  which  be  pendant  are  the  safer :  as 
is  well  seen  in  Naples,  in  Italy,  where  that  Quarter  thereof 
which  is  solid  is  subject  to  such  Casualties.  And  in  Houses 
the  Arches  are  most  safe,  and  the  Angles  of  Walls,  and 
those  Posts  which,  in  shaking,  will  jog  to  and  fro  every  Way. 
Walls  made  of  Brick  or  Earth  take  less  Harm  when  they  be 
shaken  in  an  Earthquake.  And  a  great  Difference  there  is 
in  the  Manner  of  Earthquakes  ;  for  the  Motion  is  after  many 
Sorts.  The  safest  is,  when  Houses  as  they  rock  keep  a  trem- 
bling and  warbling  Noise :  also  when  the  Earth  seemeth  to 
swell  up  in  rising :  and  again  to  settle  down  with  an  alterna- 
tive Motion.  It  is  harmless,  also,  when  Houses  run  on  End 
together  by  a  contrary  Stroke,  and  jut  one  against  another: 
for  the  one  Motion  doth  withstand  the  other.  The  bending 
downward  in  Manner  of  waving,  and  a  rolling  like  to  surging 
Billows,  is  that  which  is  so  dangerous  ;  or  when  the  whole 

1  A  consideration  of  the  fact  here  expressed  might  have  mitigated  the 
wonder  felt  by  Pliny  at  the  prognostication  of  approaching  earthquakes, 
referred  to  in  chapter  Ixxix.  Their  prescience  only  proved  a  close  ob- 
servance of  Nature  by  these  illustrious  inquirers,  and  how  far  they  were 
in  advance  of  the  philosophy  of  the  day. —  Wern.  Club. 


124  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  II. 

Motion  forceth  itself  to  one  Side.  These  Tremblings  of  the 
Earth  give  over  when  the  Wind  is  vented  out :  but  if  they 
continue,  then  they  cease  not  for  forty  Days :  yea,  and  many 
Times  it  is  longer,  so  that  some  of  them  have  lasted  for  the 
Space  of  a  Year  or  two. 

CHAPTER  LXXXIII. 
Portentous  Earthquakes,  seen  only  once. 

THERE  happened  once  (which  I  found  in  the  Books  of 
Tuscan  Science)  within  the  Territory  of  Modena  (whilst 
L.  Martins  and  Sex.  Julius  were  Consuls)  a  mighty  Portent 
of  the  Earth :  for  two  Mountains  rushed  together,  and  with 
the  utmost  Clamour  assaulted  one  another,  and  then  retired 
again.  It  fell  out  in  the  Daytime  :  and  between  them  there 
issued  flaming  Fire  and  Smoke,  mounting  up  into  the  Sky : 
while  a  great  Number  of  Roman  Knights,  a  Multitude  of 
Servants,  and  Passers-by,  stood  and  beheld  it  from  the  Mml- 
lian  Way.  With  this  Conflict  all  the  Villages  upon  them 
were  dashed  in  Pieces  ;  and  very  much  Cattle  that  was 
within  died  therewith.  And  this  happened  the  Year  before 
the  social  War ;  which  I  doubt  whether  it  were  not  more 
pernicious  to  the  Land  of  Italy  than  the  Civil  Wars.  That  was 
no  less  wonderful  a  Prodigy,  which  was  known  also  in  our 
Age,  in  the  last  Year  of  Nero  the  Emperor  (as  we  have  shewn 
in  his  Acts),  when  Meadows  and  Olive-rows  (notwithstanding 
the  great  public  Road  lay  between)  passed  across  into  one 
another's  Place,  in  the  Marrucine  Territory,  within  the  Lands 
of  Vectius  Marcellus,  a  Roman  Knight,  Procurator  under 
Nero  in  his  Affairs. 

CHAPTER  LXXXIV. 
Wonders  of  Earthquakes. 

THERE  happen  together  with  Earthquakes,  Inundations 
of  the  Sea ;  which  is  infused  into  the  Earth  with  the  same 
Wind,  or  else  received  into  the  hollow  Receptacle  as  it  set- 
tleth  down.  The  greatest  Earthquake  within  the  Remem- 
brance of  Man,  was  that  which  happened  during  the  Reign 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  125 

of  Tiberius  Ccesar,  when  twelve  Cities  of  Asia  were  over- 
turned in  one  Night.  But  Earthquakes  were  most  frequent 
in  the  Punic  War,  when  within  one  Year  there  were  an- 
nounced at  Rome  seven-and-fifty l.  In  which  Year,  indeed, 
when  the  Carthaginians  and  Romans  fought  a  Battle  at  the 
Lake  Thrasymenus,  none  of  either  army  perceived  the  Oc- 
currence of  a  great  Earthquake.  Neither  is  this  a  simple 
evil  Thing,  nor  doth  the  Danger  consist  only  in  the  Earth- 
quake itself,  but  that  which  it  portendeth  is  as  bad  or  worse. 
Never  did  the  City  of  Rome  experience  an  Earthquake,  but 
it  proved  a  Warning  of  some  unhappy  Event  to  follow. 

CHAPTER  LXXXV. 
In  what  Places  the  Seas  have  gone  back. 

THE  same  Cause  is  to  be  rendered  of  some  new  Piece  of 
Ground,  when  the  before-named  Wind  within  the  Earth, 
able  to  inflate  and  raise  the  Ground,  was  still  not  of  Power 
sufficient  to  break  forth  and  escape.  For  there  groweth  firm 
Land  not  only  by  that  which  Rivers  bring  in  (as  the  Islands 
Echinades,  which  were  raised  up  by  the  River  Achelous ; 
and  also  by  the  Nile  the  greater  Part  of  Egypt,  into  which, 
if  we  believe  Homer,  from  the  Island  Pharus  there  was  a 
Course  by  Sea  of  a  Day  and  Night's  Sailing),  but  also  by  the 
retiring  of  the  Sea;  as  the  same  Poet  hath  written  of  the 
Circeice.  The  like  is  said  to  have  happened  both  in  the 
Haven  of  Ambracia,  for  the  Space  of  ten  thousand  Paces ; 
and  also  in  that  of  the  Athenians  for  five  thousand  Paces, 
near  Piraeeum  :  also  at  Ephesus,  where  formerly  the  Sea 
flowed  near  to  the  Temple  of  .Diana.  Indeed,  if  we  believe 
Herodotus,  it  was  all  a  Sea  from  above  Memphis  to  the 
Ethiopian  Mountains :  and  likewise  from  the  Plains  of  Arabia. 
It  was  Sea  also  about  Ilium,  and  all  Teuthrania ;  and  where 
the  River  Meander  now  runneth  by  Meadows2. 

1  Announced  by  the  augurs,  and  therefore  a  strong  proof  of  the  agita- 
tion of  the  public  mind. —  Wern  Club. 

2  The  records  of  all  nations  afford  proof  of  similar  facts,  which  are 
still  more  extensively  shewn  by  the  discoveries  of  modern  geology.    It 


126  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

CHAPTER  LXXXVI. 
The  Reason  of  Islands  rising  out  of  the  Sea. 

THERE  be  Lands  also  that  are  produced  after  another 
Manner,  and  emerge  on  a  sudden  in  some  Sea  :  as  if  Nature 
struck  a  Balance  with  herself,  by  giving  again  in  one  Place 
that  which  her  gaping  Gulfs  had  swallowed  up  in  another. 

CHAPTER  LXXXVII. 
What  Islands  have  sprung  up,  and  at  what  Times1. 

THOSE  Islands,  long  since  famous,  Delos  and  Rhodes, 
are  recorded  to  have  risen  out  of  the  Sea  :  and  afterwards, 
others  that  were  less,  namely,  Anaphe,  beyond  Melos  ;  Nea, 
between  Lemnus  and  Hellespont ;  Alon£,  between  Lebedus 
and  Teos ;  and  Thera,  and  Therasia,  among  the  Cyclades ; 
which  latter  shewed  in  the  fourth  Year  of  the  135th  Olym- 
piad. Moreover,  among  the  same  Islands,  130  Years  after, 
Hiera,  which  is  the  same  as  Automate.  And  two  Stadii  from 
it,  after  110  Years,  Thia,  in  our  own  Time,  upon  the  eighth 
Day  before  the  Ides  of  July,  when  M.  Junius  Syllanus  and 
L.  Balbus  were  Consuls. 

CHAPTER  LXXXVIII. 
What  Lands  the  Seas  have  broken  in  between. 

IN  our  own  Presence,  and  near  to  Italy,  between  the 
JEtolian  Islands ;  and  also  near  to  Crete,  there  was  one  that 
shewed  itself  with  hot  Fountains  out  of  the  Sea,  for  1500 

was  a  part  of  the  teaching  of  Pythagoras,  as  we  learn  from  Ovid  (book 
xv.)  ;  and  by  him  it  seems  to  have  been  made  a  portion  of  his  doctrine  of 
the  metempsychosis. —  Wern.  Club. 

1  What  are  denominated  eruptions  of  elevation  have  occurred  in 
various  ages,  and  in  almost  every  quarter  of  the  world.  The  latest,  and, 
perhaps  the  most  precise,  account,  of  such  an  elevation  of  an  island  from 
the  bottom  of  the  sea,  is  that  of  Graham's  Island,  in  1831,  in  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  between  Partellaria  and  Sciacca ;  of  which  many  parti- 
culars are  given  in  several  publications  of  that  date :  and  popularly  in 
London's  "Magazine  of  Natural  History,"  vol.  iv.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  127 

Paces:  and  another  in  the  third  Year  of  the  143rd  Olympiad, 
within  the  Tuscan  Gulf,  which  latter  burned  with  a  violent 
Wind.  It  is  recorded,  also,  that  when  a  great  Multitude  of 
Fishes  floated  about  it,  those  Persons  died  presently  that 
fed  thereof.  So  they  report,  that  in  the  Campain  Gulf  the 
Pithecusae  Islands  appeared.  And  soon  after,  the  Mountain 
Epopos  in  them  (at  which  Time  there  suddenly  shone  out  a 
flaming  Fire  from  it)  was  laid  level  with  the  plain  Country. 
Within  the  same,  also,  there  was  a  Town  swallowed  up  by 
the  deep  Sea  ;  and  in  another  Earthquake  there  appeared  a 
standing  Pool :  but  in  another,  by  the  Fall  of  some  Moun- 
tains, there  grew  the  Island  Prochyta:  for  after  this  Manner, 
also,  Nature  hath  formed  Islands.  Thus,  she  disjoined  Sicily 
from  Italy,  Cyprus  from  Syria,  Euboea  from  Bceotia,  Ata- 
lante  and  Macris  from  Euboea,  Besbycus  from  Bithynia, 
Leucostia  from  the  Promontory  of  the  Syrenes1. 

CHAPTER  LXXXIX. 
What  Islands  became  joined  to  the  Main. 

AGAIN,  she  hath  taken  Islands  from  the  Sea,  and  joined 
them  to  the  Main  Land ;  as,  for  Instance,  Antissa  to  Lesbos, 
Zephyria  to  Halicarnassus,  Aethusa  to  Myndus,  Dromiscos 
and  Pern£  to  Miletus,  and  Narthecusa  to  the  Promontory 
Parthenius.  Hybanda,  once  an  Island  of  Ionia,  is  now  dis- 
tant from  the  Sea  200  Stadia.  As  for  Syria,  Ephesus  hath  it 
now  in  the  midland  Parts  far  from  the  Sea.  So  Magnesia, 
neighbour  to  it,  hath  Derasitas  and  Sophonia.  Epidaurus 
and  Oricum  have  ceased  to  be  Islands. 

CHAPTER  XC. 
What  Lands  have  been  turned  wholly  into  Sea. 

NATURE  hath  altogether  taken  away  some  Lands ;  the 
chief  of  which  was  where  now  is  the  Atlantic  Sea,  but  which 

1  To  this  may  be  added,  Britain  from  France.  But,  in  truth,  to  dis- 
ruptions of  this  kind  we  owe,  for  the  most  part,  the  present  distribution  of 
the  geography  of  the  world.  —  Wern.  Club. 


128  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

was  formerly  a  Continent  for  a  mighty  Space  of  Ground  ;  if 
we  may  credit  Plato.  And  soon  after,  in  our  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  all  men  may  see  at  this  Day  how  much  hath 
been  immersed ;  as,  Acarnania  by  the  inward  Gulf  of  Am- 
bracia ;  Achaia  within  that  of  Corinth  ;  Europe  and  Asia 
within  Propontis  and  Pontus.  And  besides,  the  Sea  hath 
broken  through  Leucas,  Antirrhium,  Hellespont,  and  the 
two  Bosphori. 

CHAPTER  XCI. 
What  Lands  have  swallowed  up  themselves. 

AND  now  to  pass  over  Arms  of  the  Sea  and  Lakes,  the 
Earth  hath  devoured  and  buried  herself:  as,  for  Example, 
that  very  high  Mountain,  Cybotus,  with  the  Town  Curites ; 
Sipylus  in  Magnesia :  and  in  the  same  Place  before  that,  the 
most  noble  City  called  Tantalus :  the  Territories  of  Galanis 
and  Gamale  in  Phcenice,  together  with  the  Cities  themselves. 
Phogium,  also,  a  very  high  Hill  in  Ethiopia,  as  if  the  very 
Shores  were  not  to  be  trusted,  but  they  also  must  work 
mischief. 

CHAPTER  XCII. 
What  Cities  have  been  swallowed  up  by  the  Sea. 

THE  Sea  of  Pontus  hath  overwhelmed  Pyrrha  and  Antyssa, 
about  Maeotis ;  and  Elice,  and  Bura  in  the  Gulf  of  Corinth  : 
whereof  the  Marks  are  to  be  seen  in  the  deep  Water.  Out 
of  the  Island  Cea  more  than  30,000  Paces  of  Ground  were 
lost  suddenly,  with  very  many  Men.  In  Sicily,  also,  the  Sea 
came  in  and  took  away  half  the  City  Thindaris,  and  all 
between  Italy  and  Sicily.  The  like  it  did  in  Bosotia  and 
Eleusina. 

CHAPTER   XCIII. 
Of  the  Wonders  of  the  Land. 

LET  us  speak  no  more  of  Earthquakes,  and  any  Thing 
else  of  that  Kind ;  for  we  will  rather  speak  of  the  Wonders 


BOOK  II.]  History  «/  Nature.  129 

of  the  Earth  than  of  the  mischievous  Freaks  of  Nature.  And 
surely  the  History  of  celestial  Things  was  not  more  hard  to 
be  related  :  the  Wealth  is  such  of  Metals,  in  such  Variety,  so 
rich,  so  fruitful,  rising  still  one  under  another,  for  so  many 
Ages  ;  notwithstanding  that  daily  there  is  so  much  consumed 
throughout  the  World,  with  Fires,  Ruins,  Shipwrecks,  Wars, 
and  fraudulent  Practices :  yea,  and  so  much  spent  in  luxury 
by  so  many  Men  living !  yet  how  many  Sorts  of  Gems  there 
be  still  so  painted  !  In  precious  Stones,  what  Variety  of 
Colours! 'and  how  bespotted  !  And  among  them,  the  Bril- 
liancy of  some  one  excluding  all  else  but  Light!  The  Virtue 
of  medicinable  Fountains  :  the  continual  Burning  for  so 
many  Ages  of  Fire  issuing  forth  in  so  many  Places :  the 
deadly  Exhalations  in  some  Places,  either  emitted  from  Pits 
when  they  were  sunk,  or  else  from  the  very  Position  of  the 
Ground  ;  present  Death  in  one  Place  to  the  Birds  only  (as  at 
Soracte,  in  a  Quarter  near  the  City) ;  in  others,  to  all  other 
living  Creatures,  save  only  Man  :  yea,  and  sometime  to  Men 
also,  as  in  the  Territories  of  Sinuessa  and  Puteoli.  Which 
damp  Holes1,  breathing  out  a  deadly  Air,  some  call  Charonece 
Scrobes,  or  Charon's  Ditches.  Likewise  in  the  Hirpines' 
Land,  that  of  Amsanctus,  a  Cave  near  the  Temple  of  Me- 
phitesy  into  which  as  many  as  enter  die  presently.  After  the 
like  Manner,  at  Hierapolis  in  Asia  there  is  another  such, 
fatal  to  all  except  the  Priest  of  the  great  Mother.  In  other 
Places  there  be  also  Caves  possessing  a  prophetical  Power : 
by  the  Exhalation  of  which  Men  are  intoxicated,  and  so 

1  The  nature  of  the  air  now  denominated  carbonic  acid  gas,  which, 
when  attempted  to  be  inhaled,  is  destructive  to  animal  life,  was  unknown, 
except  in  these  effects,  to  the  ancients.  It  is  to  this  that  the  well-known 
Grotto  del'  Cane  in  Italy,  as  well  as  sometimes  deep,  moist,  and  stagnant 
pits  among  ourselves,  owe  their  fatal  qualities.  The  inhalations  at  Delphi 
were  probably  artificial ;  and  those  who  visited  the  prophetic  cave  of 
Trophonius  were  observed  to  be  ever  afterward  affected  with  constitu- 
tional gloom ;  which,  however,  might  be  the  effect  of  the  drugs  that  were 
given  them  to  drink,  under  the  name  of  the  "Waters  of  the  Mnemosme." 
In  chap.  ciii.  a  reference  is  made  to  a  natural  spring  producing  similar 
effects.— Wern.  Club. 


1 30  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  1 1 , 

foretell  Things  to  come ;  as  at  Delphi,  that  most  renowned 
Oracle.  In  which  Things,  what  other  Reason  can  any  mortal 
Man  assign,  than  the  divine  Power  of  Nature  diffused  through 
all,  which  breaketh  forth  at  Times  in  sundry  Sorts? 

CHAPTER  XCIV. 
Of  Lands  always  trembling. 

SOME  Parts  of  the  Earth  there  be  that  tremble  under 
Men's  Feet  as  they  go ;  as  in  the  Territory  of  the  Gabians, 
not  far  from  Rome,  where  there  be  almost  200  Jugera  of 
Ground,  which  tremble  as  Horsemen  ride  over  them  :  and 
the  same  in  the  Territory  of  Reate. 

CHAPTER  XCV. 
Of  Islands  ever  floating. 

SOME  Islands  are  always  floating1 ;  as  in  the  Country 
about  Caecubum,  Reate  above-named,  Mutina,  and  Statonia. 
Also  in  the  Lake  Vadimonis,  and  near  the  Waters  Cutyliae, 
there  is  a  dark  Grove,  which  is  never  seen  in  one  Place  for 
a  Day  and  Night  together.  Moreover,  in  Lydia,  the  Isles 
Calaminae  are  not  only  driven  to  and  fro  by  Winds,  but  also 
many  be  thrust  about  with  long  Poles,  which  Way  a  Man 
will :  a  Thing  that  saved  many  a  Man's  Life  in  the  War 
against  Mithridates.  There  are  other  little  ones  also  in  the 
River  Nymphaeus,  called  Saltuares  (or  Dancers),  because  in 
any  Concert  of  Musicians,  they  are  moved  at  the  Stroke  of 
the  Feet,  as  keeping  their  Time.  In  the  great  Lake  of 
Italy,  called  Tarquiniensis,  two  Islands  carry  about  with 
them  Groves  :  one  while  appearing  triangular,  another  while 
round,  when  they  close  one  to  the  other  by  the  Drift  of 
Winds,  but  never  four-square. 

It  is  believed  there  is  something  similar  in  the  north  of  England. 
— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  \  3 1 


CHAPTER  XCVI. 

In  what  Lands  it  never  raineth.    Also,  Wonders  of  the  Earth, 
and  other  Elements  heaped  together. 

PAPHOS  hath  in  it  a  famous  Temple  of  Venus:  upon  a 
certain  Floor  and  Altar  whereof  it  never  raineth1.  Likewise 
in  Nea,  a  Town  of  Troas,  it  never  rains  about  the  Image  of 
Minerva.  In  the  same,  also,  the  Beasts  killed  for  Sacrifice, 
if  they  be  left  there,  never  putrify.  Near  to  Harpasa,  a 
Town  in  Asia,  there  stands  a  craggy  and  awful  Rock,  movable 
with  one  Finger,  but  if  you  thrust  it  with  your  whole  Body, 
it  will  stiffly  resist2.  In  the  Peninsula  of  the  Tauri  and  City 
Parasinum,  there  is  a  kind  of  Earth  that  healeth  all  Wounds, 
But  about  Assos,  in  Troas,  there  grows  a  Stone  by  which  all 
Bodies  are  consumed,  and  thereupon  it  is  termed  Sarco- 
phagus. There  be  two  Mountains  near  the  River  Indus :  the 
Nature  of  the  one  is  to  hold  fast  all  Manner  of  Iron,  and  of 
the  other,  to  reject  it :  andr  therefore,  if  the  Sole  of  a  Man's 
Shoes  be  clouted  with  Nails,  in  the  one  of  them  a  Man  can- 
not pluck  away  his  Foot,  and  in  the  other  he  cannot  take 
any  footing.  It  is  noted,  that  in  Locri  and  Crotone  the  Pes- 
tilence was  never  known,  nor  any  Danger  by  Earthquake. 
And  in  Lycia,  after  an  Earthquake,  it  is  fair  Weather  for 
forty  Days.  In  the  Territory  of  Arda,  if  Corn  be  sowed,  it 
never  groweth.  At  the  Altars  Murtiae  in  the  Veientian 
Country,  and  in  Tusculanum,  and  the  Wood  Cyminia,  there 
be  certain  Places,  wherein  whatever  is  pitched  into  the 
Ground  can  never  be  plucked  up  again.  In  the  Crustumin 
Country  all  the  Hay  there  growing  is  hurtful  in  the  same 
Place  :  but  if  removed,  it  is  good  and  wholesome. 

1  Tacitus  alludes  to  the  same  circumstance,  b.  xviii. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  The  Logan  stone,  near  the  Land's  End,  in  Cornwall,  is  a  well-known 
example  of  the  same  thing.    The  simple  fact  is,  that  a  very  large  stone  is 
poised  very  nearly  on  its  centre  of  gravity,  while  the  limit  of  oscillation  is 
narrow.—  Wern.  Club. 


1 32  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  1 1 . 


CHAPTER  XCVI1. 

What  is  the  Reason  of  the  Ebb  and  Flow  of  the  Sea :  and 
where  it  is  that  they  keep  no  Order. 

OF  the  Nature  of  Waters  much  hath  been  said ;  but  that 
the  Tide  of  the  Sea  should  flow  and  ebb,  is  a  very  wonderful 
Thing  indeed.  The  Manner  thereof  is  various,  but  the  Cause 
is  in  the  Sun  and  Moon.  Between  two  Risings  of  the  Moon 
they  flow  twice  and  twice  go  back,  and  always  in  the  Space 
of  four-and- twenty  Hours.  And  first  as  she  riseth  aloft 
together  with  the  World,  the  Tides  swell ;  and  presently 
again,  as  she  goeth  from  the  Height  of  the  Meridian  Line 
and  inclineth  Westward,  they  subside  :  again,  as  she  moveth 
from  the  West,  under  our  Horizon,  and  approacheth  to  the 
Point  contrary  to  the  Meridian,  they  flow,  and  then  they  are 
received  back  into  the  Sea  until  she  rise  again :  and  never 
keepeth  the  Tide  the  same  Hour  that  it  did  the  Day  before  : 
for  it  giveth  Attendance  upon  the  Planet,  which  greedily 
draweth  with  it  the  Seas,  and  evermore  riseth  to  Day  in  some 
other  Place  than  it  did  yesterday.  Nevertheless,  the  Tides 
keep  just  the  same  Times  between,  and  hold  always  six 
Hours  a-piece  :  I  mean  not  of  every  Day  and  Night  or  Place 
indifferently,  but  only  the  Equinoctial.  For  in  regard  of 
Hours,  the  Tides  of  the  Sea  are  unequal :  forasmuch  as  by 
Day  and  Night  the  Tides  are  more  or  less  one  Time  than 
another  :  in  the  Equinoctial  only  they  are  equal  in  all  Places. 
A  powerful  Argument  this  is,  and  full  of  Light,  to  convince 
the  Dulness  of  those  who  are  of  opinion,  that  the  Planets 
being  under  the  Earth  lose  their  Power :  and  that  their 
Virtue  beginneth  when  they  are  above  only.  For  they  shew 
their  Effects  as  well  under  as  above  the  Earth,  as  well  as  the 
Earth  which  worketh  in  all  Parts.  And  plain  it  is,  that  the 
Moon  performeth  her  Operations  as  well  under  the  Earth  as 
when  we  see  her  visibly  above :  neither  is  her  Course  any 
other  beneath  than  above  our  Horizon.  But  yet  the  Altera- 
tion of  the  Moon  is  manifold,  and  first  every  seven  Days: 
for  while  she  is  new,  the  Tides  be  but  small,  until  the  first 


BOOK  1 1 .]  History  of  Nature.  \  33 

Quarter :  and  as  she  groweth  bigger  they  flow  more,  so  that 
at  the  full  they  swell  most  of  all.  From  that  Time  they  be- 
come more  mild  :  and  in  the  first  Days  of  the  decrease  unto 
the  seventh,  the  Tides  are  equal.  Again,  when  she  is  divided 
on  the  other  Side  they  are  increased.  And  in  the  Conjunc- 
tion they  are  equal  to  the  Tides  of  the  full.  And  evidently 
it  appeareth,  that  when  she  is  Northerly  and  removed  far- 
ther from  the  Earth,  the  Tides  are  more  gentle  than  when 
she  is  gone  Southerly :  for  then  she  worketh  nearer  Hand, 
and  putteth  forth  her  full  Power.  Every  eight  Years,  also, 
and  after  the  hundredth  Revolution  of  the  Moon,  the  Seas 
return  to  the  Beginning  of  their  Motions,  and  to  the  like 
Increase  :  by  Reason  that  she  augmenteth  all  Things  by  the 
yearly  Course  of  the  Sun :  forasmuch  as  in  the  two  Equi- 
noctials they  always  swell  most,  yet  more  in  that  of  the 
Autumn  than  the  Spring  ;  but  nothing  to  speak  of  in  Mid- 
winter, and  less  at  Midsummer.  And  yet  these  Things  fall 
not  out  in  these  very  Instants  of  the  Times  which  I  have 
named,  but  some  few  Days  after ;  like  as  neither  in  the 
full  nor  in  the  change,  but  afterward  :  nor  yet  immediately 
as  the  Heaven  either  shevveth  us  the  Moon  in  her  rising,  or 
hideth  her  from  us  at  her  setting,  or  as  she  declineth  from  us 
in  the  middle  Climate,  but  later  almost  by  two  equinoctial 
Hours.  Forasmuch  as  the  Effect  of  all  Influences  in  the 
Heaven  reach  not  so  soon  unto  the  Earth,  as  the  Eyesight 
pierceth  up  to  the  Heaven  :  as  appeareth  by  Lightnings, 
Thunders,  and  Thunderbolts.  Moreover,  all  Tides  in  the 
main  Ocean  overspread  arid  cover  much  more  within  the  Land 
than  in  other  Seas :  either  because  in  the  whole  it  is  more 
violent  than  in  a  Part :  or  for  that  the  open  Greatness  thereof 
feeleth  more  effectually  the  Power  of  the  Planet,  working 
forcibly  as  it  doth  widely  at  Liberty,  than  when  the  same  is 
restrained  within  those  Straits.  Which  is  the  Cause  that 
neither  Lakes  nor  little  Rivers  ebb  and  flow  in  like  Manner. 
Pythias  of  Massiles  writeth,  that  above  Britain  the  Tide 
floweth  in  Height  eighty  Cubits.  But  the  more  inward  Seas 
are  shut  up  within  the  Lands,  as  in  a  Harbour.  Nevertheless, 
in  some  Places  a  more  spacious  Liberty  there  is  that  yieldeth 


134  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  II. 

to  the  Power  [of  the  Moon]  :  for  there  are  many  Examples 
of  those  who,  in  a  calm  Sea,  without  Wind  and  Sail,  by  a 
strong  Current  only,  have  passed  from  Italy  to  Utica  in  three 
Days.  But  these  Motions  are  found  about  the  Shores  more 
than  in  the  deep  Sea;  just  as  in  our  Bodies  the  extreme 
Parts  have  a  greater  Feeling  of  the  Beating  of  Arteries,  or  in 
other  Words,  the  vital  Spirits.  Yet  notwithstanding  in  many 
Estuaries  of  the  Sea,  because  of  the  unequal  Risings  of  the 
Planets  in  every  Coast,  the  Tides  are  diverse,  and  disagreeing 
in  Time ;  but  not  in  their  Cause  ;  as  particularly  in  the  Syrtes. 
And  yet  some  there  be  that  have  a  peculiar  Nature  ;  as  the 
Firth  Taurominitanum,  which  ebbeth  and  floweth  oftener 
than  twice:  and  that  other  in  Eubcea,  called  likewise  Eu- 
npus,  which  hath  seven  Tides  forward  and  back  in  a  Day 
arid  Night.  And  the  same  Tide  three  Days  in  a  Month 
standeth  still,  namely,  in  the  seventh,  eighth,  and  ninth  Days 
of  the  Moon's  Age.  At  Gades1,  the  Fountain  near  the  Chapel 
of  Hercules  is  enclosed  about  like  a  Well,  which  sometimes 
riseth  and  falleth  with  the  Ocean  ;  and  at  other  Times  it 
doth  both  at  contrary  Seasons.  In  the  same  Place  there  is 

*  Cadiz,  on  the  Atlantic  coast  of  Spain,  was  founded  in  a  very  remote 
age  by  the  Phoenicians,  under  the  conduct  of  one  of  their  most  illustrious 
chiefs,  Melcartus ;  whose  name  is  significant  of  a  royal  race ;  and  who  has 
been  denominated  the  Tyrian  Hercules,  from  a  supposition  that  his 
labours  were  somewhat  similar  to  those  of  the  son  of  Alcmena.  The  city 
was  at  this  time  called  Gadira,  and  in  it  was  a  temple  devoted  to  this  first 
of  celebrated  navigators,  but  retaining  the  marks  of  primitive  purity  of 
worship,  in  having  no-  image.  (Silius  Italicus,  quoted  in  Cumberland's 
"  Sanchoniatho.")  The  Phoenicians  were  accustomed  to  select  for  their 
colonies  such  islands  as  this  Spanish  peninsula  then  was,  both  for  pru- 
dential and  religious  reasons ;  and  the  city  long  continued  the  centre  of 
trade  to  the  British  islands  and  northern  regions ;  while  at  the  same  time 
it  was  unknown  to  the  rest  of  the  world.  There  is  even  reason  to  believe, 
that  during  the  Roman  dominion  of  Europe  an  intercourse  was  main- 
tained between  Cadiz  and  the  independent  Britons  —  scarcely  known  to 
any  beside  the  merchants  engaged  in  it.  From  an  expression  of  Pliny  in 
chap,  cviii.  of  this  book,  it  would  appear  that  there  were  at  this  place  two 
pillars,  properly  termed  the  "Pillars  of  Hercules  :"  though  the  name  has 
since  been  applied  to  the  mountains  at  the  entrance  of  the  Mediterranean 
Sea.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  135 

another  Spring  that  agrees  with  the  Motions  of  the  Ocean. 
On  the  Bank  of  Betis  there  is  a  Town,  the  Wells  whereof,  as 
the  Tide  floweth,  ebb;  and  as  it  ebbeth,  flow;  but  in  the 
intermediate  Times  they  do  not  move.  Of  the  same  Nature 
there  is  one  Well  in  the  Town  Hispalis ;  while  the  Rest  be 
as  others  are.  And  the  Sea  Pontus  evermore  floweth  out 
into  Propontis,  but  the  Sea  never  retireth  back  again  within 
Pontus. 

CHAPTER  XCVIII. 

Wonders  of  the  Sea. 

ALL  Seas  are  cleansed  at  the  full  Moon;  and  some  besides 
at  certain  Times.  About  Messala  and  Nylse,  there  is  thrown 
upon  the  Shore  Dregs  like  Beasts'  Dung ;  from  which  arose 
the  Fable,  that  the  Sun's  Oxen  were  there  kept  in  Stall. 
Hereunto  addeth  Aristotle  (that  I  may  not  omit  any  Thing 
that  I  know),  that  no  living  Creature  dieth  but  in  the  Ebb  of 
the  Sea1.  This  is  observed  much  in  the  Ocean  of  Gaul,  but 
found  only  in  Man  by  Experience. 

CHAPTER  XCIX. 

What  Power  the  Moon  hath  over  Things  on  Earth 
and  in  the  Sea. 

BY  which  it  is  truly  guessed,  that  not  in  vain  the  Planet 
of  the  Moon  is  supposed  to  be  a  Spirit :  for  this  is  it  that 
saturates  the  Earth  in  her  approach,  filling  Bodies  full;  and 
in  her  retiring  emptying  them  again2.  And  hereupon  it  is, 

1  "  I  was  not  so  curious  as  to  entitle  the  stars  upon  any  concern  of  his 
death,  yet  could  not  but  take  notice  that  he  died  when  the  moon  was  in 
motion  from  the  meridian  ;  at  which  time,  an  old  Italian,  long  ago,  would 
persuade  me  that  the  greatest  part  of  mankind  died :  but  herein  I  confess 
I  could  never  satisfy  my  curiosity,  although  from  the  time  of  tides  in  places 
upon  or  near  the  sea  there  may  be  considerable  deductions ;  and  Pliny  hath 
an  odd  and  remarkable  passage  concerning  the  death  of  men  and  animals 
upon  the  recess  or  ebb  of  the  sea.*1 — Sir  THOMAS  BROWN'S  Worhs,  by 
WILKIN,  vol.  iv.  p.  40. —  Wem.  Club. 

a  In  this,  to  chap,  ci.,  is  an  account  of  the  effects  which  were  supposed 
to  be  produced  by  the  influence  of  the  moon  on  natural  bodies ;  and  that 


136  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

that  with  her  growth  all  Shell-fish  increase  :  and  those  Crea- 
tures which  have  no  Blood,  most  of  all  do  feel  her  Spirit. 
Also,  the  Blood  in  Men  doth  increase  or  diminish  with  her 
Light ;  and  the  Leaves  of  Trees  and  the  Fodder  (as  shall  be 
said  in  a  convenient  Place)  feel  her  Influence;  which,  ever- 
more the  same,  pierceth  effectually  into  all  Things. 

CHAPTER  C. 
The  Power  of  the  Sun,  and  why  the  Sea  is  salt. 

THUS  by  the  fervent  Heat  of  the  Sun  all  Moisture  is  dried 
up :  for  we  have  been  taught  that  this  Planet  is  masculine, 
burning  and  sucking  up  the  Humidity  of  all  Things.  Thus 
the  broad  and  spacious  Sea  hath  the  Taste  of  Salt  sodden  into 
it :  or  else  it  is  because,  when  the  sweet  and  thin  Substance 
is  drawn  out  of  it,  which  the  fiery  Power  of  the  Sun  very 
easily  draweth  up,  all  the  sharper  and  grosser  Parts  thereof 

which  was  believed  to  be  the  cause  of  the  tides  requires  no  further  re- 
mark, than  that  the  cause  and  effect  are  acknowledged,  and  that  the  mode 
of  influence  is  the  only  subject  of  error.  The  moon's  influence  in  causing 
shell-fish  and  vegetables  to  increase  and  decrease,  was  believed  by  Aris- 
totle, and  maintained  its  place  in  the  popular  opinion  until  a  late  date. 
But  in  tropical  countries  it  is  regarded  as  beyond  all  doubt,  that  the 
bright  shining  of  the  moon  has  a  deleterious  effect  on  all  bodies  exposed 
to  it ;  and  the  fact  is  implicitly  credited  by  many  Europeans  who  have  in- 
quired into  it.  Thus,  slaughtered  cattle  so  exposed,  are  believed  to  pass 
into  speedy  putrefaction ;  its  influence  on  eyes  when  asleep,  causes  blind- 
ness, and  on  the  head  a  tendency  to  delirium  or  death.  The  antiquity 
and  extent  of  these  opinions  appear  from  Psalm  cxxi. ;  where  the  writer 
expresses  his  trust,  that  "  the  sun  shall  not  smite  thee  by  day,  nor  the 
moon  by  night."  But  the  influence  is  not  always  hurtful :  at  least  on 
vegetation ;  for,  in  the  blessing  of  Moses  at  the  time  of  his  death,  on  the 
tribe  of  Joseph,  he  speaks  of"  the  precious  things  put  forth  by  the  moon" 
(Deut.  xxxiii.  14).  Dr.Prichard  ("Egyptian  Mythology,"  p.  156)  says: 
"  The  idea  that  the  moon  exerts  an  influence  favourable  to  propagation,  is 
so  strange  and  absurd,  that  we  are  at  a  loss  to  imagine  how  it  can  have 
arisen ;  and  it  is  truly  astonishing  to  find  that  similar  fictions  were  ex- 
tended through  a  great  part  of  the  Pagan  world.  Young  maids  among 
the  Greenlanders  are  afraid  to  stare  long  at  the  moon,  imagining  that  they 
incur  a  danger  of  becoming  pregnant."  Sec  chap.  ci.~  Wern,  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  137 

remain  behind  :  and  hereupon  it  is,  that  the  deep  Water  to- 
ward the  Bottom  is  less  salt  than  that  at  the  Top.  And 
this  is  a  truer  Reason  of  that  unpleasant  Taste  it  hath,  than 
that  the  Sea  should  be  a  Sweat  issuing  out  of  the  Earth  con- 
tinually :  or,  because  overmuch  of  the  dry  Element  is  min- 
gled in  it  without  any  Vapour :  or  else  because  the  Nature 
of  the  Earth  infecteth  the  Waters  with  some  strong  Medi- 
cine. We  find  among  Examples  that  there  happened  a  Pro- 
digy to  Dionysius,  Tyrant  of  Sicily,  when  he  was  expelled 
from  his  Power,  which  was  :  that  the  Sea-water,  in  one  Day, 
in  the  Harbour  became  fresh. 

CHAPTER  CI. 
Also,  of  the  Moons  Nature. 

ON  the  contrary,  they  say  that  the  Moon  is  a  Planet 
feminine,  tender  and  nightly;  that  it  dissolveth  Humours, 
drawing  the  same,  but  carrying  them  not  away.  And  this 
appeareth  evidently  because  that  the  Carcasses  of  wild  Beasts 
which  are  slain,  she  putrifieth  by  her  Influence,  if  she  shine 
upon  them.  When  Men  also  are  found  asleep,  the  dull 
Numbness  thereby  gathered  she  draweth  up  into  the  Head : 
she  thaweth  Ice,  and  with  a  moistening  Breath  relaxeth  all 
Things.  Thus  you  see  how  Nature's  turn  is  served,  and  is 
always  sufficient ;  while  some  Stars  thicken  the  Elements, 
and  others  again  resolve  the  same.  But  as  the  Sun  is  fed  by 
the  salt  Seas,  so  the  Moon  is  nourished  by  the  fresh  Waters. 

CHAPTER  CII. 
Where  the  Sea  is  deepest. 

FABIANUS  saith,  that  the  Sea,  where  it  is  deepest,  ex- 
ceedeth  not  fifteen  Stadii.  Others  again  report,  that  in  Pon- 
tus  the  Sea  is  of  an  unmeasurable  Depth  over  against  the 
Nation  of  the  Coraxians,  at  the  Place  they  call  Bathea  Ponti, 
whereof  the  Bottom  could  never  be  sounded  at  the  Distance 
of  three  hundred  Stadii  from  the  Continent. 


138  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

CHAPTER  CIII. 
The  Wonders  of  Waters^  Fountains,  and  Rivers. 

OF  all  Wonders  this  is  among  the  greatest,  that  some 
fresh  Waters  close  by  the  Sea  spring  forth  as  out  of  Pipes  : 
for  the  Nature  of  the  Waters  also  ceaseth  not  from  mira- 
culous Properties.  Fresh  Waters  are  borne  on  the  Sea,  as 
being,  no  doubt,  the  lighter :  and,  therefore,  the  Sea-water 
(which  naturally  is  heavier)  beareth  up  whatsoever  is  brought 
into  it.  Also,  among  fresh  Waters,  some  there  be  that  float 
over  others.  As  in  the  Lake  Fucinus,  the  River  that  runneth 
into  it ;  in  Larius,  Addua ;  in  Verbanus,  Ticinus ;  in  Benacus, 
Mincius;  in  Sevinus,  Ollius ;  in  Lemanus,  the  River  Rho- 
danus.  As  for  this  River  beyond  the  Alps,  and  the  former  in 
Italy,  for  many  a  Mile  as  they  pass  they  carry  forth  their  own 
Waters  from  thence  as  Strangers,  and  none  other ;  and  the 
same  no  larger  than  they  brought  in  with  them  This  is 
reported  likewise  of  Orontes,  a  River  in  Syria,  and  of  many 
others.  Some  Rivers  again  there  be,  which,  upon  an  Hatred 
to  the  Sea,  run  under  the  Bottom  thereof;  as  Arethusa,  a 
Fountain  in  Syracuse  :  wherein  this  is  observed,  that  what- 
soever is  cast  into  it  cometh  up  again  at  the  River  Alpheus, 
which,  running  through  Olympia,  falleth  into  the  Sea-shore 
of  Peloponnesus.  There  go  under  the  Ground,  and  appear 
above  the  Ground  again,  Lycus  in  Asia,  Erasinus  in  Argolica, 
Tigris  in  Mesopotamia.  And  at  Athens,  the  Things  that  are 
immersed  in  the  Fountain  of  ^Esculapius  are  cast  up  again 
in  Phalericus.  Also  in  the  Atinate  Plains,  the  River  that 
becomes  buried  under  the  Earth  20,000  Paces  off,  appeareth 
again;  as  doth  Tirnavus  in  the  Territory  of  Aquileia.  In 
Asphaltites  (a  Lake  in  Judea  which  produceth  Bitumen)  no- 
thing will  sink  ;  nor  will  it  in  Arethusa,  in  the  greater  Ar- 
menia :  and  the  same,  though  it  be  full  of  Nitre,  produceth 
Fish.  In  the  Salentines'  Country  near  the  Town  Manduria 
there  is  a  Lake  full  to  the  Bank,  out  of  which,  if  there  be 
laden  as  much  Water  as  you  will,  it  decreaseth  not ;  nor  is  it 
augmented,  though  any  Quantity  be  poured  in.  In  a  River 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  139 

of  the  Cicones,  and  in  the  Lake  Velinus  in  the  Picene  Terri- 
tory, if  Wood  be  thrown  in  it  becomes  covered  over  with  a 
stony  Bark.  Also  in  Surius,  a  River  of  Colchis,  the  like  is 
to  be  seen  :  insomuch  that  the  Bark  which  overgroweth  it  is 
as  hard  as  a  Stone.  Likewise  in  the  River  Silarus  beyond 
Surrentum,  not  Twigs  only  that  are  dipped  therein,  but 
Leaves  also,  grow  to  be  Stones ;  and  yet  the  Water  thereof 
otherwise  is  wholesome  to  be  drunk.  In  the  Outlet  of  the 
Reatin  Marsh,  a  Rock  groweth  bigger;  and  in  the  Red  Sea 
there  be  Olive-trees  and  other  Shrubs,  that  grow  up  green. 
There  be  also  very  many  Springs  which  have  a  wonderful 
Nature  for  their  boiling  Heat :  and  that  also  upon  the  very 
Mountains  of  the  Alps ;  and  in  the  Sea  between  Italy  and 
uEnaria :  as  in  the  Bay  Baianus,  and  the  River  Liris,  and 
many  others.  For  in  very  many  Places  you  may  draw  fresh 
Water  out  of  the  Sea ;  as  about  the  Islands  ChelidonisB  and 
Aradus  :  and  in  the  Ocean  about  Gades.  In  the  hot  Waters 
of  the  Patovans  there  grow  green  Herbs :  in  those  of  the 
Pisanes  there  breed  Frogs :  and  at  Vetulonii  in  Etruria,  not 
far  from  the  Sea,  Fishes  also  are  bred.  In  the  Territory 
Casinas  there  is  a  River  called  Scatebra,  which  is  cold,  and 
in  Summer  Time  more  abounding  in  Water  than  in  Winter  : 
in  it,  as  also  in  Stymphalis  of  Arcadia,  there  are  brought 
forth  River  Mussels.  In  Dodone,  the  Fountain  of  Jupiter 
being  exceedingly  chill,  quencheth  lighted  Torches  when 
dipped  therein  ;  but  if  you  hold  the  same  near  it  when  they 
nre  extinguished,  it  setteth  them  on  Fire  again.  The  same 
Spring  at  Noontide  evermore  wanteth  Water,  for  which 
Cause  they  call  it  Anapavomenos :  by  and  by  it  beginneth  to 
rise  until  it  be  Midnight,  and  then  it  hath  great  Abundance : 
and  from  that  Time  again  it  subsideth  by  little  and  little.  In 
Illyricum  there  is  a  cold  Spring,  over  which,  if  there  be 
spread  any  Clothes,  they  catch  Fire  and  burn.  The  Foun- 
tain of  Jupiter  Amman  in  the  Daytime  is  cold,  and  all  Night 
it  is  boiling  hot.  In  the  Troglodytes  Country  there  is  a 
Fountain  of  the  Sun,  called  the  Sweet  Spring,  which  about 
Noon  is  exceeding  cold ;  but  by  and  by  and  gradually  it 


140  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  II. 

groweth  warm,  and  at  Midnight  it  is  offensive  for  Heat  and 
Bitterness.  The  Fountain  of  the  Po,  at  Noon  in  Summer, 
intermitteth  to  boil,  and  is  then  ever  dry.  In  the  Island 
Tenedos  there  is  a  Spring,  which,  after  the  Summer  Solstice, 
evermore  from  the  third  Hour  of  the  Night  to  the  sixth, 
doth  overflow.  And  in  the  Island  of  Delos,  the  Fountain 
Inopus  falleth  and  riseth  after  the  same  Sort  as  the  Nile 
doth,  and  together  with  it.  Over  against  the  River  Timavus 
there  is  a  little  Island  in  the  Sea,  having  hot  Springs,  which 
ebb  and  flow  in  Time  and  Manner  as  the  Tide  of  the  Sea. 
In  the  Territory  of  the  Pitinates,  beyond  the  Apennines,  the 
River  Novanus,  at  every  Midsummer  Time,  is  in  Flood  ;  but 
in  Midwinter  is  dry.  In  the  Faliscan  Country  the  Water  of 
the  River  Clitumnus  maketh  the  Cattle  white  that  drink  of 
it.  And  in  Boeotia,  the  River  Melas  maketh  Sheep  black  : 
Cephyssus  running  out  of  the  same  Lake,  causeth  them  to  be 
white :  and  Penius,  again,  giveth  them  a  black  Colour : 
but  Xanthus,  near  to  Ilium,  coloureth  them  reddish;  and 
hereupon  the  River  took  that  Name.  In  the  Land  of  Pon- 
tus  there  is  a  River  that  watereth  the  Plains  of  Astace,  upon 
which,  those  Mares  that  feed  give  black  Milk  for  the  Food 
of  that  Nation.  In  the  Reatin  Territory  there  is  a  Fountain 
called  Neminia,  which,  according  to  its  issuing  forth  out  of 
this  or  that  Place,  signifieth  the  Change  in  the  Price  of  Vic- 
tuals. In  the  Haven  of  Brundusium  there  is  a  Well  that 
yieldeth  to  Sailors  Water  which  will  never  corrupt.  The 
Water  of  Lincestis,  called  Acidula  (or  Sour),  maketh  Men 
drunken  no  less  than  Wine.  Also,  in  Paphlagonia,  and  in 
the  Territory  of  Gales.  Also  in  the  Isle  of  Andros  there  is  a 
Fountain  in  the  Temple  of  Father  Bacchus,  which  upon  the 
Nones  of  January  always  runneth  with  Water  that  tasteth 
like  Wine ;  as  Mulianus  verily  believeth  ;  who  was  a  Man 
that  had  been  thrice  Consul :  the  Name  of  the  Spring  is 
Dios  Tecnosia.  Near  Nonacris,  in  Arcadia,  is  the  River 
Styx  ;  differing  from  the  other  Styx  neither  in  Smell  nor 
Colour  :  drink  of  it  once,  and  it  is  present  Death.  Also,  in 
Berosus  (an  Hill  of  the  Tauri),  there  be  three  Fountains,  the 


BOOK  1 1 .]  History  of  Nature.  \  4 1 

Water  whereof  whosoever  drinketh  is  sure  to  die  of  it,  reme- 
diless, and  yet  without  Pain.  In  a  Country  of  Spain,  called 
Carrinensis,  two  Springs  run  near  together,  the  one  rejecting 
and  the  other  swallowing  up  all  Things.  In  the  same  Coun- 
try there  is  another  Water  which  sheweth  all  Fishes  within 
it  of  a  golden  Colour;  but  if  they  be  taken  out  of  that  Water, 
they  be  like  other  Fishes.  In  the  Cannensian  Territory, 
near  the  Lake  Larius,  there  is  a  large  Fountain,  which  every 
Hour  continually  swelleth  and  falleth  down  again.  In  the 
Island  Sidonia,  before  Lesbos,  there  is  a  hot  Fountain  that 
runneth  only  in  the  Spring.  The  Lake  Sinnaus,  in  Asia,  is 
infected  with  the  Wormwood  growing  about  it.  At  Colo- 
phon, in  the  Cave  of  Apollo  Clarius,  there  is  a  Channel  with 
Water:  they  that  drink  of  it  foretell  strange  Things  like 
Oracles  ;  but  they  live  the  shorter  Time  for  it.  Rivers  run- 
ning backward  even  our  Age  hath  seen  in  the  latter  Years  of 
the  Prince  Nero,  as  we  have  related  in  the  Acts  of  his  Life. 
Now,  that  all  Springs  are  colder  in  Summer  than  Winter, 
who  knoweth  not?  as  also  these  wondrous  Works  of  Nature, 
that  Brass  and  Lead  in  the  Lump  sink  down  in  Fluid,  but  if 
they  be  spread  out  into  thin  Plates  they  float :  and  let  the 
Weight  be  all  one,  yet  some  Things  settle  to  the  Bottom ;  and 
others,  again,  are  borne  above :  that  heavy  Burdens  be  re- 
moved with  more  Ease  in  Water.  Likewise  that  the  Stone 
Thyrreus,  however  large,  doth  swim  when  entire:  but  broken 
into  Pieces,  it  sinketh.  Bodies  newly  dead  fall  to  the  Bottom 
of  the  Water,  but  when  swollen  they  rise  again.  Empty  Ves- 
sels are  not  so  easily  drawn  out  of  the  Water  as  those  that  be 
full :  Rain-water  for  Salt-pits  is  more  profitable  than  any 
other  :  and  Salt  cannot  be  made  unless  fresh  Water  be  min- 
gled :  Sea-water  is  longer  before  it  freezes,  but  it  is  sooner 
made  hot.  In  Winter  the  Sea  is  hotter,  and  in  Autumn 
salter.  The  whole  Sea  is  made  still  with  oil :  and  therefore 
the  Divers  under  the  Water  scatter  it  with  their  Mouths,  be- 
cause it  allayeth  the  rough  Nature  thereof,  and  carrieth  a 
Light  with  it.  No  Snows  fall  where  the  Sea  is  deep.  And, 
whereas  all  Water  runneth  downward,  yet  Springs  leap  up; 
even  at  the  very  Foot  of  ^Etria,  which  burneth  so  far  as  that 


142  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

for  fifty,  and  even  an  hundred,  Miles,  Balls  of  Fire  cast  out 
Sand  and  Ashes1. 

CHAPTER  CIV. 

The  Wonders  of  Fire  and  Water  jointly  together,  and 
of  Maltha. 

Now  let  us  relate  some  Wonders  of  Fire  also,  which  is 
the  fourth  Element  of  Nature.  But  first,  out  of  Waters.  In 
a  City  of  Comagene,  named  Samosatis,  there  is  a  Pond 
yielding  forth  a  burning,  slimy  Mud  (called  Maltha2).  When 
it  meeteth  with  any  Thing  sqlid  it  sticketh  to  it ;  and  if  it  be 
touched  it  followeth  them  that  flee  from  it.  By  this  means 
the  Townsmen  defended  their  Walls  when  Lucullus  assaulted 
it ;  and  his  Soldiers  were  burned  in  their  own  Armour.  It 
burns  even  in  Water.  Experience  hath  taught,  that  Earth 
only  will  quench  it 

CHAPTER  CV. 
Of  Naphtha. 

OF  the  like  Nature  is  Naphtha  :  for  so  is  it  called  about 
Babylonia,  and  in  the  Austacenes'  Country  in  Parthia ;  and 
it  runneth  in  the  Manner  of  liquid  Bitumen.  There  is  great 
Affinity  between  Fire  and  it ;  for  Fire  is  ready  to  leap  unto 
it  immediately,  if  it  be  near  it.  Thus  (they  say)  Medea 
burnt  her  Husband's  Concubine,  by  Reason  that  her  Crown 
anointed  therewith  was  caught  by  the  Fire  after  she  had 
approached  to  the  Altars  with  the  Intention  to  sacrifice3. 

1  Many  of  the  phenomena  here  related  are  merely  exaggerations  of 
the  truth ;  and  many,  however  strange,  are  easily  explained :  as  the  inter- 
mitting springs,  and  those  which  kindle  into  fire :  the  latter  owing  this  pro- 
perty either  to  the  extrication  of  hydrogen  gas  or  naphtha. — Wcrn.  Club. 

2  This  is  evidently  a  natural  mineral  pitch ;  to  which  the  artificial  sub- 
stance bearing  the  same  name,  and  described  in  b.  xxxvi.  c.  24,  could  only 
have  been  similar  in  its  effects,  especially  of  combustion. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  There  are  many  things  in  the  history  of  Medea  which  shew  her  to 
have  been  a  skilful  chemist,  and  possessed  of  a  high  degree  of  knowledge 
of  the  science  of  the  age  in  which  she  lived.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  143 

CHAPTER  CVI. 
Of  Places  continually  burning. 

BUT  amongst  the  Wonders  of  Mountains,  JStna  burneth 
always  in  the  Nights  :  and  for  so  long  Continuance  of  Time 
yieldeth  sufficient  Matter  to  maintain  those  Fires :  in  Winter 
it  is  full  of  Snow,  and  covereth  the  Ashes  cast  up  with  Frosts. 
Neither  in  it  alone  doth  Nature  rage,  threatening  the  con- 
suming of  the  whole  Earth  by  Fire.  For  in  Phaselis  the 
Mountain  Chimaera  likewise  burneth,  and  that  with  a  con- 
tinual Fire  both  Night  and  Day  :  Ctesias  of  Gnidos  writeth, 
that  the  Fire  thereof  is  inflamed  with  Water,  but  quenched 
with  Earth.  In  the  same  Lycia  the  Mountains  Hephaestii 
being  touched  with  a  flaming  Torch,  do  so  burn  that  the 
very  Stones  of  the  Rivers  and  the  Sand  in  the  Waters  are 
set  on  Fire ;  and  the  same  Fire  is  maintained  with  Rain. 
They  report  that  if  a  Man  make  a  Furrow  with  a  Staff  that 
is  set  on  Fire  by  them,  there  follow  Gutters  of  Fire.  In 
the  Bactrians'  Country,  the  Top  of  the  Cophantus  burneth 
by  Night.  Amongst  the  Medians,  also,  and  the  Caestian 
Nation,  the  same  Mountain  burneth  :  but  principally  in  the 
Confines  of  Persis.  At  Susis,  indeed,  in  a  Place  called  the 
White  Tower,  the  Fire  proceeds  out  of  fifteen  Chimneys,  and 
the  greatest  of  them,  even  in  the  Daytime,  carrieth  Fire. 
There  is  a  Plain  about  Babylonia1,  in  Manner  of  a  Fish-pond, 
which,  for  the  Quantity  of  an  Acre,  burneth  likewise.  Also, 
near  the  Mountain  Hesperius  in  Ethiopia,  the  Fields  in  the 
Night-time  shine  like  Stars.  The  like  is  to  be  seen  in  the 
Territory  of  the  Megapolitans,  although  the  Field  there 
be  pleasant  within,  and  not  burning  the  Boughs  of  the  thick 
Grove  above  it.  And  near  a  warm  Spring  the  hollow, 

1  These  natural  fires  were  objects  of  idolatrous  veneration  by  the  in- 
habitants of  this  country,  from  a  very  early  period :  and  opinions  of  a 
similar  nature  have  continued  in  the  East  to  the  present  day.  Zoroaster, 
if  not  the  author,  is  believed  to  have  been  the  great  reformer  of  this  doc- 
trine ;  which  by  some  is  supposed  to  have  had  its  origin  in  times  before 
the  Flood.—  Wern.  Club. 


144  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  II. 

burning  Cavity,  called  Crater  Nymphsei,  always  portendeth 
some  fearful  Misfortunes  to  the  Apolloniates,  the  Neigh- 
bours thereby,  as  Theopompus  hath  reported.  It  increaseth 
with  Showers  of  Rain,  and  casteth  out  Bitumen,  to  be  com- 
pared with  that  Fountain  or  Water  of  Styx  that  is  not  to  be 
tasted ;  otherwise  weaker  than  all  Bitumen  besides.  But 
who  would  wonder  at  these  Things  ?  In  the  Midst  of  the 
Sea,  Hiera,  one  of  the  ^Etolian  Islands  near  to  Italy,  burned 
together  with  the  Sea  for  certain  Days  together,  during 
the  Time  of  the  social  War,  until  a  Legation  of  the  Senate 
made  Expiation.  But  that  which  burneth  with  the  greatest 
Fire  is  a  Hill  of  the  Ethiopians  called  Theonochema ; 
which  sendeth  out  the  fiercest  Flames  in  the  hottest  Sun- 
shine. In  so  many  Places  with  so  many  Fires  doth  Nature 

burn  the  Earth. 

i 

CHAPTER  CVII. 
Wonders  of  Fires  by  themselves. 

MOREOVER,  since  the  Nature  of  this  Element  of  Fire 
alone  is  to  be  so  fruitful,  that  it  produceth  itself,  and  groweth 
from  the  least  Sparks,  what  may  be  thought  will  be  the 
End  of  so  many  funeral  Fires  of  the  Earth1?  What  a  Nature 
is  that  which  feedeth  the  most  greedy  Voracity  in  the  whole 
World  without  Loss  of  itself?  Add  thereto  the  infinite  Num- 
ber of  Stars,  the  immense  Sun  ;  moreover,  the  Fires  in  Men's 
Bodies,  and  those  that  are  inbred  in  Stones ;  the  Attrition, 
also,  of  certain  Woods  one  against  another ;  yea,  and  those 
within  Clouds,  the  Original  of  Lightnings.  Surely  it  ex- 
ceedeth  all  Miracles  that  any  one  Day  should  pass  in  which 
all  Things  are  not  set  on  Fire,  when  the  concave  Mirrors 
also,  set  opposite  to  the  Sunbeams,  set  Things  a-burning 
sooner  than  any  other  Fire.  What  should  I  speak  of  innu- 

1  This  natural,  but  awful,  inquiry,  is  best  answered  in  the  words  of  the 
apostle  Peter,  2nd  Epist.  iii.  7 :  —  "  But  the  heavens  and  the  earth  which 
are  now,  by  the  same  word  are  kept  in  store,  reserved  unto  fire  against  the 
day  of  judgment  and  perdition  of  ungodly  men." — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IT.]  History  of  Nature.  \ 45 

merable  small  Matters,  which  naturally  are  poured  out  in 
Abundance  ?  In  Nymphaeum  there  cometh  a  Flame  out  of 
a  Rock,  which  is  set  a-burning  with  Rain.  There  is  the 
like  at  the  Waters  called  Scantiae.  But  this  is  but  feeble 
when  it  passeth,  neither  endureth  it  long  in  any  other  Mat- 
ter. There  is  an  Ash-tree  covering  this  fiery  Fountain,  which, 
notwithstanding,  is  always  green.  In  the  Territory  of  Mu- 
tina,  there  riseth  up  Fire  also,  upon  Days  devoted  to  Vulcan. 
It  is  found  written,  that  if  a  Coal  of  Fire  fall  upon  the  arable 
Fields  under  Aricia,  the  Soil  presently  is  on  Fire.  In  the 
Sabines  Territory,  as  also  in  that  of  the  Sidicines,  Stones 
anointed  will  be  set  on  Fire.  In  aTown  of  the  Salentines,  called 
Egnatia,  if  Wood  be  laid  upon  a  certain  hallowed  Stone  there, 
it  will  immediately  flame  out.  Upon  the  Altar  of  Juno 
Lacinia,  standing  in  the  open  Air,  the  Ashes  lie  immovable, 
blow  what  stormy  Winds  that  will  on  every  Side.  Besides, 
there  be  Fires  that  suddenly  arise,  both  in  Waters  and  even 
about  the  Bodies  of  Men.  Valerius  Antias  reporteth,  that 
the  Lake  Thrasymenus  once  burned  all  over  :  also,  that  when 
Servius  Tullius,  in  his  childhood,  lay  asleep,  a  Flame  shone 
out  of  his  Head  l :  likewise,  as  L.  Martins  made  an  Oration 
to  the  Army  after  the  two  Scipios  were  slain  in  Spain,  and 
exhorted  his  Soldiers  to  revenge  their  Death,  his  Head  was, 
in  like  Manner,  in  a  Flame.  More  of  this,  and  more  dis- 
tinctly, will  we  write  by-and-by.  For  now  we  exhibit  the 
Wonders  of  all  Things  intermingled  together.  But  my  Mind 
being  passed  beyond  the  Interpretation  of  Nature,  hasteneth 
to  lead,  as  it  were,  by  the  Hand,  the  Minds  of  the  Readers 
throughout  the  whole  World. 


1  There  are  instances  in  modern,  as  well  as  in  ancient  times,  of  such 
luminous  appearances  proceeding  from  the  human  body :  most  commonly 
when  it  is  in  a  state  of  emaciation  or  chronic  disease.  Its  cause  is,  the 
excretion  of  phosphoric  vapour  mixed  with  the  perspiration.  This  lu- 
minous appearance  has  been  largely  interpreted  by  superstition. —  Wern. 
Club. 


1 46  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  1 1 . 

CHAPTER   CVIIl. 
The  Measure  of  the  whole  Earth  in  Length  and  Breadth. 

THIS  our  Part  of  the  Earth  of  which  I  speak,  floating,  as 
it  were,  within  the  Ocean  (as  hath  been  said),  lieth  out  most 
in  Length  from  East  to  West,  that  is,  from  India  to  the  Pil- 
lars of  Hercules,  consecrated  at  Gades :  and  as  my  Author, 
Artemidorus,  thinketh,  it  containeth  8578  Miles.  But,  ac- 
cording to  Isidorus,  9818.  Artemidorus  addeth,  more- 
over, from  Gades  within  the  Circuit  of  the  sacred  Promon- 
tory to  the  Cape  Artabrum,  where  the  Front  of  Spain  beareth 
out  furthest,  in  Length  891  Miles.  This  Measure  runneth 
two  Ways.  From  the  River  Ganges  and  the  Mouth  thereof, 
where  it  dischargeth  itself  into  the  East  Ocean,  through 
India  and  Parthyene  to  Myriandrum,  a  City  of  Syria,  situ- 
ated upon  the  Gulf  of  Isa,  5215  Miles.  From  thence  by  the 
nearest  Voyage,  to  the  Island  Cyprus,  to  Patara  in  Lycia, 
Rhodes,  and  Astypatsea  (Islands  lying  in  the  Carpathian  Sea), 
to  Taenarus  in  Laconia,  Lilybseum  in  Sicily,  Calaris  in  Sar- 
dinia, 3450  Miles.  Then  to  Gades  1450  Miles.  Which 
Measures  being  put  together,  make,  from  the  said  Sea,  8578 
Miles.  The  other  Way,  which  is  more  certain,  lieth  most 
open  by  Land,  from  Ganges  to  the  River  Euphrates,  5021 
Miles.  From  thence  to  Mazaca,  in  Cappadocia,  244  Miles ; 
and  thence  through  Phrygia  and  Caria  to  Ephesus,  498  Miles. 
From  Ephesus,  through  the  ^Egean  Sea,  to  Delos,  200  Miles. 
Then  to  Isthmus,  212  Miles.  From  thence  by  Land,  arid  by 
the  Laconian  Sea  and  the  Gulf  of  Corinth,  to  PatraB  in 
Peloponnesus,  202J  Miles :  to  Leucas,  86J  Miles,  and  as 
much  to  Corcyra.  Then  to  Acroceraunia,  132£  Miles  :  to 
Brundusium,  86£  Miles :  so  to  Rome,  360  Miles.  Then  to 
the  Alps,  as  far  as  the  Village  of  Cincomagus,  518  Miles. 
Through  Gaul  to  the  Pyrenean  Mountains,  unto  Illiberis, 
556  Miles ;  to  the  Ocean  and  Sea-coast  of  Spain,  332  Miles. 
Then  the  Passage  over  to  Gades,  1\  Miles.  Which  Measure, 
by  Artemidorus9  Estimation,  maketh  in  all  8685  Miles.  Now 


BOOK  II.]  History  of  Nature.  147 

the  Breadth  of  the  Earth,  from  the  Meridian  Point  to  the 
North,  is  collected  to  be  less  almost  by  One-half;  that  is, 
5462  Miles.  Whereby  it  appeareth  plainly,  how  much  of 
the  one  Side  the  Heat  of  Fire,  and  on  the  other  Side  frozen 
Water  hath  stolen  away.  For  I  am  not  of  opinion  that  the 
Earth  goeth  no  further  than  this ;  for  then  it  would  not  have 
the  Form  of  a  Globe  ;  but  that  the  Places  on  either  Side  be 
uninhabitable,  and  therefore  not  discovered.  This  Measure 
runneth  from  the  Shore  of  the  Ethiopian  Ocean,  where  now 
it  is  inhabited,  to  Meroe,  550  Miles.  From  thence  to 
Alexandria,  1240  Miles;  to  Rhodes,  583  Miles;  to  Gnidus, 
84J  Miles;  to  Cos,  25  Miles;  to  Samus,  100  Miles;  to 
Chius,  84  Miles ;  to  Mitylen£,  65  Miles  ;  to  Tenedos,  28 
Miles  ;  to  the  Promontory  Sigaeum,  12J  Miles  ;  to  the  Mouth 
of  Pontus,  312J  Miles;  to  Carambis,  the  Promontory,  350 
Miles;  to  the  Mouth  of  Maeotis,  312J  Miles;  to  the  Haven 
of  Tanais,  265  Miles :  which  Voyage  may  be  made  shorter 
(with  the  Vantage  of  sailing  directly)  by  89  Miles.  From 
the  Haven  of  Tanais,  the  most  diligent  Authors  have  set 
down  no  Measure.  Artemidorus  was  of  opinion,  that  all  be- 
yond was  not  discovered,  allowing  that  about  Tanais  the 
Sarmatian  Nations  inhabit ;  who  lie  to  the  North.  Isidorus 
hath  added  hereto  1200  Miles,  as  far  as  to  Thule  :  which  is 
grounded  upon  bare  Conjecture.  I  understand  that  the  Bor- 
ders of  the  Sarmatians  are  known  to  have  no  less  an  Extent 
than  this  last-mentioned  cometh  to.  And  otherwise,  how 
much  must  it  be  that  would  contain  such  innumerable  Na- 
tions, shifting  their  Seats  every  now  and  then.  Whereby  I 
judge  that  the  Over-measure  of  the  Clime  inhabitable  is 
much  greater.  For  I  know  certainly,  that  from  Germany 
very  great  Islands  have  been  discovered  not  long  since.  And 
thus  much  of  the  Length  and  Breadth  of  the  Earth,  which 
I  thought  worth  the  writing.  Now  the  universal  Circuit 
thereof,  Eratosthenes,  who  was  learned  in  all  Kind  of  Lite- 
rature, and  in  this  Knowledge  better  qualified  than  others ; 
and  whom  I  see  of  all  Men  approved,  hath  set  down  to  be 
252,000  Stadia.  This  Measure,  by  the  Romans'  reckoning, 
amounteth  to  31,500  Miles.  A  wondrous  bold  Attempt !  but 


1 48  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  1 1 . 

yet  so  exquisitely  calculated,  that  it  were  a  Shame  not  to  be- 
lieve him.  Hipparchus,  a  wonderful  Man,  both  for  con- 
vincing him,  and  for  all  his  other  Diligence,  addeth  more- 
over little  less  than  25,000  Stadia. 

CHAPTER  CIX. 
The  harmonica!  Measure  of  the  World. 

ANOTHER  Kind  of  Faith  may  be  given  to  Dionysodorus ; 
for  I  will  not  withhold  a  very  great  Example  of  Grecian 
Vanity.  This  Man  was  a  Melian,  famous  for  his  Skill  in 
Geometry :  he  died  very  aged  in  his  own  Country :  his  near 
Kinswomen,  who  were  his  Heirs,  solemnised  his  Funerals. 
These  Women,  as  they  came  some  few  Days  after  to  perform 
the  Obsequies  thereto  belonging,  are  said  to  have  found  in 
his  Monument  an  Epistle  of  this  Dionysodorus,  written  in  his 
own  Name,  To  them  above ;  to  this  Effect :  that  he  had  gone 
from  his  Sepulchre  to  the  Bottom  of  the  Earth,  and  that  it 
was  thither  42,000  Stadia.  Neither  wanted  there  Geome- 
tricians who  made  this  Interpretation,  that  this  Epistle  was 
sent  from  the  Centre  of  the  Earth ;  to  which  Place  down- 
ward from  the  uppermost,  the  Way  was  longest;  and  the 
same  was  just  half  the  Diameter  of  the  Ball :  whereupon 
followed  this  Computation,  that  they  pronounced  the  Circuit 
to  be  255,000  Stadia.  The  harmonical  Proportion  which 
forceth  this  Nature  of  Things  to  agree  unto  itself,  addeth 
unto  this  Measure  7000  Stadia,  and  maketh  the  Earth  to  be 
the  96,000th  Part  of  the  whole  World. 


IN  THE  THIRD   BOOK 

ARE    COMPREHENDED    THE 

REGIONS,  NATIONS,  SEAS,  TOWNS,  PORTS,  MOUNTAINS,  RIVERS, 

WITH  THEIR  MEASURES,  AND  PEOPLE,   EITHER  AT  THIS 

DAY  KNOWN,  OR  IN  TIMES  PAST  ; 

AS  FOLLOWETH  : 


CHAP. 

1.  Of  Europe. 

2.  The  Length  and  Breadth  of 

Boetica  (a  Part  of  Spain,  con- 
taining Andalusia,  and  the 
Realm  of  Grenada). 

3.  That    nearer   Part    of   Spain 

(called  by  the  Romans  Ilis- 
pania  Citerior). 

4.  The  Province  of  Narbonensis 

(wherein  is  Dauphine,  Lan- 
guedoc,  and  Provence). 

5.  Italy,  Tiberis,  Rome,  and  Cam- 

pania. 

6.  The  Island  Corsica. 

7.  Sardinia. 

8.  Sicily. 

9.  Lipara. 

10.  Of  Locri,  and  the  Frontiers  of 
Italy. 

In  this  Book  are  described  twenty-six  Islands  within  the  Adriatic  and 
Ionian  Seas :  their  principal  Cities,  Towns,  and  Nations.  Also  the  chief 
and  famous  Rivers :  the  highest  Hills :  particular  Islands :  Towns  and 
Countries  that  have  perished.  In  Sum,  here  are  comprised  Histories  and 
Observations  to  the  Number  of  326. 


CHAP. 

11.  The  second  Gulf  of  Europe. 

12.  The  fourth  Region  of  Italy. 

13.  The  fifth  Region. 

14.  The  sixth  Region. 

15.  The  eighth  Region. 

16.  Of  the  River  Po. 

1 7.  Of  Italy  beyond  the  Po,  counted 

the  eleventh  Region. 

18.  Venice,  the  tenth  Region. 

19.  Of  Istria. 

20.  Of  the  Alps,  and  Alpine  Na- 

tions. 

21.  Illyricum. 

22.  Liburnia. 

23.  Macedonia. 

24.  Noricum. 

25.  Pannonia  and  Dalmatia. 

26.  Mcesia. 


LATIN  WRITERS  ABSTRACTED: 

Turannius  Graccida,  Cor.  Nepos,  T.  Livius,Cato  Censor  ius,  M.  Agrippa, 
M.  Varroj  Divm  Augustus  the  Emperor,  Varro  Attacinus,  AnHas,  Hyginus, 
L.  Vetus,  Mela  Pomponius,  Curio  the  Father,  Coelius  Aruntius,  Sebosus, 
Lidnius  Mutianus,  Fabricius  Thuscus,  L.  Atteius  Capttd,  Verrius  Flaccus, 
L.  Piso,  C.  JElianus,  and  Vuleriamis. 

FOREIGN  AUTHORS: 

Artemidojiis,  Alexander  Polyhistor,  Thitcydides,  Theophrastiis,  Isidorus, 
Theopompm,  Metrodorus  Scepsius,  Callicratcs,  Xenophon,  Lampsaccuns, 
Diodorus  SyracMsanus,  Nymphodorus,  CaUiphanes,  and  Tinwgenes. 


THE  THIRD   BOOK 


HISTORY    OF    NATURE 


WRITTEN    BY 


C.   PLINIUS  SECUNDUS. 


THE   PREFACE. 


we  have  written  of  the  Position  and 
Wonders  of  the  Earth,  Waters,  and  Stars  :  also 
of  the  Proportion  and  Measure  of  the  whole 
World.  Now  we  proceed  to  the  Parts  thereof; 
although  this  also  be  judged  an  infinite  Piece 
of  Work,  and  not  lightly  to  be  handled  without 
some  Reprehension  :  and  yet  in  no  kind  of  Enterprise  is 
Pardon  more  due  ;  since  it  is  little  Wonder,  if  he  who  is  born 
a  Man  knoweth  not  all  Things  belonging  to  Man.  And 
therefore,  I  will  not  follow  one  Author  particularly,  but 
every  one  as  I  shall  think  him  most  true  in  each  Part.  Be- 
cause it  hath  been  common,  in  a  Manner,  to  them  all,  to  de- 
scribe the  Situations  of  those  Places  most  exactly,  from 
whence  themselves  proceeded  :  and,  therefore,  neither  will  I 
blame  nor  reprove  any  Man.  The  bare  Names  of  Places 
shall  be  simply  set  down  ;  and  that  with  as  much  Brevity  as 
I  can  :  the  Excellency,  as  well  as  the  Causes,  being  deferred 
to  their  several  Treatises  :  for  now  the  Question  is  touching 
the  Earth  in  general.  And,  therefore,  I  would  have  Things 
to  be  taken  as  if  the  Names  of  Countries  were  put  down  void 
of  Renown,  and  such  only  as  they  were  in  the  Beginning, 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  151 

before  any  Acts  were  done ;  and  as  if  they  had  indeed  an 
Enduement  of  Names,  but  respective  only  to  the  World  and 
Nature  of  Things. 

The  whole  Globe  of  the  Earth  is  divided  into  three  Parts, 
Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa.  The  Beginning  we  take  from  the 
West  and  the  Straits  of  Gades,  where  the  Atlantic  Ocean 
breaking  in,  is  spread  into  the  inland  Seas.  Entering  there, 
Africa  is  on  the  right  Hand,  Europe  on  the  left,  and  Asia 
between  them.  The  Bounds  confining  these  are  the  Rivers 
Tanais  and  Nil  us.  The  Mouth  of  the  Ocean  of  which  I  spoke 
lyeth  out  in  Length  fifteen  Miles,  and  in  Breadth  five,  from 
a  Village  in  Spain  called  Mellaria  to  the  Promontory  of 
Africa  called  the  White,  as  Turannius  Graccula,  who  was 
born  there,  writeth.  T.  Livius  and  Nepos  Cornelius  have 
reported,  that  the  Breadth,  where  it  is  narrowest,  is  seven 
Miles,  and  ten  Miles  where  it  is  broadest.  From  so  small  a 
Mouth  spreadeth  so  vast  an  Expanse  of  Waters ;  nor  doth 
such  exceeding  Depth  lessen  the  Wonder.  In  the  very 
Mouth  of  it  are  many  Shelves  of  white  Sands,  to  the  great 
Terror  of  Ships  passing  that  Way.  And  therefore,  many 
have  called  those  Straits  the  Entry  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea. 
Near  to  the  Sides  of  this  Gullet,  are  set  two  Mountains,  one 
on  each  Side,  as  Barriers  to  shut  all  in :  which  are,  Abila  for 
Africa,  and  Calpe  for  Europe,  the  Limits  of  the  Labours  of 
Hercules.  For  which  Cause,  the  Inhabitants  of  those  Parts 
call  them  the  Pillars  of  that  God  ;  and  they  believe,  that 
by  Ditches  digged  within  the  Continent,  the  Ocean,  before 
excluded,  was  let  in  ;  and  so  the  Face  of  the  Earth  was 
changed. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Of  Europe 1 . 

AND  first,  of  Europe,  the  Nurse  of  that  People  which  is 
the  Conqueror  of  all  Nations  ;  and  of  all  Lands  by  many 

1  This  claim  of  superiority  is  advanced  by  the  Roman,  in  the  con- 
sciousness of  his  country's  power  and  greatness;  and  although  1800  years 


1 52  History  of  Na  ture.  [BooKllI. 

Degrees  the  most  beautiful :  which  many  rightly  have  made 
not  the  third  Portion  of  the  Earth,  hut  the  half,  the  whole 
Globe  being  divided  into  two  Parts :  from  the  River  Tanais 
to  the  Straits  of  Gades.  The  Ocean,  then,  at  this  Space 
abovesaid  entereth  into  the  Atlantic  Sea,  and  with  a  greedy 
Current  drowneth  those  Lands  which  dread  his  coming ; 
but  those  Shores  that  resist,  with  its  windings  it  eateth  and 
hollo weth  continually,  excavating  many  Creeks  in  Europe, 
wherein  four  remarkable  Gulfs  are  to  be  seen. 

Of  these  the  first,  from  Calpe,  the  remotest  Promontory 
(as  is  abovesaid)  of  Spain,  is  bent  with  an  exceeding  great 
Compass,  to  Locri ;  and  as  far  as  the  Promontory  Brutium. 
Within  it  lieth  Spain,  the  first  of  Lands  ;  that  Part,  I  mean, 
which,  in  regard  of  Rome,  is  the  further  off,  and  is  named 
also  Boetica.  And  presently  from  the  End  of  Virgitanus, 
the  hither  Part,  otherwise  called  Tarraconensis,  as  far  as  the 
Pyrenean  Mountains.  That  further  Part  is  divided  into  two 
Provinces  through  the  Length  :  for  on  the  North  Side  of 
Boetica  lieth  Lusitania,  divided  from  it  by  the  River  Ana. 

This  River  beginneth  in  the  Territory  Larninitanus  of  the 
nearer  Spain,  one  while  spreading  out  itself  into  Pools,  then 
again  gathering  into  narrow  Brooks  :  or  altogether  hidden 
under  Ground,  and  taking  Pleasure  to  rise  up  oftentimes, 
falleth  into  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  But  the  Part  named  Tarra- 
conensis, lying  close  to  the  Pyrenean  Mountain  and  running 
along  all  the  Side  thereof,  and,  at  the  same  Time,  stretching 
out  itself  across  from  the  Iberian  Sea  to  the  Gallic  Ocean, 
is  separated  from  Boetica  and  Lusitania  by  the  Mountain 

have  passed,  and  that  greatness  has  departed  like  a  dream,  European 
superiority  still  exists.  A  prophecy  from  the  remotest  ages  (Gen.  ix.  27) 
—  delivered  under  circumstances  in  which  its  fulfilment  was  exceedingly 
unlikely  —  has  proclaimed,  that  the  God  whom  Pliny  did  not  know  shall 
enlarge  Japhet,  the  father  of  European  nations  ;  —  that  he  shall  dwell  in 
the  tents  of  Shem,  and  Canaan  shall  be  his  servant.  And,  accordingly, 
we  see  the  inhabitants  of  Europe  spreading  out,  and  exerting  a  mastery, 
in  the  most  distant  climes ;  in  the  strength  of  their  superiority  in  the  arts 
of  life,  in  science,  the  freedom  of  their  political  institutions,  and,  above  all, 
in  religion.  The  superiority  must  continue  so  long  as  this  foundation  of 
it  shall  exist.  Esto  perpetua. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  153 

Salarius  and   the  Cliffs  of  the  Oretanes,  Carpetanes,  and 
Asturians. 

Bcetica,  so  called  from  the  River  Bcetis,  that  cutteth  it  in 
the  midst,  excelleth  all  the  other  Provinces  in  Produce,  arid 
a  certain  plentiful  and  peculiar  Beauty.  Therein  are  held 
four  judicial  Assemblies;  the  Gaditan,  Cordubian,  Astigitan, 
and  Hispalensian.  All  the  Towns  in  it  are  in  (Oppida)  Num- 
ber 175;  whereof  eight  are  Colonies;  free  Boroughs  (Muni- 
cipia),  eight ;  Towns  endued  with  the  ancient  Franchises  of 
Latiuni,  twenty-nine  :  with  Freedom,  six;  Confederate,  four; 
Tributary,  120.  Of  which  those  that  be  worth  the  naming, 
or  are  more  current  in  the  Latin  Tongue,  be  these  under- 
written :  from  the  River  Ana  the  Coast  of  the  Ocean,  the 
Town  (Oppidum)  Ossonoba,  surnamed  also  Lusturia.  Two 
Rivers,  Luxia  and  Urium1,  run  between  the  Mountains  Ariani : 
the  River  Bretis:  the  Shore  Corense :  with  a  winding  Creek. 
Over  against  which  lieth  Gades,  to  be  spoken  of  among  the 
Islands.  The  Promontory  of  Juno :  the  Haven  Besippo. 
The  Towns  Belon  and  Mellaria.  The  Straits  out  of  the 
Atlantic  Sea.  Carteia,  called  Tertessos  by  the  Greeks  ;  and 
the  Mountain  Calpe.  Then,  within  the  Shore,  the  Town 
Barbesula,  with  the  River.  Also,  the  Town  Salbula ;  Suel- 
Malacha,  with  the  River  of  the  Confederates.  Next  to  these, 
Menoba,  with  a  River:  Sexi-firmum,  surnamed  Jiilium  : 
Selaubina,  Abdera,  and  Murgis,  the  Frontier  of  Boetica.  All 
that  Coast  M.  Agrippa  thought  to  have  had  their  Beginning 
from  the  Carthaginians  (Poeni).  From  Ana  there  lieth 
against  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  the  Region  of  the  Bastuli  and 
the  Turduli. 

M.  Varro  saith,  that  there  entered  into  all  Parts  of  Spain, 
the  Iberians,  Persians,  Phoenicians,  Celts,  and  Carthaginians 
(Posni)  :  for  Lusus,  the  Companion  of  Father  Liber,  or 
Lyssa,  (which  signifieth  the  frantic  Fury  of  those  that  raged 
with  him),  gave  the  Name  to  Lusitania;  and  Pan  was  the 
Governor  of  it  all.  But  those  Things  which  are  reported  of 
Hercules  and  Perene,  or  of  Saturn,  I  think  to  be  fabulous 

1  These  rivers  are  now  called  Oilier  and  Tin  to. 


154  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  III. 

Tales  in  a  high  Degree.  Boetls,  in  the  Tarraconensian  Pro- 
vince, rising,  not  as  some  have  said,  at  the  Town  Mentesa, 
but  in  the  Forest  Tugrensis,  which  the  River  Tader  watereth, 
as  it  doth  the  Carthaginian  Country  at  Ilorcum1,  shunneth 
the  Funeral  Pile  of  Scipio :  and,  turning  into  the  West, 
maketh  toward  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  adopting  the  Province, 
is  at  first  small,  but  receiveth  many  other  Rivers,  from 
which  it  taketh  away  both  their  Fame  and  their  Waters. 
And  first  being  entered  from  Ossigitania  into  Boetica,  running 
gently  with  a  pleasant  Channel,  it  hath  many  Towns,  both 
on  the  left  Hand  and  the  right,  seated  upon  it.  The  most 
famous  between  it  and  the  Sea-coast,  in  the  Mediterranean, 
are  Segeda,  surnamed  Augurina :  Julia,  which  is  also  called 
Fidentia  :  Virgao,  otherwise  Alba :  Ebura,  otherwise  Cere- 
alis:  Illiberi,  which  is  also  Liberini:  Ilipua,  named  likewise 
Laus.  Artigi,  or  Julienses  :  Vesci,  the  same  as  Faventia : 
Singilia,  Hegua,  Arialdunum,  Agla  the  Less,  Baebro,  Castra 
Vinaria,  Episibrium,  Hipponova,  Ilurco,  Osca,  Escua,  Suc- 
cubo,  Nuditanum,  Tucci  the  Old,  all  which  belong  to  Basti- 
tania,  lying  toward  the  Sea.  But  within  the  Jurisdiction  of 
Corduba,  about  the  very  River  standeth  the  Town  Ossigi, 
which  is  surnamed  Laconicum  :  llliturgi,  called  also  Forum 
Julium:  Ipasturgi,  the  same  as  Triumphal^  ;  Sitia  :  and  four- 
teen Miles  within  the  Country,  Obulco,  which  is  named 
Pontificense\  And  presently  Ripepora.  a  Town  of  the  Con- 
federates, Sacili,  Martialum,  Onoba.  And  on  the  right  Hand 
Corduba,  surnamed  Colonia  Patritia:  and  then  beginneth 
Bcetis  to  be  navigable.  The  Towns  Carbulo,  Decuma,  the 

*  The  river  makes  a  bend  to  avoid  the  funeral  pile  of  Cneius  Stipio, 
concerning  the  manner  of  whose  death  there  is  some  difference  of  opinion. 
Apianus,  in  "  Iberic,"  p.  263,  says,  that  the  victorious  forces  of  Hasdrubal 
drove  him,  with  a  band  of  his  followers,  into  a  certain  castle,  where  they 
were  all  destroyed  by  fire.  Livy  tells  us  (lib.  xxv.  36),  that  "  Cneius 
Scipio,  according  to  some  accounts,  was  killed  on  the  hill,  in  the  first  as- 
sault :  according  to  others,  he  fled  into  a  castle  standing  near  the  camp  : 
this  was  surrounded  with  fire,  and  the  doors,  which  were  too  strong  to  be 
forced,  being  then  burned,  they  were  taken ;  and  all  within,  together  with 
the  general  himself,  were  put  to  death."  The  modern  name  of  Ilorcum 
is  Lorquinum,  in  the  province  of  Murcia. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  \ 55 

River  Singulis,  falling  into  the  same  Side  of  Bcetis.     The 
Towns  of  the  Jurisdiction  Hispalensis  are  these  :  Celtica  Axa- 
tiara,  Arruci,  Menoba,  Ilipa,  surnamed  Italica.    And  on  the 
left  Hand,  Hispalis,  a  Colony,  surnamed  likewise  Romulensis. 
Opposite  to  it,  the  Town  Osset,  which  is  also  called  Julia  Con- 
stantia:  Vergenturn,  which  also  is  JuliiGenitor;  Hippo  Caura- 
siarum,  the  River  Menoba,  which  also  entereth  into  Bcetis  on 
the  right  Side.     But  within  the  Estuaries  of  the  Boetis  there 
is  the  Town  Nebrissa,  surnamed  Veneria  and  Colobona :  also 
Colonies,  as  Asta,  which  is  called  Regia.    And  in  the  midland 
Part  Asido,  which  is  also  Caesariana.     The  River  Singulis 
breaking  into  the  Boatis  in  the  order  I  have  said,  runneth 
by  the  Colony  Astigitania,  surnamed  also  Augusta  Firma,  and 
so  forward  it  is  navigable.  The  Rest  of  the  Colonies  belonging 
to  this  Jurisdiction  are  free :  namely,  Tucci,  which  is  surnamed 
Augusta  Gemella :    Itucci,  called  also  Virtus  Julia:  Attubi, 
called  Claritas  Julia  :  Urso,  which  is  Genua  Urbanorum  :  and 
among  these  was  Munda,  taken  together  with  Pompeys  Son. 
Free  Towns,  Astigi  the  Old,  Ostippo.     Stipendiary,  Callet, 
Calucula,  Castra  Gemina,  llipula  the  Less,  Merucra,  Sacrana, 
Obulcula,  Oningis.     Coming  from  the  Coast,  near  the  River 
Menoba,  itself  navigable,  there  dwell  not  far  off  the  Alonti- 
gicili,  and  Alostigi.     But  this  Region,  which,  without  the 
forenamed,  reacheth  from  the  Boetis  to  the  River  Ana,  is 
called  Beturia :  divided  into  two  Parts,  and  as  many  Sorts  of 
People  :  the  Celtici,  who  border  on  Lusitania,  and  are  within 
the  Jurisdiction  Hispalensis:  and  the  Turduli,  who  inhabit 
close  upon  Lusitania  and  Tarraconensis  :  and  they  resort  to 
Corduba.     It  is  clear  that  the  Celtici  came  from  the  Celtibe- 
rians,  out   of  Lusitania,    as   appeareth   by   their   Religion, 
Tongue,  and  Names  of  Towns,  which  in  Bcetica  are  distin- 
guished by  their  Surnames  ;  as  Seria,  which  is  called  Fama 
Julia:  Ucultuniacum,  which  now  is  Curiga  :   Laconimurgi,. 
Constantia  Julia ;  Terresibus  is  now  Fortunales  ;  and  Callen- 
sibus,  Emanici.    Besides  these,  in  Celtica  Acinippo,  Arunda, 
Arunci,  Turobrica,  Lastigi,  Alpesa,  Ssepona,  Serippo.     The 
other  Beturia,  which  we  said  belonged  to  the  Turduli  and 
to  the  Jurisdiction  of  Corduba,  hath  Towns  of  no  base  Ac- 


156  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

count,  Arsa,  Mellaria,  and  Mirobrica:  and  the  Regions Osrutigi 
and  Sisapone.  Within  the  Jurisdiction  of  Gades,  there  is  a 
Town  of  Roman  Citizens  called  Regina :  of  Latins,  there  are 
Laepia,  Ulia,  Carisa,  surnamed  Aurelia,  Urgia,  which  is  like- 
wise named  Castrurn  Julium :  also,  Csesaris  Salutariensis. 
Stipendiaries  there  be,  Besaro,  Belippo,  Berbesula,  Lacippo, 
Besippo,  Callet,  Cappagum,  Oleastro,  Itucci,  Brana,  Lacibi, 
Saguntia,  Andorisippo.  The  whole  Length  of  it  M .  Agrippa 
hath  set  down  463  Miles,  and  the  Breadth  257.  But  because 
the  Bounds  reached  to  Carthage,  which  Cause  occasioneth 
oftentimes  Errors  in  computing  the  Measure  ;  at  one  Place 
in  the  Limits  of  the  Provinces,  and  in  another  the  Paces  in 
journeying  being  either  more  or  less  ;  also,  considering  that 
the  Seas  in  so  long  a  Time  have  encroached  here  upon  the 
Land,  and  the  Banks  again  gotten  there  of  the  Sea  ;  or  that 
the  Rivers  have  either  turned  crooked  or  gone  straight :  be- 
sides, that  some  have  begun  to  take  their  Measure  from  this 
Place,  others  from  that,  and  gone  divers  Ways  :  it  is  by  these 
Means  come  to  pass,  that  no  two  agree  together. 

CHAPTER  II. 
The  Length  and  Breadth  of  Bcetica. 

THE  Length  of  Bcetica  at  this  day,  from  the  Bound  of  the 
Town  Castulo  to  Gades,  is  475  Miles :  and  from  Murgi  on 
the  Sea-coast,  more  by  twenty-two  Miles.  The  Breadth 
from  the  Border  of  Carteia  is  224  Miles.  And  who  would 
believe  that  Agrippa  (a  Man  so  diligent,  and  in  this  Work 
principally  so  careful)  did  err,  when  he  purposed  to  set  out  a 
View  of  the  whole  World  for  the  City,  and  Divus  Augustus 
with  him  ?  For  he  finished  the  Portico  begun  according  to 
the  Designation  and  Memorials  appointed  by  the  Sister  of 
M.  Agrippa. 

CHAPTER   III. 
The  nearer  Spain. 

THE  old  Form  of  the  nearer  Spain  is  somewhat  changed, 
as  also  of  many  other  Provinces,  as  Pompey  the  Great  in  the 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  157 

Trophies  which  he  erected  in  Pyrenaeus,  testifieth,  that 
846  Towns  between  the  Alps  and  the  Borders  of  the  further 
Spain,  were  by  him  brought  to  Obedience.  Now  the 
whole  Province  is  divided  into  seven  Jurisdictions  :  the  Car- 
thaginian, the  Tarraconensian,  Caesar  Augustanian,  Cluni- 
ensian,  Asturian,  Lucensician,  and  of  Bracarum.  There  are 
besides  Islands,  which  we  set  aside  without  naming  them, 
and  excepting  the  Cities  that  are  annexed  to  others,  the 
Province  itself  containeth  294  Towns.  In  which  Colonies 
there  be  twelve  Towns,  of  Roman  Citizens  thirteen,  of  old 
Latins  seventeen,  of  Allies  one,  stipendiary  136.  The  first 
in  the  Frontiers  be  the  Bastulians :  behind  them,  in  such 
Order  as  shall  be  said,  those  receding  Interiorly,  the  Men- 
tesani,  Oretani,  and  the  Carpetani,  upon  the  River  Tagus. 
Near  to  them,  the  Vaccaei,  Vectones,  Celtiberi,  and  Arrebaci. 
The  Towns  next  to  the  Borders,  Urci  and  Barea,  assigned  to 
Bcetica  :  the  Country  of  Mauritania,  then  Deitania :  after 
that,  Contestania,  and  New  Carthage,  a  Colony.  From  the 
Promontory  of  which,  called  Saturn  s  Cape,  the  Passage 
over  the  Sea  to  Caesaries,  a  City  in  Mauritania,  is  187  Miles. 
In  the  residue  of  that  Coast  is  the  River  Tader  :  the  Free 
Colony  Illici,  of  which  the  Bay  took  the  name  Illicitanus. 
To  it  are  annexed  the  Icositani :  soon  after,  Lucentum,  a 
Town  of  the  Latins.  Dranium,  a  Stipendiary  ;  the  River 
Sucro,  and  what  was  sometime  the  Frontier  Town  of  Con- 
testania. The  Region  Edetania,  which  retireth  to  the  Cel- 
tiberians,  having  a  pleasant  Pool  bordering  along  the  Front 
of  it.  Valentia,  a  Colony  lying  three  Miles  from  the  Sea. 
The  River  Turium  ;  and  just  as  far  from  the  Sea,  Saguntum, 
a  Town  of  Roman  Citizens  renowned  for  their  Fidelity. 
The  River  Idubeda,  and  the  Region  of  the  Ilergaoni.  The 
River  Iberus,  rich  by  Commerce  and  Navigation,  which 
beginneth  in  the  Cantabrian's  Country,  not  far  from  the 
Town  luliobrica,  and  holdeth  on  its  course  430  Miles,  and, 
for  260  of  them,  from  the  Town  Varia,  carrieth  Vessels;  in 
regard  of  which  River,  the  Greeks  named  all  Spain  Iberia. 
The  Region  Cossetania,  the  River  Subi,  the  Colony  Tarraco, 
built  by  the  Scipios,  like  as  Carthage  of  the  Poani.  The 


1 58  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  111. 

Country  of  the  Illergetes,  the  Town  Subur,  the  River  Ru- 
bricatum  ;  from  thence  the  Lacetani  and  Indigetes.     After 
them  in  this  order  following :  retiring  within  at  the  Foot  of 
Pyrenaeus,  the  Ausetani,   Itani,  and  Lacetani :    and   along 
Pyrenaeus,  the  Cerretani,  and  then  the  Vascones.     But  in 
the    Borders,    the    Colony    Barcino,    surnamed    Faventia : 
Towns  of  Roman  Citizens, — Baetulo,  Illuro,  the  River  Lar- 
num,  Blandee :  the  River  Alba,  Emporiae:  two  there  be  of 
these,    of  the  old   Inhabitants,  and   of  Greeks,  who  were 
descended  from  the  Phocaeans.      The  River   Tichis;    from 
whence  to  Pyrenaea  Venus  on  the  other  side  of  the  Pro- 
montory, are  forty  Miles.      Now,   besides   the  forenamed, 
shall  be  related  the  principal  places  as  they  lie  in  every 
Jurisdiction.     At  Tarracon  there  plead  in  Court  four  and 
forty  States.     The  most  famous  among  them  are,  of  Roman 
Citizens,  the  Dertusani   and  Bisgargitani  :    of  Latins,  the 
Ausetani  and  Cerretani,  surnamed  Juliani :  they  also  who 
are  named    Augustani,    the   Sedetani,    Gerundenses,    Ges- 
sorienses,  Teari,  the  same  with  Julienses.     Of  Stipendiarii, 
the  Aquicaldenses,  Onenses,  and  Baetulonenses.     Caesar  Au- 
gusta, a  free  Colony,  upon  which  the  River  Iberus  floweth, 
where  the  Town  before  was  called  Salduba :    these  are  of 
the  Region  Sedetania,  and  receiveth  152  States,  and  among 
these,  of  Roman  Citizens,  the  Bellitani  and  Celsenses  ;  and 
out  of  the  Colony,  the  Calaguritani,  surnamed  also  Nascici. 
The   Ilerdenses   of  the   Surdaon's    Nation,   near   to   whom 
runneth  the  River  Sicoris  :  the  Oscences,  of  the  Region  Ves- 
cetania,  and  the  Turiasonenses.      Of  old  Latins,  the  Cas- 
cantenses,  Erganicenses,   Gracchuritani,   Leonicenses,  Ossi- 
gerdenses  :  of  Confederates,  the  Tarragenses.    Stipendiarii, 
the  Arcobricenses,  Andologenses,  Arocelitani,  Bursaonenses, 
Calaguritani,   surnamed    Fibularenses,    Complutenses,    Ca- 
renses,    Cincenses,   Cortonenses,    Dammanitani,   Larrenses, 
Iturisenses,  Tspalenses,    Ilumberitani,    Lacetani,    Vibienses, 
Pompelonenses,  and  Segienses.     There  resort  to  Carthage 
for  Law  sixty-two  several  States,  besides  the  Inhabitants  of 
the  Islands.     Out  of  the  Colony  Accitana,  the  Gemellenses, 
also   Libisosona,  surnamed   Foroaugustana,    which   two  are 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  159 

endued  with  the  Franchises  of  Italy :  out  of  the  Colony 
Salariensis,  the  Citizens  of  Old  Latium,  Castulonenses,  whom 
Ccesar  calleth  Venales.  The  Setabitani,  who  are  also  Au- 
gustani,  and  the  Valerrienses.  But  of  the  Stipendiarii,  of 
greatest  name  be  the  Babanenses,  the  Bastiani,  the  Con- 
saburenses,  Dianenses,  Egelestani,  Ilorcitani,  Laminitani, 
Mentesani,  the  same  as  Oritani ;  arid  Mentesani,  who  other- 
wise are  Bastuli ;  Oretani,  who  also  are  called  Germani ; 
the  Chief  of  the  Celtiberians,  the  Segobrigenses,  and  the 
Toletani  of  Carpetania,  dwelling  upon  the  River  Tagus  : 
next  to  them,  the  Viacienses  and  Virgilienses.  To  the  Juris- 
diction of  Cluniensis  the  Varduli  bring  fourteen  Nations,  of 
which  it  is  necessary  to  name  none  but  the  Albanenses ; 
the  Turmodigi  four,  among  whom  are  the  Segisamonenses, 
Sagisainejulienses.  To  the  same  Jurisdiction  the  Carietes 
and  the  Vennenses  go  out  of  five  Cities,  of  which  the  Ve- 
lienses  are.  Thither  repair  the  Pelendones,  with  four  States 
of  the  Celtiberians,  of  whom  the  Numantini  were  famous ; 
as  in  the  eighteen  Cities  of  the  Vaccsei.  the  Intercatienses, 
Pallantini,  Lacobricenses,  and  Caucenses:  for  in  the  four 
States  of  the  Cantabrici  only  Juliobrica  is  named.  In  the 
ten  Cities  of  the  Autrigoni,  Tritium  and  Vironesca.  To 
the  Arevaci  the  River  Areva  gave  name.  Of  them  there  be 
seven  Towns  :  Saguntia  and  Uxama,  which  Names  are  often 
used  in  other  Places  ;  besides  Segovia  and  Nova  Augusta, 
Termes,  and  Clunia  itself,  the  very  utmost  bound  of  Cel- 
tiberia.  All  the  rest  lie  toward  the  Ocean ;  and  of  the 
above-named,  the  Verduli,  together  with  the  Cantabri.  To 
these  there  are  joined  twelve  Nations  of  the  Astures,  divided 
into  the  Augustanes  and  Transmontani,  having  a  stately 
City,  Asturica.  Among  these  are  Giguri,  Pesici,  Lancienses, 
and  Zoclae.  The  number  of  the  whole  Multitude  ariseth  to 
240,000  Polls  of  free  Men.  The  Jurisdiction  Lucensis  com- 
priseth  sixteen  Nations  (besides  the  Celtici  and  Lebuni)  of 
base  Condition,  and  having  barbarous  Names  ;  but  of  Free- 
men, almost  166,000.  In  like  manner,  twenty-four  Cities, 
having  275,000  Polls  of  Bracari;  of  whom,  besides  the 
Bracari  themselves,  the  Vibali,  Celerini,  Galleeci,  ^Equesilici, 


1 60  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  III. 

and  Quinquerni,  may  be  named  without  Disdain.  The 
length  of  the  hither  Spain,  from  Pyrenaeus  to  the  Bound  of 
Castulo,  is  607  Miles,  and  the  Coast  thereof  somewhat  more. 
The  Breadth  from  Tarracon  to  the  Shore  of  Alarson,  307 
Miles ;  and  from  the  Foot  of  Pyrenseus  where,  between  two 
Seas,  it  is  Pointed  with  the  Straits,  and  so  opening  itself 
by  little  and  little  until  it  come  to  touch  the  farther  Spain, 
it  is  as  much,  and  addeth  somewhat  more  to  the  Breadth. 
All  Spain  is  full  of  Metal,  as  Lead,  Iron,  Copper,  Silver, 
and  Gold  :  the  hither  part  thereof  aboundeth  with  Specular 
Stone,1  and  Bostica,  particularly,  with  Vermillion.  There 
are  also  Quarries  of  Marble.  Unto  all  Spain,  Vespasianus 
Augustus,  the  Emperor,  tossed  with  the  Tempests  of  the 
Commonwealth,  granted  the  Franchises  of  Latium.  The 
Mountains  Pyreuaei  define  the  Boundaries  of  Spain  and  Gaul, 
their  Promontories  projecting  into  two  opposite  Seas. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
The  Province  Narbonensis. 

THAT  Part  of  Gallia  which  is  washed  by  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea  is  called  the  Province  Narbonensis,  named  for- 
merly Braccata  ;  divided  from  Italy  by  the  River  Varus  and 
the  Alps,  most  Friendly  Mountains  to  the  Roman  Empire ; 
and  from  the  other  Parts  of  Gaul,  on  the  North  side,  by  the 
Mountains  Gehenna  and  Jura.  For  Tillage  of  the  Ground, 
for  reputation  of  Men,  regard  of  Manners,  and  for  Wealth, 
worthy  to  be  set  behind  no  other  Provinces  whatever  ;  and, 
in  one  word,  to  be  counted  Italy  more  truly  than  a  Pro- 
vince. In  its  Borders  lyeth  the  Country  of  the  Sardoni ; 
and  within,  the  Region  of  the  Consuarani.  The  Rivers  be 
Tecurn  and  Vernodubrum  ;  the  Towns,  llliberis  (a  poor 
relic  of  a  City  that  was  once  Great),  and  Ruscio,  inhabited 
by  the  Latins.  The  River  Atax,  springing  out  of  Pyrenaeus, 
runneth  through  the  Lake  Lubrensis:  Narbo  Martins,  a 
Colony  of  the  Tenth  Legion,  twelve  Miles  distant  from  the 

'  i.  e.  Talc.     See  Lib.  xxxvi.  cap.  22. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  161 

Sea  :  Rivers  Araris  nnd  Liria.  Towns  in  the  other  Parts 
scattered  here  and  there,  by  reason  of  Pools  lying  before 
them :  Agatha,  in  Times  past  belonging  to  the  Massilians, 
and  the  Region  of  Volscae  Tectosages.  Also,  where  Rhoda 
of  the  Rhodians  was,  whereof  Rhodanus  took  its  name,  the 
most  fruitful  River  of  all  Gallia,  running  swiftly  out  of  the 
Alps  through  the  Lake  Lemanus,  and  carrying  with  it 
the  slow  Araris  ;  and  Isara  running  as  fast  as  itself, 
together  with  Druentia  ;  of  which  the  two  small  Mouths  are 
called  Lybica;  of  which  the  one  is  Hispaniensum,  the  other 
Metapinum  :  there  is  a  third,  which  is  the  most  Wide 
and  Large,  named  Massalioticum.  Some  write  that  the 
Town  Heraclea  likewise  stood  at  the  Mouth  of  Rhodanus. 
Beyond  the  Ditch,  out  of  Rhodanus,  which  was  the  Work 
of  C.  Marius  and  beareth  his  Name,  there  was  remarkable 
Pool ;  moreover,  the  Town  Astromela,  and  the  maritime 
Tract  of  the  Avsetici ;  and  above,  the  stony  Plains,  the  Me- 
morial of  the  Battles  of  Hercules.  The  Region  of  the 
Anatilii,  and  within,  of  the  Desuviates  and  Caviarae.  Again, 
from  the  Sea,  Tricorium ;  and  within,  the  Region  of  the 
Tricolli,  Vocantii,  Segovellauni,  and  presently  of  the  Allo- 
broges ;  but  in  the  Borders,  Massilia  of  Greek  Phocaeans 
confederate :  the  Promontory  Citharista,  Zaopartus,  and  the 
Region  of  the  Camatullici.  After  them  the  Suelteri ;  and 
above  them,  Verucines;  but  in  the  Coast,  Athenopolis  of 
the  Massilians  ;  Forum  Julii,  a  Colony  of  the  ninth  Legion, 
which  also  is  called  Parensis  and  Classica :  in  it  is  the  River 
Argenteus,  the  Region  of  the  Oxubii  and  Ligaunii ;  above 
whom  are  the  Suetri,  Quariates,  and  Adunicates  :  but  in  the 
Borders,  a  Latin  Town,  Antipolis.  The  Region  of  the 
Deciates,  the  River  Varus  gushing  out  of  a  Mountain  of  the 
Alps,  called  Acema  :  in  the  middle  Part  thereof,  the  Colonies 
Arelate  of  the  sixth  Legion,  Bliterae  of  the  seventh,  and 
Arausia  of  those  belonging  to  the  second .  In  the  Territory 
of  the  Caviarae,  Valentia  and  Vienna,  of  the  Allobroges. 
Latin  Towns,  Aquas  Sextiae  of  the  Saiyi,  and  Avenio  of  the 
Caviarae,  Apta  Julia  of  the  Vulgienties,  Alebecerriorum  of 
the  Apollinares,  Alba  of  the  Helvi,  Augusta  of  the  Tricos- 


162  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  III. 

tines ;  Anatilia,  Aeria,  Bormannico,  Comacina,  Cabellio, 
Carcasum  of  the  Volscan  Tectosages  ;  Cessero,  Carpen- 
toracte  of  the  Menines ;  the  Cenicenses,  Cambolecti,  who 
are  named  Atlantici,  Forum  Voconii,  Glanum,  Livii,  Lu- 
tevani,  who  are  the  same  as  the  Foro-neronienses :  Ne- 
rnausum  of  the  Arecomici,  Piscense,  Ruteni,  Sanugenses,  and 
Tolosani  of  the  Tectosages.  The  Borderers  upon  Aquitane, 
Tasco-dumetari,  Canonienses,  Umbranici  :  two  capital 
Towns  of  the  confederate  City  of  the  Vocontians,  Vasco  and 
Lucus  Augusti ;  but  Towns  of  no  importance  nineteen,  as 
twenty-four  annexed  to  the  Nemausienses.  To  this  Charter 
Galba  the  Emperor  added  of  the  Alpine  Inhabitants,  the 
Avantici  and  Eproduntii,  whose  Town  is  named  Dima. 
Agrippa  saith  that  the  Length  of  the  Province  Narbonensis 
is  270  Miles,  and  the  Breadth  248. 

CHAPTER  V. 
Italy,  Tiber,  Rome,  Campania. 

NEXT  to  them  is  Italy  ;  and  the  first  of  it  the  Ligurians  : 
then  Hetruria,  Umbria,  Latium,  where  are  the  Mouths  of 
Tiberis  and  Rome,  the  Head  of  the  whole  Earth,  sixteen 
Miles  distant  from  the  Sea.  After  it  is  the  maritime  Country 
of  the  Volscians,  and  Campania  :  then  Picentium,  Lu- 
canum,  and  Brutium,  the  furthest  Point  in  the  South,  to 
which,  from  the  moonshaped  Mountains  of  the  Alps,  Italy 
shooteth  out  to  the  Seas.  From  it  is  the  Sea-coast  of 
Graecia,  and  soon  after,  the  Salentini,  Pediculi,  Apuli, 
Peligni,  Ferentani,  Marrucini,  Vestini,  Sabini,  Picentes, 
Galli,  Urnbri,  Tusci,  Veneti,  Carni,  lapides,  Istri,  and 
Liburni. 

Neither  am  I  ignorant  that  it  might  be  thought  justly  a 
point  of  an  unthankful  and  stupid  Mind,  if  briefly  in  this 
sort,  and  cursorily,  that  Land  should  be  spoken  of  which  is 
the  Nurse  of  all  Lands.  She  also  is  the  Mother,  chosen  by 
the  Power  of  the  Gods,  to  make  even  Heaven  itself  more 
Glorious  ;  to  gather  into  One  the  scattered  Empires,  to 
soften  the  Fashions  of  other  Countries ;  and  whereas  the 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  163 

Languages  of  so  many  Nations  were  repugnant  and  savage, 
to  draw  them  together  by  commerce  of  Speech,  to  a  Con- 
ference;  to  endue  Man  with  Humanity;  and  briefly,  that  of 
all  Nations  in  the  World  there  should  be  one  only  Country. 
But  so  noble  are  all  the  Places  that  a  Man  shall  come  to, 
so  excellent  is  every  thing,  and  each  State  so  famous,  that  I 
am  at  a  loss  what  to  say.  The  City  of  Rome,  the  only  fair 
Face  therein  worthy  to  stand  upon  so  stately  a  Neck,  what 
Work  would  it  ask  to  be  described  as  it  ought l  ?  The  very 
Tract  of  Campania  by  itself,  so  pleasant  and  happy,  how 
should  it  be  described?  So  that  it  is  evident  in  this  one 
Place  there  is  the  Work  of  rejoicing  Nature.  Besides  this, 
the  whole  Temperature  of  the  Air  is  evermore  so  vital,  the 
Fields  so  fertile,  the  Hills  so  open  to  the  Sun,  the  Forests 
so  harmless,  the  Groves  so  shady,  the  kinds  of  Wood  so 
bounteous,  the  Mountains  so  breezy ;  the  Corn,  the  Vines, 
the  Olives  so  fertile  ;  the  Sheep  so  enriched  with  such  noble 
Fleeces.;  such  Necks  to  the  Oxen ;  so  many  Lakes,  such 
abundance  of  Rivers  and  Springs  watering  it  throughout ;  so 
many  Seas  and  Havens,  that  it  is  the  very  Bosom  lying  open 
to  receive  the  Commerce  of  all  Lands ;  and  as  of  itself 
earnestly  desiring  to  lie  far  into  the  Sea  to  help  all  Mankind. 
Neither  do  I  speak  now  of  the  Natures  and  Manners  of  the 
Men ;  nor  of  the  Nations  subdued  by  their  Tongue  and 
Hand.  Even  the  Greeks  (a  Nation  of  all  other  most  given 
to  praise  themselves)  have  given  their  judgment  of  her,  in 
that  they  called  a  certain  Part  thereof  Great  Greece.  But 
that  which  we  did  in  the  mention  of  the  Heaven,  namely,  to 
touch  some  known  Planets  and  a  few  Stars,  the  same  must 


1  The  Romans  were  proud  of  the  glory  of  their  city ;  and  believed  it 
to  be  the  only  one  worthy  the  regard  of  the  gods  :— 

"  Jupiter  arce  sua  cum  totum  spectat  in  orbem, 

Nil  nisi  Romanum,  quod  tueatur,  habet." — OVID,  Fasti,  lib.  i. 

From  his  high  citadel  when  Jove  surveyed 

The  extended  earth  beneath  his  sovereign  sway, 

Nought  but  the  Roman  widely  spread  he  spied. 
Worthy  t'engage  his  care. —  Wern.  Club. 


164  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

we  do  in  this  Part :  only  I  pray  the  Readers  to  remember 
that  I  hasten  to  rehearse  every  particular  Thing  through 
the  whole  Globe. 

Italy  is  fashioned  like  to  an  Oak  leaf,  being  much  larger 
in  Length  than  in  Breadth:  to  the  left  Side  bending  with 
the  Top,  and  ending  in  the  Figure  of  an  Amazonian  Shield  : 
and  where,  from  the  middle  Extension,  it  is  called  Cocin- 
thos,  it  putteth  forth  through  two  moonshaped  Promontories 
two  Horns :  the  one,  Leucopetra,  on  the  right  Hand ;  the  other, 
Lacinium,  on  the  left.  In  Length  it  reacheth  from  the  Foot 
of  the  Alps  to  Prsetoria  Augusta,  through  the  City  of  Rome, 
and  so  to  Capua,  with  a  course  leading  to  Rhegium,  a  Town 
situated  upon  the  Shoulder  thereof:  from  which  beginneth 
the  bending,  as  it  were,  of  the  Neck,  and  beareth  1020 
Miles.  And  this  Measure  would  be  much  more  if  it  went 
as  far  as  Lacinium  ;  but  such  an  Obliquity  might  seem  to 
decline  out  too  much  to  one  Side.  Its  Breadth  is  various  ; 
being  410  Miles  between  the  two  Seas,  the  Higher  and 
the  Lower,  and  the  Rivers  Varus  and  Arsia.  The  middle 
portions  of  this  Breadth,  which  is  much  about  the  City  of 
Rome,  from  the  Mouth  of  the  River  Aternus  running  into 
the  Adriatic  Sea,  unto  the  Mouths  of  Tiber,  136  Miles;  and 
somewhat  less  from  Novum  Castrum  by  the  Adriatic  Sea,  to 
Alsium,  and  so  to  the  Tuscan  Sea :  and  in  no  Place  ex- 
ceedeth  it  in  Breadth  300  Miles.  But  the  full  Compass  of 
the  whole,  from  Varus  to  Arsia,  is  20,049  Miles.  It  is 
distant  by  Sea  from  the  Lands  round  about,  that  is,  from 
Istria  and  Liburnia,  in  some  Places  100  Miles;  from  Epirus 
and  Illyricuni,  50  Miles  ;  from  Africa,  less  than  200,  as  Varro 
affirmeth  ;  from  Sardinia,  120  Miles  ;  from  Sicily,  a  Mile  and 
a  half ;  from  Corey ra,  less  than  70  ;  from  tssa,  50.  It  goeth 
along  the  Seas  even  to  the  Meridional  Line  of  the  Heaven ; 
but  if  a  Man  examine  it  very  exactly,  it  lieth  between  the 
Sun-rising  in  Mid-winter,  and  the  Point  of  the  Meridian. 

Now  we  will  describe  the  Circuit  of  this  Country,  and 
reckon  the  Cities :  wherein  it  is  necessary  to  be  premised, 
that  we  shall  follow  our  Author  Divus  Augustus,  and  the 
Description  by  him  made  of  all  Italy  ;  arranged  into  eleven 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  1 65 

Regions.  The  Maritime  Towns  I  will  set  down  in  the  order 
as  they  stand,  according  to  their  vicinity  one  to  another. 
But  as  in  so  running  a  Speech,  the  rest  cannot  be  so 
orderly  described,  therefore  in  the  Inland  part  thereof  I 
will  follow  him  as  he  hath  digested  them  in  Letters,  but 
mentioning  the  Colonies  by  Name  which  he  hath  delivered 
in  that  number.  Neither  is  it  easy  to  follow  thoroughly 
their  Positions  and  Origins,  considering  the  Ingaun  Li- 
gurians  (to  say  nothing  of  all  the  rest)  were  endowed  with 
Lands  thirty  times.  To  begin  with  the  River  Varus,  there- 
fore, there  is  the  Town  Nicsea,  built  by  the  Massilians ;  the 
River  Po ;  the  Alps  ;  the  People  within  the  Alps,  of  many 
Names,  but  chiefly  the  Capillati :  the  Town  Vediantiorum, 
the  City  Cemelion  (or  a  Town  belonging  to  the  State  of  the 
Vedianti,  called  Cemelion) ;  the  Port  of  Hercules  Monoscus  ; 
the  Ligustian  Coast.  Of  the  Liguri,  the  most  renowned 
beyond  the  Alps  are  the  Sally i,  Deceates,  and  Oxubii :  on 
this  Side,  the  Veneni,  and,  descended  from  the  Caturiges, 
the  Vagienni,  Statilli,  Vibelli,  Magelli,  Euburiates,  Cas- 
monates,  Veliates,  and  those  whose  Towns  we  will  declare 
in  the  next  Coast.  The  River  Rutuba,  the  Town  Albium, 
Intemelium,  the  River  Merula,  the  Town  Albium  Ingaunum, 
the  Port  Vadum  Sabatium,  the  River  Porcifera,  the  Town 
Genua,  the  River  Feritor ;  the  Port  Delphini,  Tigulia : 
within,  Segesta  Tiguliorum  :  the  River  Macra,  which  limiteth 
Liguria.  But  on  the  back  of  all  these  Towns  above-named 
is  Apenninus,  the  highest  Mountain  of  all  Italy,  reaching 
from  the  Alps,  with  a  continual  ridge  of  Hills,  to  the 
Straits  of  Sicily.  From  the  other  Side  of  this  to  Pad  us, 
the  richest  River  of  Italy,  all  the  Country  shineth  with  noble 
Towns :  Liberna,  Dertona  a  Colony,  Iria,  Barderates,  In- 
dustria,  Pollentia,  Cartea,  which  also  is  named  Polentia; 
Foro  Fulvii  the  same  as  Valentinum  ;  Augusta  of  the  Va- 
gienni :  Alba  Pompeia,  Asta,  and  Aquae  Statiellorum.  This 
is  the  ninth  Region,  according  to  the  Arrangement  of  Au- 
gustus. The  Coast  of  Liguria  lieth  between  the  Rivers  Varus 
and  Macra,  211  Miles.  To  it  is  adjoined  the  seventh, 


166  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

wherein  is  Hetruria,  from  the  River  Macra  :  and  itself, 
with  the  Names  often  changed.  In  old  Time  the  Pelasgi 
drove  the  Umbri  from  thence  :  and  by  them  the  Lydi  did 
the  like,  of  whose  King  they  were  named  Tyrrheni:  but 
soon  after,  of  their  Ceremonies  in  Sacrificing,  in  the  Greek 
Language  Thusci.  The  first  Town  of  Hetruria  is  Luna,  with 
a  famous  Harbour ;  then  the  Colony  Luca,  lying  from  the 
Sea :  and  nearer  to  it  is  Pisae,  between  the  River  Auser 
and  Arnus,  which  took  the  Beginning  from  Pelops  and  the 
Pisi,  or  Atintani,  a  Greek  Nation.  Vada  Vollaterranea,  the 
River  Cecinna.  Populonium  of  the  Hetrusci,  in  Times  past 
situate  only  upon  this  Coast.  After  these,  the  Rivers  Prille, 
and,  soon  after,  Umbro,  navigable :  so  forward  the  Tract  of 
Umbria,  and  the  PortTelamon  :  Cossa  Volscientium,  planted 
by  the  People  of  Rome ;  Graviscae,  Castrum  Novum,  Pyrgi, 
the  River  Cseretanus,  and  Caere  itself,  standing  four  Miles 
within ;  Agylla,  named  by  the  Pelasgians,  who  built  it ; 
Alsium  and  Frugenae.  The  River  Tiber,  distant  from 
Macra  284  Miles.  Within  are  these  Colonies :  Falisca, 
descended  from  Argi  (as  Cato  saith),  and  called  Hetrus- 
corum :  Lucus  Feronise,  Russellana,  Senensis,  and  Sutriva. 
For  the  rest  :  Aretini  the  Old,  Aretini  Fidentes,  Aretini 
Julienses,  Amitinenses,  Aquenses,  surnamed  Taurini :  Blerani, 
Cortonenses,  Capenates,  Clusini  the  Old,  Clusini  the  New, 
Fluentini,  fast  upon  the  River  Arnus  that  runneth  before 
them,  Fesulse,  Ferentinum,  Fescennia,  Hortanum,  Herbanum, 
Nepet,  Novempagi,  Prefectura  Claudia,  Foro  Clodii :  Pis- 
torium,  Perusia,  Suanenses,  Saturnini,  who  beforetime  were 
called  Aurinini,  Sudertani,  Statones,  Tarquinienses,  Tus- 
canienses,  Vetulonienses,  Veientani,  Vesentini,  Volaterrani, 
surnamed  Hetrusci,  and  Volsinienses.  In  the  same  Part  lie 
the  Territories  Crustuminus  and  Cseletranus,  bearing  the 
Names  of  the  old  Towns.  Tiber,  before  named  Tybris, 
and,  before  that,  Albula,  from  almost  the  middle  of  the 
Length  of  the  Apennine  runneth  along  the  Borders  of  the 
Aretini :  small  at  the  first,  and  not  Navigable  without  being 
gathered  together  by  Fishponds  into  an  Head,  and  so  let 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  167 

go  :  as  Tinia  and  Glanis,  which  run  into  him ;  and  which 
require  nine  Days  for  the  collection  of  Waters,  and  so  are  kept 
in  for  running  if  they  have  no  Help  from  Rain.  But  Tiber, 
hy  reason  of  the  rough  and  rugged  Channel,  notwithstanding 
that  Device,  holdeth  on  no  long  Course  together,  but  only 
for  Troughs,  more  truly  than  Boats ;  and  thus  it  doth  for 
150  Miles,  to  not  far  from  Tifernum,  Perusia,  and  Otriculum : 
dividing  as  it  passeth  Hetruria  from  the  Umbri  and  Sa- 
bini :  and  presently,  within  thirteen  Miles  of  the  City 
(Rome),  it  parteth  the  Veientian  country  from  the  Crustu- 
mine:  and  soon  after,  the  Fidenate  and  Latin  Territories  from 
the  Labican.  But,  besides  Tinia  and  Glanis,  it  is  augmented 
with  forty-two  Rivers  ;  and  especially  with  Nar  and  Anio : 
which  River  being  also  itself  Navigable,  encloseth  Latium 
from  behind,  and  that  notwithstanding  so  many  Waters 
and  Fountains  are  brought  thereby  into  the  City  ;  whereby 
it  is  able  to  receive  large  Ships  from  the  Italian  Sea,  being 
the  kindest  Merchant  of  Things  growing  in  the  whole  World  : 
it  is  the  only  River  of  all  others  to  speak  of,  and  more  Vil- 
lages stand  upon  it  and  see  it,  than  all  other  Rivers  in  any 
lands  soever.  No  River  hath  less  Liberty  than  it,  as  having 
the  Sides  thereof  enclosed  on  both  Hands ;  and  yet  he  doth 
not  resist,  although  he  hath  many  and  sudden  Swellings, 
and  in  no  Place  more  than  in  the  City  itself  do  his  Waters 
overflow :  yet  is  he  taken  to  be  a  Prophet  rather,  and  a 
Counsellor,  and  in  Swelling  more  truly  Religious  than  Cruel. 
Old  Latium,  from  Tiber  to  Circeios,  was  observed  to  be  in 
Length  fifty  Miles;  so  slender  were  at  first  the  Roots  of 
this  Empire.  The  Inhabitants  thereof  changed  often,  and 
held  it,  some  one  time,  some  another;  that  is,  the  Abo- 
rigines, Pelasgi,  Arcades,  Siculi,  Aurunci,  and  Rutili.  And 
beyond  Circeios,  the  Volsci,  Osci,  Ausones,  from  whence  the 
Name  of  Latium  reached  soon  after,  as  far  as  to  the  River 
Liris.  In  the  beginning  of  it  standeth  Ostia,  a  Colony, 
brought  thither  by  a  Roman  King  :  the  Town  Laurentum, 
the  Grove  of  Jupiter  Indiges,  the  River  Numicius,  and  Ardea, 
built  by  Dande,  the  Mother  of  Perseus.  Then  the  Colony 
Antium,  once  Aphrodisium  ;  Astura,  the  River  and  the 


168  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

Island.  The  River  NymphaBUS,  Clostra  Romana,  Circeii1, 
in  Times  past  an  Island,  environed  with  a  mighty  Sea  (if  we 
believe  Homer\  but  now  with  a  Plain.  A  Wonder  it  is  what 
we  are  able  to  deliver  concerning  this  thing,  to  the  know- 
ledge of  Men.  Theophrastus,  who  of  Foreigners  was  the  first 
that  wrote  any  Thing  diligently  concerning  the  Romans  (for 
Theopompus,  before  whom  no  Man  made  any  mention,  said 
only,  That  the  City  was  taken  by  the  Gauls :  and  Clitarchus 
next  after  him,  spake  of  nothing  but  an  Embassage  sent 
to  Alexander} ;  this  Theophraslus^  with  more  certainty  than 
bare  hearsay,  hath  set  down  the  Measure  of  the  Island 
Circeii  to  be  eighty  Stadia  ;  in  that  Book  which  he  wrote  to 
IVicodorus,  the  chief  Magistrate  of  the  Athenians,  who  lived 
in  the  460th  year  after  the  Foundation  of  our  City.  What- 
ever Land,  therefore,  above  ten  Miles'  compass,  lieth  near 
about  it,  hath  been  annexed  to  the  Island.  A  year  after 
that  another  wonderful  Thing  fell  out  in  It<sly  :  for  not  far 
from  Circeii  there  is  a  Pond  called  Pomptina,  which  Mu- 
tianusy  a  Man  who  had  been  thrice  Consul,  reporteth  to  have 
been  a  Place  wherein  stood  twenty-three  Cities.  Then  there 
is  the  River  Ufens,  upon  which  is  the  Town  Terracina, 
called  in  the  Volscian  tongue  Anxur,  and  where  was  the  City 
Aioycle,  destroyed  by  Serpents.  After  it  is  the  Place  of  a 

1  Cerceia  was  a  town  of  the  Volsci,  on  whose  ruins  is  now  built  the 
little  village  Santa  Felicita.  Homer  ("  Odyssey,"  K.  194)  represents  it 
as  the  abode  of  Circe,  and  says  it  was  an  island — 

"  An  isle  encircled  with  the  boundless  flood." 

But  the  country  all  around  is  now  one  vast  plain,  and  constitutes  the  well- 
known  Pontine  Marshes,  which  being  raised  but  little  above  the  level  of 
the  sea,  may  not  improbably  have  been  once  covered  by  its  waves.  "  If 
the  traveller  can  spare  a  day,"  says  Eustace  in  his  "  Classical  Tour,"  "  he 
may  hire  a  boat,  and  sail  along  the  coast  to  the  promontory  of  Circe, 
which  forms  so  conspicuous  a  figure  in  his  prospect,  and  appears  from 
Terracina,  as  Homer  and  Virgil  poetically  describe  it,  a  real  island.  As 
he  ranges  over  its  lofty  cliffs,  he  will  recollect  the  splendid  fictions  of  the 
one  and  the  harmonious  lines  of  the  other.  He  may  traverse  the  un- 
frequented groves  ;  but  instead  of  the  palace  of  Circe  he  will  discover  the 
lonely  village  of  Santa  Felicita,  a  few  solitary  towers  hanging  over  the 
sea,  and  perhaps  some  faint  traces  of  the  ancient  Cerceia,  covered  with 
bushes  and  overgrown  with  shrubs." —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  169 

Cave,  the  Lake  Fundanus,  and  the  Port  Cajeta.  The  Town 
Formiae,  named  also  Hormiae,  the  ancient  Seat  (as  Men 
thought)  of  the  Laestrigones.  Beyond  it  was  the  Town 
Pyrae,  the  Colony  Minturnae,  divided  by  the  River  Liris, 
called  Clauius.  The  furthest  Town  in  the  adjoins  of  Latium 
is  Sinuessa,  which,  as  some  have  said,  was  commonly  called 
Sinope.  Thence  cometh  the  pleasant  Country  Campania. 
From  this  Vale  begin  the  Hills  which  are  full  of  Vineyards, 
and  famous  for  Drunkenness,  proceeding  of  the  Liquor  so 
celebrated,  commended  in  all  Countries  :  and  (as  they  were 
wont  to  say  in  old  Time)  there  was  the  chief  Strife  between 
Father  Liber  and  Ceres.  From  hence  the  Setine  and  Ce- 
cubine  Countries  spread  forth  :  and  to  them  join  the  Falern 
and  Calene.  Then  arise  the  Mountains  Massici,  Gaurani, 
and  Surrentim.  There  the  Laborini  Fields  are  spread  about, 
and  the  good  Wheat  harvest  to  make  Dainties  at  the  table. 
The  Sea-coasts  here  are  watered  with  hot  Fountains  ;  and 
beside. other  Things  through  all  the  Sea,  they  are  famous 
for  the  rich  purple  Shell-fish1  and  other  excellent  Fishes2. 
In  no  Place  is  there  better  Oil  from  the  Olive ;  and  this 
contest  of  Human  pleasure,  the  Osci,  Grecians,  Umbri, 
Tusci,  and  Campi,  have  held.  In  the  Border  of  this  is  the 
River  Savo ;  Vulturnum,  the  Town,  with  the  River;  Li- 
ternum,  and  Cumo,  inhabited  by  Chalcidians,  Misenum, 
the  Harbour  Baiae,  Baiili,  the  Lakes  Lucrinus  and  Aver- 
nus,  near  which  was  once  the  Town  Cimmerium.  Then 
Puteoli,  called  also  the  Colony  Dicaearchia :  after  that,  the 
Plains  Phlegraei,  and  the  Marsh  Acherusia,  near  to  Cumes. 
And  by  the  Shore  Naples3,  a  City  also  of  the  Chalcidians; 

1  The  famous  Tyrian  dye  was  procured  from  shell-fish,  but  the  par- 
ticular species  are  not  certainly  known.     Of  the  Purpura  and  Buccinum 
described  by  Pliny  in  his  9th  book,  the  former  is  probably  the  Murex 
trunculus  of  Linnaeus,  and  the  other  the  Purpura  patula  of  Lamark. — 
Wern.  Club. 

2  The  Scarus,  described  by  Pliny,  lib.  ix.  29,  is  perhaps  intended,  but 
it  is  difficult  to  determine  what  the  Scarus  was.    Baian  and  Lucrine  oysters 
may  also  be  referred  to;  these  are  described,  lib.  ix.  79. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Livy,  lib.  viii.  22,  says,  "  Naples  was  inhabited  by  a  people  that 
came  from  Cumae,  and  the  Cumans  derive  their  origin  from  Chalcis,  in 
Euboaa."—  Wern.  Club. 


170  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  III. 

as  Parthenope,  so  called  from  the  Tomb  of  a  Siren :  Her- 
culaneum,  Pompeii  :  and,  not  far  off,  the  Mountain 
Vesuvius  overlooketh,  and  the  River  Sernus  runneth  by 
the  Territory  of  Nuceria ;  and  within  nine  Miles  of  the  Sea, 
Nuceria  itself.  Surrentum,  with  the  Promontory  of  Mi- 
nerva, the  Seat  once  of  the  Sirens.  From  Circeii  the  Navi- 
gation lieth  open  seventy-eight  Miles.  This  is  counted  the 
first  Region  of  Italy,  from  Tiber,  according  to  the  Descrip- 
tion of  Augustus.  Within  it  are  these  Colonies  :  Capua,  so 
called  of  the  Champaign  Country  ;  Aquinum ;  Suessa,  Ve- 
nafrum,  Sora,  Teanum,  named  also  Sidicinum ;  and  Nola : 
the  Towns  Abellinum,  Aricia,  Alba  Longa,  Acerrani,  Allifani, 
Atinates,  Aletrinates,  Anagnini,  Atellani,  Asulani,  Arpinates, 
Auximates,  Avellani,  Aifaterni ;  and  they  who  of  the  Latin, 
Hernic,  and  Labicane  Territories,  are  surnamed  accordingly  : 
Bovillse,  Calatiae,  Casinum,  Calenum,  Capitulum,  Cernetum> 
Cernetani,  who  are  called  also  Mariani.  Corani,  descended 
from  Dardanus  the  Trojan.  Cubulterini,  Castrimonienses, 
Cingulani.  Fabienses,  and  in  the  Mount  Albanus,  Foro-popu- 
lienses.  Out  of  the  Falern  Territory,  Frusinates,  Feren- 
tinates,  Freginates,  Fabraterni  the  Old,  Fabraterni  the  New, 
Ficolenses,  Fricolenses,  Foro-Appi,  Forentani,  Gabini,  In- 
terramnates,  Succasani,  called  also  Lirinates,  Ilionenses, 
Lavinii,  Norbani,  Nementani  Prenestini,  whose  City  was  in 
Times  past  named  Stephanus,  Privernates,  Setini,  Signini, 
Suessulani,  Telini,  Trebutini,  surnamed  Balinienses,  Trebani, 
Tusculani,  Verulani,  Veliterni,  Ulubrenses,  Ulvernates,  and 
above  Rome  herself:  the  other  Name1  whereof  to  utter  is 

1  Valentia. 

In  the  second  chapter  of  book  xxviii.,  Pliny  tells  us,  on  the  autho- 
rity of  authors  adduced  by  Verrius  Flaccus,  that  the  Romans,  when  about 
to  commence  the  siege  of  any  place,  first  called  upon  their  priests  to  in- 
voke the  deity  under  whose  protection  that  place  was,  and  promised  him 
the  same,  or  even  a  greater,  degree  of  worship  than  he  had  previously 
received.  And  that  the  enemies  of  Rome  might  not  have  recourse  to  the 
same  expedient,  it  was  kept ; a  strict  secret  under  the  protection  of  what 
particular  deity  their  own  city  was  placed.  Valentia  appears  to  have  been 
the  secret  name,  and  it  was  never  divulged  till  Valerius  Soranus  rashly 
uttered  it,  and,  as  we  learn  from  Plutarch  (in  "  Quaest.  Rom."  p.  278), 
uffered  the  punishment  of  his  impiety.  St.  Paul  found  at  Athens  an 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  171 

counted  in  the  Mysteries  of  the  Ceremonies  an  impious  and 
unlawful  Thing  :  which,  after  it  was  abolished,  for  the  faithful 
Safety  thereof,  Valerius  Soranus  pronounced,  and  soon  after 
suffered  the  Penalty.  I  think  it  not  amiss  to  insert  in  this 
Place  an  Example  of  the  ancient  Religion,  instituted  espe- 
cially for  this  Silence:  for  the  Goddess  Angerona,  to  whom 
is  sacrificed  on  the  twelfth  Day  before  the  Kalends  of  January, 
is  represented  by  an  Image  having  her  Mouth  bound  and 
sealed  up.  The  City  had  three  Gates  when  Romulus  left  it ; 
or  rather  four  (if  we  believe  most  Men  that  write  thereof), 
its  Walls,  when  the  two  Vespasians,  Emperors  and  Censors, 
took  the  Measure,  in  the  Year  after  the  Foundation  of  it, 
828,  were  in  circuit  thirteen1  Miles  and  almost  a  quarter. 
It  containeth  within  it  seven  Mountains,  and  is  divided  into 
fourteen  Regions  and  265  cross  Streets,  called  Compita 
Larium.  The  Measure  of  the  same  space  of  Ground,  running 
from  the  Milliarium,  erected  at  the  Head  of  the  Roman 
Forum,  to  every  Gate,  which  are  at  this  Day  thirty-seven  in 
number  (so  ye  reckon  once  the  twelve  Gates  always  open, 
and  overpass  seven  of  the  old,  which  no  longer  exist2),  maketh 
thirty  Miles,  three-quarters,  and  a  little  more,  in  a  straight 
Line :  but  from  the  same  Milliarium  3,  to  the  utmost  ends  of 
the  Houses,  with  the  Praetorian  Camps,  and  the  clumps 
(vicos)  of  all  the  Streets,  it  cometh  to  somewhat  above 
seventy  Miles  :  to  which  if  a  Man  put  the  Height  of  the 
Houses,  he  may  truly  conceive  by  it  a  worthy  Estimate  of  it, 
and  confess  that  the  Magnitude  of  no  City  in  the  World 

altar  dedicated  to  the  Unknown  God;  this  had,  probably,  been  erected 
with  a  reference  to  the  custom  above-mentioned,  as  there  is  no  reason  for 
supposing  it  confined  to  the  Romans. —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Some  read,  thirty. 

2  In  ancient  times  the  most  frequented  roads  to  the  city  of  Rome  had 
double  gates.    They  who  came  into  the  city  passed  through  the  left-hand 
gates ;    and  they  who  went  out  took  the  right-hand  gate.      (Nardini, 
"  Roma  Antica,"  lib.  x.  cap.  9.)     When  Pliny,  speaking  of  the  gates  of 
the  city,  says  that  twelve  of  the  thirty-seven  gates  should  only  be  num- 
bered once,  he  alludes  to  such  of  them  as  were  double  in  this 

Note  in  the  "  Pursuits  of  Literature"  Dia.  4th.—  Wern.  Club. 

3  For  figure  of  the  Milliarium,  see  the  end  of  this  book. 


172  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  lit. 

could  be  compared  to  it.  It  is  enclosed  on  the  East  Side 
with  the  Rampart  of  Tarquinius  the  Proud  ;  a  very  won- 
derful piece  of  Work  :  for  he  raised  it  as  high  as  the  Walls 
on  that  Side  where  the  approach  to  it  was  most  open.  On 
the  other  Part  it  was  fortified  with  exceedingly  high  Walls, 
or  with  steep  Hills,  except  where  there  the  Buildings  lie  out, 
and  make  many  Cities.  In  that  first  Region  there  were 
besides,  for  Latium,  these  distinguished  Towns :  Satricum, 
Pometia,  Scaptia,  Pitulum,  Politorium,  Tellene,  Tifata. 
Caemina,  Ficana,  Crustumerium,  Ameriola,  Medullia,  Cor- 
niculum,  Saturnia,  where  now  Rome  standeth  :  Antipolis, 
which  now  is  Janiculum,  in  a  Part  of  Rome  :  Antemnse, 
Carnerium,  Collatise  :  Amiternum,  Norbe,  Sulmo ;  and  with 
these,  the  Alban  People,  who  were  accustomed  to  receive 
Flesh  in  Mount  Alban  ;  Albani,  ^Esolani,  Acienses,  Aholani, 
Bubetani,  Bolani,  Casuetani,  Coriolani,  Fidenates,  Foretii, 
Hortenses,  Latinenses,  Longulani,  Manates,  Macrales,  Mu- 
tucumenses,  Munienses,  Numinienses,  OHiculani,  Octulani, 
Pedani,  Pollustini,  Querquetulani,  Sicani,  Sisolenses,  Tole- 
rienses,  Tutienses,  Virnitellarii,  Velienses,  Venetulani,  Vi- 
cellenses.  Thus  of  the  Old  Latium  there  be  fifty-three  States 
perished,  without  any  Remains  left  behind.  Moreover,  in 
the  Campaign  Country,  the  Town  Stabiae  continued  to  the 
Time  that  Cn.  Pompeius  and  L.  Carbo  were  Consuls,  the 
last  Day  of  April ;  upon  which  Day  L.  Sylla,  Legate  in  the 
Social  War,  destroyed  it  utterly :  which  now  is  turned  into 
Farm-houses.  There  is  decayed  also  there  Taurania.  There 
be  also  some  little  Relics  left  of  the  dying  Casilinum. 
Moreover,  Antias  writeth,  that  Apiolae,  a  Town  of  the 
Latins,  was  taken  by  L.  Tarquinius^  the  King ;  with  the 
Pillage  whereof  he  founded  the  Capitol.  From  Surrentum 
to  the  River  Silarus  was  the  Picentine  Country,  for  the 
space  of  thirty  Miles,  renowned  for  the  Tuscan's  Temple 
built  by  Jason  in  honour  of  Juno  Argiva.  Within  it  stood 
the  Towns  Salernum  and  Picentia.  At  Silarus,  the  third 
Region  beginneth,  together  with  the  Lucan  and  Brutian 
Countries  :  and  there  also  the  Inhabitants  changed  not  a 
few  times.  For  it  was  possessed  by  the  Pelasgi,  (Enotri, 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  173 

I  tali,  Morgetes,  Siculi,  People  for  the  most  part  of  Greece  : 
and  last  of  all  by  the  Lucani,  descended  from  the  Samnites, 
under  their  Leader  Lucius.  In  which  standeth  the  Town 
Paestum,  called  by  the  Greeks  Posidonia:  the  Bay  Psestanus, 
the  Town  Helia,  now  Velia.  The  Promontory  Palinurum, 
Creek  receding,  from  which  there  is  a  Passage  to  the  Column 
Rhegia,  100  Miles  over.  Next  to  this,  the  River  Melphes  : 
the  Town  Buxentum,  in  Greek  Pyxus;  the  River  Laiis  ; 
and  a  Town  there  was  likewise  of  the  same  Name.  From 
thence  the  Sea-coast  of  Brutium,  the  Town  Blanda,  the 
River  Batnm,  the  Haven  Parthenius  belonging  to  the 
Phocaeans  :  the  Bay  Vibonensis ;  the  Grove  Clampetia,  the 
Town  Ternsa,  called  by  the  Greeks  Temese :  and  Terina  of 
the  Crotonians,  and  the  very  large  Bay  Terinseus  :  the  Town 
Consentia.  Within,  in  a  Peninsula,  the  River  Acheron, 
from  which  the  Townsmen  are  called  Acherontini.  Hippo, 
which  now  we  call  Vibovalentia  ;  the  Port  of  Hercules,  the 
River  Metaurus,  the  Town  Tauroentum,  the  Port  of  Orestes, 
and  Medua  :  the  Town  Scylleum,  the  River  Cratais,  Mother 
(as  they  say)  to  Scylla.  Then  the  Column  Rhegia :  the 
Sicilian  Straits,  and  two  Capes,  one  over  against  the  other ; 
namely,  Caenis  from  Italy,  and  Pelorum  from  Sicily,  a  Mile 
and  half  asunder  :  from  whence  to  Rhegium  is  twelve  Miles 
and  a  half:  and  so  forward  to  a  Wood  in  the  Apennine 
called  Sila  ;  and  the  Promontory  called  Leucopetra,  twelve 
Miles.  Beyond  which,  Locri  (carrying  the  Name  also  of  the 
Promontory  Zephyrium)  is  from  Silarus  distant  303  Miles. 
Here  is  included  the  first  Gulf  of  Europe,  wherein  are  named 
these  Seas :  first,  Atlanticum  (from  which  the  Ocean  breaketh 
in),  called  of  some  Magnum  :  the  Passage  through  which  it 
entereth  is  by  the  Greeks  called  Porthmos;  by  us  FretumGadi- 
tanum ;  when  it  hath  entered  the  Spanish  Sea,  so  far  it  washeth 
the  Coasts  of  Spain,  Freturn  Hispanum  :  of  others,  Ibericum, 
or  Balearicum :  and  presently  it  taketh  the  Name  of  Gallicum, 
before  the  Province  Narbonensis  :  and  after  that,  Ligusticum : 
from  whence,  to  the  Island  Sicily,  it  is  called  Tuscum  ;  which 
some  of  the  Grecians  term  Notium,  others  Tyrrhenum,  but 
most  of  our  Countrymen  Inferum.  Beyond  Sicily  to  the 


174  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

Salentini,  Polybius  calleth  it  Ausonium  :  but  Eratosthenes 
naraeth  all  the  Sea  Sardonuin,  that  is,  between  the  Mouth  of 
the  Ocean  and  Sardinia  :  and  from  thence  to  Sicily,  Tyr- 
rhenum  :  and  from  it  to  Greta,  Siculum  :  beyond  which  it  is 
called  Creticum.  The  Islands  along  these  Seas  are  these  : 
the  first  of  all,  those  by  the  Greeks  named  Pityusae,  of  the 
Pine  plant ;  but  now,  Ebusus :  they  are  both  a  City  con- 
federate, and  a  narrow  Arm  of  the  Sea  runneth  between 
them  :  they  are  forty-two  Miles  apart.  From  Dianeum  they 
are  distant  seventy  Stadia :  and  so  many  are  there  between 
Dianeum  and  New  Carthage,  by  the  main  Land  :  and  as  far 
from  Pityusse  into  the  main  Ocean,  lie  the  two  Baleares ; 
and  toward  Sucro,  Colubraria.  These  Baleares,  in  War, 
use  much  the  Sling  ;  and  the  Greeks  name  them  Gymnesiae. 
The  greater  of  them  is  100  Miles  in  Length,  and  in  Circuit 
380.  It  hath  Towns  of  Roman  Citizens,  Palma  and  Pol- 
lentia :  of  Latins,  Cinium  and  Cunici :  and  Bochri  was  a 
Town  confederate.  From  it  the  lesser  is  30  Miles  off, 
being  in  Length  60  Miles,  and  in  Compass  150.  Cities 
in  it  are  Jamno,  Sanisera,  and  Mago.  From  the  greater, 
12  Miles  in  the  Sea,  lieth  the  Isle  Capraria,  dangerous  for 
Shipwrecks :  and  opposite  the  City  Palma,  Menariae,  and 
Tiquadra,  and  little  Annibalis.  The  Soil  of  Ebusus  chaseth 
Serpents  away,  but  that  of  Colubraria  breedeth  them ;  and 
therefore  it  is  Dangerous  for  all  that  come  into  it,  unless  they 
bring  with  them  some  of  the  Ebusian  earth.  The  Greeks 
call  this  Island,  Ophiusa.  Neither  doth  Ebusus  produce 
any  Rabbits ;  which  are  so  common  in  the  Baleares,  that 
they  eat  up  the  Corn.  There  be  about  twenty  more  little 
ones  in  the  shallow  Part  of  the  Sea.  But  in  the  Coast  of 
Gallia,  in  the  Mouth  of  Rhodanus,  there  is  Metina  ;  and 
soon  after,  that  which  is  called  Blascon  ;  and  the.  three 
Stoechades,  called  so  by  their  Neighbours  the  Massilians,  for 
their  Order ;  and  they  give  each  one  a  several  Name,  as 
Prote,  Mes£  (which  also  is  called  Pornponiana),  and  the 
third,  Hypea.  After  them,  are  Sturium,  Phrenice,  Phila, 
Lero,  and  Lerina,  over  against  Antipolis;  wherein  is  a 
Memorial  of  the  Town  Vergaonum. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  1 75 

CHAPTER  VI. 

i 
Of  Corsica. 

IN  the  Ligurian  Sea  is  Corsica,  which  the  Greeks  called 
Cyrnos,  but  it  is  nearer  to  the  Tuscan  Sea,  stretching  out 
from  the  North  into  the  South,  and  in  Length  is  150  Miles : 
in  Breadth,  for  the  more  Part,  50:  in  Circuit,  322:  it  is 
distant  from  the  Shallows  of  Volaterrae  62  Miles.  It  hath 
35  Cities  :  and  the  Colonies,  Mariana,  planted  by  C.  Marius; 
Aleria,  by  the  Dictator  Sylla.  On  this  Side  of  it  is  Oglasa ; 
but  within  60  Miles  of  Corsica  is  Planaria ;  so  called  of  its 
Form,  which  is  level  with  the  Sea;  and,  therefore,  deceiveth 
Ships.  Bigger  than  it  are  Urgo  and  Capraria,  which  the 
Greeks  called  .ZEgilos.  Also,  ^Egilium  and  Danium,  the 
same  as  Artemisia ;  both  lying  over  against  the  Coast  of 
Cosanum.  Other  small  ones,  also,  as  Maenaria,  Columbraria, 
Venaria,  Ilua,  with  the  Iron  Mines,  in  Circuit  100  Miles, 
10  Miles  from  Populonia,  called  by  the  Greeks,  .ZEthalia : 
from  it  is  Planasia,  39  Miles  off.  After  them,  beyond  the 
Mouths  of  Tiber  in  the  Antian  (Creek),  is  Astura;  and  close 
by  Palmaria,  Sinonia  ;  and  just  against,  Formias,  Pontiae. 
But  in  the  Bay  of  Puteolanum,  Pantadaria  and  Prochyta,  so 
called,  not  of  jEneass  Nurse,  but  because  of  the  gushing  of 
the  Sea  from  JEnaria.  ^Enaria  itself  took  its  Name  from  the 
Station  of  the  Ships  of  uEneas  ;  called  by  Homer  Inarime,  by 
the  Greeks,  Pithecusa;  not  for  the  Number  of  Apes  there,  as 
some  have  thought,  but  of  the  Work-houses  of  those  that 
made  earthen  Vessels.  Between  Pausilipus  and  Naples,  Me- 
garis ;  and  soon  after,  eight  Miles  from  Surrentum,  Capreae, 
renowned  for  the  Castle  of  the  Prince  Tiberius  ;  in  Circum- 
ference 400  Miles.  Next,  Leucothea;  and  out  of  Sight  Jieth 
Sardinia,  close  upon  the  African  Sea,  but  less  than  nine  Miles 
from  the  Coast  of  Corsica :  and  still  those  Straits  are  made 
more  narrow  by  reason  of  the  small  Islands  named  Cunicu- 
larise.  Likewise  Phintonis  and  Fossae,  whereof  the  very 
Strait  itself  is  named  Taphros. 


1 76  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  III. 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Of  Sardinia. 

SARDINIA,  on  the  East  Side,  is  in  Extent  188  Miles;  on 
the  West,  170  ;  Southward,  74;  and  Northward,  122  :  so  that, 
in  all,  it  taketh  up  the  Compass  of  560  Miles.  It  is  from  the 
Cape  of  Caralitanus  to  Africa  200  Miles :  from  Gades,  1400 
Miles.  It  hath  two  Islands  on  that  Side  where  the  Promon- 
tory Gorditanum  standeth  ;  which  be  called  Hercules'  Is- 
lands :  on  the  Side  of  Sulsensis,  Enosis  ;  of  Caralitanum, 
Ficaria.  Some  Place  not  far  from  it  the  Islands  Belerides 
and  Col  1  odes :  and  another  which  they  call  Heras  Lutra,  or 
Hieraca.  The  most  celebrated  People  therein  are  the  Ilienses, 
Balari,  and  Corsi :  and  of  the  fourteen  Towns,  the  Sul- 
citana,  Valentin),  Neapolitan!,  Bosenses,  and  Caralitani,  who 
are  Roman  Citizens  ;  arid  Norenses.  There  is  one  Colony 
which  is  called  Ad  Turrim  Libysonis.  This  Island  Sardinia 
Timceus  called  (from  the  Shape  of  a  Shoe)  Sandaliotis :  but 
Myrsylus  (from  its  Resemblance  to  a  Footstep),  Ichnusa. 
Over  against  the  Bay  Psestanum  is  Leucasia,  so  called  from 
a  Siren  there  buried.  Opposite  Vestia,  lie  Pontia  and  Issia  ; 
both  jointly  called  by  one  Name,  (Enotides  ;  an  Argument 
that  Italy  was  possessed  by  the  CEnotrians.  And  opposite 
Vibo  other  little  ones,  called  Ithacesise,  the  Watch-places  of 
Ulysses. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Of  Sicily. 

BUT  Sicily  excelleth  all  other  of  these  Islands.  It  is 
named  by  Thucydides,  Sicania ;  by  many,  Trinacria,  or  Tri- 
quetra,  from  its  triangular  Form.  It  is  in  Circuit  (as  Agrippa 
saith)  198  Miles.  In  Times  past  it  was  joined  to  the  Bru- 
tians'  Country ;  but  soon  after,  by  the  Rush  of  the  Sea,  it 
was  torn  from  it,  and  a  Strait  was  left  of  12  Miles  in 
Length,  and  one  and  a  half  in  Breadth,  near  the  Column 
Rhegium.  Upon  this  Occasion  of  opening,  the  Greeks  gave 
a  Name  to  the  Town  Rhegiurn,  situated  on  the  Edge  sf  Italy. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  177 

In  this  Strait  is  the  Rock  called  Scylla,  and  likewise  another 
named  Charybdis :  the  Sea  is  full  of  Whirlpools,  and  both 
those  Rocks  are  notorious  for  their  Rage.     The  utmost  Cape 
of  this  Island  Triquetra  (as  we  have  said)  is  called  Pelorus, 
projecting  against  Scylla  toward  Italy.     Pachynum  lieth  to- 
ward Graecia,  and  from  it  Peloponnesus  is  distant  144  Miles. 
Lilybaeum  lieth  toward  Africa,  and  between  it  and  the  Cape 
of  Mercury  there  are  180  Miles  :  and  from  the  said  Lilybaeum 
to  the  Cape  of  Caraleis  in  Sardinia,  120.     Now  these  Pro- 
montories and  Sides  lie  one  from  the  other  at  this  Distance : 
by  Land,  from  Pelorus  to  Pachynum,  166  Miles  :  from  thence 
to  Lilybaeum,  200  Miles :  so  forward  to  Pelorus,  170.     In  it, 
of  Colonies,  Towns,    and    Cities,    there   are   72.      Beyond 
Pelorus,  which  looketh  toward  the  Ionian  Sea,  is  the  Town 
Messana,  inhabited  by  Roman  Citizens,  which  are  called 
Mamertini.      Also  the  Cape  Drepanum  ;  the  Colony  Tau- 
rominium,  formerly   called  Naxos;  the   River  Asines;   the 
Mountain  ^Etna,  wonderful  for  its  Fires  in  the  Night ;  the 
Cavity  (Crater)  of  it  is  in  Compass  two  Miles  and  a  half; 
the  burning  Ashes  thereof  fly  as  far  as  to  Taurominium  and 
Catana :  but  its  crashing  Noise  may  be  heard  as  far  as  to 
Maron,  and  the  Hills  Gemellis.     There  are  also,  the  three 
Rocks   of  the  Cyclops ;    the    Port  of  Ulysses,  the   Colony 
Catana ;  the  Rivers  Symethum  and  Terias :  within  the  Isle 
the  Fields  Laestrigonii.     The  Towns  Leontini  and  Megaris  : 
the  River  Pantagies  :  the  Colony  Syracusae,  with  the  Foun- 
tain Arethusa.   Also,  there  are  other  Springs  in  the  Territory 
of  Syracusa  that  yield  Water  for  drink,  as  Temenitis,  Archi- 
demia,    Magaea,    Cyan£,   and   Milichie.     The   Port   Naus- 
tathmos,  the  River  Elorum,  the   Promontory  Pachynum  : 
and  on  this  Front  of  Sicily,  the  River  Hirminium,  the  Town 
Camarina,  the  River  Helas,  and  Town  Acragas,  which  our 
Countrymen  have  named  Agrigentum.  The  Colony  Thermae : 
Rivers,  Atys  and  Hypsa :  the  Town  Selinus :  and  next  to  it 
the  Promontory  Lilybaeum,  Drepana,  the  Mountain  Eryx. 
The  Towns  Panhormum,  Solus,  Hymetta  with  the  River, 
Cephaloedis,  Aluntium,  Agathirium,  Tyndaris  a  Colony,  the 

M 


178  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

Town  Mylse ;  and,  whence  we  began,  Pelorus.  Within,  of 
Latin  condition,  the  Centuripines,  Netini,  and  Segestini. 
Stipendiaries,  Assarini,  .ZEtnenses,  Agyrini,  Acestaei,  and 
Acrenses :  Bidini,  Citarii,  Caciritani,  Drepanitani,  Ergetini, 
Ecestienses,  Erycini,  Eutellini,  Etini,  Enguini,  Gelani,  Gala- 
tani,  Halesini,  Ennenses,  Hyblenses,  Herbitenses,  Herbes- 
senses,  Herbulenses,  Halicyenses,  Hadranitani,  Iinacarenses, 
Ichanenses,  Jetenses,  Mutustratini,  Magellini,  Murgentini, 
Mutyenses,  Menanini,  Naxii,  Nooeni,  Pelini,  Paropini,  Phin- 
thienses,  Semellitani,  Scherrini,  Selinuntii,  Symaetii,  Tala- 
renses,  Tissinenses,Triocalini,  Tiracienses,  Zanchaei  belonging 
to  the  Messenians  in  the  Straits  of  Sicily.  Islands  bending 
to  Africa :  Gaulos,  Melita,  from  Camerina,  84  Miles ;  and 
from  Lilybaeum,  113:  Cosyra,  Hieronesus,  Caene,  Galata, 
Lopadusa,  ^Ethusa,  which  others  have  written  ^Egusa ;  Bu- 
cina,  and  75  Miles  from  Solus,  Osteodes  :  and  opposite  the 
Paropini,  Ustica.  But  on  this  Side  Sicily,  opposite  the 
River  Metaurus,  about  12  Miles  from  Italy,  seven  others 
called  JEoliae.  The  same  Islands  belonged  to  the  Liparaei, 
and  by  the  Greeks  were  called  Hephaestiades,  and  by  our 
People,  Vulcaniae ;  ^oliae,  also,  because  ^Eohts  reigned  there 
in  the  Time  that  Ilium  flourished. 


CHAPTER  IX. 
Of  Lipara. 

LIPARA,  with  a  Town  of  Roman  Citizens,  so  called  from 
King  Liparus,  who  succeeded  ^Eolus,  but  before  that  named 
Melogonis,  or  Meligunis,  is  twelve  Miles  from  Italy ;  and  is 
itself  somewhat  less  in  Circuit.  Between  it  and  Sicily  there 
is  another,  formerly  named  Therasia,  now  Hiera,  because  it 
is  sacred  to  Vulcan,  wherein  there  is  a  Hill  that  casteth  up 
Flames  in  the  Night.  A  third  is  named  Strongyl£,  a  Mile 
from  Lipara,  lying  toward  the  Sun-rising,  wherein  JEolus 
reigned  ;  and  it  differeth  from  Lipara  only  in  that  it  sendeth 
forth  more  lively  Flames  :  by  the  Smoke  thereof  the  People 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  179 

of  that  Country  are  said  to  tell,  three  Days  before-hand1, 
what  Winds  will  blow  :  from  whence  it  is  commonly  thought, 
that  the  Winds  were  obedient  to  JEolus.  A  fourth  is  named 
Didym&,  less  than  Lipara  :  and  a  fifth,  Ericusa  :  a  sixth, 
Phoenicusa,  left  to  feed  the  Rest  that  are  next  to  it :  the  last 
and  least  is  Euonymus.  And  thus  much  concerning  the  first 
Gulf  that  divideth  Europe. 

CHAPTER  X. 
Of  Locri,  the  Front  of  Italy. 

AT  Locri  beginneth  the  Front  of  Italy,  called  Magna 
Graecia,  retiring  itself  into  three  Bays  of  the  Ausonian  Sea ; 
because  the  Ausones  first  occupied  it.  It  extendeth  eighty- 
two  Miles,  as  Varro  testifieth ;  but  the  greater  Number  of 
Writers  have  made  it  but  seventy-two.  In  that  Coast  are 
Rivers  without  Number;  but  the  Things  which  are  worth 
the  writing  of  near  Locri,  are  these  :  Sagra,  and  the  Vestiges 
of  the  Town  Caulon  :  Mystia,  the  Camp  Consilinum,  Cerin- 
thus,  which  some  think  to  be  the  longest  Promontory  of 
Italy.  Then  the  Bay  of  Scylaceum,  which  was  called  by  the 
Athenians,  when  they  built  it,  Scylletium.  Which  Place  the 
Bay  Terinaeus  meeting  with,  maketh  a  Peninsula :  in  which 
there  is  a  Port  called  Castra  Annibilis :  and  in  no  Place  is 
Italy  narrower,  being  but  twenty  Miles  broad.  And,  therefore, 
Dionysius  the  Elder  wished  to  have  there  cut  it  off,  and 
added  it  to  Sicily.  Rivers  navigable  there :  Caecinos,  Cro- 
talus,  Semirus,  Arocha,  Targines.  Within  is  the  Town  Pe- 
tilia,  the  Mountain  Alibanus,  and  the  Promontory  Lacinium  : 
before  the  Coast  of  which  is  an  Island  ten  Miles  from  the 
Land,  called  Dioscoron ;  and  another  Calypsus,  which  Homer 

1  Wheelwright,  in  his  translation  of  Pindar,  thinks  the  following  lines 
from  the  seventh  Nemean  Ode  refer  to  the  circumstance  mentioned  by 
Pliny  :— 

"  Three  days  ere  yet  the  tempest  rise, 
The  skilful  mariner  descries,"  &c. 

Wern.  Club. 


180  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  III. 

is  supposed  to  have  called  Ogygia  ;  and  also  Tyris,  Eranusa, 
Meloessa.  And  this  is  seventy  Miles  from  Caulon,  as  Agrippa 
hath  recorded. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

The  second  Bay  of  Europe. 

FROM  the  Promontory  Lacinium  beginneth  the  second 
Bay  of  Europe,  bent  with  a  great  Winding ;  and  it  endeth  at 
Acrocerauriium,  a  Promontory  of  Epirus,  from  which  it  is 
seventy  Miles  distant.  In  it  is  the  Town  Croto,  and  the 
River  Naeathus.  The  Town  Thurium,  between  the  two 
Rivers,  Arathis  and  Sybaris ;  where  there  was  a  Town  of  the 
same  Name.  Likewise,  between  Siris  and  Aciris  there 
standeth  Heraclea,  once  called  Siris.  Rivers,  Acalandrum, 
Masuentum  ;  the  Town  Metapontum,  in  which  the  third 
Region  of  Italy  endeth.  The  inland  Inhabitants,  the  Aprus- 
tani  only,  are  of  the  Brutians  :  but  of  the  Lucani,  Thoati- 
nates,  Bantini,  Eburini,  Grumentini,  Potentini,  Sontini, 
Sirini,  Tergilani,  Ursentini,  Volcentani,  to  whom  the  Nu- 
mestrani  are  joined.  Besides  these,  Cato  writeth,  that  Thebes 
of  the  Lucani  hath  perished.  And  Theopompus  saith,  that 
Pandosia  was  a  City  of  the  Lucani,  wherein  Alexander  the 
Epirote  was  slain.  Attached  to  it  is  the  second  Region, 
containing  within  it  the  Hirpini,  Calabria,  Apulia,  and  the 
Salentini,  within  a  Bay,  in  Compass  250  Miles ;  which  is 
called  Tarentinus,  from  a  Town  of  the  Laconi,  situated  in 
the  Recess :  and  to  it  was  annexed  the  maritime  Colony 
which  was  there  :  it  is  distant  from  the  Promontory  Laci- 
nium 136  Miles  ;  putting  forth  Calabria  into  a  Peninsula 
against  it.  The  Greeks  called  it  Messapia,  from  the  Name 
of  a  Leader,  and  before  this,  Peucetia,  of  Peucetius,  the  bro- 
ther of  CEnotrus.  In  the  Salentine  Country,  between  the 
Promontories,  there  is  the  Distance  of  100  Miles.  The 
Breadth  of  this  Peninsula,  from  Tarentum  to  Brundisium,  by 
Land,  is  two-and-thirty  Miles  ;  but  far  shorter  from  the  Port 
Sasina.  The  Towns  in  the  Continent  from  Tarentum,  are 
Varia,  surnamed  Apula,  Cessapia  and  Aletium.  But  in  the 
Coast  of  the  Senones,  Gallipolis,  now  Auxa,  sixty-two  Miles 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  181 

from  Tarentum.  Two-and-thirty  Miles  off  is  the  Promontory 
which  they  call  Acra  Japygia,  from  which  Italy  runneth 
furthest  into  the  Sea.  Beyond  it  is  the  Town  of  Basta,  and 
Hydruntum,  the  Space  of  nineteen  Miles,  to  make  a  Par- 
tition between  the  Ionian  and  the  Adriatic  Sea ;  through 
which  is  the  shortest  Passage  into  Greece,  over  against  the 
Town  of  Apollonia  ;  where  the  Strait  running  between  is  not 
above  fifty  Miles  over.  This  Space  between,  Pyrrhus  King 
of  Epirus,  intending  to  have  a  Passage  over  on  Foot,  first 
thought  to  make  Bridges  across  :  after  him,  M.  Varro,  at  the 
Time  when  in  the  Pirates'  War,  he  was  Admiral  of  Pompeys 
Fleet.  But  both  of  them  were  stopped  by  other  Cares.  Next  to 
Hydrus,  is  Soletum,  a  City  not  inhabited  :  then,  Fratuertium  : 
the  Port  Tarentinus,  the  Garrison  Town  Lupia,  Balesium, 
Caelium,  Brundusium,  fifteen  Miles  from  Hydrus,  much  re- 
nowned among  the  chief  Towns  of  Italy  for  the  Harbour, 
especially  for  the  surer  sailing,  although  it  be  the  longer ; 
and  the  City  of  lllyricum  Dyrrhagium  is  ready  to  receive  the 
Ships  :  the  Passage  over  is  220  Miles.  Upon  Brundusium 
bordereth  the  Territory  of  the  Psediculi.  Nine  young  Men 
there  were  of  them,  and  as  many  Maids,  descended  from  the 
Illyrians,  who  begat  thirteen  Nations.  The  Towns  of  the 
Psediculi  are  Rhudia,  Egnatia,  Barion,  formerly  Japyx,  from 
the  Son  of  Dedalus ;  who  also  gave  Name  to  Japygia. 
Rivers,  Pactius  and  Aufidus,  issuing  out  of  the  Hirpine 
Mountains,  and  running  by  Canusium.  Then  followeth 
Apulia  of  the  Dauni,  so  named  from  their  Leader,  Father- 
in-law  to  Diomedes.  In  which  is  the  Town  Salapia,  famous 
for  the  Love  of  an  Harlot  loved  by  Annibal:  then,  Sipontum 
and  Uria  :  also  the  River  Cerbalus,  where  the  Dauni  end  : 
the  Port  Agasus,  the  Cape  of  the  Mountain  Garganus,  from 
Salentinum  or  Japygium  234  Miles,  fetching  a  Compass 
about  Garganus :  the  Harbour  Garnae,  the  Lake  Pantanus. 
The  River  Frento,  full  of  Harbours  ;  and  Teanum  of  the 
Apuli.  Also,  Larinum,  Aliternia,  and  the  River  Tifernus. 
Then  the  Region  Frentana,  So  there  be  three  Kinds  of 
Nations :  Teani,  of  their  Leader,  from  the  Greeks :  the 
Lucani,  subdued  by  Calchas ;  which  Places  now  the  Atinates 


182  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

hold.  Colonies  of  the  Dauni  besides  the  above-named,  Lu- 
ceria  and  Venusia  :  Towns,  Canusium  ;  Arpi,  sometime  Argos 
Hippium,  built  by  Diomedes,  but  soon  after  called  Argyrippa. 
There  Diomedes  destroyed  the  Nations  of  the  Monadi  and 
Dardi,  with  two  Cities,  which  grew  to  a  laughable  Proverb; 
Apina  and  Trica.  The  rest  be  inward  in  the  second  Region : 
one  Colony  of  the  Hirpini,  called  Beneventum,  more  auspici- 
ously by  a  Change  of  Name ;  whereas,  in  Times  past,  it  was 
denominated  Maleventum  :  the  ^Eculani,  Aquiloni,  and 
Abellinates,  surnamed  Protropi :  the  Campsani,  Caudini ; 
and  Ligures,  surnamed  Corneliani :  as  also  Bebiani,  Vescel- 
lani,  Deculani,  and  Aletrini :  Abellinates,  surnamed  Marsi ; 
the  Atrani,  .ZEcani,  Asellani,  Attinates,  and  Arpani  :  the 
Borcani,  the  Collating  Corinenses :  and,  famous  for  the 
overthrow  of  the  Romans  there,  the  Cannenses  :  the  Dirini, 
the  Forentani,  the  Genusini,  Hardonienses  and  Hyrini :  the 
Larinates,  surnamed  Frentani,  Metinates,  and  out  of  Gar- 
ganus  the  Mateolani,  the  Neritini  and  Natini,  the  Robustini, 
the  Sylvini  and  Strapellini,  the  Turmentini,  Vibinates,  Venu- 
sini  and  Ulurtini,  the  inland  Inhabitants  of  the  Calabri,  the 
.ZEgirini,  Apanestini  and  Argentini.  The  Butuntinenses  and 
Brumbestini,  the  Deciani,  the  Norbanenses,  the  Palionenses, 
Sturnini,  and  Tutini.  Also  of  Salentini,  the  Aletini,  Baster- 
bini,  Neretini,  Valentini,  and  Veretini. 

CHAPTER  XII. 
The  fourth  JReyion  of  Italy. 

Now  followeth  the  fourth  Region ;  even  of  the  most 
valiant  Nations  of  Italy.  In  the  Coast  of  the  Frentani,  next 
to  Tifernus,  is  the  River  Trinium1,  full  of  Harbours. 
The  Towns  Histonium,  Buca,  and  Ortona  ;  with  the  River 
Aternus.  Inland  are  the  Anxani,  surnamed  Frentani:  the 
Carentini,  both  higher  and  lower;  the  Lanuenses;  of  Maurici, 
the  Teatini :  of  Peligni,  the  Corsinienses  ;  Super- .ZEquani  and 
Sulmonenses  :  of  Marsi,  the  Anxantini  and  Atinates,  the 
Fucentes,  Lucentes,  and  Maruvii :  of  Alpenses,  Alba  upon 

1  Now  Trigno. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  183 

the  Lake  Fucinus  :  of  Jjlquiculani,  the  Cliternini  and  Carseo- 
lani :  of  the  Vestini,  the  Augulani;  Pinnenses;  Peltuinates, 
to  whom  are  joined  the  Aufinates  on  this  Side  the  Moun- 
tains :  of  Samnites,  whom  the  Greeks  called  Sabelli  and 
Saunitse ;  the  Colony  Bovianum,  the  old  ;  and  another,  sur- 
named  Undecimanorum  :  the  Aufidenates,  Esernirii,  Fagi- 
sulani,  Ficolenses,  Sepinates,  Treventinates :  of  Sabini,  the 
Amiternini,  Curenses,  Forum  Decii,  Forum  Novum,  the 
Fidenates,  Interamnates,  Nursini,  Nomentani,  Reatini,  Tre- 
bulani,  who  are  surnamed  Mutuscaei,  and  also  Suflfonates ; 
the  Tiburtes,  and  Tarinates.  In  this  Quarter  of  the  JSqui- 
culse,  there  have  perished  the  Comini,  Tadiates,  Acedici,  and 
Alfaterni.  Gellianus  writeth,  that  Archippe,  a  Town  of  the 
Mar  si,  built  by  Marsyas^  a  Leader  of  the  Lydi,  was  swallowed 
up  by  the  Lake  Fucinus.  Also  Valerianus  reporteth,  that  a 
Town  of  the  Vidicini  in  Picenum  was  utterly  destroyed  by 
the  Romans.  The  Sabini,  as  some  have  thought,  were,  for 
their  Religion  and  worship  of  the  Gods,  called  Seveni :  they 
dwell  close  by  the  Veline  Lakes,  upon  the  dewy  Hills.  The 
River  Nar  draineth  them  with  its  sulphury  Waters.  Which 
River  running  from  these  toward  Tiberis,  filleth  it :  and  flow- 
ing from  the  Mountain  Fiscelius,  near  to  the  Groves  of 
Vacuna  and  Reate,  it  is  hidden  in  the  same.  But  from  ano- 
ther Side,  the  River  Anio,  beginning  in  the  Mountain  of  the 
Trebani,  bringeth  into  Tiberis  three  Lakes  of  noble  Beauty, 
which  gave  the  Name  to  Sublaqueo1.  In  the  Reatine  Ter- 
ritory is  the  Lake  Cutilise,  wherein  floateth  an  Island  :  and 
this  Lake,  M.  Varro  saith,  is  the  very  midst  of  Italy.  Be- 
neath the  Sabini  lieth  Latium ;  on  the  Side,  Picenum  ;  be- 
hind, Umbria;  and  the  Crags  of  the  Apennine  on  either 
Hand  enclose,  as  with  a  Rampart,  the  Sabini. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
The  fifth  Region  of  Italy. 

THE  fifth  Region  is  Picene,  in  Times  past  exceedingly 
populous;  360,000  of  the  Picentes  came  under  the  Protec- 

1  Now  Subiaquo. 


184  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  III. 

tion  of  the  People  of  Rome.  They  are  descended  from  the 
Sabini,  upon  a  Vow  truly  sacred.  They  dwelt  by  the  River 
Aternus,  where  now  is  the  Territory  Adrianus,  and  the  Colony 
Adria,  seven  Miles  from  the  Sea.  There  is  the  River  Voma- 
num  and  the  Preetutian  and  Palmensian  Territories.  Also, 
Castrum  Novum,  the  River  Batinum,  Truentum  with  the 
River ;  which  is  the  only  Remains  of  the  Liburnians  remain- 
ing in  Italy.  The  Rivers  Alpulates,  Suinum,  and  Helvinum, 
at  which  the  Praetutian  Country  endeth,  and  the  Picentian 
beginneth.  The  Town  Cupra,  a  Castle  of  the  Firmans,  and 
above  it  the  Colony  Ascuum,  of  all  Picenum  the  most  noble. 
Within  standeth  Novana.  In  the  Borders  are  Cluana,  Po- 
tentia,  and  Numana,  built  by  the  Siculi.  Next  to  those  is 
the  Colony  Ancona,  with  the  Promontory  Cumerum,  lying 
close  by  it,  in  the  very  Elbow  of  the  Border  thereof  as  it 
bendeth;  and  it  is  from  Garganus  183  Miles.  Within  are 
the  Auximates,  Beregrani,  Cingulani,  Cuprenses,  surnamed 
the  Mountaineers  ;  Falarienses,  Pausulani,  Pleninenses, 
Ricinenses,  Septempedani,  Tollentinates,  Triacenses,  the  City 
Sal  via,  and  the  Tollentini. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
The  sixth  Region  of  Italy. 

To  these  adjoineth  the  sixth  Region,  embracing  Umbria 
and  the  Gallic  Country  about  Ariminum.  From  Ancona 
begin  the  Gallic  Borders,  by  the  Name  of  Togata  Gallia.  The 
Siculi  and  Liburni  possessed  most  Parts  of  that  Tract,  and 
principally  the  Territories  Palmensis,  Prsetutianus,  and 
Adrianus.  Them  the  Umbrii  expelled  :  these  Etruria,  and 
these  again  the  Galli.  The  People  of  Umbria  are  supposed, 
of  all  Italy,  to  be  of  greatest  Antiquity ;  as  being  they  whom 
Men  think  to  have  been  by  the  Greeks  named  Ombri,  be- 
cause in  the  Deluge  of  the  Country  by  Rain,  they  only  re- 
mained alive.  The  Thusci  are  known  to  have  subdued  300 
Towns  of  theirs.  At  this  Day,  in  the  Border,  there  are, 
the  River  .^Esus,  and  Senogallia :  the  River  Metaurus,  the 
Colony  Fanurn  Fortunse.  Pisaurum,  with  the  River.  And 
within,  Hispellum  and  Tuder.  In  the  Rest,  the  Amerini, 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  185 

Attidiates,  Asirinates,  Arnates,  and  ^Esinates.  Camertes, 
Casventillani,  Carsulani,  Delates  surnamed  Salentini,  Ful- 
ginates,  Foro  -  flaminienses,  Foro-Julienses,  named  also 
Concubienses,  Foro-bremitiani,  Foro-Sempronienses,  Iguini, 
Interamnates,  surnamed  Nartes,  Mevanates,  Mevanienses, 
and  Matilicates,  Narnienses,  whose  Town  formerly  was 
called  Nequinum.  Nucerini  surnamed  Favonienses,  and 
Camelani.  The  Otriculani  and  Ostrani.  The  Pitulani,  sur- 
named Pisuertes,  and  others  surnamed  Mergentini  ;  the 
Pelestini,  Sentinates,  Sarsinates,  Spoletini,  Suarrani,  Sesti- 
nates,  and  Suillates,  Sadinates,  Trebiates,  Tuficani,  Tifer- 
nates,  named  also  Tribertini ;  also  others  named  Metau- 
renses.  The  Vesionicates,  Urbinates,  as  well  they  that  be 
surnamed  Metaurenses,  as  others  Hortenses  ;  the  Vettio- 
nenses,  Vindenates  and  Viventani.  In  this  Tract  there  are 
extinct  the  Feliginates,  and  they  who  possessed  Clusiolum 
above  Interamna  :  also  the  Sarranates,  with  the  Towns 
Acerrae,  called  also  Vafriae;  and  Turceolum,  the  same  as 
Vetriolum.  Also,  the  Solinates,  Suriates,  Fallienates,  Apien- 
nates.  There  are  gone,  likewise,  the  Arienates,  with  Crino- 
volum,  and  the  Usidicani  and  Plangenses,  the  Pisinates  and 
Caelestini,  As  for  Amera  above  written,  Cato  hath  left  in 
Record,  that  it  was  built  964  Years  before  the  War  against 
Perseus. 

CHAPTER   XV. 

The  eighth  Region  of  Italy. 

THE  eighth  Region  is  bounded  by  Ariminum,  Padus,  and 
Apennine.  In  the  Borders  thereof  is  the  River  Crustumi- 
num,  the  Colony  Ariminum,  with  the  Rivers  Ariminum  and 
Aprusa.  Then  the  River  Rubico,  once  the  utmost  Limit  of 
Italy.  After  it,  Sapis,  Vitis,  and  Anemo  ;  Ravenna,  a  Town  of 
the  Sabini,  with  the  River  Bedeses,  102  Miles  from  Ancona. 
And  not  far  from  the  Sea  of  the  Umbri,  Butrium.  Within 
are  these  Colonies ;  Bononia,  usually  called  Felsina,  when  it 
was  the  head  City  of  Etruria  ;  Brixillum,  Mutina,  Parma, 
Placentia.  Towns,  Caesena,  Claterna,  Forum-Clodii,  Livii 
and  Popilii,  pertaining  to  the  Truentini:  also,  [Forum] 
Cornolii,  Laccinir  Faventini,  Fidentini,  Otesini,  Padinates, 


186  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

Regienses  a  Lepido,  Solonates  :  also  the  Forests  Galliani, 
surnamed  Aquinates ;  Tanetani,  Veliates,  surnamed  Vecteri, 
Regiates  and  Umbranates.  In  this  Tract  the  Boii  have 
perished;  who  had  112  Tribes,  as  Cato  maketh  Report. 
Likewise  the  Senones,  who  took  Rome. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Of  the  River  Padus. 

PADUS  issuing  out  of  the  Bosom  of  the  Mountain  Vesulus, 
bearing  up  his  Head  into  a  very  lofty  Height,  runneth  from 
a  Spring1  worth  the  seeing,  in  the  Borders  of  the  Ligurian 
Vagienni ;  and  hiding  itself  within  a  narrow  Passage  under 
the  Ground,  and  rising  up  again  in  the  Territory  of  the  Foro- 
vibians,  is  inferior  to  no  other  Rivers  in  Excellency.  By  the 
Greeks  it  was  called  Eridanus,  and  well  known  for  the 
Punishment  of  Phaeton.  It  increaseth  about  the  Rising  of 
the  Dog-star,  by  Reason  of  the  melting  Snow :  more  violent 
to  the  Fields  thereby,  than  to  the  Vessels  :  nevertheless, 
nothing  is  stolen  away  to  itself;  but  when  it  hath  left  the 
Fields,  its  Bounty  is  more  abundant  by  their  Fruitfulness : 
from  its  Head  it  holdeth  on  its  Course  300  Miles,  adding,  for 
its  meandering,  88  Miles.  It  receiveth  not  only  the  navi- 
gable Rivers  of  the  Apennines  and  the  Alps,  but  large  Lakes 
also  that  discharge  themselves  into  it :  so  that  in  all  it  car- 
rieth  into  the  Adriatic  Sea,  30  Rivers.  The  most  celebrated 
of  them  are  these,  sent  out  of  the  Side  of  Apennine  :  Tanarus, 
Trebia,  Placentinus,  Tarus,  Nicia,  Gabellus,  Scultenna,  Rhe- 
nus.  But  running  out  of  the  Alps,  Stura,  Morgns,  two 
Duriae,  Sessites,  Ticinus,  Lambrus,  Addua,  Olius,  and  Min- 
cius.  And  there  is  no  River  that  in  so  little  Way  groweth  to 
a  greater  Stream  ;  because  it  is  driven  on  with  the  Mass  of 
Water,  and  stirred  to  the  Bottom,  heavy  to  the  Earth,  al- 
though it  be  drawn  into  Rivers  and  Trenches  between  Ra- 
venna and  Ativum,  for  120  Miles  :  yet  because  it  casteth 
them  out  in  great  Abundance,  it  is  said  to  make  seven 

1  Pliny  tells  us  (lib.  ii.  106)  that  this  wonderful  spring  ceased  to  flow 
at  mid-day  in  the  summer  season.  Under  the  modern  name  of  Po,  this 
river  is  not  less  celebrated  than  in  ancient  times. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  187 

Seas.  It  is  drawn  to  Ravenna  by  a  narrow  Channel,  where 
it  is  called  Padusa,  and  in  Times  past,  Messanicus.  The 
next  Mouth  that  he  maketh  from  thence,  carrieth  the  Big- 
ness of  a  Harbour,  which  is  named  Vatreni :  at  which  Clau- 
dius Ctesar,  as  he  came  triumphant  from  Britain,  entered 
into  Adria,  with  that  Vessel,  more  like  a  huge  House  than  a 
Ship.  This  Mouth  of  it  was  formerly  called  Eridanum :  by 
others,  Spineticum,  from  the  neighbouring  City  Spinae,  built 
by  Diomedes  (as  some  think),  with  the  Treasures  of  Delphi. 
There  the  River  Vatrenus,  from  out  of  the  Territory  of 
Forum  Cornelii,  increaseth  Padus.  The  next  Mouth  is 
Caprasise,  then  Sagis,  then  Volane,  which  before  was  named 
Olane.  All  those  Rivers  and  Trenches,  the  Thusci  were  the 
first  to  make  out  of  Sagis,  carrying  the  forcible  Stream  of  the 
River  across  into  the  Atrian  Ponds,  which  are  called  the  seven 
Seas ;  and  they  made  the  famous  Harbour  of  Atria,  a  Town 
of  the  Thusci ;  of  which  the  Atriatic  Sea  took  the  Name 
aforetime  ;  which  now  is  called  Adriaticum.  From  thence 
are  the  full  Mouths  of  Carbonaria,  and  the  Fosses  Phylis- 
tinse,  which  others  call  Tartarus  ;  but  all  spring  out  of  the 
overflowing  of  the  Foss  Phylistina,  with  Athesis  coming  out  of 
the  Tridentine  Alps,  and  Togisonus  out  of  the  Territory  of  the 
Patavini.  Part  of  them  made  also  the  next  Port  Brundulum  : 
like  as  the  two  Medoaci  and  the  Foss  Clodia,  make  Edron. 
With  these  Padus  mingleth  itself,  and  by  these  it  runneth 
over ;  and,  as  it  is  said  by  most  Writers,  like  as  in  Egypt 
Nilus  maketh  that  which  they  call  Delta,  so  it  shapeth  a 
triangular  Figure  between  the  Alps  and  the  Sea-coast,  two 
Miles  in  Compass.  It  is  a  Shame  to  borrow  from  the  Greeks 
the  Explanation  of  Things  in  Italy  :  but  Metrodorus  Scepsius 
saith,  that  because  about  the  Head  of  this  River  there  grow 
many  Pitch  Trees,  called  in  the  Gallic  Language,  Pades, 
therefore  it  took  the  Name  of  Padus.  Also,  that  in  the 
Ligurian  Language,  the  River  itself  is  called  Bodincus, 
which  means  bottomless.  And  to  approve  this  Argument, 
there  is  a  neighbouring  Town  called  Industria,  but  by  an  old 
Name,  Bodincomagum ;  where  beginneth  its  greatest  Depth. 


188  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  III. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Italy  beyond  Padus,  the  eleventh  Region. 

NEXT  to  it  is  the  Region  called Transpadana,  the  eleventh1 
in  Number ;  and  all  in  the  Midland  Part ;  into  which  the 
Seas  bring  all  Things  with  fruitful  Channel.  The  Towns 
therein  be,  Vibi-Forum,  and  Segusius.  The  Colonies  from 
the  Foot  of  the  Alps,  Augusta  of  the  Taurini,  an  ancient 
Descent  from  the  Liguri :  from  whence  Padus  is  navigable. 
Then,  Augusta  Prsetoria,  of  the  Salassi,  near  the  two-fold 
Passages  of  the  Alps,  Graijae  and  Peninse :  for  it  is  recorded, 
that  the  Carthaginians  (Pseni)  came  through  the  one,  and 
Hercules  in  at  the  other,  named  Graijae.  There  standeth  the 
Town,  Eporedia,  built  by  the  People  of  Rome  by  direction 
of  the  Books  of  the  Sibyls.  The  Gauls,  in  their  Tongue,  call 
good  Horse-breakers  Eporedicse.  Also,  Vercella  of  the 
Lybici,  descended  from  the  Sallii :  Novaria,  from  the  Verta- 
comacori ;  which  at  this  Day  is  a  Village  of  the  Vocontii, 
and  not,  as  Cato  thinketh,  of  the  Liguri ;  of  whom  the  Levi 
and  Marici  built  Ticinum,  not  far  from  the  Padus :  like  as 
the  Boii  coming  over  the  Alps,  founded  Laus  Pompeia ;  arid 
the  Insubrias,  Mediorlapum.  That  Comus  and  Bergomus, 
and  Licini- Forum,  with  other  People  thereabout,  were  of  the 
Orobian  Race,  Cato  hath  reported  :  but  the  Original  of  that 
Nation,  he  confesseth  that  he  knoweth  not.  Which  Corne- 
lius Alexander  sheweth  to  have  descended  from  the  Greeks; 
and  this  by  the  Interpretation  of  their  Name,  which  signi- 
fieth,  Men  living  in  Mountains.  In  this  Tract,  Barra,  a 
Town  of  the  Orobians,  is  perished  ;  from  whence,  Cato  saith, 
the  Bergomates  took  their  Beginning  ;  discovering  by  their 
Name,  that  they  were  seated  more  highly  than  happily. 
There  are  perished  also  the  Caturiges,  banished  Persons  of 

1  Pliny  says,  the  eleventh  region;  and  he  may  be  accurate  according 
to  his  original  authority:  which  was  a  survey  ordered  by  Augustus 
Caesar,  and  in  some  measure  equivalent  to  the  English  Domesday  survey. 
This  measure  of  the  emperor  may  be,  perhaps,  the  same  that  is  referred 
to  by  St.  Luke,  ii.  1.  But  in  Pliny's  order  of  reckoning  it  is  only  the 
ninth  region. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  189 

the  Insubri :  likewise  Spina,  before-named.  Also,  Melpum, 
a  Town  remarkable  for  Wealth ;  which,  as  Nepos  Cornelius 
hath  written,  was  by  the  tnsubres,  Boii,  and  Senones,  razed 
on  that  very  Day  on  which  Camillus  took  Veii. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Venetia,  the  tenth  Region. 

Now  followeth  the  tenth  Region  of  Italy,  Venetia,  lying 
upon  the  Adriatic  Sea  :  the  River  whereof,  Silis,  cometh  from 
the  Mountains  Taurisani :  also  the  Town  Altinum,  the  River 
Liquentia,  issuing  from  the  Mountains  Opitergeni ;  and  a 
Harbour  of  the  same  Name;  the  Colony  Concordia.  Rivers 
and  Havens :  Romatinum,  Tilaventum,  the  greater  and  the 
less  :  Anassum,  by  which  Varranus  runneth  down  :  Alsa, 
Natiso,  with  Turrus,  running  by  Aquileia,  a  Colony  situated 
12  Miles  from  the  Sea.  This  is  the  Region  of  the  Carni, 
joining  that  of  Japides :  the  River  Timavus,  and  the  Castle 
Pucinum,  famous  for  good  Wine.  The  Bay  Tergestinus,  the 
Colony  Tergeste,  23  Miles  from  Aquileia  :  beyond  which  six 
Miles,  is  the  River  Formio,  189  Miles  from  Ravenna:  the 
ancient  Limit  of  Italy  enlarged,  but  at  this  Day  of  Istria, 
which  they  report,  was  so  named  of  the  River  Ister,  flowing 
out  of  the  River  Danubius  into  Adria  :  and  over  against  the 
same  Ister,  the  Mouth  of  Padus :  by  the  contrary  rushing 
Streams  of  which  two  Rivers,  the  Sea  between  beginneth  to 
be  more  mild ;  as  many  Authors  have  reported,  but  untruly  ; 
and  Cornelius  Nepos,  also,  although  he  dwelt  just  by  Padus  : 
for  there  is  no  River  that  runneth  out  of  Danubius  into  the 
Adriatic  Sea.  They  were  deceived  (1  suppose),  because  the 
Ship  Argos1  went  down  a  River  into  the  Adriatic  Sea,  not  far 

1  The  Argonauts  embarked  at  Jolcos,  in  Thessaly,  and  steered  first  to 
Lemnos :  from  whence,  after  many  adventures,  they  reached  the  Phasis, 
which  flows  through  Colchis  into  the  Black  Sea.    It  would  be  no  easy 
task  to  point  out  the  course  they  took  on  their  return.    Pindar,  in  the 
Fourth  Pythian  Ode,  makes  them  pass  the  Erythraean  Sea— 
"  Then  mingling  in  the  ocean  deep, 
The  Erythraean  Sea  they  sweep." 
By  the  Erythraean  Sea  the  Indian  Ocean  is  to  be  understood,  through 


190  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  III. 

from  Tergeste;  but  what  River  it  was,  is  unknown.  The 
more  diligent  Enquirers  say,  that  it  was  carried  upon  Men's 
Shoulders  over  the  Alps  :  and  that  it  was  embarked  into 
Ister,  and  so  into  Saus,  and  then  Nauportus,  which  upon 
that  occasion  took  his  Name,  which  riseth  between  ^Emona 
and  the  Alps. 

CHAPTER   XIX. 
Istria. 

ISTRIA  runneth  out  like  a  Peninsula.  Some  have  deli- 
vered, that  it  is  40  Miles  broad,  and  122  Miles  in  Circuit. 
The  like  they  say  of  Liburnia  adjoining  to  it,  and  of  the  Bay 
Flanaticus.  But  others  say,  that  the  Circuit  of  Liburnia  is 
180  Miles.  Some  have  set  out  Japidia  to  the  Bay  Flanaticus, 
behind  Istria,  130  Miles  :  and  so  have  made  Liburnia  in  Cir- 
cuit 150  Miles.  TuditanuSj  who  subdued  the  Istri,  upon  his 
own  Statue  there  set  this  Inscription  :  from  Aquileia  to 
the  River  Titius,  are  200  Stadia.  The  Towns  in  Istria,  of 
Roman  Citizens,  are  ^Egida  and  Parentium.  A  Colony  there 
is,  Pola,  now  called  Pietas  Julia ;  built  in  old  Time  by  the 
Colchii.  It  is  from  Tergeste,  100  Miles.  Soon  after,  the 
Town  Nesactium,  and  the  River  Arsia,  now  the  Bound  of 
Italy.  From  Ancona  to  Pola,  there  is  a  Passage  over  the 
Sea  of  120  Miles.  In  the  Midland  Part  of  this  tenth  Region 
are  the  Colonies,  Cremona  and  Brixia,  in  the  Country  of 
the  Cenomanni :  but  in  the  Country  of  the  Veneti,  Ateste. 
Also  the  Towns  Acelum,  Patavium,  Opitergium,  Belunum, 
Vicetia :  Mantua  of  the  Tusci,  the  only  Place  left  beyond 
the  Padus.  That  the  Veneti  were  the  Offspring  of  the  Tro- 

which  it  seems  they  came  into  Africa,  and  when  arrived  on  land,  carrying 
the  ship  on  their  shoulders  until  they  came  to  the  Tritoniari  Lake,  they 
sailed  into  the  Mediterranean,  and  touched  at  Thera;  thence  through 
the  Ocean  they  came  to  the  island  of  Lemnos.  —  (See  Wheelwright's 
"  Pindar.")  But  a  more  probable  course  would  be  one  approaching  that 
given  by  Pliny  in  the  text.  The  whole  story  of  the  Argonauts,  how- 
ever, having,  in  the  lapse  of  time,  become  a  mere  fable,  it  is  not  worth  the 
attempt  to  illustrate  it. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  191 

jans  Cato  informs  us,  and  also,  that  the  Cenomanni,  near  to 
Massilia,  dwell  among  the  Volsci.  Fertini,  Tridentini,  and 
Bernenses,  are  Towns  of  Rhetia.  Verona  is  of  the  Rheti  and 
Euganei;  Julienses  of  the  Garni.  Then  follow  these,  whom 
we  need  to  use  no  Strictness  in  naming ;  Alutruenses,  Asse- 
riates,  Flamonienses,  Vannienses,  and  others  surnamed 
Gulici :  Foro  Julienses,  surnamed  Transpadani :  Foretani, 
Venidates,  Querqueni,  Taurisani,  Togienses,  Varvani.  In 
this  Tract  there  have  perished  in  the  Borders,  Itamine,  Pel- 
laon,  Palsicium.  Of  the  Veneti,  Atina  and  Caelina :  of  the 
Garni,  Segeste  and  Ocra :  and  of  the  Taurissi,  Noreia.  Also 
from  Aquileia  twelve  Miles,  there  was  a  Town  destroyed  by 
M.  Claudius  Marcellus,  in  spite  of  the  Senate,  as  L.  Piso 
hath  recorded.  In  this  Region  there  are  also  ten  remarkable 
Lakes  and  Rivers,  either  issuing  forth  of  them  as  their  Off- 
spring, or  else  maintained  by  them,  if  they  send  them  out 
again,  when  they  have  received  them :  as  Larius  doth  Addua, 
Verbanus  Ticinus,  Benacus  Mincius,  Sebinus  Ossius,  Eupi- 
lius  Lamber,  all  seated  in  the  Padus.  The  Alps  reach  in 
Length  ten  Miles  from  the  upper  Sea  to  the  lower,  as  Ccdius 
saith :  Timogenes,  two-and-twenty :  but  Cornelius  Nepos,  in 
Breadth  100  Miles  :  T.  Livius  saith,  3000  Stadia.  But  both 
of  them  take  Measure  in  different  Places ;  for  sometimes  they 
exceed  100  Miles,  where  they  separate  Germany  from  Italy : 
and  in  other  Parts  they  are  so  narrow,  that  they  make  not 
full  out  three  score  and  ten  Miles  ;  as  if  by  the  Provi- 
dence of  Nature.  The  Breadth  of  Italy,  from  Varus  under 
the  Foot  of  them  through  the  Shallows  of  Sabatia,  the  Tau- 
rini,  Comus,  Brixia,  Verona,  Vicetia,  Opitergium,  Aquileia, 
Tergeste",  Pola,  and  Aristia,  maketh  702  Miles. 

CHAPTER  XX. 
Of  the  Alps  and  Alpine  Nations. 

MANY  Nations  inhabit  the  Alps,  but  those  of  special 
Name,  from  Pola  to  the  Tract  of  Tergestis,  are  these  :  the 
Secusses,  Subocrini,  Catili,  Menocaleni :  and  near  to  the 
Garni,  those  who  in  Times  past  were  called  Taurisci,  but 


192  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  III. 

now  Norici.  To  these  are  Neighbours  the  Rheti  and  Vin- 
delici,  all  divided  into  many  Cities.  The  Rheti  are  judged 
to  be  descended  from  the  Thusci,  driven  out  by  the  Galli, 
with  their  Leader  Rhcetus1.  But  turning  our  Breast  to  Italy, 
we  meet  with  the  Euganean  Nations  of  the  Alps,  who  en- 
joyed the  Right  of  the  Latins,  and  whose  Towns  Cato  reck- 
oneth  to  the  number  of  four  and  thirty.  Of  them,  the 
Triumpilini,  both  People  and  Lands,  were  sold.  After  them 
the  Camuni,  and  many  such,  were  annexed  to  the  next  Muni- 
cipii.  The  Lepontii  and  the  Salassi,  Cato  thinketh  to  be  of 
the  Tauric  Nation.  But  almost  all  others  suppose  that  the 
Lepontici  were  a  Residue  left  behind  of  the  Companions  of 
Hercules ,  through  the  interpretation  of  the  Greek  Name,  as 
having  their  Members  burned  with  the  Alpine  snows  as  they 
passed  through  :  that  the  Graii  likewise  were  of  the  same 
Company,  planted  in  the  Passage,  and  inhabiting  the  Alps 
Graiae :  also  that  the  Euganei  were  noblest  in  Birth,  from 
which  they  took  their  Name.  The  Head  of  them  is  Stonos. 
Of  those  Rhoeti  the  Vennonetes  and  Sarunetes  inhabit  the 
Heads  of  the  River  Rhenus  :  and  of  the  Leponti,  those  who 
are  called  Viberi  dwell  by  the  Fountain  of  Rhodanus,  in 
the  same  quarter  of  the  Alps.  There  be  also  Inhabitants 
within  the  Alps  endowed  with  the  Liberty  of  Latium :  as 
the  Octodurenses,  and  their  Borderers  the  Centrones,  the 
Cottian  Cities.  The  Caturiges,  and  the  Vagienni,  from 
them  descended  ;  Ligures,  and  such  as  are  called  the  Moun- 
taineers :  and  many  kinds  of  the  Capillati,  on  the  Borders 
of  the  Ligusticus  Sea.  In  seemeth  not  amiss  in  this  Place 
to  set  down  an  Inscription  out  of  a  Trophy  erected  in 
the  Alps,  which  runneth  in  this  Form  :  To  the  Emperor 
Caesar,  Son  o/Divus  Augustus,  Pontifex  Maximus,  Imperator 
fourteen  Times,  and  invested  with  the  Authority  of  the 
Tribune  seventeen  Times  :  the  Senate  and  People  of  Rome  : 
For  that  under  his  Conduct  and  Auspices,  all  the  Alpine 

1  Justin,  xx.  5,  p.  181,  says,  "  The  Tusci,  with  their  leader  Koetus, 
having  lost  their  ancient  territorial  possessions,  took  possession  of  the 
Alps,  and  laid  the  foundation  of  the  nation  of  the  Roeti,  so  called  after  the 
name  of  their  leader." —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  J93 

Nations  which  reached  from  the  Upper  Sea  to  the  Nether, 
were  reduced  under  the  Empire  of  the  People  of  Rome.  The 
Alpine  Nations  subdued:  Triumpilini,  Camuni,  Vennonetes, 
Isarci,  Breuni,  Naunes,  and  Focunates.  Of  the  Vindelici 
four  Nations:  the  Consuanetes,  Virucinates,  Licates,  and 
Catenates.  The  Abisontes,  Rugusce,  Suanetes,  Calucones, 
Brixentes,  Lepontii,  Viberi,  Nantuates,  Seduni,  Veragri, 
Salad,  Acitavones,  Medulli,  Uceni,  Caturiges,  Brigiani, 
Sogiontiiy  Ebroduntii,  Nemaloni,  Edenates,  Esubiani,  Veamini, 
Gallitce,  Triulatti,  Ectini,  Vergunni,  Eguituri,  Nementuri, 
Oratelli,  Nerusivelauni,  Suetri.  There  were  not  reckoned 
among  these  the  twelve  Cottian  Cities,  which  were  not  in 
any  Hostility,  nor  yet  those  which  were  assigned  to  the 
Municipii  by  virtue  of  the  Law  Pouipeia.  This  is  that 
Italy  sacred  to  the  Gods,  these  are  her  Nations,  and  these 
be  the  Towns  of  the  People.  And  more  than  this,  that 
Italy  which,  when  L.  JEnilius  Paulus  and  Caius  Attilius 
Regulus  were  Consuls,  upon  news  of  a  Tumult  of  the  Gauls, 
alone,  without  any  Foreign  aids,  and  without  any  Nations 
beyond  the  Padus,  armed  80,000  Horsemen  and  700,000 
Foot.  In  plenty  of  all  Metals  it  giveth  place  to  no  Land 
whatsoever.  But  it  is  forbidden  to  dig  any  by  an  old  Act 
of  the  Senate,  commanding  to  spare  Italy. 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
Illyricum. 

THE  Nation  of  the  Liburni  joineth  to  Arsia,  as  far  as 
the  River  Titius.  A  Part  of  it  were  the  Mentores,  Hymani, 
Encheleae,  Dudini,  and  those  whom  Callimachus  nameth 
Pucetiae.  Now,  the  whole  in  general  is  called  by  one  Name, 
Illyricum.  The  Names  of  the  Nations  are  few  of  them 
worthy  or  easy  to  be  spoken.  The  lapides,  and  fourteen 
Cities  of  the  Liburni,  resort  to  the  Convention  at  Scordona : 
of  which  it  is  not  irksome  to  name  the  Laciniensi,  Stulpini, 
Burnistee,  and  Albonenses.  And  in  that  Convention  these 
Nations  following  have  the  Liberty  of  Italians  :  the  Alutas 
and  Flanates,  of  whom  the  Gulf  is  named:  Lopsi,  Varubarini, 


194  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

and  the  Assesiates  that  are  exempt  from  Tribute:  also  of 
Islands,  the  Fulsinates  and  Curictae1.  Moreover,  along 
the  maritime  Coasts,  beyond  Nesactiuni,  these  Towns :  Al- 
vona,  Flavona,  Tarsatica,  Senia,  Lopsica,  Ortopula,  Vegium, 
Argyruntum,  Corinium,  the  City  ^Enona,  the  River  Pausinus, 
and  Tedanium,  at  which  lapida  endeth.  The  Islands  lying 
in  that  Gulf,  with  the  Towns,  besides  those  above  noted, 
Absirtium,  Arba,  Tragurium,  Issa  ;  Pharos,  beforetime 
Pares,  Crexa,  Gissa,  Portunata.  Again,  within  the  Con- 
tinent, the  Colony  laderon,  which  is  from  Pola  160  Miles. 
From  thence,  30  Miles  off,  the  Island  Colentum  ;  and  18 
to  the  Mouth  of  the  River  Titius. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Liburnia. 

THE  End  of  Liburnia  and  Beginning  of  Dalmatia  is 
Scordona,  which  is  twelve  Miles  from  the  Sea,  situate  upon 
the  said  River  (Titius).  Then  followeth  the  ancient  Country 
of  the  Tariotae,  and  the  Castle  Tariota,  the  Promontory  of 
Diomed,  or,  as  some  would  have  it,  the  Peninsula  Hyllis ; 
in  Circuit  100  Miles.  Also  Tragurium,  inhabited  by  Roman 
Citizens,  well  known  for  its  Marble  :  Sicum,  into  which 
Place  Divus  Claudius  sent  the  old  Soldiers  :  the  Colony 
Salona,  222  Miles  from  ladera.  There  repair  to  it  for  Law 
those  that  are  described  into  Decuries,  382  :  of  Dalmatise, 
22;  Decuni,239;  Ditiones,69;  and  Mezaei,  52;  Sardiates.  In 
this  Tract  are  Burnum,  Mandetrium,  and  Tribulium,  Castles 
illustrious  for  the  Battles  of  the  Romans.  There  come  also 
for  Law,  of  the  Islands  the  Isssei,  Collentini,  Separi,  and 
Epetini.  From  these,  certain  Castles,  Piguntise  and  Ra- 
taneum,  and  Narona,  a  Colony,  pertaining  to  the  third  Con- 
vention, 72  Miles  from  Salona,  lying  close  by  a  River  of  the 
same  Name,  and  20  Miles  from  the  Sea.  M.  Varro  writeth, 
that  89  Cities  used  to  repair  thither  for  Justice.  Now,  about 
these  only  are  known,  Cerauni  in  33  Decuries ;  Daorizi 
in  17;  Destitiates  in  103;  Docleatse  in  34  ;  Deretini  in  14; 

1  Now  Vegia. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  195 

Deremistae  in  30 ;  Dindari  in  33  ;  Glinditiones  in  44  ;  Mel- 
comani  in  24  ;  Naresii  in  102 ;  Scirtari  in  72 ;  Siculotae 
in  24 ;  and  the  Vardsei,  who  formerly  wasted  Italy,  in  not 
more  than  twenty  Decuries.  Besides  these,  there  held  this 
Tract,  Oenei,  Partheni,  Hemasini,  Arthitae,  and  Armistae. 
From  the  River  Naron  100  Miles,  is  the  Colony  Epidaurum. 
Towns  of  Roman  Citizens,  Rhizinium,  Ascrinium,  Butua, 
Olchiniuin,  which  hefore  was  called  Colchinium,  built  by 
the  Colchi.  The  River  Drilo,  and  the  Town  upon  it,  Scodra, 
inhabited  by  Roman  Citizens,  eighteen  Miles  from  the  Sea  ; 
besides  many  other  Towns  of  Greece,  and  strong  Cities,  out 
of  all  remembrance.  For  in  that  Tract  were  the  Labeatae, 
Enderoduni1,  Sassgei,  Grabsei,  and  those  who  properly  were 
called  Illyrii,  and  Taulantii,  and  Pyrgei.  The  Promontory 
Nymphgeum,  in  the  Coast,  keepeth  the  name  :  also  Lissum, 
a  Town  of  Roman  Citizens,  100  Miles  from  Epidaurum. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 
Macedonia. 

FROM  Lissum  is  the  Province  of  Macedonia  :  the  Nations 
there  are  the  Partheni,  and  on  their  Back,  the  Dassaretes. 
The  Mountains  of  Candavia  seventy-nine  Miles  from  Dyr- 
rhachium.  But  in  the  Borders,  Denda,  a  Town  of  Roman 
Citizens;  also  the  Colony  Epidamnum2,  which,  for  that 
inauspicious  Name,  was  by  the  Romans  called  Dyrrhachium. 
The  River  Aous,  named  of  some  ^Eas ;  Apollonia,  once  a 
Colony  of  the  Corinthians,  seven  Miles  from  the  Sea ; 
in  the  Recesses  of  which  is  the  famous  Nymphaeum3.  The 
Foreigners  inhabiting  about  it  are  the  Amantes  and  Bu- 
liones;  but  in  the  Borders,  the  Town  Oricum,  built  by  the 
Colchi.  Then  beginneth  Epirus,  the  Mountains  Acroce- 

1  Now  Endero,  in  Albania. 

2  Mela,  ii.  3.    The  Romans  changed  the  name  Epidamnum,  because 
it  seemed  ominous  to  those  ivho  were  going  to  their  loss.  It  is  now  Durazzo. 
— Wern.  Club. 

8  The  crater  Nymphaei  was  a  hot  spring  in  the  territory  of  Apollonia, 
and  is  described  by  Pliny,  lib.  ii.  110.—  Wern.  Club. 


196  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

raunia,  with  which  we  have  bounded  this  Bay  of  Europe. 
Oricum  is  from  Salentinum  (a  Promontory  of  Italy)  four 
score  and  five  Miles. 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 
Noricum. 

BEHIND  the  Garni  and  lapides,  where  the  great  River 
Ister  runneth,  the  Norici  are  joined  to  the  Rhaeti.  Their 
Towns  are  Virunum,  Celeia,  Teurnia,  Aguntum,  Viana, 
^Emona,  Claudia,  Flavium,  Tolvense.  Near  the  Norici  are 
the  Lake  Peiso,  the  Deserts  of  the  Boii.  Nevertheless  now, 
by  the  Colony  of  Divus  Claudius,  Salaria,  and  by  the  Town 
Scarabantia  Julia,  they  are  inhabited. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 
Pannonia. 

THENCE  beginneth  Mast-bearing  Pannonia:  from  which 
the  Crags  of  the  Alps,  becoming  more  Smooth,  turn  through 
the  midst  of  Illyricum  from  the  North  to  the  South,  and 
settle  lower  by  an  easy  Descent,  both  on  the  right  Hand  and 
the  left.  That  Part  which  looks  toward  the  Adriatic  Sea  is 
called  Dalmatia,  and  Illyricum,  above-named.  Pannonia 
bendeth  toward  the  North,  and  is  bounded  with  the  River 
Danubius.  In  it  are  these  Colonies  :  ^Emonia,  Siscia.  And 
these  remarkable  and  navigable  Rivers  run  into  Danubius  : 
Draus,  with  more  Violence,  out  of  the  Noric  Alps ;  and 
Saus  out  of  the  Carnic  Alps  more  gently,  115  Miles  between. 
Draus  passeth  through  the  Serretes,  Serrapilli,  Jasi,  and 
Sandrozetes:  Saus  through  the  Colapiani  and  Breuci.  And 
these  be  the  chief  of  the  People.  Moreover,  the  Arivates, 
Azali,  Amantes,  Belgites,  Catari,  Corneates,  Aravisci,  Her- 
cuniates,  Latovici,  Oseriates,  and  Varciani.  The  Mountain 
Claudius,  in  the  Front  of  which  are  the  Scordisci,  and  upon 
the  Back,  the  Taurisci.  The  Island  in  Saus,  Metubarris, 
the  biggest  of  all  the  River  Islands.  Besides,  remarkable 
Rivers  :  Calapis,  running  into  Saus,  near  Siscia  ;  where, 
with  a  double  Channel,  it  maketh  the  Island  called  Segestica. 


BOOK  III.]  History  of  Nature.  197 

Another  River,  Bacuntius,  running  likewise  into  Saus  at 
the  Town  Sirmium :  where  is  the  City  of  the  Sirmians  and 
Amantines.  Forty-five  Miles  from  thence,  Taurunum,  where 
Saus  is  intermingled  with  Danubius.  Higher  above  there  run 
into  it  Valdanus  and  Urpanus,  which  are  no  obscure  Rivers. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 
Mcesia. 

To  Pannonia  is  joined  the  Province  called  Mcesia,  which 
extendeth^'along  Danubiusl  unto  Pontus.  It  beginneth 
from  the  confluent  above  named.  In  it  are  the  Dardani, 
Celegeri,  Triballi,  Trimachi,  Mcesi,  Thraces,  and  the  Scy- 
thae,  bordering  upon  Pontus.  Fair  Rivers,  out  of  the 
Dardanian  Borders :  Margis,  Pingus,  and  Timachis.  Out 
of  Rhodop£,  Oessus :  out  of  Haemus,  Utus,  Essamus,  and 
Jeterus.  Illyricum,  where  it  is  broadest,  taketh  up  325 
Miles  :  in  Length  from  the  River  Arsia  to  the  River  Drinius, 
800  Miles.  From  Drinium  to  the  Promontory  Acroce- 
raunium,  182  Miles.  M.  Agrippa  hath  set  down  this  whole 
Gulf,  comprehending  Italy  and  Illyricum,  in  the  compass  of 
1300  Miles.  In  it  are  two  Seas,  bounded  as  I  have  said: 
that  is,  the  Lower,  otherwise  called  the  Ionian,  in  the  first 
Part :  the  Inner,  called  Adriaticum,  which  also  they  name 
the  Upper.  In  the  Ausonian  Sea  there  are  no  Islands  worth 
the  naming,  but  those  above  specified.  In  the  Ionian  Sea 
there  are  but  few :  upon  the  Calabrian  Coast,  before  Brun- 
dusium,  by  the  interposition  of  which  the  Harbour  is  made : 
and  against  the  Apulian  Coast,  Diomedea,  famous  for  the 
Tomb  of  Diomedes.  Another  of  the  same  Name,  called  by 
some  Teutria.  The  Coast  of  Illyricum  is  heaped  with  more 
than  1000  ;  such  is  the  nature  of  the  Sea,  full  of  Shallows, 
with  narrow  Channels  running^ between.  But  before  the 
Mouth  of  Timavus,  there  are  Islands  famous  for  hot  Waters, 
which  flow  with  the  Sea.  And  near  the  Territory  of  the 
Istri,  Cissa,  Pullariaj,  and  those  which  the'Greeks  name  Ab- 
syrtides,  from  Absyrtis,  Brother  of  Medea,  there  slain.  Near 


198  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  III. 

them  they  called  the  Islands  Electridse,  wherein  is  produced 
Amber,  which  they  call  Electrum  :  a  very  certain  Argument 
to  prove  the  Vanity  of  the  Greeks ;  inasmuch  as  the  matters 
they  assigned  to  him  were  never  known.  Opposite  lader  is 
Lissa ;  and  certain  others  over  against  the  Liburni,  called 
Creteae  :  and  as  many  of  the  Liburni,  Celadusse.  Opposite 
Surium  is  Brattia,  commended  for  Oxen  and  Goats.  Issa, 
inhabited  by  Roman  Citizens,  and  Pharia  with  the  Town. 
Next  to  these,  Corcyra,  surnamed  Melsena ;  with  the  Town 
of  the  Guidii,  distant  22  Miles  :  between  which  and  Illy- 
ricum  is  Melita  ;  from  whence  (as  Callimachus)  testifieth) 
the  little  Dogs  Melitaei  took  their  Name1 ;  and  twelve  Miles 
from  thence,  the  three  Elaphites.  In  the  Ionian  Sea,  from 
Oricum  1000  Miles,  is  Sasonis,  well  known  for  the  Station  of 
Pirates. 

1  There  were  two  islands  called  Melita :  one  of  them  between  Sicily 
and  Africa,  famous  for  the  shipwreck  of  St.  Paul ;  and  from  which,  Strabo 
says,  the  Melitean  or  Maltese  dogs  took  their  name.  The  other  Melita 
was  on  the  coast  of  Illyria ;  and  from  this,  other  authors  besides  Pliny 
suppose  these  favourite  animals  to  have  been  derived.—  Wern.  Club. 


Note. — The  reader  will  have  observed  in  the  preceding  chapters  a 
strange  diversity  of  opinion  in  the  mind  of  the  author :  for  whilst  he 
ascribes  every  ominous  appearance  to  the  deities  presiding  over  the  affairs 
of  men,  yet,  in  other  passages,  he  expresses  his  doubts  as  to  their  ex- 
istence, or  would  limit  to  the  earth  itself  the  controlling  power ;  in  other 
words,  he  believed  the  earth  to  be  a  deity.  From  these  incongruities  we 
can  derive  but  one  opinion,  namely,  that,  heathen  as  he  was,  Pliny  never- 
theless doubted  the  truth  of  that  which  his  countrymen  and  other  heathen 
nations  believed,  whilst  he  fell  short  of  that  true  knowledge  which,  in 
and  before  his  day,  had  been  vouchsafed  to  many  like  himself,  who  from 
heathenism  were  converted  to  Christianity,  either  through  the  evidence 
of  miracles,  by  which  its  truth  was  supported,  or  through  the  opening  of 
the  eyes  of  the  understanding,  by  which  means  they  acknowledged  that 
which  seemed  a  mystery  before.  Considering  these  chapters  in  this  light, 
much  interest  is  added  to  the  style  and  spirit  in  which  our  author  wrote. 
— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  III.] 


History  of  Nature, 


199 


Roman  Milliarium,  from  Montfattfon.    See  page  171. 


London :  —  Printed  by  George  Barclay,  Castle  Street,  Leicester  Square. 


PLINY'S 
NATURAL    HISTORY. 


IN 


THIRTY-SEVEN   BOOKS. 


A  TRANSLATION 

ON  THE  BASIS  OF  THAT  BY  DR.  PHILEMON  HOLLAND, 
ED.  1601. 


WITH  CRITICAL   AND  EXPLANATORY  NOTES. 


VOL.  II. 


bt>  tijf  Wtrnman  Club. 


PRINTED  FOR  THE  CLUB 

BY 

GEORGE  BARCLAY,  CASTLE  STREET,  LEICESTER  SQUARE. 
1848-49. 


PURSUANT  to  a  Resolution  to  the  following  effect,  passed  at  a  meeting  of 
the  Committee  held  on  Wednesday,  the  15th  March,  1848, — 

"  The  best  thanks  of  the  Club  are  hereby  presented  to— 

JONATHAN  COUCH,  Esq.  F.L.S.,  the  Superintending  Editor  of  this 
Publication,  and  Translator  of  the  Work. 

Also  to  the  following  Gentlemen,  viz. : — 

In  the  Department  of  Classics, 

W.  G.  V.  BARNEWALL,  Esq.  M.A. 
Rev.  GEORGE  MUNFORD. 

In  the  Department  of  Geography, 

W.  H.  F.  PLATE,  Esq.  LL.D. 
GEORGE  ALEXANDER,  Esq.  F.S.A. 
CHARLES  MOXON,  Esq. 

In  the  Department  of  Natural  History  and  Physiology, 

C.  J.  B.  ALDIS,  Esq.  M.D. 
C.  R.  HALL,  Esq.  M.D. 
JONATHAN  COUCH,  Esq.  F.L.S. 
JOHN  CHIPPENDALE,  Esq.  F.R.C.S. 

For  the  Editorial  Assistance  rendered  by  them  in  the  preparation  of  the 
accompanying  Work." 


IN  THE  FOURTH   BOOK 


ARE    COMPRISED 


REGIONS,  NATIONS,  SEAS,  TOWNS,  MOUNTAINS,  PORTS,  RIVERS, 

WITH  THEIR  DIMENSIONS,  AND  PEOPLE,  EITHER  NOW 

OR  IN  TIMES  PAST  KNOWN;    VIZ.  I 


CHAP. 

1.  Epirus. 

2.  ^Etolia. 

3.  Locri. 

4.  Peloponnesus. 

5.  Achaia. 

6.  Arcadia. 

7.  Greece  and  Attica. 

8.  Thessaly. 

9.  Magnesia. 

10.  Macedonia. 

11.  Thracia. 

12.  The    Islands    lying    between 

those  Countries  :  among 
which,  Greta,  Euboea,  the 
Cyclades,  Sporades :  also, 


CHAP. 

the  Isles  within  Hellespont, 
near  the  Sea  of  Pontus, 
within  Moeotis,  Dacia,  Sar- 
matia,  and  Scythia. 

13.  The  Islands  of  Pontus. 

14.  The  Islands  of  Germany. 

15.  Islands  in  the  French  Ocean. 

16.  Britain  and  Ireland. 

17.  Gaul. 

18.  Gallia  Lugdunensis. 

19.  Aquitain. 

20.  High  Spain  (named  Citerior). 

21.  Portugal. 

22.  Islands  in  the  Ocean. 

23.  The  Measure  of  all  Europe. 


Herein  are  contained  many  principal  Towns  and  Countries,  famous 
Rivers  and  Mountains ;  Islands,  also,  besides  Cities  or  Nations  that  are 
perished :  in  sum,  Histories  and  Observations. 


LATIN  WRITERS  ABSTRACTED  : 

M.  Varro,  Cato  Censorius,  M.  Agrippa,  Divus  Augustus,  Varro  Ata- 
,  Cor.  Nepos,  Hyginus,  L.  Vetas,  Pomponius  Mela,  Licinius  Mutianus, 
Fabricius  Thuscus,  Atteius  Capita,  and  Atteius  Philologus. 

FOREIGN  AUTHORS: 

Polybius,  Hecatceus,  Hellanicus,  Damastes,  Eudoxus,  Diccearchus, 
Timosthenes,  Ephorus,  Crater  the  Grammarian,  Serapion  of  Antioch,  Cal- 
limachus,  Artemidorus,  Apollodorus,  Agathocles,  Eumachus  Siculus  the 
Musician,  Alexander  Polyhistor,  Thucydides,  Dosiades,  Anaximander, 
Philistides,  Mallotes,  Dionysius,  Aristides,  Callidemus,  Mencechmus,  j*Edas- 
thenes,  Anticlides,  Heraclides,  Philemon,  Menephon,  Pythias,  Isidorus, 
Philonides,  Xenagoras,  Astyonomus,  Staphylus,  Ariatocritus,  Metrodorus, 
Cleobulus,  and  Posidonius. 

VOL.  II.  B 


THE  FOURTH  BOOK 


HISTORY    OF    NATURE. 


WRITTEN    BY 


C.   PLINIUS   SECUNDUS. 


From  whence  first  arose  all  the  fabulous  Lies,  and  the 
excellent  Learning  of  the  Greeks. 

HE  third  Bay  of  Europe  beginneth  at  the 
Mountains  of  Acrocerannia,  and  endeth  in 
the  Hellespont.  It  containeth,  besides  19 
smaller  Bays,  25,000  Miles.  Within  it  are 
Epirus,  Acarnania,  ^Etolia,  Phocis,  Locris, 
Achaia,  Messania,  Laconia,  •  Argolis,  Megaris,  Attica, 
Bceotia.  And  again,  from  another  Sea,  the  same  Phocis 
and  Locris,  Doris,  Phthiotis,  Thessalia,  Magnesia,  Ma- 
cedonia, Thracia.  All  the  fabulous  Vein,  as  well  as  the 
illustrious  learning  of  Greece,  proceeded  first  out  of  this 
quarter;  on  which  account  we  will  therein  stay  somewhat 
the  longer.  The  Country  Epirus,  generally  so  called,  be- 
ginneth at  the  Mountains  of  Acroceraunia.  In  it  are,  first, 
the  Chaones,  of  whom  Chaonia  taketh  the  Name  :  then  the 
Thesproti,  and  Antigonenses  :  the  Place  Aornus,  and  Exha- 
lation so  deadly  to  Birds.  The  Cestrini,  and  Perrhoabi,  with 
their  Mountain  Pindus  :  the  Cassiopsei,  the  Dryopes,  Selli, 
Hellopes,  and  Molossi,  among  whom  is  the  Temple  of  Jupiter 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  3 

Dodonceus,  so  famous  for  the  Oracle  :  the  Mountain  To- 
marus,  celebrated  by  Theopompus  for  the  hundred  Fountains 
about  its  foot. 


CHAPTER  I. 
Ejjirus. 

EPIRUS  itself  reaching  to  Magnesia  and  Macedonia,  hath 
behind  it  the  Dassaretae  above  named,  a  free  Nation;  but 
presently  the  savage  People  of  the  Dardani.  On  the  left 
side  of  the  Dardani,  the  Treballi  and  Nations  of  Moesia  lie 
ranged  :  from  the  Front  are  joined  to  them,  the  Medi 
and  Denthelatse ;  upon  whom  the  Thraces  border,  who 
reach  as  far  as  to  Pontus.  Thus  it  is  environed  with 
Rhodope,  and  is  fenced  presently  also  with  the  Heights  of 
Haetnus.  In  the  Coast  of  Epirus,  among  the  Acroceraunia, 
is  the  Castle  Chimsera,  under  which  is  the  Spring  of  the 
King's  Water.  The  Towns  are  Maeandria  and  Cestria  :  the 
River  of  Thesprotia,  Thyamis  :  the  Colony  Buthrotium  : 
and  the  Gulf  of  Ambracia,  above  all  others  most  famous, 
receiving  at  its  Mouth  the  wide  Sea,  39  Miles  in  Length 
and  15  in  Breadth.  Into  it  runneth  the  River  Acheron, 
flowing  out  of  Acherusia,  a  Lake  of  Thesprotia,  36  Miles 
from  thence  :  and  the  Bridge  over  it,  1000  Feet  long,  ad- 
mirable to  those  that  admire  all  Things  of  their  own.  In 
the  Gulf  is  the  Town  Ambracia.  The  Rivers  of  the  Molossi, 
Aphas  and  Arachtus.  The  City  Anactoria,  and  the  Lake 
Pandosia.  The  Towns  of  Acarnania,  called  formerly  Curetus, 
are  Heraclea  and  Echinus  :  and  in  the  very  entrance,  Actium, 
a  Colony  of  Augustus,  with  the  noble  Temple  of  Apollo,  and 
the  free  City  Nicopolis.  When  out  of  the  Ambracian  Gulf 
and  in  the  Ionian  Sea,  we  meet  with  the  Leucadian  Coast 
and  the  Promontory  of  Leucate.  Then  the  Bay,  and  Leu- 
cadia  itself,  a  Peninsula,  once  called  Neritis,  but  by  the 
Labour  of  the  neighbouring  Inhabitants  cut  off  quite  from 
the  Continent,  but  joined  to  it  again  by  means  of  the  Winds 


4  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

blowing  together  heaps  of  Sand ;  which  Place  is  called 
Dioryctus,  and  is  in  Length  half  a  mile.  A  Town  in  it  is 
called  Leucas,  formerly  Neritum.  Then  the  Cities  of  the 
Acarnani,  Halyzea,  Stratos,  Argos,  surnamed  Amphilo- 
chicum.  The  River  Achelous  running  out  of  Pindus,  and 
dividing  Acarnania  from  ^tolia  ;  and  by  continual  addition 
of  Earth  joining  the  Island  Artemita  to  the  main  Land. 


CHAPTER  II. 
JEtolia. 

THE  ^Etolian  People  are  the  Athamanes,  Tymphei, 
Ephiri,  jEnienses,  Perrhoebi,  Dolopes,  Maraces  and  Atraces, 
from  whom  the  River  Atrax  falleth  into  the  Ionian  Sea. 
The  Town  Calydon  in  ^Etolia  is  seven  Miles  and  a  half  from 
the  Sea,  near  to  the  River  Evenus.  Then  followeth  Ma- 
cynia  and  Molychria  ;  behind  which  Chalcis  standeth,  and 
the  Mountain  Taphiassus.  But  in  the  Borders,  the  Pro- 
montory Antirrhium,  where  is  the  Mouth  of  the  Corinthian 
Gulf,  not  a  Mile  broad  where  it  runneth  in  and  divideth 
the  JEtoli  from  Peloponnesus.  The  Promontory  that  shooteth 
out  against  it  is  named  Rhion :  but  in  the  Corinthian  Gulf 
are  the  Towns  of  JEtolia,  Naupactum,  and  Pylene :  and  in 
the  Midland  parts,  Pleuron,  Halysarna.  The  Mountains  of 
name :  in  Dodone,  Tomarus :  in  Ambracia,  Grania :  in 
Acarnania,  Aracynthus  :  in  ^Etolia,  Acanthon,  Panaetolium, 
and  Macinium. 

CHAPTER  III. 
Locri. 

NEXT  to  the  ^Etoli  are  the  Locri,  surnamed  Ozolae,  free  : 
the  Town  Oeanthe  :  the  Port  of  Apollo  Phastius :  the  Bay 
Crissaeus.  Within,  the  Towns  Argyna,  Eupalia,  Phsestum, 
and  Calamissus.  Beyond  are  Cirrhsei,  the  Plains  of  Phocis, 
the  Town  Cirrha,  the  Port  Chalseon  :  from  which,  seven 
Miles  within  the  Land,  is  the  free  City  Delphi,  under  the 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  5 

Mountain  Parnassus,  the  most  illustrious  Place  upon  Earth 
for  the  Oracle  of  Apollo.  The  Fountain  Castalius,  the  River 
Cephissus,  running  before  Delphos,  which  ariseth  in  a  former 
City,  Liloea.  Moreover,  the  Town  Crissa,  and  together  with 
the  Bulenses,  Anticyra,  Naulochum,  Pyrrha,  Amphissa,  a 
free  State,  Trichone,  Tritea,  Auibrysus,  the  Region  Drymaea, 
named  Daulis.  Then,  at  the  bottom  of  the  Bay,  the  Angle 
of  Bceotia  is  washed  by  the  Sea,  with  the  Towns  Siphae  and 
Thebae,  which  are  surnamed  Corsicae,  near  to  Helicon.  The 
third  Town  of  Breotia  from  this  Sea  is  Pagse,  from  whence 
projecteth  the  Neck  of  Peloponnesus. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Peloponnesus. 

PELOPONNESUS,  called  formerly  Apia  and  Pelasgia,  is  a 
Peninsula,  worthy  to  come  behind  no  other  Land  for  noble- 
ness ;  lying  between  two  Seas,  ^Egeum  and  Ionium  :  like 
the  Leaf  of  a  Plane  Tree1,  in  regard  of  the  indented  Creeks 
thereof:  it  beareth  a  circuit  of  563  Miles,  according  to 
Isidorus.  The  same,  if  you  comprise  the  Creeks,  addeth 
almost  as  much  more.  The  Straits  whence  it  passeth  is 
called  Isthmos.  In  which  Place  the  Seas  above-named, 
bursting  from  various  ways,  from  the  North  and  the  East, 
devour  all  the  Breadth  of  it  there :  until,  by  the  contrary 
running  in  of  such  Seas,  the  Sides  on  both  hands  being 
eaten  away,  and  leaving  a  Space  between,  five  Miles  over, 
Hellas,  with  a  narrow  Neck,  meeteth  with  Peloponnesus. 
The  one  Side  thereof  is  called  the  Corinthian  Gulf,  the 
other,  the  Saronian.  Lecheum  on  the  one  hand,  and  Cen- 
chreae  on  the  other,  are  the  Bounds  of  the  Straits :  where 
such  Ships  as  for  their  bigness  cannot  be  conveyed  over  upon 
Waggons,  make  a  great  compass  about  with  some  Danger. 
For  which  cause,  Demetrius  the  King,  Caesar  the  Dictator, 

1  Dionysius,  the  geographer,  also  compares  the  form  of  the  Morea,  or 
ancient  Peloponnesus,  to  the  leaf  of  a  plane-tree,  making  the  footstalk  to 
be  the  isthmus  by  which  it  is  joined  to  Greece.  And  in  Martyn's  "  Virgil," 
a  figure  of  this  leaf  is  engraved  to  illustrate  the  subject.—  Wern.  Club. 


6  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

Prince  Caius,  and  Domitius  Nero,  endeavoured  to  cut 
through  the  narrow  portions,  and  make  a  navigable  Channel : 
but  the  attempt  was  unhappy,  as  appeared  by  the  issue  of 
them  all.  In  the  midst  of  this  narrow  Strait  which  we 
have  called  Isthmos,  the  Colony  Corinthus,  formerly  called 
Ephyra,  situated  on  a  little  Hill,  is  inhabited,  three  score 
Stadia  from  each  Shore  :  which  from  the  top  of  its  Citadel, 
which  is  named  Acrocorinthus,  wherein  is  the  Fountain 
Pirene,  hath  a  prospect  into  both  those  opposite  Seas. 
Through  the  Corinthian  Gulf  is  a  Passage  from  Leucas  to 
Patrae,  of  87  Miles.  Patrse,  a  Colony,  built  upon  the  Pro- 
montory of  Peloponnesus  that  shooteth  furthest  into  the 
Sea,  over  against  ./Etolia  and  the  River  Evenus,  of  less  dis- 
tance, as  hath  been  said,  than  a  Mile,  in  the  very  entrance, 
sendeth  out  the  Corinthian  Gulf  85  Miles  in  Length,  even 
as  far  as  Isthmos. 

CHAPTER  V. 
Achaia. 

ACHAIA,  the  name  of  a  Province,  beginneth  at  the 
Isthmus :  formerly  it  was  called  .ZEgialos,  because  of  the 
Cities  disposed  in  order  upon  the  Strand.  The  first  there  is 
Lecheae  above  named,  a  Port  of  Lechese  of  the  Corinthians. 
Next  to  it  Oluros,  a  Castle  of  the  Pellensei.  The  Towns, 
Helic£,  Bura,  and  (into  which  the  Inhabitants  retired  when 
these  before-named  were  swallowed  up  in  the  Sea)  Sicyon, 
JSgira,  -ZEgion,  and  Erineos.  Within,  Cleone  and  Hysiae. 
Also  the  Port  Panhormus,  and  Rhium,  described  before : 
from  which  Promontory,  five  Miles  off,  standeth  Patrse, 
above  mentioned,  and  the  Place  called  Pherae.  Of  nine 
Mountains  in  Achaia,  Scioessa  is  most  known  ;  also  the 
Spring  Cymothoe.  Beyond  Patrae  is  the  Town  Olenum,  the 
Colony  Dymae.  Places  called  Buprasium  and  Hirmene  : 
and  the  Promontory  Araxum.  The  Bay  of  Cyllene,  the 
Cape  Chelonates :  from  whence  to  Cyllene  is  two  Miles. 
The  Castle  Phlius.  The  Tract  also  by  Homer  named 
Arethyrea,  and  afterwards  Asophis :  then  the  Country  of 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  7 

the  Elii,  who  before  were  called  Epei.  Elis  itself  is  in  the 
Midland,  12  Miles  from  Pylos.  Within  is  the  Shrine  of 
Jupiter  Olympius,  which,  for  the  fame  of  the  Games  there, 
containeth  the  Calendars  of  the  Greeks  (fasti) :  also,  the 
former  Town  of  the  Pisaei,  before  which  the  River  Alpheus 
runneth  ;  but  in  the  Borders,  the  Promontory  Icthys.  The 
River  Alpheus  is  navigated  to  the  Towns  Aulos  and  Leprion. 
The  Promontory  Platanestus.  All  these  lie  Westward.  But 
towards  the  South,  the  Bay  Cyparissius,  the  City  Cyparissa, 
72  Miles  in  circuit.  The  Towns,  Pylos,  Methone,  a  Place 
called  Helos  :  the  Promontory  Acritas  :  the  Bay  Asinaeus  of 
the  Town  Asinum,  and  Coronseus  of  Corone  :  and  these  are 
bounded  by  the  Promontory  Jsenarus.  There  also  is  the 
Region  Messenia  with  22  Mountains  :  the  River  Paomisus. 
But  within,  Messene  itself,  Ithome,  Occhalia,  Arene,  Pteleon, 
Thryon,  Dorion,  Zancluin,  famous  at  various  times.  The 
Compass  of  this  Bay  is  80  Miles,  the  Passage  over  30  Miles. 
Then  from  Taenarus,  the  Laconian  Land  pertaining  to  a  free 
People,  and  a  Bay  there  in  circuit  about  206  Miles,  but  39 
Miles  over.  The  Towns  Taenarum,  Amiclae,  Pherae,  Leuctra, 
and  within,  Sparta,  Theranicum :  and  where  stood  Car- 
damyle,  Pitan£,  and  Anthan£.  The  Place  Thyrea,  and 
Gerania  :  the  Mountain  Taygetus  :  the  River  Eurotas,  the 
Bay  ^Egylodes,  and  the  Town  Psammathus.  The  Bay 
Gytheates,  of  a  Town  thereby  (Gythaeum),  from  whence  to 
the  Island  Greta  there  is  a  very  direct  course.  All  these 
are  enclosed  within  the  Promontory  Maleum.  The  Bay 
next  following  to  Scyllaeus  is  called  Argolicus,  and  is  50  Miles 
over,  and  172  Miles  round.  The  Towns  upon  it,  Boaa, 
Epidaurus,  Limera,  named  also  Zarax :  the  Port  Cyphanta. 
Rivers,  Inachus,  Erasinus :  between  which  standeth  Argos, 
surnamed  Hippium,  upon  the  Lake  Lern£,  from  the  sea  two 
Miles,  and,  nine  Miles  further,  Mycenae.  Also,  where  they 
say  Tiryntha  stood,  and  the  Place  Mantinea.  Mountains, 
Artemius,  Apesantus,  Asterion,  Parparus,  and  11  others 
besides.  Fountains,  Niobe,  Amymone,  Psammoth£.  From 
Scyllseum  to  the  Isthmus,  177  Miles.  Towns,  Herraione, 
Troezen,  Coryphasium,  and  Argos.  called  of  some  Inachium, 


8  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

of  others  Dipsium.  The  Port  Caenites,  the  Bay  Saronicus, 
encircled  in  old  Time  with  a  Grove  of  Oaks,  from  whence  it 
had  the  Name,  for  so  old  Greece  called  an  Oak.  Within  it 
the  Town  Epidaurum,  celebrated  for  the  Shrine  of  JEscu- 
lapius;  the  Promontory  Spirseum,  the  Harbours  Anthedon 
and  Bucephalus  :  and  likewise  Cenchreae,  which  we  spoke  of 
before,  being  the  other  limit  of  the  Isthmus,  with  the  Shrine 
of  Neptune,  famous  for  its  Games  every  five  Years.  So 
many  Bays  cut  up  the  Peloponnesian  Coast :  so  many  Seas 
roar  against  it.  For  on  the  North  side  the  Ionian  Sea 
breaketh  in :  on  the  West  it  is  beaten  upon  by  the  Sicilian. 
From  the  South  the  Crethean  Sea  driveth  against  it :  the 
^gean  from  the  South-east,  and  Myrtoan  on  the  North- 
east, which  beginning  at  the  Megarian  Bay,  washeth  all 
Attica. 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Of  Arcadia. 

THE  midland  Parts  of  this,  Arcadia  most  of  all  taketh 
up,  being  every  way  remote  from  the  Sea  :  at  the  beginning 
it  was  named  Drymodis,  but  soon  after  Pelasgis.  The 
Towns  in  it  are  Psophis,  Man  tinea,  Stymphalum,  Tegea, 
Antigonea,  Orchomenum,  Pheneum,  Palatium,  from  whence 
the  Mount  Palatium  at  Rome  took  the  Name,  Megalepolis, 
Catina,  Bocalium,  Carmon,  Parrhasise,  Thelphusa,  Melansea, 
Hersea,  Pil£,  Pellana,  Agree,  Epium,  Cynsetha,  Lepreon  of 
Arcadia,  Parthenium,  Alea,  Methydrium,  Enespe,  Macistum, 
Lamp£,  Clitorium,  Cleone  ;  between  which  Towns  is  the 
Tract  Nemea,  usually  called  Berubinadia.  Mountains  in 
Arcadia,  Pholoe,  with  the  Town :  also  Cyllene,  Lyceus, 
wherein  the  Shrine  of  Jupiter  Lyceus,  Msenalus,  Artemisius, 
Parthenius,  Lampeus,  and  Nonacris :  and  eight  besides  of 
base  account.  Rivers,  Ladon,  issuing  out  of  the  Fens  of 
Pheneus,  Erymanthus  out  of  a  Mountain  of  the  same  Name, 
running  both  down  into  Alpheus.  The  rest  of  the  Cities  to 
be  named  in  Achaea,  Aliphiraei,  Albeatae,  Pyrgerises,  Pareatse, 
Paragenitiae,  Tortuni,  Typansei,  Thryasii,  Trittenses.  All 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  9 

Achaea  Domitius  Nero  endowed  with  Freedom.  Pelo- 
ponnesus, from  the  Promontory  of  Malea  to  the  Town 
Lechaeum  upon  the  Corinthian  Bay,  lieth  in  Breadth  160 
Miles:  but  across,  from  Elis  to  Epidaurum,  125  Miles: 
from  Olympia  to  Argos,  through  Arcadia,  63  Miles :  from 
the  same  Place  to  Phlius  is  the  said  measure.  And  the 
whole,  as  if  Nature  weighed  out  a  Recompense  for  the 
irruptions  of  the  Seas,  riseth  up  into  three  score  and  sixteen 
Mountains. 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Greece  and  Attica. 

FROM  the  Straits  of  the  Isthmus  beginneth  Hellas,  by  our 
Countrymen  called  Graecia.  The  first  Tract  thereof  is  Attica, 
in  old  Time  named  Acte.  It  reacheth  the  Isthmus  on  that 
Part  of  it  which  is  called  Megaris,  from  the  Colony  Megara, 
from  the  Region  of  the  Pagae.  These  two  Towns,  as  Pelo- 
ponnesus lieth  out  in  Length,  are  seated  on  either  Hand,  as 
it  were,  upon  the  Shoulders  of  Hellas.  The  Pagaei,  and 
more  especially  the  ^Egosthenienses,  lie  annexed  to  the 
Magarensians.  In  the  Coast  is  the  Harbour  Schoenus. 
Towns,  Sidus,  Cremyon,  the  Scironian  Rocks  for  three  Miles 
long,  Geranea,  Megara,  and  Elcusin.  There  were  besides, 
CEnoa  and  Probalinthus,  which  now  are  52  Miles  from 
the  Isthmus.  Pyraeeus  and  Phalera,  two  Ports  joined  to 
Athens  by  a  Wall,  within  the  Land  five  Miles.  This  City 
is  free,  and  needeth  no  more  any  Man's  praise :  so  abund- 
antly noble  it  is.  In  Attica  are  these  Fountains,  Cephissia, 
Larine,  Callirrhoe,  and  Enneacreunos.  Mountains,  Brilessus, 
Megialcus,  Icarius,  Hymettus,  and  Lyrabetus  :  the  River 
Ilissos.  From  Pyraeeus  42  Miles  is  the  Promontory 
Sunium  ;  likewise  the  Promontory  Dpriscum.  Also  Po- 
tamos  and  Brauron,  Towns  in  time  past.  The  Village 
Rhamnus,  the  Place  Marathon,  the  Plain  Thriastius,  the 
Town  Melita  and  Oropus,  in  the  Border  of  Boeotia.  To 
which  belong  Anthedon,  Onchestos,  Thesprae,  a  free  Town, 
Lebadea  :  and  Thebes,  surnamed  Boeotia,  not  inferior  in 


JO  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  IV. 

Fame  to  Athens,  as  being  the  native  Country  (as  Men  will 
have  it)  of  two  Gods,  Liber  and  Hercules.  Also,  they  attribute 
the  Birth  of  the  Muses  to  the  Grove  Helicon.  To  this  Thebes 
is  assigned  the  Forest  Cithseron  and  the  River  Ismenus. 
Moreover,  Fountains  in  Boeotia,  GEdipodium.  Psammate, 
Dirce,  Epigranea,  Arethusa,  Hippocrene,  Aganippe,  and 
Gargaphiae.  Mountains,  besides  the  forenamed,  Mycalessus, 
Adylisus,  Acontius.  The  rest  of  the  Towns  between  Megara 
and  Thebes,  Eleutherse,  Haliartus,  Plateae,  Pherae,  Aspledon, 
Hyle,  Thisbe,  Erythrse,  Glissas,  and  Copse.  Near  the  River 
Cephissus,  Lamia  and  Anichia :  Medeon,  Phligon£,  Grephis, 
Coronsea,  Chseronia.  But  in  the  Borders,  beneath  Thebes, 
Ocal&,  Elseon,  Scolos,  Scoanos,  Peteon,  Hyrie,  Mycalessus, 
Hyreseon,  Pteleon,  Olyros,  Tanagia,  a  free  People ;  and  in 
the  very  Mouth  of  Euripus,  which  the  Island  Euboea  maketh 
by  its  opposite  Site,  Aulis,  renowned  for  its  large  Har- 
bour. The  Boeotians  in  old  Time  were  named  Hyantes. 
The  Locrians  also  are  named  Epicnemidii,  in  Times  past 
Letegetes,  through  whom  the  River  Cephissus  runneth  into 
the  Sea.  Towns,  Opus  (whereof  cometh  the  Opuntinean 
Bay),  and  Cynus.  Upon  the  Sea-coast  of  Phocis,  one 
Daphnus.  Within,  among  the  Locrians,  Elatea,  and  upon 
the  Bank  of  Cephissus  (as  we  have  said)  Lilaea :  and  toward 
Delphos,  Cnemis  and  Hiarnpolis.  Again,  the  Borders  of 
the  Locrii,  wherein  stand  Larymna  arid  Thronium,  near 
which  the  River  Boagrius  falleth  into  the  Sea.  Towns, 
Narycion,  Alope,  Scarphia.  After  this,  the  Vale,  called 
by  the  People  there  dwelling,  Maliacus  Sinus,  wherein  are 
these  Towns,  Halcyone,  Econia,  and  Phalara.  Then  Doris, 
wherein  are  Sperchios,  Erineon,  Boion,  Pindus,  Cytirium. 
On  the  Back  of  Doris  is  the  Mountain  (Eta.  Then  fol- 
loweth  jEmonia  that  so  often  hath  changed  Name  :  for 
the  same  hath  beea  called  Pelasgicum,  Argos,  and  Hellas, 
Thessalia  also,  and  Dryopis,  and  evermore  it  took  the  Name 
of  the  Kings.  In  it  was  born  a  King  called  Gracus,  from 
whom  Greece  was  named  :  there  also  was  Hellen  born, 
from  whence  came  the  Hellenes.  These  being  but  one 
People,  Homer  hath  called  by  three  Names:  Myrmidons, 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  1 1 

Hellense,  and  Achaei.  Of  these,  they  are  called  Phthiotae 
who  inhabit  Doris.  Their  Towns  are  Echinus,  in  the  entrance 
of  the  River  Sperchius  :  and  the  Straits  of  Thermopylae,  so 
named  by  reason  of  the  Waters  :  and,  four  Miles  from 
thence,  Heraclea  was  called  Trachin.  There  is  the  Mountain 
Callidromus :  and  the  famous  Towns,  Hellas,  Halos,  Lamia, 
Phthia,  and  Arne. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Thessalia. 

MOREOVER,  in  Thessalia,  Orchomenus,  formerly  called 
Minyeus  ;  and  the  Town  Almon,  by  some  Elmon  ;  Atrax, 
Pelinna,  and  the  Fountain  Hyperia.  Towns,  Pherse,  behind 
which  Pierius  stretcheth  forth  to  Macedonia:  Larissa,  Gomphi, 
Thebes  of  Thessalia,  the  Grove  Pteleon,  and  the  Bay  Pa- 
gasicus.  The  Town  Pagasa,  the  same  named  afterwards 
Demetrias  ;  Tricca,  the  Pharsalian  Plains,  with  a  free  City  : 
Cranon,  and  Iletia.  Mountains  of  Phthiotis,  Nymphaeus, 
beautiful  for  the  natural  Harbours  and  Garden-works  there  : 
Buzigaeus,  Donacesa,  Bermius,  Daphista,  Chimerion,  Atha- 
mas,  Stephane.  In  Thessalia  there  are  34,  of  which  the 
most  famous  are  Cerceti,  Olympus,  Pierus,  Ossa  :  over 
against  which  is  Pindus  and  Othrys,  the  Seat  of  the  Lapithae ; 
and  those  lie  toward  the  West :  but  Eastward,  Pelios  ;  all  of 
them  bending  in  the  manner  of  a  Theatre  :  and  before  them, 
in  form  of  a  WTedge,  72  Cities.  Rivers  of  Thessalia, 
Apidanus,  Phoenix,  Enipeus,  Onochomus,  Pamisus  :  the 
Fountain  Messeis,  the  Lake  Boebeis :  and  illustrious  above 
all  the  rest,  Peneus,  which,  rising  near  Gomphi,  runneth 
for  500  Stadia  in  a  woody  Dale  between  Ossa  and  Olympus, 
and  half  that  Way  is  navigable.  In  this  Course  are  the 
Places  called  Temp£,  five  Miles  in  Length,  and  almost  an 
Acre  and  a  half  Broad,  where  on  both  Hands  the  Hills  arise 
by  a  gentle  Ascent  above  the  reach  of  Man's  Sight.  Within, 
Peneus  glideth  by,  in  a  fresh  green  Grove,  clear  as  Crystal, 
over  the  gravelly  Stones;  pleasant  for  the  Grass  upon  the 
Banks,  and  melodious  with  the  Harmony  of  Birds.  It 


12  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

taketh  in  the  River  Eurotas,  but  receiveth  him  not,  but,  as 
Homer  expresseth  it1,  floweth  over  him  like  Oil:  and  within  a 
very  little  while  rejecteth  the  Burden,  as  refusing  to  mingle 
with  his  own  silver  Streams  those  penal  and  cursed  Waters 
so  direfully  produced. 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Magnesia. 

To  Thessalia,  Magnesia  is  annexed  :  the  Fountain  there 
is  Libethra.  The  Towns,  lolchos,  Hirmenium,  Pyrrha, 
Methone,  Olizon.  The  Promontory  Sepias.  Towns,  Cas- 
tana,  Sphalatra,  and  the  Promontory  ^Enantium.  Towns, 
Meliboea,  Rhisus,  Erymne.  The  Mouth  of  Peneus.  Towns, 
Homolium,  Orthe,  Thespise,  Phalanna,  Thaumaciae,  Gyrton, 
Cranon,  Acarne,  Dotion,  Melitsea,  Phylace,  Potinae.  The 
Length  of  Epirus,  Achaia,  Attica,  and  Thessalia,  lying  strait 
out,  is  by  report  480  Miles,  the  Breadth  287. 

CHAPTER  X. 
Macedonia. 

MACEDONIA,  so  called  afterwards  (formerly  it  was  named 
Emathia)  is  a  Kingdom,  consisting  of  150  several  People, 
renowned  for  two  Kings,  and  once  ennobled  for  the  Empire 
of  the  World.  This  Country  passing  behind  Magnesia  and 
Thessalia  toward  the  Nations  of  Epirus  Westward,  is  much 
troubled  with  the  Dardani.  The  North  Parts  thereof  are 
defended  by  Paeonia  and  Pelagonia,  against  the  Triballi. 
The  Towns  are  these,  -^Ege,  wherein  it  was  the  Custom  to  inter 

1  As  Homer  expresseth  it.     See  "  Iliad,"  b.  750 : — 

"  To  these  were  join'd,  who  till  the  pleasant  fields 
Where  Titaresius  winds  :  the  gentle  flood 
Pours  into  Peneus  all  his  limpid  stores, 
But  with  the  silver-eddied  Peneus  flows 
Unmixt  as  oil ;  for  Stygian  is  his  stream, 
And  Styx  is  the  inviolable  oath. 

COWPER'S  Homer. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  13 

their  Kings  :  Beroea,  and  jEginium,  in  that  Quarter  which, 
from  the  Wood,  is  called  Pieria.  In  the  Borders,  Heraclea, 
and  the  River  Apilas  :  Towns,  Phina  and  Oloros  :  the  River 
Haliacmon.  Within  are  the  Haloritae,  the  Vallei,  Phylacei, 
Cyrrhestae,  Tyrissaei :  Pella,  the  Colony  :  the  Town  Stobi,  of 
Roman  Citizens.  Presently,  Antigonia,  Europus,  upon  the 
River  Axius,  and  another  of  the  same  Name,  through  which 
Rhaedias  runneth  :  Heordeco,  Scydra,  Mieza,  Gordinise.  Soon 
after,  in  the  Borders,  Ichnae ;  and  the  River  Axius.  To  this 
Extremity  the  Dardani :  Treres  and  Pieres  border  upon 
Macedonia.  From  this  River  are  the  Nations  of  Paeonia, 
Parorei,  Heordenses,  Almopii,  Pelagones,  and  Mygdones. 
The  Mountains  Rhodope,  Scopius,  and  Orbelus.  Then  the 
Lap  of  the  Earth  spreading  along,  Arethusii,  Antiochienses, 
Idomenenses,  Doberienses,  Trienses,  Allantenses,  AndarU 
stenses,  Moryllii,  Garesci,  Lyncestae,  Othrionei,  and  the  free 
States  of  the  Amantini  and  Orestae.  Colonies,  Bulledensis 
and  Diensis.  Xilopolitae,  Scotussaei,  free ;  Heraclea,  Sintica, 
Tymphei,  and  Coronaei.  In  the  Coast  of  the  Macedonian 
Bay,  the  Town  Calastra,  and  within,  Phileros,  and  Let£  : 
and  in  the  middle  bending  of  the  Coast,  Thessalonica,  of 
free  condition.  To  it  from  Dyrrhachium,  is  114  Miles; 
Thermae.  In  the  Bay  Thermaicus,  are  these  Towns,  Dicaea, 
Pydna,  Derrha,  Scione  :  the  Promontory  Canastraeum. 
Towns,  Pallenei,  Phlerga.  In  which  Region  these  Moun- 
tains, Hypsizorus,  Epitus,  Alchion^,  Leuomn£.  Towns, 
Nissos,  Brygion,  Eicon,  Mendae,  and  in  the  Isthmus  of  Pal- 
lene,  the  Colony  sometime  called  Potidaea,  and  now  Cas- 
sandria ;  Anthemus,  the  Bay  Holophyxus,  and  Mecyberna ; 
Towns,  Phiscella,  Ampelos,  Torone,  and  Singos  :  the  Creek 
(where  Xerxes,  King  of  the  Persians,  cut  the  Mountain 
Athos  from  the  Continent),  in  Length  a  Mile  and  a  half. 
The  Mountain  itself  shooteth  out  from  the  Plain  into  the 
Sea,  75  Miles.  The  Compass  of  the  Foot  thereof  taketh 
150  Miles.  A  Town  there  was  on  the  Summit,  Acroton. 
Now  there  be  Vranopolis,  Palaeotrium,  Thyssus,  Cleon£, 
Apollonia,  the  Inhabitants  whereof  are  named  Macrobii.  The 
Town  Cassera,  and  a  second  Gullet  of  the  Isthmus,  Acan- 


14  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  IV. 

thus,  Stagira,  Sitone,  Heraclea,  and  the  Region  lying  under 
Mygdonia,  wherein  are,  receding  from  the  Sea,  Apollonia 
and  Arethusa.  Again,  in  the  Coast,  Posidium,  and  a  Bay, 
with  the  Town  Cermorus  :  Amphipolis,  a  free  State,  and  the 
Nation  Bisaltse.  Then,  the  River  Strymon,  which  is  the 
Bound  of  Macedonia,  and  which  springeth  in  Haemus :  of 
which  this  is  worthy  to  be  remembered,  that  it  runneth  into 
seven  Lakes  before  it  keepeth  a  direct  Course.  This  is 
Macedonia,  which  once  obtained  the  Dominion  over  all  the 
Earth :  this  overran  Asia,  Armenia,  Iberia,  Albania,  Cappa- 
docia,  Syria,  Egypt,  Taurus,  and  Caucasus :  this  ruled  over 
the  Bactri,  Medi,  and  Persi,  and  possessed  all  the  East : 
this  having  the  Conquest  of  India,  wandered  through  the 
Tracts  of  Father  Liber  and  Hercules.  This  is  the  very 
same  Macedonia,  of  which  in  one  Day  Paulus  jEmylius, 
our  Imperator,  sold  72  plundered  Cities.  So  great  a 
Difference  of  Fortune  befel  two  Men. 

CHAPTER  XI. 
Thracia. 

Now  followeth  Thracia,  among  the  most  valiant  Nations  of 
Europe,  divided  into  52  Regiments  (strategias)  of  Soldiers. 
Of  those  People  in  it,  whom  it  does  not  grieve  me  to  name, 
the  Denseletes  and  Medi  inhabit  near  the  River  Strymon,  on 
the  right  Side,  as  far  as  to  the  Bisaltse  above-named :  on  the 
left,  the  Digeri,  and  many  Names  of  the  Bessi,  to  the  River 
Nestus,  which  environeth  the  Bottom  of  the  Mountain  Pan- 
gseus,  between  the  Eleti,  Diobesi,  and  Carbilesi ;  and  so 
forward  to  the  Brysae  and  Capaei.  Odomanta,  a  Nation  of 
the  Odrysee,  poureth  out  the  River  Hebrus  to  the  Neighbour- 
borderers,  the  Carbiletes,  Pyrogeri,  Drugeri,  Caenici,  Hyp- 
salti,  Beni,  Corpilli,  Botisei,  and  Edoni.  In  the  same  Tract 
are  the  Selletae,  Priautae,  Diloncae,  Thyni,  Celetse,  the  greater 
under  Haemus,  the  less  under  Rhodopae  :  between  whom 
runneth  the  River  Hebrus.  The  Town  situate  beneath  Rho- 
dop£,  before-time  named  Poneropolis ;  soon  after  by  the 
Founder,  Philippopolis ;  but  now,  from  its  Site,  Trimontium. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  15 

The  Elevation  of  Haemus  taketh  six  Miles  :  the  Back  and 
declining  thereof  down  to  Ister,  the  Moesi,  Getae,  Aoti, 
Gaudae,  and  Clariae,  and  under  them  the  Arraei,  Sarmatae, 
whom  they  call  Areatae,  and  Scythae  :  and  about  the  Sea- 
coast  of  Pontus,  the  Moriseni  and  Sithonii,  from  whom  the 
Poet  Orpheus  descended,  do  inhabit.  Thus  Ister  boundeth 
it  on  the  North  :  in  the  East,  Pontus  and  Propontus :  South- 
ward, the  Sea  J£gaeum,  in  the  Coast  of  which,  from  Strymon, 
stand  Apollonia,  CEstima,  Neapolis,  and  Polis.  Within,  the 
Colony  of  Philip;  and  325  Miles  from  Dyrrhachium,  Sco- 
tusa,  Topiris,  and  the  Mouth  of  the  River  Nestus.  The 
Mountain  Pangaeus,  Heraclea,  Olynthos  Abdera,  a  free  City; 
the  Marsh  and  Nation  of  the  Bistoni.  There  stood  the  Town 
Tinda,  terrible  for  the  Stables  of  the  Horses  of  Diomedes. 
Now  there  are  the  Diceae,  Ismaron,  the  Place  Parthenion, 
Phalesina,  Maronea,  called  Ortagurea  before-time.  The 
Mountain  Serrium  and  Zonae  :  then,  the  Place  Doriscus, 
able  to  receive  1 0,000 1  Men  :  for  so  there  Xerxes  numbered 
over  his  Army.  The  Mouth  of  Hebrus :  the  Port  of  Stentor: 
the  free  Town  .ZEnea,  with  the  Tomb  of  Polydorus ;  the 
Region,  sometime,  of  the  Cicones.  From  Doriscus,  the 
Coast  bendeth  to  Macron -Tichos  for  122  Miles.  About 
which  Place  the  River  Melas,  from  which  the  Bay  taketh  its 
Name.  Towns,  Cypsella,  Bisanthe,  and  that  which  is  called 
Macron-Tichos,  whence  stretching  forth  the  Walls  from  Pro- 
pontis  to  the  Bay  Melanes,  between  two  Seas,  it  excludeth 
Cherronesus  as  it  runneth  out.  For  Thracia,  on  one  Side, 
beginning  at  the  Sea-coast  of  Pontus,  where  the  River  Ister 
is  discharged,  hath  in  that  Quarter  the  very  beautiful  Cities, 
Istropolis  of  the  Milesii,  Tomi,  and  Calatis,  which  before 
was  called  Acernetis.  It  had  Heraclea  and  Bizon,  which 
was  destroyed  in  a  Chasm  of  the  Earth ;  now  it  hath  Diony- 
sopolis,  formerly  called  Crunos.  The  River  Ziras  runneth  by 
it.  All  that  Tract,  the  Scythians  named  Aroteres  possessed. 
Their  Towns,  Aphrodisius,  Libistos,  Ziger£,  Borcob&,  Eu- 
menia,  Parthenopolis,  Gerania,  where  it  is  reported  were  the 

1  Or  100,000. 


16  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

Nation  of  the  Pygmei1,  whom  the  Barbarians  call  Catizi,  and 
they  believe  that  they  were  chased  away  by  Cranes.  In  the 
Borders  from  Dionysopolis  is  Odessus  of  the  Milesii;  the  River 
Pomiscus,  the  Town  Tetranaulochos  :  the  Mountain  Haemus 
bending  down  with  a  huge  Top  into  Pontus,  had  in  the  Sum- 
mit the  Town  Aristseum.  Now  in  the  Coast  is  Mesembria 
and  Anchialum,  where  Messa  was.  The  Region  Astice. 
There  was  the  Town  Anthium,  now  there  is  Apollonia.  The 
Rivers  Panissa,  Rira,  Tearus,  Orosines.  Towns,  Thynnias, 
Almedessos,  Develton,  with  the  Marsh  which  now  is  called 
Deultum,  belonging  to  the  Veterans.  Phinopolis,  near  which 
is  Bosphorus.  From  the  Mouth  of  Ister  to  the  Entrance  of 
Pontus  others  have  made  555  Miles.  Agrippa  hath  added 
40  Miles  more.  From  thence  to  the  Wall  above-named, 
150 :  and  from  it  to  Cherronesus,  126.  But  from  the  Bos- 
phorus is  the  Bay  Gasthenes.  The  Port  Senum,  and  an- 
other which  is  called  the  Port  Mulierum.  The  Promontory 
Chrysoceras,  whereon  standeth  the  Town  Bizantium  of  free 
Condition,  and  formerly  called  Lygos.  From  Dyrrhachium 
it  is  71 1  Miles.  Thus  much  lieth  out  the  Length  between 
the  Adriatic  Sea  and  Propontis.  Rivers,  Bathynias,  Pydaras, 
or  Atyras.  Towns,  Selymbria,  Perinthus,  annexed  to  the 
Continent,  200  Paces  broad.  Within,  Byzia,  the  Castle  of 
the  Thracian  Kings,  hated  by  Swallows2  for  the  horrible 
Crime  of  Tereus.  The  Region  Camica  :  the  Colony  Flavio- 
polus,  where  formerly  the  Town  was  called  Zela.  And  50 
Miles  from  Byria,  the  Colony  Apros,  which  is  from  Philippi 
188  Miles.  But  in  the  Borders,  the  River  Erginus,  where 
was  the  Town  Gonos.  And  there  you  leave  Lysimachia, 

1  The  Pygmies  are  frequently  spoken  of  by  ancient  writers,  and  the 
existence  of  the  diminutive  race  was  never  doubted.     We  defer  the  parti- 
cular consideration  of  the  monstrous  races  of  mankind  to  the  7th  Book, 
c.  2,  where  they  are  all  mentioned  together ;  but  the  Pygmies  appear  to 
have  attracted  more  of  the  imagination  of  the  poets  than  any  of  the 
others.    The  origin  of  their  royal  tyrant,  the  crane,  is  referred  to  by 
Ovid,  "Metamorphoses,"  b.  vi.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  See  the  story  of  Tereus,  Procne,  and  Philomela,  in  Ovid's  "  Metamor- 
phoses," lib.  vi. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  17 

now  in  Cherronesus.     For  there  is  another  Isthmus  of  like 
Straigbtness,    of  the   same    Name,    and  of  equal    Breadth. 
On  both  Sides  two  Cities  beautify  the  Shores,  which  they 
hold  in  a  Manner  not  unlike :   Pactiae  from  Propontis,  and 
Cardia  from  the  Bay  Melane  :  this  taketh  its  Name  from  the 
Appearance  of  the  Place  :   and  both,  afterwards,  were  en- 
closed within  Lysimaehia,  three  Miles  from  the  long  Walls1. 
Cherronesus  from    Propontis  had   Tiristasis  and  Crithotes, 
also   Cissa,  upon  the  River  ^Egos  :  now  it  hath  from  the 
Colony  Apros  32  Miles ;  Resistos,  over  against  the  Colony 
Pariana.     And  Hellespontus,  dividing  Europe  from  Asia  by 
seven  Stadia  (as  we  have  said),  hath  four  Cities,  opposite  one 
against  another :  in  Europe,  Calippolis  and  Sestos ;  in  Asia, 
Lampsacum  and  Abydos.    Then,  is  the  Promontory  of  Cher- 
ronesus, called  Mastisia,  opposite  to  Sigeum,  in  the  crooked 
Front   whereof   is   Cynossema :   for   so   is  Hecuba  s  Tomb 
named,  the  Station  of  the  Achaei.     The  Tower  and  Shrine 
of  Proiesilaus :  and  in  the  utmost  Front  of  Cherronesus, 
which  is  called  folium,  the  Town  Elaeus.     After  it,  as  a 
Man  goeth  to  the  Bay  Melan£,  the  Port  Cselos,  Panhormus, 
and  the  above-named  Cardia.   The  third  Bay  of  Europe  is  in 
this  Manner  shut  in.     Mountains  of  Thracia  above  those 
before  rehearsed,  Edonus,  Gigemorus,  Meritus,  and  Melam- 
phyllon  ;  Rivers  falling  into  Hebrus,  Bargus,  and  Suemus. 
The  Length  of  Macedonia,  Thracia,  and  Hellespontus,  is  set 
down  before.    Some  make  it  720  Miles.    The  Breadth  is  380 
Miles.     The  Sea  ^Egeum  took  that  Name  from  a  Rock,  be- 
tween Tenedos  and  Chios,  more  truly  than  from  an  Island 
named  MX,  resembling  a  Goat,  and  therefore  so  called  of  the 
Greeks ;  which  suddenly  riseth  out  of  the  midst  of  the  Sea. 
The  People  that  sail  from  Achaia  to  Andros,  discover  it  on 
the   right   Hand,   dreadful  and   mischievous.     Part  of  the 
-^Egean  Sea  is  given  to  Myrtoum,  and  is  so  called  from  a 
little   Island  which  sheweth   itself  to  them  that  sail  from 
Gerestus  to  Macedonia,  not  far  from  Charystos  in  Euboea. 
The  Romans   comprehend   all   these  Seas  in  two    Names  : 

1  Macron-Tichos. 

VOL.  II.  C 


18  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

Macedonicum,  all  that  which  toucheth  Macedonia  and 
Thracia :  and  Grseciensum,  where  it  beateth  upon  Greece. 
For  the  Greeks  divide  the  Ionian  Sea,  into  Siculum  and 
Creticum,  from  the  Islands.  Also,  Icarius  (they  call  that), 
between  Samos  and  Mycionus.  The  other  Names  are  given 
by  Bays,  of  which  we  have  spoken.  And  thus  much,  indeed, 
of  the  Seas  and  Nations  contained  in  this  Manner  within  the 
third  Bay  of  Europe. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Islands  between  those  Lands,  among  which,  Creta,  Eubcea, 
Cyclades,  and  Sporades:  also,  of  Hellespont,  Pontus, 
Mceotis,  Dacia,  Sarmatia,  and  Scythia. 

ISLANDS  over  against  Thresprotia,  Corey ra:  12  Miles  from 
Buthrotus,  and  the  same  from  Acroceraunia,  50  Miles,  with 
a  City  of  the  same  Name,  Corcyra,  of  free  Condition  ;  also, 
the  Town  Cassiope,  and  the  Temple  of  Jupiter  Cassiopceus  : 
it  lieth  out  in  Length  97  Miles.  Homer  called  it  Scheria 
and  Phseacia :  Callimachus  also,  Drepane\  About  it  are 
some  others  :  but  verging  toward  Italy,  Thoronos  :  and  to- 
ward Leucadia,  the  two  Paxae,  five  Miles  divided  from  Cor- 
cyra. And  not  far  from  them  before  Corcyra,  Ericusa, 
Marate,  Elaphusa,  Malthace,  Trachise,  Pytionia,  Ptychia, 
Tarachie.  And  beyond  Pholachrum,  a  Promontory  of  Corcyra, 
the  Rock  into  which  it  is  feigned  that  the  Ship  of  Ulysses  was 
turned,  on  Account  of  its  Resemblance.  Before  Leucadia, 
Sybota.  But  between  Leucadia  and  Achaia  there  are  very 
many:  of  which  are  Teleboides,  the  same  as  Taphise.:  of  the 
Inhabitants  before  Leucadia,  they  are  called  Taphias ;  Oxiae 
and  Prinoessa :  and  before  jEtolia,  the  Echinades,  JEgialia, 
Cotonis,  Thyatira,  Geoaris,  Dionysia,  Cyrnus,  Chalcis, 
Pinara,  and  Mystus.  Before  them  in  the  deep  Sea,  Cepha- 
lenia  and  Zacynthus,  both  free  States :  Ithaca,  Dulichium, 
Same,  Crocylea,  and  Paxos.  Cephalenia,  formerly  called 
Meloena  is  11  Miles  off,  and  44  Miles  in  Circuit.  Sam£  was 
destroyed  by  the  Romans  :  nevertheless,  it  hath  still  three 
Towns :  between  it  and  Achaia  is  Zacynthus,  with  a  Town,  a 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  19 

stately  Island,  and  remarkably  fertile.  In  Times  past  it  was 
called  Hyrie,  and  is  22  Miles  distant  from  the  South-coast  of 
Cephalenia.  The  famous  Mountain  of  Elatus  is  there.  The 
Island  itself  is  in  Circuit  25  Miles.  Twelve  Miles  from  it  is 
Ithaca,  wherein  is  the  Mountain  Neritus.  And  in  the  whole 
it  taketh  up  the  Compass  of  25  Miles.  From  it  12  Miles  off 
is  Araxum,  a  Promontory  of  Peloponnesus.  Before  this,  in 
the  main  Sea,  Asteris  and  Prote.  Before  Zacynthus,  35 
Miles  in  the  Wind  Eusus,  are  the  Strophades,  called  by 
others,  Plotae  :  and  before  Cephalenia,  Letoia.  Before  Pylos, 
three  Sphagise ;  and  as  many  before  Messene,  called  GEriussae. 
In  the  Bay  Asinaeus,  three  Thyrides :  in  the  Laconian  Gulf, 
Teganusa,  Cothon,  Cythera,  with  the  Town  formerly  named 
Porphyris.  This  lieth  five  Miles  from  the  Promontory  of 
Malea,  doubtful  for  Ships  to  come  about  it,  by  Reason  of  the 
Straits  there.  In  the  Argolic  Sea  are  Pityusa,  Irine  and 
Ephyre  :  and  against  the  Territory  Hermonium,  Typarenus, 
Epiropia,  Colonis,  Aristera  :  over  against  Trcezenium  Ca- 
lauria,  half  a  Mile  from  Platese :  also,  Belbina,  Lacia  and 
Baucidias.  Against  Epidaurus,  Cecryphalos,  and  Pytionesos, 
six  Miles  from  the  Continent.  Next  to  it  is  .ZEgina,  of  free 
Condition,  17  Miles  off,  and  the  Navigation  of  it  is  20  Miles 
about.  The  same  is  distant  from  Pyrseeum,  the  Port  of  the 
Athenians,  12  Miles,  and  in  old  Time  it  was  usually  called 
CEnone.  Over  against  the  Promontory  Spiraeum,  lie  Eleusa, 
Dendros,  two  Craugise,  two  Caeciae,  Selachusa,  Cenchreis,  and 
Aspis.  Also,  in  the  Megarian  Bay,  there  are  four  Methu- 
rides.  But  ./Egilia  is  15  Miles  from  Cythera;  and  the  same 
is  from  Phalasarna,  a  Town  in  Greta,  25  Miles.  And  Creta 
itself,  lying  with  one  Side  to  the  South,  and  the  other  to  the 
North,  stretcheth  forth  in  Length  East  and  West ;  famous 
and  noble  for  100  Cities.  Dosiades  saith  it  took  that  Name 
from  the  Nymph  Creta,  Daughter  of  Hesperis :  but  according 
to  Anaximander,  from  a  King  of  the  Curetes.  Philistides, 
Mallotes,  Crates,  have  thought  it  was  called  first  ^Eria,  and 
afterwards  Curetis,  and  some  have  thought  it  was  named 
Macaros,  on  Account  of  the  excellent  Temperature  of  the 
Air.  In  Breadth  it  exceedeth  in  no  Place  50  Miles,  and  in 


20  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

the  middle  Part  it  is  broadest :  in  Length  it  is  full  270 
Miles :  in  Circuit,  589  Miles  :  and  bending  itself  into  the 
Cretic  Sea,  so  called  from  it,  where  it  stretcheth  out  furthest 
Eastward,  it  putteth  forth  the  Promontory  Sarnmonium, 
opposite  Rhodos  ;  and  Westward,  Criu-Metopon,  toward 
Cyrense.  The  principal  Towns  are  Phalasarnae,  Elaea,  Cysa- 
mum,  Pergamum,  Cydon,  Minoum,  Apteron,  Pantoma- 
trium,  Amphimalla,  Rhythymna,  Panhormum,  Cyteurn, 
Apollonia,  Matium,  Heraclea,  Miletos,  Ampelos,  Hiera- 
pytna,  Lebena,  Hierapolis.  And  in  the  midland  Parts,  Cor- 
tyna,  Phaestum.  Gnossus,  Potyrrhenium,  Myrina,  Lycastus, 
Rhamnus,  Lyctus,  Dium,  Asum,  Pyloros,  Rhytion,  Clatos, 
Pharae.  Holopyxos,  Lasos1,  Eleuthernse,  Therapne,  Mara- 
thusa,  Mytinos.  And  other  Towns  to  about  the  Number  of 
60  stand  yet  upon  Record.  The  Mountains  :  Cadiscus, 
Idaeus,  Dictaeus,  and  Morycus.  The  Isle  itself,  from  the 
Promontory  in  it  called  Criu-Metopon,  as  Agrippa  reporteth, 
is  distant  from  Phycus,  a  Promontory  of  the  Cyrense,  225 
Miles.  Likewise  to  Capescum  from  Malea  in  Peloponnesus, 
it  is  80  Miles.  From  the  Island  Carpathus,  from  the  Pro- 
montory Sammonia,  in  the  Favonian  Wind,  60  Miles.  This 
Island  lieth  between  it  and  Rhodos.  The  Rest  about  it  are 
these :  before  Peloponnesus  two  Coricae,  and  as  many  Mylae : 
and  on  the  North  Side,  with  Creta  on  the  right  Hand,  there 
appeareth  Leuce  over  against  Cydonia,  with  the  two  Budorae; 
against  Matium,  Cia:  against  the  Promontory  Itanum  Onisa 
and  Leuce  :  against  Hierapytna,  Chrysa,  and  Caudos.  In 
the  same  Tract  are  Ophiussa,  Butoa,  and  Rhamnus  :  and 
doubling  Criu-Metopon,  the  Isles  called  Musagores.  Before 
the  Promontory  Sammonium,  Phocse,  Platiae,  Sirnides,  Nau- 
lochos,  Armedon,  and  Zephyre.  But  in  Hellas,  yet  still  in 
.ZEgeum,  Lichades,  Scarphia,  Maresa,  Phocaria,  and  very 
many  more  over  against  Attica ;  but  without  Towns,  and 
therefore  obscure  :  but  against  Eleusina,  the  noble  Salamis, 

1  Dr.  Bloomfield  ("  Recens.  Synop."  in  loco}  thinks  this  place  was  the 
Lasea  of  Acts  xxvii.  8.  Pliny  makes  it  an  inland  town,  but  by  inland 
towns  he  only  means  such  as  were  not  ports ;  and  that  Lasea  was  not  a 
port  is  clear,  the  Fair  Havens  being  its  port. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  2J 

and  before  it  Psytalia:  and  from  Sunium,  Helen£,  five  Miles 
off:  and  Ceos,  from  thence  as  many ;  which  our  Countrymen 
have  named  Caea  ;  but  the  Greeks  Hydrussa  :  cut  off  from 
Euboea.  In  Times  past  it  was  500  Stadia  long :  but  soon 
after,  almost  four  Parts,  which  verged  towards  Boaotia,  were 
devoured  by  the  same  Sea  :  and  now  the  Towns  remaining 
are  Julis  and  Cartheea.  For  Coressus  and  Peecessa  are 
perished.  From  hence,  as  Varro  saith,  came  the  more  deli- 
cate Dress  that  Women  use.  Euboea  itself  hath  been  torn 
from  Boeotia,  being  divided  with  so  little  a  Euripus,  that  a 
Bridge  joineth  the  one  to  the  other :  it  is  well  marked  by 
Reason  of  two  Promontories  in  the  South  Side,  which  are, 
Genestum,  bending  toward  Attica  ;  and  Caphareus  to  Helles- 
pontus  :  and  upon  the  North  Side,  Ceeneus.  In  no  Part  doth 
it  extend  broader  than  40  Miles ;  and  no  where  doth  it  con- 
tract beyond  20.  But  in  Length  from  Attica,  as  far  as  Thes- 
salia,  it  lieth  along  Boeotia  for  150  Miles;  and  contained!  in 
Circuit  365.  From  Hellespont,  on  the  Part  of  Caphareus,  it 
is  225  Miles.  In  Times  past  it  was  illustrious  for  these 
Cities:  Pyrrha,  Porthmos,  Nesos,  Cerinthus,  Oreum,  Dium, 
^Edepsum,  Ocha,  CEchalia,  now  Calcis,  over  against  which 
standeth  Aulis  on  the  Continent  :  but  now  noble  for  Geres- 
turn,  Eretria,  Carystus,  Oritanum,  Artemisium,  the  Fountain 
Arethusa,  the  River  Lelantum,  the  hot  Waters  called  Hel- 
lopige ;  but  yet  more  known  for  the  Marble  of  Carystus. 
In  former  Time  it  was  called  commonly  Chalcodontis  or 
Macris,  as  Dionysius  and  Ephorus  say  ;  but  Macra,  ac- 
cording to  Aristides :  and  according  to  Callidemus,  Chalcis, 
from  the  Brass  there  first  found:  and  as  Mencecmus  saith, 
Abantias  :  and  Asopis,  as  the  Poets  commonly  name  it.  Be- 
yond, in  the  Myrtoom  Sea,  are  many  Isles,  but  those  prin- 
cipally famous  are  Glauconnesus  and  jEgilia.  And  from  the 
Promontory  Gerestuui,  about  Delos,  some  lying  in  a  Circle 
together,  whence  they  took  their  Name  Cyclades.  The  first 
of  them,  Andrus,  with  a  Town,  is  from  Gerestum,  10  Miles  ; 
and  from  Ceum,  39.  Myrsilius  saith  it  was  called  Cauros, 
and  afterwards  Antandros.  Callimachus  nameth  it  Lasia, 
others  Nonagria,  Hydrussa,  and  Epagris.  It  lieth  in  Com- 
pass 93  Miles.  A  Mile  from  the  same  Andros,  and  15  from 


22  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

Delos,  lieth  Tenos,  with  a  Town  stretched  out  15  Miles  in 
Length  :  which,  for  the  Plenty  of  Water,  Aristotle  saith,  was 
called  Hydrussa,  but  others  name  it  Ophiussa.  The  Rest  are 
these:  Myconos,  with  the  Mountain  Dimastos,  15  Miles 
from  Delos.  Scyros  Syphnus,  formerly  named  Meropia  and 
Acis,  in  Circuit  28  Miles  :  Seriphus,  12  Miles,  Praepesinthus, 
Cythnus.  And  Delos  itself,  of  all  others  the  most  illustrious, 
the  midmost  of  the  Cyclades,  celebrated  for  the  Temple  of 
Apollo,  and  for  Merchandise;  which,  having  a  long  Time 
floated  up  and  down  (as  it  is  reported),  was  the  only  Island 
that  never  felt  an  Earthquake1  unto  the  Time  of  M.  Varro. 
Mutianus  hath  recorded  that  it  was  twice  shaken.  Aristotle 
giveth  a  Reason  of  the  Name  in  this  Sort,  because  it  was 
produced  and  discovered  on  a  sudden.  jEylosthenes  termeth 
it  Cynthia  :  others  Ortygia,  Asteria,  Lagia,  Chlamydia, 
Cynethus,  and  Pyrpile ;  because  in  it  Fire  was  first  found 
out.  It  is  but  five  Miles  about,  and  riseth  up  by  the  Moun- 
tain Cinthus.  Next  to  it  is  Rhene,  which  Anticlides  calleth 
Celadussa,  and  Helladius,  Artemite.  Moreover,  Syros,  which 
ancient  Writers  have  reported  to  be  in  Circuit  20  Miles, 
and  Mutianus,  160.  Oliatos,  Paros,  with  a  Town,  38  Miles 
from  Delos,  of  great  Name  for  white  Marble,  which  at 
first  they  called  Pactia,  but  afterwards  Minois.  From  it 
seven  and  a  half  Miles  is  Naxus,  18  Miles  from  Delos; 
with  a  Town,  which  they  called  Strongyle,  afterwards  Dia, 
soon  after  Dionysius,  from  its  Fertility  of  Vines  ;  and  by 
others,  Sicily  the  Less,  and  Callipolis.  It  reacheth  in  Cir- 
cuit 75  Miles,  and  is  half  as  long  again  as  Paros.  And  thus 
far,  indeed,  they  note  for  the  Cyclades:  the  Rest  that  follow, 
for  the  Sporades.  And  these  are  Helenum,  Phocussa,  Phae- 
casia,  Schinussa,  Phalegandros  ;  and  17  Miles  from  Naxos, 
Icaros :  which  gave  Name  to  the  Sea,  lying  out  as  far  in 
Length  ;  with  two  Towns,  for  the  third  is  lost :  beforetime 
it  was  called  Dolichum,  Macris,  and  Ichtyoessa.  It  is  situated 

1  Thucydides,  book  ii.,  says  :  "  There  was  also  a  little  before  the  time 
of  the  Peloponnesian  war,  an  earthquake  at  Delos,  which,  in  the  memory 
of  the  Grecians,  never  shook  before ;  and  was  interpreted  for,  and  seemed 
to  be  a  sign  of,  what  was  to  come  afterwards  to  pass." — HOBBES.  —  Wern. 
Club. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  23 

North-east,  from  Delos  50  Miles :  and  from  Samos  it  is  35 
Miles.  Between  Euboea  and  Andros  there  is  a  Strait  12 
Miles  over.  From  it  to  Gerestum  is  112^  Miles.  And  then 
no  Order  forward  can  be  kept ;  the  Rest,  therefore,  shall  be 
set  down  promiscuous!}'.  los  from  Naxos  is  24  Miles,  vene- 
rable for  the  Sepulchre  of  Homer :  it  is  in  Length  25  Miles, 
and  in  former  Time  was  called  Phaenice.  Odia,  Letandros  ; 
Gyaros,  with  a  Town,  in  Circuit  12  Miles.  It  is  distant  from 
Aneros,  62  Miles.  From  thence  to  Syrnus,  80  Miles.  Cyne- 
thussa  ;  Telos,  famous  for  costly  Ointment,  and  called  by 
Callimachus,  Agathussa.  Donysa ;  Pathmos,  in  Circuit  30 
Miles.  Corasise,  Lebinthus,  Leros,  Cynara,  Sycinus,  which 
beforetime  was  (Enoe  ;  Heratia,  the  same  as  Onus  ;  Casus, 
otherwise  Astrabe;  Cimolus,  otherwise  Echinussa  ;  Melos, 
with  a  Town,  which  Aristides  nameth  Byblis  ;  Aristotle,  Ze- 
phyria ;  Callimachus,  Himallis ;  Heraclides,  Syphnus  and 
Acytos.  And  this,  of  all  the  Islands,  is  the  roundest.  After  it 
Machia;  Hypere,  sometime  Patage,  or  after  some  Platage, 
now  Amorgos  ;  Potyaegos,  Phyle,  Thera ;  when  it  first 
appeared,  called  Calliste.  From  it  afterwards  was  Therasia 
torn  away  :  and  between  those  two  soon  after  arose  Auto- 
mate, the  same  as  Hiera  :  and  Thia,  which  in  our  Days 
appeared  new  out  of  the  Water  near  Hiera.  los  is  from 
Thera,  25  Miles.  Then  follow  Lea,  Ascania,  Anaphe,  Hip- 
puris,  Hippurissusa.  Astipalsea  of  free  Condition,  in  Com- 
pass 88  Miles  :  it  is  from  Cadiscus,  a  Promontory  of  Creta, 
125  Miles.  From  it  is  Platea,  distant  60  Miles.  And  from 
thence  Camina,  38  Miles.  Then  Azibnitha,  Lanise,  Tragia, 
Pharmacusa,  Techedia,  Chalcia ;  Calydna,  in  which  are 
the  Towns  Coos  and  Olymna.  From  which  to  Carpathus, 
which  gave  the  Name  to  the  Carpathian  Sea,  is  25  Miles  : 
and  so  to  Rhodes  with  an  African  Wind.  From  Carpathus 
to  Casos,  seven  Miles  :  from  Casos  to  Samonium,  a 
Promontory  of  Creta,  30  Miles.  Moreover,  in  the  Euboic 
Euripus,  almost  at  the  first  Entrance,  are  the  four  Islands, 
Petalise  ;  and  at  the  Outlet,  Atalante,  Cyclades,  and  Spo- 
rades :  inclosed  on  the  East  with  the  Icarian  Sea-coasts  of 
Asia;  on  the  West,  with  the  Myrtoan  Coasts  of  Attica; 


24  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  IV. 

Northward,  with  the  ^Egean  Sea ;  and  South,  with  the  Cretic 
and  Carphacian  Seas  :  and  they  lie  in  Length  200  Miles. 
The  Bay  Pagasicus  hath  before  it  Eutychia,  Cicynethus,  and 
Scyrus  abovesaid  :  but  the  Outermost  of  the  Cyclades  and 
Sporades,  Gerontia,  Scadira,  Thermeusis,  Irrhesia,  Solinnia, 
Eudemia,  Nea,  which  is  sacred  to  Minerva.  Athos  before 
it  hath  four;  Preparethus,  with  a  Town,  sometime  called 
Euonos,  nine  Miles  off:  Scyathus,  five  Miles:  and  Imbrus, 
with  a  Town,  88  Miles  off.  The  same  is  from  Mastusia  in 
Corinthos,  75  Miles.  Itself  is  in  Circuit  72  Miles.  It  is 
watered  by  the  River  Ilissus.  From  thence  to  Lemnos,  22 
Miles :  and  the  latter  from  Athos,  87.  In  Compass  it  con- 
taineth  22J  Miles.  Towns  it  hath,  Hepheestia  and  Myrina, 
into  the  Market-place  of  which  the  Mountain  Athos  casteth  a 
Shadow  at  the  Solstice.  Thassos,  a  free  State,  is  from  it  five 
Miles  :  in  Times  past,  called  JEria,  or  jEthria.  From  thence 
Abdera  in  the  Continent  is  20  Miles  :  Athos,  62 :  the  Isle 
Samothrace  as  much,  which  is  free,  and  lieth  before  Hebrus : 
from  Imbrus,  32  Miles:  from  Lemnus,  22 J  Miles:  from  the 
Borders  of  Thracia,  28  Miles :  in  Circuit  it  is  32  Miles,  and  hath 
a  Rising  of  the  Hill  Saoces  for  the  Space  of  10  Miles  :  and 
of  all  the  Rest  is  fullest  of  Harbours.  Callimachus  calleth  it 
by  the  old  Name  Dardania  :  between  Cherronesus  and 
Samothrace  is  Halomesus,  about  15  Miles  from  either  of 
them :  beyond  lieth  Gethrone,  Larnponia,  Alopeconnesus 
not  far  from  Coelos,  a  Port  of  Cherronesus :  and  some 
others  of  no  importance.  In  this  Bay  are  rehearsed  also 
the  deserted  Islands,  of  which  the  Names  only  can  be  disco- 
vered :  Desticos,  Larnos,  Cyssicos,  Carbrusa,  Celathusa, 
Scylla,  Draconon,  Arconesus,  Diethusa,  Scapos,  Capheris, 
Mesat&,  .ZEantion,  Phaterunesos,  Pateria,  Calete,  Neriphus, 
and  Polendus. 

The  fourth  of  those  great  Bays  in  Europe,  beginning 
from  Hellespont,  endeth  in  the  Mouth  of  Mceotis.  But  we 
are  briefly  to  describe  the  Form  of  the  whole  Sea,  that  the 
Parts  may  be  more  easily  known.  The  vast  Ocean  lying 
before  Asia,  and  driven  out  from  Europe  in  that  long  Coast 
of  Cherronesus,  breaketh  into  the  Land  with  a  narrow 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  25 

Passage  of  seven  Stadia  (as  hath  been  said)  dividing  Europe 
from  Asia.  The  first  Straits  they  call  Hellespontus.  Over 
this,  Xerxes,  King  of  the  Persians,  made  a  Bridge  upon 
Ships,  and  so  led  his  Array  across.  From  thence  is  extended 
a  small  Euripus  for  the  space  of  86  Miles,  to  Priapus,  a 
City  of  Asia,  where  Alexander  the  Great  passed  over.  From 
that  Place  the  Sea  groweth  wide,  and  again  gathereth  into 
a  Strait :  the  largeness  is  called  Propontis ;  the  Straits,  the 
Thracian  Bosphorus,  500  Paces  over  :  by  which  Darius,  the 
Father  of  Xerxes,  made  a  Bridge  and  transported  his  Forces. 
The  whole  Length  from  Hellespont  is  239  Miles.  From 
thence  the  vast  Sea  called  Pontus  Euxinus,  and  in  Times 
past  Axenus,  taketh  up  the  space  between  Lands  far  remote, 
and  with  a  great  winding  of  the  Shores,  bendeth  backward 
into  Horns,  and  lieth  stretched  out  from  them  on  both  Sides, 
resembling  evidently  a  Scythian  Bow.  In  the  midst  of  this 
bending,  it  joineth  close  to  the  Mouth  of  the  Lake  Mreotis. 
That  Mouth  is  called  Cimmerius  Bosphorus,  two  Miles  and 
a  half  Broad.  But  between  the  two  Bosphori,  Thracius  and 
Cimmerius,  there  is  a  direct  Course,  as  Polybius  saith,  of 
500  Miles.  But  the  Circuit  of  all  this  Sea,  as  Varro  and 
almost  all  the  old  Writers  witness,  is  2150  Miles.  Nepos 
Cornelius  addeth  thereto  350  Miles.  Artemidorus  maketh 
it  2919  Miles:  Agrippa,  2360  Miles:  Mutianus,  2865 
Miles.  In  like  sort,  some  have  determined  the  Measure 
to  the  Side  of  Europe  to  be  4078J  Miles:  others,  11,072 
Miles.  M.  Varro  taketh  his  Measure  in  this  manner :  from 
the  Mouth  of  Pontus  to  Apollonia,  188J  Miles:  to  Calatis, 
as  much  :  to  the  Mouth  of  Ister,  125  :  to  Borysthenes,  250  : 
to  Cherroriesus,  a  Town  of  the  Heracleates,  375  Miles  :  to 
Panticapaeus,  which  some  call  Bosphorus,  the  utmost  Coast 
of  Europe,  222 1  Miles  :  the  sum  of  which  makes  1336J  Miles. 
Agrippa  measureth,  from  Bizantium  to  the  River  Ister,  560 
Miles :  to  Panticapseurn,  630  :  from  thence  the  very  Lake 
Mceotis,  receiving  the  River  Tanais  which  runneth  out  of 
the  Riphaean  Mountains,  is  supposed  to  be  in  Compass  1306 
Miles ;  being  the  furthest  Bound  between  Europe  and  Asia. 
Others  make  11,025  Miles.  But  it  is  evident,  that  from  its 


26  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

Mouth  to  the  Mouth  of  Tanais,  by  a  straight  Course,  it  is  375 
Miles.  The  Inhabitants  of  that  Bay  have  been  named  in 
the  mention  of  Thracia,  as  far  as  to  Istropolis.  From  thence 
the  Mouths  of  Ister.  This  River  riseth  among  the  Hills  of 
Abnoba,  a  Mountain  of  Germany,  over  against  Rauricum,  a 
Town  in  Gallia,  and  passing  many  Miles  beyond  the  Alps,  and 
through  innumerable  Nations,  under  the  Name  of  Danubius, 
with  a  mighty  increase  of  Waters,  and  whence  he  first  be- 
ginneth  to  wash  Illyricum  taking  the  Name  of  Ister,  after 
he  hath  received  60  Rivers,  and  almost  the  one-half  of  them 
navigable,  rolleth  into  Pontus  with  six  vast  Streams.  The 
first  Mouth  of  it  is  Peuces :  soon  after,  the  Island  Peuce 
itself,  from  which  the  next  Channel  took  its  name,  and  is 
swallowed  up  in  a  great  Marsh  of  19  Miles.  Out  of  the 
same  Channel,  and  above  Astropolis,  a  Lake  is  produced  of 
63  Miles'  compass ;  which  they  call  Halmyris.  The  second 
Mouth  is  called  Naracustoma :  the  third,  Calostoma,  near 
the  Island  Sarmatica :  the  fourth,  Pseudostoma,  and  the 
Island  Conopon  Diabasis.  After  that,  Boreostoma,  and 
Spireostoma.  Each  of  these  is  so  great,  that  by  Report 
the  Sea,  for  40  Miles'  length,  is  overmatched  with  the 
same,  and  the  fresh  Water  may  so  far  be  tasted.  From  it, 
into  the  inland  Parts,  the  People  are  all  Scythians  :  but 
various  other  Nations  inhabit  close  on  the  Coasts  :  in  some 
Places  the  Getae,  called  by  the  Romans  Daci :  in  others  the 
Sarmatse,  by  the  Greeks  Sauromatse ;  and  among  them,  the 
Hamaxobii  or  Aorsi.  Elsewhere  the  degenerate  Scythians, 
who  are  sprung  from  Servants,  or  the  Troglodites  :  presently, 
the  Alani  and  Rhoxalani.  But  the  higher  Parts  between  Da- 
nubius and  the  Forest  Hercynius,  as  far  as  to  the  Panrionian 
wintering  Places  of  Carnuntum,  and  the  Confines  there  of 
the  Germans,  the  Fields  and  Plains  of  Jazyge,  the  Sar- 
matians  possess.  But  the  Mountains  and  Forests,  the  Daci, 
who  were  expelled  by  them,  inhabit,  as  far  as  to  the  River 
Parhyssus  from  Morus  ;  or  this  is  Duria,  dividing  them 
from  the  Suevi  and  the  Kingdom  of  Vanni.  The  Parts 
against  these  the  Bastarnae  hold ;  and  from  thence  other 
Germani.  Agrippa  hath  set  down  that  whole  Tract,  from 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  27 

the  Ister  to  the  Ocean,  as  amounting  to  2000  Miles,  and 
400  less  in  Breadth,  from  the  Deserts  of  Sarmatia  to  the 
River  Vistula  :  the  Name  of  Scythae  everywhere  continually 
runneth  into  Sarmatae  and  Germani.  Neither  hath  that  old 
denomination  remained  in  any  others  but  those,  who,  as  I 
have  said,  live  the  furthest  off  of  these  Nations,  almost 
unknown  to  all  other  Men.  But  the  Towns  next  to  the 
Ister  are  Cremniscos  and  ^Epolium  :  the  Mountains  Ma- 
crocrennii :  the  noble  River  Tyra,  giving  Name  to  the  Town, 
whereas  before  time  it  was  called  Ophiusa.  Within  the  same 
is  a  spacious  Island,  inhabited  by  the  Tyragetae.  It  is  from 
Pseudostomum,  a  Mouth  of  the  Ister,  130  Miles.  Soon 
after  are  the  Axiacae,  named  after  the  River :  beyond  whom 
are  the  Crobyzi  :  the  River  Rhode  :  the  Bay  Sagaricus,  and 
the  Port  Ordesus.  And,  120  Miles  from  Tyra,  is  the  River 
Borysthenes,  and  a  Lake  and  Nation  of  that  Name : 
and  a  Town  15  Miles  within  from  the  Sea,  called  by  the 
ancient  Names  Olbropolis  and  Miletopolis.  Again,  on  the 
Shore,  the  Harbour  of  the  Achaeans  :  the  Island  of  Achilles, 
famous  for  the  Tomb  of  that  Man.  And  from  it  135  Miles, 
is  a  Peninsula,  lying  out  across  in  the  Form  of  a  Sword, 
and  called  Dromos  Achilleos,  upon  occasion  of  his  Exercise 
there  :  the  Length  of  which  Agrippa  hath  declared  to  be  80 
Miles.  All  that  Tract,  the  Taurisci,  Scythae,  and  Sarmatae 
inhabit.  Then  the  woody  Region  gave  the  name  to  the  Sea 
Hylaeum,  by  which  it  is  encircled.  The  Inhabitants  are  called 
Enaecadloae.  Beyond  is  the  River  Panticapes,  which  divideth 
the  Nomades  and  Georgi :  and  soon  after,  Acesinus.  Some 
say  that  Panticape,  with  Borysthenes,  run  together  beneath 
Olbia ;  but  the  more  exact  name  Hypanis  :  so  much  they 
erred  who  have  described  it  in  a  part  of  Asia.  The  Sea 
retires  with  a  very  great  Ebb,  until  it  is  distant  from  Moeotis 
with  an  interval  of  five  Miles,  compassing  a  vast  Space,  and 
many  Nations.  There  is  a  Bay  called  Corcinites,  and  a 
River  Pacyris.  Towns,  Naubarum  and  Carcine.  Behind 
is  the  Lake  Buges,  let  out  into  the  Sea  by  a  foss.  And 
(Buges)  itself  is  disjoined  from  Coretus,  a  Bay  of  the  Lake 
Moeotis,  by  a  rocky  Back.  It  receiveth  the  Rivers  Buges, 


28  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

Gerrhus,  Hypanis,  coming  from  different  quarters  :  for 
Gerrhus  parteth  the  Basilides  and  Nomades.  Hypanis 
floweth  through  the  Nomades  and  the  Hyleans  into  Buges, 
by  a  Channel  made  by  Man's  Hand,  but  in  his  natural 
Channel  into  Coretus.  The  Region  of  Scythia  is  named 
Sendica.  But  in  Carcinites,  Taurica  beginneth  :  which  in 
Times  past  was  environed  with  the  Sea,  where  now  there 
lie  Fields  :  afterwards  it  mounteth  up  with  very  great  Hills. 
Thirty  People  are  in  it :  and  of  them  24  are  within  Land. 
Six  Towns,  Orgocyni,  Caraseni,  Assyrani,  Tractari,  Archi- 
lachitse,  and  Caliordi.  The  Crest  of  the  Hill  the  Scytotauri 
hold.  They  are  shut  in  Westward  by  Cherronesus  ;  East- 
ward by  the  Scythian  Satarchi.  In  the  Coast  from  Car- 
cinites are  these  Towns  :  Taphrae,  in  the  very  Straits  of  the 
Peninsula  :  then,  Heraclea,  Cherronesus,  endowed  with 
Liberty  by  the  Romans.  Formerly  it  was  called  Megarice, 
and  is  the  most  Elegant  in  all  that  Tract,  as  retaining  the 
Manners  of  the  Greeks  ;  and  it  is  encompassed  with  a  Wall 
of  five  Miles'  extent.  Then  the  Promontory  Parthenium. 
A  City  of  the  Tauri,  Placia.  The  Harbour  Symbolon :  the 
Promontory  Criu-Metopon,  over  against  Charambes,  a  Pro- 
montory of  Asia,  running  through  the  middle  of  Euxinus 
for  the  space  of  170  Miles  :  which  is  the  cause  especially 
that  maketh  the  Form  abovesaid  of  a  Scythian  Bow.  Near 
to  it  are  many  Harbours  and  Lakes  of  the  Tauri.  The 
Town  Theodosia,  distant  from  Criu-Metopon  122  Miles,  and 
from  Cherronesus  165  Miles.  Beyond,  there  have  been 
the  Towns  Cyte,  Zephyrium,  Acre,  Nymphseum,  and  Dia. 
And  by  far  the  strongest  of  them  all  remaineth  still  in  the 
very  entrance  of  Bosphorus,  namely,  Panticapaeum  of  the 
Milesians,  from  Theodosia  1035  Miles  :  but  from  Cim- 
merum,  a  Town  situated  beyond  the  Strait,  a  Mile  and  a  half, 
as  we  have  said.  And  this  is  all  the  Breadth  there  that 
divideth  Asia  from  Europe :  and  even  that  is  for  the  most 
part  passable  on  Foot,  when  the  Strait  is  frozen  over.  The 
Breadth  of  Bosphorus  Cimmerius  is  12  Miles.  It  hath  the 
Towns  Hermisium,  Myrmecium  ;  and  within  it,  the  Island 
Alopece.  But  through  Mceotis,  from  the  furthest  part  of 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  29 

the  Isthmus,  which  Place  is  called  Tapbrse,  to  the  Mouth  of 
Bosphorus,  it  containeth  260  Miles.  From  Taphrae,  the 
Continent  within  is  inhabited  by  the  Anchetae,  among  whom 
the  Hypanis  springeth  :  and  Neuri,  where  Borysthenes  hath 
his  Head ;  also,  the  Geloni,  Thussagetae,  Budmi,  Basilidae, 
and  the  Agathyrsi,  with  blue  Hair  on  their  Heads.  Above 
them,  the  Nomades  ;  and  then  the  Anthropophagi.  From 
Buges,  above  Moeotis,  the  Sauromates  and  Essedones  dwell. 
But  along  the  Borders,  as  far  as  Tanais,  the  Mceotae,  from 
whom  the  Lake  was  so  called  ;  and  the  last  behind  them, 
the  Arimaspi.  Within  a  little  are  the  Riphaean  Mountains, 
and  a  Country  called  Pterophoros,  for  the  resemblance  of 
Wings  (Feathers1)  occasioned  by  the  continual  fall  of 
Snow :  a  Part  of  the  World  condemned  by  the  nature  of 
Things,  and  immersed  in  thick  Darkness,  having  no  shelter- 
ing Places  but  the  work  of  Cold,  the  produce  of  the  freezing 
North  Wind.  Behind  those  Mountains,  and  beyond  the 
North  Pole,  there  is  a  happy  Nation  (if  we  may  believe  it) 
whom  they  call  Hyperborei2,  who  live  exceeding  long,  and 

1  "  A  race  of  men  there  are,  as  fame  has  told, 
Who  shivering  suffer  Hyperborean  cold, 
Till  nine  times  bathing  in  Minerva's  lake 
Soft  feathers,  to  defend  their  naked  sides,  they  take." 

DBTDEN'S  Ovid.  Metam.  lib.  xv. 

Herodotus,  Melpo.  31,  says:  "  In  respect  to  the  feathers  wherewith 
the  Scythians  affirm  the  air  to  be  filled,  my  opinion  is  this :  above  that 
country  snow  falls  continually ;  now  any  one  that  has  seen  snow  falling 
thick,  and  close  to  himself,  must  understand  what  I  say.  The  snow  does,  in 
fact,  bear  great  resemblance  to  feathers.  I  think,  therefore,  that  the 
Scythians  and  the  surrounding  nations  compare  the  snow  to  feathers. — 
LAURENT. — Wern.  Club. 

2  The  ancients  denominated  those  people  and  places  Hyperborean 
which  were  to  the  northward  of  the  Scythians.  They  had,  indeed,  but 
very  little  acquaintance  with  these  regions ;  and  all  they  tell  us  of  them 
is  very  precarious,  while  much  of  it  is  false.  Herodotus,  as  well  as  Pliny, 
doubts  whether  or  not  there  were  any  such  nations ;  while  Strabo  pro- 
fesses to  believe  that  they  really  existed.  See  a  very  amusing  account  of 
these  fabulous  Hyperboreans  in  Herodotus,  Melpo.  32-36.  From  whence 
much  that  Pliny  says  was  borrowed. —  Wern.  Club. 


30  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

are  celebrated  for  fabulous  Wonders.  There  are  believed  to 
be  the  Poles  of  the  World,  and  the  very  Ends  of  the  revo- 
lution of  the  Heavens,  having  for  six  Months  together  one 
entire  Day  ;  and  Night  as  long,  when  the  Sun  is  turned  from 
them :  but  their  Day  is  not  from  the  Spring  Equinox  (as 
the  Ignorant  say)  to  the  Autumn  :  for  once  in  the  Year,  at 
the  Solstice,  the  Sun  riseth  with  them :  and  once  likewise 
it  setteth  in  Mid-winter.  The  Region  is  open  to  the  Sun, 
of  a  happy  Temperature,  void  of  all  hurtful  impulse  of  Air. 
The  Woods  are  their  Habitations,  and  the  Groves  where 
they  worship  the  Gods  Man  by  Man,  and  in  Companies : 
Discord  and  all  Disease  are  unknown  ;  and  they  never  die, 
but  when  they  are  satiated  with  Life :  when  the  aged  Men, 
having  feasted  and  anointed  their  bodies,  leap  from  a  certain 
Rock  into  the  Sea.  This  kind  of  Sepulture  is  the  most  happy. 
Some  Writers  have  placed  them  in  the  first  Part  of  the  Sea- 
coast  in  Asia,  and  not  in  Europe;  because  some  are  there  re- 
sembling them  in  manners  and  situation,  named  Atocori ; 
others  have  set  them  in  the  midst,  between  both  Suns ;  that 
is,  the  Setting  of  it  with  the  Antipodes,  and  the  Rising  of  it 
with  us :  which  cannot  possibly  be,  so  vast  a  Sea  lying 
between.  Those  that  have  placed  them  nowhere  but  in  the 
six  Months'  daylight,  have  written  of  them,  that  they  sow  in 
the  Morning,  reap  at  Noon,  at  Sunset  gather  the  Fruits  from 
the  Trees,  and  by  Night  lie  within  Caves.  Neither  may  we 
make  doubt  of  that  Nation,  since  so  many  Authors  testify, 
that  they  were  accustomed  to  send  their  first  Fruits  to 
Delos,  to  Apollo,  whom  they  chiefly  worship.  They  were 
Virgins  that  conveyed  these  Fruits  ;  who  for  certain  Years 
were  venerated  and  entertained  by  all  Nations,  until,  upon 
breach  of  Faith,  they  appointed  to  bestow  those  sacred  ob- 
lations in  the  next  Borders  of  their  Neighbours  :  and  these 
again  to  convey  them  to  those  that  bordered  upon  them,  and 
so  on  as  far  as  to  Delos :  and,  soon  after,  this  custom  wore 
out.  The  Length  of  Sarmatia,  Scythia,  and  Taurica,  and  of  all 
that  Tract  from  the  River  Borysthenes,  is  980  Miles,  the 
Breadth  717,  as  M.  Agrippa  hath  delivered  it.  But  I  judge 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  31 

that  the  Measure  of  this  Part  of  the  Earth  is  uncertain. 
But  after  the  appointed  Order,  the  remainder  of  this  Gulf 
may  be  spoken  of;  and  we  have  already  shewn  the  Seas  of  it. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
The  Islands  of  Pontus. 

HELLESPONT  hath  no  Islands  to  be  spoken  of  in  Europe. 
In  Pontus  are  two,  a  Mile  and  a  half  from  Europe,  and  14 
Miles  from  the  Mouth :  Cyaneae,  of  others  called  Symple- 
gades  :  and  by  Report  of  Fables,  they  ran  one  into  another : 
because  they  being  severed  by  a  small  Space,  to  them  that 
enter  the  Sea  full  upon  them  they  seemed  a  Pair:  but  if 
the  Eye  be  a  little  turned  aside,  they  made  a  Show  as  if  they 
met  together.  On  this  Side  the  Ister  there  is  one,  pertaining 
to  the  Apolloniates,  80  Miles  from  Bosphorus  Thracius  :  out 
of  which  M.  Lucullus  brought  Apollo  Capitolinus1.  What 
were  within  the  Mouths  of  the  Ister  we  have  declared  al- 
ready. Before  Borysthenes  is  the  above-named  Achillea,  and 
the  same  is  called  Leuce  and  Macaron.  This  the  modern 
demonstration  places  140  miles  from  Borysthenes :  from 
Tyra,  120 :  from  the  Island  Pence,  50.  It  is  in  Compass 
about  ten  Miles.  The  rest  are  in  the  Bay  Carcinites :  Ce- 
phalonnesos,  Rhosphodusa,  and  Macra.  I  cannot  pass  by 
the  Opinion  of  many  Writers,  before  we  depart  from  Pontus, 
who  have  thought  that  all  the  inland  Seas  arise  from  that 
head,  and  not  from  the  Straits  of  Gades ;  and  they  lay  for 
their  argument,  not  without  some  probability,  because  out 
of  Pontus  the  Tide  always  floweth,  and  never  returneth. 

But  now  we  are  to  depart  thence,  that  other  Parts  of 

1  Apollonia  was  a  colony  of  the  Milesians  in  Thrace,  the  greatest 
part  of  whose  chief  town  was  situated  in  a  small  island  in  the  Euxine, 
and  contained  a  temple  dedicated  to  Apollo.  The  colossal  statue  of  the 
god  which  Lucullus  is  said  to  have  removed  from  thence,  and  placed  in 
the  Capitol  at  Rome,  is  described  by  Pliny  (lib.  xxxiv.  c.  7),  as  being  30 
cubits  high,  and  costing  500  talents.  After  its  removal,  it  acquired  the 
name  of  Apollo  Capitolinus. — (Note.  HOLLAND'S  Translation  says  150 
talents  only.) — Wem.  Club. 


32  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

Europe  may  be  spoken  of;  and  passing  the  Riphaean  Moun- 
tains, we  must  proceed  along  the  Shore  of  the  Northern 
Ocean  to  the  left,  until  we  come  to  Gades.  In  which 
Tract  there  are  reported  to  be  very  many  Islands  without 
Names,  of  which,  by  the  Report  of  Tim&us,  there  is  one  be- 
fore Scythia  called  Bannomanna,  distant  from  Scythia  one 
Day's  Sailing,  into  which,  in  the  Time  of  Spring,  Amber  is 
cast  up  by  the  Waves.  The  other  Coasts  are  of  uncertain 
Report.  The  North  Ocean  from  the  River  Paropamisus, 
where  it  washeth  Scythia,  Hecatceus  nameth  Amalchium, 
which  Word,  in  the  language  of  that  Nation,  signifieth 
Frozen.  Philemon  writeth,  that  the  Cimbrians  call  it  Mori- 
marusa,  that  is  Mortuum  Mare  [the  Dead  Sea],  even  as  far 
as  to  the  Promontory  Rubeae:  then  beyond,  Cronium. 
Xenophon  Lampsacenus  saith,  That  in  three  Days'  sailing 
from  the  Scythian  Coast  there  is  the  Island  Baltia,  of  ex- 
ceeding magnitude.  The  same  doth  Pythias  name  Basilia. 
There  are  reported  the  Isles  Oonae,  wherein  the  Inhabitants 
live  on  Birds'  Eggs  and  Oats.  Others  also,  wherein  men 
are  born  with  the  Feet  of  Horses,  and  called  Hippopodes. 
Others  of  the  Panoti1,  who,  being  otherwise  naked,  have 
immensely  great  Ears  that  cover  their  whole  Bodies.  Then 
begins  a  clearer  Report  to  open  from  the  Nation  of  the 
Ingevoni,  the  first  of  the  Germans  in  those  Parts.  There  is 
the  exceeding  great  Mountain  Sevo,  not  inferior  to  the  high 
Crags  of  Riphaeus,  which  maketh  a  very  large  Gulf,  as  far 
as  to  the  Cimbrians'  Promontory,  called  Codanus,  and  it  is 
full  of  Islands,  of  which  the  most  celebrated  is  Scandinavia, 
the  Magnitude  whereof  is  not  yet  discovered.  A  Part 
only  thereof,  as  much  as  is  known,  the  Nation  of  Helle- 
viones  inhabiteth,  in  500  Villages:  and  they  call  it  a  second 
Worldj  and  as  it  is  thought  Enigia  is  not  less.  Some  say, 
that  these  Parts,  as  far  as  to  the  River  Vistula,  are  in- 
habited by  the  Sarmati,  Veneti,  Scyri,  and  Hirri  :  also  that 

1  Some  editions  read  Fanesii,  but  Panotii  seems  the  more  correct ;  for 
as  the  Oonae  were  so  called  in  consequence  of  their  living  on  eggs,  and  the 
Hippopodes  because  they  had  horses'  feet,  so  the  Panoti  derived  their 
name  from  having  immensely  great  ears  that  covered  their  whole  bodies. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  33 

the  Gulf  of  the  Sea  is  called  Clylipenus :  and  that  in  the 
Mouth  of  it  is  the  Island  Latris.  Also  that  not  far  from  it, 
there  is  another  Bay  bounding  upon  the  Cirnbri.  The  Pro- 
montory of  the  Cimbriaris  shooting  far  into  the  Seas;  maketh 
a  Peninsula,  which  is  called  Cartris.  Thence  three-and- 
twenty  Islands  are  known  by  the  Roman  Armies.  The 
noblest  of  them  are  Burchana,  called  by  our  countrymen 
Fabaria,  from  the  Plenty  of  Vegetables  growing  there  un- 
sown. Likewise  Glessaria,  so  called  by  the  Soldiers  from 
Amber ;  but  by  the  Barbarians,  Austrania  ;  and  besides  them 
Actania.  Along  this  Sea,  until  you  come  to  the  River  Scaldis, 
the  German  Nations  inhabit :  but  the  Measure  of  that  Tract 
can  scarcely  be  declared,  such  very  great  Discord  there 
is  among  Writers.  The  Greeks  and  some  of  our  own  Writers 
have  described  the  Coast  of  Germany  to  be  2500  Miles. 
Agrippa  again,  joining  with  it  Rhaetia  and  Noricum,  saith, 
that  it  is  in  Length  686  miles,  and  in  Breadth  268.  And 
of  Rhaetia  alone,  the  Breadth  is  almost  greater,  at  least  at 
the  time  that  it  was  subdued,  and  the  People  departed  out 
of  Germany  :  for  Germany  was  discovered  many  years  after, 
and  is  not  all,  even  now.  But  if  it  be  permitted  to  guess,  there 
will  not  be  much  wanting  in  the  Coasts,  from  the  opinion 
of  the  Greeks ;  nor  in  the  Length  as  set  down  by  Agrippa. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
Germania. 

OF  Germans,  there  are  five  Kinds  ;  the  Vindili,  a  part  of 
whom  are  the  Burgundiones,  Varini,  Carini,  and  Gurtones. 
A  second  kind,  the  Ingaevones,  part  of  whom  are  the  Cimbri, 
Teutoni,  and  the  Nations  of  the  Cauchi.  The  Istaevones  are 
the  nearest  to  the  Rhine  (Rhenus),  and  part  of  them  are  the 
Cimbri.  Then  the  Midland  Hermiones,  among  whom  are 
the  Suevi,  Hermunduri,  Chatti,  and  Cherusci.  The  fifth 
part  are  the  Peucini,  and  Basternae,  bordering  upon  the 
abovenamed  Dacae.  Notable  Rivers  that  run  into  the 
Ocean;  Guttalus,  Vistillus  or  Vistula,  Albis,  Visurgis,  Ami- 
VOL.  IT.  D 


34  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

sius,  Rhenus,  Mosa.     And  within,  the  Hircynium  Hill,1  infe- 
rior to  none  in  estimation,  is  stretched  forward. 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Islands  in  the  Gallic  Ocean. 

IN  the  Rhine  itself,  for  almost  an  hundred  Miles  in 
Length,  is  the  most  noble  Island  of  the  Batavi,  Cannenu- 
fates ;  and  others  of  the  Frisii,  Cauchi,  Frisiaboni,  Sturii, 
and  Marsatii,  which  are  spread  between  Helius  and  Flevus. 
For  so  are  the  Mouths  called,  into  which  Rhenus,  as  it  gushes, 
scatters  itself:  from  the  North  into  Lakes;  from  the  West 
into  the  River  Mosa.  But  in  the  middle  Mouth  between 
these,  he  keepeth  a  small  Channel,  of  his  own  name. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Britannia  and  Hybernia — England  and  Ireland.* 

OVER  against  this  Tract  lieth  the  Island  Britannia,  be- 
tween the  North  and  West ;  renowned  in  Greek  and  Roman 

1  The  Hercynian  Hill  (jugum)  is  elsewhere  called  the  Hercynian 
Forest  (saltus). 

Although  Pliny  had  served  with  the  army  in  Germany,  and  had 
written  a  history  of  the  war  in  which  he  was  engaged,  yet  he  makes  no 
mention,  in  this  work,  of  any  city  or  region  of  that  country ;  a  proof 
that  the  celebrity  of  a  place  as  estimated  at  Rome,  was  the  measure  of  its 
importance  with  him. —  Wern.  Club. 

a  Different  suggestions  have  been  offered  in  explanation  of  the  word 
"  Britannia."  By  some  it  has  been  supposed  to  be  derived  from  the  British 
word  "  Brithy" — painted  ;  from  a  practice  by  the  inhabitants  of  staining 
their  skin  of  a  blue  colour  with  woad,  to  render  themselves  formidable  to 
their  enemies.  But  a  name  thence  derived  would  only  be  applied  by 
strangers,  who  would  not  have  selected  a  word  foreign  to  their  own  lan- 
guage to  express  the  custom.  It  is  more  likely,  therefore,  to  have  been 
derived  from  a  foreign  source ;  and  it  is  Bochart's  opinion  that  it  was 
first  applied  by  the  Phrenicians,  in  whose  language  the  word  "  Baratanac" 
signifies  the  land  of  tin  :  the  chief  produce  which  tempted  these  adven- 
turous merchants  to  visit  this  country,  and  make  settlements  in  its  most 
western  extremity,  at  a  very  remote  period.  The  word  became  after- 
wards translated  into  the  Greek  name  "  Cassiterides,"  which  was  applied  by 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  35 

Records.  It  is  opposite  to  Germania,  Gallia,  and  Hispania, 
the  greatest  Parts  by  far  of  Europe,  and  no  small  Sea  lying  be- 
tween. Albion  was  its  Name,  when  all  the  Islands  were  called 
Britanniae,  of  which  by  and  by  we  will  speak.  This  (Island) 
is  from  Gessoriacum,  a  Coast  of  the  Nation  of  the  Morini, 
50  Miles  by  the  nearest  Passage.  In  Circuit,  as  M.  Pytheas 
and  Isidorus  report,  it  containeth  3825  Miles.  And  now  for 
about  30  Years  the  Roman  Armies  growing  into  further 
knowledge,  yet  have  not  penetrated  beyond  the  neighbour- 

the  latter  people,  more  particularly  to  the  Scilly  Islands  and  the  County 
of  Cornwall.  Albion  was  more  properly  the  Roman  name  of  the  coun- 
try ;  and  was  probably  derived  from  its  white  appearance,  as  seen  on  their 
approach  to  it  from  Gaul.  This  latter  name  was  retained  in  official  docu- 
ments, even  under  the  Saxon  dominion,  as  appears  from  a  charter  of 
JEthelred  in  the  10th  century;  in  which  he  terms  himself  "  Ego  JEthel- 
redus,  totius  Albionis,  Dei  gubernante  moderamine,  Basileus :"  and  end- 
ing, "  Ego  JEthelredus  Rex  Anglorum." — HEARNE'S  Leland,  vol.  ii. 

As  natives  of  the  British  Islands,  we  cannot  but  regret  that,  while  the 
Author  has  been  so  minute  in  the  mention  of  places  lying  round  the 
borders  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  he  has  passed  over  with  neglect  the 
regions  and  towns  of  Britain  and  Ireland,  as  well  as  those  of  the  north  of 
Europe.  Although  his  knowledge  of  these  was  probably  limited,  the 
omission  can  scarcely  have  proceeded  from  ignorance  alone,  for  Suetonius 
informs  us,  that  the  Emperor  Vespasian,  who  was  the  great  patron  of  Pliny, 
had  subdued  twenty  cities  in  Britain,  together  with  the  Isle  of  Wight ;  and 
we  cannot  suppose  that  Pliny  remained  unacquainted  with  the  names  of 
any  of  them.  In  another  place  he  names  Camelodunum,  which  is  be- 
lieved to  be  Doncaster,  as  a  station  sufficiently  known,  from  which  to 
measure  the  distance  to  the  Island  Mona,  or  Anglesea ;  and  the  city  of 
the  Trinobantes  had  been  previously  mentioned  by  Julius  Caesar.  His 
distribution  of  the  islands  lying  round  Britain  is  contradictory  as  well 
as  obscure ;  but  he  appears  to  regard  all  that  are  situated  west  of  the 
ordinary  place  of  passage  from  the  Continent  into  Britain,  (Gessoriacum, 
which  is  probably  Boulogne  on  the  one  side,  and  the  British  port  of  the 
Morini,  whether  Dover  or  Folkestone,)  as  being  necessarily  situated  be- 
tween Britain  and  Ireland.  Vectis  is  admitted  to  be  the  Isle  of  Wight ; 
but  by  some  authors  the  same  name  is  given  to  an  island  to  which  tin 
was  carried  from  Cornwall  in  carts,  and  from  which  it  was  afterwards 
exported.  From  a  comparison  of  ancient  authors,  Sir  Christopher  Haw- 
kins was  persuaded  that  this  could  be  no  other  that  St.  Michael's  Mount, 
in  Cornwall ;  and  the  argument  urged  against  this  supposition,  built  on 
the  tradition  that  it  once  stood  within  the  land,  and  was  surrounded  by 


36  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  IV. 

hood  of  the  Caledonian  Forest.  Agrippa  belie  veth  that  it 
is  in  Length  800  miles,  and  in  Breadth  300 ;  and  also  that 
Ireland  is  as  broad,  but  not  so  long  by  200  Miles.  This 
Island  is  seated  above  it,  and  but  a  very  short  Passage 
distant ;  30  Miles  from  the  Nation  of  Silures.  Of  the 
other  Islands  there  is  none,  by  report,  in  Compass  more  than 
125  Miles.  But  there  are  the  Orcades  40,  divided  from  each 
other  by  small  spaces :  Acmodse  7,  and  30  Hsebrides.  Also 
between  Britannia  and  Hibernia  are  Mona,  Monapia,  Ricnea, 

a  wood,  may  be  answered  by  believing  that  these  facts  refer  to  very  different 
ages  of  the  world.  The  Mictis  of  Pliny  may  be  this  Cornish  island ; 
his  error  in  the  distance  having  arisen  from  confounding  the  place 
of  export  for  tin  with  the  islands  producing  it.  To  the  latter,  or  Scilly 
Islands,  it  appears  the  Britons  were  accustomed  to  sail  in  their  wicker  boats 
covered  with  leather,  or  coracles  ;  a  mode  of  navigation  perhaps  not  less 
secure  than  the  somewhat  similar  vessels  at  present  in  use  among  the 
Greenlanders.  That  they  were  capable  of  a  considerable  voyage  appears 
from  the  fact,  that  they  have  been  employed  in  crossing  the  channel 
from  Armorica  to  Cornwall  so  late  as  about  the  7th  century.  It  must 
have  been  from  misinformation  that  Pliny  assigns  the  Cassiterides  (Chap. 
XXII.)  to  Spain ;  but  even  this  great  error  may  be  excused,  by  recol- 
lecting that  in  a  preceding  age  the  merchants  had  succeeded  in  concealing 
the  situation  of  this  Cornish  group  from  the  inquiry  of  Julius  Caesar, 
when  he  was  tempted  to  invade  the  seat  of  pearls  and  tin;  and  that 
Cadiz  was  the  Continental  port,  from  which  this  profitable  intercourse 
with  Cornwall  and  Scilly  had  from  the  remotest  ages  been  carried  on. 
The  Islands  mentioned  by  Pliny  may  be  judged  the  following  : — 

Orcades    .        .        .     Orkneys. 

AcmodcB     .     probably  Zetland. 

Habredes,  Hebrides .     Western  Islands. 

Mona        .        .        .    Anglesea. 

Monapia,  Monaadia,  and  by  others  Menavia,  Isle  of  Man. 

Ricnea,  qu.  Ricina  f  .    Birdsey,  between  Wales  and  Ireland. 

Vectzs       .        .        .    Isle  of  Wight. 

Silumnus    ...  ? 

Andros      ...  ? 

Siambis     ...  ? 

Axantos     ...  ? 

Mictis        .        .        .St.  Michael's  Mount. 

Glessaria  )  Nordstant,  in  the  German  Sea. 

Electrides  ) 

Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  37 

Vectis,  Silimnus,  and  Andros :  but  beneath  Siambis  and 
Axantos:  and  on  the  contrary  side,  toward  the  German 
Sea,  there  lie  scattered  the  Glessariae,  which  the  later  Greek 
Writers  have  named  Electrides,  because  Amber  was  pro- 
duced there.  The  farthest  of  all,  which  are  spoken  of,  is 
Thule ;  in  which  there  are  no  Nights,  as  we  have  declared, 
at  the  Solstice,  when  the  Sun  passeth  through  the  Sign 
Cancer  ;  and  on  the  other  hand  no  Days  in  Midwinter ;  and 
each  of  these  Times  they  supposed  to  last  Six  Months. 
Timceus  the  Historiographer  saith,  That  farther  within,  at 
Six  Days'  sailing  from  Britannia,  is  the  Island  Mictis,  in 
which  White  Lead  is  produced,  and  that  the  Britanni  sail 
thither  in  Wicker  Vessels,  sewed  round  with  Leather.  Some 
make  mention  of  others,  as  Scandia,  Durnna,  and  Bergos ; 
and  the  biggest  of  all,  Nerigos;  from  which  Men  sail  to 
Thule.  Within  one  Day's  Sail  from  Thule  is  the  Frozen 
Sea,  named  by  some  Cronium. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Gallia. 

ALL  Gallia,  by  one  Name  called  Comata,  is  divided  into 
three  Kinds  of  People,  and  those  for  the  most  part  divided 
one  from  the  other  by  Rivers :  Belgica,  from  Scaldis  to 
Sequana  :  Celtica,  from  it  to  Garumna ;  and  this  Part  of 
Gallia  is  also  named  Lugdunensis.  From  thence  to  the  lying 
out  of  the  Mountain  Pyrenseus,  Aquitania,  formerly  called 
Aremorica.  Agrippa  hath  made  this  Computation  of  all 
the  Gallise  lying  between  Rhenus,  Pyrenaeus,  the  Ocean, 
and  the  Mountains  Gehenna  and  Jura ;  whereby  he  ex- 
cludeth  Narbonensis  Gallia;  in  Length  420  Miles,  and  in 
Breadth  313.  Next  to  Scaldis,  the  Toxandri  inhabit  the 
utmost  Borders,  under  many  Names.  Then  the  Menapii, 
Morini,  and  Oromansaci ;  joining  upon  that  District  which  is 
called  Gessoriacus,  the  Brinanni,  Ambiani,  Bellonici,  and 
Hassi.  Within,  the  Castologi,  Atrebates,  and  the  free  Nervii. 
TheVeromandui,  Sueconi,  and  free  Suessiones,free  Ulbanectes, 
Tungri,  Rinuci,  Frisiabones,  Betasi,  free  Leuci.  TheTreviri, 


38  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

free  formerly  :  the  Lingeries  Confederates  :  the  Remi  Confe- 
derate :  the  Mediomatrici,  the  Sequani,  the  Raurici,  and  Hel- 
vetii.  Colonies,  Equestris  and  Rauriaca.  But,  of  German 
Nations  in  the  same  Province,  that  dwell  near  the  Rhenus, 
the  Nemetes,  Tribochi,  and  Vangiones  :  then  the  Ubii,  Co- 
Ionia  Agrippensis,  Gugerni,  Batavi,  and  those  whom  we 
spake  of  in  the  Islands  of  the  Rhenus. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Lugdunensis  Gallia. 

LUGDUNENSIS  GALLIA  containeth  the  Lexovii,  Velocasses, 
Galleti,  Veneti,  Abricatui,  Osismii,  and  the  noble  River  Li- 
geris  :  but  a  remarkable  Peninsula  running  out  into  the 
Ocean  from  the  Extremity  of  the  Osismii,  having  in  cir- 
cuit 625  Miles:  with  its  Neck  125  Miles  broad.  Beyond 
it  dwell  the  Nannetes :  within,  the  Hcedui  Confederates, 
the  Carnuti  Confederates,  the  Boii,  Senones,  Aulerici, 
surnamed  Eburovices,  and  the  Cenomannes,  arid  Meldi, 
free.  Parrhisii,  Trecasses,  Andegavi,  Viducasses,  Vadicasses, 
Unelli,  Cariosvelites,  Diablindi,  Rhedones,  Turones,  Itesui, 
and  free  Secusiani,  in  whose  Country  is  the  Colony  Lug- 
dun  urn. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Aquitania. 

To  Aquitania  belong  the  Ambilatri,  Anagnutes,  Pictones, 
the  free  Santones  (Bituriges),  named  also  Vibisci,  Aquitani, 
from  whom  the  Province  is  named,  and  the  Sediboniates. 
Then  such  as  were  enrolled  into  a  Town  from  various  Parts  : 
Begerri,  Tarbeli,  who  came  under  4  Ensigns;  Cocossati, 
under  6  Ensigns ;  Venami,  Onobrisates,  Belendi,  and  the 
Forest  Pyrenseus.  Beneath  them,  the  Monesi ;  Osquidates, 
Mountaineers ;  Sibyllates,  Camponi,  Bercorates,  Bipedimui, 
Sassumini,  Vellates,  Tornates,  Consoranni,  Ausci,  Elusates, 
Sottiates,  the  Field  Osquidates,  Succasses,  Latusates,  Basa- 
bocates,  Vassei,  Sennates,  Cambolectri,  Agesinates  joined  to 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  39 

the  Pictones.  Then  the  free  Bituriges,  who  are  also  called 
Cubi.  Next  to  them,  Lemovices,  the  free  Arverni,  and  Ga- 
bales.  Again,  those  that  border  upon  the  Province  Narbo- 
nensis ;  the  Rutheni,  Cadurci,  Autobroges,  and  the  Petro- 
gori  divided  from  the  Tolosani  by  the  River  Tarne.  Seas 
about  the  Coast:  upon  the  Rhenus  the  North  Ocean :  between 
the  Rhenus  and  Sequana,  the  British  Ocean  :  between  it  and 
Pyrenseus,  the  Gallic  Ocean.  Islands  :  many  of  the  Veneti, 
which  are  called  also  Veneticse  :  and  in  the  Gulf  of  Aquitaine, 
Uliarus. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

The  Hither  Hispania. 

AT  the  Promontory  of  Pyrenseus  beginneth  Hispania 
(Spain) ;  narrower  not  only  than  Gallia,  but  also  than  itself 
(as  we  may  say),  so  vast  a  Quantity  is  wrought  into  it  by 
the  Ocean  of  the  one  Coast,  and  the  Iberian  Sea  on  the 
other.  The  Mountains  of  Pyrenseus,  which  from  the 
East  spread  all  the  way  to  the  Southwest,  make  Hispania 
shorter  on  the  North  Side  than  the  South.  The  nearest 
Border  of  this  hither  Province  is  the  same  as  the  Tract 
of  Tarracon,  from  Pyrenseus  along  the  Ocean,  to  the 
Forest  of  the  Vascones.  In  the  Country  of  the  Varduli  : 
the  Towns  Olarso,  Morosgi,  Menosca,  Vesperies,  the  Port 
Amanum,  where  now  is  Flaviobriga,  a  Colony  of  nine  Cities. 
The  Region  of  the  Cantabri,  the  River  Sada,  the  Port  of 
Victoria,  inhabited  by  the  Juliobrigenses.  From  that  Place 
the  Fountains  of  Iberus,  40  Miles.  The  Port  Biendium,  the 
Origeni,  intermingled  with  the  Cantabri.  Their  Harbours, 
Vesei  and  Veca  :  the  Country  of  the  Astures,  the  Town 
Noega,  in  the  Peninsula  Pesicus.  And  then  the  Conventus 
Lucensis,  from  the  River  Navilubio,  the  Cibarci,  Egovarri, 
surnamed  Namarini,  ladoni,  Arrotrebse,  the  Promontory 
Celticum.  Rivers,  Florius  and  Nelo.  Celtici,  surnamed 
Neriae  :  and  above  the  Tamirici,  in  whose  Peninsula  are 
three  Altars  called  Sestianse,  dedicated  to  Augustus ;  Crepori, 
the  Town  Noela.  The  Celtici,  surnamed  Prsesamarci,  Cileni. 
Of  Islands  worth  the  naming,  Corticata  and  Aunios.  From 


40  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

the  Cileni,  the  Conventus  of  the  Bracae,  Heleni,  Gravii,  the 
Castle  Tyde,  all  descended  from  the  Greeks.  The  Islands 
Cicae,  the  distinguished  Town  Abobrica  ;  the  River  Minius 
with  a  broad  Mouth,  four  Miles  over;  the  Leuni,  Seurbi, 
Augusta,  a  Town  of  the  Bracse :  and  above  them,  Gallaecia; 
the  River  Limia.  The  River  Durius,  one  of  the  greatest  in 
Hispania,  springing  in  the  Pelendones' Country,  and  running 
by  Numantia :  and  so  on,  through  the  Arevaci  and  Vaccsei, 
dividing  the  Vettones  from  Asturia,  and  the  Gallseci  from 
Lusitania  :  and  there  also  it  keepeth  off  the  Turduli  from  the 
Bracari.  All  this  Region  abovesaid  from  Pyrenaeus  is  full 
of  Mines,  of  Gold,  Silver,  Iron,  Lead,  both  black  and  white 
(Tin). 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

Lusitania. 

FROM  the  (River)  Durius  beginneth  Lusitania,  wherein 
are  Turduli  the  old,  Pesuri,  the  River  Vacca.  The  Town 
Talabrica,  the  Town  and  River  Minium.  Towns,  Conim- 
brica,  Olisippo,  Eburo,  Britium.  From  whence  runneth  out 
into  the  Sea  with  a  mighty  Horn  the  Promontory,  which 
some  have  called  Artabrum ;  others,  the  Great ;  and  many, 
Olissoponense,  from  the  Town,  making  a  Division  of  Land, 
Sea,  and  Sky.  By  it  is  the  Side  of  Hispania  determined, 
and  from  the  Compass  of  it  beginneth  the  Front. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Islands  in  the  Ocean. 

ON  the  one  hand,  is  the  North  and  the  Gallic  Ocean  : 
on  the  other,  the  West  and  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  The 
shooting  forth  of  the  Promontory  some  have  reported  to 
be  60  Miles,  others  90.  From  thence  to  Pyrenaeus  not  a 
few  say  it  is  1250  Miles  ;  and  that  there  is  a  Nation  of  the 
Atabri,  which  never  was,  with  a  manifest  Error.  For  they 
have  set  the  Arrotrebae,  whom  we  have  placed  before  the 
Celtic  Promontory,  in  this  place,  by  exchanging  some  Let- 
ters. They  have  erred  also  in  certain  famous  Rivers.  From 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  41 

Minius  abovenamed  (as  Varro  saith)  ^minius  is  200  Miles 
distant  (which  some  take  to  be  elsewhere,  and  call  it  Limaea), 
named  by  the  ancients  Oblivionis ;  of  which  goeth  many 
a  Fable.  From  Durius  to  Tagus  is  200  Miles,  and  Munda 
cometh  between.  Tagus  is  much  renowned  for  Sand  that 
yieldeth  Gold  :  160  Miles  from  it  the  Promontory  Sacrum 
(Sacred)  runneth  out  from  about  the  middle  Front  of  His- 
pania :  and  Varro  saith  it  is  14  Miles  from  it  to  the  midst  of 
Pyrenaeus.  But  from  Ana,  by  which  we  have  separated 
Lusitania  from  Baetica,  226  Miles  :  adding  thereto  from 
Gades  102  Miles.  Nations  :  Celtici,  Varduli,  and  about  the 
Tagus,  the  Vettones.  From  Ana  to  Sacrum,  the  Lusitani. 
Memorable  Towns  :  from  Tagus  in  the  Coast  Side,  Olisippo, 
noble  for  the  Mares  that  conceive  there  by  the  Favonius 
Wind.  Salacia,  denominated  Urbs  Imperatoria,  and  Mero- 
brica  :  the  Promontory  Sacrum,  and  another  called  Caeneus.1 
Towns  :  Ossonoba,  Balsa,  and  Myrtius.  The  whole  Province 
is  divided  into  three  Conventions  :  Emeritensis,  Pacensis, 
and  Scalabitanus.  Itcontaineth  in  all  five-and-forty  People: 
wherein  are  five  Colonies,  one  Municipium  of  Roman  Citi- 
zens ;  three  of  Old  Latium.  Stipendiaries,  six-and-thirty. 
Colonies,  Augusta  Emerita :  and  upon  the  River  Ana, 
Metallinensis ;  Pacensis,  Norbensis,  which  is  named  also 
Caesariana.  To  it  are  laid  Castra  Julia  and  Castra  Caecilia. 
The  fifth  is  Scalabis,  called  Praesidium  Julium.  The  Muni- 
cipium of  Roman  Citizens  Olyssippo,  named  also  Felicitas 
Julia.  Towns  of  the  Old  Latium,  Ebora,  which  likewise  was 
called  Liberalitas  Julia  :  Myrtilis  also,  and  Salatia,  which  we 
have  spoken  of.  Of  Stipendiaries,  which  I  am  not  loth  to 
name,  beside  the  abovesaid,  in  the  additions  of  Baetica, 
Augustobrigenses,  Ammienses,  Aranditarii,  Axabricenses, 
Balsenses,  Caesarobricenses,  Caperenses,  Caurenses,  Colarni, 
Cibilitani,  Concordienses,  the  same  as  Bonori ;  Interau- 
senses,  Lancienses,  Mirobrigenses  surnamed  Celtici ;  Medu- 
bricenses,  the  same  as  Plumbarii ;  Ocelenses,  who  also  are 
Lancienses;  Turtuli,  named  Barduli,  and  Tapori.  M.Agrippa 

1   Cceneus  is  read  in  some  editions,  and  Cuneus  in  others. 


42  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IV. 

hath  written,  that  Lusitania,  with  Asturia  and  Gallsecia,  is  in 
Length  540  Miles,  and  in  Breadth  526.  But  all  the  His- 
panise  (Spains),  from  the  two  Promontories  of  Pyrenaeus  along 
the  Seas,  are  supposed  to  take  up  in  Circuit  of  the  whole 
Coast  2900  Miles,  and  by  others,  2700.  Over  against  Celti- 
beria  are  very  many  Islands,  called  by  the  Greeks  Cassiterides, 
from  the  plenty  of  Lead  -,1  and  from  the  region  of  the  Pro- 
montory of  the  Arrotrebae,  six  named  Deorum  (i.  e.  of  the 
Gods)  which  some  have  called  Fortunatae.  But  in  the  very 
Cape  of  Bsetica,  from  the  Mouth  of  the  Strait  75  Miles, 
lieth  the  Island  Gades,  12  Miles  long,  as  Polybim  writeth, 
and  3  Miles  broad.  It  is  distant  from  the  Continent,  where 
it  is  nearest,  less  than  700  Paces,2  in  other  Parts  above  7 
Miles.  Its  space  containeth  15  Miles.  It  hath  a  Town  of 
Roman  Citizens,  which  is  named  Augusta,  Urbs  Julia 
Gaditana.  On  that  side  that  looks  toward  Spain,  within 
about  100  Paces,  is  another  Island,  3  Miles  long,  and  a 
Mile  broad,  wherein  formerly  was  the  Town  of  Gades.  The 
Name  of  this  Island,  according  to  Ephorus  and  Philistides,  is 
Erythia :  but  according  to  Timceus  and  Silenus,  Aphrodisias  : 
by  the  Native  Inhabitants,  of  Juno.  The  bigger,  'Timaus 
saith,  was  by  them  called  Cotinusa ;  our  Countrymen  name 
it  Tartessos,  the  Pceni  Gadir,3  which  in  the  Punic  Lan- 
guage signifieth4  the  number  of  seven.5  Erythia  was 
called,  because  the  Tyri  were  reported  to  have  had  their 
first  beginning  out  of  the  (Red)  Sea,  Erythraeum.  Some  think 
that  Geryon  here  dwelt,  whose  Herds  Hercules  took  away. 
There  are  again  some  who  think  that  it  is  another,  over 

See  p.  36,  c.  xvi. 

Less  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 

Or  Gadiz. 

Septem,  or,  as  some  read,  Septum  (i.  e.  a  park  or  enclosure). 

From  the  Hebrew  root  signifying  to  make  a  fence,  the  Phoenicians 
called  any  enclosed  space  Gaddir,  and  particularly  gave  this  name  to  their 
settlement  on  the  south-western  coast  of  Spain,  which  the  Greeks  from 
them  called  Gaderia,  the  Romans  Gades,  and  we  Cadiz.  See  Bochart, 
vol.  i.  628-734.  This  name  is  very  appropriately  given  to  the  island 
mentioned  by  Pliny ;  but  why  it  should  be  derived  from  a  Punic  word 
signifying  seven  is  not  so  apparent. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IV.]  History  of  Nature.  43 

against  Lusitania,  and  there  sometime  called  by  the  same 
Name. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 
The  Measure  of  all  Europe. 

HAVING  finished  the  circuit  of  Europe,  we  must  now 
yield  the  total  Sum,  that  such  as  are  desirous  of  Knowledge 
be  not  deficient  in  any  thing.  Artemidorus  and  Isldorus  have 
set  down  the  Length  of  it  from  Tanais  to  Gades  84,014 
Miles.  Polybius  hath  put  down  the  Breadth  of  Europe, from 
Italy  to  the  Ocean  1150  Miles,  for  then  the  largeness  of  it 
was  not  known.  But  the  Breadth  of  Italy  itself  (as  we  have 
shewn)  is  1220  Miles  to  the  Alps :  from  whence  by  Lug- 
dunum  to  the  Port  of  the  Morini  in  Britain,  from  which 
Polybius  seemeth  to  take  his  Measure,  is  1168  Miles.  But 
the  more  certain  Measure,  and  the  longer,  is  directed  from 
the  said  Alps  to  the  extreme  West  and  the  Mouth  of  the 
Rhenus,  through  the  Camps  of  the  Legions  of  Germania, 
1243  Miles.  Now  will  we  proceed  to  describe  Africa  and 
Asia. 


IN  THE  FIFTH   BOOK 


ARE    CONTAINED 

REGIONS,  NATIONS,  SEAS,  TOWNS,  PORTS,  HILLS,  RIVERS,  WITH 

THEIR  MEASURES,  AND  PEOPLE,  EITHER  AT  THIS  DAY 

EXISTING,  OR  IN  TIMES  PAST,  VIZ.:  — 


CHAP. 

1.  Mauritania. 

2.  The  Province  Tingitana. 

3.  Numidia. 

4.  Africa. 

5.  Gyrene. 

6.  Lybia  Maraeotis. 

7.  Islands  lying  about  Africa,  and 

over  against  Africa. 

8.  The  Ethiopians. 

9.  Asia. 

10.  Alexandria. 

11.  Arabia. 

12.  Syria,  Palsestina,  Phoenice. 

13.  Idumsea,  Syria,  Palaestina,  Sa- 

maria. 

14.  Judaea,  Galilea. 

15.  The  River  Jordan. 

16.  The  Lake  Asphaltites. 

17.  The  Essenes  (people). 

18.  The  Country  Decapolis. 

19.  Tyrus  and  Sidon. 

20.  The  Mount  Libanus. 


CHAP. 

21.  Syria  Antiochena. 

22.  The  Mountain  Casius. 

23.  Coele- Syria. 

24.  The  River  Euphrates. 

25.  The  Region  Palmyra. 

26.  Hierapolis  (the  Country). 

27.  Cilicia  and  the  Nations  adjoin- 

ing :  Pamphylia,  Isauria, 
Homonades,  Pisidia,  Lyca- 
onia,  the  Mountain  Taurus, 
and  Lycia. 

28.  The  River  Indus. 

29.  Laodicea,  Apamia,  Ionia,  and 

Ephesus. 

30.  JEolis,  Troas,  Pergamus. 

31.  Islands  about  Asia,  the  Pam- 

phylian  Sea,  Rhodes,  Samus, 
and  Chius. 

32.  Hellespont,    Mysia,    Phrygia, 

Galatia,  Nicea,  Bithynia, 
Bosphorus. 


Herein  you  find  Towns  and  Nations,  principal  Rivers,  famous  Moun- 
tains, Islands,  117.  Towns  also  that  are  perished.  Affairs,  Histories  and 
Observations. 


LATIN  AUTHOKS  ABSTRACTED: 

Agrippa,  Suetonius  Paulinus,  Varro  Atacinus,  Cornelius  Nepos,  Hyginus, 
L.  Vetus,  Mela,  Domitius  Corlulo,  Licinius  Mutianus,  Claudius  Ccesar, 
Aruntius,  Livius  the  Son,  Sebosus,  the  Records  of  the  Triumphs. 

FOREIGN  WRITERS: 

King  Juba,  Hecatam,  Hellanicus,  Damastes,  Diccearchus,  Bion,  Timo- 
sihenes,  Philonides,  Xenagoras,  Asty nonius,  Staphylus,  Aristotle,  Dionysius, 
Aristocritus,  Ephorus,  Eratosthenes,  Hipparcnus,  Pancetius,  Serapion  An- 
tiochenus,  Callimachus,  Agathocles,  Polybius,  Timaus  the  Mathematician, 
Herodotus,  Myrsilus,  Alexander  Polyhistor,  Metrodorus,  Posidonius  who 
wrote  Periplus  or  Periegesis,  Sotades,  Periander,  Aristarchus  Sicyonius, 
Eudoxus,  Antigenes,  Callicrates,  Xenophon  Lampsacenus,  Diodorus  Syra- 
cusanus,  Hanno,  Himilco,  Nymphodorus,  Calliphon,  Artemidorus,  Mega- 
sthenes,  Isidorus,  Cleobulus,  Aristocreon. 


THE  FIFTH  BOOK 


OF   THE 


HISTORY   OF   NATURE 


WRITTEN   BY 


C.  PLINIUS  SECUNDUS. 


The  Description  of  Africa. 

FRICA  the  Greeks  have  called  Lybia;  from 
which  the  Lybian  Sea  before  it  beginneth,  and 
endeth  in  the  Egyptian.  No  part  of  the  Earth 
receiveth  fewer  Gulfs  in  that  long  compass  of 
oblique  Coasts  from  the  West.  The  Names 
of  its  People  and  Towns  are  exceedingly  hard 

to  be  Pronounced,  unless  by  their  own  Tongues  :  and  again, 

they  for  the  most  part  dwell  in  Castles. 


CHAPTER  I. 
Mauritania. 

AT  the  beginning,  the  Lands  of  Mauritania,  until  the 
time  of  C.  Ccesar  (i.  e.  Caligula),  son  of  Germanicus,  were 
called  Kingdoms :  but  by  his  Cruelty  it  was  divided  into  two 
Provinces.  The  utmost  Promontory  of  the  Ocean  is  named 
by  the  Greeks  Ampelusia.  The  Towns  were  Lissa  and  Cotes 


46  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

beyond  the  Pillars  of  Hercules.  Now  there  is  Tingi,  formerly 
built  by  Antceus ;  and  afterwards  by  Claudius  Ccesar,  when  he 
made  it  a  Colony,  by  whom  it  was  called  Traducta  Julia.  It 
is  from  Belone,  a  Town  in  Baetica,  by  the  nearest  Passage,  30 
Miles.  Five-and-Twenty  Miles  from  it,  in  the  Coast  of  the 
Ocean,  is  a  Colony  of  Augustus,  now  Julia  Constantia,  exempt 
from  the  Jurisdiction  of  the  Kings  of  Zilis  :  and  commanded 
to  seek  for  Law  to  Baetica.  And  32  Miles  from  it  is  Lixos, 
made  a  Colony  by  Claudius  Caesar,  of  which  in  old  Time  there 
were  related  many  Fabulous  Tales.  There  stood  the  Royal 
Palace  of  Antceus ;  there  was  the  combat  with  Hercules  ;  there 
also  were  the  Gardens  of  the  Hesperides.  Now  there  floweth 
into  it  out  of  the  Sea  a  Creek  by  a  winding  Channel,  in 
which  Men  now  interpret  that  there  were  Dragons  serving 
as  Guards.  It  encloseth  an  Island  within  itself,  which  (not- 
withstanding the  Tract  near  it  is  somewhat  higher)  is  alone 
not  overflowed  by  the  Tides  of  the  Sea.  In  it  there  standeth 
an  Altar  of  Hercules ;  and  except  wild  Olives,  nothing  is  to 
be  seen  of  that  Grove,  reported  to  bear  Golden  Apples. 
And  indeed  less  may  they  wonder  at  the  enormous  lies  of 
Greece  invented  concerning  these,  and  the  River  Lixus  ; 
who  will  think  how  of  late  our  Countrymen  have  delivered 
some  Fables  scarcely  less  monstrous,  regarding  the  same 
things  :  as,  that  this  is  a  very  strong  City,  bigger  than  great 
Carthage :  moreover,  that  it  is  situated  over  against  it,  and 
almost  at  an  immense  way  from  Tingi :  and  other  such, 
which  Cornelius  Nepos  hath  been  very  eager  to  believe. 
From  Lixus  40  Miles,  in  the  Midland  Parts,  standeth  Babba, 
another  Colony  of  Augustus,  called  Julia  Campestris  :  also 
a  third  75  Miles  off,  called  Banasa,  but  now  Valentia. 
35  Miles  from  it  is  the  Town  Volubile,  just  in  the  midway 
between  both  Seas.  But  in  the  Coast,  50  Miles  from  Lixus, 
there  runneth  Subur,  a  copious  and  navigable  River,  near  to 
the  Colony  Banasa.  As  many  Miles  from  it  is  the  Town 
Sala,  standing  upon  a  River  of  the  same  Name,  near  now  to 
the  Wilderness,  much  infested  with  Herds  of  Elephants,  but 
much  more  with  the  Nation  of  the  Autololes,  through 
which  lieth  the  Way  to  Atlas,  the  most  fabulous  Mountain  of 


BooKV.]  History  of  Nature.  47 

Africa.  For  Writers  have  given  out  that,  rising  out  of  the 
very  midst  of  the  Sands,  it  rnounteth  to  the  Sky,  rough  and 
ill-favoured  on  that  side  which  lieth  toward  the  Shore  of  the 
Ocean,  unto  which  it  gave  the  Denomination  :  and  the  same 
is  shadowy,  full  of  Woods,  and  watered  with  Sources  of 
spouting  Springs,  on  the  way  which  looketh  to  Africa,  with 
Fruits  of  all  sorts,  springing  of  their  own  accord,  one  under 
another,  in  such  a  manner,  that  at  no  time  is  Fulness  of  Plea- 
sure wanting.  Moreover,  that  none  of  the  Inhabitants  are 
seen  by  day  :  all  is  silent,  like  the  Awe  of  Solitude  :  a  secret 
Devotion  creepeth  into  the  Hearts  of  those  who  approach 
near  to  it;  and  besides  this  Awe  they  are  lifted  above  the 
Clouds,  even  close  to  the  Circle  of  the  Moon  :  that  the  same 
(Mountain)  shineth  by  Night  with  frequent  Fires,  and  is 
filled  with  the  Lasciviousness  of  j£gi  panes  and  Satyrs  ;  that  it 
resoundeth  with  the  Melody  of  Flutes  and  Pipes ;  and 
ringeth  with  the  Sound  of  Drums  and  Cymbals.  These  are 
the  Reports  of  famous  Writers,  besides  the  Labours  of 
Hercules  and  Perseus  there.  The  Way  unto  it  is  exceedingly 
long,  and  not  certainly  known.  There  were  also  Com- 
mentaries of  Hanno,  the  General  of  the  Carthaginians,  who 
in  the  time  of  the  most  flourishing  state  of  Carthage  had  a 
charge  to  explore  the  Circuit  of  Africa.  Him,  most  of  the 
Greeks  as  well  as  our  Countrymen  following,  among  some 
other  fabulous  Stories,  have  written  that  he  also  built  many 
Cities  there  :  but  neither  any  Memorial,  nor  Token  of  them 
remain.  When  Scipio  jSZmylianus  carried  on  War  in  Africa, 
Polybius,  the  Writer  of  the  Annals,  received  from  him  a  Fleet ; 
and  having  sailed  about  for  the  purpose  of  searching  into  that 
part  of  the  World,  he  reported,  That  from  the  said  Mountain 
West,  toward  the  Forests  full  of  Wild  Beasts,  which  Africa 
breedeth,  to  the  River  Anatis,  are  485  Miles ;  and  from 
thence  to  Lixus,  205.  Agrippa  saith,  That  Lixus  is  distant 
from  the  Straits  of  Gades  112  Miles.  Then,  that  there  is  a 
Bay  called  Saguti;  also  a  Town  upon  the  Promontory, 
Mutelacha.  Rivers,  Subur  and  Sala.  That  the  Port 
Rutubis  is  from  Lixus  313  Miles.  Then  the  Promontory 
of  the  Sun.  The  Port  Risardir :  the  Gaetulians,  Autololes, 


48  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  V. 

the  River  Cosenus,  the  Nation  of  the  Scelatiti  and  Massati. 
The  Rivers  Masatal  and  Darat,  wherein  Crocodiles  are  pro- 
duced. Then  a  Bay  of  516  Miles,  enclosed  within  the  Promon- 
tory of  the  Mountain  Barce,  running  out  into  the  West,  which 
is  called  Surrentium .  After  it,  the  River  Palsus,  beyond  which 
are  the  ^Ethiopian  Perorsi,  and  at  their  back  are  the  Pharusi. 
Upon  whom  join  the  inland  People,  the  Geetuli  Darae.  But 
upon  the  Coast  are  the  ^Ethiopian  Daratitee ;  the  River 
Bambotus  full  of  Crocodiles  and  Hippopotami.  From  which, 
he  saith,  there  is  a  Continuation  of  Mountains  as  far  as  to 
that  which  we  call  Theon-Ochema  (the  Gods'  Chariot). 
Then,  in  sailing  nine  Days  and  Nights  to  the  Promontory 
Hesperium,  he  hath  placed  the  Mountain  Atlas  in  the  mid- 
way ;  which  by  all  other  Writers  is  set  down  to  be  in  the 
utmost  Borders  of  Mauritania.  The  Romans  first  warred  in 
Mauritania,  in  the  time  of  Claudius  the  Prince :  when 
JEdcemon,  the  Freedman  of  King  Ptolemceus,  who  was 
slain  by  C.  Ccesar,  endeavoured  to  avenge  his  Death.  For 
as  the  Barbarians  fled  backward,  the  Romans  came  to  the 
Mountain  Atlas.  And  not  only  to  such  Generals  as  had 
been  Consuls,  and  to  such  as  were  of  the  Senate,  who  at  that 
time  managed  affairs,  but  to  Knights  also,  who  from  that 
time  had  command  there,  was  it  a  glory  to  have  pene- 
trated to  the  Atlas.  *Five  Roman  Colonies,  as  we  have 
said,  are  in  that  Province,  and  by  common  fame  it  may  seem 
to  be  accessible.  But  this  is  found  for  the  most  part  by 
Experience  very  fallacious  :  because  Persons  of  high  Rank, 
when  it  is  irksome  to  search  out  the  Truth,  find  it  not  irk- 
some through  the  shame  of  Ignorance,  to  give  out  Untruths  : 
and  never  are  Men  more  credulous  to  be  deceived  than  when 
some  grave  Author  fathereth  the  lie.  And  indeed  I  less 
wonder,  that  things  are  not  known,  when  they  of  the  Eques- 
trian Order,  and  those  now  also  of  the  Senatorial  Rank, 
admire  nothing  but  Luxury:  which  very  powerful  and  pre- 
vailing Force  is  seen  when  Forests  are  searched  for  Ivory  and 
Citron-trees :  and  all  the  Rocks  in  Getulia  for  Murices  and 

*  It  seemeth  that  this  clause  is  to  be  set  in  the  beginning  of  the  next 
chapter. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  49 

Purpurae.  Nevertheless  the  natural  Inhabitants  report,  That 
in  the  Sea-coast  150  Miles  from  Sala  there  is  the  River 
Asana,  that  receiveth  Salt  Water  into  it,  but  with  a  goodly 
Harbour :  and  not  far  from  it  a  River,  which  they  call  Fut : 
from  which  to  Dyris  (for  that  is  the  Name  in  their  Language 
of  Atlas)  are  200  Miles,  with  a  River  coming  between, 
named  Vior.  And  there,  by  report,  are  to  be  seen  the  cer- 
tain tokens  of  a  Soil  formerly  inhabited ;  the  vestiges  of 
Vineyards  and  Date-tree  Groves.  Suetonius  Paulinus  (a 
Consul  in  our  time),  who  was  the  first  Roman  Leader  that 
passed  over  Atlas  for  the  space  of  some  Miles,  also  hath  re- 
ported regarding  the  height  thereof:  and  moreover,  that  the 
foot  of  it  toward  the  bottom  is  full  of  thick  and  tall  Woods, 
with  Trees  of  an  unknown  kind,  but  the  height  of  them  is 
delightful  to  see,  smooth  and  beautiful,  the  branches  like 
Cypress  ;  and,  besides  the  strong  smell,  are  covered  over 
with  a  thin  Down,  of  which  (with  some  help  of  Art)  fine 
Cloth  may  be  made,  such  as  the  Silk-worm  yieldeth :  that 
the  top  of  it  is  covered  with  deep  Snow,  even  in  Summer, 
and  that  he  reached  up  to  it  on  the  tenth  day,  and  beyond  to 
the  River  called  Niger,  through  solitudes  of  black  Dust, 
with  sometimes  conspicuous  ragged  Rocks,  appearing  as  if 
burnt :  places  by  reason  of  the  Heat  not  habitable,  although 
tried  in  the  Winter  Season.  Those  who  dwelt  in  the  next 
Forests  were  pestered  with  Elephants,  wild  Beasts,  and 
Serpents  of  all  sorts  ;  and  those  People  were  called  Canarii ; 
because  they  and  Animals  feed  together,  and  part  among 
them  the  Bowels  of  wild  Beasts.  For  it  is  sufficiently 
known  that  a  Nation  of  ^Ethiopians,  whom  they  call  Peroresi, 
joineth  to  them.  Juba,  the  Father  of  Ptolemceus,  who  for- 
merly ruled  over  both  Mauritania,  a  Man  more  memorable 
for  his  illustrious  Studies  than  for  his  Kingdom,  hath  written 
the  like  concerning  Atlas ;  and  (he  saith)  moreover,  that 
there  is  an  Herb  growing  there  called  Euphorbia,  from  his 
Physician's  name  that  first  found  it:  the  Milky  Juice  of 
which  he  praiseth  exceedingly  much  for  clearing  the  Eyes 
and  against  Serpents  and  all  Poisons,  in  a  dedicated  Book  by 
itself.  Thus  much  may  suffice,  if  not  too  much,  about  Atlas. 

VOL.  II.  E 


50  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

y  CHAPTER  II. 

The  Province  Tingitania. 

THE  Length  of  the  Province  Tingitania  is  170  Miles.  The 
Nations  therein  are  these :  The  Mauri,  which  in  times  past 
was  the  principal,  and  of  whom  the  Province  took  its  Name : 
and  those  most  Writers  have  called  Marusii.  Being  by  War 
weakened,  they  wasted  to  a  few  Families.  Next  to  them 
were  the  Masssesuli,  hut  in  like  manner  they  were  extin- 
guished. Now  are  the  Nations  inhabited  by  the  Getulae, 
Bannurri,  and  the  Autololes,  the  most  powerful  of  all :  a 
part  of  whom  were  once  the  Vesuni :  but  being  divided  from 
them,  they  became  a  Nation  by  themselves,  and  were  turned 
to  the  ./Ethiopians.  This  Province  being  full  of  Mountains 
eastward,  affordeth  Elephants.  In  the  Mountain  Abila, 
also,  and  in  those  which  for  their  equal  height  they  call 
the  Seven  Brethren :  these  are  joined  to  Abila,  which  looketh 
over  the  arm  of  the  Sea.  From  these  beginneth  the  Coast  of 
the  Inward  Sea.  The  River  Tamuda  navigable,  and  for- 
merly a  Town.  The  River  Laud,  which  also  is  able  to 
receive  Vessels.  The  Town  Rusardir,  and  the  Harbour. 
The  navigable  River  Malvana.  The  Town  Siga,  over 
against  Malacha,  situated  in  Hispania  :  the  royal  Seat  of 
Syphax,  and  now  the  other  Mauritania.  For  a  long  time  they 
kept  the  names  of  the  Kings,  so  that  the  furthest  was  called 
Bogadiana:  and  likewise  Bocchi,  which  now  is  Caesariensis. 
Next  to  it  is  the  Harbour  for  its  space  called  Magnus,  with  a 
Town  of  Roman  Citizens.  The  River  Muluca,  which  is  the 
limit  of  Bocchi  and  the  Massaesuli.  Quiza  Xeriitana,  a  Town 
of  Strangers  :  Arsennaria,  a  Town  of  Latins,  3  Miles  from  the 
Sea :  Carcenna,  a  Colony  of  Augustus,  the  Second  Legion  : 
Likewise  another  Colony  of  his,  planted  with  the  Pretorian 
Cohort :  Gunugi :  and  the  Promontory  of  Apollo.  And  a 
most  famous  Town  there,  Caesarea,  usually  in  old  time  called 
lol,  the  royal  Seat  of  King  Juba :  endowed  by  Divus  Clau- 
dius with  the  Right  of  a  Colony,  by  whose  Appointment  the 
old  Soldiers  were  there  bestowed.  A  new  Town,  Tipasa, 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  51 

with  the  Liberties  of  Latium.  Likewise  Icosium,  endowed 
by  Vespasian  the  Emperor  with  the  same  Gift.  The  Colony 
of  Augustus,  Rusconiae:  and  Ruscurum,  by  Claudius  honoured 
as  a  City  :  Rusoezus,  a  Colony  of  Augustus.  Salde,  a  Colony 
of  the  same.  Igelgili  also,  and  Turca,  a  Town  seated  upon 
the  Sea  and  the  River  Ampsaga.  Within  Land,  the  Colony 
Augusta,  the  same  as  Succubar ;  and  likewise  Tubrisuptus. 
Cities,  Timici,  Tigavse.  Rivers,  Sardabala  and  Nabar.  The 
Nation,  Macurebi :  the  River  Usar  and  the  Nation  of  the 
Nabades.  The  River  Ampsaga  is  from  Caesarea  233 
Miles.  The  Length  of  either  Mauritania  is  839  Miles,  the 
Breadth,  467. 

CHAPTER  III. 
Numidia. 

NEXT  to  Ampsaga  is  Numidia,  renowned  for  the  Name  of 
Masanissa:  called  by  the  Greeks,  the  Land  Metagonitis. 
The  Numidian  Nomades  (so  named  from  changing  their  Pas- 
ture), who  carry  their  Huts,  that  is,  their  Houses,  about  with 
them  upon  Waggons.  Their  Towns  are  Cullu  and  Rusicade  ; 
from  which  48  Miles  off,  within  the  midland  Parts  is  the 
Colony  Cirta,  surnamed  of  the  Sittiani ;  another  also  within 
Cicca,  and  a  free  Town  named  Bulla  Regia.  But  in  the  Coast, 
Tacatua,  Hippo  Regius,  and  the  River  Armua.  The  Town 
Trabacha,  of  Roman  Citizens  :  the  River  Tusca,  which 
boundeth  Numidia :  and  besides  the  Numidian  Marble,  and 
abundance  of  wild  Beasts,  nothing  is  there  worth  the 
noting. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Africa. 

FROM  Tusca  forward  is  the  Region  Zeugitana,  and  the 
Country  properly  called  Africa.  Three  Promontories  :  the 
White ;  then  that  of  Apollo,  over  against  Sardinia:  that  of  Mer- 
cury opposite  to  Sicily  ;  which,  running  into  the  Sea,  make 
two  Bays :  the  one  Hipponensis,  next  to  the  Town  which 
they  call  Hipponis,  named  by  the  Greeks  Diarrhyton,  on 


52  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

account  of  Brooks  of  Water :  upon  this  bordereth  Theudalis, 
an  exempt  Town,  but  further  from  the  Sea-side  ;  then  the 
Promontory  of  Apollo.  And  in  the  other  Bay,  Utica,  of 
Roman  Citizens,  ennobled  by  the  death  of  Cato :  the  River 
Bagrada.  A  Place  called  Castra  Cornelia  :  and  the  Colony 
Carthago,  among  the  Relics  of  great  Carthage:  and  the 
Colony  Maxulla.  Towns,  Carpi,  Misna,  and  the  free  Clupea, 
upon  the  Promontory  of  Mercury.  Also,  free  Towns,  Cu- 
rubis  and  Neapolis.  Soon  is  another  distinction  of  Africa 
itself.  Libyphoenices  are  they  called,  who  inhabit  Byzacium  ; 
for  so  is  that  Region  named :  containing  in  Circuit  250  Miles, 
exceedingly  fertile,  where  the  Ground  sown  yieldeth  to  the 
Husbandman  an  hundred-fold  Increase.  In  it  are  free  Towns, 
Leptis,  Adrumetum,  Ruspina,  and  Thapsus :  then,  Thense, 
Macomades,  Tacape,  Sabrata,  reaching  to  the  Lesser  Syrtis  : 
unto  which,  the  Length  of  Numidia  and  Africa  from  Am- 
phaga  is  580  Miles  :  the  Breadth,  of  so  much  as  is  known, 
200.  This  Part,  which  we  have  called  Africa,  is  divided  into 
two  Provinces,  the  old  and  the  new  ;  separated  by  a  Fosse 
brought  as  far  as  to  Thense,  within  the  African  Gulf;  which 
Town  is  217  Miles  from  Carthage.  The  third  Bay  is  sepa- 
rated into  two ;  horrible  Places  for  the  Shallows  and  ebbing 
and  flowing  of  the  Sea  at  the  two  Syrtes.  From  Carthage 
to  the  nearer  of  them,  which  is  the  lesser,  is  300  Miles,  by 
the  Account  of  Polybius :  who  saith,  also,  that  the  said  Pas- 
sage of  Syrtis  is  100  Miles  forward  and  300  in  Circuit.  By 
Land  also,  the  Way  to  it  is  by  observation  of  the  Stars,  and 
through  the  Desert  over  Sands  and  through  Places  full  of 
Serpents  ;  you  pass  Forests  filled  with  Numbers  of  wild 
Beasts  :  and  within,  Solitudes  of  Elephants  :  and  soon  after, 
vast  Deserts,  even  beyond  the  Garamantes,  who,  from  the 
Augilae,  are  distant  twelve  Days'  Journey.  Above  them  was 
the  Nation  of  the  Psylli :  and  above  them  the  Lake  of  Lyco- 
medes  environed  with  Deserts.  The  Augilee  themselves  are 
seated  about  the  middle  Way  from  Ethiopia  ;  which  bendeth 
Westward,  and  from  the  Country  lying  between  the  two 
Syrtes,  with  an  equal  Distance  on  each  Side  :  but  the  Shore 
between  the  two  Syrtes  is  250  Miles.  There  standeth  the 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  53 

City  Oeensis,  the  River  Cinyps,  and  the  Country.  Towns, 
Neapolis,  Taphra,  Abrotonum,  the  other  Leptis,  called  also 
the  Great.  Then  the  Greater  Syrtis,  in  Compass  625  Miles, 
and  in  direct  Passage  313.  Then  inhabit  the  Nation  of  Cisi- 
pades.  In  the  inmost  Gulf  was  the  Coast  of  the  Lotophagi, 
whom  some  have  called  Alachroas,  as  far  as  to  the  Altars  of 
the  Philaeni,  and  they  are  formed  of  Sand.  Next  to  them,  not 
far  from  the  Continent,  the  vast  Marsh  admitteth  into  it  the 
River  Triton,  and  taketh  its  Name  from  it :  but  CaUimachus 
calleth  it  Pallantias,  and  saith  it  is  on  this  Side  the  lesser 
Syrtes  ;  but  many  place  it  between  both  Syrtes.  The  Pro- 
montory that  encloseth  the  greater  is  named  Borion.  Beyond 
is  the  Province  Cyrenaica.  From  the  River  Ampsaga  to  this 
Bound,  Africa  containeth  26  separate  People,  who  are  subject 
to  the  Roman  Empire :  among  which  are  six  Colonies,  be- 
sides the  above-named,  Uthina  and  Tuburbis.  Towns  of 
Roman  Citizens,  15 ;  of  which  those  in  the  midland  Parts  to 
be  named  are  Azuritanum,  Abutucense,  Aboriense,  Cano- 
picum,  Chilmanense,  Simittuense,  Thunusidens£,  Tuburni- 
cense,  Tynidrumense,  Tribigense,  two  Ucitana,  the  greater 
and  less;  and  Vagiense.  One  Latin  Town,  Usalitanum. 
One  stipendiary  Town  near  Castra  Cornelia.  Free  Towns, 
30,  of  which  are  to  be  named,  within,  Acrolitanum,  Achari- 
tanum,  Avinense,  Abziritanum,  Canopitanum,  Melzitanum, 
Madaurense,  Salaphitanum,  Tusdritanum,  Tiricense,  Tiphi- 
cense,  Tunicense,  Theudense,  Tagestense  (Tigense),  Ulusi- 
britanum,  another  Vagense,  Vigense,  and  Zamense.  The 
rest  it  may  be  right  to  call  not  only  Cities,  but  also  for  the 
most  Part,  Nations ;  as  the  Natabudes,  Capsitani,  Misulani, 
Sabarbares,  Massili,  Misives,  Vamacures,  Ethini,  Massini, 
Marchubii:  and  all  Gsetulia  to  the  River  Nigris,  which 
parteth  Africa  and  Ethiopia. 

CHAPTER  V. 
CyrenS. 

THE   Region   Cyrenaica,    called   also    Pentapolitana,   is 
illustrious  for  the  Oracle  of  Hammon,  which  is  from  Cyrenae 


54  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  V. 

400  Miles,  from  the  Fountain  of  the  Sun ;  and  principally 
for  five  Cities,  Berenice,  Arsinoe,  Ptolemais,  Apollonia,  and 
Gyrene  itself.  Berenice  standeth  upon  the  outermost  Horn 
of  Syrtis,  called  formerly  the  City  of  the  above-named  Hes- 
perides,  according  to  the  wandering  Tales  of  Greece.  And 
before  the  Town,  not  far  off,  is  the  River  Lethon,  the  sacred 
Grove  where  the  Gardens  of  the  Hesperides  are  reported  to 
be.  From  Leptis  it  is  385  Miles.  From  it  is  Arsinoe,  usually 
named  Teuchira,  43  Miles :  and  from  thence  22  Miles, 
Ptolemais,  called  in  old  time  Barce.  And  then  250  Miles 
off,  the  Promontory  Phycus  runneth  out  through  the  Cretic 
Sea,  distant  from  Tsenarus,  a  Promontory  of  Laconia,  350 
Miles  :  but  from  Greta  itself  125  Miles.  And  after  it  Gyrene, 
1 1  Miles  from  the  Sea.  From  Phycus  to  Apollonia  is  24 
Miles:  to  Cherrhonesus,  88:  and  so  to  Catabathnus,  216 
Miles.  The  Inhabitants  there  bordering  are  the  Marmaridse, 
stretching  out  in  Length  almost  from  Parse  to  mum  to  the 
Greater  Syrtis.  After  them  the  Ararauceles  :  and  so  in  the 
very  Coast  of  Syrtis,  the  Nesamones,  whom  formerly  the 
Greeks  called  Mesammones,  by  reason  of  the  Place,  as 
seated  in  the  midst  between  the  Sands.  The  Cyrenaic 
Country,  for  the  Space  of  15  Miles  from  the  Sea-shore,  is 
fruitful  for  Trees :  and  for  the  same  Compass  within  the 
Land,  for  Corn  only:  but  then  for  30  Miles  in  Breadth,  and 
250  in  Length,  for  Laser.1  After  the  Nasamones  live  the 
Hasbitae  and  Masse.  Beyond  them  the  Hammanientes,  11 
Days'  Journey  from  the  Greater  Syrtis  to  the  West ;  and  even 
they  also  every  Way  are  compassed  about  with  Sands :  but 

1  The  plant  that  yielded  the  Cyrenaic  juice  called  Laser,  was  the 
Silphion  of  the  Greeks,  and  the  Laserpitium  of  the  Romans  (Thapsia 
Silphion,  Viviani),  and  agrees  tolerably  well  with  the  rude  figures  struck 
on  the  Cyrenean  coins.  It  would  appear,  however,  that  the  Cyrenaic 
juice  becoming  scarce,  the  ancients  employed  some  other  substance  of 
similar,  though  inferior  properties,  as  a  substitute,  and  to  both  of  them 
they  applied  the  term  Laser.  Pliny  (lib.  xix.  c.  3)  says,  "  For  a  long 
time  past  the  only  Laser  brought  to  us  is  that  which  is  produced  abun- 
dantly in  Persia,  &c.,  but  it  is  inferior  to  the  Cyrenaic."  Now  it  is  not  at 
all  improbable  that  the  Laser  of  Persia  may  have  been  our  Asafcedita 
(Ferula  Asafa>dita,  LIN.)  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  55 

they  find  without  much  difficulty  Wells  almost  in  the  Depth 
of  two  Cubits,  where  the  Waters  of  Mauritania  settle.  They 
build  themselves  Houses  of  Salt,  hewn  out  of  their  own 
Mountains  in  the  manner  of  Stone.  From  these  to  the  Tro- 
glodites,  in  the  South-west  Coast,  the  Country  is  four  Days' 
Journey ;  with  whom  is  a  Traffic  only  for  a  precious  Stone, 
which  we  call  a  Carbuncle,  brought  out  of  Ethiopia.  There 
cometh  between,  the  Country  Phazania  toward  the  Solitudes 
of  Africa,  above  the  said  Lesser  Syrtis :  where  we  subdued 
the  Nation  of  the  Phazanii,  with  the  Cities  Alele  and  Cillaba. 
Also  Cydamum,  over  against  the  region  of  Sabrata.  Next  to 
these  is  a  Mountain,  reaching  a  great  way  from  East  to 
West,  called  by  our  People  Ater,  as  if  burnt  by  Nature,  or 
scorched  by  the  reflection  of  the  Sun.  Beyond  that  Moun- 
tain are  the  Deserts :  also  Matelgse,  a  Town  of  the  Gara- 
mantes,  and  likewise  Debris,  which  casteth  forth  a  Fountain, 
the  Waters  boiling  from  Noon  to  Midnight,  and  for  as  many 
Hours  to  Mid-day  reducing  again :  also  the  very  illustrious 
Town  Garama,  the  head  of  the  Garamantes.  All  which 
Places  the  Roman  Arms  have  conquered,  and  over  them 
Cornelius  Balbus  triumphed ;  the  only  Man  of  Foreigners 
that  was  honoured  with  the  (Triumphant)  Chariot,  and  en- 
dowed with  the  Freedom  of  Roman  Citizens ;  because  being 
born  at  Gades,  he  and  his  Uncle,  Balbus  the  Elder,  were 
made  free  Denizens  of  Rome.  And  this  wonder  our  Writers 
have  recorded,  that  besides  the  Towns  above  named  by  him 
conquered,  himself  in  his  Triumph  carried  the  Names  and 
Images,  not  of  Cydamus  and  Garama  only,  but  also  of  all 
the  other  Nations  and  Cities ;  which  went  in  this  Order. 
The  Town  Tabidium,  the  Nation  Niteris  ;  the  Town  Neglige- 
mela,  the  Nation  Bubeium  ;  the  Town  Vel,  the  Nation  Enipi ; 
the  Town  Thuben,  the  Mountain  named  Niger;  the  Towns 
Nitibrum  and  Rapsa  ;  the  Nation  Discera,  the  Town  Debris ; 
the  River  Nathabur,  the  Town  Tapsagum,  the  Nation  Nan- 
nagi,  the  Town  Boin ;  the  Town  Pege,  the  River  Dasibari. 
Presently  these  Towns  lying  continuously,  Baracum,  Buluba, 
Alasi,  Balsa,  Galla,  Maxala,  and  Zinnia.  The  Mountain 
Gyri,  wherein  Titus  hath  reported  "that  precious  Stones 


56  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  V. 

were  produced.1  Hitherto  the  Way  to  the  Garamantes  was 
intricate,  by  reason  of  the  Robbers  of  that  Nation,  who  used 
to  dig  Pits  in  the  Way  (which  to  them  that  know  the  Places 
is  no  hard  matter  to  do)  and  then  cover  them  with  Sand. 
But  in  the  last  War  which  the  Romans  maintained  against  the 
Oeenses,  under  the  conduct  of  Vespasian  the  Emperor,  there 
was  found  a  short  Way  of  four  Days'  Journey  :  and  this  Way 
is  called  Prceter  caput  Saxi  [beside  the  Rock's  Head].  The 
Frontier  of  Cyrenaica  is  called  Catabathmos  ;  which  is  a  Town 
and  a  Valley  with  a  sudden  Descent.  To  this  Bound,  from 
the  Lesser  Syrtis,  Cyrenaica  Africa  lieth  in  Length  1060 
Miles,  and  in  Breadth,  for  so  much  as  is  known,  800. 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Libya  Mareotis. 

THE  Country  following  is  named  Mareotis  Libya,  bounded 
by  Egypt;  inhabited  by  the  Marmaridse,  Adyrmachidge,  and 
then  the  Mareotse.  The  Measure  from  Catabathmos  to  Pa- 
retonium  is  86  Miles.  In  that  Tract  there  lieth  in  the  way 
the  Village  Apis,  a  place  noble  for  the  Religion  of  Egypt. 
From  it  to  Parsetonium,  12  Miles.  From  thence  to  Alexan- 
dria, 200  Miles :  the  Breadth  is  169  Miles.  Eratosthenes 
hath  delivered,  That  from  Cyrenae  to  Alexandria  by  Land  the 
Journey  is  525  Miles.  Agrippa  saith,  that  the  Length  of  all 
Africa  from  the  Atlantic  Sea,  with  the  inferior  part  of  Egypt, 
containeth  3040  Miles.  Polybius  and  Eratosthenes,  reputed 
the  most  diligent,  have  set  down  from  the  Ocean  to  great 
Carthage  600  Miles  :  from  thence  to  Canopicum,  the  nearest 
Mouth  of  Nilus,  1630  Miles.  Isidorus  reckoneth  from  Tingi 
to  Canopus  3599  Miles ;  and  Artemidorus,  40  less  than 
Isiodorus. 

1  Some  editions  read  Titus  prodidit,  while  others  have  titulus  pracepit. 

In  the  triumph  of  Vespasian  and  Titus,  so  minutely  described  by 
Josephus  ("  Wars  of  the  Jews,"  book  vii.  cap.  5)  a  title  was  affixed  to 
the  several  images  carried  in  procession,  containing  the  names  of  the  con- 
quered nations  and  towns,  with  mention  of  their  chief  productions.— 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  57 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Islands  about  Africa,  and  over  against  Africa. 

THESE  Seas  do  not  contain  very  many  Islands.  The 
fairest  is  Meninx,  35  Miles  long  and  25  broad,  called  by 
Eratosthenes  Lotophagitis.  It  hath  two  Towns,  Meninx  on 
the  side  of  Africa,  and  Thoar  on  the  other :  itself  is  situated 
from  the  right-hand  Promontory  of  the  Lesser  Syrtis  200 
Paces.1  A  hundred  Miles  from  it  against  the  left  hand  is 
Cercina,  with  a  free  Town  of  the  same  Name,  in  Length  25 
Miles,  and  half  as  much  in  Breadth  where  it  is  most :  but 
toward  the  end  not  above  five  Miles.  To  it  there  lieth  a 
little  one  toward  Carthage  called  Cercinitis,  and  it  joineth 
by  a  Bridge.  From  these,  almost  50  Miles,  lieth  Lopadusa, 
six  Miles  long.  Then,  Gaulos  and  Galata,  the  Earth  of  which 
killeth  the  Scorpion,  a  dangerous  Creature  of  Africa.  They 
say  also  that  they  will  die  in  Clupea,  over  against  which 
lieth  Cosyra,  with  a  Town.  But  against  the  Bay  of  Car- 
thage are  the  two  ^ginori,  more  truly  Rocks  than  Islands, 
lying  for  the  most  part  between  Sicily  and  Sardinia.  Some 
write  that  these  were  inhabited,  but  sunk  down. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
The  JEthiopes. 

BUT  within  the  inner  Compass  of  Africa,  toward  the 
South,  and  above  the  Gsetuli,  where  the  Deserts  come  be- 
tween, the  first  People  that  inhabit  are  the  Libii  jEgyptii, 
and  then  the  Leucsethiopes.  Above  them  are  the  Ethiopian 
Nations  :  the  Nigritae,  from  whom  the  River  was  named  :  the 
Gyrnnetes,  Pharusi,  and  those  which  now  reach  to  the  Ocean, 
whom  we  spake  of  in  the  border  of  Mauritania  :  the  Perorsi. 
From  all  these  are  vast  Solitudes  eastward,  to  the  Gara- 
mantes,  Augylse,  and  Troglodites,  according  to  the  truest 
opinion  of  them  who  place  two  ^Ethiopias  above  the  Deserts 
of  Africa :  and  especially  of  Homer,  who  saith,  that  the 
Ethiopians  are  divided  two  ways,  towards  the  East  and 

1  Or  1500  paces,  i.  e.  a  mile  and  a  half. 


58  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

West.  The  River  Niger  is  of  the  same  nature  as  Nilus ; 
producing  the  Reed  and  Papyrus,  and  the  same  living  Crea- 
tures, and  swelleth  at  the  same  Seasons.  It  springeth  be- 
tween the  Tareleia  jEthiopiae,  and  the  Oecalicae.  The  Town 
Mavin,  belonging  to  this  People,  some  have  set  upon  the 
deserts  :  near  them  the  Atlantae ;  the  jEgipanae,  half  beasts  ; 
the  Blemmyae,  the  Gamphasantae,  Satyri,  and  Himantopodae. 
Those  Atlantae,  if  we  will  believe  it,  degenerate  from  Human 
Manners :  for  neither  call  they  one  another  by  any  Name  : 
and  they  look  upon  the  Sun,  rising  and  setting,  with  dread- 
ful curses,  as  being  pernicious  to  them  and  their  Fields  : 
neither  Dream  they  in  their  Sleep,  as  other  Men.  The 
Troglodites  dig  Caverns,  and  these  serve  them  for  Houses : 
they  feed  upon  the  Flesh  of  Serpents ;  they  make  a  gnash- 
ing Noise,  not  a  Voice,  so  little  exchange  have  they  of  Speech. 
The  Garamantes  live  out  of  Marriage,  and  converse  with 
their  Women  in  common.  The  Augylae  only  worship  the 
Infernal  Gods.  The  Gamphasantes  are  naked,  and  know  no 
Wars,  and  associate  with  no  Foreigner.  The  Blemmyae,  by 
report,  have  no  Heads,  but  their  Mouth  and  Eyes  fixed  in 
their  Breast.  The  Satyri,  besides  their  Shape,  have  nothing 
of  Human  Manners.  The  jEgipauae  are  shaped  as  you  see 
them  commonly  painted.  The  Himantopodae  are  some  of 
them  wry-legged,  with  which  they  naturally  go  creeping. 
The  Pharusi,  formerly  Persae,  are  said  to  have  been  the 
Companions  of  Hercules,  as  he  went  to  the  Hesperides. 
More  of  Africa  worth  the  noting  does  not  occur.1 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Of  Asia. 

UNTO  it  joineth  Asia,  which  from  the  Mouth  of  Canopus 
unto  the  Mouth  of  Pontus,  according  to  Timosthenes,  is  2639 
Miles.  But  from  the  Coast  of  Pontus  to  that  of  Maeotis, 
Eratosthenes  saith  it  is  1545  Miles.  The  whole,  together  with 
Egypt  unto  Tanais,  according  to  Artemidorus  and  Isidorus, 
taketh  8800  Miles.  Many  Seas  there  are  in  it,  taking  their 

1  Notes  on  these  alleged  varieties  of  the  human  form  will  be  found 
b.  vii.  c.  2 ;  see  also  b.  vi.  c.  30.  — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  59 

Names  from  the  Borderers ;  and  therefore  they  shall  he 
declared  together.  The  next  Country  to  Africa  that  is 
inhabited  is  Egypt,  receding  withinward  to  the  South,  so 
far  as  to  the  ^Ethiopians,  who  are  stretched  out  on  its  Back. 
The  Nilus  is  on  the  lower  part,  and  is  divided  on  the  Right 
'and  Left;  by  its  encircling  it.boundeth  it  with  the  Mouth 
of  Canopus  from  Africa,  and  with  the  Pelusiac  from  Asia, 
with  an  interval  of  170  Miles.  For  which  cause,  some  have 
reckoned  Egypt  among  the  Islands,  considering  that  Nilus 
doth  so  divide  itself  as  to  make  a  triangular  figure  of  the 
Land.  And  so,  many  have  called  Egypt  by  the  Name  of  the 
Greek  letter  Delta  (A).  The  Measure  of  it  from  the  Channel 
where  it  is  single,  from  whence  it  first  parteth  into  sides,  to 
the  Mouth  of  Canopus,  is  146  Miles  ;  and  to  the  Pelusiac  256. 
The  upmost  part  bounding  upon  ^Ethiopia,  is  called  Thebais. 
It  is  divided  into  Townships,  with  separate  Jurisdictions, 
which  they  call  Nomi :  as  Ombites,  Phatunites,  Apol- 
lopolites,  Hermonthites,  Thinites,  Phanturites,  Captites, 
Tentyrites,  Diospalites,  Antaeopolites,  Aphroditopolites,  and 
Lycopolites.  The  Country  about  Pelusium  hath  these  Nomi : 
Pharboetites,  Bubastites,  Sethroites,  and  Tanites.  But  the 
remainder,  the  Arabic,  the  Hammoniac  which  extendeth  to 
the  Oracle  of  Jupiter  Hammon,  Oxyrinchites,  Leontopolites, 
Atarrhabites,  Cynopolites,  Hermopolites,  Xoites,  Mendesius, 
Sebennites,  Capastites,  Latopolites,  Heliopolites,  Prosopites, 
Panopolites,  [Thermopolites,  Saithes?]  Busirites,  Onuphites, 
Sorites,  Ptenethu,  Pthernphu,  Naucratites,  Nitrites,  Gynae- 
copolites,  Menelaites,  in  the  Country  of  Alexandria.  In  like 
manner  of  Libya  Mareotis. '  Heracleopolites  is  in  an  Island  of 
Nilus,  50  Miles  long,  wherein  also  is  the  place  they  call  the 
Town  of  Hercules.  There  are  two  Arsinoetes;  they  and 
Memphites  reach  as  far  as  to  the  Head  of  Delta.  Upon  it  there 
border,  out  of  Africa,  the  two  Ouasitae.  There  are  Writers 
that  change  some  of  these  Names,  and  substitute  other  Nomi: 
as  Heroopolites,  and  Crocodilopolites.  Between  Arsinoetes 
and  Memphites  there  was  a  Lake  250  Miles  in  Circuit ;  or, 
as  Mutianus  saith,  450,  and  50  Paces  deep  (i.  e.  150  Feet), 
made  by  Hand  ;  called  the  Lake  Moeridis,  from  a  King  who 


60  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  V. 

made  it :  72  Miles  from  thence  is  Memphis,  the  Castle  in 
old  time  of  the  Egyptian  Kings.  From  which  to  the 
Oracle  of  Hammon  is  12  Days'  Journey  ;  and  to  the  Division 
of  Nilus,  which  we  have  called  Delta,  15  Miles.  The  Nilus, 
rising  from  unknown  Springs,  passeth  through  Deserts  and 
burning  Countries:  and  going  a  vast  way  in  Length,  is 
known  by  Fame  only,  without  Arms,  without  Wars,  which 
have  discovered  all  other  Lands.  It  hath  its  beginning,  so 
far  as  King  Juba  was  able  to  search,  in  a  Mountain  of  the 
lower  Mauritania,  not  far  from  the  Ocean,  near  to  a  stag- 
nant Lake,  which  they  call  Nilides.  In  it  are  found  the 
Fishes  called  Alabetae,1  Coracini,  Siluri,  and  also  the  Cro- 
codile. Upon  this  argument  the  Nilus  is  thought  to  spring 
from  hence,  for  that  it  is  seen  dedicated  by  him  at  Csesarea, 
in  Iseum,  at  this  day.  Moreover,  it  is  observed,  that  as  the 
Snow  or  Rain  fills  the  Country  in  Mauritania,  so  the  Nilus 
increases.  When  it  is  run  out  of  this  Lake,  it  scorneth 
to  pass  through  the  sandy  and  unclean  Places,  and  hideth 
itself  for  some  Days'  Journey.  By  and  by  out  of  another 
greater  Lake  it  breaketh  forth  in  the  Country  of  the  Mas- 
ssesyli,  of  Mauritania  Csesariensis  ;  and  as  if  it  looks  about  for 
the  Company  of  Men,  with  the  same  arguments  of  living 
Creatures,  again  becomes  received  within  the  Sands,  where 
it  is  hidden  a  second  time  for  20  Days'  Journey  in  the 
Deserts,  as  far  as  to  the  next  ^Ethiopse :  and  so  soon  as  it 
hath  again  espied  a  Man,  forth  it  leapeth  (as  it  should  seem) 
out  of  that  Spring,  which  they  called  Nigris.  And  then 
dividing  Africa  from  ^Ethiopia,  being  acquainted,  if  not  pre- 
sently with  people,  yet  with  the  frequent  company  of  wild  and 
savage  Beasts,  and  creating  the  shade  of  Woods,  it  cutteth 

1  The  first  named,  Alabes  or  Alabetse,  is  a  species  of  Lota  of  Cuvier, 
or  Burbot :  though  perhaps  not  the  same  with  the  fish  of  that  name  that 
inhabits  the  fresh  waters  of  Europe.  The  name  Coracinus  has  been 
applied  to  more  than,  one  fish  of  a  sooty  colour :  but  the  species  referred 
to  by  Pliny  is  probably  the  Perca  Nilotica  of  Linnaeus :  the  Lates  Nilo- 
ticus  of  Cuvier.  The  Silurus  of  Pliny  is  perhaps  a  species  of  Cuvier's 
genus  Schilbe,  although  true  Siluri  are  found  in  the  Nile.  The  Croco- 
dile will  be  more  particularly  referred  to  in  another  place. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  61 

through  the  midst  of  the  ^Ethiopians :  there  surnamed 
Astapus,  which  in  the  Language  of  those  Nations  signifieth 
a  Water  flowing  out  of  Darkness.  Thus  dasheth  it  upon 
such  an  innumerable  Multitude  of  Islands,  and  some  of  them 
so  very  great,  that  although  it  bear  a  swift  Stream,  yet  is  it 
not  able  to  pass  beyond  them  in  less  space  than  five  Days. 
About  the  fairest  of  them,  Meroe,  the  Channel  going  on  the 
Left  is  called  Astabores,  which  is,  the  Branch  of  a  Water 
coming  forth  from  Darkness :  but  that  on.  the  Right  is 
Astusapes,  which  adds  the  signification  of  Lying  hid.  And 
it  never  taketh  the  Name  of  Nilus,  until  its  Waters  meet 
again  and  accord  together.  And  even  so  was  it  formerly 
named  Siris  for  many  Miles:  and  by  Homer  altogether 
jEgyptus :  by  others,  Triton :  here  and  there  hitting  upon 
Islands,  and  stirred  with  so  many  Provocations :  and  at  the 
last  enclosed  within  Mountains :  and  in  no  place  is  it  more  a 
Torrent,  while  the  Water  that  it  beareth  hasteneth  to  a 
Place  of  the  .ZEthiopii  called  Catadupi,  where  in  the  last 
Cataract  among  the  opposing  Rocks  it  is  supposed  not  to 
run,  but  to  rush  down  with  a  mighty  Noise.  But  afterwards 
it  becometh  gentle,  as  the  Stream  is  broken  and  the  violence 
subdued  and  partly  wearied  with  his  long  way :  and  so, 
though  with  many  Mouths,  it  dischargeth  itself  into  the 
Egyptian  Sea.  Nevertheless,  on  certain  Days  it  swelleth 
to  a  great  height :  and  when  it  hath  travelled  through  all 
Egypt,  it  overfloweth  the  Land,  to  its  great  Fertility.  Dif- 
ferent causes  of  this  Increase  have  been  given  :  but  those 
which  carry  the  most  probability  are  either  the  rebounding 
of  the  Water  driven  back  by  the  Etesian  Winds,  at  that  time 
blowing  against  it,  and  driving  the  Sea  upon  the  Mouths  of 
the  River :  or  the  Summer  Rain  in  ^Ethiopia,  by  reason 
that  the  same  Etesian  Winds  bring  Clouds  thither  from 
other  parts  of  the  World.  Timceus  the  Mathematician 
alleged  an  hidden  reason  for  it,  which  is,  that  the  Foun- 
tain of  the  Nilus  is  named  Phiala,  and  the  River  itself  is 
hidden  within  Trenches  under  the  Ground,  breathing  forth 
in  a  Vapour  out  of  reeking  Rocks,  where  it  lieth  concealed. 
But  so  soon  as  the  Sun  during  those  Days  cometh  near,  it  is 


62  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

drawn  up  by  the  force  of  Heat,  and  while  it  hangeth  aloft  it 
overfloweth :  and  then,  lest  it  should  be  devoured,  it  hideth 
again.  And  this  happeneth  from  the  rising  of  the  Dog 
through  the  Sun's  entrance  into  Leo,  while  the  Star  standeth 
perpendicularly  over  the  Fountain  :  when  in  that  Tract  there 
are  no  Shadows  to  be  seen.  Many  again  were  of  a  different 
Opinion :  that  a  River  floweth  more  abundantly  when  the 
Sun  is  departed  toward  the  North  Pole,  which  happeneth  in 
Cancer  and  Leo,  and  therefore  at  that  time  it  is  not  so  easily 
dried :  but  when  it  is  returned  again  toward  Capricorn  and 
the  South  Pole,  it  is  drunk  up,  and  therefore  floweth  more 
sparily.  But  if,  according  to  Timceus,  it  would  be  thought 
possible  that  the  Water  should  be  drawn  up,  the  want  of 
Shadows  during  those  Days,  and  in  those  Places,  continueth 
still  without  end.  For  the  River  beginneth  to  increase  at 
the  New  Moon,  that  is  after  the  Solstice,  by  little  and  little 
gently,  so  long  as  the  Sun  passeth  through  Cancer,  but  most 
abundantly  when  he  is  in  Leo.  And  when  he  is  entered 
into  Virgo  it  falleth  in  the  same  measure  as  it  rose  before. 
And  it  is  altogether  brought  within  its  banks  in  Libra,  as 
Herodotus  thinketh,  by  the  hundredth  day.  While  it  riseth 
it  hath  been  thought  unlawful  for  Kings  or  Governors  to  sail 
upon  it.  Its  increasings  are  measured  by  Marks  in  certain 
Pits.  The  ordinary  Height  is  sixteen  Cubits.  The  Waters 
short  of  this  do  not  overflow  all ;  when  more  than  that  they 
are  a  hinderance,  by  reason  that  they  retire  more  slowly.  By 
these  the  Seed  Time  is  consumed,  by  the  Earth  being  too 
Wet ;  by  the  other  there  is  none,  because  the  Ground  is 
Thirsty.  The  Province  taketh  reckoning  of  both.  For 
in  12  Cubits  it  findeth  Famine :  at  13  it  feeleth  Hunger  ;  14 
Cubits  comfort  their  Hearts;  15  bring  Safety;  and  16 
Dainties.  The  greatest  Increase  that  ever  was  known  until 
these  Days  was  18  Cubits,  in  the  time  of  Prince  Claudius  : 
and  the  least,  in  the  Pharsalian  War :  as  if  the  River  by 
that  Prodigy  turned  away  with  horror  from  the  Slaughter  of 
that  great  Man.1  When  the  Waters  have  stood,  they  are 

1  Pompey  the  Great,  slain  by  treachery  in  Egypt. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  63 

admitted  by  opening  the  Flood-gates.  And  so  soon  as  any 
part  of  the  Land  is  freed  from  the  Water  it  is  sowed.  This 
is  the  only  River,  of  all  others,  that  breatheth  out  no  Air. 
The  Dominion  of  Egypt  beginneth  at  Syene,from  the  Frontier 
of  Ethiopia,  for  that  is  the  Name  of  a  Peninsula  a  hundred 
Miles  in  Compass,  wherein  are  the  Cerastae  upon  the  side  of 
Arabia :  and  over  against  it  the  four  Islands  Philae,  600 
Miles  from  the  Division  of  Nilus,  where  it  began  to  be  called 
Delta,  as  we  have  said.  This  space  of  Ground  hath  Arte- 
midorus  published  ;  and  that  within  it  were  250  Towns. 
Juba  setteth  down  400  Miles.  Aristocreon  saith,  That  from 
Elephantis  to  the  Sea  is  750  Miles.  The  Island  Elephantis 
is  Inhabited  beneath  the  lowest  Cataract  three  Miles,  and 
above  Syene  16  :  and  is  the  utmost  Point  that  the  Egyp- 
tians sail  unto.  It  is  586  Miles  from  Alexandria.  So  far 
the  Authors  above  written  have  erred  :  there  the  .^Ethiopian 
Ships  assemble ;  for  they  are  made  to  fold  up  together,  and 
are  carried  upon  Shoulders,  so  often  as  they  come  to  those 
Cataracts.  Egypt,  above  the  other  glory  of  Antiquity, 
pretends  that  in  the  Reign  of  King  Amasis  there  were  in- 
habited in  it  20,000  Cities.  And  even  at  this  Day  it  is  full 
of  them,  though  of  base  account.  Nevertheless,  that  of 
Apollo  is  renowned  ;  and  near  to  it  that  of  Leucothea,  and 
Diospolis1  the  Great,  the  same  as  Thebes,  noble  for  the 
Fame  of  its  Hundred  Gates.  Also,  Captos,  a  great  commer- 
cial Town  very  near  to  Nilus,  frequented  for  Merchandise  of 
India  and  Arabia.  Near  is  the  Town  of  Venus,  and  another 
of  Jupiter ;  and  Tentyris,  beneath  which  standeth  Abydus, 
the  royal  Seat  of  Memnon  ;  and  renowned  for  the  Temple  of 
Osiris,  seven  Miles  and  a  half  distant  from  the  River,  toward 
Lybia.  Then  Ptolemais,  Panopolis,  and  another  of  Venus. 
Also  in  the  Lybian  Coast,  Lycon,  where  Mountains  bound 
Thebais.  After  these,  the  Towns  of  Mercury,  Alabastron, 
Canum,  and  that  of  Hercules  spoken  of  before.  After  these, 
Arsinoe,  and  the  abovesaid  Memphis,  between  which  and 
the  Nomos  Arsinoetes,  in  the  Lybian  Coast,  are  the  Towns 
called  Pyramids ;  the  Labyrinth  built  up  out  of  the  Lake 

1  .The  city  of  Jupiter. 


64  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

Moeris  without  any  Timber  to  it;  and  the  Town  Crialon. 
One  besides,  standing  within  and  bounding  upon  Arabia, 
called  the  Town  of  the  Sun  :  of  great  importance. 

CHAPTER  X. 
Alexandria.1 

BUT  justly  worthy  of  praise  is  Alexandria,  standing  upon 
the  Coast  of  the  Egyptian  Sea,  built  by  Alexander  the  Great 
on  the  Part  of  Africa,  12  Miles  from  the  Mouth  of  Canopus, 
near  to  the  Lake  Mareotis :  which  Lake  was  formerly  called 
Arapotes.2  Dinochares,  the  Architect,  renowned  for  his 
remarkable  Ability  in  many  ways,  laid  out  the  Plan  with 
the  great  Extent  of  the  Circuit  of  15  Miles,  according  to  the 
Shape  of  a  Macedonian  Cloak  ;  full  of  Plaits,  with  the  Circuit 
waved  on  to  the  right  Hand  and  on  the  left  with  an  angular 
Extension;  and  yet,  even  then,  he  assigned  one-fifth  Part  of 
this  Space  for  the  King's  Palace,  The  Lake  Mareotis3  from 
the  South  Side  of  the  City,  meeteth  with  an  Arm  of  the  River 
Nilus,  brought  from  out  of  the  Mouth  of  the  said  River 
called  Canopicus,  for  the  more  commodious  Commerce  out 
of  the  inland  Continent.  This  Lake  containeth  within  it 
sundry  Islands,  and,  according  to  Claudius  Ccesar,  it  is  30 

1  Alexandria  is  connected  with  much  that  is  interesting  in  the  estima- 
tion of  the  Christian  and  philosopher.    It  was  built  B.C.  331,  and  became 
the  capital  of  Egypt  under  the  Ptolemies ;  at  a  subsequent  period,  its 
library  was  the  most  renowned  in  the  world ;  its  school  rose  into  high 
repute  during  the  second  and  third  centuries ;  it  long  continued  a  flou- 
rishing bishopric  of  the  early  Christian  Church  (having  been  planted  by 
St.  Mark),  and  was  the  scene  of  many  Christian  persecutions  in  common 
with  the  rest  of  the  empire.     Of  the  ancient  city  little  remains,  the  only 
monuments  of  its  extent  and  grandeur  being,  as  Dr.  Robinson  relates, 
"  a  few  cisterns  still  in  use,  the  catacombs  on  the  shore,  the  granite  obelisk 
of  Thothmes  III.,  with  its  fallen  brother,  brought  hither  from  Heliopolis, 
and  usually  called  '  Cleopatra's  Needle ; '  and  the  column  of  Dioclesian, 
commonly  called  'Pompey's  Pillar.'" — Wern.  Club. 

2  Or,  Rachobes. 

3  ( Various  reading.}  —  "  The  Lake  Mareotis,  from  the  south  part  of 
the  city,  by  an  arm  of  the  sea,  is  sent  through  the  mouth  of  Canopus  for 
inland  traffic ;  it  also  embraces  many  islands,  and  is  30  miles  in  breadth, 
and  150  in  circuit,  as  Claudius  Ccesar  says."  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  65 

Miles  over.  Others  say,  that  it  lieth  in  Length  40  Schceni ; 
and  as  every  Schoenus  is  30  Stadia,  it  cometh  to  be  150 
Miles  long,  and  as  many  broad.  There  are  many  Towns  of 
importance  standing  upon  the  Course  of  the  River  Nilus, 
and  those  especially  which  have  given  Names  to  the  Mouths, 
not  to  all  those  (for  there  are  11  of  them,  besides  4  more, 
which  they  themselves  call  false  Mouths),  but  to  the  most 
celebrated  7 :  as,  to  that  of  Canopus,  next  to  Alexandria ; 
then  Bolbitinum,  Sebenniticum,  Phatniticum,  Mendesicum, 
Taniticum,  and  last,  Pelusiacum  ;  besides,  Euros,  Pharboetos, 
Leontopolis,  Athribis,  the  Town  of  Isis,  Busiris,  Cynopolis, 
Aphrodites,  Sais,  Naucratis,  whence  some  name  the  Mouth 
Naucraticum,  which  others  call  Heracleoticum,  preferring  it 
before  Canopicum,  next  to  which  it  standeth. 

CHAPTER  XL 
Arabia. 

BEYOND  the  Pelusiac  Mouth  is  Arabia,  bordering  on  the 
Red  Sea :  and  that  Arabia,  so  rich  and  odoriferous,  and  re- 
nowned with  the  Surname  of  Happy.  This  Desert  Arabia  is 
possessed  by  the  Catabanes,  Esbonitae,  and  Scenite  Arabians  : 
barren,  except  where  it  toucheth  the  Confines  of  Syria,  and, 
setting  aside  the  Mountain  Casius,  nothing  memorable.  This 
Region  is  joined  to  the  Arabians,  Canchlei  on  the  East  Side, 
and  to  the  Cedrsei  Southward ;  and  they  both  are  joined 
afterwards  with  the  Nabathsei.  Moreover,  two  Bays  there 
be,  one  Bay  is  called  that  of  Heroopoliticus,  and  the  other, 
Elaniticus  :  in  the  Red  Sea,  bordering  on  Egypt,  150  Miles 
distant,  between  two  Towns,  Elana  and  Gaza,  which  is  in  our 
[Mediterranean]  Sea.  Agrippa  counteth  from  Pelusium  to 
Arsinoe,  a  Town  upon  the  Red  Sea,  through  the  Deserts,  an 
hundred  and  five-and-twenty  Miles.  So  small  a  Way  lieth 
between  things  of  such  Difference  in  Nature. 

CHAPTER  XII. 
Syria,  Palcestina,  Pkcenict. 

NEAR  the  Coast  is  Syria,  a  Region  which  in  Times  past 
was  the  chiefest  of  Lands,  and  distinguished  by  many  Names. 

VOL.  II,  F 


66  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

For  where  it  toucheth  upon  the  Arabians,  it  was  called  Pales- 
tine.,1 Judaea,  Coele  (Syria) ;  and  afterward,  Phoenice  :  and 
where  it  passes  inward,  Damascena.  Still  further  south- 
wards, it  is  named  Babylonia.  And  the  same  between  the 
Rivers  Euphrates  and  Tigris  is  called  Mesopotamia,  and 
when  it  passeth  the  Mountain  Taurus,  it  is  Sophene  :  but  on 
this  Side  Comagene,  and  beyond  Armenia,  is  Adiabene, 
formerly  named  Assyria  ;  and  where  it  meets  Cilicia,  it  is 
known  by  the  Name  of  Antiochia.  The  whole  Length  of 
Syria  between  Cilicia  and  Arabia  is  470  Miles  :  the  Breadth 
from  Seleucia  Pieria  to  Zeugma,  a  Town  seated  upon  the 
Euphrates,  is  175  Miles.  They  that  minutely  divide  it 
would  have  Phoenice  to  be  environed  with  Syria ;  and  that 
it  is  the  Sea-coast  of  Syria,  a  Part  of  which  compriseth 
Idumaea  and  Judaea :  then  Phoenice,  and  then  Syria.  And 
that  Sea  which  lieth  along  that  Coast  beareth  the  Name  of 
the  Phoenician  Sea.  This  Nation  of  the  Phoenicians  hath 
had  great  Glory  for  the  Invention  of  Letters,  and  for  the  Arts 
of  the  Stars,  Navigation,  and  Skill  in  War.  Beyond  Pelu- 
sium  is  Chabriae  Castra,  the  Mountain  Casius,  the  Temple  of 
Jupiter  Casius,  the  Tomb  of  Pompeius  Magnus;  and  Ostra- 
cine.  From  Pelusium  to  the  Frontiers  of  Arabia  are  65 
Miles. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
Idum&af  Syria,  Palcestina,  Samaria. 

SOON  after  beginneth  Idumaea  and  Palestina,  from  the 
Rising  up  of  the  Lake  Sirbon,  which  some  have  reported  to 

1  The  following  division  of  Palestine  under  the  Romans  will  throw 
light  upon  the  comments  which  follow  : — 

Palestina  Prima,      Kingdom  of  Judah  (Judaea)  and  Samaria. 
Palestina  Secunda,  Galilee  and  Trachonitis. 
Palestina  Tertia,     Peraea  and  Idumaea  Proper. 

Wern.  Club. 

2  Idumaea  comprised  the  country  in  the  southern  extremity  of  Judaea, 
and  embraced  also  a  part  of  Arabia,  which,  from  having  been  left  nearly 
depopulated  during  the  Babylonian  captivity,  was  seized  upon  by  the 
Idumseans,  and  continued  to  be  called  Idumaea  in  common  with  Iduma3a 


BOOK  V,]  History  of  Nature.  67 

possess  a  circuit  of  150  Miles.  Herodotus  saith  it  lies  close 
by  the  Mountain  Casius  ;  but  now  it  is  a  small  Lake.  The 
Towns  are  Rhinocolura ;  and  within  the  Land,  Rapheea :  also 
Gaza,  and  within,  Anthedon,  and  the  Mountain  Angoris. 
Samaria,  the  Region  through  the  Coast ;  the  free  Town 
Ascalon,  and  Azotus  :  the  two  Jamnes,  whereof  one  is  within 
the  Land  ;  and  Joppe,  in  Phoanicia,  which,  by  report,  is 
more  ancient  than  the  Deluge  over  the  Earth.1  It  is  situated 
upon  a  Hill,  with  a  Rock  before  it,  in  which  they  shew  the 
Remains  of  the  Chains  of  Andromeda.  There  the  fabulous 
Derccto  is  worshipped.  Then  is  Apollonia  ;  the  Town  of 
Strato,  called  also  Caesarea,  founded  by  Kmgfferod:  itbeareth 
now  the  Name  of  Prima  Flavia,  a  Colony  derived  from  Ves- 
pasian the  Emperor.  The  Bounds  of  Paleestina  are  180  Miles 
from  the  Confines  of  Arabia :  and  there  entereth  Phoanice. 
But  within-land  are  the  Towns  of  Samaria,  and  Neapolis, 
which  formerly  was  named  Mainortha  [or  Maxbota].  Also 
Sebaste  upon  the  Mountain,  and  Gamala,  which  yet  standeth 
higher  than  it. 

Proper,  to  a  later  period  than  the  date  of  our  author.  The  bounds  of 
Palestine,  in  the  time  of  the  Romans,  embraced  Judaea,  Samaria,  Galilee, 
and  Trachonitis  ;  and  Perasa  and  Idumsea.  —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Mandeville,  who  travelled  through  these  countries  about  the  year 
1323,  and  collected  all  the  information  that  fell  in  his  way,  without  discri- 
mination, says :  "  And  whoso  wil  go  longe  tyme  on  the  See,  and  come 
nerrer  to  Jerusalem,  he  schal  go  fro  Cipre,  be  see,  to  the  Port  Jaff.  For 
that  is  the  nexte  Havene  to  Jerusalem.  For  fro  that  Havene  is  not  but 
o  Day  Journeye  and  an  half  to  Jerusalem.  And  the  Town  is  called  Jaff : 
for  on  of  the  Sones  of  Noe,  that  highte  Japhet,  founded  it ;  and  now  it  is 
clept  Joppe.  And  zee  schulle  undrestonde,  that  it  is  on  of  the  oldest 
Townes  of  the  World :  for  it  was  founded  before  Noes  Flode.  And  zitt 
there  schewethe  in  the  Roche  ther,  as  the  Irene  cheynes  were  festned, 
that  Andromade,  a  great  Geaunt,  was  bounden  with,  and  put  in  Presoun 
before  Noes  Flode :  of  the  whiche  Geaunt,  is  a  rib  of  his  Syde,  that  his  40 
Fote  longe."  In  the  Ethiopics  of  Heliodorus,  book  x.,  the  Ethiopic  kings 
are  said  to  derive  their  pedigree  from  Perseus  and  Andromeda ;  whose 
history  is  by  Pliny  treated  as  something  more  than  a  fable.  But  the 
mistake  of  Mandeville,  in  confounding  Andromeda  with  the  monster 
that  was  to  have  devoured  her,  is  perfectly  consistent  with  other  errors 
in  regard  to  the  Scriptures  and  classical  learning,  which  occur  in  his 
narrative.  —  Wcrv.  Club. 


68  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  V . 

CHAPTER  XIV.1 
Judaea  and  Galilcsa. 

ABOVE  Idumaea  and  Samaria,  Judaea  spreadeth  out  far  in 
Length  and  Breadth.  That  part  of  it  which  joineth  to  Syria, 
is  called  Galilaea :  but  that  which  is  next  to  Syria  and  Egypt 
is  named  Peraea  [/.  e.  beyond  Jordan]  :  full  of  rough  Moun- 
tains dispersed  here  and  there :  and  separated  from  the  other 
Parts  of  Judaea  by  the  River  Jordan.  The  rest  of  Judaea  is 
divided  into  ten  Toparchies,  which  we  will  speak  of  in  order: 
of  Hiericho,  planted  with  Date-trees  ;  Emmaus,  well  watered 
with  Fountains;  Lydda,  Joppica,  Accrabatena,  Gophnitica, 
Thamnitica,  Betholen£,  Tephene,  and  Orine,  wherein  stood 
Hierosolyma,  by  far  the  most  illustrious  of  the  Cities  of  the 
East,  and  not  of  Judaea  only.  In  it  also  is  the  Toparchy 
Herodium,  with  a  famous  Town  of  the  same  Name. 

CHAPTER  XV. 
The  River  Jordan* 

THE  River  Jordanis  springeth  from  the  Fountain  Pane- 
ades,  which  gave  the  Surname  to  Caesarea,  whereof  we  will 

1  This  chapter  should  properly  have  been  embodied  with  the  pre- 
ceding, which  treats  of  Palestine,  that  name  having  been  applied  by  the 
Greeks  to  the  whole  country  on  account  of  the  number  of  the  Philistines 
always  within  its  bounds,  both  before  and  after  the  final  conquest  of  that 
people  by  David  and  Solomon.   "  Judaea,"  in  its  real  signification,  implies 
the  whole  of  the  country  inhabited  by  the  Jews,  in  fact,  the  whole  "  Land 
of  Promise,"  from  Dan  to  Beersheba  in  length,  and  including  the  region 
allotted  to  the  two  tribes  and  a  half  on  the  other  side  Jordan ;  the  term 
was  originally  synonymous  with  "  the  land  of  Judah,"  but  on  the  separa- 
tion of  the  ten  tribes,  the  latter  term  was  applied  to  the  territories  of 
Judah  and  Benjamin,  then  formed  into  a  separate  kingdom,  and  hence 
"  Judaea  "  also  came  to  be  applied  to  that  district  in  particular.     Pliny  is 
also  in  error  in  speaking  of  Judaea  as  "  spreading  out  far  in  length  above 
Idumaea  and  Samaria"  inasmuch  as  Samaria  occupies  the  central  portion 
of  Judaea  itself,  and  there  is,  therefore,  an  evident  contradiction  in  the 
description. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  This  river  rises  at  Caesarea  Philippi;  its  length  is  100  miles  or  there- 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  69 

speak.  It  is  a  pleasant  River,  and  so  far  as  the  Situation  of 
the  Country  will  permit,  spacious,  offering  itself  to  the 
neighbouring  Inhabitants ;  and  reluctantly,  as  it  were,  it 
passeth  to  the  Lake  Asphaltites,  cursed  by  Nature  :  by  which 
it  is  swallowed  up ;  it  loseth  its  own  esteemed  Waters,  by 
their  becoming  mixed  with  those  of  the  Pestilential  Lake. 
And  therefore  upon  the  first  opportunity  of  any  Valleys,  it 
poureth  itself  into  a  Lake,  which  many  call  Genesara,  which 
is  16  Miles  Long  and  6  Broad.  This  is  environed  with 
beautiful  Towns :  on  the  East  side  with  Julias  and  Hippo ; 
on  the  South  with  Tarichea,  by  which  Name  the  Lake  is  by 
some  called ;  and  on  the  West  with  Tiberias,  an  healthful 
Place  on  account  of  the  Hot  Waters. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Asphaltites. 

ASPHALTITES1  produceth  nothing  besides  Bitumen ;  from 
whence  the  name.  No  Body  of  any  Creature  doth  it  receive  : 
Bulls  and  Camels  float  upon  it.  Arid  hence  ariseth  the 

abouts,  and  its  embouchure  is  into  the  Dead  Sea ;  its  inner  banks,  to  within 
a  few  miles  of  this  place,  are  covered  with  willows,  oleanders,  reeds,  &c.  &c. 
whilst  its  periodical  overflowings  have  formed  a  wider  channel,  denned  by 
a  second  or  outer  bank  on  either  side. —  Wem.  Club. 

1  Asphaltites^  in  other  words  the  bituminous  lake,  from  the  abund- 
ance of  asphalt  (bitumen)  which  occurs  in  it.  Dr.  Shaw  estimated  its 
length  at  72  English  miles,  and  its  Breadth  19  miles.  Dr.  Robinson, 
however,  estimates  its  length  at  only  50,  and  its  average  breadth  10  or  12 
miles.  The  constituents  of  the  water  of  the  Dead  Sea  are  as  follows  :— 

Muriate  of  lime      3-920  grains. 

Muriate  of  magnesia     10-246     " 

Muriate  of  soda      19-360     " 

Sulphate  of  lime    0-054     " 

34-580  grains  in  each  100. 

Several  analyses  have  been  made  by  Marat,  Gay-Lussac,  Gmelin,  &c., 
with  nearly  the  same  result.  The  origin  of  this  lake  accounts  for  the 
above  facts,  and  the  phenomena  by  which  it  is  surrounded  equally  evi- 
dence its  truth — sterility  in  land,  water,  and  air,  are  its  saddening  cha- 
racters. It  is  reputed  to  be  very  shallow,  which  seems  to  be  a  mistake. 
It  also  bore  the  name  of  the  "  Sea  of  the  Plain."  The  history  of  this 
lake  is  best  seen  in  the  Bible.—  Wern.  Club. 


70  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

Report  that  nothing  will  sink  in  it.  This  Lake  in  Length 
exceedeth  100  Miles,  in  Breadth  25  Miles  where  broadest, 
and  6  where  narrowest.  On  the  East,  Arabia  of  the 
Nomades  confronteth  it ;  and  on  the  South,  Machserus,  in 
Time  past  the  second  Fortress  of  Judaea,  next  to  Hierosolyma. 
On  the  same  side  is  a  Fountain  of  Hot  Waters,  useful  in 
Medicine,  named  Callirhoe ;  a  Name  that  expresseth  the 
Glory  of  the  Waters. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
The  Race  of  the  Esstni. 

ALONG  the  West  Coast  retire  the  Esseni  i1  a  Nation  living- 
alone,  and  beyond  all  others  throughout  the  World  wonder- 
ful: without  any  Women,  casting  off  the  whole  of  Venus  : 
without  Money :  keeping  company  only  with  Date-trees. 
Yet  the  Country  is  ever  well  peopled,  because  daily  numbers 
of  Strangers  resort  thither  from  other  Parts :  and  such  as 
are  weary  of  Life  are  by  the  Waves  of  Fortune  driven  thither 
to  their  manner  of  Living.  Thus  for  thousands  of  Ages 
(beyond  belief  to  say),  the  Race  is  eternal  in  which  no  one  is 
Born  :  so  prolific  to  them  is  the  Repentance  of  Life  of  other 
Men.  Beneath  them  stood  the  Town  Engadda,  for  Fertility 
(of  Soil)  and  Groves  of  Date-trees  the  next  City  to  Hiero- 
solyma, now  a  Place  for  the  Dead.  Beyond  it  is  Massada, 
a  Castle  upon  a  Rock,  and  not  far  from  Asphaltites.  And 
thus  much  concerning  Judaea. 

1  The  Essenes  were  a  Jewish  sect,  divided  into  two  classes.  First,  the 
practical,  who  lived  in  society,  and  applied  themselves  to  husbandry  and 
other  harmless  occupations ;  and  second,  the  contemplative,  who  were  also 
called  therapeutce,  or  physicians,  from  their  application  principally  to  the 
cure  of  the  diseases  of  the  soul ;  these  last  devoted  themselves  wholly  to 
meditation,  and  avoided  living  in  great  towns,  as  unfavourable  to  a  con- 
templative life.  Both  classes  were  exceedingly  abstemious,  and  highly 
exemplary  in  their  moral  deportment.  Although  our  Saviour  censured 
all  the  other  sects  of  the  Jews  for  their  vices,  yet  He  never  spoke  of  the 
Essenes ;  neither  are  they  mentioned  by  name  in  any  part  of  the  New 
Testament.  Pliny's  object  in  the  account  he  has  thought  fit  to  give  of 
them  appears  to  have  been  to  say  something  that  might  excite  wonder 
and  ridicule. —  Wern.  Club, 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  71 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Decapolis. 

THERE  is  joined  to  it  on  the  side  of  Syria  the  Region 
Decapolis,1  so  called  from  the  number  of  Towns ;  in  which 
all  Men  observe  not  the  same.  Nevertheless  most  Men 
speak  of  Damascus  and  Opotos,  watered  by  the  River  Chry- 
sorrhoa,  and  also  of  the  fruitful  Philadelphia  arid  Raphana, 
all  lying  within  Arabia.  Moreover,  of  Scythopolis,  so  named 
from  the  Scythians  there  planted :  and  formerly  Mysa,  so 
named  of  Father  Liber,  because  his  Nurse  was  buried  there. 
Gadara,  with  the  River  Hieromiax  running  before  it,  and 
the  before-named  Hippos  Dios.  Pella,  enriched  with 
Waters,  Galaza  and  Canatha.  The  Tetrarchies  lie  between 
and  about  these  Cities ;  every  one  resembling  a  Region  :  and 
they  are  reduced  into  several  Kingdoms :  Trachonitis,  Panias, 
wherein  standeth  Caesarea,  with  the  Fountain  abovesaid ; 
Abila,  Area,  Ampeloessa,  and  Gab&. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Tyrus*  and  Sidon. 

WE  must  return  to  the  Sea-coast  of  Phcenic£,  where  a 
River  runneth  called  Crocodilon,  on  which  stood  a  Town 
bearing  the  same  Name.  Also  there  are  the  Memorials  of 
the  Cities,  Dorum,  Sycaminon,  the  Promontory  Carmelum  ; 
and  a  Town  on  the  Mountain  so  named,  but  in  old  Time 
called  Ecbatana.  Near  this  is  Getta  and  Jebba :  the  River 
Pagida  or  Belus,  mixing  on  its  little  Shore  the  Sands  fertile 
in  Glass.  This  River  floweth  out  of  the  stagnant  pond  Ceu- 
devia,  from  the  foot  of  Carmel.  Near  it  is  the  City  Ptole- 

1  Josephus  mentions  the  following  cities  as  contained  within  this 
region :— Pella,  Gerasa,  Gadara,  Hippos  Dios,  Damascus,  Philadelphia, 
Otopos,  Raphana,  and  Scythopolis. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  There  were  two  cities  of  this  name ;  one  on  the  Syrian  coast  of  the 
Continent  (vide  Bishop  Newton),  and  the  other  on  an  adjacent  island, 
which,  in  our  author,  are  both  spoken  of  together.    Tyre  has  been  called 
the  daughter  of  Sidon,  because  "  The  merchants  of  Sidon  replenished 
it."— (Isaiah,  xxiii.  2.)—  Wern.  Club. 


72  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

mais,  a  Colony  of  Claudius  Ccesar,  formerly  called  Ace. 
The  Town  Ecdippa  ;  the  Promontory  Album  ;  Tyrus,  in  old 
Time  an  Island,  lying  almost  three  quarters  of  a  Mile  within 
the  Deep  Sea :  but  now,  by  the  Besieging  Works  of  Alexander, 
joined  to  the  firm  Land :  renowned  for  having  produced 
Cities  of  ancient  Name,  Leptis,  Utica,  and  that  Carthage, 
the  Rival  of  the  Empire  of  Rome  for  the  Dominion  of  the 
whole  World  :  yea  and  Gades,  founded  beyond  the  Bounds 
of  the  Earth.  But  now  all  the  Glory  thereof  standeth  upon 
the  (Shell-fishes)  Chylium  and  Purpura.1  The  Circumference 
of  it  is  19  Miles,  comprised  within  Palaetyrus.  The  Town 
itself  taketh  up  22  Stadia.  Near  it  are  the  Towns  Lynhydra, 
Sarepta,  and  Ornithon  :  also  Sidon,  where  Glass  is  made, 
and  which  is  the  Parent  of  Thebes  in  Boeotia. 

CHAPTER  XX. 
The  Mountain  Libanus. 

BEHIND  it  beginneth  Mount  Libanus,2  and  for  1500 
Stadia  it  reacheth  as  far  as  to  Smyrna,  where  it  is  named 
Coele-Syria.  Another  Mountain  equal  to  it,  and  lying  oppo- 
site to  it,  is  called  Antilibanus;  with  a  Valley  lying  between, 
which  in  old  Time  was  joined  (to  the  other  Libanus)  by  a 
Wall.  Being  past  this,  there  is  the  Region  Decapolis  ;  and 
the  above-named  Tetrarchies  with  it,  and  the  whole  expanse 
of  Palestina.  But  in  that  Coast  still  along  the  Foot  of 
Libanus,  is  the  River  Magoras,  and  the  Colony  Berytus, 
called  also  Foelix  Julia.  The  Town  Leontos ;  the  River 
Lycos  ;  Palsebyblos ;  the  River  Adonis  ;  the  Towns  Byblos, 
Botrys,  Gigarta,  Trieris,  Calamos  ;  and  Tripolis,  subject  to 
the  Tyrians,  Sidonians,  and  Aradians.  Orthosia  and  the 
River  Eleutheros.  The  Towns  Simyra,  Marathos ;  and  over 
against  Aradus,  Antaradus,  a  Town  of  seven  Stadia  ;  and  an 

1  See  b.  ix.  c.  36,  &c. 

2  Libanus  (Lebanon)  is  a  chain  of  limestone  mountains;  the  cedars 
for  which  they  were  formerly  famed  still  grow  there,  though  in  reduced 
numbers,  forming  a  small  grove,  in  a  small  hollow  at  the  foot  of  the  highest 
peak.    Anti-  Libanus  is  the  more  lofty  ridge  of  the  two. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  73 

Island  less  than  a  quarter  of  a  Mile  from  the  Continent. 
The  Country  where  the  said  Mountains  end,  and  in  the  Plains 
lying  between,  beginneth  Mount  Bargylis :  and  thence 
Phcenice  endeth,  and  Syria  beginneth  again.  The  Towns 
Carne,  Balanea,  Paltos,  Gabale,  the  Promontory  wherein  is 
the  Free  (City)  Laodicea,  with  Diospolis,  Heraclea,  Cha- 
radrus,  Posidium. 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
Syria  Antiochena. 

THENCEFORWARD  is  the  Promontory  of  Syria  Antiochena ; 
within  is  the  Free  City  itself,  Antiochena,  surnamed  Epi- 
daphne ;  through  the  midst  runneth  the  River  Orontes. 
But  in  the  Promontory  is  the  Free  (City)  Seleucia,  named 
also  Pieria. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
The  Mountain  Casius. 

ABOVE  (the  City)  Seleucia,  there  is  another  Mountain 
named  Casius,  as  well  as  the  other.  This  is  of  that  Height, 
that  if  a  Man  be  upon  the  Top  of  it  in  the  Night,  at  the 
Fourth  Watch,  he  may  behold  the  Sun  rising.  So  that 
with  a  little  turning  of  his  Body,  he  may  at  one  Time  see 
both  Day  and  Night.  The  Passage  round  to  the  Top  is  19 
Miles ;  but  directly  up,  it  is  only  Four  Miles.  In  the  Bor- 
ders runneth  the  River  Orontes,  which  riseth  between  Li- 
banus  and  Antilibanus,  near  to  Heliopolis.  Then,  the  Town 
Rhosos :  and  behind,  the  Passages  between  the  Mountains 
Rhosii  and  Taurus,  which  are  called  Portse  Syriae.  In  the 
Coast,  the  Town  Myriandros,  the  Mountain  Amanus, 
where  is  the  Town  Bomitae.  This  separateth  Cilicia  from 
the  Syrians. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Cede-  Syria.1 

Now,  to  speak  of  the  Midland  parts.  Ccel&  hath  Apa- 
mia,  separated  from  the  Nazerines'  Tetrarchy  by  the  River 

1  Calo- Syria  (or  Lower  Syria)  signifying  "Syria  in  the  Hollow." 
It  may  be  considered,  says  Strabo,  "  either  in  a  proper  and  restrained 


74  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

Marsia:  Bambyce,  otherwise  called  Hierapolis;  but  of  the 
Syrians,  Magog.  There  is  worshipped  the  monstrous  Idol 
Atargatis,1  called  by  the  Greeks  Derceto.  Also  Chalcis, 
surnamed  Upon  Belus  :  from  which,  the  Region  Chalcidene, 
the  most  fertile  of  all  Syria,  taketh  its  Name.  Then  the 
Region  Cyrrhistica,  Cirrhus,  Gazatse,  Gindareni,  and  Ga- 
beni.  Two  Tetrarchies,  called  Granucomatse.  The  Hemi- 
seni,  Hylatse,  the  Nation  of  the  Iturse,  and  those  of  them 

sense,  as  comprehending  only  the  tract  of  land  between  Libanus  and  Anti- 
Libanus ;  or  in  a  larger  signification,  and  then  it  will  comprehend  all  the 
country  in  obedience  to  the  king  of  Syria,  from  Seleucia  or  Arabia  and 
Egypt-— Wern.  Club. 

1  The  Syrian  idol  Atargatis  is  the  same  as  the  Astarte  or  Ashtaroth, 
so  often  mentioned  in  Holy  Scripture ;  it  is  also  the  Derceto  of  the 
Greeks,  who  represent  her  to  be  the  daughter  of  Venus,  or,  as  some  say, 
Venus  herself.  The  upper  half  of  this  monster  had  the  form  of  a  woman, 
while  the  lower  was  that  of  a  fish.  Atargatis  is  fabled  to  have  thrown 
herself  into  a  lake  near  Ascalon  in  Syria,  through  vexation  at  the  loss  of 
her  chastity,  after  having  given  birth  to  a  daughter  named  Semiramis. 
From  this  circumstance  the  Syrians  abstained  from  eating  the  fish  of  that 
lake,  deified  Atargatis,  and  built  a  temple  to  her  memory  on  the  borders 
of  the  lake.  Her  daughter,  Semiramis,  was  left  exposed  in  a  desert ;  but 
her  life  was  preserved  by  doves  for  one  whole  year,  till  a  shepherd  of 
N"inus  found  her  and  brought  her  up  as  his  own  child.  She  afterwards 
married  Menones,  the  governor  of  Nineveh,  and  at  length  became  the 
celebrated  Queen  of  Assyria.  After  her  death  she  was  changed  into  a 
dove,  and  received  immortal  honours  in  Assyria.  Ovid  alludes  to  both 
mother  and  daughter  in  the  commencement  of  his  4th  Book  of  the 
Metamorphoses. 

"  But  she  awhile  profoundly  seemed  to  muse, 

Perplex'd  amid  variety  to  choose  ; 

And  knew  not  whether  she  should  first  relate 

The  poor  Dercetis,  and  her  wondrous  fate ; 

(The  Palestines  believe  it  to  a  man, 

And  shew  the  lake  in  which  her  scales  began :) 

Or,  if  she  rather  should  the  daughter  sing, 

Who  in  the  hoary  verge  of  life  took  wing, 

Who  soar'd  from  earth,  and  dwelt  in  towers  on  high, 

And  now  a  dove,  she  flits  along  the  sky." 

EUSDEN'S  Translation. 

It  may  be  doubted  whether  she  is  not  identical  with  Dagon,  the  first 
goddess  of  the  Phrenicians.—  Wern.  Club. 


HOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  75 

who  are  named  Betarrani,  and  the  Mariammitani.  The 
Tetrarchy  named  Mammisea :  Paradisus,  Pagrse,  Pinaritae, 
and  two  Seleucise,  besides  the  abovenamed  ;  one  called  Upon 
Euphrates,  and  the  other,  Upon  Belus :  the  Carditenses. 
The  rest  of  Syria  hath  besides  these  which  shall  be  spoken 
of  with  the  Euphrates,  the  Arethusi,  Berseenses,  and  Epi- 
phanenses.  Eastward,  the  Laodiceni,  which  are  entituled, 
Upon  Libanus :  the  Leucadii,  and  Larisssei :  besides  17 
Tetrarchies  reduced  into  Kingdoms  under  Barbaric  Names. 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 
Euphrates.1 

THIS  is  the  fittest  Place  to  speak  of  the  Euphrates.  Its 
Source,  by  the  Report  of  them  who  have  seen  it  most  closely, 
is  in  Caranitis,  a  Province  of  Armenia  the  Greater.  These 
are  Domitius  Corbulo,  who  says,  that  it  riseth  in  the  Moun- 
tain Aba;  and  Licinius  Mutianus,  who  affirmeth,  that  it 
issueth  from  the  Foot  of  the  Mountain  which  they  call 
Capotes,  12  Miles  higher  than  Simyra :  and  that  in  the 
beginning  it  was  called  Pyxirates.  It  runneth  first  to  Der- 
xene,  and  then  to  Ana  also,  shutting  out  the  Regions  of  Ar- 
menia from  Cappadocia.  The  Dastusae  from  Simyra  is  75 
Miles.  From  thence  it  is  navigable  to  Pastona,  Fifty  Miles : 
from  it  to  Melitene  in  Cappadocia,  74  Miles.  To  Elegia  in 
Armenia,  Ten  Miles:  where  it  receiveth  the  Rivers,  Lycus, 
Arsania,  and  Arsanus.  Near  Elegia  it  meeteth  the  Moun- 

1  Euphrates  rises  in  Armenia,  near  Mount  Aba,  and  after  flowing  by 
Syria,  Mesopotamia,  and  the  site  of  Babylon,  empties  itself  into  the  Per- 
sian Gulf.  It  overflows  its  banks  at  certain  seasons,  and  in  consequence 
its  banks  are  very  fertile. 

The  Euphrates  is  universally  allowed  to  take  its  rise  in  Armenia 
Major ;  but  in  what  particular  spot,  or  in  what  direction  it  afterwards 
shapes  its  course,  is  still  a  matter  of  the  greatest  disagreement.  Pliny's 
account  entirely  differs  from  those  of  Strabo  and  Mela.  The  best  com- 
pendium of  the  discoveries  of  modern  geographers  and  travellers  on 
this  subject  will  be  found  in  the  Penny  Cyclopaedia  articles  "Asia"  and 
"  Euphrates."  See  also  Macdonnald  Kinneir's  large  map. —  Wern.  Glrtb. 


76  History  of  Nature.  [BooR  V. 

tain  Taurus  :  yet  stayeth  it  not,  but  prevaileth,  although  it 
be  in  Breadth  Twelve  Miles.  Where  it  breaketh  through 
they  call  it  Omiras  :  and  so  soon  as  it  hath  cut  through  it  is 
named  Euphrates :  full  of  Rocks  and  very  violent.  There 
it  separateth  Arabia  on  the  Left  Hand,  called  the  Region  of 
the  Meri,  by  the  Measure  of  Three  Schcenae,  and  on  the 
Right,  Comagene.  Nevertheless,  even  there  where  it  con- 
quereth  Taurus,  it  suffers  a  Bridge.  At  Claudiopolis  in  Cap- 
padocia,  it  taketh  its  Course  westward.  And  here  the 
Taurus,  although  resisted  at  first,  hindereth  him  of  his  Course: 
and  notwithstanding  it  was  overcome  and  dismembered,  it 
conquereth  in  another  way,  and  drives  it  thus  broken  into 
the  South.  Thus  Nature  matcheth  these  Forces:  The  one 
proceeding  whither  it  chooseth,  and  the  other  not  suffering 
it  to  run  which  way  it  will.  From  the  Cataracts  it  is  Navi- 
gable, and  Forty  Miles  from  that  place  standeth  Samosata, 
the  Head  of  all  Comagen£.  Arabia  aforesaid  hath  the  Towns 
Edessa,  sometime  called  Antiochea ;  Callirrhoe,  taking  its 
Name  from  the  Fountain ;  and  Carrse,  famous  for  the 
slaughter  of  Crassus.  Here  joineth  the  Prefecture  of  Meso- 
potamia, which  taketh  its  beginning  from  the  Assyrians,  in 
which  stand  the  Towns  Anthemusa  and  Nicephorium.  Pre- 
sently the  Arabians,  called  Rhetavi,  whose  Capital  is  Sin- 
gara.  But  from  Samosatae,  on  the  side  of  Syria,  the  River 
Marsyas  runneth  into  Euphrates.  Gingla  limiteth  Coma- 
gene,  and  the  City  of  the  Meri  beginneth  it.  The  Towns 
Epiphania  and  Antiochia  have  the  River  running  close  to 
them,  and  they  are  called  Euphrates.  Zeugma  likewise, 
72  Miles  from  Samosatse,  is  ennobled  by  the  Passage  over 
Euphrates  :  for  it  is  joined  to  Apamia,  over  against  it,  by  a 
Bridge,  built  by  Seleucus  the  Founder  of  both.  The  People 
that  join  to  Mesopotamia  are  called  Rhoali.  But  the  Towns 
of  Syria  are  Europum ;  Thapsacum,  formerly,  now  Amphi- 
polis;  Arabian  Scsenitse.  Thus  it  passeth  as  far  as  to  the 
Place  Ura,  in  which  turning  to  the  East,  it  leaveth  the 
Deserts  of  Palmyra  in  Syria,  which  reach  to  the  City  Petra 
and  the  Country  of  Arabia  called  the  Happy. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  77 

CHAPTER  XXV. 
Palmyra.1 

THE  City  Palmyra,  noble  for  its  situation,  the  Riches  of 
its  Soil,  and  its  pleasant  Streams,  encloseth  its  Fields  with  a 
vast  compass  of  Sand.  Arid  as  if  shut  out  by  Nature  from 
all  other  Lands,  it  is  by  a  peculiar  lot  between  two  mighty 
Empires,  the  Romans  and  the  Parthians ;  wherein  Dis- 
cord is  ever  the  first  object  on  both  Sides.  It  is  distant 
from  Seleucia  of  the  Parthians,  which  is  called,  on  the 
Tigris,  537  Miles  :  and  from  the  nearest  Coast  of  Syria,  252  : 
and  from  Damascus,  27  nearer. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 
Hierapolis. 

BENEATH  the  Solitudes  of  Palmyra,  lieth  the  Country 
Stelendena,2  wherein  are  the  Cities  named  at  this  Day 
Hierapolis,  Beroea,  and  Chalcis.  Beyond  Palmyra  also, 
Heinesa  taketh  up  some  part  of  those  Deserts :  and  likewise 
Elutium,  nearer  to  Petra  by  one-half  than  is  Damascus. 
And  next  to  Astura  standeth  Philiscum,  a  Town  of  the  Par- 
thians, on  Euphrates.  From  which  by  Water  it  is  a  Journey 

1  We  are  at  a  loss  to  account  for  the  praise  bestowed  on  the  site  of 
Palmyra,  situated  as  it  is  on  the  borders  of  a  vast  wilderness ;  it  can  only 
be  from  comparison  with  the  surrounding  sterility,  and  the  supply  of 
water  obtained  here,  which  is  so  rare  a  blessing  in  the  sandy  plains  of  the 
East.    The  country  does  not  appear  to  have  undergone  any  change  from 
the  period  of  the  foundation  of  this  ancient  city,  until  now  ;  Tadmor  (its 
original  name)  was  built  by  king  Solomon,  probably  for  the  purpose  of 
cutting  off  all  commerce  between  the  Syrians  and  Mesopotamians,  and  it 
rose  into  note  in  consequence.    In  later  times  it  was  also  much  frequented 
by  the  caravans  of  Persia  and  the  countries  beyond. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Stelendena  does  not  appear  to  be  mentioned  by  any  other  writer  than 
Pliny.    Hierapolis  has  been  just  before  spoken  of  under  the  name  of 
Bambyce  or  Magog,  as  the  Syrians  call  it.    It  is  the  Magog  of  Holy 
Scripture  (Ezekiel,  xxxviii.)  concerning  the  situation  of  which  great 
diversity  of  opinion  has  been  entertained. —  Wern.  Club. 


78  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

of  Ten  Days  to  Seleucia,  and  about  as  many  to  Babylon. 
Euphrates  is  divided  Fourscore  and  Three  Miles  from  Zeug- 
ma, about  the  Village  Massice,  and  on  the  Left  Side  it 
passeth  into  Mesopotamia,  through  Seleucia,  it  being  poured 
into  the  River  Tigris  as  it  runneth  by :  but  on  the  right 
Channel  it  passeth  toward  Babylon,  formerly  the  Chief  City 
of  Chaldsea ;  and  passing  through  the  midst  of  it,  as  also  of 
another  which  they  call  Otris,  it  is  drawn  off  into  Marshes. 
It  riseth  at  certain  Times  after  the  manner  of  the  Nilus, 
but  with  a  little  difference ;  for  it  overfloweth  Mesopotamia 
when  the  Sun  is  the  20th  degree  of  Cancer,  and  beginneth 
again  to  diminish  when  the  Sun  is  past  Leo,  and  is  entered 
into  Virgo:  so  that  in  the  29th  degree  of  Virgo,  it  is  reduced 
again. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Cilicia,  and  the  Nations  adjoining,  Isauricce,  Homonades, 
Pisidia, ,  Lycaonia,  Pamphylia :  the  Mountain  Taurus, 
and  Lycia. 

BUT  we  will  return  to  the  Coasts  of  Syria,  to  which 
Cilicia  is  the  nearest.  The  River  Diaphanes,  the  Mountain 
Crocodilus,  Passages  of  the  Mount  Amanus  :  Rivers,  Andri- 
con,  Pinarus,  and  Lycus,  the  Gulf  Issicus.  The  Town  Issa, 
then  the  River  Chlorns,  the  Free  Town  Mge,  the  River  Pyra- 
mus,  and  the  Passages  of  Cilicia.  The  Towns  Mallos  and 
Magarsos ;  and  within  Tarsos,  the  Plains,  Aleii ;  the  Towns, 
Cassipolis  and  Mopsum,  which  is  free,  and  standeth  upon  the 
River  Pyramus ;  Thynos,  Zephyrium,  and  Anchialae.  The 
Rivers  Saros  and  Sydnus,  which  runneth  through  Tarsus,  a 
free  City,  far  from  the  Sea :  the  Country  Celenderitis,  with 
the  Town.  The  Place  called  Nyraphaeum,  and  Soloe  Cilicii, 
now  Pompeiopolis,  Adana,  Cibira,  Pinara,  Pedalie,  Halix, 
Arsinoe,  Tabse,  and  Doron  :  and  near  the  Sea  ye  shall  find  a 
Town,  an  Harbour,  and  a  Cave,  all  named  Corycos.  Soon 
after,  the  River  Calycadnus.  The  Promontory  Sarpedon, 
the  Towns  Olme  and  Mylse,  the  Promontory  and  Town  of 
Venus,  nearest  to  which  is  the  Isle  of  Cyprus.  But  in  the 
Mainland  are  the  Towns  Myanda,  Ariemurium,  Corace- 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  79 

slum  :  and  the  River  Melas,  the  ancient  Bound  of  Cilicia. 
Within  are  to  be  spoken  of,  the  Anazarbeni,  at  this  Day 
named  Caesar- Augustani ;  Castabla  ;  Epiphania,  formerly 
Eniandos;  Eleusa,  and  Iconium.  Seleucia  upon  the  River 
Calicadmus,  surnamed  also  Trachiotis,  removed  backward 
from  the  Sea,  where  it  was  called  Hormia.  Furthermore, 
within  the  Country,  the  Rivers  Liparis,  Bombos,  and  Para- 
disus.  The  Mountain  Jubarus.  All  Authors  have  joined 
Pamphylia  to  Cilicia,  and  never  regarded  the  Nation  Isau- 
rica.  The  Towns  within  it  are,  Isaura,  Clibanus,  Lalassis ; 
and  it  shooteth  down  to  the  Sea-side  of  the  Country  Anemu- 
rium  abovesaid.  In  like  sort,  as  many  as  have  set  forth 
Descriptions  of  these  Matters,  had  no  Knowledge  of  the 
neighbouring  Nation,  the  Homonades,  which  have  a  Town 
within  their  Country  called  Homona.  Other  Fortresses,  to 
the  number  of  44,  lie  hidden  among  the  rugged  Valleys. 
The  Pisidae,  formerly  called  Solymis,  are  placed  on  the  top ; 
a  Colony  of  which  is  Csesarea,  the  same  as  Antiochia.  The 
Towns  are  Oroanda  and  Sagalessos.  This  Nation  is  enclosed 
within  Lycaonia,  lying  within  the  Jurisdiction  of  Asia  :  with 
which  are  joined  the  Philomelienses,  Tymbrians,  Leucolithi, 
Pelteni,  and  Hyrienses.  There  is  given  a  Tetrarchy  out  of 
Lycaonia,  on  that  side  that  bordereth  upon  Galatia:  to 
which  belong  14  Cities,  whereof  the  most  celebrated  is  Ico- 
nium. In  Lycaonia  itself,  those  of  celebrity  are  Tembasa 
upon  Taurus,  Sinda  in  the  Confines  of  Galatia  and  Cappa- 
docia.  But  on  the  Side  thereof  above  Pamphylia,  the  Myliae, 
descended  in  old  Time  from  Thrace,  whose  Town  is  Aricanda. 
Pamphylia  was  in  ancient  Time  called  Mopsopia.  The  Pam- 
phylian  Sea  joineth  to  the  Cilician.  Its  Towns  are  Sid£,  As- 
pendus  on  the  Mountain,  Platanistus,  and  Perga.  Also  the 
Promontory  Leucolla,  the  Mountain  Sardemisus,  the  River 
Eurymedon  running  near  Aspendum.  Cataractes,  near  which 
stand  Lyrnessus  and  Olbia ;  and  the  furthest  of  that  Coast, 
Phaselis.  Joined  to  it  is  the  Lycian  Sea,  and  the  Nation  of 
the  Lycians,  where  is  a  great  Gulf.  The  Mountain  Taurus, 
coming  from  the  Eastern  Shores,  fixeth  the  limit  by  the 
Promontory  Chelidonium.  This  (Taurus)  is  a  mighty  Moun- 


80  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

tain,  and  is  an  overlooker  to  a  very  great  Number  of  Nations. 
So  soon  as  it  is  risen  from  the  Indian  Sea,  it  parteth  :  and  the 
right  Hand  passeth  Northward,  the  left  Southward,  bending 
toward  the  West :  dividing  Asia  through  the  midst :  and 
(but  that  it  meeteth  the  Seas)  ready  to  oppress  the  whole 
Earth.  It  retireth,  therefore,  toward  the  North,  fetching  a 
great  Circuit,  and  so  making  way,  as  if  the  Industry  of 
Nature  continually  opposed  the  Seas  against  it;  on  one  side 
the  Phoenician  Sea,  on  another  the  Sea  of  Pontus ;  here  the 
Caspian  and  Hyrcanian  Seas,  and  full  against  him  the  Lake 
Mceotis.  And  notwithstanding  these  Bars,  within  which  it 
is  pent  and  entwined,  yet  at  last  Conqueror ;  it  winds  away 
and  passeth  on  until  it  encounters  its  kindred  Riphaean 
Mountains :  and  wherever  it  goeth,  it  is  distinguished  by  a 
Number  of  new  Names.  For  in  the  Beginning  of  its  Course 
it  is  called  Imaus  :  a  little  forward  Emodus,  Paropamisus, 
Circius,  Camibades,  Parphariades,  Choatras,  Oreges,  Oro- 
andes,  Niphates,  Taurus  ;  and  where  it  is  predominant,  Cau- 
casus ;  where  it  stretcheth  forth  its  Arms,  as  if  now  and  then 
endeavouring  toward  the  Seas,  it  taketh  the  Name  Sarpedon, 
Coracesius,  and  Cragus ;  and  then  again  Taurus,  even  where 
it  gapeth,  and  opening  itself  to  the  People.  And  yet  it 
claimeth  its  Unity  still,  and  (these  Passages  are  called)  by 
the  Names  of  Gates ;  as  in  one  Place  Armenise,  in  another 
Caspise,  and  again  Cilicise.  And  besides  being  broken  into 
Parcels,  and  escaped  far  from  the  Sea,  it  taketh  here  and 
there  many  Names  of  Nations  ;  as,  on  the  right  Hand  Hyr- 
canus  and  Caspius  ;  on  the  left,  Pariedrus,  Moschicus, 
Amazonicus,  Coraxicus,  and  Scythicus.  And  throughout  all 
Greece,  Ceraunius. 

To  return  to  Lycia,  beyond  its  Promontory,  is  the  Town 
Simena,  the  Mountain  Chimsera,  emitting  Flames  by  Night; 
the  City  Hephsestium,  where  the  Hills  likewise  oftentimes 
are  known  to  burn.  Formerly  the  City  Olympus  stood  there  ; 
but  now  the  Mountain  Towns,  Gage,  Corydalla,  and  Rhodio- 
polis.  Near  the  Sea,  Lymira  with  a  River,  into  which 
Arycandus  runneth  :  also  the  Mountain  Massy  rites,  the 
Cities  Andriarca  and  Myra.  These  Towns,  Apyre  and  Anti- 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  8 1 

phellos,  which  formerly  was  called  Habessus,  and  in  a  cor- 
ner, Phellus.  Then  Pyrrha,  and  also  Xanthus,  J5  Miles 
from  the  Sea,  and  a  River  of  the  same  Name.  Soon  after 
Patara,  formerly  named  Sataros ;  and  Sydinia  on  a  Hill ; 
the  Promontory  Ciagus.  Beyond  which  is  a  Gulf  equal  to 
the  former.  There  is  Pinara  ;  and  Telmessus,  that  boundeth 
Lycia.  In  ancient  Time  Lycia  possessed  threescore  Towns, 
but  now  36;  of  which  the  most  celebrated,  besides  the  above- 
named,  are  Canae,  Candyba,  where  the  Wood  Oenium  is 
praised  ;  Podalia,  Choma  upon  the  River  Adesa,  Cyane, 
Ascandalis,  Amelas,  Noscopium,  Tlos,  and  Telanorus.  It 
containeth  in  the  midland  Parts  Chabalia,  with  three  Towns 
thereto  belonging :  Oenonda,  Balbura,  and  Bubon. 

Beyond  Telmessus  is  the  Asiatic  Sea,  otherwise  called 
Carpathium,  and  the  Country  which  is  properly  called  Asia. 
Agrippa  hath  divided  it  into  two  Parts,  of  which  the  one  by 
his  Description  boundeth  Phrygia  and  Lycaonia,  eastward  : 
but  on  the  West  Side  it  is  limited  by  the  JEgean  Sea. 
Southward  it  boundeth  upon  Egypt:  and  in  the  North  upon 
Paphlagonia.  The  Length  thereof  by  his  Computation  is 
470  Miles,  the  Breadth  300.  The  other  he  hath  limited 
Eastward  from  Armenia  the  Less:  Westward  by  Phrygia, 
Lycaonia,  and  Pamphylia;  on  the  North  by  the  Province  of 
Pontus ;  and  on  the  South  by  the  Pamphylian  Sea  :  it  con- 
taineth 575  Miles  in  Length,  and  325  in  Breadth.  The  next 
Coast  bordering  upon  it  is  Caria :  and  near  it,  Ionia; 
beyond  that,  .ZEolis.  For  Caria  encloseth  Doris  in  the  midst, 
environing  it  round  on  every  Side  to  the  Sea.  In  it  is  the 
Promontory  Pedalium,  and  the  River  Glaucus,  charged 
with  (the  River)  Telmessus.  The  Towns,  Daedala  and  Crya, 
peopled  with  Fugitives ;  the  River  Axon,  and  the  Town 
Calydua. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 
The  River  Indus. 

THE  River  Indus,  rising  in  the  craggy  Mountains  of  the 
Cybiratae,  receiveth  threescore  regularly  running  Rivers,  but 
of  Torrents  above  an  hundred.  The  Free  Town  Caunos,  and 

VOL.  II.  G 


82  History  of  'Nature.  [BooK  V. 

a  little  off,  Pyrnos.  The  Port  Cressa,  from  which  the  Island 
Rhodus  is  distant  20  Miles.  The  Place  Loryma ;  the  Towns 
Tysanusa,  Taridion,  Larymna;  the  Bay  Thymnias,  and  the 
Promontory  Aphrodisias  ;  the  Town  Hyda,  the  Bay  Schoenus. 
The  Country  Bubassus  ;  where  stood  the  Town  Acanthus, 
otherwise  called  Dulopolis.  On  the  Promontory  is  the  Free 
(Town)  Gnidos,  Triopia,  then  Pegusa,  called  likewise  Stadia. 
Beyond  which  Doris  beginneth.  But  first  it  is  convenient  to 
have  pointed  out  the  midland  Jurisdictions  and  the  Parts 
which  lie  behind  :  one  is  named  Cibiratica.  The  Town  itself 
is  in  Phrygia,  and  to  it  are  joined  25  Cities. 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 
Laodicea,  Apamia,  Ionia,  Ephesus. 

THE  most  celebrated  City  is  Laodicea.1  It  is  seated  on 
the  River  Lycus,  Asopus  and  Caper  washing  its  Sides.  This 
City  was  first  called  Diospolis,  and  afterwards  Rhoas.  The 
other  Nations  belonging  to  that  Jurisdiction  worth  the  Nam- 
ing are  the  Hydrelitae,  Themisones,  and  Hierapolitse.  Another 
Jurisdiction  taketh  its  Name  from  Synnada :  and  to  it  repair 
the  Licaones,  Appiani,  Eucarpeni,  Dorylaei,  Midsei,  Julienses, 
and  fifteen  other  ignoble  People.  A  third  (Jurisdiction) 
goeth  to  Apamia,  which  in  old  Time  was  called  Celsense,  and 
afterwards  Ciboton.  It  is  situated  at  the  Foot  of  the  Moun- 

1  Laodicea,  so  named  in  honour  of  Laodice,  wife  of  Antiochus  II.,  by 
whom  the  city  was  enlarged.  From  all  accounts  it  appears  to  have  been 
built  on  a  volcanic  hill,  and  boasted,  in  its  prosperity,  many  public  build- 
ings of  note,  of  which  the  remains  of  an  aqueduct  and  amphitheatre  are 
still  to  be  seen. 

Ephesus  was  the  capital  of  Proconsular  Asia,  and  was  situated  in  Ionia 
(now  Natolia),  about  five  miles  from  the  .ZEgean  Sea,  on  the  sides  and 
at  the  foot  of  a  range  of  mountains  overlooking  a  fine  plain  watered  and 
fertilised  by  the  river  Cayster.  The  city  was  celebrated  for  the  Temple 
of  Diana,  a  most  magnificent  edifice,  erected  at  the  common  expense 
of  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  Proper,  and  described  by  Pliny,  b.  xxxvi.  c.  14, 
but  of  which  the  site  is  now  unknown.  Ephesus  was  finally  overthrown 
in  tbe  fourteenth  century,  after  continued  struggles.  There  are  numerous 
traces  of  its  magnificence  still  extant,  though  the  neighbouring  country 
bears  all  the  marks  of  desolation  and  decay. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  83 

tain  Signia,  environed  with  the  Rivers  Marsyas,  Obrima, 
and  Orga,  which  fall  into  the  Maeander.  The  River  Marsyas, 
which  a  little  from  his  Spring  is  hidden  under  Ground, 
where  Marsyas  contended  with  Apollo  in  playing  on  the 
flute,  sheweth  itself  again  in  Aulocrense,  for  so  is  the  Valley 
called,  ten  Miles  from  Apamia,  as  Men  travel  to  Phrygia. 
Under  this  Jurisdiction  we  should  do  well  to  Name  the 
Metropolitan  Dionysopolitae,  Euphorbeni,  Acmoneses,  Pel- 
teni,  and  Silbiani.  There  are  besides  60  ignoble  Towns. 
Within  the  Bay  of  Doris,  Leucopolis,  Amaxitos,  Elaeus,  and 
Euthene.  Then  Towns  of  Caria,  Pitaium,  Eutaniae,  and 
Halicarnassus.  To  this  (City)  were  annexed  by  Alexander 
the  Great,  six  Towns:  Theangela,  Sibde,  Medmossa,  Eura- 
nium,  Pedasium,  and  Telmessum.  It  is  inhabited  be- 
tween the  two  Gulfs,  Ceramicus  and  Jasius.  From  thence 
Myndus,  and  where  formerly  stood  Palaemyndus,  Neapolis, 
Nariandus,  Carianda,  the  Free  City  Termera,  Bergyla,  and 
the  Town  Jasus,  which  gave  Name  to  the  Gulf  Jasius.  But 
Caria  is  most  renowned  for  the  Places  of  Name  within  it, 
for  therein  are  these  Cities :  Mylasa  Free,  and  Antiochia, 
where  sometime  were  the  Towns  Seminethos  and  Cranaos  : 
and  it  is  now  environed  about  with  the  Maeander  and  Mos- 
sinus.  In  the  same  Tract  also  stood  Maeandropolis.  There 
is  Eumenia  close  by  the  River  Cludrus ;  the  River  Glaucus  ; 
the  Town  Lysias  and  Orthasia.  The  Tract  of  Berecinthus, 
Nysa,  Trallis,  which  also  is  named  Euanthia,  and  Seleucia, 
and  Antiochia.  It  is  washed  by  the  River  Eudone,  and 
Thebanis  passeth  through  it.  Some  report  that  the  Pigmaei1 

1  The  Pygmaei  were  a  fabulous  nation  inhabiting  Thrace  and  other 
regions,  who  brought  forth  young  at  five  years  of  age,  and  were  old  at 
eight.  Homer  has  celebrated  their  memorable  defeats  by  cranes. — Iliad, 
3d  Book. 

" When  inclement  winters  vex  the  plain 

With  piercing  frosts,  or  thick  descending  rain, 
To  warmer  seas  the  cranes  embodied  fly, 
With  noise,  and  order,  through  the  mid- way  sky : 
To  pigmy  nations  wounds  and  death  they  bring, 
And  all  the  war  descends  upon  the  wing." — Pope. 

Pliny  has  described  these  tiny  creatures  in  Lib.  vi.  c.  22  and  35,  and 


84  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

formerly  there  dwelt.  Besides,  there  are  Thydonos,  Pyrrha, 
Eurome,  Heraclea,  Amyzon,  and  the  Free  Alabanda,  from 
which  that  Jurisdiction  took  its  Name.  The  Free  Stratonicea, 
Hynidos,  Ceramus,  Trcezene,  and  Phorontis.  There  are 
Nations  farther  remote  that  resort  to  that  Court:  the 
Othronienses,  Halydienses  or  Hyppini,  Xystiani,  Hydis- 
senses,  Apolloniates,  Trapezopolitse,  and  the  Free  Aphro- 
disienses.  Besides  these,  there  are  Cossinus  and  Harpasa, 
close  by  the  River  Harpasus,  which  also  ran  under  Trallicon, 
when  such  a  Town  existed.  Lydia  is  watered  by  the  wind- 
ings of  the  River  Mseander:  and  it  reacheth  above  Ionia: 
being  near  upon  Phrygia  in  the  East,  upon  Mysia  in  the 
North,  and  in  the  South  side  enclosing  Caria;  and  was  for- 
merly named  Mceonia.  It  is  celebrated  chiefly  for  Sardis, 
seated  upon  the  side  of  the  Mountain  Trnolus,  formerly 
called  Timolus,  planted  with  Vineyards ;  and  from  it  flows 
Pactolus,  called  likewise  Chrysorrhoa :  as  also  the  Fountain 
Tames.  This  City  was  commonly  by  the  Mceonise  called 
Hyde,  and  was  famous  for  the  Lake  of  Gyges.  That  Juris- 
diction is  at  this  Day  called  Sardiana.  Thither  resort  besides 
the  abovenamed,  the  Macedonian  Caduenes,  the  Loreni, 

again  in  lib.  vii.  c.  2.  See  also  Aristotle's  Hist.  Anim.  lib.  viii.,  and 
Mela,  lib.  iii.  There  can  be  no  question  but  that  the  ancient  fictions  of 
pygmies,  satyrs,  cynocephali,  cynoprosopi,  &c.,  and  other  supposed  tribes 
of  human  monsters,  originated  in  vague  accounts  of  different  species  of 
simiae,  though  the  Bushmen  of  South  Africa  are  supposed  also  to  have 
been  referred  to  as  a  nation  of  pigmies.  The  earliest  unquestionable 
reference  to  any  of  the  true  apes  is  found  in  the  Periplus  of  Hanno,  circ. 
500  B.C. 

"  For  three  days,"  says  the  Carthaginian  admiral,  "  we  passed  along  a 
burning  coast,  and  at  length  reached  a  bay  called  the  Southern  Horn. 
In  the  bottom  of  this  bay  we  found  an  island  similar  to  that  already  men- 
tioned ;  this  island  contained  a  lake,  that  in  its  turn  contained  another 
island,  which  was  inhabited  by  wild  men.  The  greater  number  of  those 
we  saw  were  females ;  they  were  covered  with  hair,  and  our  interpreters 
called  them  Gorilloi.  We  were  unable  to  secure  any  of  the  men,  as  they 
fled  to  the  mountains,  and  defended  themselves  with  stones.  As  to  the 
women,  we  caught  three  of  them,  but  they  so  bit  and  scratched  us  that 
we  found  it  impossible  to  bring  them  along;  we  therefore  killed  and 
flayed  them,  and  carried  their  hides  to  Carthage." — Wern,  Club. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  85 

Philadelpheni,  and  those  Moeonians  inhabiting  on  the 
River  Cogamus,  at  the  Foot  of  Tmolus ;  and  the  Tripoli- 
tani,  who,  together  with  the  Antoniopolitae,  are  washed  by 
the  River  Maeander ;  also,  the  Apollonos-Hieritae,  Myso- 
tmolites,  and  others  of  mean  Reputation. 

Ionia  beginneth  at  the  Bay  of  Jasius,  and  all  its  Coast  is 
full  of  Indentations.  The  first  Bay  in  it  is  Basilicus  ;  the 
Promontory  Posideum,  and  the  Town  called  the  Oracle  of 
the  Branchidae,  but  at  this  Day,  of  Apollo  Didymaeus,  20 
Stadia  from  the  Sea-side.  And  beyond  this  180  Stadia, 
standeth  Milletus,  the  Head  (City)  of  Ionia,  named  in  Time 
past  Lelegeis ;  Pitylisa,  also  named  Anactoria.  From  which, 
as  from  a  Mother,  are  descended  more  than  eighty  others, 
built  along  the  Sea-coast.  Neither  is  this  City  to  be  de- 
frauded of  the  Citizen  Cadmus,  who  taught  first  to  declaim 
in  Prose.  The  River  Maeander  issueth  out  of  a  Lake  in  the 
Mountain  Aulocrene ;  and  passing  by  many  Towns,  and 
filled  with  Abundance  of  Rivers,  it  fetcheth  such  windings 
to  and  fro,  that  oftentimes  it  is  thought  to  run  backward 
again.  The  first  Country  it  passeth  through  is  Apamia  :  and 
presently  Eumenitica,  and  so  through  the  Plains  Bargyl- 
letici.  Last  of  all,  it  cometh  gently  into  Caria,  and  watering 
all  that  Land  with  a  very  fruitful  Mud,  about  ten  Stadia 
from  Miletus  it  glideth  into  the  Sea.  Near  (to  that  River)  is 
the  Mountain  Latmus :  the  Town  Heraclea,  surnamed 
Caryca,  from  a  Hill  of  that  Name;  also  Myus,  which, 
as  the  Report  goeth,  was  first  founded  by  the  lones  after 
their  proceeding  from  Athens ;  Naulochum,  and  Pyrene. 
Upon  the  Sea-coast  the  (Town)  called  Trogilia ;  the  River 
Gessus.  This  Region  is  sacred  to  all  the  lonians,  and  there- 
fore it  is  named  Panionia.  Near  it  was  Phygela,  built  for 
Fugitives,  as  appeareth  by  the  Name :  and  the  Town  Mara- 
thesium  :  and  above  it  Magnesia,  designated  with  the  sur- 
name On-Mseander,  sprung  from  the  Thessalian  Magnesia. 
From  Ephesus  it  is  distant  15  Miles ;  and  from  Tralleis  it  is 
three  Miles  farther.  Formerly  it  was  called  Thessaloce  and 
Androlitia :  and  being  situated  upon  the  Shore,  it  took  away 
with  it  from  the  Sea  other  Islands  called  Dera*ides.  Within- 


86  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

land  Thyatira  (in  old  Time  called  Pelopia  and  Euhippa)  is 
washed  by  the  Lycus.  But  upon  the  Sea-coast  is  Manteium  ; 
and  Ephesus,  a  Work  of  the  Amazons.  But  many  Names 
it  had  gone  through  before  ;  for  in  the  Time  of  the  Trojan 
War  it  was  called  Alopes  :  soon  after,  Ortygia  and  Morges  : 
and  it  took  the  Name  of  Smyrna,  with  addition  of  Trachsea 
(i.  e.  Rough),  Samornium,  and  Ptelea.  It  is  mounted  on 
the  Hill  Pione,  and  is  washed  by  the  Caystrus,  which  spring- 
eth  out  of  the  Cilbian  Hills,  and  bringeth  down  with  it 
many  other  Rivers,  and  the  Lake  Pegaseum,  which  dis- 
chargeth  itself  by  the  River  Phyrites.  From  these  Rivers 
proceedeth  a  large  quantity  of  Mud,  which  increaseth  the 
Land :  so  that  it  hath  thrown  good  way  within  the  Land  the 
Island  Syrie.  There  is  a  Fountain  within  the  City  called 
Callipia :  and  two  (Rivers)  Selinuces,  coming  from  different 
Countries,  encircle  the  Temple  of  Diana.  From  Ephesus 
you  come  to  another  Manteium,  inhabited  by  the  Colo- 
phonii :  and  within,  the  Country  Colophon  itself,  with  the 
(River)  Halesus  flowing  by  it.  Then  the  Sacred  Place 
(Fane)  of  Apollo  Clarius,  and  Lebedos.  And  there  formerly 
was  the  Town  Notium.  The  Promontory  Coryceon  :  the 
Mountain  Mimas,  which  reacheth  out  250  Miles,  and 
endeth  at  length  in  the  Plains  within  the  Continent.  This 
is  the  place  where  Alexander  the  Great  commanded  the 
Plain  to  be  cut  through  for  seven  Miles  and  a  half  in  Length, 
to  join  the  two  Gulfs,  and  to  bring  Erythrae  and  Mimas 
together,  to  be  environed  around  therewith.  Near  this  Ery- 
thrae were  the  Towns,  Pteleon,  Helos,  andiiDorion:  now, 
there  is  the  River  Aleon,  and  Corineum :  upon  the  Mount 
Mimas,  Clazomene,  Partheniae;  and  Hippi,  called  Chyto- 
phoria,  when  they  were  Islands  :  the  same  Alexander  united 
them  to  the  Continent  for  the  Space  of  two  Stadia.  There 
have  perished  within,  Daphnus,  Hermesia,  and  Sipylum, 
called  formerly  Tantalis,  the  chief  City  of  Moeonia,  where 
now  is  the  Lake  Sale.  And  for  that  cause  Archaeopolis 
succeeded  to  Sipylus,  and  after  it  Colpe,  and  to  it  Lebade. 
Returning  thence  twelve  Miles  off  is  Smyrna,  on  the  Coast, 
built  by  an  Amazon,  but  restored  by  Alexander  the  Great ; 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  87 

made  pleasant  by  the  River  Meles,  which  hath  its  Source 
not  far  off.     The  most  celebrated  Mountains  in  Asia,  for  the 
most  part,  spread  themselves  at  large  in  this  Tract,  as  Mas- 
tusia,  on  the  Back  of  Smyrna ;  and  Termetis  that  meeteth 
close  to  the  Foot  of  Olympus.     This  (Olympus)   endeth  in 
Draco,  and  Draco  in  Tmolus ;  Tmolus  at  Cadmus ;  and  Cad- 
mus in  Taurus.     Beyond  Smyrna  are  Plains,  formed  by  the 
River  Hermus,   and  therefore   adopting   its    Name.     This 
(River)  hath  its  Beginning  near  Doryleus,  a  City  of  Phrygia, 
and  collecteth  into  it  many  Rivers ;  among  which  is  Phryg£, 
which  giveth  Name  to  the  whole  Nation  and  divideth  Phry- 
gia and  Caria  asunder.     Moreover,  Lyllus  and  Crios,  which 
are  well  filled  by  the  other  Rivers  of  Phrygia,  Mysia,  and 
Lydia.     In  the  Mouth  of  this  River  stood  the  Town  Temnos  : 
now  in  the  further  portion  of  the  Gulf  are  the  Rocks  Myr- 
meces.     Also  the  Town  Leuce  upon  the  Promontory,  which 
was  an  Island  :  and  Phocaea,  which  boundeth  Ionia.     A  large 
part  of  ^Eolia,  of  which  we  will  speak  by  and  by,  repaireth 
commonly  to  the  Convention  of  Smyrna  :  and  likewise  the 
Macedonians,  surnamed  Hyrcani ;   and  the  Magnetes  from 
Sipylum.     But  to  Ephesus,  which  is  another  Light  of  Asia, 
resort  those  that  dwell  farther  off :  the  Caesarienses,  Metro- 
politse,  Cylbiani,  the  Myso-Macedones,  as  well  the  Higher 
as  the  Lower,  the  Mastaurenses,  Brullitae,  Hypprepeni,  and 
Dios-Hieritae. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

JEolis,  TroaSj  and  Pergamus. 

uEoms,  in  old  Time  called  Mysia,1  is  nearest  (to  Ionia :) 
and  so  is  Troas,  which  boundeth  upon  the  Hellespontus. 

1  The  people  of  Mysia,  according  to  Cicero,  "  were  despicable  and  base 
to  a  proverb."  Their  country  was  bounded  on  the  west  by  Troas,  in 
which  region  was  situated  the  city  of  that  name,  of  which  numerous 
vestiges  remain,  attesting  its  former  splendour.  "Indeed,"  says  Mr. 
Fellowes,  who  visited  the  spot  in  1838,  "  for  many  miles  round  the  soil  is 
rendered  useless  for  agriculture,  by  the  multitude  of  broken  marbles, 
stones,  and  arches,  which  lie  under  the  surface  in  every  direction." 

Pergamus  was  the  ancient  capital  of  Mysia,  and,  as  its  ruins  also  attest, 
was  a  magnificent  city.—  Wern.  Club. 


88  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

Being  past  Phocaea,  there  is  the  Port  Ascanius :  and  then 
the  Place  where  Larissa  stood  :  and  now  Cyme,  and  Myrina, 
which  calleth  itself  Sebastopolis.  Within  the  Land,  ^Egae, 
Attalia,  Posidea,  Neon-tichos,  and  Temnos.  Upon  the  Coast, 
the  River  Titanus,  and  a  City  taking  its  Name  from  it.  There 
was  also  Grynia,  now  only  a  Port  of  the  Ground ;  the  Island 
being  taken  into  it.  The  Town  Elsea,  and  the  River  Caicus 
corning  out  of  Mysia.  The  Town  Pytane,  the  River  Canaius. 
There  are  perished,  Cause,  Lysimachia,  Atarnea,  Carenae, 
Cisthene,  Cilia,  Cocillum,  Thebae,  Astyre,  Chrysa,  Palce- 
stepsis,  Gergithos,  and  Neandros.  At  this  Day,  there  is  the 
City  Perperene,  the  Tract  Heracleotes ;  the  Town  Coryphas, 
the  River  Chryliosolius,  the  Country  called  Aphrodisias, 
which  formerly  was  Politiceorgas,  the  Country  Scepsis; 
the  River  Evenus,  upon  the  Bank  of  which  have  perished 
Lyrmessos  and  Miletos.  In  this  Tract  is  the  Mountain  Ida. 
And  in  the  Sea-Coast  Adramytteos,  formerly  called  Pedasus, 
where  the  Bay  and  Convention  are  named  Adramytteos. 
Rivers,  Astron,  Cormalos,  Eryannos,  Alabastros,  and  Hieros 
out  of  Ida.  Within,  Mount  Gargara,  and  a  Town  of  the 
same  Name.  And  then  again  on  the  Sea-side,  Antandros, 
formerly  called  Edonis  :  then,  Cymeris,  and  Assos,  which 
also  is  Apollonia.  Also  there  was  a  Town  called  Palaine- 
dium.  The  Promontory  Lecton,  dividing  .ZEolus  and  Troas. 
There  also  was  the  City  Polymedia,  and  Cryssa,  with  another 
Larissa.  The  Temple  Smintheum  remaineth  still.  Within, 
the  Town  Colone  is  destroyed,  and  the  Business  removed 
to  Adramytteum.  The  Apolloniatae,  from  the  River  Rhyn- 
dicus :  the  Eresii,  Miletopolites,  Poemaneni,  Macedones, 
Aschilacae,  Polychnaei,  Pionitae,  Cilices,  and  Mandagandeni. 
In  Mysia,  the  Abrettini,  and  those  called  Hellespontii ;  be- 
sides others  of  base  account.  The  first  place  in  Troas  is 
Amaxitus :  then,  Cebrenia,  and  Troas  itself,  named  Anti- 
gonia,  now  Alexandria,  a  Roman  Colony.  The  Town  Nee : 
the  navigable  River  Scamander;  and  on  the  Promontory, 
formerly,  the  Town  Sigaeum.  Then  the  Port  of  the  Greeks, 
(Portus  Achaeorum,)  into  which  Xanthus  and  Simoeis  run 
together;  as  also  Palae-Scamander,  but  first  it  maketh  a 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  89 

Lake.  The  remainder  celebrated  by  Homer  as  Rhaesus, 
Heptaporus,  Caresus,  and  Rhodius,  have  no  Vestiges  remain- 
ing. The  Granicus  floweth  by  a  different  Tract  into  the 
Propontis.  Yet  there  is  at  this  Day  a  little  City  called 
Scamandria ;  and  one  Mile  and  a  half  from  the  Port,  the 
Free  City  Ilium,  from  which  proceedeth  all  that  great  Name, 
Outside  of  this  Gulf  lieth  the  Coast  Rhoetea,  inhabited  with 
the  Towns  upon  it,  of  Rhoateum,  Dardanium,  and  Arisb£. 
There  was  also  Acheleum,  a  Town  near  the  Tomb  of  Achilles, 
founded  by  the  Mitylenei,  and  afterwards  re-edified  by  the 
Athenians,  on  the  Bay  Sigseum,  where  his  Fleet  rode.  There 
also  was  Acantium,  built  by  the  Rhodians,  in  another  Horn, 
where  Ajax  was  interred,  thirty  Stadia  distant  from  Sigaeum, 
and  the  very  Station  of  his  Fleet.  Above  Molis  and  a  part 
of  Troas,  within  the  Continent,  is  the  (Town)  called  Teu- 
thrania,  which  the  Mysi  in  old  Time  held.  There  springeth 
Caicus,  the  River  abovesaid.  A  large  Country  this  is  of  it- 
self, and  especially  when  it  was  united  to  Mysia,  and  also  so 
called :  containing  in  it  Pionise,  Andera,  Cale,  Stabulum, 
Conisium,  Tegium,  Balcea,  Tiare,  Teuthrania,  Sarnaca,  Hali- 
serne,  Lycide,  Parthenium,  Thymbre,  Oxyopum,  Lygda- 
num,  Apollonia  :  and  Pergamus,  the  most  illustrious  City  of 
Asia  by  many  Degrees  ;  through  it  passeth  the  River  Selinus, 
and  Csetius  runneth  by  it,  issuing  out  of  the  Mountain  Pin- 
dasus.  Not  far  from  thence  is  Elea,  which,  as  we  have 
said,  standeth  on  the  Shore.  The  Jurisdiction  of  this  Tract 
is  named  Pergamena.  To  it  resort  the  Thyatyreni,  Myg- 
dones,  Mossini,  Bregmenteni,  Hieracomitae,  Perpereni, 
Tyareni,  Hierapolenses,  Harniatapolitae,  Attalenses,  Pan- 
taenses,  Apollonidenses,  and  other  Cities  of  little  Honour. 
Dardanium,  a  small  Town,  is  threescore  and  ten  Stadia  dis- 
tant from  Rhosteum.  Eighteen  Miles  from  thence  is  the 
Promontory  Trapeza,  where  first  the  Hellespont  rusheth 
along  roughly.  Eratosthenes  saith,  That  the  Nations  of  the 
Solymi,'  Leleges,  Bebrices,  Colycantii,  and  Trepsedores,  are 
utterly  perished  from  Asia.  Isidorus  reporteth  the  same  of 
the  Arymei  and  Capretae,  where  Apamia  was  built  by  King 
Seleucus,  between  Cilicia,  Cappadocia,  Cataonia,and  Armenia. 


90  History  of  Nature.  [Boon  V. 

And  because  he  had  vanquished  most  Fierce  Nations,  at  the 
first  he  named  it  Damea. 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 

The  Islands  before  Asia,  the  Pamphylian  Sea  ;  Rhodus, 
Samus,  and  Chios. 

THE  first  of  the  Islands  before  Asia  is  in  the  Canopic 
Mouth  of  the  Nilus,  so  called,  as  they  say,  from  Canopus, 
the  Pilot  of  King  Menelaus.1  The  second  is  Pharus,  which 
is  joined  to  Alexandria  by  a  Bridge.  In  old  Time  it  was  a 
Day's  Sailing  from  Egypt :  and  now  by  Fires  from  a  Watch- 
Tower,  Sailors  are  directed  in  the  Night.  It  is  a  Colony  of 
Casar  the  Dictator.  Alexandria  is  encompassed  with  de- 
ceitful Shallows,  and  there  are  but  three  Channels  from  the 
Sea;  Tegamum,  Posideurn,  and  Taurus.  Next  to  that  Isle, 
in  the  Phoenician  Sea  before  Joppa,  lieth  Paria,  an  Island 
not  larger  than  the  Town,  in  which  they  report  that  Andro- 
meda was  exposed  to  the  Beast.2  Also  Arados  beforenamed, 
between  which  and  the  Continent,  as  Mutianus  says,  there  is 
a  Fountain  in  the  Sea,  where  it  is  fifty  Cubits  deep,  out  of 
which  Fresh  Water  is  drawn  from  the  very  Bottom  of  the 
Sea,  through  Pipes  made  of  Leather.  The  Pamphylian  Sea 
hath  some  Islands  of  little  Importance.  In  the  Cilician  Sea 
is  Cyprus,  one  of  the  Five  greatest,  and  it  lieth  east  and 
west,  opposite  Cilicia  and  Syria ;  in  Times  past  the  Seat  of 
Nine  Kingdoms.  Timosthenes  saith,  that  it  contained  in 
Circuit  four  hundred  and  nineteen  Miles  and  a  half; 
but  Isidorus  is  of  opinion,  that  it  is  but  three  hundred 
and  seventy-five  Miles  in  Compass.  Its  Length  between 
the  two  Promontories,  Dinaretas  and  Acamas,  which 
is  westward,  Artemidorus  reporteth  to  be  160|  Miles:  and 

1  Jacob  Bryant,  in  his  "Analysis  of  Ancient  Mythology,"  (vol.  ii.  p.  4,) 
says,  "  that  the  priests  of  Egypt  laughed  at  this  account  of  the  pilot  of 
Menelaus,  as  an  idle  story ;  affirming  that  the  place  was  much  more  an- 
cient than  the  people  of  Greece ;  and  the  name  not  of  Grecian  original." 
Also  Stephanus  of  Byzantium  calls  the  pilot  Pharos,  and  not  Canopus. — 
Wem.  CM. 

3  Seep.  67  of  this  vol. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  91 

Timosthenes  200,  who  saith  besides,  that  formerly  it  was 
called  Acamantis :  according  to  Philonides,  Cerastis :  after 
Xenagoras,  Aspelia,  Amathusia,  and  Macatia :  Astynomus 
calleth  it  Cryptos  and  Colinia.  Towns  in  it,  15 :  Paphos, 
Palaepaphos,  Curias,  Citium,  Corineum,  Salamis,  Amathus, 
Lapethos,  Soloe,  Tamaseus,  Epidarurn,  Chytri,  Arsinoe, 
Carpasium,  and  Golgi.  There  were  in  it  besides,  Cinirya, 
Marium,  and  Idalium.  And  from  Anemurium  in  Cilicia,  is 
50  Miles.  The  Sea  which  is  stretched  between  they  call 
Aulon  Cilicium.  In  this  Tract  is  the  Island  Elaeusa:  and 
four  others  before  the  Promontory  named  Glides,  over-against 
Syria.  Likewise  one  more,  named  Stiria,  at  the  other  Cape. 
Over-against  Neampaphos,  Hierocepia.  Over-against  Sala- 
mis, Salaminae.  But  in  the  Lycian  Sea,  Illyris,  Telendos, 
Attelebussa,  and  three  Cypriae,  all  barren :  also  Dionysia, 
formerly  called  Caretha.  Then  over-against  the  Promon- 
tory of  Taurus,  the  Chelidonige,  dangerous  to  Sailors :  and 
as  many  more,  together  with  the  Town  Leucola  Pactiae, 
Lasia,  Nymphais,  Maoris,  Megista,  the  City  of  which  is 
gone.  Then  many  of  no  Importance.  But  over-against  Chi- 
mera, Dolichist£,  Chirogylium,  Crambussa,  Rhode",  Enagora, 
eight  Miles.  Daedaleon,  two:  Cryeon,  three:  and  Stron- 
gyle,  over-against  Sidynia  of  Antiochus :  and  toward  the 
River  Glaucus  Lagusa,  Macris,  Didymge,  Helbo,  Scope", 
Aspis,  and  Telandria ;  in  which  the  Town  is  gone :  and,  near 
to  Caunus,  Rhodussa.  But  the  fairest  of  all  is  the  Free  (Isle) 
Rhodos  ;  in  Compass  130  Miles ;  or  if  we  rather  give  Credit 
to  Isidorus,  103.  Cities  in  it  well  peopled,  Lindus,  Camirus, 
and  lalysus,  now  called  Rhodus.  By  the  Account  oflsido?-us9 
it  is  from  Alexandria  in  Egypt,  578  Miles :  but  according  to 
Eratosthenes,  569 :  according  to  Mutianus,  50Q ;  and  from 
Cyprus,  416.  In  Times  past  it  was  called  Ophyusa,  Asteria, 
jEthraea,  Trinacria,  Corymbia,  Posessa,  Atabyria  from  the 
King(Atabyris) :  and  finally,  Macaria,  and  Oloessa.  Islands  of 
the  Rhodians,  Carpathus,  which  gave  name  to  the  Sea  (Car- 
pathium) ;  Casos,  formerly  Achrn£  :  and  Nisyros,  distant 
from  Gnidos  twelve  Miles  and  a  half;  which  heretofore  had 
been  called  Porphyris.  And  in  the  same  Range,  Sym£, 


92  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V. 

between  Rhodus  and  Gnidus  ;  it  is  in  Circuit  six-and-thirty 
Miles  and  a  half.  It  is  blessed  with  eight  Harbours.  Be- 
sides these,  there  lie  about  Rhodus,  Cyclopis,  Teganon,  Cor- 
dylusa,  four  under  the  Name  of  Diabete :  Hymos,  Chalcis, 
with  a  Town  :  Seutlusa,  Narthecusa,  Dimastos,  and  Progne. 
Beyond  Gnidos,  Cicerussa,  Therionarce,  Calydne  with  three 
Towns,  Notium,  Nisyrus,  Mendeterus :  and  in  Arconesus, 
the  Town  Ceramus.  Upon  the  Coast  of  Caria,  the  Islands, 
twenty  in  number,  called  Argiae :  and  Hyetussa,  Lepsia,  and 
Leros.  But  the  most  noble  in  that  Bay  is  Cos,  which  is  dis- 
tant from  Halicarnassus  15  Miles ;  and  in  Compass  100,  as 
many  judge;  called  Merope,  as  Staphylus  saith  :  but  accord- 
ing to  Dionysius,  Cos  Meropis :  and  afterwards  Nymphaea. 
There  is  the  Mountain  Prion :  and  as  they  think,  Nysiris 
broken  off;  formerly  named  Porphyris.  Beyond  this, 
Carianda,  with  a  Town :  and  not  far  from  Halicarnassus, 
Pidosus.  Moreover,  in  the  Gulf  Ceramicus,  Priaponnesus, 
Hipponesus,  Psyra,  Mya,  Lampsemandus,  Passala,  Crusa, 
Pyrrhe,  Sepiussa,  Melano ;  and  within  a  short  Distance  of 
the  Continent,  another  called  Cinedopolis,  from  the  shameful 
Persons  that  King  Alexander  left  there.  The  Coast  of  Ionia 
hath  (the  Islands)  ./Egeae  and  Corsese,  besides  Icaros,  spoken 
of  before.  Also  Lade,  formerly  called  Latse :  and  among 
some  others  of  no  worth,  the  two  Camelides  near  to  Miletus. 
Mycalenum,  Trogylise,  Trepsilion,  Argennon,  Sardalion : 
and  the  free  Samos,  which  in  Circuit  is  fourscore  and  seven 
Miles;  or  as  Isidorus  thinketh,  100.  Aristotle  writeth, 
that  at  first  it  was  called  Parrhania,  afterwards  Dryusa,  and 
then  Anthemusa.  Aristocritus  giveth  it  other  Names,  as 
Melamphyllus,  and  afterward  Cyparissia :  others  term  it 
Partheno-arusa,  and  Stephane.  Rivers  in  it,  Imbrasus, 
Chesius,  arid  Ibettes  :  Fountains,  Gigarto  and  Leucothea : 
the  Mountain  Cercetius.  There  lie  adjoining  to  it  the 
Islands  Rhypara,  Nymphaea,  arid  Achillea.  Fourscore  and 
thirteen  Miles  from  it,  is  Chios,  free,  with  a  Town  ;  which 
Island  is  as  renowned  as  Samos.  jEphorus  by  the  ancient 
Name  calleth  it  ^Ethalia :  Metrodorus  and  Cleobulus,  Chia, 
from  the  Nymph  Chio.  Others  suppose  it  was  so  called 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  93 

from  Chion,  i.e.  Snow  :  and  some  would  have  it  to  be  Ma- 
cris  and  Pityusa.  It  has  a  Mountain  called  Pellenaeus,  the 
Marble  called  Chium.  Ancient  Geographers  have  written, 
that  it  is  125  Miles  in  Circuit ;  and  Isidorus  addeth  nine 
more.  It  is  situated  between  Samos  and  Lesbos,  for  the  most 
part  opposite  to  Erythrse.  Near  it  lieth  Thallusa,  which  some 
write  Dapnusa,  (Enussa,  Elaphites,  Euryanassa,  Arginussa 
with  a  Town.  Now  all  these  are  about  Ephesus,  as  also 
those  called  of  Pisistratus :  and  the  Anthinae,  Myonnesus,  and 
Diareusa.  In  both  these  the  Towns  are  lost.  Poroselense 
with  a  Town,  Cerciae,  Halon£,  Commone,  Illetia,  Lepria, 
and  Rhespheria,  Procusae,  Bolbulae,  Phanae,  Priapos,  Syce, 
Melane,  ^Enare,  Sidusa,  Pela,  Drymusa,  Anydros,  Scopelos, 
Sycussa,  Marathussa,  Psile,  Perirheusa,  and  many  others  of 
no  Importance.  But  among  the  illustrious  is  Teos,  in  the 
deep  Sea,  with  a  Town :  distant  from  Chios  fourscore  and 
one  Miles,  and  as  much  from  Erythrae.  Near  Smyrna  are 
the  Peristerides,  Carteria,  Alopece,  Elseussa,  Bachina,  Pys- 
tira,  Crommyonnesus,  and  Megale.  Before  Troas,  the  Asca- 
niae,  and  three  Plateae.  Then  the  Lainiae,  and  two  Plitaniae ; 
Plate,  Scopelos,  Getone,  Artheidon,  Celae,  Lagussae,  and 
Didymae.  But  the  most  illustrious  is  Lesbos,  which  is  from 
Chios  threescore  and  five  Miles.  It  was  called  Hemerte,  and 
Lasia,  Pelasgia,  J^gira,  Mihyope,  and  Macaria :  famous  for 
eight  Towns ;  of  which  Pyrrha  is  swallowed  up  by  the  Sea : 
and  Arisb&  is  overthrown  by  an  Earthquake.  Methymna 
was  peopled  from  Antissa,  which  was  united  to  it,  and  in  it 
were  eight  Cities,  and  it  is  about  seven-and-thirty  Miles  from 
Asia.1  Also  Agamede  and  Hiera  have  perished.  There 
remain  Eresos,  Pyrrha,  and  the  free  Mitylenae,  which  hath 
continued  powerful  for  500  Years.  Isidorus  saith,  that  this 
Island  is  in  Circuit  173  Miles  :  but  the  old  Geographers,  195. 
In  it  are  these  Mountains,  Lepethymus,  Ordymnus,  Macistus, 
Creon,  and  Olympus.  It  is  distant  eight  Miles  and  a  half  from 
the  Continent,  where  it  lieth  nearest.  Islands  near  it,  Sauda- 
lion,  and  the  five  Leucae.  Of  these,  Cydonea  hath  a  Foun- 

1  Natolia. 


94  History  of  Nature.  [Boon  V. 

tain  of  hot  Water.  The  Argenussae  are  distant  from  ./Egse 
four  Miles.  Then  Phellusa  and  Pedua.  Outside  the  Helles- 
pont, over-against  the  Sigean  Coast,  lieth  the  Isle  Tenedus, 
called  sometimes  Leucophrys,  Phoenice,  and  Lyrnessos. 
From  Lesbos  it  is  six-and-fifty  Miles,  and  from  Sigaeum 
twelve  Miles  and  a  half. 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 

Hellespontus,  Mysia,  Phrygia,   Galatia,  Bithynia, 
Bosporus. 

THE  Hellespont  then  assumeth  its  Violence  and  over- 
cometh  the  Sea,  digging  a  Way  with  its  Eddies,  until  it  hath 
torn  away  Asia  from  Europe.  That  Promontory  we  have 
named  Trapeza,  ten  Miles  beyond  which  stancleth  the  Town 
Abydum,  where  the  Straits  are  seven  Stadia  over.  Be- 
yond it  is  the  Town  Percote,  and  Lampsacum,  called  for- 
merly Pityusa :  the  Colony  Parium,  which  Homer  called 
Adrastia.  The  Town  Priapos,  the  River  JEsepus,  Zelia, 
Propontus ;  as  the  Place  is  called  where  the  Sea  enlargeth 
itself.  The  River  Granicum,  the  Harbour  Artace,  where 
once  stood  a  Town.  Beyond  it  is  an  Island,  which  Alexander 
joined  to  the  Continent,  in  which  standeth  the  Town  Cyzi- 
cum,  founded  by  the  Milesians,  called  heretofore  Arconne- 
sos;  Dolionis,  and  Dindymis,  near  the  Top  of  which  is  the 
Mountain  Dindymus.  Presently  the  Towns  Placia,  Aviacos, 
Scylac£ :  and  behind  them,  the  Mountain  Olympus,  called 
Msesius.  The  City  Olympena.  The  Rivers  Horisius  and 
Rhyndacus,  formerly  named  Lycus.  This  River  taketh  its 
Beginning  in  the  Lake  Artynia,  near  to  Miletopolis.  It 
receiveth  the  Marestos  and  many  others  ;  and  separateth 
Asia  from  Bithynia.  This  Region  was  called  Cronia  :  after- 
ward Thessalis,  then  Malianda  and  Strymonis.  These  (Na- 
tions) Homer  named  Halizones,  because  they  are  environed 
with  the  Sea.  There  was  a  very  great  City  named  Attusa. 
At  this  Day  there  are  fifteen  Cities,  among  which  is  Gordiu- 
come,  now  called  Juliopolis ;  and  on  the  Coasts  Dascylos. 
Then  the  River  Gebes  :  and  within-land,  the  Town  Helgas, 


BooKV.]  History  of  Nature.  95 

the  same  as  Germanicopolis,  known  also  Ity  another  Name 
Booscoete,  as  also  Apamea,  now  called  Myrtea  of  the  Colo- 
phonians.  The  River  Etheleum,  the  ancient  limit  of  Troas, 
and  where  Mysia  beginneth.  Afterwards  the  Gulf  into 
which  runneth  the  River  Ascanium,  the  Town  Bryllion. 
The  Rivers  Hylas  and  Cios,  with  a  Town  of  that  Name  : 
which  was  a  Place  of  Trade,  not  far  off  from  the  Inhabitants 
of  Phrygia,  and  built  by  the  Milesians  in  a  Place  called  As- 
cania  of  Phrygia.  And  therefore  we  cannot  do  better  than 
here  to  speak  of  that  Country.  Phrygia  spreadeth  out  above 
Troas  and  the  Nations  before  named,  from  the  Promontory 
Lectus  unto  the  River  Etheleus.  It  bordereth  on  the 
North  upon  part  of  Galatia,  southward  it  boundeth  on  Ly- 
caonia,  Pisidia,  and  Mygdonia ;  and  on  the  east  it  reacheth 
to  Cappadocia.  The  most  celebrated  Towns  besides  those 
before  spoken  of,  are  Ancyra,  Andria,  Celsense,  Colossae,  Ca- 
rina,  Cotiaion,  Ceranse,  Iconium,  and  Midaion.  Certain 
Authors  write,  that  out  of  Europe  have  passed  over  the 
Mysi,  Bryges,  and  Thyni,  from  whom  are  named  the  Mysi, 
Phryges,  and  Bithyni. 

At  the  same  time  I  think  it  good  to  write  also  of  Galatia, 
which  lying  higher  than  Phrygia,  possesseth  a  greater  part  of 
its  plain  Country,  and  the  former  Capital  of  it,  called  Gordium. 
They  who  inhabited  that  Quarter  were  sprung  from  the  Gauls, 
and  were  called  Tolistobogi,  Voturi,  and  Ambitui :  but  they 
that  occupied  the  Country  of  Mseonia  and  Paphlagonia  were 
named  Trocmi.  Cappadocia  is  spread  along  from  the  North 
and  East ;  and  the  most  plenteous  Tract  thereof  the  Tecto- 
sages  and  Teutobodiaci  kept  in  their  Possession.  And  thus 
much  for  these  Nations.  The  People  and  Tetrarchies  are  in 
all  a  hundred  and  ninety  and  five.  The  Towns:  of  the 
Tectosages,  Ancyra  :  of  the  Trocmi,  Tavium  :  of  the  Tolisto- 
bogians,  Pesinus.  Besides  these,  there  are  celebrated  the 
Attalenses,  Arasenses,  Cotnenses,  Dios-Hieronitse,  Lystreni, 
Neapolitani,  Oeandenses,  Seleucenses,  Sebasteni,  Timmonia- 
censes,  and  Tebaseni.  Galatia  extendeth  to  Gabalia  and 
Milyae  in  Pamphylia;  which  are  situated  about  Baris :  also 
Cyllanticum  and  Oroandicum,  a  Tract  of  Pisidia  :  likewise 


96  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  V. 

Obigene",  a  part  of  Lycaonia.  Rivers  there  are  in  it,  beside 
those  beforenamed,  Sangarium  and  Gall  as,  from  which  the 
Priests  of  the  Mother  of  the  Gods  were  named.  Now  to 
speak  of  what  remains  on  the  Sea-coast :  inward  from  Cios 
is  Prusa  within  Bithynia ;  founded  by  Annibal  beneath 
Olympus.  From  Prusa  to  Nicsea,  five-and-twenty  Miles ; 
the  Lake  Ascanius  lying  between.  Then  Nicsea,  in  the  out- 
most part  of  the  Gulf  Ascanium,  which  before  was  called 
Olbia:  also  to  another  Prusa,  und«r  the  Mountain  Hippius. 
There  were  Pythopolis,  Parthenopolis,  and  Choryphanta. 
Now  there  are  upon  the  Sea-side  the  Rivers,  .ZEsius,  Bryazon, 
Plataneus,  Areus,  Siros,  Gendos,  named  also  Chrysorrhoas. 
The  Promontory  on  which  stood  the  Town  Megaricum.  Then 
the  Gulf  which  was  called  Craspedites  ;  because  that  Town 
stood  as  it  were  in  a  Fold  of  it,  There  was  also  the  Town 
Astacum,  from  which  the  Bay  took  the  Name  of  Astacenus. 
There  was  also  the  Town  Libyssa,  where  now  remaineth 
nothing  but  the  Tomb  of  Annibal.  In  the  inmost  part  of 
the  Gulf  is  the  very  handsome  Town  of  Bithynia,  called 
Nicomedia.  The  Promontory  Leucatas  which  encloseth  the 
Bay  of  Astarenus,  is  from  Nicomedia  forty-two  Miles  and 
a  half.  Being  past  this  Bay,  the  opposite  Shores  approach- 
ing together,  the  Straits  reach  as  far  as  to  the  Thracian  Bos- 
phorus.  Upon  these  Straits  standeth  the  Free  (City)  Chalce- 
don,  seventy-two  Miles  and  a  half  from  Nicomedia.  Formerly 
it  was  called  Procerastis :  then,  Compusa  :  afterwards,  the 
City  of  the  Blind ;  because  they  who  founded  it  were  so 
ignorant  as  not  to  give  a  preference  to  a  Place  seven  Stadia 
from  Byzantium,  so  much  more  favourable  in  every  respect. 
But  within-land,  in  Bithynia,  is  the  Colony  Apamena :  also, 
the  Agrippenses,  Juliopolitae,  and  they  of  Bithynium.  The 
Rivers,  Syrium,  Lapsias,  Pharmicas,  Alces,  Crynis,  Lylaeus, 
Scopius,  Hieras,  which  parteth  Bithynia  from  Galatia.  Be- 
yond Chalcedon,  stood  Chrysopolis:  then,  Nicopolis,  of 
which  the  Gulf  still  retaineth  the  Name :  wherein  is  the 
Port  of  Amycus :  the  Promontory  Naulochum  :  Estia, 
wherein  is  the  Temple  of  Neptune;  and  the  Bosphorus, 
half-a-mile  over,  which  now  again  parteth  Asia  from  Europe. 


BOOK  V.]  History  of  Nature.  97 

From  Chalcedon,  it  is  twelve  Miles  and  a  half.  There  begin 
thej  narrow  Straits,  where  it  is  eight  Miles  and  a  quarter 
over:  where  stood  the  Town  Philopolis.  All  the  Coasts 
are  inhabited  by  the  Thyni,  but  the  Inland  Parts  by 
the  Bithyni.  This  is  the  end  of  Asia,  and  of  282  Nations, 
which  are  reckoned  from  the  Gulf  of  Lycia  to  this  place. 
The  Space  of  the  Hellespont  and  Propontis  to  the  Thracian 
Bosphorus  containeth  in  Length  188  Miles,  as  we  have 
before  said.  From  Chalcedon  to  Sigeum,  by  the  computa- 
tion of  Isidorus,  it  is  372  Miles  and  a  half.  Islands  lying  in 
Propontis  before  Cyzicum  are  these;  Elaphonnesus,  from 
whence  cometh  the  Cyzicen  Marble ;  and  the  same  Isle  was 
called  Neuris,  and  Proconnesus.  Then  follow  Ophiiisa, 
Acanthus,  Phoebe,  Scopelos,  Porphyrione,  and  Halone,  with 
a  Town.  Delphacia,  Polydora  :  Artaceeon,  with  the  Town. 
And  over-against  Nicomedia,  is  Demonnesos :  likewise,  be- 
yond Heraclea,  over-against  Bithynia,  is  Thynnias,  which 
the  Barbarians  call  Bithynia.  There  is  also  Antiochia  :  and 
opposite  to  the  narrow  Straits  of  llhyndacus,  Besbicos, 
eighteen  Miles  in  Circuit.  Also  there  is  Elsea,  two  Rho- 
dussae,  Erebinthus,  Magale,  Chalcitis,  and  Pityodes, 


VOL.  IT. 


IN  THE  SIXTH   BOOK 


AEE    CONTAINED 

REGIONS,  NATIONS,  SEAS,  CITIES,  PORTS,  RIVERS,  WITH  THEIR 
DIMENSIONS;  AND  PEOPLE  THAT  ARE  OR  HAVE  BEEN  : — 


CHAP. 

1.  Pontus  Euxinus,  formerly  Ax- 

enus. 

2.  The   Nations  of  the   Paphla- 

gones  and  Cappadocians. 

3.  Cappadocia. 

4.  The  Nations  of  the  Country 

Themiscyra. 

5.  The    Region    Colchica.      The 

Achsei,  and  the  rest  in  that 
Tract. 

6.  Bosphorus     Cimmerms,     and 

Mo30tis. 

7.  The  People  about  Moeotis. 

8.  The  Armenise,  both. 

9.  Armenia  the  Greater. 

10.  Albania,  Iberia. 

1 1 .  The  Gates  Caucasian 

12.  Islands  in  Pontus. 

13.  Nations    about    the    Scythian 

Ocean. 

14.  Media  and  the  Straits  Caspise. 

15.  Nations  about  the  Hircanian 

Sea. 

16.  Also  other  Nations  bordering 

upon  that  Country. 

17.  People  of  Scythia. 

18.  The  River  Ganges. 


CHAP. 

19.  The  Nations  of  India. 

20.  The  River  Indus. 

21.  The  Arii,  and  the  Nations  bor- 

dering upon  them. 

22.  The  Island  Taprobane. 

23.  Capissene,  Carmania. 

24.  The  Persian  and  Arabian  Gulfs. 

25.  The  Island  Cassandrus,  and  the 

Kingdoms  of  the  Parthians. 

26.  Media,  Mesopotamia,  Babylon, 

Seleucia. 

27.  The  River  Tigris. 

28.  Arabia,    Nomades,    Nabathsei, 

Omani,  Tylos,  and  Ogyris, 
two  Islands. 

29.  The  Gulfs  of  the  Red  Sea,  the 

Troglodite    and    Ethiopian 
Seas. 

30.  Nations  of  strange  and  won- 

derful Shapes. 

31.  Islands  of  the  Ethiopian  Sea. 

32.  Of  the  Fortunate  Islands. 

33.  The    Division    of   the    Earth 

calculated  by  Measures. 

34.  A  Division  of  the  Earth  by 

Climates,     Lines     Parallel, 
and  Equal  Shadows. 


Towns  of  name,  195.  Nations  of  account,  566.  Famous  Rivers,  180. 
Notable  Mountains,  38.  Principal  Islands,  108.  Cities  and  Nations 
perished,  195.  In  sum,  there  are  rehearsed  in  this  Book,  of  other  Things, 
Histories  and  Observations,  2214. 


LATIN  AUTHORS  ABSTRACTED: 

M.  Agrippa,  Varro  Atacinus,  Cornelius  Nepos,  Hyginus,  Lu.  Vetus,  Mela 
Pomponius,  Domitius  Corbulo,  Licinius  Mutianus,  Claudius  Coesar,  Aruntius 
Sebosus,  Fabridus  Thuscus,  T.  Livius,  Seneca,  Nigidius. 

FOREIGN  WRITERS  : 

King  Juba,  Polybius,  Hecatceus,  Hellanicus,  Damastes,  Eudoxus,  Dicce- 
archus,  Beto,  Timosthenes,  Pair  odes,  Demodamas,  Clitarchus,  Eratosthenes, 
Alexander  the  Great,  Ephorus,  Hipparchus,  Pancetius,  CattimacJius,  Artemi- 
dorus,  Apollodorus,  Agathocles,  Polybius,  Eumachus  Siculus,  Alexander 
Polyhistor,  Amometus,  Metrodorus,  Posidonius,  Onesicritus,  Nearchus, 
Megasthenes,  Diognetus,  Aristocreon,  Bion,  Dialdon,  Simonides  the  Younger, 
Basiles,  and  Xenophon  Lampsacenus. 


THE  SIXTH  BOOK 


HISTORY   OF   NATURE. 


WRITTEN    BY 


C.  PLINIUS  SECUNDUS. 


CHAPTER  I. 
Pontus  Euxinus. 

HE  Pontus  Euxinus,  named  in  old  time  Axenos, 
from  its  inhospitable  wildness,  is  spread  between 
Europe  and  Asia,  by  a  special  Envy  of  Nature, 
and  an  Eagerness  to  maintain  the  Sea  in  his 
greedy  and  endless  Appetite.  It  was  not  enough 
for  the  Ocean  to  have  environed  the  whole 
Earth,  and  to  have  taken  away  a  great  part  of  it,  with 
exceeding  Rage  ;  it  sufficed  not,  to  have  broken  through  the 
shattered  Mountains,  and  also  having  torn  Calpe1  from 
Africa,  to  have  swallowed  up  a  much  larger  space  than  it 
left  behind :  nor  to  have  poured  out  Propontis  through  the 
Hellespont,2  so  again  devouring  the  Land :  from  the  Bos- 
phorus  also  it  is  spread  abroad  into  a  large  Space  without 

1  Mouth  of  Gibraltar. 

8  The  ideas  of  the  ancients  appear  to  have  been  confounded  in  the  wide 


100  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

being  satisfied,  until  they  are  very  wide,  and  the  Lake 
Moeotis  joiueth  its  ruin  to  them.  And  that  this  hath 
happened  in  spite  of  the  Earth,  appeareth  by  so  many 
Straits  and  such  narrow  Passages  of  opposing  nature, 
considering  that  at  the  Hellespont  the  Breadth  is  not 
above  875  Paces :  and  at  the  two  Bosphori  even  Oxen  easily 
pass  over :  and  hereupon  they  both  took  their  Name :  and  in 
this  disunion  appeareth  an  agreement  of  relationship.  For 
Cocks  may  be  heard  to  crow,  and  Dogs  to  bark  from  one 
Side  to  the  other :  and  by  the  interchange  of  Human  Speech 
Men  out  of  these  two  Worlds  may  talk  one  to  another  in 
continued  discourse,  if  the  Winds  do  not  carry  away  the 
Sound. 

Some  have  made  the  Measure  of  Pontus  from  the  Bos- 
phorus  to  the  Lake  Moeotis  to  be  1438  Miles.  But  Erato- 
sthenes reckoneth  it  less  by  one  hundred.  Agrippa  saith, 
that  from  Chalcedon  to  Phasis  is  a  thousand  Miles;  and 
onward  to  Bosphorus  Cimmerius,  360  Miles.  We  will  set 
down  in  general  the  Distances  of  Places  collected  in  our  own 
Days,  when  our  Armies  have  carried  on  WTar  even  in  the 
very  Mouth  of  the  Cimmerian  Strait. 

Beyond  the  Straits  of  the  Bosphorus  is  the  River 
Rhebas,  which  some  have  called  Rhcesus:  and  beyond  it, 
Psillis  :  the  Port  of  Calpas  ;  and  Sangarius,  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal Rivers :  it  ariseth  in  Phrygia,  receiveth  large  Rivers 
into  it,  and  amongst  the  rest  Tembrogius  and  Gallus.  The 
same  Sangarius  is  by  many  called  Coralius ;  from  which 
begin  the  Gulfs  Mariandirii  and  the  Town  Heraclea,  situated 
upon  the  River  Lycus.  It  is  from  the  Mouth  of  Pontus 
200  Miles.  There  is  the  Port  Acone,  cursed  with  the 
poisonous  Aconitum  ;  and  the  Cave  Acherusia.  The  Rivers 
Pedopiles,  Callichorum,  and  Sonantes.  Towns,  Tium,  eight- 
and-thirty  Miles  from  Heraclea :  the  River  Bilis. 

expanse  of  the  ocean:  in  consequence,  probably,  of  the  creeping  manner 
of  their  navigation.     Homer  speaks  of — 

"  All  wide  Hellespont's  unmeasured  main." — Iliad,  b.  24. 

Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  101 

CHAPTER  II. 

The  Nation  of  the  Paphlagonians,  and  Cappadocians. 

BEYOND  this  River  Bilis  is  the  Nation  of  Paphlagonia, 
which  some  have  named  Pylsemenia,  and  it  is  enclosed  with 
Galatia  behind  it.  The  Town  Mastya  of  the  Milesians  :  and 
next  to  it  Cromna.  In  this  quarter  the  Heneti  inhabit,  as 
Cornelius  Nepos  saith,  from  whom  the  Veneti  in  Italy,  who 
bear  their  Name,  are  descended,  as  he  would  have  us  believe. 
The  Town  Sesamum,  which  is  now  called  Amastris.  The 
Mountain  Cytorus,  64  Miles  from  Tium.  The  Towns 
Cimolus  and  Stephane ;  the  River  Parthenius ;  the  Pro- 
montory Corambis,  which  reacheth  a  mighty  way  into 
the  Sea;  and  it  is  from  the  Mouth  of  the  Pontus  315 
Miles,  or  as  others  think,  350.  It  is  also  as  far  from  the 
(Strait)  Cimmerius,  or  as  some  would  rather  have  it,  312 
Miles  and  a  half.  A  Town  there  was  also  of  that  Name : 
and  another  beyond  it  called  Arminum  :  but  now  there  is  the 
Colony  Sinope,  164  Miles  from  Citorum.  The  River  Vare- 
tum ;  the  People  of  the  Cappadoces ;  the  Town  Gaziura, 
and  Gazelum  ;  the  River  Halys,  which,  issuing  out  of  the 
foot  of  Taurus,  passeth  through  Cataonia  and  Cappadocia. 
The  Towns,  Grangre,  Carissa ;  the  Free  City  Amisum,  distant 
from  Sinope  130  Miles.  A  Gulf,  bearing  the  Name  of  this 
Town,  runneth  so  far  within  the  Land  that  it  seemeth  to 
make  Asia  almost  an  Island :  for  from  thence  through  th^e 
Continent  to  the  Gulf  Issicus  in  Cilicia,  is  not  above  200 
Miles.  In  all  which  Tract  there  are  no  more  than  three 
Nations  which  justly  may  be  called  Greeks:  which  are  the 
Dorians,  lonians,  and  ^Eolians  :  for  all  the  rest  are  Bar- 
barians. To  Amisum  there  was  joined  the  Town  Eupa- 
toria,  founded  by  Mithridates  :  and  when  he  was  vanquished, 
both  together  took  the  Name  of  Pompeiopolis.1 

1  From  Pompey  the  Great,  who  conquered  him. —  Wern.  Club. 


102  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

CHAPTER  III. 
Cappadocia. 

IN  the  interior  of  Cappadocia  is  a  Colony  founded  by 
Claudius  Ccesar,  called  Archelais,  situated  upon  the  River 
Halys.  The  Town  Comana,  by  which  the  (River)  Sarus 
runneth:  Neo-Csesarea,  washed  by  the  Lycus :  and  Amasia, 
on  the  River  Iris,  in  the  Country  Gazacena.  In  Colopena, 
also,  are  Sebastia  and  Sebastopolis :  little  Towns,  but  equal 
with  those  abovesaid.  In  the  other  part  (of  Cappadocia)  is 
the  City  Melita,  built  by  Queen  Semiramis,  not  far  from  the 
Euphrates :  also,  Dio-Csesarea,  Tyana,  Castabala,  Magno- 
polis,  Zela  :  and  under  the  Mountain  Argseus,  Mazaca,  which 
now  is  named  Csesarea.  That  part  of  Cappadocia  which  lieth 
before  Armenia  the  Greater,  is  called  Meliten£ :  that  which 
bordereth  upon  Comagene,  Cataonia :  upon  Phrygia,  Gar- 
sauritis  :  upon  Sargaurasana,  Cammanen£ :  and  upon  Ga- 
latia,  Morimen£.  And  there  the  River  Cappadox  separateth 
the  one  from  the  other.  From  this  River  the  Cappadocians 
took  their  Name,  having  formerly  been  called  Leucosyri. 
The  River  Lycus  divideth  the  above-named  new  Armenia 
from  Neo-Csesarea.  Within  the  Country  there  runneth  also 
the  famous  Ceraunus.  But  on  the  Coast  beyond  Amysum  is 
the  Town  Lycastum,  and  the  River  Chadisia:  and  still  fur- 
ther the  Country  Themiscyra.  The  River  Iris,  bringing 
down  the  Lycus.  In  the  midland  Parts  the  City  Ziela, 
ennobled  by  the  slaughter  of  Triarius,*  and  the  Victory  of 
C.  CcBsar.  In  the  Coast  the  River  Thermodon,  which 
issueth  from  before  a  Castle  named  Phanaroea,  and  passeth 

1  Triarius,  a  Roman  general  under  Lucullus  in  the  Mithridatic  war,  was 
defeated  by  the  enemy,  at  the  battle  of  Ziela,  with  the  loss  of  7000  of  his 
men.  And  at  the  same  place,  some  years  afterwards,  Julius  Caesar  gained 
an  important  victory  over  Pharnaces,  the  son  of  Mithridates,  deprived 
him  of  the  kingdom  of  Pontus,  and  entirely  ruined  his  army.  It  was  on 
this  occasion  that  Csesar,  when  describing  the  rapidity  and  despatch  he 
had  employed  in  the  victory,  made  use  of  the  well-known  sentence, 
"  Veni,  vidi,  vici,"  I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  103 

by  the  foot  of  the  Mountain  Amazonius.  There  was  a  Town 
of  the  same  Name,  and  five  others,  namely,  Phamizonium, 
Themiscyra,  Sotira,  Amasia,  Comana,  now  called  Manteium. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
The  Nations  of  the  Region  Themlscyrene. 

THE  Nations  of  the  Genetae  and  Chalybes ;  a  Town  of  the 
Cotyi.  Nations  called  Tibareni ;  and  Mossyni,  who  mark 
their  Bodies  with  Figures.1  The  Nation  of  the  Macrocephali, 
the  Town  Cerasus,  the  Port  Cordulse.  The  Nations  Bechires  ; 
Buzeti ;  the  River  Melas.  The  Nation  Macrones,  Sideni, 
and  the  River  Syderium,  upon  which  is  situated  the  Town 
Polemonium,  distant  from  Amisum  120  Miles:  beyond  this 
the  Rivers  Jasonius  and  Melanthius :  also  80  Miles  from 
Amisum,  the  Town  Pharnacea:  the  Castle  and  River  of 
Tripolis.  Also,  Philocalia,  and  Liviopolis  without  a  River: 
also,  the  Free  City  Trapezus,  environed  with  a  high  Moun- 
tain, 100  Miles  from  Pharnacea.  Beyond  Trapezus  is  the 
Nation  of  the  Armenochalybes,  and  Armenia  the  Greater  : 
which  are  30  Miles  asunder.  On  the  Coast  is  the  River 
Pyxites  that  runneth  before  Trapezus:  and  beyond  it  the 
Nation  of  the  Sanni  Heniochi.  The  River  Absarus,  with  a 
Castle  likewise  so  named  in  its  Mouth  ;  from  Trapezus  is 
150  Miles.  Behind  the  Mountains  of  that  quarter  is  Iberia  : 
but  in  the  Coast  of  the  same  are  the  Heniochi,  Ampreutae, 
and  Lazi.  The  Rivers  Campseonysis,  Nogrus,  Bathys. 
The  Nations  of  the  Colchians ;  the  Town  Matium,  the 
River  Heracleum,  and  a  Promontory  of  the  same  Name ; 
and  the  most  renowned  (River)  of  Pontus,  called  Phasis. 
This  River  riseth  out  of  the  Moschian  Mountains,  and  for 
38  Miles  and  a  half  is  Navigable  for  great  Vessels.  And 
then  for  a  great  way  it  carrieth  smaller  Vessels  ;  having 

1  The  practice  of  tattooing  is  general  through  the  islands  of  the 
Southern  Ocean ;  the  inhabitants  of  which,  however,  were  not  known  to 
Pliny.  But  it  is  also  practised,  even  in  our  day,  by  the  people  of  Burma, 
and  perhaps  in  other  nations  of  the  East.  The  same  practice  is  again 
referred  to  in  b.  vii.  c.  11. —  Wern.  Club. 


104  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

over  it  120  Bridges.  It  had  many  Towns  upon  its  Banks; 
the  most  celebrated  being  Tyritacen,  Cygnus,  and  Phasis, 
situated  at  its  very  Mouth.  But  the  most  illustrious  was 
j£a,  fifteen  Miles  from  the  Sea  :  where  Hippos  and  Cyanos, 
two  very  great  Rivers,  coming  from  different  Parts,  flow  into 
it.  Now  it  possesseth  Surium  only,  which  taketh  its  Name 
from  the  River  Surium,  that  runneth  into  it.  And  thus  far 
we  said  that  Phasis  was  capable  of  being  navigated  by  great 
Ships.  And  it  received)  other  Rivers,  remarkable  for  size 
and  number,  among  which  is  the  River  Glaucus.  In  the 
Mouth  of  this  River  (Phasis)  there  are  Islands  without  a 
Name.  It  is  distant  from  Bsarus  75  Miles.  Being  past 
Phasis,  there  is  another  River  called  Charien  ;  the  Nation  of 
the  Salae,  named  in  old  Time  Phthirophagi  and  Suani ;  the 
River  Cobus,  which  issueth  out  of  Caucasus,  and  runneth 
through  the  Country  of  the  Suani.  Then  Rhoas  ;  the  region 
Ecrectic£  :  the  Rivers  Sigania,  Tersos,  Atelpos,  Chrysorrhoas, 
and  the  Nation  Absilse:  the  Castle  Sebastopolis,  a  hundred 
Miles  from  Phasis  ;  the  Nation  of  the  Sanigares,  the  Town 
Cygnus,  the  River  and  Town  called  Pityus.  And  last  of  all, 
the  Nations  of  the  Heniochae,  which  have  many  Names. 

CHAPTER  V. 

The  Region  of  Colchis,  the  Achai,  and  other  Nations  in 
that  Tract. 

NEXT  followeth  the  region  of  Colchis,  which  is  likewise 
in  Pontus  :  wherein  the  craggy  Summits  of  the  Caucasus 
wind  and  turn  toward  the  Rhiphsean  Mountains,  as  hath  been 
hinted  ;  on  the  one  side  bending  down  toward  the  Euxinus 
and  Moeotis ;  and  on  the  other  inclining  to  the  Caspian  and 
Hircanian  Seas.  The  remainder  of  the  Coasts  are  occupied  by 
savage  Nations,as  the  Melanchlseni,  the  Choruxi;  Dioscurias, 
a  City  of  the  Colchi,  near  the  River  Anthemus,  now  lying 
waste,  although  it  was  so  renowned  in  Time  past,  that  by  the 
report  of  Timosthenes  there  were  settled  therein  300  Nations 
which  used  distinct  Languages.  And  afterwards  our  Ro- 
mans were  forced  to  provide  130  Interpreters  for  the  Traffic 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  105 

with  this  People.  Some  think  that  it  was  first  founded  by 
Amphitus  and  Telchius,  who  had  the  charge  of  the  Chariots 
of  Castor  and  Pollux  .-1  for  certain  it  is,  that  the  fierce  Nation 
of  the  Heniochi  are  from  them  descended.  Being  past 
Dioscurias,  there  is  the  Town  Heraclium,  which  from  Sebas- 
topolis  is  80  Miles  distant.  The  Achaei,  Mardi,  and  Car- 
cetae :  after  them  the  Serri,  and  Cephalotomi.  Far  within 
that  Tract  stood  the  very  wealthy  Town  Pitius,  which  by  the 
Heniochians  was  plundered.  On  the  back  part  thereof 
inhabit  the  Epageritse,  a  People  of  the  Sarmatae,  upon  the 
tops  of  the  Caucasus :  after  which  the  Sauromatae.  Hither 
had  fled  King  Mithridates  in  the  time  of  Prince  Claudius, 
and  he  made  report  that  the  Thali  dwell  thereby,  and  border 
Eastward  upon  the  very  opening  of  the  Caspian  Sea:  which 
becometh  Dry  when  the  Sea  ebbeth.  But  on  the  Coast 
near  to  the  Cercetae  is  the  River  Icarusa,  with  a  Town  and 
River  called  Hierum,  136  Miles  from  Heracleum.  Then 
come  ye  to  the  Promontory  Cronea,  in  the  steep  Ridge 
of  which  the  Toretae  inhabit.  The  City  Sindica,  67  Miles 
from  Hierum  :  the  River  Sceaceriges. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Mceotis  and  the  Bosphorus  Cimmerius. 

» -: 

FROM  the  above-said  River  to  the  Entrance  of  the  Cim- 
merian Bosphorus  is  88  Miles  and  a  half.  But  the  Length 
of  the  Peninsula  itself,  which  stretcheth  out  between  the 
Lakes  Pontus  and  Moeotis  is  not  above  87  Miles,  and  the 
Breadth  in  no  place  less  than  two  Acres  of  Land.  They  call 
it  Eione.  The  very  Coasts  of  the  Bosphorus,  both  of  Asia 
and  Europe,  are  curved  towards  the  Moeolis.  The  Towns  in 

1  There  is  frequently  occasion  to  remark,  that  Pliny  speaks  of  the 
deities  of  his  country,  as  if  it  was  an  acknowledged  fact  that  they  were 
once  living  men.  -ZEolus,  Hercules,  and  even  Jupiter,  are  so  regarded ; 
and  as  he  speaks  of  the  impiety  of  this  opinion,  b.  vii.  c.  47,  when  applied 
to  some  particular  cases,  we  are  at  liberty  to  believe  that  his  regard  for 
the  established  heathenism  of  his  country  was  exceedingly  slight. — 
Wern.  Club. 


106  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

the  very  first  Passage  of  Bosphorus  are  Hermonassa  and  then 
Cepi,  founded  by  the  Milesians.  Close  by  is  Stratilia  (or 
Stratoclea),  Phanagoria,  and  Apaturos,  which  is  almost  un- 
peopled:  and  last  of  all,  in  the  mouth,  Cimmerius,  formerly 
called  Cerberian. 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Nations  about  Mceotis. 

BEYOND  Cimmerium  is  the  Lake  Moeotis,  spoken  of  be- 
fore in  Europe.  Beyond  Cimmerium  inhabit  the  Mceotici, 
Vati,  Serbi,  Archi,  Zingi,  and  Psesii.  After  this  you  come 
to  the  River  Tanais,  which  runneth  with  two  Mouths :  and 
on  the  sides  of  it  dwell  the  Sarmatae,  descended,  as  they  say, 
from  the  Medi :  but  themselves  divided  into  many  Races. 
And  first  the  Sauromatae,  surnamed  Gynaecocratumeni,  from 
whence  the  Amazons  are  provided  with  Husbands.  Next  to 
them  are  the  Euazae,  Cottae,  Cicimeni,  Messeniani,  Costo- 
bocci,  Choatrae,  Zigae,  Dandari,  Thussageae,  and  Turcae,  even 
as  far  as  the  Wilderness,  rough  with  woody  Valleys.  Be- 
yond them  are  the  Arimphaei,  who  live  upon  the  Riphaaan 
Mountains.  The  Tanais  itself  the  Scythians  call  Silys  ;  and 
Moeotis  they  name  Temerinda,1  that  is  to  say,  the  Mother  of 
the  Sea.  There  stood  also  a  Town  at  the  mouth  of  Tanais. 
The  Lares  first  inhabited  the  Borders :  afterwards  the  Clazo- 
menii  and  Moeones:  and  in  process  of  time  the  Panti- 
capenses.  Some  Authors  write,  that  about  Moeotis  toward 
the  higher  Mountains  Ceraunii,  the  following  Nations  inhabit 
on  the  Coast,  the  Napaeae :  and  above  them  the  Essedones, 
joining  on  the  Colchi,  and  the  tops  of  the  Mountains.  After 
them  the  Carmacae,  the  Orani,  Antacse,  Mazacae,  Ascantici, 
Acapeatae,  Agagammatae,  Phycari,  Rhimosoli,  and  Asco- 

1  It  is  easy  to  discern  that  many  of  the  names  of  nations  mentioned 
by  Pliny  are  not  those  which  the  people  themselves  would  have  recog- 
nised; but  Greek  descriptive  designations.  But  the  word  "  Temerinda" 
is  believed  to  have  been  u  Scythian,"  and  to  be  rightly  interpreted  by  the 
author.  Daleschamp  supposes  the  true  expression  to  be  "  Themers-end," 
or,  in  modern  terms,  "  Dess-maers-end." — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  107 

marci ;  and  on  the  Tops  of  Caucasus,  the  Icatalae,  Imaduchi, 
Rani,  Anclacae,  Tydii,  Charastasci,  and  Asuciandae.  Along 
the  River  Lagoiis,  issuing  out  of  the  Mountains  Cathei,  and 
into  which  Opharus  runneth,  are  these  Nations :  the  Cau- 
cadae  and  the  Opharitae :  the  River  Menotharus,  and  Imitues 
divided  from  the  Mountains  Cissii,  which  passeth  among  the 
Agedi,  Carnapae,  Gardei,  Accisi,  Gabri,  and  Gregari :  and 
about  the  source  of  this  River  Imitues,  the  Imitui  and  Apar- 
theni.  Others  say  that  the  Suitae,  Auchetae,  Satarnei,  and 
Asampatse,  overflowed  this  Part;  the  Tanaitae  and  Ne- 
pheonitae  were  slain  by  them  to  a  Man.  Some  write,  that 
the  River  Opharius  runneth  through  the  Canteci  and  the 
Sapaei:  and  that  the  River  Tanais  traversed  through  the 
Phatarei,  Herticei,  Spondolici,  Synthietae,  Amassi,  Issi, 
Catazeti,  Tagori,  Catoni,  Neripi,  Agandei,  Mandarei,  Satur- 
chei,  and  Spalei. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Cappadocia. 

WE  have  gone  through  the  Nations  and  Inhabitants  of 
the  Coasts  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  Now  are  we  to  speak 
of  the  People  inhabiting  the  Inland  Parts :  wherein  I  shall 
advance  many  things  different  from  the  ancient  Geographers : 
because  I  have  made  diligent  Search  into  the  state  of  those 
Regions,  especially  by  enquiry  of  Domitius  Corbulo,  in  regard 
of  the  things  done  by  himself,  and  also  of  the  Kings  who 
came  from  thence  as  Petitioners,  and  of  those  King's  Sons 
that  were  Hostages.  And  we  will  begin  with  the  Nation  of 
the  Cappadocians.  This  is  a  Country  that  of  all  which  bound 
upon  Pontus,  reacheth  farthest  within  the  Land  :  for  on  the 
left  Hand  it  passeth  by  the  Greater  and  Less  Armenia,  and 
Comagene :  and  on  the  right,  all  those  Nations  in  Asia 
before-named  :  being  overflowed  with  a  Multitude  of  People : 
and  with  great  Might  climbing  up  Eastward  to  the  Tops  of 
Taurus,  it  passeth  Lycaonia,  Pisidia,  and  Cilicia  :  and  with 
that  quarter  which  is  called  Cataonia,  it  pierceth  above  the 
Tract  of  Antiochia,  and  reacheth  as  far  as  to  its  Region  Cyr- 


108  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  VI. 

rhestica.     And  therefore  the  Length  of  Asia  there  may  con- 
tain 1250  Miles,  and  the  Breadth  640. 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Armenia,  the  Greater  and  Less. 

THE  Greater  Armenia,  beginning  at  the  Mountains  Pa- 
riedri,  is  divided  from  Cappadocia  by  the  River  Euphrates,  as 
hath  been  said  before :  and  where  the  River  Euphrates 
turneth,  from  Mesopotamia  by  the  River  Tigris,  scarcely  less 
renowned  than  the  other.  It  poureth  forth  both  these  Rivers, 
and  constitutes  the  beginning  of  Mesopotamia,  which  is  situ- 
ated between  them  both.  The  Land  which  lieth  between  is 
possessed  by  the  Arabs  Orei.  In  this  manner  it  extendeth  its 
Border  to  Adiabene.  Beyond  this,  being  hemmed  in  with 
Mountains  that  stand  across  it,  it  spreadeth  its  Breadth  on 
the  left  Hand  to  the  River  Cyrus  :  and  then  across  to  the 
River  Araxes :  but  it  carrieth  its  Length  to  the  Lesser  Ar- 
menia, being  separated  from  it  by  the  River  Absarus,  which 
falleth  into  the  Poritus  :  and  by  the  Mountains  Pariedri,  from 
which  the  River  Absarus  issueth.  The  River  Cyrus  springeth 
in  the  Mountains  Heniochii,  which  some  have  called  Co- 
raxici.  The  Araxes  issueth  out  of  the  same  Mountain  from 
whence  Euphrates  cometh,  and  there  is  not  above  the  Space 
of  six  Miles  between  them.  This  River  Araxes  is  augmented 
with  the  River  Musis ;  and  then  itself  loseth  its  Name,  and,  as 
most  have  thought,  is  carried  by  the  River  Cyrus  into  the  Cas- 
pian Sea.  These  Towns  are  famous  in  the  Lesser  (Armenia) ; 
Csesarea,  Aza,  and  Nicopolis.  In  the  Greater  is  Arsamote, 
near  the  River  Euphrates  ;  and  Carcathiocerta,  upon  the 
Tigris.  In  the  higher  Country  is  Tigranocerta,  but  in  the 
Plain,  near  the  Araxes,  Artaxata.  Aufidius  saith,  that  both 
the  Armenise  contain  in  all  500  Miles.  Claudius  Ccesar 
reporteth,  that  in  Length  from  Dascusa  to  the  Confines  of 
the  Caspian  Sea  is  1300  Miles,  and  in  Breadth  half  as  much, 
from  Tigranocerta  to  Iberia.  This  is  well  known,  that  it  is 
divided  into  Prefectures,  which  they  call  Strategies  ;  and 
some  of  them  in  old  time  were  as  large  as  Kingdoms  :  the 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  109 

Number  being  120,  with  barbarous  Names.  It  is  enclosed 
Eastward  with  Mountains,  but  neither  the  Ceraunii,  nor  the 
Region  Adiabene,  do  immediately  border  on  it.  The  Country 
of  the  Sopherii  lieth  between  :  next  are  the  Mountains  Ce- 
raunii ;  and  beyond  them  dwell  the  Adiabeni.  But  through 
the  flat  Valleys  the  next  Neighbours  to  Armenia  are  the 
Menobardi  and  Moscheni.  The  River  Tigris  and  steep 
Mountains  encompass  Adiabene.  On  the  left  Hand  its 
Region  is  of  the  Medians,  and  the  Prospect  of  the  Caspian 
Sea.  This  is  poured  in  from  the  Ocean  (as  we  shall  shew  in 
its  place),  and  is  enclosed  wholly  within  the  Mountains  of 
Caucasus.  We  will  now  speak  of  the  Inhabitants  of  these, 
through  the  Confine  of  Armenia. 

CHAPTER  X. 
Albania  and  Iberia. 

THE  Nation  of  the  Albani  inhabit  all  the  plain  Country 
from  the  River  Cyrus.  Beyond  it  is  the  Region  of  the  Iberes, 
who  are  separated  from  the  Albani  by  the  River  Alazon, 
which  runneth  down  from  the  Caucasian  Mountains  into  the 
Cyrus.  The  strong  Towns  of  Albania  :  Cabalaca  ;  of  Iberia, 
Harmastis,  near  the  River  Neoris :  the  Region  Thasie,  and 
Triare,  as  far  as  to  the  Mountains  Partedori.  Beyond  them 
are  the  Deserts  of  Colchis:  and  on  the  side  of  them  which 
lieth  toward  the  Ceraunii  the  Armenochalybes  inhabit :  and 
the  Tract  of  the  Moschi  to  the  River  Iberus,  that  floweth  into 
the  Cyrus.  Beneath  them,  inhabit  the  Sacassani,  and  beyond 
them  the  Macrones,  who  reach  to  the  River  Absarus.  Thus 
the  Plain  and  the  hanging  of  the  Hills  are  inhabited.  Again, 
from  the  Frontiers  of  Albania,  in  all  the  front  of  the  Moun- 
tains are  the  savage  Nations  of  the  Sylvi ;  and  beneath  them, 
of  the  Lubieni,  and  so  forward  the  Diduri,  and  Sodii. 

CHAPTER  XI. 
The  Gates  of  the  Caucasus. 

BEYOND  the  Sodii  are  the  Gates  of  Caucasus,  which  many 
have  very  erroneously  called  Caspise  Portae,  or  the  Caspian 


110  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

Gates :  a  mighty  Piece  of  Nature's  Work,  by  suddenly  cleav- 
ing asunder  those  Mountains,  where  the  Gates  were  barred 
up  with  iron  Bars,  whilst  under  the  midst  thereof,  the  River 
Dyriodorus  runneth :  and  on  this  Side  of  it  standeth  a  formi- 
dable Castle  called  Cumania,  situated  upon  a  Rock,  able  to 
arrest  the  Passage  of  a  very  numerous  Army;  so  that  in  this 
Place,  by  means  of  these  Gates,  one  Part  of  the  World  is 
excluded  from  the  other  :  and  chiefly  over-against  Harmastis, 
a  Town  of  the  Iberi.  Beyond  the  Gates  of  Caucasus,  through 
the  Mountains  Gordyei,  the  Valli  and  Suarrii,  uncivilised 
Nations,  are  employed  only  in  the  Mines  of  Gold.  Beyond 
them  as  far  as  to  the  Pontic  Sea,  are  many  Races  of  the 
Heniochi ;  and  soon  after,  of  the  Achaei.  And  thus  much 
concerning  this  Tract  of  the  Lands  among  the  most  re- 
nowned. Some  have  set  down,  that  between  Pontus  and  the 
Caspian  Sea,  it  is  not  above  375  Miles.  Cornelius  Nepos 
saith  it  is  but  150;  into  such  Straits  is  Asia  driven  again. 
Claudius  Ccesar  hath  reported,  that  from  the  Cimmerian 
Bosphorus  to  the  Caspian  Sea,  is  150  Miles;  and  that  Seleucus 
Nicator  purposed  to  cut  the  Land  through,  at  the  Time 
when  he  was  slain  by  Ptolomceus  Ceraunus.  It  is  almost 
certain,  that  from  the  Gates  of  Caucasus  to  Pontius  is 
200  Miles. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Islands  in  the  Pontus. 

IN  Pontus  lie  the  Islands  Planctse,  otherwise  Cyaneae  or 
Symplcgades.  Then  Apollonia,  named  also  Thynnias,  for 
Distinction  sake  from  that  other  so  named  in  Europe  :  it  is 
from  the  Continent  one  Mile,  and  in  Circuit  three.  And 
over-against  Pharnacea  is  Chalceritis,  which  the  Greeks 
called  Aria,  sacred  to  Mars ;  wherein  are  Birds  which  fight 
with  a  Blow  of  their  Wings  against  others  that  come 

thither. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Nations  on  the  Scythian  Ocean. 

HAVING  thus  discoursed  of  all  the  Countries  in  the  inte- 
rior of  Asia,  let  us  now  determine  to  pass  over  the  Rhiphsean 


BOOK  V I .]  History  of  Nature.  1  ]  1 

Mountains,  and  discover  the  Coasts  of  the  Ocean  which  lie 
on  the  right  hand.  Asia  is  washed  by  this  Ocean  on  three 
Sides :  on  the  North  Side  is  the  Scythian :  on  the  East  it  is 
called  Eous :  and  from  the  South  they  name  it  the  Indian. 
And  according  to  the  various  Gulfs,  and  the  Inhabitants,  it  is 
divided  into  many  Names.  But  a  great  part  of  Asia  toward 
the  North  hath  in  it  extensive  Wildernesses,  by  reason  of  the 
violence  of  its  frozen  Star.  From  the  extreme  North  to  the 
North-east  are  the  Scythians.  Beyond  whom,  and  the  very 
point  of  the  North  Pole,  some  have  placed  the  Hyperborei ; 
of  whom  we  have  spoken  at  large  in  the  Treatise  of  Europe. 
The  first  Promontory  that  you  meet  with  in  the  Country 
Celtica  is  named  Lytarmis :  and  then  the  River  Carambucis, 
where,  by  the  forcible  influence  of  the  Stars,  the  Mountains 
Rhiphaei  are  deprived  of  their  ragged  Tops.  And  there  we 
have  heard  that  there  are  a  People  named  Arimphaei:  a 
Nation  not  much  unlike  the  Hyperborei.  They  have  their 
Habitations  in  Forests  ;  their  Food  is  Berries  ;  both  Women 
and  Men  count  it  a  shame  to  have  Hair ;  mild  in  their  man- 
ners; and  therefore,  by  report,  they  are  held  to  be  sacred, 
and  to  be  inviolable  even  by  those  wild  People  that  dwell 
near  them  ;  neither  do  they  respect  them  only,  but  also  those 
who  fly  to  them.  At  some  distance  beyond  them  are  the 
Scythians,1  as  well  the  Cimmerii,  Cicianthi,  and  Georgi ; 
and  the  Nation  of  the  Amazons.  These  reach  to  the  Caspian 
and  Hircanian  Sea :  for  it  breaketh  forth  from  the  Scythian 
Ocean,2  toward  the  back  parts  of  Asia,  and  is  called  many 
Names  by  the  neighbouring  Inhabitants,  but  especially  by 
two  of  the  most  celebrated,  the  Caspian  and  Hircanian. 
Clitarchus  is  of  opinion  that  this  Sea  is  full  as  great  as  the 

1  At  this  day,  the  Moschovites,  white  and  black  Russians,  Georgians, 
Amazonians,  and  the  less  Tartary. —  Wern.  Club. 

a  Strabo  (lib.  xi.)  entertains  the  same  erroneous  opinions  respecting 
the  Caspian  Sea.  That  both  these  intelligent  writers,  as  well  as  other 
ancient  geographers,  should  have  been  so  mistaken  is  the  more  extraor- 
dinary, as  Herodotus  (lib.  i.  203)  had  given  a  just  description  of  it  long 
before.  "  The  Caspian  Sea,"  he  says,  "  is  a  sea  of  itself,  which  does  not 
mingle  with  any  other." — Wern.  Club. 


1.12  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

Pontus  Euxinus.  And  Eratosthenes  setteth  down  the  mea- 
sure of  it  as  being  from  East  to  South,  along  the  Coast  of 
Cadusia  and  Albania,  5400  Stadia :  from  thence  by  the 
Aratiatici,  Amarbi,  and  Hircanii,  to  the  mouth  of  the  River 
Zonus,  4800  Stadia :  from  it  to  the  mouth  of  the  Jaxartes, 
2400  Stadia:  which  being  put  together  amount  to  1575 
Miles.  Artemidorus  counteth  less  by  25  Miles.  Agrippa,  in 
limiting  the  Circuit  of  the  Caspian  Sea,  and  the  Nations 
around  it,  and  Armenia  with  them,  from  the  East  with  the 
Ocean  of  the  Seres,  Westward  with  the  Mountains  of  Cau- 
casus, on  the  South  side  with  the  Mountain  Taurus,  and  on 
the  North  with  the  Scythian  Ocean,  hath  written,  That  the 
whole,  so  far  as  is  known,  may  contain  in  Length  590  Miles, 
and  290  in  Breadth.  There  want  not  others  who  say,  That 
the  whole  Circuit  of  that  Sea,  from  the  Strait  is  2500  Miles. 
This  throat  is  very  narrow  where  it  bursts  forth,  but  exceed- 
ingly long  :  but  where  it  beginneth  to  enlarge  it  fetcheth  a 
Compass  withlunated  Horns,  and  after  the  manner  of  a  Scy- 
thian Bow,  as  M.  Varro  saith,  it  windeth  along  from  its 
Mouth  toward  the  Lake  Moeotis.  The  first  Gulf  is  called 
Scythicus ;  for  the  Scythians  inhabit  on  both  Sides,  and  by 
means  of  the  narrow  Straits  between  have  business  one  with 
another :  for  on  one  side  are  the  Nomades  and  Sauromatae, 
with  many  Names :  and  on  the  other,  the  Abzoae,  who  have 
no  fewer  denominations.  At  the  entry  of  this  Sea  on  the 
right  hand,  the  Udini,  a  People  of  the  Scythians,  dwell 
upon  the  very  point  of  these  Straits  :  and  then  along  the 
Coast,  the  Albani,  descended  (as  they  say)  from  Jason ; 
where  the  Sea  that  lieth  before  them  is  called  Albanum. 
This  Nation  is  spread  also  upon  the  Mountains  of  Caucasus 
to  the  River  Cyrus,  and  descendeth,  as  hath  been  said,  to  the 
border  of  Armenia  and  Iberia.  Above  the  Maritime  Coasts 
of  Albania  and  the  Nation  of  the  Udini,  the  Sarmatse,  called 
Utidorsi,  and  Atoderes,  are  planted  :  and  behind  them  the 
Sauromatides,  Amazons,  already  pointed  out.  The  Rivers  of 
Albania,  which  fall  into  the  Sea,  are  Cassios  and  Albanos : 
and  then  Carnbises,  which  hath  its  Head  in  the  Caucasian 
Mountains  :  and  soon  after  Cyrus,  which  ariseth  out  of  the 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  113 

Mountains  Corax,  as  is  before  said.  Agrippa  writeth  that 
this  whole  Coast,  from  the  lofty  and  inaccessible  Mountains 
of  Caucasus,  containeth  425  Miles.  Beyond  the  Cyrus,  the 
Caspian  Sea  beginneth  to  take  that  Name ;  and  the  Caspii 
dwell  there.  And  here  the  error  of  many  is  to  be  corrected, 
even  of  those  who  were  lately  with  Corbulo  in  Armenia  with 
the  Army  :  for  they  called  those  Gates  of  Caucasus,  of  which 
we  spoke  before,  the  Caspian  Gates  of  Iberia :  and  the  Maps 
and  Descriptions  which  are  painted  and  sent  from  thence, 
have  that  Name  written  on  them.  Likewise  the  threatening 
of  Prince  JVero,  when  he  sought  to  gain  those  Gates,  which 
through  Iberia  lead  into  Sarmatia,  made  mention  of  the 
Gates  Caspise ;  which  had  scarcely  any  Passage  by  reason 
of  the  Mountains  so  closely  approaching  each  other.  There 
are  other  Gates  near  the  Caspian  Sea,  that  join  upon  the 
Caspian  Nations,  which  could  not  have  been  distinguished 
from  the  other  but  by  the  relation  of  those  that  accompanied 
Alexander  the  Great  in  his  Expeditions.  For  the  Kingdoms 
of  the  Persians,  which  at  this  day  we  take  to  be  those  of 
the  Parthians,  are  elevated  between  the  Persian  and  Hir- 
canian  Seas  upon  the  Mountains  of  Caucasus  ;  in  the  Descent 
of  which  on  both  sides  bordering  upon  Armenia  the  Greater, 
and  on  that  part  of  the  front  which  vergeth  to  Comagene,  it 
joineth  (as  we  have  said)  with  Sephenise :  and  upon  it  bor- 
dereth  Adiabene,  the  beginning  of  the  Assyrians  :  Arbelitis, 
which  is  nearest  to  Syria,  is  a  part  of  this:  where  Alexander 
vanquished  Darius.  All  this  Tract  the  Macedonians  surnamed 
Mygdonia,1  from  its  resemblance.  The  Towns  Alexandria ; 
and  Antiochia,  which  they  call  Nisibis :  from  Artaxata  it  is 
750  Miles.  There  was  also  Ninus,2  seated  upon  the  Tigris, 
looking  towards  the  West,  and  in  Times  past  highly  re- 
nowned. But  on  the  other  Side,  where  it  lieth  toward  the 
Caspian  Sea,  the  Region  Atropatenc,  separated  by  the  River 
Araxes  from  Oterie  in  Armenia :  its  City,  Gazse,  is  450  Miles 

1  From  its  resemblance  to  a  part  of  Greece  of  that  name,  with  which 
they  were  well  acquainted.—  Wern.  Club. 
8  The  ancient  Nineveh. —  Wern.  Club. 
VOL.  II.  I 


114  History  of  Nature .  [BooK  VI. 

from  Artaxata :  and  as  many  from  Ecbatana  of  the  Medes, 
some  part  of  which  the  Atropateni  hold. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Media,  and  the  Gates  Caspice. 

ECBATANA,  the  head  of  Media,  was  founded  by  King 
Seleucus :  and  it  is  from  Seleucia  the  Great  750  Miles  :  and 
from  the  Caspian  Gates  20.  The  other  Towns  of  the  Medes 
are  Phausia,  Agamzua,  and  Apamia,  named  also  Rhaphane. 
The  Straits  there,  (called  the  Caspian  Gates,)  have  the  same 
reason  for  being  so  named  as  the  other  (by  Caucasus) ;  be- 
cause the  Mountains  are  broken  through  with  so  narrow 
a  Passage,  that  hardly  a  single  line  of  Carts  is  able  to  pass 
it  for  the  Length  of  Eight  Miles  :  and  all  done  by  the  hand 
of  Man.  The  Cliffs  that  hang  over  on  the  right  Side  and  on 
the  left  are  as  if  they  were  scorched  :  through  a  silent  Tract 
of  38  Miles  ;  for  all  the  Moisture  running  together  out  of 
those  Cliffs,  and  pouring  through  the  Straits,  obstructs  the 
Passage.  Besides,  the  Multitude  of  Serpents  prevents  Tra- 
velling except  in  Winter. 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Nations  about  the  Hircanian  Sea. 

UNTO  Adiabene  are  joined  the  Carduchi,  so  called  in 
Times  past,  and  now  Cordueni ;  along  which  the  Tigris 
runneth ;  and  on  them  the  Pratitse  border,  called  also  Pare- 
doni,  who  hold  the  Caspian  Gates.  On  the  other  side  of 
whom  you  meet  with  the  Deserts  of  Parthia,  and  the  Moun- 
tains of  Cithenus :  and  beyond  these  is  the  most  pleasant 
Tract  of  the  same  Parthia,  called  Choara.  There  stand  two 
Cities  of  the  Parthians,  formerly  opposed  against  the  Me- 
dians :  namely,  Calliope  ;  and  Issatis,  situated  in  times  past 
upon  another  Rock.  The  Capital  of  Parthia  itself,  lleca- 
tompylos,  is  from  the  (Caspian)  Gates  133  Miles.  Thus  the 
Kingdoms  of  the  Parthians  are  shut  up  by  Doors.  When 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  115 

passed  out  of  these  Gates,  presently  we  enter  on  the  Cas- 
pian Nation,  which  reacheth  as  far  as  the  Sea-shore,  and 
gave  the  Name  to  the  Gates  and  the  Sea.  The  left  hand  is 
full  of  Mountains :  and  from  this  Nation  backward  to  the 
River  Cyrus,  is  by  report  220  Miles.  From  that  River,  if 
you  would  go  higher  up  to  the  Gates,  it  is  700  Miles.  And 
from  this  starting-place  began  Alexander  to  reckon  his 
Journeys :  making  from  those  Gates  to  the  Entrance  of 
India,  15,680  Stadia :  from  thence  to  the  Town  of  Bactra, 
which  they  call  Zariaspa,  3700,  and  thence  to  the  River 
Jaxartes  five  Miles. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Other  Nations  also. 

FROM  the  Caspian  Country  eastward,  lieth  the  Region 
called  Zapanortene,1  and  in  it  Daricum,  a  place  celebrated 
for  Fertility.  Then  come  the  Nations  of  the  Tapyri,  Anariaci, 
Stauri,  and  Hircani,  at  whose  Coasts  the  same  Sea  beginneth 
to  take  the  Name  Hircanum,  from  the  River  Syderis.  About 
it  are  the  Rivers  Mazeras  and  Stratos,  all  issuing  out  of 
Caucasus.  Then  follows  the  Region  Margiana,  famous  for 
its  warm  Sunshine,  and  the  only  place  in  all  that  quarter 
which  yieldeth  Vines.  It  is  environed  with  pleasant  Moun- 
tains, for  the  compass  of  1500  Stadia:  difficult  of  approach 
by  reason  of  the  Sandy  Deserts  for  the  space  of  120  Miles; 
and  it  is  situated  over  against  the  Tract  of  Parthia,  wherein 
Alexander  had  built  Alexandria ;  which  being  destroyed  by 
the  Barbarians,  Antiochus  the  Son  ofSeleucus  rebuilt  it  in  the 
same  place,  upon  the  River  Margus,  which  runneth  through 
it,  together  with  another  River  Zotale,  and  it  was  called 
Syriana.2  But  he  desired  rather  that  it  should  be  named 
Antiochia.  This  City  containeth  in  Circuit  70  Stadia: 
and  into  it  Orodes,  after  the  Slaughter  of  Crassus  and  his 
Army,  brought  his  Roman  Prisoners.  Being  past  the  high 
Country  (Margiana),  you  come  to  the  Nation  of  the  Mardi, 

1  Some  copies  read  Zapauortene  and  Apauortene. — Wern.  Club. 

2  Or  rather  Seleucia. 


]  16  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

a  Fierce  People,  subject  to  none;  they  inhabit  the  Rocky 
Summits  of  Caucasus,  which  reach  as  far  as  to  the  Bac- 
trians.  Beyond  that  Tract  are  the  Nations  Ochani,  Chomari, 
Berdrigei,  Hermatotrophi,  Bomarci,  Commani,  Marucsei, 
Mandrueni  and  latii.  The  Rivers  Mandrus  and  Gridinus. 
Beyond,  inhabit  the  Chorasmii,  Gandari,  Attasini,  Paricani, 
Sarangae,  Parrasini,  Maratiani,  Nasotiani,  Aorsi,  Gelse,  whom 
the  Greeks  called  Cadusii,  and  the  Matiani.  The  Town 
Heraclea,  built  by  Alexander,  which  afterwards  was  over- 
thrown :  but  when  it  was  repaired  again  by  Antiochus,  he 
named  it  Achais.  The  Derbices,  through  the  midst  of  whose 
Borders  runneth  the  River  Oxus,  which  hath  its  Beginning 
from  the  Lake  Oxus :  the  Syrmatae,  Oxii,  Tagae,  Heniochi, 
Bateni,  Saraparse,  and  the  Bactri,  with  their  Town  Zariaspe, 
called  afterwards  Bactrum,  from  the  River  (Bactra) ;  this 
Nation  inhabiteth  the  back  parts  of  the  Mountain  Paropa- 
misus,  over  against  the  Source  of  the  River  Indus ;  and  it  is 
inclosed  by  the  River  Ochus.  Beyond  are  the  Sogdiani; 
the  Town  Panda  ;  and  in  the  utmost  Borders  of  their  Terri- 
tory is  Alexandria,  built  by  Alexander  the  Great.  There  are 
the  Altars  erected  by  Hercules  and  Liber  Pater,  also  by 
Cyrus,  Semiramis,  and  Alexander :  the  very  end  of  all  their 
Voyages  in  that  part  of  the  World  being  included  within  the 
River  Jaxartes,  which  the  Scythians  call  Silys:  Alexander 
and  his  Soldiers  thought  it  had  been  the  Tanais.  Demonax, 
a  General  of  the  Kings  Seleucus  and  Antiochus,  passed  over 
that  River,  and  set  up  Altars  to  Apollo  Didymceus.  And 
this  Demonax  for  the  most  part  we  follow. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
The  Scythian  Nation. 

BEYOND  (the  Realm  Sogdiana)  inhabit  the  People  of  the 
Scythians.  The  Persians  called  them  in  general  Sacas,  from 
a  People  adjoining,  and  the  Ancients  Aramei.  The  Scythians 
for  their  part  called  the  Persians,  Chorsari :  and  the  Moun- 
tain Caucasus,  they  called  Graucasus,  that  is  to  say,  White 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  117 

with  Snow.1  The  People  are  exceedingly  numerous  :  as 
much  so  as  the  Parthians.  The  principal  People  of  Scythia 
are  the  Sacse,  Massagetae,  Dahse,  Essedones,  Ariacae,  Rhym- 
nici,  Pesici,  Amordi,  Histi,  Edones,  Camee,  Camacse,  Eu- 
chatse,  Corieri,  Antariani,  Pialae,  Arirnaspi,  formerly  called 
Cacidiri,  Assei,  and  Oetei.  The  Napsei  and  Apellsei  who 
dwelt  there,  are  said  to  have  perished.  The  noble  Rivers  of 
those  People  are  Mandagrseus  and  Caspasius.  And  surely 
there  is  not  a  Region  wherein  Geographers  vary  as  they  do 
in  this :  and  I  believe  this  to  proceed  from  the  very  great 
number  of  those  Nations,  and  their  wandering  to  and  fro. 
Alexander  the  Great  reporteth  that  the  Water  of  the  Scy- 
thian Sea  is  fresh  and  potable ;  and  M.  Varro  saith  that 
Pompey  had  such  Water  brought  to  him  when  he  carried  on 
the  War  in  that  Neighbourhood  against  Mithridates:  by 
reason,  no  doubt,  of  the  great  Rivers  that  fall  into  it,  which 
overcome  the  Saltness  of  the  Water.  Varro  saith  also,  that 
during  this  Expedition  of  Pompey  to  the  Bactri  it  was  known 
that  it  is  but  seven  Days'  Journey  from  India  to  the  River 
Icarus,  which  runneth  into  the  Oxus :  and  that  the  Mer- 
chandise of  India,  transported  by  the  Caspian  Sea,  and  so 
to  the  River  Cyrus,  may  be  brought  in  not  more  than  five 
Days  by  Land  as  far  as  to  Phasis  in  Pontus.  Many  Islands 
lie  all  over  that  Sea  :  but  one  above  the  rest  is  Tazata ;  for 
thither  all  the  Shipping  from  the  Caspian  Sea  and  the  Scy- 
thian Ocean  bend  their  Course,  the  Sea-coasts  being  all 
turned  to  the  East.  The  first  part  of  this  is  uninhabitable, 
from  the  Scythian  Promontory,  by  reason  of  the  Snow  :  and 
the  next  Regions  to  this  are  left  uncultivated  because  of  the 
Fierceness  of  those  Nations  that  border  upon  it.  The  An- 
thropophagi are  in  Scythia,  who  live  on  Man's  flesh.2  This 
is  the  cause  why  there  are  nothing  there  but  vast  Deserts, 

1  The  Emodus  or  Imaus  of  Pliny  (a  word  which  in  the  language  of 
the  inhabitants  signifies  snowy,)  derived  its  origin  immediately  from  the 
Ilimaleh  of  the  Hindoos ;  which  really  signifies  in  their  language  "  snowy," 
or  more  strictly  speaking,  "the  seat  of  snow." — Quarterly  Review^  vol.  xxiv. 
p.  103. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  We  find  a  further  account  of  this  people,  whom  the  ancients  regarded 
with  horror,  in  the  7th  Book,  c.  2.    The  nation  referred  to  was  probably 


History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  VI. 

with  a  multitude  of  Wild  Beasts,  lying  in  wait  for  Men  as 
savage  as  themselves.  Then  again  the  Scythians  ;  and  again 
a  Wilderness  full  of  Wild  Beasts,  as  far  as  to  the  craggy 
Mountain  overlooking  the  Sea,  called  Tabis.  Almost  one-half 
of  the  length  of  that  Coast,  which  looketh  toward  the  East, 
is  uninhabited.  The  first  of  the  People  that  are  known  are 
the  Seres,1  famous  for  the  fine  Silk  that  their  Woods  yield. 
They  collect  from  the  Leaves  of  the  Trees  their  hoary  Down, 
and  when  it  is  steeped  in  Water  they  card  it;  wherein  our 
Women  have  a  double  Labour,  both  of  undoing  and  again  of 
weaving  this  kind  of  Thread :  with  so  much  Labour  and  so 
far  away  is  it  sought  after,  that  our  Matrons  when  they  go 
abroad  in  the  street  may  shine  with  Transparency.  The 
Seres  are  a  mild  People,  but  they  resemble  Beasts,  in  that  they 
fly  the  Company  of  other  People2  when  they  desire  inter- 

the  Samoieds,  in  the  north  of  Russia :  their  name  signifying  people  who 
eat  each  other ;  but  the  word  has  long  survived  the  practice  it  described. 
Ovid  speaks  of  such  a  people  seated  near  the  place  of  his  exile  on  the 
Euxine : 

"  UK  quos  audis  hominum  gaudere  cruore." 

TRIST.  1.  4.,  explained  by  AGELL.  ix.  4. — Wern.  Club. 

1  There  can  be  no  question  that  the  people  here  referred  to  are  the 
Chinese,  who  are  again  mentioned  in  the  22d  chapter.    It  was  a  pardon- 
able error  to  suppose  that  silk  was  the  produce  of  a  tree,  instead  of  being 
the  production  of  a  creature  which  fed  on  it ;  but  it  appears  that  the 
Romans  were  at  great  pains  in  disentangling  the  woven  texture,  that 
it  might  again  be  formed  into  garments  which  better  suited  their  taste 
or  habits.     Martial  speaks  of  this  material  under  the  name  of  Bombycina 
(Apophoreta,  24),  and  from  his  account  it  was  of  very  fine  texture,  and 
probably  expensive.     When  it  was  worn,  the  hair  was  bound  up  into  a 
knot  and  fastened  with  a  gold  pin,  in  order  that  it  might  not  soil  so 
exquisite  a  dress.    It  permitted  the  beauty  of  form  and  colour  to  be  seen 
through  its  substance. 

"  Fo3mineum  lucet  sic  per  bombycina  corpus  :" 
So  female  beauty  shines  through  woven  silk. 

Epig.  B.  8.  68. 

See  book  ii.  c.  xxii.  where  Pliny  corrects  the  errors  of  this  chapter. — 
Wern.  Club. 

2  Even  at  this  day  they  set  abroad  their  wares  with  the  prices,  upon 
the  shore,  and  go  their  ways  :  then  the  foreign  merchants  come  and  lay 
down  the  money,  and  have  away  the  merchandise ;  and  so  depart  with- 
out any  communication  at  all. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  119 

course  with  them.  The  first  River  known  among  them  is 
Psitaras :  the  next  Carabi :  the  third  Lanos :  beyond  which 
the  Promontory,  the  Gulf  Chryse,  the  River  Cymaba,  the 
Bay  Attanos,  and  the  Nation  of  the  Attaci,  a  kind  of  People 
secluded  from  all  noisome  Wind  by  pleasant  Hills,  with  the 
same  Temperature  that  the  Hyperboreans  live  in.  Of  this 
People,  Amonetus  hath  specially  written  a  Book  ;  as  Hera- 
taus  hath  done  of  the  Hyperboreans.  Beyond  the  Attacores 
are  the  Thyri  and  Tochari,  and  then  the  Casiri,  who  now 
belong  to  the  Indians.  But  they  withinland,  that  lie  toward 
the  Scythians,  feed  on  Man's  Flesh.  The  Nomades  of 
India  likewise  wander  to  and  fro.  Some  write  that  they 
border  upon  the  very  Ciconians  and  Brysanians  on  the  North 
Side.  But  there  (as  all  agree)  the  Mountains  Emodi  arise, 
and  the  Nation  of  the  Indians  beginneth,  lying  not  only  by 
that  Sea,  but  also  on  the  Southern,  which  we  have  named 
the  Indian  Sea.  And  this  part  opposite  the  East,  stretcheth 
straightforward  to  that  place  where  it  beginneth  to  bend 
toward  the  Indian  Sea;  and  it  containeth  1875  Miles. 
Then  that  Tract  which  is  bent  towards  the  South  taketh 
2475  Miles  (as  Eratosthenes  hath  set  down),  even  to  the 
River  Indus,  which  is  the  utmost  limit  of  India  Westward. 
But  many  others  have  set  down  the  whole  Length  of  India 
in  this  manner ;  that  it  requireth  40  Days  and  Nights'  Sail- 
ing ;  and  also,  that  from  the  North  to  the  South  is  2750 
Miles.  Agrippa  saith  that  it  is  3003  Miles  Long,  and 
2003  Broad.  Posidonius  hath  measured  it  from  the  North- 
east to  the  South-east ;  and  by  this  means  fixeth  it  directly 
opposite  to  Gaul,  which  he  likewise  measured  along  the 
West  Coast,  from  the  North-west  point  where  the  Sun  goeth 
down  at  Midsummer,  to  the  South-west,  where  it  setteth 
in  the  midst  of  Winter.  He  teacheth  also,  by  very  good 
Reasons,  that  this  West  Wind,  which  from  opposite  bloweth 
upon  India,  is  very  healthful  for  that  Country.  The  Indians 
have  a  different  Aspect  of  the  Sky  from  us.  Other  Stars  rise 
in  their  Hemisphere.  They  have  two  Summers  in  the  Year ; 
two  Harvests :  and  their  Winter  between  hath  the  Etesian 
Winds  blowing  instead  of  the  Northern  Blasts  with  us.  The 


120  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

Winds  are  mild  with  them,  the  Sea  navigable,  the  Nations 
and  the  Cities  innumerable,  if  any  one  would  take  in  Hand 
to  reckon  them  all.  For  India  hath  been  discovered,  not 
only  by  the  Arms  of  Alexander  the  Great,  and  of  other 
Kings  his  Successors  (for  Seleucus  and  Antiochus,  and  their 
Admiral  Patrocles,  sailed  about  it,  even  to  the  Hircan  and 
Caspian  Seas) :  but  also  other  Greek  Authors,  who  abode 
with  the  Kings  of  India  (as  Megasthenes,  and  Dionysius,  who 
was  sent  thither  for  this  purpose  by  Plriladelphus)  have 
made  relation  of  the  Forces  of  those  Nations.  And  further 
Diligence  is  to  be  employed,  considering  they  wrote  of 
Things  so  various  and  incredible.  They  who  accompanied 
Alexander  the  Great  in  his  Indian  Voyage  have  written, 
that  in  that  Quarter  of  India  which  he  conquered,  there 
were  5000  Towns,  not  one  of  them  less  than  (the  City)  Cos : 
and  -nine  Nations.  Also  that  India  is  a  third  Part  of  the 
whole  Earth  r1  that  the  People  in  it  were  innumerable.  And 
this  they  delivered  with  good  Appearance  of  Reason  :  for  the 
Indians  were  almost  the  only  Men  of  all  others  that  never 
went  out  of  their  own  Country.  They  collect  that  from  the 
Time  of  Father  Liber  to  Alexander  the  Great,  there  reigned 
over  them  154  Kings,  for  the  Space  of  5402  Years  and  three 
Months.  The  Rivers  are  of  wonderful  bigness.  It  is  reported 
that  Alexander  sailed  every  Day  at  least  600  Stadia  upon  the 
River  Indus,  and  yet  it  took  him  five  Months  and  some  few 
Days  to  reach  the  end  of  that  River,  although  it  is  allowed  to 
be  less  than  the  Ganges.  Also,  Seneca,  one  of  ourselves,  who 
laboured  to  write  Commentaries  on  India,  hath  made  Report 
of  60  Rivers  therein,  and  of  Nations,  118.  It  would  be  as 
great  a  Labour  to  reckon  up  the  Mountains.  Imaus,  Emo- 
dus,  Paropamisus,  parts  of  Caucasus,  join  together ;  from 
which  the  whole  passes  into  a  very  extensive  Plain,  like  to 
Egypt.  But  to  shew  the  Continent,  we  will  follow  the  Steps 
of  Alexander  the  Great.  Dwgnetus  and  J3eton,  the  Mea- 
surers of  the  Journeys  of  that  Prince,  have  written,  that  from 

1  "India,  a  third  part  of  the  whole  earth;"  which  is  near  the  truth, 
although  it  contradicts  what  Pliny  says  in  the  33d  chapter  of  this  Book. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  121 

the  Caspian  Ports  to  Hecatompylos  of  the  Parthians,  there 
are  as  many  Miles  as  we  have  set  down  already.  From 
thence  to  Alexandria  Arion,  which  City  the  same  King 
founded,  562  Miles:  from  whence  to  Prophthasia  of  the 
Drangse,  199  Miles :  and  so  forward  to  the  Town  of  the 
Arachosi,  515  Miles.  From  thence  to  Orthospanum,  250 
Miles :  thence  to  the  Town  of  Alexandria  in  Opianum,  50 
Miles.  In  some  Copies  these  Numbers  are  found  to  differ : 
this  City  is  situated  at  the  very  Foot  of  Caucasus.  From 
which  to  the  River  Chepta,  and  Pencolaitis,  a  Town  of  the 
Indians,  are  227  Miles.  From  thence  to  the  River  Indus 
and  the  Town  Taxila,  60  Miles  :  to  the  noble  River  Hy- 
daspes,  120  Miles:  to  Hypasis,  a  River  of  no  less  account, 
4900,  or  3900 j1  which  was  the  End  of  Alexanders  Voyage  : 
but  he  passed  over  the  River,  and  on  the  opposite  Bank  he 
dedicated  Altars.  The  Letters  also  of  the  King  himself 
agree  to  this.  The  other  Parts  of  the  Country  were  sur- 
veyed by  Seleucus  Nicator:  to  Hesidrus,  168  Miles :  to  the 
River  Joames  as  much  ;  and  some  Copies  add  five  Miles 
more  :  from  thence  to  the  Ganges,  112  Miles :  to  Rhodapha, 
119;  and  some  say,  that  between  them  it  is  .325  Miles.  From 
it  to  the  Town  Calinipaxa  167  Miles  and  a  half,  others  say 
265.  Thence  the  Junction  of  the  Rivers  Jomanes  and 
Ganges  625  Miles,  and  many  put  thereto  13  Miles  more: 
from  thence  to  the  Town  Palibotra  625  Miles.  To  the  Mouth 
of  the  Ganges  638  Miles.  The  Nations  which  it  is  not  irk- 
some to  name,  from  the  Mountains  Emodi,  of  which  the 
Promontory  is  called  Imaus,  which  signifieth  in  the  Lan- 
guage of  the  Inhabitants,  Snowy  :2  there  are  the  Isari,  Cosyri, 
Izgi,  and  upon  the  very  Mountains,  the  Ghisiotosagi :  also 
the  Brachmanse,3  a  Name  common  to  many  Nations,  among 
whom  are  the  Maccocalinga?.  Rivers,  Pumas  and  Cainas, 

1  "  Ad  Hypasin  non  ignobiliorcm  xxix.  mill,  cccxc.    Hoc  est  novem  et 
viginti  milliaria  cum  trecentis  et  xc.  pass." — Note  in  the  Regent  Edition. 
—Wern.  Club. 

2  Seep.  117. 

3  If  these  were  a  sect  of  the  Gymnosophists,  they  are  referred  to  by 
Plutarch  in  his  life  of  Alexander ;  but  Pliny  seems  to  be  of  opinion  that 


122  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

the  latter  of  which  runneth  into  the  Ganges,  and  both  are 
navigable.  The  Nations  called  Calingse  are  close  upon  the 
Sea ;  but  the  Mandei  and  Malli,  among  whom  is  the  Moun- 
tain Mall  us,  are  above  them  ;  and  then  is  the  Ganges,  the 
farthest  Bound  of  all  that  Tract. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
The  River  Ganges. 

SOME  have  said  that  the  Fountains  of  the  Ganges  are 
uncertain,  like  those  of  the  Nilus ;  and  that  it  overfloweth  the 
neighbouring  Countries  in  the  same  manner.  Others  have 
said  that  it  issueth  out  of  the  Mountains  ofScythia.  There 
run  into  it  nineteen  Rivers :  of  which,  besides  those  before- 
named,  there  are  navigable,  Canucha,  Varna,  Erranoboa, 
Cosaogus,  and  Sonus.  Some  report  that  the  Ganges  pre- 
sently breaketh  out  to  a  great  Magnitude  from  its  own 
Sources  with  great  Violence,  falling  down  over  steep  and 
craggy  Rocks  :  and  when  it  is  arrived  in  the  flat  arid  even 
Country,  that  it  taketh  Shelter  in  a  certain  Lake ;  and  out  of 
it  carrieth  a  gentle  Stream,  8  Miles  broad  where  it  is  nar- 
rowest:  and  100  Stadia  over  for  the  most  part,  but  160 
where  it  largest :  but  in  no  Place  under  20  Paces  deep. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Nations  of  India. 

THE  first  Nation  is  that  of  the  Gandaridae;  the  Region  of 
the  Calingae  is  called  Parthalis.  The  King  hath  in  readiness 
for  his  Wars  80,000  foot,  1000  Horsemen,  and  700  Ele- 
phants. The  other  Nations  of  the  Indians  are  of  different 
Conditions  and  milder  Habits.  Some  apply  themselves  to 
Tillage :  others  are  devoted  to  War :  one  Sort  export  their 

several  separate  people  are  so  denominated.  They  are  probably  the  same 
as  those  mentioned  in  the  19th  chapter,  as  being  always  prepared  for  a 
yoluntary  death.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  1 23 

own  Commodities  to  other  Countries,  and  bring  foreign 
Merchandise  into  their  own.  Those  that  are  the  richest  and 
most  worthy  manage  the  affairs  of  the  State,  distribute  Jus- 
tice, or  sit  in  Council  with  the  Kings.  A  fifth  Kind  there  is 
besides,  in  great  repute,  and  given  wholly  to  the  Study  of 
Wisdom  and  Religion ;  and  these  make  profession  of  being 
always  ready  for  a  voluntary  Death :  and  they  end  their 
Days  on  a  great  funeral  Fire,  which  they  have  prepared 
beforehand.  Besides  all  these,  one  Thing  there  is  amongst 
them  half  Savage,  and  full  of  exceeding  Toil,  and  yet  by 
which  all  the  Estates  abovesaid  are  maintained  ;  which  is  the 
practice  of  bunting  and  taming  Elephants.  It  is  with  them 
they  plough  their  Ground,  upon  them  they  ride :  these  are 
the  best  Cattle  they  know :  with  them  they  go  to  War,  and 
contend  in  defence  of  their  Frontiers.  In  the  choice  of  them 
for  War  they  consider  their  Strength,  their  Age,  and  Bigness 
of  Body.  There  is  an  Island  in  the  Ganges  of  great  size, 
containing  one  Nation,  named  Modogalica.  Beyond  it  are 
seated  the  Modubse,  Molindse,  where  standeth  the  fruitful 
and  stately  City  Molinda ;  the  Galmodroesi,  Preti,  Calissae, 
Sasuri,  Fassalpe,  Colubse,  Orxula3,  Abali,  and  Taluctse.  The 
King  of  these  Countries  hath  in  Arms  50,000  Foot,  3000 
Horsemen,  arid  400  Elephants.  Then  comes  the  stronger 
Nation  of  the  Andarae,  with  many  Villages,  and  with  30 
Towns,  fortified  with  Walls  and  Towers.  These  maintain 
ready  to  serve  the  King  100,000  Foot,  2000  Horsemen, 
and  1000  Elephants.  The  Dardae  are  the  richest  in  Gold; 
and  the  Setae,  in  Silver.  But  above  all  the  Nations  of  India 
throughout,  and  not  of  this  Tract  only,  the  Prasii  far  exceed 
in  Power  and  Reputation ;  and  the  largest  and  richest  City, 
Palibotra,  from  whence  some  have  named  this  Nation,  yea, 
and  all  the  Country  generally  beyond  Ganges,  Palibotros. 
Their  King  keepeth  continually  in  pay  600,000  Footmen, 
30,000  Horsemen,  and  9000  Elephants,  every  Day.  Whereby 
you  may  guess  the  mighty  Wealth  of  this  Prince.  Beyond, 
more  within,  inhabit  the  Monedes  and  Suari,  who  possess 
the  Mountain  Maleus  :  in  which,  for  six  Months,  the  Sha- 
dows in  Winter  fall  northward  ;  and  in  Summer,  south- 


124  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

ward.1  The  Polar  Stars  in  all  that  Tract  are  seen  but  once 
in  the  Year,  and  that  only  for  15  Days ;  as  Beton  maketh 
report:  but  Megasthenes  writeth,  that  this  is  usual  in  other 
Parts  of  India  also.  The  South  Pole  is  called  by  the  Indians 
Dramasa.  The  River  Jomanes  runneth  into  the  Ganges 
through  Palibotros,  between  the  Towns  Methora  and  Cyriso- 
borca.  Beyond  the  River  Ganges,  in  that  quarter  which  lieth 
southward,  the  People  are  coloured  by  the  Sun :  but  though 
tinted,  yet  not  so  burnt  as  the  Ethiopians.  And  the  nearer  they 
approach  to  the  Indus,  the  deeper  coloured  they  are  with  the 
Sun :  for  closely  beyond  the  Nation  of  the  Prasii  is  the  In- 
dus :  among  whose  Mountains  the  Pigmrei  are  reported  to 
inhabit.  Artemidorus  writeth,  that  between  these  two  Rivers 
there  is  a  Distance  of  21  Miles. 

CHAPTER  XX. 
The  River  Indus. 

THE  Indus,  which  the  People  of  that  Country  call  Sandus, 
issueth  out  of  that  top  of  the  Mountain  Caucasus,  which  is 
called  Paropamisus :  it  taketh  its  Course  against  the  Sun- 
rising,  and  receiveth  19  Rivers.  Among  these  the  principal 
are  Hydaspes,  which  bringeth  with  it  four  more :  and  Can- 
tabra,  conveying  three.  Moreover,  of  such  as  are  of  them- 
selves navigable,  Acesines  and  Hypasis :  and  yet  so  modest 
is  the  Course  of  its  Waters,  that  in  no  place  is  it  either  above 
50  Stadia  over,  or  deeper  than  15  Paces.2  This  River 
encloseth  a  very  great  Island  named  Prasiane,  and  another 
that  is  less,  which  they  call  Patale.  They  that  have  written 
it  with  the  least,  say  that  it  is  navigable  for  1240  Miles ; 
and  turning  with  the  Course  of  the  Sun,  it  keepeth  him  com- 
pany westward,  until  it  is  discharged  into  the  Ocean.  The 
Measure  of  the  Coast  to  it  I  will  set  down  generally  as  I  find 
it  written :  although  there  is  no  Agreement  among  Writers 

1  The  reader  is  referred  to  the  concluding  chapter  of  this  Book  for  a 
more  particular  account  of  the  climates  and  the  direction  of  the  shadows. 
—Wern.  Club. 

3  That  is,  seventy-five  feet.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  125 

concerning  it.  From  the  Mouth  of  the  Ganges  to  the  Cape 
Calingon,  and  the  Town  Dandagula,  are  725  Miles  :  from 
thence  to  Tropina,  1225  Miles.  Then  to  the  Promontory  of 
Perimula,  where  is  the  chief  Town  of  Merchandise  in  all 
India,  750  Miles:  from  which  to  the  abovesaid  Town  Patale, 
within  the  Island,  620  Miles.  The  Mountain  Nations  be- 
tween it  and  Jomanes  are  the  Cesi  and  the  savage  Catreboni : 
next  to  them  the  Megallae,  whose  King  hath  500  Elephants ; 
and  of  Foot  and  Horsemen  an  uncertain  number.  The 
Chrysei,  Parasangze,  and  Asangae,  are  full  of  Tigers:  they 
arm  30,000  Foot,  800  Horsemen,  and  300  Elephants.  The 
Indus  shuts  them  in,  and  they  are  enclosed  with  a  crown  of 
Mountains  and  Wildernesses  for  (525  Miles.  Beneath  these 
Deserts  are  the  Dari  and  Surge ;  and  then  again  Deserts  for 
188  Miles,  compassed  about  for  the  most  part  with  Banks  of 
Sands,  like  Islands  in  the  Sea.  Under  these  Deserts  are  the 
Maltecorae,  Singae,  Marobae,  Rarungee,  Moruntes,  Masuae, 
and  Pagungae.  Now  for  those  who  inhabit  the  Mountains, 
which  in  a  continual  range  without  interruption  stand  upon 
the  Coasts  of  the  Ocean,  they  are  free  and  subject  to  no 
Kings,  and  many  Cities  they  hold  among  these  Mountains. 
Then  come  the  Naraese,  enclosed  within  the  highest  Mountain 
of  all  the  Indian  Hills,  Capitalia.  On  the  other  side  of  this 
the  Inhabitants  dig  extensively  in  Gold  and  Silver  Mines. 
Then  you  enter  upon  Oratura,  whose  King  hath  indeed  but 
10  Elephants,  but  a  great  abundance  of  Footmen;  and  the 
Varetatae,  who  under  their  King  keep  no  Elephants,  trusting 
to  their  Horsemen  and  Footmen.  The  Odomboerae  and 
Salabastrae ;  the  beautiful  City  Horata,  fortified  with  Fosses 
and  Marshes  :  through  which  the  Crocodiles,  on  account  of 
their  greedy  Appetite  for  Men's  Bodies,  will  suffer  none  to 
pass  into  the  Town,  but  over  the  Bridge.  Another  Town 
there  is  among  them,  of  great  Name :  Automela,  standing 
on  the  Sea-side  :  a  noble  resort  of  Merchants,  by  reason  of 
five  great  Rivers  which  meet  all  there  in  one  confluence. 
Their  King  possesseth  1600  Elephants,  150,000  Footmen, 
and  5000  Horsemen.  The  King  of  the  Charmse  is  poor ;  he 
possesseth  60  Elephants,  and  his  Power  is  otherwise  small. 
Beyond  them  are  the  Pandse,  the  only  Nation  of  the  Indians 


126  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

which  is  governed  by  Women.  One  of  this  Sex,  they  say, 
was  begotten  by  Hercules,  in  which  regard  she  was  the  better 
accepted,  and  was  appointed  over  the  greatest  Kingdom. 
Those  who  draw  their  Origin  from  her  have  Dominion 
over  300  Towns,  and  the  Command  of  150,000  Foot,  and 
500  Elephants.  Beyond  this  Realm  are  the  Syrieni,  con- 
taining 300  Cities ;  the  Derangae,  Posingae,  Buzse,  Gogyarei, 
Umbrae,  Nereae,  Prancosi,  Nobundae,  Cocondae,  Nesei,  Peda- 
tritse,  Solobriasae,  and  Olostrae,  touching  on  the  Island1 
Patale :  from  the  utmost  Shore  of  which  Island  unto  the 
Gates  Caspiae,  are  reckoned  18,025  Miles.  Again,  on  this 
side  the  River  Indus,  over  against  them,  as  appeareth  by 
evident  Demonstration,  there  dwell  the  Amatae,  Bolingae, 
Gallitalutae,  Dimuri,  Megari,  Ordabse,  and  Mesae.  Beyond 
them,  the  Uri  and  Sileni ;  and  then  Deserts  for  250  Miles  ; 
which  being  passed  over,  there  are  the  Organages,  the 
Abaortae,  Sibarae,  and  the  Suertae  :  and  beyond  these  a  Wil- 
derness as  great  as  the  former.  Again,  the  Sarophages, 
Sorgae,  Baraomatae,  and  the  Gumbritae;  of  whom  there  are 
thirteen  Nations,  and  each  one  hath  two  Cities.  The  Aseni 
inhabit  three  Cities :  their  capital  City  is  Bucephala,  built  in 
the  very  Place  where  King  Alexander  s  horse,  called  Buce- 
phalus, was  buried.  Above  them  are  the  Mountaineers 
below  the  Caucacus,  named  Soleadae  and  Sondrae :  and  hav- 
ing passed  the  Indus,  going  along  its  Banks  are  the  Sama- 
rabriae,  the  Sambruceni,  the  Brisabritae,  Osii,  Antixeni,  and 
Taxillae,  with  a  famous  City  called  Amandra :  from  which  all 
that  Tract  now  lying  plain  within  the  Country  is  named 
Amandra.  Four  Nations  there  are :  the  Peucolaitae,  Arsa- 
galitae,  Geretae,  and  Asoi :  for  many  set  not  down  the  River 
Indus  as  the  limit  westward ;  but  add  four  Provinces 
(Satrapae):  Gedrosi,  Arachotae,  Arii,  and  Paropamisadae. 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
Tlit  Arii  and  the  Nations  adjoining* 

OTHER  Writers  prefer  the  opinion,  that  the  utmost  limit 
is  the  River  Cophetes,  all  which  quarters  are  within  the  Ter- 

1  Babul. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  127 

ritory  of  the  Arii :  and  most  of  them  affirm  that  the  City 
Nysa,  as  also  the  Mountain  Merus  consecrated  to  Father 
Liber,  belong  to  India.  This  is  that  Mountain  from  which 
arose  the  Fable,  that  he  sprung  from  the  Seed  of  Jupiter. 
Likewise  (they  assign  to  India)  the  Country  of  the  Aspagonse, 
so  plentiful  in  Vines,  Laurels,  and  Box,  and  generally  all 
sorts  of  Fruits  that  grow  in  Greece.  Many  wonderful,  and 
in  a  manner  fabulous  things,  they  report  of  the  Fertility  of 
that  Land,  of  the  sorts  of  Fruits,  of  Trees  bearing  Cotton,  of 
Wild  Beasts,  of  Birds,  and  other  Creatures :  which  I  will 
reserve  for  their  proper  places  in  another  part  of  this  Work. 
Those  four  Satrapies,  which  I  mentioned  before,  I  will  speak 
of  presently:  for  now  I  hasten  to  the  Island  Taprobane. 
But  there  are  other  Isles  first,  as  Patalse,  which  we  have 
noted  to  lie  in  the  very  Mouth  of  the  River  Indus,  of  a 
Triangular  figure,  220  Miles  in  Breadth.  Without  the 
Mouth  of  the  Indus,  two  other  Islands,  Chryse  and  Agyre, 
abounding,  as  I  suppose,  in  Gold  and  Silver  Mines ;  for  I 
cannot  easily  believe,  that  the  Soil  there  is  all  Gold  and 
Silver,  as  some  have  reported.  Twenty  Miles  from  them  is 
Crocala:  and  twelve  Miles  further  Bibaga,  abundant  in 
Oysters  and  other  Shell-fishes.  Then,  nine  Miles  beyond 
it,  Toralliba  sheweth  itself,  and  many  other  petty  Islands. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
The  Island  Taprobant.1 

IT  hath  been  for  a  long  time  thought  that  Taprobane  was 
another  World  under  the  appellation  of  the  Antichthones. 
But  from  the  time  of  Alexander  the  Great,  and  the  inter- 
course in  those  parts,  it  was  discovered  to  be  an  Island. 
Oneslcratusj  the  Admiral  of  his  Fleet,  hath  written,  that  the 
Elephants  bred  in  this  Island  are  bigger  and  better  fitted  for 
War  than  those  of  India.  Megasthenes  saith,  that  there  is 
a  River  which  divideth  it,  arid  that  the  Inhabitants  are  called 

1  This  is  now  generally  concluded  to  be  the  island  of  Ceylon,  in  the 
East  Indies,  now  subject  to  British  dominion. —  Wern.  Club. 


128  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

Palgeogoni:  that  it  affordeth  more  Gold  and  bigger  Pearls 
than  the  Indian.  Eratosthenes  also  took  the  Measure 
of  it,  in  length  7000  Stadia,  and  in  breadth  5000  :  that 
there  are  no  Cities,  but  Villages  to  the  number  of  700.  It 
beginneth  at  the  Sea  Eoos,  from  which  it  extendeth 
between  the  East  and  West  of  India :  and  in  times 
past  was  believed  to  lie  out  into  the  Sea  from  the  Prasian 
Nation  twenty  Days'  Sailing.  But  afterwards,  because  the 
Vessels  and  Rigging  used  upon  this  Sea  in  the  Passage 
thither  were  made  of  Paper  Reeds,  like  those  of  the  River 
Nile,  the  Voyage  was  estimated,  by  comparison  with  our 
Ships,  at  about  seven  Days.  All  the  Sea  tying  between 
is  full  of  Shallows,  no  more  than  five  Fathoms  Deep  ;  but  in 
certain  Channels  it  is  so  deep  that  no  Anchors  will  reach  the 
Bottom:  and  so  narrow  are  these  Channels,  that  a  Ship 
cannot  turn  within  them ;  and  therefore,  to  avoid  the  neces- 
sity of  turning,  the  Ships  have  Prows  at  both  ends.  In 
Sailing,  there  is  no  Observation  of  the  Stars.  The  North 
Pole  is  never  seen  :  but  they  carry  with  them  Birds,  which 
they  send  off  at  intervals  and  follow  their  Course,  as  they 
fly  to  Land :  neither  used  they  go  to  Sea  for  more  than 
three  Months  in  the  Year  ;  and  for  one  hundred  Days  from 
the  Solstice  they  take  most  heed ;  for  at  that  time  it  is  Win- 
ter with  them.  And  thus  much  we  know  by  relation  of 
ancient  Writers.  But  we  obtain  better  Intelligence,  and 
more  accurate  Information,  by  Ambassadors  who  came  out 
of  that  Island,  in  the  reign  of  Claudius,  which  happened 
after  this  manner.  A  Freed-man  of  Annius  Plocamus,  who 
had  Farmed  from  the  Exchequer  the  Customs  of  the  Red 
Sea,  as  he  sailed  about  the  Coasts  of  Arabia,  was  driven  with 
the  North  Winds  beyond  the  Realm  of  Carmania,  and  in  the 
Space  of  15  Days  he  reached  an  Harbour  of  that  Country, 
called  Hippuros.  He  found  the  King  of  that  Country  so 
courteous,  as  to  afford  him  Entertainment  for  six  Months. 
And  as  he  used  to  discourse  with  him  about  the  Romans  and 
Caesar,  he  recounted  to  him  at  large  of  all  things.  But 
among  many  other  Reports  that  he  heard,  he  wondered  most 
at  their  Justice,  because  their  Denarii  of  the  Money  which 


BOOK  V  [ .]  History  of  Nature.  ]  29 

was  taken  were  always  of  the  same  Weight,  although  the 
different  Images  shewed  that  they  were  made  by  different 
Persons.  And  hereupon  especially  was  he  moved  to  seek 
for  the  Friendship  of  Rome  ;  and  so  despatched  four  Ambas- 
sadors, of  whom  Rachias  was  the  chief.  From  them  it  be- 
came known  that  there  were  five  hundred  Towns  in  it ;  and 
that  there  was  a  Harbour  facing  the  South,  lying  conve- 
niently near  the  Town  Palesimundum,  the  principal  City  of 
all  that  Realm,  and  the  King's  Seat ;  that  there  were 
200,000  common  Citizens  :  that  within  this  Island  there  was 
a  Lake  called  Magisba,  270  Miles  in  Circuit,  containing  in 
it  some  Islands  fruitful  in  nothing  but  Pasturage.  Out  of 
this  Lake  issued  two  Rivers ;  the  one,  Palesimundas,  pass- 
ing near  to  the  City  of  the  same  Name,  and  running  into  the 
Harbour  with  three  Streams ;  of  which  the  Narrowest  was  five 
Stadia  Broad,  and  the  largest  fifteen  ;  the  other  Northward 
towards  India,  by  Name  Cydara :  also  that  the  next  Cape  of 
this  Country  to  India  is  called  Colaicum,  from  which  to  the 
nearest  Port  (of  India)  is  counted  four  Days'  Sailing  :  in  the 
midst  of  which  Passage,  there  lieth  the  Island  of  the  Sun. 
They  said,  moreover,  that  the  Water  of  this  Sea  was  of  a 
deep  green  Colour;  and,  what  is  still  more  extraordinary, 
full  of  Trees  growing  within  it  :1  so  that  the  Pilots  with 
their  Helms  broke  off  the"  Crests  of  those  Trees.  They  won- 
dered to  see  the  Stars  about  the  North  Pole  (Septentriones) 
and  Vergiliae,  as  if  it  had  been  a  new  Heaven.  They  confessed 
also  they  never  saw,  with  them,  the  Moon  above  the  Earth 
before  it  was  eight  Days  old,2  nor  after  the  sixteenth  Day. 
That  the  Canopus,  a  great  and  bright  Star,  used  to  shine  all 
Night  with  them.  But  the  thing  that  they  were  most  sur- 
prised at  was,  that  they  observed  the  Shadow  of  their  own 

1  Branched  corals,  beyond  a  doubt. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  It  is  surprising  to  find  an  author  so  intelligent  as  Pliny  relating 
such  extraordinary  circumstances    as  these   ambassadors   from  Ceylon 
reported  without  any  animadversion ;  and  particularly  that  he  takes  no 
notice  of  what  they  said  concerning  the  appearance  of  the  moon,  as  such 
a  phenomenon  could  not  take  place  in  any  region  of  the  earth.—  Wern. 
Club. 

VOL.  IT.  K 


130  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  VI. 

Bodies  to  fall  toward  our  Hemisphere,  and  not  to  theirs ; 
and  that  the  Sun  rose  on  their  Left  Hand  and  set  on  their 
Right,  rather  than  contrary  wise.  Furthermore  they  related, 
that  the  Front  of  that  Island  which  looked  toward  India 
contained  10,000  Stadia,  and  reached  from  the  South-east 
beyond  the  Mountains  Emodi.  Also,  that  the  Seres  were 
within  their  Sight,  with  whom  they  had  Acquaintance  by 
Merchandise :  and  that  the  Father  of  Rachias  used  many 
times  to  travel  thither:  affirming,  moreover,  that  if  any 
Strangers  came  thither,  they  were  assailed  by  Wild  Beasts  : 
and  that  the  Inhabitants  themselves  exceeded  the  ordinary 
Stature  of  Men,  having  red  Hair,  blue  Eyes,  their  Voice 
harsh,  their  Speech  not  fitted  for  any  Commerce.  In  all 
things  else  their  Practice  is  the  same  as  that  of  our  Mer- 
chants. On  the  farther  side  of  the  River,  when  Commodi- 
ties are  laid  down  near  the  Things  for  Sale,  if  the  Exchange 
please  them  they  take  them  away,  and  leave  the  other  Mer- 
chandise in  lieu  thereof:  with  a  juster  Hatred  of  Luxury 
than  if  the  mind  shall  consider  what  and  whence  it  is  sought 
for,  and  to  what  end.  But  even  this  Island  Taprobane, 
seeming,  as  it  were,  to  be  separated  by  Nature  from  all  the 
World,  is  not  without  the  Vices  with  which  we  are  tainted. 
For  Gold  and  Silver  are  even  there  also  highly  esteemed : 
and  Marble,  especially  if  it  be  fashioned  like  a  Tortoise-shell. 
Gems  and  Pearls  also,  of  the  better  sort,  are  in  great  honour : 
and  the  Abundance  of  our  Luxury.  These  Ambassadors  said 
that  their  Riches  were  greater,  but  that  we  had  more  use  of 
them.  They  affirmed,  that  no  Man  with  them  had  any 
Slaves  ;  neither  slept  they  after  Day-light,  nor  in  the  Day- 
time :  that  the  Manner  of  Building  their  Houses  is  low,  that 
the  Price  of  Victuals  did  not  fluctuate ;  and  there  were  no 
Courts,  or  going  to  Law.  Hercules  is  worshipped.  Their 
King  is  chosen  by  the  People,  if  he  is  aged,  merciful,  and 
childless;  but  if  he  should  have  Children  afterward,  then  he 
is  deposed,  in  order  that  the  Kingdom  may  not  become  here- 
ditary. He  hath  thirty  Governors  assigned  to  him  by  the 
People :  and  no  Person  can  be  condemned  to  Death  unless 
by  the  Majority  of  them :  and  even  then  he  may  appeal  to 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  131 

the  People.  Seventy  Judges  are  deputed  to  sit  upon  his 
Cause;  and  if  it  happen  that  they  acquit  him,  then  the 
thirty  who  condemned  him  are  ever  displaced  from  their 
Dignity,  with  a  very  severe  Rebuke.  The  King  is  adorned 
like  Liber  Pater :  hut  others  in  the  habit  of  Arabians.  If 
the  King  offend  in  any  thing,  Death  is  his  Punishment :  but 
no  Man  doeth  Execution.  All  Men  turn  away  from  him, 
and  deny  him  any  Intercourse,  of  even  a  Word.  They  are 
destroyed  during  a  solemn  Hunting,  which,  it  appears,  is 
exceedingly  agreeable  to  the  Tigers  and  Elephants.  They 
cultivate  their  Ground  diligently.  They  do  not  use  Vines  ; 
but  all  sorts  of  Fruits  they  have  in  Abundance.  They  also 
take  Pleasure  in  Fishing,  and  especially  in  taking  Tortoises  : 
and  so  great  are  they  found  there,  that  one  of  their  Shells 
serves  to  cover  a  House.  They  count  a  hundred  Years  no 
long  Life.  Thus  much  we  have  learned  concerning  Tapro- 
bane.  It  remaineth  now  to  say  somewhat  of  those  four 
Satrapies,  which  we  put  off  to  this  Place. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 
Capissend,  Carmania. 

BEYOND  those  Nations  which  border  nearest  on  the  River 
Indus,  the  Mountain  Portions  of  Capisssene  possess  the  City 
Capissa,  which  Cyrus  destroyed.  Arachosia,  with  a  City, 
and  a  River  also  of  that  Name ;  which  City  some  have  called 
Cophe,  founded  by  Queen  Semiramis.  The  River  Her- 
mandus,  which  runneth  by  Abest£,  of  the  Arachosians.  The 
next,  which  confront  Arachosia  southward,  toward  part  of  the 
Arachotae,  are  the  Gedrosi ;  and  on  the  North  side  the  Paro- 
pamisadae.  The  Town  Cartana,  named  afterwards  Tetra- 
gonis,  is  at  the  foot  of  Caucasus.  This  Region  lieth  over 
against  the  Bactriani :  then  its  principal  Town  Alexandria, 
named  from  its  Founder:  Syndraci,  Dangulae,  Parapiani, 
Cantaces,  and  Maci.  At  the  Hill  Caucasus  standeth  the 
Town  Cadrusi,  built  likewise  by  Alexander.  Below  all  these 
Regions  lieth  the  Coast  of  the  Indus.  The  Region  of  the 
Arians,  scorched  with  parching  Heats,  and  environed  with 


132  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

Deserts  :  but  many  shadowy  Places  lie  between.  Cultivators 
are  assembled  especially  about  the  two  Rivers,  Tonderos  and 
Arosapes.  The  Town  Artaccana.  The  River  Arms,  which 
runneth  by  Alexandria,  built  by  Alexander.  The  Town  con- 
taineth  in  Compass  30  Stadia.  Artacabane,  as  much  more 
ancient  as  it  is  more  beautiful,  which  by  Antiochus  the  King 
was  walled  the  second  time,  and  enlarged  to  50  Stadia. 
The  Nation  of  the  Dorisci.  The  Rivers  Pharnacotis  and 
Ophradus.  Prophtasia,  a  Town  of  the  Zarasparae.  The 
Drangse,  Argetae,  Zarangae,  and  Gedrusi.  Towns  Peucolais 
and  Lymphorta ;  the  Desert  of  the  Methoricori ;  the  River 
Manais ;  the  Nation  of  the  Augutturi.  The  River  Borru ; 
the  People  Urbi ;  the  Navigable  River  Ponamus,  in  the 
Borders  of  the  Pandse.  Also,  the  River  Ceberon,  in  the 
Country  of  the  Sorarse;  with  many  Harbours  in  its  Mouth. 
The  Town  of  Condigramma ;  the  River  Cophes  ;  into  which 
run  the  Navigable  Rivers,  Sadarus,  Parosphus,  and  Sodinus. 
Some  will  have  the  Country  Daritus  to  be  a  part  of  Ariana, 
and  they  set  down  the  Measure  of  them  both  to  be  in  Length 
1950  Miles,  and  in  Breadth  less  by  half  than  India.  Others 
have  said  that  the  Country  of  the  Gedrusi  and  Scyri  con- 
tairieth  183  Miles.  Being  past  which,  are  the  Ichthyophagi, 
surnamed  Oritse,  who  speak  not  the  proper  Indian  Tongue, 
for  200  Miles.  And  beyond  it  are  situated  the  People  of  the 
Arbians,  for  200  Miles.  Those  Ichthyophagi  Alexander  for- 
bade to  feed  on  Fish.1  Beyond  them  are  the  Deserts;  and 
then  comes  Carmania,  as  well  as  Persis,  and  Arabia.  But 
before  we  treat  distinctly  of  these  Countries,  I  think  it  meet 
to  set  down  what  Onesicritus  (who  having  the  conduct  of  the 

1  Fish  was  a  favourite  diet,  among  the  people  bordering  on  the 
Mediterranean  Sea \  and  therefore- the  objection  of  Alexander  could  not 
be  to  this,  simply  as  an  article  of  food.  It  may  be  supposed  that  various 
tribes  living  on  the  sea-coast  were  accustomed  to  feed  on  this  diet  alone, 
on  the  principle  of  caste  or  sect,  thereby  rendering  themselves  exclusive 
in  their  communications  with  others.  To  remove  such  barriers  to  civilis- 
ation may  be  supposed  to  have  been  the  prevailing  motive  with  Alex- 
ander in  this  edict ;  which  regulated  rather  than  forbade  the  use  of  a 
wholesome  article  of  food. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  T33 

Fleet  of  Alexander,  sailed  out,  of  India,  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean parts  of  Persis)  reporteth,  according  to  the  Informa- 
tion which  came  lately  from  Juba :  in  like  manner  this 
Navigation  in  these  years  ascertained,  is  even  at  this  day  pre- 
served. The  Reports  made  by  Onesicritus  and  Nearchus  of 
their  Navigation  possess  neither  the  Distance  nor  the  Names 
of  the  several  Resting-places.  And  to  begin  with  Xylene- 
polis,  built  by  Alexander,  from  which  they  entered  first  on 
their  Voyage,  it  is  not  satisfactorily  put  down  by  them,  either 
in  what  Place  it  is  situated,  or  near  what  River.  Yet  these 
Particulars  are  by  them  reported  worthy  the  Remembrance  : 
as  that  in  this  Voyage  Nearchus  founded  a  Town :  that 
the  River  Nabrus  is  able  to  bear  great  Vessels :  overagainst 
which  there  is  an  Island,  at  the  Distance  of  70  Stadia  : 
that  Leonatus  founded  Alexandria  in  the  Frontiers  of 
that  Nation,  by  Commandment  of  Alexander  ;  Argenus  is  a 
safe  Harbour:  that  the  River  Tuberum  is  navigable,  around 
which  are  the  Paritse.  After  them  the  Ichthyophagi,  who 
occupy  so  long  a  Tract,  that  they  were  20  Days  in  Sailing 
along  by  their  Coasts.  The  Island  of  the  Sun,  named  also 
the  Bed  of  the  Nymphs,  is  red,  and  in  which  almost  every 
Creature  is  consumed  for  no  certain  cause.  The  Origens  : 
Hytanis,  a  River  in  Carmania,  with  many  Harbours,  and 
Plenty  of  Gold.  And  here  first  they  observed  that  they  had 
a  sight  of  the  North-pole  Star  (Septentriones).  The  Star 
Arcturus  they  saw  not  every  Night,  nor  at  any  Time  all 
Night  long.  Furthermore,  the  Archaemenides  reached  thus 
far :  and  they  found  Mines  of  Copper,  Iron,  Arsenic,  and  Ver- 
milion :  then  is  the  Cape  of  Carmania  :  from  which  to  the 
Coast  overagainst  them  of  the  Macae,  a  Nation  of  Arabia,  is 
50  Miles.  Three  Islands,  of  which  Organa  only  is  inhabited, 
having  Abundance  of  Fresh  Water,  and  distant  from  the  Con- 
tinent 25  Miles :  four  Islands  in  the  very  Gulf  before  Persia. 
About  these  Islands  Sea  Serpents,  twenty  Cubits  long,  as  they 
came  swimming  toward  them,  put  the  Fleet  in  great  Terror. 
The  Island  Acrotadus :  likewise  the  Gauratse,  wherein  the 
Nation  of  the  Chiani  inhabit.  In  the  middle  of  the  Persian 
is  the  River  Hiperis,  able  to  bear  Ships  of  Burden,  The 


1 34  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  V I . 

River  Sitiogagus,  upon  which  a  Man  may  pass  in  seven  Days 
to  the  Pasargadee.  A  River  that  is  Navigable  called  Phir- 
stimus,  and  an  Island  without  a  Name.  The  River  Granius., 
which  runneth  through  Susiane,  carrieth  hut  small  Vessels. 
Along  the  Right  Bank  of  this  River  dwell  the  Deximontani, 
who  prepare  Bitumen.  The  River  Oroatis,  with  a  difficult 
Mouth,  except  to  skilful  Pilots:  two  little  Islands.  Past 
which,  the  Sea  is  very  shallow,  like  a  Marsh,  but  there  are 
some  Channels  wherein  they  may  sail.  The  Mouth  of  the 
Euphrates.  The  Lake  which  the  Eulseus  and  Tigris  make, 
near  to  Characis.  Then  on  the  Tigris,  Susa.  There  they 
found  Alexander  keeping  Feast-days  of  Festivity  in  the 
seventh  Month  after  he  had  parted  from  them  at  Patalae, 
and  the  third  Month  of  his  Voyage.  And  thus  much  con- 
cerning the  Voyage  of  Alexanders  Fleet.  Afterwards 
from  Syagrus,  a  Promontory  in  Arabia,  it  was  counted  to 
Patale  1332  Miles,  and  that  the  West  Wind,  which  the 
people  of  that  Country  call  Hypalus,  was  thought  most  pro- 
per to  sail  with  to  the  same  Place.  The  Age  ensuing  dis- 
covered a  shorter  and  safer  Course  ;  namely,  if  from  the  said 
Promontory  they  set  their  Course  directly  to  the  River  Zize- 
rus,  an  Harbour  in  India.  And  in  truth  this  Passage  was 
sailed  for  a  long  time,  until  at  length  a  Merchant  found  out 
a  more  compendious  Course,  and  India  was  brought  near 
for  Gain :  for  every  Year  they  sailed  thither,  and  because 
Pirates  very  much  infest  them,  they  embark  in  their  Ships 
Companies  of  Archers.  And  because  all  these  Seas  are  now- 
first  certainly  discovered,  it  is  not  amiss  to  shew  the  whole 
Course  from  Egypt.  It  is  worthy  to  be  observed,  that  there 
is  not  a  Year  but  it  costs  our  State  to  furnish  into  India, 
500,000  Sesterces,  (fifty  millions  of  Sesterces.)  For  which 
the  Indians  send  back  Merchandise,  which  at  Rome  is 
sold  for  a  hundred  times  as  much  as  it  cost.  From  Alex- 
andria it  is  two  Miles  to  Juliopolis  :  from  whence  on  the 
Nilus  they  sail  303  Miles  to  Coptus,  which  may  be  done  in 
twelve  Days,  with  the  Etesian  Winds  blowing.  From  Cop- 
tus they  travel  upon  Camels  ;  and  for  the  sake  of  Water 
there  are  Places  appointed  for  Lodging.  The  first  is  called 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  135 

Hydreuma,  32  Miles.  The  second,  one  Day's  Journey,  in  a 
Mountain.  The  third,  at  another  Hydreuma,  95  Miles  from 
Coptus.  The  fourth,  again,  in  a  Mountain.  Again,  at  the 
Hydreuma  of  Apollo,  from  Coptus,  184  Miles.  Again,  in  a 
Hill.  And  then  to  Hydreuma  the  New,  from  Coptus,  234 
Miles.1  There  is  another  called  Hydreuma  the  Old,  named 
also  Troglodyticum,  where,  two  Miles  out  of  the  direct  way,  is 
a  Garrison,  four  Miles  distant  from  New  Hydreuma.  From 
thence  to  the  Town  Berenice,  where  is  an  Harbour  of  the 
Red  Sea,  258  Miles  from  Coptus.  But  as  the  Journey  is  for 
the  most  part  performed  by  Night,  because  of  the  excessive 
Heat,  and  Travellers  rest  all  the  Day,  twelve  Days  are  set 
down  for  the  whole  Journey  between  Coptus  and  Berenices 
They  begin  to  sail  at  Midsummer,  before  or  close  upon  the 
rising  of  the  Dog-star ;  and  in  about  30  Days  they  arrive  at 
Ocelis  in  Arabia,  or  else  at  Cana,  within  the  Country  of  In- 
cense. A  third  Port  there  is  besides,  called  Muza,  to  which 
there  is  no  Resort  of  the  Merchants  of  India  :  neither  by  any 
but  Merchants  that  traffic  in  Incense  and  Spices  of  Arabia. 
The  Indus  hath  Towns.2  Its  Region  is  called  Saphar :  and 
another  called  Sabe.  But  for  them  that  would  make  a 
Journey  to  the  Indians,  the  most  commodious  place  from 
whence  to  set  forward  is  Ocelis :  for  from  thence,  and  with 
the  West  Wind  called  Hypalus,  they  have  a  passage  of  forty 
Days'  Sailing  to  the  first  Town  of  Merchandise  in  India, 
called  Muziris.  However,  this  Port  is  not  to  be  ventured 
in,  because  of  the  neighbouring  Pirates,  which  keep  ordi- 
narily about  a  place  called  Hydrae;  and  it  is  not  richly 
stored  with  Merchandise.  And  moreover,  the  Station  of  the 
Ships  is  far  from  the  Land,  so  that  they  must  convey  their 
Wares  in  little  Boats  which  they  use  for  the  purpose.  At 
the  time  when  this  Account  was  written,  the  King  that 
reigned  there  was  named  Celebothras.  There  is  another 
Harbour  that  is  more  commodious,  belonging  to  the  Nation 

1  So  as  it  appeareth  that  every  day's  journey  was  about  thirty-two 
miles. 

2  This  is  an  unfinished  sentence,  perhaps  from  the  author's  not  being 
able  to  obtain  the  names  of  these  towns. —  Wern.  Club. 


136  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK,  VI. 

Necanidon,  which  they  call  Becare :  the  King's  Name  at 
present  is  Pandion  ;  far  off  is  another  Town  of  Merchandise 
within  the  Land,  called  Modusa.  The  Region  from  whence 
they  transport  Pepper  in  small  Lighters  made  of  one  piece 
of  Wood  to  Becare,  is  named  Cotona  :  of  all  which  Nations, 
Ports,  and  Towns,  there  is  not  a  Name  found  in  any  of  the 
former  Writers.  By  which  it  appeareth,  that  there  hath 
been  great  Change  in  these  places.  From  India,  our  Mer- 
chants return  in  the  Beginning  of  our  Month  December, 
which  the  Egyptians  call  Tybis :  or  at  farthest  before  the 
Sixth  Day  of  the  ^Egyptian  Month  Machiris,  which  is  before 
our  Ides  of  January  :  and  by  this  reckoning  they  may  pass 
and  return  within  the  compass  of  One  Year.  When  they 
sail  from  India  they  have  the  (North-East)  Wind,  Vulturnus, 
with  them :  and  when  they  have  entered  into  the  Red  Sea, 
the  South  or  South-west.  Now  will  we  return  to  our  pro- 
posed Discourse  concerning  Carmania :  the  Coast  of  which, 
after  the  reckoning  of  Nearchus,  may  take  in  Circuit  12,050 
Miles.  From  its  Beginning  to  the  River  Sabis  is  100  Miles; 
from  whence  as  far  as  to  the  River  Andanin,  are  Vineyards 
and  Corn-fields,  well  cultivated.  The  Region  is  called  Ar- 
muzia.  The  Towns  of  Carmania  are  Zetis  and  Alexandria. 
In  this  part  the  Sea  breaketh  into  the  Land  in  two  Arms ; 
which  our  Countrymen  call  the  Red  Sea,1  and  the  Greeks 
Erythrseum,  from  a  King  named  Erythras:  or  (as  some 
think)  because  the  Sea,  by  reason  of  the  Reflexion  of  the  Sun, 
seemeth  of  a  reddish  colour.  Others  suppose  that  this  Redness 
is  occasioned  of  the  Sand  and  Ground,  which  is  Red:  and  others 
again,  that  the  very  Water  is  of  its  own  nature  so  coloured. 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 
The  Persian  and  Arabian  Gulfs. 

THIS  Red  Sea  is  divided  into  Two  Gulfs,     That  from  the 
East  is  named  the  Persian  Gulf,  and  is  in  Circuit  2500  Miles, 

1  Another  reason  for  the  name  is  to  be  found  in  Esau,  the  son  of  the 
patriarch  Isaac,  and  whose  dominion  was  on  its  borders.  Bruce  and  others 
have  advanced  opinions  with  regard  to  the  origin  of  the  name  of  this  cele- 
brated sea ;  but  its  most  ancient  name  may  be  rendered  the  Weedy  Sea. 
-  Wern.  Club, 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  137 

by  the  computation  of  Eratosthenes.  Overagainst  this  Gulf 
is  Arabia,  which  is  in  Length  1200  Miles.  On  the  other 
side  there  is  another  called  the  Arabian  Gulf,  which  runneth 
into  the  Ocean,  called  Azanius.  The  Mouth  of  the  Persian 
Gulf  is  Five  Miles  wide,  though  some  have  made  it  but 
Four.  From  this  to  its  deepest  recess,  by  a  straight  Course, 
is  known  to  be  1125  Miles;  and  it  is  fashioned  like  a  Man's 
Head.  Onesicritus  and  Nearchus  have  written,  that  from 
the  River  Indus  to  the  Persian  Gulf,  and  from  thence  to 
Babylon  by  the  Marshes  of  the  Euphrates,  is  2500  Miles. 
In  an  angle  of  Carmania  the  Chelonophagi  inhabit,  who  feed 
on  the  Flesh  of  Tortoises,  and  cover  their  Cottages  with  their 
Shells.  They  inhabit  from  the  River  Arbis  to  the  very  Cape, 
they  are  Hairy  over  all  their  Body  except  their  Heads,  and 
wear  no  other  Garment  but  Fish-skins. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 
The  Island  Cascandrus :  and  the  Kingdoms  of  the  Parthians. 

BEYOND  this  Tract  of  the  Chelonophagi,  toward  India, 
there  lieth,  Fifty  Miles  within  the  Sea,  the  Island  Cascan- 
drus, by  report  all  desert ;  and  near  it,  with  an  Ann  of  the 
Sea  between,  another  Island  called  Stois ;  having  a  lucrative 
Trade  in  Pearls.  Beyond  the  Cape  of  Carmania,  you  enter 
upon  the  Armozei.  Some  say,  that  the  Albii  are  between 
both ;  and  that  their  Coasts  contain  in  the  whole  402  Miles. 
There  are  the  Port  of  the  Macedonians,  and  the  Altars  of 
Alexander  on  the  very  Promontory  itself.  The  Rivers  Saga- 
nos,  and  then  Daras,  and  Salsos :  beyond  which  is  the  Cape 
Themistheas,  and  the  Island  Aphrodisias,  which  is  inhabited. 
Then  beginneth  Persis,  which  extendeth  to  the  River  Oroatis, 
that  divideth  it  from  Elymais.  Overagainst  Persis,  these 
Islands,  Philos,  Cassandra,  and  Aratia,  with  an  exceeding 
high  Mountain  in  it :  and  this  Island  is  consecrated  to  Nep- 
tune. Persis  itself,  westward,  hath  the  Coasts  lying  out  in 
Length  450  Miles.  The  People  are  Rich,  even  to  Luxury; 
and  long  since  they  are  become  subject  to  the  Parthians,  and 
have-  lost  their  own  Name.  We  will  briefly  now  speak  of 


1 38  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI . 

their  Empire.  The  Parthians  have  in  all  Eighteen  Realms 
under  them  :  for  so  they  divide  the  Provinces  about  the 
Two  Seas,  as  we  have  said,  the  Red  Sea  lying  southward, 
and  the  Hircan  Sea,  toward  the  north.  Of  these  Eleven, 
which  are  called  the  Higher  Provinces,  take  their  beginning 
from  the  Border  of  Armenia,  and  the  Coasts  of  the  Caspian  ; 
and  they  reach  to  the  Scythians,  with  whom  they  have  equal 
Intercourse  on  the  other  side.  The  other  Seven  are  called 
the  Lower  Provinces.  As  for  the  Parthians,  their  Land 
always  lay  at  the  Foot  of  those  Mountains  of  which  we  have 
so  often  spoken,  which  enclose  all  those  Nations.  It  hath 
on  the  East  the  Arii,  and  southward  Carmania  and  the 
Ariani ;  on  the  west  side  the  Pratitse  and  Medi ;  and  on 
the  North  the  Hircani ;  and  is  compassed  about  with  Deserts. 
The  farthest  Nations  of  the  Parthians  are  called  Nomades : 
beyond  the  Deserts  their  Cities  toward  the  West,  are  Issaris 
and  Calliope,  of  which  we  have  written  before  ;  but  toward 
the  North-east,  Europum ;  and  South-east,  Mania.  In  the 
Midland  the  City  Hecatompylos,  and  Arsacia.  The  noble 
Region  of  Nyssea  in  Parthyenes,  where  is  Alexandropolis, 
(so  called)  from  its  Founder. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 
Media,  Mesopotamia,  Babylon,  and  Seleucia. 

IT  is  needful  in  this  place  to  describe  the  Situation  of  the 
Medi,  and  to  discover  the  Face  of  those  Countries,  as  far  as 
to  the  Persian  Sea,  in  order  that  the  Description  of  other 
Regions  may  be  the  better  understood.  For  Media  on  the 
West  runneth  obliquely,  confronteth  the  Parthise,  and  en- 
closeth  both  these  Realms.  Therefore  on  the  East  side  it 
hath  the  Parthians  and  Caspians :  on  the  South,  Sittacene, 
Susiane,  and  Persis  ;  Westward,  Adiabene ;  and  Northward, 
Armenia.  The  Persians  always  dwelt  about  the  Red  Sea,  on 
which  account  it  was  called  the  Persian  Gulf.  The  Mari- 
time Coast  thereabout  is  called  Cyropolis,  and  that  part 
which  bordereth  upon  the  Medes  Elymais.  There  is  a  Place 
called  Megala,  in  the  ascent  of  a  steep  Mountain,  through  a 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  139 

narrow  Passage  by  Steps  to  Persepolis,  the  Head  of  the 
Kingdom,  and  destroyed  by  Alexander.  Moreover,  in  the 
Frontiers  standeth  Laodicea,  built  by  King  Antiochus. 
From  thence  towards  the  East  the  Magi  hold  the  Castle  of 
Passagardae,  wherein  is  the  Tomb  of  Cyrus.  Also  the  Town 
Ecbatana  belonging  to  the  Magi,  which  Darius  the  King 
caused  to  be  translated  to  the  Mountains.1  Between  the 
Parthians  and  the  Ariani  are  extended  the  Paraeraceni. 
These  Nations  and  the  River  Euphrates  serve  to  limit  the 
lower  Realms.  Now  are  we  to  discourse  of  the  Parts 
remaining  of  Mesopotamia  ;  setting  aside  one  point  thereof, 
and  the  People  of  Arabia,  whereof  we  spoke  in  the  former 
Book.  All  Mesopotamia  belonged  to  the  Assyrians,  dis- 
persed in  Villages,  except  Babylon  and  Ninus.  The  Mace- 
donians collected  it  into  Cities  on  account  of  the  goodness  of 
their  Soil.  Besides  the  above-named  Towns,  it  hath  Seleucia, 
Laodicea,  and  Artemita  :  likewise  within  the  Nation  of  the 
Arabians  named  Aroei  and  Mardani,  Antiochia :  and  that 
which,  being  founded  by  Nicanor,  Governor  of  Mesopotamia, 
is  called  Arabis.  Upon  these  join  the  Arabians,  but  within 
the  Country  are  the  Eldamarii.  Above  them  is  the  Town 
Bura,  situated  upon  the  River  Pelloconta ;  beyond  which  are 
the  Salmani  and  Masei,  Arabians.  Then  there  join  to  the 
Gordisei  the  Aloni,  by  whom  the  River  Zerbis  passeth,  and  so 
is  discharged  into  the  Tigris.  The  Azones  and  Silices,  Moun- 
taineers, together  with  the  Orentes ;  on  the  side  of  whom  the 
Town  Gaugamela.  Also  Sue  among  the  Rocks ;  above  are 
the  Sylici  and  Classitae,  through  whom  the  Lycus  runneth 
out  of  Armenia.  Toward  the  South-east,  Absittis,  and  the 
Town  Azochis.  Presently  in  the  Plains  the  Towns  Diospage, 
Polytelia,  Stratonicea,  and  Anthemus.  Nicephorion,  as  we 
have  already  said,  is  seated  near  the  River  Euphrates,  where 
Alexander  caused  it  to  be  founded,  for  the  convenient  Situ- 
ation of  the  Place.  Of  the  City  Apamia  we  have  before 

1  Pliny's  statement  as  to  the  building  of  the  palace,  and  indeed  the 
whole  city  of  Shushan,  by  Darius  Hystaspes,  is  contradicted  by  all  Greek 
and  Oriental  writers,  who  represent  the  city  as  extremely  ancient — vide 
"Home."—  Wem.  Club. 


• 

140  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  VI. 

spoken  in  the  Description  of  Zeugma  :  from  which  they  that 
go  eastward  meet  with  a  strong  fortified  Town,  formerly 
in  Compass  65  Stadia,  and  called  the  Royal  Palace  of  their 
Satraps,  to  which  they  hrought  Tributes ;  but  now  it  is 
formed  into  a  Castle.  But  there  continue  still  as  they 
were,  Hebata  and  Oruros,  unto  which,  by  the  Conduct  of 
Pompey  the  Great,  the  Bounds  of  the  Roman  Empire  were 
extended ;  and  it  is  from  Zeugma  250  Miles.  Some  Writers 
say  that  the  Euphrates  was  divided  by  a  Governor  of  Meso- 
potamia, and  one  Arm  of  it  brought  to  Gobaris  ;  which  was 
done  lest  the  River  should  endanger  the  City  of  Babylon. 
They  affirm,  moreover,  that  the  Assyrians  generally  called  it 
Armalchar,1  which  signifieth  a  Royal  River.  On  the  Place 
where  it  is  turned  there  stood  Agrani,  one  of  the  greatest 
Towns  of  that  Region,  which  the  Persians  utterly  destroyed. 
Babylon,2  the  Capital  of  the  Chaldean  Nations,  for  a  long- 
time possessed  an  illustrious  Name  through  all  the  World  :  in 
regard  of  which  the  other  Part  of  Mesopotamia  and  Assyria 
was  named  Babylonia  :  and  embracing  60  Miles.  The  Walls 
were  200  Feet  in  Height,  and  50  broad  :  reckoning  to  every 
Foot  three  Fingers'  Breadth  more  than  our  ordinary  Mea- 
sure. Through  the  midst  passeth  the  River  Euphrates :  with 
a  wonderful  Work,  on  both  Sides.  To  this  Day  the  Temple 


1  Or  rather,  Nahal  Nalca,  L  e.  the  King's  River. 

2  Herodotus,  in  the  first  book  of  his  history,  describes  this  most 
splendid  of  cities ;  the  walls  of  which  were  classed  among  the  wonders  of 
the  world.    But  contrary  to  the  report  by  which  Pliny  professes  to  be 
guided,  this  ancient  Greek  author  represents  them  to  have  been  built  in 
the  form  of  a  square ;  and  although  the  lapse  of  time  may  have  caused  a 
variety  of  changes  to  take  place  in  other  particulars  regarding  this  city, 
we  can  scarcely  suppose  that  these  changes  can  have  extended  to  the 
dimensions  or  situation  of  its  stupendous  walls ;  by  which  alone  its  form 
would  be  influenced.     It  is  surprising  that  among  the  authors  which 
Pliny  had  consulted  in  drawing  up  his  account  of  these  regions,  he  makes 
no  mention  of  this  illustrious  Greek  writer,  though  he  quotes  him  in 
other  places.     Philostratus,  Solinus,  Diodorus,    Quintus  Curtius,  and 
more  especially  the  Bible,  may  be  consulted  for  a  variety  of  curious  par- 
ticulars regarding  this  eminent  and   powerful  city,  whose  walls  and 
splendour  are  now  buried  in  a  desert. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  141 

of  Jupiter  Belus  continueth  there  entire.  He  was  the  first 
Discoverer  of  the  Science  of  the  Stars.  Nevertheless  it  is 
reduced  to  a  Desert,  having  been  exhausted  by  Seleucia, 
which  standeth  near  it :  and  which  was  for  that  very  purpose 
built  by  Nicator  within  the  Fortieth  Stone,  at  the  Place  of 
meeting  of  the  New  Channel  of  Euphrates  with  the  Tigris : 
nevertheless  it  is  named  Babylonia,  a  free  State  at  this  Day, 
of  independent  Jurisdiction;  but  they  live  after  the  Man- 
ners of  the  Macedonians.  And  by  report  there  are  600,000 
common  Citizens.  The  Position  of  the  Walls,  by  report,  is 
in  the  form  of  an  Eagle  spreading  out  her  Wings  :  and  the 
Soil  is  the  most  Fertile  in  all  the  East.  The  Parthians, 
again,  to  exhaust  this  City,  built  Ctesiphon  within  the  Third 
Stone  from  it,  in  Chalonitis ;  which  now  is  the  Head 
of  the  Kingdom.  But  when  it  advanced  nothing,  King 
Vologesus  founded  another  Town  near  it,  called  Vologeso 
Certa.  There  are  also  in  Mesopotamia  the  Cities  Hyp- 
parenum,  a  City  likewise  of  the  Chaldaeans,  and  ennobled 
for  Learning,  and,  as  well  as  Babylon,  situated  near  the 
River  Narraga,  which  gave  the  Name  to  the  City.  The 
Persians  destroyed  the  Walls  of  this  Hypparenum.  There  are 
also  in  this  Tract  the  Orcheni,  toward  the  south  ;  and  a  Third 
Sect  of  the  Chaldaeans.  Beyond  this  Region  are  the  Notitae, 
Orthophantae,  and  Graeciochantae.  Nearchus  and  Onesi- 
critus  report,  That  from  the  Persian  Sea  to  Babylon,  by  the 
Voyage  up  the  Euphrates,  is  412  Miles.  But  later  Writers 
count  from  Seleucia  490  Miles.  Juba  writeth,  that  from 
Babylon  to  Charax  is  175  Miles.  Some  affirm  that  beyond 
Babylon  the  River  Euphrates  floweth  in  one  Channel  87 
Miles,  before  it  is  divided  to  water  the  Country  :  its  entire 
Course  being  1200  Miles.  This  variety  in  Authors  is  the  cause 
of  the  Uncertainty  of  the  Measure,  considering  that  even  the 
very  Persians  agree  not  about  the  Dimensions  of  their 
Schceni  and  Parasangae,  but  have  different  Measures  of  them. 
Where  the  River  Euphrates  ceaseth  to  defend  by  its  own 
Channel,  at  the  portion  approaching  the  Border  of  Charax, 
there  is  great  danger  of  the  Robbers  called  Attalae,  a  Nation 
of  the  Arabians.  Beyond  them  are  the  Scenitae.  The  Arabian 


142  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

Nomades  occupy  the  circuit  of  the  Euphrates,  as  far  as  to  the 
Deserts  of  Syria :  from  which  place  we  said  that  it  turned 
into  the  South,  abandoning  the  Deserts  of  Palmyra.1  From 
the  beginning  of  Mesopotamia  to  Seleucia,  by  sailing  on  the 
Euphrates,  is  1125  Miles ;  and  from  the  Red  Sea,  if  you  go 
by  the  Tigris,  320  Miles  ;  from  Zeugma  527  Miles  ;  and  to 
Zeugma  from  Seleucia  in  Syria,  upon  the  Coast  of  our  Sea, 
is  175  Miles.  This  is  the  Breadth  there  of  the  Land  between 
the  two  Seas.  The  Kingdoms  of  Parthia  contain  944  Miles. 
Finally,  there  is  a  Town  of  Mesopotamia  on  the  Bank  of  the 
Tigris,  near  where  the  Rivers  meet,  which  they  call  Digba. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 
The  River  Tigris. 

IT  is  also  convenient  to  say  somewhat  of  the  River  Tigris 
itself.  It  beginneth  in  the  Region  of  Armenia  the  Greater, 
issuing  out  of  a  great  Source  in  the  Plain.  The  place  beareth 
the  Name  of  Elongosine.  The  River  itself,  so  long  as  it  run- 
neth slowly,  is  named  Diglito ;  but  when  it  beginneth  to  be 
rapid,  it  is  called  Tigris,  which  in  the  Median  language  sig- 
nifieth  a  Dart.  It  runneth  into  the  Lake  Arethusa,  which 
beareth  up  all  that  is  cast  into  it;  and  the  Vapours  that  arise 
out  of  it  carry  Clouds  of  Nitre.  In  this  Lake  there  is  but 
one  kind  of  Fish,  and  that  entereth  not  into  the  Channel  of 
the  Tigris  as  it  passeth  through ;  as  likewise  the  Fishes  of 
the  Tigris  do  not  swim  out  into  the  Water  of  the  Lake.  In 
its  Course  and  Colour  it  is  unlike  the  other :  and  when  it  is 
past  the  Lake  and  meeteth  the  Mountain  Taurus,  it  loseth 
itself  in  a  Cave,  and  so  runneth  under,  until  on  the  other 


1  This  is  Tadmor  in  the  wilderness,  built  by  Solomon,  king  of  Israel, 
and  further  illustrious  from  being  the  city  where  the  critic  Longinus  was 
the  prime  minister  of  the  Queen  Zenobia.  It  is  now  truly  in  a  wilder- 
ness, but  is  still  celebrated  for  its  remains  of  antiquity :  chiefly  of  Greek 
construction.  There  are  many  streams  coming  down  from  the  adjacent 
mountains,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  if  a  settled  tribe  fixed 
themselves  there,  the  tract  would  become  as  fine  an  oasis  as  erer. — 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI .]  History  of  Nature.  \  43 

Side  it  breaketh  forth  again  in  a  Place  which  is  called  Zoro- 
anda.  That  it  is  the  same  River  is  evident  by  this,  that  it 
carrieth  through  whatever  was  cast  into  it.  After  this  second 
Spring,  it  runneth  through  another  Lake,  named  Thospites, 
and  again  taketh  its  Way  under  the  Earth  through  Gutters, 
and  25  Miles  beyond  it  is  returned  about  Nymphaeum. 
Claudius  Caesar  reporteth,  that  in  the  Country  Arrhene,  it 
runneth  so  near  to  the  River  Arsanias,  that  when  they  both 
swell  they  join,  but  without  mingling  their  Water;  for  Arsa- 
nias, being  the  lighter,  floateth  over  the  other,  for  almost  the 
Space  of  four  Miles ;  but  soon  after  they  part  asunder,  and  it 
turneth  its  Course  toward  the  River  Euphrates,  into  which 
it  entereth.  But  Tigris  receiving  the  famous  Rivers  out  of 
Armenia  :  Parthenis,  Agnice,  and  Pharion,  so  dividing  the 
Arabians,  Aroeans,  and  the  Adiabeni,  and  by  this  means 
making,  as  we  have  said,  Mesopotamia  to  be  an  Island,  after 
it  hath  passed  by  and  viewed  the  Mountains  of  the  Gordiaei, 
near  Apamia,  a  Town  of  Mesene  on  this  side  Seleucia,  sur- 
named  Babylonia,  125  Miles.  Dividing  itself  into  two  Chan- 
nels, with  the  one  it  runneth  southward  to  Seleucia,  watering 
the  Country  of  Mesene  ;  and  with  the  other  it  windeth  to 
the  north,  on  the  back  of  the  said  Mesene,  and  cutteth 
through  the  Plains  of  the  Cauchians.  When  these  two 
Branches  are  united  again,  it  is  called  Pasitigris.  After  this 
it  receiveth  out  of  Media  the  Coaspes  ;  and  so  passing  be- 
tween Seleucia  and  Ctesiphon,  as  we  have  said,  it  poureth 
itself  into  the  Lakes  of  Chaldsea,  which  it  replenisheth  with 
Water  for  the  Compass  of  threescore  and  ten  Miles  :  which 
done,  it  issueth  forth,  gushing  out  with  a  very  great  Stream, 
and  on  the  right  of  the  Town  Charax  is  discharged  into  the 
Persian  Sea,  by  a  Mouth  ten  Miles  over.  Between  the 
Mouths  of  these  two  Rivers  were  25  Miles,  or,  as  some  say, 
seven  :  and  both  of  them  were  navigable.  But  the  Orcheni 
and  other  neighbouring  Inhabitants  long  since  turned  the 
Course  of  Euphrates  aside  to  water  their  Fields,  insomuch 
that  it  is  conveyed  into  the  Sea,  only  through  the  Tigris. 
The  next  Country  bordering  upon  the  Tigris  is  called  Para- 
potamia  :  in  it  is  Mesene,  of  which  we  have  spoken.  Its 


144  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  VI. 

Town  is  Dibitach.  Chalonitis  is  joined  with  Ctesiphon,  noble 
not  only  with  Date-trees,  but  also  with  Olive,  Apple,  and 
Pear-trees,  and  generally  with  all  sorts  of  Fruit.  Unto  this 
Country  extendeth  the  Mountain  Zagrus,  coming  out  of  Ar- 
menia, between  the  Medes  and  Adiabeni,  above  Paraetacene 
and  Persis.  Chalonitis  is  distant  from  Persis  480  Miles. 
Some  write,  that  by  the  nearest  Way  it  is  so  much  from  the 
Caspian  Sea  to  Assyria.  Between  these  Nations  and  Mesene 
lieth  Sittacene,  the  same  that  is  called  Arbelitis  and  Pales- 
tine. The  Towns  therein  are  Sittace  of  the  Graecians,  toward 
the  east,  and  Sabata ;  but  on  the  West,  Antiochia,  between 
two  Rivers,  Tigris  and  Tornadotus.  Also  Apamia,  which 
Antiochus  so  called  after  his  Mother's  Name.  This  City 
is  environed  with  the  River  Tigris,  and  divided  by  the  River 
Archous.  Somewhat  lower  is  Susiane,  wherein  (is)  Susa, 
the  ancient  Region  of  the  Persians,  founded  by  Darius,  the 
Son  of  Hystaspes ;  and  from  Seleucia  Babylonia,  it  is  distant 
450  Miles ;  and  as  much  from  Ecbatana  of  the  Medes, 
through  the  Mountain  Charbanus.  Upon  that  Channel  of 
the  Tigris  which  taketh  its  Course  northward,  standeth  the 
Town  Babytace  :  and  from  Susa  it  is  135  Miles.  The  People 
of  this  Country  are  the  only  Men  in  the  World  that  hate 
Gold :  and  they  bury  it,  that  it  may  serve  for  no  use  to  any 
one.  To  the  Susiani  eastward  are  joined  the  Cossiaei  Rob- 
bers, and  forty  Nations  of  the  Mizsei,  free  and  wild.  Above 
these  lie  the  Parthusi,  Mardi,  Saitae,  and  Hyi,  who  are 
spread  abroad  above  Elemais,  which  joineth  to  the  maritime 
Coasts  of  Persis,  as  is  above  said.  Susa  is  from  the  Persian 
Sea  250  Miles.  On  that  Side  where  the  Fleet  of  Alexander 
came  up  the  Pasitigris,  there  standeth  a  Village  upon  the 
Lake  Chaldais,  named  Aphle :  from  which  to  Susa  is  65| 
Miles  by  Water.  The  next  that  border  upon  the  Susiani 
eastward  are  the  Cossaei  ;  and  above  the  Cossaei  northward 
lieth  Mesobatene,  under  the  Mountain  Cambiladus,  which  is 
a  Branch  of  the  Caucasus :  and  from  thence  is  the  most  easy 
Passage  to  the  Bactri.  The  River  Eulaeus  maketh  a  Parti- 
tion between  Elimais  and  Susiane.  This  River  riseth  in  the 
Country  of  the  Medi,  and  in  the  midst  of  its  Course  loseth 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  145 

itself  in  the  Ground  ;  but  rising  again,  and  running  through 
Mesobatene,  it  passeth  round  the  Castle  of  the  Susi  and  the 
Temple   of  Diana,  the  most  august  Temple  among  those 
Nations  :   and   the  very  River  itself  is   ceremoniously  re- 
garded :  so  that  the  Kings  drink  of  no  other,  and  therefore 
they  carry  it  to  a  great  distance.     It  receiveth  the  River 
Hedypnus,  which  corneth  along  by  the  Asylum  of  the  Per- 
sians, and  one  from  among  the  Susiani.    A  Town  there  is  near 
it,  called  Magoa,  15  Miles  from  Charax.  Some  place  this  Town 
in  the  utmost  Borders  of  Susiana,  close  to  the  Deserts.     Be- 
neath Eulaeus  lieth  Elymais,  joining  to  Persis  on  the  Sea- 
coast  ;  it  is  240  Miles  from  the  River  Oroates  to  Charax.  The 
Towns  in  it  are  Seleucia  and  Sositare,  situated  upon  the 
Mountain  Casyrus.     The  Coast  which  lieth  before  it  is,  as 
we  have  said  before,  no  less  dangerous  than  the  Lesser  Syrtes, 
because  of  the  Mud  and  Slime  which  the  Rivers  Brixia  and 
Ortacea  bring  down;  and  Elimais  itself  is  so    moist   that 
there  is  no  Way  to  Persis  but  by  taking  a  Circuit  about 
it.     It  is  also  much  infested  with  Serpents,  which   those 
Rivers  bring  down :  but  that  part  of  it  is  the  least  passable 
which  they  call  Characene,  from  the  Town  (Charax),  which 
limiteth  the  Kingdoms  of  Arabia  :  of  which  we  will  speak 
by  and  by,  after  we  have  set  down  the  Opinion  ofM.Agrippa; 
for  he  hath  written,  that  Media,  Parthia,  and  Persis,  are 
bounded  on  the  East  by  the  Indus ;  on  the  West,  by  the 
Tigris  ;  on  the  North,  by  the  Taurus  and  Caucasus ;  and  on 
the  South,  by  the  Red  Sea :  also,  that  they  extend  in  Length 
1320  Miles,  and  in  Breadth  840.     Moreover,  that  Mesopo- 
tamia by  itself  is  enclosed  eastward  by  the  Tigris,  westward  by 
the  Euphrates ;  on  the  North  by  the  Taurus,  and  on  the  South 
by  the  Persian  Sea;  being  in  Length  800  Miles,  and  in 
Breadth  360.     Charax  is  the  inmost  Town  of  the  Persian 
Gulf,  from  which  Arabia,  called  Eudaemon  (happy)  runneth 
forth  in  Length;  it  is  situated  upon  a  Mount  artificially 
raised  between  the  Confluence  of  Tigris  on  the  right  Hand, 
and  Eulseus  on  the  left :  with  an  Expansion  of  three  Miles. 
It  was  first  founded  by  Alexander  the  Great ;  who,  having 
drawn  Colonists  out  of  the  royal  City  Durine  (which  then 

VOL.  II.  L 


146  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

was  ruined),  and  leaving  there  behind  him  those  Soldiers 
which  were  not  fit  for  service,  ordained  that  this  Town  should 
be  called  Alexandria ;  and  the  District  about  it,  Pellseum, 
from  his  native  Country  :  and  he  peopled  it  only  with  Mace- 
donians. This  Town  was  destroyed  by  the  Rivers.  After- 
wards, Antiochus,  the  fifth  of  the  Kings,  rebuilt  it,  and 
named  it  from  himself.  But  when  it  was  injured  again, 
Spasines,  Son  of  Sogdonacus,  King  of  the  adjoining  Arabians, 
and  not  (as  Juba  reporteth)  a  Lord  (Satrap)  under  Antiochus, 
restored  it  by  Moles  opposite  each  other,  and  called  it  after 
his  own  Name.  He  thus  fortified  the  Site  of  it  three  Miles  in 
Length  and  little  less  in  Breadth.  At  the  beginning  it  stood 
upon  the  Sea-coast,  being  from  the  Water-side  ten  Stadia ; 
and  even  from  thence  it  hath  false  Galleries :  but  by  the 
Report  of  Juba,  in  his  Time,  50  Miles.  At  this  Day  the 
Arabian  Ambassadors,  and  also  our  Merchants  that  come  from 
thence,  affirm  it  is  from  the  Sea-shore  125  Miles :  so  that  it 
cannot  be  found  in  any  Place  that  the  Earth  hath  gained 
more,  or  in  so  short  a  Time  by  means  of  the  Mud  brought 
down  by  Rivers.  And  it  is  the  more  wonderful,  that  the 
Tide  which  riseth  far  beyond  this  Town  doth  not  carry  it 
away  again.  In  this  very  Town  I  am  not  ignorant  that 
Dionysius,  the  latest  of  our  modern  Geographers,  was  born  : 
whom  Divus  Augustus  sent  before  into  the  East  to  write  a 
Description  of  whatever  he  found,  for  the  Information  of  his 
elder  Son,  who  was  about  to  proceed  into  Armenia,  in  an 
Expedition  against  the  Parthians  and  Arabians.  It  has  not 
escaped  me,  nor  is  it  forgotten,  that  in  my  first  Entrance  into 
this  Work,  I  professed  to  follow  those  who  had  written  of 
their  own  Countries,  as  being  the  most  diligent  in  that  be- 
half. Nevertheless,  in  this  Place  I  choose  rather  to  follow 
the  Roman  Officers  that  have  warred  there,  and  King  Juba, 
in  Books  written  to  C.  Ccesar  (Caligula)  concerning  the 
aame  Arabian  Expedition. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  147 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Arabia,  Nomades,  Nalatcei,  and  Omani:  the  Islands  Tylos 
and  Ogyris. 

ARABIA  cometh  behind  none  of  the  Nations  for  its  great 
Length  and  Extent ;  for  it  beginneth  at  the  Descent  of  the 
Mountain  Amanus,  overagainst  Cilicia  and  Comagen£,  as  we 
have  before  said ;  where  it  is  peopled  with  many  Nations  of 
them,  brought  by  Tigranes  the  Great  to  inhabit  that  Quarter; 
and  in  old  Time  it  descended  naturally  as  far  as  to  our  Sea 
and  the  Egyptian  Coast,  as  we  have  shewn :  yea,  and  it 
extendeth  into  the  midland  Parts  of  Syria  to  the  Mountain 
Libanus,  where  the  Hills  reach  to  the  very  Clouds  :  to 
which  are  joined  the  Ramasi ;  then  the  Taranei,  and  after 
them  the  Patami.  The  Peninsula  itself  of  Arabia  runneth 
out  between  two  Seas,  the  Red  and  the  Persian,  by  a 
certain  Workmanship  of  Nature,  resembling  Italy  in  Form 
and  Magnitude,  with  its  Sea-coasts  also  in  the  manner  of 
Italy.  It  also  regardeth  the  same  Quarter  of  the  Heaven 
without  any  Difference.  This  Tract,  for  the  rich  Seat  it 
hath,  is  named  Felix  (happy).  The  Nations  therein  dwell- 
ing, from  our  Sea  to  the  Deserts  of  Palmyra,  we  have  treated 
of  already,  therefore  we  pass  them  by.  The  Nomades,  and 
those  Robbers  that  trouble  the  Chaldseans,  the  People 
called  Scenitse,  border  on  it  as  we  have  before  said ;  they  also 
are  Wanderers,  but  are  so  called  from  their  Tabernacles, 
which  they  make  of  Hair-cloths,  and  they  encamp  under 
them  as  they  please.  Being  past  them  you  find  the  Nabatsei, 
who  inhabit  a  Town  named  Petra,  in  the  Valley,  little  less 
than  two  Miles  large ;  environed  with  very  steep  Mountains, 
and  having  a  River  running  through  the  midst  of  it.  It 
is  distant  from  Gaza  (a  Town  of  our  Coast)  600  Miles ;  and 
from  the  Persian  Gulf,  122.  And  here  meet  both  the  High- 
ways, that  is,  the  one  which  Passengers  travel  to  Palmyra  in 
Syria,  and  the  other  wherein  they  come  from  Gaza.  Beyond 
Petra  the  Omani  inhabit  as  far  as  to  Carax,  in  the  celebrated 
Towns  built  by  Semiramis,  namely,  Abesamis  and  Soractia. 
But  now  all  is  a  Wilderness,  Then  come  you  to  a  Town 


148  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

named  Forath,  situated  upon  the  Bank  of  the  Pasitigris,  and 
subject  to  the  King  of  the  Caraceni :  to  which  they  resort 
from  Petra;  and  from  thence  to  Charax  they  sail  with  a 
favourable  Tide  for  the  Space  of  twelve  Miles.  But  they 
that  come  by  Water  out  of  the  Parthian  Kingdom,  meet  with 
a  Village  called  Teredon,  below  the  Place  where  Euphrates 
and  Tigris  meet.  The  Chaldaeans  inhabit  the  left  Bank  of 
the  River,  and  the  Nomades  called  Scenitse,  the  right.  Some 
affirm,  that  as  you  sail  on  the  Tigris,  you  pass  by  two  other 
Towns,  distant  from  each  other :  the  one  called  formerly 
Barbatia,  and  afterwards  Thumata,  which  our  Merchants 
report  to  be  ten  Days'  Sail  from  Petra,  and  to  be  subject  to 
the  King  of  the  Characeni :  and  the  other  named  Apamia, 
situated  in  the  Place  where  the  Overflowing  of  Euphrates 
joineth  with  the  Tigris ;  and  therefore  they  prevent  the  In- 
vasion of  the  Parthians,  by  breaking  up  the  Banks  and  so 
procure  an  Inundation  of  the  Waters.  Now  being  past  Cha- 
rax, we  will  discourse  of  the  Coast  first  explored  by  Epi- 
phanes.  The  Place  where  the  Mouth  of  the  Euphrates  was. 
A  River  of  Salt  Water  ;  the  Promontory  Chaldone,  where  the 
Sea  is  more  like  a  Whirlpool  than  a  Sea,  for  50  Miles.  The 
River  Achana  ;  Deserts  for  100  Miles,  until  you  come  to  the 
Island  Ichara  :  the  Bay  Capeus,  which  the  Gaulopes  and 
Chateni  inhabit :  the  Bay  Gerraicus,  and  the  Town  Gerra, 
five  Miles  in  extent ;  and  fortified  with  Towers  made  of  square 
Masses  of  Salt.  Fifty  Miles  from  the  Sea-side  is  the  Region 
Attene :  and  overagainst  it  the  Island  Tylos,  as  many  Miles 
from  the  Shore,  with  a  Town  bearing  the  Name  of  the  Island, 
much  celebrated  for  Abundance  of  Pearls  :  and  not  far  from 
it  is  another  somewhat  less,  twelve  Miles  from  the  Cape  of 
the  aforesaid  Tylos.  Beyond  these  there  are  discovered  by 
Report  some  great  Islands ;  but  they  have  not  been  visited 
by  our  Merchants.  This  last  Island  is  112  Miles  and  a  half 
in  Circuit,  and  is  far  from  Persis ;  and  Access  to  it  is  only 
by  one  narrow  Channel.  The  Island  Asgilia  ;  the  Nations 
Nocheti,  Zurachi,  Borgodi,  Catarsei,  and  Nomades :  the 
River  Cynos.  Beyond  that,  Juba  saith,  there  is  no  more 
Navigation  discovered  on  that  Side,  by  reason  of  the  Rocks. 
He  hath  made  no  mention  of  the  Town  Batrasabe  of  the 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  1 49 

Omani,  nor  of  Omana,  which  former  Geographers  have 
held  to  be  a  Harbour  of  great  Importance  in  Carmania. 
Also,  Omne  and  Athanae,  which  our  Merchants  report  to  be 
at  this  Day  two  very  famous  Towns,  frequented  from  the 
Persian  Gulf.  Beyond  the  River  Canis,  as  King  Juba 
writeth,  there  is  a  Hill  which  seemeth  all  scorched.  The 
Nations  of  the  Epimaranitae :  and  soon  after  the  Ichthyo- 
phagi  :  a  desert  Island  ;  the  Nations  Bathymi.  The  Moun- 
tains Eblitaei ;  the  Island  Omcenus  ;  the  Port  Machorbae,  the 
Islands  Etaxalos,  Onchobrice,  the  Nation  Chadaei.  Many 
Islands  without  a  Name  :  but  of  Importance,  Isura,  Rhinnea  ; 
and  another  very  near,  wherein  are  Pillars  of  Stone  inscribed 
with  unknown  Characters.  The  Port  of  Goboea;  and  the 
desert  Islands  Bragae.  The  Nation  of  the  Thaludsei :  the 
Region  Dabanegoris :  the  Mountain  Orsa,  with  a  Port : 
the  Bay  Duatus,  and  many  Islands.  The  Mountain  Tricory- 
phus :  the  Region  Cardalena,  the  Islands  Solanidae,  Capina. 
Also  the  Islands  of  the  Ichthyophagi :  and  after  them  the 
Glari.  The  Shore  called  Hamruaeum,  where  are  Gold  Mines. 
The  Region  Canauna.  The  Nations  Apitami  and  Gasani. 
The  Island  Deuadae;  the  Fountain  Goralus;  theGarpheti; 
the  Islands  Aleu  and  Amnamethu.  The  Nation  called 
Darrae,  the  Islands  Chelonitis,  and  many  of  the  Ichthyo- 
phagi. The  Isle  Eodanda,  which  is  Desert,  and  Basage  ; 
many  others  of  the  Sabaei.  The  Rivers  Thamar  and  Amnon  ; 
the  Islands  Dolicae ;  the  Fountains  Daulotes  and  Dora ;  the 
Islands,  Pteros,  Labanis,  Coboris,  Sambracate,  with  a  Town 
so  named  on  the  Continent.  On  the  South  side  are  many 
Islands,  but  the  greatest  of  them  is  Camari.  The  River 
Mysecros ;  the  Port  Leupas,  and  the  Sabaeans,  called  Sce- 
nitae.  Many  other  Islands  ;  their  Chief  Town  of  Merchandise 
is  Acila,  where  the  Merchants  embark  for  their  Voyage  to 
India.  The  Region  Amithoscuta,  and  Damnia.  The  Mizi, 
the  Greater  and  Less  :  the  Drimati  and  Macae.  The  Promon- 
tory of  these  People  is  overagainst  Carmania,  and  distant 
from  it  50  Miles.  A  wonderful  thing  is  reported  there  :  that 
Numenius,  Chief  Commander  under  King  Antiochus,  over 
Mesena,  conquered  the  Navy  of  the  Persians  in  a  Sea-fight, 


150  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

and  on  the  same  Day,  with  the  return  of  the  Tide,  sub- 
dued their  Horsemen :  in  memorial  of  which  he  erected  in 
the  same  Place  two  Trophies,  one  in  honour  of  Jupiter, 
and  the  other  of  Neptune.  Far  out  at  Sea  there  lieth  an 
Island  called  Ogyris,  distant  from  the  Continent  125  Miles, 
and  containing  in  Circuit  112;  much  renowned  for  the 
Sepulchre  of  King  Erythra,  who  was  buried  there.  Another 
there  is  no  less  famous,  called  Dioscoridu,  in  the  Sea  Aza- 
nium ;  and  it  is  from  Syagrum,  the  extremest  Cape,  280 
Miles.  There  remain  yet  not  spoken  of,  the  Autarides, 
toward  the  South,  in  the  Mountains,  which  continue  for 
seven  Days'  journey :  the  Nations  Larendani,  Catabani,  and 
Gebanitse,  who  have  many  Towns,  but  the  greatest  are  Nagia 
and  Tarnna,  with  65  Temples  within  it,  which  is  a  mark  how 
great  it  is.  A  Promontory,  from  which  to  the  Continent  of 
the  Trogloditse  is  50  Miles.  The  Toani,  Acchitee,  Chatra- 
motitse,  Tomabei,  Antidalei,  Lexianse,  Agrei,  Cerbani ;  and 
Sabaei,  of  all  the  Arabians  most  famous  for  their  Frankin- 
cense ;  their  Nations  reaching  from  Sea  to  Sea.  Their  Towns 
on  the  Coast  of  the  Red  Sea  are  Marane,  Marma,  Corolla, 
and  Sabatra ;  within-land  are  the  Towns  Nascus,  Cardava, 
Carnus,  and  Tomala,  whence  they  convey  their  Commodities 
of  Aromatics.  One  part  of  them  are  the  Atramitse,  whose 
Capital  City,  Sobotale,  had  within  its  Walls  Sixty  Temples. 
But  the  Royal  City  of  the  whole  is  Nariaba,  situated  on  a 
Gulf  that  reacheth  into  the  Land  ninety-four  Miles,  full  of 
Islands,  having  Odoriferous  Trees.  Upon  the  Atramitse, 
within  the  Mainland,  are  joined  the  Minaei :  but  the  Ela- 
mitae  inhabit  the  Sea  (Coast),  where  standeth  a  City  also  called 
Elamitum.  To  them  are  joined  the  Cagulatae ;  and  their 
Town  is  Siby,  which  the  Greeks  name  A  pate.  Then  the 
Arsicodani,  and  Vadei,  with  a  great  Town  :  and  the  Barasei : 
Lichenia,  and  the  Island  Sygaros,  which  Dogs  will  not  enter ; 
and  if  any  be  put  there,  they  wander  about  the  Shore  until 
they  die.  A  Deep  Bay,  in  which  are  the  Leanitae,  who  gave 
name  to  it.  Their  Royal  City  is  Agra :  but  Leana,  or,  as 
others  have  it,  ^lana,  is  in  the  Bay.  And  hence  our 
Writers  have  called  that  Bay  jElaniticum,  which  others 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  151 

have  termed  JSlenaticum  ;  Artemidorus,  Aleniticum  ;  and 
Juba,  Lseniticum.  Arabia  is  reported  to  take  in  Circuit  from 
Charax  to  Leana,  4870  Miles ;  but  Juba  thinketh  it  some- 
what less  than  4000.  It  is  widest  in  the  North  Parts,  be- 
tween the  Towns  Herons  and  Charace.  Now  it  remaineth 
that  we  speak  of  other  Parts  within  the  Midland  thereof. 
The  Ancients  joined  the  Nabataei  to  the  Thimanei ;  but  at 
this  Day  there  are  the  Tavern,  Suelleni,  and  Sarraceni :  the 
Town  is  Arra,  wherein  all  Business  is  assembled.  The  He- 
rnuatse  and  Analitae ;  the  Towns  Domada  and  Erag£ ;  the 
Thamusians,  with  their  Town  Badanatha;  the  Carrei,  and 
their  Town  Chariati ;  the  Achoali,  and  their  Town  Phoda. 
Furthermore,  the  Minaei,  descended,  as  some  think,  from 
Minos,  King  of  Crete  ;  whose  Town  Charmaei  is  14  Miles  (in 
Compass) ;  Mariaba,  Baramalacum,  a  Town  not  to  be  de- 
spised; likewise  Carnon,  and  the  Rhamei,  who  are  thought 
to  spring  from  Rhadamanthus,  the  Brother  of  Minos.  The 
Homeritae,  with  the  Town  Massala ;  the  Hamirci,  Gedra- 
nitae,  Anaprae,  Ilisanitae,  Bochilitae,  Sammei,  and  Amathei ; 
with  the  Towns,  Nessa  and  Cennesseri.  The  Zamareni,  with 
the  Towns  Saiace,  Scantate,  and  Bacascani ;  the  Town  Rhi- 
phearma,  which  in  the  Arabian  Tongue  signifieth  Barley ; 
also  the  Autei,  Raui,  Gyrei,  and  Marhatsei ;  the  Helmodones, 
with  the  Town  Ebode ;  the  Agacturi  in  the  Mountains,  hav- 
ing a  Town  20  Miles  in  Circuit,  wherein  is  a  Fountain  called 
Emischabales,  which  signifies  the  Camel's  Town  ;  Ampelone, 
a  Colony  of  the  Milesii ;  the  Town  Actrida ;  the  Calingii, 
whose  Town  is  named  Mariaba,  which  signifies  Lords  of  all. 
Towns  Pallon  and  Murannimal,  near  a  River,  by  which  they 
think  that  the  Euphrates  springeth  forth.  The  Nations 
Agrei  and  Ammonii ;  the  Town  Athenas  ;  the  Caurarani, 
which  signifieth  very  rich  in  Cattle.  The  Caranitae,  Caesani, 
and  Choani.  There  were  also  Towns  in  Arabia,  held  by 
Greeks,  as  Arethusa,  Larissa,  and  Chalcis,  which  were 
destroyed  in  various  Wars.  The  only  Roman  until  this  day 
that  carried  our  Arms  into  those  Parts  was  jElius  Gallus,  of 
the  Knightly  Order.  For  Gains  Ccesar,  the  Son  of  Augustus, 
did  but  look  only  into  Arabia ;  but  Gallus  destroyed  Towns, 
not  named  by  Authors  that  wrote  before :  Egra,  Annestum, 


152  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

Esca,  Magusum,  Tammacum,  Labecia,  and  the  above-named 
Marieba,  in  Circuit  Six  Miles :  likewise  Caripeta,  the  furthest 
that  he  went  to.  The  other  matters  he  made  report  of  were, 
that  the  Nomades  live  on  Milk  and  Wild  Animals  ;  the  rest 
express  Wine,  as  the  Indians  do,  out  of  Dates ;  and  Oil  of 
Sesama.  That  the  Homerites  are  the  most  Populous ;  the 
Minasi  have  Fruitful  Fields,  full  of  Palm-trees  and  Vine- 
yards, but  their  Riches  is  in  Cattle.  The  Cembani  and 
Arii  excel  in  Arras,  but  chiefly  the  Chatramotitse.  The 
Carseans  have  the  largest  Territories  and  most  Fertile 
Fields.  The  Sabsei  are  Richest  in  the  Fertility  of  their 
Woods,  that  bring  forth  Aromatic  Gums  :  also  in  Mines  of 
Gold ;  having  Water  to  refresh  their  Lands,  and  plenty  of 
Honey  and  Wax.  Of  the  Spices  that  come  from  thence  we 
will  speak  in  a  Book  by  itself.  The  Arabians  wear  Mitres,1 
or  go  with  their  Hair  long ;  their  Beards  they  shave,  except 
on  the  upper  Lip ;  and  yet  some  there  are  that  suffer  their 
Beards  to  grow  long.  But  one  thing  is  surprising,  that  out 
of  such  a  very  great  number  of  People,  the  one-half  live  by 
Robbery,  and  the  other  by  Merchandise.  On  the  whole 
they  are  exceedingly  rich ;  for  with  them  the  Romans  and 
Parthians  leave  very  large  Sums,  for  the  Commodities  out 
of  their  Woods  and  Seas  which  they  sell  them ;  and  them- 
selves buy  nothing  of  them  in  return.  Now  will  we  speak  of 
the  other  Coast  opposite  to  Arabia.  Timosthenes  hath  set 
down,  that  the  whole  Gulf  was  from  one  End  to  the  other 
Four  Days'  Sailing :  and  from  Side  to  Side,  Two  Days' ;  the 
Breadth  of  the  Straits  being  Seven  Miles  over.  Eratosthenes 
saith,  that  taking  the  Measure  at  the  very  Mouth,  it  is  every 
way  1300  Miles. 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

The  Gulf  of  the  Red  Sea :  likewise  of  the  Trogloditic  and 
^Ethiopian  Seas. 

ARTEMIDORUS  saith,  that  the  Red  Sea  toward  the  side  of 
Arabia  is  1450  Miles :  but  on  the  Coast  of  the  Trogloditse  1 1 82, 

1  It  is  a  question  whether  these  are  not  rather  turbans,  as  at  present 
extensively  worn  through  Asia. — Wern,  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  153 

until  you  come  to  Ptolemais  :  but  Agrippa  1322,  without  any 
distinction  of  the  Sides.  Most  Geographers  have  set  down 
the  Breadth  to  be  462  Miles :  and  the  Mouth  of  it  against 
the  Sun-rising  in  Winter,  (i.  e.  South-west)  some  say,  is  7 
Miles  Broad ;  and  others  12.  The  Situation  of  it  is  this : 
Beyond  the  Bay  called  JElaniticus  there  is  another  Bay 
which  the  Arabians  call  jEant,  on  which  standeth  the  Town 
Heroon.  There  was  also  Cambisu,  between  the  Neli  and 
Marchandae,  into  which  the  sick  Soldiers  were  conveyed. 
The  Nation  of  Tyra  ;  the  Port  Daneon,  from  which  Sesostris, 
King  of  Egypt,  was  the  first  that  imagined  to  conduct  a 
Navigable  Channel  into  the  Nile,  in  that  part  where  it 
runneth  to  the  Place  called  Delta,  for  the  Space  of  62 
Miles ;  which  is  between  the  River  and  the  Red  Sea.  This 
Enterprise  was  followed  by  Darius,  King  of  the  Persians  : 
and  afterwards  by  Ptolomceus,  who  also  made  a  Channel 
100  Feet  in  Breadth,  and  30  Deep,  for  Thirty-Seven  Miles 
and  a  Half  in  Length,  even  to  the  Bitter  Fountains.  But 
this  Design  went  no  farther,  through  fear  of  an  Inundation : 
the  Red  Sea  being  found  to  lie  Three  Cubits  above  the  Land 
of  Egypt.  Some  allege  that  this  was  not  the  true  cause, 
but  that  if  the  Sea  were  let  into  the  Nile  the  Water  thereof 
(of  which  only  they  drink)  would  be  corrupted.  Never- 
theless the  Way  is  well  frequented  from  the  Egyptian  Sea  ; 
and  there  are  Three  ordinary  Ways  there :  one  from  Pelu- 
sium  over  the  Sands,  where,  unless  Reeds  be  set  up  in  the 
Ground  for  direction,  no  Path  would  be  found,  because  the 
Wind  bloweth  the  Sand  over  the  Tracts  of  the  Feet.  A 
second  beginneth  Two  Miles  beyond  the  Mountain  Casius, 
which  after  sixty  Miles  returneth  into  the  Pelusiac  Way. 
Here  the  Arabians  called  Autei  inhabit.  The  Third  begin- 
neth at  Gereum,  which  they  call  Adipson,  and  passeth 
through  these  same  Arabians,  being  Sixty  Miles  nearer,  but 
full  of  craggy  Hills,  and  altogether  destitute  of  Water.  All 
these  Ways  lead  to  Arsinoe,  which  was  built  upon  the  Gulf 
Charandra  by  Ptolemceus  Philadelphus,  and  bearing  his 
Sister's  Name :  and  he  was  the  first  that  searched  narrowly 
into  the  Region  Trogloditicum  ;  and  the  River  that  passeth 


154  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

by  Arsinoe  he  called  Ptolemseus.  Within  a  little  of  this 
Place  there  is  a  small  Town  named  Aennum,  for  which 
some  write  Philotera.  Beyond  them  are  the  Azarei :  wild 
Arabians  from  Marriages  of  the  Trogloditee.  The  Islands 
Sapyren£  and  Scytala :  and  within  a  little,  Deserts,  unto 
Myros-hormos,  where  is  the  Fountain  called  Tadnos ;  the 
Mountain  Eos ;  the  Island  Larnbe,  many  Harbours ;  and 
Berenice,  a  Town  bearing  the  Name  of  the  Mother  of  Phila- 
delphus ;  to  which  there  is  a  Way  lying  from  Coptos,  as  we 
have  said  :  the  Arabians  called  Autei,  and  Gnebadei.  Tro- 
gloditice,  which  the  Ancients  called  Michoe,  and  others 
Midoe  :  the  Mountain  Pentedactylos.  Certain  Islands  called 
Stenae-de'irse ;  and  others  no  fewer  in  number,  named  Halon- 
nesi :  Cardamine,  and  Topazos,  which  gave  the  Name  to  the 
precious  Stone.  A  Bay  full  of  Islands,  of  which  that  which 
is  called  Mareu  is  well  supplied  with  Water  :  another,  called 
Eratonos,  is  altogether  Dry.  There  were  Governors  there 
under  the  King.  Within-land  inhabit  the  Candei,  whom 
they  call  Ophiophagi,  because  they  are  accustomed  to  feed 
on  Serpents;  and  in  truth  there  is  no  other  Region  that 
breeds  them  more  than  this.  Juba,  who  seemeth  to  have 
very  diligently  searched  into  these  things,  hath  omitted  in 
this  Tract  (unless  there  be  some  fault  in  his  Original),  to 
speak  of  a  second  Berenice,  which  is  denominated  Pan- 
chrysos ;  as  also  of  a  third  called  Epidires,  renowned  for  its 
Situation ;  for  it  stands  upon  a  Neck  of  Land  running  a  long 
way,  where  the  Mouth  of  the  Red  Sea  is  not  above  Four 
Miles  and  a  Half  from  Arabia.  There  is  the  Island  Cytis, 
itself  producing  Topazes.  Beyond  this  are  Woods,  where 
Ptolemceus,  surnamed  Philadelphia,  built  a  City  for  Hunt- 
ing the  Elephant,  near  the  Lake  Monoleus,  and  named  it 
Epitheras.  This  is  the  Region  mentioned  by  me  in  the 
Second  Book;  wherein  for  Forty-five  Days  before  Mid- 
Summer,  and  as  many  after,  at  the  Sixth  Hour  of  the  Day, 
no  Shadows  are  to  be  seen :  which  being  past,  all  the  Day 
after  they  fall  into  the  South  ;  and  on  other  Days  they  fall 
to  the  North ;  whereas,  in  Berenice,  which  we  mentioned 
first,  on  the  very  Day  of  the  Solstice,  at  the  Sixth  Hour,  the 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  155 

Shadows  are  wholly  lost;  and  otherwise  there  is  nothing 
new  to  be  observed  for  the  space  of  600  Miles  about  Ptole- 
mais :  a  thing  worthy  of  observation,  and  a  place  of  great 
Curiosity,  that  gave  great  Light  to  the  World ;  for  Erato- 
sthenes, upon  this  undoubted  argument  of  the  Shadows,  took 
in  hand  to  deduce  the  Measure  of  the  Earth.  Beyond  this 
is  the  Sea  Azanium,  and  the  Promontory  which  some  have 
written  by  the  name  of  Hispalus  ;  also  the  Lake  Mandalum  ; 
the  Island  Colocasitis,  and  in  the  deep  Sea  many,  wherein 
are  numerous  Tortoises.  The  Town  Suchse ;  the  Island 
Daphnis,  and  the  Town  Aduliton,  built  by  Egyptian  Slaves 
who  escaped  from  their  Masters.  This  is  the  greatest  Town 
of  Traffic  of  the  Trogloditse,  as  well  as  of  the  Egyptians  :  and 
it  is  (from  Ptolemais)  Five  Days'  Sailing.  Thither  are  brought 
very  much  Ivory  and  Horns  of  the  Rhinoceros,  Skins  of  the 
Hippopotamus,  Tortoise  Shells,  Monkeys,  and  Slaves.  Above 
are  the  Ethiopians,  called  Aroteres :  also  the  Islands  named 
Aliseu :  and  Islands  named  Bacchias,  Antibacchias,  and 
Strathonis;  beyond  them  there  is  a  Gulf  in  the  Coast  of 
Ethiopia,  as  yet  not  known,  a  thing  to  be  wondered  at,  con- 
sidering that  Merchants  search  into  remoter  Parts.  Also  a 
Promontory,  wherein  is  a  Fountain  named  Cucios,  much 
desired  by  Sailors.  Beyond  it  is  the  Port  of  Isis,  distant 
from  the  Town  of  the  Adulitse  ten  Days  rowing  with  Oars  : 
and  thither  is  Myrrh  collected  by  the  Trogloditse.  Before 
this  Harbour  are  two  Islands,  named  Pseudopylse  ;  and  as 
many  further  within,  called  Pylse ;  in  one  of  them  are  some 
Pillars  of  Stone,  engraved  with  unknown  Characters.  Be- 
yond this  is  the  Bay  Abalites :  the  Island  Diodori,  and  others 
lying  Desert.  Also  along  the  Continent  there  is  much  Wil- 
derness ;  the  Town  Gaza  ;  the  Promontory  and  Port  Mossy- 
lites,  unto  which  Cinnamon  is  brought.  Thus  far  marched 
Sesostris  with  his  Army.  Some  Writers  place  one  Town  of 
Ethiopia  beyond  this,  on  the  Sea-side,  called  Baradaza. 
Juba  would  have  the  Atlantic  Sea  to  begin  at  the  Promon- 
tory Mossylites  :  on  which  Sea  a  Man  may  Sail  with  a  north- 
west Wind,  by  the  Coasts  of  his  Kingdoms  of  Mauritania  to 
Gades :  and  the  whole  of  his  Opinion  cannot  be  contradicted 


156  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

on  this  point.  From  a  Promontory  of  the  Indians  called 
Lepteacra,  and  by  others  Drepanum,  to  the  Isle  of  Malchu, 
he  layeth  it  down  that  by  a  straight  Course  it  is  1500 
Miles,  beside  those  Parts  that  are  burnt  up.  From  thence 
to  a  place  called  Sceneos  is  225  Miles :  and  from  it  to  the 
Island  Sadanum,  150  Miles :  and  thus  it  is  made  to  the  open 
Sea  1885  Miles.  But  all  other  Writers  have  been  of  opinion 
that  there  could  not  be  any  Sailing  on  it,  for  the  exceeding 
Heat  of  the  Sun.  Moreover,  the  Arabians  named  Ascitse  do 
much  harm  from  the  Islands  to  the  Trade  :  for  these  Ara- 
bians join  Bottles  made  of  Ox  Leather,  two  and  two  toge- 
ther, as  if  they  were  a  Bridge,  and  exercise  Piracy  by 
shooting  their  Poisoned  Arrows.  The  same  Juba  writeth, 
that  there  are  Nations  of  the  Trogloditae,  named  Thero- 
thoes,  from  their  huntings,  of  wonderful  Swiftness :  as 
the  Ichthyophagi  from  Swimming,  as  if  they  were  Water 
Creatures.  He  nameth  also  the  Bargeni,  Zagerae,  Chalybse, 
Saxinse,  Syrecae,  Daremae,  and  Domazanes.  Also  he  affirmeth, 
that  the  People  inhabiting  along  the  Sides  of  the  Nile,  from 
Syene  to  Meroe,  are  not  ^Ethiopians,  but  Arabians,  who  for 
the  sake  of  Fresh  Water  approached  the  Nile,  and  there 
dwelt :  as  also  that  the  City  of  the  Sun,1  which  we  said  be- 
fore in  the  Description  of  Egypt,  standeth  not  far  from  Mem- 
phis, was  founded  by  the  Arabians.  There  are  some  also 
who  assign  the  further  side  of  the  Nile  to  Africa  and  not  to 
Ethiopia.  But  leaving  every  Man  to  his  own  Pleasure,  we 
will  set  down  the  Towns  on  both  sides  in  that  order  in  which 
they  are  declared.  And  to  begin  with  that  side  toward 
Arabia,  after  you  are  past  Syene,  is  the  Nation  of  the  Cata- 
dupi ;  and  then  the  Syenitae.  The  Towns  Tacompson,  which 
some  have  called  Thatice,  Aranium,  Sesanium,  Sandura, 
Nasaudum,  Anadoma,  Cumara,  Beda  and  Bochiana,  Leuphi- 

1  "  City  of  the  Sun,"  or  Heliopolis.  This  is  the  Egyptian  city,  of 
which  the  father  of  the  patriarch  Joseph's  wife  was  priest.  It  may  have 
proceeded  from  the  Arabian  descent  of  the  people  of  this  place,  that  the 
worship  of  the  sun  was  more  agreeable  to  the  disposition  of  the  minds  of 
the  inhabitants,  than  that  of  any  of  the  animal  deities,  which  obtained  so 
much  favour  in  other  cities  of  Egypt.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  157 

thorga,  Tantarene,  Maechindira,  Noa,  Gophoa,  Gystatae,  Me- 
geda,  Lea,  Rhemnia,  Nupsia,  Direa,  Pataga,  Bagada,  Du- 
mana,  Rhadata,  in  which  a  Golden  Cat  is  worshipped  as  a 
God.  Boron  in  the  Midland  part,  and  Mallos,  the  next 
Town  to  Meroe.  Thus  hath  Bion  set  them  down.  But 
King  Juba  hath  arranged  them  otherwise.  Megatichos,  a 
Town  on  a  Mountain  between  Egypt  and  Ethiopia,  which 
the  Arabians  call  Myrson ;  next  to  it  Tacompson,  Aranium, 
Sesanium,  Pide,  Mamuda,  and  Corambis  ;  near  it  a  Fountain 
of  Bitumen  :  Hammodara,  Prosda,  Parenta,  Mama,  Thes- 
sara,  Gallae,  Zoton,  Graucome,  Emeum,  Pidibotae,  Hebdo- 
mecontacomertee,  and  the  Nomades,  who  live  in  Tents. 
Cyste,  Pemma,  Gadagale,  Palois,  Primmis,  Nupsis,  Daselis, 
Pads,  Gambrenes,  Magases,  Segasmala,  Cranda,  Denna, 
Cadeuma,  Thena,  Batha,  Alana,  Macum,  Scammos,  and 
Gora  within  a  Island.  Beyond  these  Abala,  Androcalis, 
Seres,  Mallos,  and  Agoce.  On  the  Side  of  Africa  they  are 
reckoned  in  this  way :  another  Tacompsos,  with  the  same 
Name  or  perhaps  a  part  of  the  former :  then,  Magora,  Sea, 
Edosa,  Pelenaria,  Pyndis,  Magusa,  Bauma,  Linitima,  Spyn- 
tuma,  Sydopta,  Gensoa,  Pindicitora,  Eugoa,  Orsima,  Suasa, 
Mauma,  Rhuma,  Urbubuma,  Mulona,  which  Town  the 
Greeks  call  Hypaton  ;  Pagoargas,  Zamnes  ;  and  there  begin 
the  Elephants  to  come  in ;  Mamblia,  Berresa,  Cetuma. 
There  was  formerly  a  Town  named  Epis,  overagainst  Meroe, 
but  destroyed  before  Bion  wrote.  These  were  recorded  until 
you  come  to  Meroe  ;  of  which  at  this  Day  scarcely  anything 
is  to  be  found  on  either  side.  The  remainder  is  a  Wilder- 
ness, by  report  made  to  the  Prince  Nero  by  the  Praetorian 
Soldiers  sent  thither  from  him  under  the  Command  of  a 
Tribune,  to  make  Discoveries :  at  the  time  when  amongst 
his  other  Wars,  he  thought  of  an  Expedition  against  the 
Ethiopians.  But  in  the  Days  of  Dwus  Augustus,  the  Roman 
Arms  penetrated  thither  under  the  conduct  ofPublius  Petro- 
nius,  a  Knight  of  Rome,  and  Prefect  of  Egypt.  He  con- 
quered all  those  Towns  in  Ethiopia,  which  he  found  in  this 
order  following;  Pselcis,  Primis,  Aboccis,  Phthuris,  Can- 
busis,  Attena,  Stadissis,  where  the  River  Nile  casteth  itself 


158  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

down  with  such  a  Noise  that  the  Inhabitants  living  close  by 
lose  their  Hearing.  He  won  also  Napata.  He  marched 
forward  a  great  way  into  the  Country,  even  870  Miles  be- 
yond Syene  ;  but  this  Roman  Army  laid  not  all  Waste  in 
those  parts.  It  was  the  Egyptian  Wars  that  wasted  Ethiopia ; 
sometimes  by  Ruling,  and  at  others  by  Servitude ;  it  was  Illus- 
trious and  Powerful  until  the  Reign  of  King  Memnon,  who 
ruled  in  the  Time  of  the  Trojan  War,  so  that  Syria  was  sub- 
ject to  it;  as  also  our  own  Coast  in  the  Time  of  King  Cepheus, 
as  appeareth  by  the  Fables  of  Andromeda.  In  the  same 
manner  they  disagree  about  the  Measure  of  Ethiopia.  And 
first,  Dalion  passing  far  beyond  Meroe ;  after  him,  Arista- 
creon,  Bion,  and  Basilis ;  also  Simonides  (the  Lesser)  who 
dwelt  in  Meroe  Five  Years,  when  he  wrote  of  Ethiopia. 
Timosthenes,  the  Admiral  of  the  Fleet  of  Philadelphus,  hath 
left  in  record,  that  from  Syene  to  Meroe  is  Sixty  Days' 
Journey,  without  particularizing  the  Measure.  But  Erato- 
sthenes precisely  noteth,  that  it  is  625  Miles :  Artemidorus, 
600.  Sebostus  affirmeth,  that  from  the  Frontiers  of  Egypt  it 
is  1675  Miles ;  from  whence  the  last  rehearsed  Writers  count 
1270.  But  all  this  difference  is  lately  determined  by  the 
Report  of  those  Travellers  whom  Nero  sent  to  Discover  those 
Countries,  who  have  related  that  it  is  862  Miles  from  Syene 
in  this  manner :  from  Syene  to  Hiera-Sycaminon,  Fifty-four 
Miles ;  from  thence  to  Tama,  Seventy-five  Miles ;  from  Tama 
to  the  Euonymites  Country,  the  first  of  the  Ethiopians,  120  ; 
toAcina,  Fifty-four;  to  Pitara,  Twenty-five;  to  Tergedum, 
106  Miles.  That  in  the  midst  of  this  Tract  lieth  the  Island 
Gagandus,  where  they  first  saw  the  Birds  called  Parrots; 
and  beyond  another  Island  called  Attigula  they  saw  Monkeys  ; 
beyond  Tergedum  they  met  with  the  Creatures  Cynocephali. 
From  thence  to  Napata  Eighty  Miles,  which  is  the  only 
little  Town  among  all  the  beforenamed  ;  from  which  to  the 
Island  Meroe  is  360  Miles.  They  reported,  moreover,  that 
about  Meroe,  and  not  before,  the  Herbs  appeared  greener ; 
and  the  Woods  shewed  somewhat  in  comparison  of  all  the 
way  besides ;  and  they  espied  the  Tracts  of  Elephants  and 
Rhinoceroses.  The  Town  itself  of  Meroe  was  from  the 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  159 

Entry  of  the  Island  Seventy  Miles,  and  just  by,  there  was 
another  Island  called  Tatu,  which  formed  a  Port  for  them 
that  approached  by  the  Channel  on  the  Right.  The  Buildings 
within  the  Town  were  few ;  the  Isle  was  subject  to  a  Queen 
named  Candaocc*  a  name  that  for  many  years  already  hath 
passed  in  succession  from  one  Queen  to  another.  Within 
this  Town  is  the  Shrine  of  Hamrnon  for  Devotion  ;  and  in  all 
that  Tract  many  Chapels.  Finally,  so  long  as  the  Ethiopians 
were  powerful  this  Island  was  very  famous.  For  by  report, 
they  were  accustomed  to  furnish  of  Armed  Men  250,000,  and 
to  maintain  of  Artisans  400,000.  Also  it  is  at  this  day  reported 
that  there  have  beon  Forty-five  Kings  of  the  Ethiopians. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 
The  Manifold  and  Wonderful  Forms  of  Men? 

BUT  the  Nation  in  general  was  in  old  time  called 
jEtheria  ;  3  afterwards  Atlantia ;  and  finally  from  Vulcan  s 
Son  jfiEthiops,  it  took  the  name  of  Ethiopia.  It  is  no  won- 
der, that  about  the  remote  Borders  of  it  there  are  produced 
both  Men  and  Beasts  of  monstrous  Shapes,  considering  the 
Agility  of  the  Fiery  Heat  to  frame  Bodies  and  carve  them 
into  strange  Shapes.  It  is  reported  by  some,  that  far  within 
the  Country  eastward  there  are  Nations  without  Noses,  but 
having  their  Visage  all  Plain  and  Flat:  that  others  are 
without  any  Upper  Lip,  and  some  without  Tongues ;  also, 
there  is  a  kind  of  them  that  have  the  Mouth  grown  to- 
gether, and  are  without  Nostrils ;  so  that  at  the  same  Orifice 
only  they  take  in  Breath,  receive  Drink  by  drawing  it  in 
through  an  Oaten  Straw,  and  Feed  themselves  with  the 
Grains  of  Oats  which  grow  of  their  own  accord  for  their 
Food.  Others  there  are,  who  instead  of  Speech  make  Signs 
by  nodding  their  Heads,  and  moving  their  Limbs.  There 
are  also  some  that  before  the  Time  of  Ptolemceus  Lathyrus 

1  See  Acts  of  Apostles,  viii.  27. 
*  See  further,  Book  vii.  c.  2. 

3  As  all  Pliny's  authors  were  Greek  or  Roman,  he  was  ignorant  that 
a  much  more  ancient  name  was  Gush. — Wern.  Club. 


160  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI. 

King  of  Egypt,  knew  no  use  of  Fire.  Some  Writers  have 
reported,  that  in  the  Country  near  the  Marshes  from  whence 
the  Nile  hath  its  Source  there  inhabit  a  Nation  of  Pygmei. 
But  where  we  left  off  there  is  a  continual  range  of  Moun- 
tains, all  Red,  as  if  they  were  Burning.  Beyond  Meroe 
there  is  a  Country  lying  above  the  Trogloditue  and  the  Red 
Sea ;  where  Three  Days'  Journey  from  Napata  toward  the 
Red  Sea,  in  most  places  they  save  Rain  Water  for  their  ordi- 
nary Use ;  all  the  Country  between  is  very  abundant  in 
Gold.  All  beyond  this  Region  is  Inhabited  by  the  Atabuli, 
a  People  of  Ethiopia.  The  Megabari,  whom  some  have 
named  Adiabarae,  lie  overagainst  Meroe,  and  have  a  Town 
bearing  the  Name  of  Apollo.  Part  of  them  are  Nomades, 
who  live  on  Elephant's  Flesh.  Just  against  them  in  a  part 
of  Africa  are  the  Macrobii.  Again,  beyond  the  Megabari 
are  the  Memnones  and  Daveli ;  and  Twenty  Days'  Journey 
from  them  the  Critensi.  Beyond  them  are  the  Dochi  and 
the  Gymnites,  who  are  always  naked.  Soon  after  you  find  the 
Anderae,  Mathitae,  Mesagebes,  Hipporeae,  of  a  Black  Colour, 
but  who  paint  their  Bodies  with  a  kind  of  Red  Chalk  called 
Rubrica.  But  upon  a  part  of  Africa  are  the  Medimni ;  be- 
yond then  are  Nomades,  who  feed  on  the  Milk  of  Cynoce- 
phali :  and  the  Olabi  and  Syrbotae,  who  are  reported  to  be 
Eight  Cubits  high.  Aristocreon  saith,  that  on  the  side  of 
Libya,  Five  Days'  Journey  from  Meroe,  there  is  a  Town 
called  Tole  ;  and  Twelve  Days'  Journey  from  thence  is  Esar, 
a  Town  of  the  Egyptians,  who  fled  from  Psammeticus.  It  is 
reported,  that  they  have  lived  in  it  for  300  Years ;  another 
Town  of  theirs  called  Daronis,  on  the  opposite  side,  on  the 
Coast  of  Arabia.  But  that  which  Aristocreon  nameth  Esar, 
Bion  calleth  Sapa;  and  he  saith,  the  very  word  signifieth 
Strangers  come  from  other  parts.  Their  Capital  City  is 
within  the  Island  Sembobitis;  and  Sai  in  Arabia  is  the  Third. 
Between  the  Mountains  and  the  Nile  are  the  Symbari  and 
the  Phalanges ;  but  upon  the  Mountains  themselves  live 
the  Asachae,  with  many  Nations ;  and  they  are  by  report 
Seven  Days'  Journey  from  the  Sea.  They  live  by  Hunting 
Elephants.  The  Island  in  the  Nile,  of  the  Semberritae,  is 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  161 

subject  to  a  Queen.  Eight  Days'  Journey  from  thence  lieth 
the  Country  of  the  Ethiopians,  named  Nubaei.  Their  Town 
Tenupsis  is  seated  upon  the  Nile.  The  Sambri,  where  all 
the  Four-footed  Beasts,  and  even  the  very  Elephants,  are 
without  Ears.  Upon  the  Border  of  Africa  inhabit  the 
Ptceambati  and  Ptoemphanse,  who  have  a  Dog  for  their 
King,  and  they  judge  of  his  imperial  Commands  by  his  Motion. 
Their  City  is  Auruspi,  far  distant  from  the  Nile.  Beyond 
them  are  the  Achisarmi,  Phaliges,  Marigeri,  and  Casamarri. 
Bion  says,  that  beyond  Psembobitis,  there  are  other  Towns  in 
the  Islands  toward  Meroc,  for  Twenty  Days'  Journey.  The 
Town  of  the  next  Island  is  Semberritarum,  under  a  Queen ; 
another  called  Asar  ;  and  there  is  a  second  Island  having  in 
it  the  Town  Daron ;  they  call  the  third  Medoe,  wherein 
stand eth  the  Town  Asel ;  and  a  fourth  named  Garode,  as 
the  Town  is  also.  Then  along  the  Banks,  the  Towns,  Navos, 
Modunda,  Andatis,  Setundum,  Colligat,  Secande,  Navectabe, 
Cuini,  Agrospi,  ^gipa,  Candrogari,  Araba,  and  Summara. 
The  Region  above  Sirbitum,  where  the  Mountains  end,  is 
reported  by  some  to  have  upon  the  Sea-coast  Ethiopians 
called  Nisicastes  and  Nisitae,  which  means  Men  with  Three 
and  Four  Eyes ;  not  because  they  are  so  furnished,  but  be- 
cause they  are  excellent  Archers.  Bion  affirmeth,  moreover, 
that  from  that  part  of  the  Nile  which  stretcheth  above  the 
Greater  Syrtes,  toward  the  Southern  Ocean,  they  are  called 
Dalion,  who  use  Rain-water  only;  and  the  Cisori  and  Lon- 
gopori.  Beyond  Oecalices  for  Five  Days'  Journey,  the 
Usibalci,  Isucles,  Pharusi,  Valii,  and  Cispii.  The  rest  is 
desert.  But  then  he  telleth  fabulous  Tales  :  as  that  westward 
there  are  People  called  Nigro2,  whose  King  hath  but  one 
Eye,  and  that  in  the  midst  of  his  Forehead :  also,  there  are 
the  Agriophagi,  who  live  chiefly  on  the  Flesh  of  Panthers 
and  Lions;  the  Pornphagi,  who  Eat  all  things;  the  Anthro- 
pophagi, that  Feed  on  Man's  Flesh ;  the  Cynamolgi,  who 
have  Heads  like  Dogs;  the  Artabatitae,  who  wander  about 
like  Four-footed  Savage  Beasts.  Beyond  whom  are  the 
Hesperii  and  Peroesi,  who,  as  we  said  before,  are  planted  in 

VOL.  II,  M 


1C2  History  vf  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

the  Confines  of  Mauritania.  In  certain  parts  of  Ethiopia 
the  People  live  on  Locusts  only,1  which  they  preserve  with 
Salt,  and  hang  up  in  Smoke  to  harden,  for  their  yearly  Pro- 
vision ;  and  these  live  not  above  Forty  Years  at  the  most. 
Agrippa  saith  that  all  the  Land  of  Ethiopia,  with  the  Red 
Sea,  containeth  in  Length  2170  Miles:  and  in  Breadth, 
together  with  the  higher  Egypt,  1291.  Some  have  taken 
the  Breadth  in  this  manner;  from  Meroe  to  Sirbitum, 
Twelve  Days' Navigation  ;  from  thence  to  the  Davelli, Twelve  ; 
and  from  them  to  the  Ethiopian  Ocean,  a  Journey  of  Six 
Days.  But  on  the  whole  all  Writers  in  a  manner  agree 
that  between  the  Ocean  and  Meroe  it  is  725  Miles  ;  and 
from  thence  to  Syene,  as  much  as  we  have  set  down  before. 
The  Situation  of  Ethiopia  lieth  South-east  and  South-west. 
In  the  exact  South,  Woods  of  Ebony  chiefly  flourish  ;  toward 
the  midst  of  this  Region,  there  is  a  lofty  Mountain  looking 
over  the  Sea,  that  burneth  continually,  which  the  Greeks 
call  Theon-ochema ;  from  which  it  is  counted  Four  Days'  Sail 
to  the  Promontory  called  Hesperion-Ceras,2  on  the  border  of 
Africa,  near  to  the  Hesperian  Ethiopians.  Some  Writers 
hold,  that  this  Tract  is  beautified  with  little  Hills,  pleasantly 
clad  with  shady  Groves,  wherein  are  the  jEgipanes  and 
Satyri. 

1  That  locusts  should  form  a  portion  of  the  food  of  the  people  who 
live  where  they  abound,  cannot  be  regarded  as  surprising.  John 
the  Baptist  fed  on  them,  Matt,  iii,  4,  and  Mark,  i.  6.  They  are  still 
occasionally  used  for  food  in  the  East.  When  Khosru  Purwis  (Chosroes), 
the  Sassanian  king  of  Persia,  was  summoned  by  Mohammed  to  adopt  his 
doctrine,  he  contemptuously  dismissed  the  messengers  of  a  chief  of  "naked 
locust-eaters."  The  Arabs  eat  the  different  species  of  the  migratory 
locusts,  and  are  very  fond  of  them,  especially  of  the  red  locust,  which 
when  fat  is  called  Jerdd  rnikken.  They  eat  them  either  fried  or  broiled, 
or  dried  in  an  oven,  or  boiled  with  a  sprinkle  of  salt ;  the  locusts  taste 
like  dried  sprats.  The  female  locust  when  fat  and  full  of  eggs,  is  a  great 
dainty,  and  greatly  esteemed  by  the  male  population  on  account  of  its 
aphrodisiac  qualities.  (Niebuhr,  Beschreibung  von  Arabien,  p.  170,  &c.) 
~-Wern.  Club. 

8  Cap  de  Bonne  Esperance. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  163 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 
The  Islands  of  the  Ethiopian  Sea. 

EPHORUS,  Eudoxus,  and  Timosthenes  agree,  that  there 
are  very  many  Islands  in  all  that  Sea.  Clitarchus  wit- 
nesseth,  that  report  was  made  to  Alexander  the  King,  of  one 
which  was  so  rich,  that  for  Horses  the  Inhabitants  would 
give  Talents  of  Gold  ;  also  of  another,  wherein  was  a  sacred 
Mountain  adorned  with  a  shady  Wood,  where  the  Trees 
distilled  Odours  of  wonderful  Sweetness.  Overagainst  the 
Persian  Gulf  lieth  the  Island  named  Cerne,  opposite  to 
Ethiopia;  but  how  large  it  is,  or  how  far  off  from  the  Con- 
tinent, is  not  certainly  known :  but  this  is  reported,  that 
the  Ethiopians  only  inhabit  it.  Euphorus  writeth,  that  they 
who  would  Sail  thither  from  the  Red  Sea,  are  not  able,  from 
the  extreme  Heat,  to  pass  beyond  certain  Columns ;  for  so 
they  call  the  little  Islands  there.  But  Polybms  affirmeth, 
that  this  Island  Cerne,  where  it  lieth  in  the  utmost  Coast  of 
Mauritania,  overagainst  the  Mountain  Atlas,  is  but  Eight 
Stadia  from  the  Land.  On  the  other  hand,  Nepos  Cornelius 
affirmeth,  that  it  is  not  above  a  Mile  from  the  Land, 
overagainst  Carthage ;  and  that  it  is  not  above  Two  Miles 
in  Circuit.  There  is  mention  made  also  of  another  Island 
before  the  Mountain  Atlas,  and  which  is  named  Atlantis. 
And  Five  Days'  Sailing  from  it  are  the  Deserts  of  the 
Ethiopian  Hesperians,  and  a  Promontory,  which  we  have 
named  Hesperion-Ceras ;  where  the  Coasts  of  the  Land  begin 
first  to  turn  about  their  front  to  the  westward,  and  the 
Atlantic  Sea.  Overagainst  this  Promontory,  as  Xenophon 
Lampsacenus  reporteth,  lie  the  Islands  called  Gorgates, 
where  formerly  the  Gorgani  kept  their  Habitation,  two 
Days'  Sailing  from  the  Continent.  Hanno,  Commander  of 
the  Carthaginians  (Pceni),  penetrated  to  them,  and  reported 
that  the  Women  were  all  over  their  Bodies  hairy ;  and  that 
the  Men  were  so  Swift  of  Foot  that  they  escaped  from  him  ; 
but  he  placed  the  Skins  of  two  of  these  Gorgon  Women  in 
the  Temple  of  Juno,  for  a  Testimonial,  and  as  a  Wonder,  and 


164  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

they  were  seen  there  until  Carthage  was  taken.  Beyond 
these  Isles  also  there  are  said  to  be  two  Islands  of  Hesperides. 
But  so  uncertain  are  all  things  concerning  these  parts,  that 
Statins  Sebosus  affirmeth,  it  is  Forty  Days'  Sailing  from  the 
Islands  of  the  Gorgones  along  the  Coast  of  Atlas,  to  the 
Isles  of  the  Hesperides ;  and  from  thence  to  Hesperion- 
Ceras,  one.  As  little  certainty  there  is  concerning  the 
Islands  of  Mauritania.  In  this  only  they  all  agree,  that  Juba 
discovered  some  few  of  them  over  against  the  Autololes,  in 
which  he  purposed  to  dye  Gsetulian  Purple.1 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 
Of  the  Fortunate  Islands. 

SOME  Authors  think,  that  the  Fortunate  Islands,  and 
some  others  besides  them,  are  beyond  the  Autololes  ;  among 
whom  the  same  Sebosus  spoke  of  their  Distances :  and  parti- 
cularly that  the  Island  Junonia  is  from  Gades  750  Miles ; 
and  that  from  it  westward  the  Isles  Pluvialia  and  Capraria 
are  as  much :  also  that  in  the  Island  Pluvialia  there  is  no 
Water  but  what  they  have  by  Showers.  From  them  to  the 
Fortunate  Islands  is  250  Miles  ;  they  lie  eight  Miles  from  the 
Coast  of  Mauritania  to  the  Left  Hand,  called  the  Coast  of 
the  Sun,  in  a  Valley,  because  it  is  like  a  Valley  or  Hollow ; 
and  it  is  also  called  Planaria,  as  resembling  an  even  Plain. 
This  Valley  containeth  in  Circuit  300  Miles:  wherein  are 
Trees  so  luxuriant  that  they  grow  to  the  Height  of  144 
Feet.  Concerning  the  Islands  named  Fortunate,  Juba 
learned  by  diligent  inquiry,  that  they  lie  from  the  South 
near  to  the  West  625  Miles  from  the  Islands  Purpurariee : 
so  that  to  Sail  thither  a  Man  must  pass  250  Miles  above  the 
West,  and  then  for  75  Miles  bend  his  course  Eastward.  He 
saith,  moreover,  that  the  first  of  these  Islands  is  called  Om- 
brion,  wherein  are  no  Tokens  of  Houses.  Also  that  among 
the  Mountains  it  hath  a  Marsh ;  and  Trees  resembling  the 
Plant  Ferula,  out  of  which  they  press  WTater :  that  which 

1  On  which  account  in  the  next  chapter  these  islands  are  called 
Purpurese, — Wern,  Club, 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  165 

issueth  out  of  the  Black  Trees  being  bitter,  and  that  from 
the  Whiter  sort  sweet  and  potable.  He  saith  that  a  second 
Island  is  named  Junonia,  in  which  there  is  one  little  House, 
or  Chapel,  made  of  Stone :  beyond  it,  but  near  by  there  is  a 
third  of  the  same  Name,  but  less  in  size :  and  then  you  come 
to  one  called  Capraria,  full  of  great  Lizards.  Within  sight 
of  these  is  the  Island  Nivaria,  which  took  this  Name  from 
the  Snow  that  lieth  there  continually  ;  it  is  also  full  of  Mists. 
The  next  to  it  is  Canaria,  so  called  from  the  great  number  of 
very  large  Dogs,  of  which  Juba  brought  away  two  :  and  in 
this  Island  there  are  some  marks  remaining  of  Buildings. 
And  as  all  these  Islands  abound  plentifully  with  fruitful 
Trees  and  Birds  of  all  sorts,  so  this  is  replenished  with 
Palm-trees  that  bear  Abundance  of  Dates,  and  likewise  with 
Trees  that  yield  Pine  Nuts.  There  is  also  great  plenty  of 
Honey  :  and  the  Rivers  produce  the  Papyrus  Reed,  and  are 
well  stored  with  the  Fish  Silurus  :  and  in  conclusion  he 
saith,  that  these  Islands  are  much  infested  with  great  Ani- 
mals, that  are  very  often  cast  out  in  a  Putrid  Condition. 
Thus  having  at  large  gone  through  the  Description  of  the 
Globe  of  the  Earth,  as  well  without  as  within,  it  remaineth 
now  to  collect  into  a  small  space  the  measure  of  the  Seas. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

A  Summary  of  the  Earth,  digested  according  to  its 
Dimensions. 

POLYBIUS  layeth  it  down,  that  from  the  Straits  of  Gib- 
raltar by  a  straight  Course  to  the  Mouth  of  Moeotis  is  3437J 
Miles.  From  the  same  starting-place  by  a  right  Course  east- 
ward to  Sicily,  it  is  1260J  Miles ;  to  Crete,  375  Miles ;  to 
Rhodes,  146£  Miles ;  to  the  Chelidonian  Islands  as  much ; 
to  Cyprus,  325  Miles ;  from  whence  to  Seleucia  Pieria  in 
Syria,  115  Miles.  Which  computation  makes  the  sum  of 
2340  Miles.  Agrippa  also  counteth  3440  Miles  for  all  this 
distance  from  the  Straits  of  Gibraltar  directly  forward  to  the 
Gulf  of  Issa.  In  which  reckoning  I  scarcely  know  whether 
there  be  an  error  in  the  number,  because  the  same  Writer 


166  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI. 

hath  set  down  the  passage  from  the  Sicilian  Strait  to  Alex- 
andria at  1250  Miles.  But  the  whole  .  Circuit  through  the 
above-said  Gulfs,  from  the  point  where  we  began  to  the  Lake 
Moeotis,  summed  together,  is  15,600  Miles.  Artemidorus 
added  thereto  756  Miles.  And  the  same  Geographer 
writeth,  that  with  Moeotis  it  cometh  to  17,390  Miles.  This 
is  the  measure  of  unarmed  Men,  and  the  peaceful  boldness 
of  such  as  have  not  feared  to  provoke  Fortune.  Now 
are  we  to  compare  the  greatness  of  each  part,  in  spite  of 
the  Difficulty  produced  by  the  Disagreement  of  Authors. 
But  most  easily  will  this  appear  if  we  join  Longitude  and 
Latitude  together.  According  to  this  prescribed  rule  the 
Magnitude  of  Europe  is  8148  Miles.  Africa  (taking  the 
middle  Computation  between  them  all  that  have  set  it  down) 
containeth  in  Length  3748  Miles.  The  Breadth  of  so  much 
as  is  inhabited  in  no  Place  exceedeth  250  Miles.  Agrippa 
would  have  it  to  contain  910  Miles  in  Breadth,  beginning  at 
the  Bounds  of  Cyrene,  and  comprehending  in  this  Measure 
the  Deserts  thereof  as  far  as  to  the  Garamantse,  so  far  as 
they  are  known ;  and  then  the  whole  Measure  collected  into 
one  sum  amounted  to  4608  Miles.  Asia1  is  allowed  to  be  in 
Length  63,750  Miles ;  and  its  Breadth  is  truly  reckoned 
from  the  Ethiopian  Sea  to  Alexandria,  situated  near  the 
Nile,  so  that  the  Measurement  runs  through  Meroe  and 
Syrene,  1875  Miles;  whereby  it  appeareth  that  Europe  is 
little  wanting  of  being  half  as  large  again  as  Asia :  and  the 
same  Europe  is  twice  as  much  again  as  all  Africa,  and  a 
sixth  part  over.  Reduce  now  all  these  sums  together,  and  it 
will  be  found  clear  that  Europe  is  a  third  part  of  the  whole 
Earth,  and  something  more  than  an  eighth  Portion  over; 
Asia  a  fourth  part,  with  a  fourteenth;  and  Africa  a  fifth, 
with  an  over-plus  of  a  sixtieth  portion.  To  this  Calculation 
we  will  add  one  sentence  of  Greek  invention,  which  sheweth 

1  Pliny's  ignorance  of  the  extent  of  Africa  is  pardonable,  for  he  knew 
no  more  of  it  than  the  small  portion  which  had  come  under  the  Roman 
dominion ;  but  in  his  account  of  Asia  he  contradicts  what  he  has  already 
assigned  to  India,  which  is  only  a  part  of  it,  but  which  he  truly  repre- 
sented to  be  larger  than  Europe.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  167 

their  exquisite  subtilty,  in  order  that  we  may  otnit  nothing 
in  this  view  of  the  Situation  of  the  Earth ;  that  when  the 
Position  of  every  Region  is  known,  a  Man  may  likewise  come 
to  the  knowledge  of  what  Society  there  is  between  one  and 
the  other,  either  of  the  agreement  of  the  Length  of  Days  and 
Nights,  by  the  Shadows  at  Noonday,  or  by  the  equal  Con- 
vexity of  the  World.  To  bring  this  about  effectually,  I  must 
arrange  the  whole  Earth  into  certain  Portions  of  the  Heaven  ; 
for  there  are  very  many  of  those  Divisions  of  the  World  which 
our  Astronomers  call  Circles,  and  the  Greeks,  Parallels. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 

The  Arrangement  of  the  Earth  Into  Parallels  and  equal 
Shadows. 

THE  beginning  is  at  that  part  of  India  which  turns  to  the 
South.  It  extends  as  far  as  Arabia  and  the  Inhabitants  of 
the  Red  Sea.  Under  it  are  comprised  the  Gedrosi,  Persae, 
Carmani,  and  Elimaei ;  Parthyen&,  Aria,  Susiane,  Mesopo- 
tamia, Seleucia,  surnamed  Babylonia ;  Arabia,  so  far  as 
Petrge,  Coele-Syria,  and  Pelusium  in  Egypt;  the  Lower 
Coasts,  which  are  called  of  Alexandria ;  the  Maritime  Parts 
of  Africa;  all  the  Towns  of  Cyrenaica,  Thapsus,  Adrume- 
tum,  Clupea,  Carthago,  Utica,  both  Hippoes,  Numidia,  both 
Realms  of  Mauritania,  the  Atlantic  Sea,  and  Hercules'  Pil- 
lars. In  all  the  Circumference  of  this  Heaven,  at  Noon-tide 
of  an  Equinoctial  Day,  the  Umbilicus,  which  they  call  Gno- 
mon, seven  Feet  Long,  castetli  a  Shadow  not  above  the 
Length  of  four  Feet.  The  Longest  Night  or  Day  is  fourteen 
Hours;  and  the  shortest,  ten.  The  following  Circle  begin- 
neth  from  India,  tending  westward,  and  passeth  through 
the  midst  of  Parthia,  Persepolis,  the  nearest  parts  of  Persis, 
the  nearer  Arabia,  Judaea,  and  the  Borders  of  the  Mountain 
Libanus.  It  embraceth  Babylon,  Idumsea,  Samaria,  Hieru- 
solyma,  Ascalon,  Joppe,  Caesarea,  Phoenice,  Ptolemais, 
Sydon,  Tyrus,  Berytrus,  Botrys,  Tripolis,  Byblus,  Antiochia, 
Laodicea,  Seleucia,  the  Sea-coasts  of  Cilicia,  Cyprus,  the 
South  Part  of  Creta,  Lilybeum  in  Sinalia,  the  North  Parts 


1 68  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VI . 

of  Africa  and  Numidia.  The  Gnomon  upon  the  Equi- 
noctial Day,  thirty-five  Feet  in  Length,  maketh  a  Shadow 
twenty-four  Feet  Long.  The  Longest  Day  or  Night  is  four- 
teen Hours  Equinoctial,  and  the  fifth  part  of  an  Hour.  The 
third  Circle  beginneth  at  the  Indians  next  to  the  Imaus,  and 
goeth  by  the  Caspian  Gates  very  near  to  Media,  Cataonia, 
Cappadocia,  Taurus,  Amanus,  Issus,  the  Cilician  Gates, 
Soli,  Tarsus,  Cyprus,  Pisidia,  Syde  in  Paiuphilia,  Lycaonia, 
Patara  in  Lycia,  Xanthus,  Caunus,  Rhodus,  Coiis,  Halicar- 
nassus,  Gnidus,  Doris,  Chius,  Delus,  the  Middle  Cyclades, 
Gytthium,  Malea,  Argos,  Laconia,  Elis,  Olympia,  Messene, 
Peloponnesus,  Syracusa,  Catina,  the  Midst  of  Sicily,  the 
South  Part  of  Sardinia,  Carteia,  and  Gades.  The  Gnomon 
of  one  hundred  Inches  yieldeth  a  Shadow  of  seventy-seven 
Inches.  The  Longest  Day  hath  Equinoctial  Hours  fourteen 
and  a  half,  with  the  thirtieth  part  of  an  Hour.  Under  the 
fourth  Circle  lie  those  who  are  on  the  other  Side  of  Imaus, 
the  South  Parts  of  Cappadocia,  Galatia,  Mysia,  Sardis, 
Smyrna,  Sipylus,  the  Mountain  Tmolus  in  Lydia,  Caria, 
Ionia,  Trallis,  Colophon,  Ephesus,  Miletus,  Samos,  Chios, 
the  Icarian  Sea,  the  Northern  Cyclades,  Athens,  Megara, 
Corinthus,  Sicyon,  Achsea,  Patrse,  Isthmos,  Epirus,  the 
North  Parts  of  Sicily,  Narbonensis  Gallia  toward  the  East,1 
'the  Maritime  Parts  of  Spain  beyond  New  Carthage,  and  so 
to  the  West.  To  a  Gnomon  of  twenty-one  feet  the  Shadows 
answer  of  seventeen  Feet.  The  Longest  Day  is  fourteen 
Equinoctial  Hours,  and  two-third  parts  of  an  Hour.  The 
fifth  Division  containeth  from  the  Entrance  of  the  Caspian 
Sea,  Bactra,  Iberia,  Armenia,  Mysia,  Phrygia,  Hellespontus, 
Troas,  Tenedus,  Abydus,  Scepsis,  Ilium,  the  Mountain  Ida, 
Cyzicum,  Lampsacum,  Sinope,  Amisum,  Heraclea  in  Pontus, 
Paphlagonia,  Lemnus,  Imbrus,  Thasus,  Cassandria,  Thes- 
salia,  Macedonia,  Larissa,  Amphipolis,  Thessalonice,  Pella, 
Edessa,  Bersea,  Pharsalia,  Carystum,  Eubcea,  Boaotia, 
Chaicis,  Delphi,  Acarnania,  ^Etolia,  Apollonia,  Bnmdisium, 
Tarentum,  Thurii,  Locri,  Rhegium,  Lucani,  Neapolis,  Pu- 

1  Languedoc. 


BOOK  VI.]  History  of  Nature.  169 

teoli,  the  Tuscan  Sea,  Corsica,  the  Baleares,  the  Middle  of 
Spain.  A  Gnomon  of  seven  Feet  giveth  six  of  Shadow. 
The  Longest  Day  is  fifteen  Equinoctial  Hours.  The  sixth 
Parallel  compriseth  the  City  of  Rome,  and  containeth  the 
Caspian  Nations,  Caucasus,  the  North  Parts  of  Armenia, 
Apollonia  upon  Rhindacus,  Nicomedia,  Nicaea,  Chalcedon, 
Byzantium,  Lysimachia,  Cherrhonesus,  the  Gulf  Melane, 
Abdera,  Samothracia,  Maronea,  .ZEnus,  Bessica,  the  Mid- 
land Parts  of  Thracia,  Poeonia,  the  Illyrii,  Dyrrhachium, 
Canusium,  the  utmost  Coasts  of  Apulia,  Campania,  Hetruria, 
Pisa,  Luna,  Luca,  Genua,  Liguria,  Antipolis,  Massilia,  Nar- 
bon,  Tarracon,  the  Middle  of  Spain  called  Tarraconensis, 
and  thence  through  Lusitania.  To  a  Gnomon  of  nine  Feet 
the  Shadow  is  eight  Feet.  The  Longest  Day  hath  fifteen 
Equinoctial  Hours  and  the  ninth  part  of  an  Hour,  or  the 
fifth,  as  Nigidius  is  of  opinion.  The  seventh  Division  be- 
ginneth  at  the  other  Coast  of  the  Caspian  Sea,  and  falleth 
upon  Callatis,  Bosphorus,  Borysthenes,  Tomos,  the  Back 
Parts  of  Thracia,  the  Tribali,  the  rest  of  Illyricum,  the 
Adriatic  Sea,  Aquileia,  Altinum,  Venetia,  Vicetia,  Patavium, 
Verona,  Cremona,  Ravenna,  Ancona,  Picenum,  Marsi, 
Peligni,  Sabini,  Umbria,  Ariminum,  Bononia,  Placentia, 
Mediolanum,  and  all  beyond  Apenninum :  also  over  the 
Alps,  Aquitaine  in  Gaul,  Vienna,  Pyrenaeum,  and  Celtiberia. 
The  Gnomon  of  thirty-five  Feet  casteth  a  Shadow  thirty-six 
Feet  in  Length  ;  yet  so,  that  in  some  part  of  Venetia  the 
Shadow  is  equal  to  the  Gnomon.  The  Longest  Day  is  fif- 
teen Equinoctial  Hours,  and  three-fifth  parts  of  an  hour. 
Hitherto  we  have  reported  the  exact  Labours  of  the  Ancients. 
But  the  most  diligent  Modern  Writers  have  assigned  the  rest 
of  the  Earth  not  as  yet  specified,  to  three  Sections.  (The 
first)  from  Tanais  through  the  Lake  Moaotis  and  the  Sar- 
matae,  all  the  way  to  Borysthenes,  and  so  by  the  Daci  and  a 
part  of  Germany,  the  Galliae,  and  the  Coasts  of  the  sur- 
rounding Ocean,  where  the  Day  is  sixteen  Hours  long.  A 
second,  through  the  Hyperborei  and  Britannia,  where  the 
Day  is  seventeen  Hours  long.  Last  of  all,  is  the  Scythian 
Parallel,  from  the  Rhiphean  Hills  unto  Thule :  in  which  (as 


170  History  of  Nature,  [BooK  VI. 

we  have  said)  it  is  Day  and  Night  continually  by  turns. 
The  same  Writers  have  set  down  two  Circles,  before  those 
Points  where  the  others  began,  and  which  we  set  down. 
The  first  through  the  Island  Meroe,  and  Ptolemais  upon  the 
Red  Sea,  built  for  the  Hunting  of  Elephants ;  where  the 
Longest  Day  is  but  twelve  Hoars  and  an  half:  the  second 
passing  through  Syene  in  Egypt,  where  the  Day  hath  thir- 
teen Hours.  And  the  same  Authors  have  put  to  every 
one  of  the  other  Circles,  even  to  the  very  last,  half  an  Hour 
more. 

THUS  MUCH  OF  THE  EARTH. 


IN  THE  SEVENTH   BOOK 

ABE    CONTAINED 
THE  WONDERFUL  SHAPES  OF  MEN  IN  VARIOUS  COUNTRIES, 


CHAP. 

1.  Strange  Forms  of  many  Na- 

tions. 

2.  Of  the   Scythians,  and  other 

People  of  different  Coun- 
tries. 

3.  Of  Monstrosities. 

4.  The    Transmutation    of    the 

Sexes  and  of  Twins. 

5.  De  Hominis  Generando. 

6.  De    Conceptibus,     et     Signa 

Sexus   in   gravidis  praeve- 
nientia  Partum. 

7.  De  Conceptu  Hominum  et  Ge- 

neratione. 

8.  De  Agrippis. 

9 .  Monstruosi  Partus  excisi  Utero. 

10.  Qui  sunt  Vopisci. 

11.  Exempla  numerosa}  Sobolis. 

12.  Examples  of  those  that  were 

like  one  to  another. 

13.  Quse  sit  Generandi  Ratio. 

14.  De  eodem  multiplicius. 

15.  De  Menstruis  Mulierum. 

16.  Item  de  Katione  Partuum. 

17.  The  Proportion  of  the  Parts 

of  Man's  Body,  and  Things 
therein  observed. 

18.  Examples    of     extraordinary 

Shapes. 

19.  Remarkable  Natures  of  Men. 

20.  Of  bodily  Strength  and  Swift- 

ness. 

21.  Of  excellent  Sight. 

22.  Who  excelled  in  Hearing. 


CHAP. 

23.  Examples  of  Patience. 

24.  Examples  of  Memory. 

25.  The  Praise  of  C.  Julius  Casar. 

26.  The    Praise    of  Pompey    the 

Great. 

27.  The  Praise  of  Cato  the  Elder. 

28.  Of  Valour  and  Fortitude. 

29.  Of  notable  Abilities,   or  the 

Praises  of  some  for  their 
singular  Talents. 

30.  Of  Plato,  Ennius,  Virgil,  M. 

Varro,  and  M.  Cicero. 

31.  Of  Majesty  in  Behaviour. 

32.  Of  Authority. 

33.  Of  certain  Divine  Persons. 

34.  Of  (Scipio)  Nasica. 

35.  Of  Chastity. 

36.  Of    Piety    (Natural     Kind- 

ness). 

37.  Of  Excellency  in  many  Sci- 

ences ;  in  Astrology,  Gram- 
mar, Geometry,  &c. 

38.  Also,  Rare    Pieces    of  Work 

made  by  Artificers. 

39.  Of  Servants  and  Slaves. 

40.  The  Excellency  of  Nations. 

41.  Of  perfect  Contentment. 

42.  Examples  of  the  Variety  of 

Fortune. 

43.  Of  those  that  were  twice  out- 

lawed and  banished :  of  L. 
Sylla  and  Q.  Metellus. 

44.  Of  another  Metellus. 

45.  Of  the  Emperor  Augustus. 


172 


Contents  of  the  Seventh  Booh. 


CHAP. 

46.  Of  Men  deemed  most  happy 

by  the  Gods. 

47.  Who  was  ordered  to  be  wor- 

shipped as  a  God  while  he 
lived. 

48.  Of  those    that    lived   longer 

than  others. 

49.  Of     different    Nativities     of 

Men. 

50.  Many    Examples    of   strange 

Accidents  in  Sickness. 

51.  Of  the  Signs  of  Death. 

52.  Of  those  that  revived  when 


CHAP. 

they  were  carried  forth  (to 
be  buried). 

53.  Of  sudden  Death. 

54.  Of  Sepulchres  and  Burials. 

55.  Of  the  Soul :  or  the  Manes. 

56.  The  first  Inventors  of  many 

Things. 

57.  Wherein     all     Nations    first 

agreed. 

58.  Of  ancient  Letters. 

59.  The  Beginning  of  Barbers  at 

Rome. 

60.  When  first  Dials. 


In  sum,  there  are  in  this  Book,  of  Histories  and  Observations,  747. 


LATIN  AUTHORS  ABSTRACTED  : 

Verrius  Flaccus,  Cn.  Gellius,  Licinius  Mutianus,  Mutius,  Massurius, 
Agrippina  wife  of  Claudim,  M.  Cicero,  Asinius  Pollio,  Messala,  Rufus, 
Cornelius  Nepos,  Virgil,  Livy,  Cordus,  Melissus,  Sebosus,  Cornelius  Celsus, 
MaximusValerius,  Trogus,  Nigidius  Figulus,  Pomponius  Atticus,  Pedianus 
Asconius,  Salinus,  Cato  Censorius,  Fabius  Vestalis. 

FOREIGN  WRITERS: 

Herodotus,  Aristeas,  Beto,  Isigonus,  Crates,  Agatharddes,  Callipnanes, 
Aristotle,  Nymphodorus,  Apollonides,  Philarchus,  Damon,  Megasthenes, 
Ctesias,  Tauron,  Eudoxus,  Onesicritus,  Clitarchus,  Duris,  Artemidorus, 
Hippocrates  the  Physician,  Asclepiander  the  Physician,  Hesiodus,  Anacreon, 
Theopompus,  Hellanicus,  Damasthes,  Ephorus,  Epigenes,  Berosus,  Pessiris, 
Necepsus,  Alexander  Polyhistor,  Xenophon,  Callimachus,  Democritus,  Duil- 
lius,  Polyhistor  the  Historian,  Strata  who  wrote  against  the  Propositions  and 
Theorems  of  Ephorus,  Heraclides  Ponticus,  Asclepiades  who  wrote  Trago- 
damena,  Philostephanus,  Hegesias,  Archimachus,  Thucydides,  Mnesigiton, 
Xenagoras,  Afetrodorus  Scepsius,  Anticlides,  and  Critodemus. 


THE  SEVENTH  BOOK 


OP   THE 


HISTORY   OF   NATURE, 


WRITTEN    BY 


C.  PLINIUS  SECUNDUS. 


THE  PREFACE. 

BW-5SES8HUS  we  have  in  the  former  Books  treated  of 
the  World,  and  of  the  Lands,  Nations,  Seas, 
Islands,  and  remarkable  Cities  therein  con- 
tained. It  remainetli  now  to  discourse  of  the 
Nature  of  the  Living  Creatures  comprised  within 
the  same :  a  point  which  would  require  as  deep 
a  Contemplation  as  any  other  Part  whatsoever,  if  the  Mind 
of  Man  were  able  to  comprehend  all  the  Things.  By  right 
the  chief  place  is  assigned  to  Man,  for  whose  sake  it  appears 
that  Nature  produced  all  other  Creatures ;  though  this  great 
favour  of  hers  is  severe  as  set  against  all  her  other  Gifts :  so 
that  it  is  hard  to  judge  whether  she  is  a  kinder  Parent  to 
Man,  or  a  cruel  Step-mother.  For,  in  preference  to  all  other 
Living  Creatures,  the  one  she  hath  clothed  with  the  Riches  of 
others :  to  the  rest  she  hath  assigned  a  variety  of  Coverings : 
as  Shells,  Barks,  Hard  Hides,  Spines,  Shag,  Bristles,  Hair, 
Feathers,  Quills,  Scales,  and  Fleeces.  The  Trunks  and 


174  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VII. 

Stems  of  Trees  she  hath  defended  with  Bark,  which  is  some- 
times double,  against  the  injuries  both  of  Heat  and  Cold ! 
Man  alone  she  hath  cast  all  Naked  upon  the  bare  Earth, 
even  on'  his  Birth-day,  immediately  to  cry  and  lament :  so 
that  among  so  many  Living  Creatures  there  is  none  subject 
to  shed  Tears  and  Weep  like  him  from  the  very  onset  of  his 
Existence.  And  verily,  however  forward  and  active  we  may 
be,  to  no  one  is  it  given  to  laugh  before  he  is  Forty  Days  old. 
From  this  glimmering  of  Light  he  is  bound  fast,  and  hath 
no  Member  at  liberty ;  a  thing  which  is  not  practised  upon 
the  Young  of  any  Wild  Beast  among  us.  The  Child  thus 
unhappily  born,  and  who  is  to  rule  all  other,  lieth  bound1 
Hand  and  Foot,  weeping  and  crying ;  and  .receiveth  the 
auspices  of  Life  with  Punishments,  to  make  satisfaction. for 
this  only  Fault,  that  he  is  born  Alive.  What  madness  in 
such  as  think  this  the  proper  Beginning  of  those  who  are 
born  to  be  proud  !  The  first  Hope  of  our  Strength,  the  first 
gift  that  Time  affordeth  us,  maketh  us  no  better  than  four- 
footed  Beasts.  How  long  ere  we  can  go  alone  !  How  long- 
before  we  can  speak,  feed  ourselves  !  How  long  continueth 
the  Crown  of  our  Heads  to  palpitate, — the  mark  of  our  ex- 
ceeding great  weakness  above  all  other  Creatures !  Then 
the  Sicknesses,  and  so  many  Medicines  devised  against  these 
Maladies :  besides  the  new  Diseases  that  spring  up  to 
overcome  us.  Other  Living  Creatures  understand  their 
own  Nature ;  some  assume  the  use  of  their  swift  Feet, 
others  of  their  Wings ;  some  are  Strong ;  others  able  to 
Swim ;  but  Man  knoweth  nothing  unless  he  be  taught : 
not  even  to  speak,  or  go,  or  eat :  arid,  in  short,  -he  is 
naturally  good  at  nothing  but  to  weep.  And  hence  some 
have  insisted  on  it,  that  it  is  best  for  a  man  never  to  have 
been  born,  or  else  speedily  to  die.  To  one  only,  of  living 

1  The  artificial  bandages  inflicted  on  new-born  children  are  the  swad- 
dling-clothes referred  to  in  St.  Luke's  Gospel,  c.  ii.  v.  7 ;  but  they  can 
scarcely  be  numbered  among  the  necessary  evils  of  humanity,  for  they 
have  long  since  been  abolished  in  England.  In  the  seventh  chapter  of 
this  Book  the  Author  dwells  again  on  the  littleness  and  misery  of  the 
human  race. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  175 

Creatures  is  it  given  to  mourn,  one  only  is  guilty  of  excess, 
and  that  in  a  vast  variety  of  ways,  and  through  every  Mem- 
ber that  he  has.  Who  but  we  are  ambitious  ?  Who  but 
we  are  avaricious  ?  None  but  we  possess  the  extravagant 
desire  of  living,  are  superstitious,  anxious  for  our  burial, 
and  what  shall  be  our  fate  when  we  are  gone.  To  none  is 
Life  more  frail ;  yet  to  no  Creature  is  there  a  greater  craving 
after  every  thing ;  none  suffereth  under  a  more  terrifying 
Fear ;  and  none  more  furious  in  his  Rage.  To  conclude,  other 
Animals  live  orderly  according  to  their  kind :  we  see  them 
flock  together,  and  stand  against  others  of  a  contrary  kind; 
the  Lions,  though  savage,  fight  not  one  with  another ; 
Serpents  sting  not  Serpents :  and  even  the  very  Beasts  and 
Fishes  of  the  Sea  war  not  upon  their  own  kind :  but,  by  Her- 
cules !  the  greatest  part  of  the  evils  that  happen  to  Men  are 
from  the  hand  of  Man  himself. 

CHAPTER  I. 
The  wonderful  Forms  of  Nations. 

IN  our  reports  of  Nations  we  have  spoken  in  general  of 
the  Human  Race  spread  over  the  Face  of  the  Earth.  Neither 
is  it  our  purpose  at  present  to  describe  particularly  all  their 
numberless  Customs  and  Manners  of  Life,  which  are  as 
many  as  there  are  Assemblies  of  Men.  However,  I  think  it 
good  not  to  omit  all,  but  to  make  relation  of  some  things 
concerning  those  People  especially  who  live  furthest  from 
the  Sea;  among  whom,  I  doubt  not  but  I  shall  find  such 
matter  as  to  most  Men  will  seem  both  prodigious  and 
incredible.  For  whoever  believed  that  there  were  Ethio- 
pians before  he  saw  them?  what  is  it  that  seemeth  not  a 
Wonder  at  the  First  Sight?  how  many  things  are  judged 
impossible  before  they  are  done?  arid  the  Power  and  Ma- 
jesty of  Nature  in  every  particular  action  seemeth  incre- 
dible, if  we  consider  the  same  severally,  and  do  not  em- 
brace the  whole  at  once  in  the  Mind.  For,  to  say  nothing 
of  the  Peacocks'  Feathers,  of  the  Spots  of  Tigers  and  Pan- 
thers, of  the  Colours  that  ornament  so  many  Creatures 


176  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

besides :  let  us  come  to  one  only  point,  which  to  speak  of 
seemeth  small,  but  being  deeply  weighed,  is  a  matter  of 
exceeding  great  regard ;  and  that  is,  the  Speech  of  so 
many  Nations ;  so  many  Tongues ;  so  much  Variety  of 
Utterance,  that  a  Foreigner  seems  to  be  something  different 
from  a  Man.  Then  to  view  the  variety  that  appeareth  in 
our  Face  and  Countenance ;  although  there  be  not  more 
than  Ten  Members  or  a  few  more,  among  so  many  thousand 
of  these,  not  Two  Persons  are  to  be  found  who  are  not 
distinct  in  Likeness :  a  thing  which  no  Art  can  perform,  in 
a  small  number  out  of  so  many.  And  yet  thus  much  must 
I  advertise  my  Readers,  that  I  will  not  pawn  my  credit 
for  many  things  that  I  shall  deliver;  but  I  will  rather 
direct  them  to  the  Authors,  who  will  answer  them  in 
all  doubtful  points :  only  let  them  not  think  much  to  follow 
the  Greeks,  whose  Diligence  hath  been  greater,  and  their 
Attention  of  longer  standing. 

CHAPTER  II. 
Of  the  Scythians,  and  the  Diversity  of  other  Nations.1 

THAT  there  are  Scythians,  and  even  many  kinds  of 
them,  who  feed  ordinarily  on  Man's  Flesh,  we  have  shewn 

1  The  belief  of  the  ancients  in  the  existence  of  many  anomalous  races 
of  mankind,  was  a  portion  of  the  science  of  the  age ;  and  not  to  have 
given  it  credit,  and  a  place  in  his  work,  would  have  subjected  the  author 
to  as  much  reproach  for  scepticism,  as  the  notice  he  has  taken  of  them 
has  done  for  his  alledged  credulity.  And  so  far  as  Greek  authority  ex- 
tended, the  degree  of  credit  which  Pliny  assigned  to  these  strange  races, 
appears  to  have  heen  well  founded ;  for  except  in  one  or  two  instances, 
the  errors  appear  to  have  sprung  from  misinterpretation,  rather  than 
from  a  positive  departure  from  truth.  Aristotle  is  sufficient  authority 
for  the  existence  of  a  race  of  pigmies,  who  are  also  mentioned  by  Hero- 
dotus ;  and  in  more  modern  times  that  excellent  naturalist  Belon  is  satis- 
fied concerning  them.  Nor  can  we,  even  now,  refuse  to  admit  the  possi- 
bility of  finding  their  representatives  in  the  Bushmen  still  existing  in 
Southern  Africa.  On  the  other  hand,  the  existence  of  men  of  enormous 
stature,  of  which  some  stupendous  instances  are  given  by  Pliny  (b.  vii. 
c.  xvi.),  is  attested  by  profane  as  well  as  by  sacred  history.  Thus  Pau- 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  177 

already,  (Book  iv.  1 2 ;  vi.  1 .)  The  thing  itself  would  be  thought 
incredible,  if  we  did  not  consider  that  in  the  very  Middle  of 
the  World,  even  in  Sicily  and  Italy,  there  have  been  Nations  of 
such  Monsters,  as  the  Cyclopae  and  Lystrigonae :  and  also  very 

sanias  (in  his  "  Atticks,"  quoted  by  Bishop  Cumberland  in  his  translation 
of  Sanchoniatho)  says,  that  he  saw  in  the  Upper  Lydia  bones  whose 
figure  would  satisfy  any  man  that  they  were  men's  bones,  but  their  big- 
ness was  above  the  now  known  size  of  men.  He  also  mentions  the  bones 
of  Asterius,  in  the  neighbouring  country  of  the  Milesians ;  giving  the 
dimensions  of  his  body  to  be  no  less  than  ten  cubits  long,  and  that  he 
was  the  son  of  Anax ;  a  name  singularly  corresponding  with  a  race  men- 
tioned by  Moses,  and  the  sight  of  whom  terrified  and  humbled  the  Is- 
raelitish  spies.  It  is  not  a  little  strange,  as  Bishop  Cumberland  remarks, 
quoting  from  Cicero  "  de  Natura  Deorum,"  that  there  is  reason  to  believe, 
one  of  the  very  ancient  and  gigantic  persons  known  under  the  name  of 
Hercules  had  six  fingers  on  each  hand,  as  is  also  noticed  of  the  last  de- 
scendants of  this  mighty  race,  in  the  second  book  of  Samuel,  c.  xxi.  The 
tradition  that  such  enormous  people  existed  in  the  early  ages  of  the 
world  is  often  referred  to  by  Homer,  and  other  ancient  writers,  who 
drew  from  thence  the  erroneous  conclusion,  that  the  whole  human  race 
had,  since  their  day,  become  gradually  weaker  and  more  diminutive ; 
whereas,  in  the  only  authentic  history  of  these  remote  ages  it  is  clearly 
intimated,  that  this  vast  stature  was  limited  to  particular  families  or 
nations,  who  even  at  that  time  were  thought  remarkable  by  all  besides ; 
and  who  were  finally  exterminated  by  their  neighbours,  perhaps  as  the 
only  resource  against  their  violence.  The  Macrocephali,  or  long  heads, 
(mentioned  b.  vi.  c.  4)  may  be  supposed  to  have  owed  their  peculiarity  to 
the  habit  of  employing  pressure  to  mould  their  heads  in  early  infancy 
into  the  compressed  and  elevated  form,  as  is  now  practised  by  some  tribes 
on  the  continent  of  America ;  and  such  as  are  mentioned  with  exceedingly 
short  necks  may,  perhaps,  have  been  marked  only  with  a  personal  de- 
formity ;  but  the  people  with  intensely  black  skin,  to  all  of  whom,  how- 
ever otherwise  different,  the  ancients  seem  to  have  assigned  indiscrimi- 
nately the  name  of  Ethiopians,  are  judged  by  Pliny  to  display  a  more 
remarkable  phenomenon  than  all  the  strange  forms  he  has  occasion  to 
notice ;  as  we  also  should  probably  do,  if  living  instances  had  not  ren- 
dered it  common.  We  may  include  in  another  section  those  singular 
examples  of  the  human  race,  which  the  author  supposes  to  be  comprised 
in  nations,  but  which  are  more  probably  reported  as  of  rare  or  casual 
occurrence,  or  perhaps  nothing  beyond  an  accidental  monstrosity.  Such 
we  know  to  be  the  case  with  the  Albinoes,  with  white  hair  and  tender 
eyes  ;  and  perhaps  also  the  monoculous  king,  and  the  Arimaspians,  who 
are  mentioned  also  by  Herodotus,  together  with  the  other  Cyclopaean 
VOL.  n.  N 


178  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VII. 

lately,  on  the  other  side  of  the  Alps,1  there  are  those  that 
kill  Men  for  Sacrifice,  after  the  manner  of  those  (Scythian) 
people,  which  differs  but  little  from  eating  their  Flesh. 
Moreover,  near  to  those  Scythians  that  inhabit  Northward, 
not  far  from  the  very  rising  of  the  North-east  Wind,  and 

people,  whose  singularities  may  have  referred  to  some  manner  in  the 
habitual  use  of  the  organ,  rather  than  to  an  actual  deformity.  A  third 
section  of  these  supposed  anomalous  people  may  obviously  be  referred  to 
the  quadrumanous  tribes :  a  class  of  creatures  so  nearly  approaching  to 
the  external  form  of  humanity,  that  we  cannot  feel  surprised  if  ignorant 
travellers,  who  viewed  only  at  a  distance,  and  with  minds  prepared  to 
welcome  every  wonder  —  the  oran  outang  and  pongo  —  were  not  able  to 
discern  a  generic  difference  between  them  and  the  truly  human  race. 
Such  were  the  hairy  men  and  women  mentioned  in  the  31st  chapter  of 
this  book,  the  satyrs,  Choromandse,  and  people  with  no  noses,  or  having 
tails,  a  figure  of  the  latter  being  found  on  an  alraxis,  or  amulet,  engraved 
by  Montfau9on ;  but  through  the  whole  of  his  narrative  we  observe  that 
the  author  is  careful  to  give  his  authorities,  as  being  aware  that  what 
appeared  so  strange  must  be  made  to  rest  upon  the  credit  of  those  who 
had  originally  reported  it.  Some  of  these  instances,  indeed,  admit  of  no 
interpretation  that  we  are  able  to  afford  them ;  but  in  regard  to  one  of 
the  strangest  of  them,  Purchas  gives  the  authority  of  Fitch,  an  English- 
man :  "  I  went  from  Bengala  into  the  country  of  Couche,  not  far  from 
Cauchin  China.  The  people  have  ears  which  be  marvellous  great,  of  a 
span  long,  which  they  draw  out  in  length  by  devices  when  they  be 
young."  In  addition  to  the  strange  forms  of  men  mentioned  by  Pliny, 
Diodorus  Siculus  mentions  some  in  an  island  discovered  by  Jambulus, 
whose  bones  were  as  flexible  as  nerves  (tendons)  :  the  holes  of  their  ears 
far  wider  than  ours ;  and  with  tongues  deeply  cloven,  so  that  they  imi- 
tate the  song  of  birds,  and  can  ordinarily  speak  to  two  men  at  once. — 
Wern.  Club. 

1  The  people  here  referred  to  are  the  Gauls.  Caesar  (de  Bell.  Gall, 
lib.  vi.)  says,  "  The  whole  nation  of  the  Gauls  is  much  addicted  to  reli- 
gious observances,  and  on  that  account,  those  who  are  attacked  by  any  of 
the  more  serious  diseases,  and  those  who  are  involved  in  the  danger  of 
warfare,  either  offer  human  sacrifices  or  make  a  vow  that  they  will  offer 
them,  and  they  employ  the  Druids  to  officiate  at  their  sacrifices ;  for  they 
consider  that  the  favour  of  the  immortal  gods  cannot  be  conciliated, 
unless  the  life  of  one  man  be  offered  up  for  that  of  another :  they  have  also 
sacrifices  of  the  same  kind  appointed  on  behalf  of  the  state.  Some  have 
images  of  enormous  size,  the  limbs  of  which  they  make  of  wicker-work, 
and  fill  with  living  men,  and  setting  them  on  fire,  the  men  are  destroyed 
by  the  flames." — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  179 

about  that  Cave  out  of  which  that  Wind  is  said  to  issue, 
which  place  they  call  Gesclithron,  the  Arimaspi  are  reported 
to  dwell,  who,  as  we  have  said,1  are  distinguished  by  having 
One  Eye  in  the  midst  of  their  Forehead,  and  who  are  in 
constant  War  about  the  Mines  with  the  Griffins,2  a  flying 
kind  of  Wild  Beasts,  which  used  to  fetch  Gold  out  of  the 
Veins  of  those  Mines ;  which  savage  Beasts  (as  many  Authors 
have  recorded,  and  particularly  Herodotus  and  Aristeas  the 
Proconnesian,  two  Writers  of  greatest  Name)  strive  as 
eagerly  to  keep  the  Gold  as  the  Arimaspi  to  snatch  it  from 
them.  Above  those  other  Scythians  called  Anthropophagi, 
there  is  a  Country  named  Abarimon,  within  a  certain 
extensive  Valley  of  the  Mountain  Imaus,  in  which  are 
Wild  Men,  wandering  about  among  brute  Beasts,  and 
having  their  Feet  directed  backward  behind  the  Calves 
of  their  Legs,  but  able  to  run  very  swiftly.  This  kind 
of  Men  cannot  live  in  any  other  Climate  than  their  own, 
which  is  the  reason  that  they  cannot  be  conveyed  to  the 
Kings  that  border  upon  them ;  nor  could  they  be  brought 
to  Alexander  the  Great,  as  Beton  hath  reported,  who  was 
the  Surveyor  of  the  Journeys  of  that  Prince.  The  former 
Anthropophagi  whom  we  have  placed  in  the  North,  Ten 
Days'  Journey  above  the  River  Borysthenes,  are  accustomed 
to  drink  out  of  the  Skulls  of  Men,  and  to  wear  the  Skins 
with  the  Hair  for  Mantles  before  their  Breasts,  according 
to  Isigonus  the  Nicean.  The  same  Writer  affirmeth,  that 
in  Albania  there  are  produced  certain  Individuals  who  have 
the  Sight  of  their  Eyes  of  a  bluish-grey  Colour,  who  from 
their  Childhood  are  grey-headed,  and  can  see  better  by 
Night  than  by  Day.  He  reporteth  also  that  Ten  Days' 
Journey  above  the  Borysthenes,  there  are  the  Sauromatae, 
who  never  eat  but  once  in  Three  Days.  Crates  of  Per- 
gamus  saith,  that  in  Hellespont  about  Pariuni  there  was 
a  kind  of  Men,  whom  he  nameth  Ophiogenes,  who,  if  one 
were  stung  by  a  Serpent,  with  touching  only  will  ease  it; 
and  if  they  lay  their  Hand  upon  the  Wound,  are  able  to 

1  Lib.  iv.  12,  and  lib.  vi.  17. 

2  The  griffins  are  again  mentioned,  book  x.  chap.  49. —  Wern.  Club. 


180  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

draw  forth  all  the  Poison  from  the  Body.  Varro  also  testi- 
n'eth,  that  even  at  this  Day  there  are  a  few  who  cure  the 
Stinging  of  Serpents  with  their  Spittle.  Agathar tides 
writeth,  that  in  Africa  the  Psylli,1  who  are  so  called  from 
king  Psyllus,  whose  Sepulchre  is  in  a  part  of  the  Greater 

1  The  earliest  existing  reference  that  we  have  to  the  Psylli,  or  serpent- 
charmers,  is  found  in  the  58th  Psalm,  the  8th  verse  ;  and  the  art  is  yet 
practised  in  the  East.  These  men  were,  and  still  are,  distinct  tribes  in 
their  several  countries,  professing  the  power  they  claim  to  be  an  inherent 
and  natural  function.  Lucan,  in  the  5th  book  of  his  "Pharsalia,"  gives  a 
complete  exposition  of  the  ancient  belief  concerning  the  charming  of  ser- 
pents. He  chiefly  describes  the  measures  which  were  taken  to  protect 
the  Roman  camp.  When  the  encampment  was  marked  out,  the  serpent- 
charmers  marched  around  it  chanting  their  charms,  the  mystic  sounds  of 
which  chased  the  serpents  far  away.  But  not  trusting  entirely  to  this, 
fires  of  different  kinds  of  wood  were  kept  up  beyond  the  furthest  tents, 
the  smell  of  which  prevented  the  serpents  from  approaching.  Thus  the 
camp  was  protected  during  the  night.  But  if  any  soldier  when  abroad  in 
the  day  time  happened  to  be  bitten,  the  Psylli  exerted  their  power  to 
effect  a  cure.  First  they  rubbed  the  wounded  part  around  with  saliva, 
to  prevent,  as  they  said,  the  poison  from  spreading  while  they  assayed 
their  arts  to  extract  it :  — 

"  Then  sudden  he  begins  the  magic  song, 

And  rolls  the  numbers  hasty  o'er  his  tongue ; 

Swift  he  runs  on,  nor  pauses  once  for  breath, 

To  stop  the  progress  of  approaching  death ; 

He  fears  the  cure  might  suffer  by  delay, 

And  life  be  lost  but  for  a  moment's  stay. 

Thus  oft,  though  deep  within  the  veins  it  lies, 

By  magic  numbers  chased,  the  mischief  flies : 

But  if  it  hear  too  slow,  if  still  it  stay, 

And  scorn  the  potent  charmer  to  obey ; 

With  forceful  lips  he  fastens  on  the  wound, 

Drains  out  and  spits  the  venom  to  the  ground." — ROWE. 
Lane  ("Modern  Egyptian")  gives  a  particular  account  of  the  different 
methods  made  use  of  by  the  Psylli  of  the  present  day  when  exhibiting 
their  supposed  powers.  As  to  the  pretensions  of  ancient  as  well  as  mo- 
dern serpent-charmers,  of  being  in  their  own  persons  insensible  to  the 
poison  of  the  reptiles,  there  is  no  satisfactory  proof  of  it :  indeed  numerous 
instances  to  the  contrary  have  occurred ;  and  where  they  escape  unharmed, 
it  is  to  be  attributed  to  the  poison  fangs  having  been  previously  extracted, 
or  to  their  fearless  handling  of  the  deadly  creatures. — See  the  note  on 
Ps.  Iviii.  5,  in  the  "Pictorial  Bible,"  by  Dr.  Kitto.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  181 

Syrtes,  could  do  the  like.  These  Men  had  naturally  in 
their  Bodies  a  Poison  fatal  to  Serpents,  so  that  by  the 
Smell  of  it  they  were  able  to  stupify  them.  And  by 
this  means  they  used  to  try  the  Chastity  of  their  Wives. 
For  as  soon  as  their  Children  were  born,  they  exposed 
them  to  the  most  furious  Serpents ;  for  these  would  not  fly 
from  them  if  they  were  begotten  in  Adultery.  This  Nation, 
in  general,  hath  been  almost  entirely  extirpated  by  the 
Nasamones,  who  now  inhabit  those  parts ;  but  a  kind  of 
these  Men  remaineth  still,  descended  from  those  who  fled, 
or  else  who  were  not  present  when  the  Battle  was  fought;  but 
they  exist  in  small  Companies.  In  like  manner,  the  Nation 
of  the  Marsi  continue  in  Italy,  who  preserve  the  Reputa- 
tion of  being  descended  from  a  Son  of  Circe,  and  therefore 
possess  the  same  natural  faculty.  Yet  so  it  is  that  all  Men 
possess  within  them  that  which  is  Poison  to  Serpents:  for 
it  is  reported  they  flee  from  Man's  Spittle,  as  they  do  from 
the  touch  of  Scalding  Water;  but  if  it  penetrate  into  their 
Mouth,  especially  if  it  come  from  a  Man  that  is  fasting,  it  is 
present  Death.  Beyond  the  Nasamonse,  and  their  Neigh- 
bours the  Machlyae,  there  are  Androgyni,  of  a  double  Nature, 
inter  se  vicibus  coeuntes,  as  Calliphanes  reporteth.  Aristotle 
adds,  that  their  Right  Breast  is  like  that  of  a  Man,  and  the 
Left  that  of  a  Woman.  In  the  same  Africa  Isigonus  and  Nym- 
phodorus  avouch  that  there  are  certain  Families  of  Charmers: 
who,  if  they  praise,  destroy  the  Sheep,  cause  .the  Trees  to 
wither,  and  Infants  to  pine  away  to  death.  Isigonus  addeth 
further,  that  there  are  People  of  the  same  kind  among  the  Tri- 
balli  and  Illyrii,  who  charrn  with  their  Eyesight,  and  kill  those 
whom  they  look  upon  for  a  long  time,  especially  if  their  Eyes 
look  angry  :  which  Evil  of  theirs  is  more  quickly  felt  by  those 
who  are  above  the  age  of  Puberty.  It  is  worthy  of  remark, 
that  they  have  two  Pupils  in  each  Eye.  Of  this  kind  Apol- 
lonides  saith,  there  are  also  Women  in  Scythia  named  Bithyae. 
Philarchus  witnesseth,  that  in  Pontus  also  the  Race  of 
the  Thibii,  and  many  others,  have  the  same  Quality  :  of 
whom  he  giveth  these  marks,  that  in  one  of  their  Eyes  they 
have  two  Pupils,  and  in  the  other  the  Resemblance  of  a 


182  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VII. 

Horse.  He  reporteth  also,  that  they  cannot  sink  in  the 
Water,  not  even  if  weighed  down  with  Apparel.  Damon 
reports  that  there  is  a  sort  of  People  not  unlike  these  in 
Ethiopia,  called  Pharnaces,  whose  Sweat,  if  it  chance  to 
touch  a  Man's  Body,  presently  causeth  him  to  waste  away. 
And  Cicero,1  a  Writer  of  our  own,  testifieth,  that  all  Women 
everywhere  who  have  double  Pupils  in  their  Eyes  inflict 
Injury  with  their  Sight.  In  such  manner  Nature,  having 
generated  in  Man  this  custom  of  Wild  Beasts,  to  feed  upon 
the  Bowels  of  Men,  hath  taken  Delight  also  to  generate 
Poisons  in  their  whole  Body,  and  even  in  the  very  Eyes  of 
some;  that  there  should  be  no  evil  in  the  whole  World,  that 
might  not  be  likewise  found  in  Man.  Not  far  from  the  City 
of  Rome,  within  the  Territory  of  the  Falisci,  there  are  a  few 
Families  called  Hirpise,  which  at  their  Yearly  Sacrifice  cele- 
brated to  Apollo  upon  the  Mount  Soracte,  walk  upon  the 
pile  of  Wood  as  it  is  on  Fire  without  being  burnt.2  On 
which  account,  by  a  perpetual  Act  of  the  Senate,  they  possess 
an  Immunity  from  War  and  all  other  Public  Services. 
Some  men  have  certain  Parts  of  their  Bodies  naturally 
working  surprising  Effects.  As  for  example,  King  Pyrrhus,3 
whose  Great  Toe  of  his  Right  Foot  was  a  Remedy  by  its 

1  This  must  have  been  in  some  of  the  lost  works  of  Cicero,  as  no 
such  opinion  is  found  in  any  of  his  extant  writings. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  The  art  of  treading  bare-foot  on  burning  embers,  red-hot  iron,  &c., 
which  has  its  professors  in  the  present  day,  is  from  this  passage  shewn  to 
be  of  great  antiquity ;  Virgil  also  alludes  to  the  same  when  he  speaks  of 
the  annual  festival  of  the  Hirpi  on  Mount  Soracte,  in  Etruria,  where 
Chlorcus,  the  priest  of  Cybele,  thus  addresses  Apollo  (yEn.  xi.  785)  : — 

"  O  patron  of  Soracte's  high  abodes ! 

Phoebus,  the  ruling  power  among  the  gods ! 

Whom  first  we  serve :  whole  woods  of  unctuous  pine 

Are  fell'd  for  thee,  and  to  thy  glory  shine  ; 

By  thee  protected,  with  our  naked  soles, 

Through  flames  unsinged  we  march,  and  tread  the  kindled  coals." 

DRYDEN. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  According  to  Plutarch,  in  his  life  of  Pyrrhus,  the  person  of  this  king 
was  very  extraordinary  : — "  Instead  of  teeth  in  his  upper  jaw,  he  had  one 
continued  bone,  marked  with  small  lines  resembling  the  divisions  of  a  row 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  183 

Touch  for  them  that  had  Diseased  Spleens.  And  they  say,  that 
when  the  rest  of  his  Body  was  Burned  that  Great  Toe  could 
not  be  consumed :  so  that  it  was  preserved  in  a  little  Case  in 
the  Temple.  But  principally  India  and  the  whole  Tract  of 
Ethiopia  is  full  of  these  wonderful  Things.  The  greatest  Ani- 
mals are  bred  in  India,  as  will  appear  by  their  Dogs,1  which 
are  much  greater  than  those  of  other  Parts.  And  there  are 
Trees  growing  in  that  Country  to  such  a  Height,  that  a 
Man  cannot  shoot  an  Arrow  over  them.  The  reason  of  this 
is  the  Goodness  of  the  Soil,  the  Temperature  of  the  Air,  and 
the  Abundance  of  Water :  which  is  the  cause  also  that  under 
a  single  Fig-tree,2  if  it  can  be  believed,  Squadrons  of  Horse- 
men may  stand.  There  are  Reeds  also  of  such  Length3  that 
between  every  Joint  they  will  yield  sufficient  to  make  Boats 
able  to  receive  three  Men.  There  are  many  Men  there  who 
are  above  five  Cubits  in  Height :  never  do  they  Spit :  they 
are  not  troubled  with  Pain  in  the  Head,  Toothache,  or  any 
Disease  of  the  Eyes,  and  seldom  of  any  other  Parts  of  the 
Body;  so  hardy  are  they  through  the  Moderate  Heat  of  the 
Sun.  There  are  certain  Philosophers,  whom  they  call  Gym- 
nosophistae,4  who  from  Sunrising  to  its  setting  persevere  in 
standing  and  looking  full  against  the  Sun  without  once 

of  teeth.  It  was  believed  that  he  cured  the  swelling  of  the  spleen,  by 
sacrificing  a  white  cock,  and  with  his  right  foot  gently  pressing  the  part 
affected,  the  patients  lying  on  their  backs  for  that  purpose.  There  was 
no  person,  however  poor  or  mean,  to  whom  he  refused  this  relief,  if 
requested.  He  received  no  reward,  except  the  cock  for  sacrifice ;  and  this 
present  was  very  agreeable  to  him.  It  is  also  said  that  the  great  toe  of 
that  foot  had  a  divine  virtue  in  it ;  for,  after  his  death,  when  the  rest  of 
his  body  was  consumed,  that  toe  was  found  entire  and  untouched  by  the 
flames." — LANGHORNE.  The  reader  will  here  be  reminded  of  the  royal 
touch  for  the  cure  of  scrofulous  diseases  once  exercised  by  our  own  kings. 
—  Wern.  Club. 

1  Pliny  (lib.  viii.  40)  tells  us  of  one  of  these  Indian  dogs  that  con- 
quered a  lion. — Wern.  Club. 

2  The  Ficus  Religiosa,  well  known  to  modern  travellers. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Lib.  xvi.  36. 

4  It  is  remarkable  to  observe  how  exactly  the  austerities  of  these 
ancient  gymnosophists  are  still  practised  by  the  Fakirs  of  India.—  Wern. 
Club. 


184  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

moving  their  Eyes :  and  from  Morning  to  Night  stand  some- 
times on  one  Leg,  and  sometimes  on  the  other,  on  the  Burn- 
ing Sand.  Meyasthenes  writeth,  that  on  a  Mountain  named 
Milo,  there  are  Men  whose  Feet  are  turned  backward,  and 
on  each  Foot  they  have  eight  Toes.  And  in  many  other 
Mountains  there  is  a  kind  of  Men  with  Heads  like  Dog's,  clad 

O     ' 

all  over  with  the  Skins  of  Wild  Beasts,  and  who  instead  of 
Speech  used  to  Bark:  they  are  armed  with  Nails,  and  they  live 
on  the  Prey  which  they  get  by  Hunting  Beasts,  and  Fowling. 
Ctesias  writeth  that  there  were  known  of  them  above 
120,000  in  number ;  and  that  in  a  certain  Country  of 
India  the  Women  bear  but  once  in  their  Life,  and  their 
Infants  presently  become  Grey.  Likewise,  that  there  is  a 
kind  of  People  named  Monoscelli,  which  have  but  one  Leg, 
but  they  are  exceedingly  Swift,  and  proceed  by  Hopping. 
These  same  Men  are  also  called  Sciopodse,  because  in  the 
hottest  Season  they  lie  along  on  their  Back  on  the  Ground, 
and  defend  themselves  with  the  Shadow  of  their  Feet :  and 
these  People  are  not  far  from  the  Trogloditae.  Again,  be- 
yond these  westward,  some  there  are  without  a  Neck,  but 
carrying  their  Eyes  in  their  Shoulders.  Among  the  Western 
Mountains  of  India  there  are  the  Satyri  (the  Country  where 
they  are  is  called  the  Region  of  the  Cartaduli),  the  swiftest 
of  all  Animals :  which  sometimes  run  on  four  Legs,  at 
others  on  two  Feet  like  Men  :  but  so  light-footed  are  they, 
that  unless  they  are  very  Old  or  Sick  they  cannot  be  taken. 
Tauron  writeth,  that  the  Choromandee  are  a  wild  People, 
without  any  Voice,  but  uttering  a  horrible  Noise :  their 
Bodies  Hairy,  their  Eyes  bluish-grey,  their  Teeth  like  Dogs. 
Eudoxus  saith,  that  in  the  South  Parts  of  India  the  Men 
have  Feet  a  Cubit  long,  but  those  of  the  Women1  are 
so  small  that  they  are  called  Struthopodes.  Megasthenes 
writeth,  that  among  the  Indian  Nomadse  there  is  a  Nation 

1  This  character  is  so  applicable  to  Chinese  women,  that  it  seems  to 
point  out  the  great  antiquity  to  which  the  strange  custom  of  binding  their 
feet  can  be  traced.  The  name  of  Struthopodes,  or  ostrich -footed,  can  only 
have  been  applied  to  them  by  foreigners,  but  is  not  badly  descriptive  of 
the  figure  of  this  artificial  deformity. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  185 

that  instead  of  Noses  have  only  two  small  Orifices,  and  after 
the  manner  of  Snakes  have  wiry  Legs,  and  are  named 
Syrictae.  In  the  utmost  Borders  of  India,  eastward,  about 
the  Source  of  the  Ganges,  there  is  a  Nation  called  the 
Asthomes,  having  no  Mouths :  hairy  over  the  whole  Body, 
but  clothed  with  the  Down  of  the  Branches  of  Trees :  they 
live  only  by  the  Vapour  and  Smell  which  they  draw  in  at 
their  Nostrils  :  no  Meat  or  Drink  do  they  take,  but  only 
various  pleasant  Odours  from  Roots,  Flowers,  and  Wild 
Fruits ;  which  they  carry  with  them  when  they  take  a  Long 
Journey,  because  they  would  not  miss  their  Smelling;  but  if 
the  Scent  be  a  little  too  strong  they  are  soon  deprived  of 
Life.  Higher  in  the  Country,  in  the  Edge  of  the  Mountains, 
the  Pygmaei  Spithamei  are  reported  to  be ;  which  are  three 
Spans  in  Length,  that  is,  not  exceeding  three  times  nine 
Inches.  The  Climate  is  healthy,  and  ever  like  the  Spring, 
by  reason  that  the  Mountains  are  on  the  North  side  of  them. 
And  these  People  Homer1  also  hath  reported  to  be  much 
annoyed  by  Cranes.  The  report  goeth,  that  in  the  Time  of 
Spring  they  set  out  all  in  a  great  Troop,  mounted  upon  the 
Backs  of  Rams  and  Goats,  armed  with  Darts,  to  go  down  to 
the  Sea-side,  and  devour  the  Eggs  and  Young  of  their 
Winged  prey.  For  three  Months  this  Expedition  continueth, 
for  otherwise  they  would  not  be  able  to  withstand  their  future 
Flocks.  Their  Cottages  are  made  of  Clay,  Feathers,  and 
Egg-shells.  Aristotle'2'  writeth,  that  the  Pygmsei  live  in 
Caves.  For  all  the  other  matters  he  reported  the  same  as 
all  the  rest.  Isigonus  saith,  that  the  kind  of  Indians  named 
Cyrni  live  a  hundred  and  forty  Years.  The  like  he  thinketh 
of  the  Ethiopian  Macrobii  and  the  Serae,  and  those  who 

1  Iliad,  lib.  iii.  6  :— 

"  So  when  inclement  winters  vex  the  plain 
With  piercing  frosts,  or  thick  descending  rain, 
To  warmer  seas  the  cranes  embodied  fly, 
With  noise,  and  order,  through  the  mid- way  sky : 
To  pygmy  nations  wounds  and  death  they  bring, 
And  all  the  war  descends  upon  the  wing." — POPE. 

5  Hist.  Anim.  lib.  viii.  15. 


186  History  of  Na  tyre.  [BooK  VIT. 

dwell  upon  Mount  Athos :  and  of  these  last,  because  they 
Feed  on  Vipers'1  Flesh,  and  therefore  it  is  that  no  offensive 
Creatures  are  found  on  their  Heads,  nor  on  their  Clothes. 
Onesicritus  affirmeth,  that  in  those  Parts  of  India  there  are 
no  Shadows,  that  the  Men  are  five  Cubits  and  two  Palms  in 
Stature,  that  they  live  one  hundred  and  thirty  Years  :  and 
never  bear  the  Marks  of  Age,  but  die  as  if  they  were  in  the 
middle  of  their  age.  Crates  of  Pergamus  nameth  those 
Indians,  who  live  above  an  hundred  Years,  Gymnetae :  but 
not  a  few  call  them  Macrobii.  Ctesias  saith  there  is  a  Race 
of  Indians,  named  Pandore,  inhabiting  certain  Valleys,  who 
live  two  hundred  Years :  in  their  youthful  Time  their  Hair  is 
White,  but  as  they  grow  old  it  becometh  Black.  On  the 
other  hand,  there  are  some  who  are  Neighbours  to  the 
Macrobii,  who  exceed  not  forty  Years,  and  their  Women 
bear  but  once  in  their  Lifetime.  And  this  also  is  avouched 
by  Agatharcides,  who  addeth,  that  they  feed  on  Locusts,  and 
are  swift  of  Foot.  Clitarchus  and  Megasthenes  name  them 
Mandri,  and  number  up  three  hundred  Villages  in  their 
Country :  also,  that  the  Women  bear  Children  when  they 
are  but  seven  Years  old,  and  are  aged  at  forty.  Artemi- 
dorus  affirmeth,  that  in  the  Island  Taprobana  the  People 
live  exceeding  long  without  any  Bodily  Infirmity.  Duris 
maketh  report,  that  certain  Indians  have  fellowship  with 
Beasts,  of  which  acquaintance  are  bred  a  mixed  and  half 
Savage  Race ;  that  among  the  Calingi,  a  Nation  of  India, 
the  Women  conceive  at  five  Years  of  Age,  and  live  not  above 
eight.  In  another  Tract  of  that  Country,  there  are  Men  with 
shaggy  Tails  and  of  great  Swiftness  :  and  some  again  that 
with  their  Ears  cover  their  whole  Body.  The  Orites  are 
divided  from  the  Indians  by  the  River  Arbis.  They  are 
acquainted  with  no  other  Food  but  Fish,  which  they  split 
in  Pieces  with  their  Nails,  and  Roast  against  the  Sun, 
and  then  make  Bread  of  it,  as  Clitarchus  makes  Report. 
Crates  of  Pergamus  saith,  that  the  Trogloditse  above  Ethiopia 
are  swifter  than  Horses,  and  that  there  are  Ethiopians  above 

1  Lib.  xxix.  6. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  187 

eight  Cubits  High :  that  this  Nation  of  Ethiopian  Nomades 
is  called  Syrbotse,  and  dwelleth  along  the  River  Astapus, 
toward  the  North.  The  Nation  called  Menismini  dwell 
Twenty  Days'  Journey  from  the  Ocean,  and  live  on  the  Milk 
of  certain  Animals  which  we  call  Cynocephali,1  of  which 
they  keep  Flocks  of  the  Females,  but  they  kill  the  Males, 
except  only  enough  to  preserve  the  Race.  In  the  Deserts  of 
Africa  you  will  meet  oftentimes  with  Appearances  in  the 
shape  of  Men,  but  they  vanish  in  an  instant.  Ingenious 
Nature  disposes  this  and  such-like  things,  as  a  Pastime  to 
her,  but  which  are  Miracles  to  us.  And  indeed,  who  is  able 
to  recount  every  one  of  her  Sports,  which  she  accomplishes 
daily  and  even  hourly  ?  Let  it  suffice  therefore,  in  order  to 
declare  her  Power,  that  we  have  set  down  those  prodigious 
Works  of  hers,  as  displayed  in  whole  Nations.  And  now  we 
proceed  to  a  few  Particulars  that  are  well  known  in  regard 
to  Man. 

CHAPTER  III. 

Of  Prodigious  Births* 

THAT  Women  may  bring  forth  three  at  one  Birth,  ap- 
peareth  evidently  by  the  example  of  the  Horatii  and  Curiatii. 
But  to  exceed  that  number  is  reputed  to  be  among  the  Por- 
tents ;  except  in  Egypt,  where  Women  are  more  fruitful  by 
drinking  the  Water  of  the  Nile.  Of  late  Years,  about  the 
latter  end  of  the  Reign  of  Divus  Augustus,  a  Woman  at  Ostia 
named  Fausta,  of  ordinary  Rank,  was  delivered  of  two 
Boys  and  as  many  Girls ;  but  this  was  a  Portent  beyond 

1  The  cynocephalus  anubis  of  modern  zoologists  is  without  doubt  here 
intended.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  "  Prodigious  births  :"  that  is,  not  simply  out  of  the  common  course 
of  nature,  but  such  as  were  believed  to  be  prophetic  of  some  remarkable 
events,  and  so  reported  by  augurs  to  the  proper  authorities.   What,  at  the 
end  of  this  chapter,  Pliny  reports  that  he  had  himself  seen,  is  of  no  uncom- 
mon occurrence,  and  would  be  regarded  among  us  as  nothing  beyond  a 
monstrous  birth,  an  irregular  formation  of  nature ;  but  the  incident  he 
mentions  last  can  only  be  regarded  as  a  proof  of  the  great  agitation  of  the 
public  mind,  at  a  period  when  the  danger  was  a  sufficient  motive  to  raise 
and  propagate  the  strangest  reports. — Wern.  Club. 


188  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

doubt  of  the  Famine  that  ensued.  In  Peloponnesus  also 
there  is  found  a  Woman,  who  brought  forth  at  four  Births 
twenty  Children,  and  the  greater  Part  of  them  lived. 
Trogus  is  the  authority,  that  in  Egypt  a  Woman  hath  borne 
seven  at  a  Birth.  It  falleth  out,  moreover,  that  there  come 
into  the  World  Children  of  both  Sexes  in  one,  whom  we  call 
Hermaphrodites.  In  old  Time  they  were  known  by  the 
Name  of  Androgyni,  and  reputed  for  Prodigies ;  but  now 
Men  take  Pleasure  in  them.  Pompey  the  Great,  in  the 
Theatre  which  he  adorned  with  remarkable  Ornaments,  as 
well  for  the  subject  as  the  most  exquisite  Hand  of  the  great 
Artists,  among  other  Images  represented  Eutichtt,  a  Woman 
of  Tralles,  who  after  she  had  borne  thirty  Births,  was  carried 
by  twenty  of  her  Children  to  the  Funeral  Fire  for  to  be 
burnt.  AlcippZ  was  delivered  of  an  Elephant,  and  that 
certainly  was  a  monstrous  Token.  Also  in  the  beginning  of 
the  Marsian  War  a  Bondwoman  brought  forth  a  Serpent.1 

1  We  know  how  prone  vulgar  ignorance  or  superstition  is  to  compare 
an  ordinary  monstrous  birth  to  some  fancied  animal.  Such  is  within  the 
knowledge  of  living  observers.  But  what  shall  we  say  to  the  following  ? 
"  Lemnius  tells  us  of  a  monster,  that  a  certain  woman  was  delivered  of, 
and  to  whom  he  himself  was  physician  and  present  at  the  sight,  which  at 
the  appearing  of  the  day  filled  all  the  chamber  with  roaring  and  crying, 
running  all  about  to  find  some  hole  to  creep  into-;  but  the  women  at  the 
length  stifled  and  smothered  it  with  pillows." —  Wanleys  Wonders  of  the 
Little  World.  And  from  the  same  authority : — "  Johannes  Naborowsky, 
a  noble  Polonian,  and  my  great  friend,  (says  Bartholini,  "Hist.  Anat.") 
told  me  at  Basil,  that  he  had  seen  in  his  country  two  little  fishes  without 
scales,  which  were  brought  forth  by  a  woman,  and  as  soon  as  they  came 
out  of  her  womb  did  swim  in  the  water  as  other  fish."  The  story  given 
by  Wormius,  concerning  the  birth  of  an  egg  from  a  woman  (and  of  which 
he  gives  a  figure  in  his  "  Museum  Wormianum,")  is  illustrated,  and  per- 
haps explained,  as  may  all  the  others  on  the  same  principle,  by  another 
given  in  Wanley's  book,  of  a  woman  "  of  good  quality,  who  had  made 
great  preparations  for  her  lying-in,  but  in  the  last  month  her  distension 
subsided,  and  it  is  confessed  that  she  plumped  herself  up  with  a  stuffing  of 
garments.  However,  the  time  must  come  at  last,  and  she  was  delivered 
of  a  creature,  very  like  unto  a  dormouse  of  the  greater  size,  which  to  the 
amazement  of  the  women  who  were  present,  with  marvellous  celerity 
sought  out  and  found  a  hole  in  the  chamber,  into  which  it  crept  and  was 
never  seen  after."  Instances  somewhat  similar  have  occurred  in  very 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  189 

Many  misshapen  Creatures  of  various  kinds  are  produced  as 
Monsters  in  the  World.  Claudius  Ccesar  writeth,  that  in  Thes- 
saly  an  Hippocentaur  was  born,  and  that  it  died  on  the  very 
same  Day.  And  when  he  was  Sovereign  we  ourselves  saw  the 
like  sent  to  him  out  of  Egypt,  preserved  in  Honey.  Among 
the  Instances  there  is  one  of  a  Child  in  Saguntum,  in  the  Year 
in  which  that  Town  was  destroyed  by  Annibal,  which,  as  soon 
as  it  was  born,  presently  returned  again  into  the  Womb. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Of  the  Change  of  the  Sex  ;l  and  of  Double  Births. 

IT  is  no  fable,  that  Females  may  be  turned  to  Males ; 
for  we  have  found  it  recorded  in  the  Annals,  that  in  the  Year 
when  Pub.  Licinius  Crassus  and  C.  Cassius  Longinus  were 
Consuls,  there  was  at  Cassinum  a  Maid  who,  under  her 
Parents,  became  a  Boy :  and  by  the  order  of  the  Aruspices 
he  was  conveyed  to  a  Desert  Island.  Lucinius  Mutianus  re- 
porteth,  that  himself  saw  at  Argos  a  Person  named  Arescon, 
who  had  borne  the  Name  of  Arescusa,  and  even  had  been 
Married  :  but  afterwards  came  to  have  a  Beard,  and  the 
general  Properties  of  a  Man,  and  thereupon  married  a  Wife. 
After  the  same  sort  he  saw  at  Smyrna  a  Boy  changed.  I 
myself  was  an  Eye-witness,  that  in  Africa  L.  Cossicius,  a 

recent  times,  to  the  great  disappointment  of  expecting  friends  :  and  the 
laugh  could  only  have  been  rendered  the  louder  if,  instead  of  a  simple  dis- 
appointment, an  egg  or  dormouse,  an  elephant  or  serpent  had  been  the 
result.  By  law,  "  Ut  monstrosos  partus  necare  parentibus  liceret," —  that 
"  it  should  be  lawful  to  parents  to  put  to  death  children  that  were  born 
monstrous;"  but  Dionysius  Halicarnasseus  adds,  that  it  was  necessary 
they  should  call  witnesses  to  prove  that  they  were  monstrous :  although 
the  latter  stipulation  can  scarcely  be  reconciled  with  another  law,  which 
gave  to  parents  the  right  of  life  and  death  over  their  children.  Accord- 
ing to  the  law  of  Tullus  Hostilius,  third  king  of  Rome,  when  three  chil- 
dren were  born  at  one  birth,  they  were  to  be  brought  up  to  the  age  of 
maturity  at  the  public  charge. —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Instances  similar  to  these  are  scarcely  uncommon,  and  the  causes 
are  well  known  to  anatomists.  The  remarks  concerning  the  fate  of  twins 
are  so  contrary  to  experience,  that  Pliny's  error  can  scarcely  be  accounted 
for.— Wern.  Club. 


190  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

Citizen  of  Tisdrita,  was  turned  from  a  Woman  to  a  Man 
upon  the  very  Marriage-day.  If  a  Woman  bring  Twins,  it 
is  rare  for  them  all  to  live,  but  either  the  Mother  dieth,  or 
one  of  the  Babes,  if  not  both.  But  if  the  Twins  be  of  both 
Sexes,  it  is  rare  for  both  of  them  to  escape.  Women  grow 
old  sooner  than  Men ;  and  they  grow  to  their  Maturity  more 
speedily  than  Men.  It  is  certain  that  a  Male  Child  stirreth 
oftener  in  the  Womb,  and  lieth  commonly  more  to  the  right 
Side ;  whereas  Females  incline  to  the  left.1 

CAP.  V. 

De  Hominis  Generando,  et  Pariendi  Tempore  per  illustria 
Exempla  a  Mensibus  septem  ad  undecim.2 

C^TERIS  animantibus  statum,  et  pariendi,  et  partus 
gerendi  tempus  est ;  homo  toto  anno,  et  incerto  gignitur 
spatio.  Alius  septimo  mense,  alius  octavo,  et  usque  ad  initia 
decimi  undecimique.  Ante  septimum  mensem  baud  unquam 
vitalis  est.  Septimo  non  nisi  pridie  posterove  plenilunii  die, 
aut  interlunio  concept!  nascuntur.  Translatitium  in  ^Sgypto 
est  et  octavo  gigni.  Jam  quidem  et  in  Italia  tales  partus 
esse  vitales,  contra  priscorum  opiniones.  Variant  hsec  plu- 
ribus  modis.  Vestilia  C.  Herditii  ac  postea  Pomponii  atque 
Orfiti,  clarissimorum  civium,  conjunx,  ex  his  quatuor  partus 
enixa,  Sempronium  septimo  mensi  genuit,  Suilliuni  Rufum 
undecimo,  Corbulonem  septimo,  utrunque  Consulem  :  postea 
Caesoniam  Caii3  principis  conjugem,  octavo.  In  quo  men- 
sium  numero  genitis,  intra  quadragesimum  diem  maximus 

1  No  signs  are  known  by  which  the  sex  of  the  child  before  birth  is  in 
the  least  indicated. —  Wern  Club. 

2  The  term  of  pregnancy  natural  to  the  human  female  is  280  days ; 
by  the  Prussian  laws,  300  days ;  by  the  French,  301  days  are  considered 
to  mark  the  extreme  limit.    From  physiological  reasons  it  is  extremely 
improbable  if  the  usual  term  of  nine  calendar,  or  ten  lunar  months,  is 
ever  exceeded  by  more  than  one  lunar  month. — Wern.  Club. 

3  The  emperor  so  named  is  better  known  by  the  name  of  Caligula, 
which  was  imposed  upon  him  on  account  of  the  military  shoe  which, 
when  a  child,  he  wore  in  the  camp.    The  wife's  father  here  spoken  of 
was  the  Emperor  Augustus. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  191 

labor.  Gravidis  autetn  quarto  et  octavo  mense,  letalesque  in 
iis  abortus.  Massurius  auctor  est,  L.  Papyrium  Prsetorem, 
secundo  hserede  lege  agente,  bonorum  possessionem  contra 
eum  dedisse,  cum  mater  partum  se  13  mensibus  diceret 
tulisse,  quoniara  nullum  certum  tempus  pariendi  statutum 
videretur.1 

CAP.  VI. 

De  Conceptibus,  et  Signa  Sexus  in  gravidis  prcevenientia 
Partum. 

A  CONCEPTU  decimo  die,  doloris  capitis,  oculorum  verti- 
ginis  tenebrseque,  fastidium  in  cibis,  redundatio  stomachi, 
indices  sunt  horninis  inchoati.  Melior  color  marem  ferenti, 
et  facilior  partus :  motus  in  utero  quadragesimo  die.  Con- 
traria  omnia  in  altero  sexu  :  ingestabile  onus,  crurum  et 
inguinum  levis  tumor.  Primus  autem  nonagesimo  die 
motus.  Sed  plurimum  languoris  in  utroque  sexu,  capil- 
lum  germinante  partu,  et  in  plenilunio ;  quod  tempus  editos 
quoque  infantes  prsecipue  infestat.  Adeoque  incessus,  atque 
omne,  quicquid  dici  potest,  in  gravida  refert :  ut  salsioribus 
cibis  usae,  carentem  unguiculis  partum  edant,  et,  si  respi- 
ravere,  difficilius  enitantur.  Oscitatio  quidem  in  enixu  letalis 
est:  sicut  sternuisse  a  coi'tu  abortivum. 

CAP.  VII. 
De  Conceptu  Hominum  et  Generatione. 

MISERET  atque  etiam  pudet  aestimantem  quam  sit  frivola 
animalium  superbissimi  origo,  cum  plerunque  abortus  causa 
fiat  odor  a  lucernarum  extinctu.  His  principiis  nascuntur 
tyranni,  his  carnifex  animus.  Tu  qui  corporis  viribus  fidis, 

1  According  to  the  Roman  law :  "  Sei  qua  molier  post  virei  mortem 
in  decem  proximeis  mensebos  pariat,  quei,  quave  ex  ea  nascatur,  sonus, 
suave,  in  verei  familia  heres  estod :"  —  "If  a  woman  is  delivered  of  a 
child  ten  months  after  the  death  of  her  husband,  let  the  child  born,  either 
boy  or  girl,  be  heir  to  his  father."  Ulpian's  opinion  is,  that  a  child  born 
eleven  months  after  the  death  of  his  father  is  not  able  to  inherit.  The 
Emperor  Adrian  allowed  a  legitimate  birth  in  the  eleventh  month ;  but 
this  is  explained  by  saying,  that  the  eleventh  month  may  be  begun,  but 
not  ended.—  Wem.  Club. 


192  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

tu  qui  fortunes  munera  amplexaris,  et  te  ne  alumnum  qui- 
dem  ejus  existimas,  sed  partum  :  tu  cujus  semper  in  victoria 
est  mens,  tu  qui  te  Deum  credis,  aliquo  successu  turaens, 
tanti  perire  potuisti :  atque  etiam  hodie  minoris  potes,  quan- 
tulo  serpentis  ictus  dente :  aut  etiam,  ut  Anacreon  Poeta, 
acino  uvae  passse :  ut  Fabius  Senator  Praetor,  in  lactis  haustu 
uno  pilo  strangulatus.  Is  demum  profecto  vitam  aequa  lance 
pensitabat,  qui  semper  fragilitatis  human®  memor  fuerit. 

CAP.  VIII. 
De  Agrippis. 

IN  pedes  procedere  nascentem  contra  naturam  est;  quo 
argumento  eos  appellavere  agrippas,  ut  segre  partos :  qua- 
liter  M.  Agrippam  ferunt  genitum  unico  prope  felicitatis 
exemplo  in  omnibus  ad  hunc  modum  genitis.  Quanquam  is 
quoque  adversa  pedum  valetudine,  misera  juventa,  exercito 
aevo  inter  arma  mortesque,  ad  noxia  successu,  infelici  terris 
stirpi  omni,  sed  per  utrasque  Agrippinas  maxirne,  quae  Caium 
et  Domitium  Neronem  Principes  genuere,  totidem  faces 
generis  humani :  praeterea  brevitate  aevi  quinquagesimo  uno 
raptus  anno,  in  tormentis  adulteriorum  conjugis,  socerique 
praegravi  servitio,  luisse  augurium  praeposteri  natalis  existi- 
matur.  Neronem,  quoque  paulo  ante  Principem,  et  toto  Prin- 
cipatu  suo  hostem  generis  humani,  pedibus  genitum  parens 
ejus  scribit  Agrippina.  Ritu  naturae  capite  hominem  gigni 
mos  est,  pedibus  efferri. 

CAP.  IX. 

Monstruosi  Partus  excisi  Utero. 

AUSPICATIUS  enecta  parente  gignuntur,  sicut  Scipio  Afri- 
canus  prior  natus,  primusque  Csesarum  a  caeso  matris  utero 
dictus :  qua  de  causa  et  Caesones  appellati.1  Siinili  modo 
natus  et  Manlius,  qui  Carthaginem  cum  exercitu  intravit. 

1  The  Caesarian  operation,  as  it  is  now  called,  has  been  an  unsuccessful 
one  in  modern  times ;  but  this  arises  from  the  fact  that  it  is  now  performed 
on  the  living  mother  to  preserve  her  life,  perhaps  at  the  risk  of  that  of 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  193 

CAP.  X. 

Qui  sint  Vopisci. 

VOPISCOS  appellabant  e  geminis,  qui  retenti  utero  nasce- 
rentur,  altero  interempto  abortu.  Namque  maxima  et  rara 
circa  hoc  miracula  existunt. 

CAP.  XI. 
Exempla  Numerosa  Sobolis. 

PRJETER  mulierem  pauca  animalia  coitura  novere  gra- 
vida.  Unum  quidem  omnino,  aut  alterum,  superfoetat.1 
Extat  in  monumentis  etiam  medicorum,  et  quibus  talia  con- 
sectari  curse  fuit,  uno  abortu  duodecim  puerperia  egesta. 
Sed  ubi  paululum  teraporis  inter  duos  conceptus  intercessit, 
uterque  perfertur :  ut  in  Hercule  et  Iphiclo  fratre  ejus  apparuit, 
et  in  ea  quae  gemino  partu,  altero  marito  similem,  alterum 
adultero  genuit ;  Item  in  Proconnesia  ancilla,  quae  ejusdem 
diei  coitu,  alterum  domino  similem,  alterum  procurator! 
ejus;  et  in  alia,  qua?  unum  justo  partu  quinque  mensium 
alterum  edidit.  Rursus  in  alia,  quae  septein  mensium  edito 
puerperio,  insecutis  mensibus  geminos  enixa  est.  Jam  ilia 
vulgata,  varie  ex  integris  truncos  gigni,  ex  truncis  integros, 
eademque  parte  truncos:  signa  quaedam,  naevosque  et  cica- 
trices etiam  regenerari.  Quarto  partus  Dacorum  originis  Nota 
in  brachio  redditur. 

CHAPTER  XII. 
Examples  of  those  who  have  closely  resembled  one  another." 

IN  the  Race  of  the  Lepidi  it  is  said  there  were  three,  not 
successively  one  after  another,  who  had  when  they  were 

the  child ;  whereas  it  appears  that  anciently  it  was  had  recourse  to  only 
after  the  mother  had  expired,  to  save  the  child  which  still  gave  signs  of 
life.  Cornelius  Gamma  says,  that  he  performed  it  six  times  on  as  many 
women,  and  that  the  children  were  preserved ;  but  he  says  nothing  of  the 
fate  of  the  mothers.— Wern.  Club. 

1  Superfcetation  is  an  exceedingly  rare  occurrence  in  women;  but  some 
modern  instances  place  the  certainty  of  this  fact  on  certain  grounds. — 
Wern.  Club. 

2  This  chapter  is  borrowed  from  Aristotle's  "  History  of  Animals," 
b.  xvii.  c.  6. —  Wern.  Club. 

VOL.  IT.  O 


194  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

Born,  a  Membrane  growing  over  the  Eye.  Some  have 
resembled  their  Grandfathers :  and  of  Twins,  one  hath  been 
like  the  Father,  the  other  the  Mother :  but  he  that  was 
Born  a  year  after  hath  been  so  like  his  elder  Brother  as  if  he 
had  been  one  of  the  Twins.  Some  Women  bring  all  their 
Children  like  themselves ;  others  again  resembling  their 
Husbands,  and  some  like  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. 
Some  Women  bring  all  their  Daughters  like  their  Fathers, 
and  their  Sons  like  the  Mothers.  The  Example  is  undoubted, 
of  NiccBus^  a  famous  Painter  of  Byzantium,  who  having  to 
his  Mother  a  Woman  begotten  in  Adultery  by  an  Ethiopian, 
and  nothing  different  in  Colour  from  other  Women,  was 
himself  begotten  an  Ethiopian.  Indeed,  the  Consideration 
of  the  Likenesses  is  in  the  Mind ;  in  which  likewise  many 
other  Accidents  are  thought  to  be  very  strong,  whether  they 
come  by  Sight,  Hearing,  and  Memory,  or  Imaginations 
drunk  in  in  the  very  instant  of  Conception.1  The  thought  of 
either  Father  or  Mother  flying  to  and  fro  transporting  the 
Soul  in  a  moment,  is  supposed  to  stamp  this  Likeness,  or  to 
mix  it.  On  this  account  it  is  that  Men  are  more  unlike  one 
another  than  other  Creatures:  for  the  Quickness  of  the 
Thoughts,  the  Agility  of  the  Mind,  the  very  great  variety 
of  our  Dispositions,  imprint  the  great  Multiplicity  of  Marks  ; 
whereas  the  Minds  of  other  Creatures  is  immovable,  being 
alike  in  all,  and  in  every  one  according  to  its  own  Kind. 
Artenon,  a  Man  of  the  common  Rank,  was  so  like  in  all 
points  to  Antiochus  King  of  Syria,  that  Laodicl  the  Queen, 
after  Antiochus  was  killed,  effected  the  Succession  of  the 
Kingdom  through  his  acting  the  part  of  Recommendation. 
Vibius,  a  certain  Commoner  of  Rome,  and  Publicius,  one 
from  a  Bondslave  made  a  Freeman,  were  both  of  them  so 
like  Pompey  the  Great,  that  the  one  could  scarcely  be 
discerned  from  the  other :  so  closely  did  they  represent  that 
open  Countenance,  and  the  singular  Majesty  which  appeared 
in  his  Forehead.  The  like  cause  it  was  that  gave  his  Father 
also  the  Surname  of  Menogenes,  from  his  Cook  ;  although  he 

1  The  reader  will  scarcely  fail  to  remember  Jacob's  singular  stratagem 
with  Laban's  flock — Genesis,  xxx.  and  xxxi. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  195 

was  already  surnamed  Strabo,  because  of  his  Squint  Eyes  : 
imitating  a  defect  that  existed  in  his  Servant.  So  was  one 
of  the  Scipios  surnamed  Serapio  upon  such  an  occasion, 
after  the  name  of  one  Serapio,  who  was  a  base  Slave  of  his, 
and  the  dealer  in  buying  and  selling  his  Swine.  Another 
Scipio  after  him,  of  the  same  House,  was  surnamed  Salutio, 
because  of  a  certain  Jester  of  that  Name.  After  the  same 
manner  one  Spinter,  a  Player  of  the  second  Place,1  arid 
Pamphilus,  a  Player  of  the  third  Part,  resembled  Lentulus 
and  Metellus,  who  were  Consuls  together.  And  this  fell 
out  very  untowardly,  that  such  resemblances  of  the  two 
Consuls  should  be  seen  together  on  the  Stage.  On  the  other 
hand,  Rubrius  the  Player  was  surnamed  Plancus,  because 
he  was  so  like  Plancus  the  Orator.  Again,  Burbuleius  and 
Menogenes,  both  Players,  gave  name,  the  one  to  Curio  the 
Father,  as  did  the  other  to  Messala  Censorius.  There 
was  in  Sicily  a  Fisherman  who  resembled  Sura  the  Pro- 
consul, not  in  general  likeness  only,  but  also  in  the  grin 
when  he  spoke,  in  drawing  his  Tongue  short,  and  in  his 
thick  Speech.  Cassius  Severus,  the  famous  Orator,  was 
reproached  for  being  like  Mirmillo,  a  Keeper  of  Cattle. 
Toranius  sold  to  Marcus  Antonius,  at  that  time  Triumvir, 
two  very  beautiful  Boys  as  Twins,  so  like  they  were  one  to 
the  other :  although  one  was  born  in  Asia,  and  the  other 
beyond  the  Alps.  But  when  Antony  afterwards  came  to 
the  knowledge  of  the  fraud,  which  was  detected  by  the  Lan- 
guage of  the  Boys,  he  threatened  him  in  great  Anger : 
Among  other  things  complaining  of  the  high  Price  that  he 
had  made  him  pay,  for  they  cost  him  two  hundred  Sesterces. 
But  the  cunning  Merchant  answered,  That  this  was  the  very 
cause  why  he  bad  sold  them  at  so  great  a  rate  :  for  it  would 
not  have  been  so  wonderful  if  two  Brothers  of  the  same 
Mother  had  resembled  one  another ;  but  that  there  should 
be  any  found,  who  were  born  in  different  Countries,  so  like 
in  all  respects,  was  above  every  thing  deserving  of  a  high 
Price.  This  answer  of  his  produced  a  well-timed  admiration, 

1  That  is,  he  who  supported  the  second  or  the  third  rate  of  characters 
on  the  ancient  stage.—  Wern.  Club. 


196  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

so  that  the  Proscriptor,  whose  mind  was  enraged  and  uttered 
reproaches,  was  not  only  appeased,  hut  also  induced  to  be 
well  pleased  with  his  good  Fortune. 

CAP.  XIII. 
Qucs  sit  Generandi  Ratio. 

EST  quaedam  privatim  dissociatio  corporum ;  et  inter  se 
steriles,  uhi  cum  aliis  junxere,  gignunt :  sicut  Augustus  et 
Livia.  Item  alii  aliaeque  fbeminas  tantum  generant,  aut 
mares ;  plerunque  et  alternant :  sicut  Gracchorum  mater  duo- 
decies,  et  Agrippina  Germanici  novies.  Aliis  sterilis  est 
juventa,  aliis  semel  in  vita  datur  gignere.  Quaedam  non 
perferunt  partus :  quales,  si  quando  medicina  et  cura  vicere, 
fceminam  fere  gignunt.  Divus  Augustus  in  reliqua  exemplo- 
rum  raritate,  neptis  suae  nepotem  vidit  genitum  quo  excessit 
anno,  M.  Syllanum  ;  qui  cum  Asiam  obtineret  post  Consu- 
latum,  Neronis  Principis  successione,  veneno  ejus  interemptus 
est.  Q.  Metellus  Macedonicus,  cum  sex  liberos  relinqueret, 
undecim  nepotes  reliquit,  nurus  vero  generosque  et  omnes 
qui  se  patris  appellatione  salutarent,  viginti  septem.  In  Actis 
temporum  Divi  Augusti  invenitur,  XII.  Consulatu  ejus  L. 
qusB  Sylla  Collega,  ad  III.  Id  us  Aprilis,  C.  Crispinum  Hila- 
rum  ex  ingenua  plebe  Fesulana,  cum  liberis  novem  (in  quo 
numero  filiae  duae  fuerunt)  nepotibus  XXVII.,  pronepotibus 
XXIX.,  neptibus  IX.,  praelata  pompa,  cum  omnibus  in 
Capitolio  immolasse.1 

1  These  instances  are  more  than  equalled  by  some  which  are  men- 
tioned in  the  preface  to  "  Hearne's  Edition  of  Leland,"  vol.  vi.  p.  4. 
Mary,  wife  of  Richard  Honiwood,  of  Charinge,  in  Kent,  died  at  the  age 
of  ninety-eight,  in  the  year  1620,  leaving  by  one  husband  sixteen  children, 
114  grand-children,  228  great-grand-children,  and  nine  in  the  fourth  de- 
gree :  in  all  367  persons.  Thomas  Urqhart,  laird  and  sheriff  of  Cromarty, 
had  by  one  wife  twenty-five  sons  and  eleven  daughters :  all  of  whom  he 
lived  to  see  of  considerable  eminence  in  the  world.  "In  Dunstable 
church,"  says  Hakewell  (Apol.)  "  is  an  epitaph  on  a  woman,  testifying 
that  she  bore  three  children  at  a  birth  three  several  times,  and  five  at  a 
birth  two  other  times."  In  the  year  1553  the  wife  of  John  Gissger,  an 
Italian,  had  twins,  and  before  the  year  was  out  she  produced  five  children, 
three  sons  and  two  daughters.  Thomas  Fazel  writes  that  "  Jane  Pancica, 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  197 

CAP.  XIV. 
De  eodem  multiplicius. 

MULIER  post  quinquagesimum  annum  non  gignit,  major- 
que  pars  quadragesimo  profluvium  genitale  sistit.  Nam  in 
viris  Massinissam  Regem,  post  LXXXVI.  annum  generasse 
filium,  quern  Methymnatum  appellaverit,  clarum  est:  Cato- 
nem  Censorium  octogesimo  exacto,  a  filia  Salonii  clientis  sui. 
Qua  de  causa,  aliorum  ejus  liberorum  propago,  Liciniani 
snnt  cognominati,  hi  Saloniani,  ex  quibus  Uticensis  fuit. 
Nuper  etiam  L.  Volusio  Saturnine  in  urbis  praefectura  ex- 
tincto,  notum  est  Cornelias  Scipionum  gentis  Volusium  Sa- 
turninum,  qui  fuit  Consul,  genitum  post  LXII.  annum. 
Et  usque  ad  LXXXV.  apud  ignobiles  vulgaris  reperitur 
generatio. 

CAP.  XV. 
.De  Menstruis  Mulierum. 

SOLUM  autem  animal  menstruale  mulier  est :  inde  unius 
utero,  quas  appellarunt  molas.  Ea  est  caro  informis, 
inanima,  ferri  ictum  et  aciein  respuens.  Movetur,  sistitque 
menses;  ut  et  partus,  alias  lethalis,  alias  una  senescens, 
aliquando  alvo  citatiore  excidens.  Simile  quiddam  et  viris 
in  ventre  gignitur,  quod  vocant  scirron  :  sic  ut  Oppio  Capi- 
toni  praetorio  viro.  Sed  nihil  facile  reperiatur  mulierum 
profluvio  magis  monstrificum.  Acescunt  superventu  inusta, 
sterilescunt  tactae  frtiges,  moriuntur  insita,  exuruntur  horto- 
rum  germina,  et  fructus  arborum,  quibus  insidere,  decidunt ; 
speculorum  fulgor  aspectu  ipso  hebetatur,  acies  ferri  prae- 
stringitur,  eborisque  nitor ;  alvei  apum  emoriuntur ;  aes 
etiam  ac  ferrum  rubigo  protinus  corripit,  odorque  dirus 
aera  ;  et  in  rabiem  aguntur  gustato  eo  canes,  atque  insanabili 
veneno  morsus  inficitur.  Quin  et  bituminum  sequax  alio- 

wife  of  Bernard,  a  Sicilian,  in  thirty  births  produced  seventy-three 
children."  The  latter  instances  are  from  Wanley's  "  Wonders  of  the 
Little  World,"  where  his  authorities  are  given. — Wern.  Club. 


198  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

quin  ac  lenta  Natura,  in  Lacu  Judaese  (qui  vocatur  Asphal- 
tites),  certo  tempore  anni  supernatans,  nequit  sibi  avelli,  ad 
omnein  contactum  adhserens,  praeterquam  filo  quod  tale 
virus  infecerit.  Etiam  formicis  animali  minimo,  inesse  sen- 
sum  ejus  ferunt;  abjicique  gustatas  fruges,  nee  postea  repeti. 
Et  hoc  tale  tantumque  omnibus  tricenis  diebus  malum  in 
muliere  exsistit,  et  trimestri  spatio  largius.  Quibusdam  vero 
saepius  mense;  sicut  aliquibus  nunquam  ;  sed  tales  non  gig- 
nunt,  quando  hsec  est  generando  homini  rnateria  semine  e 
maribus  coaguli  modo  hoc  in  sese  glomerante,  quod  deinde 
tempore  ipso  animatur,  corporaturque.  Ergo  cum  gravidis 
fluxit,  invalidi  aut  non  vitales  partus  eduntur,  aut  saniosi,  ut 
autor  est  Negidius.1 

CAP.  XVI. 
Item  de  Ratione  Partuum. 

IDEM,  lac  fbeminae  non  corrumpi  alenti  partum  si  ex 
eodem  viro  rursus  conceperit,  arbitratur.  Incipiente  autem 
hoc  statu,  aut  desinente,  conceptus  facillimi  traduntur. 
Faecunditatis  in  fceminis  praerogativam  accepimus,  inunctis 
medicamine  oculis,  salivam  infici.  Caeterum  editis  primores 
septimo  mense  gigni  dentes  priusque  in  supera  fere  parte,haud 
dubium  est.  Septimo  eosdem  decidere  anno,  aliosque  suffici. 
Quosdam  et  cum  dentibus  nasci,2  sicut  M.  Curium,  quod  ob 
id  Dentatus  cognominatus  est,  et  Cn.  Papyrium  Carbonem, 
praeclaros  viros.  In  Women  the  same  thing  was  counted 
inauspicious  in  the  times  of  the  Kings,  for  when  Valeria 
was  born  toothed  in  this  manner,  the  Augurs  (Aruspices) 
being  consulted  about  it,  answered  by  way  of  Prophecy, 
that  she  would  be  the  ruin  of  that  City  to  which  she  might 
be  conveyed ;  whereupon  she  was  conveyed  to  Suessa  Pometia, 

1  Much  that  is  here  stated  is  erroneous,  and  mere  fable ;  the  recondite 
subject  of  generation  abounding  in  the  marvellous. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  However  this  might  have  been  regarded  in  ancient  times,  on  a  super- 
stitious account,  it  is  not  an  uncommon  circumstance.      The  editor  is 
acquainted  with  the  fact,  that  in  an  instance  of  three  children  being  born 
at  one  birth,  all  of  them  were  furnished  with  teeth.-—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  199 

which  at  that  time  was  very  flourishing:  and  the  ruin  of  the 
place  certainly  followed.  Cornelia,  the  Mother  of  the  Grac- 
chi, is  sufficient  proof  that  it  is  an  adverse  omen,  when 
Women  are  born  with  the  Genital  Parts  grown  together. 
Some  Children  are  born  with  a  continued  edge  of  Bone 
instead  of  a  row  of  distinct  Teeth  j1  as  a  Son  of  Prusius  King 
of  the  Bythinians,  who  had  such  a  Bone  in  his  Upper  Jaw. 
But  Teeth  are  the  only  parts  that  are  not  subdued  by  the 
Fires ;  so  that  they  are  not  consumed  with  the  rest  of  the 
Body;  but  the  same  parts  that  are  not  conquered  by  the 
Flames  are  hollowed  out  and  wasted  by  a  Waterish  Rheum. 
They  may  be  made  White  by  some  Medicines.  They  are 
worn  away  by  use  ;  and  sometimes  they  fall  first  out  of  the 
Head  ;  they  serve  not  only  to  grind  our  Meat  for  our  Nourish- 
ment, but  they  are  necessary  for  the  framing  of  our  Speech. 
The  Fore-teeth  hold  the  Government  over  our  Voice  and 
Words  by  a  peculiar  accord,  answering  to  the  Stroke  of  the 
Tongue,  and  the  series  of  their  Formation,  with  their  Size, 
catting  up,  softening,  or  restraining  the  Words ;  but  when 
they  are  fallen  out  all  explanation  of  Words  is  lost. 
Moreover,  it  may  be  believed,  that  some  Augury  can  be 
gathered  from  the  Teeth.  Men  are  in  possession  of  two-and- 
thirty  in  all,  except  the  Nation  of  the  Turduli ;  and  those 
who  have  above  this  Number  suppose  that  they  may  calcu- 
late on  longer  Life.  Women  have  not  so  many :  they  that 
have  on  the  right  Side  in  the  upper  Jaw  two  Eye-teeth, 
named  Canine,  may  promise  themselves  the  Favours  of  For- 
tune ;  as  was  the  case  in  Agrippina,  the  Mother  of  Domitius 
Nero :  but  it  is  the  contrary  in  the  Left  Side.  It  is  not  the  Cus- 
tom in  any  Country  to  burn  in  a  Funeral  Fire  the  dead  Body 
of  an  Infant  before  the  Teeth  are  come  up :  but  of  this  we  will 
write  more,  when  our  History  will  take  in  the  individual 
Members.  Zoroastres  was  the  only  Man  we  have  heard  of, 
who  laughed  the  same  day  he  was  born :  his  Brain  did  so 
evidently  pulsate,  that  it  would  lift  up  the  Hand  that  was 
laid  on  it:  a  Presage  of  his  future  Learning.  It  is  certain 

1  This  was  also  the  case  with  King  Pyrrhus.     See  note,  lib.  vii.  2. — 
Wem.  Club. 


200  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

that  a  Man  at  three  years  of  Age  is  come  to  one-half  of  the 
Measure  of  his  Height.  This  also  is  observed  for  a  Truth,  that 
generally  all  Men  fall  short  of  the  full  Stature  in  Times  past ; 
and  seldom  are  they  taller  than  their  Fathers :  the  Exube- 
rance of  the  Seeds  being  consumed  by  the  burning,  in  the 
Changes  of  which  the  World  now  vergeth  toward  the  latter 
End.     In  Crete,  a  Mountain  being  cloven  asunder  by  an 
Earthquake,  a  Body  was  found  standing,  forty-six  Cubits 
high ;   which  some  judged  to  be  the  Body  of  Orion,  and 
others,  of  Otus.     It  is  believed  from  Records  that  the  Body 
of  Orestes,  when  taken  up  by  direction  of  the  Oracle,  was 
seven  Cubits  long.1     And  that  great  Poet,  Homer,  who  lived 
almost  a  thousand  Years  ago,  did  not  cease  to  complain  that 
Men's  Bodies  were  less  of  Stature  even  then,  than  in  old 
Time.     The  Annals  do  not  deliver  down  the  Bulk  of  Navius 
Pollio;  but  that  he  was  of  great  size  appeareth  by  this,  that 
it  was  taken  for  a  Wonder,  that  in  a  great  Crowd  of  People 
running  together  he  was  almost  killed.     The  tallest  Man 
that  hath  been  seen  in  our  Age  was  one  named  Gabbara, 
who  in  the  Days  of  Prince  Claudius  was  brought  out  of 
Arabia;  he  was  nine  Feet  high,  and  as  many  Inches.    There 
were  in  the  Time  of  Divus  Augustus  two   others,  named 
Pusio  and  Secundilla,  higher  than  Gabbara  by  half  a  Foot, 
whose  Bodies  were  preserved  for  a  Wonder  in  a  Vault  in  the 
Gardens  of  the  Salustiani.     While  the  same  (Augustus)  was 
President,  his  Niece  Julia  had  a  very  little  Man,  two  Feet 
and  a  Hand- breadth  high,  called  Canopas,  whom  she  made 
much  of;  and  also  a  Woman  named  Andromeda,*  the  Freed 
Woman  of  Julia  Augusta.     M.  Varro  reporteth  that  Manius 
Maximus,  and  M.  Tullius,  Roman  Knights,   were   but  two 
Cubits  hio;h  :  and  we  ourselves  have  seen  their  Bodies  em- 

\j 

balmed  in  Presses.     It  is  well  known  that  there  are  some 

1  Ten  feet  and  an  half. 

2  The  instance  of  the  American  who  exhibited  himself  through  Eu- 
rope is  of  recent  occurrence.     John  Duck,  an  Englishman,  was  carried 
about  for  a  show  in  1610,  being  two  feet  and  a  half  high  at  forty-five  years 
of  age.  Cardan  says  he  saw  a  man  in  Italy,  of  full  age,  not  above  a  cubit 
high.    He  was  carried  about  in  a  parrot- cage. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII .]  History  of  Nature.  201 

born  a  Foot  and  a  half  high  ;  others  again  somewhat  longer  : 
filling  up  the  Course  of  their  Life  in  three  Years.  We  find 
in  the  Chronicles,  that  in  Salamis  the  Son  of  Euthimenes1  in 
three  Years  grew  to  he  three  Cubits  high  ;  but  he  was  in 
his  Pace  slow  and  in  his  Understanding  dull ;  but  having 
attained  the  State  of  Puberty,  and  his  Voice  having  become 
strong,  at  Three  Years'  end  he  died  suddenly  of  a  Contraction 
of  all  the  Parts  of  his  Body.  Some  while  since  I  saw  myself 
the  like  in  almost  all  respects,  except  the  Puberty,  in  a  Son 
of  Cornelius  Tacitus,  a  Roman  Knight,  and  a  Procurator  for 
the  State  in  Belgic  Gaul.  Such  the  Greeks  call  Ectrapelos  ; 
in  Latin  they  have  no  Name. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Observations  of  Bodies. 

WE  see  that  the  Length  of  a  Man  from  the  Sole  of  the 
Foot  to  the  Crown  of  the  Head  is  equal  to  the  Extent  of  his 
longest  Fingers  when  his  Arms  and  Hands  are  stretched  out. 
As  also,  that  most  People  are  stronger  on  the  right  Side ; 
others  are  as  strong  on  one  Side  as  on  the  other  :  and  there  are 
some  that  are  altogether  Left-handed;  but  that  is  never  seen 
in  Women.  Men  weigh  heavier  than  Women  :  and  in  every 
kind  of  Creature,  the  bodies,  when  dead,  are  more  heavy  than 
when  alive ;  and  the  same  Parties  sleeping  weigh  more  than 
when  awake.  The  dead  Bodies  of  Men  float  with  the  Face 

1  In  the  year  1747,  Mr.  Dawkes,  a  surgeon  at  St.  Ives,  near  Hun- 
tingdon, published  a  small  tract  called  "  Prodigium  Willinghamense,"  or 
an  account  of  a  surprising  boy,  who  was  buried  at  Willingham,  near 
Cambridge,  upon  whom  he  wrote  the  following  epitaph :  —  "  Stop,  tra- 
veller, and  wondering  know,  here  buried  lie  the  remains  of  Thomas,  son 
of  Thomas  and  Margaret  Hall,  who,  not  one  year  old,  had  the  signs  of 
manhood ;  not  three,  was  almost  four  feet  high ;  endued  with  uncommon 
strength,  a  just  proportion  of  parts,  and  a  stupendous  voice;  before  six  he 
died,  as  it  were,  of  advanced  age.  He  was  born  at  this  village,  October  31, 
1741,  and  the  same  departed  this  life,  September  3,  1747."  (See  also 
"Philosophical  Transactions,"  1744-45.)  As  Dr.  Elliotson  has  observed 
(Blumenbach's  "  Physiology  "),  this  perfectly  authentic  case  removes  all 
doubts  respecting  the  boy  at  Salamis  mentioned  by  Pliny. — Wern.  Club. 


202  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

upward,  and  Women  with  the  Face  downward,  as  if  Nature 
had  provided  to  save  their  Modesty  even  when  dead. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Examples  of  a  Variety  of  Forms. 

WE  have  heard  that  some  Men's  Bones  are  solid,  and  so 
live  without  any  Marrow.  They  are  known  by  the  Signs,  that 
they  never  feel  Thirst,  nor  put  forth  any  Sweat :  and  yet  we 
know  that  a  Man  may  conquer  his  Thirst  by  his  Will ;  and 
Julius  Viator,  a  Roman  Knight,  descended  from  the  Race  of 
the  Confederate  Voconti,  in  his  younger  Years  being  ill  with 
an  Effusion  of  Water  beneath  the  Skin,  and  forbidden  by 
the  Physicians  to  use  Fluids  in  any  way,  obtained  a  Nature 
by  Custom,  so  that  in  his  old  Age  he  forbore  to  drink. 
Others  also  have  been  able  to  command  their  Nature  in 
many  Cases. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Examples  of  Diversity  of  Habits. 

IT  is  said,  that  Crassus,  Grandfather  to  that  Crassus  who 
was  slain  in  Parthia,  never  laughed,  and  on  that  account 
was  called  Agelastus:  and  also  that  many  have  been  found 
to  have  never  wept.  Socrates,  who  was  illustrious  for  his 
Wisdom,  was  seen  always  to  carry  the  same  Countenance, 
never  being  more  cheerful  nor  more  disturbed  at  one  Time 
than  another.  But  this  tendency  of  the  Mind  turneth  now 
and  then  in  the  End  into  a  certain  Rigour  and  Sternness 
of  Nature,  so  hard  and  inflexible  that  it  cannot  be  ruled ; 
and  so  despoileth  Men  of  the  humane  Affections;  and  such 
are  called  by  the  Greeks  Apathes.  who  had  the  Experience 
of  many  such  :  and,  what  is  surprising,  some  of  them  were 
very  eminent  for  Wisdom,  as  Diogenes  the  Cynic,  Pyrrho, 
Heraclitus,  and  Timo ;  the  latter  being  carried  away  so  far 
as  to  hate  the  whole  Human  Race.  But  these  were  Ex- 
amples of  depraved  Nature.  Various  remarkable  Things  are 
known  ;  as  in  Antonia,  the  Wife  of  Drusus,  who  was  never 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  203 

seen  to  spit ;  and  Pomponius  the  Poet,  a  Consular  Man,  who 
never  belched.  Such  as  naturally  have  their  Bones  solid, 
who  are  seldom  met  with,  are  called  Cornel  (hard  as  Horn). 

CHAPTER  XX. 
Of  Strength  and  Swiftness.1 

VARRO,  in  his  Treatise  of  prodigious  Strength,  maketh 
Report  of  Tritanus,  who  was  little  in  Person,  but  of  incom- 
parable Strength,  much  renowned  in  the  Gladiatorial  Play, 
with  the  Armature  of  the  Samnites.  He  maketh  mention 
also  of  a  Son  of  his,  a  Soldier  under  Pompey  the  Great ;  and 
that  he  had  all  over  his  Body,  as  well  as  through  his  Arms 
and  Hands,  Sinews  running  straight  and  across  like  Net- 
work :  and  when  an  Enemy  challenged  him  to  a  Combat, 
he  overcame  him  with  his  right  Hand  unarmed,  and  in  the 
End  caught  hold  of  him,  and  brought  him  into  the  Camp 
with  one  Finger.  Junius  Valens,  a  Centurion  in  the  Praeto- 
rium  of  Divus  Augustus,  was  accustomed  to  bear  up  Waggons 
laden  with  Sacks,  until  they  were  discharged :  with  one  Hand 
he  would  hold  back  a  Chariot,  standing  firm  against  all  the 
Force  of  the  Horses.  He  did  also  other  wonderful  Things, 
which  are  to  be  seen  engraved  on  his  Tomb :  and  therefore 
Varro  saith  that  being  called  Hercules  Rusticellus,  he  took 
up  his  Mule  and  carried  him  away.  Fusius  Salvius  carried 
up  over  the  Stairs  two  hundred  Pounds'  weight  on  his  Feet, 
as  many  in  his  Hands,  and  twice  as  much  upon  his  Shoul- 
ders. Myself  have  seen  a  Man  named  Athanatus,  with  a 
great  deal  of  Ostentation  walk  upon  the  Stage  clothed  in  a 

1  It  is  observable  that  in  this,  and  chap,  xxiii.,  Pliny's  instances  apply 
only  to  animal  endurance.  Martial  took  a  more  correct  view  of  the  mental 
property,  when  he  said : — 

"  Rebus  in  angustis  facile  est  contemnere  vitam : 
Fortiter  ille  facit,  qui  miser  esse  potest." — B.  xi.  Ep.  35. 

When  Fortune  frowns,  'tis  easy  life  to  hate ; 
But  real  courage  is  not  crush'd  by  fate. 

Wem.  Club. 


204  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

Cuirass  of  Lead  weighing  five  hundred  Pounds,  and  wearing 
high  Shoes  of  the  same  Weight.  When  Milo,  the  great 
Wrestler  of  Croton£,  stood  firm  upon  his  Feet,  no  Man  was 
able  to  make  him  stir  in  the  least  Degree :  if  he  held  an 
Apple,  no  Man  was  able  to  stretch  out  his  Finger.1  It  was  a 
great  matter,  that  Philippides  ran  1140  Stadia,  from  Athens 
to  Lacedsemon,  in  two  Days  ;  until  Anistis,  a  Runner  of 
Lacedsemon,  and  Philonides,  belonging  to  Alexander  the 
Great,  ran  from  Sicyone  to  Elis  in  one  Day,  1200  Stadia. 
But  now,  indeed,  we  know  some  in  the  Circus  able  to  endure 
the  running  of  160  Miles.  And  lately  when  Fonteius  and 
Vipsanus  were  Consuls,  a  young  Boy,  only  nine  Years  old, 
between  Noon  and  Evening  ran  75  Miles.  And  a  Man  may 
wonder  the  more  at  this  Matter,  if  he  consider,  that  it  was 
counted  an  exceeding  great  Journey  that  Tiberius  Nero  made 
in  three  Chariots  in  a  Day  and  a  Night,  when  he  hasted  to 
his  Brother  Drusus,  then  lying  sick  in  Germany,  which  was 
but  200  Miles.2 

1  Two  persons,  successively  porters  to  Kings  James  I.  and  Charles, 
his  son,  were  of  great  size  and  strength.    The  first,  particularly,  was  able 
to  take  two  of  the  tallest  yeomen  of  the  guard,  one  under  each  arm,  and 
he  ordered  them  as  he  pleased.     The  Emperor  Maximinus,  who  was  eight 
feet  and  a  half  in  height,  was  of  enormous  strength,  even  in  proportion  to 
his  magnitude.  —  Wern.  Club, 

2  We  have  less  examples  of  swiftness  of  foot,  since  more  rapid  convey- 
ance is  common.  Pliny's  instances  are  the  more  surprising,  as  they  imply 
continuance ;  but  the  English  King  Henry  V.  was  so  swift  of  foot,  that 
with  two  of  his  lords,  without  any  weapons,  he  would  catch  a  wild  buck 
in  a  large  park.    In  Baker's  "  Chronicle "  we  are  informed,  that  John 
Lepton,  of  Kepwick,  in  the  county  of  York,  one  of  the  grooms  of  the 
Privy  Chamber  to  James  I.,  for  a  wager  rode  for  six  days  successively 
between  York  and  London :  which  is  150  miles.     He  accomplished  the 
work  of  each  day,  beginning  May  20,  1606,  before  it  was  dark  ;  and  hav- 
ing finished  his  wager  at  York  on  Saturday,  on  the  following  Monday  he 
rode  back  to  London,  and  on  Tuesday  to  the  court  at  Greenwich  :  being 
as  fresh  and  well  as  when  he  began.    In  the  year  1619,  July  17,  Bernard 
Calvert  rode  from  St.  George's  church,  in  Southwark,  to  Dover  :  thence 
by  barge  to  Calais,  and  from  thence  back  to  St.  George's  church,  on  the 
same  day;  beginning  at  three  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  ending  at  eight 
in  the  evening,  fresh  and  lusty,  although  roads  were  then  less  perfect 
than  now.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  205 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
Examples  of  good  Eyesight. 

WE  find  in  Histories  almost  incredible  Examples  of 
Sharpness  of  the  Eyes.  Cicero  hath  recorded,  that  the  Poem 
of  Homer  called  the  Iliad,  written  on  Parchment,  was  en- 
closed within  a  Nutshell.  The  same  Writer  maketh  mention 
of  one  who  could  see  to  the  Distance  of  135  Miles.  And 
M.Varro  nameth  the  Man,  saying  that  he  was  called  Strabo; 
and  that  during  the  Carthaginian  War  he  was  accustomed  to 
stand  upon  Lilybseum,  a  Promontory  of  Sicily,  and  discover 
the  Fleet  coming  out  of  the  Harbour  of  Carthage ;  he  was 
also  able  to  tell  even  the  Number  of  the  Ships.  Collier ates 
made  Emmets,  and  other  equally  small  Creatures,  out  of 
Ivory,  so  that  other  Men  could  not  discern  the  Parts  of  their 
Bodies.  A  certain  Myrmecides  was  excellent  in  that  kind  of 
Workmanship ;  who  of  the  same  Material  carved  a  Chariot 
with  four  Wheels,  which  a  Fly  might  cover  with  her  Wings. 
Also  he  made  a  Ship  that  a  little  Bee  might  hide  with  her 
Wings.1 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Of  Hearing. 

OF  Hearing  there  is  one  Example  which  is  wonderful : 
that  the  Battle  in  which  Sybaris  was  destroyed  was  heard  at 
Olympia  on  the  very  same  Day  it  was  fought.  For  the  Cim- 

1  Peculiarities  of  eyesight  are  also  recorded  in  ancient  authors.  The 
Emperor  Tiberius  was  able  to  see  better  than  other  men  by  night ;  and 
contrary  to  the  usual  habit,  best  when  he  first  opened  his  eyes  from  sleep. 
Such  was  also  the  case  with  the  philosopher  Cardan.  Fabricius  ab  Aqua- 
pendente  knew  a  man  who  could  see  well  by  night,  but  not  by  day ;  and 
the  Editor  was  acquainted  with  two  brothers,  whose  vision  was  of  this 
kind ;  and  it  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  fact,  that  they  were  destitute  of 
eyebrows,  and  had  very  little  eyelashes. —  Wern.  Club. 


206  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  VII. 

brian  Victories  and  the  Report  of  the  Victory  over  the  Per- 
sians made  at  Rome  by  the  Castors,  on  the  same  Day  that  it 
was  achieved,  were  Visions  and  the  Presages  of  Divine 
Powers. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 
Examples  of  Patience. 

MANY  are  the  Calamities  incident  to  Mankind,  which 
have  afforded  innumerable  Trials  of  Patience,  in  suffering 
Pains  of  the  Body.  The  most  illustrious  among  Women  is 
the  Example  of  Leana  the  Courtesan,  who,  when  she  was 
tortured,  did  not  betray  Harmodius  and  Aristogiton,  who 
slew  the  Tyrant.  Among  Men  is  the  Example  of  Anaxar- 
chus,  who,  being  tortured  for  a  like  Cause,  bit  off  his  Tongue 
with  his  Teeth,  and  spat  his  only  Hope  of  Discovery  into  the 
Face  of  the  Tyrant. 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 
Examples  of  Memory.1 

MEMORY  is  the  greatest  Gift  of  Nature,  and  most  neces- 
sary of  all  others  for  Life  ;  it  is  hard  to  say  who  deserved  the 

1  The  orator  Hortensius  was  famous  for  an  extensive  and  accurate 
memory ;  which  Cicero  speaks  of  with  admiration.  It  is  said  of  him, 
that  once  sitting  at  a  place  where  things  were  exposed  to  public  sale  for  a 
whole  day,  he  recited  in  order  all  the  things  that  had  been  sold,  their 
price,  and  the  names  of  the  buyers ;  and  it  was  afterwards  found  that  he 
was  minutely  correct.  Cicero,  comparing  him  with  Lucullus,  says,  that 
Hortensius's  memory  was  greater  for  words,  and  that  of  Lucullus  for 
things, — an  important  distinction,  for  it  is  commonly  found  that  those  who 
best  remember  the  one,  are  deficient  in  the  other.  Seneca  had  a  remark- 
able memory  for  words ;  so  that  he  was  able  to  repeat  two  thousand  names 
in  the  order  they  were  pronounced.  The  art  of  memory,  to  which  some 
moderns  have  made  great  pretensions,  is  very  ancient ;  and  it  was  much 
in  use  in  the  middle  ages.  But  it  applies  to  words  rather  than  things  ; 
and  it  requires  to  be  studied  as  an  individual  object,  and  not  as  means  to 
an  end.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  207 

chief  honour  therein,  considering  how  many  have  excelled 
in  its  Glory.  King  Cyrus  called  every  Soldier  in  his  Army 
by  his  own  Name.  L.  Scipio  could  do  the  like  by  all  the 
Citizens  of  Rome.  Cineas,  Ambassador  of  King  Pyrrhus, 
the  next  Day  after  he  came  to  Rome,  saluted  by  Name  the 
Senate  and  Equestrian  Order.  Mithridates,  the  King  of  two- 
and-twenty  Nations  of  different  Languages,  ministered  Justice 
to  them  in  that  Number  of  Tongues :  and  when  he  made  a 
Speech  in  the  public  Assembly  respectively  to  every  Nation,  he 
performed  it  without  an  Interpreter.  A  certain  Charmidas^ 
a  Grecian,  rehearsed  as  if  he  was  reading  whatever  any  Man 
would  call  for  out  of  any  of  the  Volumes  in  the  Libraries. 
At  length  the  Practice  of  this  was  reduced  into  an  Art  of 
Memory,  which  was  invented  by  Simonides  Melicus,  and 
afterwards  brought  to  Perfection  by  Metrodorus  Scepsius;  by 
which  a  Man  might  learn  to  rehearse  the  same  Words  of  any 
Discourse  after  once  hearing.  And  yet  there  is  nothing  in 
Man  so  frail ;  for  it  is  injured  by  Diseases,  Accidents,  and  by 
Fear,  sometimes  in  part,  and  at  other  Times  entirely.  One 
who  was  struck  with  a  Stone  forgot  his  Letters  only.  Ano- 
ther, by  a  Fall  from  the  Roof  of  a  very  high  House,  lost 
the  Remembrance  of  his  own  Mother,  his  near  Relations, 
and  Neighbours.  Another  when  sick  forgot  his  own  Ser- 
vants ;  and  Messala  Corvinus,  the  Orator,  forgot  even  his 
own  Name.2  So  also  it  often  endeavoureth  to  lose  itself,  even 
while  the  Body  is  otherwise  quiet  and  in  Health.  But  let 
Sleep  creep  upon  us,  and  it  reckoneth,  as  an  empty  Mind 
inquireth,  what  place  it  is  in. 

1  Carneades,  according  to  Cicero  and  Quintilian. 

2  A  sudden  loss  of  memory  on  a  particular  subject  is  common,  though 
unaccountable.    We  are  told  that  Curio,  the  orator,  was  much  given  to 
this ;  so  that,  offering  to  divide  a  subject  into  three  heads,  he  would  forget 
one  of  them,  or  perhaps  make  four.   He  was  to  plead  on  behalf  of  Sextus 
Naevius,  opposed  to  Cicero,  who  was  on  the  side  of  Titania  Corta ;  when 
he  suddenly  forgot  the  whole  cause,  and  ascribed  the  fact  to  the  witchcraft 
of  Titania.  —  Wern.  Club. 


208 


History  of  Nature. 


[BOOK  VII. 


Julius  Ccesar  and  Augustus. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 
The  Praise  of  C.  Julius  Ccesar. 

FOR  Vigour  of  Spirit  I  judge  that  C.  Ccesar,  the  Dictator, 
was  the  most  excellent.  I  speak  not  now  of  his  Courage 
and  Constancy,  nor  of  his  lofty  Understanding  of  all  Things 
under  the  Expanse  of  Heaven  ;  but  of  that  proper  Strength 
and  Quickness  of  his,  as  active  as  the  very  Fire.  We  have 
heard  it  reported  of  him,  that  he  was  accustomed  to  write 
and  read  at  one  Time,  to  dictate  and  hear.  He  would  dic- 
tate Letters  of  the  utmost  Importance  to  four  Secretaries  at 
once :  and  when  he  was  free  from  other  Business,  he  would 
dictate  seven  Letters  at  one  Time.  The  same  Man  fought 
fifty  Battles  with  Banners  displayed :  in  which  Point  he 
alone  exceeded  M.  Marcellus,  who  fought  thirty-nine  Battles. 
For,  besides  his  Victories  in  the  Civil  Wars,  he  slew  in  Battle 
1,192,000  of  his  Enemies  ;  but  this,  for  my  own  Part,  I  hold 
no  special  Glory  of  his,  considering  the  great  Injury  so  in- 
flicted on  Mankind  :  and  this,  indeed,  he  hath  himself  con- 
fessed, by  avoiding  to  set  down  the  Slaughter  that  occurred 
during  the  Civil  Wars.  Pompey  the  Great  deserveth  honour 
more  justly  for  taking  from  the  Pirates  846  Sail  of  Ships. 
But  what  is  proper  and  peculiar  to  Ccesar,  besides  what  is 
said  above,  was  his  remarkable  Clemency,  in  which  he  so  far 
surpassed  all  others,  that  he  himself  regretted  it.  The  Example 
of  his  Magnanimity  was  such,  that  nothing  besides  can  be  com- 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  209 

pared  to  it.  For  to  reckon  up  the  Spectacles  exhibited,  with 
the  lavish  Expense,  with  the  Magnificence  in  this  Portion  of 
his  Works,  is  to  lend  a  countenance  to  Luxury.  But  herein 
appeared  the  true  and  incomparable  Loftiness  of  his  un- 
conquered  Mind,  that  when  at  the  Battle  of  Pharsalia,  the 
Writing-case  containing  the  Letters  of  Pompey  was  taken, 
as  also  those  of  Scipio  at  Thapsus,  he  burnt  them  all  with 
the  utmost  Fidelity,  without  having  read  them. 


Pompey. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 
The  Praise  of  Pompey  the  Great. 

To  relate  all  the  Titles,  Victories,  and  Triumphs  of  Pompey 
the  Great,  wherein  he  was  equal  in  the  splendour  of  his 
Exploits  not  only  to  Alexander  the  Great,1  but  even  almost 
to  Hercules  and  Liber  Pater,  would  redound,  not  to  the 
Honour  only  of  that  one  Man,  but  also  to  the  Grandeur  of 
the  Roman  Empire.  In  the  first  place  then,  after  he  had 
recovered  Sicily,  from  whence  his  first  rising  was  as  a  follower 
of  Sylla  in  the  cause  of  the  Republic,  he  appeared  auspiciously 

1  It  is  clear  from  various  ancient  authorities,  that  it  was  the  ambition 
of  Pompey  to  imitate  and  be  compared  to  Alexander;  and  it  was  with  this 
view  that  the  title  of  Great  was  highly  acceptable  to  him.  It  was  per- 
haps to  humour  this  foible,  and  through  it  to  secure  him  the  more  effec- 
tually  to  his  party,  that  Sylla  was  accustomed  to  pay  him  extraordinary 
personal  honours :  returning  his  salutation  of  Imperator  with  the  same 
title,  rising  from  his  seat  to  salute  him  when  Pompey  dismounted  from 
his  horse,  and  uncovering  his  head  at  the  same  time. — Daleschampiiis. 
In  honour  of  Pompey 's  having  restored  the  sovereignty  of  the  sea,  the 
reverse  of  a  Roman  denarius  bears  the  figure  of  a  Dolphin  and  Eagle, 
separated  by  a  Sceptre,  with  the  inscription,  Magn.  Procos.—  Wern.  Club. 

VOL.  II.  P 


210  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

fortunate.  Having  also  wholly  subdued  Africa,  and  brought 
it  under  obedience,  he  was  brought  back  in  a  Triumphal 
Chariot,  with  the  name  of  Great,  by  reason  of  the  Pillage 
there  captured,  being  then  only  a  Roman  Knight :  a  thing 
that  was  never  seen  before.  Immediately  passing  into  the 
West,  and  having  brought  under  obedience  876  Towns, 
between  the  Alps  and  the  borders  of  Spain,  he  erected 
Trophies  on  the  Pyrenees,  with  the  inscription  of  his  Victory  ; 
and  with  more  nobleness  of  Mind,  said  nothing  concerning 
Sertorius.  And  after  the  Civil  War  was  put  an  end  to 
(which  drew  after  it  all  Foreign  matters),  this  Roman  Knight 
triumphed  the  second  time :  being  so  many  times  a  General 
(Imperator),  before  he  was  a  Soldier  (Miles).  Afterward 
he  was  sent  out  on  an  Expedition  to  all  the  Seas,  and  then 
into  the  East  parts  :  From  whence  he  returned  with  more 
Titles  to  his  Country,  after  the  manner  of  those  who  win 
Victories  at  the  Sacred  Games.1  Neither,  indeed,  are  those 
Crowned,  but  they  Crown  their  Native  Countries;  and 
so  Pompey  gave  as  a  Tribute  to  the  City  these  honours 
which  he  dedicated  to  Minerva*  out  of  (mojiubiis)  his  own 
share  of  the  Spoils,  with  an  inscription  in  this  manner  : 
CN.  POMPEIUS  the  Great,  Imperator,  having  finished  the 
War  of  Thirty  Years:  having  discomfited,  put  to  flight,  slain, 
received  to  submission,  2,183,000  Men :  sunk  or  taken  846 
Ships :  brought  under  his  authority  Towns  and  Castles  to  the 
number  0/1538  :  subdued  the  Lands  from  the  Lake  Mceotis 
to  the  Red  Sea,  hath  dedicated  of  right  this  Vow  to  MINERVA. 
This  is  the  Summary  of  his  Services  in  the  East.  But  of  the 
Triumph  which  he  led  on  the  Third  Day  before  the  Calends 
of  October,  when  M.  Messala  and  M.  Piso  were  Consuls, 
the  Title  ran  thus  :  When  he  had  freed  the  Sea-coast  from 
Pirates,  had  restored  to  the  People  of  Rome  the  Sovereignty 
of  the  Sea,  he  hath  triumphed  for  Asia ;  Pontus,  Armenia, 
Paphlagonia,  Cappadocia,  Cilicia,  Syria,  the  Scythians,  Jews, 
and  the  Albani ;  the  Island  Iberia,  Crete,  the  Bastarni ; 
and  above  these,  over  the  Kings  Mithridates  and  Tigranes. 
But  the  greatest  Glory  of  all  in  him  was  this,  (as  himself 

1  Olympia,  Nemsea,  Pythia,  Isthmia.  2  Or  Victory. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  21 1 

said  in  an  Assembly,  when  he  discoursed  of  his  own  Ex- 
ploits) :  that  whereas  Asia,  when  he  received  it,  was  the 
remotest  Province  of  his  Country,  he  left  it  in  the  centre. 
If  a  man  would  set  Ccesar  on  the  other  side  against  him, 
and  review  his  actions,  who  of  the  two  seemed  greater, 
he  might  indeed  reckon  up  the  whole  World,  which  would 
amount  to  an  infinite  matter. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 
The  praise  of  the  First  Cato. 

MANY  Men  have  differently  excelled  in  various  other 
kinds  of  virtues.  But  Cato,1  the  First  of  the  Porcian  House, 
was  thought  to  have  been  the  most  excellent  in  three 
things  which  are  in  the  highest  degree  commendable  in 
Man.  He  was  the  best  Orator;  the  best  General ;  and  the 
best  Senator.  And  yet,  in  my  opinion,  all  these  excellencies 
shone  out  more  brightly,  although  he  was  not  first,  in  Scipio 
JEmilianus :  To  say  nothing  besides  of  the  absence  of  the 
Hatred  of  so  many  Men,  which  Cato  laboured  under.  But 
if  you  seek  for  one  especial  thing  in  Cato,  this  is,  that  he 
was  judicially  called  to  his  answer  Forty-four  times,  and 
never  was  there  a  Man  accused  oftener  than  he ;  yet  he  was 
always  acquitted. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Of  Valour. 
IT  is  a  very  extensive  inquiry,  to  discover  in  whom  the 

1  This  Cato  appears  to  have  been  more  successful  in  obtaining  the 
esteem  than  the  love  of  the  people ;  and,  indeed,  from  the  evidence  of  his 
"Treatise  on  Agriculture,"  he  appears  to  have  been  a  niggardly  and 
shrewd  master,  whom  no  one  could  defraud,  and  who  was  ready  to 
secure  every  advantage  in  a  bargain.  He  recommends,  with  the  same 
indifference,  the  sale  of  an  ox  that  was  past  labour,  his  rusty  iron,  and 
sickly  or  worn-out  slave. 

Narratur  et  prisci  Catonis, 

Saepe  mero  caluisse  Virtus. — Wern.  Club. 


212  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VII. 

greatest  degree  of  hardy  Courage  existed ;  and  more  espe- 
cially if  we  admit  the  fabulous  tales  of  Poets.  Q.  Ennius 
had  in  greatest  admiration  T.  Ccecilius  Teucer,  and  his 
brother;  and  in  regard  of  those  Two  he  added  to  the  others 
the  Sixth  Book  of  his  Annals.  But  L.  Siccius  Dentatus,  a 
Tribune  of  the  Commons,  not  long  after  the  Banishment  of 
the  Kings,  when  Sp.  Tarpeius  and  A.  JEternius  were  Con- 
suls, by  most  Voices  surpasseth  in  this  kind,  having  Fought 
120  Battles;  having  been  Conqueror  in  Eight  Combats  with 
a  Challenge ;  being  marked  with  45  Scars  on  the  front 
of  his  Body,  and  none  behind.  Also  he  won  the  Spoils  of 
33  Enemies;  he  had  been  presented  with  18  Spears;  25 
trappings  for  Horses ;  83  Chains ;  160  Bracelets ;  26 
Crowns,  of  which  14  were  Civic,  eight  of  Gold :  three 
Mural ;  and  one  Obsidional ;  together  with  a  Pension  from 
the  Treasury ;  and  ten  Captives  with  twenty  Oxen ;  and 
thus  he  followed  nine  Imperators,  who  chiefly  by  his  means 
triumphed.  Besides  these  things,  he  accused  in  open  court 
before  the  body  of  the  People,  which  I  suppose  was  the 
worthiest  act  he  ever  did,  T.  Romulius,  one  of  the  lead- 
ing Generals  (who  had  been  a  Consul)  and  convicted  him  for 
his  ill  management  of  his  military  command.  Scarcely 
inferior  to  these  were  the  exploits  of  Manlius  Capitolinus,  if 
he  had  not  forfeited  them  again  with  such  an  end  of  his  life.1 
Before  he  was  seventeen  years  of  age,  he  had  gained  two 
spoils  of  his  Enemies.  He  was  the  first  Roman  Knight  that 
received  a  Mural  Crown;  with  six  Civic  Crowns  ;  37  Dona- 
tions; and  he  carried  the  Scars  in  the  forepart  of  his  Body 
of  33  Wounds.  He  rescued  P.  Servilius,  Master  of  the 
Horse,  and  (in  the  rescue)  was  himself  wounded  in  the  Arm 

1  Marcus  Manlius  was  the  means  of  preserving  the  Capitol  when  it  was 
nearly  taken  by  the  Gauls ;  from  which  exploit  he  obtained  the  surname 
of  Capitolinus.  Becoming  afterwards  a  warm  supporter  of  the  popular 
party  against  the  patrician  order,  he  was  accused  of  aiming  at  the  kingly 
power,  and  condemned  to  death.  According  to  Livy  (lib.  vi.)  "the 
tribunes  cast  him  down  from  the  Tarpeian  rock ;  thus  the  same  spot,  in 
the  case  of  one  man,  became  a  monument  of  distinguished  glory  and  of 
the  cruellest  punishment." —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  213 

and  Thigh.  Above  all  other  actions,  he  alone  saved  the 
Capitol,  and  thereby  the  whole  State,  from  the  Gauls:  if  he 
had  not  saved  it  for  his  own  Kingdom  !  In  these  examples 
there  is  indeed  much  of  courage,  but  yet  Fortune  hath  had  the 
greater  share ;  and  in  my  judgment  no  one  may  justly  prefer 
any  Man  before  M.  Sergius,  although  Catiline,  his  Nephew's 
Son,  discredited  his  Name.  In  the  second  Year  of  his  Service 
he  lost  his  Right  Hand  ;  and  in  two  Services  he  was  wounded 
three  and  twenty  times :  by  which  means  he  had  little  use 
of  either  his  Hands  or  Feet.  But  although  thus  disabled 
as  a  Soldier,  he  went  many  a  Time  after  to  the  Wars, 
attended  only  by  one  Slave.  Twice  he  was  taken  Prisoner 
by  Hannibal  (for  he  did  not  serve  against  ordinary  Enemies), 
and  twice  he  escaped  from  his  bonds,  although  for  twenty 
Months  he  was  every  Day  kept  Bound  with  Chains  or 
Shackles.  Four  times  he  fought  with  his  Left  Hand  only, 
until  two  Horses  were  killed  under  him.  He  made  himself 
a  Right  Hand  of  Iron,  and  he  fought  with  it  fastened  to  his 
Arm.  He  delivered  Cremona  from  Siege,  and  saved  Pla- 
centia.  In  Gallia,  he  took  twelve  Camps  of  the  Enemies: 
All  which  Exploits  appear  from  that  Oration  of  his  which  he 
made  in  his  Praetorship,  when  his  Colleagues  repelled  him 
from  the  solemn  Sacrifices  because  he  was  maimed.1  What 
heaps  of  Crowns  would  he  have  built  up  if  he  had  been 
matched  with  any  other  Enemy  !  For  it  is  very  important, 
in  our  estimate  of  Courage,  to  consider  in  what  Time  the 
Persons  lived.  For  what  Civic  Crowns  yielded  either  Trebia 
and  Ticinus,  or  Thrasymenus?  what  Crown  could  have  been 
gained  at  Cannae,  where  the  best  service  of  Courage  was  to 
have  made  an  escape  ?  Others,  truly,  have  vanquished  Men  ; 
but  Sergius  conquered  Fortune  herself. 

1  The  ancients  were  cautious  not  to  admit  a  mutilated  person  to  the 
celebration  of  sacred  rites,  observing  that  such  a  defect  was  to  be  regarded 
as  a  thing  of  ill-omen  ;  and  that,  if  the  victim  must  be  perfect,  how  much 
more  does  it  become  the  priest  to  be  so !  How  careful  the  Jews  were 
commanded  to  be  in  this  respect,  appears  from  the  Law  of  Moses, 
Levit.  xx.  xxi. —  Wern.  Club. 


214  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII, 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

Of  Ingenuities,  or  the  Commendations  of  some  Men  for  their 

Ingenuity. 

WHO  is  able  to  make  a  muster  of  them  that  have  been 
excellent  in  Ingenuity  through  so  many  kinds  of  Sciences, 
and  such  a  variety  of  Works  and  Things?  Unless  perhaps 
we  agree  that  Homer,  the  Greek  Prophet,  excelled  all  others, 
considering  either  the  subject  matter  or  the  happy  fortune 
of  his  Work.  And  therefore  Alexander  the  Great  (for  in  so 
proud  a  decision  I  shall  cite  the  Judgment  of  the  highest, 
and  of  those  that  are  beyond  Envy),  having  found  among 
the  Spoils  of  Darius,  king  of  the  Persians,  his  Casket  of 
sweet  Ointments,  which  was  richly  embellished  with  Gold, 
Pearls,  and  precious  Stones  ;  when  his  friends  shewed  him 
many  uses  to  which  the  Cabinet  might  be  put,  considering 
that  Alexander,  as  a  Soldier  engaged  in  War,  and  soiled  with 
its  service,  was  disgusted  with  those  Unguents  :  By  Hercules, 
he  said,  let  it  be  devoted  to  the  care  of  Homer's  Books,  that 
the  most  precious  Work  of  the  Human  Mind  should  be  pre- 
served in  the  richest  of  all  Caskets.  The  same  Prince,  when 
he  took  Thebes,  commanded  that  the  Dwelling-house  and 
Family  of  the  Poet  Pindar*  should  be  spared.  He  refounded 
the  native  place  (Patria)  of  Aristotle  the  Philosopher;  and 
so  mingled  a  kind  Testimony  for  one  who  threw  light  on 
all  things  in  the  World.  Apollo,  at  Delphi,  revealed  the 
murderers  of  Archilochus  the  Poet.  When  Sophocles,  the 
Prince  of  the  Tragic  Buskin,  was  dead,  and  the  Walls  of 
the  City  were  besieged  by  the  Lacedaemonians,  Liber  Pater 
commanded  that  he  should  be  buried  ;  and  he  admonished 
Lysander  their  King  several  times  as  he  slept,  to  suffer  his 
delight  to  be  interred.  The  King  made  diligent  inquiry  who 

1  "  The  Macedonian  conqueror  bade  spare 

The  house  of  Pindarus,  when  temple  and  tower 
Went  to  the  ground." — MII/TON. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  215 

lately  had  died  in  Athens :  and  by  relation  of  the  Citizens 
soon  found  out  who  the  god  had  signified ;  and  so  gave  them 
peace  for  the  burial. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 
Of  Plato,  Ennius,  Virgil,  M.  Varro,  and  M.  Cicero. 

DIONYSIUS  the  Tyrant,  born  otherwise  to  pride  and 
cruelty,  sent  out  to  meet  Plato,  the  Chief  of  the  Wise 
Men,  a  Ship  adorned  with  Ribbons;  and  himself  went  out 
in  a  Chariot  with  four  white  Horses,  to  receive  him  on  the 
Shore.  Isocrates  sold  one  Oration  for  twenty  talents  of  Gold. 
JEschines,  the  famous  Orator  of  Athens,  having  at  Rhodes 
rehearsed  that  accusation  which  he  had  made  against 
Demosthenes,  read  also  his  adversary's  defence,  by  occasion 
of  which  he  had  been  driven  into  Banishment  at  Rhodes ; 
and  when  the  Rhodians  wondered  at  it  he  said,  How  much 
more  would  you  have  wondered,  if  you  had  heard  him  de- 
livering it  himself!  Yielding  thus  in  his  Calamity  a  noble 
Testimony  to  his  Adversary.  The  Athenians  exiled  Thucy- 
dides  their  General :  but  after  he  had  written  his  Chronicle 
they  called  him  home  again,  wondering  at  the  Eloquence  of 
the  Man  whose  Courage  they  had  condemned.  The  Kings 
of  Egypt  and  Macedonia  gave  a  strong  Testimony  how  much 
they  honoured  Mcenander  the  Comic  Poet,  in  that  they 
sent  Ambassadors  for  him  with  a  Fleet ;  but  he  won  himself 
greater  fame  by  esteeming  more  his  Studies,  than  the  Favours 
of  Princes.  Also  the  Roman  Nobles  have  afforded  Testi- 
monies even  to  Foreigners.  Hence  Cn.  Pompey,  when  he  had 
ended  the  War  against  Mithridates,  being  about  to  enter  the 
House  of  Posidonius,  the  celebrated  Professor  of  Wisdom, 
forbad  the  Lictor  to  knock  at  the  Door  according  to  custom  : 
and  he  to  whom  both  the  East  and  the  West  parts  of  the 
World  had  submitted,  laid  down  the  lictorial  Fasces  at  the 
Gate.  Cato,  surnamed  Censorius,  when  there  came  to  Rome 
that  noble  embassage  from  Athens,  consisting  of  three,  the 
wisest  Men  among  them,  having  heard  Carneades  speak, 


216  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

gave  his  opinion  presently,  that  those  Ambassadors  were  to 
be  sent  away  with  all  speed,  because,  if  that  Man  argued  the 
case,  it  would  be  difficult  to  find  out  the  Truth.1  What  a 
change  is  there  now  in  Men's  manners  !  His  decision  was, 
that  by  any  means  all  Greeks  should  be  expelled  from  Italy ; 
but  his  nephew's  Son,  (Pronepos,)  Cato  of  Utica,  brought  one 
of  their  Philosophers  over  with  him  from  the  Tribunes  of  the 
Soldiers,  and  another  from  the  Cyprian  Embassy.  And  it  is 
worthy  of  notice  to  consider  how  the  same  Language  was  regard- 
ed by  these  two  Catoes :  for  by  the  one  it  was  rejected.  But 
let  us  now  discern  the  glory  of  our  own  Countrymen.  Scipio 
Africanus  the  elder  gave  order  that  the  Statue  of  Q.  Ennius* 

1  The  account  of  Gate's  conduct  with  the  Greek   ambassadors,  as 
given  by  Pliny,  is  very  different  from  that  by  Plutarch,  and,  from 
Cato's  acknowledged  love  of  eloquence,  we  may  judge  more  correct.     It 
was  not,  therefore,  the  fear  that  eloquence  would  render  the  Romans 
effeminate ;  but  because  the  peculiar  eloquence  of  these  men,  with  per- 
haps the  general  tendency  of  Greek  studies,  was  calculated  to  foster 
habits  of  sophistry,  and  so  confound  the  distinction  between  truth  and 
falsehood.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  He  was  emphatically  the  poet  of  the  republic,  and  must  have  been 
a  man  of  sterling  worth  to  have  been  so  highly  esteemed  by  the  family 
of  Scipio,  and  by  the  censor  Cato.     "  It  was  well  known  from  a  passage 
in  Cicero,  and  another  in  Livy,  that  the  sepulchre  of  the  Scipios  stood 
beyond  the  Porta  Capena  of  Rome  ;  and  Livy  describes  it  as  being  in  his 
time  surmounted  by  three  statues :  two  of  them  of  the  Scipios,  and  the 
third,  as  was  believed,  of  the  poet  Ennius.     But  it  was  not  until  the  year 
A.D.  1780,  that  some  labourers  at  work  in  a  vineyard  discovered  a  clue 
which  led  to  further  excavations;  and  thus  the  tombs,  after  having  lain 
undisturbed  for  upwards  of  2000  years,  were  most  unexpectedly  brought 
to  light.     The  original  inscriptions  have  been  removed  to  the  Vatican." 
The  following  is  from  "  Roma  Antica,"  but  is  also  contained  in  Mont- 
faucon's  "Antiquities,"  and  it  must  belong  to  that  Scipio  who  is  spoken  of 
by  Pliny  in  the  thirty-fourth  chapter  of  this  book,  though  our  author 
has  erred  in  the  application :  — 

Hone  .  oino  .  ploirume  .  consentient  .  R  . 

Duonoro  .  optumo  .  fuise  .  viro  . 

Luciom  .  Scipione  .  filios  .  Barbati  . 

Consol  .  Censor  .  Aidilis  .  Hie  .  fuit  .A  .... 

Hec  .  cepit  .  Corsica  .  Aleriaque  .  Urbe  . 

Dedet  .  tempestatebus  .  aide  .  mereto  .  j 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  217 

the  Poet  should  be  set  over  his  Tomb ; 1  to  the  end  that  this 
illustrious  name,  or  indeed  the  spoil  that  he  had  carried 
away  from  a  third  part  of  the  World,  should  be  read  over  his 
last  ashes,  with  the  title  of  the  Poet.  Divus  Augustus  forbad 
that  the  Poems  of  Virgil  should  be  burned,  contrary  to  the 
truth  of  his  will ;  by  which  means  there  grew  more  credit  to 
the  Poet,  than  if  himself  had  approved  his  own  Verses. 
Asinius  Pollio  was  the  first  that  set  up  a  public  Library  at 
Rome,  raised  from  his  portion  of  spoil ;  and  in  it  he  placed 
the  image  of  M.  Varro,  even  while  he  lived :  a  thing  of  as 
great  honour,  in  my  opinion  (considering  that  among  the 
multitude  of  learned  Men  he  only  received  this  Crown  from  a 
Citizen  and  an  excellent  Orator),  as  that  other  Naval  Crown 
gained  him,  which  Pompey  the  Great  bestowed  upon  him 

Thus  interpreted : — 

Hunc  umirn  plurimi  consentiunt  Romae, 

Bonorum  optimum  fuisse  virum, 

Lucium  Scipionem,  films  Barbati, 

Consol,  Censor,  .^Edilis,  Hie  fuit ;  atque  (or,  apud  vos, 

or  ad  eos). 

Hie  cepit  Corsicam,  Aleriamque  urbem 
Dedit  Tempestatibus  sedem  merito. 

"  The  Roman  people  agree  in  thinking  this  man,  Lucius  Scipio,  the 
best  of  all  good  citizens.  He  was  the  son  of  Barbatus,  and  consul,  censor, 
and  sedile  among  you.  He  took  Corsica,  and  the  city  Aleria,  and 
worthily  dedicated  a  temple  to  the  Seasons." 

This  inscription  was  dug  up  in  1616,  but  was  rejected  as  spurious  until 
the  others  were  discovered.  Africanus,  the  greatest  of  the  Scipios,  was 
not  buried  in  the  paternal  tomb,  but  on  the  shore  at  Liternum ;  and  the 
inscription  on  his  tomb  is  supposed  to  have  been,  "  Ingrata  Patria,  ne 
ossa  quidem  habes."  The  place  is  supposed  to  be  marked  by  a  modern 
tower,  which  from  the  inscription  still  retains  the  name  of  "  Patria." — 
Wem.  Club. 

1  "  Nor  think  the  great  from  their  high  place  descend, 
Who  choose  the  Muses'  favourite  for  a  friend ; 
When  mighty  Scipio,  Rome  well  pleas'd  could  see, 
With  Ennius  join'd,  in  kindest  amity." 

JEPHSON'S  Roman  Portraits. 

"  L'intime  liaison  de  Scipion  avec  le  poete  Ennius,  avec  qui  il  voulut 
avoir  un  tombeau  commun,  fait  juger  qu'il  ne  manquoit  pas  de  gout 
pour  les  belles  lettres."— Hist.  Rom.  par  ROLLIN,  vol.  vii. 


218  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

in  the  Pirates'  War.  There  are  innumerable  Roman  exam- 
ples, if  a  Man  would  search  them  out :  for  this  one  Nation 
hath  brought  forth  more  excellent  Men  in  every  kind  than 
all  besides.  But  why  should  I  be  silent  concerning  the  sacri- 
fice of  M.  Tullius?  or  how  shall  I  best  declare  his  high 
excellency?  how  better  his  praises  than  from  the  most 
ample  testimony  of  the  whole  body  of  the  People  in  general, 
and  the  acts  only  of  this  Consulship,  chosen  out  of  the 
whole  course  of  thy  life  ?  Thine  Eloquence  was  the  cause 
that  the  Tribes  renounced  the  Agrarian  Law :  that  is,  their 
own  Sustenance.  Through  thy  Persuasion  they  pardoned 
Roscius,  the  Author  of  the  Law  of  the  Theatre;1  they  were 
content  to  be  noted  by  the  Difference  of  Seat.  At  thy 
Request  the  Children  of  the  Proscribed  felt  ashamed  to  sue 
for  honourable  Dignities ;  Catiline  fled  from  thy  Ability ;  it 
was  thou  that  proscribedst  M.  Antonius.  Hail,  thou  who  wast 
the  first  that  wast  saluted  by  the  Name  of  Father  of  thy  Coun- 
try! the  first  in  the  long  Robe  that  deserved  a  Triumph,  and 
the  Laurel  for  thy  Language  !  the  Father  indeed  of  Elo- 
quence and  of  the  Latin  Learning  :  and  (as  the  Dictator 
C&sar,  who  was  at  one  Time  thine  Enemy,  hath  written  of 
thee)  hast  obtained  a  Laurel  above  all  other  Triumphs,  by  how 
much  more  Praiseworthy  it  is  to  have  enlarged  the  Bounds 
of  Roman  Learning  than  of  Roman  Dominion. 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 
Of  Majesty  in  Manners. 

THOSE  who,  among  other  Gifts  of  the  Mind,  have  sur- 
passed the  rest  of  Mankind  in  Wisdom,  were  on  that  Account 
among  the  Romans  surnamed  Cati,  and  Corculi.  Among  the 
Greeks,  Socrates  was  preferred  to  all  beside  by  the  Oracle  of 
Apollo  Pythius. 

1  The  Roscian  and  Julian  law,  of  which  L.  Roscius  Otho,  tribune  of 
the  people,  was  the  author,  which  denned  and  regulated  the  order  of 
sitting  in  the  public  theatre ;  where,  before  this,  the  people  mixed  indis- 
criminately with  the  knights.  The  law  seems  to  have  been  unpopular, 
and  therefore  to  have  required  frequent  renewal.  Martial  (b.  v.  ep.  8), 
has  an  amusing  epigram  on  its  enforcement  by  Domitian.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  219 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 
Of  Authority. 

AGAIN,  Chilo  the  Lacedsemonian  was  of  such  great  Reput- 
ation among  Men,  that  his  Sayings  were  held  for  Oracles ; 
and  three  Precepts  of  his  were  consecrated  at  Delphi,  in 
these  Words :  That  each  one  should  know  himself:  Set  thy 
Mind  too  much  on  Nothing:  Debt  and  Law  are  always  accom- 
panied with  Misery.  Moreover,  when  he  died  for  Joy,  on 
receiving  Tidings  that  his  Son  was  Conqueror  at  Olympia, 
all  Greece  solemnised  his  Funeral. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 
Of  a  divine  Spirit. 

AMONG  Women,  in  the  Sibyl1  there  was  a  divine  Spirit, 
and  a  certain  very  noble  Companionship  with  celestial 
Beings.  Of  Men,  among  the  Greeks,  Melampus;  and  among 
the  Romans,  Martins. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 
Of  Nasica. 

SCIPIO  NASICA  was  judged  once  hy  the  sworn  Senate  to 
be  the  best  Man  from  the  Beginning  of  Time :  but  the  same 
Man  is  remarked  to  have  twice  suffered  a  Repulse  by  the 
People  in  his  white  Robe.  And  to  conclude,  it  was  not  per- 
mitted him  to  die  in  his  own  Country;  no  more,  by  Hercules, 
than  it  was  that  Socrates,  pronounced  the  wisest  Man  by 
Apollo,  should  die  out  of  Bonds. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 
Of  Modesty* 

SULPITIA,  Daughter  of  Paterculus  and  Wife  to  Fulvius 
Flaccus,  by  the  Sentence  in  general  of  the  Matrons  was  pro- 

1  The  Sibyls  will  be  referred  to  in  the  34th  book.—  Wern.  Club. 
a  It  was  an  ancient  law, "  Ut  Matronis  de  via  decederetur,  nihil  obscceni 
presentibus  iis  vel  diceretur  vel  fieret,  neve  quis  nudum  se  ab  iis  conspici 


220  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  VII. 

nounced  the  most  modest ;  and  was  elected  out  of  a  hundred 
principal  Matrons  to  dedicate  the  Image  of  Venus,  according 
to  the  Sybilline  Books.  Claudia,  likewise  was,  by  a  religious 
Experiment  (proved  to  be  such),  by  bringing  the  Mother  of 
the  Gods  to  Rome. 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 
Of  Piety.1 

TRULY,  in  all  Parts  of  the  World,  there  have  been  found 
infinite  Examples  of  Piety ;  but  one  Example  of  this  occurred 
at  Rome,  to  which  none  beside  can  be  compared.  There 
was  a  young  Woman  of  humble  Condition  among  the  com- 
mon People,  and  therefore  of  no  account,  who  lately  had  been 
in  Childbed,  and  whose  Mother  was  shut  up  in  Prison  for 
some  great  Offence ;  and  when  this  Daughter  obtained  leave 
to  have  Access  to  her  Mother,  and  constantly  by  the  Jailer 
was  narrowly  searched,  that  she  might  not  bring  to  her  any 
Food,  she  was  at  last  detected  suckling  her  with  the  Milk 
of  her  Breasts.  On  account  of  this  astonishing  circum- 
stance the  Life  of  the  Mother  was  granted  to  the  Piety  of 
the  Daughter,  and  both  of  them  had  continued  Sustenance 
allowed  them ;  and  the  Place  where  this  happened  was  con- 
secrated to  this  Deity  (Piety} :  so  that  when  C.  Quintius  and 
M.  Acilius  were  Consuls,  the  Temple  of  Piety  was  built,  in 
the  very  Place  where  this  Prison  stood,  and  where  now 
standeth  the  Theatre  ofMarcellus.  The  Father  of  the  Gracchi 

pateretur,  alioquin  criminis  capitalis  reus  haberetur."  That  they  should 
give  way  to  matrons,  that  no  obscenity  should  either  be  spoken  or  done  in 
their  presence ;  and  that  no  man  should  suffer  himself  to  be  within  sight 
of  them  naked :  if  otherwise,  he  should  be  held  guilty  of  a  capital  crime. 
—Wern.  Club. 

1  In  the  language  of  the  ancients,  piety  is  not  to  be  understood  as 
having  a  reference  to  God,  but  only  as  expressing  the  law  of  social  kind- 
ness among  the  relations  of  blood  or  marriage.  It  proceeds  only  from 
revelation  that  the  latter  is  made  to  be  a  duty  flowing  from  the  former ; 
and  hence,  while  among  Heathens  the  most  vicious  of  mankind  in  his 
general  character  might  also  be  among  the  most  pious,  among  Christians 
no  such  anomalies  can  exist.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  221 

having  taken  two  Serpents  within  his  House,  received  an 
Answer  (from  the  Soothsayers),  that  if  he  would  himself  live 
the  female  Snake  must  be  killed.  Truly  then,  said  he,  rather 
kill  the  male ;  for  Cornelia  is  young,  and  may  have  more 
Children.  This  was  in  order  to  spare  his  Wife's  Life,  in 
consideration  of  the  Good  she  might  do  to  the  Common- 
wealth. And  so  it  fell  out  soon  after.  M.  Lepidas  so  en- 
tirely loved  his  wife  Apuleia,  that  he  died  when  she  was 
divorced  from  him.  P.  Rutilius  was  laid  by  from  some 
slight  Illness,  but  hearing  of  his  Brother's  Repulse  in  his 
Request  for  the  Consulship,  died  immediately.  P.  Catienus 
Philotimus  so  loved  his  Master  (Patronus),  that  though  he 
was  made  his  Heir  to  all  that  he  had,  yet  he  cast  himself  into 
his  funeral  Fire. 

CHAPTER  XXXVII. 

Of  the  Excellency  of  many  Arts,  as  Astrology,  Grammar, 
and  Geometry. 

IN  the  Knowledge  of  various  Arts  a  great  Number  of 
Men  have  excelled ;  but  we  will  only  take  the  Flower  of 
them,  and  touch  them  lightly.  In  Astrology,  Berosus  was 
eminent ;  to  whom  the  Athenians,  for  his  divine  Predictions, 
caused  a  Statue  with  a  golden  Tongue  to  be  erected  in  the 
public  Gymnasium.  In  Grammar,  Apollodorus  was  distin- 
guished; and  therefore  he  was  highly  honoured  by  the  Am- 
phitryons  of  Greece.  In  Medicine,  Hippocrates1  excelled  ; 
and  having  foretold  a  Pestilence  that  was  approaching  from 
Illyria,  to  cure  it  he  sent  his  Disciples  to  the  surrounding 
Cities.  In  Recompense  of  which  good  Desert,  Greece  de- 
creed for  him  the  like  Honours  as  to  Hercules.  For  the  same 
Science,  King  Ptolemy  gave  to  Cleombrotus  of  Cea,  at  the 
sacred  Megalensian  Rites,  a  hundred  Talents,  especially  for 
curing  King  Antiochus.  Critobulus  likewise  acquired  great 
Fame  for  drawing  an  Arrow  out  of  King  Philip's  Eye,  and 

1  The  remarkable  observation  at  the  end  of  the  50th  chapter,  which 
appears  to  be  confirmed  by  the  course  of  the  most  formidable  epidemics  of 
modern  times,  will  account  for  this  skill  in  this  most  eminent  physician 


222  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

so  curing  the  Wound  that  the  Sight  remained,  and  only  a 
Blemish  of  the  Mouth  remained.  But  Asclepiades  the  Pru- 
sian  surpassed  all  others,  having  founded  a  new  Sect ;  he 
rejected  the  Ambassadors  and  large  Promises  offered  by 
King  Mithridates;  discovered  a  Method  to  make  Wine  medi- 
cinable  for  the  Sick ;  and  recovered  a  Man  to  his  former 
state  of  Health,  who  was  carried  forth  to  be  buried  :  and 
chiefly  he  attained  to  the  greatest  Name  for  the  Engagement 
made  against  Fortune,  that  he  would  not  be  reputed  a  Phy- 
sician if  he  ever  were  known  to  be  in  any  way  diseased.  And 
he  was  Conqueror ;  for  when  he  was  very  aged  he  fell  down 
over  the  Stairs,  and  was  killed.  A  high  Testimony  for  Know- 
ledge in  Geometry  and  the  making  of  Engines  was  given  by 
M.  Marcellus  to  Archimedes,  who  in  the  storming  of  Syra- 
cuse gave  express  Command  concerning  him  alone,  that  no 
Violence  should  be  done  to  him  ;  but  military  Imprudence 
disappointed  the  Order.  Ctesiphon  of  Gnosos  is  much  praised 
for  having  wonderfully  erected  the  Temple  of  Diana  at 
Ephesus.  Philon,  likewise,  was  highly  esteemed  for  making 
the  Arsenal  at  Athens,  which  was  able  to  receive  a  thousand 
Ships ;  and  Ctesibius  for  a  Method  of  forming  Wind  Instru- 
ments, and  the  Discovery  of  Engines  to  draw  Water :  Dino- 

of  antiquity,  who  had  the  benefit  of  access  to  the  long  series  of  records  of 
the  family  of  the  Asclepiadae,  and  whose  public  spirit  was  equal  to  his 
abilities  and  opportunities.  —  Wern.  Club. 


Medal  of  Hippocrates,  from  an  engraving  in  Dr.  Mead's  Harveyan  Oration,  1723. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  223 

crates,  also,  for  devising  the  Model  of  Alexandria  in  Egypt, 
when  Alexander  founded  it.  To  conclude,  this  great  Com- 
mander (Imperator)  forbade,  by  Edict,  that  any  Man  should 
paint  him  but  Apelles:  that  any  one  should  carve  his  Statue 
besides  Pyrgoteles :  and  that  any  one  except  Lysippus 
should  cast  his  Image  in  Brass.  In  which  Arts  many  have 
excelled. 

CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 

Surprising  Works  of  Artificers.1 

KING  Attains  offered  by  Competition,  for  one  Picture  by 
Aristides  the  Theban  Painter,  a  hundred  Talents.  Ccesar 
the  Dictator  bought  for  eight  Talents  two  Pictures,  the 
Medea  and  Ajax  of  Timomachus,  which  he  meant  to  conse- 
crate in  the  Temple  of  Venus  Genetrix.  King  Candaulas 
bought  of  Butarchus  a  Picture  of  the  Destruction  of  the 
Magnetes,  of  no  great  Size,  and  weighed  it  in  an  equal  Scale 
with  Gold.  King  Demetrius,  surnarned  Expugnator,  forbore 
to  set  Rhodes  on  Fire,  because  he  would  not  burn  a  Picture  by 
Protogenest  which  was  placed  in  that  part  of  the  Wall  which 
he  attacked.  Praxiteles  was  ennobled  on  account  of  a  marble 
Statue,  the  Gnidian  Venus,  remarkable  particularly  for  the 
mad  Love  of  a  certain  young  Man ;  which  Statue  was  so 
esteemed  by  King  Nicomedes,  that  he  endeavoured  to  obtain 
it  in  full  Payment  of  a  large  Debt  they  owed  him.  The 
Jupiter  Olympius  still  aifordeth  daily  Testimony  to  Phydias. 
{Jupiter}  Capitolinus,  and  Diana  of  Ephesus  yield  Testimony 
to  Mentor :  and  the  Instruments  of  this  Art  were  consecrated 
by  them  in  their  Temples. 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 

Of  Bondsmen.2 
I  HAVE  never  obtained  the  Knowledge  to  this  Day  of  a 

1  The  subject  of  statues  and  paintings  is  more  fully  treated  of  in  the 
34th  and  35th  books.  —  Wern.  Club. 

a  The  money  which  Marc  Antony  paid  for  a  couple  of  boys  is  given 
in  the  12th  chapter  of  this  book. — Wern.  Club. 


224  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

Man  born  a  Slave  who  was  valued  so  high  as  Daphnis,  the 
Grammarian,  was :  for  Cn.  Pisauretisis  sold  him  for  300,700 
Sesterces  to  M.  Scaurus,  Prince  of  the  City.  In  this  our  Age 
Stage-players  have  gone  beyond  this  Price,  and  that  not  a 
little  ;  but  they  had  bought  their  Freedom.  And  no  Wonder, 
for  it  is  reported  that  the  Actor  Roscius  in  former  Time  had 
yearly  earned  500,000  Sesterces.  Unless  any  one  may  desire 
in  this  Place  to  hear  of  the  Treasurer  of  the  Armenian  War, 
a  little  while  before  carried  on  on  account  of  Tyridatest  and 
who  was  made  free  by  Nero  for  120,000  Sesterces.  But,  by 
Hercules,  it  was  the  War  that  cost  so  much,  and  not  the  Man. 
Like  as  Sutorius  Priscus  gave  to  Sejanus  3500  Sesterces  for 
Pcezon,  one  of  his  Eunuchs :  but  this  was  more  for  Lust  than 
for  his  Beauty.  But  he  executed  this  infamous  Bargain  at  a 
Time  when  the  City  was  in  Sorrow,  and  no  Man  had  any 
Leisure  to  utter  a  Word  in  reproach. 

CHAPTER  XL. 
The  Excellency  of  Nations. 

IT  will  be  scarcely  questioned,  that  of  all  Nations  in  the 
World,  the  Romans1  are  the  most  excellent  for  every  Virtue  ; 
but  to  determine  who  was  the  happiest  Man  is  above  the 
reach  of  human  Understanding,  considering  that  some  fix 

1  The  Komans  were  a  haughty  people;  and  they  had  much  to  be 
proud  of:  for  we  have  no  records  of  a  nation  that  ever  understood  the 
arts  of  government  or  war  better  than  they.  But  of  what  is  properly 
denominated  science  they  knew  little ;  and  the  Chevalier  Bunsen  re- 
marks, that  they  did  not  reverence  or  recognise  human  rights  in  any 
nation  beside  their  own.  The  love  of  knowledge  and  truth  for  their  own 
sakes  was  altogether  unknown  among  them,  and  they  never  conferred 
benefit  except  for  their  own  advantage.  Their  calculating  self-love  made 
them,  essentially,  beneficial  rulers ;  but  they  manifested  no  esteem  for  their 
subjects ;  and  we  may  add,  that  the  most  probable  motive  which  actuated 
Plutarch  in  writing  his  "  Lives,"  and  especially  for  arranging  them  in 
parallels,  was  to  shew  covertly  that  men,  as  great  in  all  respects  as  any 
Romans,  had  lived  in  Greece.  Germanicus  is  judged  to  have  been  an 
exception  to  this  Roman  constitution  of  mind ;  and  probably  there  were 
others  of  lower  rank ;  but  they  are  to  be  regarded  as  simply  the  exceptions 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  225 

their  highest  Advantage  in  one  Thing,  others  in  another;1 
and  every  one  rneasureth  it  according  to  his  several  Dispo- 
sition :  but  if  we  wish  to  form  a  correct  Judgment,  throwing 
aside  all  the  Ambition  of  Fortune,  it  may  be  concluded,  that 
there  is  not  a  Man  in  the  World  to  be  accounted  happy.  Arid, 
therefore,  Fortune  dealeth  liberally  and  indulgently  with  any 
one,  if  he  may  justly  be  called  not  unhappy  ;  because  if  there 
be  no  other  Things,  yet  surely  a  Man  may  be  ever  in  Fear 
lest  Fortune  should  grow  tired  of  him  :  but  let  him  admit 
this  Fear,  and  there  can  be  no  solid  Happiness.  What 
should  I  say,  moreover,  to  this  ?  —  that  no  Man  is  at  all  Times 
wise?  I  wish  that  this  were  false,  and  not,  in  the  Judgment 
of  most  Men,  a  Poet's  Word  only.  But  such  is  the  Folly  of 
mortal  Men,  that  they  are  very  ingenious  in  deceiving  them- 
selves :  so  that  they  reckon  after  the  Custom  of  the  Thra- 
cians,  who,  by  Stones  marked  with  different  Colours,  which 
they  cast  into  an  Urn,  institute  the  Trial  of  every  Day  ;  and 
at  their  last  Day  they  separate  these  Stones  one  from  an- 
other and  count  them  :  and  thus  give  Judgment  concerning 

to  the  general  rule.     It  is  in  the  spirit  of  Pliny's  remark  that  Martial 
begins  his  Epigram  to  Trajan,  lib.  xii.  ep.  8  :  — 

"  Terrarum  Dea,  gentiumque  Roma, 
Cui  par  est  nihil,  et  nihil  secundum." 

Goddess  of  lands  and  nations,  Rome, 

Nothing  to  which  can  equal  come, 

And  nothing  second.  Wern.  Club. 

1  The  reader  is  referred  to  the  fourth  epistle  of  Pope's  "  Essay  on 
Man,"  for  a  more  extended  and  poetical  developement  of  this  sentiment. 

The  sentiments  in  the  latter  part  of  this  chapter  are  re-echoed  in  the 
Book  of  Ecclesiastes  by  Solomon ;  where  he  employs  the  advantages 
arising  from  his  high  situation  and  consummate  wisdom  in  seeking  to 
discover  whether,  on  merely  human  principles,  there  was  any  such  thing 
as  human  happiness  in  the  world.  The  result  was  the  same  as  is  expressed 
by  Pliny,  but  with  the  advantage  on  the  side  of  the  Hebrew  sage,  that 
he  was  able  to  find  in  his  more  elevated  principles  a  security  of  which 
Pliny  was  altogether  ignorant.  The  value  of  the  Life  and  Immortality 
which  have  been  brought  to  light  by  the  Gospel,  can  best  be  estimated 
when  we  see  the  gloom  which  occupied  the  mind  of  even  such  a  man  as 
Pliny  without  it.  The  highest  happiness  detailed  in  the  next  chapter 
(xli.)  is  much  below  the  aspiration  of  every  Christian.  —  Wern.  Club. 
VOL.  II.  Q 


226  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

each  one.  But  what  if  the  Day,  flattered  with  a  white  Stone, 
have  in  it  the  Beginning  of  some  Misfortune  ?  How  many  a 
Man  hath  entered  upon  Empires,  which  have  turned  to  their 
Affliction  ?  How  many  have  lost  their  Goods,  and  at  last 
have  been  brought  to  utter  Ruin  ?  Certainly  these  are  good 
Things  if  a  Man  could  enjoy  them  fully  for  one  Hour.  But 
thus  stands  the  Case,  that  one  Day  is  the  Judge  of  another, 
and  the  last  Day  judgeth  all ;  and  therefore  there  is  no 
trust  to  be  placed  in  them.  To  say  nothing  of  this  :  that  our 
good  Fortunes  are  not  equal  to  our  bad  even  in  Number ; 
nor  is  any  one  Joy  to  be  weighed  against  the  least  of  our 
Sorrows.  Alas  for  our  empty  and  imprudent  Diligence ! 
We  reckon  our  Days  by  Number,  whereas  we  should  esti- 
mate them  by  Weight. 

CHAPTER  XLT. 
Of  the  highest  Happiness. 

LAMPIDO,  a  Lacedaemonian  Lady,  is  the  only  Woman  that 
ever  was  known  to  have  been  the  Daughter  of  a  King,  a 
King's  Wife,  and  the  Mother  of  a  King.  Also,  Pherenice 
alone  was  the  Daughter,  Sister,  and  Mother  of  them  that  won 
the  Victory  at  the  Olympian  Games.  In  one  Family  of  the 
Curiones  there  were  three  Orators,  one  after  another,  by 
descent  from  Father  to  Son.  The  Family  of  the  Fabii  alone 
afforded  three  Presidents  of  the  Senate  in  succession,  who 
were  M.  Fabius  Ambustus,  Fabius  Rullianus  the  Son,  and 
Q.  Fabius  Gurges  the  Nephew. 

CHAPTER  XLII. 
Examples  of  Change  of  Fortune. 

WE  have  innumerable  other  examples  of  the  variety  of 
Fortune :  for  what  great  Joys  did  she  ever  give,  but  such  as 
sprung  from  some  Evil  ?  Or  what  great  Calamities  that 
have  not  followed  upon  the  highest  Joys? 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  227 

CHAPTER  XLIII. 
Of  one  twice  Proscribed:  of  Q.  Metellus,  and  L.  Sylla. 

M.  FIDUSTIUS,  a  Senator,  having  been  Proscribed  by 
Sylla,  was  preserved  for  six-and-thirty  Years;  but  he  was 
afterwards  Proscribed  the  second  time :  for  he  outlived  Sylla 
and  continued  to  the  time  of  Antony ;  and  it  so  happened 
that  by  him  he  was  Proscribed  again,  for  no  other  reason 
but  because  he  had  been  so  before.  Fortune  was  pleased 
that  P.  Ventidius  alone  should  triumph  over  the  Parthians  : 
but  she  had  led  him,  while  a  Boy,  in  the  Asculan  triumph  of 
Cn.  Pompeius  Strabo  ;  although  Massurius  testifieth,  that  he 
was  so  led  in  triumph  twice.  Cicero  saith,1  that  he  was  at 
first  but  a  Muleteer  to  serve  the  Camp  with  Meal.  Many 
others  affirm  that  in  his  Youth  he  was  a  poor  Soldier,  and 
served  as  a  Footman  in  his  Caliga  (or  Military  Foot  Clothing). 
Balbus  Cornelius  was  also  the  Senior  Consul  :  but  he  had 
been  judicially  accused,  delivered  over  to  the  Counsel  of  the 
Judges,  so  that  the  right  of  the  Rods2  was  on  him.  But  this 
Man  was  the  first  Roman  Consul  of  Foreigners,  arid  even  of 
those  born  within  the  Ocean ;  having  attained  to  that  Dig- 
nity, which  our  Forefathers  denied  to  Latium.  Among  the  dis- 
tinguished is  L.  Fulvius,  who  was  Consul  of  the  rebellious  Tus- 
culans  ;  but  when  he  had  passed  over  to  the  Romans,  he  was 
presently  by  the  whole  People  advanced  to  the  same  Honour 
among  them :  and  he  was  the  only  Man  who  triumphed  at 

1  Epist.  x.  18. 

2  This  "right"  was  according  to  a  law  whose  origin  is  disputed;  but 
it  seems  to  have  been  ancient.    According  to  Dalechampius'  note  on  the 
passage,  no  Roman  citizen  could  be  sentenced  by  the  magistrate  to  the 
rods,  or  be  put  to  death,  for  any  other  crime  than  murder;  and  of 
the  latter  it  was  necessary  that  he  should  be  regularly  convicted.     But  it 
would  appear  that  he  might  be  condemned  to  exile  with  little  ceremony. 
Before  the  passing  of  this  law,  a  Roman  citizen,  as  well  as  a  foreigner,  if 
sentenced  to  death,  was  scourged  as  a  matter  of  course  previous  to  the 
execution  of  the  higher  sentence.     The  tendency  of  this  law  to  confer 
protection  is  seen  in  the  instance  of  St.  Paul,  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  xvi.  37, 
and  xxii.  25.— Wern,  Club. 


228  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  VII. 

Rome  over  them  whose  Consul  he  bad  been,  even  in  the 
same  Year  in  which  he  was  himself  an  Enemy  in  the  Field. 
L.  Sylla  was  the  only  Man,  until  our  time,  that  challenged 
to  himself  the  surname  of  Felix?  or  the  Fortunate ;  but  the 
Title  was  adopted  from  shedding  the  Blood  of  Citizens,  and 
by  waging  War  against  his  Country.  And  by  what  argu- 
ments was  grounded  this  good  Fortune  of  his  ?  That  he  was 
able  to  Proscribe,  and  put  to  Death,  so  many  thousands  of 
the  Citizens  \  O  mistaken  interpretation,  and  unhappy  even 
to  future  time !  For  were  not  they  more  blessed,  who  then 
lost  their  Lives,  whose  Death  at  this  day  we  pity,  than  SyUa, 
whom  no  Man  living  at  this  day  doth  not  abhor  ?  More- 
over, was  not  his  end  more  cruel  than  the  misery  of  all  those 
who  were  Proscribed  by  him  ?  for  his  own  wretched  Body 
consumed  itself,2  and  bred  its  own  torment.  And  although 
we  may  believe  that  he  dissembled  all  this  by  his  last  Dream,3 
wherein  he  lay  as  if  he  were  dead,  upon  which  he  gave  out 
this  Speech,  that  himself  alone  had  overcome  Envy  by  Glory  ; 
yet  in  this  one  thing  he  confessed,  that  his  Felicity  was 
defective,  inasmuch  as  he  had  not  Consecrated  the  Capitol. 
Q.  MetelluSy  in  that  Funeral  Oration  which  he  made  in 
commendation  of  L.  Metellns,  his  Father,  left  it  written  of 

1  There  was  scarcely  a  title  more  coveted  by  the  Romans  than  this  of 
Fortunate,  for  they  took  it  to  be  a  decisive  evidence  of  the  ability  which 
had  led  to  success.  Appian  says  that  there  existed  in  front  of  the  Rostra 
in  Rome,  a  golden  equestrian  figure  of  Sylla,  with  the  inscription, 
"  Syllse  Imperat.  fortunate."  But  from  Pliny  we  learn  that  his  cruelty 
had  caused  his  memory  to  be  held  in  little  estimation  by  posterity. — 
Wern.  Club. 

3  The  cause  of  the  death  of  Sylla  is  not  quite  certain.  Appian  (De 
Bell.  Civ.  i.  105)  says  he  died  of  an  attack  of  fever ;  while  others  inform 
us  that  the  loathsome  disease  called  phthiriasis  was  the  cause  of  his  death. 
Of  this  latter  opinion  were  Plutarch,  Pliny,  and  Pausanias. — Went.  Club. 

3  Plutarch  says,  "  Sylla  tells  us,"  in  his  Commentaries,  "  that  the 
Chaldaeans  had  predicted,  that  after  a  life  of  glory  he  would  depart  in  the 
height  of  his  prosperity."  He  further  acquaints  us,  that  his  son,  who 
died  a  little  before  Metella,  appeared  to  him  in  a  dream,  dressed  in  a 
mean  garment,  and  desired  him  to  bid  adieu  to  his  cares,  and  go  along 
with  him  to  his  mother  Metella,  with  whom  he  should  live  at  ease,  and 
enjoy  the  charms  of  tranquillity.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  229 

him,  that  he  had   been   Pontifex,   twice   Consul,    Dictator, 
Master  of  the  Horse,  one  of  the  Quindecimvirs  deputed  for 
Division  of  Lands,  and  that  in  the  first  Punic  War  he  led 
many  Elephants  in  triumph  :  moreover,  that  he  had  accom- 
plished ten  of  the  greatest  and  best  Things;  in  seeking  which 
the  Wise  spend  their  whole  time:  for  his  desire  was  to  be 
among  the  foremost  of  Warriors,  an  excellent  Orator,  a  very 
powerful  Commander  (Imperator);   to  have  the  conduct  of 
the   most  important  Affairs,  to  be  in   the  highest  place  of 
Honour,  to  be  eminent  for  Wisdom,  to  he  accounted  a  prin- 
cipal Senator,  to  attain  to  great  Wealth  by  good  Means,  to 
leave  many  Children  behind  him,  and  to  be  the  noblest  per- 
sonage in  the  City.     That  these  perfections  fell  to  him,  and 
to  none  but  him  since  the  Foundation  of  Rome,  it  were  long 
and   useless  now  to  confute  :  but  it  is  abundantly  answered 
by  one  instance ;  for  this  same  Metellus  became  Blind  in  his 
old  Age ;  having  lost  his  Eyes  in  a  Fire,  when  he  would  have 
saved   the  Palladium1  out  of  the  Temple  of  Vesta:  an  act 
worthy  of  being  remembered ;  but  the  event  was  unhappy. 
In  regard  of  which  it  is  not  proper  to  term  him  Unfortunate 
(Infelix);  and  yet  he  cannot  be  called   Fortunate  (Felix). 
The  People  of  Rome  granted  to  him  a  Privilege,  which  no 
Man  before  him  in  the  World  was  known  to  have:  that  he 
should  be  conveyed  in  a  Chariot  to  the  Senate-house  as  often 
as  he  went  to  sit  at  the  Council:  a  great  and  elevated  Pre- 
rogative, but  it  was  allowed  him  as  a  Compensation  for  his 
Eyes. 

CHAPTER  XLIV. 

Of  anothtr  Metellus. 

A  SON  likewise  of  this  Q.  Metellus,  who  <*ave  out  those 
Commendations  concerning  his  Father,  is  reckoned  among 

1  It  was  one  of  the  figments  of  Roman  divinity,  that  this  image  of  the 
tutelary  Pallas  had  existed  in  ancient  Troy;  from  whence,  with  2Eneas, 
it  had  transferred  the  empire  to  the  imperial  city  of  Rome.  A  similar 
image  existed  at  Ephesus  (Acts  of  the  Apostles,  xxix.  35),  and  it  has 
heen  supposed  that  the  fall  from  the  sky,  of  at  least  the  materials  of  the 
image,  may  not  have  been  imaginary.  The  descent  of  an  aerolite  was, 
probably,  as  common  in  ancient  times  as  in  modern.-^  Wern.  Club. 


230  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII 

the  most  rare  examples  of  human  Felicity  ;  for  besides  the 
most  honourable  Dignities,  and  the  Surname  of  Macedonians, 
he  was  borne  to  the  Funeral  Pile  by  four  Sons ;  one  being 
the  Prsetor,  and  the  other  three  having  been  Consuls :  of 
which  two  had  triumphed,  and  one  had  been  Censor :  which 
remarkable  things  had  happened  to  few.  And  yet  in  the 
very  flower  of  these  Honours,  as  he  was  returning  from  the 
Field,  about  Noon-day,  he  was  seized  by  Catinius  Labeo, 
surnamed  Macerio,  a  Tribune  of  the  Commons,  whom  he  by 
virtue  of  his  Censorship  had  expelled  out  of  the  Senate  ;  and 
the  Forum  of  the  Capitol  being  empty,  he  took  him  away  by 
force  to  the  Tarpeian  Rock,  with  an  intention  to  cast  him 
down  headlong.  A  number  came  running  about  him  of  that 
company  which  called  him  Father;  but,  as  was  unavoidable 
in  so  sudden  a  case,  slowly,  and  as  if  attending  a  Funeral ; 
with  the  absence  also  of  a  right  to  make  Resistance,  and 
repel  the  inviolable  Authority  :  so  that  he  was  likely  to  have 
Perished  even  for  his  Virtue  and  faithful  Execution  of  his 
Censorship,  if  there  had  not  been  one  Tribune  found,  with 
much  difficulty,  to  step  between  and  oppose  himself;  by 
which  means  he  was  rescued,  even  from  the  utmost  point  of 
Death.  He  lived  afterwards  by  the  liberality  of  other 
Men  :  for  all  his  Goods  from  that  day  forward  were  devoted, 
from  his  Condemnation  :  as  if  he  had  not  suffered  Punish- 
ment enough  to  have  his  Neck  so  writhed,  as  that  the  Blood 
was  squeezed  out  at  his  Ears.  And  truly  I  would  reckon  it 
among  his  Calamities,  that  he  was  an  Enemy  to  the  later 
Africanus,  even  by  the  Testimony  of  Macedonians  himself. 
These  were  his  words  to  his  Children :  Go,  my  Sons,  and 
do  honour  to  his  Obsequies ;  for  the  Funeral  of  a  greater 
Citizen  ye  will  never  see.  And  this  he  said  to  them,  when 
they  had  conquered  Crete  and  the  Balearic  Islands,  and  had 
worn  the  Diadem  in  triumph  :  being  himself  already  entitled 
Macedonians.  But  if  we  consider  that  only  injury  offered  to 
him,  who  can  justly  deem  him  happy,  being  exposed  to  the 
pleasure  of  his  Enemy,  far  inferior  to  Africanus,  and  so  to 
come  to  confusion  ?  What  were  all  his  Victories  to  this  one 
Disgrace?  What  Honours  and  Chariots  did  riot  Fortune 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  231 

cast  down  by  her  violence,  when  a  Censor  was  dragged 
through  the  middle  of  the  City  (the  only  way  indeed  to  bring 
him  to  his  Death) ;  dragged  to  the  Capitol  itself,  to  which 
he  had  ascended  triumphant :  but  he  never  so  dragged  along 
those  Captives,  for  whose  Spoils  he  triumphed.  And  this 
Outrage  was  the  greater  in  regard  of  the  Felicity  which 
ensued  ;  considering  that  this  Macedonians  was  in  danger  to 
have  lost  so  great  an  Honour  as  this  solemn  and  stately 
Sepulture,  in  which  he  was  carried  forth  to  his  Funeral  Fire 
by  his  triumphant  Children,  as  if  he  had  triumphed  again  at 
his  very  burial.  Truly  that  can  be  no  sound  Felicity,  which 
is  interrupted  by  any  Indignity  of  Life,  much  less  by  so  great 
a  one  as  this.  To  conclude,  £  know  not  whether  there  be 
more  cause  to  glory  for  the  modest  carriage  of  Men,  or  to 
grieve  at  the  Indignity,  that  among  so  many  Metelli  so  auda- 
cious a  Villany  as  this  of  Catinius  was  never  revenged. 

CHAPTER  XLV. 

Of  Divus  Augustus.1 

ALSO,  in  Divus  Augustus,  whom  all  the  World  declare th 
to  be  in  this  rank  of  fortunate  Men,  if  we  diligently  consider 
all  things,  we  perceive  great  Changes  of  the  Human  lot 
Driven  by  his  Uncle  from  the  Generalship  of  the  Horse, 
and,  notwithstanding  his  Petition,  seeing  Lepidus  preferred 
to  that  place,  he  laboured  under  the  reproach  of  the  Pro- 
scription ;  and  for  being  one  of  the  Triumvirate,  united  with 
the  most  wicked  Citizens ;  and  this  with  a  less  than  equal 
share  (of  the  Roman  Empire),  for  Antony  obtained  the 
greatest  Portion.  He  was  Sick  at  the  Battle  of  Philippi ; 
his  flight;  and  while  still  Sick,  for  three  Days  his  lying 
hidden  in  a  Marsh ;  so  that  (as  Agrippa  and  Meccenas  con- 
fess), he  grew  into  a  kind  of  Dropsy,  and  his  Sides  were 
distended  with  Water  under  the  Skin ;  his  Shipwreck  in 

1  It  is  a  proof  of  the  imperfect  manner  in  which  history  has  been  gene- 
rally treated,  that  Suetonius  has  written  the  life  of  Augustus  Caesar 
without  the  mention  of  a  great  part  of  these  particulars,  and  of  none  of 
them  in  the  point  of  view  here  given. —  Wern.  Club. 


232  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  VII. 

Sicily,  and  there  likewise  he  was  glad  to  remain  concealed  in 
a  Cave  :  then  he  was  put  to  flight  at  Sea,  and  when  the  whole 
power  of  his  Enemies  was  hard  on  him,  he  hesought  Pro- 
culeius  to  put  him  to  Death  ;  how  he  was  perplexed  by  the 
Contentions  at  Perusium  ;  the  anxiety  he  was  in  at  the 
Battle  of  Actium,  and  for  the  issue  of  the  Pannonian  War ; 
for  the  fall  of  a  Bridge ;  so  many  Mutinies  among  his  Sol- 
diers ;  so  many  dangerous  Diseases  of  his  Body ;  the  sus- 
pected Allegiance  of  Marcellus ;  the  shame  of  Banishing 
Agrippa  ;  his  Life  so  many  times  attempted  by  secret  Plots  ; 
the  suspected  Deaths  of  his  Children ;  the  sad  Afflictions 
thereby ;  and  not  altogether  for  his  Childless  condition  :  the 
Adultery  of  his  Daughter,  and  her  Contrivances  for  taking 
his  Life  away  made  known  to  the  World ;  the  reproachful 
Retreat  of  Nero,  his  Wife's  Son  ;  another  Adultery  com- 
mitted by  one  of  his  Nieces  :  above  all  this,  so  many  united 
Evils,  as  the  want  of  Pay  for  his  Soldiers  ;  the  Rebellion  of 
lllyricum  ;  the  Mustering  of  Slaves;  the  Scarcity  of  Young 
Men  ;  a  Pestilence  in  the  City ;  Famine  and  Drought  through 
Italy ;  a  deliberate  Resolution  of  Dying,  having  to  that  end 
Fasted  four  Days  and  Nights,  and  in  that  time  received  into 
his  Body  the  greater  part  of  his  own  Death.  Besides  these 
things,  the  Slaughter  of  Variuss  Forces,  and  the  foul  stain 
of  his  Honour;  the  putting  away  of  Posthumus  Agrippa 
after  his  Adoption,  and  the  desire  that  he  had  for  him  after 
his  Banishment;  then  the  Suspicion  that  he  conceived  of 
Fabius,  and  the  disclosing  of  his  Secrets  ;  and  again  his 
Opinions  concerning  his  Wife  and  Tiberius,  which  surpassed 
all  his  other  Cares.  To  conclude,  that  God,  of  whom  I  do 
not  know  whether  he  rather  obtained  Heaven  than  deserved 
it,  left  behind  him  for  his  Heir  the  Son  of  his  Enemy. 

CHAPTER  XLVI. 
Whom  the  Gods  Judge  the  most  Happy. 

I  CANNOT  pass  over  in  this  Discourse  the  Oracles  of  Del- 
phos,  delivered  from  the  God  to  chastise  the  Folly  of  Men. 
Two  of  them  are  these  :  That  Phedius,  who  but  a  while 


Boo  K  V 1 1 .]  History  of  Nature.  233 

before  Died  for  his  Country,  was  the  most  Happy.  Again, 
being  consulted  by  Gyges,  the  most  sumptuous  King  in  all 
the  Earth,  the  answer  was,  that  Aylaus  Psophidius  was  the 
more  Happy.  This  Aglaus  was  a  Man  somewhat  advanced 
in  Years,  dwelling  in  a  very  narrow  corner  of  Arcadia, 
where  he  had  a  little  Estate,  which  himself  cultivated  ;  and 
it  was  sufficient  with  its  yearly  Produce  to  Support  him 
plentifully  ;  out  of  it  he  never  went :  so  that  (as  appeared  by 
his  course  of  Life,)  as  he  coveted  very  little,  so  he  expe- 
rienced as  little  Trouble  while  he  Lived. 


CHAPTER  XLV1I. 

Whom,  while  Living,  they  ordered  to  be  Worshipped 
as  a  God.1 

BY  the  appointment  of  the  same  Oracle,  arid  by  the 
approbation  of  Jupiter ,  the  Sovereign  of  the  Gods,  Euthymus 
the  Wrestler,  who  always  was  Conqueror  at  Olympia,  except 
once,  was  Consecrated  a  God  while  he  lived,  and  knew  of  it ; 
he  was  born  at  Locri,  in  Italy,  where  one  Statue  of  his,  as 
also  another  at  Olympia,  were  both  on  one  Day  struck  with 
Lightning :  which  I  see  CaUimachus  wondered  at,  as  if 
nothing  else  were  worthy  of  Admiration ;  and  gave  order 
that  he  should  be  Sacrificed  to,  as  to  a  God  :  which  was  per- 
formed accordingly,  both  while  he  Lived  and  after  he  was 
Dead.  A  thing  that  I  wonder  at  more  than  at  any  thing 
else :  that  the  Gods  should  have  been  pleased  with  such 
a  thing. 

1  It  was  scarcely  more  reasonable  to  worship  a  man  after  he  was  dead 
than  during  his  life ;  and  yet  Pliny  must  have  joined  in  the  worship  of 
Augustus  and  Julius  Caesar,  and  have  been  conscious,  as  appears  from 
several  places  of  his  writings,  that  the  greatest  gods  of  his  country  had 
formerly  been  living  men.  The  egregious  vanity  of  desiring  to  be  sup- 
posed a  god  was  felt  by  Alexander  the  Great,  to  whose  application  for 
recognition  in  this  character  the  Lacedaemonians  replied  by  an  edict,  that 
"  If  Alexander  wished  to  be  a  god,  he  might  be  a  god."  Pliny  lived  to 
see  the  brother  of  his  patron  Titus,  Domitian,  exemplify  the  absurdity  of 
which  he  complains ;  for  it  appears  that  the  latter  emperor  was  more  than 
ordinarily  fond  of  this  assumption  of  divinity.—  Wem.  Club. 


234  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

• 

CHAPTER  XLVIII. 
Of  the  longest  Extent  of  Life. 

THE  extent  and  duration  of  Man's  Life  are  rendered 
uncertain,  not  only  by  the  Situation  of  Places,  but  also  from 
Examples,  and  the  peculiar  lot  of  his  Nativity.  Hesiod, 
the  first  Writer  who  has  treated  on  this  Subject,  in  his  Fabu- 
lous Discourse  (as  I  regard  it),  embracing  many  things  about 
the  Age  of  Man,  saith  that  a  Crow  lives  nine  times  as  long 
as  we ;  the  Stags  four  times  as  long  as  the  Crow ;  and  the 
Ravens  thrice  as  long  as  they.  And  his  other  remarks  about 
the  Nymphs  and  the  Phoenix  are  still  more  Fabulous.  Ana- 
creon  the  Poet,  assigneth  to  Arganthonius,  King  of  the 
Tartessi,  150  Years  :  and  to  Cyniras,  King  of  the  Cypri,  ten 
Years  longer  :  to  JEgimius,  200.  Theopompus  affirmeth,  that 
Epimenides,  the  Gnossian,  died  when  he  was  157  Years  old. 
Hellanicus  hath  Written,  that  among  the  Epii,  in  ^Etolia, 
there  are  some  who  continue  full  200  Years :  and  with  him 
agreeth  Damastes ;  adding  also,  that  there  was  one  Pic- 
tor  eus  among  them,  a  Man  of  exceeding  Stature,  and  very 
Strong,  who  lived  even  to  300  Years.  Ephorus  saith,  that 
the  Kings  of  Arcadia  usually  lived  to  300  Years.  Alexander 
Cornelius  writeth  of  one  Dando  in  Illyrica,  who  lived  500 
Years.  Xenophon  in  his  "  Periplus,"  maketh  mention  of  a 
King  of  a  People  upon  the  Sea-coasts,  who  lived  600  Years : 
and  as  if  he  had  not  lied  enough  already,  he  saith,  that  his 
Son  came  to  800.  All  these  strange  reports  proceed  from 
ignorance  of  the  times  past,  for  some  reckoned  the  Summer 
for  one  Year,  and  the  Winter  for  another.  Others  reckoned 
every  Quarter  for  a  Year,  as  the  Arcadians,  whose  Year  was 
but  three  Months.  Some,  as  the  Egyptians,  count  every 
change  of  the  Moon  for  a  Year ;  and  therefore  some  of  them 
are  reported  to  have  lived  1000  Years.  But  to  pass  to 
things  acknowledged  as  true,  it  is  almost  certain,  that  Argan- 
thonius,  King  of  Calais,  reigned  80  Years  ;  and  it  is  supposed 
that  he  was  40  Years  old  when  he  began  to  Reign.  It  is 
undoubted,  that  Masanissa  reigned  60  Years ;  and  also  that 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  235 

Gorgias  the  Sicilian  lived  108  Years.  Q.  Fabius  Maximus 
continued  Augur  for  63  Years.  M.  Perpenna,  and  of  late, 
L.  Volusius  Saturninus,  out-lived  all  those  Senators  who 
had  sat  in  Council  with  them  when  they  were  Consuls. 
Perpenna  left  but  seven  of  those  Senators  alive  whom  he 
had  chosen  in  his  Censorship  ;  and  he  lived  himself  98 
Years.  Where,  by  the  way,  one  thing  cometh  to  my  Mind 
worth  the  noting :  that  there  was  one  Space  of  five  Years, 
and  never  but  one,  in  which  not  one  Senator  died  ;  and  that 
was  from  the  time  that  Flaccus  and  Albinus  the  Censors 
finished  their  Lustrum,  to  the  comma:  in  of  the  next  Censors  ; 
which  was  from  the  Year  after  the  Foundation  of  the  City, 
579.  M.  Valerius  Cor vinus  \ived  100  Years  complete;  and 
between  his  first  Consulate  and  his  sixth,  were  46  Years. 
He  took  his  Seat  on  the  Curule  Chair  21  Times  ;  and  no 
Man  ever  besides  him  so  often.  Metellus  the  Pontifex  lived 
full  as  long  as  he. 

To  come  now  to  Women :  Lima  the  Wife  of  Rutilius 
lived  more  than  97  Years.  Statilia,  a  noble  Lady,  in  the 
Time  of  Claudius  the  Prince,  was  99  Years  of  Age  :  Cicero's 
Wife,  Terentia,  was  103  Years  old  :  Clodia,  Wife  to  Osilius, 
saw  115  Years  ;  and  she  had  15  Children.  Luceia,  a  Comic 
Actress,  appeared  on  the  Stage  for  100  Years.  Galeria 
Copiola,  a  Mimic  Actress,  was  brought  again  upon  the 
Stage  when  C?i.  Pompeius  and  Q.  Sulpitius  were  Consuls,  at 
the  solemn  Plays  vowed  for  the  Health  of  Divus  Augustus, 
when  she  was  in  the  J04th  Year  of  her  Age  :  the  first  Time 
that  she  entered  on  the  Stage  was  91  Years  before,  when 
she  was  brought  thither  by  M.  Pompotiius,  ^Edile  of  the 
Commons,  in  the  Year  that  C.  Marius  and  Cn.  Carbo  were 
Consuls ;  and  once  again  Pornpey  the  Great,  at  the  dedica- 
tion of  his  great  Theatre,  returned  the  old  Woman  to  the 
Stage  for  the  wonder  of  the  thing.  Also  Asconius  Pcedi- 
anus  writeth,  that  Samula  lived  110  Years;  and  therefore  I 
wonder  the  less  that  Stephanio  (who  was  the  first  of  the 
Long  Robe  who  appointed  Dancing)  danced  in  both  the 
Secular  Games,  as  well  those  that  were  set  out  by  Divus 
Augustus,  as  those  which  Claudius  Ccesar  exhibited  in  his 


236  History  of  Nature.  [Boon  VII. 

fourth  Consulship  ;  considering  that  between  the  one  and 
the  other  there  were  but  63  Years ;  and  yet  Stephanio  lived 
for  a  considerable  Time  after.  Mutianus  witnesseth,  that  in 
Tempsis,  which  is  the  Crest  of  the  Mountain  Tmolus,  People 
lived  150  Years.  At  that  Age,  T.  Fullonius,  of  Bononia, 
entered  his  Name  in  the  Census  at  the  Time  that  Claudius 
Ccesar  held  the  Registry ;  and  that  he  was  so  old  indeed, 
appeared  by  comparing  together  several  Registries  that  he 
had  before  made,  as  also  by  circumstances  that  had  occurred 
in  his  Lifetime ;  for  the  Emperor  took  care  in  that  way  to 
find  out  the  Truth.1 

CHAPTER  XLIX. 
Of  Differences  in,  the  Nativities. 

THIS  Point  would  require  the  Advice  of  the  Science  of 
the  Stars ;  for  Epigenes  saith,  that  it  is  not  possible  for  a 
Man  to  live  a  hundred  and  twenty-two  Years ;  and  Berosus 
is  of  opinion,  that  one  cannot  pass  an  hundred  and  seven- 
teen. That  Calculation  holdeth  good  which  Petosiris  and 
Necepsos  have  delivered,  and  which  they  call  Tetartemorion, 
from  a  portion  of  three  Signs ;  according  to  which  account  it 

1  The  length  of  life  detailed  in  the  Mosaic  records  was  unknown  to 
the  Greeks,  who  had  only  retained  an  obscure  traditionary  remembrance 
of  it,  and  of  the  great  stature  and  strength  with  which  it  was  supposed  to 
be  accompanied.  But  that  Pliny's  mode  of  interpreting  it,  by  a  peculiar 
method  of  explaining  the  length  of  the  year,  will  not  apply  to  the  narra- 
tive in  the  Book  of  Genesis,  appears  from  the  fact  that  the  same  history 
records  the  reduction  of  the  length  of  human  life,  by  sudden  transitions, 
to  at  last  threescore  and  ten  years,  which  we  are  compelled  to  measure 
by  the  same  scale  as  the  former. 

As  a  general  summary  of  the  duration  of  life  in  historical  times,  the 
"  History  of  Life  and  Death,"  by  Lord  Bacon,  may  be  consulted.  Fuller 
mentions  James  Sands,  of  Horborne  in  Staffordshire,  who  lived  140 
years,  and  his  wife  120.  The  Countess  of  Desmond,  known  to  Sir  W 
Rawleigh,  lived  to  about  140  years,  and  had  new  teeth  three  several 
times.  Thomas  Parr  was  born  in  1483 ;  married  at  the  age  of  eighty, 
and  in  the  space  of  thirty-two  years  had  only  two  children.  At  the  age 
of  120  he  had  another  child,  and  died  aged  150  years.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI!.]  History  of  Nature.  237 

i8  evident,  that  in  the  Tract  of  Italy,  Men  may  reach  to  a 
hundred  and  twenty-six  Years.  They  denied  that  a  Man 
could  possibly  pass  the  ascendant  Space  of  90  Degrees 
(which  they  call  Anaphoras) ;  and  that  even  these  are  cut 
short,  either  by  the  encounter  of  malevolent  Planets,  or  by 
the  radiations  of  them  or  the  Sun.  Again,  the  Sect  of  Ascle- 
piades1  affirm,  that  the  appointed  Length  of  Life  proceedeth 
from  the  Stars  ;  but  concerning  the  utmost  term,  it  is  uncer- 
tain. But  they  say,  that  the  longer  Ages  are  Rare,  because 
the  greatest  Number  by  far  have  their  Nativity  at  the 
marked  Moments  of  the  Hours  of  the  Moon,  or  of  Days 
according  to  the  Number  of  Seven  or  Nine  (which  are 
Daily  and  Nightly  observed) :  by  the  gradual  declining  Law 
of  the  Years,  called  Climacteric,2  and  such  as  are  so  Born 
scarcely  exceed  the  fifty-fourth  Year.  But  here,  first,  the 
Uncertainty  of  the  Art  itself  declaret.li  how  doubtful  this 
matter  is.  To  this  are  added  the  Observations  and  Instances 
of  the  very  recent  Census,  which  within  the  Space  of  four 
Years,  the  Imperators,  Caesars,  Vespasian?,  Father  and 
Son,  Censors,  have  accomplished.  And  here  we  need  not 
search  every  Cupboard,  we  will  only  set  down  the  examples 
of  the  middle  part,  between  the  Apennine  and  the  Po.  At 
Parma,  three  Men  were  found  of  the  Age  of  a  hundred  and 

1  In  book  xxvi.  c.  3,  Pliny  gives  a  more  precise,  and  not  very  com- 
plimentary, account  of  this  physician. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  A  large  portion  of  the  physiological  learning  of  ancient  physicians 
consisted  in  the  arithmetical  calculation  of  types  and  periods  of  vital  and 
diseased  actipns ;  in  connexion  with  which  they  also  arranged  the  motions 
of  the  celestial  bodies  and  their  influences.     It  thus  became  necessary, 
that  he  who  was  a  physician  in  the  modern  meaning  of  the  word  should 
also  be  able  to  interpret  the  stars,  and  to  apply  mathematical  reasoning 
to   the  laws   of  health  and  disease.     The   calculation  of  climacterical 
years,  and  the  ultimate  duration  of  human  life,  were  thus  decided  by  a 
combination  of  intricate  mathematical  probabilities.     These  climacteric 
years  were  formed  on  the  multiplication  of  the  number  seven  by  the 
unit  numbers,  and  at  them  the  most  important  of  the  periodic  changes 
of  the  body  were  accomplished.     The  highest  number  thus  multiplied 
formed  the  grand  climacteric,  after  which  the  changes  produced  a  retro- 
gression towards  feebleness  and  decay ;  the  danger  of  which  was  ever 
greatest  at  the  climacterics.     See  bookii.  c.  52. —  Wcrn.  Club. 


238  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

twenty  Years:  at  Brixelus,  one  that  was  a  hundred  and 
twenty-five  Years;  at  Parma,  two  of  a  hundred  and  thirty 
Years ;  at  Placentia,  one  of  a  hundred  and  thirty-one  ;  at 
Faventia,  there  was  one  Woman  a  hundred  and  thirty-two 
Years  old  ;  at  Bonona,  L.  Terentius,  the  Son  of  Marcus,  and 
at  Ariminum  M.  Aponius,  were  a  hundred  and  fifty. 
Tertulla  was  a  hundred  and  thirty-seven.  About  Placentia 
there  is  a  Town  on  the  Hills,  named  Velleiacium,  in  which 
six  Men  brought  a  Certificate  that  they  had  lived  a  hundred 
and  ten  Years  ;  four  likewise  brought  one  of  about  a  hundred 
Years  ;  one  of  a  hundred  and  forty,1  namely  M.  Mutius, 
son  of  Marcus  surnamed  Galerius  Felix.  But  because  we 
will  not  dwell  long  in  a  matter  so  commonly  allowed,  in  the 
eighth  Region  of  Italy  there  were  found  in  the  Roll  fifty- 
four  Persons  of  one  hundred  Years  of  Age  ;  fifty-seven  of  a 
hundred  and  ten  ;  two,  of  a  hundred  and  twenty-five  ;  four, 
of  a  hundred  and  thirty ;  as  many  that  were  a  hundred  and 
thirty-five,  or  a  hundred  and  thirty-seven  Years  ;  and  three 
Men  of  a  hundred  and  forty.  Another  inconstant  variety  in 
mortal  Men :  Homer  reporteth,  that  Hector  and  Polydamas 
were  born  in  one  Night,  though  Men  of  such  a  different 
Fortune.  While  C.  Marius  was  Consul,  and  Crt.  Carbo  with 
him,  who  had  been  twice  before  Consul,  the  fifth  Day  before 
the  Calends  of  June,  M.  C&cilius  Ruffus  and  C.  Licinius 
Calvus  were  born  on  the  same  Day  ;  and  both  of  them 
indeed  were  Orators :  but  their  fate  was  very  different. 
And  this  is  seen  daily  to  happen  throughout  the  World,  that 
among  those  born  in  one  Hour  some  are  Kings,  and  others 
Beggars,  some  Lords  and  others  Slaves. 

CHAPTER  L. 
Various  Examples  of  Diseases. 

PUB.  CORNELIUS  RUFUS,  who  was  Consul  with  M. 
Curius,  dreamed  that  he  had  Lost  his  Sight ;  and  so  it  proved 
when  he  awoke.  On  the  other  Hand,  Phalereus  being  given 

1  Dr.  Holland  seems  to  have  read  "  one  hundred  and  fourteen." — 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  239 

over  by  the  Physicians  for  the  Disease  of  Vomica,  being 
stabbed  in  his  Breast,  found  a  Remedy  in  his  Enemy.  Q. 
•Fabius  Maximus,  Consul,  engaging  in  a  Battle  with  the  Nations 
of  the  Allobroges  and  Averni,  near  the  River  Isara,  on  the 
sixth  Day  before  the  Ides  of  August ;  in  which  double 
action  he  Slew  of  his  Enemies  13,000;  he  was  in  the  Contest 
delivered  from  his  Fever.  This  gift  of  Nature,  truly,  what- 
ever is  bestowed  on  us,  is  frail  and  uncertain  :  and  in  those 
in  whom  it  exists  in  the  largest  Measure,  it  is  but  short  and 
evil  if  we  consider  the  whole  Course  of  it  from  Beginning  to 
End.  Because  if  we  count  our  repose  by  Night,  a  Man 
may  be  truly  said  to  live  but  one  half  of  his  Life ;  for  that 
Half  of  it  which  is  spent  in  Sleep  may  be  compared  to  Death  ; 
and  if  he  cannot  Sleep,  it  is  a  Punishment.  Nor  are  the 
Years  of  our  Infancy  to  be  reckoned,  for  this  Age  is  void  of 
Sense;  nor  those  of  old  Age,  which  is  the  punishment  of  a 
disposition  to  live.  What  shall  I  speak  of  so  many  kinds  of 
Dangers,  so  many  Diseases,  so  many  Fears,  so  many  Cares, 
so  many  Prayers  for  Death,  that  we  Pray  for  nothing  more 
frequently  ?  and  therefore  Nature  knoweth  not  what  better 
thing  to  give  a  Man,  than  short  Life.  The  Senses1  become 
dull,  the  Members  grow  benumbed,  the  Eye-sight  decayeth 
betimes,  the  Hearing  followeth,  then  the  Supporters,  the 
Teeth  also,  and  the  very  Instruments  that  serve  for  our 
Food  ;  and  yet  all  this  Time  is  counted  a  Part  of  our  Life. 
And  therefore  it  is  taken  for  a  wonderful  example,  and  that 
to  which  we  cannot  find  a  fellow,  that  Xenophilus  the  Musi- 
cian lived  105  Years,  without  any  inconveniency  in  all  his 
Body.  But  all  other  Men,  by  Hercules!  are  vexed  at  certain 
Hours,  as  no  other  Creatures  are  besides,  with  pestiferous 
Heat  and  Cold  in  every  part  of  their  Members ;  which  go 

1  How  remarkably  does  this  enumeration  of  the  signs  and  evils  of 
age  correspond  with  the  more  poetical  representation  of  the  same  condi- 
tion by  Solomon,  in  the  last  chapter  of  the  Book  of  Ecclesiastes ! 
Cicero,  in  his  "  Cato,"  laments  the  ills  of  age  as  more  weighty  than  .ZEtna ; 
and  others  of  the  wisest  heathens  join  in  the  lamentation ;  which  ceases 
to  surprise  us  when  we  reflect  that  they  were  destitute  of  a  hope  in  the 
future.—  Wern.  Club. 


240  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  VII. 

and  come,  not  for  certain  Hours  only,  but  by  Day  and  by 
Night :  one  while  every  Third,  and  at  others  every  Fourth 
Day  and  Nis;ht,  even  through  the  whole  Year.  And  it  is 
some  sort  of  Disease  to  die  through  wisdom,  for  Nature 
hath  set  down  certain  Laws,  even  to  Diseases ;  as  that  the 
circle  of  a  Quartan  Fever  never  beginneth  in  the  shortest 
Days  of  the  Year,  neither  in  the  Months  of  Winter ;  that 
some  Diseases  are  not  incident  to  those  that  are  above  Sixty 
Years  of  Age  ;  that  others  again  pass  away  when  young 
People  come  to  the  Age  of  Puberty  ;  and  especially  this  is 
observed  in  young  Women.  Old  People  are  the  least  liable 
to  take  the  Plague.  Also  there  are  Sicknesses  that  follow 
particular  Regions,  affecting  the  Inhabitants  generally 
therein.  There  are  some  again  that  take  hold  of  Servants 
only  ;  others  touch  the  highest  Persons  alone  :  and  so  from 
degree  to  degree.  But  in  this  Place  it  is  to  be  observed,  that 
a  Pestilence  beginneth  in  the  South  parts,  and  always  goeth 
toward  the  West;  and  it  scarcely  ever  doeth  otherwise, 
except  in  Winter,  and  then  it  doth  not  exceed  three 
Months.1 

CHAPTEU  LI. 

Of  the  Signs  of  Death.12 

Now  let  us  take  a  View  of  the  fatal  Signs  in  Sickness. 
In  the  Disease  of  Fury  (Madness),  to  Laugh  is  such  a  Sign  : 
In  the  Sickness  of  Wisdom  (Frenzy),  to  have  a  care  of 
the  Fringes  of  their  Garments  and  Bedclothes,  to  smoothe 
them  down  ;  the  neglect  of  such  things  as  would  prevent 
their  Sleep;  the  apologising  letting  go  of  their  Water.  It 

1  This  remark  has  been  already  referred  to  c.  37,  p.  221 ;  and  it  is  the 
more  worthy  of  notice,  since  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  all  the  epidemics 
which  have  traversed  Europe  since  the  time  when  Pliny  wrote  have 
conformed  to  the  same  rule. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Celsus  considers  this  subject,  book  ii.  c.  6,  and  the  medical  nature 
and  treatment  of  insanity,  book  iii.  c.  18.     Eyfuroris  morbus  (madness 
or  mania),  and  sapientice  cegritudine  (frenzy),    he  seems   to   mean,   the 
former,  insanity  of  the  passions ;  and  the  latter,  insanity  of  the  under- 
standing.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI I .]  History  of  Nature.  24 1 

may  also  be  certainly  seen  in  the  aspect  of  the  Eyes  and 
Nose,  as  also  in  the  manner  of  lying  always  upon  the  Back 
supine :  also  by  the  unequal  stroke  of  the  Veins,  as  if  an 
Ant  crept  under  it,  with  other  Signs  which  Hippocrates,  the 
prince  of  Medicine,  hath  observed.  And  whilst  there  are 
innumerable  Signs  that  presage  Death,  there  is  not  one  that 
can  assure  a  Man  certainly  of  Life  and  Health.  For  Cato1 
the  Censor,  writing  to  his  Son  concerning  robust  Health, 
hath  delivered  from  some  Oracle,  that  Youth  resembling 
Age  is  a  Sign  of  untimely  Death.  Diseases  are  so  innu- 
merable, that  Pherecydes,  of  the  Island  of  Syros,  died  of  a 
great  quantity  of  Creepers2  bursting  out  of  his  Body.  Some 
are  never  free  of  a  Fever,  as  C.  Meccenas.  The  same  Man, 
for  three  whole  Years  before  he  died,  never  was  asleep  for 
a  single  Minute.  Antipater  Sidonius  the  Poet,  once  a  year 
during  his  Life  was  seized  with  an  Ague-fit  upon  his  Birth- 
day only,  and  at  last  he  died  in  such  a  Fit  in  a  good 
old  Age. 

CHAPTER  LII. 

Of  such  as  were  carried  forth  to  their  Funeral  and  revived 

again. 

A.  VIOLA,  who  had  been  Consul,  came  to  himself  when 
he  was  on  the  Funeral  Pile ;  but  because  the  Flame  was  so 
Strong  that  he  could  not  be  got  away,  he  was  burnt  alive. 

1  Cato's  knowledge  of  medical  subjects  may  be  judged  of  from  the 
specimens  of  miserable  quackery  contained  in  his  "  Treatise  on  Agricul- 
ture."     Much  of  it  consisted  of  charms,  in  unintelligible  jargon. — 
Wern.  Club. 

2  Pliny  sometimes  employs  unusual  words  to  express  plain  and  com- 
mon things;  or  he  may  have  adopted  the  term  to  avoid  what  among 
polite  people  would  have  excited  loathing.    For  the  same  reason  another 
author  speaks  of  the  same  creatures  under  the  name  of  animalia  tetra,  or 
foul  creatures.     It  was  the  disease  which  afflicted  Herod,  Acts  of  the 
Apostles,  xii.  23 ;    and  in  modern  times  Dr.  Heberden  records  a  case, 
"  Commentaries,"  c.  Ixxi  :  but  it  is  not  certain  that  they  are  of  the  same 
species  as  that  which  commonly  attacks  the  human  body.     The  fate  of 
Sylla,  from  the  same  cause,  is  referred  to  in  the  4Md  chapter  of  this  Book. 
-  Wern.  Clnl*. 

VOL.  II.  R 


242  History  of  Nature  [BooK  VII. 

The  like  accident  is  reported  to  have  befallen  Lu.  Lamia, 
of  Praetorian  rank.  That  C.  ^Elius  Tubero,  who  had  been 
Praetor,  was  brought  Alive  again  from  the  Funeral  Fire, 
Messala  Rufus  and  many  others  assert.  Such  is  the  condi- 
tion of  Mortal  Men  ;  and  to  this  kind  of  Fortune,  and  such 
as  this,  are  we  born  :  so  that  in  the  case  of  Man  there  is 
no  assurance,  no,  not  even  in  his  Death.  We  read  in 
Chronicles,  that  the  Soul  of  Hermotimus  Clazomenius  was 
accustomed  to  leave  his  Body,  and  wandering  to  a  great 
distance,  brought  him  backs  News  of  such  things  as  could 
not  possibly  have  been  known  unless  it  had  been  present 
there  ;  and  all  the  while  his  Body  lay  half  Dead.  This 
manner  he  continued,  until  the  Cantharidae,  who  were  his 
Enemies,  took  his  Body  and  burnt  it  to  Ashes ;  and  by  that 
means  disappointed  his  Soul  when  it  came  back  again  to 
its  Sheath.  Also  it  is  said,  that  the  Spirit  of  Aristceas  in 
Proconnesus  was  seen  to  fly  out  of  his  Mouth  in  the  form 
of  a  Raven ;  and  many  an  empty  Tale  folio  we  th  thereon  : 
for  surely  I  take  it  to  be  no  better  than  a  Fable,  which  is  in 
like  manner  reported  of  Epimenides  the  Gnossian,  that  when 
he  was  a  Boy,  and  wearied  with  Heat  and  Travel,  he  laid 
himself  down  in  a  Cave,  and  there  slept  for  57  Years.1  At 
length  he  awoke,  as  if  on  the  very  next  Morning,  and  won- 
dered at  the  changed  face  of  every  thing  he  saw.  Hence  in  an 
equal  number  of  Days  after,  he  grew  Old,  that  at  last  he  lived 
to  the  Age  of  175  Years.  Women,  by  reason  of  their  Sex,  are 
most  subject  to  this  danger,2  by  the  turning  of  the  Womb  ; 
which,  if  it  be  corrected,  they  soon  recover.  To  this  belongs 
that  noble  Volume  among  the  Greeks  written  by  Heraclides, 
where  he  writeth  of  a  Woman  that  for  seven  Days  lay  as 
Dead,  but  who  in  the  end  was  restored  to  Life.  Also  Varro 
reporteth,  that  when  the  twenty  Men  were  dividing  Lands 

1  Gibbon  refers  to  a  similar  story,  which  was  widely  believed,  in  the 
fifth  century  of  Christianity  ("  Decline  and  Fall,"  c.  xxxiii.) ;  but  he  seems 
not  to  have  been  aware  of  this  more  ancient,  and  perhaps  original,  narra- 
tive of  a  similar  event. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  That  is,  of  the  suspension  of  animation,  one  of  the  symptoms  of 
Hysteria.— Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  243 

at  Capua,  there  was  one  carried  forth  on  his  Bier  who  came 
home  again  upon  his  Feet.  Also,  that  the  like  happened  at 
Aquinum.  Likewise,  that  in  Rome  one  Corfidius,  who  had 
married  his  own  Aunt  by  the  Mother's  side,  after  his 
Funeral  had  been  set  in  order,  revived  again ;  and  the 
Orderer  of  his  Funeral  was  by  him  carried  out  to  the 
same.  Varro  also  addeth  some  surprising  things,  which 
are  worth  the  rehearsal  at  large.  There  were  two  Brethren 
of  the  Equestrian  order,  of  whom  the  elder,  named  Corfidius, 
happened  in  all  appearance  to  die;  and  when  his  last  Will 
was  opened,  the  younger  Brother,  who  was  appointed  his 
Heir,  gave  orders  for  his  Funeral.  In  the  meanwhile  the 
Man  that  seemed  Dead,  by  clapping  one  Hand  against  the 
other,1  raised  the  Servants  in  the  House ;  and  he  recounted 
to  them  that  he  was  come  from  his  younger  Brother,  who 
had  recommended  his  Daughter  to  him  ;  and,  moreover,  that 
he  had  shewed  to  him  in  what  place  he  had  buried  his 
Gold,  without  the  knowledge  of  any  Man  :  requesting  him 
also  to  employ  that  Provision  which  he  had  prepared  for 
him  about  his  own  Funeral.  As  he  was  relating  this  matter, 
his  Brother's  domestic  Servants  came  in  great  haste  to  the 
House,  and  brought  word  that  their  Master  was  dead ;  and 
the  Gold  was  found  in  the  place  he  had  pointed  out.  And 
truly  life  is  full  of  these  Divinations ;  but  they  are  not  to  be 
compared  with  these,  as  for  the  most  part  they  are  mere 
lies,  as  we  will  prove  by  one  notable  example :  in  the 
Sicilian  War,  Gabienus,  one  of  the  bravest  Officers  of 
CcBsars  Fleet,  was  taken  prisoner  by  Sex.  Pompey,  and  by 
commandment  from  him  his  Head  was  almost  stricken  off, 
so  that  it  scarcely  hung  to  the  Neck  by  the  Skin,  and  in  this 
condition  he  lay  all  day  on  the  Shore.  When  it  grew 
toward  the  Evening,  and  a  Company  were  flocked  about 
him,  with  a  groan  and  prayers  he  requested  that  Pompey 
would  come  to  him,  or  at  least  send  some  one  of  those  who 


1  Clapping  the  hands  together  appears  to  have  been  an  ordinary 
method  of  summoning  the  attendants  before  bells  came  into  use  for  that 
purpose. —  Wern.  Club. 


244  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  VII. 

were  dear  to  him,  because  he  was  sent  back  from  the  Lower 
Regions,  and  had  a  Message  to  deliver  to  him.  Then  Pompey 
sent  several  of  his  friends,  to  whom  Gabienus  related  that 
the  Infernal  Gods  were  well  pleased  with  the  Cause  and 
pious  Dispositions  of  Pompey^  and  therefore  he  should  have 
as  good  an  issue  of  it  as  he  could  wish.  Thus  much,  he  said, 
he  was  commanded  to  deliver ;  and  as  a  proof  of  the  truth, 
so  soon  as  he  had  done  his  errand  he  would  immediately 
expire  :  and  so  it  came  to  pass.  Histories  also  make  men- 
tion of  them  who  have  appeared  after  they  were  committed 
to  Earth.  But  our  purpose  is  to  write  of  Nature's  works, 
arid  not  to  prosecute  such  Prodigious  Matters. 

CHAPTER  LIII. 
Of  Sudden  Deaths. 

BUT  among  the  principal  things  is  sudden  Death,  which 
is  the  greatest  Felicity  of  Life  ;  many  examples  of  which  we 
have,  that  always  seem  strange,  although  they  are  common, 
and  as  we  shall  shew,  natural.  Verrius  hath  set  forth  many, 
but  we  will  make  choice  among  them  all.  Besides  C/iilon, 
of  whom  we  have  spoken  before,  there  died  suddenly  for  Joy 
Sophocles  the  Poet,  and  Dionysius  the  Tyrant  of  Sicily  : 
both  of  them,  on  Tidings  brought  to  them  that  they  had  won 
the  best  Prize  among  the  Tragic  Poets.  Presently  after  the 
famous  battle  of  Cannae,  a  Mother  died  immediately  on  the 
sight  of  her  Son  unhurt,  whom  by  a  false  Message  she  had 
heard  to  have  been  Slain.  Diodorus,  a  Professor  of  Dialectic 
Learning,  for  shame  that  he  could  not  readily  resolve  a  fri- 
volous Question  at  the  demand  of  Stilbo,  sunk  away  without 
recovery.  Without  any  apparent  cause  some  have  died, 
particularly  two  of  the  Ccesars ;  the  one  a  Praetor :  the  other 
who  had  borne  that  Dignity,  the  Father  of  Ccesar  the  Dic- 
tator :  both  of  them  in  the  Morning  when  they  were  putting 
on  their  Shoes,  the  one  at  Pisa,  the  former  at  Rome. 
Q.  Fabius  Maximus  in  his  verv  Consulship,  upon  the  last 
Day  of  December;  in  whose  place  Eebilus  made  suit  to  be 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  245 

Consul  for  a  very  few  Hours.1  Also,  C.  Vulcatius  Guryes,  a 
Senator :  all  of  them  in  such  sound  and  perfect  Health,  that 
they  expected  to  live  Long.  Q.  JEmilius  Lepidus,  even  as  he 
was  going  out  of  his  Bed-chamber,  hit  his  great  Toe  against 
the  Door-post  and  died  from  it.  C.  Aufidius  was  going 
out  of  his  House,  on  his  way  to  the  Senate,  and  stumbled 
with  his  Foot  in  the  Comitium.  The  Ambassador  of  the 
Rhodians  also,  who  had  to  the  great  admiration  of  all  that 
were  present  pleaded  their  cause  before  the  Senate,  in  the 
very  entry  of  the  Counsel-house,  as  he  was  going  out,  fell 
down  Dead.  Cn.  Bcebius  Pamphilus,  who  had  been  Praetor, 
died  suddenly  as  he  was  asking  a  Boy  what  it  was  o'clock. 
A.  Pompeius,  so  soon  as  he  had  worshipped  the  Gods  in  the 
Capitol ;  M.  Juventius  Talva,  the  Consul,  as  he  was  sacri- 
ficing ;  Cams  Servilius  Pansa,  as  he  stood  at  a  Shop  in  the 
Forum,  at  the  second  Hour  of  the  Day,  leaning  on  his 
Brother,  P.  Pansa ;  Bcebius,  the  Judge,  as  he  was  adjourning 
an  Appearance  in  the  Court ;  M.  Terentius  Corax,  while  he 
was  writing  Letters  in  the  Foruin ;  no  longer  since  than  last 
Year  a  Knight  of  Rome,  as  he  was  talking  in  the  Ear  of  one 
who  had  been  Consul,  before  the  Ivory  Statue  of  Apollo, 
which  is  in  the  Forum  of  Augustus :  but  above  all  others, 
C.  Julius,  a  Physician,  as  he  was  dressing  an  Eye  with 
Ointment,  and  drawing  the  Surgical  Instrument  along  the 
Eye ;  also  L.  Manlius  Torquatus,  a  Consular  Man,  when  at 
Supper  he  reached  for  a  Cake  ;  L.  Durius  Valla,  a  Phy- 
sician, while  he  was  drinking  a  Draught  of  honeyed  Drink ; 
Appius  Savfoius,  being  come  out  of  the  Bath,  as  he  was 
drinking  honeyed  Drink,  and  supping  an  Egg ;  P.  Quin- 
tius  Scapula,  as  he  was  at  Supper  with  Aquiilius  Gallus ; 
Decimus  Saufeim,  a  Scribe,  as  he  sat  at  Dinner  in  his  own 
House ;  Cornelius  Gallus,  who  had  been  Praetor,  and  T. 
JEtherius  a  Roman  Knight,  died  in  the  very  act  of  Venus. 
The  like  befell  in  our  Days  to  two  of  the  Equestrian  order, 
with  the  same  pantomimic  Jester  Mithycus,  who  was  in 
those  days  of  surpassing  Beauty.  But  M.  OJilius  Hilarus, 

1  Until  the  year  was  accomplished :  an  honour  which  otherwise  he 
was  not  likely  ever  to  attain.—  Wern.  Club. 


246  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

an  Actor  in  Comedies,  as  is  reported  by  ancient  Writers, 
died  with  the  most  laboured  security  of  Death  :  for  after  he 
had  afforded  much  Pleasure  to  the  People  on  his  Birth-day 
he  held  a  Feast ;  and  when  the  Supper  was  set  forth,  he 
called  for  some  hot  Drink  in  a  Basin  :  and  casting  his  Eye 
on  the  Mask  that  he  had  worn  that  day,  he  took  off  the 
Chaplet  from  his  Head,  and  set  it  on  it ;  in  this  habit  he 
became  cold  before  any  Man  perceived  it,  until  he  that 
reclined  next  to  him  put  him  in  mind  that  his  Drink  was 
growing  cold.  These  are  examples  of  happy  Deaths.  But, 
on  the  other  hand,  there  is  a  very  great  number  of  those  that 
are  miserable.  L.  Domitius,  descended  from  a  noble  Family, 
being  vanquished  by  Ccesar  near  Massilia,  and  taken  pri- 
soner at  Corsinium  by  the  same  Ccesar,  for  very  irksomeness 
of  Life  poisoned  himself;  but  after  he  had  drunk  the 
Poison  he  did  all  he  could  to  save  his  life.  We  find  in  the 
Public  Acts,  that  when  Felix,  one  of  the  Red-coloured 
Chariot- drivers,  was  carried  out  to  be  burnt,  one  of  those 
who  favoured  him  threw  himself  into  his  Funeral  Fire.  A 
frivolous  matter  it  is  to  speak  of;  but  they  of  the  other  side, 
that  this  act  should  not  be  ascribed  to  the  honour  of  the 
Artist  abovenamed,  gave  it  out,  that  this  Friend  of  his  did  it 
only  because  his  Head  was  intoxicated  with  the  strong  smell 
of  the  Odours.  Not  long  before  this  M.  Lepidus,1  descended 
from  a  most  noble  Family,  who  (as  is  above  said)  died 
through  Grief,  was  by  the  violence  of  the  Flame  cast  off  from 
the  Funeral  Pile ;  and  as,  because  of  the  extreme  Heat,  no 
one  could  come  near  to  lay  him  again  on  the  place,  he  was 
burnt  naked  on  a  pile  of  dry  Vine  Cuttings,  near  the  former. 

CHAPTER  LIV.         t .,_ 
Of  Burial. 

To  burn  the  Bodies2  of  the  Dead  was  not  an  ancient 
Custom  among  the  Romans  ;  but  they  Buried  them  in  the 

1  The  cause  of  his  death  is  mentioned  in  the  36th  chapter  of  this 
book.—  Wern.  Club. 

3  The  practice  of  burning  the  dead  is  of  high  antiquity,  and  as  such  is 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  247 

Earth.  But  after  they  understood  that  the  Bodies  of  the 
Men  slain  in  the  distant  Wars  were  taken  up  out  of  the  Earth 
again,  it  was  appointed  to  Burn  them.  And  yet  many  Fami- 
lies kept  still  to  the  old  Customs:  as  in  the  House  of  the 
Cornelii  no  one  is  reported  to  have  been  burnt  before  L. 
Sylla,  the  Dictator.  And  he  willed  it  through  dread  that  he 
should  be  so  served  as  he  had  done  by  C.  Marius,  whose 
Corpse  he  had  caused  to  be  digged  up.  (In  Latin)  he  is  said 
to  be  Sepultus,  who  is  bestowed  in  any  way ;  but  Humatus 
sigriifieth  that  he  is  covered  with  the  Earth. 

CHAPTER  LV. 
Of  the  Soul,  or  the  Manes.1 

AFTER  Sepulture  there  is  very  great  Obscurity  regarding 
the  Manes  ;  but  this  is  generally  held,  that  in  whatever  Con- 
familiarly  spoken  of  by  Homer.  That  it  was  more  ancient  among  the 
Romans  than  is  represented  by  Pliny  appears  from  Ovid  ;  who  ("  Fasti," 
c.  4)  speaks  of  its  having  been  practised  on  the  body  of  Remus,  the  bro- 
ther of  Romulus.  The  same  is  also  negatively  proved  by  Numa,  who 
ordered  that  his  body  should  not  be  burned ;  and  by  the  laws  of  the 
Twelve  Tables,  regulations  were  instituted  concerning  it :  chiefly  to  pre- 
vent extravagant  expense  in  the  ceremony.  The  general  fashion  of 
burning,  in  preference  to  interment,  succeeded  to  the  example  set  by 
Sylla ;  after  whose  day  it  was  practised  even  by  people  of  inferior  orders  : 
but  neither  burning  nor  burial  were  allowed  by  law  within  the  bounds 
of  the  city.  An  ordinance  of  Numa  forbade  that  a  woman  who  died  in 
childbirth  should  be  buried,  until  the  child  was  taken  from  her  ;  and  the 
usual  ceremonies  were  to  be  omitted  when  the  person  had  been  killed  by 
lightning. — Wern.  Club. 

1  "  Manes  "  was  a  general  term  expressive  of  the  souls  of  men  after 
they  were  separated  from  the  body.  They  were  supposed  to  be  arranged 
in  classes,  according  to  their  moral  condition  :  for  which  see  a  note, 
vol.  i.  p.  24.  But  however  situated,  a  kind  of  deityship  was  supposed  to 
attach  itself  to  them :  and  hence  they  were  addressed  as  Dii  Manes. 
Such  was  the  popular  opinion,  as  referred  to  by  Virgil,  Ovid,  and  other 
writers  who  reflected  the  public  mind ;  but  it  was  scarcely  an  article  of 
faith  among  philosophers  and  the  higher  classes,  whose  opinions  fluctuated 
according  to  circumstances.  As  a  motive  to  moral  obligation  and  respon- 
sibility it  was  exceedingly  feeble. 

Pliny's  observation,  "  that  in  whatever  condition  they  were  before 


248  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  VI I . 

dition  they  were  before  they  were  born,  in  the  same  they 
remain  when  they  are  dead.  For  neither  Body  nor  Soul 
hath  any  more  Sense  after  Death  than  they  had  before  the 
Day  of  Birth.  But  the  Vanity  of  Men  extendeth  itself  even 
into  the  future,  and  in  the  very  Time  of  Death  fiattereth 
itself  with  a  Life  after  this.  For  some  attribute  Immortality 
to  the  Soul ;  others  devise  a  Transfiguration  ;  some  again 

they  were  born,  in  the  same  they  remain  after  they  are  dead,"  may  be 
understood  as  referring  to  the  Pythagorean  doctrine  of  Transmigration  ; 
which  was  the  most  plausible  account  .of  the  disposition  of  the  intelligent 
principle  that  the  Heathens  could  reach  to,  before  Light  and  Immor- 
tality were  revealed  in  the  Gospel;  but  by  the  almost  contemptuous 
silence  with  which  he  passes  it  over  in  his  argument,  it  appears  that  he 
did  not  feel  disposed  to  credit  it.  With  regard  to  the  station  of  the 
manes,  Plato  supposes  that  impure  spirits  wander  about  among  sepulchres 
and  monuments.  Homer  represents  Elpenor  as  prevented  from  rest 
until  the  funeral  rites  were  paid ;  and  a  commonly  received  doctrine  was, 
that  there  were  days  sacred  to  Dis  and  Proserpine,  on  which  the  whole  of 
the  secret  and  deep  places  of  the  world  were  thrown  open,  and  the  disem- 
bodied spirits  were  permitted  to  revisit  the  light.  Varro  supposes  that 
this  occurs  three  times  in  the  year :  on  the  feast  of  Vulcanalia,  tenth  of 
the  Calends  of  September,  or  23d  of  August ;  on  the  3d  of  the  Nones  of 
October,  the  Fontinalia,  October  13 ;  and  the  6th  of  the  Ides  of  November, 
or  8th  of  that  month. 

According  to  the  doctrine  of  the  Jewish  Rabbis,  derived,  no  doubt, 
from  ancient  Oriental  sources,  "  during  the  first  twelve  months  after 
death  the  souls  of  righteous  men  descend  and  ascend  again  "  (Talmud,  tr. 
Sabbath) :  which  Rabbi  Joseph  Albo,  in  the  "  Book  of  Principles,"  c.  xxxi., 
explains  by  saying,  that  the  soul  does  not  directly  and  at  once  become 
divested  of  those  corporeal  attachments  to  which  it  is  accustomed,  but 
lingers  about  them  until  by  habit  it  becomes  weaned  from  them,  and 
assimilated  to  the  new  condition  on  which  it  has  entered. 

The  gloomy  views  which  even  the  more  virtuous  of  the  ancient  Hea- 
thens took  of  an  invisible  world  is  shewn  by  Homer's  representations  in 
the  "  Odyssey,"  b.  xi. ;  and  by  so  much  of  Etrurian  learning  as,  from 
their  paintings  and  other  representations,  have  descended  to  us.  With  so 
much  distaste  of  a  wearisome  life  on  the  one  hand  (in  which  even  Homer 
joins,  b.  xvii.),  and  on  the  other  the  dim  prospect  of  the  dreary  regions 
below,  we  can  scarcely  wonder  if  even  the  virtuous  Pliny  should  choose 
rather  to  lie  down  in  ashes  without  the  prospect  of  living  again.  The 
greater  portion  of  his  argument,  however,  is  founded  on  his  ignorance : 
his  questions,  then  so  doubtful,  are  such  as  now  even  a  child  may  answer. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  249 

bestow  Sense  on  those  who  are  in  the  Lower  Regions  ;  and 
they  do  Honour  to  the  Manes,  making  a  God  of  him  who 
hath  ceased  to  be  a  Man  :  as  if  the  Manner  of  Man's  Breath- 
ing differed  from  that  of  other  living  Creatures  ;  or  as  if 
there  were  not  to  be  found  many  other  Things  in  the  World, 
that  live  much  longer  than  Men,  and  yet  no  Man  foretells 
the  like  Immortality  to  them.  But  what  is  the  Body  that 
followeth  the  Material  of  the  Soul  ?  where  lieth  her 
Thought?  how  is  her  Seeing,  how  is  her  Hearing  per- 
formed ?  what  toucheth  she  ?  nay,  what  doth  she  at  all  ? 
How  is  she  employed  ?  or  what  Good  can  there  be  without 
these  ?  I  would  know  where  she  hath  her  abiding  Place  ? 
and  what  Multitudes  of  Souls,  like  Shadows,  would  there  be 
in  so  many  Ages  ?  Surely  these  are  but  fantastical  and 
childish  Toys,  devised  by  Men  that  would  fain  live  always. 
The  like  Foolery  there  is  in  preserving  the  Bodies  of  Men. 
And  the  Vanity  of  Democritus  is  no  less,  who  promised  a 
Restoration  to  Life,  and  yet  himself  hath  not  come  to  Life 
again.  And  what  an  Instance  of  Madness  to  think  (an  Evil 
in  itself)  that  Death  should  be  the  Way  to  a  life !  What 
Repose  should  ever  Men  have  that  are  born,  if  the  Sense  of 
their  Souls  should  remain  on  high,  while  their  Shadows  are 
among  those  below  ?  Certainly,  this  sweet  Inducement, 
and  Credulity,  destroyeth  the  Benefit  of  the  best  Gift  of 
Nature,  which  is  Death  ;  and  it  doubleth  the  Pain  of  a  Man 
who  is  to  die,  if  he  happen  to  consider  what  shall  befall  him 
in  the  Time  to  come.  For  if  it  be  sweet  to  live,  what  Plea- 
sure can  one  have,  that  hath  already  lived  ?  But  how  much 
more  easy  and  certain  is  it  for  each  Man  to  trust  to  himself, 
and  to  gather  Reasons  from  the  Experience  that  he  had 
before  he  was  born? 

CHAPTER  LVI. 
The  first  Inventors  of  Things  in  Life. 

BEFORE  we  depart  from  this  Discourse  of  Men's  Nature, 
it  seemeth  convenient  to  point  out  their  Inventions,  and 
what  each  Man  hath  discovered.  In  the  first  Place,  Liber 


250  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  VII. 

Pater  appointed  buying  and  selling  ;    he  also  devised  the 
Diadem,  the  Ornament  of  Kings,  and  the  Triumph.     Ceres 
shewed  the  use  of  Corn,  whereas  before  Men  lived  on  Mast. 
She  taught  also  how  to  grind  Corn,  to  knead  Dough,  and 
make  Bread  of  it,  in  Attica,  Italy,  and  Sicily ;  for  which  she 
was  reputed  a  Goddess.      She  it  was  that  began  to  make 
Laws ;  but  others  have  thought  that  Rhadamanthns  was  the 
first  Lawgiver.     I  am  of  opinion,  that  Letters  ever  were  in 
Assyria ;  but  some  think,  as  particularly  Gellius,  that  they 
were  invented  by  Mercury  in  Egypt,  and  others  will  have  it 
that  they  came  first  from  Syria.     True  it  is,  that  Cadmus 
brought  into  Greece  from  Phcenice  to  the  Number  of  sixteen; 
to  which  Palamedes,  in  the  Time  of  the  Trojan  War,  added 
four,  in  these  characters,  0,  3,  <£,  X.    And  after  him  Simon- 
ides  Melicus1  produced  the  same  Numbers,  z,  H,  T,  a :  the 
Force  of  all  which  Letters  we  acknowledge  among  ourselves. 
Aristotle  is  rather  of  opinion,  that  there  were  eighteen  an- 
cient Letters :  A,  B,  r,  A,  E,  z,  i,  K,  A,  M,  N,  o,  n,  p,  2,  T,  r,  $, 
and  that  the  other  two,  0  and  X,  were  added  by  Epicharmus, 
and  not  by  Palamedes.    Anticlides  writeth,  that  one  in  Egypt 
named  Menon  was  the  Inventor  of  Letters,  fifteen  Years  be- 
fore the  Time  of  Phoroneus,  the  most  ancient  King  of  Greece : 
and  he  endeavoureth  to  prove  the  same  by  Monuments.    On 
the  other  Hand,  Epigenes,  an  Author  as  renowned  as  any, 
sheweth,   that   among   the    Babylonians   there   were   found 
Observations  of  the  Stars  for  7*20  Years,  written  on  Bricks  ; 
and  they  who  speak  of  the  least,  as  Berosus  and  Critodemus, 
report  the  like  for  480  Years.     Whereby  it  appeareth  that 
the  use  of  Letters  was  eternal.     The  Pelasgi  brought  their 
use  into  Latium.     Euryalus  and  Hyperbius,  two  Brothers  at 
Athens,  invented  the  first  Manufacture  of  Bricks  and  the 
Formation  of  Houses  ;  for  before  their  Time  Caves  were  used 
for  Houses.     Gellius  is  of  opinion  that  Doxius,  the  Son  of 
Ccelus,  devised  the  first  Houses  that  were  made  of  Clay ; 
taking  his  Pattern  from  the   Nests  of  Swallows.      Cecrops 
called  a  Town  after  his  own  Name,  Cecropia  ;  which  at  this 

1  Some  copies  read  Medicus,  "  a  physician." —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VI L]  History  of  Nature.  251 

Day  is  the  Castle  in  Athens.  Some  will  have  it  that  Argos 
was  built  before  it  by  King  Phoroneus;  and  others  again, 
that  Sycione  was  before  them.  The  Egyptians  affirm,  that 
long  before  that,  their  City  Diospolis  was  founded.  Cinyra, 
the  Son  of  Agriopa,  invented  the  Slating  of  Houses,  and 
Mines  of  Brass :  both  within  the  Isle  of  Cyprus.  He  also 
invented  Pincers,  the  little  Hammer,  the  Lever,  and  the 
Anvil.  Danaus,  who  was  brought  from  Egypt  to  Greece, 
which  was  then  called  Argos  Dipsion,  first  sunk  Wells. 
Cadmus  at  Thebes,  or,  as  Theophrastus  saith,  in  Phoenice, 
found  out  Stone  Quarries.  Thrason  was  the  first  Builder 
of  Walls  :  of  Towers,  the  Cyclops,  as  Aristotle  thinketh ; 
but  the  Tyrinthii,  according  to  Theophrastus.  Weaving 
was  the  Invention  of  the  Egyptians  ;  and  Dyeing  Wool, 
of  the  Lydians  in  Sardis.  Closter,  the  Son  of  Arachne, 
taught  the  first  making  of  the  Spindle  for  Woollen  Yarn : 
and  Arachnb  herself,  the  Flax  and  Nets.  Nicias  the  Megaren- 
sian  invented  the  Fuller's  Art :  Boethius,  the  Art  of  Sewing. 
The  Egyptians  will  have  Medicine  to  have  been  discovered 
among  them ;  but  others,  that  Arabus,  the  Son  of  Babylo 
and  Apollo,  was  its  Author.  The  first  Herbarist  and  Apothe- 
cary was  Chiron,  Son  of  Saturn  and  Phyllira.  Aristotle 
thinketh  that  Lydus  the  Scythian  displayed  the  melting  and 
tempering  of  Brass  ;  Theophrastus,  that  it  was  Delas  the 
Phrygian.  Some  think  the  Chalybse  devised  the  working 
into  Vessels  of  Brass,  arid  others  attribute  it  to  the  Cyclopae. 
The  Discovery  of  Iron  was  the  Invention  of  those  in 
Crete,  who  were  called  Dactyli  Idaei,  according  to  Hesiod. 
Erichthonius  the  Athenian  discovered  Silver,  or,  as  others 
say,  JEacus.  The  Gold  Mines,  together  with  the  melting  of 
the  Metal,  Cadmus  the  Phrenician  first  found  out  at  the 
Mountain  Pangaeus ;  but  others  say,  Thoas  and  Eaclis  in 
Panchaia ;  or  else  Sol  the  Son  of  Oceanus,  to  whom  Gellius 
attributeth  the  Discovery  of  Medicine,  and  of  Honey. 
Midacritus  was  the  first  that  brought  Lead  out  of  the  Island 
Cassiteris.1  And  the  Cyclops  invented  the  working  Iron  to 

1  The  Islands  of  Scilly.— Wern.  Club. 


252  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VII. 

use;  Corcebus  the  Athenian,  the  Potter's  Art;  and  therein 
Anacharsis  the  Scythian,  or  according  to  some,  Hyperbios 
the  Corinthian,  invented  the  forming  into  a  Globe.  The 
Carpenter's  Art  was  the  Invention  of  Dcedalus,  as  well  as 
the  Tools  :  the  Saw,  the  Hatchet,  the  Perpendicular,  the 
Auger,  Glue,  Fish-glue.  The  Square,  the  Level,  the  Lathe, 
and  the  Key,  were  invented  by  Theodorus  Samius.  Phidon 
the  Argive,  or  Palamedes,  as  Gellius  rather  thinketh,  found 
out  Measures  and  Weights.  Pyrodes,  the  Son  of  Cilix,  first 
obtained  Fire  from  the  Flint;  and  Prometheus,  the  Means  to 
preserve  it  in  Ferula  (or  Fennel).  The  Phrygians  invented 
the  Waggon  with  four  Wheels  :  the  Poeni  (Carthaginians), 
Merchandise:  Eumolpus  the  Athenian  discovered  the  culti- 
vation of  Vines  arid  Trees.  Staphylus,  the  Son  of  Silenus, 
taught  how  to  mix  Wine  with  Water.  Aristceus  the  Athenian 
invented  the  making  of  Oil,  and  also  the  Press  belonging  to 
it.  The  same  Man  taught  to  draw  Honey  from  the  Combs. 
Buzyges  the  Athenian,  or  as  others  have  it,  Triptolemus, 
employed  Oxen  for  the  Plough.  The  Egyptians  were  the 
first  that  had  a  royal  City,  and  the  Athenians  a  popular 
City.  After  Theseus,  the  first  Tyrant  was  Phalaris  of  Agri- 
gentum.  The  Lacedaemonians  first  invented  the  Condition 
of  Slavery.  The  first  Judgment  for  Death  WHS  in  the  Court 
of  Areopagus.  The  first  Battle  was  fought  between  the  Afri- 
cans and  Egyptians ;  and  the  same  was  done  with  Clubs, 
which  they  call  Phalangae.  Shields  were  contrived  by 
Prcetus  and  Acrisius,  when  they  warred  against  each  other ; 
or  by  Calchus,  the  Son  of  Athamas.  Midias  of  Messene  in- 
vented the  Cuirass,  and  the  Lacedaemonians  the  Helmet, 
Sword,  and  Spear.  The  Carians  contrived  Greaves,  and 
Crests  (upon  Helmets):  Scythes,  the  Son  of  Jupiter,  the  Bow 
and  Arrows;  although  some  say  that  Perses,  the  Son  of 
Perseus,  invented  Arrows.  The  ^Etolians  invented  the 
Lance ;  the  Dart  with  a  Loop  was  by  JEtolus,  the  Son  of 
Mars :  the  light  Javelins  and  the  Pilum  by  Tyrrhenus ;  and 
Penthesilea  the  Amazon,  the  Battle-axe.  Piseus  found  out 
the  Boar-spear  and  Chasing-staff.  Among  Engines  to  throw 
with,  the  Cretes  invented  the  Scorpion:  the  Syrians,  the 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  253 

Catapult :  the  Phoenicians,  the  Balista  and  the  Sling.  Piseus 
the  Tyrrhenian  first  used  the  hrazen  Trumpet;  and  Arthemon 
the  Clazomenian,  Tortoises.  The  Engine  to  batter  Walls 
(called  sometimes  the  Horse,  and  now  the  Ram)  was  the 
Device  of  Epeus  at  Troy.  Bellerophon  shewed  first  how  to 
ride  on  Horseback :  Pelethronius  invented  the  Saddle  and 
Bridle  for  the  Horse.  The  Thessalians,  called  Centaurs, 
inhabiting  near  the  Mountain  Pelius,  were  the  first  that 
fought  on  Horseback.  The  Nation  of  the  Phrygians  first 
joined  two  Horses  to  a  Chariot ;  and  Erichthonius  four. 
Palamedes,  during  the  Trojan  War,  invented  the  manner 
of  setting  an  Army  in  array:  also  the  giving  of  a  Signal, 
the  Watch-word,  and  the  Outposts  (VigiliaB).  In  the  same 
War,  Sinon  devised  Watch-towers.  Lycanor  was  the  first 
Maker  of  a  Truce  :  Theseus,  of  Alliances  :  Car,  from  whom 
Caria  took  its  Name,  observed  first  the  Flight  of  Birds 
(Augury) ;  to  which  Orpheus  added  the  Signs  from  other 
Animals.  Delphus  invented  Divination  from  the  Entrails 
(Aruspices) :  Amphiaraus,  that  of  the  Inspection  of  Fire 
(Ignispex)  :  Tyresias,  the  Theban,  that  of  the  Auspices  of 
Birds.  Amphictyon  gave  the  Interpretation  of  portentous 
Sights,  and  of  Dreams.  Atlas,  the  Son  of  Libya  (or, 
as  some  say,  the  Egyptians,  and  as  others  the  Assyrians), 
invented  Astrology  ;  and  in  that  Science,  Anaximander  the 
Milesian  devised  the  Sphere.  The  Explanation  of  the 
Winds  was  given  by  JEolus,  the  Son  of  Helen.  Amphion 
invented  Music.  The  Flute  and  the  single  Pipe1  were 
the  Invention  of  Pan,  the  Son  of  Mercury.  The  oblique 
Cornet  was  by  Midas  in  Phrygia  ;  and  in  the  same  Country 
Marsyas  invented  the  Double  Flute ;  Amphion  taught  the 
Lydian  Measures;  Thamyras  the  Thracian,  the  Dorian;  and 
Marsyas  of  Phrygia,  the  Phrygian.  Amphion,  likewise  (or, 
as  some  say,  Orpheus,  and  according  to  others,  Linus},  played 
first  on  the  Lute.2  Ter pander  added  seven  Strings  to  it; 
Simonides  added  the  eighth ;  and  Timotheus  the  ninth.  Tha- 
myras was  the  first  that  played  on  the  Lute  without  Song, 

1  Fistula  and  Monaiilus.  —  Wern.  Club.  a  Cithara.  —  Wern.  Club. 


254  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  VII. 

and  Amphion  sung  with  it,  or,  according  to  some,  Linus. 
Terpander  adapted  Songs  to  the  Lute.  Dardanus,  the  Tro3- 
zenian,  began  first  vocal  Music  to  the  Flute.1  The  Curetes 
taught  to  dance  in  Armour ;  and  Pyrrhus  the  Pyrrhic  Dance  ; 
and  both  these  were  first  practised  in  Crete.  The  Heroic 
Verse  we  owe  to  the  Oracle  of  Pythius  (Apollo}.  About  the 
Original  of  Poems  there  is  a  great  Question.  They  are 
proved  to  have  existed  before  the  Trojan  War.  Pherecydes 
of  Syros,  in  the  Days  of  King  Cyrus,  invented  the  Writing 
in  Prose.  Cadmus  the  Milesian  founded  History.  Lycaon 
appointed  the  first  public  Games  of  Strength  in  Arcadia ; 
Acastus  in  lolcum,  the  first  solemn  Games  at  Funerals ;  and 
after  him  Theseus,  in  the  Isthmus.  Hercules  instituted  the 
Athletic  Exercises  at  Olympia  :  and  Pythus  those  of  Play  at 
Ball.  Gyges  the  Lydian  first  practised  Painting  in  Egypt; 
but  in  Greece,  Euchir,  a  Relative  of  Dcedalus,  as  Aristotle 
supposeth  ;  and  according  to  Theophrastus,  it  was  Polygnotus 
the  Athenian.  Danaus  was  the  first  that  sailed  with  a  Ship, 
and  so  he  passed  the  Sea  from  Egypt  to  Greece ;  for  before 
that  time  they  used  Rafts,  which  were  invented  by  King 
Erythra,  to  cross  from  one  Island  to  another  in  the  Red  Sea. 
But  we  meet  with  some  Writers  who  suppose  that  the  Tro- 
jans and  Mysians  were  the  first  that  devised  Navigation  be- 
fore them  in  the  Hellespont,  when  they  passed  over-against 
the  Thracians.  And  even  at  this  Day  in  the  British  Ocean, 
there  are  made  WTicker  Boats  covered  with  Leather,  and 
stitched  round  about ;  in  the  Nile,  of  Papyrus,  Cane-reed, 
and  Rushes.  Philostephanus  witnesseth,  that  Jason  first  used 
in  Navigation  the  long  Ship ;  but  Egesias  saith,  that  it  was 
Paralus.  Ctesias  attributeth  it  to  Samyras ;  Saphanus,  to 
Semiramis ;  and  Archimackus,  to  JEgeon.  Damastes  testi- 
fieth,  that  the  Erythraeans  first  made  the  Bireme  (or  Galley 
with  two  Ranks  of  Oars) :  Thucydides,  that  Aminocles  the 
Corinthian  built  the  first  Trireme  (with  three  Rows  of  Oars) : 
Aristotle  saith,  that  the  Carthaginians  were  the  first  that  set 
to  Sea  the  Quadrireme  (with  four  Ranks  of  Oars):  and 

1  Tibia.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  255 

Nesichthon  the  Salaminian,  set  afloat  the  first  Quinquireme 
(with  five  Ranks  of  Oars).  Zenagoras  of  Syracusa  brought 
up  those  of  six  Rows  ;  and  from  it  to  those  of  ten,  Mnesigeton 
was  the  Inventor.  It  is  said  that  Alexander  the  Great  built 
Galleys  with  twelve  Banks  ;  and  Philostephanus  reporteth, 
that  Ptolemy  Soter  rose  to  fifteen :  Demetrius,  the  Son  of 
Antiaonus,  to  thirty  :  Ptolemy  Philadelphus,  to  forty ;  and 
Ptolemy  Philopater,  surnamed  Tryphon,  to  fifty.  Hippus 
the  Tyrian  invented  Ships  of  Burden.1  The  Cyrenians  first 
built  the  Pinnace ;  the  Phoenicians,  the  Ferry-boat ;  the 
Rhodians,  the  Wherry ;  and  last,  the  Cyprians,  the  Hulk. 
The  Phoenicians  were  the  first  that  in  sailing  observed  the 
Course  of  the  Stars.  The  Copeans  devised  the  Oar,  and  the 
Plateans  its  broad  End  :  Icarus,  the  Sails  :  Dcedalus,  the 
Mast  and  the  Yard.  Vessels  for  transporting  Horses  were 
the  Invention  of  the  Samians,  or  else  of  Pericles  the  Athe- 
nian. The  Thasii  formed  the  long-covered  Ships :  for  before 
their  Time  they  fought  only  from  the  Stern  and  the  Bow. 
Piseus  added  the  Rostra ;  the  Tyrrhenians,  the  Anchor ;  to 
which  Eupalamus  added  the  two  Claws,  and  Anac/tarsis  the 
Grappling-hooks.  The  Stock  was  by  Pericles  the  Athenian ; 
and  finally,  the  Steering-tackle  by  Typhis.  The  Chief  that 
first  fought  in  a  Fleet  was  Minos.  The  first  that  killed  a 
Beast  was  HyperHus,  the  Son  of  Mars;  and  Prometheus  first 
killed  an  Ox.2 

1  The  names  of  these  ships  in  the  original  are,  Oneraria,  Cymba, 
Celox,  Cercuros. —  Wern.  Club. 

8  It  has  been  already  remarked,  that  the  Greeks  regarded  as  the 
inventor  of  any  art  him  who  had  communicated  it  to  them ;  and  Pliny 
seeks  no  further  than  to  their  writings  for  authority  in  these  particulars, 
In  the  Book  of  Genesis  (chap.  iv.  &c.)  we  have  more  authentic  particulars 
of  the  invention  of  musical  instruments,  of  tents  to  dwell  in,  and  of 
working  in  metal :  the  latter  by  one  whose  name  seems  to  have  been  the 
origin  of  that  of  Vulcan ;  and  the  following  catalogue  of  discoveries  in 
the  most  ancient  times  is  derived  from  Sanchoniatho,  the  Phoenician :  — 

"From  Genus,  the  son  of  Protogonus  and  (Eon,  other  mortal  issue 
were  begotten,  whose  names  were  Light,  Fire,  and  Flame.  These  found 
out  the  way  of  generating  fire  by  the  rubbing  of  pieces  of  wood  against 
each  other,  and  taught  men  the  use  thereof.  These  begat  sons  of  vast 
bulk  and  height,  whose  names  were  given  to  mountains  on  which  they 


256  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  VII. 

CHAPTER  LVII. 
Wherein  first  appeared  the  general  Agreement  of  Nations. 

THE  first  silent  Consent  of  all  Countries  hath  agreed  in 
this,  That  they  should  use  the  Ionian  Letters. 

first  seized :  so  from  them  were  named  Mounts  Cassius  and  Libanus, 
Antilibanus  and  Brathys.  Perhaps  it  is  to  these  that  allusion  is  made, 
Genesis,  vi.  4.  The  Protogonus  and  (Eon  here  spoken  of,  being  the 
first  generation  of  mortals,  were  the  discoverers  of  the  way  of  taking 
food  from  trees;  and  their  children,  Genus  and  Genea,  in  a  time  of 
scarcity  in  Phanicia,  first  worshipped  the  sun,  as  Beelsamin,  or  only 
Lord  of  Heaven. 

"  Hypsuranius,  a  Tyrian,  first  made  huts  of  reeds  and  rushes,  and  the 
paper-reeds.  His  brother  Usoiis  first  invented  covering  for  his  body,  out 
of  the  skins  of  wild  beasts  which  he  could  catch ;  which  may  be  reconciled 
with  the  narrative  in  Genesis,  iii.  21.  He  consecrated  two  rude  stone 
pillars  to  the  fire  and  wind,  and  worshipped  them  with  the  sprinkling  of 
the  blood  of  wild  beasts  taken  in  hunting.  He  first  ventured  on  the  sea 
in  a  kind  of  raft ;  and  on  his  death  were  first  instituted  anniversary  feasts. 
Many  years  after  him,  Agreus  and  Halieus  were  the  inventors  of  the  arts, 
and  it  would  appear,  the  fathers  of  tribes  who  pursued  hunting  and  fish- 
ing. The  two  brothers  who  invented  the  working  of  iron  were  their 
sons.  One  of  these,  named  Chrysor,  the  same  as  Vulcan,  employed 
charms  and  divinations ;  he  invented  the  hook,  bait,  and  fishing-line,  and 
boats  slightly  made :  perhaps  those  covered  with  leather,  mentioned  by 
Pliny  as  used  in  his  day  in  Britain,  and  originally  derived  from  this 
Eastern  source.  This  Coracle,  employed  so  late  as  the  fourth  or  fifth  cen- 
tury of  Christianity  in  crossing  the  British  Channel,  is  still  used  in  Welsh 
rivers,  and  is  figured,  in  its  modern  structure,  by  Mr.  Yarrell  ("  History 
of  British  Fishes,"  vol.  ii.  p.  62,  2d  edit.)  :  a  copy  from  an  ancient  relievo 
in  Montfaucon  is  at  the  end  of  this  volume.  It  was  a  subsequent  race, 
the  Cabiri,  that  formed  the  first  complete  ship.  From  the  last  generation, 
or  Chrysor  and  his  brother,  sprang  two  brothers :  one  called  Technites,  or 
the  artist,  and  the  other,  Ge'inus  Autochthon,  the  home-born  man  of  the 
earth.  These  first  mingled  stubble  with  the  brick  earth,  and  dried  the 
tiling  in  the  sun.  This  accommodation  was  further  improved  by  the  for- 
mation of  courts,  fences,  and  cellars  about  houses.  They  were  husband- 
men, and  worshipped  a  statue  carried  about  in  a  movable  temple,  drawn 
by  oxen.  This  practice  is  alluded  to  by  the  prophet  Amos,  v.  26,  and 
perhaps  2  Samuel,  vi.  3  and  7.  These  were  the  first  that  employed  dogs 
in  the  hunting  of  wild  animals.  Amynus  and  Magus,  their  sons,  first 


BOOK  VII .].  History  of  Nature.  257 

CHAPTER  LVIII. 
Of  the  ancient  Letters.1 

THAT  the  old  Greek  Letters  were  almost  the  same  as  the 
present  Latin  appeareth  by  an  antique  Table  of  Brass,  which 
came  from  the  Temple  at  Delphos,  and  which  at  this  Day  is 
in  the  Library  of  the  Palatium,  dedicated  to  Minerva  by  the 
Emperors,  with  an  Inscription  like  this  on  it:  Nau<r/x.£ar»j£ 
T/tfa/xit/ou  '  Adqvatbg,  xooa  xa/  ' AQqva  aveQqxsv :  i.e.  Nausicrates  (the 

Son)  of  Tisamenus  an  Athenian,  caused  this  Table  to  be  made 
and  set  up  to  Minerva. 

formed  villages  and  flocks ;  and  their  sons,  Misor  and  Sydyc  (Wellfreed 
and  Just),  discovered  the  use  of  salt. 

"  Cronus  first  made  a  scimitar  and  spear :  Dagon  invented  the  use  of 
bread  and  the  plough.  Inachus,  whom  Archbishop  Usher  makes  contem- 
porary with  the  Scriptural  Nahor,  was  the  inventor  of  honorary  gold  and 
silver  chains.  The  purple  dye  from  shell-fish  was  discovered  by  the  Phre- 
nician  Hercules,  the  great  navigator  Melcartus,  who  first  passed  through 
the  Straits  of  Gibraltar,  and  visited  Cornwall.  It  is  true,  there  seems  some 
doubt  whether  there  be  not  two  individuals  referred  to  under  this  name, 
one  of  whom  lived  in  the  days  of  Canaan ;  but  if  so,  at  least  they  were 
natives  of  the  same  country,  and  were  both  honoured  by  their  country- 
men as  inventors  of  the  arts  by  which  the  nation  acquired  riches  and 
eminency.  Cronus  first  taught  the  use  of  the  bow  as  a  weapon;  which 
took  place  in  Crete,  an  island  afterwards  famous  for  this  kind  of  skill. 
4  Eupolemus  says  of  Enoch,  that  he  was  the  true  Atlas,  the  inventor  of 
astronomy.'  Finally,  the  infamy  of  having  first  practised  persecution  for 
religion  is  ascribed  to  Cronus,  who  is  supposed  to  be  Ham,  the  son  of 
Noah,  with  the  concurrence  of  the  Egyptian  Thoth ;  but  the  Jews  are 
inclined  to  derive  its  origin  from  the  city  of  Ur,  in  Chaldaea,  where  Terah 
was  put  to  death  in  the  fire  (Ur)  :  but  in  either  case  the  act  was  devised 
in  support  of  false  religion,  or  idolatry." — Wern.  Club. 

1  In  the  beginning  of  the  56th  chapter,  Pliny  has  expressed  his  belief 
that  the  Assyrian  letters  are  the  most  ancient  in  the  world :  but  whether 
these  were  the  same  as  in  recent  times  have  been  discovered  among  the 
antique  monuments  of  Nineveh  and  Babylon ;  the  Chaldsean  characters 
afterwards  introduced  among  the  Jews  by  Ezra ;  or  the  ancient  Pho2ni- 
cian,  now  termed  the  Samaritan;  in  either  case  it  is  only  by  passing 
through  great  mutations  that  they  can  be  traced  to  the  Greek  and  Latin 
forms  of  the  days  of  Pliny.  Sanchoniatho  says  that  Taautus,  called  by 

VOL.  II.  S 


258  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  VII. 

CHAPTER  LIX. 
When  Barbers  were  first  at  Rome. 

THE  next  Consent  of  all  People  was  to  entertain  Bar- 
bers; but  they  were  later  among  the  Romans.  The  first  that 
entered  Italy  came  from  Sicily,  in  the  454th  Year  after  the 
Foundation  of  Rome.  They  were  brought  in  by  P.  Ticinius 
Mena,  as  Varro  reporteth:  for  before  this  they  were  un- 
shorn. The  first  that  took  up  the  practice  to  Shave  every 
day  was  Scipio  Africanus :  and  after  him  cometh  Divus 
Augustus,  who  always  used  the  Rasor.1 

CHAPTER  LX. 
When  was  the  fast  Dial.2 

THE  third  Consent  of  all  Nations  was  in  the  observation  of 
the  Hours ;  and  this  was  grounded  upon  Reason :  but  at 
what  Time,  and  by  whom  this  was  Invented  in  Greece,  we 
have  declared  in  the  Second  Book  ;  and  it  was  late  before 
this  came  up  at  Rome.  In  the  Twelve  Tables  the  East  and 
West  alone  are  mentioned  ;  after  some  Years  the  Noon  was 
added,  and  the  Consul's  Officer  proclaimed  Noon  when, 
standing  at  the  Hall  of  the  Council,  he  beheld  the  Sun  in 

the  Greeks  Hermes,  found  out  the  first  letters ;  but  these  appear,  from 
his  subsequent  remarks,  to  have  been  what  we  now  term  hieroglyphics. 
It  may  be  the  phonetic  characters,  of  which  Pliny  ascribes  the  invention 
to  Meno  the  Egyptian ;  but  it  is  probable  that  they  are  all  much  more 
ancient. — Wern.  Club. 

1  Slaves  and  servants  were  not  permitted  to  be  shaved.     The  Egyp- 
tians were  the  only  people  who  universally  used  the  rasor. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Lumisden  has  some  observations  on  the  Roman  method  of  measur- 
ing time.     "  I  do  not  conceive,"  he  says,  "  how  a  sun-dial  or  any  other 
instrument  could  point  out  the  various  hours,  as  time  was  computed  by 
the  ancient  Romans.     The  time  the  earth  takes  to  revolve  once  round  its 
axis,  or  the  space  between  the  rising  of  the  sun  till  its  next  rising,  which 
makes  a  day  and  a  night,  divided  into  twenty-four  equal  parts,  we  call 
hours.    Now,  the  Romans  divided  the  day  and  the  night  into  twenty-four 
hours.    Twelve  of  these,  from  the  rising  of  the  sun  to  its  setting,  con- 


BOOK  VII.]  History  of  Nature.  259 

that  Quarter  between  the  Rostra  and  the  Grecostasis.  But 
when  the  Sun  inclined  downward  from  the  Column  named 
Moenia,  to  the  Prison,  he  proclaimed  the  last  Quarter  (of  the 
Day).  But  this  observation  would  serve  only  on  clear  Days  ; 
and  yet  it  was  so  until  the  first  Punic  War.  Fabius  Vestalis 
writeth,  that  L.  Papyrius  Cursor,  the  Prince,  twelve  Years 
before  the  War  with  Pyrrhus,  to  do  the  Romans  a  pleasure 
set  up  a  Sun-dial  on  the  Temple  of  Quirinus,  when  it  was 
dedicated,  his  Father  having  vowed  it  before  him.  But 
this  Author  sheweth  not  either  the  method  of  that  Dial,  or 
the  Workman ;  nor  yet  from  whence  it  was  brought,  nor  in 
what  Writer  he  found  it  so  written.  M.  Varro  reporteth, 
that  the  first  Dial  was  set  up  in  the  common  Market-place, 
upon  a  Column  near  the  Rostra,  in  the  first  Punic  War,  by 
M.  Valerius  Messala,  the  Consul,  presently  after  the  taking 
of  Catana,  in  Sicily ;  from  whence  it  was  brought,  thirty 
Years  after  the  report  of  the  aforesaid  Dial  of  Papyrius,  in 
the  Year  of  the  City  477.  And  although  the  Lines  of  this 
Dial  did  not  agree  with  the  Hours,  yet  were  the  People 
governed  by  it  for  an  hundred  Years  save  one,  until 
Q.  Martius  Philippus,  who  was  Censor,  with  L.  Paulus, 
set  another  by  it,  made  more  carefully.  And  this  gift, 
among  other  things  done  by  the  Censor,  was  highly 
acceptable  to  the  People.  But  notwithstanding  this,  if  it 
were  a  cloudy  Day  the  Hours  were  uncertain ;  and  thus  it 

stituted  their  day ;  and  the  other  twelve,  from  the  setting  of  the  sun  to 
its  rising,  constituted  their  night.  Thus,  as  the  seasons  changed,  the 
length  of  their  hours  must  have  varied.  In  winter  the  twelve  hours  of 
the  day  were  short,  and  those  of  the  night  long :  in  summer  they  were 
the  reverse.  How  then  could  these  hours,  of  an  unequal  length,  and 
which  daily  varied,  be  measured  by  an  instrument  ?  I  have  not  been 
able  to  discover  any  method  by  which  this  could  be  done.  However, 
they  had  two  fixed  points,  namely,  mid-day  and  midnight,  which  they 
called  the  sixth  hour.  So  that  a  meridian  line  would  always  point  out 
the  sixth  hour,  or  mid- day." 

That  the  dial  was  a  very  ancient  instrument  for  measuring  time 
appears  from  the  2d  Book  of  Kings,  xx.  11,  and  Isaiah,  xxxviii.  8, 
where  is  the  first  mention  of  it  on  record.  It  probably  was  invented  in 
Babylonia.—  Wern.  Club. 


260 


History  of  Nature. 


[BOOK  VII 


continued  five  Years  more.  Then  Scipio  Nasica,  the  Col- 
league of  L&nas,  first  divided  the  Hours,  both  of  Day  and 
Night  equally,  by  Water.  And  this  Horologe  he  dedicated 
under  a  Roof,  in  the  Year  of  the  City  595  from  the  Build- 
ing of  Rome.  So  long  it  was,  that  the  People  of  Rome  did 
not  measure  out  the  Light. 

Now  let  us  return  to  the  other  Living  Creatures :  and 
first,  of  Animals  of  the  Land. 


Coracle  referred  to  in  note  at  p.  256.— Montfaucon,  torn.  iv.  pi.  49. 


END  OF  VOL.  II. 


London :— George  Barclay,  Castle  Street,  Leicester  Square. 


IN  THE   EIGHTH   BOOK 


IS    CONTAINED    THE 
NATURE    OF    LAND    ANIMALS    THAT    GO    ON    FOOT. 


CHAP. 

1.  Of  Land  Creatures:  the  Com- 
mendation of  Elephants :  their 
Understanding. 

»/  2.  When    Elephants    were    first 
yoked. 

3.  The  Docility  of  Elephants. 

4.  The  Clemency  of  Elephants: 
that    they    know    their    own 
Dangers ;  also  of  the  Ferocity 
of  the  Tiger. 

5.  The  Understanding   and  Me- 
mory of  Elephants. 

6.  When    Elephants    were    first 
seen  in  Italy. 

7.  Comhats  by  Elephants. 

8.  The   Manner  of  taking  Ele- 
phants. 

9.  The    Manner   how  Elephants 

are  tamed. 

10.  How  long  an  Elephant  goeth 
with    Young,    and   of    their 
Nature. 

1 1.  The  Countries  where  Elephants 
breed :   the   discord    between 
Elephants  and  Dragons. 

12.  The  Industry  and  Wit  of  Dra- 
gons and  Elephants. 

13.  Of  Dragons. 

14.  Serpents  of  prodigious  Magni- 
tude :  of  Serpents  named  Boae. 

15.  Of  the  Animals  of  Scythia,  and 
of  the  North  Countries. 

16.  Of  Lions. 

17.  Of  Panthers. 
VOL.  in. 


CHAP. 

18.  The  Nature  of  the  Tiger :  of 
Camels,  and  the  Camelopard  : 
when  it  was  first  seen  at  Rome. 

19.  Of  the  Stag- wolf  named  Chaus: 
and  the  Cephus. 

20.  Of  the  Rhinoceros. 

21.  Of  Lynxes,  Sphinges,  Crocutes, 
Marmosets,   of  Indian   Oxen, 
of  Leucrocutes,  of  Eale,  of  the 
^Ethiopian  Bulls,  of  the  Man- 
tichora,   the  Unicorn,  of  the 
Catoblepa,  and  the  Basilisk. 

22.  Of  Wolves. 
3.  Of  Serpents. 

24.  Of  the  Ichneumon. 

25.  Of  the  Crocodile  and  the  Hip- 
popotamus. 

26.  Who  shewed  first  at  Rome  the 

Hippopotamus  and  Crocodiles. 
Medicines  discovered  by  Ani- 
mals. 

27.  Of  Animals  which  have  shewn 
certain  Herbs  ;  the  Red  Deer, 
Lizards,   Swallows,  Tortoises, 
the  Weasel,    the    Stork,   the 
Boar,    the    Snake,    Panther, 
Elephant,  Bears,  Stock-Doves, 
House  -  Doves,     Cranes,     and 
Ravens. 

28.  Prognostications    taken    from 
Animals. 

What  Cities  and  Nations  have 
been  destroyed  by  small  Crea- 
tures. 


Contents  of  the  Eighth  Booh. 


CHAP 

30.  Of  the   Hy?ena,  the   Crocuta, 

and  Mantichora :  of  Beavers 
and  Otters. 

31.  Of  Frogs,  Seals,  and  Stellions. 

32.  Of  Deer,  both  Eed  and  Fal- 
low. 

33 .  Of  the  Tragelaphis :  of  the  Cha- 
meleon, and  other   Creatures 
that  change  Colour. 

34.  Of  the   Tarand,  the   Lycaon, 
and  the  Wolf  called  Thoes. 
Of  the  Porcupine. 

36.  Of  Bears  and  their  Cubs. 

37.  The  Rats  of  Pontus  and  the 

Alps :  of  Hedgehogs. 

38.  Of  the  Leontophones,  the  Lynx, 
Badger,  and  Squirrels. 

39.  Of  Vipers,  Snails,  and  Lizards. 

40.  Of  Dogs. 

Against  the  Bite  of  a  mad  Dog. 
42.  The  Nature  of  Horses. 


CHAP. 

43.  Of  Asses.  -/ 

44.  Of  Mules. ,/ 

45.  Of  Kine,  Bulls,  and  Oxen.  ^ 

46.  Of  the  Bull  named  Apis. 

47.  The  Nature  of  Flocks  and  their 
Breeding.  «/ 

48.  Different  kinds  of  Wool  and 

Cloths. 

49.  Of  Musmons. 

50.  Of  Goats  and  their  Generation. 

51.  Of  Swine  and  their  Nature.  J 

52.  Of   Parks    and  Warrens    for 
Beasts. 

53.  Of  Beasts  half  Tame.  J 

54.  Of  Apes  and  Monkeys.  - 

55.  Of  Hares  and  Rabbits.   - 

56.  Of  Beasts  half  Savage.    S 

57.  Of  Rats  and  Mice :  of  Dormice. 

58.  Of  Animals  that  Live  not  in 
some  places. 

59.  Of  Animals  hurtful  to  Strangers. 


In  sum  there  are  in  this  Book,  Histories  and  Observations  788. 


LATIN  AUTHORS  ABSTRACTED  : 

Mutianus,  Procilius,  Verrius  Flaccus,  L.  Piso,  Cornelius  Valerianus, 
Cato  the  Censor,  Fenestella,  Trogus,  Actius,  Columella,  Virgil,  Varro, 
Lu.  Metellus  Scipio,  Cornelius  Celsus,  Nigidius,  Trebius  Niger,  Pomponius 
Mela,  Manlius  Sura. 

FOREIGN  WRITERS: 

King  Juba,  Polybius,  Onesicritus,  Isidoruv,  Antipater,  Aristotle,  Deme- 
trius the  Natural  Philosopher,  Democritus,  Theophrastus,  Euanthes,  Agrippa 
who  wrote  of  the  Olympionicce,  Hiero,  King  Attalus,  King  Philometer,  Cte- 
sias,  Duris,  Philistus,  Architas,  Philarchus,  Amphilochus  the  Athenian, 
Anaxipolis  the  Thasian,  Apollodorus  of  Lemnos,  Aristophanes  the  Milesian, 
Antigonus  the  Cymcean,  Agathocles  of  Chios,  Apollonicus  of  Pergamus, 
Aristander  of  Athens,  Bacchus  the  Milesian,  JBion  of  Soli,  Chcereas  the 
Athenian,  Diodorus  ofPryenceum,  Dio  the  Colophonian,  Epigenes  of  Rhodes, 
Evagon  of  Thassus,  Euphranius  the  Athenian,  Hegesias  of  Maronea,  Men- 
ander  of  Pryenceum,  Menander  also  of  Heraclea,  Menecrates  the  Poet,  An- 
drocion  who  wrote  of  Agriculture,  JEschrion  who  likewise  wrote  of  that 
argument,  Dionysius  ivho  translated  Mago,  Diophanes  who  collected  an  Epi- 
tome of  Dionysius,  King  Archelaus,  and  Nicander. 


THE  EIGHTH  BOOK 


HISTORY    OF    NATURE 


WRITTEN    BY 


C.   PLINIUS   SECUNDUS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Of  Animals  of  the  Land ;  the  Praise  of  Elephants,1  and  their 
Understanding. 

0.x....:>  ..:x:..x"# £  will  now  pass  on  to  treat  of  other  living 
Creatures,  and  first  of  Animals  of  the  Land, 
amon£  which  the  Elephant  is  the  greatest, 
an(^  cometh  nearest  in  Capacity  to  Men; 
l  f°r  tney  understand  the  Language  of  the 
Country,  they  do  whatever  they  are  commanded,  re- 
member what  Duties  they  are  taught,  and  take  a  Pleasure 
in  Love  and  Glory ;  nay,  more  than  this,  they  possess 
Probity,  Prudence,  and  Equity,  (rare  Qualities  even  in 
Men,)  and  they  have  also  in  religious  Reverence  the  Stars, 
and  Veneration  for  the  Sun  and  Moon.  Writers  report 
that  when  the  new  Moon  beginneth  to  appear  bright  > 
Herds  of  them  come  down  to  a  certain  River  named 
Ainilus,  in  the  Thickets  of  Mauritania,  and  there  they 
solemnly  Purify  themselves  by  dashing  themselves  all  over 

1  Elephas  Indicus.—Cuv.     The  Indian  Elephant. 
Elephas  Africanus.—Cvv.     The  African  Elephant.—  Wcrn. 


4  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIIL 

with  the  Water;  and  so  having  saluted  the  Planet,  they 
return  again  to  the  Woods,  carrying  before  them  their 
Young  Ones  that  are  fatigued.  They  are  thought  also  to 
have  an  Understanding  of  Religion1  in  others  ;  for  when  they 
are  to  pass  the  Seas  they  will  not  enter  the  Ships  before  they 
are  induced  to  it  by  an  Oath  of  their  Governors  that  they 
shall  return  again;  and  they  have  been  seen  enfeebled  by 
Sickness  (for  as  Large  as  they  are  they  are  subject  to  Sick- 
ness), to  lie  upon  their  Backs,  throwing  up  Herbs  toward 
Heaven,  as  if  they  had  procured  the  Earth  to  pray  for  them. 
Now  for  their  Docility  :  they  adore  the  King,  they  kneel  and 
offer  Chaplets  of  Flowers.  The  lesser  sort,  which  they  call 
Bastards,  serve  the  Indians  to  Plough  their  Ground. 

CHAPTER  II. 

When  Elephants  were  first  put  to  Draw. 

THE  first  time  they  were  known  to  Draw  at  Rome  was  in 
the  Chariot  of  Pompey  the  Great,  in  the  African  Triumph. 

1  The  author  in  several  places  speaks  of  religion  in  animals :  as  of 
monkeys,  b.  viii.  c.  54,  and  of  barn-door  poultry,  b.  x.  c.  41.  The  oryx 
was  judged  to  be  impious,  because  it  had  been  seen  to  display  signs  of  dis- 
regard or  contempt  to  the  moon.  To  understand  the  ground  of  this 
opinion,  it  is  necessary  to  bear  in  mind  that  the  religion  of  the  heathens 
did  not  include  or  demand  a  spiritual  attachment,  or  mental  conformity, 
to  the  character  or  commands  of  the  object  worshipped,  but  was  merely 
ritual :  the  latreia  being  an  official  service  which  was  employed  to  allay 
the  anger  of  some  divinity,  which  had  been  raised  by  some  cause  equally 
remote  from  any  feeling  of  a  moral  nature  with  that  instituted  to  obviate 
it.  The  real  cultus  was  comprised  in  this  ceremony,  and  religion  was  the 
binding  of  this  cultus,  or  worship,  on  those  who  were  subject  to  it  —  as 
superstition  included  the  employment  of  a  greater  amount  of  ceremony 
than  the  latreia  demanded ;  and  as  this  was  judged  to  proceed  from  a 
greater  degree  of  fear  than  the  cause  required,  it  was  always  considered 
as  degrading  him  that  manifested  it.  As  the  proper  idea  of  religion  was 
supposed  to  be  the  binding  of  the  cultus  on  those  only  who  were  the  sub- 
jects of  it,  it  was  no  great  extension  of  the  same  principle  to  suppose  that 
animals  might  be  subject  to  the  same  laws  as  men  in  these  respects,  and 
that  they  might  have  recourse  to  means  of  a  similar  kind  to  obviate 
similar  offences.  That  the  elephant  practised  religious  rites  was  not  the 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  5 

But  long  before  this  it  is  said  that  Father  Liber  did  the 
same  in  his  Triumph  for  having  Conquered  India.  Prod- 
lius  denieth  that,  coupled  as  they  were,  two  in  one  Yoke, 
they  could  possibly  have  entered  in  at  the  Gates  of  Rome  in 
Pompey's  Triumph.  In  the  Show  of  Gladiators,  which  Ger- 
manicus  Ccssar  exhibited,  the  Elephants  were  seen  to  show 
some  disorderly  Motions,  after  a  manner  of  Dancing.  It  was 
a  common  thing  to  fling  Weapons  through  the  Air,  so  that 
the  Winds  had  no  power  against  them  ;  to  flourish  and  meet 
together  in  Fight  like  Gladiators,  and  to  make  Sport  in  a 
Pyrrhic  Dance ;  and  afterwards  to  go  on  Ropes ;  to  carry 
(four  together1)  one  of  them  laid  at  ease  in  a  Litter,  re- 
sembling the  manner  of  Women  newly  brought  to  Bed  ;  and 
some  of  them  would  enter  a  Dining-place  where  the  Tables 
were  full  of  Guests,  and  pass  among  them  with  their  foot- 
opinion  of  Pliny  only,  but  appears  to  have  been  common  in  ancient  times. 
^Elian,  whose  "  History  of  the  Peculiar  Nature  of  Animals  "  is  chiefly 
valuable  for  containing  everything  on  the  subject  that  floated  on  the  sur- 
face of  popular  observation,  says,  "  At  the  first  appearance  of  the  new 
moon  I  have  heard  that  elephants  leave  the  woods  under  the  influence  of 
a  certain  natural  and  inexpressible  intelligence,  bearing  with  them 
branches  which  they  have  plucked  from  the  trees,  which  they  bear 
aloft  and  wave  to  and  fro  as  they  cast  their  looks  upward,  as  if  offering 
some  divine  intercession  to  the  goddess  to  be  propitious  and  gracious  to 
them." — B.  iv.  c.  x.  "  They  also  worship  the  rising  sun  by  lifting  up  their 
trunks,  like  hands,  to  meet  his  rays,  and  on  this  account  they  are  dear  to 
the  god ;  and  of  this  fact  Ptolemy  Philopator  is  an  excellent  and  un- 
doubted witness." — B.  vii.  c.  14.  The  reference  of  the  author  to  this  sove- 
reign is  built  on  a  remarkable  dream  which  he  had  on  the  occasion  of 
having  offered  the  unusual  sacrifice  of  four  elephants  on  occasion  of  a 
victory.  The  solemn  ceremonies  of  the  elephant  on  occasion  of  the  death 
of  those  of  their  own  kind  are  referred  to  in  the  same  work,  b.  v.  c.  49. 
Their  adoration  of  the  king  was  the  result  of  discipline,  b.  xiii.  c.  22  ;  and 
they  also  formed  his  night-watch,  when  perhaps  he  had  learned  to  dis- 
trust the  fidelity  of  his  guards. —  Wern.  Club. 

1  If  the  elephants  walked  two  and  two,  as  they  probably  did  when 
thus  carrying  their  companion,  there  must  have  been  two  ropes  placed 
in  parallel  lines.  JElian,  "  De  Animalibus,"  gives  a  most  amusing  account 
of  the  performances  of  the  elephants  of  Germanicus  in  the  theatre  ;  but  I 
do  not  remember  that  he  mentions  this  feat.  A  like  exploit  is,  however, 
mentioned  by  Seneca,  Suetonius,  and  others. —  Wern.  Club. 


6     .  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

steps  so  equally  ordered  that  they  would  not  touch  any  of 
the  Company  as  they  were  Drinking. 

CHAPTER  III. 
The  Docility  of  Elephants. 

IT  is  certain  that  there  was  one  Elephant  who  was  of  a 
slower  Capacity  than  the  others,  so  that  he  was  often 
beaten  with  Stripes  because  he  did  not  Learn  that  which  was 
Taught  him ;  and  he  was  found  Studying  those  Lessons  by 
Night,  which  he  had  not  succeeded  in  Learning  by  Day.1 
But  one  of  the  greatest  Wonders  was,  that  they  could  mount 
up  against  a  Rope;  and,  more  wonderful,  that  they  should 
slide  down  again  with  their  Faces  downward.  Mutianus, 
who  had  been  thrice  Consul,  reporteth  that  one  of  them  had 
Learned  to  make  the  Greek  Letters,  and  was  accustomed  to 
Write  in  that  Language  thus:  This  have  I  myself  written, 
and  have  dedicated  the  Celtic  spoils.  Also  himself  saw  at 
Puteoli,  when  some  Elephants  that  had  been  brought 
thither  were  forced  to  go  forth  out  of  the  Vessel  in  which 
they  had  come,  but  being  affrighted  at  the  extent  of  the  way 
from  the  Ship  to  the  Land,  to  deceive  themselves  so  that 
the  way  might  not  seem  too  long,  they  went  backward  with 
their  Tails  to  the  Land.  They  know  that  the  Riches  for 
which  Men  lie  in  wait  for  them  consisteth  only  in  their 
Arms,  which  Juba  calleth  their  Horns  ;  but  which  Herodotus, 
who  wrote  long  before  him,  and  custom,  hath  better  termed 
Teeth.  And  therefore  when  they  are  fallen  off,  either  from 
Age,  or  by  some  Accident,  the  Elephants  themselves  hide 
them  in  the  Ground.  And  this  is  the  only  Ivory ;  for  all  the 
rest,  and  the  Teeth  themselves  so  far  as  they  are  covered 
within  the  Flesh,  is  no  better  than  common  Bone.  And  yet 
of  late  for  scarcity  Men  have  taken  up  to  cut  the  Bones  into 
Plates.  For  it  is  rare  to  procure  Teeth  of  any  bigness  except 
from  India ;  since  all  the  rest  in  our  part  of  the  World  hath 

1  Plutarch,  "  De  Solert.  Anim."  tells  us  of  an  elephant  who  practised 
bis  parts  by  moonlight  of  his  own  accord.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  7 

been  employed  in  Luxuries.  You  may  know  young  Ele- 
phants by  the  Whiteness  of  their  Teeth,  and  these  Beasts 
have  a  special  care  over  them.  They  spare  the  Point  of  one 
of  them,  lest  it  should  be  blunt  when  they  come  to  Fight ; 
and  the  other  they  use  ordinarily,  either  to  dig  up  Roots  or 
to  throw  down  Banks.  When  they  are  compassed  round 
with  Hunters,  they  set  in  the  foremost  rank  those  which 
have  the  least  Teeth,  that  their  price  may  not  be  thought 
worth  the  hazard  of  Battle.  But  afterwards,  when  they  are 
weary,  they  break  them  by  driving  them  into  the  Trees,  and 
so  ransom  themselves  by  the  prey. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

The  Clemency  of  Elephants ;    their  Knowledge  of  their  own 
Dangers  ;  also  the  Fierceness  of  the  Tiyer. 

IT  is  a  wonder  in  most  Animals  that  they  know  why  they 
are  Hunted ;  and  through  the  whole  they  understand  what 
to  guard  against.  If  an  Elephant  chance  to  meet  a  Man 
wandering  simply  out  of  his  way  in  the  Wilderness,  it  is  said 
that  he  will  mildly  and  peaceably  set  him  in  the  right  way 
again.  But  if  he  perceive  a  Man's  footstep  before  he  dis- 
covers the  Man,  he  will  tremble  for  fear  of  being  entrapped ; 
he  will  stay  from  the  Scent,  look  about  him  every  way,  and 
puff  for  very  anger.  Neither  will  he  tread  upon  the  Track,  but 
dig  it  out  and  give  it  to  the  next  (Elephant),  and  he  again  to 
him  that  followeth,  in  the  way  of  a  Message,  to  the  furthest 
rank  behind.  Then  the  whole  Herd  wheels  round  and  re- 
turns backward,  putting  themselves  in  Battle  Array  :  so  long 
continueth  that  strong  Smell  of  Men's  Feet  through  them 
all,  notwithstanding  for  the  most  part  they  have  not  naked 
Feet,  So  the  Tigress  also,  though  fierce  to  other  wild 
Beasts,  and  disregarding  the  footsteps  of  the  Elephant 
itself,  if  she  happen  to  catch  sight  of  a  Man  is  said  im- 
mediately to  convey  away  her  Whelps.  How  cometh 
she  to  this  knowledge  of  a  Man  ?  Where  did  she  ever  see 
him  before  whom  she  thus  feareth  ?  For  surely  such  Forests 


8  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

are  very  little  frequented  by  Men.  They  may  indeed  well 
wonder  at  the  novelty  of  their  Tracks,  bat  how  know  they 
that  they  are  to  be  feared  ?  Nay,  what  should  be  the  reason 
that  they  dread  even  to  see  a  Man,  being  so  much  superior 
in  Strength,  Size,  and  Swiftness  ?  Certainly  herein  is  the 
wonderful  work  of  Nature,  and  her  mighty  Power ;  that  the 
greatest  and  fiercest  of  wild  Beasts,  which  have  never  seen 
that  which  they  ought  to  fear,  yet  immediately  understand 
why  the  same  is  to  be  dreaded. 

CHAPTER  V. 
The  Understanding  and  Memory  of  Elephants. 

ELEPHANTS  march  always  in  Troops.  The  oldest  of  them 
leadeth  the  Company,  and  the  next  to  him  in  age  cometh 
behind  with  the  conduct  of  the  Rear.  When  they  are  to  pass 
over  a  River,  they  put  the  Smallest  foremost,  lest  if  the 
Larger  should  enter  first  they  would  dig  up  the  Channel,  and 
so  make  the  Torrent  to  become  deeper.  Anti.pat.er  writeth, 
that  King  Antiochus  had  two  Elephants  which  he  used  in 
his  Wars,  and  were  famous  for  their  Surnames,  which  they 
knew  well.  And  truly  Cato,  when  he  named  in  his  Annals 
the  Commanders  (Imperators),  hath  recorded  that  the  (Ele- 
phant) which  fought  most  bravely  in  the  Punic  Contest  was 
named  Surus,  and  that  one  of  his  Teeth  was  lost.  When 
Antiochus  would  have  sounded  the  passage  of  a  River  (by 
putting  the  Elephants  before),  Ajax  refused,  although  at  all 
times  he  was  the  leader  of  the  Troop.  On  this  it  was  pro- 
nounced that  the  Elephant  which  would  pass  should  be  the 
Chief;  and  Patroclus  having  ventured,  as  a  reward  there 
was  presented  to  him  a  rich  set  of  Silver  Trappings  (a  thing 
in  which  they  take  very  great  Delight) ;  and  besides  this, 
he  was  made  the  Sovereign  of  the  others.  But  the  other, 
which  was  distinguished  (by  his  Abstaining  from  Food)  pre- 
ferred Death  to  the  Shame :  for  they  are  wonderfully 
Bashful,  so  that  if  one  of  them  be  overcome  he  will  fly  from 
the  voice  of  the  Conqueror,  and  put  forward  Earth  arid  Ver- 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  9 

vain.1  Through  Modesty  they  never  associate  in  Love  except 
in  secret :  the  Male  at  five  Years  of  Age,  and  the  Female  at 
ten  Years  old.  And  this  they  do  every  third  Year,2  and  they 
continue  therein  five  Days  in  the  Year  (as  they  say)  and  not 
more,  for  upon  the  sixth  Day  they  Wash  themselves  over  in 
the  River  ;  and  before  this  they  do  not  return  to  the  Herd. 
They  know  no  adulterous  change  ;  neither  are  there  any 
Battles  among  them  about  their  Females,  as  among  other 
Animals  to  their  great  injury.  And  this  is  not  for  want  of 
strong  Affection ;  for  it  is  reported  of  an  Elephant  that  he 
was  enamoured  of  a  certain  Woman  in  Egypt  who  sold  Gar- 
lands of  Flowers.  And  lest  any  one  should  think  that  she 
was  an  ordinary  maiden  that  was  beloved,  she  was  greatly 
admired  by  Aristophanes,  the  excellent  Grammarian.  There 
was  another  so  full  of  Love  to  a  Youth  in  the  Army  of  Ptolo- 
mceus,  that  if  he  did  not  see  him  every  Day  he  would  abstain 
from  his  Meat.  Juba  likewise  reporteth  of  an  Elephant  that 
loved  a  Woman  who  sold  Perfumes.  All  these  shewed  their 
Love  by  the  tokens  of  Joy  at  the  sight  of  the  object  of  their 
regard,  by  their  rude  Blandishments,  and  by  preserving  the 
Gifts  which  the  People  gave  them,  and  laying  them  in  their 
Bosoms.  Nor  is  Love  so  much  to  be  wondered  at  where  the 
Memory  is  so  good.  For  the  same  Juba  saith,  that  an  Ele- 
phant acknowledged  a  Man  in  his  old  Age,  and  after  many 
Years,  who  in  his  youth  had  been  his  Governor.  He 
affirmeth  also  that  they  have  a  certain  Divine  Instinct  of 
Justice  :  for  when  King  Bacchus  had  appointed  to  be  re- 
venged on  thirty  Elephants,  which  he  had  caused  to  be 
bound  to  Stakes,  and  had  set  the  same  number  to  run  upon 
them,  appointing  also  Men  to  urge  them  to  rush  forward ; 
yet  they  were  riot  able  to  cause  them  to  become  the  Ministers 
of  another's  Cruelty. 

1  The  greatest  sign  of  victory  in  old  time  was  for  the  vanquished  to 
offer  a  plant  to  the  conqueror,  which  signified  that  he  surrendered  all  the 
interests  he  had  in  earth,  and  even  the  rite  of  burial.  See  Lib.  viii.  c.  5. 
-Wern.  Club. 

3  Some  copies  read  two  years.—  Wern.  Club. 


10  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

When  Elephants  were  first  seen  in  Italy. 

THE  first  Time  that  Elephants  were  seen  in  Italy  was 
during  the  War  of  King  Pyrrhus ;  and  they  were  called  by 
the  Name  of  Lucce  Boves,  or  Lucan  Oxen,  because  they  were 
seen  in  the  Lucan  Country  ;  in  the  four  hundred  and  seventy- 
second  Year  of  the  City.  But  in  Rome  it  was  seven  Years 
after  this  before  they  were  seen,  and  then  in  a  Triumph.  But 
in  the  Year  502,  a  Number  of  them  were  seen,  being  taken 
from  the  Carthaginians  in  the  Victory  of  L.  Metellus  Pontifex 
in  Sicily.  142  were  conveyed  over  on  Rafts,  which  were  laid 
upon  Rows  of  great  Tuns  placed  close  one  by  another.  Ver- 
rius  saith  that  they  fought  in  the  Circus,  and  were  killed  with 
Darts,  for  want  of  better  Counsel  ;  for  they  were  neither 
willing  to  feed  them,1  nor  to  bestow  them  upon  Kings.  L.  Piso 
saith  they  were  only  brought  out  into  the  Circus ;  and  to 
make  them  contemptible,  they  were  driven  round  it  by  cer- 
tain hired  Fellows,  having  for  that  purpose  Spears  simply 
headed  with  Iron.  But  what  became  of  them  afterward, 
those  Authors  make  no  mention ;  but  they  are  of  opinion, 
that  they  were  not  killed. 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Their  Combats. 

MUCH  renowned  is  the  Contest  of  one  Roman  with  an 
Elephant,  when  Annibal  forced  our  Captives  to  skirmish  one 
against  another.  For  the  only  Roman  that  remained,  he 
matched  with  an  Elephant,  having  covenanted  with  him, 

1  The  Romans  might  well  shrink  from  the  expense  of  supporting  142 
elephants,  when,  as  we  are  informed,  the  quantity  of  food  required  for  the 
daily  consumption  of  a  full-grown  elephant  is  not  less  than  200  pounds  of 
aliment  of  all  sorts.  The  elephant  of  Louis  XIV.  had  daily  80  pounds 
of  bread,  12  pints  of  wine,  and  a  large  quantity  of  vegetable  soup,  with 
bread  and  rice ;  this  was  exclusive  of  grass,  and  what  he  got  from  visi- 
tors. —  Wcrn.  Club. 


BOOK  VIIL]  History  of  Nature.  1 1 

that  if  he  could  kill  the  Beast,  he  should  be  dismissed.  So 
this  Prisoner  entered  into  single  Fight  with  the  Elephant, 
and  to  the  great  Grief  of  the  Carthaginians,  slew  him.  An- 
nibal,  considering  that  the  Report  of  this  Combat  would 
cause  these  Beasts  to  be  little  regarded,  sent  after  him  some 
Light  Horsemen  to  kill  him  upon  the  Way.  Their  Trunk 
(Proboscis)  may  be  easily  cut  off;  as  appeared  by  Experience 
in  the  Battles  of  Pyrrhus.  Fenestella  writeth,  that  the  first 
Fight  of  them  in  Rome  was  in  the  Circus,  when  Claudius 
Pulcker  was  Curule  jEdile,  and  M.  Antonius  and  A.  Post- 
humius  were  Consuls,  in  the  six  hundred  and  fiftieth  Year 
of  the  City.  Also  20  Years  after,  when  the  Luculli  were 
Curule  .ZEdiles,  they  fought  against  Bulls.  Also  in  the 
second  Consulship  of  Cn.  Pompeius,  at  the  Dedication  of  the 
Temple  to  Venus  Victoress,  20  of  them,  or  as  some  write,  17, 
fought  in  the  Circus.  The  Gaetulians  threw  Darts  against 
them.  But  one  Elephant  did  Wonders :  for  when  his  Feet 
were  pierced  through  with  Darts,  he  crept  upon  his  Knees 
among  the  Companies,  where  he  caught  from  them  their 
Shields,  and  flung  them  aloft,  which,  as  they  fell,  turned 
round  as  if  by  Art,  and  not  as  if  thrown  with  Violence  by 
the  Beasts  in  their  Anger,  to  the  great  Pleasure  of  the  Be- 
holders. And  as  strange  a  Thing  was  seen  in  another  of 
them,  who  was  killed  with  one  Stroke ;  for  the  Dart  was 
driven  under  the  Eye,  and  pierced  to  the  vital  Parts  of  the 
Head.  Whereupon  all  the  rest  endeavoured  to  burst  away, 
not  without  a  great  disturbance  among  the  People,  although 
fenced  round  with  Iron  Bars.  And  for  this  Cause,  Ccesar 
the  Dictator,  when  afterwards  he  was  about  to  exhibit  the 
like  Show,  cast  a  Ditch  round  about  the  Arena ;  which  Prince 
Nero  removed  to  make  room  for  the  Knights.  But  those 
Elephants  of  Pompey  being  past  all  Hope  of  escaping,  in  a 
Manner  that  cannot  be  expressed  seemed  to  supplicate  the 
Multitude,  craving  their  Mercy,  with  grievous  Lamentations 
bewailing  their  Condition ;  so  that  the  People's  Hearts 
melted,  and  with  Tears  in  their  Eyes,  they  rose  up  all  at 
once,  without  Regard  to  the  Imperator,  or  Respect  to  his 
magnificent  Display,  and  imprecated  on  Pompey  these  severe 


12  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

Misfortunes  which  soon  after  ensued  accordingly.  Again, 
Ccesar  the  Dictator,  in  his  third  Consulship,  exhibited  ano- 
ther Fight  of  them ;  20  against  500  Footmen  ;  and  a  second 
Time  20  more,  having  Turrets  with  60  Defendants  to  the 
same ;  and  he  opposed  against  them  the  same  Number  as 
the  former  of  Footmen,  and  as  many  Horse.  After  this, 
Claudius  and  JVero,  the  Princes,  brought  them  forth  one  by 
one,  by  way  of  finishing  the  Show  of  Gladiators.  This 
Animal  is  reported  to  be  so  gentle  to  all  that  are  not  so 
strong  as  himself,  that  if  he  meet  a  Flock  of  Cattle,  he  will 
with  the  Hand  remove  any  that  cometh  in  his  Way,  for  Fear 
he  should  crush  them  without  being  aware  of  it.  And  they 
never  do  any  Hurt  unless  provoked.  They  always  walk  in 
Troops,  and  are  less  disposed  to  wandering  alone  than  any 
other  Animals.  If  they  are  environed  with  Horsemen,  they 
take  into  the  midst  of  the  Troop  the  feeble,  weary,  or  wounded ; 
and  as  if  they  were  under  the  Direction  of  a  General,  or  with 
the  Guidance  of  Reason,  they  succeed  one  another  in  their 
Course.  When  taken,  they  are  soonest  brought  to  be  tame 
with  the  Juice  of  Barley.1 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
The  Manner  of  taking  Elephants. 

THE  Indians  take  Elephants  in  this  manner :  the  Go- 
vernor employeth  one  of  them  that  are  tame,  and  when  he 
meeteth  with  a  wild  one  alone,  or  can  single  him  from  the 
Herd,  he  beateth  him  until  he  hath  made  him  weary,  and 
then  he  mounteth  on  him  and  ruleth  him  as  well  as  the  former. 
In  Africa  they  catch  them  in  Pit-falls;  into  which,  if  one  of 
them  wander,  all  the  rest  immediately  heap  together  Boughs 
of  Trees,  they  roll  down  Heaps,  they  raise  Banks,  and  with 
all  they  can  do,  labour  to  draw  him  out.  Formerly  when 
they  meant  to  make  them  tractable,  by  the  Help  of  Horse- 
men they  drove  the  Flocks  along  into  a  Valley  made  by 
Man's  Hand,  and  calculated  to  deceive  them  for  a  consider- 

1  That  is,  gruel,  or  tissane,  as  we  may  suppose.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  13 

able  Extent ;  arid  when  they  were  enclosed  within  the  Ditches 
and  Banks,  they  subdued  them  by  Hunger;  and  they  knew 
they  were  tame  enough  if  they  would  quietly  take  a  Branch 
from  the  Man  that  offered  it  to  them.  But  now,  since  they 
seek  after  them  for  the  sake  of  their  Teeth,  they  throw  Darts 
at  their  Legs,  which  are  the  softest  Part  of  their  Body.  The 
Trogloditee,1  a  People  bordering  on  Ethiopia,  who  live  only 
by  hunting  Elephants,  climb  the  Trees  that  are  near  their 
Walk,  and  from  thence  watching  all  the  Herd  as  they  pass, 
they  leap  down  upon  the  Buttocks  of  the  hindmost;  then  he, 
with  his  left  Hand,  layeth  hold  of  the  Tail,  and  setteth  his 
Feet  fast  in  the  Flank  of  the  left  Side ;  and  so  hanging,  with 
his  right  Hand  he  cutteth  the  Hamstrings  of  one  of  his  Legs 
with  a  very  sharp  double-edged  Knife ;  which  done,  the 
Elephant  slackening  his  Pace,  the  Man  then  maketh  escape, 
and  divideth  the  Sinews  likewise  of  the  other  Ham  ;  and  all 
this  Execution  he  doth  with  wonderful  Agility.  Others  have 
a  safer  Way  than  this,  but  it  is  more  deceitful :  they  fix  in 
the  Ground  a  great  Way  off,  very  great  Bows  ready  bent; 
to  hold  these  fast  they  choose  young  Men  remarkable  for 
their  Strength,  and  others  united  together  draw  with  all 
Might  these  Bows  against  the  first,  and  so  they  pierce  the 
Elephants  as  they  pass  with  Javelins,  and  then  follow  them 
by  their  Blood.  Of  these  Creatures,  the  Females  are  much 
more  fearful  than  the  Males. 

1  These  people  are  often  mentioned  by  Pliny,  and  are  particularly 
described  by  Heliodorus  (2Ethiopics,  b.  viii.) :  "  They  are  a  people  of 
Ethiopia,  and  live  by  grazing.  These  people  are  extremely  swift  of  foot, 
as  well  by  nature  as  by  continued  exercise  from  their  childhood :  of  little 
use  in  close  fight,  but  very  serviceable  with  their  slings,  which  they  gall 
their  enemy  with  at  a  distance ;  and  if  they  find  themselves  overpowered, 
they  fly,  secured  by  their  swiftness,  and  by  running  into  holes  and  caverns 
among  the  rocks,  where  no  enemy  ever  found  it  worth  their  while  to  follow 
them."  The  Agagees,  as  mentioned  by  Mr.  Bruce,  in  his  "  Travels  into 
Abyssinia,"  appear  to  be  a  similar  race  of  men ;  although  the  object  of 
pursuit  is  a  different  animal.  —  Wern.  Club. 


]  4  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  VIII. 

CHAPTER  IX. 
The  Manner  of  Taming  Elephants. 

As  furious  as  they  may  be,  they  are  tamed  with  Hunger 
and  Stripes,  and  by  the  Help  of  other  Elephants  that  are 
brought  to  them,  to  restrain  the  unruly  Beast  with  Chains ; 
and  at  other  Times,  when  they  go  to  rut,  they  are  most  out 
of  Order  ;  so  that  they  demolish  the  Stables  with  their  Teeth  : 
and  therefore  they  restrain  them  from  their  Heat,  and  sepa- 
rate the  Inclosures  of  the  Females  apart  from  those  of  the 
Males,  which  Enclosures  they  have  much  in  the  Mariner  of 
other  Beasts.  When  tamed,  they  serve  in  War,  and  carry 
little  Castles  with  armed  Soldiers  among  the  Enemies  j1  and 
for  the  most  Part  they  decide  the  Wars  of  the  East.  They 
bear  down  the  Body  of  the  Army,  and  stamp  them  (the 
armed  Men)  under  Foot.  But  these  same  are  affrighted 
with  the  Grunting  of  Swine  ;  and  if  wounded  or  put  into 
a  Fright,  they  always  go  backward,  with  scarcely  less  Mis- 
chief to  their  own  Side.  The  African  Elephants  are  afraid 
of  the  Indian,  and  dare  not  look  upon  them  ;  for  the  Indian 
Elephants  are  much  bigger.2 

CHAPTER  X. 

How  they  Bring  forth  their  Young;  and  of  other  Parts  of 
their  Nature. 

IT  is  the  common  Opinion  that  they  go  with  Young  ten 
Years ;  but  Aristotle  saith,  that  they  go  but  two  Years,  and 

1  Or  on  their  backs  (a  various  reading),  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Philostratus  and  Polybius  confirm  this  statement  of  Pliny,  that  the 
Indian  elephant  is  larger  than  that  of  Africa ;  and  ^Elian  says,  that  it 
attains  the  height  of  nine  cubits.    But  modern  authors  generally  consider 
the  African  species  the  larger, — at  least  larger  than  the  common  elephant 
of  Hindostan.     Mr.  Corse,  formerly  superintendent  of  the  East  India 
Company's  elephants  at  Tiperah,  a  province  of  Bengal,  never  heard  of 
but  one  Indian  elephant  whose  height  reached  ten  feet  six  inches.     The 
elephants  of  Hindostan  are,  however,  the  smallest  of  the  Asiatic  species. 
Those  of  Pegu  and  Ava  are  much  larger  ;  and  the  skeleton  of  the  elephant 
at  the  Museum  of  Petersburgh,  which  was  sent  to  the  Czar  Peter  by  the 
King  of  Persia,  measures  sixteen  feet  and  a  half  in  height.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  15 

that  they  breed  but  once  in  their  Life,  and  produce  not  above 
one  at  a  Time  :  also  that  they  live  200  Years,  and  some  of 
them  300.  Their  Condition  of  Youth  beginneth  when  they 
are  threescore  Years  old  :  they  greatly  delight  in  Rivers,  and 
they  wander  about  Waters  ;  when  otherwise,  by  reason  of  the 
Magnitude  of  their  Bodies,  they  cannot  swim.1  They  are 
impatient  of  Cold.  The  greatest  Evil  which  befals  them  is, 
Distension  and  Purging  of  the  Bowels ;  nor  do  they  suffer 
from  any  other  kinds  of  Sickness.  I  find  that  if  they  drink  Oil, 
the  Darts  which  stick  in  their  Bodies  will  fall  off,  but  if  they 
sweat  the  more  easily  will  they  hold  fast.  The  eating  of 
Earth  causes  wasting  in  them,  unless  they  chew  well  and 
often  :  they  devour  Stones  also.  The  Trunks  of  Trees  is  the 
best  Meat  they  have.  They  will  overturn  the  higher  Palm- 
trees  with  their  Forehead,  and  eat  the  Dates  as  they  lie 
along.  They  chew  their  Meat  with  their  Mouth  :  but  they 
breathe,  drink,  and  smell  with  what  is  not  improperly  called 
their  Hand.  Of  all  living  Creatures  they  most  detest  a 
Mouse;2  and  if  they  perceive  that  their  Provender  lying  in 
the  Manger  hath  been  touched  by  it,  they  will  not  touch  it. 
They  are  mightily  tormented  with  Pain,  if  in  their  drinking 
they  swallow  down  a  Leech  ;  which  Creature,  I  observe,  they 
begin  now  commonly  to  call  a  Bloodsucker,  (Sanyuisuga) : 
for  when  the  Leech  hath  fixed  itself  in  the  Windpipe,  it  put- 
teth  him  to  intolerable  Pain.  The  Hide  of  their  Back  is 
most  hard;3  but  in  the  Belly  it  is  soft;  their  Skin  has  no 
covering  of  Hair ;  and  even  in  their  Tail  there  is  no  Defence 
which  might  serve  to  drive  away  the  Annoyance  of  Flies  (for 
as  huge  a  Beast  as  he  is,  he  feeleth  it) ;  but  their  Skin  is  full 

1  It  scarcely  needs  be  observed  that  the  elephant  swims  as  well  as 
any  other  quadruped.  In  this  act  he  will  frequently  immerse  his  whole 
body,  so  that  the  tip  of  his  trunk  only  is  above  water,  to  the  no  slight 
inconvenience  of  those  who  chance  to  be  riding  on  his  back.  —  Wern. 
Club. 

3  JElian  says  (B.  i.  c.  38),  that  it  dreads  the  grunting  of  a  hog,  and  a 
horned  ram ;  and  it  was  by  employing  these  that  the  Romans  put  to  flight 
the  elephants  of  King  Pyrrhus,  by  which  they  obtained  a  decisive  victory. 
—  Wern.  Club. 

3  (Various  reading.)     Anirnce  canali,  or  amne  canali.  —  Wern.  Club. 


]  6  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  VIII. 

of  cross  Wrinkles,  and  its  Smell  attracts  this  kind  of  Crea- 
tures. And  therefore  when  they  are  stretched  along,  and 
perceive  the  Swarms  settled  on  their  Skin,  suddenly  they 
draw  those  Crevices  close  together,  and  crush  them  to  death. 
This  serves  them  instead  of  Tail,  Mane,  and  long  Hair. 
Their  Teeth  bear  a  very  high  Price,  and  their  Substance  is 
of  greatest  request  for  the  Images  of  the  Gods  :  but  Luxury 
hath  devised  another  Thing  in  them  to  commend  ;  for  they 
find  a  particular  Taste  (vim)  in  the  hard  Substance  of  (that 
which  they  call)  their  Hand  :  for  no  other  reason  (I  believe) 
but  because  they  have  a  Conceit  that  they  eat  the  Ivory 
itself.  In  Temples  are  to  be  seen  Teeth  of  the  greatest  Size  ; 
but  in  the  remote  Parts  of  Africa  where  it  bordereth  on 
Ethiopia,  they  stand  in  the  Place  of  Corner-posts  of  their 
Houses ;  and  with  the  Elephants'  Teeth  they  make  Hedges 
and  Pales,  as  well  to  enclose  their  Grounds,  as  also  to  keep 
their  Cattle  within  Stalls,  as  PolyHus  reporteth,  from  the 
Testimony  of  the  petty  King  Gulussa. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

Where  Elephants  are  bred ;  and  of  the  Disagreement  between 
them  and  the  Dragons.1 

ELEPHANTS  are  bred  in  that  Part  of  Africa  which  lieth 
beyond  the  Deserts  of  the  Syrtes,  and  also  in  Mauritania : 
they  are  found  also  among  the  Ethiopians  and  Troglodites, 
as  hath  been  said  :2  but  India  produceth  the  biggest :  as  also 
the  Dragons,  which  are  continually  at  variance  and  fighting 
with  them  ;  and  those  of  such  Greatness,  that  they  can  easily 
clasp  round  the  Elephants,3  and  tie  them  fast  with  a  Knot. 

1  For  the  Dragons,  see  1 3th  chap.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Lib.  viii.  c.  8.—  Wem.  Club. 

3  .ZElian  (B.  vi.  c.  21)  says,  that  these  dragons  conceal  themselves 
among  the  branches  of  trees,  from  which  they  hang  dependent,  watching 
for  their  prey.  When  the  elephants  approach  to  feed  on  the  branches, 
the  enemy  seizes  them  about  the  eyes,  twines  itself  about  the  neck,  and 
lashes  them  with  its  tail,  in  which  manner  they  fall  down  strangled. — 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  17 

In  this  Conflict  they  die  together ;  that  which  is  overcome 
falling  down,  and  with  his  Weight  crushing  the  one  that  is 
twined  about  him. 

CHAPTER  XII. 
The  Subtilty  of  Animals.* 

WONDERFUL  is  the  Subtilty  of  Animals,  each  one  ac- 
cording to  its  own  Kind ;  and  they  have  only  this  one  Diff- 
culty,  that  they  must  climb  to  so  great  an  Height.  The 
Dragon,  therefore,  espying  the  Elephant  going  to  its  Food, 
throweth  itself  on  it  from  a  high  Tree ;  this  Creature, 
knowing  its  Inability  by  struggling  to  withstand  the  other's 
Windings  about  it,  seeketh  to  crush  its  Enemy  against  the 
Trees  or  Rocks.  The  Dragons  guard  against  this  by  en- 
tangling its  Progress  first  with  their  Tail;  the  Elephants 
undo  those  Knots  with  their  Hand :  but  the  Dragons  put 
their  Heads  into  their  Snout,  and  so  shut  out  their  Breath, 
and  tear  the  tenderest  Parts.  When  these  two  chance  to 
encounter  each  other  on  the  Way,  the  Dragons  raise  them- 
selves against  their  Enemies,  and  aim  chiefly  at  the  Eyes, 
whereby  it  happeneth  that  many  Times  they  (the  Ele- 
phants) are  found  blind,  and  worn  away  with  Hunger 
and  Grief.  What  other  Reason  should  a  Man  allege  of  so 
great  a  Variance  between  them,  if  it  be  not  a  Sport  of  Nature, 
in  matching  these  two,  so  equal  in  every  respect  ?  But  some 
report  this  Contest  in  another  Manner ;  and  that  the  Occa- 
sion of  it  ariseth  from  the  Elephant's  Blood  being  exceed- 
ingly Cold,  on  which  Account  chiefly  the  Dragons  search  it 
out  during  the  parching  Season  of  the  Year.  And  to  the 
same  Purpose  they  lie  under  the  Water  in  Rivers,  watching 
for  the  Elephants  when  they  are  drinking;  when  they  catch 
fast  hold  of  their  Hand  (Trunk),  and  having  clasped  it,  they 

1  This  chapter  offers  a  poor  developement  of  a  universal  principle  in 
nature,  by  which  the  character  of  every  animal  is  displayed  in  its  re- 
sources of  pursuit  and  defence.  For  its  exemplification  in  the  habits  of 
British  animals,  the  reader  is  referred  to  a  work  entitled  "  Illustrations 
of  Instinct,  derived  from  the  Habits  of  British  Animals,"  by  Jonathan 
Couch,  F.L.S.— Wern.  Club. 

VOL.  III.  C 


]8  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

fix  their  Bite  in  the  Elephant's  Ear,  because  that  is  the  only 
Part  which  they  cannot  defend  with  their  Hand.  These 
Dragons  are  so  large,  that  they  are  able  to  receive  all  the 
Elephant's  Blood.  Thus  are  they  sucked  dry  by  them  until 
they  fall  down  dead  ;  and  the  Dragons  thus  drunken,  are 
crushed  under  them,  and  both  die  together. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
Of  Dragons.* 

IN  Ethiopia  there  are  produced  as  great  Dragons  as  in 
India,  being  twenty  Cubits  long.  But  I  chiefly  wonder  at 
this  one  Thing:  why  Juba  should  think  they  were  Crested. 
They  are  produced  most  in  a  Country  of  Ethiopia,  where  the 
People  called  Asachsei  inhabit.  It  is  reported,  that  upon 
their  Coasts  they  enwrap  themselves  four  or  five  together, 
in  the  manner  of  a  Bundle  of  Rods,  and  thus  pass  the  Seas, 
to  find  better  Pasturage  in  Arabia,  bearing  up  their  Heads 
aloft  as  they  cross  the  Waves. 

1  Dragons  are  often  mentioned  by  ancient  authors,  but  without  any 
marks  by  which  we  can  distinguish  them  from  other  kinds  of  serpents. 
Their  bulk  did  not  constitute  the  distinction,  for  the  bose  mentioned  in 
the  following  chapter  are,  at  least,  equally  large.  The  idea  of  ferocity 
seems  more  directly  to  mix  itself  with  this  class  of  reptiles ;  and  accord- 
ingly in  the  Septuagint  version  of  the  Scriptures  this  is  the  impression 
usually  implied  in  the  term.  In  the  29th  chapter  of  the  prophecy  of 
Ezekiel  the  crocodile  is  signified  by  that  name,  as  it  is  also  by  Marco 
Polo  in  his  travels ;  but  in  Revel,  c.  xx.  as  in  the  more  ancient  books  of 
Scripture,  a  large  serpent  is  distinctly  characterised.  Among  the  remark- 
able things  at  Rome  in  the  days  when  the  strangest  things  were  sought 
out  to  gratify  extravagant  curiosity,  Suetonius  says  that  Tiberius  pos- 
sessed a  tame  dragon ;  and  Martial  (Ep.  b.  vii.  c.  70)  makes  it  the  play- 
thing of  a  lady :— "  Si  gelidum  collo  nectit  Glacilla  Draconem."  The 
dragon,  as  a  winged  serpent,  was  in  the  middle  ages  often  represented  by 
the  skin  of  a  skate,  distorted  and  cut  into  form,  by  which  the  opinion  of 
?uch  a  monstrous  shape  was  spread  among  the  public. —  Wern.  Club. 


BooKVIU.]  History  of  Nature.  19 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Of  very  great  Serpents,  and  those  called  Bo<z.L 

MEGASTHENES  writeth  that  there  are  Serpents  in  India 
which  grow  to  such  a  Size  that  they  are  able  to  swallow 
Stags  or  Bulls  whole.  Metrodorus  saith  that  about  the  River 
Rhyndacus,  in  Pontus,  there  are  Serpents  which  catch  and 
devour  the  Fowls  of  the  Air  as  they  fly  over  them,  however 
high  or  rapid  their  Flight  may  be.  It  is  well  known  that 
Regulus,  Imperator  during  the  Wars  against  the  Cartha- 
ginians, near  the  River  Bograda  assailed  a  Serpent  with  his 
Military  Engines,  the  Balistae  and  Tormentum,  as  he  would 
have  done  to  a  Town  ;  and  when  Subdued,  the  Length  of  the 
Serpent  was  found  to  be  120  Feet.  The  Skin  and  Jaws  of 
this  Serpent  were  preserved  in  a  Temple  at  Rome  until  the 
War  of  Numantia.  And  this  is  rendered  the  more  credible 
from  the  Serpents  that  we  see  in  Italy  that  are  called  Boae, 
which  increase  to  such  Size,  that  in  the  Days  of  the  Prince 
Dlvus  Claudius  there  was  one  of  them  killed  in  the 
Vatican,  within  the  Belly  of  which  there  was  found  an  In- 
fant Child.  They  are  nourished  at  the  first  by  the  Milk  of 
the  Cow,  from  whence  they  take  their  Name.  As  for  other 
Animals,  which  of  late  are  often  brought  from  all  Parts  into 
Italy,  it  is  needless  for  me  to  describe  their  Forms  par- 
ticularly. 

1  The  monstrous  serpents  recorded  by  ancient  authors,  as  Aristotle, 
Virgil,  Livy,  Pliny,  and  others,  were  probably  of  the  family  of  bose. 
Pliny  gives  here  the  derivation  of  the  name  "  boa,"  and  Johnson,  "  Dei- 
parse  de  Urseolo,"  and  others  observe  that  the  name  is  derived  not  so 
much  from  the  power  the  animals  have  of  swallowing  oxen,  as  from  a 
strong  opinion  in  old  times  of  their  following  the  herds,  and  sucking  their 
udders.  Cuvier  says  the  boae  are  among  the  largest  of  serpents.  Some 
of  the  species  attain  to  thirty  or  forty  feet  in  length,  and  become  capable 
of  swallowing  dogs,  deer,  and  even  oxen,  after  having  crushed  them  in 
their  folds,  and  lubricated  them  with  their  saliva.  The  class  of  bose,  as 
anciently  understood,  has  been  divided  by  Cuvier  into  two,  boa  and 
python :  to  which  latter  this  author  supposes  that  serpent  to  have  belonged 
which  offered  so  formidable  a  resistance  to  the  army  of  Regulus.  Such 
enormous  serpents  have  long  since  ceased  to  exist  in  Italy. —  Wern.  Club. 


9Q  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  VIII. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

Of  Scythian  Animals,  and  those  that  are  produced  in  the 
North  Parts. 

VERY  few  Animals  are  produced  in  Scythia,  through  the 
Scarcity  of  Vegetation.  Few  likewise  are  in  Germany,  bor- 
dering on  it;  but  that  Country  possesseth  some  remark- 
able kinds  of  Wild  Cattle,  as  the  Maned  Bisons,1  and  the 
Urus,  of  very  great  Strength  and  Swiftness,  which  ignorant 

1  Urus  Bonasus.  Much  doubt  has  existed  with  regard  to  the 
distinction  between  these  three  supposed  species  of  oxen,  which  Cuvier 
resolves  into  two,  the  Bos  Bonasus  of  Linneus;  Zubr,  or  European 
Bison;  and  the  Urus,  mentioned  in  ancient  times  by  Caesar.  The 
former  animal  once  roamed  over  the  woodland  districts  of  Central 
Europe,  and  in  England  was  contemporary  with  the  extinct  races 
of  elephant  and  rhinoceros ;  but  it  is  now  confined  to  the  forest  of 
Bialowicza,  in  the  government  of  Grodno,  where  it  is  carefully  pro- 
tected by  the  imperial  government,  whose  strict  enactments  alone  have 
saved  it  from  extirpation.  In  Owen's  "  History  of  British  Fossil  Mam- 
malia," p.  491,  &c.  the  remains  of  animals  of  this  species  are  described 
as  those  of  the  Bison  Priscus;  and  they  are  found  in  "  various  newer  ter- 
tiary fresh -water  deposits,  especially  in  Kent  and  Essex,  and  along  the 
valley  of  the  Thames."  A  young  male  and  female  were  presented  to  the 
Zoological  Society  of  London,  by  the  Emperor  of  Russia,  in  the  year 
1847.  Aristotle  calls  it  Bonasos,  or  Monassos,  and  describes  it  as  living 
in  Pa3onia,  the  modern  Bulgaria;  but  the  distance  to  which,  in  terror,  it 
voids  its  excrements,  is  more  moderately  represented  by  him  as  four 
fathoms  ;  which  Pliny  extends  to  no  less  than  "  tria  jugera,"  or  a  space  of 
700  feet.  The  Urus,  also  a  large  species  of  wild  ox,  ranged  the  forests  of 
Germany  and  Belgium  till  a  late  period  of  the  Roman  empire,  but  is  now 
extinct.  Its  fossil  remains,  under  the  name  of  Bos  Primigemus,  are  found 
by  Professor  Owen  in  the  same  deposits  and  localities  as  those  of  the 
Aurochs,  or  Bison.  The  Urus  was  almost  equal  in  size  to  the  Aurochs, 
but  differed  from  it  precisely,  as  the  Roman  poets  and  historians  have 
indicated,  by  the  greater  length  of  its  horns,  and  by  the  absence  of  a 
copious  mane.  It  appears  to  have  had  a  nearer  affinity  to  the  domestic 
ox,  resembling  it  probably  in  the  close  nature  of  its  hairy  covering. 
Cuvier,  Professor  Bell,  and  other  naturalists,  are  disposed  to  believe  that 
our  domestic  cattle  are  the  degenerate  descendants  of  the  Urus,  but  with 
this  opinion  Professor  Owen  does  not  concur ;  and  they  are  more  probably 
to  be  referred  to  the  wild  cattle  still  preserved  in  the  park  at  Shering- 
ham. —  Wern.  Club, 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  2 1 

People  call  Bubalus  :  whereas  the  Bubalus1  is  bred  in  Africa, 
and  beareth  some  Resemblance  to  a  Calf,  or  rather  to  a  Stag. 
The  Northern  Regions  also  bring  forth  Troops  of  Wild 
Horses  ;2  as  in  Asia  and  Africa  there  are  of  Wild  Asses.3 
Besides  these  there  is  the  Alee,4  very  like  a  Beast  of  Burden, 
but  that  the  Height  of  its  Ears  and  Neck  distinguishes  it. 
Also,  in  the  Island  Scandinavia,  but  nowhere  else  in  the 
World,  though  spoken  of  by  many,  there  is  a  Beast  called 
Machlis,  not  much  unlike  the  Alee  abovenamed,  but  without 
any  Bending  of  the  Pastern,  and  therefore  he  never  lieth 
down,  but  Sleepeth  leaning  against  a  Tree;  and  when  that  is 
cut  down,  they  are  taken  in  the  Snare,  for  otherwise  they 
are  too  swift  to  be  caught.  Their  upper  Lip  is  exceeding 
Great,  and  therefore  as  they  Feed  they  go  backward  ;  for  if 
they  passed  forward,  it  would  be  folded  double.  There  is 
(they  say)  a  Wild  Beast  in  Paeonia,  which  is  called  Bonasus, 
with  a  Mane  like  an  Horse,  but  otherwise  resembling  a 
Bull ;  arid  his  Horns  bend  so  inwardly,  with  their  Tips 
toward  the  Head,  that  they  are  of  no  Service  for  Fight,  and 
therefore  he  hath  recourse  to  Flight  for  Safety  ;  and  in  it 
throwing  out  his  Dung  at  intervals  to  the  Distance  of  three 
Acres,  the  Contact  of  which  burneth  them  that  follow,  like  so 
much  Fire.  It  is  a  strange  thing  that  Leopards,  Panthers, 
Lions  and  such  Animals,  as  they  go,  draw  the  Points  of  their 

1  Antelope  bubalus.— PALLAS.     The  Harte-beest. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  A  race  of  wild  horses  was  common  to  the  northern  and  other  regions 
of  the  earth  in  Pliny's  time,  but  they  appear  to  have  been  derived  from  a 
domesticated  stock.  Like  that  of  most  other  animals,  and  even  plants, 
that  have  yielded  to  the  sway  of  man,  the  original  country  of  the  horse 
cannot  be  traced  with  a  certainty ;  but  as  the  sacred  writings  inform  us  that 
the  Egyptians  were  the  first  to  train  him  for  the  use  of  man,  it  is  pro- 
bably to  the  northern  parts  of  Africa  that  we  are  to  look  for  its  native 
locality.—  Wern.  Club. 

3  The  ass  still  exists  in  a  state  of  nature  in  Persia,  India,  and  in  some 
parts  of  Africa ;  it  is  larger,  stronger,  and  more  beautiful  than  the  same 
animal  in  a  domestic  state. —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Alee,  the  Elk,  Cervus  Alee,  of  Linnaeus.     What  is  to  be  understood 
by  the  Machlis  appears  to  be  doubtful.     The  description  applies  only  to 
the  Elk ;  but  part  of  it  is  clearly  an  error.—  Wern.  Club. 


22  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

Claws  within  a  Sheath,  that  they  may  not  be  Broken,  or 
rendered  Blunt;  and  that  when  they  run  the  Hooks  are 
turned  back,  and  are  never  stretched  forth  but  when  they 
seize  an  Object.1 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Of  Lions .2 

THE  Lions  are  then  in  their  high  Perfection  vhen  the 
Hair  of  their  Mane  covereth  the  Neck  and  Shoulders.  And 
this  cometh  at  a  certain  Age  to  them  that  are  the  Progeny 
of  Lions  indeed ;  for  such  as  have  Panthers  to  their  Sires 
never  have  this  Ornament  ;3  as  also  has  not  the  Lioness. 
Lionesses  are  very  lecherous,  which  is  the  cause  that  there 
is  so  much  Anger  in  the  Lions.  This  Africa  seeth  most, 

1  Sir  Charles  Bell,  "  Bridgewater  Treatise,"  p.  102,  says,  "  The  last 
bone,  which  supports  the  claw,  is  placed  laterally  to  the  next  to  the  last, 
and  is  so  articulated  with  it  that  an  elastic  ligament  draws  it  back  and 
raises  the  sharp  extremity  of  the  claw  upwards.   In  the  ordinary  running 
of  the  animal  the  nearer  extremity  of  the  furthest  bone  presses  the 
ground,  this  and  the  furthest  extremity  of  the  second  bone,  which  is  also 
bent  down,  being  received  on  a  pad,  which  acts  as  a  cushion,  and  also  adds 
to  the  elasticity.   In  this  condition  the  claw  itself  is  received  into  a  sheath 
above ;  but  when  the  creature  strikes  an  object,  the  claws  are  brought  for- 
ward, and  bent  under  by  the  action  of  the  flexor  tendons  acting  on  the 
last  bone,  assisted  by  the  extensors,  which  cause  to  start  upward  the  end 
of  the  second  bone  as  by  a  spring.    It  is  only  the  excitement  of  seizing  an 
object  that  can  produce  this  action ;  and  when  this  does  not  exist,  the 
bones  and  claw  fall  into  their  ordinary  almost  dislocated  condition." — 
Wern.  Club. 

2  Felis  Leo.— LINN.—  Wern.  Club. 

3  Aristotle  also  speaks  of  a  maneless  lion,  "  Hist.  Anim."  ii.  31 ;  and 
modern  science  has  confirmed  the  assertion  of  these  ancient  naturalists,  but 
of  course  without  accrediting  its  monstrous  birth.    Olivier,  "  Voyage  dans 
1'Kmpire  Othomau,  1'Egypt,  et  la  Perse,"  tom.iv.  says  that  the  lion  which 
inhabits  the  part  of  Arabia  and  Persia  near  the  river  of  the  Arabs,  from 
ilie  Persian  Gulf  to  the  environs  of  Helle  and  of  Bagdad,  is  probably  the 
species  of  lion  of  which  Aristotle  and  Pliny  have  spoken,  and  which  they 
regarded  as  a  different  species  from  that  which  is  spread  over  the  interior 
of  Africa.     This  lion  much  resembles  the  African  species,  excepting  that 
it  is  smaller  and  has  no  mane.      la  1833  Captain  Since  exhibited  to  a 
meeting  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London  the  skins  of  a  lion  and  lioness 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  23 

where  for  want  of  Water  the  Wild  Beasts  meet  in  Troops 
about  the  few  Rivers  that  are  found.  And  hence  it  is  that 
so  many  strangely  shaped  Beasts  are  there  produced,  for  the 
Males,  either  by  Force  or  through  Wantonness,  mix  with 
the  Females  of  various  Kinds.  From  hence  also  proceeds 
the  common  Greek  Proverb,  That  Africa  is  continually 
bringing  forth  something  new.1  The  Lion  knoweth  by  Scent 
of  the  Panther  when  the  Lioness  hath  suffered  his  Embrace  ; 
and  with  all  his  might  he  punisheth  her  Adultery.  And 
therefore  she  either  washeth  away  the  Crime  in  a  River, 
or  else  folio weth  the  Lion  at  a  great  Distance.  I  see  it  is  a 
commonly  received  Opinion  that  the  Lioness  bringeth  forth 
Young  but  once,  because  the  Whelps  in  her  Parturition 

killed  by  him  in  Guzerat.  He  stated  that  this  variety  was  distinguished 
from  those  previously  known  by  the  absence  of  a  mane  (that  is,  it  is 
maneless  compared  with  other  lions),  from  the  sides  of  the  neck  and 
shoulders,  the  middle  line  of  the  back  of  the  neck  being  alone  furnished 
with  long  hairs,  which  are  erect,  like  those  of  the  same  situation  in  the 
Cheetah  (Felis  jubatd).  The  under  surface  of  the  neck  has  long  loose 
silky  hairs,  and  there  is  a  tuft  at  the  angle  of  the  anterior  legs.  Besides1 
the  absence  of  the  extensive  mane,  the  tail  is  shorter  than  that  of  ordinary 
lions,  and  is  furnished  at  its  tip  with  a  much  larger  brush  or  tuft.  Capt. 
Smee  thus  characterises  his  maneless  lion : — "  Felis  Leo.  LINN.  var.  Gooj- 
ratensis.  Mane  of  the  male  short,  erect ;  tuft  at  the  apex  of  the  tail  very 
large,  black."  See  "  Zool.  Proc."  1833 ;  also  "  Zool.  Trans."  vol.  i.  where 
an  excellent  figure  is  given  ;  and  "  Penny  Cyclopaedia,"  art.  Lion. —  Wern. 
Club. 

1  Many  animals  possess  a  figure  so  closely  resembling  more  than  one 
of  another  kind  or  family,  that  we  cannot  wonder  if  the  ancients,  with 
their  slender  knowledge  of  nature,  thought  they  really  were  a  mixed  breed, 
and  that  newly-created  species  were  continually  springing  up.  Thus, 
according  to  Pliny's  theory,  the  Camelopardalis,  or  Giraffe  was  the  off- 
spring of  the  Camel  and  Panther ;  the  Leopard,  of  the  latter  animal  and 
the  Lion ;  and  the  Harte-beest  (Antelope  bubalus)  of  the  Antelope  and 
Buffalo.  But  modern  experience  has  shewn  the  fallacy  of  this  opinion  ; 
and  we  now  know  that  if  a  hybrid  be  sometimes  produced,  there  the 
power  of  propagation  ceases.  There  is  no  proof  or  probability  that  any 
permanent  race  has  risen  into  existence  since  first  individual  creation  pro- 
ceeded from  the  hand  of  its  Maker ;  and  in  a  wild  condition  it  is  ques- 
tionable whether  even  a  mongrel  individual  has  been  ever  produced, 
although  this  has  sometimes  happened  in  captivity. —  Wern.  Club. 


24  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

tear  her  Belly  with  their  Claws  for  their  exit.  Aristotle 
writeth  otherwise:  a  Man  whom  I  cannot  name  but  with 
great  Honour,  and  whom  in  these  matters  I  mean  for  the 
most  part  to  follow.  King  Alexander  the  Great,  having  an 
ardent  desire  to  know  the  Nature  of  all  living  Creatures, 
assigned  this  Charge  to  Aristotle,  a  Man  accomplished  in  all 
kind  of  Science  and  Learning,  and  to  this  effect  commanded 
some  Thousands  of  Men  through  all  the  Extent  of  Asia  and 
Greece  to  give  their  Attendance,  including  all  Hunters, 
Fowlers,  and  Fishers,  that  lived  by  those  Professions.  Also 
all  Foresters,  Park-keepers,  and  Warreners  ;  all  such  as 
had  the  keeping  of  Herds  and  Flocks  ;  of  Bee- hives,  Fish- 
ponds, and  Fowls,  so  that  he  should  not  be  ignorant  of  any- 
thing in  any  Nation.1  By  his  Conference  with  them  he  com- 
piled almost  fifty  excellent  Books,  "  De  Animalibus,"  (of 
Living  Creatures).  Which  being  collected  by  me  in  a  nar- 
row Room,  with  the  addition  of  some  Things  which  he  never 
knew,  I  beseech  the  Readers  to  take  in  good  part ;  and  for 
the  Knowledge  of  all  Nature's  Works,  which  that  most  noble 
of  all  Kings  desired  so  earnestly,  to  make  a  short  Excursion 
under  my  care.  That  Philosopher  reporteth  that  the  Lioness 
at  her  first  Litter  bringeth  forth  five  Whelps,  and  every  Year 
after  fewer  by  one ;  and  when  she  bringeth  but  one  she  be- 
cometh  Barren.  Her  Whelps  at  the  first  are  without  Shape 
and  very  Small,  like  Lumps  of  Flesh,  no  bigger  than  Weasels. 
When  they  are  six  Months  old  they  can  hardly  go,  and  for 
the  two  first  they  cannot  move.  There  are  also  Lions  in 
Europe,2  but  only  between  the  Rivers  Achelous  and  Nestus, 

1  Aristotle  is  by  far  the  most  illustrious  naturalist  of  antiquity,  and 
he  will  not  suffer  by  comparison  with  the  moderns.  His  great  work, 
written  under  such  favourable  circumstances,  continues  to  this  day,  and 
is  remarkable  for  that  in  which  other  ancient  writers  are  exceedingly 
deficient,  a  philosophical  digest  of  his  subject.—  Wern.  Club. 

5  Lions  are  at  present  confined  to  Asia  and  Africa,  but  that  they  were 
once  found  in  Europe  there  can  be  no  doubt.  Thus  it  is  recorded  by 
Herodotus  ("Polym."  vii.  124)  that  the  baggage  camels  of  the  army  of 
Xerxes  were  attacked  by  lions  in  the  territory  of  Paeonia  and  Crestonia, 
in  Thracia.  The  same  authority,  as  well  as  that  of  Aristotle  ("  Hist. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  25 

and  these  are  much  Stronger  than  those  of  Africa  or  Syria. 
Lions  are  of  two  Kinds,  the  one  Short  and  Compact,  with 
Manes  more  Curled  ;  but  these  are  more  numerous  than 
those  which  have  long  and  plain  Hair,  for  the  latter  despise 
Wounds.  The  Males  lift  up  the  Leg  when  they  micturate,  as 
Dogs  do;  they  have  a  strong  Breath,  and  their  Bodies  also 
Smell  rank.  They  Drink  seldom,  and  Eat  but  on  alternate 
Days ;  and  if  they  Feed  till  they  are  Full  they  abstain  from 
Meat  for  three  Days.  In  their  Feeding  whatever  they  can 
Swallow  without  Chewing  goes  down  whole  ;  and  if  they  find 
their  Belly  not  able  to  receive  their  Greediness,  they  thrust 
their  Claws  into  their  Throats  to  drag  it  out  again,  that  if 
they  are  compelled  to  fly  they  may  not  go  away  in  their  Ful- 
ness. That  they  Live  very  long1  is  proved  by  this  Argument, 
that  many  of  them  are  found  Toothless.  Polybius,  who 
accompanied  (Scipio)  JEmilianus,  reporteth  that  when  they 
are  grown  Aged  they  will  prey  upon  a  Man,  because  their 
Strength  will  not  hold  out  to  pursue  Wild  Beasts.  Then 
they  lie  in  wait  about  the  Cities  of  Africa  ;  and  for  that  cause 
while  he  was  with  Scipio  he  saw  some  of  them  Crucified, 
that  other  Lions  might  be  scared  from  doing  the  like  Mis- 
chief by  fear  of  the  same  Punishment.  The  Lion  alone  of 
all  Wild  Beasts  is  gentle  to  those  that  humble  themselves  to 
him ;  he  spareth  those  that  lie  Prostrate ;  and  when  he  is 
furious  he  dischargeth  his  Rage  upon  Men  before  he  setteth 
upon  Women,  and  never  preyeth  upon  Babes  unless  it  be  for 
extreme  Hunger.  It  is  believed  in  Libya  that  they  have  an 
Understanding  of  Prayers  addressed  to  them.  I  have  heard 
as  a  fact  of  a  Captive  Woman  of  Gaetulia,  who  was  brought 
back  again  to  her  Master,  that  she  had  pacified  the  Violence 

Anim."  vi.  31 ;  and  viii.  33),  from  whom  Pliny  seems  to  have  copied, 
inform  us  that  they  abounded  in  that  part  of  Europe  which  is  between 
the  Achelous  and  Nessus.  Nor  is  Europe  the  only  part  of  the  world 
from  which  the  lion  has  disappeared ;  for  it  is  no  longer  to  be  found  in 
Egypt,  Palestine,  or  Syria,  where  it  once  was  evidently  far  from  uncom- 
mon, as  we  know  from  the  frequent  allusions  to  it  in  the  Holy  Scriptures. 
—  Wern.Club. 

1  Aristotle,  "  Hist.  Anim."  ix.  69.—  Went.  Club. 


26  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  VIII. 

of  many  Lions  in  the  Woods  by  her  Speech,  having  ventured 
to  say  that  she  was  a  Woman,  a  banished  one,  Feeble,  a 
Suppliant  to  the  noblest  of  all  other  living  Creatures,  the 
Commander  of  all  the  rest,  and  unworthy  that  his  Glory 
should  prey  upon  her.  The  Opinions  concerning  these  things 
are  various,  according  to  the  Bias  of  each  Person,  or  the 
Occurrences  that  have  happened  to  him.  Whether  Savage 
Beasts  are  appeased  by  kind  Words,  the  more  especially 
as  also  whether  Serpents  may  be  fetched  out  of  their  Holes1 
by  Song,  and  kept  under  for  Punishment,  is  true  or  no,  Ex- 
perience hath  not  yet  determined.  The  Tail2  is  an  Index  to 

1  See  the  account  of  the  Psylli,  book  vii.  chap.  2.—  Wern.  Club. 

3  It  was  a  common  opinion  among  the  ancients  that  the  lion  lashes  his 
sides  with  his  tail  to  stimulate  himself  into  rage  ;  hence  Pliny  calls  the 
tail  the  index  of  the  lion's  mind.  But  they  do  not  seem  to  have  adverted 
to  any  peculiarity  in  that  member,  to  which  so  extraordinary  a  function 
might,  however  incorrectly,  be  attributed.  Didymus  Alexandrinus  ap- 
pears to  have  been  the  first  person  who,  entertaining  this  fancy,  noticed  a 
prickle  at  the  end  of  the  tail,  in  his  comment  on  the  twentieth  book  of  the 
Iliad,  where  the  lion's  rage  is  mentioned, — 

"  Such  the  lion's  rage, 

***** 

Lash'd  by  his  tail  his  heaving  sides  resound  ; 
He  calls  up  all  his  rage." 

"  The  lion,"  he  says,  "  has  a  black  prickle  on  his  tail,  like  a  horn ;  when 
punctured  with  which  he  is  still  more  irritated  by  the  pain."  This 
prickle  was  by  many  long  looked  upon  as  a  mere  fiction,  till  the  matter 
was  put  beyond  a  doubt,  some  years  since,  by  Professor  Blumenbach, 
who  upon  dissection  discovered  on  the  very  tip  of  the  tail  of  a  lioness  a 
small  dark-coloured  spine,  as  hard  as  a  piece  of  horn,  and  surrounded  at 
its  base  with  an  annular  fold  of  skin.  It  is,  however,  only  occasionally 
found ;  nor  is  it  confined  to  the  lion,  for  it  has  been  discovered  in  the 
Asiatic  leopard.  Mr.  Wood  ("  Zool.  Proc."  1832)  remarks  that  it  is  dif- 
ficult to  conjecture  the  use  of  these  prickles,  their  application  as  a  stimulus 
to  anger  being  of  course  out  of  the  question  ;  but  he  observes  that  it  could 
not  be  very  important,  for,  to  say  nothing  of  their  small  size  and  envelope- 
ment  in  the  fur,  the  majority  of  individuals,  in  consequence  of  the  readi- 
ness with  which  the  part  is  detached,  are  deprived  of  it  for  the  remainder 
of  their  lives.  The  writer  of  this  note  has  had  an  opportunity  of  seeing 
and  feeling  the  prickle  in  the  tail  of  a  lion's  cub,  which  was  whelped  in 
Womb  well's  menagerie.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  27 

the  Mind  of  Lions,  as  in  Horses  their  Ears,  for  these  Marks 
Nature  hath  given  to  the  most  noble  Beast ;  and  when  the 
Lion  stirreth  not  his  Tail  he  is  quiet  and  gentle,  as  if  he  were 
willing  to  be  played  with;  but  he  is  seldom  so,  for  he  is  more 
frequently  angry.  In  the  Beginning  of  his  Anger  he  beateth 
the  Ground,  when  it  increaseth  he  beateth  his  Sides  and 
Back  as  if  to  whip  himself  with  something  that  would  stir 
up  his  Fury.  His  main  Strength  lieth  in  his  Breast ;  from 
every  Wound,  whether  made  by  his  Claw  or  Tooth,  the 
Blood  that  floweth  is  Black.  When  their  Belly  is  full  they 
become  harmless.  His  Magnanimity  is  chiefly  shewn  in 
Dangers ;  not  only  in  that  he  despiseth  the  Darts,  but  also 
that  he  defendeth  himself  by  his  Terror  only,  and  as  if  bear- 
ing witness  that  he  is  forced  to  his  own  Defence,  he  riseth  up 
in  Fury,  not  as  at  last  compelled  by  the  Peril,  but  as  made 
angry  by  their  Folly.  But  this  more  noble  Display  of  Courage 
is  shewn  in  that,  however  great  may  be  the  Strength  of 
Hounds  and  Hunters,  while  in  the  open  Plains  and  where 
he  may  be  seen,  he  retireth  only  by  degrees  and  with  Scorn  ; 
but  when  he  hath  got  among  the  Thickets  and  Woods  then 
he  hurrieth  away,  as  if  the  Place  concealed  his  Shame. 
When  he  followeth  he  leapeth  with  a  Bound,  which  he  never 
useth  to  do  in  Flight.  If  wounded  he  hath  a  remarkable 
Quickness  of  Observation  to  discern  the  Person  who  smote 
him,  and  amidst  a  Multitude  he  runneth  upon  him  only.  As 
for  the  Man  who  hath  thrown  a  Dart  at  him  without  wound- 
ing him,  he  striketh  him  down,  and  seizeth  and  shaketh  him, 
but  doth  not  wound  him.  When  the  Female  fighteth  for  her 
Whelps,  it  is  said  that  she  fixeth  her  Gaze  upon  the  Ground, 
that  she  may  not  be  affrighted  at  the  Sight  of  the  hunting 
Weapons.  For  the  rest,  they  are  destitute  of  Craft  and  Sus- 
picion ;  they  never  look  aslant,  and  they  love  not  to  be 
looked  at  in  that  manner.  It  is  believed  that  when  they  are 
dying  they  bite  the  Earth,  and  in  their  Death  shed  Tears. 
This  Animal,  so  fierce  as  he  is,  is  made  afraid  with  the 
running  round  of  Cart-wheels,  or  empty  Chariots;  he  is  ter- 
rified with  the  Cock's  Comb,  and  much  more  with  his  Crow- 
ing, but  most  of  all  with  the  Sight  of  Fire.  The  Lion  is 


28  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  V11I. 

never  Sick  but  of  Loathing  ;  and  then  the  way  to  cure  him 
is  to  tie  to  him  She  Apes,  which  with  their  wanton  mocking 
drive  him  to  Madness,  and  then  when  he  hath  tasted  their 
Blood  it  acts  as  a  Remedy.  Q.  Sccevola,  the  Son  of  Publius, 
was  the  first  at  Rome  that,  in  his  Curule  .ZEdileship,  exhibited 
a  Fight  of  many  Lions  together;  but  L.  Sylla,  who  after- 
wards was  Dictator,  was  the  first  of  all  that  in  his  Praetor- 
ship  exhibited  an  hundred  maned  Lions.  After  him  Pompey 
the  Great  shewed  600  of  them  in  the  Circus,  and  among 
them  were  315  with  Manes.  Ccesar>  the  Dictator,  exhibited 
400.  The  taking  of  them  formerly  was  a  hard  piece  of 
Work,  and  was  commonly  in  Pit-falls ;  but  in  the  Reign  of 
Claudius  a  Shepherd  of  Gsetulia  taught  the  manner  of  catch- 
ing them,  a  thing  to  be  regarded  as  almost  unbeseeming  the 
Name  of  such  a  Beast.  This  Gaetulian,  when  a  Lion  violently 
assailed  him,  threw  his  Military  Cloak  over  his  Eyes.  This 
remarkable  thing  was  soon  after  practised  in  the  Arena ;  so 
that  a  Man  would  hardly  have  believed  that  so  much  Fierce- 
ness should  so  easily  be  rendered  inert  by  this  slight  covering 
thrown  on  the  Head,  the  Creature  making  no  resistance,  but 
suffering  himself  to  be  bound  fast,  as  if  all  his  Vigour  rested 
in  his  Eyes.  The  less  therefore  is  it  to  be  wondered  at  that 
Lysimachus  strangled  a  Lion,1  when  by  Command  of  Alex- 
ander he  was  shut  up  alone  together  with  him.  The  first 
who  subdued  them  to  the  Yoke  at  Rome,  and  joined  them  to 
his  Chariot,  was  M.  Antony.  And  truly  it  was  in  the  Civil 
War,  when  the  Battle  was  still  in  Contest  in  the  Plains  of 
Pharsalia :  not  without  some  foretoken  of  the  times,  which 
by  that  Prodigy  gave  them  to  understand  that  Men  of  a 
high  Spirit  should  come  under  the  Yoke  of  Subjection ;  for 
that  Antony  was  carried  in  this  manner,  with  the  Comic 

1  Plutarch,  in  the  "  Life  of  Demetrius,"  informs  us  that  "  Demetrius 
having  sent  ambassadors  to  Lysimachus  on  some  occasion  or  other,  that 
prince  amused  himself  one  day  with  shewing  them  the  deep  wounds  he 
had  received  from  a  lion's  claws  in  his  arms  and  thighs,  and  gave  them  an 
account  of  his  being  shut  up  with  that  wild  beast  by  Alexander  the 
Great,  and  of  the  battle  he  had  with  it."  Pausanias,  Seneca,  and  Justin, 
mention  this  story  ;  but  Q.  Curtius  doubts  the  truth  of  it.—Wern.  Clul. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  29 

Actress  Cytheris,  was  beyond  the  monstrous  Spectacles  of 
even  those  calamitous  times.  It  is  reported  that  Hanno, 
one  of  the  noblest  of  the  Carthaginians,  was  the  first  Man 
that  ventured  to  manage  a  Lion  with  his  Hand,  and  to  shew 
him  as  being  rendered  Submissive.  But  he  was  condemned 
on  account  of  this  very  Circumstance,  for  it  appeared  to  them 
that  a  Man  of  such  artful  Ingenuity  would  be  able  to  per- 
suade to  anything ;  and  that  it  was  dangerous  to  trust  their 
Liberty  to  him,  to  whom  even  Fierceness  itself  had  so  re- 
markably yielded.  But  there  are  also  casual  Examples  of 
their  Clemency.  Mentor,  the  Syracusan,  met  with  a  Lion 
in  Syria,  which  after  an  humble  manner  rolled  himself  in 
the  Way  before  him  ;  and  being  astonished  with  Fear,  when 
he  sought  to  escape  in  every  way  the  Wild  Beast  placed  him- 
self across  his  Path,  and  licked  his  Footsteps  in  a  flattering 
manner.  Mentor  then  observed  that  the  Lion  had  a  Swelling 
and  Wound  in  his  Foot,  whereupon  he  gently  plucked  out 
the  Splinters  of  Wood,  and  so  eased  the  Beast  of  his  Pain.1 
This  Fact  is  for  a  Memorial  represented  in  a  Picture  at  Syra- 
cuse. In  a  similar  Manner  Elpis,  a  Samian  by  Nation,  being 
conveyed  to  Africa  in  a  Ship,  and  having  discovered  near  the 
Shore  a  Lion  having  a  threatening  Gape,  he  fled  quickly  to  a 
Tree,  and  called  upon  Father  Liber;  for  then  is  the  principal 
Time  for  Prayer,  when  we  see  no  other  Hope.  But  the  Lion 
stopped  him  not  in  his  Flight,  although  it  was  in  his  Power; 
and  laying  himself  down  close  to  the  Tree,  with  that  open 
Mouth  with  which  he  had  terrified  the  Man,  he  sought  his 
Compassion.  Now  the  Beast  having  lately  fed  greedily,  had 
gotten  a  Bone  stuck  fast  within  his  Teeth,  which  put  him  to 
great  Pain ;  also,  he  was  almost  famished  ;  and  he  looked 
up  pitifully,  shewing  how  he  was  punished  with  those  very 
Weapons  of  his,  and,  as  if  with  dumb  Prayers,  besought  his 
Help.  Eipis,  on  the  other  Hand,  not  being  very  forward  to 
commit  himself  to  the  Wild  Beast,  stayed  the  longer,  while 
he  considered  rather  this  miraculous  Accident  than  other- 

1  The  reader  will  here  be  reminded  of  the  well-known  story  of  An- 
drocles,  or  Androdus,  and  the  lion,  told  by  Aulus  Gellius  and  JElian. — 
Wern.  Club. 


30  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

wise  greatly  feared.  At  the  last  he  came  down  from  the 
Tree  and  plucked  out  the  Bone,  while  the  Lion  held  his 
Mouth  open,  and  composed  himself  to  his  Conveniency  :  in 
recompense  of  which  Service,  it  is  said,  that  so  long  as  this 
Ship  lay  on  that  Coast,  the  Lion  furnished  him  with  a  good 
Quantity  of  Food  by  Hunting.  And  on  this  account  Elpis 
dedicated  a  Temple  in  Samos  to  Liber  Pater;  which  from 
this  Circumstance  the  Greeks  called  jt.s^v6rog  A/ovutfou  (of 
Gaping  Dionysius}.'1  Can  we  feel  surprised  after  this,  that 
Wild  Beasts  should  know  the  Footsteps  of  Men,2  when  even 
they  have  recourse  to  him  alone  for  Hope  of  Succour?  And 
why  did  they  not  go  to  other  Creatures?  or  who  taught 
them  that  the  Hand  of  Man  was  ahle  to  cure  them  ?  unless 
this  be  the  Reason,  that  perhaps  the  Power  of  many  Evils 
forceth  even  savage  Beasts  to  seek  out  all  means  of  Help. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Of  Panthers. 

DEMETRIUS  the  Natural  Philosopher  also  maketh 
mention  of  as  memorable  a  Case  as  the  former,  concerning  a 
Panther;  which  was  desirous  to  meet  with  a  Man,  and 
therefore  lay  in  the  Middle  of  an  Highway,  and  suddenly 
appeared  to  the  Father  of  a  certain  Philinus,  a  Student  of 
Philosophy.  The  Man,  through  Fear,  began  to  go  back 
again,  but  the  Wild  Beast  kept  rolling  itself  about  him,  very 
plainly  fawning  upon  him,  and  tossing  itself  so  piteously, 


1  Holland  has  chosen  to  add,  "  or  ^ar^os  vuov  AIOVVO-OV,  the  Chapel  of 
Dionysius  the  Saviour  ;"  not  because  there  are  such  words  in  the  text, 
but  because  Gesner,  whose  edition  of  Pliny  he  appears  to  have  used,  not 
understanding  the  purport  of  Pliny's  words,  has  proposed  to  substitute 
the  latter,  which  he  supposed  to  be  a  more  intelligible  reading.    But  in 
no  MS.  of  Pliny  is  any  support  afforded  to  this  criticism  of  Gesner  ;  and 
the  conclusion  of  ch.  xlviii.  b.  7,  of  ^Elian,  is  a  sufficient  proof  of  the  accu- 
racy of  the  present  text,  —  as  the  story  there  given  is  an  explanation  of  its 
meaning.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Pliny  had  before  remarked  (Book  viii.  chap.  5),  that  the  elephant 
could  recognise  the  footstep  of  a  man.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  31 

that  its  Grief  might  be  seen  even  in  a  Panther.  She  had  but 
lately  produced  Young,  and  her  Whelps  were  fallen  into  a 
Pit  at  a  Distance  off.  The  first  Point  of  Pity  that  the  Man 
shewed  was  not  to  be  afraid ;  and  the  next,  to  direct  his 
Regard  to  her ;  and  so  following  her  in  the  Way  whither  she 
drew  him  by  his  Garment,  which  she  gently  held  with  her 
Claws,  as  he  understood  the  Occasion  of  her  Sorrow,  and  the 
Reward  of  his  Courtesy,  he  drew  forth  her  little  ones  ;  which 
done,  she  and  her  Whelps,  leaping  for  Joy,  accompanied  him, 
and  directed  him  all  the  Way  to  beyond  the  Wilderness. 
So  that  it  easily  could  be  discerned  that  she  was  thankful 
to  him,  and  that  they  mutually  acknowledged  each  other: 
a  rare  Example  to  be  found  even  amongst  Men.  This  Story 
gives  great  Credit  to  that  which  Democritus  reporteth :  That 
Thoas,  in  Arcadia,  was  preserved  by  a  Dragon.  This  Thoas, 
when  a  Child,  had  loved  this  Dragon  exceedingly  well,  and 
nourished  him ;  but  being  in  some  dread  of  the  Serpent's 
Nature,  and  fearing  his  Magnitude,  he  had  carried  him  into 
the  Deserts ;  wherein  being  environed  by  the  Stratagems  of 
Thieves,  when  he  cried  out,  the  Dragon,  knowing  his  voice, 
came  forth  and  rescued  him.  As  for  the  Things  reported 
concerning  Infants  cast  forth  to  perish,  and  sustained  by  the 
Milk  of  Wild  Beasts,  like  Romulus  and  Remus,  our  Founders, 
by  a  She-Wolf,  in  my  Opinion  they  are  to  be  attributed  more 
to  the  Greatness  of  their  Destinies  than  to  the  Nature  of  those 
Wild  Beasts.  Panthers  and  Tigers  are  almost  the  only  Beasts 
seen  with  a  Variety  of  Spots ;  for  other  Beasts  have  each  one 
a  proper  Colour  of  their  own,  according  to  their  Kind.  A 
black  Kind  of  Lion  is  found  in  Syria  only.  The  Ground  of 
the  Panther's  Skin  is  White,1  with  little  black  Spots  like 

1  There  seems  much  uncertainty  and  confusion  in  Pliny's  description 
of  the  Panther  and  Leopard,  which,  probably,  he  means  by  the  terms 
Panthera  and  Pardvs ;  indeed,  modern  naturalists  are  not  at  all  agreed  as 
to  the  best  mode  of  distinguishing  these  animals.  Cuvier  considers  the 
v  vK$K*.ts  of  the  ancients  to  be  the  modern  Panther  (Felis  Pardus. — LINN.). 
He  does  not  notice  the  Panther,  o  vnvfa*  of  Aristotle,  "  Hist.  Anim."  vi.  35  ; 
and,  indeed,  this  animal  is  supposed  by  many  not  to  be  of  the  leopard 
kind.  —  Wcrn.  Club. 


32  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  VII  t. 

Eyes.  It  is  said  that  all  Quadrupeds  are  wonderfully  enticed 
by  the  Smell  of  Panthers ;  but  their  Sternness  of  Counte- 
nance carrieth  Terror  with  it,  and  therefore  they  hide  their 
Heads,  and  when  they  have  attracted  other  Beasts  within 
reach  by  their  sweet  Smell,  they  fly  upon  and  seize  them. 
Some  report  that  they  have  a  Mark  on  their  Shoulder  resem- 
bling the  Moon,  growing  to  the  full  and  decreasing  into 
Horns  as  she  doth.  In  all  this  Race  of  Wild  Beasts,  now  they 
call  the  Males  Varise  and  Pardi ;  and  there  is  great  Abun- 
dance of  them  in  Africa  and  Syria.  Some  distinguish  be- 
tween Leopards  and  Panthers,  by  the  Panthers  being  white ; 
and  as  yet  I  know  no  other  Difference  between  them.  There 
was  an  old  Act  of  the  Senate,  forbidding  that  any  Panthers 
of  Africa  should  be  brought  into  Italy.  Against  this  Edict, 
Cn.  Aufidius,  a  Tribune  of  the  People,  produced  a  Bill  to  the 
People,  which  permitted,  that  for  the  sake  of  the  Circensian 
Games,  they  might  be  brought  over.  Scaurus  was  the  first 
who  in  his  ^Edileship  exhibited  of  different  Sorts  150(Variae) 
in  all.  After  him,  Pompey  the  Great  brought  out  410 ;  Divus 
Augustus,  420;  who  also  in  the  Year  that  Q.  Tubero  and 
Fabius  Maximus  were  Consuls,  on  the  fourth  Day  before  the 
Nones  of  May,  at  the  Dedication  of  the  Theatre  ofMarcellus, 
was  the  first  of  all  those  that  shewed  at  Rome  a  tame  Tiger 
in  a  Cage ;  but  .Divus  Claudius  shewed  four  at  once. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Of  the  Nature  of  the  Tiger :  of  Camels,  of  the  Camelopard, 
and  when  it  was  first  seen  at  Rome. 

TIGERS  are  produced  in  Hyrcania1  and  India.  This 
Animal  is  dreadful  for  Swiftness,  and  most  of  all  this  is  seen 
when  it  is  taken  :  for  her  Litter,  of  which  there  is  always  a 

1  Fells  Tigris. — LINN.  The  Royal  Tiger.  Some  have  supposed  that 
this  species  was  but  little  known  to  the  ancients ;  but  we  think  with  no 
sufficient  grounds.  The  numerous  passages  in  which  the  word  tigris 
occurs  in  Greek  and  Latin  authors,  leave  little  room  for  doubting  their 
knowledge  of  the  animal ;  and  Hyrcania,  with  which  it  is  so  frequently 
associated  by  the  latter,  is  a  locality  well  suited  to  what  we  know  of  its 


BOOK  VIII.] 


History  of  Nature. 


33 


great  Number,  by  one  that  lieth  in  wait,  is  snatched  away 
upon  a  very  swift  Horse ;  and  they  are  shifted  at  Intervals 
from  one  fresh  Horse  to  another.  But  when  the  Tigress  finds 
her  Den  empty  (for  the  male  Tiger  hath  no  Care  of  the  Young), 
she  runneth  headlong  after  her  young  Ones,  following  the 
Tracks  by  their  Scent.  The  Man  who  hath  seized  them, 
perceiving  the  Tigress  approaching  by  the  Noise  she  maketh, 
throws  down  one  of  her  Whelps;  up  she  taketh  it  in  her 


From  the  Pavement  of  the  Temple  of  Fortune  at  Palestrina.    Montf.  torn.  iv.  pi.  60. 

Mouth,  and  back  she  runneth  towards  her  Den,  the  swifter 
for  the  Burden  that  she  carryeth ;  and  presently  again  she 
followeth  the  Pursuit,  and  so  forward  and  back  until  they 
are  embarked  in  the  Boat,  and  then  she  rageth  with  Fury  on 
the  Shore. 

Camels  are  pastured  in  the  East  among  other  Cattle. 
There  are  two  Kinds  of  them,  the  Bactrian  and  the  Arabian  ; 
which  differ  in  that  the  Bactrian  Camels  have  two  Hunches 
on  their  Backs,1  and  the  other  only  one  ;2  but  they  have  an- 

geographical  distribution.  See  the  article  Tigers,  in  the  "  Penny  Cyclo- 
paedia," where  the  subject  is  fully  treated,  and  numerous  passages  from 
the  Classics  adduced  in  proof  of  the  acquaiutance  of  the  ancients  with  this 
animal.—  Wern.  Club. 

1  Camelus  Bactrianus. — LINN.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Camelus  Dromedarius. — LINN.     The  Arabian  Camel.  —  Wern.  Club. 

VOL.  III.  D 


34  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

other  on  their  Breast,  whereon  they  rest  when  they  lie  down. 
Both  sorts  are  without  the  upper  Row  of  Teeth,  like  Oxen. 
In  those  Countries  they  all  serve  to  carry  Burdens  like 
labouring  Horses ;  and  they  are  even  rode  like  Horses  in 
Battles.  Their  Swiftness  is  comparable  to  that  of  Horses ; 
but  they  differ  one  from  another  in  this,  as  they  do  also  in 
Strength.  The  Camel  in  his  Travelling  will  not  go  further 
than  his  ordinary  Journey,  neither  will  he  carry  more  than 
his  accustomed  Load.  Naturally  they  hate  Horses.1  They 
can  sustain  Thirst  for  four  Days  together;  and  when  they 
find  Occasion  to  drink,  they  fill  themselves  full  enough  to 
serve  both  for  the  Past  and  Future ;  but  before  they  drink, 
they  trample  with  their  Feet  to  trouble  the  Water,  for  other- 
wise they  take  no  Pleasure  in  drinking.  They  live  for  fifty 
Years,  and  some  of  them  an  hundred.  These  Creatures,  also, 
as  it  were,  fall  to  be  mad.  Also  a  Method  hath  been  disco- 
vered of  castrating  the  very  Females,  to  make  them  service- 
able in  War  ;  for  if  the  sexual  Disposition  be  denied  to  them, 
they  become  stronger. 

There  are  two  other  Kinds  of  Beasts2  which  resemble  in 


1  In  a  state  of  nature  this  appears  to  be  the  case ;  while  at  Smyrna, 
and  other  parts  of  Asia,  the  horse  and  camel  are  constantly  seen,  each 
occupied  in  its  respective  labours,  in  friendly  harmony  ;  this  may,  indeed, 
be  only  the  effect  of  hereditary  habit,  the  animals  having  been  so  long 
accustomed  to  each  other;  for  at  Pisa,  where  the  camel  has  been  intro- 
duced not  much  more  than  two  centuries,  we  are  informed  by  Professor 
Santi,  that  it  is  necessary  to  accustom  the  horses  of  the  neighbourhood  to 
the  sight  of  the  camel,  as  without  such  precaution   constant  accidents 
would  occur.    And  Herodotus  relates  (Clio,  80),  that  when  Cyrus  met 
the  Lydian  army,  commanded  by  Croesus,  fearing  the   cavalry  of  his 
enemy,  he  unloaded  the  baggage  camels,  and  placed  soldiers  upon  them, 
with  orders  to  march  against  the  enemy's  cavalry ;  this  he  did,  as  Hero- 
dotus says,  because  "  the  horse  has  a  dread  of  the  camel,  and  cannot  bear 
either  to  see  the  form,  or  to  smell  the  scent  of  him."     And  the  stratagem 
of  Cyrus  succeeded,  for  the  horses  no  sooner  saw  and  smelt  the  camels, 
than  they  turned  back,  and  the  hopes  of  Croesus  were  destroyed.— Wern. 
Club. 

2  Pliny,  in  the  original,  implies  that  there  are  two  other  kinds  of 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  35 

some  sort  the  Camel :  one  of  them  is  called  by  the  Ethiopians, 
the  Nabis ;  with  a  Neck  like  a  Horse,  and  the  Leg  and  Foot 
like  the  Ox ;  the  Head  resembles  that  of  a  Camel,  and  it  is 
marked  with  white  Spots  upon  a  red  Ground,  from  which  it 
taketh  the  Name  of  Camelopardalis  ; 1  and  the  first  Time  it 
was  seen  at  Rome  was  in  the  Games  of  the  Circus  given  by 
Ccesar  the  Dictator;  since  which  Time  it  is  sometimes  seen, 
being  more  remarkable  for  the  Sight  than  for  any  wild  Nature 
that  it  hath  ;  on  which  Account  some  have  given  it  the  Name 
of  the  Wild  Sheep. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Of  the  Chaus  and  Cephus. 

THE  Chaus,2  which  the  Gauls  called  Rhaphius,  having 
the  Shape  of  a  Wolf  with  Leopard's  Spots,  was  shewed  first 
in  the  Plays  exhibited  by  Pompey  the  Great.  He  also  brought 
out  of  Ethiopia  the  Animals  named  Cephi,3  whose  fore  Feet 

animal  which  resembles  the  camel  in  name,  that  is,  the  camelopardalis, 
and  the  struthiocamelus,  or  ostrich.  —  Wern.  Club. 

1  The  giraffe  was  certainly  well  known  to  the  ancients  long  before 
the  time  of  Julius  Ca3sar,  when,  as  Pliny  says,  it  first  appeared  in  Italy. 
It  occurs,  though  rarely,  in  the  Egyptian  hieroglyphics,  and  is  mentioned 
by  Agatharchidas,  a  Greek  writer,  who  flourished  about  150  B.C.  In  his 
description  of  the  animal,  Pliny  appears  to  have  taken  the  darker  parts  of 
the  skin  as  forming  the  ground  colour,  which  is  relieved  by  the  lighter 
tints.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Felts  Lynx. — LINN.  The  European  Lynx. — This  animal  is  again 
mentioned,  Lib.  viii.  c.  22,  where  it  is  called  the  Lupus  Cervarius,  or 
Stag- Wolf ;  and  Dr.  Fischer  supposes  it  also  to  be  the  lynx  mentioned, 
Lib.  xi.  ch.  46.  It  is  probable  that  Pliny  has  confounded  together  this 
and  the  Marsh- Lynx,  FeUs  Chaus,  CUVIER. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Cercopithecus  Ruber,  of  Authors.  The  Patas,  or  Nismas. — ^Elian, 
"  Hist.  Anim."  xvii.  8,  on  the  authority  of  Pythagoras,  describes  the 
Cephi  as  inhabiting  the  country  bordering  on  the  Red  Sea.  They  are 
vsaid  to  have  been  called  xJJwa/,  that  is,  gardens,  from  the  various  colours 
for  which  they  are  distinguished.  The  Patas  being  one  of  the  most  beau- 
tiful of  the  monkey  tribe,  the  author  of  the  volume  on  monkeys  in  the 


36  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

were  like  Men's  Hands,  and  the  hind  Feet  and  Legs  re- 
sembled those  of  a  Man.  This  Creature  was  never  seen 
afterwards  at  Rome. 

CHAPTER  XX. 
Of  the  Rhinoceros.1 

IN  the  same  Plays  of  Pompey,  and  many  Times  beside 
was  shewed  a  Rhinoceros,  with  a  single  Horn  on  his  Snout. 
This  is  a  second  begotten  Enemy  to  the  Elephant.2  He  fileth 
this  Horn  against  hard  Stones,  and  so  prepareth  himself  to 
fight ;  and  in  his  Conflict  he  aimeth  principally  at  the  Belly, 
which  he  knoweth  to  be  the  tenderest  Part.  He  is  full  as 
long  as  his  enemy ;  his  Legs  much  shorter ;  his  Colour  a 
palish  Yellow. 

"  Library  of  Entertaining  Knowledge,"  thinks  there  is  no  doubt  of  its 
being  the  Cephus  here  mentioned.  "  It  is  seldom,  indeed,"  he  says,  "  that 
we  are  able  to  identify  an  animal  so  satisfactorily  with  the  ancient  descrip- 
tion." The  Cephus  of  Pliny  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  Cebus  of 
Aristotle,  which  is  the  Papis  Gelada. — Wern.  Club. 

1  Rhinoceros  Indicus. — Cuv.  The  Indian  Rhinoceros.  It  has  been 
asserted  by  Bruce  and  Salt  that  the  Indian  or  one-horned  Rhinoceros 
has  never  been  found  in  Africa ;  from  whence,  since  it  was  led  in  the 
triumph  of  Pompey,  it  was  implied  that  this  animal  was  brought.  But 
in  confirmation  of  the  above  inference,  Dio  Cassius  states,  though  indi- 
rectly, that  Augustus,  in  the  celebration  of  his  triumph  over  Cleopatra, 
gave  a  one-horned  rhinoceros  to  be  slain  in  the  circus.  And  Strabo  de- 
scribes another  which  he  saw  at  Alexandria ;  while  Burckhardt  says  ex- 
pressly, that  it  is  the  one-horned  rhinoceros  that  is  found  in  the  country 
above  Sennaar.  —  Wern.  Club. 

9  The  first  is  the  Dragon,  mentioned  Lib.  viii.  c.  12.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.] 


History  of  Nature. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

Of  Lynxes  and  Sphinges;  ofCro- 
cutce,  CercopitheccBj  Indian 
Oxen,  JLeucrocutce,  Eale ; 
Ethiopian  Bulls,  the  Manti- 
chora,  Monoceros,  Catoblepa, 
the  Basilisca. 

LYNXES  are  common;1  and 
so  are  Sphinges:2  with  brown- 
ish Hair,  and  two  Breasts  on 
their  Chests  (pectus).  Ethiopia 
produceth  them,  and  many  other 
similar  monstrous  Beasts,  as 
Horses  with  Wings,  and  armed 
with  Horns,  which  they  call 
Pegasi.3  Also  Crocutse,4  which  appear  as  if  begotten  between 


T.  Q.  Couch.    From  Montf.  torn.  iii.  pi.  17 


1  Felis  Caracal. — LINN.  The  Caracal. — Bennet  ("  Tower  Menage- 
ries,") thinks  that  the  Caracal  is  unquestionably  identical  with  the  lynx 
of  the  ancients,  though  the  name  has  been  usurped  in  modern  times  for 
an  animal  of  northern  origin,  utterly  unknown  to  the  Greeks,  and  known 
to  the  Romans  by  a  totally  different  appellation.  But  although  it  is 
generally  agreed  that  the  Caracal  is  the  lynx  of  the  ancients,  it  is  to  be 
observed  that  they  use  the  term  to  denote  various  animals;  and  particu- 
larly in  the  case  of  the  animal  accorded  to  Bacchus  as  one  of  his  attri- 
butes, they  seem  to  have  had  no  precise  idea  respecting  it.  The  terms, 
Lynx,  Panther,  and  Tiger,  seem  to  be  all  employed  to  designate  this 
animal,  or  these  animals.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  The  term  "  Sphinx,"  which  Dr.  Holland  translated  "  Marmozet," 
was  undoubtedly  used  to  designate  some  species  of  Simia,  but  what  sort 
it  does  not  seem  possible  to  determine. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Pliny  has,  on  more  than  one  occasion,  manifested  an  inclination  to 
regard  as  real  the  fabulous  creations  of  the  heathen  mythology.    But 
modern  inquiry  has  failed  to  discover  either  the  Pegasus,  the  Syren,  or 
the  Mantichora,  —  the  latter,  an  imaginary  monster,  mentioned  also  by 
Aristotle  ("Hist.  Anim."   Book  ii.  ch.  11);  by  Pausanias  (Lib.  ix.);  by 
vElian  (c.  iv.  21),  and  by  Ctesias,  "  Apud  Photium."—  Wern.  Club. 

4  Canis  Hycena. — LINN.     The  Striped  Hyaena. — The  most  monstrous 
fables  were  rife  among  the  ancients  respecting  this  animal.   It  would  be  a 
waste  of  time  and  space  to  enumerate  all  the  wonderful  powers  that  were 


38 


History  of  Nature. 


[Bdoic  VIII, 


a  Dog  arid  a  Wolf;  they  crush  every  Thing  with  their 
Teeth  ;  and  a  Thing  is  no  sooner  devoured  but  presently  it  is 
passed  through  the  Body  ;  and  Cercopithecse,1  with  black 
Heads,  and  Hair  like  Asses,  differing  from  other  (Apes)  in 
their  Voice :  also  Indian  Oxen  with 
one  Horn,2  arid  others  with  three. 
Also  the  Leucrocutse,3  a  very  swift 
Beast,  almost  as  big  as  an  Ass,  with 
Legs  like  a  Deer ;  with  a  Neck, 
Tail,  and  Breast  of 
a  Lion,  the  Head  of 


a  Badger,  with  a  clo- 
ven Foot ;  the  Gape 
of  his  Mouth  reach- 
ing to  his  Ears  ;  and 
instead  of  Teeth,  an 
entire  Bone.  They 
report  that  this  Beast 
They  have  among  them,  also, 


From  the  Pavement  of  the  Temple  of  Fortune  at  Palestrina. 
Montf.  torn.  iv.  pi.  60. 


imitateth  the  human  Voice. 


attributed  to  it ;  but  among  other  accomplishments  it  was  said  to  imitate 
the  language  of  men,  in  order  to  draw  to  it  shepherds,  whom  it  devoured 
at  leisure,  and  to  have  the  power  of  charming  dogs,  so  that  they  became 
dumb ;  and  the  early  modern  naturalists  repeat  the  fables  of  the  ancients. 
See  ch.  30,  and  ^Elian,  Book  i.  ch.  25  ;  Book  vi.  ch.  14;  Book  vii.  ch.  22. 
—Wern.  Club. 

1  Cercopithecus  Griseus. — F.  Cuv.     The  Grey  Guenon. — It  has  been 
usual  to  consider  the  term  "  Cercopithecus,"  as  employed  generically  by 
the  ancients.    The  Greeks  and  Romans,  however,  were  acquainted  with 
only  two  species  of  Cercopithecus,  viz.,  that  here  alluded  to,  and  the  Cepus 
(Cercopithecus  Ruber).    It  is,  therefore,  highly  improbable  that  they 
should  have  had  a  generic  term  for  these  two  animals,  and  we  therefore 
consider  it  most  likely  that  Pliny  here  referred  to  the  present  species. 
See  "  Natural  History  of  Monkeys,"  in  "  Library  of  Entertaining  Know- 
ledge."— Wern.  Club. 

2  The  reader  is  referred  to  the  note  on  the  Oryx,  Lib.  xi.  c.  46 ;  and 
also  to  Vol.  i.  p.  75,  note.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  The  best  editions  of  Pliny  have  Leucocrota,  and  the  animal  intended 
was  probably  a  species  of  antelope.    Leocrocota  would  imply  a  fabulous 
monster  deriving  its  origin  from  the  Hyaena  and  the  Lioness.     See 
chap.  30.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII,]  History  of  Nature.  39 

another  Beast,  named  Bale,1  of  the  size  of  the  River-Horse, 
with  the  Tail  of  the  Elephant,  the  Colour  either  black 
or  tawny  (fulvus) ;  his  Jaws  resemble  those  of  a  Boar ; 
he  hath  Horns  above  a  Cubit  long,  which  he  can  fix  on  either 
Side  in  Fight,  or  alter  them  in  a  formidable  Manner  obliquely, 
as  he  sees  occasion.  But  the  most  cruel  are  the  Wild  Bulls 
of  the  Forest,2  which  are  greater  than  the  field  Bulls ;  swifter 
than  all  the  others ;  of  a  tawny  Colour,  the  Eyes  bluish, 
their  Hair  reversed,  the  Gape  of  their  Mouth  reaching  to 
their  Ears ;  their  Horns,  near  them,  movable  ;3  their  Hide  as 
hard  as  a  Flint,  resisting  every  Wound  ;  all  other  Wild  Beasts 
they  hunt,  but  these  cannot  be  taken  except  in  Pit-falls;  and 
in  this  Fierceness  they  die.  Ctesias  writeth,  that  there  is  a 
Beast  which  he  calleth  Mantichora,4  having  three  Rows  of 
Teeth,  which  meet  together  like  the  Teeth  of  a  Comb ;  with 
the  Face  and  Ears  of  a  Man ;  blue  Eyes ;  the  Colour  like 
Blood,  the  Body  like  a  Lion>  and  having  a  Tail  armed  with 
a  Sting  like  a  Scorpion  ;  his  Voice  resembleth  the  Sound  of 
a  Flute  and  Trumpet  {Fistula  et  Tuba)  sounded  together ; 
very  swift,  and  before  all  others  he  desireth  Man's  Flesh. 
In  India  there  are  also  Oxen  with  solid  Hoofs  and  a  single 

1  Pliny  appears  to  be  the  only  author,  with  the  exception  of  his 
copyist,  Solinus,  who  has  described  the  animal  which  he  here  calls  Bale ; 
it  is  impossible  to  conjecture  what  he  meant.  —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Bos  Bubalus. — LINN.  The  Buffalo. — According  to  the  accounts  of 
travellers  the  Buffalo  still  exists  in  a  wild  condition  in  many  parts  of 
Africa,  more  particularly  in  Abyssinia,  —  the  Ethiopia  of  the  ancients. — 
Wern.  Club. 

3  This  seems  to  be  Pliny's  representation  of  the  condition  of  the  Eale, 
and  also  the  wild  bull.    Julian  says,  that  the  Erythraean  oxen  have  horns 
as  moveable  as  their  ears.     Book  iii.  ch.  34.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  ^Elian,  Book  iv.  c.  21,  under  the  name  of  Mantichora,  gives  a  some- 
what lengthened  description  of  this  animal,  from  Ctesias,  who  pretended 
to  have  seen  it.     The  latter  author,  who  is  also  the  only  authority  for 
some  other  very  wonderful  accounts  of  Indian  animals,  appears  to  have 
been  just  such  a  traveller  as  our  own  Maundeville;  honest,  but  highly 
credulous,  and  trusting  more  to  the  authority  of  others  than  to  his  own 
eyesight.  What  the  creature  was,  to  which  this  name  was  attached,  could 
only  be  recovered  by  finding  the  same  name  still  in  use  in  the  East. — 
Wern.  Club. 


40  History  of  Nature.  [ BOOK  VIII. 

Horn ;  also  a  Wild  Beast  named  Axis,1  with  its  Skin  like  a 
Fawn,  but  marked  with  more  Spots,  and  those  whiter.  This 
Creature  is  sacred  to  Liber  Pater.  The  Orsians  of  India 
hunt  Apes,  which  are  white  all  over  the  Body.  But  the  most 
furious  Beast  is  the  Monoceros:2  his  Body  resembleth  an 
Horse,  his  Head  a  Stag,  his  Feet  an  Elephant,  his  Tail  a 
Boar;  the  Sound  he  utters  is  deep ;  there  is  one  black  Horn 
in  the  Middle  of  his  Forehead,  projecting  two  Cubits  in 
Length  :  by  Report,  this  Wild  Beast  cannot  possibly  be 
caught  alive.  Among  the  Hesperian  Ethiopians  there  is  a 
Fountain  named  Nigris,  the  Head  (as  many  have  thought) 
of  the  Nilus,  and  good  Reasons  there  are  for  it,  as  we  have 
alleged  before.3  Near  this  Spring  there  is  found  a  Wild  Beast 
called  Catoblepas,4  of  small  Size  otherwise,  and  heavy  in  all 
his  other  Limbs  ;  but  his  Head  is  so  great  that  his  Body  is 
hardly  able  to  bear  it ;  it  is  always  carried  downwards  to- 
ward the  Earth,  for  otherwise  he  would  destroy  all  Man- 
kind :  for  every  one  that  looketh  upon  his  Eyes  immediately 
dieth.  The  like  Property  hath  the  Serpent  called  a  Basilisk,5 

1  Cervus  Axis,  of  Authors.  The  Spotted  Axis  Deer.  This  beautiful 
animal  is  found  in  India,  and  the  larger  islands  of  the  Indian  Archipelago. 
—Wern.  Club. 

3  If  credit  is  given  to  the  ancient  writers  on  natural  history,  nothing 
can  be  more  clear  than  that  there  once  existed  a  creature  which  answered 
to  the  modern  idea  of  what  is  termed  the  Unicorn,  and  is  represented  as 
one  of  the  supporters  of  the  royal  arms  of  Britain.  JElian,  book  xvi. 
ch.  20,  describes  it  under  the  name  of  Cartazonos,  as  inhabiting  a  limited 
district  in  the  interior  of  India ;  where,  however,  modern  research  has 
failed  to  discover  it.  For  a  long  time  the  tooth  of  the  Narwahl  was  sup- 
posed to  be  the  horn  that  projected  from  between  the  eyes  of  the  Uni- 
corn ;  although  it  did  not  exactly  answer  to  the  description,  being  white 
instead  of  black.  See  note  on  the  Oryx,  Book  xi.  ch.  46 ;  and  Vol.  i. 
p.  75  ;  Book  ii.  note.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Lib.  v.  c.  9.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Antelope  Gnu.  —  GMELIN.     The  Gnu. — This  animal,  which  inhabits 
the  plains  of  South  Africa,  is  generally  supposed  to  be  the  Katoblepas  of 
the  ancients. — JEi,iAN,  Book  vii.  ch.  5.  —  Wern.  Club. 

5  This  fabulous  creature  is  often  referred  to  by  ancient  authors,  and 
also  by  some  comparatively  modern  ;  by  the  latter  of  whom  even  its  eyes 
were  supposed  to  convey  poison.     Thus,  Shakspeare  makes  the  Lady 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  41 

which  is  produced  in  the  Province  of  Cyrenaica,  and  is  not 
above  twelve  Fingers'  Breadth  long ;  with  a  white  Spot  on 
the  Head,  as  if  distinguished  with  a  Diadem  :  with  his  Hiss 
he  driveth  away  other  Serpents ;  he  rnoveth  not  his  Body 
forward  by  multiplied  Windings  like  other  Serpents,  but  he 
goeth  with  Half  his  Body  upright  and  aloft  from  the  Ground; 
he  killeth  all  Shrubs  not  only  that  he  toucheth,  but  that  he 
breatheth  upon ;  he  burns  up  Herbs,  and  breaketh  the  Stones; 
so  great  is  his  Power  for  Mischief!  It  is  received  for  a  Truth, 
that  one  of  them  being  killed  with  a  Larice  by  a  Man  on 

Ann  say,  in  answer  to  Richard's  observation  on  her  eyes :  "  Would  they 
were  basilisk's,  to  strike  thee  dead ! "  Its  touch  was  also  said  to  cause  the 
flesh  to  fall  from  the  bones  of  the  animal  with  which  it  came  in  contact. 
The  Basilisk  was  a  wingless  dragon,  and  derived  its  name  from  bearing  on 
its  head  the  figure  of  a  crown.  The  Egyptians  believed  it  was  produced 
from  the  egg  of  the  ibis,  and  some,  more  modern,  from  the  egg  of  the 
common  cock  ;  and,  strange  as  it  may  appear,  the  latter  supposition  may 
explain  much  of  the  superstition  regarding  it.  It  is  now  known  that, 
from  some  change  in  the  structure  and  action  of  the  ovary,  a  hen  some- 
times assumes  the  plumage  of  a  cock ;  as  is  the  case  also  with  other  galli- 
naceous fowls,  and  even  the  duck.  The  final  result  is  barrenness ;  but 
previous  to  this  an  egg  may  be  produced,  that  is  unnatural  in  its  size  and 
contents ;  and  such  a  one  is  figured  by  Aldrovandus,  and  copied  from 
him  by  Ruysch  (Table  of  Serpents,  X.).  Such  an  egg  resembles  the 
produce  of  some  serpents,  and  the  latter  might  be  easily  mistaken  for  the 
former.  The  egg  of  a  snake  may  be  often  found  on  a  dung-heap,  over 
which  a  fowl  may  roost ;  and  an  individual  who  had  seen  an  egg  from 
such  a  transformed  fowl,  might  mistake  a  snake's  egg  for  it,  and  watch  it 
to  its  hatching.  Hens  also  sometimes  lay  soft  eggs  (without  a  shell),  and 
when  they  do  so,  as  wanting  the  firmness  natural  to  it,  the  egg  escapes 
from  them  when  on  the  perch,  without  the  consciousness  of  laying.  The 
Editor  has  known  such  eggs  to  fall  on  the  dungheap  below ;  and  when 
so,  it  would  not  be  easy  to  distinguish  them  from  those  laid  by  snakes  in 
the  same  place.  An  egg  so  laid  produces  nothing  living ;  but  the  uncer- 
tainty attending  it,  especially  if  laid  by  a  hen  in  a  condition  of  trans- 
formed plumage,  in  the  same  place  with  those  deposited  by  a  snake,  would 
be  a  sufficient  foundation  for  all  the  superstition  attending  it.  The  eggs 
of  the  Basilisk,  and  their  liability  to  be  mistaken  for  those  which  were 
wholesome,  are  referred  to  by  the  prophet  Isaiah,  lix.  5.  Ruysch 
thinks  that  the  cobra  da  capella,  or  hooded  snake,  is  one  of  the  ser- 
pents that  have  been  called  the  Basilisk,  or  the  royal  serpent. — Wern. 
Club. 


42 


History  of  Nature. 


[BOOK  VIII. 


Horseback,  the  Poison  was  so  strong  that  it  passed  along 
the  Staff,  and  destroyed  both  Horse  and  Man  ;  and  yet  a 
Weasel  hath  a  deadly  Power  to  kill  even  such  a  Monster  as 
this  (for  Kings  have  been  desirous  to  see  the  Manner  how  he 

is  killed).  So  Nature  hath  de- 
lighted to  match  every  Thing  in 
the  World  with  its  equal !  They 
cast  these  Weasels  into  their  Holes, 
which  it  is  easy  to  know  by  the 
Poison  alone.  They  destroy  them 
at  the  same  Time  with  their  strong 
Smell,  but  they  die  themselves  ; 
and  so  the  Combat  of  Nature  is 

Basilisk.    Montfaufon,  torn.  iii.  pi.  60.      finish ed . 


CHAPTER  XXII. 
Of  Wolves.1 

IT  is  also  commonly  believed  in  Italy  that  the  Eye-sight 
of  Wolves  is  hurtful  ;2  so  that  if  they  look  on  a  Man  before  he 
see  them,  they  cause  him  to  lose  his  Voice  for  the  time. 
Those  which  are  produced  in  Africa  and  Egypt  are  small, 
and  without  Spirit;  but  in  colder  Climates  they  are  more 
Fierce  and  Cruel.  That  Men  are  transformed  into  Wolves, 
and  restored  again  to  their  former  Shapes,  we  must  confi- 
dently believe  to  be  False,  or  else  give  credit  to  all  those 
Tales  which  we  have  for  so  many  ages  found  to  be  mere 
Fables.  But  whence  this  Opinion  came  to  be  so  firmly 
settled,  that  when  we  would  give  Men  the  most  opprobrious 
Words,  we  term  them  Versipelles,  or  Turn-coats,  I  will  shew. 
Euanthes,  a  not  contemptible  Writer  among  the  Greeks,  re- 
porteth  having  found  among  the  Records  of  the  Arcadians 

1  Canis  Lupus.— LINN.     The  Wolf.— Wern.  Club. 

2  So  Virgil,  Eel.  ix.— 

"  His  very  voice  the  hapless  Moeris  lost ; 
His  path  some  wolf's  first  darted  glance  hast  crost."—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  43 

that  there  was  a  certain  Race  of  the  Antaei,  out  of  which  one 
must  be  chosen  by  Lot,  to  be  conveyed  to  a  Pool  in  the 
Country  ;  and  when  all  his  Clothes  are  taken  off  and  hung 
upon  an  Oak,  he  swimmeth  across  the  Lake,  and  goeth 
away  into  the  Wilderness  to  be  turned  into  a  Wolf,  and  so  to 
keep  company  with  others  of  that  Kind  for  the  space  of  nine 
Years ;  during  which  time,  if  he  forbear  to  eat  Man's  Flesh, 
he  returneth  again  to  the  same  Pool,  and  having  swam  back 
over  it,  he  receiveth  his  former  Shape,  except  that  he  shall 
look  nine  Years  older  than  before.  Fabius  addeth  one  thing 
more,  that  he  findeth  again  the  same  Garment.  It  is  won- 
derful to  what  extent  Grecian  Credulity  can  proceed  ;  so  that 
there  is  not  so  impudent  a  Lie  but  it  findeth  some  one  to 
bear  Witness  to  it.  And  therefore  Agriopas,  who  wrote  the 
Olympionicse,  telleth  of  one  Dcemcenetus  Parrhasius,  who  at  a 
Sacrifice  of  a  Human  Being,  which  the  Arcadians  celebrated 
to  Jupiter  Lyccens,  tasted  of  the  Inwards  of  a  Boy,  and  was 
turned  into  a  Wolf;  and  the  same  Man  ten  Years  after  was 
changed  to  a  Man  again,  became  a  Wrestler,  contended  in 
Boxing,  and  went  away  home  again  with  Victory  from 
Olympia.  Besides,  it  is  commonly  believed  that  in  the 
Tail  of  this  Animal  there  is  a  little  Hair  that  is  effectual  to 
procure  Love  ;  and  that  when  he  is  taken  he  casteth  it  away, 
because  it  is  of  no  Force  unless  it  is  taken  from  him  while 
he  is  Alive.  He  goeth  to  rut  in  the  whole  Year  no  more 
than  twelve  Days.  When  he  is  very  hungry  he  devoureth 
Earth.  Among  Auguries,  if  a  Wolf,  in  going  about,  turn  to 
their  Right  Hand,  with  the  Interruption  of  his  Journey,  it  is 
good ;  but  if  his  Mouth  be  full  when  he  doth  so,  there  is 
not  a  better  Sign  in  the  World.  There  are  some  of  this 
Kind  that  are  called  Stag- Wolves,1  such  as  we  have  said 
that  Pompey  shewed  in  the  Circus,  brought  out  of  Gallia. 
This  Animal,  they  say,  however  hungry  he  may  be  when 
he  is  eating,  if  he  chance  to  look  backward,  forgetteth  his 
Meat,  and  wandereth  away  to  seek  for  some  other  Prey. 

1  Lib.  viii.  c,  19.—  Wern.  Club. 


44  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 
Of  Serpents. 

As  regards  Serpents,  it  is  commonly  observed  that  for 
the  most  part  they  are  of  the  Colour  of  the  Earth  in  which 
they  lie  hidden  :  and  a  very  great  number  of  Sorts  there 
are  of  them.  The  Cerastes1  hath  standing  out  on  the 
Body  some  small  Horns,  which  are  often  four  Double ; 
by  moving  which,  while  the  rest  of  the  Body  is  hidden, 
she  enticeth  the  Birds  into  her  Power. 

The  Amphisbsena  hath  two  Heads,2  that  is  to  say,  one  at 
the  Head  and  another  at  the  Tail,  as  if  it  were  little  to  cast 
out  her  Poison  at  one  Mouth  only.  Some  have  Scales, 
others  are  painted ;  but  all  have  deadly  Venom.  The 
Jaculus  darteth  itself  from  the  Boughs  of  Trees :  so  that 
we  are  not  only  to  guard  against  Serpents  with  our  Feet, 
but  also  to  look  to  them  that  fly  as  a  Dart  from  an  Engine. 
The  Aspides  swell  about  the  Neck3  (when  they  purpose  to 
sting);  and  there  is  no  Remedy  for  the  Bite  unless  the 
Parts  that  are  wounded  are  cut  off  immediately.  This 
destructive  Creature  hath  one  Point  yet  of  Understanding, 

1  Vipera  (Cerastes")  caudalis. — SMITH.  Near  the  middle  of  each  of 
the  arched  eyebrows  of  this  venomous  snake  there  is  a  slender,  pointed, 
slightly  recurved  spine,  about  a  line,  or  a  line  and  a  quarter  in  length. 
This  in  part  answering  the  description  of  Pliny,  renders  it  not  improbable 
that  it  is  the  reptile  intended  by  our  author.  It  inhabits  the  dry  sandy 
districts  of  Africa.  A  harmless  serpent  much  like  this  is  mentioned  by 
Herodotus,  book  ii.  as  being  esteemed  sacred  by  the  Egyptians. —  Wern. 
Club. 

3  The  modern  genus  Amphisbsena  is  perfectly  harmless  and  inoffen- 
sive, and  confined  to  Brazil  and  other  parts  of  South  America ;  it  could 
not,  therefore,  have  been  known  to  the  ancients.  What  their  Amphis- 
baena  was,  must  be  left  to  conjecture. —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Vipera  Haje. — DAUBIN.  The  Asp. — The  asp  is  often  mentioned 
both  by  Greek  and  Roman  writers ;  and  from  the  discrepancies  which  are 
observable  in  the  accounts  given  by  different  authors,  it  seems  probable 
that  two  or  three  different  species  of  poisonous  serpents  were  known  to 
the  ancients  under  this  common  name.  From  various  circumstances, 
however,  and  particularly  from  the  description  of  Pliny,  it  is  evident  that 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  45 

or  rather  of  Affection  :  they  for  the  most  part  wander  abroad 
in  Pairs ;  nor  can  they  live  without  their  Mate :  so  that  if 
one  be  killed,  it  is  incredible  how  the  other  seeketh  to  be 
revenged.  It  pursueth  the  Murderer;  it  knoweth  him 
again  amongst  a  great  number  of  People,  and  followeth  him 
closely ;  it  overcometh  all  Difficulties,  goeth  to  any  Dis- 
tance, and  nothing  will  save  him  unless  it  is  stopped  by  some 
River,  or  that  the  Individual  betake  himself  to  a  hasty 
Flight.  I  am  not  able  to  say  whether  Nature  hath  been 
more  free  in  producing  such  Evils,  or  in  giving  us  Remedies. 
For,  in  the  first  place,  she  hath  afforded  to  this  hurtful 
Creature  but  a  dim  Pair  of  Eyes,  and  those  not  placed  in  the 
fore  Part  of  the  Head,  to  see  directly  forward,  but  in  the 
Temples.  And  therefore  these  Serpents  are  oftener  directed 
by  their  Hearing  than  Sight. 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 
Of  the  Ichneumon* 

THERE  is  mortal  War  between  the  Asp  and  the  Ichneu- 
mon. This  Animal  is  known  by  this  Distinction  especially, 
that  it  is  bred  likewise  in 
the  same  Egypt.  It  wallows 
oftentimes  within  the  Mud, 
and  then  dries  itself  again  in 
the  Sun ;  and  when  he  hath 
thus  armed  himself  with  many 

*        From  the  Pavement  of  the  Temple  of  Fortune 
Skins,      he        gOeth       forth       tO  atPalestrma.    Montf.  torn.  vi. pi.  60. 

combat.  In  Fight  he  sets  up  his  Tail,  and  turning  it  to 
the  Enemy,  receiveth  all  the  Strokes  (of  the  Aspis)  without 
harm,  until  he  spies  a  Time  to  turn  his  Head  on  one  Side, 
that  he  may  catch  the  Aspis  by  the  Throat.  And  not 

the  most  common  and  celebrated  is  the  present  species.  The  animal  mea- 
sures from  three  to  five  feet  in  length,  and  is  closely  allied  to  the  cobra 
capello,  or  spectacled  snake  of  India.  It  inhabits  Egypt  and  other  parts 
of  Africa.—  Wern.  Club. 

1  Herpestes  Pharaonis. — DESMAE.     The  Ichneumon.  —  There  is  no 
reason  to  doubt  this  being  the  animal  intended  by  Pliny.—  Wern.  Club. 


46  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VI II . 

contented  with  this,    he   addresseth   himself  to   a  Conflict 
with  another,  as  hurtful  as  the  former. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 
Of  the  Crocodile,  Scink,  and  Hippopotamus. 

THE  Nilus  is  inhabited  by  the  Crocodile,1  an  ill-disposed 
Creature,  four-footed,  as  dangerous  upon  Land  as  on  the 
Water.  This  Animal  alone,  of  all  other  that  live  on  the 
Land,  hath  no  use  of  a  Tongue.  He  only  moveth  the 
upper  Jaw,  with  which  he  biteth  hard  ;  and  the  grasp  of 
his  Mouth  is  otherwise  terrible,  by  means  of  the  row  of  his 
Teeth,  which  close  within  one  another  as  if  two  Combs 
penetrated  each  other.  Ordinarily  he  is  above  eighteen 
Cubits  in  Length.  The  Female  layeth  Eggs  as  big  as  those 
of  a  Goose,  and  sitteth  continually  upon  them  out  of  the 
Water.  By  a  certain  Fore-knowledge  she  is  aware  how  far 
the  Nile  will  rise  that  Year  when  it  is  at  the  highest.  There 
is  no  other  Creature  that  from  a  smaller  Beginning  groweth 
to  a  greater  Size.  He  is  armed  with  Claws,  and  his  Skin 
will  resist  any  Injury  whatever.  By  Day  it  keepeth  on  the 
Land,  but  passeth  the  Night  in  the  Water  ;  being  guided  by 
each  according  to  the  Season.  When  it  hath  satisfied  its 
Appetite  with  Fishes,  it  lieth  asleep  on  the  Shore,  and 
always  with  some  of  the  Meat  in  his  Mouth.  Then  cometh 
a  little  Bird,  called  there  Trochilos,2  and  in  Italy  the  King  of 
Birds,  and  for  the  sake  of  her  Food  she  instigates  the  Crea- 
ture to  gape  by  hopping  first  about  its  Mouth,  which  she 
pecks  and  cleanses,  and  then  the  Teeth,  after  which  she 
getteth  within  to  the  Back  of  his  Mouth,  which  it  openeth 
the  wider  because  it  taketh  such  great  Delight  in  this 
scouring.  When  the  Crocodile  is  lulled  fast  asleep  with 

1  Crocudilus  vulgaris. — CUVIER.     The  Crocodile. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  This  account  is  taken  from  Herodotus  (Euterpe,  Ixviii.)  who  says, 
"  The  mouth  of  the  crocodile  is  filled  in  the  inside  with  leeches.    All 
birds  and  animals  in  general  avoid  him ;  the  trochilus  is  the  only  animal 
at  peace  with  him  ;  and  that  on  account  of  the  services  he  receives  from 
that  bird ;  for  when  the  crocodile  comes  out  of  the  water  to  land,  and 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  47 

this  Pleasure,  the  Ichneumon,  having  discovered  the  Oppor- 
tunity, shooteth  himself  down  his  Throat  like  a  Dart,  and 
gnaweth  a  Hole  through  his  Belly.1 

In  the  Nilus  there  breeds  also  the  Scincos,2  which  is  like 
the  Crocodile,  but  less  than  the  Ichneumon.  It  is  the  chief 
Antidote  against  Poisons,  and  also  provokes  the  Heat  of 
Lust  in  Men. 

But  the  Crocodile  produceth  so  much  Mischief,  that 
Nature  is  not  content  to  have  given  him  only  one  Enemy; 

opens  his  mouth,  the  trochilus  goes  into  his  throat  and  devours  the 
leeches :  the  crocodile  is  pleased  at  being  relieved,  and  hurts  not  the 
trochilus."  Although  this  statement  is  confirmed  by  Aristotle,  Pliny, 
and  other  ancient  writers,  it  has  been  very  generally  discredited  in 
modern  times.  Recent  inquiries,  however,  shew  that  in  this,  as  in  most 
of  his  relations,  the  father  of  history  is  justified  by  the  fact.  The  term 
"bdella"  has  hitherto  been  translated  "  leech."  But  M.  Geoffrey  St. 
Hilaire  has  adopted  the  opinion  that  it  corresponds  to  "culex,"  that  is, 
"  a  gnat,"  myriads  of  which  insects  swarm  on  the  banks  of  the  Nile,  and 
attack  the  crocodile  when  he  comes  to  repose  on  the  sand.  His  mouth 
is  not  so  hermetically  closed  but  that  they  can  enter,  which  they  do  in 
such  numbers,  that  the  interior  of  his  palate,  which  is  naturally  of  a 
bright  yellow,  appears  covered  with  a  darkish  brown  crust.  The  insects 
strike  their  trunks  into  the  orifices  of  the  glands  which  abound  in  the 
mouth  of  the  crocodile ;  and  the  tongue  of  the  animal  being  immoveable, 
it  cannot  get  rid  of  them.  It  is  then  that  the  trochilus,  a  kind  of  plover, 
closely  allied  to  the  Charadrius  minor  of  Meyer,  or  in  the  opinion  of  M. 
St.  Hilaire,  C.  Egyptiacus,  but  which  Pliny,  confounding  with  another 
bird  of  the  same  name,  calls  "  the  king  of  birds,"  in  its  pursuit  of  the 
gnats,  hastens  to  his  relief ;  the  crocodile  always  taking  care,  when  he  is 
about  to  shut  his  mouth,  to  make  certain  movements  which  warn  the 
bird  to  fly  away.  Thus  the  ancient  story  is  not  so  unreasonable  as  might 
be  thought.  It  is  matter  of  every-day  observation,  that  gnats  will  attack 
bulls  and  other  large  terrestrial  animals  of  the  fiercest  nature ;  and  that 
wagtails  and  other  insectivorous  birds  will  peck  the  former  from  their 
muzzles.  While  in  India  it  is  common  to  see  the  ox  approaching  its  eye 
deliberately  to  the  ground,  by  holding  its  head  on  one  side,  to  enable  the 
mina,  a  species  of  starling,  to  take  an  insect  from  the  hairs  of  the  eyelid. 
There  appears,  therefore,  no  reason  why  the  crocodile  should  not  have 
recourse  to  similar  aid  on  similar  necessity. —  Wern.  Club. 

1  It  can  hardly  be  worth  while  to  refute  such  a  fable  as  this,  but  it 
was  long  entertained  as  worthy  of  serious  belief. —  Wern.  Club. 

a  Lib.  xxviii.  c.  8.—  Wern.  Club. 


48  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

and  therefore  when  the  Dolphins  pass  into  the  River  Nile, 
where  the  Crocodiles  assume  to  be  Kings,  as  if  the  River 
were  their  peculiar  Property,  and  therefore  drive  them  away 
and  prevent  them  from  taking  Food  :  seeing  themselves  to 
be  otherwise  inferior  to  the  Crocodiles  in  Strength,  but 
being  armed  on  the  Back  with  a  Fin  as  Sharp  as  a  Knife, 
they  manage  to  destroy  them  by  Craft.  For  all  Creatures 
are  herein  very  skilful,  and  know  not  only  their  own 
Advantages,  but  also  what  may  hurt  their  Enemies.  They 
know  what  offensive  Weapons  they  have,  and  the  fit  Occa- 
sions of  using  them  ;  as  also  the  weak  Parts  of  those  opposed 
to  them.  The  Skin  of  the  Crocodile's  Belly  is  thin  and 
soft;  and  therefore  the  Dolphins,1  as  if  afraid  of  them,  dive 
under  Water,  and  getting  beneath  until  they  have  gotten 
under  his  Vent,  rip  it  up  with  this  sharp  Spine.  Also, 
there  is  a  Kind  of  People  that  bear  a  Hatred  to  the  Croco- 
dile, and  they  are  called  Tentyrites,  from  an  Island  of  the 
Nile  which  they  inhabit.  These  Men  are  of  small  Stature, 
but  when  opposed  against  the  Crocodiles,  and  then  only,  it  is 
wonderful  to  see  how  resolute  they  are.  Indeed  this  Cro- 
codile is  a  terrible  Beast  to  them  who  fly  from  him  ;  but  on 
the  other  Hand  he  runneth  away  from  such  as  pursue  him. 
Now,  these  People  are  the  only  Men  that  dare  to  approach 
right  in  front  of  him.  They  will  even  swim  into  the  River 
after  them,  and  mount  upon  their  Backs,2  and  sit  on  them 

1  Lib.  ix.  c.  8.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  The  exploits  of  these  Tentyrites  have  not  been  unmatched  in  modern 
times.    A  ride  on  the  back  of  a  crocodile  does  not  seem  a  very  tempting 
thing ;  but  that  it  has  long  been  occasionally  performed  in  the  process  of 
killing  these  monsters  is  shewn  by  Dr.  Pocock,  in  his  "  Observations  on 
Egypt,"  where  he  says,  "  They  make  some  animal  cry  at  a  distance  from 
the  river,  and  when  the  crocodile  comes  out  they  thrust  a  spear  into  his 
body,  to  which  a  rope  is  tied :  they  then  let  him  go  into  the  water  to 
spend  himself,  and  afterwards  drawing  him  out,  run  a  pole  into  his 
mouth,  and,  jumping  on  his  back,  tie  his  jaws  together."—  (Vol.  i.  p.  203.) 
Mr.  Waterton,  in  his  "Wanderings  in  South  America,"  tells  us  he  per- 
formed  the  same  extraordinary  feat.      His  Indian  assistants  having 
secured  a  monster  of  the  Essequibo,  by  a  baited  hook  fastened  to  a  long 
pole,  "they  pulled  the  cayman,"  as  he  describes  (p.  231,)  "within  two 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  49 

like  Horsemen ;  and  as  they  turn  up  their  Heads,  with  their 
Mouth  wide  open  to  bite,  they  thrust  a  Club  into  it  across, 
and  so  holding  with  the  Hands  each  End  of  it,  the  one  with 
the  right  and  the  other  with  the  left  as  with  a  Bridle, 
they  bring  them  Prisoners  to  land ;  and  then,  when  they 
have  them  there,  they  so  frighten  them  with  their  Voice 
only,  that  they  compel  them  to  vomit  up  those  Bodies  which 
they  have  newly  swallowed,  and  bury  them.  And  therefore 
this  is  the  only  Island  which  the  Crocodiles  will  not  swim 
to ;  for  the  very  Smell  of  these  Tentyrites  drives  them 
away,  just  as  the  Psylli1  do  with  Serpents.  This  Animal 
is  said  to  see  but  badly  in  the  Water ;  but  out  of  it  they  are 
very  quick-sighted.  The  four  Winter  Months  they  pass  in  a 
Cave,  and  eat  nothing.  Some  are  of  Opinion,  that  this  is  the 
only  Creature  that  groweth  as  long  as  he  liveth  ;  and  certainly 
he  liveth  a  long  Time. 


The  same  River  Nile  produceth  another  Beast  of  greater 
Height,  called  Hippopotamus.2  He  hath  a  cloven  Foot  like 
an  Ox  ;  the  Back,  Mane,  and  Neighing  of  an  Horse ;  his 
Snout  turning  up.  The  Tail  and  hooked  Teeth  are  like  those 
of  Boars,  but  less  formidable ;  the  Skin  of  his  Back  impene- 

yards  of  me ;  I  saw  he  was  in  a  state  of  fear  and  perturbation  ;  I  instantly 
dropped  the  mast,  sprang  up,  and  jumped  on  his  back,  turning  half  round 
as  I  vaulted,  so  that  I  gained  my  seat  with  my  face  in  a  right  position.  I 
immediately  seized  his  fore  legs,  and  by  main  force  twisted  them  on  his 
back  :  thus  they  served  me  for  a  bridle." — Wern.  Club. 

1  Lib.  vii.  2. 

2  Hippopotamus  Senegalensis.  —  DESMOULIN.     The  Hippopotamus. — 
In  this  account  of  the  Hippopotamus,  Pliny  seems  to  have  followed  Ari- 
stotle (Lib.  ii.  c.  7),  who  in  like  manner  copied  from  Herodotus  (Lib.  ii. 
c.  71).    It  is  probable  that  the  two  latter  writers  never  saw  the  animal, 
but  trusted  to  the  wild  accounts  of  others ;  and  Pliny  himself,  although 
he  says,  in  the  next  chapter,  that  Marcus  Scaurus  exhibited  the  Hippo- 

VOL.   III.  E 


50  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

trable  if  made  into  Shields  and  Helmets,  unless  it  be  soaked 
in  some  Liquor.  He  feedeth  on  the  standing  Corn ;  and  they 
say  that  he  fixeth  beforehand  where  he  will  feed  by  Day ; 
and  his  Footsteps  are  always  backward,  in  order  that  against 
his  Return  no  Snare  shall  be  laid  for  him. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

Who  first  showed  the  Hippopotamus  and  Crocodiles  at  Rome. 
Also  the  Medicines  discovered  by  Animals. 

MARCUS  SCAURUS  was  the  first,  who,  in  the  Games 
which  he  displayed  at  Rome  in  his  Office  of  Edileship,  pro- 
duced one  Hippopotamus  and  four  Crocodiles,  swimming  in 
a  temporary  Pool. 

The  Hippopotamus  hath  taught  a  Practice  in  a  certain 
Part  of  the  Art  of  Healing.  For  finding  himelf  overfat,  by 
Reason  of  his  full  Feeding  so  continually,  he  getteth  to  the 
Shore,  having  spied  where  the  Reeds  have  been  newly  cut ; 
and  where  he  seeth  the  sharpest.  Stem  he  presseth  down  his 
Body  on  it,  and  pierceth  a  certain  Vein  in  his  Leg,  so  that 
by  a  Flow  of  Blood  he  relieves  his  diseased  Body,  and  he 
covereth  over  the  Orifice  again  with  Mud. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

What  Herbs  certain  Creatures  have  showed  us:  Deer,  Lizards, 
Swallows,  Tortoises,  the  Weasel,  Stork,  the  Boar,  the 
Snake,  Dragon,  Panther, Elephant, Bears,  Doves,  Pigeons, 
Cranes,  the  Raven. 

SOMETHING  like  this  was  showed  us  by  a  Bird  which  is 
called  Ibis  in  the  same  Country  of  Egypt.  This  Bird  having 

potamus  at  Rome,  can  hardly  be  supposed  to  have  seen  it,  or  he  never 
could  have  fallen  into  so  great  an  error  as  to  give  it  the  mane  of  an 
horse.  It  need  hardly  be  observed,  that  in  all  probability  the  Romans 
derived  their  Hippopotamus  from  Northern  Africa ;  if,  therefore,  there  be 
more  than  one  species,  the  Hippopotamus  Senegalensis  is,  in  all  likelihood, 
the  one  intended.  —  Went.  Club. 
1  Lib.  x.  30. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  51 

a  crooked  Bill,  useth  it  to  squirt  Water  through  that  Part 
through  which  it  is  most  healthy  to  discharge  the  Burdens  of 
Meat.  Neither  have  dumb  Creatures  directed  us  to  these 
Practices  only,  which  might  serve  for  use  to  Man.  For 
Deers1  first  showed  us  the  Virtue  of  the  Herb  Dictarnnus2  to 
draw  out  Arrows.  Being  shot  with  that  Dart,  with  feeding 
on  this  Herb  it  is  driven  out  again.  The  same  Creatures 
being  also  stung  by  the  Phalangium,3  a  kind  of  Spider,  or 
any  of  like  Nature,  cure  themselves  by  eating  Cray-fishes.4 

There  is  an  Herb  called  Calaminth,5  of  remarkable  Effi- 
cacy against  the  biting  of  Serpents  ;  with  the  Application  of 
which  the  Lizards,  when  they  have  fought  with  them,  cure 
their  Wounds. 

The  Swallows  taught  us  the  Usefulness  «^ 
of  Chelidonia6  for  the  Eyesight;  for  with 
it  they  heal  ttheir  young  Ones  when  their  Eyes 
are  injured. 

The  Tortoise,7  by  eating  Cunila,  which  is 
also  called  Bubula,  reneweth  his  Powers  against 
Serpents.  Mont/,  tom.  i.  pi.  84. 

The  Weasel  useth  Rue8  when  he  purposeth  to  hunt  for 
Rats,  in  case  he  should  fight  with  any  of  them. 

The  Stork  goeth  to  the  Herb  Origanum  for  a  Remedy; 
and  the  Boar,  when  he  is  sick,  is  his  own  Physician,  by 
eating  Ivy  and  Crabs,  such  especially  as  the  Sea  casteth 
on  Shore. 

The  Snake,9  by  lying  still  all  the  Winter,  hath  a  Mem- 
brane growing  over  the  Body;  but  with  the  Juice  of  Fennel 
she  throweth  off  that  Incumbrance,  and  appeareth  fresh  and 
elegant  again.  She  beginneth  to  throw  it  off  first  at  the 
Head  ;  and  she  is  so  slow  as  to  occupy  a  whole  Day  and  a 
Night  in  folding  it  backward,  before  the  Inside  of  the  Mem- 

1  Lib.  viii.  32.  2  Lib.  xxv.  8.  3  Lib.  xi.  24. 

4  Lib.  ix.  50, 51.  4  That  is,  the  Condrillon.  Lib.  xxii.  22. 

6  Lib.  xxv.  8,  12.    The  juice  of  Chelidonium  majus,  diluted  with  milk, 
is  said  to  consume  white  opaque  spots  on  the  eyes.  —  Wern.  Club. 

7  Lib.  xx.  16.  8  Lib.  xx.  13.  9  Lib.  xx.  23. 


52  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

brane  can  be  turned  outward.  Also,  when  by  keeping  close 
all  the  Winter,  her  Sight  is  become  dim,  she  rubbeth  herself 
with  the  Herb  Marathrum,  and  also  anointeth  and  com- 
forteth  her  Eyes.  But  if  the  Scales  be  hard  and  insensible, 
she  scratcheth  herself  with  the  Prickles  of  the  Juniper. 

The  Dragon,1  feeling  a  Loathing  of  Meat  in  the  Spring, 
removeth  it  with  the  Juice  of  the  wild  Lettuce.2 

The  Barbarians,  when  they  hunt  Panthers,3  thoroughly 
rub  the  Flesh  (which  they  lay  as  a  Bait  for  them)  with 
Aconitum4  (which  is  Poison).  The  Beasts  have  no  sooner 
touched  the  Flesh,  but  immediately  they  are  seized  with 
great  Anguish  in  their  Throat;  on  which  Account  some  have 
called  this  Poison  Pardalianches.  But  the  wild  Beast  hath  a 
Remedy  against  this  in  the  Ordure  of  a  Man;  and  at  other 
Times,  also,  so  eager  is  he  for  it,  that  when  the  Shepherds 
have  carefully  hanged  it  up  aloft  in  some  Vessel,  so  that 
it  is  above  their  Power  to  reach  it  by  leaping,  he  becomes 
ready  to  faint  with  straining  to  get  up  and  seize  it,  and  in  the 
end  thus  killeth  himself.  And  yet  otherwise  he  is  of  such 
enduring  Vitality,  that  he  continueth  to  fight  when  his  very 
Bowels  are  cut  out. 

The  Elephant,  if  he  swallow  the  Chameleon  among  the 
Leaves  which  this  Creature  is  like  in  Colour,  goeth  straight 
to  the  wild  Olive  for  a  Remedy  against  this  his  Poison. 

Bears,  when  they  have  tasted  Mandrake  Apples,5  lick 
up  Emmets. 

The  Stag  uses  as  an  Antidote  against  poisonous  Weeds  in 
its  Pasture,  the  Herb  Cinara  (Artichoke).6 

Pigeons,7  Graculus,8  Merulse,9  purge  away  their  yearly 
Loss  of  Appetite  with  eating  Bay-leaves.  Partridges,10 
Doves,11  Turtle-doves,12  and  Poultry,13  do  the  like  with  the 

I  Perhaps  some  species  of  Boa.     Lib.  viii.  14. — Wern.  Club. 

8  Lib.  xix.  8.        3  Lib.  viii.  17.        4  Lib.  xxvii.  2.        5  Lib.  xxix.  6. 

6  This  word  Cinara,  here  translated  Artichoke,  is  not  mentioned  any 
•where  else  by  Pliny,  and  it  is  by  no  means  certain  that  the  artichoke  is 
the  plant  intended.  —  Wern.  Club. 

7  Lib.  x.  35.          8  Lib.  xi.  29.          9  Lib.  x.  29.  10  Lib.  x.  33. 

II  Lib.  x.  34.  Ia  Lib.  x.  24.  I3  Lib.  x.  21. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  53 

Herb  called  Helxine.1  Ducks,2  Geese,3  and  other  Water- 
Fowls,  purge  with  the  Herb  Siderite.4  Cranes,5  and  Birds 
of  that  kind,  with  the  Marsh-reed.6 

The  Raven,  when  he  hath  killed  the  Chameleon,  and  is 
hurt  by  him,  extinguished!  the  Venom  that  he  is  infected 
with  by  Aid  of  the  Bay-tree. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 
Prognostications  from  A  nimals. 

THERE  are  a  thousand  Properties  besides  bestowed  on 
Beasts ;  and  particularly  many  of  them  are  endued  by  the 
same  Nature  with  the  Observation  of  the  Air  above,  to  fore- 
see what  Weather  we  shall  have,  what  Winds,  Rain,  Tem- 
pests ;  which  to  search  out  in  particular  is  not  possible,  no 
more  than  their  other  Qualities,  respective  to  the  Society 
with  every  Man.  For  they  warn  us  beforehand  of  Dangers, 
not  only  by  their  Fibres  and  Bowels,  about  which  a  large 
Part  of  the  World  fixeth  its  Attention,7  but  also  by  other 
Significations.  When  a  House  is  ready  to  tumble,  the  Mice 
are  sure  to  have  quitted  it;  and  the  Spiders,  with  their  Webs, 
are  the  first  to  fall.  Augury,  indeed,  hath  formed  itself  into 
an  Art;  and  among  the  Romans  there  is  a  College  of  Priests, 
instituted  for  the  most  Party  early.  In  Thracia,  where  Places 
are  frozen,  the  Fox,  an  Animal  that  is  otherwise  sharp  in  his 
Hearing,  will  not  pass  over  any  River  or  Pool  that  is  frozen, 
before  he  hath  tried  the  Ice  by  his  Ear  ;  and  then  he  does  not 
venture,  except  when  he  goeth  to  feed,  or  returneth.  It  is 
observed  that  he  judgeth  of  the  Thickness  of  the  Ice  by 
applying  his  Ear  to  it. 

1  Helxine,  Lib.  xxi.  16.  2  Lib.  x.  38.  3  Lib.  x.  22. 

4  Siderite,  Lib.  xxv.  5.  5  Lib.  x.  23. 

6  Juncas  Palustris,  Lib.  xix.  2. 

7  Alluding  to  the  art  of  Divination  by  these  means ;  so  constantly 
practised  by  the  Ancients.  —  Wern.  Club. 


54  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

The  Cities  and  Nations  which  have  been  utterly  destroyed  by 
small  Animals. 

NOTHING  is  more  notorious  than  the  Fact,  that  much 
Injury  hath  come  from  contemptible  Creatures.  M.  Varro 
writeth,  That  there  was  a  Town  in  Spain  undermined  by 
Rabbits ;  and  one  in  Thessaly,  by  the  Moles.  In  Gallia,  the 
Inhabitants  of  one  City  were  driven  out  by  Frogs.  In  Africa, 
the  People  were  expelled  by  Locusts.  Out  of  Gyaros,1  an 
Island  of  the  Cyclades,  the  Inhabitants  were  driven  away  by 
Rats  and  Mice.  In  Italy,  Amyclae  was  destroyed  by  Ser- 
pents. In  Ethiopia,  on  this  Side  the  Cynamolgi,  there  is  a 
wide  Country  which  lieth  desert,  from  being  dispeopled  by 
Scorpions  and  Solpugae.2  Theophrastus,  also,  reporteth,  that 
the  Trerienses  were  forced  away  by  Scolopendres.  But  let 
us  return  to  other  Kinds  of  wild  Beasts. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

Of  the  Hycena   and  Crocuta,  and  Mantichora,  and  Beavers, 
and  Otters. 

THE  common  People  believe  that  Hyasnas3  possess  a 
double  Nature,  and  that  every  second  Year  they  change 
their  Sex,  from  Males  to  Females,  and  that  the  latter  bear 
without  the  Male ;  but  Aristotle  denieth  it.  Their  Neck  and 
Mane  is  stretched  out  in  Continuation  of  the  Spine,  and  he 
denies  that  it  has  the  Power  to  bend  without  turning  about 
the  whole  Body.  Many  strange  Matters  besides  this  are 
reported ;  and  above  the  rest,  that  he  will  counterfeit 
Man's  Speech  among  the  Shepherds'  Cottages,  and  will  call 

1  See  more  of  this,  Lib.  viii.  57  ;  also,  Lib.  x.  65. 

2  Lib.  xxii.  25,  and  Lib.  xxix.  4. 

3  Canis  Hyama.—Lvsy.     The  Striped  Hyama.— This  seems  to  be  the 
same  animal  that  our  author  in  the  21st  chapter  has  named  Crocuta.  See 
the  note  there.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  55 

one  of  them  forth  by  Name ;  and  when  he  hath  obeyed  the 
Call,  he  will  tear  him  in  Pieces.  Also  that  he  will  imitate 
the  Vomiting  of  a  Man,  to  entice  the  Dogs  to  come  to  him, 
and  then  devour  them.  This  Beast  alone  will  dig  up  the 
Graves  in  search  of  Bodies.  The  Female  is  seldom  taken. 
There  are  a  thousand  Variations  in  their  Eyes,  through  the 
change  of  Colour.  Moreover,  if  a  Dog  come  within  his 
Shadow,  he  becometh  dumb.  Again,  by  certain  magical 
Arts,  if  he  go  round  about  any  other  living  Creature  three 
Times,  it  shall  not  have  the  Power  to  stir  a  Foot.  The 
Lioness  of  Ethiopia,  by  Copulation  with  this  kind,  brings 
forth  the  Leocrocuta  j1  which  likewise  knoweth  how  to  imi- 
tate the  Voice  both  of  Man  and  the  Sheep.  His  Sharpness 
of  Sight  is  constant ;  he  hath  one  continuous  Tooth  (in 
either  Jaw),  and  no  Gums.  That  these  Bones  may  not  be- 
come blunt  by  continual  rubbing  against  one  another,  they 
are  enclosed  as  if  within  a  Sheath. 

Juba  reporteth  that  the  Mantichora2  in  Ethiopia  imi- 
tateth  Men's  Language.  Many  Hyaenas  are  produced  in 
Africa;  which  also  yieldeth  a  Multitude  of  wild  Asses.3 
And  one  of  the  Males  ruleth  whole  Flocks  of  the  female 
Asses.  These  Beasts  are  so  jealous,  that  they  look  narrowly 
to  the  Females  great  with  young;  and  as  soon  as  they  have 
foaled,  they  castrate  the  young  Males.  On  the  other  Hand, 
the  she-Asses,  when  they  are  with  young,  seek  hiding- 
places,  from  a  Desire  to  bring  forth  secretly;  and  they  delight 
in  the  Abundance  of  their  Gratification. 

The  Beavers  in  Pontus  4  do  the  same  as  the  male  Asses, 
by  the  same  Parts,  when  Danger  presses ;  as  knowing  that 
they  are  sought  after  for  this ;  and  these  Parts  Physicians 
call  Castoreum.  And  otherwise,  the  Bite  of  this  Creature  is 

1  Lib.  viii.  21.  2  Lib.  viii.  21. 

3  Lib.  viii.  15.    Pliny  tells  us  here,  and  again  in  the  44th  chapter, 
that  the  wild  ass  was  found  in  Africa ;  but  no  traveller  has  since  met 
with  it.    And  as  far  as  we  know,  the  species  in  a  wild  state  is  confined  to 
Asia.     It  has  even  retired  from  Syria  and  Asia  Minor,  where  it  was 
formerly  found.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Lib.  xxxii.  3. 


56  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

terrible ;  for  he  will  bite  down  the  Trees  by  the  River-sides, 
as  if  they  were  cut  with  an  Axe ;  and  when  he  catcheth  hold 
of  a  Man,  he  never  letteth  loose  his  Bite  until  he  have  heard 
the  broken  Bone  crack.  The  Tail  of  this  Creature  is  like  a 
Fish,  but  otherwise  he  resembleth  the  Otter.1  Both  these 
Animals  live  in  the  Water,  and  their  Hair  is  softer  than  the 
Down  of  Feathers. 

CHAPTER   XXXI. 
Of  Frogs,  Sea- Calves,  and  Stelliones. 

THE  Frogs  called  Rubetae,2  which  live  both  on  Land  and 
in  Moisture,  yield  many  Medicines.  It  is  said  that  they  lay 
aside  these  Medicines,  reserving  only  to  themselves  the  Poi- 
son ;  and  when  they  have  taken  their  Food,  they  resume 
the  same  again.  The  Sea-Calf3  likewise  feedeth  both  in  the 
Sea  and  upon  the  Land  ;  and  hath  the  same  Habits  with  the 
Beaver.  He  vomiteth  up  his  Gall,  which  is  good  for  many 
Medicines ;  and  so  he  doth  his  Runnet,  which  is  a  Remedy 
for  the  Epilepsy :  for  he  is  well  aware,  that  Men  seek  after 
him  for  these  two  Things.  Theophrastus  writeth,  that  the  Stel- 
liones4 cast  off  their  old  Coat  as  Snakes  do  ;  but  they  imme- 
diately eat  it  up  again,  and  so  prevent  Men  from  obtaining 
the  Remedies  for  the  Epilepsy.  He  reporteth  that  their 
biting  in  Greece  is  deadly ;  but  in  Sicily  harmless. 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 
OfDeers. 

To  the  Deer,5  also,  though  he  is  amongst  the  gentlest  of 
Animals,  belongs  a  Degree  of  Malevolence.  If  he  be  over- 
driven by  Hounds,  then  willingly  he  hath  recourse  to  Man. 
Likewise,  the  Hinds,  when  they  are  about  to  calve,  choose 

1  Lib.  xxxii.  11.  2  Lib.  xxxii.  5.  3  Lib.  xi.  40. 

4  Lib.  xi.  26. 

5  Cervus  ElepJias.  —  LTNN.     The  Red  Deer.  —  Pliny,  in  this  chapter, 
describes  the  Elephas  of  Aristotle,  which  is,  doubtless,  the  common  stag, 
or  red  deer,  and  was  well  known  to  the  ancients.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  57 

rather  some  Place  near  the  Ways  that  are  trodden  with 
Man's  Steps,  than  secret  Corners  which  lie  open  to  wild 
Beasts.  They  are  got  with  Young  after  the  rising  of  the  Star 
Arcturus  ;  they  go  eight  Months,  and  sometimes  produce 
two  Calves  at  once.  Finding  themselves  with  Young,  they 
part  Company  with  the  Stags.  But  the  Males,  seeing  them- 
selves left,  fall  into  the  Rage  of  Heat,  and  dig  Pits  in  the 
Ground.  Then  their  Muzzles  become  black,  and  so  con- 
tinue, until  such  Time  as  the  Rain  washeth  away  the  Colour. 
The  Hinds,  before  they  calve,  purge  themselves  with  the 
Herb  called  Seselis,1  whereby  they  have  more  easy  Deliver- 
ance. After  Parturition  they  have  two  Herbs,  which  are  called 
Arus2  and  Seselis,  after  having  eaten  of  which  they  return 
to  their  Young,  being  willing,  for  some  unknown  Reason, 
that  their  first  Milk  should  taste  of  these  Herbs.  They  exer- 
cise their  new-born  little  ones  in  the  Race,  and  teach  them 
to  know  how  to  fly  away.  They  lead  them  to  high  and 
craggy  Rocks,  and  show  them  how  to  leap.  And  now  the 
Stags  being  past  the  Heat  of  Rut,  fall  eagerly  to  their  Food. 
When  they  find  themselves  to  be  grown  very  Fat,  they  seek 
Lurking-places,  confessing  how  incommodious  their  Weight 
is  to  them.  At  other  Times  always  they  delight  in  flight ;  and 
stand  still  to  look  behind.  But  when  the  Hunters  are  come 
near  them,  then  they  seek  the  Shelter  of  Flight  again ;  and 
this  they  do  for  a  Pain  in  their  Bowels,  which  Parts  are  so 
tender,  that  with  a  slight  Blow  they  will  burst  within.  When 
they  hear  the  barking  of  the  Hounds  they  fly,  but  always  in 
the  Course  of  the  Wind,  that  the  Scent  of  their  Tracks  may 
pass  away  with  them.  They  take  great  Delight  in  the  Sound 
of  the  Shepherd's  Pipes,  and  in  Song.  When  they  erect 
their  Ears,  they  are  very  quick  of  Hearing ;  when  they  let 
them  hang  down,  they  are  deaf.  In  other  respects  it  is  a 
simple  Creature,  stupidly  wondering  at  everything;  inso- 
much that  if  an  Horse  or  an  Heifer  approach  near,  it  will 

1  Lib.  xx.  5. 

2  Lib.  xxiv.  16.     This  plant  is  the  Arum  of  Dioscorides   (lib.  ii. 
c.  142),  and  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  Egyptian  Arum.  —  Wern. 
Club. 


58  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

not  regard  a  Man  that  is  hunting  it ;  or  if  they  discover  him, 
they  will  look  with  Wonder  at  his  Bow  and  Arrows.     They 
pass  the  Seas,  swimming  by  Flocks,  in  a  long  Row,  each 
one  resting  his  Head  upon  the  Haunches  of  the  one  before 
him  ;  and  the  foremost  retireth  behind  by  turns.     This  is 
chiefly  observed  by  those  that  pass  from  Cilicia  to  Cyprus. 
They  do  not  see  the  Land,  but  swim   towards  it  by  their 
Smell.    The  Males  possess  Horns,  and  are  the  only  Animals 
that  cast  them  every  Year  at  a  certain  Time  of  the  Spring  : 
and  to  that  Purpose,  a  little  before  the  very  Day,  they  seek 
the  most  secret  Places.   When  the  Horns  are  shed,  they  keep 
close  hidden,  as  being  unarmed  ;  and  this  they  do  as  if  they 
grudged  that  any  one  should  have  any  Good  from  them.     It 
is  denied  that  the  Right  Horn  can  ever  be  found,  as  being 
endued  with  some  singular  Virtue  as  a  Medicine ;  and  this 
must  be  granted  to  be  a  very  wonderful  Thing,  considering 
that  in  Parks1  they  change  them  every  Year;  so  that  it  is 
thought  they  bury  them  in  the  Earth.     But  burn  which  of 
them  you  will,  the  Smell  of  it  driveth  Serpents  away,  and 
discovereth  them  who  are   subject  to  the  Epilepsy.     They 
carry  the  Marks  of  their  Age  on  their  Heads  ;    for   every 
Year  addeth  one  Branch  to  their  Horns,  until  they  come  to 
six  (sexcennes),   after   which   Time   the    same    Number   is 
renewed ;  so  that  their  Age  cannot  be  discerned  any  more 
by  the  Head,  but  old  Age  is  shown  by  their  Teeth  :  for  in 
the  latter  Case  they  have  few  or  no  Teeth,  and  are  without 
Branches  at  the  Root  of  the  Horns ;  whereas,  when  they 
were  younger  they  used  to  have  them  standing  out  in  front 
of  the  very  Forehead.    When  they  have  been  castrated2  they 

1  Vivariis,  Lib.  viii.  52.—  Wern.  Club. 

3  "  The  sympathy  between  that  part  of  the  system  which  regulates 
the  developement  of  the  horns  in  the  deer  tribe,  and  the  organs  of  gene- 
ration, is  very  remarkable.  For  instance,  if  a  stag  is  castrated  when  his 
horns  are  in  a  state  of  perfection,  they  will,  it  is  affirmed,  never  be  shed ; 
if  the  operation  is  performed  when  the  head  is  bare,  the  horns,  it  is  said, 
will  never  be  regenerated  ;  and  if  it  is  done  when  the  secretion  is  actually 
going  on,  a  stunted,  ill-formed  permanent  horn  is  the  result,  more  or  less 
developed,  according  to  the  period  at  which  the  animal  is  emasculated." — 
See  Penny  Cyclopaedia :  Art.  "  Deer."—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  59 

neither  cast  the  Horns  which  they  had  before,  nor  do  any 
new  ones  grow.  When  they  first  break  out  again,  they  are 
like  renewed  Kernels  of  dry  Skin  ;  then  they  grow  with 
tender  Stalks  into  reed-like  round  Excrescences,  feathered 
all  over  with  soft  Down.  So  long  as  they  are  destitute  of 
Horns  they  go  out  to  seek  Food  by  Night ;  the  Horns  grow 
hard  by  the  increasing  Heat  of  the  Sun  ;  and  then  they 
occasionally  try  them  against  Trees  ;  and  when  they  are 
satisfied  that  they  are  strong,  they  go  abroad  boldly.  It 
has  happened  that  some  of  them  have  been  taken  with  green 
Ivy  on  their  Horns,  inbred  there  since  the  Time  when  they 
employed  them  in  their  tender  State  against  some  Trees. 
Sometimes  they  are  of  a  shining  white  Colour,  such  as  was 
the  Hind  which  Q.  Serforius1  was  reported  to  have  had, 
and  which  he  persuaded  the  People  of  Spain  to  believe  to 
be  his  Soothsayer.  This  kind  of  Deer  maintain  a  Fight  with 
Serpents :  they  will  track  them  to  their  Holes,  and  by  the 
Strength  of  the  Breath  of  their  Nostrils  force  them  out :  and 
therefore  there  is  nothing  so  good  to  drive  away  Serpents 
as  the  Smell  of  burnt  Hartshorn.  But  against  their  Bite 
there  is  an  excellent  Remedy  from  the  Runnet  in  the  Maw 
of  a  Fawn  killed  in  the  Dam's  Belly.  It  is  generally  ac- 
knowledged that  Stags  live  long ;  for  an  hundred  Years  after 
Alexander  the  Great,  some  were  taken  with  golden  Collars 
that  had  been  affixed  to  them  by  that  Prince,  but  then  over- 
grown by  the  Skin  through  great  Stoutness.  This  Creature 
is  not  subject  to  feverish  Diseases,  but  he  is  effectual  to  cure 
it.  I  have  known  great  Ladies  accustomed  to  the  Use  every 
Morning  of  eating  this  Venison,  and  thereby  to  have  lived  to 
a  great  Age  without  having  Fevers ;  but  it  is  thought  an 
established  Remedy  in  the  highest  Degree  if  the  Stag  be 
struck  dead  with  one  Wound  only. 

1  See  Plutarch's  Life  of  Sertorius.— Went.  Club. 


60  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 
Of  the  Tragelephus,  and  the  Chameleon. 

OF  the  same  Kind  is  one  that  differs  only  in  the  Beard 
and  long  Shag  about  the  Shoulders,  and  which  they  call  Tra- 
gelaphon;1  and  this  breedeth  nowhere  but  about  the  River 
Phasis.  Africa  is  almost  the  only  Country  that  breedeth  no 
Stags,  but  it  produceth  Chameleons;2  although  India  hath 
them  in  greater  Number.  In  Shape  and  Size  it  resembleth 
a  Lizard,  but  it  standeth  higher  and  straighter  upon  its  Legs. 
The  Sides  are  joined  to  the  Belly,  as  in  Fishes;  and  it  hath 
Spines  projecting  as  they  have  ;  the  Snout  is  prominent, 
not  unlike  a  small  Swine,  with  a  very  long  Tail  sloping  away 
so  as  to  become  slender  at  the  End,  winding  round  and 
entangled  like  the  Viper's ;  the  Claws  are  hooked,  and  the 
Motion  is  slow,  as  in  the  Tortoise  ;  the  Body  is  rough  as 
the  Crocodile's ;  the  Eyes  are  in  a  hollow  Cavity,  and  they 
are  very  large,  near  each  other,  of  the  same  Colour  with  the 
rest  of  the  Body  :  it  never  openeth  its  Mouth,  and  there  is 
no  Motion  in  the  Pupil  when  it  looketh  about,  but  it  views 
Things  by  moving  the  whole  Ball  of  his  Eye ;  it  liveth 
aloft,  gaping  with  its  Mouth,  and  is  the  only  Creature  that 
feedeth  neither  of  Meat  nor  Drink,  but  hath  its  Nourish- 
ment of  Air  only  :  about  wild  Fig-trees3  it  is  a  wild  Beast, 
but  elsewhere  harmless.  But  the  Nature  of  its  Colour  is 
more  wonderful ;  for  every  now  and  then  it  changeth  it,  as 

1  Antelope  Picta.  —  PALLAS.     The  Nyl-ghau.  —  According  to  Ogilby 
("  Zool.  Proc."  1536),  the  Tragelaphus,  which  is  the  same  as  the  Hippela- 
phus  of  Aristotle,  is  the  Nyl-ghau  ;  but  Cuvier,  in  the  last  edition  of  his 
"  Regne  Animal,"  seems  to  consider  that  the  Cervus  Aristotelis  (Cuv.),  a 
deer  living  in  the  north  of  India,  is  the  animal  alluded  to.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Chamceleo  vulgaris. — LINN.     Book  xxviii.  c.  28. — There  is  a  contra- 
diction in  this  description ;  the  author  saying  in  one  place,  "  Nunquam  os 
aperit,"  and  presently  afterward,  "  Ipse  celsus  hiante  semper  ore."    The 
first  portion  of  this  quotation  Holland  has  rendered,  — "  He  is  always 
open-eyed,  and  never  closeth    hem." — Wern.  Club. 

3  About  the  time  when  they  offered  sacrifices  to  Vulcan  under  the  wild 
fig-tree;  that  is,  during  the  dog-days.  —Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  61 

well  in  the  Eyes  as  Tail  and  the  whole  Body :  and  what- 
ever Colour  it  only  toucheth,1  the  same  it  always  assumeth, 
unless  it  be  red  and  white.  When  it  is  dead,  it  becometh 
pale ;  the  Flesh  on  its  Head  and  Jaws,  and  at  the  Junction 
of  the  Tail,  is  very  little;  and  in  all  the  Body  besides,  none  at 
all.  All  its  blood  is  in  its  heart,  and  about  its  Eyes  ;  among 
the  Bowels  there  is  no  Spleen.  It  lieth  concealed  all  the 
Winter,  like  the  Lizards. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 
Of  the  Tarandus,  the  Lycaon,  and  the  Thoes. 

IN  Scythia  there  is  the  Tarandus,2  which  also  changeth  its 
Colour ;  and  no  other  Creature  bearing  Hair  doth  the  same, 
unless  it  be  the  Lycaon3  of  India,  which,  by  Report,  hath  a 
maned  Neck.  For  the  Thoes4  (which  is  a  Kind  of  Wolves 

1  The  most  noticed  peculiarity  of  this  reptile  is  its  change  of  colour ; 
and  the  exposition  of  this  feature  in  its  physiology  has  exercised  both  the 
ingenuity  and  the  imagination  of  many  observers.     Whatever  the  true 
cause  may  be,  it  has  little  to  do  with  the  colour  of  objects  placed  in  juxta- 
position, as  Pliny  maintains :  but  in  a  series  of  experiments  carried  on  for 
six  months  by  the  Editor,  on  a  specimen  in  his  possession,  it  seemed  to 
proceed  from  sensitive,  though  often  unconscious,  impressions  made  upon 
the  circulating  system  of  the  skin.    While  asleep,  the  slightest  shaking 
of  the  stalk  on  which  it  rested  produced  a  change :  and  while  the  faint 
light  of  a  candle  altered  the  tints,  a  shade  thrown  on  particular  parts 
prevented  the  colour  from  extending  to  them.     There  are  several  species 
of  the  chameleon,  although  the  ancients  seem  to  have  recognised  only 
one.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Cervus  Tarandus.  —  LINN.     The  Kein-deer.  —  The  fact  that  the 
rein-deer  is  subject  to  great  variety  of  colour,  even  in  a  wild  state,  pro- 
bably gave  rise  to  the  fancy  of  Pliny,  that  he  took  "  the  colour  of  all 
trees,  shrubs,  plants,  flowers,  and  places  wherein  he  lieth  when  he  retireth 
for  fear."—  Wern.  Club. 

3  The  Lycaon  was  doubtless  a  species  of  Hyaena,  but  it  is  not  easy  to 
identify  it ;  it  cannot  be  the  Hyaena-dog,  Canis  Lycaon  of  Fischer,  as 
that  species  has  no  mane,  and  is,  besides,  indigenous  to  South  Africa. — 
Wern.  Club. 

4  The  Theus,  or  Thos,  was  in  all  probability  some  species  nearly 
allied  to  the  Jackal,  Canis  Aureus,  LINN.    It  is  mentioned  by  Oppian, 
on  lib.  x.  74.     Hunting,  b.  iv. —  Wern.  Club. 


62  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

somewhat  longer  than  the  others,  and  differing  in  being 
shorter  legged,  swift  in  leaping,  living  by  Chace,  without 
doing  any  Harm  to  Man,  change  their  Habit,  not  their 
Colour ;  through  the  Winter  being  Shaggy,  but  in  Summer 
naked.  The  Tarandus  is  as  big  as  an  Ox,  with  a  Head  not  un- 
like a  Stag's,  but  greater;  the  Horns  branched,  cloven-hoofed, 
and  the  Hair  as  deep  as  in  the  Bear.  The  Hide  of  his  Back 
is  so  hard,  that  they  make  Breast- plates  of  it.  He  taketh 
the  Colour  of  all  Trees,  Shrubs,  Plants,  Flowers,  and  Places 
in  which  he  lieth  when  he  retireth  for  Fear  ;  and  therefore 
he  is  seldom  caught ;  but  when  he  likes  to  be  in  his  own 
Colour,  he  resembleth  an  Ass.  It  is  strange  that  the  bare 
Body  should  alter  into  so  many  Colours ;  but  more  strange 
that  the  Hair  also  should  so  change. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 
Of  the  Hystrix. 

THE  Hystrix1  is  produced  in  India  and  Africa,  and  is  a 
kind  of  Hedgehog.  The  Spines  of  the  Hystrix  are  longer 
than  those  of  the  Hedgehog  ;  and  when  he  stretcheth  his  Skin 
he  shooteth  them  from  him ;  when  the  Hounds  press  hard 
upon  him,  he  fixeth  them  in  their  Mouths,  and  darteth  them 
at  them  when  farther  off.  In  the  Winter  Months  he  lieth 
hid,  as  it  is  the  Nature  of  many  Beasts  to  do,  and  the  Bears 
above  the  rest. 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 
Of  Bears2  and  their  Young. 

THEY  couple  in  the  beginning  of  Winter,  and  not  after 
the  common  Manner  of  four-footed  Beasts,  but  lying  both 

1  Hystrix  cristata.— LINN.  The  Porcupine.— Aristotle  merely  glances 
at  the  power  which  this  animal  was  thought  to  possess  of  shooting  its 
quills  to  a  distance  at  its  enemies.  But  Pliny  here  dwells  upon  it  with 
his  usual  love  of  the  marvellous  :  and  JSlian,  Oppian,  and  Claudian  have 
repeated  the  tale  with  exaggerations.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  Ursus  Arctos. — LINN.     The  Brown  Bear.  — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  63 

along,  and  embracing  one  another  :  then  they  go  apart  into 
Caves,  where  thirty  Days  after  they  produce  their  Cubs, 
commonly  five  at  a  Time.  These  are  a  Lump  of  white  un- 
formed Flesh,1  little  bigger  than  Rats,  without  Eyes,  and 
without  Hair;  only  the  Claws  are  put  forth.  This  Lump, 
by  licking,  they  fashion  by  little  and  little ;  and  nothing  is 
more  rare  than  to  see  a  she-Bear  bringing  forth  her  Young : 
and  this  is  one  Cause  why  the  male  Bears  lie  hid  for 
forty  Days,  and  the  Female  for  four  Months.  If  they  have 
no  Caves,  they  build  themselves  Cabins  of  Wood,  by  ga- 
thering together  Boughs  and  Bushes,  in  order  to  be  im- 
pervious to  Rain ;  and  they  strew  soft  Leaves  upon  the 
Floor.  For  the  first  fourteen  Days  they  sleep  so  soundly, 
that  they  cannot  possibly  be  awaked,  even  with  Wounds.  In 
this  state  of  Drowsiness  they  grow  exceedingly  Fat.  This 
their  Grease2  is  a  good  Medicine  for  those  that  shed  their 
Hair.  These  (fourteen)  Days  being  past,  they  sit  up,  and 
live  by  sucking  their  fore  Feet.  Their  young  Cubs,  when 
stiff  with  Cold,  they  cherish  by  pressing  to  their  Bosom, 
much  as  Birds  do  that  sit  upon  their  Eggs.  A  wonderful 
Thing  is  told,  and  believed  by  Theophrastus,  that  if  Bears' 
Flesh3  be  taken  during  those  Days,  and  cooked,  and  then 
kept  safe,  it  will  grow.  At  this  Time  there  doth  not  appear 
any  Token  [of  Excrement]  of  Meat  that  they  have  eaten  ; 
and  very  little  Moisture  is  found  within  their  Belly.  Of 
Blood  some  few  small  Drops  lie  about  the  Heart  only,4  and 
none  at  all  in  the  whole  Body  besides.  When  Spring  is 
come,  they  quit  their  Den ;  and  at  that  Time  the  Males  are 
exceedingly  fat :  but  the  Reason  of  this  cannot  be  readily 
rendered  :  for,  as  we  said  before,  they  had  no  more  than 

1  In  proof  of  the  errors  of  this  account,  young  bears  have  been 
extracted  from  the  mother  after  she  has  been  killed ;  and  they  have  been 
found  to  have  their  parts  as  distinct  as  other  animals.  — Wern.  Club. 

2  Lib.  xxviii.  11.     It  is  also  a  famous  prescription  for  the  same  pur- 
pose in  the  present  day.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  Theophrastus  (de  Odoribus),  from  whom  Pliny  borrows  this,  does 
not  speak  of  bears'^/Zes^,  but  bears'  grease;  but  this  does  not  diminish  the 
wonder.  — Wern.  Club. 

4  Lib,  xi.  38. 


64  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

that   fortnight's   Sleep    to   fatten    them    with.     Being   now 
gotten  abroad,  the  first  Thing  is  to  devour  a  certain  Herb 
named  Aron,1  to  loosen   their  Intestines,  which   otherwise 
were  grown  together ;  and  they  prepare  their  Mouths  and 
Teeth  with  the  young  Shoots  of  Brambles.    They  are  subject 
many  Times  to  Dimness  of  Sight,  for  which  Cause  especially 
they  seek  after  Honeycombs,  that  the  Bees  might  settle  on 
them,  and  with  their  Stings   make  them  bleed  about  the 
Mouth,  and  by  that   means   relieve   the  Heaviness  which 
troubleth  their  Eyes.     Bears  are  as  weak  in  the   Head  as 
Lions  are  strong  in  that  part ;  and  therefore  when  they  are 
chased  hard,  and  ready  to  cast  themselves  headlong  from  a 
Rock,    they   cover   their   Heads   with   their  Paws,  as  with 
Hands,  and  so  throw  themselves  down.     And  often  in  the 
Arena  they  are  deprived  of  Life  with  a  Blow  on  the  Ear  with  a 
Man's  Fist.    In  Spain  it  is  believed,  that  in  their  Brain  there 
is  a  poisonous  Quality  ;  and  if  it  be  taken  in  Drink,  it  driveth 
Men  into  a  kind  of  Madness,  as  if  they  were  Bears  :  in  proof 
of  which,  when  they  are  killed  in  the  Shows,  they  burn  the 
Heads.     They  also  walk  erect  on  their  two  hind  Feet :  they 
creep  down  from  a  Tree  backward :  when  they  fight  with 
Bulls  their  Manner  is  to  hang  with  all  their  Feet  about  their 
Mouth  and  Horns,  and  so  with  the  Weight  of  their  Bodies 
weary  them.   There  is  not  a  living  Creature  more  crafty,  and 
at  the  same  time  foolish  in  its  Viciousness.     It  is  recorded  in 
the  Annals,  that  when  M.  Piso  and  M.  Messala  were  Con- 
suls, Domitius  ^E?wbarbus9  Curule  .ZEdile,  on  the  fourteenth 
Day  before  the  Calends  of  October,  exhibited  one  hundred 
Numidian  Bears  in  the  Circus,  and  as  many  ^Ethiopian  Hun- 
ters.    And  I  wonder  that  the  Chronicle  nameth  Numidian, 
since  it  is  known  that  Bears  are  not  produced  in  Africa.2 

1  Lib.  viii.  32,  p.  57. 

2  Lib.  viii.  58.    The  existence  of  bears  in  Africa  has  been  a  subject  of 
dispute  in  modern  times,  and  even  Cuvier  seems  to  have  entertained 
doubts  as  to  their  being  found  in  that  vast  continent.    But  Ehrenberg 
(Symbolce  Physical)  says  he  has  hunted  the  bear  in  Abyssinia,  and  adds, 
that "  Forskal  has  brought  tidings  of  an  indigenous  African  bear."— Wern. 
Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  65 

CHAPTER  XXXVII. 

Of  the  Rats  of  Pontus,  and  the  Alps  ;  also  of  Hedgehogs. 

THE  Rats  of  Pontus,1  those  at  least  which  are  white, 
come  not  abroad  in  the  Winter :  they  have  a  most  exquisite 
Taste  in  their  Feeding;  but  I  wonder  how  the  Authors  that 
have  written  this,  should  be  able  to  know  it.  Those  of  the 
Alps,2  also,  which  are  as  big  as  Badgers,3  lie  concealed  during 
Winter ;  but  they  are  provided  with  Victuals  before-hand, 
which  they  gather  together  and  carry  into  their  Holes.  And 
some  say,  that  when  the  Male  or  Female,  by  turns,  is  laden 
with  a  Bundle  of  Herbs,  as  much  as  it  can  grasp  within  the 
four  Legs,  it  lieth  upon  the  Back,  and  then  the  other  taketh 
hold  by  the  Tail  with  its  Mouth,  and  draweth  it  into  the 
Cave :  and  hence  it  is  that  at  that  Time  their  Backs  are 
bare.  The  like  of  these  live  also  in  Egypt;4  and  in  the  same 
Manner  they  sit  upon  their  Buttocks,5  and  go  by  Starts  on 
their  two  hind  Feet,  using  their  Fore  Feet  instead  of  Hands. 

Hedgehogs6  also  prepare  their  Provisions  for  Winter. 
They  roll  themselves  upon  Apples  that  lie  on  the  Ground, 
and  which  thus  become  fixed  on  their  Spines ;  and  one  more 
besides  they  take  in  their  Mouth,  and  so  carry  them  into 
hollow  Trees.  By  their  stopping  one  or  other  of  the  Holes 
of  their  Shelter,  Men  know  when  the  Wind  will  change 
from  North  to  South.  When  they  perceive  some  one  hunt- 
ing them,  they  draw  their  Mouth  and  Feet  close  together, 
with  all  their  lower  Part,  where  they  have  a  thin  and  soft 
Down,  and  so  roll  themselves  into  the  Shape  of  a  Ball 

1  Mustela   erminea.  —  LINN.     The  Ermine  Weasel.  —  The  Ponticus 
Mus  is  supposed  to  be  the  Ermine,  or  some  nearly  allied  species.  — Wern. 
Club. 

2  Mus  Marmota.  —  LINN.     The  Marmot.  — The  Alpinus  Mus  is  pro- 
bably identical  with  the  Marmot.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  Lib.  viii.  38. 

4  Dipus  Sagitta.  —  SWAIN.     The  Gerbo.— That  the  Egyptian  Mus  of 
Pliny  is  the  Gerbo,  or  Jerboa,  there  can  be  no  doubt. —  Wern.  Club. 

5  Lib.  x.  65. 

6  Erinaceus  Europaus. —  LINN.     The  Hedgehog.  —  Wern.  Club. 

VOL.  III.  F 


66  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  VIII. 

that  they  cannot  be  laid  hold  of  but  by  their  Spines.  In  the 
last  Extremity1  they  let  their  Water  go;  and  this  Fluid  hath 
a  poisonous  Quality  to  rot  their  Skin  and  Spine,  for  which 
they  know  that  they  are  chased  and  taken.  And  therefore 
it  is  a  point  of  Skill  not  to  hunt  them  before  it  is  ascertained 
that  they  have  let  their  Urine  go,  and  then  their  Skin  is 
very  good ;  but  otherwise  it  is  rotten  and  weak :  all  the 
Spines  falling  off  as  being  putrified,  even  though  they  should 
escape  and  continue  alive.  And  this  is  the  Cause  that  they 
never  drench  themselves  with  this  Mischief  except  in  the 
last  Hope,  for  they  cannot  endure  the  Smell  of  their  own 
Poison,  and  they  do  what  they  can  to  spare  themselves, 
reserving  it  for  the  utmost  time  of  Extremity,  so  that  they  are 
ready  to  be  taken  before  they  do  it.  The  Ball  into  which  this 
Creature  forms  itself  is  compelled  to  open  by  sprinkling  it 
with  warm  Water,  and  then  by  hanging  it  up  by  one  of  its  hind 
Feet ;  it  then  dies  with  Famine  and  Suspension  ;  for  otherwise 
it  is  not  possible  to  kill  them  and  save  their  Skin.  Many  do 
not  hesitate  to  say,  that  this  Animal  contributes  no  good  to 
human  Life,  except  those  Spines ;  and  that  the  soft  Fleece  of 
Wool  that  Sheep  bear  without  them  would  have  been  be- 
stowed upon  Mankind  in  vain:  for  with  this  Skin2  Garments 
are  polished.  Fraud  hath  gotten  great  Gain  by  the  Mono- 
poly of  this  Commodity ;  although  there  hath  not  been  any 
one  Evil  against  which  there  have  been  more  frequent  Acts 
of  the  Senate  ;  and  almost  every  Prince  hath  been  troubled 
concerning  it  with  grievous  Complaints  out  of  the  Provinces. 

CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 
Of  the  Leontophonos,  Lynx,  Meles,  Sciurus. 

THERE   are   two  other   kinds  of  Animals  whose   Urine 
worketh  remarkable  Effects.     We  have  undertaken  to  call 

1  This  strange  assertion,  in  which  Pliny  has  been  followed  by  his 
numerous  plagiarists,  and  amongst  them  by  Buffon,  appears  at  least  to  be 
unsupported  by  later  observation,  and  is  probably  a  mere  fiction. — Wcrn. 
Club. 

2  Or,  rather,  instead  of  teazels  that  shearmen  use. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  67 

the  small  one  Leontophonos ; l  and  it  is  bred  in  no  Country 
but  where  the  Lion  is  produced ;  and  such  is  its  Violence, 
that  the  Lion,  before  whom  all  other  Creatures  tremble, 
dieth  immediately  if  he  taste  of  it.  And  therefore  they  that 
chase  wild  Beasts  burn  the  Body  of  this  Animal,  and  sprin- 
kle the  Powder  on  the  Pieces  of  other  Flesh,  as  Flour  is 
dusted  over  Meat  in  cooking,  by  way  of  Bait ;  and  thus  with 
the  Ashes  of  his  Enemy  they  kill  him,  so  adverse  to  his 
Nature  is  this  Pest !  No  Wonder,  therefore,  if  the  Lion 
hate  it,  and  so  soon  as  he  spieth  it  he  crusheth  it,  and  so 
killeth  it  without  setting  Tooth  to  its  Body.  The  Leon- 
tophonos, for  its  part,  is  also  prepared  to  sprinkle  him  with 
its  Urine,  knowing  that  this  is  a  deadly  Poison  to  the 
Lion. 

In  those  Countries  where  the  Lynxes  breed,2  their  Mois- 
ture, after  it  is  made,  congealeth  and  hardeneth  into  precious 
Stones  resembling  Carbuncles,  shining  of  the  Colour  of  Fire, 
and  called  Lyncurium.3  And  on  this  Account  many  have 
written,  that  Amber  is  formed  after  the  same  Manner.  The 
Lynxes  know  thus  much,  and  for  Envy  understand  to  cover 
their  Urine  with  Earth ;  and  so  it  hardeneth  the  more 
quickly. 

1  The  Leontophonos  is  a  name  invented  by  Pliny  himself,  and  the 
creature  meant  by  it  altogether  unknown.  — Wern.  Club. 

2  Lib.  viii.  19. 

3  Lib.  xxxvii.  2,  3,  10.     TheLyncuria  have  been  thought  to  be  fossil 
Belenmites.     The  ancients  had  a  legend  that  these  substances  came  from 
the  Lynx,  and  they  called  them  Lapides  Lyncis,  as  well  as  Lyncuria. 
Those  which  were  found  in  Mount  Ida  were  called  Idcei  dactyli,  or  Idaean 
fingers,  from  their  supposed  resemblance  to  those  members.     It  is,  how- 
ever, by  no  means  clear,  that  the  ancients  intended  to  describe  Belemnites 
under  these  appellations.     Ovid,  Met.  xv.  413,  says :  — 

"  India  when  conquer'd,  on  the  conquering  god 
For  planted  vines  the  sharp-eyed  lynx  bestow'd, 
Whose  moisture,  shed  before  it  touches  earth, 
Congeals  in  air,  and  gives  the  gems  their  birth." 

The  different  accounts  of  Pliny,  indeed,  are  by  no  means  uniform, 
and  seem  rather  to  refer  to  several  kinds  of  gems.  Theophrastus  also 
describes  them  as  gems  of  a  very  solid  texture,  on  which  seals  were 
engraved.  —  Wern.  Club. 


68  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

The  Badger1  (Meles)  hath  another  sort  of  Craft  when 
under  the  Influence  of  Fear;  for  they  will  so  draw  in  their 
Breath  as  to  distend  their  Skin,  and  thus  repel  the  biting  of 
the  Dogs  and  the  Blow  of  the  Hunters. 

Squirrels2  also  foresee  a  Change  of  Weather ;  and  they 
shut  up  their  Holes  on  that  Side  from  which  the  Wind  is 
about  to  blow,  and  open  the  Doors  on  the  other  Side.  More- 
over, they  possess  a  broad  bushy  Tail  with  which  to  cover 
their  whole  Body.  Thus  some  Creatures  provide  Food 
against  Winter,  and  others  are  fed  with  Sleep  only. 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 
Of  the  Viper,  Snails,  and  Lizards. 

OF  Serpents  it  is  said,  that  the  Viper3  alone  lieth  hid  in 
the  Ground;  whereas  the  rest  keep  within  Hollows  of  Trees 
or  Rocks ;  and  otherwise  they  endure  Hunger  a  whole  Year, 
provided  they  be  kept  from  extreme  Cold.  All  the  Time  of 
their  Retreat  they  sleep,  and  are  without  Poison.4 

In  like  manner  do  Snails  ;5  and  not  only  in  the  Winter, 
but  in  Summer  again,  adhering  so  closely  to  Rocks,  that 
although  by  Force  they  are  plucked  off  and  turned  upward, 
still  they  will  not  come  out  of  their  Shell.  In  the  Balearic 
Islands  there  are  some  called  Cavaticae,  which  never  creep 
out  of  the  Holes  in  the  Ground  ;  neither  do  they  live  on  any 
Herb,  but  they  hang  together  like  Clusters  of  Grapes.  Ano- 
ther Sort  there  is  of  them,  but  not  so  common;  which  hide 
themselves  within  the  Cover  of  their  Shell,  which  sticks  fast 
to  them :  these  lie  always  buried  in  the  Ground,  and  were  in 

1  Meles  vulgaris.  —  DESMAREST.     The  Badger.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Sciurus  vulgaris.  —  LINN.     The  Squirrel. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Coluber  Berus.  —  LINN.     The  Common  Viper.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  "  The  Viper,  like  the  other  reptiles,  seeks  a  secret  and  secure  place 
in  which  to  hibernate  during  the  cold  months  of  the  year.     Here  several 
are  found  entwined  together,  and  in  a  very  torpid  condition ;  and  if  at 
this  period  a  viper  be  made  to  wound  an  animal  with  its  poison  fang,  no 
injury  is  likely  to  result  from  it:  the  poison  does  not  exist  at  all,  or  is 
inert."— BELL'S  British  Reptiles.  — Wern.  Club. 

5  Cochlea.    Lib.  ix.  56. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  69 

Times  past  digged  up  only  about  the  Sea-coast  of  the  Alps ; 
but  of  late  they  have  been  dug  up  in  Veliternum  also.  But 
the  very  best  of  them  all  are  in  the  Island  Astypalaea. 

Lizards1  are  the  most  deadly  Enemies  to  Snails;  and  Men 
say  that  they  do  not  live  above  six  Months.  In  Arabia  are 
Lizards  of  a  Cubit  in  Length  :  and  in  the  Mountain  Nisa,  in 
India,  they  are  four-and-twenty  Feet  long;  some  tawny, 
some  light  red,  and  others  sky-blue. 

CHAPTER  XL. 
Of  Dogs* 

AMONG  those  Creatures  which  associate  with  us  there 
are  many  Things  worthy  of  being  known ;  and  the  Dog  is 
beyond  all  others  the  most  faithful  to  Man,  and  the  Horse 
next.  We  have  heard,  beyond  doubt,  of  a  Dog,  that  in 
Defence  of  his  Master  fought  hard  against  Thieves  ;  and 
although  he  was  wounded  through  the  Body  in  many  Places, 
yet  would  he  not  abandon  him,  but  drove  away  the  wild 
Birds  and  savage  Beasts :  also  of  another  in  Epirus,  who  in 
a  great  Assembly  of  the  People,  recognising  the  Man  who 
had  murdered  his  Master,  by  barking  at  and  tearing  him 
furiously,  compelled  him  to  confess  the  Crime.  Two  hundred 
Dogs  restored  from  Exile  a  King  of  the  Garamantes ;  fight- 
ing against  all  that  opposed  him.  The  Colophonians,  and 
also  the  Castabaleans,  possessed  Squadrons  (Cohorts)  of 
Dogs  for  War  ;  and  these  were  put  in  the  front  of  the  Battle, 
and  were  never  known  to  draw  back.  These  were  their 
trustiest  Auxiliaries,  and  never  in  want  of  Pay.  In  a  Battle 
when  the  Cimbri  were  slain,  the  Dogs  defended  their  Houses 
placed  upon  the  Waggons.  Jason  the  Lycian  had  a  Dog, 
which,  after  his  Master  was  slain,  would  never  eat  Meat,  but 

1  When  Pliny  tells  us  that  some  Lizards  were  a  cubit  in  length,  while 
others  were  twenty-four  feet,  it  will  hardly  be  necessary  to  inform  the 
reader  that  the  Romans  included  many  different  species,  and  even  genera, 
under  the  terms  Lacerta  and  Lacertus.  —Wern.  Club. 

2  Camsfamiliaris.  —  'Liyx.    The  Dog.  —  Wern.  Club. 


70  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

pined  himself  to  Death.  Duris  maketh  mention  of  another 
Dog,  which  he  named  Hircanus,  that  when  the  funeral  Fire 
of  King  Lysimachus  was  set  a-burning,  leapt  into  the  Flame. 
And  so  did  another  at  the  Funeral  of  King  Hiero.  Also 
Phylistus  commemorateth  the  Dog  of  King  Pyrrhus,  and 
another  belonging  to  the  Tyrant  Gelo.  They  report  of  a  Dog 
belonging  to  Nicomedes,  King  of  Numidia,  which  flew  upon 
Consingis  his  Wife  for  toying  overwantonly  with  her  Hus- 
band. And  even  with  us,  Volcatius,  a  noble  Gentleman, 
who  taught  Geselius  the  Civil  Law,  as  he  returned  Home  one 
Evening,  riding  upon  an  Hackney  from  a  Village  near  the 
City,  was  defended  from  a  Highwayman  by  his  Dog.  Ccelius, 
likewise,  a  Senator,  lying  sick  at  Placentia,  was  violently 
attacked  by  armed  Men,  but  they  were  not  able  to  wound 
him,  until  they  had  killed  the  Dog.  But  that  exceedeth  all, 
which  happened  in  our  Time,  and  standeth  upon  Record  in 
the  Registers :  when  Appius  Junius  and  P.  Silus  were  Con- 
suls, and  T.  Sabinus  and  his  Servants  were  punished  on  ac- 
count of  Nero  the  Son  of  Germanicus :  one  of  them  that  was 
put  to  Death  had  a  Dog  which  could  not  be  kept  from  the 
Prison ;  and  when  his  Master  was  thrown  down  the  Stairs 
called  Scalse  Gemonise,  he  would  not  depart  from  his  dead 
Body,  but  kept  up  a  most  piteous  Howling  about  it,  in  the 
Sight  of  a  great  Multitude  of  Romans  that  stood  about  it; 
and  when  one  of  the  Company  threw  the  Dog  a  piece  of 
Meat,  he  carried  it  to  the  Mouth  of  his  dead  Master.  When 
the  dead  Body  was  thrown  into  the  Tiber,  the  Dog  swam 
after  it,  and  endeavoured  to  bear  it  afloat ;  and  a  large  Num- 
ber of  People  poured  out  of  the  City  to  behold  the  Fidelity 
of  the  Animal.  They  are  the  only  Animals  that  know  their 
Master ;  and  if  an  unknown  Person  approach  suddenly,  they 
are  aware  of  his  coming.  They  are  the  only  Animals  that 
know  their  own  Names,  and  the  People  of  the  House  by 
the  Sound  of  their  Voice.  They  remember  the  Way,  how- 
ever long  it  is,  if  they  have  once  gone  over  it.  And  there  is 
no  Creature,  beside  Man,  that  hath  a  better  Memory.  Their 
Violence  and  Fury  are  appeased  by  a  Man  sitting  down 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  71 

upon  the  Ground.1  The  longer  we  live  the  more  Things  we 
observe  still  in  Dogs ;  but  their  Skill  and  Sagacity  are 
chiefly  displayed  in  Hunting :  they  examine  and  follow  up 
the  Footmarks,  leading  the  Hunter  who  attends  them  to  the 
very  Place  where  the  Beast  lieth  ;  and  having  gotten  an  Eye 
of  his  Game,  how  silent  and  secret,  how  significant  is  their 
Discovery  to  the  Hunter,  first  wagging  the  Tail,  and  mark- 
ing with  their  Nose !  And  even  when  Dogs  are  worn  out, 
weak  and  blind,  Men  carry  them  in  their  Arms  to  hunt, 
to  wind  the  Beast,  and  by  Scent  to  show  by  their  pointing 
of  the  Nose  where  the  Beast  is  at  Harbour.  The  Indians 
desire  to  procure  a  Cross  between  the  Dog  and  the  Tiger ; 
and  for  this  Purpose,  at  the  proper  Time,  they  tie  the 
Bitches  in  the  Woods.  They  suppose  the  first  and  second 
Litter  of  such  as  are  thus  bred  to  be  too  fierce ;  but  the  third 
they  bring  up.  The  Gauls  do  the  same  by  their  Dogs  that 
are  produced  from  Wolves;  and  of  which  they  have  Flocks, 

1  That  the  fury  of  a  dog  is  mitigated  by  a  man's  sitting  down,  Homer 
also  informs  us,  Odyssey,  xiv.  33  : — 

"  Soon  as  Ulysses  near  the  inclosure  drew, 
With  open  mouths  the  furious  mastiffs  flew  : 
Down  sat  the  sage,  and  cautious  to  withstand, 
Let  fall  the  offensive  truncheon  from  his  hand. 
Sudden  the  master  runs ;  aloud  he  calls ; 
And  from  his  hasty  hand  the  leather  falls ; 
With  showers  of  stones  he  drives  them  far  away ; 
The  scattering  dogs  around  at  distance  bay." —  POPE. 

Mure,  in  his  "  Journal  of  a  Tour  in  Greece  and  the  Ionian  Islands," 
tells  us,  that  "  at  Argos  one  evening,  at  the  table  of  General  Gordon, 
then  commanding  in  chief  in  the  Morea,  the  conversation  happened  to 
turn,  as  it  frequently  does  when  tourists  are  in  company,  on  the  subject 
of  the  number  and  fierceness  of  the  Greek  dogs  ;  when  one  of  the  com- 
pany remarked  that  he  knew  a  very  simple  expedient  for  appeasing  their 
fury.  Happening,  on  a  journey,  to  miss  his  road,  and  being  overtaken 
by  darkness,  he  sought  refuge  for  the  night  at  a  pastoral  settlement  by 
the  wayside.  As  he  approached,  the  dogs  rushed  out  upon  him,  and  the 
consequences  might  have  been  serious  had  he  not  been  rescued  by  an  old 
shepherd,  the  Eumseus  of  the  fold,  who  sallied  forth,  and  finding  that  the 
intruder  was  but  a  benighted  traveller,  after  pelting  off  his  assailants, 


72  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

that  have  for  their  Leader  and  Captain  some  one  Dog :  him 
they  accompany  when  they  hunt ;  him  they  are  directed  by: 
for  they  keep  an  Order  among  themselves  of  Mastership.  It 
is  certain  that  the  Dogs  which  live  near  the  Nile  lap  of  the 
River1  as  they  run,  that  they  may  not  afford  an  Opportunity 
to  the  Greediness  of  the  Crocodiles.  When  Alexander  the 
Great  made  his  Journey  into  India,  the  King  of  Albania 
gave  him  a  Dog  of  extraordinary  Size  ;  and  Alexander  taking 
great  Delight  in  such  an  Example  of  a  Dog,  commanded 
them  to  let  loose  on  him  Bears,  and  afterwards  wild  Boars ; 
and  last  of  all,  fallow  Deers ;  but  he  lay  still  with  silent 
Contempt.  This  great  Commander,  a  Man  of  high  Mind, 
offended  at  the  Laziness  of  so  great  a  Body,  commanded 
that  he  should  be  killed.  News  of  this  went  presently  to  the 
King ;  and  therefore  he  sent  a  second  Dog,  with  this  Mes- 
sage :  That  he  should  not  make  trial  of  this  too  against 
small  Beasts,  but  set  him  against  a  Lion  or  an  Elephant : 
adding,  that  he  had  no  more  than  those  two  ;  and  if  this 
were  killed  likewise,  it  was  not  likely  he  would  have  more  of 
that  Race.  Alexander  made  no  delay,  and  presently  saw  a 
Lion  torn  to  Pieces.  Afterwards  he  commanded  them  to 
bring  out  an  Elephant,  and  in  no  Sight  did  he  take  greater 
Pleasure  than  in  this.  For  the  Dog's  rough,  shaggy  Hair, 

gave  him  a  hospitable  reception  in  his  hut.  His  guest  made  some  remark 
on  the  watchfulness  and  zeal  of  his  dogs,  and  on  the  danger  to  which  he 
had  been  exposed  on  their  attack.  The  old  man  replied  that  it  was  his 
own  fault  for  not  taking  the  customary  precaution  in  such  an  emergency, — 
that  he  ought  to  have  stopped,  and  sat  down,  until  some  person  whom  the 
animals  knew  came  to  protect  him.  As  this  expedient  was  new  to  the 
traveller,  he  made  some  further  inquiries,  and  was  assured,  that  if  any 
person  in  such  a  predicament  will  simply  seat  himself  on  the  ground,  lay- 
ing aside  his  weapons  of  defence,  the  dogs  will  also  squat  in  a  circle  round 
him ;  that  as  long  as  he  remains  quiet,  they  will  follow  his  example ;  but 
as  soon  as  he  rises,  and  moves  forward,  they  will  renew  the  assault." — 
Wern.  Club. 

1  "  I  was  very  well  pleased  to  see  here,  for  the  first  time,  two  shepherd 
dogs  lapping  up  the  water  from  the  stream,  then  lying  down  in  it  with 
great  seeming  leisure  and  satisfaction.  It  refuted  the  old  fable  that  the 
dogs  living  on  the  banks  of  the  Nile  run  as  they  drink,  for  fear  of  the 
crocodile."  —  BRUCE'S  Travels,  vol.  ii.  p.  7.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  73 

stood  erect  over  his  whole  Body,  and  his  loud  barking 
sounded  like  Thunder.  Soon  after  he  leapeth  and  flieth  upon 
him,  rising  and  mounting  against  the  great  Beast,  now  on 
one  Side,  and  then  on  the  other,  in  skilful  Combat,  ac- 
cording as  Opportunity  offered,  one  while  assailing  and 
another  while  avoiding  his  Enemy  ;  so  that  with  continual 
turning  round,  the  Elephant  grew  giddy  in  the  Head,  so 
that  he  came  tumbling  down  to  the  Ground,  which  shook 
with  the  Fall.  Dogs  bear  Young  once  in  a  Year ;  and  the 
due  Time  for  them  to  be  with  Whelps  is  when  they  are  a 
Year  old.  They  go  with  Young  threescore  Days.  Their 
Puppies  come  blind  into  the  World ;  and  the  more  Milk 
they  suck,  the  later  it  is  before  they  receive  their  Sight :  but 
it  is  never  above  twenty  Days  before  they  see,  and  they  do 
not  open  their  Eyes  under  seven  Days  old.  Some  say  that  if 
but  one  be  born  at  a  Litter,  it  will  see  in  nine  Days ;  if  two, 
it  will  be  in  ten  Days ;  and  the  more  Puppies  she  hath,  the 
more  Days  it  will  be  in  that  Proportion  before  they  see : 
also,  that  the  Bitch-whelp  which  cometh  of  the  first  Litter 
discerns  Fairies.1  The  best  of  the  whole  Litter  is  that  Whelp 
which  is  last  to  begin  to  see ;  or  that  which  the  Bitch  car- 
rieth  first  into  her  Kennel.  The  Madness  of  Dogs  is  most 
dangerous  to  a  Man,  as  we  have  said  before,  while  Syrius  is 
burning  hot ;  for  they  that  are  so  bitten  have  a  deadly  Fear 
of  Water.  To  prevent  this,  therefore,  it  is  good  for  thirty 
Days  to  mingle  Hen's  Dung  with  the  Meat  of  the  Dogs ;  or, 
if  the  Disease  be  coming  on,  Hellebore. 

CHAPTER  XLI. 
Against  the  Bite  of  a  mad  Dog. 

THE  sovereign  Remedy  against  this  Bite  was  revealed 
lately  by  a  certain  Oracle  :2  being  the  Root  of  a  wild  Rose, 

1  The  Fauni  here  mentioned,  and  again  Lib.  xxv.  4,  and  which  we 
have  translated  by  the  modern  term  "  Fairies,"  were  a  species  of  Incubi, 
supposed  to  occasion  the  nightmare  and  other  similar  diseases. — Wern. 
Club. 

3  Lib.  xxv.  2. 


74  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

called  Cynorrhodos.  Columella  writeth,  that  when  a  Whelp 
is  exactly  forty  Days  old,  if  his  Tail  be  bitten  off  at  the 
nethermost  Joint,  and  the  Sinew  that  cometh  after  be  taken 
away,  neither  will  the  Tail  grow  any  more,  nor  the  Dog  ever 
become  mad.  I  have  myself  observed,  that  among  the 
Prodigies  it  is  reported,  that  a  Dog  spoke  ;  as  also  that  a 
Serpent  barked  at  the  Time  when  Tarquin  was  driven  from 
the  Kingdom. 

CHAPTER  XLII. 
Of  the  Nature  of  Horses. I 

THE  same  Alexander  of  whom  we  have  spoken,  had  a 
very  uncommon  Horse,  which  they  called  Bucephalus  ;  either 
from  his  stern  Look,  or  from  the  Mark  of  a  Bull's  Head  im- 
printed on  his  Shoulder.  It  is  reported  of  Alexander,  that 
being  but  a'  Boy,  he  was  so  much  attracted  by  his  handsome 
Appearance,  that  he  bought  him  out  of  the  Flock  of  Philo- 
nicus  the  Pharsalian,  at  the  Price  of  sixteen  Talents.  He 
would  suffer  no  Man  to  sit  on  his  Back  but  Alexander,  when 
he  had  the  royal  Saddle  and  Furniture  on ;  rejecting  others 
entirely.  The  same  Horse  was  of  memorable  service  in 
Battles,  and  being  wounded  at  the  Assault  of  Thebes  he 
would  not  suffer  Alexander  to  alight  and  mount  upon  ano- 
ther. Many  other  Things  of  the  same  kind  he  did  ;  on  Ac- 
count of  which,  when  he  was  dead,  the  King  conducted  his 
Funeral  sumptuously  ;  erected  a  Tomb  for  him,  and  about  it 
built  a  City  that  bore  his  Name.  C&sar  the  Dictator  like- 
wise had  a  Horse  which  would  not  suffer  any  Man  to  ride 
him  but  his  Master ;  and  the  same  Horse  had  his  Forefeet 
resembling  those  of  a  Man  ;  and  its  Statue  so  formed  is 
placed  before  the  Temple  of  Venus  Genetrix.  Divus  Au- 
gustus also  formed  a  Tomb  for  his  Horse ;  concerning  which 
there  is  a  Poem  by  Germanicus  Ccesar.  At  Agrigentum 
there  are  Pyramids  on  the  Tombs  of  many  Horses.  Juba 
reporteth,  that  Semiramis  loved  a  Horse  usque  ad  coitum. 
The  Scythians  make  a  great  Noise  of  the  Glory  of  their 

1  Equus  caballus.  —  LINN.     The  Horse.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  75 

Horses  and  Cavalry.  A  Chieftain  of  theirs  happening  in 
Combat  on  a  Challenge  to  be  slain  by  his  Enemy,  when  the 
Conqueror  came  to  take  the  Spoil,  he  was  killed  by  the 
Kicks  and  Biting  of  the  Horse  of  the  conquered.  There  was 
another  Horse,  that  when  the  Covering  was  removed  from 
his  Eyes,  and  he  knew  that  he  had  served  as  a  Stallion  to  his 
own  Dam,  rushed  to  a  Precipice,  and  threw  himself  down 
and  died.  We  find,  also,  that  in  the  Territory  of  Reate,  an 
Horsekeeper  was  torn  upon  the  same  Occasion  of  a  Mare. 
For  surely  these  Animals  understand  their  Relationship ; 
and  therefore  Colts  will  in  the  Flock  more  willingly  keep 
Company  with  their  Sisters  of  the  former  Year,  than  with 
the  Mare  their  Mother.  Horses  are  so  docile,  that  we 
find  in  the  Army  of  the  Sybaritani,  the  whole  Troop  of  Horse- 
men had  their  Horses  accustomed  to  be  moved  to  a  certain 
Dance  at  the  Sound  of  Music.  They  have  an  Anticipation 
of  a  Battle,  and  mourn  the  Loss  of  their  Masters;  some- 
times also,  they  shed  tears  for  Love  of  them.  When  King 
Nicomedes  was  slain,  his  Horse  starved  itself  to  Death. 
Philarchus  reporteth,  that  King  Antiochus  having  in  Battle 
slain  Centaretus,  a  Galatian,  became  possessed  of  his  Horse, 
and  mounted  him  in  a  triumphant  manner ;  but  the  Horse, 
seized  with  Indignation,  would  not  be  restrained  by  the 
Bridle,  but  ran  furiously  to  a  Precipice,  and  threw  itself 
down  ;  where  both  Horse  and  Man  perished  together.  Phi- 
listus  writeth,  that  when  Dionysius  left  his  Horse  stickng 
fast  in  the  Mire  that  he  might  save  himself,  the  Animal 
followed  the  Tracks  of  his  Master,  with  a  Swarm  of  Bees 
settling  in  his  Mane ;  which  was  the  first  Presage  that  in- 
duced Dionysius  to  usurp  the  Tyranny.  The  variety  of  their 
Skill  cannot  be  expressed ;  and  those  who  throw  Darts 
have  Proof  of  their  entire  Obedience,  in  urging  them  to  the 
most  difficult  Attempts  with  great  Dexterity  and  striving  of 
the  Body.  They  even  gather  up  Darts  from  the  Ground, 
and  reach  them  to  the  Horseman  ;  and  when  they  are  fast- 
ened to  the  Chariots  in  the  Circus  they  display  beyond  a 
doubt  their  Consciousness  of  Encouragement  and  Glory.  At 
the  Secular  Circensian  Games  exhibited  bv  Claudius  Ccesar, 


76  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

although  the  Driver  was  thrown  from  the  Chariot  within  the 
Bars,  the  Horses  with  the  white  Livery  won  the  Palm,  and 
obtained  the  first  Honour;  throwing  down  whatever  stood  in 
the  Way,  and  doing  all  that  needed  to  be  done  against  their 
Rivals,  as  well  as  if  the  most  skilful  Driver  had  been  in  the 
Chariot ;  so  that  Men  were  ashamed  to  see  their  Skill  over- 
matched by  Horses ;  and  when  they  had  performed  their 
Race  according  to  Law,  they  stood  still  at  the  Goal.  A 
greater  Augury  happened  in  old  Time,  when  in  the  Plebeian 
Circensian  Games,  the  Driver  was  thrown  out  of  the  Cha- 
riot, and  yet  the  Horses  ran  directly  into  the  Capitol,  as  if 
he  had  stood  still  in  his  Place  ;  and  there  they  ran  three  times 
round  the  Temple.  But  the  greatest  of  all  was,  that  the 
Horses  of  Ratumenas  came  thither  from  Veij,  with  the 
Palm  and  Crown  which  they  had  won  there,  after  they  had 
thrown  out  their  Master,  who  had  conquered  in  the  Games 
at  that  City;  from  whom  the  Gate  (Ratumena)1  took  its 
Name.  The  Sarmatians,  when  they  intend  to  take  a  great 
Journey,  prepare  their  Horses  two  Days  before,  by  giving 
them  no  Meat,  and  only  allow  them  a  little  Drink ;  and  thus 
they  will  ride  them  an  hundred  and  fifty  Miles  at  one  Stretch. 
Some  Horses  live  fifty  Years,  but  Mares  not  so  long.  In  five 
Years  the  latter  come  to  their  full  Growth,  but  Horses  grow 
one  Year  longer.  The  Beauty  of  Horses,  such  as  a  Man 
would  choose  for  the  best,  hath  been  very  elegantly  and  com- 
pletely described  by  the  Poet  Virgil.'1  And  we  also  have 
spoken  of  the  same  Thing  in  a  Book  lately  put  forth,  con- 
cerning Dart-throwing  on  Horseback  ;  and  about  what  is 

1  Plutarch's  account  of  this  circumstance,  which  he  gives  in  the  Life  of 
Publicola,  is  as  follows  :  — -  "  It  happened  that  there  was  a  chariot  race  at 
Veii,  which  was  observed  as  usual ;  except  that,  as  the  charioteer,  who  had 
won  the  prize  and  received  the  crown  was  gently  driving  out  of  the  ring,  the 
horses  took  fright  from  no  visible  cause ;  but,  either  by  some  direction  of 
the  gods,  or  turn  of  fortune,  ran  away  with  their  driver,  at  full  speed  to- 
wards Rome.  It  was  in  vain  that  he  pulled  the  reins,  or  soothed  them 
with  words ;  he  was  obliged  to  give  way  to  the  career,  and  was  whirled 
along  till  they  came  to  the  Capitol,  where  they  flung  him,  at  the  gate  now 
called  Ratumena." — LANGHORNE'S  Translation.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Georg.  Lib.iii.  72,  etseq.  —  Wern.  CM. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  77 

there  set  down,  I  see  almost  all  agree.  But  for  Horses 
trained  to  the  Circus,  a  different  mode  of  Proceeding  is  to  be 
sought  for.  For  whereas  they  may  be  broke  into  other  Em- 
ployments when  they  are  two  Years  old,  they  must  not  be 
brought  to  enter  into  that  Contest  before  they  are  five  Years 
of  Age.  The  Females  in  this  kind  go  eleven  Months  with 
Young,  and  in  the  twelfth  they  Foal.  The  Sexes  are  put 
together  at  the  Spring  Equinox,  when  both  of  them  are  two 
Years  old  ;  but  if  they  be  kept  until  they  are  three  Years  of 
Age,  they  produce  stronger  Colts.  The  Male  is  fertile  to 
three-and-thirty  Years  old ;  so  that  when  they  are  dismissed 
from  the  Circus,  after  their  twentieth  Year,  they  are  sent  to 
produce  Offspring.  And  it  is  said  that  they  will  continue  to 
forty  Years  with  a  little  Help  put  to  the  Forepart  of  the 
Body,  to  lift  him  up.  Few  Beasts  besides  are  less  capable 
of  Fertility  than  the  Male ;  for  which  Cause  they  are  allowed 
some  Space  between,  and  in  one  Year  the  most  that  can  be 
allowed  is  fifteen.  The  Way  to  quench  the  Heat  of  a  Mare  is 
to  shear  her  Mane.  Arid  yet  Mares  can  bear  every  Year  until 
they  come  to  forty  Years.  It  is  reported  that  an  Horse  hath 
lived  three-score  and  fifteen  Years.  Mares  only  among  all 
Races  produce  their  Foals  standing  on  their  Feet;  and  they 
love  them  more  than  any  other  Creatures  do  their  Young. 
Foals  truly  have  on  their  Forehead  a  black  Thing  of  the 
Bigness  of  a  Fig,  called  Hippomanes,1  which  is  a  powerful 
Charm  to  procure  Love ;  and  this  the  Dam  devours  as  soon 
as  the  Colt  is  born ;  and  if  it  chance  that  any  Person  hath 
managed  to  secure  it  before  her,  she  will  not  permit  the  Foal 
to  suck  her.  Horses  are  driven  into  Madness  by  the  Smell. 
If  a  young  Foal  lose  her  Dam,  the  other  Mares  of  the  com- 

1  Lib.  xxviii.  11.  The  Hippomanes  was  a  sort  of  poison  famous 
among  the  ancients  as  an  ingredient  in  amorous  philters,  or  love-charms. 
At  the  end  of  Bayle's  Dictionary  is  a  very  learned  dissertation  on  the 
Hippomanes,  and  all  its  virtues,  both  real  and  imaginary.  ^Elian  (B.  xiv. 
c.  18)  says  that  this  caruncle  was  either  affixed  to  the  forehead,  loins,  or 
KU.TOC.  TOV  otiSoiov.  But  the  virtues  ascribed  to  it  were  so  singular,  that, 
credulous  as  this  author  commonly  is,  he  is  compelled  to  express  some 
doubts  of  their  truth.  —  Wern.  Club. 


78  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

mon  Herd  rear  up  the  Orphan  in  common.  It  is  said,  that 
for  three  Days  after  they  are  newly  foaled,  the  young  Colts 
cannot  lay  their  Mouth  to  the  Ground.  The  hotter  sto- 
mached an  Horse  is,  the  deeper  he  thrusteth  his  Nose  into 
the  Water  as  he  drinketh.  The  Scythians  chose  rather  to  use 
their  Mares  in  War,  because  their  staling  is  no  Hindrance  to 
their  Running.  It  is  an  admitted  Fact  that  in  Lusitania,  along 
the  River  Tagus,  and  about  the  City  Olyssipo  (Lisbon)  when 
the  West  Wind  bloweth,1  the  Mares  set  themselves  full  against 
it,  and  so  conceive  that  genital  Air  from  which  they  become 
pregnant,  and  bring  forth  Foals  of  exceeding  Swiftness  ;  but 
they  live  not  above  three  Years.  In  the  same  Spain,  from 
the  Parts  called  Gallaica  (Gallicia)  and  Asturica  (Asturia) 
there  is  produced  a  Race  of  Horses  which  we  call  Thieldones; 
and  others  of  less  Stature,  named  Asturcones.  These  Horses 
have  a  pleasant  Pace  peculiar  to  themselves ;  with  one  Foot 
set  down  before  another  softly  and  roundly  in  order  by 
turns ;  from  which  our  Horse-breakers  have  obtained  the  Art 
by  Cords  to  bring  an  Horse  to  the  like  Amble.  A  Horse  is 
subject  to  almost  the  same  Diseases  as  a  Man  :  and  also  to 
the  turning  of  the  Bladder  :  as  likewise  all  other  Beasts  that 
labour. 

CHAPTER  XLIII. 
Of  Asses* 

M.  VARRO  writeth,  that  Q.  Axius,  a  Senator,  bought  an 
Ass  at  the  Price  of  four  hundred  thousand  Sesterces:  a  Price, 
in  my  Opinion,  above  the  Worth  of  any  Beast  whatever:  and 
yet  (no  Doubt)  he  was  able  to  do  wondrous  good  Service  in 
carrying  Burdens,  ploughing  the  Ground,  and  principally  in 
getting  Mules.  In  the  Purchase  there  is  special  Regard  to 
the  Country  from  whence  they  come ;  as  from  Arcadia  in 
Achaia,  and  Reate  in  Italy.  This  Animal  is  exceedingly  im- 

1  Virgil  has  the  same  monstrous  tale   (Georg.  iii.  273)  ;  and  such 
absurdities  may  be  pardoned  in  a  poet,  but  are  inexcusable  in  a  natural 
philosopher. — Wern,  Club. 

2  Asinus  vulgaris.  —  GRAY.     The  Ass.  —  Wern.  Club' 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  79 

patient  of  Cold ;  which  is  the  Cause  that  none  are  bred  in 
Pontus.  Neither  do  they  go  with  Young,  like  other  Cattle, 
in  the  Spring  Equinox,  but  at  the  Solstice.  He-Asses  are 
the  worse  for  being  spared  in  their  Work.  The  Females 
have  bred  early,  at  the  Age  of  thirty  Months  ;  but  three 
Years  is  the  due  Time  :  as  often  as  Mares,  and  just  so 
many  Months,  and  after  the  same  Manner.  But  after 
Reception  they  must  be  forced  to  run  by  beating  them,  or 
else  they  will  let  go  their  Seed.  They  seldom  produce  two 
at  once.  The  Ass,  when  about  to  Foal,  avoideth  the  Light, 
but  seeketh  some  dark  Place,  that  she  may  not  be  seen  by 
Man.  She  breeds  all  her  Life-time,  which  is  to  her  thirty 
Years.  They  love  their  young  Foals  exceedingly  well:  but  they 
cannot  abide  Water.  To  their  little  ones  they  will  go  through 
Fire ;  but  if  there  be  the  least  Brook  between,  they  are  so 
afraid,  that  they  dare  not  dip  their  Feet  therein.  They  will 
not  drink,  except  of  their  accustomed  Fountains,  within  their 
Feeding-ground ;  and  in  such  a  Manner  that  they  may  go 
along  a  dry  Path  to  their  Drink :  neither  will  they  go  over  any 
Bridges  where  the  Planks  are  not  so  close  together  as  that 
they  see  the  Water  through.  Strange  to  say,  they  are  thirsty; 
but  if  their  Water  be  changed,  they  must  be  forced  to  drink, 
or  else  unloaded  of  their  Burdens.  They  love  to  lie  at  large, 
and  have  Room  enough.  For  in  their  Sleep  they  dream  of 
various  Fancies  appearing  to  them  ;  and  so  they  fling  about 
them  with  their  Heels  in  every  Direction ;  by  which,  if  they 
should  beat  against  some  hard  Thing,  they  would  soon  be 
lame.  They  are  more  profitable  to  their  Masters  than  the 
Revenues  of  good  Farms.  It  is  well  known,  that  in  Celti- 
beria  she-Asses,  by  breeding,  have  produced  the  Value  of 
400,000  Sesterces.  For  the  foaling  of  Mules,  they  affirm  that 
the  principal  Thing  to  be  regarded  in  the  Ass  is  the  Hair 
of  the  Ears  and  the  Eyelids.  For  however  the  whole  Body 
besides  be  of  one  Colour,  yet  shall  the  Mules  foaled  have 
as  many  Colours  as  were  in  those  Parts.  Meccenas  was  the 
first  that  introduced  at  Feasts  a  Dish  of  young  Ass-flesh  ; l  and 

1  See  the  note  on  the  Lalisiones  in  the  next  chapter.  —Wern.  Club. 


80  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

he  preferred  their  Flesh  at  that  time  before  that  of  wild  Asses. 
But  after  him  the  Reputation  of  their  Delicacy  decayed.  If 
an  Ass  be  seen  to  die,  the  whole  Race  will  very  soon  follow 
to  the  very  last. 

CHAPTER  XLIV. 
Of  Mules. 

BETWEEN  the  He-Ass  and  a  Mare  a  Mule  is  produced  in 
the  twelfth  Month  :  a  Creature  of  exceeding  Strength  for 
Labour.  For  breeding  such  Mules  they  choose  Mares  that 
are  not  under  four  Years  old,  nor  above  ten.  They  relate 
that  they  will  drive  away  one  another  in  both  kinds,  unless 
they  sucked  the  Milk  of  the  Dam,  when  they  were  young,  of 
that  kind  by  which  they  would  produce.  And  for  this  Pur- 
pose they  remove  away  either  the  young  Ass-Foals,  and  set 
them  in  the  dark  to  the  Teats  of  the  Mare,  or  else  the  young 
Colts  to  suck  of  the  she- Ass.  For  there  is  a  Mule  also  that 
cometh  of  a  Horse  and  a  female  Ass :  but  they  are  unruly, 
and  of  unconquerable  Slowness  :  and  much  more  if  they  be 
far  in  Age.  If,  when  a  she- Ass  hath  conceived  by  an  Horse, 
she  admit  an  Ass,  an  Abortion  follows ;  but  it  is  not  so  if 
an  Horse  follow  an  Ass.  It  is  observed,  that  seven  Days 
after  an  Ass  hath  foaled  is  the  best  Time  for  another  Con- 
ception; and,  also,  that  the  he- Asses  succeed  best  when 
weary  with  Travel.  That  Ass  is  understood  to  be  barren 
which  hath  not  conceived  before  she  hath  cast  her  Foal's- 
teeth ;  and  also  she  which  doth  not  conceive  at  the  first.  In 
old  Time  they  used  to  call  those  Hinuli,  which  were  begotten 
between  an  Horse  and  an  Ass  :  and,  on  the  other  Hand, 
Mules,  such  as  were  between  an  Ass  and  a  Mare.  Also 
it  is  observed,  that  a  Creature  born  from  Beasts  of  two 
different  kinds,  formeth  a  third  Sort,  resembling  neither  of 
the  Parents  ;  and  that  such  as  are  produced  in  this  Manner, 
whatever  kind  of  Creatures  they  are,  are  themselves  barren  ; 
and  therefore  she -Mules  never  breed.  We  find  in  our 
Chronicles,  that  oftentimes  Mules  have  brought  forth,  but 
it  was  always  taken  for  a  Prodigy.  Theophrastus  saith, 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  81 

that  in  Cappadocia  ordinarily  they  produce  Foals ;  but  there 
they  are  a  distinct  kind  of  Animal.  Mules  are  broken  of  their 
Kicking  if  they  are  often  made  to  drink  wine.  It  is  found 
written  in  what  remains  of  many  Greeks,  that  there  has 
been  produced  between  an  he-Mule  and  a  Mare,  a  Creature 
which  the  Latins  call  Hinnus,  that  is,  a  little  Mule.  Between 
Mares  and  wild  Asses  that  have  been  made  tame  are  pro- 
duced a  kind  of  Mules,  very  swift  in  running  and  exceed- 
ingly hard-hoofed,  slender  of  body,  of  unconquered  but 
generous  spirit.  But  the  Mule  that  cometh  of  a  wild  Ass 
and  a  female  tame  Ass  exceeds  all  the  rest.  Wild  Asses 
(Onagri)  are  the  best  in  Phrygia  and  Lycaonia.  Africa 
boasts  of  the  Flesh  of  their  Foals,  which  is  excellent  Meat  ;x 
and  such  they  call  Lalisiones.  It  appeareth  in  the  Chronicles 
of  Athens,  that  a  Mule  lived  eighty  Years;  and  that  when 
they  built  the  Temple  in  the  Citadel  at  that  Place,  this  old 
Mule  being  set  aside  for  Age,  would  yet  accompany  the 
other  labouring  Beasts,  and  if  any  of  them  were  ready  to  fall 
under  their  Load,  would  relieve  and  encourage  them  accord- 
ing to  his  power:  by  which  the  people  were  so  much  pleased, 
that  they  made  a  Decree  that  the  Corn-Merchants  should 
take  good  Care  that  this  Mule  should  not  be  driven  away 
from  their  Cleansing-Sieves. 

CHAPTER  XLV. 

Of  Oxen* 
IT  is  said  that  the  Oxen  of  India  are  as  high  as  Camels, 

o  * 

and  four  Feet  broad  between  the  Horns.     In  our  Part  of  the 

1  ^Elian,  Hunting,  book  iii.     The  Persians  and  Tartars  hold  the  flesh 
of  the  wild  ass  in  high  esteem,  and  hunt  it  in  preference  to  all  other 
descriptions  of  game.     Olearius  assures  us  that  he  saw  no  fewer  than 
thirty-two  wild  asses  slain  in  one  day  by  the  Schah  of  Persia  and  his 
court,  and  their  bodies  were  sent  to  the  royal  kitchens  at  Ispahan.     We 
know  from  Martial  that  the  epicures  of  Rome  held  the  flesh  of  the 
Onager  in  the  same  estimation  as  we  do  venison  :— 

"Cum  tener  est  Onager,  solaque  lalisio  matre 
Pascitur :  hoc  infans,  sed  breve  nomen  habet." 

Lib.  xiii.  97.  —  Wcrn.  Club. 

2  Bos  Taurus.  —  LINN.     The  Ox.  —  Wern.  Club. 
VOL.  III.  G 


82  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

World,  those  that  come  out  of  Epirus  are  most  commended; 
and  they  report  that  they  were  much  attended  to  by  King 
Pyrrhus,  who  would  not  suffer  them  to  breed  before  they 
were  four  Years  old.  Therefore  they  were  of  great  Size; 
and  so  they  continue  in  their  Posterity  to  this  Day.  In  the 
present  Day,  however,  they  are  permitted  to  breed  when 
/hey  are  one  Year  old,  or  at  most  two;  which  is  more  tole- 
rable. Bulls  are  generative  when  they  are  four  Years  old ; 
and  one  is  a  sufficient  Companion  for  ten  Cows  through  the 
Year.  If  a  Bull,  after  Copulation,  go  away  toward  the  right 
Hand,  he  hath  gotten  a  male  Calf;  hut  if  to  the  left,  a  Cow 
Calf.  Cows  are  fertile  at  the  first ;  but  if  it  chance  that 
they  fail,  the  twentieth  Day  after  they  again  seek  their  Fel- 
low. In  the  tenth  Month  they  calve ;  and  whatever  cometh 
before  that  Term  is  worth  nothing.  Some  write  that  they 
calve  just  upon  the  last  Day  of  the  tenth  Month  complete. 
They  seldom  bring  forth  two  Calves  at  a  Time.  Their  Time 
of  Propagation  continueth  thirty  Days  from  the  rising  of  the 
Dolphin  to  the  Day  before  the  Nones  of  January  ;  but  some 
propagate  in  Autumn.  Indeed,  in  those  Countries  where  the 
People  live  on  Milk,  they  order  the  Matter  so,  that  they  are 
not  without  this  Food  all  the  Year  long.  Bulls  do  not  serve 
above  two  Cows  in  one  Day.  Oxen  alone  of  all  Animals  go 
backward  as  they  feed  ;  and  among  the  Garamantsb  they 
•scarcely  ever  feed  otherwise.  Cows  live  riot  above  fifteen 
Years  at  the  most ;  but  the  Males  come  to  twenty.  They  are 
in  their  full  Strength  when  five  Years  old.  It  is  said  they  will 
grow  fat  if  they  are  bathed  with  hot  Water  ;  or  if  a  Man  slit 
their  Hide,  and  with  a  Reed  blow  Wind  into  their  Entrails. 
Oxen  are  not  to  be  despised  as  defective,  although  they  may 
look  but  ill-fa vouredly  ;  for  in  the  Alps  those  that,  are  least 
of  Body  are  the  best  for  Milk.  And  the  best  labouring 
Oxen  are  they  which  are  yoked  by  the  Head,  and  not  the 
Neck.  In  Syria  they  have  no  Dewlaps,  but  a  Bunch  stand- 
ing on  the  Back.  They  of  Caria  also,  a  Country  in  Asia, 
are  ill-favoured  to  be  seen,  having  between  their  Necks  and 
Shoulders  a  projecting  Tumour ;  and  their  Horns  are  loose, 
as  if  out  of  Joint;  and  yet  by  Report,  tbev  are  excellent  for 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  83 

Labour:  but  the  black  or  white  in  this  kind  are  condemned 
for  Work.  Bulls  have  less  and  slenderer  Horns  than  Cows 
or  Oxen.  The  Time  to  bring  the  Ox  or  Bull  to  the  Yoke  is 
at  three  Years  of  Age  ;  after  this  it  is  too  late,  and  before  it 
is  too  soon.  A  young  Steer  is  soonest  trained  to  draw,  if  he 
be  coupled  with  another  that  hath  been  taught  already ;  for 
this  Animal  is  our  Companion  in  Labour  and  the  Cultivation 
of  the  Ground  :  and  so  highly  regarded  was  the  Ox  by  our 
Forefathers,  that  we  find  it  on  Record  that  a  Man  was  judi- 
cially condemned  on  a  given  Day  by  the  People  of  Rome, 
because,  to  gratify  a  wanton  Concubine  of  his,  who  said  he 
had  not  eaten  any  Tripe  all  the  while  he  was  in  the  Country, 
he  had  killed  an  Ox,1  although  it  was  his  own  ;  and  for  this 
Fact  he  was  banished,  as  if  he  had  slain  his  own  Manager  of 
Husbandry.  There  is  a  Majesty  in  the  Aspect  of  a  Bull ; 
their  Countenance  stern,  their  Ears  covered  with  stiff  Hairs, 
and  their  Horns  standing  as  if  they  were  ever  demanding  to 
fight.  But  all  his  threatening  appears  in  his  Fore-feet ;  be- 
stirring himself  now  with  one  Foot,  and  then  with  another, 
as  his  Anger  bursts  forth,  flinging  the  Sand  aloft  into  the  Air: 
and  of  all  other  Beasts  he  alone  with  such  an  Incitement 
stirs  up  his  Anger.  We  have  seen  them  fight  one  another 
for  the  Mastery ;  and  thus  viewed  to  be  swung  round,  in 
their  Fall  to  be  caught  up  by  the  Horns,  and  to  rise  again  : 
when  only  lying  along,  to  be  raised  from  the  Ground  ; 
and  when  they  have  run  with  a  rapid  Pace,  in  two-wheeled 
Chariots,  they  have  stood  still  suddenly,  as  if  the  Cha- 
rioteers had  caused  them  to  stop.  It  was  an  Invention  of 
the  Thessalians,  with  a  Horse  to  gallop  close  to  the  Bull's 
Horns,  and  kill  it  by  twisting  its  Neck.  The  first  that  exhi- 
bited this  Show  to  the  People  of  Rome,  was  Cce.sar  the 
Dictator.  The  Bull  forms  the  most  worthy  and  sumptuous 
Offering  of  Reconciliation  to  the  Gods.  This  Animal  alone, 
of  all  those  that  are  long-tailed,  when  newly-born,  hath  not 
the  Tail  of  the  full  Measure,  as  others ;  but  it  continueth  to 

1  According  to  ^Elian,  B.  xii.  c.  34,  among  the  Phrygians  death  was 
the  regular  punishment  of  any  one  who  killed  his  plough  ox.  —  Wern. 
Club. 


84  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

grow  until  it  reacheth  down  to  the  very  Heels.  And  hereupon 
it  is,  that  in  approving  Calves  for  Sacrifice,  those  are  allowed 
whose  Tail  cometh  down  to  the  Joint  of  the  Gambril :  but  if 
shorter,  they  will  not  be  an  effectual  Sacrifice.  This  also  is 
noted,  that  Calves  brought  on  Men's  Shoulders  to  the  Altars 
are  not  for  the  most  Part  accepted  for  Sacrifice ;  nor  one 
that  is  lame ;  nor  can  the  Gods  be  appeased  with  those 
Sacrifices  which  are  foreign  to  them,  nor  with  such  as  draw 
themselves  back  from  the  Altar.  Among  the  Prodigies  that 
we  read  of  in  ancient  Times,  we  find  that  an  Ox  hath  spoke  ; l 
and  when  this  was  announced,  the  Senate  was  accustomed  to 
be  held  in  an  open  Place. 

CHAPTER  XLVI. 
Of  the  Ox  Apis. 

IN  Egypt,  also,  an  Ox2  is  worshipped  as  a  God,  and  they 
call  it  Apis.3  It  was  marked  with  a  white  Spot  on  the  right 
Side,  like  the  Horns  of  the  new  Moon  ;  a  Knob  under  the 
Tongue,  which  they  call  Cantharus:4  it  was  not  lawful  to 

1  When  a  report  was  brought  that  an  ox  had  spoken,  the  senate  was 
held  in  the  open  air.  (Adams'  "  Rom.  Antiq."  p.  9.)  This  was  against  the 
custom,  because  under  ordinary  circumstances  the  senate  could  only  meet 
in  stated  places — at  first  limited  to  two  within  the  city,  and  the  temple  of 
Bellona  without  it ;  afterwards  the  right  was  extended  to  several  temples 
and  curiae  —  the  latter  being  consecrated  by  the  augurs,  but  not  to  any 
particular  deity.     The  places  and  circumstances  of  meeting  are  recited 
more  at  length  in  Livy,  xxvi.  10 ;  iii.  63  ;  xxxi.  47 ;  xxxiii.  22,  24 ;  xxxiv. 
43;  xxxvi.  39;  xlii.  36.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  See  Herodotus,  Lib.  iii.  28.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  The  Scarabaeus.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  ^Elian,  B.  xi.  c.  10,  gives  a  different  account  of  the  Egyptian  ox-god 
Apis ;  derived,  as  he  strongly  intimates,  from  the  best  Egyptian  authority, 
and  differing  from  that  afforded  by  Herodotus  and  Aristagoras.  According 
to  him  it  was  designated  by  twenty-nine  marks  in  different  parts  of  its 
body,  and  each  one  conveying  some  important  figurative  meaning  :  as  one, 
the  increase  of  the  Nile,  and  another,  that  darkness  existed  previously  to 
light.     As  Apis  was  held  sacred  at  Memphis,  so  another  ox  was  reve- 
renced there  under  the  name  of  Mnevis :  the  latter  dedicated  to  the  sun 
as  the  former  to  the  moon.  —  JElian,  B.  xi.  c.  11.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  85 

suffer  him  to  live  above  a  certain  Number  of  Years ;  at  the 
end  of  which  they  drown  him  in  a  Fountain  of  the  Priests, 
and  then,  with  Mourning,  seek  another,  which  they  substi- 
tute in  his  Place.  Until  they  find  him  they  mourn  and 
shave  their  Heads.  But  they  never  are  long  before  they 
meet  with  another  :  and  when  they  have  found  him,  he  is  by 
the  Priests  brought  to  Memphis,  where  he  hath  two  Shrines 
(Delubra),  which  they  call  Thalami  (Bed-chambers),  which 
are  the  Auguries  of  the  People.  For  if  this  Ox  enter  into 
one  of  them,  it  is  a  good  Sign  ;  but  if  into  the  other,  it  por- 
tendeth  Misfortune.  He  gives  Answers  to  private  Persons  by 
taking  Meat  from  the  Hand  of  such  as  consult  him.  He 
turned  away  from  the  Hand  of  Germanicus  Ccesar,  and  not 
long  afterwards  he  died.  He  is  kept  secret  for  the  most  Part : 
but  when  he  hath  got  forth  to  the  Multitude,  he  proceeds 
with  a  Guard  of  Lictors,  and  a  Flock  of  Boys  accompany 
him,  singing  a  Hymn  to  his  Honour  :  for  he  seemeth  to 
understand,  and  is  pleased  to  be  worshipped.  These  Com- 
panies presently  become  beside  themselves,  and  foretell 
future  Things.  Once  a  Year  there  is  presented  to  him  a 
Cow,  which  hath  Marks  as  he  hath,  but  differing  from  his  ; 
and  it  is  said  that  always  upon  what  Day  this  Cow  is  found, 
on  the  same  it  dieth.  At  Memphis,  there  is  a  Place  in  the 
Nile  which,  from  its  Figure,  the  Inhabitants  name  Phiala; 
and  there  every  Year  the  Egyptians  drown  a  silver  and 
gold  Cup  on  the  Days  in  which  they  celebrate  the  Nativity 
of  Apis.  These  Days  are  seven  in  Number;  and  it  is  won- 
derful, that  while  they  last  no  one  is  hurt  by  Crocodiles  : 
but  on  the  eighth  Day,  after  the  sixth  Hour  of  the  Day,  they 
return  to  their  former  Ferocity. 

CHAPTER  XLVII. 
The  Nature  of  Flocks  of  Sheep,1  and  their  breeding. 

GREAT  is  the  Advantage  from  the  Flock,  both  as  regards 
Sacrifices  to  pacify  the  Gods,  and  the  use  of  their  Fleece  : 

1  Ovis  arics.  —  LINN.     The  Sheep.  —  Wern.  Club. 


86  History  of  Nature.  [Booic  VIII, 

for  as  Men  are  indebted  to  the  Ox's  Labour  for  their  Food, 
so  they  owe  the  clothing  of  their  Bodies  to  the  Sheep.  They 
are  fertile  from  two  Years  of  Age  upward  to  nine,  and  some 
until  they  are  ten  Years  old.  The  first  Lambs  are  smaller 
than  the  others.  They  go  with  Young  about  the  Setting  of 
Arcturus,  that  is,  from  the  third  Day  before  the  Ides  of  May 
to  the  Setting  of  the  Eagle,  on  the  tenth  Day  before  the 
Calends  of  August.  They  are  with  Young  150  Days.  If 
any  are  conceived  after  that  Time  they  prove  weak.  Lambs 
born  after  that  Season  they  called  in  old  Time  Cordos  (later 
Lambs).  Many  prefer  these  Winter  Lambs  before  those  that 
come  in  Spring ;  because  it  is  much  better  they  should  be 
strong  before  the  Solstice  than  before  the  shortest  Days :  and 
they  think  that  this  Creature  only  is  useful  by  being  born  in 
the  midst  of  Winter.  It  is  natural  for  Rams  to  loathe  young 
Lambs,  and  to  follow  after  old  Ewes.  Himself  also  is  better 
when  old,  and  more  effective  for  them.  To  make  them  more 
gentle,  they  bore  his  Horn  through  near  his  Ear.  If  his  right 
Testicle  be  tied  up,  he  getteth  Ewe  Lambs  :  if  the  left,  Males. 
If  Ewes  be  by  themselves  when  it  thundereth,  they  cast  their 
Lambs.  The  Remedy  is  to  gather  them  together,  that  by 
Company  they  may  have  help.  They  say  that  if  the  North 
Wind  blow  they  will  conceive  Males  ;  but  if  the  Wind  be 
South,  Females.  Moreover,  great  Regard  is  had  in  this 
Kind  to  the  Mouths  of  the  Rams :  for  of  what  Colour  the 
Veins  be  under  their  Tongue,1  of  the  same  will  the  Fleece  be 
of  the  Lambs;  and  they  will  be  of  a  Variety  of  Colours  if  the 
Veins  were  so.  Also  the  Change  of  Water  arid  Drink  maketh 
them  to  alter  their  Colour.  There  are  two  principal  Kinds 
of  Sheep;  one  reared  within  House,  and  the  other  abroad  in 
the  Field  :  the  first  is  the  tenderer,  but  the  other  more  deli- 

1  Virgil,  Georg.  iii.  387,  in  giving  directions  to  choose  a  ram,  says, — 

"But  if  dark  hues  his  tongue  and  palate  stain, 
Drive  him  far  distant  from  thy  spotless  train, 
Lest  the  dim  blemish  that  the  sire  denied 
Infect  the  fleece,  and  taint  the  motley  child." 

—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  87 

cate  in  Taste  ;  for  those  within  the  House  feed  upon  Bram- 
bles. The  Coverings  made  of  the  Arabian  Wool  are  the 
most  valuable. 

CHAPTER  XLVIII. 
Of  the  Kinds  of  Wool  and  Cloths. 

THE  Wool  of  Apulia  is  held  in  the  highest  Estimation ; 
then,  that  which  in  Italy  is  named  the  Greek  Sheep's  Wool, 
but  in  other  Countries  is  called  Italian.  In  the  third  Rank 
stands  the  Milesian  Sheep.  The  Wool  of  Apulia  is  of  a  short 
Staple,  and  is  of  Reputation  for  nothing  beside  Mantles. 
About  Tarentum  and  Canusium  the  richest  of  this  Kind  are 
found  :  as  also  at  Laodicea  in  Asia.  For  Whiteness  there  is 
none  better  than  that  which  groweth  along  the  Po  ;  and  yet 
to  this  Day  a  Pound  of  it  hath  not  exceeded  the  Price  of  an 
hundred  Sesterces.  They  do  not  shear  Sheep  everywhere  ; 
for  the  Custom  of  plucking  their  Fleece  cont'mueth  still  in 
some  Places.  There  are  several  Sorts  of  Colours  in  Wool,  so 
that  we  are  not  able  to  give  distinct  Names  to  all  that  we 
call  Native.  Black  Fleeces1  are  chiefly  in  Spain;  Pollentia, 
near  the  Alps,  has  grey  ;  Asia  is  distinguished  for  red,  and 
these  Wools  are  called  Erythraese  :  in  Boeotia  the  same.  In 
Canusia  the  Colour  is  yellow  :  and  at  Tarentum  they  are 
brown.  All  Wool,  in  its  native  Grease,  is  used  in  Medicine.2 
About  Istria  and  Liburuia  the  Fleece  resembleth  Hair  rather 
than  Wool,  and  is  not  good  to  make  Clothes  with  a  high  Nap ; 
but  serveth  only  for  the  Workman  in  Portugal,  whose  Weav- 
ing in  Net- work  with  Squares  commendeth  this  Wool.  The  like 
Wool  is  common  about  Piscenae,  in  the  Province  Narbonensis 
(Languedoc) ;  and  such  is  found  in  Egypt  :  the  Cloth  made 
of  it,  after  it  is  worn  bare,  is  dyed,  and  again  will  wear 
during  a  Man's  Life.  The  coarse,  rough  Wool,  was  in  old 

1  JElian  says  that  all  the  sheep  are  black  in  Abydena,  B.  iii.  c.  32  ; 
and  Budiana,  B.  xvi.  c.  33.  In  some  soils  of  our  country  the  fleece  has  a 
strong  red  tinge,  and  on  the  granite  in  the  middle  of  Cornwall  they  are 
more  than  usually  white.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  B.  xxix.  c.  22. 


88  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

Time  highly  commended  for  Tapestry ;  for  even  Homer  wit- 
nesseth,1  that  the  Ancients  used  it.  But  this  Tapestry  is 
adorned  with  Colours  in  Gallia  (France),  after  one  Manner, 
and  among  the  Parthians  after  another.  Wool  of  itself, 
driven  together  into  a  Felt,  serveth  to  make  Garments  with : 
and  if  Vinegar  is  added  to  it,  such  Cloth  is  proof  against 
Steel ;  and  more  than  that,  it  will  check  the  Force  of  Fire. 
And  the  last  cleansing  of  it,  when  it  is  taken  out  of  the  Cal- 
drons of  those  that  dress  it,  serveth  to  stuff  Mattresses  :2  an 
Invention,  as  I  suppose,  which  came  first  out  of  Gaul ;  for 
certainly  it  is  at  this  Day  distinguished  by  Gallic  Names.  But 
I  am  not  able  easily  to  say  at  what  Time  this  Workmanship 
began  :  for  in  old  Time  Men  made  their  Beds  of  Straw,  as 
now  in  the  Camp  they  use  hairy  Rugs  (Gausape).  Our 
Mantles  (Amphimalia),  shagged  without  and  within,  were 
invented  within  my  Father's  Memory;  and  also  these  downy 
Aprons  (Ventralia)  :  for  the  Tunic  of  the  Latus  Clavus, 
woven  in  the  Manner  of  the  Gausape  or  hairy  Rug,  is  now 
first  begun.  Black  Fleeces  will  take  no  other  Colour.  We 
will  speak  of  the  dyeing  of  other  Wools  in  their  proper 
Places  ;3  where  we  shall  treat  of  Shell-fishes,  and  the  Nature 
of  Herbs.  M.  Varro  writeth,  that  in  the  Temple  of  Sangus 
there  continued  to  the  Time  when  he  wrote  the  Wool  that 
Tanaquil,  who  is  also  called  Caia  Ccec'ilia,  spun  ;  together 
with  her  Distaff  and  Spindle;  and,  also,  in  the  Chapel  of 
Fortune,  the  royal  Robe  made  by  her  in  Wave-work,  which 
Servius  Tullius  used  to  wear.  And  hence  came  the  Custom, 
that  when  Maidens  were  married  there  attended  upon  them 
a  Distaff  dressed,  and  also  a  Spindle  with  Flax.  She  was 

1  Odyss.  iv.  427  :  — 

"  Beneath  an  ample  portico  they  spread 
The  downy  fleece  to  form  the  slumberous  bed ; 
And  o'er  soft  palls  of  purple  grain,  unfold 
Rich  tapestry,  stiff  with  interwoven  gold." 

—  Wern.  Club. 

-  "Tomente,"  or  "tormente,"  to  stuff  mattresses,  or  for  ropes  of 
engines.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Lib.  ix.  36,  ct  seq.,  and  Lib.  xxi.  8. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  89 

the  first  that  made  the  Tunic  that  is  woven  right  through,1 
such  as  young  Persons  (Tyrones)  and  newly-married  Ladies 
put  on  with  the  pure  Toga.  The  waved  Garment  was,  from 
the  Beginning,  among  the  most  esteemed  ;  and  from  thence 
came  the  branched  Works.  Fenestella  writeth,  that  in  the 
later  Time  of  Augustus  C&sar  they  began  to  use  shorn 
Gowns,  as  also  with  a  curled  Nap.  The  Robes  called 
Crebrse  Papaveratse2  (wrought  thick  with  Flower -work, 
resembling  Poppies,  or  pressed  smooth)  are  of  greater  Anti- 
quity ;  for  even  in  the  Time  of  Lucilius  the  Poet,  Torquatus 
was  noted  for  wearing  them.  The  Praetextse  had  their  Origin 
among  the  Etruscans.  The  Trabese  I  find  worn  by  Kings. 
In  Homer  s  Time3  they  used  painted  Garments :  and  from 
thence  came  the  triumphant  Robes.  The  Phrygians  invented 
that  which  is  wrought  with  a  Needle :  and  so  they  are  called 
Phrygiones.  And  in  Asia,  King  Attains  invented  the  work- 
ing of  Gold  into  the  same  ;  and  from  him  such  Cloths  are 
called  Attalica.  Babylon  was  much  celebrated  for  the  weav- 
ing of  Cloth  of  various  Colours  into  a  Picture,  and  Cloths  so 
wrought  were  called  Babylonica.  To  weave  with  many 
twisted  Threads  was  the  Invention  of  Alexandria,  and  these 
were  named  Polymita ;  but  Gallia  invented  the  Method  of 
dividing  the  Work  into  Shields  or  Escutcheons.  Metellus 

1  The  reader  will  be  reminded  of  the  garment  of  our  Lord,  woven 
without  a  seam.  (Gospel  by  St.  John,  c.  xix.  v.  23.)  The  Babylonish  gar- 
ments of  beautiful  interwoven  colours  were  of  high  antiquity,  since  they 
proved  too  great  a  temptation  to  the  virtue  of  Achan  at  the  time  of 
Joshua's  invasion  of  Palestine.     (Joshua,  c.  vii.)     The  painted  garments 
referred  to  were  as  the  name  imports ;  for  among  the  Chinese  the  arts 
are  preserved  without  change  from  times  of  remote  antiquity,  and  in 
their  own  representations  of  them,  the  liquid  colours  are  laid  on  the  tex- 
ture in  the  manner  of  drawing,  with  a  brush.  — Wern.  Club. 

2  Lib.  xix.  1,  and  Lib.  xx.  9. 

3  Iliad,  iii.  125,  where  Iris  finds  Helen  weaving  at  the  loom:  — 

"  Here  in  the  palace,  at  her  loom  she  found  ; 
The  golden  web  her  own  sad  story  crown'd. 
The  Trojan  wars  she  weav'd  (herself  the  prize), 
And  the  dire  triumphs  of  her  fatal  eyes." 

—  Wern.  Club. 


90  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

Scipio,  among  the  Crimes  alleged  against  Capita,  accused 
him  that  the  Babylonian  Hangings  of  his  Dining-room  cost 
800,000  Sesterces ;  and  such-like  of  late  stood  Prince  Nero 
in  400,000,000  Sesterces.1  The  Praetextse  of  Servim  Tullius, 
with  which  he  covered  the  Image  of  Fortune  which  he  had 
dedicated,  remained  sound  to  the  death  of  Seianus.  And  it 
was  a  Wonder  that  they  neither  fell  from  the  Image  nor 
were  Moth-eaten  in  560  Years.  We  have  in  our  Day  seen 
the  Sheep's  Fleeces  while  they  are  alive,  dyed  with  Purple, 
with  Scarlet  in  Grain,  and  from  the  Shell- fish,  by  the 
means  of  certain  Barks,  a  Foot  and  a  half  long,  dipped 
in  those  Colours ;  as  if  Luxury  should  make  Wool  to  grow 
of  those  Colours.  For  the  Sheep  itself,  she  is  known  to  be 
of  the  best  Breed  if  she  be  short-legged,  and  well  wooled 
under  the  Belly  ;  for  such  as  are  naked  there,  they  called 
Apicae,  and  condemned.  In  Syria,  Sheep  have  Tails  a  Cubit 
long,  and  they  bear  most  Wool  there.  It  is  thought  to  be 
too  early  to  castrate  Lambs  before  they  are  five  Months  old. 

CHAPTER  XLIX. 
Of  the  Musmon* 

THERE  is  in  Spain,  but  especially  in  Corsica,  a  Kind  of 
Musmones,  not  altogether  unlike  Sheep,  having  a  Shag 
more  like  the  Hair  of  Goats  than  the  Fleece  of  Sheep.  That 
Kind  which  is  produced  between  them  and  the  Sheep  they 
called  in  old  Time  Umbri.  This  Creature  hath  a  very  tender 
Head,  and  therefore  in  feeding  it  is  to  be  forced  to  stand 
with  its  Tail  to  the  Sun.  Of  all  living  Creatures,  those  that 
bear  Wool  are  the  most  foolish  ;  for  if  one  of  them  be  drawn 
by  the  Horn,  all  the  rest  will  follow,  though  otherwise  they 

1  Quadragies,  vel  quadrengenties  sestertio.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Most  naturalists  look  to  the  Mouflon,  or  Musmon,  of  Corsica  (Ovis 
musimon),  as  the  wild  type  of  the  sheep,  and  some  regard  this  to  be  the 
origin  of  the  European  breeds ;  but  the  reasons  upon  which  this  is  as- 
sumed appear  very  problematical.  The  domestic  breeds  of  sheep  are 
most  probably  the  descendants  of  a  race  subjected  from  the  beginning  to 
man,  and  no  longer  in  an  independent  state.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  91 

were  afraid  to  go  that  Way.  The  Length  of  their  Life  is  ten 
Years ;  but  in  Ethiopia,  thirteen.  In  the  same  Country,  Goats 
also  live  eleven  Years  ;  whereas  in  the  rest  of  the  World,  for 
the  most  Part,  they  live  only  eight.  Both  Sorts  become 
fertile  in  four  Opportunities. 

CHAPTER  L. 
Of  Goats1  and  their  Breeding. 

GOATS  bring  forth  four  Kids,  but  not  often.  They  go 
with  Young  five  Months,  like  Ewes.  She-Goats  become 
barren  with  Fatness.  When  three  Years  old  they  are  not  so 
good  to  breed  ;  and  when  they  are  older,  not  beyond  four 
Years  of  Age.  They  begin  at  the  seventh  Month,  even  while 
they  snck  their  Dams.  Both  Sexes  are  more  useful  if  they 
have  no  Horns.  The  first  Time  in  the  Day  that  the  she- 
Goats  go  with  the  Male  is  void :  the  second  is  more  fertile, 
and  so  forward.  They  conceive  in  the  Month  of  November, 
so  that  they  may  bring  Kids  in  March,  when  Shrubs  begin 
to  bud ;  and  this  is  sometimes  when  they  are  a  Year  old,  but 
always  at  two  Years;  and  when  three,  they  are  not  utterly 
decayed  :  for  they  are  fertile  for  eight  Years.  In  cold  Wea- 
ther they  are  liable  to  Abortion.  The  she-Goat,  when  her 
Eyes  are  overspread  with  Opacity,  pricketh  them  with  the 
Point  of  a  Rush,  and  so  letteth  them  bleed  :  but  the  Buck 
useth  the  Brier  for  the  same  Purpose.  Mutianus  reporteth  the 
Shrewdness  of  this  Creature  as  seen  by  himself,  when,  upon  a 
very  narrow  Bridge,  one  Goat  met  another  coming  opposite 
to  him  from  a  different  Direction;  now  because  the  Place  was 
so  narrow  that  they  could  not  pass  each  other,  nor  turn  about, 
nor  yet  retire  backwards  without  seeing,  considering  how 
long  and  slender  the  Plank  was,  and  also  because  the  Tor- 
rent that  ran  beneath  was  rapid  and  dangerous,  one  of  them 
lay  flat  down,  and  so  the  other  walked  over  his  Back.  Male 
Goats  are  held  for  the  best  which  are  the  most  flat-nosed, 
•vith  long  Ears  that  are  crumpled  in,  and  with  very  long, 

1  Capra  hirtus.  —  LINN.     The  Goat .  —  Wern.  Club. 


92  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

shaggy  Hair  about  their  Shoulders.  But  the  Mark  to  know 
the  noblest  Females  is,  that  they  have  two  Folds  hanging  down 
along  their  Body  on  either  Side  from  the  Neck.  All  have 
not  Horns ;  but  in  those  which  are  horned,  a  Man  may  know 
their  Age  by  the  Increase  of  the  Prominences  :  and  the  un- 
horned  she-Goats  are  more  abundant  in  Milk.  Arclielaus 
writeth,  that  they  breathe  through  the  Ears,1  and  not  at  the 
Nostrils ;  and  also  that  they  are  never  without  a  Fever.  And 
this,  perhaps,  is  the  Cause  that  they  have  hotter  Breath 
than  Sheep,  and  more  eager  in  their  Love.  They  say,  also, 
that  they  see  by  Night  as  well  as  by  Day ;  and  therefore 
they  who  in  the  Evening  are  able  to  see  nothing,  which 
Disease  we  call  Nyctalipia,  recover  their  perfect  Sight  again 
by  eating  the  Liver  of  Goats.2  In  Cilicia  and  about  the 
Syrtes,  People  clothe  themselves  with  the  Goat's  Hair,  for 
there  they  shear  them.  It  is  said  that  Goats,  toward  the 
Sun-setting,  cannot  in  their  Pasture  see  directly  one  ano- 
ther, but  by  turning  Tail  to  Tail ;  but  at  other  Hours  of  the 
Day  they  keep  towards  each  other,  among  their  Fellows. 
They  have  all  of  them  a  Tuft  of  Hair  under  their  Chin, 
which  they  call  Aruncus.  If  any  one  take  one  of  them  by 
this  Beard  and  draw  it  out  of  the  Flock,  all  the  rest  will 
stand  gazing  at  it,  as  if  they  were  astonished  ;  and  so  they 
will  do  if  any  one  of  them  chance  to  eat  a  certain  Herb.3 
Their  Bite  is  destructive  to  Trees.  They  make  the  Olive- 
Tree  barren  by  licking  it,  for  which  Cause  they  are  not 
sacrificed  to  Minerva. 

1  The  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans  were  of  opinion  that  goats  breathed 
through  their  ears;  and  even  some  modern  naturalists  entertain  the 
idea  that  the  tear-pits  found  in  the  stag  and  fallow-deer  are  furnished  to 
enable  them  to  breathe  more  freely  during  their  long  and  rapid  flights. 
These  opinions  may  be  accounted  for  in  some  measure  by  the  fact  that 
certain  species  of  antelope  have  a  pit  or  fold  of  skin  nearly  half  an  inch  in 
depth,  opening  externally  by  a  small  aperture  immediately  behind  each 
ear,  the  use  of  which  is  not  clearly  understood.  — Wern.  Club. 

2  Lib.  xxviii.  11. 

3  This  herb  is  said  to  be  Eryngium.     See  Theoph.  in  Fragmento  de 
Animalibus.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  93 

CHAPTER  LI. 
Of  Swine1  and  their  Natures. 

THE  Sexes  of  the  Herd  of  Swine 
are  united  from  the  Time  of  the 
western  Wind  (Favonius)  to  the 
Spring*  Equinox ;  and  when  they  are 
eight  Months  old ;  and  in  some 
Places  even  at  the  fourth  Month  of  Mtmtf.tom.rn. 

their  Age  up  to  the  seventh  Year.  They  farrow  twice  a  Year; 
they  go  with  Young  four  Months.  One  Sow  may  bring  at 
a  Farrow  to  the  Number  of  twenty  Pigs  ;  but  she  cannot  rear 
so  many.  Nugidius  saith,  that  those  Pigs  which  are  farrowed 
on  the  ten  Days  about  the  shortest  Day  of  the  Year,  are 
born  with  Teeth.  They  are  fertile  at  one  coupling,  but  be- 
cause they  are  subject  to  Abortion  it  requires  to  be  repeated. 
The  Way  to  prevent  Abortion  is  to  keep  them  asunder  at 
their  first  seeking,  and  before  their  Ears  hang  down.  The 
Males  are  not  fertile  after  three  Years  old.  Sows,  when  they 
are  feeble  for  Age,  are  rendered  fertile  as  they  lie  along. 
That  a  Sow  should  eat  her  own  Pigs  is  not  a  Prodigy.  A 
young  Pig  is  pure  for  Sacrifice  five  Days  after  it  is  farrowed ; 
a  Lamb  at  eight  Days;  and  a  Calf  at  thirty  Days.  But 
Coruncanus  denieth  that  Beasts  which  chew  the  Cud  are 
pure  for  Sacrifice  until  they  have  two  Teeth.  Swine  that 
have  lost  one  Eye  are  not  thought  to  live  long  after ;  other- 
wise they  may  continue  until  they  are  fifteen  Years  old,  and 
some  to  twenty.  But  they  grow  outrageous,  and  subject  to 
many  other  Kinds  of  Diseases,  especially  the  Quinsy  and 
Scrofula.  A  Mark  to  show  that  Swine  are  sick  is  to  pluck 
a  Bristle  from  the  Back,  and  it  will  be  found  bloody  at  the 
Root :  also  he  will  carry  his  Head  with  a  Twist  as  he  goeth. 
An  overfat  Sow  soon  wanteth  Milk ;  and  at  her  first  Farrow 
bringeth  fewest  Pigs.  All  the  Kind  of  them  love  to  wallow 
in  the  Mire.  They  twist  their  Tails ;  wherein  this  also  is 

1  Sus  scrofa.  —  LINN.     The  Uog.  —  Wern.  Club. 


94  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

observed,  that  they  more  easily  appease  the  Gods  in  Sacri- 
fice, when  they  turn  their  Tails  to  the  right  rather  than  the 
left.  Swine  will  be  fat  in  sixty  Days ;  and  the  rather  if,  be- 
fore you  set  them  up  for  feeding,  they  be  kept  fasting  for 
three  Days.  Of  all  other  Animals  they  are  the  most  brutish; 
so  that  there  goeth  a  witty  saying  of  them,  That  their  Life  is 
given  them  instead  of  Salt.1  It  is  known  that  when  Thieves 
had  driven  away  a  Company  of  them,  on  hearing  the  Voice 
'of  the  Swineherd  they  leaned  all  to  one  Side  of  the  Vessel, 
and  sunk  it,  and  then  returned  to  their  Keeper.  Moreover, 
the  Hogs  that  lead  the  Herd  are  so  well  trained,  that  they 
will  of  themselves  go  to  the  Swine  Market-place,  and  from 
thence  Home  again ;  and  the  Wild  ones  have  the  Wit  to 
confound  the  Prints  of  their  Feet,  in  the  marshy  Ground, 
and  to  render  their  Flight  more  easy  by  first  voiding  their 
Urine.2  Sows  also  are  spayed  as  Camels  are ;  but  two  Days 
before,  they  are  kept  from  Meat :  then  they  hang  them  by 
the  Forelegs  to  make  Incision  into  the  Part;  and  by  this 
means  they  grow  to  Fat  sooner.  There  is  an  Art  also  to 
prepare  the  Liver  of  a  Sow,  as  also  of  a  Goose,3  which  was 
the  Invention  of  M.  Apicius*  by  feeding  them  with  dry 
Figs,  and  when  they  have  eaten  till  they  are  full,  presently 
to  kill  them  with  a  Drink  of  Water,  Wine,  and  Honey 
(Mulsus).5  There  is  not  the  Flesh  of  any  other  living  Crea- 
ture that  affordeth  more  Matter  for  Gluttony  :  for  there  are 
nearly  fifty  Sorts  of  Tastes,  whereas  others  have  but  one 
each.  From  hence  came  so  many  Books  of  Laws  by  the 

1  Cicero  ("  De  Nat.  Deorum,"  lib.  ii.)  tells  us  that  this  was  the  saying 
of  Chrysippus  the  philosopher ;  intimating  that  the  hog  lived  only  to  be 
eaten,  and  that  his  life  preserved  his  flesh  from  corruption,  as  salt  would 
do.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  Lib.  xxviii.  15.  3  Lib.  x.  22. 

4  Lib.  xix.  8.     He  is  referred  to  again  (B.  x.  c.  48),  and  at  a  time  when 
luxury  in  food  was  carried  to  a  higher  pitch  than  it  had  ever  been  in  the 
world  before,  he  attracted  attention  by  his  enormous  excess.     Athenaeus 
says,  that  Appion  the  grammarian  wrote  a  treatise  on  the  luxury  of  Api- 
cius  (B.  vii.  c.  12),  quoted  in  the  Notes  to  Bowyer's  "  Lilian,"  p.  1010. — 
Wern.  Club. 

5  Lib.  xxii.  24. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  95 

Censors,  prohibiting  to  serve  up  at  Suppers  the  Belly  and 
Paps  of  a  Sow;  the  Glands,  Testicles,1  Womb,  and  the  Fore- 
part of  the  Boar's  Head :  and  yet  Publius*  the  comic  Poet, 
after  he  obtained  his  Freedom,  is  remarked  to  have  been 
never  without  an  Hog's  Belly ;  who  also  gave  the  Name  of 
Sumen  to  it.  The  Flesh  of  wild  Hogs  also  came  into  great 
Request;  so  that  Cato  the  Censor,  in  his  Orations,  reproached 
them  for  making  Brawn.3  And  yet  when  they  made  three 
Portions  of  the  wild  Boar,  the  Loin  was  served  up  in  the 
midst,  under  the  Name  of  Brawn  (Aprugnus).  The  first 
Roman  that  brought  to  the  Table,  in  Feasts,  a  whole  Boar, 
was  P.  Servilius  Rullus,  Father  of  that  Rullus  who,  when 
Cicero  was  Consul,  published  the  Agrarian  Law.  So  little 
while  ago  it  is  since  the  Beginning  of  what  is  now  an  every- 
day Occurrence.  And  the  Thing  was  recorded  in  the  Annals; 
no  doubt,  to  correct  such  Customs.  In  them  one  Supper 
had  a  Mark  set  on  it  at  the  Beginning ;  but  now,  two  and 
three  Boars  are  eaten  at  one  Time. 

CHAPTER  LII. 
Of  Parks  for  Beasts. 

THE  first  Man  of  the  long  Robe  that  formed  Parks  for 
these  and  other  wild  Animals  was  Fulvius  Lippinus,  who,  in 
the  Territory  of  Tarquiny,  set  up  an  establishment  to  feed  wild 
Beasts.  And  it  was  not  long  before  others  followed  his  Steps, 
as  L.  Lucullus  and  Q.  Hortensius.  Wild  Sows  bring  forth 
once  a  Year ;  and  the  Boars  in  rutting-time  are  exceeding 
fierce :  then  they  fight  one  with  another :  they  harden  their 
Sides  by  rubbing  them  against  Trees,  and  coat  their  Backs 
with  Mud.  The  Sows  at  their  farrowing  are  still  more  fierce, 
as  is  the  Case  with  almost  every  kind  of  Beast.  Wild  Boars 
are  not  fertile  before  they  are  a  Year  old.  The  wild  Boars  of 
India4  have  two  curved  Tusks  of  a  Cubit  in  Length,  growing 

1  Lib.  xxxvi.  2.  '  Lib.  xxxv.  17.  3  Lib.  xi.  37. 

4  Sus  babirussa.  —  Cuv.  The  Babiroussa.  —  This  animal,  a  species 
of  wild  hog,  is  found  in  some  of  the  Indian  isles.  Its  long  upper  tusks, 


96  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

out  of  their  Snout ;  and  as  many  from  their  Forehead,  like 
Calves'  Horns.  The  Hair  of  the  wild  sort  is  like  Brass  ;  but 
in  others,  black.  In  Arabia,  Swine  will  not  live. 

CHAPTER  LIII. 
Of  Beasts  half  wild. 

THERE  is  no  Creature  that  mixeth  so  easily  with  the  wild 
kind  as  the  Swine  ;  and  such  Hogs  in  old  Time  they  called 
Hybrides  (half  wild) ;  and  this  Term  hath  been  transferred  to 
Mankind,  as  in  the  Instance  of  C.  Antonius,  the  Colleague 
of  Cicero  in  the  Consulship.  And  not  in  Swine  only,  but 
also  in  all  other  Creatures,  of  whatever  Kind  there  is  any 
one  tame,  you  may  find  also  the  wild  of  the  same  Kind ;  and 
even  of  Men  there  may  be  said  to  be  so  many  wild  Kinds. 
As  for  the  Goats,  they  are  changed  into  a  variety  of  Forms.1 
There  are  (Caproe)  Roes,2  (Rupicaprse)  the  Shamois,3  the 
wild  Goat  (Ibex),4  of  wonderful  Swiftness,  although  his  Head 
is  loaded  with  very  large  Horns  like  Scabbards  for  Swords  ; 
by  these  they  poise  themselves  when  they  swing  round  as  by 
a  Rope  from  one  Rock  to  another ;  and  chiefly  when  they 
endeavour  to  skip  along  from  one  Mountain  to  another,  and 
fetch  a  Leap  to  what  Place  they  please  with  a  rapid  Spring. 
Of  this  kind  are  the  Oryges,5  the  only  Beasts,  as  some  say, 
that  have  their  Hair  growing  reversed,  and  turning  toward 
the  Head.  To  these  belong  the  (Damae)  Does,6  and  Py- 
gargi;7  as  also  Strepsicerotes,8  and  many  others  much  like. 

passing  through  the  skin  of  the  snout,  and  curving  round  over  the 
forehead,  so  as  to  protect  the  head  and  eyes,  render  it  applicable  to 
Pliny's  description  of  the  wild  boar  of  India.  —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Lib.  vii.  2.     "  No  animal,"  says  Pennant,  "  seems  so  subject  to 
varieties  (the  dog  excepted)  as  the  goat."  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Caprece,  Lib.  xi.  37.  3  Rupicapra;,  Lib.  xi.  37. 

4  Ibices:  Capra  ibex.  —  LINN.     The  Ibex. —  Wern.  Club. 

5  Oryges,  Lib.  xi.  46,  and  vol.  i.  p.  75,  note.     In  the  30th  chapter, 
the  wild  bulls  of  India  are  said  to  have  their  hair  set  backwards  as  well 
as  the  oryx.  — Wern.  Club. 

6  Damce,  Lib.  x.  37.     The  African  species.  —  Wern.  Club. 

7  Pygargus,  Lib.  x.  3.  8  Strepsicerotes,  Lib.  xi.  37. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  97 

The  former  sort  come  out  of  the  Alps :  these  last  are  sent 
from  other  Parts  beyond  the  Sea. 

CHAPTER  LIV. 
Of  Monkeys. 

ALL  the  Kinds  of  Monkeys1  approach  very  near  to  the 
human  Figure ;  but  they  differ  one  from  another  in  the  Tail. 
They  possess  wonderful  Shrewdness ;  and  are  said  to  do  as 
they  see  Hunters  do  before  them  :  even  to  besmear  them- 
selves with  Birdlime,  and  to  entangle  their  Feet  in  Snares, 
as  if  they  were  putting  on  Shoes.  Mutianus  saith,  that  they 
have  played  at  Chess;  and  that  at  first  Sight  they  knew  Nuts 
made  of  Wax  from  others ;  that  when  the  Moon  is  in  the 
wane  those  Kinds  which  have  Tails  are  sad,  but  the  new 
Moon  they  adore  with  Skipping  for  Joy  :  for  the  Eclipse  of 
Sun  or  Moon  these  and  all  other  four-footed  Creatures 
greatly  dread.  Monkeys  of  all  Sorts  are  very  fond  of  their 
Young  Ones ;  and  those  which  are  kept  tame  in  Houses  will 
display  them  to  every  one  as  soon  as  they  are  born,  carrying 
them  about :  they  also  take  Pleasure  to  have  them  dandled,  as 
if  they  understood  it  to  imply  Congratulation,  and  in  this  Way 
they  generally  end  in  killing  them  by  their  Embraces.  The 
Nature  of  the  Cynocephali2  is  the  most  savage ;  as  that  of  the 
Sphinges  and  Satyri  is  the  most  gentle.  The  Callitriches3 
differ  almost  entirely  in  their  Appearance :  they  have  a 
Beard  on  their  Face,  and  the  Forepart  of  their  Tail  is  widely 

1  Lib.  xi.  44. 

2  Cynocepnalus  anubis. — F.  Cuv.  This  is  the  baboon,  which,  according 
to  the  author  of  the  work  on  Monkeys,  in  the  "  Library  of  Entertaining 
Knowledge,"  was,  "  without  a  shadow  of  doubt,"  the  Cynocephalus  of  the 
ancients ;  but  other  authorities  attribute  the  Cynocephalus  to  the  Derrias 
or  CynocepTialus  hamadryis  of  modern  zoologists.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Colobus  guereza.  —  RUP.     The  Guereza.  —  "  The  conjecture  as  to 
the  identity  of  the  Guereza  with  the  Callithrix  of  the  ancients,  is  by  no 
means  void  of  probability :  at  all  events  it  appears  to  be  much  nearer  the 
truth  than  any  other  we  have  met  with  on  the  subject." — See  Natural 
History  of  Monkeys  in  "Library  of  Entertaining  Knowledge"  p.  278. — 
Wern.  Club. 

VOL.  III.  H 


98  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  VIII. 

spread.     This  Creature  is  said  to  live  in  no  other  Climate 
but  in  Ethiopia,  where  it  is  produced. 

CHAPTER  LV. 
Of  Hares  and  Rabbits. 

OF  Hares  there  are  many  sorts.1  On  the  Alps  they  are 
white ;  and  it  is  thought  that  in  the  Winter  Months  they 
feed  on  Snow  ;  and  certainly  when  it  is  thawed,  all  the  Year 
after  they  are  brownish  red  ;  and  this  Creature  is  otherwise 
bred  up  in  extreme  Cold.  Of  the  Hare  kind  are  they  also 
which  in  Spain  they  call  (Cuniculi2)  Rabbits,  which  are  ex- 
ceedingly fruitful ;  so  that  having  devoured  all  the  Corn  in 
the  Field  before  Harvest  in  the  Balearic  Islands,  they 
brought  thereby  a  Famine  on  the  People.  There  is  a  very 
dainty  Dish  at  Table  made  of  the  young,  either  cut  out  of 
the  Dam's  Belly,  or  taken  from  them  when  they  are  suck- 
ing, without  cleansing  their  Entrails :  and  they  call  it  Lau- 
rices.  It  is  certain  that  the  Inhabitants  of  the  Balearic 
Islands  made  a  Petition  to  Divus  Augustus  Ccesar  for  mili- 
tary Aid  to  destroy  the  great  Increase  of  these  Creatures 
among  them.  Ferrets3  are  a  favourite  Resource  for  hunt- 
ing them.  They  put  them  into  their  Holes,  which  within 
the  Ground  have  many  Passages  (from  whence  these  Crea- 
tures are  called  Cuniculi} :  and  when  they  are  driven  out 
of  their  Earth  they  are  soon  taken.  Archelaus  writeth, 
that  so  many  Passages  as  the  Hare  hath  for  his  Dung,  so 

1  Lepus  timidus. — LINN.     The  Hare. — Baron  Cuvier  says  that  during 
the  second  Punic  War,  Fulvius  Hirpinus  devised  the  mode  of  retaining 
quadrupeds  in  parks.     And  that  these  parks  were  named  Leporaria, 
because  three  sorts  of  hares  were  reared  in  them  ;  the  common  hare,  the 
original  Spanish  rabbit,  and  the  variegated  or  alpine  hare,  a  species  now 
almost  entirely  destroyed. 

The  flesh  of  the  hare  was  highly  valued :  Martial  says  (Xenia,  87) : — 

"  Inter  aves  turdus,  siquis  me  Judice  certet, 
Inter  Quadrupedes  gloria  prima  Lepus."  — Wern.  Club. 

2  Lepus  cuniculus. —  LINN.     The  Rabbit. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Musielafuro.—  Li-HN.     The  Ferret.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  99 

many  Years  old  he  is ;  and  certainly  some  have  more  than 
others.  The  same  Writer  says,  that  every  Hare  is  in  posses- 
sion of  a  double  Faculty,  and  can  breed  without  the  Buck. 
Herein  Nature  hath  showed  her  Bounty,  that  so  harmless  an 
Animal,  and  so  good  to  eat,  should  produce  so  abundantly. 
The  Hare  is  naturally  exposed  to  be  a  Prey  to  all ;  it  is  the 
only  Creature,  except  the  Dasypus,1  which  superfoetates  ;  so 
that  she  hath  one  sucking  her ;  another  within  her,  covered 
with  Hair ;  another  is  naked  ;  and  another  scarcely  well- 
shaped  :  all  in  the  Womb  together.  An  Attempt  has  been 
made  to  make  Cloth  of  Hare's  Fur ;  but  to  the  Touch  they 
are  not  so  soft  as  upon  the  Skin ;  and  the  Hair  is  soon  shed, 
because  of  its  shortness. 

CHAPTER  LVI. 
Of  Beasts  half  tame. 

HARES  are  seldom  rendered  tame ;  and  yet  they  cannot 
rightly  be  called  wild.  For  many  other  Creatures  there  are 
that  are  neither  wild  nor  gentle,  but  of  a  middle  Nature  be- 
tween both.  Such  is  among  Birds,  Swallows,  Bees;  and  in 
the  Sea,  Dolphins. 

CHAPTER  LVII. 
Of  Mice*  and  Dormice. 

IN  the  Class  of  those  which  are  neither  tame  nor  wild, 
many  have  arranged  the  Mice  that  haunt  our  Houses :  a 
Creature  not  to  be  despised  in  considering  public  Prodigies. 
By  gnawing  the  silver  Shields3  at  Lavinium,  they  portended 
the  Marsian  War.  To  Carlo  the  Imperator,  by  eating  the 
Bandages  which  he  used  in  fastening  his  Shoes,  at  Clusium, 

1  It  is  not  possible  to  determine  what  animal  Pliny  intended  by  the 
term  Dasypus:  some  have  supposed  the  word  to  be  no  more  than  an 
epithet  for  a  species  of  Lepus,  all  of  which  are  soft-footed.  See  B.  x.  c.  62. 
-Wern.  Club. 

8  Mm  musculus.  —  LINN.     The  common  Mouse.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  Cicero  mentions  this  circumstance,  "De  Divin."  Lib.  i.  and  Lib.  ii. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


100  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  VIII. 

they  prognosticated  his  Death.  There  are  many  kinds  of 
them  in  the  Country  of  Cyrerie :  some  with  a  broad  Fore- 
head, others  with  a  sharp-pointed  ;  and  some  with  sharp 
Bristles,  like  Hedgehogs.  Theophrastus  reporteth,  that  they 
drove  away  the  Inhabitants  of  the  Island  Gyaros,  and 
gnawed  even  the  Iron  :  a  Thing  which  it  seems  their 
Nature  to  do ;  for  among  the  Chalybes  they  eat  the  Iron  in 
the  Smiths'  Workshops ;  and,  indeed,  in  Gold  Mines1  on 
this  Account  they  cut  open  their  Bowels,  and  so  they  always 
find  their  stolen  Goods  again  :  such  Delight  this  Creature 
taketh  in  thieving.  We  read  in  the  Chronicles,  that  when 
Annibal  besieged  Casilinum,  a  Mouse  (Murem)  was  sold 
for  two  hundred  Sesterces ;  and  the  Man  who  bought  it 
lived,  but  he  that  sold  it  died  for  Hunger.  If  white  ones 
abound,  it  presageth  Prosperity.  Our  Annals  are  full  of 
Instances,  that  when  Rats  (Sorices)  are  heard  to  squeak 
the  Auspices  are  broken  off.  Nigidius  saith,  that  Rats  also 
lie  hid  in  Winter,  like  Dormice2  (Glires).  By  the  Laws  of 
the  Censors,  and  principally  by  an  Act  of  M.  Scaurus,  in  his 
Consulship,  it  was  provided  that  these  should  be  kept  away 
from  Suppers  in  no  other  Manner  than  were  Shell-fish,  or 
Birds  brought  from  foreign  Countries.  The  Dormouse  is  a 
half-  wild  Creature  ;  and  he  who  first  contrived  to  keep 
Boars  in  Parks,  also  fed  these  Animals  in  Tubs.  In  which 
Practice  it  hath  been  observed,  that  these  little  Creatures 
will  not  associate  unless  they  were  Inhabitants  of  the  same 
Wood ;  and  if  there  be  mingled  among  them  any  Strangers, 
such  as  had  some  River  or  Mountain  between  the  Places 
where  they  were  bred,  they  kill  one  another  with  fighting. 

1  Livy  tells  us,  Lib.  xxviii.  23,  that  at  Cumse  mice  gnawed  some  gold 
in  the  temple  of  Jupiter ;  and  again,  Lib.  xxx.  2,  that  at  Antium  some 
mice  gnawed  a  golden  crown.  — Wern.  Club. 

2  Myoxus  glis.  —  Cuv.     An  animal  as  big  as  a  rat,  and  not  to  be  con- 
founded with  the  little  English  creature  of  the  same  name  :  the  M.  Avel- 
lanarius  of  Cuvier.     The  Romans  regarded  dormice  as  a  great  delicacy, 
rearing  them  in  enclosures,  and  lodging  them  in  earthen  jars  of  a  peculiar 
form ;  and  fattening  them  with  worms  and  chestnuts.  —  B.  xxxvi.  c.  2. 
The  writers  on  agriculture  speak  of  the  rearing  of  these  creatures  as  they 
do  of  any  other  country  work.  — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  101 

They  feed  with  distinguished  Piety  their  Parents,  when 
they  are  feeble  with  Age.  They  renew  their  Age  by  sleeping 
all  the  Winter;  for  they  lie  close  and  snug  all  the  while. 
But  when  the  Summer  is  come,  they  grow  young  again. 
The  Fieldmice  (Nitelae)  likewise  take  similar  Rest. 

CHAPTER  LVIII. 
What  Creatures  are  not  to  be  found  in  certain  Places. 

IT  is  wonderful  that  Nature  hath  not  only  assigned  diffe- 
rent Creatures  to  different  Countries,  but  also  in  one  Region 
hath  denied  some  to  certain  Situations.  In  the  Forest  of 
Moesia  in  Italy,  these  Dormice  are  found  only  in  one  Part. 
In  Lycia,  Roebucks1  never  pass  the  Mountains  that  border 
on  the  Syrians ;  nor  do  the  wild  Asses  that  Mountain  which 
divideth  Cappadocia  from  Cilicia.  Within  Hellespont  the 
Stags  never  wander  away  into  the  Borders  of  other  Coun- 
tries ;  and  those  which  are  about  Arginussa  do  not  pass  be- 
yond the  Mountain  Elatus;  which  may  be  known  by  the 
Fact,  that  all  upon  that  Mountain  have  their  Ears  divided. 
In  the  Island  Poroselenum,  the  Weazels  do  not  cross  over 
the  Highway.  And  about  Lebadia  in  Bceotia,  those  Moles 
which  are  brought  thither  from  other  Parts  fly  from  the 
very  Soil ;  although  near  by,  in  Orchomenus,  they  under- 
mine all  the  Corn-fields  ;  and  I  have  seen  all  the  Bed- 
clothing  made  of  their  Skins.  In  this  Manner,  even  Religion 
will  not  prevent  our  seeking  Pleasures  out  of  the  Portents 
themselves.  The  strange  Hares  that  are  brought  to  Ithaca 
are  found  dead  about  the  very  Banks  of  the  Sea.  In  the 
Island  Ebusus  there  are  no  Rabbits ;  but  in  Spain  and  in  the 
Balearic  Islands  they  abound.  Frogs  were  mute  in  Cyrenae ; 
but  those  which  were  brought  thither  from  the  Continent 

1  Antelope  dorcas. — PALLAS.  The  Gazelle. — This  animal  is  generally 
supposed  to  be  the  Dorcas  of  the  ancients ;  but  there  are  those  who 
would  rather  identify  it  with  either  the  Antelope  Arabica,  Hemp,  et 
Ehren.;  or  the  Antelope  subgutturosa,  Guldenst. — Wern.  Club. 


102  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  VIII. 

were  vocal ;  and  this  kind  still  continueth  there.  Even  now 
in  the  Island  Seriphos  they  are  silent ;  but  if  the  same  are 
carried  to  other  Places,  they  sing.  And  they  say  that  the 
like  happeneth  in  a  Lake  of  Thessaly  named  Sicendus.  In 
Italy  the  Bite  of  the  Shrew-mouse1  (Mus  araneus)  is  venom- 
ous ;  but  beyond  the  Apennines  there  are  no  more  such  to 
be  found.  In  whatever  Country  they  are,  if  they  cross  over 
the  Track  of  a  Cart-wheel,  they  die.  In  Olympus,  a  Moun- 
tain of  Macedonia,  there  are  no  Wolves  ;  nor  in  the  Island 
of  Crete.  And  there  also  are  no  Foxes  nor  Bears;  and  in 
one  Word,  no  hurtful  Creature,  except  the  Phalangiurn,2  a 
kind  of  Spider,  of  which  we  will  speak  more  in  its  proper 
Place.  It  is  more  surprising  that  in  the  same  Island  there  are 
no  Deer,  except  only  in  the  Region  of  the  Cydoniates :  no 
wild  Boars  likewise,  nor  the  Attagen,  or  Hedgehogs.  To 
conclude,  in  Africa  there  are  no  wild  Boars,  no  Stags,  no 
Roes,  nor  Bears. 

CHAPTER  LIX. 

What  Creatures  are  hurtful  to  Strangers.  • 

SOME  Creatures  there  are  which  do  no  Harm  to  the  Na- 
tives of  the  Country,  but  kill  all  Strangers  :  such  as  some 
small  Serpents  in  Tirinthe,  which  are  supposed  to  be  pro- 
duced out  of  the  Earth.  So,  in  Syria,  there  are  Snakes, 
especially  along  the  Banks  of  the  Euphrates,  that  do  not 
touch  the  Syrians  while  l}ing  asleep;  and  even  if  a  Native 
treads  upon  them  and  receives  a  Bite,  he  does  not  receive 
any  Hurt ;  but  to  the  People  of  any  other  Nation  they  are 

1  Sorex  araneus.  —  LINN.     The  Shrew.  —  Among  the  ancients  the 
Shrew-mouse  had  a  very  bad  reputation.     Thus  Aristotle  declares  that 
its  bite  is  dangerous  to  horses  and  other  beasts  of  burden ;  and  that  it  is 
more  dangerous  if  the  Shrew-mouse  be  with  young.      The  bite,  he  says, 
causes  boils,  and  these  burst,  if  the  Shrew-mouse  be  pregnant  when  she 
inflicts  the  wound ;  but  if  she  be  not,  they  do  not  burst. — "  Hist.  Anim." 
Lib.  viii.  24.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  Lib.  xi.  24 ;  and  Lib.  xxix.  4. 


BOOK  VIII.]  History  of  Nature.  103 

very  dangerous  :  so  that  they  will  eagerly  assail  and  kill 
them  with  extreme  Pain.  And  therefore  it  is  that  the 
Syrians  do  not  destroy  them.  On  the  other  Hand,  Aristotle 
reporteth,1  that  in  Latmos,  a  Mountain  of  Caria,  the  Scor- 
pions will  do  no  Harm  to  Strangers,  but  they  will  sting  to 
Death  the  Inhabitants  of  the  Country. 

Now  let  us  proceed  to  speak  of  the  Kinds  of  other  living 
Creatures,  besides  those  of  the  Land. 

1  "Hist.  Anim."  Lib.  viii.  39.  —  Wern.  Club. 


IN  THE  NINTH   BOOK 

ARE    CONTAINED    THE 
HISTORY    AND    NATURE    OF    CREATURES    OF    THE    WATER. 


CHAP. 

1.  The  Nature  of  Creatures  of  the 

Water. 

2.  The  Reason  why  Creatures  of 

the  Sea  are  of  all  others  the 
biggest. 

3.  The  monstrous  Beasts  of  the 

Indian  Sea. 

4.  The  greatest  Fishes  in  every 

Part  of  the  Ocean. 

5.  Of  Tritons,  Nereids,  and  Sea- 

Elephants  :  their  Forms. 

6.  Of  Whales  (called  Balaenae)  and 

Orcse. 

7.  Whether    Fishes    breathe    or 

sleep. 

8.  Of  Dolphins  and  their  won- 

derful Properties. 

9.  Of  the  Tursions. 

10.  Of  Tortoises,  and  how  they  are 

taken. 

1 1 .  Who  first  devised  to  separate  the 

Tortoise-shells  into  Leaves. 

12.  The  Coverings  of  Sea  Animals : 

the  Division  of  them  into  their 
several  Kinds. 

13.  Of  the  Seal. 

14.  Of  Fishes  without  Hair  :  how 

they  breed :  and  how  many 
Sorts  there  are. 

15.  The  Names  and  Natures    of 

many  Fishes. 

16.  Augury  by  Fishes,  and  their 

Variety. 

17.  Of  the  Mullet  and  other  Fishes. 

That  the  same  Fishes  are  not 
in  request  in  all  Places. 


CHAP. 

18.  Of  the  Barbel,  the  Coracinus  : 

of  Stockfish  and  Salmon. 

19.  Of  the  Exoecetus,  Calamaries, 

the  Muraena. 

20.  The  Division  of  Fishes  by  the 

Shape  of  their  Bodies. 

21.  Of  Eels. 

22.  The  Manner  of  taking  them  in 

the  Lake  Benacus. 

23.  The  Nature  of  the  Muraena. 

24.  Of  flat  Fishes. 

25.  Of  the  Echeneis,  and  its  won- 

derful Nature. 

26.  The  Variety  of  Fishes. 

27.  Of  the  Fish  called  the  Lantern, 

and  the  Sea  Dragon. 

28.  Of  Fishes  wanting  Blood. 

29.  Of  the  Loligo,  the  Sepia,  the 

Calamary,  and  Nautilus. 

30.  The   Fish   Ozsena,   and  Nau- 

plius :    also   of  the  Lobster 
kind. 

31.  Of  Crabs,  Echini:  and  of  the 

greater  Sort  named  Echino- 
metrae. 

32.  Of  wreathed  Shells. 

33.  Of  Scallops,  Murex,  and  other 

such. 

34.  The  Treasures  of  the  Sea. 

35.  Of  Pearls,  how  they  are  pro- 

duced, and  where  :  also  how 
they  are  found. 

36.  Of  the  purple  Shell-fish  and 

the  Murices. 

37.  How  many  Kinds  there  are  of 

purple  Shell-fishes. 


Contents  of  the  Ninth  Book. 


105 


CHAP. 

38.  How  the  purple  Shell  -  fishes 

are  taken. 

39.  When  Purple  was  first  worn 

in  Rome. 

40.  The  Price  of  purple  Cloth  at 

Rome. 

41.  The  dyeing  of  the  Amethyst 

Colour,  of  the  Scarlet  in 
Grain,  and  the  light  Scarlet 
Hysginus. 

42.  Of  the  Pinna  and  Pinnoteres: 

also  the  Intelligence  of  Crea- 
tures of  the  Water. 

43.  Of  Scolopendres,    Sea  Foxes, 

and  the  Fishes  Glani. 

44.  Of  the  Fish    called  the   Sea 

Ram. 

45.  Of  those  Things  which  have  a 

third  Nature,  being  neither 
living  Creatures,  nor  yet 
Plants;  of  Sea  Nettles  and 
Sponges. 

46.  Of  Hound-fishes. 

47.  Of  such  as  have  stony  Shells : 

of  those  that  have  no  Sense : 
of  other  sordid  Creatures. 


CHAP. 

48.  Of  venomous  Fishes. 

49.  The  Diseases  incident  to  Fishes. 

50.  The  surprising  Generation  of 

Fishes. 

51.  Another    Discourse    of   their 

Generation :  and  what  Fishes 
lay  Eggs. 

52.  The  Wombs  of  Fishes. 

53.  What  Fishes  live  longest. 

54.  Of  Oyster  Pits,  and  who  first 

devised  them. 

55.  Who  first  invented  Ponds  to 

feed  the  Mursena  in. 

56.  The   Ponds  for   other  Shell- 

fishes,   and    who   first   used 
them. 

57.  Of  Fishes  that  haunt  the  Land. 

58.  The  Rats  of  the  Nile. 

59.  Of  the  Fish  called  Anthias,  and 

how  it  is  taken. 

60.  Of  Sea  Stars. 

61.  Of  the  Fishes  Dactyli,  and  their 

admirable  Properties. 

62.  What  Fishes  entertain  Amity 

one  with  another,  and  which 
are  ever  at  War. 


In  sum,  this  Book  containeth  Histories  and  Observations  to  the  Number 
of  650,  collected 

OUT  or  LATIN  AUTHORS  : 

Turanius  Graccula,  Trogus,  Mecanas,  Alfius  Flavus,  Cornelius  Nepos, 
Laberius  the  Writer  of  merry  Epigrams,  Fubianus,  Fenestella,  Mutianus, 
JElius  Stilo,  Statins  Sebosus,  Melissus,  Seneca,  Cicero,  Macer,  JEmylius, 
Messala  Corvinus,  Trebius  Niger,  and  Nigidius. 

OUT  OF  FOREIGN  WRITERS: 

Aristotle,   King  Archelaus,    Callimachus,   Democritus,    Theophrastus, 
rasyllus,  Hegesidemus  of  Cythnos,  and  Alexander  Polyhistor. 


THE   NINTH  BOOK 


HISTORY    OF    NATURE 


C.   PLINIUS   SECUNDUS. 


CHAPTER  I. 
Of  the  Nature  of  the  Inhabitants  of  the  Water. 

have  pointed  out  the  Nature  of  those  Ani- 
ma^s  which  are  caHed  Terrestrial,  and  which 
have  some  Society  with  Men.  And  consi- 
dering  that  among  the  others  they  that  fly 
K2OOOO*  are  the  least,  we  will  first  treat  of  the  Inha- 
bitants of  the  Sea ;  and  of  those  also  that  live  in  Rivers  or 
Ponds. 

CHAPTER  II. 

Why  the  Sea  should  breed  the  greatest  living  Creatures. 

THE  Waters  bring  forth  greater  Abundance  of  living 
Creatures,  and  these  also  of  larger  size,  than  the  Land. 
The  Cause  is  evident,  in  the  excessive  Abundance  of  Mois- 
ture. For  the  Birds,  which  live  suspended  in  the  Air,  their 
Case  is  otherwise.  But  in  the  Sea,  which  is  so  widely 
spread  abroad,  so  soft  and  proper  to  yield  Nourishment 
and  increase,  and  receiveth  the  Causes  of  Propagation  from 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  107 

on  high,  Nature  is  always  framing  some  new  Creatures, 
many  of  which  are  found  to  be  monstrous  Things.  For 
the  Seeds  and  universal  Elements  are  so  interlaced  and 
iningled  one  with  another,  partly  by  the  blowing  (of  the 
Winds),  and  at  other  Times  by  the  Agitation  (of  the  Waves), 
that  it  may  truly  be  said,  according  to  the  vulgar  Opinion, 
that  whatever  is  bred  in  any  Part  of  Nature  is  to  be  found 
also  in  the  Sea  ;  and  many  more  Things  besides,  which  no- 
where else  are  to  be  seen.  For  there  truly  not  only  exist  the 
Forms  of  Land  Animals,  but  also  of  many  other  Things;  and 
there  may  one  see  also  what  appear  like  Bunches  of  Grapes, 
Swords,  and  Saws;  yea,  and  also  Cucumbers,  which  for 
Colour,  Smell,  and  Taste,  resemble  those  that  grow  on 
the  Land.  And  therefore  we  need  the  less  to  wonder,  if  in 
such  little  Snails  there  are  some  Things  standing  out  like 
the  Heads  of  Horses. 

CHAPTER  III. 
Of  Beasts  in  the  Indian  Sea. 

THE  Indian  Sea  breedeth  the  most  and  biggest  Animals ; 
among  which  Whales  (Balaenae)1  are  as  large  as  four  Acres  of 
Land  ;  and  Pristes  two  hundred  Cubits:  and  no  Wonder,  for 

1  To  avoid  a  confusion  of  references,  the  species  of  whales  mentioned 
by  Pliny  are  here  arranged  at  one  view ;  and,  so  far  as  the  subject  admits, 
identified  with  those  recognised  by  modern  naturalists. 

The  term  "  Balaenae  "  appears,  in  its  widest  extension,  to  have  been  a 
general  name  for  the  whole  tribe ;  in  which  also  were  comprised  some 
inhabitants  of  the  ocean,  of  large  size,  which  had  nothing  in  common 
with  the  proper  whales  but  their  magnitude.  The  Pristis,  perhaps  the 
Basking  Shark  (Selachus  maximus,  Cuv.),  and  some  other  species,  and 
certainly  the  Tunny,  when,  as  sometimes  happens,  it  has  attained  enor- 
mous growth,  were  anciently  arranged  among  cetaceous  fishes.  But  be- 
sides this,  the  word  "  Balaena,"  or  "  Phalsena,"  was  the  proper  name  of 
the  animal  known  as  the  Balcenoptera  musculus,  or  the  Rorqual  of 
Cuvier;  which  they  did  not  distinguish  from  B.  Boops. 

The  creatures  referred  to  at  the  end  of  Ch.  3,  and  compared  to  horses, 
asses,  and  bulls,  were  probably  Dugongs,  or  Sea-cows ;  the  Manatus  and 
Halichore  of  Cuvier,  and  comprised  in  the  genus  Trichecus  of  Linncus. 
Physeter,  a  modern  as  well  as  ancient  genus  of  whales,  is  still  known  on 


1 08  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  1 X . 

Locusts  are  there  to  be  found  of  full  four  Cubits  :  and  Eels 
in  the  River  Ganges  of  thirty  Feet.  But  these  Beasts  in  the 
Sea  are  chiefly  to  be  seen  about  the  Solstice.  For  then  by 
the  Whirlwinds,  Rains,  and  Tempests,  which  rush  with  Vio- 
lence down  from  the  rugged  Mountains,  the  Seas  are  turned 
up  from  the  very  Bottom  ;  and  thus  the  Billows  roll  and 
raise  these  Beasts  out  of  the  deep  Parts  of  the  Ocean.  For 
in  that  Manner  so  great  a  Multitude  of  Tunnies  were  on  one 
occasion  driven  up,  that  the  Fleet  of  Alexander  the  Great  was 
able  to  make  head  against  them  in  no  other  Manner  than  by 
advancing  as  if  to  contend  with  an  Host  of  Enemies ;  for 
otherwise  if  they  had  sailed  singly  and  asunder,  there  had 
been  no  Way  to  escape.  By  no  Voice,  no  Noise,  no  Blows, 
but  by  the  Crash  only  were  they  terrified  ;  nor  are  they 
disturbed  but  by  Destruction. 

In  the  Red  Sea  there  is  a  great  Peninsula  named  Cadara, 
projecting  so  far  as  to  form  an  extensive  Bay,  which  it  took 
King  Ptolemceus  twelve  Days  and  Nights  to  row  through ; 
for  there  was  not  any  Wind  to  help  him.  Through  the 
Stillness  of  this  Place,  the  Beasts  grow  to  such  bigness, 
that  their  Weight  renders  them  not  able  to  stir.  The  Com- 
manders of  the  Fleets  of  Alexander  the  Great  reported, 
that  the  Gedrosi,  a  People  dwelling  on  the  River  Arbis, 

the  west  coasts  of  Britain,  by  the  corresponding  term  "  Blower."  The 
enormous  creature  cast  on  shore  at  Gades,  as  mentioned  at  the  end  of 
Chap.  5,  must  have  been  of  this  genus ;  and  as  the  number  of  teeth 
assigned  to  it  was  probably  counted  collectively,  after  the  jaws  were 
denuded  of  flesh,  when  some  also  are  seen  in  the  upper  jaw,  it  may  be 
supposed  probable  that  it  was  Ph.  macrocephalus. 

The  other  species  mentioned  by  Pliny  belong  to  the  genus  Delphinus  : — 
D.  Orca.     The  Grampus.  —  It  is  also  the  Aries  or  Ram  of  Pliny  ; 
from  a  white  crescent  over  the  eye,  marked  on  the  skin,  fancifully 
supposed  to  resemble  a  ram's  horn. 
D.  DelpMs.    The  real  Dolphin. 
D.  Tursio. 

The  Platanista  of  Pliny  is  the  D.  gangeticus,  Cuv. 
The  Forcus  marinus,  c.  15,  is  probably  the  D.  Phocana,  or  common 

Porpus. 

Whale  oil  is  mentioned,  B.  xxxii.  c.  1. 
The  Pristis  is  probably  the  P,  antiquorum,  or  Sawfish.  —  Wvrn.  Club. 


BOOK  IX .]  History  of  Nature.  109 

used  to  make  the  Jaws  of  such  Beasts  the  Doors  of  their 
Houses ;  that  they  form  the  Rafters  of  their  Roofs  with  the 
Bones  ;  and  that  many  of  them  were  found  to  be  forty  Cubits 
long. 

In  those  Parts  the  Beasts  go  forth  to  the  Land  like  a 
Flock  of  Cattle,  and  feed  upon  the  Roots  of  Plants,  and 
then  return.  There  are  others  also  which  have  Heads  like 
Horses,  Asses,  and  Bulls ;  and  these  eat  the  standing  Corn. 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Which  are  the  greatest  Creatures  in  any  Ocean. 

THE  largest  Creature  in  the  Indian  Sea  is  the  Pristis  and 
Balsena  (Whale).  In  the  Ocean  of  Gaul  the  largest  is  the 
Physeter,  which  lifteth  itself  up  in  the  Manner  of  an  immense 
Pillar,  higher  than  the  Sails  of  Ships ;  and  spouteth  forth 
almost  a  Flood.  In  the  Ocean  of  Gades  there  is  a  Tree1 
spreading  abroad  with  mighty  Arms,  to  such  an  extent  that  it 
is  believed  to  be  the  Cause  why  that  Arm  of  the  Sea  is  never 
entered.  There  are  to  be  seen  also  what  from  their  Shape 
are  called  Wheels,  distinguished  by  four  Rays  ;  with  their 
two  Eyes  closing  over  the  Naves  on  each  Side. 

CHAPTER  V. 

Of  the  Forms  of  Tritons,  Nereids,  and  Sea- Elephants  * 
WHEN  Tiberius  was  Sovereign,  an  Embassy  of  the  Inha- 

1  This  and  the  wheel  may  be  referred  to  some  large  species  of  coral, 
and  asterias,  or  sea-star ;  which  report  had  magnified  enormously.     But 
the  former  is  thought  by  Dr.  Hamilton  to  be  the  Kraken  of  Pontop- 
pidan  :  perhaps  a  species  of  Medusa,  or  Cuttle-fish,  of  which  a  wonderful 
figure  is  given  by  Denys  Montford,  where  one  of  these  creatures  is  seen 
capturing  a  Chinese  junk.  —  Wern.  Club- 

2  Of  the  existence  of  these  beings,  as  they  are  represented  by  the 
poets,  the  people  of  that  day  had  as  little  doubt  as  of  the  god  whose 
attendants  they  were  supposed  to  be.     The  stories  told  in  this  chapter 
were  probably  due  to  some  deception  practised  on  the  credulity  or  fear  of 
the  neighbourhood  by  some  skilful  swimmers.   That  some  species  of  Seal 


1  10  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

bitants  of  Ulyssipon1  was  sent  to  inform  him,  that  there  was 
seen  and  heard  within  a  certain  Cave  a  Triton,  sounding  a 
Shell;  and  that  he  was  known  by  his  Form.  And  it  is  not 
false  that  there  is  such  a  Creature  as  a  Nereid;  only  their 
Body  is  rough  with  Scales,  even  in  those  Parts  where  they 
possess  the  human  Form.  For  such  a  Female  Being  was 
beheld  on  the  same  Shore  ;  and  the  neighbouring  Inha- 
bitants heard  its  Moaning  from  a  Distance  when  it  was 
dying.  Also,  a  Governor  of  Gaul,  under  .Divus  Augustus, 
wrote,  that  many  of  these  Nereids  were  seen  dead  upon  the 
Shore.  I  possess  Authors,  illustrious  in  the  Equestrian 
Order,  who  testify  that  in  the  Ocean  near  Gades  they  saw  a 
Sea-man,  in  the  whole  Body  perfectly  resembling  a  Man  : 
that  in  the  Night  Season  he  would  come  aboard  their  Boats; 
and  on  whatever  Part  he  sat,  he  weighed  it  down  ;  so  that  if 
he  continued  there  any  long  Time  he  would  even  sink  it. 
When  Tiberius  was  Sovereign,  in  an  Island  opposite  the 
Coast  of  the  Province  of  Lugdunensis,  the  Sea,  when  it 
ebbed,  left  upon  the  Sands,  at  one  Time,  above  three  hun- 
dred Beasts,  of  a  wonderful  Variety  and  Bigness.  And 
there  were  no  fewer  found  upon  the  Coast  of  the  Santones. 
And  among  the  Rest  there  were  Elephants  and  Rams,  with 
Horns  like  those  (of  the  Land),  except  that  they  were 
white:  and  many  Nereids  also.  Turanius  hath  reported, 
that  a  Beast  was  cast  upon  the  Shore  at  Gades,  of  which  the 
Breadth  of  the  two  Fins  forming  the  Ends  of  the  Tail  was 
sixteen  Cubits  ;  it  had  120  Teeth,  of  which  the  biggest 
were  nine  Inches  in  Measure,  and  the  least  half  a  Foot. 
M.  Scaurus,  among  other  wonderful  Things  in  his 


(Phoca)  has  been  seen,  so  closely  resembling  the  human  figure  as  to  ob- 
tain the  name  of  Merman,  has,  even  in  modern  times,  been  confidently 
asserted.  But  the  evidence  has  failed  in  proportion  to  the  progress  of 
inquiry  ;  and  the  opinion  of  naturalists  of  the  present  age  appears  to  be, 
that  the  casual  and  hasty  appearance  of  the  young  of  the  Walrus,  before 
it  has  obtained  its  tusks,  has  been  the  cause  of  this  mistaken  idea.  The 
same  creature,  in  its  adult  growth,  was,  beyond  doubt,  the  sea-elephant  of 
the  ancients.  —  Wern.  Club. 

1  The  modern  Lisbon.  —Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  1 1 1 

ship,  showed  the  Bones  of  that  Beast  to  which  Andromeda1  is 
said  to  have  been  exposed  ;  and  which  were  brought  to  Rome 
from  Joppe,  a  Town  in  Judaea  :  in  Length  they  were  forty 
Feet,  and  in  Height  they  exceeded  the  Ribs  of  the  Indian 
Elephant ;  the  Bone  of  the  Spine  was  a  Foot-and-half  thick. 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Of  Balance  and  Orcce. 

BALJEN^E  come  even  into  our  Seas  also.  They  say  that 
in  the  Ocean  about  Gades,  they  are  not  seen  before  Mid- 
winter ;  for  at  their  set  Times  they  lie  close  in  a  certain  calm 
and  large  Bay,  where  they  wonderfully  delight  to  show 
themselves.  The  Orcae  know  this ;  they  are  a  Beast  that 
are  a  deadly  Enemy  to  the  others ;  and  their  Likeness  can- 
not be  represented  by  any  other  Figure  than  that  of  a 
mighty  Lump  of  Flesh,  armed  with  terrible  Teeth.  These 
break  into  those  secret  Retreats,  and  bite  and  tear  the  young 
Calves,  or  those  newly  born,  with  the  old  ones  that  are 
great  with  Young;  they  also  pierce  into  them,  like  Ships  of 
War  attacking  with  their  Prows.  The  Balaenge  (Whales) 
that  cannot  turn  aside,  and  are  helpless  to  resist,  being 
unwieldy  by  reason  of  their  own  Weight,  being  then  heavy 
with  Young,  or  weak  with  the  Pains  of  Parturition,  know 
no  other  Means  of  Safety  but  to  escape  into  the  Deep,  and 
so  defend  themselves  by  the  Aid  of  the  whole  Ocean.  On 
the  other  Side,  the  Orcae  endeavour  to  lie  between  them  and 
the  Way  of  Escape,  and  kill  them  among  the  Straits  and 
ragged  Rocks,  to  drive  them  upon  the  Shallows,  or  force 
them  upon  the  Stones.  When  these  Combats  are  seen,  the 

1  See  B.  v.  c.  13,  vol.  ii.  p.  67.  When  it  became  an  object  of  political 
importance  to  occupy  and  amuse  the  public  attention  by  subjects  alien  to 
the  affairs  of  government,  every  thing  which  could  minister  to  the  curio- 
sity of  the  people  was  sought  for  in  the  wide  range  of  the  Roman  empire, 
and  brought  to  the  city ;  where  the  credulity  of  the  populace  was  equal 
to  its  ignorance.  The  supposed  relics  of  this  monster  may  have  been  the 
fossil  bones  of  some  gigantic  animal :  or  perhaps  nothing  more  than  the 
bones  of  a  whale.  —  Wern.  Clnb. 


1 12  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

Sea  appeareth  as  if  it  were  angry  with  itself;  for  although 
there  are  no  Winds  in  the  Bay,  yet  the  Waves  are  so  great 
from  their  panting,  and  the  Blows,  as  no  Whirlwinds  are  able 
to  raise.  In  the  Harbour  of  Ostia,  also,  one  of  these  Orcae  was 
seen,  and  was  assailed  by  Claudius  the  Prince.  It  had  come 
when  he  was  making  the  Harbour,  enticed  by  the  Shipwreck 
of  Beasts'  Hides  that  were  brought  from  Gaul,  on  which  for 
several  Days  the  Creature  had  been  glutting  itself;  and  so 
it  had  made  a  Channel  in  the  Bottom  of  the  Shallows,  which 
was  so  narrowed  in  by  the  Action  of  the  Waves,  that  it  be- 
came too  narrow  for  the  Creature  to  turn  round  ;  but  while 
it  still  goeth  after  this  Gluttony,  being  thrown  by  the  Bil- 
lows upon  the  Shore,  its  back  appeared  high  above  the 
Water,  like  the  Bottom  of  a  Ship  turned  upside  down. 
Ccesar  commanded  Nets  and  Cords  with  many  Folds  to  be 
spread  along  the  Mouth  of  the  Harbour,  and  himself,  accom- 
panied with  the  Prsetorian  Cohorts,  exhibited  it  for  a  Show  to 
the  People  of  Rome;  the  Soldiers  being  brought  together, 
darted  their  Spears  from  the  Ships,  one  of  which  I  myself 
saw  sunk,  as  it  became  filled  with  the  Waves  that  this  Beast 
spouted  up.  Balsenae  have  Openings  in  their  Forehead  ;  and 
so  as  they  swim  on  the  Surface  of  the  Water,  they  blow  up 
aloft  Showers  of  Rain. 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Whether  or  no  Fish  breathe  or  sleep. 

ALL  Writers  allow  that  a  very  few  other  Fishes  in  the 
Sea,  which  among  other  inward  Bowels  have  a  Lung, 
breathe ;  for  without  the  latter  Organ  no  Animal  is  thought 
to  draw  breath*  And  they  who  are  of  this  Opinion  suppose, 
likewise,  that  no  Fishes  having  Gills  draw  in  and  return 
their  Breath  by  turns  ;  nor  many  other  Kinds  besides,  al- 
though they  are  without  Gills  :  of  which  Opinion,  I  see,  was 
Aristotle;  and  he  supported  the  Doctrine  by  many  profound 
Researches.  But  I  must  not  conceal  that  1  do  not  entirely  agree 
with  this  Opinion ;  for,  if  Nature  be  so  disposed,  other  internal 
Organs  are  able  to  carry  on  the  Function  of  Breathing  in 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  1 13 

the  Place  of  Lungs,  just  as  in  many  Creatures  another  Kind 
of  Humour  is  in  the  Place  of  Blood.  And  who  would  wonder 
that  this  vital  Breath  should  penetrate  within  the  Waters, 
considering  that  he  seeth  how  it  is  returned  from  them ;  and 
that  it  penetrateth  even  into  the  Earth,  which  is  the  grossest 
Part  of  Nature,  we  perceive  by  the  Example  of  the  Crea- 
tures, as  the  Moles,  which  live,  although  always  buried  in 
the  Ground.  I  have  effectual  Reasons  to  lead  me  to  believe, 
that  all  Things  in  the  Waters  breathe,  each  one  after  its 
Nature.  First,  I  have  often  observed  in  Fishes  an  evident 
Action  of  breathing  in  the  Heat  of  Summer;  and  also  that 
they  gape  when  the  Weather  is  calm ;  and  they  also  who 
believe  the  contrary,  confess  that  Fishes  sleep.1  For  what 
Place  is  there  for  Sleep  without  Breathing  ?  Moreover, 
whence  those  Bubbles  which  are  breathed  from  under 
Water?  and  the  increase  of  the  Bodies  of  Shell-fishes  by  the 
Influence  the  Moon  ?  But  above  all,  Fishes  possess  the 
power  of  Hearing  and  Smelling,2  and  no  doubt  both  these 
Senses  are  from  the  Matter  of  Air  :  for  it  can  be  understood 
that  Smell  is  nothing  but  the  Air  infected.  However,  let 
every  one  think  as  he  pleases  on  these  Points.  Neither 
Whales,  called  Balaense,  nor  Dolphins,  have  any  Gills.  Both 
these  Kinds  breathe  through  Passages  which  reach  down  to 
the  Lungs:  from  the  Forehead  in  the  Balsens,  and  in  the 
Dolphins,  from  the  Back.  Also  the  Sea-calves,  which  they 
call  Phoca:,  breathe  and  sleep  on  the  Land.  So  do  Tortoises, 
of  which  more  by  and  by. 

CHAPTER  VII f. 
Of  Dolphins. 

THE  swiftest  of  all  living  Creatures,  not  of  the  Sea  only, 
is  the  Dolphin  ;  more  rapid  than  a  Bird,  swifter  than  an 
Arrow  ;  and  but  that  its  Mouth  is  far  beneath  its  Snout, 
(being  almost  in  the  middle  of  its  Belly),  not  a  Fish  could 
escape  from  its  rapid  Pursuit.  But  Nature  in  its  Providence 

1  See  B.  x.  c.  75.  2  13.  x.  c.  70. 

VOL.  in.  i 


1 14  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

hath  afforded  an  Hinderance  ;  for  unless  they  turn  upright 
upon  their  Back,  they  cannot  lay  hold  ;  from  whence  chiefly 
appeareth  their  Swiftness.  For  when  the  Dolphins  are 
urged  by  Hunger  to  pursue  a  Fish  that  flies  before  them 
down  to  the  very  Bottom,  and  hold  their  Breath  for  a  long 
Time,  to  take  Breath  again  they  dart  aloft  as  if  they  were 
shot  out  of  a  Bow;  and  with  such  Force  do  they  spring  up, 
that  many  Times  they  pass  over  the  Sails  of  Ships.  They 
act  almost  as  if  they  were  united  in  Marriage.  They  pro- 
duce their  young  ones  in  the  tenth  Month,  in  the  Summer- 
time ;  and  sometimes  they  have  two  at  once.  They  suckle 
them  at  their  Teats,  as  the  (Whales)  Balaens  do ;  and  so 
long  as  their  little  ones  are  feeble  from  Youth,  they  carry  them 
about ;  so  that  even  when  they  are  become  of  full  size  they  bear 
them  Company  through  their  great  Affection  to  their  Young. 
Young  Dolphins  come  very  speedily  to  their  Growth;  for  in 
ten  Years  they  are  thought  to  have  come  to  their  full  Big- 
ness ;  but  they  live  thirty  Years,  as  hath  been  known  by  the 
Trial  of  cutting  a  Mark  in  their  Tail.  They  lie  close  for  the 
Space  of  thirty  Days,  about  the  Rising  of  the  Dog-star;  con- 
cealing themselves  in  some  unknown  Manner,  which  is  the 
more  wonderful  if  they  cannot  breathe  under  Water.  They 
are  accustomed  to  spring  forth  to  the  Land  from  some  un- 
certain Cause  ;  and  as  soon  as  they  touch  the  dry  Ground 
they  die :  and  so  much  the  sooner  because  their  Pipe  is 
closed.  Their  Tongue  is  movable,  contrary  to  the  Nature  of 
other  Creatures  living  in  the  Waters  ;  it  is  also  short  and 
broad,  not  much  unlike  that  of  a  Swine.  Their  Voice  resem- 
bleth  the  Moaning  of  a  Man  ;  they  are  Saddle-backed,  and 
the  Snout  is  flat.  And  this  is  the  Cause  that  all  of  them,  in 
a  wonderful  Manner,  acknowledge  the  Name  Simo,  and  like 
to  be  so  called.  The  Dolphin  is  not  only  a  friendly  Creature 
to  Man,  but  also  to  the  Art  of  Music:  it  is  delighted  with 
Harmony  in  Song,  but  especially  with  the  Sound  of  the 
Water  Instrument.  Of  Man  it  is  not  afraid  as  of  a  Stranger; 
but  meeteth  their  Ships,  playeth  as  if  in  Joy,  enters  into 
Competition,  and  out-goeth  them,  although  they  carry  full 
Sails. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  \  15 

When  Divus  Augustus  was  Sovereign,  a  Dolphin  in  the 
Lake  Lucrinus  loved  with  wonderful  Affection  a  Boy  who 
was  the  Son  of  a  poor  Man  ;  and  who,  using  to  go  every  Day 
to  a  Grammar-School  from  Baianum  to  Puteoli,  was  accus- 
tomed about  Noon  to  loiter  and  call  the  Dolphin  by  the 
Name  of  Simo ;  and  many  Times  he  would  give  him  Frag- 
ments of  Bread,  which  for  that  Purpose  he  brought  with  him. 
I  should  be  reluctant  to  relate  this,  but  that  Meccenas,  Fabi- 
anus,  Flavins  Alfius,  and  many  others,  have  committed  the 
Matter  to  Record.  At  whatever  Time  of  the  Day  this  Boy 
called  him,  however  hidden  and  concealed,  he  would  hasten 
from  his  Retreat ;  and  being  fed  from  his  Hand,  he  gently 
offered  him  his  Back  to  mount  upon,  lowering  down  the 
Spines  of  his  Fins,  as  into  a  Sheath.  And  when  on  his  Back 
he  carried  him  over  the  broad  Sea  as  far  as  Puteoli  to 
School ;  in  the  same  Manner  conveying  him  back  again  for 
many  Years.  But  when  the  Boy  fell  sick  and  died,  the 
Dolphin  frequented  at  Intervals  the  accustomed  Place,  as 
one  that  was  sadly  distressed ;  at  last  (in  a  Manner  that  no 
one  could  doubt)  he  also  died  from  Regret.1 

1  The  works  of  ancient  naturalists  abound  in  stories  concerning  the 
Dolphin  and  its  friendliness  to  the  human  race ;  and  from  circumstances 
which  the  Editor  has  been  made  acquainted  with,  it  would  appear  that  on 
some  occasions  slight  signs  of  recognition  have  been  occasionally  mani- 
fested between  at  least  some  species  of  cetaceous  animals  and  voyagers. 
There  is  reason  to  believe,  however,  that  these  approaches  to  intimacy 
have  been  directed  rather  to  the  ship  than  the  sailors,  and  that  the  crea- 
ture has  mistaken  the  vessel  for  one  of  its  own  kind.  It  must  be  allowed 
that  nothing  similar  to  the  circumstances  ascribed  to  this  creature  by 
Pliny,  JElian,  and  the  Greek  writers  quoted  by  Aulus  Gellius,  has  been 
seen  in  modern  times;  but  the  multitude  of  witnesses,  and  the  alleged 
publicity  of  some  of  these  occurrences,  may  be  regarded  as  warrants  that 
something  at  least  unusual  had  occurred  at  the  time  referred  to.  It  may 
serve  in  eliciting  the  truth,  if  we  compare  the  narratives  of  these  ancient 
authors  with  one  another,  and  with  the  well-known  habits  and  appear- 
ance of  the  Dolphin  (Delphinus  Delphis).  .ZElian's  account  of  a  circum- 
stance exceedingly  similar  to  this  of  Pliny,  is,  with  a  slight  abridgment, 
thus  (B.  vi.  c.  15)  :  —  "The  celebrated  instance  of  affection  which  a  Dol- 
phin at  Jasos  (in  Caria)  expressed  for  a  beautiful  boy  must  not  be  passed 
over  in  silence.  The  gymnasium  of  the  people  of  Jasos  overlooks  the 


1 16  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

Another  Dolphin,  not  many  Years  since,  upon  the  Coast 
of  Africa,  near  to  Hippo  Diarrhytus,  in  like  Manner  would 


sea ;  and  after  the  races  were  over,  it  was  the  custom  of  the  young  men 
to  go  to  the  shore  and  bathe.  On  one  occasion  when  they  were  indulging 
themselves  in  swimming,  a  dolphin  was  attracted  with  the  most  vehement 
love  to  one  of  these  youths,  who  was  remarkably  beautiful.  When  first 
the  creature  approached  him  he  was  not  a  little  afraid ;  but  as  the  fami- 
liarity increased  the  young  man  became  so  conciliated,  that  he  learned  to 
regard  him  with  kindness  and  friendship.  They  played  together,  and 
contended  in  swimming ;  and  the  boy  would  sit  on  his  back,  and  be  car- 
ried about  as  on  a  horse.  The  sight  soon  attracted  the  attention  of  the 
people  of  the  place,  and  also  of  strangers.  The  dolphin  continued  to 
manifest  his  love  for  this  young  man,  and  would  carry  him  out  to  sea,  as 
far  as  was  agreeable  to  his  friend  ;  and  then  he  would  return  and  deposit 
him  on  the  shore.  This  dolphin  was  accustomed  to  make  his  appearance 
at  the  time  when  the  young  man  was  dismissed  from  the  gymnasium; 
and  their  joy  on  meeting  appeared  to  be  mutual.  This,  however,  at  last, 
met  with  a  fatal  termination ;  for  the  boy,  being  tired  with  exercise,  on 
one  occasion  threw  himself,  naked  as  he  was,  on  the  back  of  the  dolphin, 
not  observing  the  sharp  spine  on  the  back  of  the  animal,  as  it  stood  erect; 
and  thus  he  pierced  himself  at  the  navel  with  its  point :  a  vein  being 
wounded,  by  which  he  bled  to  death.  The  dolphin  was  not  slow  in  dis- 
covering that  his  friend  was  seriously  injured  —  partly  by  the  difference 
of  weight,  for  he  did  not  sit  on  his  back  in  the  light  and  active  manner 
he  had  been  accustomed  to,  and  partly  by  seeing  the  water  stained 
with  blood ;  he  therefore  resolved  not  to  survive  him  whom  he  had  so 
affectionately  loved.  He  ran  himself,  with  all  his  might,  upon  the  shore, 
and  both  of  them  died  together.  A  monument  was  raised  by  the  people 
of  the  city  to  commemorate  this  love  between  the  young  man  and  the 
dolphin."  And  the  author  concludes  by  saying,  that  he  had  heard  of  other 
instances  of  similar  affection :  one  of  which  had  occurred  at  Puteoli,  in 
Italy ;  and  which,  doubtless,  was  the  same  as  is  mentioned  by  Pliny. 

Aulus  Gellius  adds  to  this  an  instance  which  he  had  derived  from 
Apion,  whom,  as  an  author  on  the  subject  of  wonders,  we  have  mentioned 
before  (Vol.  i.  p.  21),  and  who  authenticates  the  story  by  affirming  that 
he  saw  it  himself:  —  "I  saw,"  says  he,  "near  Dicsearchia  (Puteoli),  a 
dolphin  that  had  great  affection  for  a  boy,  and  manifested  this  feeling  at 
the  sound  of  his  voice.  The  fish  would  then  swim  near,  and  take  the  lad 
on  his  back  ;  he  would  fold  back  the  spines  of  his  fins  that  he  might  not 
hurt  him,  and  then  would  carry  him  to  the  distance  of  two  hundred 
stadia,  astride  on  his  back.  Rome,  therefore,  and  all  Italy,  were  poured 
out  to  see  this  affectionate  fish."  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  works  of 
Apion  have  perished  ;  but  the  little  that  remains  is  sufficient  to  show  that 


BOOK  1 X .]  History  of  Nature.  1 1 7 

take  Meat  from  a  Man's  Hand,  suffer  himself  to  be  handled, 
play  with  them  that  swam  in  the  Sea,  and  carry  on  his  Back 

his  authority  must  not  carry  great  weight,  even  when  he  professes  to 
have  himself  witnessed  the  occurrence.  This  Egyptian  is  also  the  autho- 
rity for  the  story  of  Androclus  and  the  Lion ;  which  he  also  asserts  to 
have  occurred  under  his  own  notice.  Yet,  setting  aside  the  negative 
evidence  derived  from  the  silence  of  Pliny,  who,  if  he  had  believed  it, 
would  have  found  it  an  excellent  illustration  of  his  history  of  that  beast, 
there  is  one  portion  of  it  which  is  altogether  incredible  :  and  the  doubt 
arising  from  which  must  render  suspicious  whatever  of  a  surprising 
nature  the  same  author  anywhere  reports.  He  says,  that  with  the  gift 
of  freedom,  Androclus  also  was  presented  with  the  lion ;  which  he  led 
quietly  about  the  city,  with  a  slight  string,  collecting  money  at  the 
taverns.  To  enhance  the  wonder,  the  beast  is  represented  to  have  been 
of  unusual  size  and  ferocity ;  but  however  well  disposed  such  an  animal 
might  be  to  recognize  one  from  whom  it  had  received  an  obligation,  it  is 
contrary  to  its  nature  for  a  fierce  and  hitherto  untamed  lion  to  have 
changed  its  character  so  far  as  to  have  been  reconciled  suddenly  to  the 
noisy  crowd  of  a  city,  and  to  have  been  led,  only  by  a  slight  string, 
crowned  with  flowers,  without  fearing  or  doing  harm. 

The  narratives  of  the  dolphin  are  equally  contrary  to  nature,  and 
that  in  several  particulars,  in  which  an  intelligent  observer  could  not  be 
mistaken :  whether  that  observer  was  Apion,  whom  A.  Gellius  charac- 
terizes as  being  "  vitio  studioque  ostentationis  loquacior,"  and  "  sane  quam 
praedicandis  doctrinis  suis  venditator : "  or  Mecaenas  himself.  Of  these 
errors  one  concerns  the  form  of  the  animal,  which  is  described  as  having 
the  mouth  beneath  the  head,  and  a  dorsal  fin  armed  with  sharp-pointed 
spines,  capable  of  voluntary  motion :  the  latter,  especially,  not  only  un- 
like what  belongs  to  the  dolphin,  but  to  anything  that  could  have  been 
mistaken  for  it.  The  mode  of  progress  in  the  water  of  the  real  dolphin, 
is  also  known  to  be  such  as  does  not  admit  these  stories  to  be  applied  to 
it.  The  dolphin  rises  to  the  surface  for  the  purpose  of  breathing ;  and 
then  is  compelled  to  roll  itself  forward  in  a  manner  which  does  not 
admit  of  its  continuing  to  pass  along  the  surface,  even  to  the  extent  of 
a  few  yards.  But  what  thus  appears  inapplicable  to  the  structure  and 
habits  of  the  real  dolphin  is  not  exceedingly  foreign  to  another  inha- 
bitant of  the  ocean.  The  common  Seal  (Phoca  Vitulina)  has  on  some 
occasions  manifested  all  the  affectionate  attachment  to  man  which  the 
ancients  ascribed  to  the  dolphin.  A  little  instruction  will  secure  this ; 
and  however  it  might  have  been  concealed  for  interested  purposes,  there 
can  be  little  doubt  that  the  creatures  of  which  these  stories  were  related 
in  ancient  times,  had  been  previously  trained  to  the  actions  they 
[,  —  Wern.  Club. 


1 18  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  IX. 

those  who  placed  themselves  on  it.  But  being  anointed 
with  Unguent  by  Flavianus  the  Proconsul  of  Africa,  the 
Creature  (as  it  should  seem)  being  rendered  sleepy  by  this 
new  Smell,  and  floating  about  as  if  had  been  half  dead, 
avoided  Intercourse  with  Man  for  several  Months,  as  if  it 
had  been  driven  away  by  some  Injury.  But  after  a  Time  he 
returned  to  the  same  surprising  Practice.  But  the  Wrongs 
that  some  great  Persons  were  the  cause  of,  in  their  Enter- 
tainment, as  they  came  to  see  this  Sight,  caused  the  Men  of 
Hippo  to  kill  the  Dolphin. 

Long  before  this  the  like  is  reported  concerning  a  Boy  in 
the  City  of  Jassus,  where  a  Dolphin  was  observed  for  a  long 
Time  to  express  Love  to  a  Boy ;  but  while  he  eagerly  fol- 
lowed the  Lad  to  the  Shore  as  he  was  going  away,  he  threw 
himself  upon  the  Sand,  and  died.  Alexander  the  Great 
appointed  this  Boy  to  be  the  Priest  of  Neptune  at  Babylon  : 
interpreting  the  Love  of  this  Dolphin  as  a  Sign  of  the  special 
Favour  of  that  god  to  him. 

Egesidemus  writeth,  that  in  the  same  City  of  Jassus  there 
was  another  Boy  named  Hermias,  who  having  used  in  the  same 
Manner  to  ride  upon  a  Dolphin  over  the  Sea,  was  in  a  sud- 
den Storm  drowned  in  the  Waves,  and  was  brought  back  by 
the  Dolphin ;  who,  confessing  that  he  was  the  Cause  of  his 
Death,  did  not  return  into  the  Sea,  but  died  on  the  dry  Land. 

The  like  happened  at  Naupactum,  by  the  Report  of  Theo- 
phrastus.  But  there  is  no  End  of  such  Examples  ;  for  the 
Amphilochi  and  Tarentini  relate  the  same  concerning  Boys 
and  Dolphins  ;  which  Instances  induce  us  also  to  believe 
that  Arioti,  who  was  a  skilful  Player  on  the  Harp,  when  the 
Sailors  were  preparing  to  kill  him,  by  throwing  him  into  the 
Sea,  and  so  intercept  all  his  Gains,  by  conciliating  them, 
obtained  the  Favour  that  he  might  first  be  permitted  to  sing- 
to  his  Harp ;  and  a  number  of  Dolphins  having  flocked 
about  him  in  consequence  of  his  Music,  when  they  threw 
him  into  the  Sea,  he  was  received  by  one  of  them,  and 
carried  to  the  Shore  of  Tsenarus. 

In  the  Province  of  Narbonensis,  and  in  the  Territory  of 
Nsemausium,  there  is  a  Pond  called  Laterra,  where  Men  and 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  119 

Dolphins  fish  in  company :  for  at  one  certain  Time  a  very 
great  Abundance  of  Mullets,1  taking  the  Advantage  of  a 
Change  of  the  Tide  at  the  narrow  Passages  of  the  Pond, 
break  forth  into  the  Sea ;  and  because  of  that  Violence  no 
Nets  can  be  spread  out  against  them  by  any  Means  strong 
enough  to  bear  their  huge  Weight  with  that  of  the  Stream  of 
Water,  if  Skill  were  not  employed  at  the  proper  Time.     In 
like  Manner  the  Mullets  immediately  urge  on  to  the  Deep, 
which  they  do  very  soon,  as  the  Channel  is  near ;  and  they 
make  all  Haste  to  pass  the  only  Place  that  is  convenient  for 
spreading  the  Nets.     The  Fishermen  being  aware  of  this, 
and  all  the  neighbouring  People  (for  a  Multitude  of  People 
come  thither,  knowing  when  the  fishing  Time  is  come ;  and 
the  rather  as  they  are  eager  to  see  the  pleasant  Sport),  shout 
as  loud  as  they  can  from  the  Shore,  and  so  call  Simo  to 
partake  of  the  Sight.     The  Dolphins  soon  hear  what  they 
would  have ;  and  the  better  if  the  North  Winds  blow  and 
carry  the  Sound :  for  a  South  Wind  more  slowly  bears  it  in 
the  opposite  Direction.     But  before  one  would  be  aware  of 
it,  the  Dolphins  fly  thither  to  assist  in  the  Fishing.     The 
Squadrons  of  those  Dolphins  quickly  take  their  Station,  and 
are  presently  arranged  in  the  Place  where  the  Battle  is  dis- 
posed, to  oppose  themselves,  and  keep  them  from  the  Deep; 
and  so  urge  them,  terrified  as  they  are,  into  the  Shallows. 
Then  the  Fishermen  enclose  them  with  Nets,  which  they  prop 
up  with  forked  Sticks  ;  yet  notwithstanding  this,  the  Mullets 
are  so  active  that  they  will  leap  over  them.     But  these  are 
caught  by  the    Dolphins,   who,  contenting  themselves  for 
the  present  to  kill  only,  put  off  the  Time  of  feeding  until 
they  have  achieved  the  Victory.     And  now  the  Work  of  the 
Battle  is  hot,  for  the  Dolphins  are  very  eager,  and  take  Plea- 
sure to  be  enclosed  within  the  Nets;  but  lest  this  should 
drive  the  Enemies  to  flight,  they  pass    so  gently  between 
the  Boats  and  Nets,  or  the  Men  there  swimming,  that  it 
cannot  be  seen  where  they  get  out.     And  although  at  other 

1  See  chapter  xvii.  The  habits  here  ascribed  to  this  fish,  and  the 
necessity  of  staking  up  the  nets  when  it  is  enclosed  in  it,  are  well  known 
at  the  present  time.  —  See  YABRELL'S  British  Fishes.  —  Wern.  Club. 


120  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

Times  they  take  great  Delight  in  leaping,  yet  none  endea- 
vour to  get  forth  by  that  Means,  except  where  the  Nets 
lie  under  them  ;  but  no  sooner  are  they  out,  than  a  Contest 
begins  before  the  Bulwark ;  and  so  the  Capture  being 
accomplished,  the  Dolphins  tear  to  Pieces  those  they  have 
killed.  But  conscious  to  themselves  that  their  Labour  hath 
earned  a  richer  Reward  than  what  belongs  to  one  Day,  they 
conceal  themselves  until  the  next;  and  are  not  contented 
with  Fish  only,  but  wait  to  receive  Crumbs  of  Bread  soaked 
in  Wine.  Mutianus  maketh  mention  of  some  Things  of  a 
similar  Kind  of  Fishing  in  the  Bay  of  Jassus  ;  but  they  differ 
in  this,  that  the  Dolphins  come  of  their  own  accord,  without 
calling,  take  their  Part  of  the  Prize  from  the  Fishermen's 
Hands;  and  every  Boat  hath  a  Dolphin  attending  upon  it  as 
a  Companion,  although  it  is  by  Night,  and  with  Torchlight. 
Also  Dolphins  have  a  public  Society  among  themselves; 
for  a  King  of  Caria  having  taken  a  Dolphin,  and  kept  him  con- 
fined in  the  Harbour,  a  great  Multitude  of  the  others  resorted 
thither,  and  by  Signs  of  Mourning,  evident  to  be  understood, 
craved  Mercy  for  the  Prisoner :  until  the  King  had  given 
Command  to  set  him  at  Liberty.  Also  the  little  ones  are 
always  accompanied  with  some  larger  one,  as  a  Keeper. 
And  they  have  been  seen  to  carry  one  of  their  Companions 
when  he  is  dead,  that  he  might  not  be  torn  by  Beasts. 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Of  Tursiones. 

The  Creatures  which  are  called  Tursiones,  are  much  like 
the  Dolphins;  but  they  differ  in  having  a  more  gloomy  As- 
pect :  for  they  are  not  so  playful  ;  but  especially  in  having 
Snouts  like  little  Dogs  when  they  snarl. 

CHAPTER  X. 
Of  Sea- Tortoises,  and  how  they  are  taken. 

THERE  are  Tortoises  in  the  Indian  Sea  so  great  that  the 
Natives  cover  the  Cottages  in  which  they  dwell  with  the  Shell 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  1 2 1 

of  a  single  one  of  them.  And  among  the  Islands,  principally 
in  the  Red  Sea,  they  use  them  for  Boats. 

Many  Ways  the  Fishermen  have  to  catch  them  ;  but 
especially  as  in  the  Mornings,  when  the  Weather  is  still, 
they  float  on  the  open  Sea  with  their  Backs  high  above  the 
calm  Surface;  and  then  the  Pleasure  of  breathing  freely  so 
entirely  deceives  them  into  Forgetful  ness,  that  their  Crust 
becomes  dried  with  the  Sun's  Heat,  and  they  cannot  dive, 
but  are  forced  againt  their  Wills  to  float,  and  so  are  exposed 
as  a  Prize  to  those  that  hunt  them.  Some  say  that  they  go 
out  in  the  oNight  to  feed;  arid  with  eating  greedily,  grow 
weary  ;  so  that  in  the  Morning,  when  they  are  returning 
again,  they  fall  asleep  on  the  Surface  of  the  Water  ;  and  then 
they  utter  such  a  Snoring  as  to  be  easily  taken.  But  three 
Men  must  swim  to  every  one  of  them  :  two  of  them  to  turn 
him  upon  his  Back,  and  the  third  to  throw  a  Cord  about 
him  as  he  lieth  with  his  Belly  upward ;  and  then  is  he 
hauled  by  many  to  the  Land.  In  the  Phoenician  Sea  they 
are  taken  with  very  little  Difficulty;  for  at  a  certain  Time 
of  the  Year  they  resort  of  themselves,  in  great  Multitudes,  to 
the  River  Eleutherus. 

The  Tortoise  hath  no  Teeth,  but  the  Borders  of  his  Snout 
are  sharp ;  the  upper  part  shutting  close  upon  the  under, 
like  a  Box.  In  the  Sea  they  live  on  Shellfish,  for  their 
Mouths  are  so  hard  that  they  crush  Stones.  They  go  to 
Land,  where,  among  the  Herbage,  they  lay  Eggs  resembling 
the  Eggs  of  Birds,  to  the  number  of  a  hundred.  They  hide 
them  in  the  Ground  at  some  Distance  from  the  Water,  cover 
them  with  Earth,  beat  it  hard  down  and  smooth  it  with  their 
Breast,  and  by  Night  sit  upon  them  :  the  Young  are  pro- 
duced in  the  Course  of  a  Year.  Some  suppose  that  the  look- 
ing upon  their  Eggs  with  their  Eyes  serveth  also  to  hatch 
them.  The  Female  flieth  from  the  Male  until  he  places  some 
Stick  upon  her  as  she  turns  away. 

The  Trogloditse  possess  some  that  carry  Horns,  like  the 
broad  Horns  fastened  to  the  Lyre,  but  movable,  with  which 
in  swimming  they  help  themselves  as  with  an  Oar.  And 
this  Kind  of  Tortoise  is  called  Celtium  :  of  remarkable  Big- 


122  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  IX. 

ness,  but  rare ;  for  the  exceeding  sharp  Rocks  terrify  the 
Chelonophagi.  But  the  Trogloditae,  to  whom  these  Tortoises 
swim,  worship  them  as  sacred. 

There  are  also  Land-Tortoises,  which,  on  Account  of  the 
Works  that  are  made  of  them,  are  called  Cheisinae;  they  are 
found  in  the  Deserts  of  Africa,  and  principally  in  that  part 
which  is  gloomy  from  the  dry  Sands  ;  and  they  are  believed  to 
live  upon  the  moist  Dew.  And,  in  Truth,  no  other  living 
Creature  is  found  there. 

CHAPTER  XL 
Who  first  set  on  Foot  the  cleaving  of  Tortoise- Shells. 

THE  first  Man  that  invented  the  cutting  of  the  Shells  of 
Tortoises  into  thin  Plates,  and  with  them  to  cover  Beds,  and 
Cupboards,  was  Carbilius  Pollio?  who  was  very  ingenious 
and  inventive  in  the  Instruments  of  Luxury. 

CHAPTER  XII. 
The  Arrangement  of  Water  Animals  into  their  several  Kinds. 

THE  Coverings  of  Creatures  that  live  in  the  Water  are  of 
many  Sorts ;  for  some  are  clothed  with  a  Skin  and  Hair,  as 
Seals  and  Hippopotami.  Others  have  only  a  bare  Skin, 

1  On  this  passage  Mr.  Bruce  remarks,  that  the  Romans  seem  to  have 
been  ignorant  of  the  art,  as  practised  by  the  Arabians  and  Egyptians,  of 
separating  the  laminae  by  fire  placed  inside  the  empty  shell.  Martial 
says,  "  Beds  were  inlaid  with  it ; "  and  the  immense  use  made  of  it  by  the 
Romans  is  shown  by  what  Velleius  Paterculus  says,  —  "  that  when  Alex- 
andria was  taken  by  Julius  Caesar,  the  warehouses  were  so  full  of  it,  that 
he  proposed  making  it  a  principal  ornament  of  his  triumph."  —  See 
B.  xxxii.  c.  4.  The  comparison  which  Pliny  makes  (c.  10)  of  the  size  of 
the  shell  of  a  tortoise  to  a  cymba  or  boat,  ^Elian  refers  to  a  scapha,  the 
origin  of  the  English  word  "skiff";  and  he  represents  it  as  capable  of 
holding  ten  medimni,  or  sixty  bushels :  in  another  place  (B.  xii.  c.  41)  he 
compares  it  to  a  barrel  that  would  hold  twenty  amphorae,  or  one  hundred 
and  eighty  gallons.  Each  shell  (B.  x.  c,  17)  is  said  to  be  fifteen  cubits 
in  size ;  which,  not  to  exceed  the  bounds  of  probability,  must  be  under- 
stood as  square  cubits.  He  says  that  the  Land-Tortoises  of  India  were 
fat  and  sweet,  and  those  of  the  sea,  bitter.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  I X .]  History  of  Nature.  1 23 

as  the  Dolphins  ;  a  Bark,  as  Tortoises ;  the  Hardness  of 
Flint,  as  Oysters  and  Cockles ;  Crusts,  as  Crayfishes 
(Locustae) ;  Crusts  and  Spines,  as  Sea-eggs  (Echini) ;  Scales, 
as  Fishes  ;  or  a  rough  Skin,  as  the  Skate  (Squatina) ;  which 
is  used  to  polish  Wood  and  Ivory.  Some  have  a  soft  Skin, 
as  Muraenae ;  others  none,  as  the  Polypus. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 
Of  the  Sea- Calf. * 

THOSE  which  are  clothed  with  Hair,  as  the  Pristis, 
Balaena,  and  Sea-Calf,  bring  forth  their  Young  alive.  The 
latter  calveth  on  dry  Land,  in  the  Manner  of  Cattle;  and 
returneth  Secundines.  The  Female  adheres  to  the  Male,  in 
the  Manner  of  Dogs :  she  never  produceth  more  than  two  at 
a  Birth ;  and  she  suckles  her  Young  at  her  Paps.  She  doth 
not  bring  them  to  the  Sea  before  the  twelfth  Day,  and  then 
she  accustometh  them  to  it  frequently.  It  is  difficult  to  kill 
them  unless  the  Head  is  crushed.  They  utter  a  Lowing  in 
their  Sleep,  from  whence  they  are  called  Calves.  Never- 
theless they  learn  what  is  taught  them  ;  and  they  salute  the 
People  at  the  same  Time  with  the  Voice  and  Look ;  the 
Sound  being  a  rude  Murmuring.  If  called  by  their  Name, 
they  answer.  No  living  Creature  sleepeth  more  soundly 
than  they.  The  Fins  they  use  to  swim  with  in  the  Sea  serve 
them  to  creep  along  with  instead  of  Feet  when  on  Land.  It 
is  said  that  their  Skins,  after  they  are  stripped  from  their 
Bodies,  retain  a  Sensibility  of  the  Seas;  for  as  the  Water 
ebbeth  they  become  rugged.  Moreover,  their  right  Fins  are 
thought  to  have  a  soporific  Power,  and  to  produce  Sleep,  if 
laid  under  one's  Head. 

1  Sea-Calf.     Phoca  VituUna.—Lm^.—Wern.  Club. 


124  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Of  Fishes1  that  are  without  Hair,  how  they  breed;  and  how 
many  Sorts  of  them. 

OF  the  Creatures  that  want  Hair,  two  only  bring  forth 
their  Young  alive :  the  Dolphin  and  the  Viper.  Of  Fishes 
there  are  seventy-four  Kinds  ;  besides  those  that  are  covered 
with  Crusts,  of  which  there  are  thirty  Sorts.  Of  every  one  in 
particular  we  will  speak  elsewhere :  but  now  we  are  to  treat 
of  the  Nature  of  the  principal. 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Of  the  Names  and  Natures  of  many  Fishes. 

THE  Tunnies''  are  exceeding  large  Fishes:  we  have  found 
some  to  have  weighed  fifteen  Talents,  and  the  breadth  of  the 
Tail  to  be  two  Cubits  and  a  Span.  In  some  Rivers,  also,  there 
are  Fish  scarcely  of  less  size  :  as  the  Silurus3  in  the  Nile  ;  the 
Esox4  in  the  Rhine;  the  Attilus5  in  the  Po;  which  groweth  so 

1  The  reader  may  consult  a  note  in  the  Wernerian  edition  of  Kay's 
"  Wisdom  of  God  in  Creation,"  p.  9 ;  where,  however,  there  is  only  an 
approximation  to  the  real  number :  to  which  should  be  added,  that  the 
fossil  species  of  animals  and  vegetables,  already  classified,  amounted,  in 
1846,  to  about  10,000.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  Scomber  ihynnus. — LINN.     Thynnus   vulgaris.  —  Cuv.      See,   con- 
cerning this  fish,  B.  xxxii.  c.  1 1.     The  Ancients  were  not  at  all  particular 
in  the  discrimination  of  species ;  and,  therefore,  what  were  formerly  sup- 
posed to  be  the  different  stages  of  growth  of  the  Tunny,  are  now  known 
as  different  species.     In  confirmation  of  the  enormous  size  to  which  the 
Tunny  sometimes  attains,  Ruysch  records  an  instance  of  one  taken  near 
Cadiz  that  was  thirty-two  feet  in  length.     The  preparation  of  Tunny 
(Athenseus  says,  of  the  larger  sort)  is  referred  to  by  Martial  (B.  iii. 
Ep.  60)  as  high  and  rank  food  :  "  Teque  juvant  gerres,  et  pelle  melandrya 
cana." — Wern.  Club. 

3  Silurus  glanis. — Cuv.  and  LINN.     Silurus  and  Glanis  are  sometimes 
regarded  by  the  Ancients  as  synonymous,  sometimes  as  distinct.     The 
Shilbe  is  also  a  fish  of  the  Nile,  of  the  same  family.    The  voracity  of  the 
Silurus  Glanis  gave  rise  to  a  proverb  :  — "  Piscem  pisci  prcedam  csse^  at 
Siluro  omnes : "  Every  fish  preys  on  some  other  one,  but  the  Silurus  on 
all.  —  Wormius.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Esox  lucius. —  LJNN.     Pike.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Accipemeo  huso.— Liny.  Erroneously  supposed  to  be  peculiar  to 
the  Po.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  125 

fat  by  its  Sluggishness,  as  sometimes  to  reach  the  weight  of 
a  thousand  Pounds ;  and  being  taken  with  a  Hook  fastened 
to  a  Chain,  cannot  be  drawn  out  of  the  River  but  with  Yokes 
of  Oxen.  And  yet  there  is  a  very  little  Fish  called  Clupea,1 
that  killeth  him  ;  for  through  a  great  Desire  after  a  certain 
Vein  within  his  Throat,  he  biteth  it,  and  so  despatched!  him. 

The  Silurus  is  a  great  Robber,  and  devoureth  every 
Animal ;  often  dragging  under  the  Water  the  Horses  as  they 
swim;  especially  in  the  Mrenus,2  a  River  of  Germany,  near 
Lisbous. 

Also,  in  the  Danube  is  taken  the  Mario,3  a  Fish  much 
like  the  Sea-Pig  (Porpoise) ;  and  in  the  Borysthenes,  men- 
tion is  made  of  a  Fish  of  large  size,  with  no  Bones  or  Spines 
interspersed,  and  the  Flesh  very  sweet. 

In  the  Ganges  of  India  there  are  Fishes  with  a  Snout 
and  Tail  like  a  Dolphin,  fifteen  Cubits  long,  and  which  they 
call  Platanistae.  And  Statins  Sebosus  reporteth  as  strange  a 
Thing  besides  :  that  in  the  same  River  there  are  Worms  or 
Serpents  with  double  Gills,4  sixty  Cubits  long,  of  Colour  blue, 
and  from  that  Colour  they  take  their  Name  (Cyonoeides). 
He  saith,  moreover,  that  they  are  so  strong,  as  when  the 
Elephants  come  to  drink,  to  catch  hold  with  their  Teeth  by 
their  Trunks,  and  drag  them  under  Water. 

The  male  Tunnies  have  no  Fins  under  the  Belly.     In  the 

1  Ray  supposes  this  to  be  the  Shad,  Clupea  alosa,  LINN.  ;  but  it  is  not 
capable  of  the  action  here  ascribed  to  it.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  A  river  of  Germany.     Daleschampius  notes  on  this  passage,  that  in 
Pliny's  time  no  river  in  Germany  was  called  Moenus :   it  is  a  modern 
appellation,  though  now  generally  acknowledged.     An  alteration  must, 
therefore,  have  been  made  in  the  text,  and  Rondeletius  proposes  to  read, 
"  in  Rheno :"  in  the  Rhine.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  No  fish  has  been  found  of  this  name  ;  and  it  has  been  supposed  that 
the  word  ought  to  be  read  "  major  : "  that  is,  a  greater  fish  than  the 
last-named,  and  much  like  the  Porcus  marinus,  a  kind  of  Shark.  —  Wern. 
Club. 

4  Daleschampius  observes  that  Solinus  quotes  Sebosus  in  a  different 
manner  from  Pliny  :  "  that  their  colour  is  blue,  from  whence  they  take 
their  name  :  their  length  six  cubits,  and  they  have  two  arms  so  strong 
that  when  elephants  come  to  drink  they  seize  them  with  their  bite,  and 
with  their  hand  draff  them  under  water."  —  Wern.  Club. 


1 26  History  of  Nature.  [Boon  I X . 

Spring-time  they  enter  into  the  Pontus  from  the  great  Sea, 
in  Troops  ;  for  in  no  other  Sea  do  they  bring  forth  their 
Young.  Their  Young,  which  accompany  their  Dams  back 
into  the  Sea  in  the  Autumn,  are  called  Cordylae.  Afterwards 
they  begin  to  call  them  Pelamydes,1  and  Limosce,  from  the 
Mud  :  and  when  they  are  above  one  Year  old,  they  are  called 
Tunnies.  These  Tunnies  are  cut  into  Portions ;  the  Neck, 
Belly,  and  the  Throat  being  commended  for  Meat :  but 
only  when  they  are  fresh,  and  even  then  they  will  rise  on  a 
Man's  Stomach.  The  other  Parts  being  full  of  good  Meat, 
are  laid  in  Salt.  They  are  called  Melandrya,  and  when  cut 
in  Slices,  are  exceedingly  like  to  Oak  Boards.  The  worst 
Pieces  of  these  are  those  nearest  the  Tail,  because  they  are 
not  fat :  the  best  is  that  which  is  toward  the  Throat:  but  in 
other  Fishes  the  Tail-piece  (is  in  greatest  request),  as  being 
the  most  exercised.  Pelamides  are  divided  into  Parcels, 
which  are  named  Apolecti;  but  when  they  are  separated 
into  Sorts,  named  Cybii. 

All  Kinds  of  Fishes  grow  with  remarkable  Rapidity  to 
their  full  Size,  and  especially  in  the  Pontus :  the  Reason  is, 
because  a  number  of  Rivers  bring  fresh  Water  into  it.  There 
is  one  called  Amia,2  which  groweth  so  fast,  that  a  Man  may 
perceive  it  from  Day  to  Day.  These  Fishes,  together  with 
the  Tunnies  and  the  Pelamides,  enter  in  great  Schuls  into 
the  Pontus,  for  the  sweeter  Food  they  find  there ;  each 
Company  with  its  own  Leader:  and  before  them  all,  the 
Mackerels  lead  the  Way ;  which,  while  they  are  in  the 
Water,  have  a  Colour  of  Brimstone ;  but  out  of  it  they  are 
like  the  rest.  The  Mackerels3  fill  the  Fish-markets  in  Spain, 
when  the  Tunnies  do  not  find  their  Way  into  their  Seas. 
But  into  the  Pontus  there  enter  no  Beasts  that  injure 
Fishes,  unless  it  be  Seals  and  little  Dolphins.  The  Tunnies 
enter  along  the  right  Bank,  and  pass  out  by  the  left.  And 

1  Pelamys  vulgaris,  CTJVIER;  who  says,  that  Cordyla  is  the  young  state 
of  the  Pelarays;  and  Limosa  only  another  name  for  it.  A  further 
account  of  these  fishes  of  the  Tunny  kind,  B.  xxxii.  c.  1 1 .  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Sarda  vulgaris.  —  Cuv.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Scomber  scombrus.  —  LINN,  and  Cuv.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX-]  History  of  Nature.  ]  27 

this  is  thought  to  happen  because  they  see  better  with  their 
right  eye  ;  and  yet  neither  of  them  by  Nature  is  dull.  Within 
the  Channel  of  the  Thracian  Bosphorus,  by  which  the  Pro- 
pontis  is  joined  to  the  Euxine,  in  the  very  Straits  of  the 
Firth  that  clivideth  Asia  from  Europe,  near  to  Chalcedon  on 
the  Side  of  Asia,  there  is  a  Rock,  exceedingly  bright,  and 
shining  in  such  a  manner  from  the  Bottom  of  the  Sea 
to  the  Top,  that  the  Tunnies  are  instantly  affrighted  at  the 
Sight ;  and  to  avoid  it,  they  rush  with  Violence  in  whole 
Flocks  towards  the  Cape  overagainst  Byzantium :  which 
Cape  on  this  Account  beareth  the  Name  of  Auricornu 
(Golden  Horn).  And  therefore  it  is,  that  all  the  Fishery  is 
at  Byzantium  ;  and  there  is  great  Scarcity  at  Chalcedon, 
although  the  Breadth  of  the  Passage  between  them  is  not 
more  than  half  a  Mile.  They  wait  for  the  North  Wind,  that 
by  the  aid  of  the  Waves  they  may  pass  out  of  the  Pontus ; 
but  the  only  taking  of  them  at  Byzantium  is  when  they  enter 
into  the  Pontus.  In  Winter  they  do  not  wander ;  but  wher- 
ever they  are  then  found,  there  they  remain  for  the  Winter, 
and  until  the  Spring  Equinox.  Many  a  Time  they  accompany 
the  Ships  that  proceed  under  Sail,  and  it  is  a  wonderful 
pleasant  Sight  to  see  them  from  the  Stern,  for  Hours  together, 
and  for  the  Space  of  several  Miles,  and  not  terrified  even 
though  the  Sailors  strike  at  them  with  the  Trident.1  Some 
People  make  a  Distinction  between  those  that  follow  the 
Ships  under  Sail  and  Tunnies,  and  call  them  Pompili.2 
Many  of  them  pass  the  Summer  in  the  Propontis,  and 
never  enter  into  the  Pontus.  Solse3  likewise  do  the  same, 


1  Familiarly  termed  Grayns  by  sailors  of  our  day ;  who  still  use  the 
instrument,  skilfully  fitted  with  a  line  which  causes  it  to  become  reversed 
when  the  blow  is  struck,  by  which  means  the  struggles  of  the  prey  only 
cause  it  to  become  the  more  securely  fixed.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  This  has  been  mistaken  for  the  Pilot-fish,  Naucrates  Ductor ;  but 
the  true  Pompilus  is  the  Centrolophus  Pompilus,  Cuv. — YARRELL'S  British 
Fishes,  vol.  i.     The  Black-fish.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Pleuronectes  solea. —  LINN.    Solea  vulgaris.  —  Cuv.   Rhombus  is  the 
Turbot.     Pleuronectes  Rhombus.  —  LINN.     Phombus  maximus.  —  Cuv.  — 
Wern.  Club. 


128  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

while  Rhombi  (Turbots)  enter.  Neither  is  the  Sepia1  there, 
although  the  Loligo  is  found.  Of  such  as  live  among  Rocks, 
theTurdus  and  Merula2  are  wanting,  as  also  Shell-fish  ;  but 
Oysters  (Ostrese)  are  in  Abundance  :  for  all  such  Things 
pass  the  Winter  in  the  JSgean  Sea.  Of  them  that  enter  into 
the  Pontus,  none  stay  there  except  the  Trichise:3  for  I  think 
it  good,  in  such  Diversity  of  Fishes'  Names,  because  the 
same  Fish  is  in  many  Countries  called  by  different  Denomi- 
nations, to  use  the  Greek  Name  for  most  of  them.  These 
Fish  alone  go  up  the  River  Ister;  and  out  of  it  they  pass 
again  by  Communications  under  the  Ground  into  the 
Adriatic  Sea,  and  therefore  they  are  seen  coming  down 
thither,  but  never  ascending  out  of  that  Sea.  The  Fishery 
for  Tunnies  is  from  the  Rising  of  the  (Stars)  Vergilise,4  to  the 
Setting  of  Arcturus.  All  the  Winter-time  besides  they  lie 
hid  in  the  Gulfs  at  the  Bottom,  unless  they  are  enticed 
forth  by  some  warm  Season,  or  at  the  full  Moon.  They  grow 
so  fat,  that  their  Skins  burst.  The  longest  of  their  Life  does 
not  exceed  two  Years.  There  is  a  little  Creature  in  Shape 
like  a  Scorpion,  and  as  big  as  a  Spider,  which  will  pierce 
with  its  sharp  Sting  under  the  Fin  of  the  Tunny,  and  also 
of  the  Sword-fish  (Gladius),5  (which  many  Times  exceeds  the 
Size  of  the  Dolphin),  and  put  them  to  such  Pain,  that  they 
often  are  driven  to  spring  into  the  Ships.  Which  they  do 
also  at  other  Times,  for  fear  of  the  Violence  of  other  Fishes  ; 
and  most  of  all,  the  Mullets6  do  so  with  such  exceeding 

1  Sepia.  —Wern.  Club. 

2  The  various  species  of  Wrass  :  the  Labri  of  modern  naturalists,  who 
have  applied  the  first  of  these  names  to  designate  a  genus  of  birds :  both 
the  birds  and  fishes  being  characterised  by  spots  on  their  scales  or  plumage. 
—  Wern.  Club. 

3  A  species  of  Clupea.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  In  the  beginning  of  May.  —  Wern.  Club. 

5  Xiphius  Gladius.  —  LINN.  —  Wern.  Club. 

6  Two  kinds   of  fishes  are  termed  Mullets   in  England :   the  Grey 
Mullet  (MugiT),  and  the  Surmullet  (Mullus).     The  former  is  the  fish 
here  meant ;  but  although  the  Mugil  is  much  in  the  habit  of  throwing 
itself  out   of  water,  to  escape  from  an   obstruction,  they  rarely  do  it 
through  fear  of  other  fishes  ;  and  few  fishes  are  less  liable  to  the  attacks 
of  parasites. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  129 

Swiftness,  that  they  will  fling  themselves  sometimes  over 
the  Ships  from  one  Side  to  the  other. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 
Of  Presages  by  Fishes,  and  of  their  Diversity. 

THERE  are  also  in  this  Portion  of  Nature,  Auguries: 
there  is  Prescience  even  among  Fishes.  During  the  Sicilian 
War,  as  Augustus  walked  along  the  Shore,  a  Fish  leapt  out 
of  the  Sea  and  fell  at  his  Feet;  the  Prophet  (Vates)  con- 
cluding from  this  Circumstance,  that  although  Sextus  Pom- 
peius  was  at  that  Time  the  adopted  of  Father  Neptune  (so 
great  was  his  naval  Glory),  yet  those  who  had  to  this  Time 
held  the  Power  of  the  Sea  were  about  to  fall  below  the 
Feet  of  CcBsar. 

Female  Fishes  are  larger  than  the  Males.  And  there  are 
some  Sorts  of  them  of  which  there  are  altogether  no  Males; 
as  the  Erythini,1  and  the  Chani :  for  they  are  taken  always 
heavy  with  Spawn. 

Scaly  Fishes  for  the  most  part  swim  in  Schuls,  each  ac- 
cording to  its  Kind.  The  Fishing  is  before  the  Sun  is  up; 
for  then  Fishes  are  most  liable  to  be  deceived  in  their  Sight. 
If  the  Nights  are  bright,  they  see  as  well  then  as  by  Day. 
They  affirm  it  is  good  fishing  twice  in  the  same  Gulf;  for  so 
more  are  caught  in  the  second  Cast  than  by  the  first.  Fishes 
greatly  delight  in  the  Taste  of  Oil ;  and  next  to  this,  in 
gentle  Showers ;  and  with  these  they  become  fat.  For  Reeds, 

1  Erythini:  more  properly,  Erythrini.  Chani.  Cuvier  supposes 
the  former  to  be  probably  the  Serranus  scriba:  the  latter  certainly  is 
Serranus  cabrilla.  The  following  quotation  from  the  second  edition  of 
Mr.  Yarrell's  "History  of  British  Fishes"  (vol.  i.  p.  13)  will  illustrate 
the  question,  hitherto  generally  received  in  the  affirmative,  of  the  herma- 
phroditism  of  these  fishes  : — "  Since  the  publication  of  the  first  edition  of 
this  work,  Mr.  Couch  has  been  kind  enough  to  send  me  the  roes  of  two 
specimens  of  this  Serranus  (Cabrilla).  These,  on  examination,  contained 
true  ova  only ;  and  Mr.  Owen,  of  the  College  of  Surgeons,  whose  micro- 
scope was  used  on  this  occasion,  agreed  with  me,  that  although  these 
organs  were  of  small  size,  there  was  nothing  equivocal  either  in  the 
structure  or  appearance."  —  Wern.  Club. 

VOL.  III.  K 


130  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  IX. 

also,  although  naturally  belonging  to  marshy  Grounds,  yet 
do  not  attain  their  perfect  Growth  without  Rain;  and  so 
wherever  Fish  are  kept  continually  in  the  same  Water,  un- 
less Rain  fall,  they  will  die.  All  Fishes  feel  the  Cold  of  a  sharp 
Winter ;  but  those  especially  which  are  thought  to  have  a 
Stone  in  their  Head  ;  as  the  Lupus,1  the  Chromis,2  Scienae,3 
and  Pagri.4  When  there  have  been  sharp  Winters,  many 
are  taken  blind.  And,  therefore,  during  those  Months  they 
lie  hid  in  Caverns,  as  we  have  said  some  Land  Creatures 
do.  For  the  most  Part  the  Hippurus5  and  Coracinus6  are 
never  caught  in  Winter ;  except  a  few  on  particular  Days  : 
and  always  of  the  same  Sort.  Also  the  Mursena,  the  Or- 
phus,7  Conger,8  Perca,9  and  all  Fishes  that  keep  near  Rocks. 
It  is  said  that  the  Torpedo,10  Psitta,11  and  Solea,12  conceal 

1  Labrax  lupus.  —Cuv.     The  Bass.     See  B.  xxxii.  c.  2. — Wern.  Club. 

2  Cuvier  says  it  is  an  unascertained  fish  with  a  Greek  name ;  but,  on 
the  contrary,  Ray  ("  Synopsis,"  p.  141)  says  that  it  is  common  in  the 
Mediterranean  Sea.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Scicena  umbra.  —  Cuv.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Sparus  pagrus.  —  LINN.     Pagrus  vulgaris.  —  Cuv.     The  Becker. — 
Wern.  Club. 

6  Coryphcena  hippurus. — LINN.  But  it  is  probable  that  the  Hippuris 
of  Oppian  is  our  Stone  Bass,  Polyprium  cernium.  —  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 

6  Cuvier  says,  it  is  his  Chromis  vulgaris^  the  Sparus  chromis  of  Linn. 
—  Wern.  Club. 

7  This  name  has  been  referred  to  several  very  different  fishes ;  and 
especially  to  the  Rudd,  Cyprinus  Erythrophthalmus  of  Linn.,  Leuciscus  E. 
of  Cuvier. 

But  the  ancient  authors  represent  it  as  a  sea-fish ;  though  even  then 
their  accounts  apply  to  a  variety  of  species.  The  true  Orphus  veterum  of 
Rondeletius  is  not  the  Pagrus  Or/us  of  Cuvier ;  and  the  only  represent- 
ation to  which  reference  can  be  made  occurs  in  a  paper  on  the  subject  by 
the  Editor  of  this  work  in  the  first  volume  of  the  "  Zoologist,"  p.  81.  The 
great  rarity  of  this  fish  appears  to  have  led  to  the  errors  of  naturalists 
concerning  it. — Wern.  Club. 

8  Murcena  Conger.  —  LINN.     Conger  vulgaris.  —  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 

9  Perca  marina  of  Linn.,  and  Ray,  who  says  it  is  common  at  Venice. 
—•Wern.  Club. 

10  See  also  B.  xxxii.  c.  1.   Raia  Torpedo,  Linn.;  which  is  now  divided 
into  two  or  three  distinct  species.  —  Wern.  Club. 

11  Probably  the  Dab,  Platessa   limanda;  but  confounded  with  the 
Plaice  and  Flounder.  —  Wern.  Club. 

12  Solea  vulgaris.  —  Cuv.    The  Sole,  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  131 

themselves  through  the  Winter  in  the  Ground  ;  that  is  to  say, 
in  Depressions  which  they  make  in  the  bottom  of  the  Sea. 
Some  again  are  impatient  of  Heat ;  and  therefore  about  the 
hot  Season  of  the  Year,  for  sixty  Days,  they  lie  hid  :  as  the 
Glaucus,1  Aselli,2  and  Auratae.3  Of  River  Fishes,  the  Silurus 
at  the  rising  of  the  Dog-star  is  blasted  ;  and  at  other  Times 
is  struck  insensible  by  Lightning.  And  some  think  the  like 
happeneth  in  the  Sea  to  the  Cyprinus.4  And  beyond  Doubt 
the  Sea  is  affected  by  the  rising  of  this  Star ;  but  most  of  all 
this  Influence  appears  in  the  Bosphorus.  For  then  Sea- 
weeds and  Fishes  float  on  the  Surface,  and  every  Thing  is 
cast  up  from  the  Bottom. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

Of  the  Mugil  and  other  Fishes ;  and  that  the  same  do  not  in 
all  Places  please. 

THE  Habit  of  the  Mugil5  is  ridiculous  ;  for  when  afraid, 
they  will  hide  their  Head,  and  then  believe  that  they  are 
entirely  concealed.  These  Mugils  nevertheless  are  so  libidi- 
nous, that  in  the  Season  of  Increase,  in  Phoanice  and  the 
Province  of  Narbonensis  (Languedoc),  if  they  take  a  Male 
out  of  their  Ponds,  and  draw  a  long  Line  through  the  Mouth 
and  Gills,  and  so  tie  it  fast,  and  then  put  him  into  the  Sea, 
holding  the  other  end  of  the  Line,  if  they  draw  him  back 
again,  the  Females  follow  him  to  the  Shore.  And  again  in 
Spawning  Time,  the  Males  thus  follow  a  Female. 

Among  our  Ancestors  the  Accipenser6  was  esteemed  the 
most  noble  of  Fishes.  He  is  the  only  Fish  that  hath  the 
Scales  turned  toward  the  Head ;  he  makes  his  Way  against 

1  Lichia  glaucus.  —  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 

2  The  Haddock :    Gadus  ceglefinus.  —  LINN.     Morrhua  JE.  —  Cuv. 
—  Wern.  Club. 

3  Gilt-head :   Sparus  auratus.  —  LINN.     Chrysophrys  aurata.  —  Cuv. 
— Wern.  Club. 

4  Naturalists  agree  in  applying  this  name  to  a  class  of  river  or  pond 
fishes :  the  Bream  and  Carp.  — Wern.  Club. 

5  The  Grey  Mullet :  Mugil  cephalus.  —  Cuv.  —  Wern.  Club. 

6  The  Sturgeon :  Accipenser  sturio.  —  LINN.  — Wern.  Club. 


132  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

the  Stream.  Now  he  is  in  no  Honour;  which  I  wonder  at, 
considering  he  is  so  seldom  to  be  found.  Some  call  him 
Elops.  Afterwards,  Cornelius  JVepos  and  Laberias  the  comic 
Poet  have  written,  that  the  Lupus  and  Asellus  obtained  the 
chief  Credit.  Of  the  Lupus,  those  that  are  the  most  com- 
mended are  those  which  are  called  Lanati,  from  the  White- 
ness and  Tenderness  of  their  Flesh.  Of  Aselli,  there  are  two 
Sorts :  Callarige,1  which  are  the  less ;  and  Bacchi,  which  are 
never  taken  but  in  deep  Water,  and  therefore  they  are  pre- 
ferred to  the  former.  But  the  Lupi  that  are  caught  in  the 
River  are  preferred  to  the  others.  The  Scarus2  hath  now 
assigned  to  it  the  chief  Place ;  and  it  is  said  to  be  the  only 
Fish  that  cheweth  the  Cud,  and  to  live  on  Herbs  and  not 
on  other  Fishes.  It  is  chiefly  found  in  the  Carpathian  Sea ; 
and  of  its  own  accord  never  passeth  the  Promontory  Lectos 
in  Troas.  When  Tiberius  Claudius  was  Sovereign,  Optatus^ 
his  Freedman  and  Admiral  of  the  Fleet,  brought  them  out  of 
that  Sea,  and  dispersed  them  between  Ostia  and  the  Coast 
of  Campania.  Care  was  taken  by  strict  Command,  for 
almost  five  Years,  that  if  any  were  taken  they  should  be 
returned  into  the  Sea.  After  this  they  were  frequently  found 
along  the  Coast  of  Italy,  whereas  before  they  had  not  been 
taken.  And  thus  Gluttony  hath  supplied  its  Taste  by  sowing 
Fish,  and  given  a  new  Inhabitant  to  the  Sea,  to  take  away 
our  Wonder  that  foreign  Birds  are  prepared  at  Rome.  Next 
to  these  Fishes,  at  least,  the  Table  is  served  with  a  Kind  of 
Mustela,3  which,  wonderful  to  say,  are  bred  in  a  Lake  of 

'  It  may  be,  that  the  name  Callarias  is  synonymous  with  Asellus, 
and  therefore  the  Haddock ;  but  Linneus  has  given  it  to  the  Dorse :  the 
Bacchus  is  believed  to  be  the  Cod-fish,  Gadm  morrhua  of  Linneus ; 
Morrhua  vulgaris,  Cuv.  Baccata  is  still  the  name  for  this  fish  in  Italy.- — 
-Wern.  Club. 

2  Scarus  creticus. — Cuv.     See  B.  xxxii.  c.  2.     It  became  the  fashion 
to  carry  this  fish  alive  to  table,  as  the  Surmullet  also  was,  and  for  the 
same  reason — that  the  guests  might  observe  their  changes  of  colour  in  the 
act  of  dying.     Those  of  the  Surmullet  are  never  restored  as  they  existed 
during  life.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Gadm  fo/a.-— LINN.    Lota  viilgans.—Cuv.     The  Eelpont.  —  Wern. 
Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  1 33 

Rboetia  among  the  Alps,  called  Brigantius ;  and  yet  they  are 
equal  to  those  of  the  Sea.  Of  the  other  Fishes  the  Mullus1 
is  the  best,  as  well  in  Excellency  and  Favour  as  in  Plenty ; 
but  they  are  only  of  moderate  Size,  for  it  is  uncommon  to 
find  them  weigh  above  two  Pounds :  nor  will  they  grow  in 
Store-Ponds.  They  are  bred  only  in  the  North  Sea;  and 
never  in  the  nearest  Coast  of  the  West  Ocean.  Moreover,  of 
this  Fish  there  are  several  Sorts.  And  they  live  on  Sea- 
weeds, Oysters,  Mud,  and  the  Flesh  of  other  Fishes.  They 

1  Mullus  surmuletus,  and  M.  barbatus. — LINN.  Surmullet.  Among 
the  Romans  this  fish  was  indispensable  at  tables  which  made  any  preten- 
sions to  fashion ;  and  at  the  same  time  it  was  the  most  costly  of  all  their 
dishes :  so  that  it  is  referred  to  by  the  poets  as  a  glaring  example  of  the 
extravagance  that  pervaded  the  city.  When  this  first  reached  the  weight 
of  two  pounds,  the  ordinary  price  was  its  own  weight  in  silver.  Horace 
mentions  as  enormous  one  which  weighed  three  pounds;  though  this 
does  not  exceed  what  the  Editor  has  seen  on  the  coast  of  Cornwall.  Two, 
which  were  caught  nearly  together,  weighed  two  and  two-and-a-quarter 
pounds  avoirdupois :  the  latter  being  precisely  the  weight  of  Horace's 
fish  of  thirty  -six  ounces.  Martial  speaks  of  a  Surmullet  of  four  pounds ; 
and  Seneca  relates  a  story  of  the  avarice  of  Tiberius,  who  sent  a  mullet 
weighing  four-and-a-half  pounds  to  market,  where,  perhaps  to  flatter  the 
emperor,  two  noblemen  contended  who  should  purchase  it ;  by  which  it 
reached  the  price  of  5000  sesterces.  Juvenal,  perhaps  with  exaggeration, 
speaks  of  one  that  weighed  six  pounds.  Suetonius  states,  that  for  three 
of  these  fishes  was  paid  at  one  time  30,000  sesterces;  and  Martial  wrote 
an  epigram  on  one  who  sold  a  servant  to  raise  the  means  of  making 
a  sumptuous  supper,  at  which  the  principal  dish,  and  the  one  that  swal- 
lowed up  the  chief  expense,  was  the  enormous  Surmullet  above-men- 
tioned. —  (B.  x.  Ep.  30.)  Those  who  wished  to  ape  the  great,  without 
sufficient  means,  were  obliged  to  be  satisfied  with  half  a  mullet.  "  Mul- 
lum  dimidium,  lapumque  totum,  mursenaeque  latus "  —  (Martial) :  the 
"  side  "  of  murasna  being  on  the  same  scale  of  stinted  luxury.  When  an 
epicure  was  asked  whether  these  prices  were  not  absurd,  he  replied  that 
two  morsels  of  the  fish  were  worth  the  expense  :  the  head  and  the  liver. 
The  latter  formed  a  delicious  sauce ;  but  the  head  must  have  been  valued 
only  because  there  was  so  little  in  it.  Attempts  were  made  to  breed  these 
fishes  in  ponds ;  but  tiiey  could  not  bear  the  confinement ;  so  that  not 
Only  did  they  cease  to  grow  in  size,  but  not  more  than  one  or  two  in  a 
thousand  continued  alive. 

The  fish  mentioned  at  the  beginning  of  the  next  chapter,  as  a  mullet 
of  the  Red  Sea,  must  have  been  of  another  species,  and  even  genus. — 
—  Wern.  Club. 


134  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  IX. 

are  distinguished  by  two  Beards  on  the  lower  Lip.  The  worst 
of  all  this  kind  is  called  Lutarius.1  And  this  Fish  hath  an- 
other, named  Sargus,  which  always  beareth  him  Company ; 
and  while  he  is  digging  into  the  Mud,  the  Sargus  devoureth 
the  Food  that  is  raised  up.  Neither  are  those  which  keep 
near  the  Shore  in  Favour.  But  these  that  are  in  highest 
Regard  taste  like  the  (Shell-fish)  Conchy  Hum.  Fenestella 
thinks,  that  the  Name  Mullus  was  given  them  because  their 
Colour  resembles  that  of  the  purplish-red  Shoes.  They 
spawn  three  Times  in  the  Year ;  for  so  often  their  Young 
are  certainly  seen.  The  principal  Epicures  say,  that  a  Mul- 
lus, when  dying,  changeth  his  Colour,  which  may  be  seen  to 
take  a  great  Variety  of  Tints ;  passing  from  pale  by  a  Variety 
of  Mutations  to  glowing  red  all  over  his  Scales,  particularly 
if  it  be  looked  at  as  he  is  held  in  a  Glass.  M.  Apicius,  who 
was  wonderful  for  every  Ingenuity  that  belonged  to  Luxury, 
thought  it  a  most  excellent  Improvement  to  stifle  them  in 
the  Sauce  of  the  Allies,  for  this  Thing  also  hath  found  a  Sur- 
name. And  he  also  incited  them  to  contrive  a  Pickle  made 
from  their  Livers.  For  surely  it  is  more  easy  to  say  this  than 
to  set  down  who  excelled  in  it.  Asturius  Celer,  a  Man  of 
consular  Rank,  showed  his  Prodigality  in  this  Fish,  for 
when  C.  Caligula  was  Sovereign,  he  gave  for  one  Mullet 
eight  thousand  Sesterces :  the  Consideration  of  which  car- 
rieth  far  away  my  Mind  to  the  Contemplation  of  those  who, 
in  their  Reproof  of  Luxury,  complained  that  a  Cook  was 
purchased  at  a  greater  Price  than  a  Horse.  For  now  a  Cook 
will  cost  as  much  as  the  Expense  of  a  Triumph ;  and  Fishes 
are  as  dear  as  Cooks.  And  no  mortal  Man  is  esteemed  more 
than  he  who  hath  the  most  Skill  to  waste  the  Goods  and 
consume  the  Property  of  his  Lord. 

1  Probably  Trigla  lineata :  a  fish  which  has  much  the  habits  of  the 
Mullus,  and  is  often  taken  in  the  same  net ;  on  which  account,  and  some 
resemblance  of  form,  it  was  called  by  the  older  naturalists,  Mullus  imberbis. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  135 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Of  the  Mullus,  and  Coracinus,  Salpa,  and  Salmon. 

LICINIUS  MUTIANUS  reporteth,  that  in  the  Red  Sea  a 
Mullet  was  taken  that  weighed  fourscore  Pounds.  What  a 
Price  would  he  have  brought  in  our  Luxury  if  he  had  been 
taken  upon  our  Coasts  near  the  City!  Also  this  is  the 
Nature  of  Fish,  that  some  obtain  the  Pre-eminency  in  one 
Place,  and  some  in  another :  as  the  Coracinus  in  Egypt : 
at  Gades,  the  Zeus,1  which  is  also  called  Faber :  about 
Ebusus  the  Salpa,2  which  in  other  Places  is  counted  base, 
and  which  nowhere  else  are  they  able  to  cook  unless  it  is 
first  well  beaten  with  a  Cudgel.  In  Aquitania  the  River 
Salmon  s  is  preferred  to  all  Sea-fishes. 

Of  Fish,  some  have  many  Gills  :  some  have  them  simple, 
others  double.  At  these  Gills  they  discharge  the  Water 
they  take  in  at  the  Mouth.  Hardness  of  the  Scales  is  a 
Mark  that  the  Fish  is  old ;  and  yet  all  Fishes  have  not 
Scales  alike.  There  are  two  Lakes  in  Italy,  at  the  Foot  of 
the  Alps,  named  Larius  and  Verbanus,*  in  which  there  are 
Fishes  that  every  Year  at  the  rising  of  the  Stars  Virgiliae, 
have  their  Scales  remarkable  for  the  Thickness  and  the 
Sharpness  of  their  Points  ;  much  like  the  Nails  (or  Tongues) 
of  the  military  Boots ;  and  never  longer  than  about  that 
Month  do  they  appear. 

1  Zeus  faber. —  LINN.  —  Wern.  Club. 

5  Sparus  salpa.  —  LINN.    Boops  salpa.  —  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Salmosalar.  —  LINN.—  Wern.  Club. 

*  Larius  and  Verbanus:  now  known  as  Lakes  Major  and  Como.  The 
fish  mentioned  is  the  Cyprianus  of  Rondeletius :  Cyprinus  clavatus,  sive 
Pigus,  of  Ray's  "  Syn.  Pis.,"  p.  115,  a  local  variety  of  the  common  Carp : 
Cyprinus  carpio.—  Wern.  Club. 


136  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Of  the  Exoccstus.1 

ARCADIA  makes  a  Wonder  of  its  Exocoetus;  so  called 
because  it  leaveth  the  Water  to  sleep  on  dry  Land.  This 
Fish  is  reported  about  the  Clitorius  to  have  a  Voice,  and 
is  without  Gills.  By  some  it  is  named  Adonis.  Also  those 
Creatures  which  are  called  Mures  Marini2  and  Polypes  and 
Muraense  leave  the  Water  for  the  Land.  Moreover,  in  the 
Rivers  of  India  there  is  a  certain  kind  of  Fish  that  doth  so, 
but  it  presently  leapeth  back  again.  For  there  is  an  evident 
Reason  why  many  Fishes  pass  into  Rivers  and  Lakes ;  it  is 
that  they  may  with  more  Safety  produce  their  Young  where 
the  Water  is  not  so  rough,  and  there  are  no  Enemies  to 
devour  them.  That  these  Creatures  should  have  the  Under- 
standing thus  to  know  the  Causes,  and  observe  the  Changes 
of  Times,  is  the  more  wonderful,  if  we  would  only  consider 
how  few  Men  there  are  aware  that  the  best  Season  for  fishing 
is  while  the  Sun  passeth  through  the  Sign  Pisces. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

An  Arrangement  of  Fishes  according  to  the  Shape  of  their 

Bodies. 

OF  Sea- Fishes  some  are  flat,  as  Rhoinbi,  Soleae,  and 
Passeres  ;3  and  the  latter  differ  from  the  Rhombi  only  in  the 
Position  of  their  Bodies.  In  the  Rhombus  the  right  Side 
turneth  upward,  and  in  the  Passer  the  left.  Others  are  long, 
as  the  Muraena  and  Conger.  On  this  Account  they  have 
Distinctions  formed  by  their  Fins,  which  Nature  hath  given 

1  Blennius   cristatus,  LINN.:   but  the  same  habit  is  common  to  the 
B.  pholis,  or  Shanny.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Mures  marini,  or  Sea-Mice ;  some  copies  read  MyrL     The  Mus  of 
Aristotle  is  a  freshwater  Turtle ;  and  probably  these  Mures  marini  are 
some  small  sea  Turtles.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Platessa  flesus,  Cuv.    Pleuronectes  F.  of  Linn.,  but  including  also 
the  Plaice.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  137 

to  Fish  instead  of  Feet.  None  have  above  four;  some  have 
two,  some  three,  and  others  none.  Only  in  the  Lake  Fucinus 
there  is  a  Fish,  which  in  swimming  useth  eight  Fins.  All 
Fishes  that  are  long  and  slippery,  as  Eels  and  Congers,  have 
ordinarily  two.  Muraenae1  have  none,  nor  any  Gills:  all  of 
these  Kinds  act  upon  the  Sea  by  bending  their  Bodies,  as 
Serpents  on  the  Land.  They  creep  also  on  dry  Land ;  and 
therefore  such  are  more  retentive  of  Life.  Also  among  flat 
Fishes  some  have  no  Fins,  as  the  Pastinaca  ;2  for  their 
Breadth  serveth  them  sufficiently  to  swim  with.  And  among 
those  which  are  denominated  Soft,  the  Polypi  have  no  Fins, 
because  their  Feet  stand  them  instead  of  Fins, 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
Of  Eels* 

EELS  live  eight  Years.  And  if  the  North  Wind  blows, 
they  continue  without  Water  six  Days ;  but  not  so  long  in  a 
South  Wind.  Yet  in  Winter-time  they  cannot  endure  the 
same  Exposure  in  a  small  Quantity  of  Water  ;  nor  if  it  be 
muddy ;  and  therefore  about  the  rising  of  the  Star  Virgilise 
they  are  most  abundantly  taken,  because  the  Rivers  about 
that  Time  are  the  most  muddy.  Their  Feeding  is  by  Night. 
Of  all  Fish  they  alone  do  not  float  when  dead. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Of  taking  them  in  the  Lake  JBenacus. 

THERE  is  a  Lake  in  Italy  called  Benacus,  in  the  Territory 
of  Verona,  through  which  the  River  Mincius  runneth :  at 
the  Outlet  of  which  every  Year,  about  the  Month  of  October, 

1  The  Mursena  has  a  fin  passing  along  the  back  to  the  extremity  of 
the  body,  where  it  is  united  to  the  anal,  and  forms  a  caudal  fin,  as  in  the 
Eel.    It  has  gills,  also,  with  a  perfect  organization  concealed  within  the 
integument ;  but  the  aperture  is  obscure.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Raia  pastinaca.  —  LINN.     Trygon  P.  —  Cuv.     The  Sting  Ray  or 
Fireflair.  —  Wern.  Club. 

*  Murcena  anguilla. — LINN.     Anguilla  vulgaris. —  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 


138  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

when  the  Autumn  Star  (Arcturus)  ariseth,  whereby  (as  is 
evident)  the  Lake  is  troubled  with  a  Winter  Storm,  there  are 
found  rolling  among  the  Waves  a  wonderful  Number  of 
Eels,  entwined  one  with  another  into  a  Heap,  so  that  in 
the  Receiving-places  or  Traps  on  this  River,  sometimes  a 
thousand  of  them  may  be  found  wrapped  together  in  a  single 
Ball. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 
Of  the  Murcena. 

THE  Muraena  spawneth  at  all  Times  of  the  Year,  whereas 
other  Fishes  shed  their  Spawn  at  one  certain  Season.  The 
Eggs  grow  very  rapidly.  The  common  People  believe  that 
they  creep  out  of  the  Water  to  the  dry  Land,  and  become 
impregnated  by  Serpents.  Aristotle  calleth  the  Male  or 
Milter,  Myrus.  The  Difference,  that  the  Mursena  is  of  a 
Variety  of  Colours,  and  weak ;  but  the  Myrus1  is  of  a  uniform 
Colour,  and  strong,  with  Teeth  projecting  beyond  his  Mouth. 
In  the  North  Parts  of  Gallia  all  the  Mursenee  have  on  their 
right  Jaw  seven  Spots,  distributed  like  the  seven  Stars  about 
the  North  Pole  (Septentrio).  These  are  of  a  golden  Colour 
so  long  as  the  Muraena  is  alive :  but  they  are  not  seen  after 
it  is  dead.  Vedius  Pollio,  a  Roman  Knight,  and  one  of  the 
Friends  of  Divus  Augustus,  contrived  Experiments  of  Cruelty 
by  Means  of  this  Creature.  For  he  caused  his  Slaves  that 
were  condemned  to  die,  to  be  thrown  into  the  Ponds  where 
his  Mursense  were  kept :  not  because  the  Wild  Beasts  of  the 
Land  were  not  sufficient  to  do  this,  but  because  in  any  other 
Way  of  Proceeding  he  would  not  have  been  able  to  view  a 
Man  plucked  in  Pieces  all  at  once,  and  at  his  Leisure.  It  is 
said,  that  if  they  taste  Vinegar  they  are  driven  to  Madness. 
They  have  a  very  thin  Skin  ;  and,  on  the  contrary,  Eels  have 
it  thick  :  so  that  Verrius  writeth,  that  Children  under  seven 

1  The  Myrus  is  a  distinct  species,  Mur.  myrus,  LINN,  and  Cuv.  The 
Muraena  was  one  of  the  petted  objects  of  luxury  of  the  Romans,  and 
therefore  sedulously  propagated  in  ponds. — Went.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  139 

Years  of  Age  (Prcetextati}  usually  were  whipped  with  Eels' 
Skins,  and  on  that  Account  were  freed  from  all  other 
Punishment. 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 
Of  Flat  Fishes. 

OF  Flat  Fishes  there  is  another  Sort,  which  instead  of  a 
Back-bone  have  a  Cartilage :  as  the  Raia,  Pastinaca,  Squa- 
tina,  and  Torpedo :  and  also,  those  which  the  Greeks  have 
termed  by  the  Names  of  the  Bos  Lamia,  Acquila,  and  Rana. 
In  this  Number  are  to  be  ranked  the  Squali  (Sharks)  also ; 
although  they  are  not  flat.  All  this  kind  in  general  Aristotle 
was  the  first  to  call  in  Greek  Selache  :  we  cannot  distinguish 
them  by  this  Name,  unless  we  are  permitted  to  call  them 
Cartilaginous  Fishes.  But  all  the  Sort  of  them  that  devour 
Flesh  are  such ;  and  they  feed  as  they  lie  supine,  like  as  we 
observed  in  the  Dolphins.  And  whereas  other  Fishes  cast 
Spawn,  this  Class  only,  in  the  same  manner  as  those 
which  we  call  Cete,1  bring  forth  their  Young  alive ;  with  the 
Exception,  however,  of  that  one  which  they  call  Rana. 

1  The  name  of  Cete  is  here  mentioned  as  equivalent  to  Balaena  for 
the  Whales,  ch.  6 :  but  the  mode  in  which  they  bear  their  young  is  very 
different  from  that  of  the  cartilaginous  fishes,  though  both,  or  at  least  the 
Sharks  among  the  latter,  are  viviparous.  The  Whales  are  placental 
animals,  but  all  true  fishes  produce  eggs,  although  in  some  instances  they 
are  hatched  within  the  body  of  the  parent. 

The  fishes  here  mentioned  are :  Eaia,  —  several  species  of  Rays  and 
Skates ;  Pastinaca,  mentioned  before,  ch.  20 ;  Squatina,  Squalus  squatina, 
Linn.,  and  Squatina  vulgaris^  Cuv. ;  the  Monk,  or  Angel-fish ;  and  Tor- 
pedo, ch.  16.  The  Bos  is  a  gigantic  species  of  Ray,  Raia  cephaloptera : 
forming  the  genus  Cephaloptera  of  Cuvier ;  and  Oppian  (B.  ii.)  gives  an 
account  of  the  great  injury  it  does  to  the  divers  for  coral,  by  clasping 
them  and  preventing  their  ascent  to  the  surface.  Lamia  is  the  White 
Shark :  Squalus  carcharias  of  Linn.,  and  Carcharias  vulgaris,  Cuv. 
Acquila,  Myliolatis  aquila.  Eagle  Ray.  Rana,  Lophius  piscatorius,  Linn. : 
Fishing  Frog,  or  Angler.—  Wern.  Club. 


140  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 
Of  the  Echeneis. 

THERE  is  a  very  little  Fish  called  Echeneis,1  that  keeps 
ordinarily  about  Rocks.  It  is  believed  that  if  it  adhere  to 
the  Keel  of  a  Ship  it  goeth  the  more  slowly ;  and  from  this 
it  took  its  Name :  for  the  same  Cause  also  it  hath  a  bad 
Reputation  for  its  use  in  amatory  Medicines,  and  in  causing 
Delay  of  Actions  at  Law  and  judicial  Decisions.  But  both 
these  Offences  are  counterbalanced  by  one  commendation :  for 
it  restraineth  Haemorrhage  threatening  Abortion  in  pregnant 
Women,  and  holdeth  the  Child  to  the  full  Time  of  Birth. 
Notwithstanding,  it  is  not  allowed  to  be  eaten.  Aristotle 
thinketh  that  it  hath  Feet,  as  the  Fins  stand  thick  cne  by 
another. 

The  Murex,  Mutianus  saith,  is  broader  than  the  Purpura, 
having  a  Mouth  neither  rough  nor  round,  and  with  a  Beak 
not  protruding  in  an  Angle,  but  simple,  the  Shell  on  both 
Sides  turning  itself  inward.  These  Shells  adhered  to  a  Ship 
conveying  Messengers  from  Periander  with  Commission  to 
emasculate  the  Noblemen's  Sons,  and  caused  it  to  remain 
still,  although  it  was  under  Sail  with  a  strong  Gale.  And 
the  Shells  which  accomplished  this  are  Objects  of  Worship 
in  the  Temple  of  Venus  of  the  Gnidians. 

Trebius  Niger  saith  that  the  Echeneis  is  a  Foot  long,  and 
five  Fingers  thick  ;  that  it  hinders  the  Progress  of  a  Ship ; 

1  The  proper  Echeneis  is  the  E.  remora.  Linn.;  but  from  its  pos- 
sessing similar,  or  even  firmer  powers  of  adhesion,  though  by  a  different 
organ,  it  was  confounded  with  the  larger  Lamprey,  Petrornyzon  marinus. 
From  allusion  to  the  feet,  Aristotle,  as  well  as  Gesner,  who  follows  him, 
appears  to  include  in  the  same  class  a  species  of  Cyclopterus ;  of  which 
there  is  one  that  adheres  with  more  facility,  although  with  less  firmness. 
We  cannot  avoid  believing  that  the  popular  impression  concerning  this 
fish  was  often  laid  hold  of  as  an  excuse,  in  some  of  the  instances  where  an 
unpleasant  task  had  been  slowly  performed  or  entirely  counteracted.  The 
narrative  of  Antony's  delay  at  the  battle  of  Actium  (see  B.  xxxii.  c.  1 .) 
will  only  excite  a  smile  in  those  who  consider  the  much  more  formidable 
attraction  that  existed  at  the  time.  — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  141 

and,  moreover,  that  it  hath  the  Virtue,  if  preserved  in  Salt,  of 
drawing  up  Gold  that  is  fallen  into  even  a  very  deep  Well, 
if  let  down  so  as  to  touch  it. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 
Of  the  Variety  in  the  Nature  of  Fishes. 

THE  Maense1  change  their  Colour;  for  these  Fishes  being 
white  in  Winter,  become  black  in  Summer.  Also  the  Phycis2 
is  subject  to  Alteration ;  being  all  the  Year  besides  white, 
but  in  the  Spring  speckled.  This  is  the  only  Fish  that 
buildeth  a  Nest3  with  Sea-weed,  and  spawneth  in  this  Nest. 
The  Hirundo4  flieth:  truly  almost  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
Bird  so  called.  The  Milvus  doeth  the  same. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Of  the  Fish  called  the  Lucerna,  and  the  Draco  Marinus 
(Sea  Dragon). 

THERE  is  a  Fish  that  cometh  above  the  Water,  called 
Lucerna,5  for  the  Resemblance  it  hath  to  a  Light;  for  it 
thrusteth  forth  its  fiery  Tongue  out  of  the  Mouth,  and  in 
calm  Nights  giveth  Light.  There  is  Fish  that  raiseth  Horns 
above  the  Sea,  almost  a  Foot  and  a  half  long ;  which  there- 
fore took  the  Name  Cornuta.6  Again,  the  Draco  Marinus 

1  Sparus  mcena.  —  LINN.     Mana  vulgaris.  —  Cuv.  — Wern.  Club. 

2  Cuvier  says  it  was  a  Goby;  perhaps  Gobius  niger,  or  G.  capita. 
Martial  says, — 

"  In  Venice,  where  the  joy  of  feasts  is  priz'd, 

The  Goby  is  the  supper's  chief." — Wern.  Club. 

3  The  particulars  of  British  fishes  which  construct  nests  may  be  seen 
in  the  Editor's  "Illustrations  of  Instinct,"  c.  15.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Exocoetus  exiliens. — Cuv.     The  Flying  Fish.   Milvus,  trigla  volitans. 
—  LINN.    Dactylopterus  volitans.  —  Cuv.    The  Flying  Gurnard.—  Wern. 
Club. 

5  Trigla  hirundo.  —  LINN.     The  Tub-fish.  —  Wern.  Club. 

6  Peristf.dion  malarmat. — Cuv.     Mailed  Gurnard.     Draco  marinus, 
Trachinm  draco.  —  LINN.     Wiever.  — Wern.  Club. 


142  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

(Sea  Dragon)  if  caught  and  let  loose  upon  the  Sand,  digs 
for  himself  an  Excavation  with  his  Snout,  with  wonderful 
Celerity. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 
Of  Fishes  destitute  of  Blood. 

SOME  Fishes  are  without  Blood  : 1  of  which  we  will  now 
speak.  Of  them  there  are  three  Sorts.  First,  those  which 
are  called  Soft :  secondly,  such  as  are  covered  with  thin 
Crusts :  and  in  the  last  Place,  they  that  are  enclosed  within 
hard  Shells.  The  soft  are  reckoned  the  Loligo,  Sepia,  Poly- 
pus, and  the  rest  of  that  Sort.  These  have  their  Head  between 
their  Feet  and  the  Belly,  and  every  one  of  them  has  eight 
Feet.  The  Sepia  and  Loligo  have  each  two  Feet,  very  long 
and  rough ;  by  which  they  convey  Meat  to  their  Mouths : 
and  also  stay  themselves  as  with  an  Anchor  against  the 
Waves.  The  rest  of  their  Feet  are  Tendrils,  with  which  they 
catch  their  Prey. 

CHAPTER  XXIX.2 
Of  the  Loligo,3  Sepia,4*  Polypus,5  and  Nautilus? 

ALSO  the  Loligo  flies,  springing  out  of  the  Water  as  if 
he  were  an  Arrow ;  and  even  Pectunculi  do  the  same.  The 

1  Not  without  a  circulating  fluid,  but  destitute  of  red  blood. — Wern. 
Club. 

2  The  Mollusks  mentioned  in  this  chapter  are :— Loligo :  Sepia  Loligo. 
—LiNN.— Wern.  Club. 

3  Loligo  vulgaris. —  Cuv.,  and  perhaps,  also,  L.  media.     Common 
Cuttle.  —Wern.  Club. 

4  Sepia  officinalis. —  LINN,  and  Cuv.    Bone  Cuttle. — Wern.  Club. 

5  Septa  octopodia.  —  LINN.     Eledone  vulgaris.  —  Cuv.    See  B.  xxxii. 
c.  2.— Wern.  Club. 

6  Argonauta  Argo.  —  LINN.    The  story  of  hoisting  its  membranous 
sails  to  the  wind  is  found  to  be  an  error :  the  use  of  these  parts  being  to 
clasp  the  sides  of  the  shell  as  it  swims.    It  was  the  Polypus  chiefly  that 
was  so  highly  prized  as  food  by  the  Greeks,  but  it  was  necessary  to  bruise 
it  well  before  it  was  cooked.    The  Loligo  was  also  employed  in  the  same 
manner ;  as  it  is  at  this  day.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  143 

Males  of  the  Sepia  kind  are  mottled,  and  blacker,  as  well  as 
more  firm,  than  the  Female.  If  the  Female  be  smitten  with 
a  Trident,  they  will  help  her  ;  but  if  the  Male  be  struck,  she 
flies.  But  both  of  them,  when  they  perceive  that  they  are 
laid  hold  of,  throw  out  a  Quantity  of  Ink,  which  is  in  the 
Place  of  Blood  to  them  ;  and  when  the  Water  is  obscured 
with  it  they  hide  themselves  by  means  of  it. 

Of  Polypi  there  are  many  Kinds.  They  that  keep  near 
the  Shore  are  bigger  than  those  that  haunt  the  Deep.  All 
of  them  employ  their  Arms  in  the  manner  of  Feet  and 
Hands ;  but  the  Tail,  which  is  sharp  and  two-forked,  serveth 
them  in  their  Coupling.  The  Polypi  have  a  Pipe  in  their 
Back,  by  which  they  throw  out  the  Sea :  and  it  they  can 
shift,  one  while  to  the  right  Side,  and  another  to  the  left. 
They  swim  obliquely  on  their  Head,  which  is  very  hard  by 
being  blown  up  while  they  are  alive.  Moreover,  by  hollow 
Concavities,  arranged  along  their  Arms,  they  will  adhere,  as 
it  were  by  sucking,  to  any  Thing ;  which  they  hold  so  fast 
(lying  upward  with  their  Bellies)  that  they  cannot  be 
plucked  from  it.  They  never  fasten  on  the  Bottom;  and 
the  greater  they  are,  the  less  strong  they  are  to  hold  any 
Thing.  Of  all  soft  (Fishes)  they  alone  go  out  of  the  Water  to 
dry  Land,  at  least  into  some  rough  Place;  for  they  cannot 
abide  those  that  are  smooth.  They  devour  the  Flesh  of  Shell- 
fishes, the  Shells  of  which  they  break  by  the  Compression  of 
their  Tendrils  ;  and  therefore  the  Place  where  they  lie  may 
be  detected  by  the  Number  of  Shells  that  lie  before  their 
Place.  And  though  in  other  Respects  it  may  be  regarded  as 
a  very  senseless  Creature,  so  that  it  will  swim  to  a  Man's 
Hand,  yet  in  what  concerns  its  Family  Affairs  it  possesses 
Understanding:  for  all  they  can  take  they  carry  to  their 
Home ;  and  when  they  have  eaten  the  Meat  of  the  Tishes 
they  throw  away  the  empty  Shells,  and  watch  to  catch  the 
little  Fishes  that  approach  them.  They  change  their  Colour 
to  that  of  the  Place  where  they  are,  and  especially  when 
under  the  Influence  of  Fear.  That  they  gnaw  their  own 
Arms  is  a  great  Error;  for  they  owe  this  Injury  to  the  Con- 
gers :  but  it  is  scarcely  false  that  they  will  grow  again,  like 


144  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  IX. 

the  Tail  of  Adders  and  Lizards.  But  among  the  greatest 
Wonders  of  Nature,  is  that  Creature  which  by  some  is  called 
Nautilos,  by  others  Pompilos.  It  comes  to  the  Surface  of 
the  Water  upon  its  Back,  so  that  it  raiseth  or  heaveth  itself 
up  by  little  and  little ;  and  that  it  may  swim  with  Ease,  it 
dischargeth  all  the  Water  through  a  Pipe,  as  if  it  were 
unloaded  by  a  Pump,  After  this,  turning  back  the  two  fore- 
most Arms,  it  stretcheth  out  between  them  a  Membrane  of 
wonderful  thinness ;  which  serve th  it  for  a  Sail  in  the  Air, 
whilst  with  the  rest  of  its  Arms  it  roweth  under  Water ;  and 
with  the  Tail  in  the  midst  it  directeth  its  Course,  as  with  an 
Helm.  Thus  does  it  make  its  Way  in  the  Deep  with  the 
Imitation  of  a  little  Boat,  and  if  any  Thing  alarm  it  with  a 
Draught  of  Water  it  sinks  itself  to  the  Bottom. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

Of  the  Ozcena,  the  Nauplius,  and  Locustce. 

THE  Ozsena1  is  a  kind  of  Polypus,  and  it  derives  its  Name 
from  the  strong  Smell  of  its  Head  ;  from  which  Cause  espe- 
cially the  Mursenae  pursue  it.  The  Polypi  lie  hid  for  two 
Months,  and  do  not  live  above  two  Years.  They  always  die 
of  a  Consumption  :  the  Female  sooner  than  the  Males,  and 
ordinarily  after  they  have  brought  forth  their  Young.  I 
cannot  pass  over  the  Reports  of  Trebius  Niger,  one  of  the 
Retinue  of  L.  Lucullus,  Proconsul  in  Boetica,  which  he  deli- 
vered as  collected  by  the  latter  concerning  these  Polypi : 
that  they  are  exceedingly  greedy  after  Conchaj  (Cockles, 
Mussels,  and  such-like  Shell-fishes) :  and  that  they,  as  soon 
as  they  feel  themselves  touched,  shut  their  Shells,  and  so  cut 
off  their  Arms,  and  thus  feed  upon  those  which  sought  to 
make  a  Prey  of  them.  These  Shell-fishes  are  without  Sight, 
and  every  other  Sense,  but  those  of  tasting  their  Meat 
and  Sensibility  to  Danger.  These  Polypi  lie  in  wait  for 
Cockles  as  they  gape  wide  open,  and  put  in  a  little  Stone 

1  Eledone  moschatus.  —  Cuv.  Professor  Edward  Forbes  says,  it  was 
probably  Eledone  macrnpodia. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  145 

between  the  Shells ;  but  not  close  to  the  Body  of  the  Fish, 
lest  if  it  felt  it,  it  might  be  thrown  out  again  ;  and  thus  they 
carry  on  their  Attacks  in  Security,  so  as  to  get  out  the 
Flesh ;  for  although  the  Cockles  close  their  Shells,  it  is  in 
vain,  because  of  the  Wedge  between  them :  so  great  is  the 
Subtilty  of  Creatures  which  otherwise  are  very  dull  in  their 
Faculties !  Moreover,  Trebius  Niger  affirmeth  that  there 
is  no  other  Creature  so  dangerous  to  destroy  a  Man  in  the 
Water ;  for  it  catcheth  him  fast  in  its  Embrace,  and  sucks 
him  with  the  Cups,  so  that  it  exhausts  him  with  the  Num- 
ber of  its  drawing  Instruments,  at  such  a  Time  as  it  has 
obtained  an  Advantage  over  those  which  are  shipwrecked, 
or  are  engaged  in  diving.  But  if  it  be  turned  upside  down, 
its  Strength  is  soon  gone  ;  for  then  they  stretch  themselves 
out  on  their  Back.  And  truly  also,  all  Creatures  in  the 
Sea  are  attracted  by  their  Smell,  which  is  the  Cause  that 
Fishermen  besmear  their  Traps  with  them. 

Other  Things  which  this  Author  hath  related  may  seem 
rather  like  something  monstrous  ;  for  he  affirmeth,  that  at 
Carteia  there  was  one  which  used  to  go  from  the  Sea  into 
their  open  Cisterns,  among  their  Ponds,  and  there  rob  them 
of  their  salt  Fish ;  and  this  Thievery  was  so  enormous  and 
long  continued,  that  it  gat  itself  the  great  Displeasure  of 
the  Keepers.  Fences  were  erected  to  stop  the  Passage,  but 
these  it  passed  over  by  means  of  a  Tree  ;  nor  could  it  have 
been  taken  but  by  the  Sagacity  of  the  Dogs  :  for  as  it  was 
returning  one  Night,  they  set  upon  it  on  all  Sides,  and  so 
raised  the  Keepers,  who  were  affrighted  at  the  strange 
Sight.  For,  first  of  all,  it  was  of  unheard-of  bigness;  then 
its  Colour  was  covered  over  with  the  Pickle,  and  the  Stink 
was  horrible.  Who  would  have  looked  for  a  Polypus  there, 
or  have  known  it  in  such  a  condition  ?  They  thought  they 
had  to  encounter  with  some  Monster :  for  with  its  terrible 
Vapour  it  drove  away  the  Dogs;  and  with  the  Ends  of  its 
long  Tendrils  it  would  lash  them ;  sometimes  with  its 
stronger  Arms  it  knocked  them,  as  with  Clubs  ;  so  that  it 
was  with  Difficulty  they  were  able  to  kill  it  with  several 
three-pronged  Spears.  Its  Head  was  shown  to  Lucullus,  and 

VOL.  III.  L 


1-46  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

was  as  big  as  a  Barrel  that  would  contain  fifteen  Amphorae ; 
and  its  Beards  (for  I  quote  the  exact  Words  of  Trebius^)  a 
Man  could  scarcely  encompass  with  both  his  Arms;  they  were 
full  of  Protuberances  like  Clubs,  and  thirty  feet  long.  The 
Cavities  or  Cups,  and  hollow  Vessels,  were  like  great 
Basins ;  and  the  Teeth  were  conspicuous  for  their  size.  The 
Remains  were  preserved  for  a  Wonder,  and  weighed  seven 
hundred  Pounds.  The  same  Author  affirmeth  that  Sepiae 
also,  and  the  Loligo,  have  been  cast  upon  that  Shore,  full  as 
big.  Indeed,  in  our  Sea,  Loligines  are  taken  of  five  Cubits 
long,  and  Sepiae  of  two :  and  these  do  not  live  above  two 
Years.1 

Mutianus  reporteth,  that  himself  saw  in  Propontis  ano- 
ther kind,  having  the  Likeness  of  one  carrying  a  Ship  :  that 
it  was  a  Shell-fish,  with  a  Keel  like  that  of  a  Barge,  with  a 
Poop  turned  inward  ;  the  Prow  with  a  Beak.  Within  this 
lay  hid  the  Nauplius,  an  Animal  resembling  a  Sepia,  only  to 
play  with  it  for  Company.  And  this  was  done  in  two  Ways : 
for  when  it  is  calm,  the  Passenger  would  put  down  its  Feet, 
and  row  as  with  Oars ;  but  if  the  Breeze  invited,  it  would 
stretch  out  the  same  to  serve  for  a  Rudder  ;  and  then  the 
Cavity  of  the  Shell  would  be  spread  to  the  Wind.  So  one  of 
them  takes,  a  Pleasure  to  carry,  and  the  other  to  direct;  and 
they  unite  to  sink  the  Shell  :  though  both  are  destitute  of 
Sense  ;  unless,  indeed,  Misfortune  be  intended  to  Man  :  a 
sad  Presage,  as  is  well  known  to  Sailors. 

Locustae2  (being  of  that  Kind  which  wanteth  Blood)  are 
defended  with  a  brittle  Crust.  For  five  Months  they  lie  hid. 


1  -/Elian  relates  some  accounts  of  enormous  Polypi :  B.  xii.  c.  6.  One 
dragged  into  the  sea  an  eagle  that  had  attempted  to  seize  it ;  B.  vii.  c.  1 1 . 
—  Wern.  Club. 

3  This  seems  a  general  name  for  long-tailed  Crustaceans,  including 
the  Lobsters  and  Crawfishes.  But  when  applied  to  a  distinct  species,  the 
Carabos  of  the  Greeks  and  Locusta  of  the  Latins  is  the  genus  Palinurus, 
Cuv.,  of  which  P.  quadricomis  was,  probably,  that  which  Tiberius  em- 
ployed to  lacerate  the  face  of  the  fisherman  at  Capri :  its  shell  being 
covered  with  prominent  spines.  Astacus  (A.  marinus)  is  the  common 
Lobster.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  147 

The  Crabs  (Cancri1)  likewise,  which  at  the  same  Time  keep 
close  ;  and  both  of  them  in  the  beginning  of  Spring  cast 
their  old  Coats  in  the  manner  of  Snakes,  and  renew  them 
fresh.  The  others  swim  within  the  Water;  but  the  Locustae 
float  aloft,  in  the  manner  of  creeping  Things.  So  long  as 
they  feel  no  Fear  they  go  straight  forward,  their  Horns, 
which  naturally  have  a  round  Arming,  being  stretched  out 
towards  the  Sides  ;  but  if  they  be  in  any  Fear,  these  Horns 
are  erected,  and  they  advance  by  passing  from  Side  to  Side. 
With  these  Horns  they  contend  with  one  another.  Of  all 
Creatures  this  only  hath  no  Solidity  in  its  liquid  Flesh, 
unless  it  is  boiled  alive  in  scalding  Water. 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 
Of  the  Cancer,  Echinus,  and  Echinometra. 

LOCUSTS  live  in  rocky  Places;  Crabs  in  those  which 
are  soft.  In  Winter  they  seek  after  Shores  exposed  to 
the  Sunshine :  but  in  Summer  they  retire  into  shady 
Places  in  Gullies.  All  of  this  Family  decline  in  the  Win- 
ter; but  in  Autumn  and  Spring  they  grow  fat;  and  espe- 
cially when  the  Moon  is  full,  because  by  Night  that  Star  is 

1  A  general  name  for  the  short-tailed  crustaceans,  which  comprise  the 
crabs ;  but  individually  Cancer  pagurus,  LINN.  :  The  edible  crab.  The 
other  species  are:  Maja:  Cancer  squinado,  LINN.;  Maia  Sq.,  Cuv.;  some- 
times seen  on  Greek  coins,  and  supposed  to  be  endowed  with  more  wis- 
dom than  other  crustaceans.  It  was  sensible  to  the  charms  of  music,  and 
jJElian  says  of  the  Pagurus  (which,  as  expressing  this  crab,  may  include 
this  species),  that  fishermen  employed  the  music  of  the  Photingium  to 
allure  them  out  of  the  water.  Heracleoticus :  Cancer  granulatus,  LINN.  ; 
Calappa  granulata,  Cuv.;  Leones :  Galafhcea  rugosa,  Cuv.;  Hippce : 
Cancer  cursor,  LINN.  ;  Ocypodb,  Cuv. ;  a  species  which  comes  on  land  by 
day,  and  returns  to  the  water  at  night.  Belonius  says,  that  its  motions 
are  so  swift,  that  a  man  cannot  overtake  it :  it  seems  rather  to  fly  than 
run.  Pinnotheres,  Cuv.,  of  two  or  three  species :  sometimes  seen  on  Greek 
coins,  and  apparently  confounded  by  Pliny  with  Hermit  Crabs  :  the 
Paguri  of  Cuvier ;  solely  because  both  these  sorts  seek  refuge  in  the 
shells  of  Mollusks.  Errors  like  this,  which  are  common  in  ancient  writers, 
are  proofs  that  they  possessed  very  slight  practical  knowledge  of  Natural 
History.  —  Wern.  Club. 


148  History  of  Nature.  [Boon  IX. 

mitigated  by  the  warm  Light.  Of  Crabs  there  are  many 
kinds  :  as  Carabi,  Astaci,  Majae,  Paguri,  Heracleotici, 
Leones,  and  others  that  are  less  esteemed.  The  Carabi 
differ  from  other  Crabs  in  the  Tail.  In  Phoenicia  there  is  a 
kind  called  Hippoe,  which  are  so  swifr,  that  it  is  impossible 
to  overtake  them.  Crabs  live  long  :  they  have  eight  Feet, 
all  turned  obliquely  :  the  Female  hath  the  Fore-foot  double, 
the  Male  single.  Moreover,  two  of  their  Arms  have  toothed 
Pincers.  The  upper  Part  of  these  Fore-claws  is  moveable  ; 
the  lower  Part  doth  not  move.  The  right  Ann  in  all  is  the 
larger.  When  they  come  in  Sculls  together,  sometimes 
they  are  not  able  to  pass  the  Mouth  of  the  Pontus  ;  for 
which  Reason  they  return  and  fetch  a  Compass,  so  that  the 
beaten  Way  may  be  seen.  The  least  of  all  these  kind  of 
Crabs  is  called  Pinnotheres1 ;  and  on  this  Account  it  is  the 
most  exposed  to  Injury.  But  it  possesses  the  Wisdom  to 
hide  itself  within  the  Shells  of  empty  Oysters  ;  and  as  it 
groweth  bigger,  it  changes  its  Quarters  to  larger  ones. 
Crabs,  when  they  are  afraid,  will  run  backward  as  fast  as 
they  went  forward.  They  fight  with  one  another,  and  then 
butt  with  their  Horns  like  Rams.  They  are  a  Remedy 
against  the  Stings  of  Serpents.  It  is  reported,  that  while  the 
Sun  is  passing  the  Sign  Cancer,  the  Bodies  of  dead  Crabs 
that  lie  on  the  dry  Land  are  turned  into  Scorpions.  Of  the 
same  Class  are  the  Echini  ;2  which  have  Spines  instead  of 
Feet.  Their  Manner  of  going  is  to  roll  themselves  round; 
and,  therefore,  many  Times  they  are  found  with  their  Spines 
rubbed  off.  Of  the  same  Sort  are  those  which  are  called 
Echinometrse,  which  have  the  longest  Spines  and  the 
smallest  Cases.  Neither  are  they  alt  of  the  same  glassy 
Colour;  for  those  produced  about Torone  are  white,  and  have 

1  Or  Pinnoteres. 

a  Professor  Edward  Forbes  believes  the  species  intended  by  Pliny  to 
be  E.  limdusj  and  Echinometra,  Echinus  esculentus.  But  in  regard  to 
the  latter  there  is  some  doubt.  Ruysch  represents  it  as  having  a  small 
cup  and  long  spines.  One  that  is  elongated,  with  soft,  weak  spines,  is 
Amphidelus  Mediterraneus  ;  and  a  little  species  with  long  spines,  Cidaris 
histrix.  What  Pliny  calls  eggs  are  the  ovaries,  the  only  eatable  parts. — 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  149 

small  Spines.  They  have  all  of  them  five  Eggs,  which  are 
bitter.  Their  Mouths  stand  in  the  Middle  of  their  Bodies, 
directed  towards  the  Earth.  It  is  said  that  they  foretell  the 
raging  of  the  Sea :  for  they  labour  to  gather  Stones,  by  the 
Weight  of  which  to  fix  themselves  from  being  rolled  over: 
for  they  dread  to  have  their  Spines  worn  off  by  being 
tossed  about ;  and  when  the  Sailors  have  seen  this,  they 
immediately  moor  their  Ships  with  many  Anchors. 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 
Of  Cochlea.1 

IN  the  same  Rank  are  the  Cochleae,  both  of  the  Land 
and  Water ;  which  stretch  themselves  out  of  their  Habi- 
tation, and  extend  or  withdraw  two  Horns.  They  have  no 
Eyes  ;  and  therefore  they  feel  the  Way  before  them  with 
the  little  Horns. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

Of  the  Pecten*  the  Murex,  and  other  Kinds  of  Shell-fishes 
(Conches}. 

THE  Pectens  in  the  Sea  are  considered  of  the  same 
Race.  They  also  lie  hid  in  the  Times  of  great  Heats,  and 
also  in  great  Cold.  They  have  Nails,  which  shine  as  if  with 
Fire  in  the  Dark:  even  in  the  Mouth  of  those  that  are 
eating,  them.  Murices  have  a  stronger  Shell;  as  also  the 
Kinds  of  Conches,  in  which  is  a  great  Variety  of  Nature's 

1  Turbinated  shells,  as  snails  and  periwinkles.      It  is  strange  that 
Pliny  should  deny  them  eyes,  when  these  organs  are  so  plainly  situated 
at  the  ends  of  the  peduncles  on  the  land  species,  and  at  their  base  in  those 
of  the  sea. — Wern.  Club. 

2  Pecten :  then  as  now  the  genus  of  Scallops,  but  not  precisely  limited 
to  the  modern  sorts.    Conchas  are  supposed  to  be  the  beautiful  family  of 
Cowries,  Cypraea?,  and  Olivse.  It  is  not  improbable,  also,  that  other  shells, 
having  no  other  natural  connexion  with  these  than  beauty  of  form  or 
colouring,  were  comprised  in  the  same  name ;  and  the  habits  ascribed  to 
the  Veneriae  are  much  like  those  of  a  turbinated   shell,  the  Janthina 
fragilis :  although  it  may  be  a  Cowry,  the  Concha  venerea  of  the  old 
naturalists. — Wern.  Club. 


150  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

Play :  so  many  different  Colours,  such  diversity  of  Forms : 
flat,  hollow,  long,  moon-shaped,  rounded  into  a  Globe,  cut 
into  half  a  Globe,  rising  up  on  the  Back,  smooth,  rough, 
toothed,  ridged,  the  Top  bent  into  a  Wreath,  the  Border 
projecting  into  a  Point,  spread  out  externally,  rolled  back 
within :  then,  again,  with  distinct  Bands,  hairy,  curled, 
channelled,  formed  like  a  Comb,  waved  with  Plaits  like 
Tiles,  having  Cells  like  Network,  spread  out  straight,  or 
oblique  ;  some  are  thickly  compact,  others  stretched  forth, 
or  crooked;  bound  round  into  a  short  Knot,  all  their  Sides 
united  together  :  some  open,  adapted  to  give  a  Clap;  others 
curved  on  themselves,  like  a  Cornet.  Of  all  these  Sorts,  the 
Venerise  swim  on  the  Water,  and  expose  their  hollow  Part 
to  gather  the  Wind  :  by  which  they  sail  upon  the  Surface  of 
the  Ocean.  The  Pectens  skip,  and  fly  out  of  the  Water  ; 
they  also  make  a  Boat  of  themselves. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 
Of  the  Riches  of  the  Sea. 

BUT  why  do  I  recount  these  small  Matters,  when  the 
Degeneracy  of  Manners  and  Luxury  proceedeth  not  from 
any  other  Thing  so  much  as  from  these  Shell-fishes?  For 
now,  of  all  the  Things  in  Nature,  nothing  is  so  destructive  as 
the  Sea,  in  so  many  Fashions,  such  Variety  of  Tables,  such 
different  Tastes  in  Fishes ;  which  bear  a  Price  according  to 
the  Danger  of  obtaining  them. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 
Of  Pearls ;  how  and  where  they  are  found. 

BUT  what  is  this  to  those  who  consider  the  Purpurse,1 
Conchylise,  and  Pearls  ?  It  was,  therefore,  but  a  little  Matter 
to  bring  the  Seas  into  the  Throat,  unless  Men  and  Women 
might  carry  them  about  on  their  Hands,  and  Ears,  Head, 
and  all  over  the  Body.  What  hath  the  Sea  to  do  with 

1  See  Chap,  xxxvi. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  151 

Apparel?  What  the  Waves  and  Billows  with  the  Fleece? 
For  this  Element  naturally  doth  not  receive  us  unless  we  are 
naked.  And  be  it  that  there  is  so  great  a  Fellowship  with 
it  and  our  Bellies ;  what  Fellowship  with  the  Back  ?  But 
we  are  not  contented  to  be  fed  with  so  many  Perils,  we  must 
be  clad  with  them  also.  So  throughout  the  whole  Body, 
that  which  is  obtained  with  the  utmost  Hazard  is  most 
regarded  by  the  Mind  of  Man.  The  principal  and  summit 
of  all  these  Things,  as  regards  the  Price,1  are  Pearls.  The 
Indian  Ocean  sends  the  chief  Supply  :  and  they  are  searched 
for  amongst  those  many  and  terrible  Beasts  which  we  have 
spoken  of  before  ;2  we  must  pass  over  so  many  Seas,  through 
so  great  an  Extent  of  Countries,  where  the  Heat  of  the  Sun 
is  excessive  :  even  the  Indians  themselves  go  to  seek  them 
among  the  Islands,  and  even  then  meet  with  very  few.  The 
greatest  Plenty  is  found  in  Taprobane  and  Toidis,  as  hath 
been  said  in  our  Review  of  the  World  :  and  likewise  about 
Perimula,  a  Promontory  of  India.  But  they  are  praised  as 
the  most  perfect,  which  are  obtained  about  Arabia,  within 
the  Persian  Gulf  of  the  Red  Sea.  The  Origin  and  Mode  of 
breeding  of  this  Shell  differ  not  much  from  that  of  the 
Shells  of  Oysters :  for  when  the  Season  of  the  Year  urgeth 
them,  they  spread  themselves  with  a  Kind  of  Gaping,  and 
then  are  said  to  be  filled  with  a  prolific  Dew,  with  which 
they  grow  pregnant :  and  the  Fruit  of  which  these  Shell- 
fishes are  delivered  are  these  Pearls,  according  to  the  Qua- 
lity of  the  Dew  which  they  received.  For  if  the  Dew  were 
pure  which  went  into  them,  the  Pearls  are  white  and  bril- 
liant ;  if  muddy,  the  Product  likewise  is  foul  :  it  is  pale, 
also,  if  the  Weather  were  threatening  at  the  Time  of  Con- 
ception. Whereby,  no  doubt,  it  is  plain  that  they  have  more 
Affinity  with  the  Sky  than  with  the  Sea :  for,  according  as 
the  Morning  is  fair,  they  are  clear ;  or  foul,  if  that  was 
cloudy.  If  they  have  Time  to  feed  sufficiently,  the  Pearls, 
also,  will  grow  large  ;  but  if  there  be  Lightning,  they  close 

1  At  the  opening  of  the  4th  chapter  of  the  37th  Book,  our  author  tells 
us  that  diamonds  bear  the  highest  price.  —  Wern.  Club. 
3  Vide  Chap.  iii.  —  Wern.  Club. 


152  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

their  Shells,  and,  for  want  of  Nourishment,  diminish  in  size. 
But  if  it  Thunder,  suddenly  they  shut  their  Shells  through 
Fear,  and  produce  those  which  are  called  Physeinata,  a 
Kind  resembling  an  empty  Bladder  blowed  up  with  Wind, 
without  any  Body ;  and  these  are  the  Abortions  of  Shells. 
Those  which  are  sound  are  formed  of  many  Skins,  which 
may  not  improperly  be  thought  the  solid  Substance  of  the 
Body;  which  they  that  are  skilful  cleanse  them  from.  I 
wonder  that  they  so  greatly  rejoice  in  the  Air;  for  with  the 
Sun  they  become  red,  and  lose  their  Whiteness,  just  like  the 
Body  of  a  Man.  Therefore  those  Shells  that  keep  in  the 
main  Sea,  and  lie  deeper  than  the  Sunbeams  can  pierce  to 
them,  have  the  finest  Pearls.  And  even  these  become  yellow 
with  Age,  and  dull  with  Wrinkles;  so  that  the  Lustre  which 
is  so  much  sought  for,  only  continued!  during  their  Youth. 
When  they  are  old,  they  grow  thick,  and  stick  fast  to  the 
Shells,  so  that  they  cannot  be  separated  but  with  a  File. 
These  have  only  one  Face,  and  from  that  Side  are  round  ; 
for  the  back  Part  is  flat ;  for  which  Reason  such  are  called 
Tympania.  We  may  see  them  growing  together  in  these 
Shells  which  serve  to  carry  Ointments.1  There  is  a  Pearl 
that,  is  soft  when  in  the  Water,  but  when  taken  out  it  pre- 
sently hardeneth.  When  this  Shell  perceiveth  the  Hand, 
it  shutteth  itself,  and  so  covereth  over  her  Riches,  being 
aware  that  it  is  for  these  she  is  sought  after.  But  if  the 
Hand  come  in  the  Way  of  the  Shell,  it  will  be  cut  off  by  its 
sharp  Edge  ;  and  the  Punishment  cannot  be  more  just, 
although  she  is  armed  with  other  Means  of  Revenge.  For 
they  keep  for  the  most  Part  about  Rocks  ;  and  if  they  are 
in  deep  Water  they  are  accompanied  with  Sea-dogs.  And 
yet  all  this  will  not  keep  them  away  from  the  Ears  of  the 
Ladies.  Some  say  that,  like  Bees,  every  Company  of  these 
Shells  has  one  Chief,  distinguished  for  his  Size  and  Age, 

1  These  boxes,  made  of  beautifully -coloured  shells,  and  ornamented 
with  rare  pearls,  for  holding  precious  unguents,  will  remind  the  reader  of 
the  alabaster  box  for  the  same  purpose  spoken  of  in  the  Gospels.  From 
what  Pliny  says  of  these  alabaster  boxes,  they  must  have  been  turned 
with  a  lathe.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  153 

like  a  Leader,  and  endued  with  wonderful  Shrewdness,  to 
guard  his  Flock  from  Danger.  These  the  Divers  use  their 
Efforts  to  obtain  ;  for  if  they  are  caught  the  rest  are  scat- 
tered, and  are  easily  taken  in  the  Nets.  When  thus  obtained, 
they  are  put  into  earthen  Pots,  and  covered  with  Salt;  and 
when  all  the  Flesh  is  consumed,  certain  Kernels  within  their 
Bodies,  that  is,  the  Pearls  themselves,  fall  down  to  the  Bot- 
tom. There  is  no  Doubt  but  they  will  become  worn,  and 
change  their  Colour,  if  they  be  not  well  looked  to.  Their 
Reputation  jconsisteth  in  their  brilliant  Whiteness,  Size, 
Roundness,  Smoothness,  and  Weight :  Qualities  not  readily 
found,  insomuch  that  it  is  impossible  to  find  two  perfectly 
fitted  together.  And  hence  it  is  that  our  very  elegant  People 
at  Rome  have  given  them  this  Name  of  Uniones.  For  the 
Greeks  have  no  such  Terms  for  them  :  nor  among  the  Bar- 
barians, who  discovered  them,  is  there  any  other  Name  than 
Margaritas.  In  the  very  Whiteness  itself  there  is  a  great 
Difference  among  them.  That  which  is  found  in  the  Red 
Sea  is  the  clearer  The  Indian  Pearl  resembleth  the  Plates 
of  the  Stone  called  Specularis  ;  but  otherwise  it  excels  all 
others  in  Magnitude.  The  greatest  Commendation  of  their 
Colour  is  to  be  called  Exalumiuatrse.  They  that  are  more 
lengthened  are  commendable  in  their  Degree.  For  those 
that  are  elongated  and  pointed  at  the  Top,  and  grow  into  a 
full  Globe  at  the  Bottom,  in  the  Shape  of  Alabaster  Boxes, 
are  favoured  with  the  Name  of  Elenchi.  The  Ladies  take 
great  Pride  to  have  these  dangling  from  their  Fingers, 
and  two  or  three  pendent  at  their  Ears.  There  is  Luxury 
conveyed  in  the  Names  they  have  devised  for  these,  and 
wanton  Excess  in  what  they  carry  about;  for  when  they 
knock  one  against  another  they  call  them  Crotalia  (Cym- 
bals), as  if  they  delighted  to  hear  the  Sound  of  their  Pearls 
rattling  together.  Now,  also,  poor  People  affect  to  wear 
them ;  and  it  is  a  Saying  among  them,  that  a  fair  Pearl  is  to 
a  Woman  instead  of  a  Lictor.1  Nay,  upon  the  Feet,  also, 

1  That  is,  they  are  a  warrant  of  her  rank,  and  so  make  way  for  her  in 
a  crowd.  —  Wern.  Club. 


154  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

they  place  them,  not  on  the  upper  Portion  of  their  Slippers, 
but  also  over  all  their  Sandals.  For  it  is  not  enough  to  carry 
Pearls  about  with  them,  but  they  must  tread  upon  them,  and 
even  walk  among  Pearls. 

Pearls  were  accustomed  to  be  found  in  our  Seas,  and 
more  abundantly  about  the  Thracian  Bosphorus  ;  but  they 
were  small  and  ruddy  in  the  Shells,  which  they  call  Myse  :l 
In  Acarnania  the  Shell  called  Pinna1  produceth  them. 
Whereby  it  appeareth  that  they  are  bred  in  more  than  one 
Sort  of  Concha.  King  Juba,  also,  hath  recorded,  that  on 
the  Arabian  Coasts  there  is  a  Kind  of  Shell  like  a  notched 
Pecten,  but  rough,  something  like  the  Echinus ;  and  this 
beareth  Pearls  in  the  Flesh  like  a  Hailstone.  But  no  such 
Shells  are  brought  to  us.  Neither  in  Acarnania  are  any 
found  of  much  Reputation,  being  of  irregular  Form,  and  of 
a  Marble  Colour.  There  are  better  about  Actium,  but  they 
are  small ;  and  so  are  they  which  are  taken  on  the  Sea 
Coasts  of  Mauritania.  Alexander  Polyhistor  and  Sudines 
are  of  Opinion  that  they  will  show  Signs  of  Age,  and  lose 
their  Colour.  That  they  are  solid  in  their  Substance,  is 
evident  by  this,  that  with  no  Fall  will  they  break.  But  they 
are  not  always  found  in  the  Middle  of  the  Flesh,  but  some- 
times in  one  Place,  and  sometimes  in  another.  I  have  seen 
them  at  the  very  Edges,  as  if  they  were  going  out  of  the 
Shell ;  and  in  some  four,  in  others  five  together.  Unto  this 
Day  few  have  been  known  to  weigh  above  half  an  Ounce 
and  a  Scruple.  In  Britain  it  is  certain  that  some  are  pro- 
duced, but  they  are  small  and  dim,  of  Colour  :  for  Divus 
Julius  wished  it  to  be  understood  that  the  Breastplate  which 
he  dedicated  to  Venus  Genetrix  in  her  Temple,  was  made  of 
British  Pearls. 

I  myself  have  seen  Lollia  Paulina,  who  was  the  Wife  of 
the  Prince  Caius,  not  when  she  was  dressed  in  State,  or  for 

1  Myse :  Pinna : — gaping  Bivalves,  still  known  to  science  by  the  same 
names.  The  shell  here  compared  to  an  Echinus  may  be  Pecten  echinatus; 
but  there  are  several  Bivalves  with  spines  projecting  from  their  surface. 
The  Editor  has  obtained  a  jet  black  and  perfectly  round  pearl  from  an 
English  Pinna:  P.  ingens.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  155 

some  great  Solemnity,  but  only  to  go  to  a  betrothing  Supper 
of  People  of  ordinary  Rank ;  at  which  Time  she  was  covered 
all  over  with  Emeralds  and  Pearls,  shining  as  they  were 
arranged  in  alternate  Rows;  over  all  her  Head,  the  Wreaths 
of  her  Hair,  her  Ears,  Neck,  Hands,  and  Fingers.  The 
Value  of  these  Ornaments  she  rated  at  400  hundred  thousand 
Sestertii  ;l  and  offered  to  prove  it  immediately  by  her  Books 
of  Accounts.  Yet  these  Jewels  were  not  the  Gifts  of  the 
prodigal  Prince,  but  the  Riches  of  her  own  Ancestors,  that 
is,  the  Product  of  the  Spoiling  of  the  Provinces.  This  is 
the  Issue  of  those  Depredations  ;  this  it  was  for  which 
M.  Lollius  was  reproached  through  all  the  East  for  receiving 
Presents  from  the  Kings  ;  and  being  forbidden  the  Friend- 
ship of  C.  Ccesar,  Son  of  Augustus,  he  drank  Poison,  that 
his  Niece  should  be  gazed  at  by  Lamp-light  as  she  was 
covered  with  the  Value  of  Jewels  of  400  hundred  thousand 
Sestertii. 

On  the  other  Hand,  let  any  Man  reckon  how  much 
Curius  or  Fabricius  bore  in  their  Triumphs ;  let  him  imagine 
what  their  Shows  were:  and  on  the  other  Side,  make  an 
Estimate  of  Lollia,  one  only  Woman,  allied  to  the  Emperor, 
reclining ;  would  not  he  wish  rather  that  they  had  been 
pulled  out  of  their  Chariots  than  to  have  conquered  only  for 
this  ?  And  yet  this  is  not  the  greatest  Example  of  excessive 
Prodigality. 

There  were  two  Pearls,  the  very  largest  that  ever  were 
known  in  any  Age,  and  they  were  possessed  by  Cleopatra, 
the  last  Queen  of  Egypt ;  having  descended  to  her  by  means 
of  the  Kings  of  the  East.  When  Antony  had  feasted  her 
Day  by  Day  very  sumptuously,  and  under  the  Influence, 
at  one  Time,  of  Pride  and  petulant  Disdain,  as  a  Royal 
Harlot,  after  undervaluing  his  Expense  and  Provision,  he 
demanded  how  it  was  possible  to  go  beyond  this  Magni- 
ficence :  she  replied,  that  she  would  consume,  in  one  Supper, 
100  hundred  thousand  Sestertii.2  Antony  desired  to  learn 
how  that  could  be  possible,  but  he  thought  it  was  not. 

1  Forty,  millions.  3  Ten  millions. 


1 56  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX . 

Wagers  were,  therefore,  laid  ;  and  on  the  following  Day, 
when  the  Decision  was  to  be  made  (for  that  a  Day  might 
not  be  lost,  Antony  appointed  the  next  succeeding  one),  she 
provided  a  Supper,  which  was,  on  the  whole,  sumptuous ; 
but  Antony  laughed  at  it,  and  required  to  see  an  Account  of 
the  Particulars.  But  she  said,  that  what  had  been  served  up 
already  was  but  the  Over-measure,  and  affirmed  still,  that 
she  would  in  that  Supper  make  up  the  full  Sum ;  and  her- 
self alone  consume  in  this  Supper  600  huudred  thousand 
Sestertii.1  She  then  commanded  the  second  Table  to  be 
brought  in.  As  soon  as  the  Order  was  given,  the  Attendants 
placed  before  her  one  only  Vessel  of  Vinegar,2  the  Strength 
and  Sharpness  of  which  wasted  and  dissolved  the  Pearls. 
Now  she  wore  at  her  Ears  that  most  remarkable  and  truly 
singular  Work  of  Nature.  Therefore,  as  Antony  waited  to 
see  what  she  was  going  to  do,  she  took  one  of  them  from 
her  Ear,  steeped  it  in  the  Vinegar,  and  when  it  was  liquefied, 
drank  it.  As  she  was  about  to  do  the  like  by  the  other, 
L.  Plancius,  the  Judge  of  that  Wager,  laid  hold  upon  it 
with  his  Hand,  and  pronounced  that  Antony  had  lost  the 
Wager :  whereat  the  Man  became  very  angry.  The  Fame 
of  this  Pearl  may  go  with  its  Fellow  ;  for  after  this  Queen, 
the  Winner  of  so  great  a  Wager,  was  taken  Prisoner,  the 
other  Pearl  was  cut  in  two,  that  the  half  of  their  Supper 
might  hang  at  the  Ears  of  Venus,  in  the  Pantheon,  at 
Rome.  Still,  however,  these  shall  not  bear  away  the  Palm  in 

1  Sixty  millions. 

2  Cleopatra  must  have  employed  a  stronger  vinegar  than  that  which 
we  now  use  for  our  tables,  as  the  pearls,  on  account  of  their  hardness  and 
their  natural  enamel,  cannot  be  easily  dissolved  by  a  weak  acid.   Nature  has 
secured  the  teeth  of  animals  against  the  effect  of  acids,  by  an  enamel 
covering  of  the  like  kind  ;  but  if  this  enamel  happen  to  be  injured  only 
in  one  small  place,  the  teeth  soon  spoil  and  rot.     Cleopatra,  perhaps, 
broke  and  pounded  the  pearls ;  and  it  is  probable  that  she  afterwards 
diluted  the  vinegar  with  water,  that  she   might  be  able  to  drink  it ; 
though  it  is  the  nature  of  the  basis  or  calx  to  neutralise  the  acid,  and  so 
render  it  imperceptible  to  the  tongue. — See  BECKMAN'S  Hist,  of  Inventions, 
vol.  ii.  p.  1. 

The  pearl  which  Cleopatra  swallowed  is  said  to  have  been  worth 
80,729*.  3s.  4d.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  157 

this,  but  shall  be  deprived  of  the  Glory  of  Luxury.  For 
before  this,  Ctodius,  the  Son  of  JEsop?  the  Tragedian,  being 
left  by  him  Heir  to  very  great  Wealth,  practised  the  same 
with  Pearls  of  great  Price ;  so  that  Antony  needed  not  to  be 
over-proud  of  his  Triumvirate,  being  almost  equalled  by  a 
Stage-player ;  and  that,  too,  when  he  was  not  urged  to  it  by 
a  Wager,  which  was  much  more  like  a  King.  His  Experi- 
ment was  the  Glory  of  the  Palate,  for  he  wanted  to  try 
what  Taste  Pearls  had ;  and  as  they  pleased  him  wonder- 
fully, because  he  would  not  be  the  only  one  who  knew  the 
Taste,  he  gave  to  every  Guest  at  his  Table  a  Pearl  to  sup  up 
in  like  Mariner. 

Fenestdla  writeth,  that  after  Alexandria  was  reduced  to 
Subjection,  Pearls  came  into  frequent  and  indiscriminate  use 
at  Rome ;  but  that  about  the  Time  of  Sylla  they  began  first; 
and  those  were  but  small  ones,  and  mean.  But  this  is  a  great 
Error.  For  JElius  Stilo  reporteth,  that  in  the  Time  of  the 
War  with  Jugurtha,  the  great  Pearls,  for  the  most  Part,  had 
the  Name  of  Uniones  imposed  on  them. 

And  this  is  almost  a  perpetual  Possession  :  it  fulloweth 
the  Heir.  When  sold,  they  pass  with  Warranty,  as  any 
Estate  would  do.* 

Purpurae  and  Conchylia  are  found  thrown  about  on  every 
Coast ;  and  yet  to  them  the  same  Mother  Luxury  hath 
assigned  almost  an  equal  Value  with  Pearls. 

1  Horace,  Lib.  iii.  Sat.  3  :— 

"  An  actor's  son  dissolved  a  wealthy  pearl 
(The  precious  ear-ring  of  his  favourite  girl), 
In  vinegar,  and  thus  luxurious  quaffed 
A  thousand  solid  talents  at  a  draught. 
Had  he  not  equally  his  wisdom  shown, 
Into  the  sink  or  river  were  it  thrown  ?  " — FRANCIS. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


158  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 
The  Nature  of  the  Purpura*  and  the  Murex. 

PURPURJE,  for  the  most  Part,  live  seven  Years.  They 
lie  hid  for  thirty  Days  about  the  rising  of  the  Dog  Star,  like 
the  Murices.  They  collect  together  in  the  Spring,  and  with 
rubbing  one  against  another  they  spit  a  clammy  Substance, 
in  the  Manner  of  Wax.  The  Murices  do  the  like.  But  that 
Bloom  which  is  so  much  in  request  for  dyeing  Garments  the 
Purpurse  have  in  the  midst  of  their  Throat.  Here  is  placed 
a  white  Vein,  containing  a  very  little  Fluid ;  from  whence 
is  derived  that  precious  and  bright  Colour  of  deep  red 
(Nigrantis)  Roses.  The  Rest  of  the  Body  yieldeth  Nothing. 
Fishermen  endeavour  to  take  them  alive,  for  when  they  die 
they  cast  up  that  Juice  with  their  Life.  Now  the  Tyrians, 
when  they  obtain  any  great  Purpurse,  remove  the  Shell  from 
the  Flesh  ;  but  the  lesser,  they  break  in  a  Mill,  and  so  at 
last  collect  that  Humour.  This  is  the  best  in  Asia  ;  but  in 
Africa,  that  in  the  (Island)  Meninx,  and  the  Coast  of  the 
Ocean  by  Getulia  ;  and  in  Europe,  that  o^f  Laconica.  It  is 
for  this  the  Roman  Fasces  and  Axes  make  Way  ;  this  is  it 
that  stands  for  the  Majesty  of  the  Childhood;  this  maketh 
the  Distinction  between  the  Senate  and  a  Knight ;  this  is 
summoned  when  they  offer  Sacrifice  to  pacify  the  Gods :  this 
giveth  a  Lustre  to  every  Garment ;  and  in  their  triumphal 
Procession  it  is  interlaced  with  the  Gold.  It  is  thus  that  the 
Madness  after  the  Purpurse  is  to  be  excused.  But  how 
should  the  Conchylia  be  so  highly  prized?  What  strong 
Smell  in  the  rank  Colour,  so  harsh  a  Colour  in  the  blue, 
and  resembling  rather  the  angry  Sea?  But  to  come  to  the 
particular  Description.  The  Purpura  hath  a  Tongue  the 
length  of  a  Finger,  so  sharp  and  hard  at  the  End  that  it 
pierces  into  other  Shell-fishes,  and  feeds  on  them.  In  fresh 

1  This  name  included  more  than  one  species ;  but  more  particularly  it 
is  the  Murex  trunculus,  Guv.  Conchylia :  a  name  for  Bivalve  shells  in 
general.  The  Buccinum  may  be  our  common  Whelk.  — Wern.  Clul. 


BOOK  I X .]  History  of  Nature.  1 59 

Water  they  die,  and  so  also  if  they  are  plunged  into  a  River; 
otherwise,  after  they  are  taken,  they  will  continue  alive  fifty 
Days  in  their  own  slimy  Humour.  All  Shell-fish  grow  very 
rapidly,  but  Purpurse  remarkably  so ;  for  in  one  Year  they 
come  to  their  full  Size.  Now  if  I  should  proceed  no  further, 
Luxury  would  think  itself  defrauded,  and  condemn  me  for 
Negligence.  Therefore  we  will  follow  the  Subject  into  the 
Shops,  that  as  every  Man  for  the  Necessity  of  this  Life 
knoweth  the  Price  of  Victuals,  all  who  take  Pleasure  in 
these  Things  may  be  well  versed  in  the  Costs  of  this  their 
Existence.  These  Shell-fishes  that  serve  for  purple  Colours, 
and  the  Conchylia,  all  consist  of  one  Material :  the  Differ- 
ence is  only  in  the  mixing.  They  are  of  two  principal  Sorts. 
The  Buccinum  is  a  smaller  Shell,  resembling  that  Horn  with 
which  Sound  is  uttered  ;  and  from  this  it  took  its  Name. 
The  round  Orifice  is  cut  in  at  the  Edges.  The  other  is 
named  Purpura,  protrudes  a  long  Snout  like  a  Channel,  and 
within  the  Side  of  this  Channel  it  is  tubulated,  to  allow  a 
Passage  for  the  Tongue.  Besides  this  the  Shell  is  studded  as 
far  as  to  the  Wreathe  with  sharp  Spines,  in  about  seven 
Rows,  placed  in  a  Circle;  which  the  Buccinum  doth  not 
possess.  But  so  many  Circles  as  each  of  them  has,  so 
many  Years  old  they  are.  The  Buccinum  fastens  to  Nothing 
besides  Rocks,  and  therefore  is  gathered  about  rough 
Places. 

CHAPTER  XXXVII. 
How  many  Sorts  there  are. 

PuRPUR2E  have  another  Name,  and  are  called  Pelagiae. 
There  are  many  Sorts  of  them,  which  differ  either  in  their 
Situation  or  Food.  The  first  is  the  Lutense,  nourished  by 
rotten  Mud  :  the  Algense,  the  worst  of  all,  feeding  upon  Sea- 
weeds close  to  the  Shore ;  and  the  Taeniens^,  which  is  better 
than  either  of  the  former,  and  is  gathered  about  the  Borders 
of  the  Sea  called  Tenci.  And  yet  this  Kind  yieideth  only  a 
light  and  diluted  Colour.  There  are  also  some  termed  Cal- 
culosae,  from  the  Sea-gravel,  which  is  wonderfully  good  for 


160  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

Conchylia.  And  by  far  the  best,  the  Purpurae  dialutense, 
that  is,  a  Kind  which  is  fed  by  various  Kinds  of  Soil.  Now 
these  Purpurae  are  taken  with  very  small  Snares,  like  Nets, 
thrown  into  deep  Water.  Within  these,  for  a  Bait,  are  some 
Shells,  that  will  shut,  and  are  ready  to  snap,  as  we  may 
see  the  Mituli.  These,  when  half  dead,  are  put  back  into 
the  Sea,  when  reviving  and  gaping  for  Water,  the  Purpurae 
eagerly  seek  for  them  with  their  pointed  Tongues,  which 
they  thrust  out  and  so  annoy  them  :  but  the  others,  feeling 
themselves  pricked,  presently  shut  their  Shells  together,  and 
compress  those  that  bite  them.  Thus  the  Purpurae,  through 
their  Greediness,  are  taken,  hanging  by  their  Tongues. 

CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 
The  Fishing -time  for  Pur  puree. 

THE  best  Time  to  take  Purpurae  is  after  the  Dog-Star  is 
risen,  or  before  the  Spring.  For,  when  they  have  borne 
Young  their  Juice  is  waterish.  But  the  Shops  of  the 
Dyers  do  not  know  this,  although  their  highest  Skill  turns 
on  this  Point.  When  they  are  caught  they  extract  the 
Vein  before-mentioned  ;  and  they  lay  it  in  the  necessary 
Salt,  in  the  Proportion  of  a  Pint  and  half  (of  Salt)  to  every 
Hundred-weight.  It  is  right  to  soak  it  for  about  three  Days, 
for  the  newer  the  Colour  is,  so  much  is  it  stronger.  They 
heat  it  in  Lead,  and  to  every  Amphora  of  Water1  they  put 
one  hundred  and  fifty  Pounds  of  the  Colour  so  prepared. 
They  boil  it  with  a  gentle  Fire,  and  therefore  the  Pipe  must 
lead  a  good  WTay  off  from  the  Furnace.  During  this  Time,  the 
Flesh  being  now  and  then  skimmed  off  (for  some  of  this  can- 
not be  prevented  from  sticking  to  the  Veins),  for  the  most 
Part  about  the  tenth  Day  the  Kettle  is  sufficiently  pre- 
pared ;  and  to  make  Trial  of  it,  they  dip  into  it  a  Fleece  of 
Wool  that  has  been  washed  out  of  one  Water  into  another  : 
and  until  their  Wish  is  satisfied,  they  persist  in  trying  the 
Liquor.  The  red  Colour  is  worse  than  that  which  is  dark. 

1  See  Chap,  xxxix.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  161 

The  Wool  absorbs  the  Colour  in  five  Hours :  then  they  card 
it,  and  put  it  in  again,  until  it  hath  drunk  up  all  the  colour- 
ing Matter.  The  Buccinum  maketh  no  good  Colour  of  itself; 
for  it  loses  the  Dye  again.  And,  therefore,  usually  they  join 
to  it  the  Pelagium  ;  which,  to  its  too  great  Blackness,  giveth 
that  Depth  and  Brightness  which  is  sought  for  in  Cloth  dyed 
in  Grain.  Thus  by  mixing  the  Force  of  both  they  raise  one 
another,  or  bind  each  other  more  closely.  The  amount  of 
the  Preparation  to  each  Pound  of  Wool  is  two  hundred  of 
the  Buccinum  to  a  hundred  and  eleven  Pelagian  Purpurse. 
In  this  Manner  is  made  that  rich  Amethyst  Colour.  But  the 
Tyrians  thoroughly  dye  the  Wool  in  the  Furnace  of  the 
Pelagian  Purpurae  only,  while  not  yet  thoroughly  prepared, 
but  still  green  ;  and  afterwards  they  change  it  into  another, 
where  the  Buccinum  has  been  boiled.  It  is  most  highly 
commended  when  it  is  as  deep  a  red  as  congealed  Blood ; 
blackish  at  the  first  Sight,  but  when  viewed  between  you 
and  the  Light,  it  shows  a  shining  Lustre.  And  hereupon  it 
is  that  Homer  calleth  Blood  Purple. 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 
When  they  began  at  Rome  to  wear  Purple. 

I  SEE  that  Purple  hath  been  always  used  in  Rome  ;  but 
Romulus  wore  it  in  his  royal  Robe  (only).  It  is  well  known 
that  Tullus  Hostilius  was  the  first  of  the  Kings  who,  after  he 
had  subdued  the  Hetruscans,  put  on  the  Toga  Pretexta  and 
the  Latus  Clavus.  JVepos  Cornelius,  who  died  under  the 
Reign  of  Divus  Augustus,  says:  When  I  was  a  young  Man, 
the  Violet  Purple  was  in  great  Request,  and  a  Pound  of  it 
was  sold  for  a  hundred  Denarii  i1  and  not  long  after  the 
Tarentine  red  Purple.  After  this  came  the  double-dyed 
Tyrian  Purple,  which  could  not  be  bought  for  a  thousand 
Pounds  of  Denarii.2  P.  Lentulus  Spinter,  in  his  Curile 
^Edileship,  is  reproached  for  having  first  worn  it  in  his  Robe. 
But  now  (says  Nepos},  who  does  not  form  the  Hangings  of 

1  3  lib.  2  shil.  6d.  sterl.  *  31  lib.  5  shil. 

VOL.  III.  M 


162  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  IX. 

his  Parlour  with  Purple  ?  Spinier  was  ^Edile  in  the  seven 
hundredth  Year  after  the  Foundation  of  the  City,  when  Cicero 
was  Consul.  This  Purple  was  then  called  Dibapha,  which 
was  twice  dyed  ;  as  being  of  magnificent  Expense ;  whereas 
now  almost  all  the  genteel  Purple  Cloths  are  thus  dyed.  In 
the  Cloths  dyed  with  the  Conchylia  the  other  Things  are 
the  same,  except  that  there  is  no  Buccinum.  Moreover,  the 
Broth  is  tempered  with  Water  instead  of  the  Excrement  of 
a  Man's  Drink;  and  only  a  half  of  the  Preparations  is 
added.  And  thus  is  made  that  pale  Tint  so  highly  com- 
mended, as  being  deprived  of  the  full  Colour ;  and  it  is  so 
much  the  more  diluted,  as  the  Wool  has  been  suffered  to 
drink  it  up. 

CHAPTER  XL. 
The  Prices  of  these  Cloths. 

THE  Prices  are  lower,  according  to  the  Abundance  of  the 
dyeing  Material  found  on  the  Coast.  But  it  was  never  known 
in  any  Place  that  a  Pound  of  the  Pelagian  (Colour)  has  ex- 
ceeded five  hundred  Sesterces  : t  nor  a  Pound  of  the  Buc- 
cinum (Purple)  cost  above  one  hundred  :  which  they  who 
sell  these  Things  raise  to  an  extravagant  Price.  But  this  is 
far  from  being  the  End  ;  and  Men  have  a  Delight  to  trifle 
with  the  Expense :  to  deceive  by  mixing  over  again,  and  so 
double  the  Produce,  adulterating  even  the  Adulterations  of 
Nature;  as  to  stain  the  Tortoise,  to  mix  Silver  with  the  Gold, 
and  so  form  Electrum  :  and  by  adding  Brass  to  these,  to 
make  the  Corinthian  Metal. 

CHAPTER  XLI. 

The  Manner  of  Dyeing  the  Amethystine  Colour,  Scarlet,  and 
colour  Hysginum. 

IT  is  not  enough  to  have  robbed  the  precious  Stone  Ame- 
thyst of  its  Name,  but  when  they  had  it  perfect,  they  must 

1  3  lib.  18  shil.  Id.  ob. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  163 

have  it  drunk1  again  with  the  Tyrian  Dye,  that  they  might 
have*  it  degraded  with  a  Name  compounded  of  both  (Tyri- 
amethystus),  correspondent  to  their  two-fold  Luxury.  Also, 
after  they  have  accomplished  the  (Colour)  Conchylium,  they 
think  it  better  prepared  to  pass  into  the  Tyrian.  It  should 
seem  that  these  double  Dyes  came  first  from  the  after- 
thought of  the  Workman,  when  he  employed  his  Skill  to 
change  what  he  had  done  and  disliked.  And  from  this  is 
come  a  Consideration,  and  a  Desire  is  derived  from  a  Fault 
by  those  portentous  Contrivances ;  and  the  twofold  Way  of 
Luxury  is  displayed,  by  laying  one  Colour  upon  another, 
with  great  Labour,  so  as  to  render  it  what  is  called  more 
pleasant  and  delicate.  Nay,  they  also  mix  the  Dye  of  Land- 
colours  ;  for  what  is  already  dyed  with  the  Coccus,  they  dye 
again  in  the  Tyrian  Purple,  to  make  the  Hysginum. 

The  Coccus  is  a  red  Grain  that  cometh  from  Galatia,  as 
we  shall  show  in  our  Account  of  (Plants)  of  the  Land  ;  or 
else  about  Emerita,  in  Lusitania  (Portugal),  and  that,  of  all 
other,  is  most  esteemed.  But  to  sum  up  in  one  Word  these 
noble  Colours,  note  this,  that  when  this  Grain  is  one  Year 
old,  it  maketh  but  a  weak  Tincture ;  but  after  four  Years, 
the  Strength  of  it  is  gone.  So  that,  neither  young  nor  old,  is 
it  of  any  great  Strength.  Thus  I  have  sufficiently  treated  of 
those  Means  which  both  Men  and  Women  think  best  fitted 
to  set  themselves  out  in  the  best  Manner. 

CHAPTER  XLII. 

Of  the  Pinna,  and  the  Pinnoter :  and  the  Perception  of 
Fishes. 

THE  Pinna2  is  also  of  the  Class  of  Shell-fishes.  It  is  pro- 
duced in  muddy  Places,  always  standing  nearly  upright;  but 
never  without  a  Companion,  which  they  call  Pinnoteres,  or, 
according  to  some,  Pinnophylax.3  This  is  a  little  Shrimp,  or 

'  Alluding  to  the  word  "  Amethyst,"  which  resisteth  drunkenness. — 
Holland. 

3  Pinna  ingens  and  P.  rotundata,  LINN.  — Wern.  Club. 
3  Pinnotheres  veterum  and  P.  pisum.  —  Wern.  Club. 


164  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

in  some  Places  a  Crab,  an  Attendant  upon  him  for  his  Vic- 
tuals. The  Pinna  gapes  abroad,  and  showeth  to  the  rittle 
Fishes  her  Body  within,  which  has  no  power  of  seeing.  They 
make  a  close  Attack  on  it;  and  as  their  Boldness  increases 
with  their  Impunity,  they  enter  and  fill  the  Shell.  The  Sen- 
tinel discerns  this  Opportunity,  and  giveth  Token  of  it  by  a 
gentle  Pinch.  She  shuts  her  Mouth,  and  crusheth  whatever 
is  within ;  and  then  she  delivers  its  proper  Share  to  her 
Companion.1  This  Fact  causes  me  to  be  so  much  the  more 
surprised,  that  there  are  some  who  are  of  Opinion  that 
Creatures  of  the  Water  have  no  Understanding.  The  Tor- 
pedo knoweth  her  own  Power,  while  she  herself  is  not  be- 
numbed. She  lieth  covered  over  and  hidden  in  the  Mud, 
ready  to  catch  those  Fishes  which,  as  they  unsuspiciously 
swim  over  her,  she  strikes  with  Numbness.  There  is  no 
Meat  that  in  Tenderness  is  to  be  preferred  to  the  Liver  of 
this  Fish.  Nor  is  the  Craftiness  of  the  Rana  less  than  this  ; 
which  is  the  same  that  is  called  the  Fisher  in  the  Sea.  She 
lifts  up  the  Horns  which  stand  erect  a  little  before  the  Eyes, 
so  as  to  project  above  the  Mud  which  she  hath  stirred  up  ; 
and  so  attracts  the  little  Fishes  which  gather  about  her, 
until  they  come  so  near  as  to  enable  her  to  seize  them.  In  a 
similar  Manner  the  Squatina  and  Rhombus  lie  concealed, 
and  stretch  out  their  Fins,  which  they  move  about,  as  if  they 
were  some  little  Worms;  and  the  Fish  called  Raia  does  the 
same.  For  the  Pastinaca  lieth  in  wait  like  a  Thief  in  a 
Corner,  ready  to  pierce  the  Fishes  that  pass  by  with  a  sharp 
Spine,  which  is  his  Dart.  It  is  a  Proof  of  the  Craftiness  of 
this  Fish,  that  whilst  they  are  the  most  sluggish  of  Fishes, 
they  are  found  to  have  in  their  Belly  the  Mugil,  which  is 
the  swiftest  of  all  Fishes. 

1  "  The  pinna  and  the  crab  together  dwell, 
For  mutual  succour,  in  one  common  shell. 
They  both  to  gain  a  livelihood  combine  ; 
That  takes  the  prey,  when  this  has  given  the  sign. 
From  hence  this  crab,  above  his  comrade  fam'd, 
By  ancient  Greeks  was  pinnatores  nam'd." 

OPPIAN  :  Halicut,  lib.ii.  1. 186,  et  seq.— Wern.  Chib. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  165 

CHAPTER  XLIII. 
Of  the  Scolopendrce,  Vulpes,  and  the  Glanis. 

THE  Scolopendrae1  are  like  those  of  the  Land  which  they 
call  Centipedes.  Wlien  this  Creature  hath  swallowed  an 
Hook,  it  vomits  up  its  Entrails,  until  it  hath  delivered  itself 
of  the  Hook,  and  then  it  suppeth  them  in  again.  But  the 
Vulpes  marinse,2  in  the  like  Danger,  swallow  down  more 
and  more  of  the  Line,  until  it  conies  to  the  weakest  Part, 
which  it  can  easily  gnaw  asunder.  The  Fish  called  Glanis 
is  more  cautious ;  it  bites  the  Back  of  the  Hook,  and  does 
not  devour  the  Bait,  but  nibbles  it  away. 

CHAPTER  XLIV. 
Of  the  Fish  called  Aries. 

THE  Ram3  attacks  like  a  Robber ;  for  sometimes  it  hides 
itself  under  the  Shade  of  large  Ships  in  the  salt  Sea, 
where  it  waiteth  for  any  Man  whom  the  Pleasure  of  Swim- 
ming may  invite  within  its  Reach ;  at  other  Times  it 
lifteth  its  Head  above  Water,  to  spy  any  small  Fishing- 
boats,  arid  then  it  slily  swimmeth  close  to  them,  and 
sinketh  them. 

CHAPTER  XLV. 

Of  those  that  have  a  third  Nature,  and  are  neither  Animals 
nor  Plants :  also  of  Urticce  and  Sponges. 

I  TRULY  am  of  Opinion,  that  those  which  are  neither 
Animals  nor  Plants,  but  possess  a  third  Nature,  or  are  com- 

1  The  creatures  referred  to  appear  to  be  Holothuriae,  and  chiefly  of 
the  class  Cucumariae ;  which,  when  near  death,  eject  their  entrails,  but 
without  the  power  of  re -absorbing  them.  But  the  name  Scolopendras 
more  properly  applies  to  marine  worms  :  Nereides.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Squalus  vulpes,  Lnw.—Carcharias  vulpus,  Cuv.  The  Sea  Fox,  or 
Thrasher.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  See  Chap.  v.  p.  108.  —  Wern.  Club. 


166  History  of  Nature.  [Boox  IX. 

pounded  of  both  (I  mean  Urticae1  and  Sponges2),  have  yet  a 
Kind  of  Sense  in  them.  Urticae  wander  about  by  Night,  and 
likewise  by  Night  change  their  (Colour).  Their  Nature  is 
formed  of  fleshy  Leafage,  and  on  Flesh  they  feed.  Their 
Quality  is  to  raise  an  itching  Smart,  like  the  Land  Nettle. 
Its  Manner  is  to  gather  in  its  Body  exceedingly  close  and 
stiff;  and  when  a  little  Fish  swimmeth  before  it,  it 
spreadeth  abroad  its  Branches,  and  thus  claspeth  and  de- 
voureth  it.  At  other  Times,  as  if  it  were  withered,  suffering 
itself  to  be  tossed  to  and  fro  among  the  Weeds,  with  the 
Waves  of  the  Sea,  if  any  Fishes  come  in  contact  with  it, 
it  seizes  them,  as  they  scratch  the  Itching  they  feel  by  rub- 
bing themselves  against  the  Rocks.  By  Night  it  seeks  for 
Pectens  and  Echini.  When  it  feeleth  one's  Hand  to  touch 
it,  it  changeth  Colour,  and  contracteth  itself.  When  touched, 
it  discharges  something  that  causes  an  Itching ;  and  if  a 
little  Interval  is  permitted  after  it  is  touched,  it  becomes 
concealed.  It  is  thought  that  its  Mouth  lieth  in  the  Root, 
and  that  it  voideth  its  Excrements  through  a  small  Pipe 
above. 

Of  Sponges  we  find  three  Sorts:  the  first  thick,  exceeding 
hard,  and  rough ;  and  this  is  called  Tragos :  a  second,  not  so 
thick,  arid  somewhat  softer;  and  that  is  named  Manon  :  the 
third  is  fine  and  compact,  wherewith  they  make  Rubbers  (to 
cleanse  with),  and  this  is  termed  Achilleum.  They  grow  all 
upon  Rocks,  and  are  fed  with  Shell-fish,  Fish,  and  Mud. 
That  they  possess  Understanding  appeareth  from  this,  that 
when  they  feel  that  one  would  pluck  them  away,  they  draw 
in,  so  as  with  the  greater  Difficulty  to  be  pulled  from  the 
Rock.  They  do  the  like  when  they  are  beaten  with  the 

1  Actineae,  a  class  of  naked  Zoophytes.     Macrobius,  in  his  account  of 
the  supper  given  by  Lentulus,  on  the  occasion  of  his  being  inaugurated 
Flamen  martialis,  enumerates  Urtica?  among  the  dishes.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Pliny's  opinion,  that  Sponges  are  living  animals,  is  still  held  by 
some  eminent  naturalists.     Others  contend  that  they  are  vegetable  ;  and 
their  natural  station  seems  to  be  on  that  debateable  line  where  each  of 
these  great  kingdoms  verges  on  the  other  :  some  really  animal  structures 
appearing  disguised  in  vegetable  forms,  —  and  vegetables  with   animal 
appearances.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  167 

Waves.  That  they  live  upon  some  Food  is  manifest  by  the 
little  Shell-fishes  which  are  found  within  them.  And  some 
say,  that  about  Torone  they  take  Food  after  they  have  been 
plucked  from  the  Rocks ;  and  that  from  the  Roots  which 
are  left  behind,  they  grow  again.  Also,  upon  those  Rocks 
(from  whence  they  are  pulled),  there  is  to  be  seen  some 
Appearance  of  Blood  sticking ;  and  especially  in  those  of 
Africa,  which  breed  among  the  Syrtes.  The  Manse  become 
very  large,  and  also  the  softest,  about  Lycia.  But  they  are 
more  soft  when  they  grow  in  the  very  deep  Water,  out  of  the 
Influence  of  Wind.  They  are  rough  in  the  Hellespont;  and 
dense  about  (the  Cape)  Malea.  In  Places  exposed  to  the 
Sun  they  will  putrify ;  and  therefore  the  best  are  in  deep 
Gullies.  They  are  of  the  same  blackish  Colour  when  they 
live,  as  when  full  of  Moisture.  They  adhere  to  Rocks  nei- 
ther by  any  one  Part,  nor  yet  all  over ;  for  there  are  dispersed 
certain  hollow  Pipes,  four  or  five  commonly,  by  which  they 
are  supposed  to  receive  their  Food.  There  are  more  (of  these 
Pipes),  but  above  they  are  grown  together.  A  certain  thin 
Skin  may  be  perceived  to  be  at  their  Roots.  It  is  known 
that  they  live  long.  The  worst  Kind  of  them  all  are  those 
called  Aplysiae,  because  they  cannot  be  made  clean ;  in  them 
the  Pipes  are  large ;  and  they  are  throughout  thick  and 
massy. 

CHAPTER  XLVI. 
Of  the  Caniculus  marinus.1 

THE  Divers  are  annoyed  very  much  with  a  great  Number 
of  Caniculi  marini  that  come  about  them,  and  put  them  in 
great  Danger.  And  they  say,  that  these  Fishes  have  a  cer- 
tain Cloud  growing  thick  over  their  Heads,  like  that  of  the 
flat  Fishes,  which  presseth  them,  and  hindereth  them  from 
retiring  backward  ;  on  which  Account  the  Divers  have  with 
them  sharp-pointed  Weapons  fastened  to  long  Poles ;  for 
unless  they  be  pricked  with  them,  they  will  not  turn  away  : 

1  The  smaller  kind  of  Sharks,  and,  perhaps,  particularly  the  Ground- 
sharks,  Scymnium.  —  Wern.  Club. 


168  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

by  Reason  (as  I  suppose)  of  the  Mist  before  their  Eyes,  and 
their  Fear.  For  I  never  heard  of  any  Man  that  found  the 
like  Cloud  or  Mist  (for  this  Term  they  give  to  this  Mischief) 
in  the  Range  of  living  Creatures.  But  the  Contest  with 
Caniculi  is  furious,  for  they  snap  at  their  Groins,  their  Heels, 
and  every  Part  of  their  Bodies  that  is  white.  The  only  safe 
Way  is  to  oppose  them  in  front,  and  so  to  terrify  them  ;  for 
they  are  as  much  afraid  of  a  Man  as  he  is  of  them.  Thus 
within  the  Deep  the  Chance  is  equal  ;  but  when  the  Divers 
mount  to  the  Surface  of  the  Water,  there  the  Danger  is 
double,  because  while  he  laboureth  to  get  out  of  the 
Water,  he  faileth  of  Means  to  encounter  the  Creature  pro- 
ceeding in  an  opposite  Direction ;  therefore  his  only  recourse 
is  to  his  Comrades :  for,  having  a  Cord  bound  about  his 
Shoulders,  by  which  they  draw  him  up,  he  shaketh  it  with 
his  left  Hand  to  give  a  Sign  of  his  Danger,  whilst  he  main- 
taineth  a  Fight  with  the  right,  by  holding  with  it  the  sharp- 
pointed  Spear;  but  otherwise  they  haul  him  up  softly.  When 
he  is  come  near  the  Ship,  unless  they  snatch  him  up  very 
quickly,  they  may  be  sure  to  see  him  devoured  before  their 
Face  :  and  when  they  are  at  the  point  of  being  plucked  up, 
they  are  caught  away  out  of  their  Hands,  if  they  do  not 
themselves  help  them  who  are  drawing  them  up,  by  gather- 
ing up  their  Bodies  together,  into  the  form  of  a  Ball.  Some, 
indeed,  thrust  at  these  Fishes  with  Tridents ;  but  it  is  the 
Craft  of  this  Monster  to  get  under  the  Bottom  of  the  Ship, 
and  so  maintain  the  Combat  in  safety.  And  therefore  all 
their  Care  is  employed  to  guard  against  this  Evil. 

CHAPTER  XL VI I. 

Of  those  Fishes  that  are  shut  within  a  flinty  Shell;  also  of 
those  that  have  no  Sense :  and  of  other  sordid  Creatures. 

THE  greatest  Security  that  Fishermen  have,  is  to  discover 
the  flat  Fishes ;  for  they  are  never  in  any  Place  where  hurt- 
ful Beasts  are ;  which  is  the  Cause  that  Divers  call  those 
Fishes  sacred. 

We  must  confess,  that  Fishes  enclosed  in  flinty  Shells,  as 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  169 

Oysters,  have  no  Sense.  Many  are  of  the  same  Nature  as 
Plants,  as  the  Holothuria,1  Pulmones,2  and  Stellae  (Star- 
fishes) ;  and  thus  there  is  nothing  that  is  not  bred  within  the 
Sea  ;  as  the  Creatures  which  in  Summer  Time  abound  within 
our  Inns,  and  vex  us  with  their  active  Leap ;  as  also  that 
which  lies  close  under  the  Hair  of  our  Heads  :  for  often  the 
Fishermen  find  a  Number  of  these  Skippers3  settled  thick 
about  their  Baits  as  they  draw  them  up.  And  these  are 
thought  to  infest  the  Fishes  in  their  Sleep  by  Night  in  the 
Sea.  But  some  Fishes  produce  these  Creatures  within 
themselves ;  among  which  is  reckoned  the  Chalcis.4 

CHAPTER  XLVIII. 
Of  venomous  Sea-fishes. 

NOR  is  the  Sea  without  deadly  Poisons,  as  in  the  Lepus,5 
which  in  the  Indian  Sea  is  so  venomous  when  touched,  that 
vomiting  and  breaking  down  of  the  Stomach  is  the  Conse- 
quence. They  which  are  found  in  our  Sea  are  a  shapeless 
Lump  of  Flesh,  in  Colour  only  resembling  the  Hare.  But  in 
the  Indian  Seas  they  are  as  big  as  the  Pilum,  only  it  is 

1  A  molluscous  form  of  the  Asteriadae :  the  Stellae,  or  Star-fishes, 
constitute  another  section  of  the  same  family  of  Asteriadae. — Wern.  Club. 

2  A  species  of  Botryllus.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  This  distant  allusion  to  the  parasites  of  the  human  body  is  still 
maintained  in  the  language  of  modern  fishermen ;  who  speak  of  sea-lice 
and  sea-fleas  as  pestering  them  in  their  avocations,  by  devouring  their 
baits,  and  sometimes  even  devouring  the  flesh  of  the  fish  that  has  swal- 
lowed the  hook,  if  not  immediately  drawn  up.  These  voracious  creatures, 
which  are  different  species   of  the  Linnean  genus  Oniscus,  obtain  an 
entrance  at  the  mouth,  and  devour  the  internal  substance,  leaving  the 
skin  and  scales  an  empty  bag,  or  filled  only  by  bones.  — Wern.  Club. 

4  A  species  of  Clupea,  and  probably  C.  Sardina,  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 

s  Aplysia :  a  genus  of  Mollusks,  possessing  the  power  of  exuding 
from  the  skin  a  fluid  of  an  acrid  quality.  The  A.  depilans  is  found  on 
the  British  shores.  The  head  and  antennae,  when  stretched  out,  bear  a 
resemblance  in  miniature  to  the  same  parts  in  the  hare.  It  is  only  when 
alarmed  that  they  contract  and  become  "  a  shapeless  lump  of  flesh." — 
Wern.  Club. 


170  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  IX. 

harder;  and  they  cannot  be  taken  there  alive.  The  Ara- 
neus1  is  equally  as  dangerous  a  Creature;  and  inflicts  Injury 
with  the  Point  of  a  Spine  on  its  Back.  But  in  no  Place  is 
there  any  one  more  detestable  than  is  the  Dart  or  Ray  that 
projecteth  upon  the  Tail  of  the  Trygon,  which  we  call  Pasti- 
naca;2  which  ray  is  five  Inches  long.  If  it  be  struck  into 
the  Root  of  a  Tree,  it  killeth  it ;  it  pierces  Armour  like  a 
Dart,  with  the  Force  of  Iron  and  the  Injury  of  Poison. 

CHAPTER  XLIX. 
Of  the  Diseases  of  Fishes. 

WE  do  not  hear  that  all  Sorts  of  Fishes  are  subject  to  Dis- 
eases, as  other  Beasts,  and  even  those  that  are  wild.  But 
that  this  or  that  Fish  may  be  sick  appeareth  evidently  from 
the  wasting  we  see  in  them ;  whereas  others  of  the  same  Sort 
are  taken  exceedingly  fat. 

CHAPTER  L. 
The  wonderful  Manner  of  their  Breeding. 

IN  what  Manner  they  breed,  the  Inquiry  and  Wonder  of 
Mankind  will  not  suffer  me  to  put  off  to  another  Oppor- 
tunity. Fishes  couple  by  the  rubbing  of  their  Bellies  one 
against  another ;  which  they  perform  with  such  Celerity  as 
to  deceive  the  Sight.  Dolphins  and  other  Whales  have  no 
other  Way,  but  they  are  somewhat  slower.  The  Female 
Fish,  in  the  Time  of  coupling,  followeth  the  Male,  striking 
his  Belly  with  her  Snout.  In  the  like  Manner,  about 
Spawning  Time,  the  Males  follow  the  Female,  devouring 
their  Spawn.  But  this  coupling  of  theirs  is  not  sufficient  of 

1  Trachinus  viper  a,  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 

2  Ch.  xxiv.  JElian  makes  the  destructive  property  of  the  spine  of  the 
Fire-flair  the  subject  of  several  chapters ;  but  if  he  or  our  author  had 
had  recourse  to  experiment,  they  might  have  soon  ascertained  the  error 
of  the  popular  opinion.    It  is  capable,  however,  of  inflicting  serious  lace- 
ration, when  the  tail  is  twisted  about  an  object ;  and  the  creature  is  well 
aware  of  the  way  to  render  it  a  formidable  weapon. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  171 

itself  to  accomplish  Fecundity,  unless  when  the  Eggs  are 
cast;  both  Male  and  Female  between  them,  by  turning  it 
over,  sprinkle  it  with  a  vital  Power.  But  in  such  a  Multi- 
tude of  Eggs  this  living  Power  doth  not  fall  on  all  of 
them  ;  for  if  it  did,  all  Seas  and  Lakes  would  be  full  of 
Fishes  :  for  there  is  not  one  of  these  Females  but  conceiveth 
an  inconceivable  Number. 

CHAPTER  LI. 

More  concerning  the  Generation  of  Fishes,  and  which  of  them 
produce  Eggs. 

THE  Eggs  of  Fishes  grow  in  the  Sea,  some  of  them  ex- 
ceedingly soon,  as  those  of  the  Muraenee :  others  are  some- 
what later.  Flat  Fishes,1  which  have  no  Tails  and  sharp 
Prickles,  when  they  couple,  come  over  one  another,  like 
Tortoises.  The  Polypi  fasten  one  of  their  Strings  to  the  Nose 
of  the  Female.  The  Sepiae  and  Loligo  with  their  Tongues, 
clasp  one  another  with  their  Arms,  and  swim  one  contrary 
to  the  other:  they  also  produce  their  Eggs  from  the  Mouth. 
But  the  Polypi  couple  with  their  Heads  downwards  to  the 
Ground.  The  other  soft  Animals  couple,  Back  to  Back,  as 
Dogs.  This  is  the  Case  with  Locustae,  Squillee,  Cancri,  at  the 
Mouth.  Frogs  lie  on  one  another :  the  Male  with  the  Fore- 
feet clasping  the  Arms  of  the  Female,  and  with  the  Hind- 
feet  the  Haunches.  They  bring  forth  very  small  Bits  of 
black  Flesh,  which  they  call  Tadpoles,  only  distinguished 
by  having  Eyes  and  a  Tail.  Soon  after  their  Feet  are 
framed,  and  their  Tail  is  divided  into  hinder  Parts.  It  is 
wonderful  that,  after  they  have  lived  six  Months,  they  are 
dissolved  into  Slime,  no  Man  seeth  how;  and  afterward  with 
the  Rains  in  the  Spring,  they  are  restored  to  their  former 
State,  as  they  were  first  shaped,  by  an  unknown  Way  of 
Proceeding,  although  it  happeneth  in  this  Way  every  Year,. 
Mussels  and  Pectens  also,  are  produced  of  themselves  by 
Nature  in  the  Sands  :  those  which  are  of  a  harder  Crust,  as 

1  Pleuronectidae.  —  Wern.  Club. 


172  History  of  Nature.  [BoOK  IX. 

the  Murex  and  Purpura,  from  a  viscous  Mucillage  :  so  also 
Gnats  proceed  from  a  Sourness  of  the  Water;  as  the  Apuae1 
from  the  Froth  of  the  Sea,  when  it  grows  warm,  and  is 
mixed  with  a  Shower.  They  that  are  covered  with  a  stony 
Shell,  as  Oysters,  are  bred  from  the  putrified  Mud,  or  out  of 
the  Froth  that  hath  stood  long  about  Ships,  or  Posts  fixed  in 
the  Water,  and  especially  if  they  are  formed  of  Holly- wood. 
It  hath  been  lately  discovered  in  Oyster  Banks,  that  there 
passeth  from  them  a  fertile  Liquid  resembling  Milk.  Eels2 
rub  themselves  against  Stones,  and  those  Scrapings  come  to 
Life ;  and  they  have  no  other  Generation.  Fishes  of  different 
Kinds  do  not  mix  their  Breed  with  another,  except  the 
Squatina  and  the  Raia ;  from  them  there  is  produced  a  Fish 
which  in  the  Forepart  resembleth  a  Raia,  and  in  Greek  hath 
a  Name  compounded  of  both.3  Some  Fishes  breed  both  on 
Land  and  in  the  Sea,  according  to  the  Warmth  of  the 
Year.  In  the  Spring,  Pectens,  Limaces  (Slugs),  Hirundines 
(Leeches),  are  produced  ;  but  in  the  corresponding  Time  of 
Autumn  they  turn  to  nothing.  Among  Fishes  the  Lupus  and 
Trichias  breed  twice  a  Year,  and  also  all  that  keep  among 
Rocks.  The  Mulius  thrice,  as  also  the  Chalcis  ;  the  Cypri- 
nus  six  Times;  the  Scorpense4  and  Sargi  twice,  namely,  in 
Spring  and  Autumn.  Of  flat  Fishes,  the  Squatina  only 
twice ;  in  the  Autumn,  and  at  the  Setting  of  the  Stars  Ver- 
giliae.  The  greatest  Number  of  Fishes  spawn  in  the  three 

1  Minute  fishes  seen  swimming  at  the  surface  of  the  sea,  and  therefore 
sapiently  supposed  to  have  sprung,  by  spontaneous  generation,  from  the 
froth.    If  any  particular  species  is  intended,  it  is  probably  Motella  glauca. 
— YARRELL'S  "British  Fishes"— Wern.  Club. 

2  The  manner  in  which  this  fish  is  propagated  was  long  a  matter  of 
doubt,  from  the  very  obscure  developement  of  the  ova  in  the  ovaries ;  but 
it  has  been  rendered  certain  that  in  their  mode  of  increase  they  do  not 
differ  from  other  fishes.    The  author  makes  several  references  to  the 
opinion,  which  was  prevalent  in  his  day,  that  creatures  might  spring  into 
existence  by  the  spontaneous  influences  of  heat  and  moisture ;  but  from 
the  days  of  the  illustrious  Harvey,  every  claim  of  this  sort  for  particular 
instances  has  been  successfully  controverted. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Bhinobatis.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Scorpena  scropha  and  Sc.  porcus,  Cuv.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  1 73 

Months,  April,  May,  and  June  :  Salpae  in  Autumn  :  the 
Sargi,  Torpedo,  and  Squali,  about  the  Equinox :  soft  Fishes 
in  the  Spring  :  and  the  Sepia  in  every  Month.  The  Spawn 
of  this  Fish,  which  hangeth  together  like  a  Cluster  of 
Grapes,  by  Means  of  the  Glue  of  the  Ink,  the  Male  follows 
with  its  Breath,  for  otherwise  it  is  barren.  The  Polypi 
couple  in  Winter,  and  produce  the  Eggs  in  Spring  ;  being 
curled  like  the  Tendrils  of  a  Vine  ;  and  that  in  such  Plenty, 
that  when  they  are  killed  they  are  not  able  to  receive  the 
Multitude  of  Eggs  in  the  Concavities  of  their  Head  which 
they  bare  when  they 'were  pregnant.  They  hatch  them  in 
fifty  Days,  but  many  of  them  perish  from  their  great  Num- 
ber. The  Locustae  and  the  rest  with  thinner  Shells,  lay  Egg 
over  Egg,  and  so  brood  upon  them.  The  female  Polypus 
one  while  sitteth  on  her  Eggs,  at  other  Times  shuts  up  the 
Cavity  (where  she  hath  laid  them),  with  her  Arms  enfolded 
across,  one  over  another.  The  Sepia  layeth  also  on  the 
Land  among  the  Reeds,  or  else  where  she  can  find  Seaweeds 
growing,  and  by  the  fifteenth  Day  it  is  hatched.  The  Loligo 
layeth  Eggs  in  the  deep  Water,  which  hang  close  together 
as  those  of  the  Sepiae.  The  Purpurse,  the  Murex,  and  such 
like,  lay  in  the  Spring.  The  Echini  are  with  Egg  at  the  Full- 
Moons  in  the  Winter  :  and  the  Cochleae  are  bred  in  the 
Winter  also.  The  Torpedo  is  found  to  have  fourscore  Young 
at  once,  and  she  hatcheth  her  soft  Eggs  within  her  Body, 
shifting  them  from  one  Place  of  the  Womb  to  another,  and 
then  excludes  them.  In  a  similar  Manner  do  all  they  which 
are  called  Cartilaginous.  By  which  it  cometh  to  pass,  that 
Fish  alone  both  conceive  Eggs,  and  bring  forth  a  living- 
Creature.  The  Male  Silurus,  of  all  others,  keepeth  the  Eggs 
after  they  are  deposited,  many  Times  for  fifty  Days,  that 
they  may  not  be  devoured  by  others.  Other  Females  hatch 
in  three  Days,  if  the  Male  touch  them.  The  Acus  or  Be- 
lone1  is  the  only  Fish  which  has  such  an  Abundance  of 
Eggs  that  their  Womb  gapeth  when  they  lay  them  :  but 

1  Syngnathus  acus,  LINN.  For  the  marsupial  habits  of  this  fish,  see 
Yarrell's  "  British  Fishes."  Pliny  could  not  have  imagined  that  it  is  the 
male  which  hatches  the  eggs  in  his  caudal  pouches.  —  Wern.  Club. 


174  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

after  they  are  produced  the  Womb  uniteth  again  :  a  Thing 
usual  (as  they  say)  in  Blind  Serpents.  The  Mus  marinus1 
diggeth  a  Furrow  within  the  Ground,  and  there  layeth  her 
Eggs,  which  she  covereth  with  Earth ;  and  so  lets  them 
alone  for  thirty  Days,  when  she  openeth  the  Place  again, 
and  leadeth  her  Young  to  the  Water. 

CHAPTER  LII. 
Of  Fishes'  Wombs. 

THE  Erythrini  and  Change  have  Wombs.  The  Fish 
which  in  Greek  is  called  Trochos2  is  thought  to  get  itself  with 
Young.  The  Young  of  all  Creatures  of  the  Water,  at  first, 
are  without  Sight. 

CHAPTER  LIII. 
Of  the  exceeding  long  Life  of  Fishes. 

IT  is  not  long  since  that  we  heard  of  one  memorable 
Example,  which  proved  the  long  Life  of  Fishes.  Pausi- 
lippum  is  a  Country-seat  in  Campania,  not  far  from  Naples ; 
where  (as  Anneus  Seneca  writeth)  there  died  a  Fish  in  the 
Fish-ponds  of  C&sar,  threescore  Years3  after  it  had  been  put 

1  Aristotle  gives  the  name  of  Mus,  or  the  Mouse,  to  a  freshwater 
turtle ;  some  of  which,  of  small  size,  are  as  active  in  the  water  as  a  mouse 
on  land.     It  is  probable,  therefore,  that  the  Mus  marinus  is  a  small  Sea- 
turtle  ;  and  the  mice  of  the  Nile  (Ch.  Iviii.),  of  the  same  natural  family. 
Seep.  136.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Turbinated  Shell-fish  are  hermaphrodite ;  but  it  is  believed  that  in 
these,  as  in  the  others,  self- impregnation  is  not  possible.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  But  what  is  this  in  comparison  with  a  tike,  of  which  Gesner  gives 
the  following  account  ?   "  In  the  year  of  our  Lord  1497,  a  Pike  was  caught 
in  a  pond  near  Haylprun,  an  imperial  city  of  Suevia,  and  fixed  to  the 
skin  of  its  gillcovers  was  a  brass  ring,  of  which  we  give  the  figure  and 
inscription :  with  the  interpretation,  as  it  was  deciphered  by  John  Dal- 
burgus,  bishop  of  Uvormaciensis :  '  I  am  the  first  fish  which,  before  all 
others,  was  placed  in  this  pond  by  the  hand  of  the  Governor  of  the  World, 
Frederic  the  Second,  on  the  5th  day  of  October,  (A.D.)  1230:'  from 
whence  it  was  concluded  that  the  fish  had  already  lived  267  years ;  and  if 
not  caught,  it  appeared  likely  to  have  survived  much  longer." —  GESNER'S 
"Nomenclator,"  &c.  p.  316.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  175 

in  by  Pollio  Vedius :  and  there  remained  living  still  two 
more  of  that  Age,  and  of  the  same  Kind.  And  since  we 
mention  Fish-ponds,  we  should  do  well  to  write  a  little  more 
of  them  before  we  give  over  this  Discourse  of  Creatures  of 
the  Water. 

CHAPTER  LIV. 
Of  Oyster-beds,  and  who  first  invented  them. 

THE  first  who  invented  Oyster-beds  was  Sergius  Grata, 
who  made  them  at  Bajanum,  in  the  Time  of  L.  Crassus  the 
Orator,  before  the  Marsian  War.  And  this  he  did,  not  for 
his  Appetite,  but  for  Profit ;  and  by  this  Invention,  and 
others,  he  gathered  great  Revenues :  for  he  it  was  that  in- 
vented the  Hanging-baths,  and  so  sold  his  Villa  to  better 
Advantage.  He  was  the  first  Man  who  pronounced  the 
Lucrine  Oysters  to  be  of  the  most  excellent  Taste :  for  the 
same  Kinds  of  Creatures  of  the  Water  in  one  Place  are  better 
than  in  another :  as  the  Lupus-fish  in  the  River  Tiber,  be- 
tween the  two  Bridges  :  the  Rhomnus  (Turbot)  at  Ravenna  : 
the  Mursena  in  Sicily :  the  Elops  at  Rhodes,  and  in  like 
Manner  of  other  Sorts  of  Fishes ;  for  I  do  not  intend  to  give 
a  long  Criticism  on  Cookery.  At  this  Time  the  British 
Shores  were  not  employed  to  prepare  them  when  Grata 
ennobled  those  of  the  Lucrine  Lake ;  but  afterwards  it  was 
thought  profitable  to  seek  Oysters  from  Brundusium,  in  the 
furthest  Part  of  Italy.  And  to  prevent  Controversy  between 
opposite  Tastes,  it  was  of  late  devised  that  the  Oysters, 
which  in  the  long  Carriage  from  Brundusium  were  almost 
famished,  should  be  fed  in  the  Lucrine  Lake.  A  little  before 
this  same  Time,  Licinius  Murena  invented  Ponds  for  keeping 
other  Fishes ;  and  his  Example  was  followed  by  Noblemen, 
as  Philippus  and  Hortensius.  Lucullus  cut  through  a  Moun- 
tain near  Naples  (for  this  Purpose),  and  let  in  an  Arm  of  the 
Sea  into  his  Fish-ponds ;  the  Cost  of  which  was  greater  than 
that  of  the  House  which  he  had  built.  For  this  Reason 
Pompey  the  Great  gave  him  the  Name  of  Xerxes  Togatus. 
The  Fishes  of  that  Pond,  after  his  death,  were  sold  for  thirty 
hundred  thousand  Sesterces  (three  millions  of  Sesterces). 


176  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

CHAPTER  LV. 
Who  invented  Store-ponds  for  Murcence. 

CAIUS  HIRTIUS  was  the  Man  who,  of  himself,  before 
all  others,  thought  of  a  Pond  to  keep  Muraenae  in.  He  it  was 
that  lent  Ccesar  the  Dictator,  for  his  triumphal  Suppers,  six 
hundred  Muraenae  in  Numher,  to  be  paid  again  ;  for  he 
would  not  sell  them  for  Money,  nor  exchange  them  for  other 
Merchandise.  Although  his  Villa  was  of  moderate  size,  yet 
the  Fish-ponds  about  it  sold  the  House  for  four  millions  of 
Sesterces.  After  this  the  Love  of  some  one  particular  Fish 
became  general.  The  Orator  Hortensius  had  a  Pond  at 
Bauli,  upon  the  Side  that  lieth  toward  Baeiae,  in  which  was  a 
Muraena  for  which  he  felt  such  regard,  that  when  it  was 
dead  it  is  believed  that  he  wept  for  it.1  At  the  same  Villa, 
Antonia  the  wife  of  Drusus  affixed  Ear-rings  to  a  Muraena 
in  which  she  delighted ;  the  Report  of  which  caused  some 
People  to  wish  to  visit  Bauli. 

CHAPTER  LVI. 
The  Preserves  for  Snails ,2  and  who  first  invented  them. 

FULVIUS  HIRPINUS  was  the  first  Inventor  of  Store- 
preserves  for  Snails  within  the  Territory  of  Tarquinii,  a  little 
before  the  Civil  War  with  Pompey  the  Great.  And  those 
had  their  distinct  Partitions  for  their  several  Sorts  :  so  that 

1  JElian  (B.  viii.  ch.  iv.),  perhaps  from  hearsay,  has  jumbled  these  two 
incidents  into  one ;  but  he  has  added  a  piece  of  wit,  which  renders  it 
worth  transcribing.     "  The  Romans  celebrate  the  Muraena  of  Crassus, 
which  he  adorned  with  ear-rings  and  precious  stones,  as  if  it  had  been  a 
beautiful  girl.     He  also  taught  the  fish  to  know  his  voice,  and  to  swim  to 
him  and  take  food  from  his  hand.     I  have  been  informed  that  when  this 
fish  died  he  wept  for  it,  and  gave  it  an  honourable  funeral.     When  on 
some  occasion  Domitius  said  to  him  :  *  What  a  fool,  Crassus,  to  weep  for 
the  death  of  a  Mura?na  1 '    To  which  he  answered :  *  True,  I  wept  the 
death  of  an  animal ;  but  that  is  more  than  any  one  saw  you  do  at  the 
funerals  of  your  three  wives.'" — Wern.  Club. 

2  See  B.  viii.  ch.  xxxix.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  177 

the  white,  which  came  from  the  Parts  about  Reat£,  should 
be  kept  by  themselves :  as  also  the  Illyrian,  which  are 
remarkable  for  size:  and  the  African,  which  are  the  most 
fruitful;  and  the  Solitanae,  which  are  the  renowned.  Nay, 
he  had  a  Contrivance  to  feed  them  with  boiled  Wine  and 
Wheat  Meal,  and  other  similar  Things ;  to  the  End  that 
Riot  might  be  served  plentifully  with  home-fed  Snails.  And 
the  Glory  of  this  Art  produced  them  at  last  of  such  Bigness, 
that  one  of  their  Shells  would  contain  fourscore  (Measures 
called)  Quadrants,1  according  to  M.  Varro. 

CHAPTER  LVII. 
Of  Land-fishes. 

THEOPHRASTUS  also  telleth  strange  Wonders  of  some 
kinds  of  Fishes  :  that  about  Babylon  there  are  Places  subject 
to  the  Inundations  of  the  Rivers,  and  in  which  the  Water 
standeth  in  Pits,  and  the  Fish  remain  after  the  Waters 
are  returned  within  their  Banks  ;  and  that  some  of  these 
Fishes  quit  those  Retreats  to  seek  for  Food,  walking  with 
their  Fins,  and  wagging  their  Tails  as  they  go.  And  if  any 
pursue  them  they  retreat  into  their  Pits,  and  when  in  them, 
stand  opposed  to  them  :  that  their  Heads  are  like  those  of 
the  Rana  marina,  but  the  other  Parts  like  the  Gobius  ;  and 
the  Gills  as  in  other  Fishes.  Also  that  about  Heraclea  and 
Cromna,  and  the  River  Lycus,  and  in  many  Parts  of  Pontus, 
there  is  one  Kind  that  haunteth  the  utmost  edges  of  the 
Rivers,  and  maketh  itself  Holes  in  the  Land,  and  liveth  in 
them,  even  when  the  Shore  is  dry,  and  the  Rivers  are 
gathered  into  narrow  Channels.  Therefore  they  are  digged 
out;  and  that  they  are  alive  appears  finally  by  the  Motion  of 
their  Bodies.  Near  the  abovesaid  Heraclea  and  the  River 
Lycus,  when  the  Water  is  ebbed,  there  are  Fishes  bred  from 
the  Eggs  left  in  the  Mud ;  and  these,  in  seeking  their  Food, 

1  Three  wine  gallons  and  three  quarts :  for  a  Quadrans  is  three  Cyathi, 
i.  e.  the  fourth  part  of  a  Sextarius,  and  a  Sextarius  is  a  wine  pint  and  a  half, 
or  eighteen  ounces. 

By  quoting  an  author,  Pliny  sufficiently  testifies  that  he  had  never 
seen  a  shell  of  a  snail  (Calix)  of  such  size.  — Wern.  Club. 

VOL.   III.  N 


1 78  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX . 

pant  with  their  little  Gills :  which  they  do  when  they  do  not 
want  Water:  and  that  is  the  Reason  also  why  Eels  live  a  long 
Time  after  they  are  taken  out  of  the  Water.  He  affirmeth, 
also,  that  the  Eggs  (of  Fishes)  lying  upon  the  dry  Land, 
will  come  to  their  Maturity,  as  those  of  the  Tortoises.  Also, 
that  in  the  same  Country  of  Pontus,  there  are  taken  Fishes 
in  the  Ice,  and  Gobiones1  especially,  which  do  not  show  a 
vital  Motion,  but  by  the  Heat  of  the  Cooking- Vessels.  In 
this  some  Reason  may  be  given,  although  the  Thing  is  won- 
derful. The  same  Author  reporteth,  that  in  Paphlagonia 
there  are  digged  out  of  the  Ground  Land-fishes  that  are  very 
excellent  as  Food  :  but  they  are  found  in  deep  Furrows,  in 
such  Places  where  no  Waters  settle.  Himself  wondereth 
how  they  are  produced  without  the  help  of  Moisture.  He 
supposeth  that  there  is  in  them  a  certain  Force  of  Liquid  in 
Wells,  as  Fishes  are  found  in  some  of  them.  Whatever  it  is, 
surely  it  is  less  wonderful,  considering  how  Moles  live  (a 
Creature  naturally  keeping  under  Ground),  unless,  perhaps, 
that  these  Fishes  are  of  the  same  Nature  with  Earth-worms. 

CHAPTER  LVIII. 
Of  the  Mice  of  the  Nile. 

BUT  the  Inundation  of  the  Nile  brings  Credibility  to 
all  these  Matters  ;  for  it  exceedeth  all  other  Wonders.  For 
when  the  Ground  becometh  again  uncovered,  little  Mice  are 
found  imperfectly  formed  from  the  generative  Virtue  of 
Water  and  Earth  :  having  one  Part  of  their  Body  living, 
but  the  rest  of  the  Form  no  better  than  the  Earth. 

CHAPTER  LIX. 
Of  the  Fish  Anthias*  and  how  it  is  taken. 

I  DO  riot  think  it  proper  to  omit  that  which  I  perceive 
many  have  believed  concerning  the  Fish  Anthias.  We  have 

1  Perhaps  some  fish  resembling  the  Gudgeon.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  It  appears  from  Oppian,  B.  i.,  that  four  different  sorts  of  fish  were 
called  by  this  name.     The  fish  referred  to  by  Pliny  may  be  the  Labrus 
anthias,  LINN.,  and  Serranus  anthias,  Cuv.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  179 

made  mention  of  the  Islands  Chelidoniae  in  Asia,  situated  in 
a  Sea  full  of  Rocks  under  the  Promontory  ;  and  here  this 
Fish  is  in  Abundance;  and  they  are  rapidly  taken  in  one 
Manner.  For  the  Fisherman  goes  in  a  small  Boat  for  cer- 
tain Days  together,  to  a  certain  Distance  in  the  Sea,  with 
his  Garments  of  one  Colour,  at  one  Hour,  and  there  he 
casteth  his  Bait.  But  whatever  is  thrown  from  the  Boat 
becomes  an  Object  of  Suspicion  to  the  intended  Prey;  and 
what  it  feareth  it,  guards  against ;  until  at  length,  after  this 
has  been  often  practised,  one  Anthias,  enticed  by  the  Repe- 
tition, seizeth  the  Bait.  The  Fisherman  carefully  notes  this 
one  Fish  as  the  Foundation  of  his  Hope,  and  the  Enticer  of 
others  that  will  be  caught.  And  that  is  no  hard  Matter  for 
him  to  do,  because  for  some  Days  that  Fish  alone  dares  to 
come  to  the  Bait.  At  length  he  meets  with  some  others, 
and  by  little  and  little  he  is  better  accompanied,  until  in  the 
End  he  brings  with  him  large  Sculls,  so  that  now  the  oldest 
of  them  being  so  well  accustomed  to  know  the  Fisherman, 
they  will  snatch  Meat  out  of  his  Hand.  Then  he  thrusteth 
forth  an  Hook  with  the  Bait,  somewhat  beyond  his  Fin- 
gers, and  flieth  upon  them  more  truly  than  catcheth  them, 
with  a  short  Snatch ;  seizing  them  from  the  Shadow  of  the 
Ship,  in  such  a  Manner  as  not  to  scare  the  others  away. 
It  is  important  to  Success  that  he  should  know  the  first 
Enticer,  that  he  may  not  take  him.  The  Fisherman  spareth 
him,  that  he  may  fly  to  some  other  Flock.  It  is  reported 
that  one  contentious  Fisherman,  out  of  Ill-will,  captured  this 
Captain-fish  which  led  the  rest  into  the  Snare,  for  he  was 
well  known  :  but  when  the  Fisherman  recognised  him  in  the 
Market  in  the  Possession  of  a  fellow-Fisherman,  regarding 
himself  as  wronged,  he  brought  his  Action  for  the  Damage,  so 
that  the  other  was  condemned.  Mutianus  adds,  that  the  Fine 
was  ten  Pounds.  The  same  Anthiae,  if  they  see  one  of  their 
Fellows  caught  with  a  Hook,  are  reported  to  cut  the  Line  with 
the  serrated  sharp  Spines  which  they  have  upon  their  Back ; 
and  that  one  which  hangeth  at  it,  stretcheth  it  out  straight, 
that  it  may  be  cut  asunder  more  easily.  But  the  Sargus,  if 
he  find  himself  taken,  rubs  the  Line  against  a  Rock. 


180  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  IX. 

CHAPTER  LX. 
Of  the  Sea- Stars  (Stella  marines}. 

BESIDES  these,  I  see  that  some  Authors,  celebrated  for 
Wisdom,  have  made  a  Wonder  at  the  Star  in  the  Sea.1  It  is 
of  small  size,  fleshy  within ;  but  without  of  a  harder  Sub- 
stance. They  say  it  is  so  fiery  hot,  that  whatever  it  toucheth 
in  the  Sea  it  burneth  :  and  whatever  Food  it  receiveth,  it 
immediately  digesteth.  What  Proof  there  is  of  this  I  cannot 
readily  say.  I  would  think  that  more  worthy  to  be  recorded 
which  hath  daily  Experience. 

CHAPTER  LXI. 
Of  the  Dactyli-  and  their  wonderful  Properties. 

THE  Dactyli  are  a  kind  of  Shellfish  ;  and  they  derive 
their  Name  from  their  Likeness  to  Men's  Nails.  The  Nature 
of  this  Fish  is  to  shine  in  the  Dark,  when  all  other  Light 
is  taken  away.  The  more  Moisture  they  have,  the  more 
Light  they  give  ;  they  shine  in  Men's  Mouths  as  they  chew 
them:  they  shine  in  their  Hands:  on  the  Floor,  and  on  their 
Garments,  if  any  Drops  fall  on  them  :  so  that  it  appeareth 
to  proceed  from  the  very  Nature  of  that  Juice,  which  we  so 
wonder  at  in  the  Body. 

CHAPTER  LXII. 
Of  the  Enmity  and  Amity  of  Fishes  between  themselves. 

THERE  are  wonderful  Instances  of  Enmities  and  Agree- 
ment. The  Mugii  and  Lupus  burn  with  mutual  Hatred  ; 
likewise  the  Conger  and  Mursena:  so  that  they  gnaw  off  one 
another's  Tails.  The  Locusta  is  so  afraid  of  the  Polypus, 

1  The  various  species  of  Star-fishes :  Asteriadce.  The  ancients  in- 
dulged the  idea  that  the  sea  contained  a  counterpart  of  every  thing  that 
was  to  be  found  on  the  land  or  in  the  sky ;  but  to  support  this  opinion, 
they  were  contented  with  very  loose  analogies,  or  mere  quibbles. — Wern. 
Club. 

3  Pholades,  and  especially  Ph.  dactylus,  LINN.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  IX.]  History  of  Nature.  181 

that  if  he  spy  him  near,  he  immediately  dieth.  Locustae 
tear  the  Conger  :l  the  Congers  again  do  the  same  to  the 
Polypus.  Nigidius  writeth,  that  the  Lupus  biteth  off  the 
Mullet's  Tail :  and  yet  these  Fishes  in  certain  Months  are 
good  Friends.  But  he  saith  that  those  Fishes  live,  although 
their  Tails  are  so  gnawed  off.  On  the  other  side,  there  are 
Examples  of  Friendship  among  Fishes,  besides  those  of 
whose  Society  I  have  already  written :  as  between  the 
Balsena,  and  the  Musculus.2  For  whereas  the  (Balaena)  hath 
no  use  of  his  Eyes,  by  reason  of  the  heavy  Weight  of  his 
Eyebrows  that  cover  them,  the  other  swimmeth  before  him, 
and  serveth  him  instead  of  Eyes,  to  show  the  Shallows,  on 
which  his  vast  Bulk  might  be  grounded. 

From  this  we  will  proceed  to  speak   of  the  Nature  of 
Birds. 

1  Locustae  congrum,  ex  Arist.  lib.  vii.  cap.  ii.  Histor.  Animal. 
8  However  small  their  eyes,  Whales  are,  in  general,  sharp  of  sight. 
What  the  Musculus  is,  seems  uncertain. — Went.  Club. 


IN  THE  TENTH  BOOK 


ARE  CONTAINED  THE 


NATURE  AND  HISTORY  OF  FLYING  CREATURES. 


CHA 
1. 

a. 

3. 

4. 


6. 
7. 

8. 
9. 

10. 
11. 

12. 


13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 

20. 
21. 


The  Nature  of  Birds. 

Of  the  Phoenix. 

Of  Eagles. 

When    the    Roman    Legions 

began  the  Standard   of  the 

Eagle,    and    other  Ensigns. 

Also    with    what    Creatures 

Eagles  maintain  fight. 
A     wonderful     Case     of    an 

Eagle. 

Of  Vultures. 
Of  the  Bird  Sangualis. 
Of  Falcons  and  Hawks. 
Of  the  Cuckoo,  which  is  killed 

by  Birds  of  its  own  Kind. 
Of  Kites. 
A  Division  of  Birds  into  their 

Kinds. 
Of  unlucky  or  ominous  Birds, 

the  Crow,  the  Raven,  and  the 

Owl  (Bubo). 

Of  the  Bird  that  carrieth  Fire. 
Of  the  Bird  Clivina. 
Of  many  Birds  unknown. 
Of  Birds  that  fly  by  Night. 
Of  Owlets. 
Of  the  Woodpecker. 
Of  Birds    which    have   Claws 

and  crooked  Talons. 
Of  Peacocks :    and  who   first 

killed  them  for  the  Table. 
Of  Cocks :  how  they  are  cas- 
trated :  of  a  Dunghill  Cock 

that  spoke. 


CHAP. 

22.  Of  Geese :  who  first  devised  a 

Dish  of  the  Goose-liver :  the 
Fat  of  Geese,  called  Coma- 
genum. 

23.  Of    Cranes,     Storks,     Swans, 

strange  Birds  of  foreign 
Countries;  of  Quails,  and 
the  Bird  Glottis. 

24.  Of    Swallows     and     Martins, 

of  Blackbirds,  Thrushes,  of 
Starlings,  Turtle-doves  and 
Ring-doves. 

25.  Of  Birds  that  tarry  with  us  all 

the  Year ;  of  Birds  that  con- 
tinue half  a  Year  only,  and 
others  that  remain  but  three 
Months. 

26.  Strange  Stories  of  Birds. 

27.  Of  the  Birds  called  Seleucides. 

28.  Of  the  Ibis. 

29.  What  Birds  will  not  abide  in 

some  Places :  which  they  are 
that  change  Colour  and 
Voice:  also  of  Nightingales. 

30.  Of  Merls. 

31.  The  Time  wherein  Birds  breed. 

32.  Of   the    Birds   Halcyons,   the 

navigable  Days  they  show : 
of  the  Gaviae  and  Mergi. 

33.  The    Subtlety    of    Birds    in 

building  their  Nests :  of  the 
common  Swallow,  the  River 
Martin,  Argatilis :  the  Birds 
Cinnamologi,  and  Partridges. 


Contents  of  the  Tenth  Booh. 


183 


CHAP. 

34.  Of  House-doves. 

35.  Of  Stock-doves. 

36.  Of  Sparrows. 

37.  Of  the  Kestrel. 

38.  Of  the  Flight  and  Walk  of 

Birds. 

39.  Of  certain  footless  Martinets, 
called  Apodes. 

40.  Of  Caprimulgi :  also  of  Spoon- 

bills, or  Plateae. 

41.  The  Ingenuity  of  Birds. 

42.  Of  the  Goldfinch,  Parrot,  and 

Birds  that  will  learn  to  speak. 

43.  The  Understanding  that  Ra- 

vens have. 

44.  Of  the  Birds  of  Diomedes. 

45.  Of  Birds  that  will  learn  no- 

thing. 

46.  The  Manner  how  Birds  drink. 

47.  Of  Birds  called  Himantipodes, 

and  Onacrotali,  and  of  other 
strange  Birds. 

48.  The  Names  of  many  Birds  and 

their  Natures. 

49.  Of  new  Birds  and  such  as  are 

supposed  to  be  fabulous. 

50.  Who    devised    first    to    cram 

Hens  and  Capons ;  of  Coops 
to  keep  and  feed  Fowls,  and 
the  first  Inventor  thereof. 

51.  Of  ^sop's  Dish. 

52.  The  Generation  of  Birds,  and 

what  four-footed  Beasts  lay 
Eggs  as  well  as  Birds. 

53.  The  Generation  of  Eggs,  the 

laying  and  sitting  of  them, 
the  Manner  and  Time  of 
Birds  coupling. 

54.  The     Accidents     that     befall 

Breeding  Birds,  and  the  Re- 
medies. 

55.  Auguries  by  Eggs. 

56.  What  Hens   are  of  the   best 

Kind. 


CHAP. 

57.  The  Diseases  incident  to  Hens, 

and  the  Cure. 

58.  The  Manner  how  Birds  con- 

ceive :  what  Number  of  Eggs 
they  lay,  and  how  many  they 
hatch. 

59.  Of  Peacocks  and  Geese. 

60.  Of  Herons  and  Bitterns.     The 

Way  to  preserve  Eggs. 

61.  The  only  Bird  that  bringeth 

forth  her  Young  alive,  and 
feedeth  the  same  with  Milk. 

62.  The  Conception  of  the  Viper, 

and  how  she  is  delivered  of 
her  Young ;  also  what  Land 
Creatures  lay  Eggs. 

63.  The  Generation  of  Land  Crea- 

tures. 

64.  The  Variety  of  Propagation  of 

Land  Animals, 

65.  The  Young  of  Mice  and  Rats. 

66.  Whether    the    Marrow    of  a 

Man's  Back- bone  will  pro- 
duce a  Serpent. 

67.  Of  the  Salamander. 

68.  What  Things  are  engendered 

of  those  that  were  never 
engendered ;  and  what  Crea- 
tures which,  being  engen- 
dered themselves,  breed  not. 

69.  The  Senses  of  Animals. 

70.  That  Fishes   both    hear    and 

smell. 

71.  That  the  Sense  of  Feeling  is 

common  to  all  living  Crea- 
tures. 

72.  What  Creatures  live  on  Poi- 

sons, and  eat  Earth. 

73.  Of  the  Meat  and  Drink  of  some 

Creatures. 

74.  What  Creatures  evermore  dis- 

agree :  and  which  they  are 
that  agree  well  together. 

75.  Of  the  Sleep  of  Animals. 


184  Contents  of  thz  Tenth  Book. 

This  Book  hath  in  it  of  Histories  and  Observations  904,  gathered  out  of 

LATIN  AUTHORS  AND  RECORDS  : 

Manilius,  Cornelius  Valerianus,  the  Public  Records  and  Registers, 
Umbricius  surnamed  Melior,  Massurius  Sabinus,  Antistius  Labeo,  Trogus 
Cremutius,  M.  Varro,  Macer  JEmylius,  Melissus,  Mutianus,  Nepos,  Fabius 
Pictor,  T.  Lucretius,  Cornelius  Celsus,  Horatius  Desulo,  Hysginus,  Sar- 
sennce,  both  Father  and  Son,  Nigidius,  and  Manlius  Sura. 

FOREIGN  WRITERS: 

Homer,  Phcemonoes,  Philemon,  Boethius,  who  wrote  a  Treatise  called 
Ornithagonia,  Hylas,  who  made  a  Discourse  of  Auguries,  Aristotle,  Theo- 
phrastus,  Callimachus,  JEschylus,  Hiero,  Philometer,  Archytas,  Amphilo- 
chus  the  Athenian,  Anaxipolis  the  Thasian,  Apollodorus  of  Lemnos, 
Aristophanes  the  Milesian,  Antigonus  the  Cymcean,  Agathocles  of  Chios, 
Apollonius  of  Pergamus,  Aristander  the  Athenian,  Bacchius  the  Milesian, 
Bion  of  Soli,  Chcereas  the  Athenian,  Diodorus  of  Prycene,  Dion  the  Colo- 
phonian,  Democritus,  Diophanes  of  Niccea,  Epigenes  of  Rhodes,  Evagoras 
of  Thasos,  Euphonius  of  Athens,  King  Juba,  Androcion,  who  wrote  of 
Husbandry,  and  JEschrion,  likewise  who  wrote  thereof,  Dionysius  who 
translated  Mago,  and  Diophanes  who  reduced  his  Work  into  an  Epitome, 
Nicander,  Onesicritus,  Philarchus,  and  Hesiodus. 


THE   TENTH   BOOK 


OP   THE 


HISTORY    OF    NATURE. 


WRITTEN    BY 


C.   PLINIUS   SECUNDUS. 


CHAPTER  I. 
The  Nature  of  Birds. 

followeth  that  we  should  speak  of  the  Nature  of 
Birds,  of  which  the  greatest  are  the  Ostriches.1 
They  almost  approach  to  the  Nature  of  Beasts, 
and  inhabit  Africa  or  Ethiopia.  They  are  higher 
than  a  Man  sitting  on  Horseback ;  and  they  are 
also  swifter  than  a  Horse  :  their  Wings  being 
only  given  them  to  help  them  in  running ;  for  otherwise 
they  do  not  fly,  nor  do  they  even  rise  from  the  Ground. 
They  have  Hoofs  like  Deer,  and  with  them  they  fight ;  for 
as  they  are  cloven,  they  serve  to  catch  up  Stones,  which 
with  their  Legs  they  hurl  back  in  their  Flight  against  those 
that  chase  them.  It  is  a  Wonder  in  their  Nature,  that 
whatever  they  eat,  although  it  is  without  choice,  they  digest. 
But  their  Stupidity  is  not  less  remarkable ;  for,  high  as  the 
rest  of  their  Body  is,  if  they  hide  their  Head  and  Neck  in  a 
Bush,  they  think  themselves  altogether  concealed.  The 

1  Struihio  camelus.  —  Wern.  Club. 


1 86  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

Advantages  obtained  from  them  are  their  Eggs,  which  are 
so  big,  that  some  use  them  for  Vessels ;  and  their  Feathers 
adorn  the  Crests  and  Helmets  of  Soldiers. 

CHAPTER  II. 
Of  the  Phoenix.1 

THE  Birds  of  Ethiopia  and  India  are  for  the  most  part 
of  a  variety  of  Colours,  and  such  as  can  hardly  be  described : 
but  the  Phoenix  of  Arabia  is  more  noble  than  all  others.  I 

1  The  Phoenix  is  one  of  the  most  renowned  of  the  fabulous  creatures 
of  antiquity.  The  first  detailed  description  and  history  of  this  bird  that 
we  meet  with  is  in  Herodotus  (Lib.  ii.  cap.  Ixxiii.),  whose  story  is  sub- 
stantially the  same  as  what  was  afterwards,  though  with  various  embel- 
lishments, repeated  and  believed  for  more  than  a  thousand  years. 

The  passage  in  which  Tacitus  notices  the  Phoenix  is  very  remarkable, 
and  deserves  to  be  quoted  at  length,  as  being  the  most  authentic  account 
of  it  that  has  been  preserved,  and  also  as  showing  that  so  cautious  and 
accurate  a  man  as  he  is  always  considered  to  be,  entertained  no  kind  of 
doubt  as  to  its  real  existence,  and  its  periodical  appearance  in  Egypt. 

"  A.U  c.  787,  A.B.  34.  Paulus  Fabius  and  Lucius  Vitellius  succeeded 
to  the  consulship.  In  the  course  of  the  year  the  miraculous  bird,  known 
to  the  world  by  the  name  of  the  Phoenix,  after  disappearing  for  a  series 
of  ages,  revisited  Egypt.  A  phenomenon  so  very  extraordinary  could 
not  fail  to  produce  abundance  of  speculation.  The  learning  of  Egypt  was 
displayed,  and  Greece  exhausted  her  ingenuity.  The  facts,  about  which 
there  seems  to  be  a  concurrence  of  opinions,  with  other  circumstances,  in 
their  nature  doubtful  yet  worthy  of  notice,  will  not  be  unwelcome  to  the 
reader.  That  the  Phoenix  is  sacred  to  the  sun,  and  differs  from  the  rest 
of  the  feathered  species  in  the  form  of  its  head,  and  the  tincture  of  its 
plumage,  are  points  settled  by  the  naturalists.  Of  its  longevity  the 
accounts  are  various.  The  common  persuasion  is,  that  it  lives  five 
hundred  years,  though  by  some  writers  the  date  is  extended  to  four- 
teen hundred  and  sixty- one.  The  several  eras  when  the  Phoenix  has 
been  seen  are  fixed  by  tradition.  The  first,  we  are  told,  was  in  the  reign 
of  Sesostris ;  the  second  in  that  of  Amasis ;  and  in  the  period  when 
Ptolemy,  the  third  of  the  Macedonian  race,  was  seated  on  the  throne  of 
Egypt,  another  Phoenix  directed  his  flight  towards  Heliopolis,  attended 
by  a  group  of  various  birds,  all  attracted  by  the  novelty,  and  gazing  with 
wonder  at  so  beautiful  an  appearance.  For  the  truth  of  this  account  we 
do  not  presume  to  answer.  The  facts  lie  too  remote ;  and,  covered  as 
they  are  with  the  mists  of  antiquity,  all  further  argument  is  suspended. 


ROOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  1 87 

can  scarcely  tell  whether  it  be  false  or  no,  that  there  is  never 
more  than  one  of  them  in  the  whole  World,  and  that  it  is 
very  rarely  seen,  ft  is  said  to  be  of  the  size  of  an  Eagle : 
as  bright  as  Gold  about  the  Neck;  the  rest  of  the  Body 
purple  :  the  Tail  azure  blue,  with  Feathers  distinguished  by 
being  of  a  Rose-colour ;  and  the  Head  and  Face  adorned 
with  a  Crest  of  Feathers  on  the  top.  Manilius,  the  noble 
Senator,  excellently  well  versed  in  most  kinds  of  Learning, 
by  his  own  unassisted  Efforts  was  the  first  and  most  diligent 

From  the  reign  of  Ptolemy  to  Tiberius,  the  intermediate  space  is  not 
quite  two  hundred  and  fifty  years.  From  that  circumstance  it  has  been 
inferred  by  many  that  the  last  Phoenix  was  neither  of  the  genuine  kind, 
nor  came  from  the  woods  of  Arabia.  The  instinctive  qualities  of  the 
species  were  not  observed  to  direct  its  motions.  It  is  the  genius,  we  are 
told,  of  the  true  Phoenix,  when  its  course  of  years  is  finished,  and  the 
approach  of  death  is  felt,  to  build  a  nest  in  its  native  clime,  and  there 
deposit  the  principles  of  life,  from  which  a  new  progeny  arises.  The 
first  care  of  the  young  bird,  as  soon  as  fledged,  and  able  to  trust  to  its 
wings,  is  to  perform  the  obsequies  of  its  father.  But  this  duty  is  not 
undertaken  rashly.  He  collects  a  great  quantity  of  myrrh,  and  to  try  his 
strength,  makes  frequent  excursions  with  a  load  on  his  back.  When  he 
has  made  his  experiment  through  a  long  tract  of  air,  and  gains  sufficient 
confidence  in  his  own  vigour,  he  takes  up  the  body  of  his  father,  and  flies 
with  it  to  the  altar  of  the  sun,  where  he  leaves  it  to  be  consumed  in  flames 
of  fragrance.  Such  is  the  account  of  this  extraordinary  bird.  It  has,  no 
doubt,  a  mixture  of  fable ;  but  that  the  Phoenix,  from  time  to  time, 
appears  in  Egypt,  seems  to  be  a  fact  satisfactorily  ascertained." — MURPHY'S 
"Tacitus"  Annals^  Book  vi.  sect.  28.  The  concluding  paragraph  of  this 
second  chapter  of  Pliny  is  the  best  comment  on  this  passage  of  Tacitus. 

The  fable  of  the  Phoenix,  however,  is  not  only  found  in  heathen  au- 
thors, but  is  mentioned  and  believed  by  many  of  the  Jewish  Rabbinical 
writers  also,  and  even  by  some  of  the  early  Fathers  of  the  Christian 
Church.  Nor  are  accounts  of  it  wanting  in  modern  authors,  even  down 
to  so  late  a  period  as  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century ;  for  Sir 
Thomas  Brown,  in  the  12th  chap,  of  the  3d  book  of  his  "Vulgar 
Errors,"  thinks  it  necessary  to  state,  at  some  length,  his  reasons  for  disbe- 
lieving the  existence  of  the  Phoenix.  Cuvier  is  of  opinion  that  the 
original  description  of  the  Phoenix  might  have  been  taken  from  the 
Phasianus  pictus,  a  native  of  China;  which,  if  it  ever  once  flew  into 
Egypt,  would  be  a  sufficient  foundation  for  the  portent.  See  Art. 
"  Phoenix,"  in  the  "  Penny  Cyclopaedia;"  also,  "  Habits  of  Birds,"  in  the 
"  Library  of  Entertaining  Knowledge." —  Wern.  Club. 


188  History  of.  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

of  the  long  Robe  (Toga),  who  wrote  of  this  Bird ;  and  he 
reporteth,  that  no  Man  was  ever  known  to  see  him  feeding : 
that  in  Arabia  he  is  sacred  to  the  Sun  :  that  he  liveth  660 
Years:  and  when  he  groweth  old,  he  builds  a  Nest  with  the 
Twigs  of  Cassia  (Cinnamon)  and  Frankincense  Trees :  and 
when  he  hath  filled  it  with  Spices,  he  dieth  upon  it.  He 
saith,  also,  that  out  of  his  Bones  and  Marrow  there  breedeth 
at  first,  as  it  were,  a  little  Worm,  from  which  proceeds  a 
young  Bird  ;  and  the  first  Thing  this  young  one  does,  is  to 
perform  the  Funeral  Rites  of  the  former  Phoenix,  and  then 
to  carry  away  the  whole  Nest  to  the  City  of  the  Sun,  near 
Panchaea,  and  to  lay  it  down  upon  the  Altar.  The  same 
Manilius  affirmeth,  that  the  Revolution  of  the  great  Year 
agreeth  with  the  Life  of  this  Bird ;  in  which  Year  the  same 
Signification  of  the  Times  and  Stars  return  again  to  their 
first  Points  :  and  that  this  should  begin  at  Noon,  that  very 
Day  when  the  Sun  entereth  the  Sign  Aries.  And  by  his 
saying,  the  Year  of  that  Revolution  was  by  him  showed 
when  P.  Licinius  and  M .  Cornelius  were  Consuls.  Cornelius 
Valerianus  writeth,  that  while  Q.  Plautius  and  Sex.  Papinius 
were  Consuls,  the  Phcenix  flew  into  Egypt.  He  was  con- 
veyed to  the  City  (Rome)  in  the  Time  that  Claudius  the 
Prince  was  Censor,  in  the  eight  hundredth  Year  of  the  City, 
and  was  showed  openly  in  the  Assembly  of  the  People,  as 
appeareth  in  the  Public  Records ;  but  no  Man  ever  made 
any  doubt  that  this  was  a  counterfeit  Phoenix. 

CHAPTER  III. 
Of  Eagles.* 

OF  all  the  Birds  we  know,  the  Eagles  excel  both  in 
Honour  and  Strength.  There  are  six  Kinds  of  them.  The 

1  In  his  account  of  the  Eagles,  when  Pliny  does  not  follow  Aristotle, 
he  may  have  been  chiefly  led  by  the  authority  of  the  books  of  the 
Augurs;  to  whom  the  appearance  of  all  strange  birds  was  officially 
reported,  and  whose  office  led  them  to  study  minutely  their  habits.  The 
absence  of  description  in  their  writings  is  explained  by  the  fact,  that  their 
books  contained  coloured  figures  of  all  the  species  that  came  within  their 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  1 89 

first  named  by  the  Greeks  Melanaetos,  which  is  the  same  as 
Valeria :  the  least  in  size,  but  the  strongest,  and  in  Colour 
black :  in  the  whole  Race  of  Eagles,  she  alone  feedeth  her 
young :  for  the  rest  (as  we  shall  say  hereafter)  beat  them 
away :  she  only  crieth  not,  nor  keepeth  a-grumbling ;  and 
she  keepeth  commonly  on  the  Mountains.  Of  the  second 
Sort  is  Pygargus.  It  keepeth  about  Towns  and  Plains,  and 
hath  a  whitish  Tail.  The  third  is  Morphnos,  which  Homer 
calleth  also  Percnos.  Some  name  it  Plancns  and  Anataria:1 
the  second  in  Bigness  and  Strength,  loving  to  live  about 
Lakes.  Phcemonne,  who  was  said  to  be  the  Daughter  of 
Apollo,  hath  reported,  that  this  Eagle  has  Teeth ;  otherwise 
mute,  and  without  Tongue  :  also,  of  all  others  she  is  the 
blackest,  and  hath  the  longest  Tail.  With  this  agrees 
Botthius.  She  is  subtle ;  for  when  she  hath  seized  on  Tor- 
toises, she  throweth  them  down  from  aloft  to  break  their 
Shells.  It  was  the  Fortune  of  the  Poet  ^Eschylus  to  die  by 
such  Means.  For  it  is  said  to  have  been  foretold  by  the 
Fates  that  he  should  be  killed  on  a  given  Day  by  something 
falling  from  the  Sky  ;  which  he  guarded  against  by  trusting 
to  the  Safety  of  the  open  Sky.  Of  the  fourth  Kind  is  Perc- 
nopterus,  the  same  as  Oripelargus ,  a  kind  of  Vulture  with 
very  small  Wings,  a  Body  bigger  than  the  rest ;  but  a  very 

notice.  It  is  also  probable,  from  Ch.  xv.,  that  the  works  of  the  ancient 
naturalists  were  illustrated  with  representations  of  the  objects  referred  to, 
although  no  such  copies  have  come  down  to  our  times. 

Eagles:  Malanaetos,  Valeria;  Falco  fulims,  Cuv.     The  common  Eagle. 

Gnesios:  F.fufous,\n  perfect  plumage.     The  Golden  Eagle. 
Besides  which,  there  is  F.  imperialis,  Cuv.,  or  Eagle  of  the  Sun ;  a  more 
powerful  bird  than  the  former,  and  to  which  Cuvier  assigns  the  stories 
concerning  the  Eagle  to  be  found  in  the  books  of  the  ancients. 

Pygargus:  perhaps  Falco  albicilla,  LINN. 

Haliatos:  Halicetus  ossifragus^  Cuv.    Fishing  Eagle,  or  Osprey.     The 
Falco  H.  of  Linneus  is  the  Pandion  H.  of  Cuvier. 

Barbata:  ossifraga:  Falco  barbatus,  GMELIN;  Gypaetos  barbatus,  Cuv. 

Morphnos,  &c.,  is  said  by  Cuvier  to  bean  undetermined  species. 

Percnopterus :  the  large  and  small  Vultures  may  be  Vultus  cinereus, 
and  V.  percnopterus,  LINN. — Wern.  Club. 

1  For  killing  of  ducks  and  mallards. 


190  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

Coward,  and  of  an  inferior  Race,  for  a  Raven  will  buffet  her. 
She  hath  a  greedy  Appetite,  and  a  continued  whining  Mur- 
mur. Of  all  the  Eagles  she  only  carrieth  away  the  dead  Prey  ; 
whereas  when  the  others  have  killed  it,  they  settled  upon 
it.  This  Kind  causeth  the  fifth  to  be  called  Gnesws,  as  being 
the  true,  and  the  only  one  of  pure  descent.  This  Eagle  is  of 
a  middle  size,  of  a  reddish  Colour,  and  rare  to  be  seen. 
There  remaineth  the  Haliaetos ;  which  hath  the  sharpest 
Sight  of  all  others,  poising  herself  on  high  ;  and  when  she 
spieth  a  Fish  in  the  Sea,  down  she  comes  upon  it  with  a 
Rush,  and  dashes  the  Waves  aside  with  her  Breast  as  she 
snatcheth  it  up.  That  Eagle  which  we  have  made  the  third, 
haunteth  standing  Waters  to  prey  upon  Water-fowl,  which 
now  and  then  dive  under  the  Water  ;  but  she  seizeth  them 
as  they  become  wearied  and  confounded.  The  Contest  is 
worth  looking  at ;  while  the  Bird  endeavours  to  gain  the 
Shore  for  Refuge,  especially  if  it  be  well  covered  with  thick 
Reeds,  and  the  Eagle  for  her  Part  drives  her  from  thence 
with  a  Blow  of  the  Wing  ;  and  whilst  the  Eagle  striketh, 
and  in  so  doing  falleth  into  the  Lake,  the  Fowl  that  swim- 
meth  beneath  the  Water,  seeing  the  Shadow  of  the  Eagle 
hovering  about  the  Shore,  riseth  up  again  in  another  Place, 
where  her  Pursuer  could  least  have  looked  for  her.  This  is 
the  Cause  why  these  Wild-fowl  commonly  swim  in  Flocks ; 
for  when  they  are  many  together,  they  are  not  troubled, 
because  with  dashing  the  Water  with  their  Wings,  they 
dazzle  the  Sight  of  their  Enemy.  Often,  also,  the  very 
Eagles,  not  able  to  bear  up  the  Weight  they  have  seized,  are 
drawn  under  the  Water  with  it.  The  Haliceetos  only,  before 
her  young  ones  are  yet  feathered,  beats  them,  and  thereby 
forces  them  to  look  full  against  the  Sunbeams;  and  if  she 
notices  any  one  of  them  to  wink,  or  their  Eyes  to  water,  she 
throws  it  out  of  the  Nest,  as  a  bastard  and  inferior  Sort ; 
but  she  educates  that  one  whose  Eye-sight  is  strong  enough 
to  sustain  the  Gaze.  Haliceeti  are  not  a  separate  Kind  of 
Eagles,  but  proceed  from  the  coupling  of  different  Sorts. 
And  that  Kind  which  is  produced  by  them  is  regarded  as  a 
Sort  of  Ossifragus  ;  from  which  are  propagated  the  lesser 


BooKX.]  History  of  Nature.  191 

Vultures ;  and  they  again  the  greater,  which  propagate 
none  whatever.  Some  add  a  Kind  of  Eagle  which  they  call 
Barbatae,  and  the  Tuscans  Ossifragae. 

But  the  three  first  and  the  fifth  Kind  of  Eagles  have  in 
their  Nest  a  Stone  named  JEetites,1  which  some  call  Gagates ; 
of  extensive  use  as  a  Medicine,  and  suffering  no  Injury  from 
Fire.  Now  this  Stone  is  also  pregnant ;  for  if  it  is  shaken, 
another  is  heard  to  rattle  within,  as  if  it  were  in  its  Womb. 
But  that  medical  Virtue  is  not  in  these  Stones  if  they  are  not 
taken  away  out  of  the  very  Nest.  They  make  their  Nests  in 
Rocks  and  upon  Trees :  they  lay  three  Eggs,  but  two  only 
are  hatched :  but  sometimes  they  have  been  seen  to  have 
three  young  ones.  But  one  of  them  they  turn  out  of  the 
Nest,  because  they  will  not  be  troubled  with  feeding  it.  And 
truly  Nature  hath  well  provided  that  at  such  a  Time  they 
shall  not  be  able  to  provide  Meat ;  for  otherwise  they  were 
enough  to  destroy'all  the  Young  of  the  wild  Beasts.  Also  at 
this  Time  their  Talons  are  bent  inward;  and  through  Hunger 
their  Feathers  grow  white,  so  that  they  have  good  Cause  to 
hate  their  Young.  But  when  they  have  cast  them  off,  the 
Ossifrages,  which  are  near  of  Kin  to  them,  receive  them  and 
bring  them  up  with  their  own  Birds.  But  the  parent  Eagles 
persecute  them  still  when  they  are  full  grown,  and  drive 
them  a  great  Way  off,  as  being  their  Rivals  in  the  Prey. 
And  were  it  not  so,  one  pair  of  Eagles  needeth  a  large  Ex- 
tent of  Country  to  furnish  them  with  sufficient  Food.  They 
have,  therefore,  their  several  Coasts  for  Prey,  and  do  not 
trespass  on  those  of  a  neighbouring  pair.  When  they  have 
seized  a  Prey,  they  do  not  carry  it  away  presently,  but  first 
lay  it  down,  and  try  the  Weight  before  they  fly  off  with  it. 
They  do  not  die  for  Age  or  Sickness,  but  of  Famine,  by  rea- 
son that  the  upper  Beak  of  their  Bill  so  far  overgrows  in- 
ward, that  the  Crookedness  does  not  permit  them  to  open  it.2 

1  B.  xxx.  ch.  xiv. ;  B.  xxxvi.  ch.  xxi. ;  B.  xxxvii.  ch.  xi. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  But  this  remarkable  growth  of  the  hook  of  the  beak  in  time  exfo- 
liates ;  when  the  bird  becomes  capable  of  feeding,  and  again  gathers 
health  and  strength.     To  this  reference  is  made,  Psalm  ciii.  5.  —  Wern. 
Club. 


192  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

Their  Manner  is  to  go  to  their  Business  and  to  fly  after 
Noon-day.  For  all  the  former  Hours  of  the  Day  they  sit 
idle,  waiting  until  Men  are  got  together  about  their  Markets 
in  the  Towns.  The  Feathers  of  Eagles  laid  among  those  of 
other  Fowls  will  consume  them.  It  is  said  that  the  Eagle 
only  is  never  smitten  with  Lightning ;  and  therefore  it  is 
judged  that  she  serveth  Jupiter  as  his  Armour-bearer. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

When  Eagles  began  to  be  the  Standards  of  the  Legions ;  and 
what  Fowls  they  are  that  have  War  with  Eagles. 

CAIUS  MARIUS, 

in  his  second 

Consulship, 

ordained 

that   the 

Roman 

Legions  should  only  have  the  Eagle  for  their 

Standard.     For  before   that  Time  the   Eagle  marched 

foremost,  with  four  others  :  Wolves,  Minotaurs,  Horses 

and  Boars;  each  one  in  its  proper  Order.     Not  many 

Years  past  the  Eagle  alone  began  to  be  advanced  in  the 

Battle;  and  the  Rest  were  left  behind  in  the  Camp.     But 

Marius    rejected   them    altogether.      And    since    this    it   is 

observed  that  scarcely  is  there  a  Camp  of  a  Legion  wintered 

at  any  Time,  without  having  a  pair  of  Eagles. 

Of  Eagles,  the  first  and  second  Kind  do  not  prey  only 
upon  the  lesser  Quadrupeds,  but  also  maintain  Battle  with 
Deer.  She  walloweth  in  the  Dust  and  gathereth  a  great 
deal  of  it  among  her  Feathers,  and  then  settling  upon  the 
Horns  she  shakes  it  off  into  his  Eyes,  flapping  it  about  his 
Face  with  her  Wings,  until  she  drive  him  down  over  the 
Rocks.  Nor  is  one  Enemy  enough  for  the  Eagle  ;  but  her 
Fight  with  the  Dragon  is  more  sharp  and  much  more  dan- 
gerous, although  it  is  in  the  Air.  The  Dragon,  out  of  a 
greedy  Desire  to  do  Mischief,  watcheth  to  destroy  the  Eggs 
of  the  Eagle  ;  but  the  Eagle  again  for  this,  wherever  she 


Insignia  Draconarius.     Montfaucon,  pi.  iii.  torn.  iv. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  193 

can  see  him,  catcheth  him  up.  The  Dragon,  with  many 
Folds  windeth  about  his  Wings,  and  so  entangleth  them 
that  they  fall  down  both  together. 

CHAPTER  V. 
A  wonderful  Thing  of  an  Eagle. 

THE  Glory  of  an  Eagle  is  much  celebrated  at  the  City  of 
Sestos ;  for  a  young  Maiden  having  brought  up  a  young 
Eagle,  the  Bird  requited  her  Kindness  by  first  catching 
Birds  for  her,  and  in  process  of  Time  brought  to  her  the 
Produce  of  its  Hunting.  At  length  the  young  Girl  died  ; 
and  when  her  Funeral-fire  was  set  a-burning,  the  Eagle 
threw  itself  on  it,  and  was  consumed  to  Ashes  with  her.  For 
which  Cause  the  Inhabitants  erected  in  that  Place  a  Monu- 
ment, such  as  they  call  Herou'm,  denominated  (the  Tomb)  of 
Jupiter  and  the  Virgin,  because  that  Bird  is  consecrated  to 
the  God. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Of  Vultures. 

THE  black  Vultures  are  the  best  of  that  kind  of  Birds. 
No  man  ever  could  meet  with  their  Nests;  and  therefore 
some  have  thought  (but  untruly)  that  they  fly  to  us  out  of 
an  opposite  World.  But  they  build  in  the  very  highest 
Rocks ;  and  their  young  ones  have  many  Times  been  seen, 
two  generally  together.  Umbricius,  who  was  the  most  skilful 
Aruspex  of  our  Age,  saith,  that  usually  they  lay  three  Eggs ; 
of  which  they  take  one  of  them  to  purify  the  other  Eggs  and 
the  Nest,  and  soon  after  they  cast  it  away :  also  that  they 
fly  two  or  three  days  before  to  the  place  where  there  will  be 
dead  Carcasses. 

CHAPTER  VII. 
Of  the  Sangualis  and  Tmmussulus. 

THE  Roman  Augurs  entertain  much  Doubt  concerning 
the  Sangualis  and  the  Immussulus.  Some  are  of  opinion 
that  the  Immussulus  is  the  Young  of  the  Vulture  :  and  the 
Sangualis,  the  Young  of  the  Ossifraga.  Massurius  saith, 

VOL.  III.  O 


1 94  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  X . 

that  the  Sangualis  and  Ossifraga  are  the  same,  and  that  the 
Iramussulas  is  the  Yonng  of  the  Eagle,  before  it  comes  to 
have  a  white  Tail.  Some  have  affirmed  confidently,  that 
after  (the  Death  of)  Mutius  the  Augur,  there  was  never  any 
of  them  seen  at  Rome  :  but  I  am  rather  of  Opinion  (as  being- 
nearest  the  Truth)  that,  through  the  supine  Negligence  of 
Men  in  all  Things,  they  do  not  know  them. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Of  the  Accipiter)  or  Hawk  kind. 

WE  find  sixteen  Kinds  of  Hawks:1  of  which  the  Circos, 
which  is  lame  of  one  Leg,  is  held  for  the  most  prosperous 
Augury  in  Treaties  of  Weddings  and  of  Cattle.  Also  the 
Triorches,  so  called  from  the  Number  of  its  Testicles,  to 
which  Phemonoe  hath  given  the  principal  Place  in  Au- 
gury. The  Romans  called  it  Buteo ;  and  there  is  still  a 
Family  surnamed  from  it,  because  it  had  settled  upon  the 
Admiral's  Ship,  with  favourable  Auspices.  The  Greeks 
name  that  Kind  YEsalo,  which  alone  is  seen  at  all  Times ; 
whereas  the  rest  are  gone  when  Winter  cometh.  Hawks  are 
divided  into  distinct  Kinds,  by  their  Greediness :  for  some 
never  seize  a  Fowl  but  upon  the  Ground  :  others,  again, 
never  attempt  a  Bird  except  it  is  flying  about  Trees :  and 
others  when  it  is  sitting  on  high :  and  some  when  they  fly  in 
the  open  Air.  Therefore  the  Pigeons,  knowing  the  Danger 
of  these  Things,  so  soon  as  they  espy  them,  either  alight 
upon  the  Ground,  or  else  fly  low  ;  and  thus  help  themselves 
in  a  contrary  Course  to  them.  There  is  in  the  Ocean  an 

1  Accipiter  is  a  general  name  for  Hawks ;  but  when,  as  at  Ch.  xvii.,  it 
is  used  for  a  certain  species,  it  is  Fulco  nisus,  Sparrow  Hawk. 

Triorches:  JFalco  butco,  LINN.     Buteo  vulgaris,  the  Buzzard. 

Circus:  Falco  cervginosus^  Moor  Buzzard. 

Buteo:  Fulco,  SubbuteOj  Hobby;  with  the  moderns  is  a  different 
species  from  the  Triorches:  and  which  Belon  found  to  be  used  as  food 
in  Crete. 

JEsalo:  Falco  asalon,  the  Merlin. 

Cymindis :  Cuvier  says,  a  species  not  determined.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  '195 

Island  of  Africa  called  Cerne,  in  which  all  the  Hawks  of 
Massesylige  build  their  Nests  on  the  Ground :  and  being 
accustomed  to  those  Nations,  they  do  not  breed  elsewhere. 
In  a  Part  of  Thracia  beyond  Ainphipolis,  Men  and  Hawks1 
catch  Birds  together,  in  a  sort  of  Fellowship ;  for  the  Men 
drive  the  Birds  from  the  Woods  and  Reeds,  and  the  Hawks, 
flying  over  their  Heads,  bear  them  to  the  Ground.  On  the 
other  Side  the  Hawkers  divide  the  Prey  with  the  Hawks : 
and  by  Report  they  let  some  Birds  fly  again  aloft  into  the 
Air,  for  the  Hawks  to  catch  for  themselves.  When  the  Time 
of  Hawking  arrives,  they  will  by  their  Cry  and  Manner  of 
Flying  together  invite  them  to  take  the  Opportunity.  It  is 
said  that  Lupi  (Bass)  do  the  like,  about  the  Lake  Mceotis : 
for  unless  they  have  their  Part  with  the  Fishermen,  they 
tear  their  Nets  when  they  are  stretched  forth.  Hawks  do 
not  eat  the  Heart  of  any  Bird.  The  Night-Hawk  is  called 
Cymindis  :  it  is  seldom  seen  in  the  Woods,  and  by  Daylight 
seeth  little.  There  is  deadly  War  between  it  and  the  Eagle ; 
and  often  they  are  both  taken,  by  holding  fast  one  with  the 
other. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Of  the  Coccyx,  which  usually  is  killed  by  Birds  of  its  own 

Kind. 

THE  Cuckoo2  appeareth  to  be  formed  of  an  Hawk, 
changed  in  its  Shape  at  one  certain  Time  of  the  Year :  for 
then  the  other  Hawks  are  not  to  be  seen,  unless  for  some 
very  few  Days.  It  showeth  itself  also  only  for  a  small  Sea- 

1  Falconry  was  little  known  to  the  Romans,    but  it  was   held  as 
honourable  in  some  parts  of  Greece.    Hence  the  Greeks  denominated  the 
falconry  hawks  Hierax,  and  the  falconer  Hieracaros;  although,  perhaps, 
this  idea  of  their  sacred  character  may  have  been  derived  from  Egypt, 
where  the  Accipiter  JEgyptius  was  so  deemed,  because  it  preyed  on  serpents. 
-  Wem.  Club. 

2  The  history  of  the  Cuckoo  may  be  seen  in  Mr.  Yarrell's  "  British 
Birds."   The  ancient  opinion  that  this  bird  became  changed  into  a  Hawk, 
was  derived  from  the  fact  that  one  of  the  migratory  Hawks  appeared 
about  the  time  when  the  Cuckoo  departed.  —  Went.  Club. 


196  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

son  in  Summer,  and  afterwards  appeareth  no  more.  It  is 
the  only  one  of  the  Hawks  that  hath  no  hooked  Talons,  nor 
is  its  Head  like  theirs,  nor  is  it  like  them  in  anything  but 
Colour  ;  and  the  Gape  of  the  Mouth  more  resembleth  that  of 
the  Dove.  Nay,  the  Hawk  will  devour  it  if  they  appear 
together ;  and  it  is  the  only  Bird  of  all  others  that  is  killed 
by  those  of  its  own  kind.  It  altereth  its  Voice  also.  In  the 
Spring  it  cometh  abroad,  and  at  the  rising  of  the  Dog-star  it 
hideth  itself.  It  lays  always  in  other  Birds'  Nests,  and  most 
of  all  in  the  Stock-doves',  commonly  one  Egg  only,  which 
no  other  Bird  doth  besides ;  and  seldom  two.  The  Reason 
why  they  place  their  Young  under  other  Birds  is  because 
they  know  that  all  Birds  hate  them,  for  even  little  Birds 
annoy  them  ;  therefore,  that  the  whole  Race  of  them  should 
not  be  utterly  destroyed,  they  make  no  Nest  of  their  own, 
being  otherwise  timorous  in  their  Nature.  The  Nurse,  there- 
fore, bringeth  up  the  substituted  Chick  in  the  adulterated 
Nest.  And  this  young  Cuckoo,  being  Greedy  by  Nature, 
intercepteth  the  Meat  from  the  other  young  Birds,  and  so 
groweth  fat ;  whereby  it  cometh  into  favour  with  the  Nurse. 
She  rejoiceth  in  its  Appearance,  and  wonders  at  herself  that 
she  hath  hatched  such  a  Chick.  The  rest,  which  are  her 
own,  she  condemns  in  comparison  with  this  one,  as  being 
Strangers,  and  suffereth  them  to  be  devoured  before  her 
Face;  and  at  last  the  young  Cuckoo,  being  able  to  fly, 
seizeth  also  her  Nurse.  And  by  that  Time  no  other  Bird 
is  to  be  compared  to  the  young  Cuckoo  for  Sweetness  of 
Flesh. 

CHAPTER  X. 
Of  the  Milvus.1 

THE  Milvus  is  of  the  same  Kind  of  Hawks,  but  it  differs 
in  size.  This  hath  been  observed  in  them  :  that  being  a 
most  ravenous  Bird,  and  ever  hungry,  yet  they  are  never 
known  to  snatch  any  Food  from  the  Dishes  of  the  Funeral 
Feasts;  nor  from  the  Altar  of  Olympia;  nor  will  they  pluck  it 

1  Falco  mihus,   LINN.;   Milvus  vulgaris,   YARKELL.     The   Kite,   or 
lead.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  197 

out  of  the  Hands  of  those  that  served,  unless  as  a  mournful 
Portent  of  the  Town's-people  that  sacrificed.  These  Birds 
seem,  by  the  turning  of  their  Tails  to  and  fro,  to  have  taught 
the  Art  of  Steering  ;  Nature  showing  that  in  the  Air  which 
is  necessary  in  the  Deep  beneath  !  The  Milvus  also,  is  not 
seen  in  the  Winter  Months  ;  but  they  do  not  go  away  before 
the  Swallows.  Moreover,  it  is  said  that  after  the  Solstices 
they  are  troubled  with  the  Gout. 

CHAPTER  XI. 
Arrangement  of  Birds  into  Genera. 

THE  first  Distinction  in  Birds  is  chiefly  taken  from  their 
Feet,  for  they  have  either  hooked  Talons  or  Toes ;  or  else 
they  are  in  some  sort  broad  arid  flat,  as  Geese,  and  almost 
all  the  Water-birds.  Those  which  have  hooked  Talons  for 
the  most  part  feed  only  upon  Flesh. 

CHAPTER  XII. 
Of  unlucky  Birds  :  the  Comix,  Corvus,  and  Bubo. 

THE  Comix1  liveth  also  on  other  Food  :  for  when  they 
meet  with  a  hard  Nut  which  resists  their  Bill,  they  will  fly 
aloft  and  fling  it  against  the  Rocks  or  Tiles  many  Times 
together,  until  it  is  so  bruised  that  they  can  easily  break  it. 
This  Bird's  Chattering  is  inauspicious,  although  by  some  it 
is  praised.  It  is  observed,  that  from  the  (going  down)  of  the 
Star  Arcturus  to  the  coining  of  the  Swallow,  it  is  not  seen 
elsewhere  but  in  the  Groves  and  Temples  of  Minerva,  and 
that  but  seldom,  as  at  Athens.  Moreover,  this  Bird  only 
feedeth  her  Young  for  a  good  while  after  they  are  able  to 
fly.  She  is  most  unlucky  at  the  Time  of  Young,  that  is, 
after  the  Solstice.  All  other  Birds  of  the  same  Race  drive 
their  young  ones  out  of  the  Nest,  and  force  them  to  fly;  as 
the  Corvus  also,  which  likewise  feed  not  on  Flesh  only  ;  and 
they  likewise,  when  they  perceive  their  young  ones  to  be 

1  Comix :  Corvus  corone,  the  Crow.  Corvus,  C.  corax,  the  Kaven. — 
Wern.  Club. 


198  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

strong,  drive  them  away  far  off.  Therefore  about  little  Vil- 
lages there  are  commonly  not  above  two  Pair  of  them.  And 
about  Cranon  in  Thessaly,  there  is  not  above  one  Pair  of 
them  :  for  the  Parents  yield  the  Place  to  the  Offspring. 
There  are  some  different  Properties  in  this  Bird,  and  that 
before-mentioned.  The  Corvi  breed  before  the  Solstice,  and 
for  sixty  Days  they  are  sick,  chiefly  with  Thirst,  until  the  Figs 
are  ripe  in  Autumn :  and  from  that  Time  the  Cornix  is  dis- 
eased. The  Corvus  for  the  most  part  layeth  five  Eggs,  and 
the  Vulgar  are  of  opinion  that  they  conceive  and  lay  Eggs  at 
the  Bill ;  and  therefore  if  Women  with  Child  eat  a  Raven's 
Egg,  they  shall  be  delivered  of  their  Children  at  the  Mouth: 
and  generally  they  have  difficult  Labour  if  such  an  Egg  be 
brought  into  the  House.  Aristotle  denieth  this :  no  more,  by 
Hercules,  than  the  Egyptian  Ibis  :  but  that  the  kissing  which 
we  see  them  do  often,  is  like  what  Pigeons  also  do.  The 
Corvi  alone  seem  to  have  a  Knowledge  of  their  own 
Significations  in  Presages;  for  when  the  Guests  of  Media 
were  all  slain,  they  all  flew  away  out  of  Peloponnesus 
and  the  Region  of  Attica.  The  worst  Signification  they 
afford  is  when  they  swallow  their  Voice  as  if  they  were 
choked. 

The  Night-birds  have  also  crooked  Talons  ;  as  the  Noctua 
Bubo  and  Ulula.1  All  these  see  but  badly  in  the  Day-time. 
The  Bubo  betokeneth  Mourning,  and  is  most  execrable, 
especially  in  the  Presages  of  public  Affairs :  it  keepeth  in 
solitary  Places ;  and  not  desolate  only,  but  also  such  as  are 
horrible,  and  hard  of  access.  It  is  the  Monster  of  the  Night, 
not  uttering  a  clear  Sound,  but  muttering  a  Groan;  and 
therefore,  if  seen  in  Cities,  or  otherwise  abroad  in  the  Light, 
it  is  a  dreadful  Portent.  I  myself  know,  however,  that  it 
hath  perched  upon  many  Houses  of  private  Men,  and  yet 
no  deadly  Accident  followed.  It  never  flieth  directly  whi- 
ther it  would  itself  go,  but  is  carried  away  across.  One  of 
them  entered  the  very  Sanctuary  of  the  Capitol,  in  the  Year 

1  Noctua,  Strix  otus,  LINN.;  Otus  vulgaris,  YARRELL—  Eared  Owl. 
Bubo,  strix  bubo,  LINN.  ;  see  Ch.  xvi.  Noctua,  strix  flammea,  LIKN. — 
Barn  Owl.—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  199 

when  Sext.  Papellio  Ister  and  L.  Pcdanius  were  Consuls  ;  on 
which  Account,  at  the  Nones  of  March,  the  City  that  Year 
passed  through  a  Lustration. 

CHAPTER   XIII. 
Of  the  Bird  Incendiaria. 

THE  Bird  Incendiaria  is  likewise  inauspicious;  and  we 
find  in  our  Annals,  that  on  account  of  it  the  City  many  a 
Time  hath  been  lustrated  ;  as  when  L.  Cassias  and  C.  Marius 
were  Consuls  :  in  that  very  Year  when,  by  Occasion  of  a  Bubo 
being  seen,  the  Lustration  also  was  performed.  But  what  Bird 
this  is,  neither  do  I  know  nor  yet  find  in  any  Writer.  Some 
give  this  Interpretation  of  Incendiaria,  that  it  is  any  Bird 
which  hath  been  seen  carrying  a  Coal  from  any  kind  of 
Altar.  Others  called  this  Bird  Spinturnix  ;  but  hitherto  I 
have  not  met  with  the  Man  who  would  say,  that  he  knew 
what  Bird  this  should  be. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Of  the  Clivina. 

LIKEWISE  the  Bird  named  in  old  Time  Clivina,  which 
some  call  Clarnatoria,  and  Labeo  by  the  Name  of  Prohi- 
bitoria,  I  perceive  is  as  little  known  as  the  other.  Nigidius 
also  maketh  mention  of  a  Bird  called  Subis,  which  breaks 
the  Eggs  of  Eagles. 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Of  unknown  Birds. 

IN  the  Tuscan  Learning1  there  are  many  Birds  drawn 
which  have  not  been  seen  for  Ages.  And  it  is  surprising 

1  Augury  appears  to  have  particularly  flourished  among  the  Tuscans, 
and  it  was  that  portion  of  ancient  religious  practice  which  mixed  itself 
most  with  the  habits  of  ordinary  life ;  so  that  no  important  step  in  life 
could  be  taken  without  its  authority,  and  no  strange  circumstance,  more 
particularly  regarding  birds,  be  noted  without  the  professors  of  this  art 
being  called  upon  to  supply  an  interpretation  and  provide  a  ceremony  for 


200  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X . 

that  they  are  now  extinct,  when  those   still   continue   in 
Abundance  which  human  Appetite  consumes. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 
Of  Nocturnal  Birds. 

OF  Foreigners,  one  who  is  called  Hylas  is  thought  to 
have  written  learnedly  concerning  Auguries.     He  reporteth 

averting  the  omen.  The  science  was  divided  into  two  portions :  one  of 
which  referred  to  the  auspices,  or  the  view  of  birds ;  and  the  other,  which 
more  especially  bore  the  name  of  augury  —  abavium  garritu  —  consisted 
in  attending  to  the  sounds  uttered  by  birds.  The  birds  themselves  that 
afforded  these  prognostications  were  supposed  to  be  moved  ab  anima 
sua,  by  an  inward  action  proceeding  from  the  influence  of  Deity :  those 
which  by  their  singing  attracted  the  attention  of  the  augurs,  were  termed 
Oscines  (Ch.  xxix.)  :  a  name  which  thus  became  a  denomination  for  all 
singing-birds  :  such  as  were  supposed  to  signify  that  an  action  ought  not 
to  be  persevered  in  were  called  Prohibltorice  (Ch.  xiv.),  and  the  word 
obscene  was  simply  descriptive  of  birds  of  ill  omen,  although  the  term 
has  been  subsequently  applied  with  another  meaning.  A  journal  of  the 
transactions  of  this  college  of  religious  naturalists  was  kept  of  the  occur- 
rence of  every  rare  event,  and  the  appearance  of  every  strange  bird, 
coloured  representations  of  which  were  drawn,  for  reference  on  any  future 
emergency.  For  the  conveniency  of  official  observation,  a  measured 
space,  termed  Pomarium,  round  the  walls  of  the  city,  and  separating  it 
from  the  country,  was  kept  free  from  buildings  or  enclosures ;  and  the 
Palatine  hill  of  Rome  was  in  old  time  excluded  from  the  city  and  the 
Pornserium,  because  it  was  the  resort  of  birds  of  ill  omen.  Spaces  in  the 
sky  were  measured  out  by  the  official  staff;  and  the  birds  themselves 
were  arranged  in  classes,  to  render  the  rules  of  prognostication  more  pre- 
cise. An  augur  who  entered  into  the  spirit  of  his  profession  was  neces- 
sarily skilful  in  ornithology ;  but  those  who  were  more  speculative  would 
make  additions  to  species  or  classes,  whic'h  the  experience  of  others  would 
fail  to  confirm.  The  public  terror  was  thus  entirely  in  the  power  of  the 
augurs,  for  even  a  slight  change  of  structure,  discovered  when  the  bird 
was  cut  asunder  for  sacrifice,  was  deemed  a  portent :  and  there  are  proofs 
that  some  among  them  might  be  induced  to  shape  their  reports  in 
a  manner  to  suit  private  purposes.  The  opinion  of  Accius  on  augurs  is 
thus  given : — 

"  Nihil  credo  auguribus,  qui  aures  verbis  divitant 

Alienas,  suas  ut  auro  locupletent  domos." 
—  Went.  Club. 


BOOK  X .]  History  of  Nature.  20 1 

that  the  Noctua  Bubo,  the  Pious l  that  pecketh  Holes  in 
Trees,  the  Trogon2  and  the  Comix  come  out  of  their  Shells 
with  their  Tails  first;  because  through  the  Weight  of  their 
Heads  the  Eggs  are  turned  (with  the  wrong  End  down- 
ward), and  so  the  hinder  part  of  their  Bodies  lieth  next 
under  the  Hen  to  cherish  with  her  Heat. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Of  the  Noctua. 

THE  Contest  of  the  Noctua  with  other  Birds  is  with  much 
Skill;  for  when  they  are  beset  with  a  Multitude  of  them, 
they  lie  upon  their  Backs,  and  resist  with  their  Feet ;  gather- 
ing themselves  into  a  narrow  Compass,  so  as  to  cover  their 
whole  Body  with  their  Bill  and  Talons.  The  Accipiter,  by  a 
peculiar  Society  of  Nature,  renders  Assistance,  and  shareth 
the  War.  Nigidius  writeth,  that  the  Noctua  for  sixty  Days 
in  Winter  keepeth  close,  and  hath  nine  different  Notes. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Of  the  Picus  Martins. 

THERE  are  also  some  small  Birds  which  have  hooked 
Claws,  as  the  Picus ;  which  is  distinguished  by  the  Name  of 
Martius,  and  are  of  great  Account  in  Auspices.  They  that 
peck  Holes  in  Trees,  and  climb  in  a  pilfering  Way  like 
Cats,  are  of  this  Race.  They  lie  supine,  and  when  they 
strike  with  their  Bills  against  the  Bark,  they  know  by  the 
Sound  that  there  is  Food  within.  These  Birds  alone  bring 
up  their  young  ones  in  Excavations  of  Trees.  And  if  a  Shep- 
herd wedge  up  their  Holes,  the  Vulgar  believe  that  they  will 
unstop  it  by  the  means  of  an  Herb  which  they  apply.  Tre- 
bius  writeth,  that  if  a  Man  drive  a  Spike  or  Wedge  with  all 
his  Might  into  the  Tree  in  which  this  Bird  hath  its  Nest, 
when  she  settleth  upon  the  Tree,  it  will  instantly  fly  out 
(with  such  a  Force)  that  the  Tree  will  give  a  Crack.  In 

1  P.  Martius,  the  greater  Woodpecker. — Wcrn.  Club. 

2  Perhaps  Trygon ;  Columba  tvj-tur,  the  Turtle-dove.  — Wern.  Club. 


202  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X . 

Latium  these  are  the  principal  Birds  in  Auguries,  from  that 
King1  who  gave  them  their  Name.  And  one  Presage  of 
theirs  I  cannot  pass  over :  one  of  them  alighted  upon  the 
Head  of  L.  Tubero,  Praetor  of  the  City,  as  he  was  distri- 
buting Justice  on  the  Judgment-seat  in  the  Forum,  and 
there  rested  so  gently,  that  it  suffered  him  to  take  it  with  his 
Hand.  The  Prophet  answered,  that  if  the  Bird  were  let  go 
it  would  portend  the  Ruin  of  the  Empire  ;  but  if  it  were 
killed,  it  denounced  Death  to  the  Praetor ;  and  he  immediately 
tore  the  Bird  in  pieces :  nor  was  it  long  before  the  Prodigy 
was  fulfilled.  There  are  also  some  of  this  Kind  that  feed 
upon  Mast,  and  many  on  Apples;  but  they  do  not  live  on 
Flesh  only,  except  the  Milvus,  which  causes  that  Bird  to  be 
mournful  in  Auguries. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Of  Birds  that  have  hooked  Talons  and  Fingers. 

THOSE  which  have  crooked  Claws  do  not  assemble  in 
Flocks,  but  prey  each  one  for  itself.  And  almost  all  these 
fly  aloft  except  the  Night-birds ;  and  the  greater  Sort  espe- 
cially. They  are  all  of  them  great  winged,  little  bodied,  and 
walk  with  Difficulty.  They  seldom  perch  upon  Rocks,  being 
hindered  by  the  bending  inward  of  their  Talons,  it  re- 
maineth  that  we  speak  of  the  second  Order  of  Birds,  which 
is  divided  into  two  Sorts :  Oscines  and  Alites.  For  the 
singing  of  the  one  Kind,  and  the  Bigness  of  the  other, 
maketh  the  Distinction.  Therefore  they  are  treated  of  first 
in  Order. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

Of  the  Pavo;2  and  who  was  the  first  that  hilled  them  for 

Food. 

THE  Class  of  the  Pavo  excels  all  the  others,  as  well  in 
Form  as  in  his  Understanding  and  Glory.  For  when  he  is 

1  Picus. 

8  Meleagrix  pano,  LINN.  ;  Pavo  criatatm,  Peacock.     Martial  expresses 
his  regret  that  so  beautiful  a  bird  shouid  be  delivered  over  to  the  cruelty 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  203 

praised  lie  spreadeth  his  Colours,  which  shine  like  precious 
Stones,  and  which  he  most  commonly  turneth  towards  the  Sun; 
for  so  they  shine  with  the  most  glittering  Lustre.  And  at  the 
same  Time  also  his  Tail  takes  the  Shape  of  a  Shell,  and  Shades 
are  formed  by  the  Reflexions  of  other  Colours,  which  shine 
the  brighter  when  contrasted  with  the  dark ;  and  he  draws 
the  whole  of  his  Feathers  together  into  an  Accumulation, 
which  it  rejoiceth  the  Eyes  to  look  at.  When  he  hath  lost 
this  Tail,  which  is  at  the  turn  of  the  Year,  when  Trees  shed 
their  Leaves,  until  it  grows  again  with  the  Flowers,  as  if 
ashamed  and  lamenting,  he  seeketh  retired  Places.  The 
(Peacock)  liveth  twenty-five  Years.  At  three  Years  of  Age 
he  beginneth  to  pour  forth  his  Colours.  Authors  say  that 
he  is  not  only  a  vain-glorious  Creature,  but  also  as  mali- 
cious as  the  Goose  is  unassuming;  for  so  have  some  of  them 
recorded  their  Remarks  on  these  Birds :  but  they  are  not 
satisfactory  to  me. 

The  first  that  killed  a  Peacock  for  the  sake  of  Food  was 
the  Orator  Hortensius,  in  his  solemn  Supper  when  he  was 
consecrated  Priest.  And  M.  Aufidius  Lurco  was  the  first 
that  contrived  to  fatten  them ;  which  was  about  the  Time  of 
the  last  Pirates'  War;  by  which  Invention  of  his  he  obtained 
a  yearly  Profit  of  60,000  Sesterces.1 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

Of  Cocks  ;  and  how  they  are  emasculated.     Also  of  a 
Dunghill  Cock  that  spoke. 

NEXT,  these  our  Sentinels  by  Night,  and  whom  Nature  hath 
created  to  break  Men  of  their  Sleep,  to  arouse  them  to  their 
Work,  have  also  a  Sense  of  Glory.  They  know  the  Stars  ; 
and  they  distinguish  the  third  Hour  portions  by  their  crowing. 

of  a  cook  (Xenia,  65);  and  Tiberius  put  a  man  to  death  for  stealing  a  pea- 
cock e  viridariO)  from  a  green-house.  Long  before  this  they  were  so 
rare,  and  so  much  admired,  as  to  be  among  the  importations  of  Solomon 
(1  Kings,  ch.  x).  They  appear  to  have  been  kept  tame,  even  so  early  as 
the  time  of  Job  (ch.  xxxix).  —  Wern.  Club. 
1  468  lib.  15  shil. 


204  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  X. 

They  go  to  roost  with  the  Sim ;  and  at  the  fourth  watch  in 
the  Camp  they  call  Men  up  to  their  Cares  and  Labour  : 
they  will  not  suffer  the  Sun  to  steal  upon  us  unwarned ;  but 
by  their  crowing  they  proclaim  the  corning  Day,  and  they 
foretel  their  crowing  likewise,  by  clapping  their  Sides.  They 
are  Rulers  of  their  own  Kind  ;  and  in  whatever  House  they 
are,  they  exercise  Sovereignty.  This  is  gotten  by  fighting 
one  with  another,  as  if  they  knew  that  naturally  they  had 
Weapons  given  them  on  their  Legs  for  this  Purpose ;  and 
many  Times  there  is  no  end  until  they  kill  one  another.  But 
if  one  of  them  obtains  the  Palm,  immediately  he  croweth  for 
his  Victory,  and  makes  it  known  that  he  is  truly  the  Chief. 
He  that  is  beaten  hideth  himself  in  Silence  ;  but  beareth  his 
Bondage  with  Reluctance.  And  the  very  common  Sort,  also, 
are  as  proud ;  marching  with  their  Neck  stretched  upright, 
and  the  Comb  lifted  aloft.  And  there  is  not  a  Bird  besides 
that  so  often  looketh  at  the  Sky,  at  the  same  Time  erecting 
his  arched  Tail ;  and  therefore  it  is,  that  they  are  a  terror  to 
Lions,  which  of  all  wild  Beasts  are  the  most  courageous. 

Now  of  these  Cocks,  some  are  bred  for  nothing  but  Wars 
and  constant  Battles  ;  and  these  Cocks  have  rendered  illus- 
trious the  Countries  from  whence  they  come,  as  Ilhodus  and 
Tenagra ;  in  a  second  Place  of  Honour  are  esteemed  those  of 
Melos  and  Chalcis ;  so  that  to  those  Birds,  for  their  Worth, 
the  Roman  Purple  affords  much  Honour.  These  are  they 
from  which- the  Tripudium  solistimum1  is  observed.  These  rule 
our  Magistracy  every  Day ;  and  they  open  or  shut  their 
Houses  to  them ;  they  urge  forward  or  hold  back  the 
Roman  Rods ;  they  order  or  forbid  the  Battle,  and  were  the 
Auspices  of  all  our  Victories  throughout  the  World  ;  and, 

1  A  kind  of  omen  derived  from  the  manner  of  their  eating.  It  was 
the  business  of  the  proper  officers  to  watch  this :  of  others,  their  mode  of 
walking ;  of  others,  their  voice  and  crowing;  of  others,  their  air  and  coun- 
tenance ;  and  the  principal  of  all  attended  to  the  appearance  of  their 
entrails  in  sacrifice.  As  the  cock  was  peculiarly  an  emblem  of  watchful- 
ness, the  augury  derived  from  him  was  of  particular  importance  in  the 
army;  and  cocks  continued  to  be  carried  with  armies  in  comparatively 
modern  times,  professedly  to  proclaim  the  hours  by  their  crowing,  but 
certainly  through  the  lingering  remains  of  ancient  custom.  —  Wer?i.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  205 

more  than  all,  these  Birds  govern  the  Government  of  all 
Nations  upon  the  Earth  :  acceptable  to  the  Gods  in  Sacrifice 
with  the  small  Fibres  of  their  inwards,  as  the  best  Victims. 
Their  crowing  out  of  Order,  and  in  the  Evening,  possesseth 
a  Portent;  for  by  their  crowing  all  Night  long,  they  pre- 
saged to  the  Boeotians  that  noble  Victory  over  the  Lacedas- 
monians ;  this  Interpretation  being  offered,  because  that 
Bird  never  croweth  if  he  is  overcome.  If  they  are  castrated 
they  cease  to  crow.  And  this  Operation  is  practised  upon 
them  in  two  Ways  :  either  by  burning  their  Loins  with  a  hot 
Iron,  or  by  cauterising  their  Thighs  beneath,  and  then  pre- 
sently applying  to  the  Ulcer  Potter's  Chalk  ;  and  thus  they 
will  sooner  grow  fat.  At  Pergamus  every  Year  there  is  an 
Exhibition  publicly  afforded  to  the  People,  of  Cocks,  as  of 
Gladiators.  We  find  in  our  Annals,  that  in  the  Territory  of 
Ariminum,  when  Marcus  Lepidus  and  Quintus  Catnlus  were 
Consuls,  a  Dung-hill  Cock  spoke ;  and  it  was  at  the  Villa  of 
Galerius.  But  this*  only  happened  once,  so  far  as  I  can 
learn. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

Of  Geese:  and  who  first  ate  the  Liver  of  the  Goose.     Also  of 
the  Fat  of  the  Goose  of  Comagene. 

THE  Goose1  likewise  is  very  vigilant,  as  witness  the 
Capitol  defended  at  that  Time  when,  through  the  Silence  of 
the  Dogs,  all  was  betrayed.  And  therefore  the  first  Thing 
the  Censors  do,  is  to  place  Food  for  the  Geese.  Moreover, 
they  are  said  to  be  much  given  to  Love ;  for  at  Argos  there 
was  a  Goose  that  was  enamoured  of  a  fair  Boy  named 
Olenus :  as  also  of  Glauce,  who  used  to  play  on  the  Lute 
(Cithara)  before  King  Ptolemy:  and  it  is  reported  that  at 
the  same  Time  a  Ram  was  in  love  with  her.  It  may  be 
thought  also  that  there  is  visible  in  this  Creature  some 

1  Anas  anser,  LINN.  The  narrative  of  the  preservation  of  the  Capitol 
from  the  attack  of  the  Gauls,  is  found  in  all  the  Roman  histories.  But 
Geese  were  held  sacred  long  before  this :  perhaps  as  an  emblem  of  watch- 
fulness.— Wern.  Club. 


206  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

Sparks  of  Wisdom.  For  Lacydts  the  Philosopher  is  said  to 
have  had  one  of  them  attached  to  him  as  a  constant  Com- 
panion, which  would  never  leave  him  Night  or  Day,  neither 
in  the  open  Street,  nor  at  the  Baths.  But  our  Countrymen 
are  wiser,  who  know  how  to  make  a  Dainty  of  their  Liver.1 
In  those  Geese  that  are  crammed  (the  Liver)  groweth  ex- 
ceedingly great;  and  when  it  is  taken  out  it  plumps  up  if  it 
is  steeped  in  Milk  and  Mead.  With  good  Cause,  therefore,  it 
is  in  Controversy  who  first  invented  so  great  a  Good  :  whe- 
ther it  was  Scipio  Metellus,  a  consular  Man,  or  M.  Sestius, 
who  in  the  same  Age  was  a  Roman  Knight.  Buc  it  is  certain 
that  Messalinus  Cotta,  Son  of  Messala  the  Orator,  found  out 
to  broil  the  broad  Feet  of  Geese,  and  with  Cocks'  Combs  to 
compose  a  Dish  of  Meat :  for  I  will  truly  give  every  Man 
his  Due  for  the  Praise  of  his  Cookery.  It  is  a  wonderful 
Thing  of  these  Birds,  that  they  should  walk  all  the  Way 
from  Morini  to  Rome.  Those  that  were  weary  were  brought 
forward  to  the  Forewent ;  and  so  the  rest,  by  crowding  toge- 
ther as  they  naturally  do,  drive  these  tired  ones  before  them. 
A  second  Revenue  of  such  Geese  as  are  white  is  their  Down. 
In  some  Places  they  are  plucked  twice  a  Year :  and  they  are 
clothed  with  Feathers  again,  and  the  nearer  to  the  Flesh  so 
much  the  softer.  But  that  which  is  brought  out  of  Germany 
is  most  esteemed.  The  Geese  there  are  white,  but  of  less 
size ;  and  they  are  called  Ganzse.2  The  Cost  of  these  Fea- 
thers is  at  five  Denarii3  a  Pound ;  and  hence  it  is  that  so 
many  Charges  are  made  against  the  Prefects  of  the  auxiliary 
Soldiers,  that  they  send  whole  Cohorts  from  the  Guard 

1  Martial  says,  they  caused  the  liver  to  grow  to  be  as  large  as  the 
goose : — 

"  Adspice  quara  turneat  magno  jecur  ansere  majus  ! " 

Palladius  says,  that  for  this  purpose  they  were  fed  on  pounded  figs  soaked 
in  water,  and  rolled  into  pellets :  and  that  this  treatment  began  when 
they  were  thirty  days  old.  They  were  also  exposed  to  intense  heat.  — 
Wern.  Club. 

2  Some  copies  read  Gantse ;  a  word  this,  perhaps,  the  origin  of  our 
word  Gander. — Wern.  Club. 

3  3  shil.  Id.  ob. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  '207 

Station  to  hunt  Geese.  And  to  this  extent  is  Delicacy  grown, 
that  without  this  Material  even  our  Men  are  not  able  to  bear 
their  Pillows. 

To  that  part  of  Syria  called  Comagene,1  we  are  beholden 
for  another  Invention.  The  Grease  of  Geese  with  Cinnamon 
is  put  into  a  brazen  Pot,  and  covered  over  with  abundance  of 
Snow,  and  they  let  it  steep  well  infused  in  this  cold  Matter, 
to  use  in  that  noble  Medecine  which  from  that  Country  is 
called  Conuiirenum. 

Of  the  Geese  kind  are  the  Chenalopeces  ;2  and  (than 
which  there  is  not  a  daintier  Dish  known  in  Britain)  the 
Chenerotes,3  which  are  less  than  the  wild  Geese. 

The  Tetrao*  have  a  shining  Appearance,  that  looks  be- 
coming in  their  absolute  Blackness ;  and  their  Eyebrows  are 
red  like  Scarlet. 

Another  Kind  there  is  of  them,  bigger  than  Vultures,5 
and  in  Colour  much  resembling  them.  And  there  is  not  a 
Fowl,  except  the  Ostrich,  that  weigheth  more  heavy  than 
they.  For  they  grow  to  that  size,  that  a  Man  can  hardly 
lift  them  from  the  Ground.  These  breed  in  the  Alps  and 
the  North  Countries.  If  they  are  confined  in  an  Aviarium, 
they  loose  their  Flavour :  they  die  through  Sullenness,  by 
holding  in  their  Breath.  Next  to  these  are  such  as  in 
Spain  are  called  the  Avis  Tarda,6  and  in  Greece  Otides  : 
but  they  are  not  approved  as  Food,  for  the  Marrow  in 
their  Bones,  if  let  out,  instantly  produceth  an  insufferable 
Smell. 

1  See  B.  xxix.  ch.  iii.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Anas  j?Egyptiaca,  Cuv.    Egyptian  Goose.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  A  word  equivalent  to  Anser  amiabiliti,  and  supposed  to  describe  the 
Anas  Bernicla,  LINN.     Bernacle  Goose.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Tetrao  Tetrix,  LINN.     Black  Cock.—  Wern.  Club. 

5  Tetrao  Urogallus,  LINN.     Caper  Cailzie.  —  Wern.  Club. 

6  Otis  tarda,  Great  Bustard.—  Wern  Club. 


208  History  of  Nat  are.  [BooK  X. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Of  the  Grus,1  Ciconiaf  Olorf  some  foreign  Birds,  and  the 
Coturnix  and  Glottis. 

THE  Nation  of  the  Pigmies  enjoys  a  Truce  when  (as  we 
have  said  before)  the  Cranes,  who  wage  War  with  them,  de- 
part into  other  Countries.  And  if  a  Man  consider  from  how 
far  they  come,  from  the  Levant  Sea,  it  is  an  immense  Extent. 
When  they  set  forward  it  is  by  general  Consent.  They  fly  high, 
to  have  a  good  look  out ;  and  they  choose  a  Leader,  whom 
they  follow.  In  the  extremity  of  their  Host  there  are  some 
disposed  which  utter  Cries,  and  keep  the  Flock  in  orderly 
Arrangement  with  their  Voice ;  and  this  they  do  by  turns. 
They  maintain  a  Watch  all  the  Night  long,  and  the  Sentinels 
hold  a  little  Stone*  in  their  Foot,  which  by  falling  from  it,  if 
they  sleep,  reproves  them  for  their  Negligence.  All  the  rest 
sleep,  couching  their  Heads  under  their  Wings;  and  they 
stand  sometimes  upon  one  Foot,  and  sometimes  on  the  other. 
The  Leader  beareth  his  Neck  aloft  in  the  Air  as  he  looks 
forward,  and  giveth  his  Word  what  is  to  be  done.  These 

1  Ardea  grus,  LINN.    The  Crane.     For  their  hostility  to  the  Pigmies, 
see  B.  iv.  Ch.  xi.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Ardea  ciconia,  LINN.     The  Stork.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Anas  olor,  and  A.  cygnus,  LINN.     The  wild  and  tame  Swan. 

The  lamentable  singing  referred  to  by  the  author  is  often  alluded  to 
by  ancient  writers ;  but  nothing  of  the  sort  has  been  witnessed  by  modern 
observers.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  "  The  old  grammarian,  Johannes  Tzetzer.  has  rendered  this  story 
into  Greek  verse;  and  the  historian  Ammianus  Marcellinus  tells  us, 
that  in  imitation  of  the  ingenuity  of  the  Crane  to  insure  vigilance,  Alex- 
ander the  Great  was  accustomed  to  rest  with  a  silver  ball  in  his  hand, 
suspended  over  a  b'rass  basin,  which,  if  he  began  to  sleep,  might  fall  and 
awake  him."  —  "  Habits  of  Birds,"  in  Library  of  Entertaining  Knowledge. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  209 

Cranes,  when  tamed,  are  very  playful ;  and  they  will,  one  by 
one,  dance  round  with  an  odd  sort  of  Walk.  It  is  certain 
that  when  they  are  about  to  take  flight  over  the  Pontus, 
they  will  fly  first  of  all  to  the  Straits  between  the  two 
Capes,  Criu-Metophon  and  Caranibis,  and  then  presently 
they  steady  themselves  with  Ballast.  When  they  have 
passed  the  middle  they  fling  away  the  Stones  from  their 
Feet;  and  when  they  are  come  to  the  Continent  they  dis- 
gorge the  Sand  from  their  Throat. 

Cornelius  Nepos,  who  died  when  Divus  Augustus  was 
Sovereign,  where  he  wrote,  That  a  little  before  his  Time 
Men  began  to  fatten  the  captured  Thrushes,  adds,  That 
Storks  were  held  for  a  better  Dish  than  Cranes.  But  now, 
no  Man  will  touch  (a  Stork) ;  while  the  Crane  is  sought  after 
among  the  principal  Delicacies.  From  whence  these  Storks 
should  come,  or  whither  they  return,  is  not  yet  known.  No 
doubt  they  come  from  remote  Countries,  and  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  Cranes ;  only  that  the  Cranes  are  our  Guests 
in  Winter,  and  the  Storks  in  Summer.  When  they  are 
about  to  depart  they  assemble  in  a  Place  appointed,  and 
they  form  such  a  Company  that  not  one  of  the  Kind  is  left, 
unless  it  be  some  one  that  is  not  at  Liberty.  They  take  their 
Departure  on  the  given  Day,  as  if  by  an  established  Law. 
Although  it  appeared  that  they  were  about  to  remove,  yet 
no  Man  hath  seen  the  Flock  as  it  went ;  neither  do  we  see 
them  come,  but  we  know  that  they  are  come,  and  they  do 
the  one  and  the  other  always  by  Night.  And  although  they 
fly  away  and  return,  yet  they  are  supposed  never  to  have 
arrived  anywhere  but  in  the  Night.  There  is  a  Place  in  the 
open  Plains  of  Asia,  called  Pithonos-Come,  where  they 
assemble,  and  make  a  murmuring  Noise  among  themselves, 
and  tear  in  Pieces  that  one  which  was  the  last  to  arrive;  and 
then  they  depart.  It  hath  been  noted,  that  after  the  Ides  of 
August  they  are  not  easily  seen  there. 

Some  affirm  that  Storks  have  no  Tongues.  So  highly 
are  they  respected  for  destroying  Serpents,  that  in  Thessaly 
it  was  a  capital  Crime  to  kill  a  Stork,  and  by  Law  he  is 
punished  the  same  as  for  slaying  a  Man. 

VOL.  in.  p 


210  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X . 

After  the  same  manner  Geese  and  Swans  associate  toge- 
ther ;  but  they  are  seen  in  their  Flight.  They  make  Way 
forcibly  after  the  Manner  of  the  Beaks  of  Ships,  for  by  this 
Means  they  more  easily  divide  the  Air  than  if  they  drove  it 
before  them  with  a  straight  Front.  The  Flock  is  spread  out 
by  Degrees,  expanding  itself  like  a  Wedge  behind,  and  so 
affords  a  great  Space  to  the  Wind,  which  impels  them.  They 
rest  their  Necks  upon  those  that  are  before  them,  and  as  the 
Leaders  become  weary  they  retire  behind.  Storks  seek  the 
same  Nest,  and  they  support  their  aged  Parents  in  return  for 
their  Kindness. 

Some  say  there  is  lamentable  singing  at  the  Death  of 
Swans,  but  untruly,  as  I  suppose  ;  for,  from  some  Experience, 
these  Birds  devour  one  another's  Flesh  among  themselves. 

But  this  Discourse  of  those  Fowls  that  make  Voyages  in 
Flocks  over  Seas  and  Lands  will  not  allow  me  to  put  off 
speaking  of  lesser  Birds  also,  which  are  of  the  same  Nature; 
for  those  before-named  may  seem  to  be  induced  to  do  so  by 
the  size  and  strength  of  their  Bodies.  Quails,1  therefore, 
always  come  before  the  Cranes.  It  is  a  little  Bird,  and  when 
it  comes  to  us,  it  belongs  to  the  Ground  rather  than  the  Air. 
The  Manner  of  their  flying  is  like  the  former ;  not  without 
some  Danger  of  the  Sailors  when  they  approach  near  to 
Land.  Because  they  often  settle  upon  their  Sails,  which  they 
do  always  in  the  Night,  and  sink  Vessels.  Their  Journey  is 
through  established  Resting-places.  In  the  Southwind  they 
do  not  fly;  because  it  is  wet  and  heavy.  And  yet  they 
choose  to  be  conveyed  by  the  Wind,  on  Account  of  the 
Weight  of  their  Bodies  arid  their  feeble  Strength.  Hence  as 
they  fly  their  complaining  expresses  their  Effort.  Com- 
monly, therefore,  they  fly  with  a  North  Wind,  the  Ortygo- 
metra  being  the  Leader.  The  first  of  them,  as  it  approacheth 

1  Tetrao  coturnix,  LINN.  Some  have  supposed  the  Ortygometra  (Mo- 
ther of  Quails)  to  be  only  a  larger  individual  of  this  species ;  others  sup- 
pose it  the  Rail,  Eallus  crcx.  It  is  judged  with  some  probability  that  not 
this  species,  but  the  Katta  (Tetrao  alchala,  LINN.)  is  the  bird  referred  to, 
under  the  name  of  Quail,  in  the  Books  of  Moses,  and  by  David,  Ps.  Ixxviii. 
—  Wern,  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  21 1 

the  Land,  is  seized  by  the  Hawk.  Whenever  they  are  upon 
their  Departure  hence  they  solicit  other  Birds  to  accompany 
them,  and  by  their  Inducements  there  go  with  them  the 
Glottis,1  Otis,2  and  Cychramus.3  The  Glottis  putteth  forth  a 
long  Tongue ;  from  which  it  hath  its  Name.  This  Bird  is 
very  forward  at  the  first  setting  out  on  the  pleasant  Journey; 
but  it  findeth  Repentance  in  the  Pain  of  the  Flight.  To  go 
back  again  without  Company  it  is  ashamed ;  and  so  to  lag 
behind  ;  neither  does  it  ever  persevere  for  more  than  one 
Day;  for  at  the  next  Resting-place  it  deserteth  the  Com- 
pany ;  but  it  meeteth  with  others  which  the  Year  before  were 
left  behind  :  and  thus  they  do  from  Time  to  Time.  The 
Cychramus  is  of  a  more  persevering  Nature,  and  maketh 
Haste  to  reach  those  Parts  which  it  so  much  desireth :  and 
therefore  in  the  Night  it  rouses  them,  and  puts  them  in 
mind  of  the  Journey.  The  Otis  is  less  than  the  Bubo,  and 
larger  than  the  Noctua,  having  two  Ears,  formed  of  Fea- 
thers standing  aloft ;  from  which  it  took  its  Name.  But  in 
Latin  some  have  called  it  Asio.  This  Bird,  besides,  is  skilful 
in  Imitation,  like  a  Parasite;  and,  in  a  particular  Way,  a 
Dancer.  It  is  easily  taken  as  the  Noctua,  while  it  looks 
intently  on  any  one,  by  another  that  goes  round  it.  But  if  a 
contrary  Wind  should  begin  to  hinder  the  Flight  of  the 
Troop,  they  render  their  Progress  steady  by  grasping  small 
weighty  Stones,  or  stuffing  their  Throat  with  Sand.  The 
Seed  of  the  Veratrum  is  a  grateful  Food  to  Quails;  for 
which  Reason  they  are  banished  from  Table.  At  the  same 
Time  they  are  accustomed  to  slaver  at  the  Mouth,  by  Reason 
of  the  comitial  Disease;4  which  they  only  are  the  Creatures, 
except  Man,  that  are  subject  to. 

1  Totanus  glottis,  Cuv.    Greenshank.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Otus  brachyotus,  Cuv.     Small-ear'd  Owl.  —Wern.  Club. 

3  Cychramis,  or  Cynchramus.     Belon  supposes  it  the  Emberiza  mili- 
aria,  Common  Bunting;  but  according  to  Aldrovandus,  E.  horlulana, 
the  Ortolan.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Comitial  disease,  or  Epilepsy.    The  author  forgets  what  he  had  said 
of  the  Elk  being  subject  to  it—  Wern.  Club. 


212  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

Of  the  Hirundo,  Merula,  Turdus,  Sturnus,  Turtur,  and 
Palumbus. 

THE  Hirundo1  also  (the  only  Birds  among  those  that  have 
not  crooked  Claws,  which  feed  upon  Flesh)  are  gone  from 
us  all  the  Winter.  But  they  go  no  further  than  to  neigh- 
bouring Places,  where  they  follow  the  sunny  Recesses  of  the 
Mountains,  and  where  many  Times  they  are  found  naked, 
and  without  Feathers.  It  is  said  they  never  build  under  any 
Roof  in  Thebes,  because  that  City  had  often  been  taken ; 
nor  at  Bizia  in  Thrace,  on  Account  of  the  Wickedness  of 
Tereus.  Ccecina  of  Volaterrae,  of  the  Equestrian  Order,  and 
Master  of  the  Chariots,  was  accustomed  to  bring  with  him 
into  the  City  a  Number  of  these  Swallows,  which  he  sent  off 
to  his  Friends  as  Messengers  of  Victory;  and  they  would 
return  to  the  same  Nest  from  which  they  were  taken, 
smeared  over  with  the  Colour  of  Victory.  Also  Fabius  Pictor 
reporteth  in  his  Annals,  that  when  a  Roman  Garrison  was 
besieged  by  the  Ligustini,  a  Swallow  was  taken  from  her 
little  ones  and  brought  to  him,  that  by  the  Number  of  Knots 
in  a  Thread  tied  to  her  Foot  he  should  signify  to  them  on 
what  Day  they  ought  to  make  a  Sally  to  meet  the  coming 
Help. 

Merulae,2  Turdi,  and  Sturni,  after  the  same  manner,  quit 
us  for  the  neighbouring  Places.  But  these  do  not  cast  their 
Feathers,  nor  lie  hid ;  but  are  seen  often  in  Places  where 
they  seek  Meat  to  serve  them  in  Winter.  And  therefore 
Turdi  are  chiefly  seen  in  Germany  in  Winter. 

The  Turtle  more  truly  hides  herself,  and  sheds  her 
Plumage. 

Palumbes  also  leave  us,  but  where  they  go  is  uncertain. 

1  The  Swallow  tribe.    See  Chap,  xxxiii.—  Wern.  Club. 

2  Turdus  merula,  LINN.  ;  the  Blackbird.     Turdi :  Turdus  musicus,  the 
Thrush;   and  perhaps,  also,  T.  Iliacus,  LINN.;  the  Redwing.     Sturni: 
Sturnus  vulgaris,  LINN.;  the  Starling. —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X .]  History  of  Nature.  213 

The  Race  of  Starlings  have  the  Property  to  fly  m  Troops,1 
and  in  their  Flight  to  gather  round  into  a  kind  of  Ball, 
where  every  one  hath  a  tendency  to  be  in  the  midst. 

Of  all  Birds,  the  Swallow  alone  flieth  in  a  bending 
Course,  which  is  swift  and  easy ;  and  therefore  it  is  not  so 
liable  to  be  seized  by  other  Birds.  To  conclude,  it  is  the 
only  Bird  that  never  feedeth  but  while  flying. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

What  Birds  continue  with  us  all  the  Year;  which  are  half-year 
Birds,  and  which  only  for  three  Months. 

THERE  is  great  Difference  in  the  Seasons  of  Birds.  Some 
remain  the  whole  Year,  as  Columbae ;  others  half  the  Year, 
as  Hirundines ;  and  some  but  a  quarter,  as  Turdi  and  Tur- 
tures.  Some  go  away  as  soon  as  they  have  brought  out  their 
Young,  as  the  Galgulus2  and  Upupa.3 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 
Strange  Stories  of  Birds. 

THERE  are  Writers  who  affirm,  that  every  Year  there  are 
Birds  which  fly  out  of  Ethiopia  to  Ilium  ;  and  there,  about 
the  Sepulchre  of  JHfemnon,  fight  each  other:  for  which  Cause 
they  call  them  Meinnonides.4  And  Cremutius  delivers  it  as 

1  Mr.  Knapp,  in  his  "  Journal  of  a  Naturalist,"  observes,  "  there  is 
something  singularly  curious  and  mysterious  in  the  conduct  of  these  birds 
previous  to  their  nightly  retirement,  by  the  variety  and  intricacy  of  the 
evolutions  they  execute  at  that  time.    They  will  form  themselves,  per- 
haps, into  a  triangle,  then  shoot  into  a  long  pear-shaped  figure,  expand 
like  a  sheet,  wheel  in  a  ball,  as  Pliny  observes,  eachjndividual  striving  to 
get  into  the  centre,  with  a  promptitude  more  like  parade  movements  than 
the  actions  of  Birds."—  Wern.  Club. 

2  Sometimes    written   Galbulus.     Oriolus   galbula,  LINN.;    Golden 
Oriole.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  Upupa  epops,  LINN.     Hoopoe. — Wern.  Club. 

4  JElian  (B.  v.  ch.  i.)  describes  these  birds  as  being  black,  and  bear- 
ing a  general  resemblance  to  the  Hawk  tribe ;  but  feeding  on  seeds,  and 
not  on  flesh.    Their  visits  to  the  Tumulus  were  in  the  autumn ;  and  they 


214  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

upon  his  own  Knowledge,  that  every  fifth  Year  the  same 
Birds  do  the  like  in  Ethiopia  about  the  royal  Palace  of 
Memnon. 

In  a  similar  manner,  the  Meleagrides 1  fight  in  Bcaotia. 
These  Meleagrides  are  a  kind  of  gallinaceous  Birds  of  Africa, 
hunch-backed,  the  Bunch  scattered  with  Feathers  of  different 
Colours.  Of  all  foreign  Birds  these  are  the  last  admitted  at 
Table,  by  reason  of  their  strong,  harsh  Taste.  But  it  is  the 
Sepulchre  of  Meleager  which  hath  given  them  Credit. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 
Of  Birds  named  Seleucides.* 

THE  Birds  are  called  Seleucides,  which  come  in  conse- 
quence of  the  Prayers  offered  to  Jupiter  by  the  Inhabitants 
of  Mount  Casius,  against  the  Locusts,  when  they  devastate 
their  Crops.  But  from  whence  they  come,  or  whither  they 
go,  no  Man  knovveth ;  for  they  are  never  seen  but  when 
there  is  need  of  their  Help. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 
Of  the  Ibis.3 

THE  Egyptians  also  invoke  their  Ibis  against  the  coming 
of  Serpents ;  and  the  Eleans  the  God  Myiagrosf  to  be  deli- 
flew  about  it,  divided  into  two  troops,  with  the  appearance  of  a  combat, 
such  as  were  common  to  the  Greeks  around  the  tombs  of  their  heroes : 
and  it  was  probably  this  habit  which  chiefly  attracted  their  attention. 
Dalechampius  supposes  them  to  have  been  a  kind  of  crows.  Ovid  gives 
the  popular  legend  of  these  birds,  as  deriving  their  origin  from  the 
funeral  pile  of  Memnon.  (B.  xiii.  ch.  iii.)  —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Numida  meleagris,  Cuv.  Guinea  Fowl.     At  Rome  they  were  known 
by  the  name  of  African  Hens.  — Wern.  Club. 

2  It  seems  impossible  to  trace  what  these  Birds  are.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  Ibis  religiosa^  Cuv.     The  Ibis.     Mummies  of  this  bird  are  now 
found  in  abundance  in  Egypt.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Many  of  the  gods  of  the  Heathens  obtained  names  or  epithets  from 
from  such  exploits  as  this.    Beelzeloul,  or  Beelzeloub,  mentioned  in  the 
New  Testament,  was  so  denominated  for  the  same  reason.—  Wern,  Club. 


BOOK  X .]  History  of  Nature.  2 1 5 

vered  from  the  Pestilence  of  a  Multitude  of  Flies,  which 
Flies  died  all  at  once  on  the  very  Day  on  which  he  was 
appeased. 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

What  Birds  do  not  exist  in  some  Places ;  and  which  change 
their  Colour  and  Voice :  and  of  the  Nightingale. 

BUT,  concerning  the  Departure  of  Birds,  Noctuae1  also  are 
reported  to  lie  hid  for  a  few  Days ;  and  of  this  kind  there 
are  none  in  the  Island  of  Crete.  Even  if  any  one  is  brought 
there  it  dies.  For  this  also  is  among  the  wonderful  Differ- 
ences of  Nature  ;  she  denies  some  Things  to  certain  Places, 
as  the  Kinds  of  Seeds  and  Fruits ;  and  so  also  that  living 
Creatures  do  not  breed  is  commonly  noted  :  but  that  those 
Things  should  die  as  soon  as  they  are  brought  thither  is 
wonderful.2  What  is  that  which  is  so  contrary  to  the  Health 
of  one  Kind,  or  what  is  this  Envy  of  Nature?  or  why  should 
Birds  be  restrained  within  any  Limits  in  the  whole  Earth? 
Rhodes  doth  not  possess  an  Eagle.  In  the  Tract  of  Italy 
beyond  the  Po,  near  the  Alps,  there  is  a  Lake  which  the 
Inhabitants  call  Larius;  and  it  is  pleasant  for  Groves  and 
Fields ;  and  yet  the  Stork  never  travels  thither ;  nor  within 
the  eighth  Milestone  from  it.  In  the  extensive  Country  of 
the  Insubres,3  near  adjoining,  there  are  Swarms  of  Gracculi4 
and  Monedulse;5  which  are  the  only  Birds  whose  Thievishness 
for  Silver  and  Gold  is  wonderful.  It  is  said,  that  in  the 
Territory  of  Tarentum  there  are  no  Woodpeckers.  It  is  but 

1  A  very  small  species  of  Owl:  probably  Noctua  passerina,   Cuv. 
JElian,  who  confirms  what  Pliny  says  of  this  bird  in  Crete  (B.  v.  ch.  ii.), 
distinguishes  it  from  the  Scops  Owl,  ch.  xlix. —  Wern.  Club. 

2  The  instance  of  a  similar  nature  in  Ireland  is  a  strong  corroboration 
of  this ;  and  in  explanation  modern  philosophy  is  as  much  at  a  loss  as  the 
ancient.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  A  Gallic  people,  mentioned  B.  iii.  ch.  xvii.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  The  word  "  Graculus  "  is  sometimes  employed  by  the  older  writers 
as  a  generic  name :  but  when  otherwise,  it  is  commonly  understood  as  the 
Fregilus  Graculus,  Cuv.;  Cornish  Chough.     The  same  with  the  Pyrrho- 
corax,  Ch.  xlviii. — Wern.  Club. 

5  Corvus  Monedula,  LINN.     Jackdaw. — Wern.  Club. 


2 1 6  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  X . 

of  lute  (and  it  is  now  rare)  that  from  the  Apennine  toward 
the  City,  a  kind  of  Pica1  began  to  be  seen  ;  they  are  distin- 
guished by  their  long  Tails,  and  are  called  Varise.  It  is  their 
Property  to  become  bald  every  Year,  at  the  Time  when  Rape 
is  sowed.  The  Partridges2  in  Attica  do  not  fly  over  the  Bor- 
ders of  Breotia  :  and  not  a  Bird  in  the  Pontus,  in  the  Island 
where  Achilles  was  buried,  will  pass  beyond  the  Temple  con- 
secrated to  him.  In  the  Territory  of  Fidenge,  near  the  City, 
Storks  build  no  Nests,  and  have  no  Young.  But  into  the 
Country  about  Volaterrse  every  Year  a  Quantity  of  Stock- 
doves fly  from  beyond  Sea.  At  Rome  no  Flies  or  Dogs  enter 
the  Chapel  of  Hercules  in  the  Beast-market.  I  could  alledge 
many  such  Examples  in  other  kinds,  which  I  purposely 
pass  over,  because  I  would  not  be  tedious :  for  Theophrastus 
reporteth,  that  the  Doves,  Peacocks,  and  Ravens  in  Asia 
have  been  brought  thither  from  other  Countries ;  and  in 
Cyrenaica  the  vocal  Frogs. 

There  is  another  admirable  Thing  concerning  the  Singing- 
Birds  (Oscines)3:  for  usually  at  a  certain  Time  of  the  Year 
they  change  their  Colour  and  Voice,  so  as  of  a  sudden  to 
become  other  Birds :  a  Thing  that  doth  not  happen  to  the 
larger  kinds  of  Fowls,  except  only  to  Cranes  :  for  they 
become  black  with  Age.  The  Merula  from  black  turneth 
reddish  ;  in  Summer  it  singeth,  in  Winter  it  babbles  ;  and 
about  the  Solstice  it  is  mute.  When  a  Year  old,  in  the  Cock 
at  least,  their  Bill  turns  to  be  like  Ivory.  The  Turd  us,  in 
Summer,  is  mottled  about  the  Neck ;  but  in  Winter  it  is  all 
of  one  Colour. 

The  Nightingale,4  for  fifteen  Days  and  Nights  together, 
never  giveth  over  its  chaunt,  rattling  away  incessantly  at 
the  Time  when  the  Trees  begin  to  put  out  their  Leaves 
thickly.  And  this  Bird  is  not  to  be  set  among  the  last 

1  Pzca,  varue.    Cor vus  pica,  LINN.     Magpie.     Ch.  xlii. — Wern.  Club. 

2  Perdix  cinerea,  LINN.     Ch.  xxxiii.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  This  word  was  originally  applied  to  singing-birds,  only  as  their 
music  was  observed  in  augury ;  but  it  would  appear  that  subsequently  it 
was  understood  of  singing- birds  in  general.  — Wern.  Club. 

4  Syhia  luscinia,  Cuv.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  217 

Things  that  deserve  Admiration :  it  is,  indeed,  among  the 
first,  that  such  a  Voice  should  come  from  so  very  little  a 
Body,  as  well  as  such  a  persevering  Breath.  Then  the  Tone  is 
given  out,  modulated  according  to  the  one  perfect  Science  of 
Music;  for  a  while  in  one  entire  Breath  she  draweth  out  her 
Tune  at  length;  now  it  is  varied  in  Inflections;  sometimes  it 
is  distinguished  by  Stops ;  it  is  united  by  entwining,  it  is 
extended  in  being  drawn  back ;  on  a  sudden  it  is  drowned  : 
now  and  then  she  records  to  herself  full,  grave,  sharp,  short, 
drawn  out  where  she  sees  fit;  vibrating,  high,  middle,  low. 
In  short,  there  is  not  any  manufacture  of  a  Pipe  so  exqui- 
sitely contrived  by  the  Art  of  Man  that  can  accomplish  such 
a  Variety  of  Things  as  proceed  out  of  that  little  Throat  of 
hers.  So  that  no  doubt  this  Sweetness  was  foreshown  by  a 
powerful  Presage,  when  it  sang  in  the  Mouth  of  the  Infant 
Stesichorus.1  And  that  no  Man  may  doubt  that  it  is  the 
Effect  of  Art,  there  is  not  one  Nightingale  but  hath  many 
Tunes,  and  each  one  his  own  peculiar  one.  They  strive  who 
can  do  best ;  and  it  is  evident  that  they  contend  with  all 
their  Heart ;  for  often  she  that  is  conquered  ends  her  Life  in 
the  Contest,  and  yieldeth  up  her  Breath  sooner  than  her 
Song.  The  young  Nightingales  study  the  others,  and  under- 
stand the  Lessons  which  they  imitate.  The  Scholar  listens 
with  close  Attention,  and  rehearseth  what  she  hath  heard ; 
and  both  of  them  repeat  it  over  by  turns.  The  Correction  of 
what  is  amended  is  understood  ;  and  also  something  of  Re- 
proof in  the  Teacher.  Therefore  one  of  these  Nightingales 
obtains  the  Price  of  a  Slave;  yea,  indeed,  more  than  might 
in  old  Time  have  bought  an  Armour-bearer.  I  myself  have 
known  one  of  them,  which  also  was  white,  a  Circumstance 
not  commonly  seen,  to  have  been  sold  for  6000  Sesterces,  to 
to  be  given  as  a  Present  to  Agrippina,  Wife  of  the  Prince 
Claudius.  And  now  of  late  we  have  seen  many  of  them 
begin  to  sing  at  command ;  and  to  take  their  turn  in  Sym- 
phony. Also  Men  have  been  found,  who,  by  placing  Reeds 
across,  and  adding  some  Water,  blowing  into  an  Hole  with 

1  An  ancient  Greek  poet,  whose  works  are  lost.  — Wern.  Club. 


218  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

a  very  little  Stop  of  the  Tongue  interposed  could  imitate  the 
Note  so  perfectly,  that  the  Difference  could  not  be  distin- 
guished. But  these  Mistresses  of  Song,  so  great  and  clever 
as  they  are,  after  fifteen  Days,  by  Degrees  abate  their 
Music ;  yet  so,  as  a  Man  cannot  say  they  are  either  weary, 
or  satisfied  with  Singing.  Soon  after,  when  the  Weather 
groweth  hotter,  their  Voice  is  entirely  altered  ;  being  neither 
musical  nor  various.  Their  Colour,  also,  is  changed  :  and 
finally,  in  Winter  she  is  not  seen.  Their  Tongues  are  not 
like  other  Birds',  with  a  thin  Tip  before.  They  breed  in  the 
prime  of  the  Spring,  and  commonly  lay  six  Eggs. 

The  Ficedula1  observes  another  Course,  for  it  changeth 
both  Colour  and  Form  at  the  same  Time.  They  have  not 
that  Name  except  in  the  Autumn ;  for  afterwards  they  are 
called  Melancoryphi. 

So  also  the  Bird  named  Erithacus  in  Winter,  is  the  same 
as  the  Phoenicurus  in  Summer. 

The  Upupa,2  as  JEschylus  the  Poet  saith,  also  changeth. 
This  is  an  unclean  Bird  otherwise  in  the  manner  of  feeding ; 
with  a  handsome  Crest,  that  can  be  folded  up :  for  some- 
times she  will  draw  it  in,  and  at  others  erect  it  along  the 
length  of  the  Head. 

The  (Enanthe3  also  has  certain  Days  in  which  to  lie  close, 
being  hidden  when  the  Dog-star  ariseth:  but  after  its  set- 
ting she  cometh  abroad  :  a  strange  Thing,  that  in  those 
Days  it  should  do  both.  Also  the  Chlorion,4  which  is  all 
over  yellow,  and  not  seen  in  the  Winter,  but  appeareth 
about  the  Solstices. 

1  Sylvia  hortensts,  Great  Pettychaps.     It  is  not  improbable  that  the 
author    confounded    this    Bird    with   S.  atricapilla,  or    Blackcap.     A 
similar  error  has  led  him  to  regard  the  Erithacus  :  Sylvia  rubecula,  or 
Redbreast,  with  the  Phoenicurus  (S.  P.),  or  Redstart."—  Wern.  Club. 

2  Upupa  epops,  LINN.     Hoopoe. — Wern.  Club. 

3  Saxicola,  O.    Wheatear.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  Supposed  to  be  Picus  viridis,  or  common  Woodpecker. — Wern. 
Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  219 

CHAPTER  XXX. 
Of  the  Merula. 

ABOUT  Cyllen£  in  Arcadia,  and  nowhere  else,  white 
Merulae1  are  produced.  The  Ibis,  about  Pelusium  only,  is 
black  ;  in  all  other  Places  it  is  white. 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 
The  Time  of  Birds'  Breeding. 

ALL  Singing-birds,  besides  those  that  are  excepted  before, 
do  not  unwarily  breed  before  the  Spring  Equinox,  nor  after 
the  Autumn.  And  those  they  hatch  before  the  Solstice  are 
doubtful ;  but  after  the  Solstice  they  are  lively. 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 

Of  the  Haley  ones;  and  the  .Days  good  for  Navigation  which 
they  show.     Of  the  Gavia  and  Mergus. 

AND  in  this  especially  the  Haley  ones2  are  remarkable. 
The  Seas,  and  they  that  sail  on  them,  know  the  Days  when 
they  breed.  This  Bird  is  little  bigger  than  a  Sparrow ;  for 

1  Albinoes  are  not  uncommon  in  most  sorts  of  birds ;  but  the  black 
Ibis  is  a  separate  species  :  Ibis  falcinellus,  Cuv. — Wern.  Club. 

2  Alcedo  ispidcij   LINN.,  Common  Kingfisher;  and  A.  halcyon,  the 
smaller  Kingfisher.     The  former   is   commonly  silent;  but  the  latter 
is  highly  musical,    Belon  praises  highly  its  varied  notes;  which  were 
uttered  so  incessantly  through  the  day  and  night,  as  to  cause  him  to 
wonder  at  its  powers  of  song ;  and  to  pity  it,  as  if  condemned  to  such 
persevering  labour.    In  addition  to  Pliny,  who  probably  copies  Aristotle, 
uiElian  (B.  ix.  ch.  xvii.)  also  so  minutely  describes  the  nest  of  the  King- 
fisher, as  to  prove  that  he  had  closely  examined  something  which  had 
been  represented  as  such.     But  it  was  very  different  from  what  has  been 
since  known  when  this  bird  builds  a  nest ;  for  it  will  not  always  under- 
take the  labour,  but  sometimes  contents  itself  with  leaving  the  eggs  on 
the  bare  earth,  at  the  end  of  a  hole  in  the  ground.    The  only  natural 
object  resembling  that  which  Pliny  and  JSlian  describe  as  the  nest  of  the 
Kingfisher,  is  the  crust  of  a  spatangus.    For  the  Halcyon  days,  see 
Vol.  i.  p.  85.  —  Wern,  Club. 


220  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

the  greater  Part  of  a  Sky-blue  Colour,  yet  with  white  and 
purple  Feathers  intermingled,  and  having  a  long  and  slender 
Neck.  There  is  another  Kind  of  them  that  differs  in  size 
and  Song.  The  lesser  sing  among  the  Reeds.  It  is  very 
rare  to  see  an  Halcyon,  and  never  except  at  the  setting  of 
Virgilise,  or  about  the  Solstices  or  Mid-winter;  for  some- 
times they  fly  about  a  Ship,  but  immediately  they  go  into 
Concealment.  They  breed  in  Mid-winter,  and  the  Days 
when  this  is  are  called  the  Halcyon  Days :  for  while  they 
last,  the^Sea  is  calm  and  navigable,  especially  in  Sicily.  In 
other  Parts,  also,  the  Ocean  is  not  so  boisterous ;  but  surely 
the  Sicilian  Sea  is  navigable,  both  in  the  Straits  and  the 
open  Ocean.  Now,  seven  Days  before  Mid-winter  they  build 
their  Nests;  and  within  as  many  after,  they  have  hatched. 
Their  Nests  are  wonderfully  made,  in  the  shape  of  a  Ball : 
the  Entrance  narrow,  and  standing  somewhat  out,  much 
like  that  of  great  Sponges.  They  cannot  be  cut  asunder  with 
an  iron  Instrument ;  but  they  will  break  with  a  strong  Blow, 
like  the  dry  Foam  of  the  Sea  :  and  no  Man  could  ever  find 
of  what  they  are  made.  Some  think  they  are  formed  of  the 
sharp  pointed  Prickles  of  Fishes;  for  these  Birds  live  on 
Fish.  They  come  up  also  into  Rivers.  They  lay  five  Eggs. 
The  Gaviae1  build  in  Rocks:  and  the  Mergus2  also  in 
Trees.  They  usually  lay  four  Eggs :  but  the  Gavite  in 
Summer,  the  Mergi  in  the  beginning  of  Spring. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

Of  the  Skill  of  Birds  in  building  their  Nests.     Of  the 
Hirundo,3  the  Argatilis,  Cinnamologus,  and  Perdix. 

THE  Form  of  the  Halcyon's  Nest  puts  me  in  mind  of  the 
Skill  of  other  Birds :  and  in  no  other  Thing  is  the  Ingenuity 

1  A  general  name  for  all  the  Gulls.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Mergus  merganser,  LINN.     Goosander.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  The  first,  H.  rustica,  LINN.;  Chimney  Swallow.    Second:  H.  wlica, 
LINN.  ;  House  Martin.     The  third :  H.  riparia,  Bank  Martin.    The  story 
of  an  embankment  of  the  Nile  formed  by  Martins'  nests,  must  be  set  down 
among  the  Wonders  of  Egypt.  —Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  221 

of  Birds  more  admirable  than  in  this.  The  Hirundines 
frame  their  Nests  of  Clay,  but  they  strengthen  them  with 
Straw.  If  at  any  Time  there  is  a  scarcity  of  Clay,  they  wet 
their  Feathers  with  a  quantity  of  Water,  and  sprinkle  the 
Dust  with  it.  They  line  the  Nest  itself  with  soft  Feathers 
or  fine  Flox,  to  keep  the  Eggs  warm,  and  also  that  it  may 
not  be  hard  to  the  young  Birds.  They  distribute  the  Food 
by  turns  to  the  Young  with  strict  Equality.  They  remove 
the  Excrement  of  the  young  ones  with  remarkable  Attention 
to  Cleanness ;  but  when  they  are  grown  something  more, 
they  teach  them  to  turn  about,  and  discharge  their  Fulness 
beyond  it. 

There  is  another  kind  of  Hirundo,  that  keeps  in  the 
country  Villages  and  Fields,  which  seldom  build  their  Nests 
in  Houses ;  but  their  Nests  are  formed  of  the  same  Material 
as  the  former,  although  of  a  different  Shape,  supine,  with  the 
Entrance  thrust  forward  straight  and  narrow ;  but  "the  Capa- 
city within  is  large ;  so  that  it  is  wonderful  how  skilful  and 
capable  they  are  in  concealing  their  young  ones,  and  in 
lining  it  with  soft  Materials.  In  the  Heracleotic  Mouth  of 
Egypt,  there  is  a  mighty  Bank  raised  by  a  continual  Course 
of  Nests  for  the  length  almost  of  one  Stadium  (half-a-quarter 
of  a  Mile) ;  which  is  impregnable  against  the  spreading 
abroad  of  the  Nile :  a  piece  of  Work  which  could  not  have 
been  accomplished  by  human  Labour.  In  the  same  Egypt, 
near  the  Town  Coptos,  there  is  an  Island  sacred  to  Isis, 
which,  that  the  same  River  may  not  tear  to  Pieces,  these 
Swallows  fortify  by  their  Labour :  in  the  beginning  of  the 
Spring,  for  three  Days  and  Nights,  employing  their  Bill  to 
make  it  strong  with  Straw  and  Chaff;  and  they  continue 
their  Work  by  Night  with  so  much  Labour,  that  it  is 
known  many  of  them  have  died  with  the  Labour.  This 
public  Work  always  recurs  to  them  with  the  return  of  the 
Year. 

There  is  a  third  sort  of  these  Swallows,  which  dig  Hol- 
lows in  the  Banks,  and  so  form  Nests  within.  The  young 
Birds  of  these,  if  burnt  to  Ashes,  are  a  Remedy  for  the 
deadly  Quinsey,  and  many  other  Diseases  of  the  human 


222  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

Body.  These  do  not  build  Nests ;  but  if  they  perceive  that 
the  River  is  going  to  increase,  and  will  rise  as  high  as  their 
Holes,  they  go  away  many  Days  before. 

There  are  Birds  of  the  kind  of  Parrse,1  which  with  dry 
Moss  make  a  Nest,  resembling  so  perfectly  a  round  Bali 
that  the  Entrance  cannot  be  discovered.  Another,  called 
Argatilis,2  makes  her  Nest  of  the  same  form,  but  it  is  woven 
of  Flax. 

A  kind  of  Picus3  maketh  a  Nest  in  the  manner  of  a  Gob- 
let, and  hangeth  it  at  a  Twig,  on  the  uppermost  Branches, 
that  no  Quadruped  may  be  able  to  reach  it.  It  is  established 
that  Galguli  (Orioles)  take  their  Sleep  hanging  by  their 
Legs,  hoping  by  that  means  to  be  in  more  Safety.  It  is,  in- 
deed, commonly  known,  that  all  these  Birds,  with  good 
Providence,  choose  some  cross  Boughs  for  Rafters,  to  sup- 
port their  Nests ;  and  then  cover  them  from  the  Rain  with 
an  arched  Roof,  or  else  enclose  them  among  the  thick 
Leaves. 

In  Arabia  there  is  a  Bird  called  Cinnamologos,4  which 
builds  her  Nest  with  Twigs  of  the  Cinnamon-tree.  The 
Inhabitants  of  that  Country  shake  them  down  with  Arrows 
headed  with  Lead,  for  the  sake  of  Profit.  In  Scythia,  there 
is  a  Bird  of  the  bigness  of  an  Otis,  which  layeth  two  Eggs; 
and  she  always  wraps  them  in  a  Hare's  Skin  ;  and  hangeth 
them  upon  the  top  Branches  of  Trees.  The  Picae,  when 
they  perceive  with  their  watching  Eye  that  a  Man  hath  dis- 
covered their  Nest,  presently  remove  their  Eggs  to  another. 

1  In  this  place  Gaza  reads,  Ripariarum ;  that  is,  of  bank  birds ;  and 
Gesner,  Parorum,  or  Tomtits ;  Gelenius  reads  Perrarum.    Dalechampius' 
reading  is  "In  genere  paratum  est,  cui  Nidus;"  which  leaves  the  species 
still  more  uncertain. — Wern.  Club. 

2  An  uncertain  species. — Wern.  Club. 

3  It  is  certain  that  no  species  of  Woodpecker  suspends  its  nest  in  this 
way.     Aldrovandus,  therefore,  supposed  it  to  be  the  Galbula,  or  Oriole  ; 
which  he,  on  that  account,  denominated  Picus  nidum  suspendcns.    It  is 
just  as  probable  that  it  is  the  Parus  caudatus,  or  Long-tailed  Tit. — 

Wern.  Club. 

4  An  unrecognised  species.    Dalechampius  remarks,  that  the  cinna- 
mon does  not  grow  in  Arabia.  — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  223 

In  those  Birds  whose  Toes  are  not  fitted  to  clasp  and  convey 
the  Eggs,  this  is  reported  to  be  done  after  a  strange  Manner : 
for  they  lay  a  Twig  over  two  Eggs,  and  glue  them  fast  with  a 
Cement  from  their  own  Bowels;  they  then  put  their  Necks 
under  the  middle,  which,  hanging  equally  poised  on  each 
Side,  they  carry  away  to  another  Place. 

No  less  skilful  are  they  that  make  their  Nestling-cradles 
in  the  Ground,  as  being  forbidden  by  the  Weight  of  their 
Body  to  mount  aloft.  One  is  called  Merops,1  that  useth  to 
feed  her  Parents  as  they  lie  hid.  The  inside  of  her  Feathers 
in  the  Wing  is  pale,  the  outside  blue ;  and  those  above  about 
the  Neck,  reddish.  She  maketh  her  Nest  in  a  Hole  six  Feet 
deep  within  the  Ground.  Partridges  so  fortify  their  Place  of 
deposit  with  Thorns  and  Twigs,  that  they  are  sufficiently 
fenced  against  wild  Beasts.  They  heap  up  over  their  Eggs  a 
covering  of  fine  Dust;  neither  do  they  sit  in  the  Place  where 
they  laid  them  first,  but  lest  their  more  frequent  resort  to  it 
should  lead  to  Suspicion,  they  convey  them  to  some  other 
Place.  And,  indeed,  the  Hens  deceive  also  the  Males ;  for  so 
lecherous  are  they,  that  they  break  their  Eggs,  because  they 
may  not  be  occupied  about  sitting.  Then  through  desire 
after  the  Hens,  the  Males  fight  among  themselves ;  and  they 
say  that  the  one  which  is  overcome,  suffereth  Venus.  Trogus 
reporteth  the  same  of  Quails,  and  sometimes  of  Dunghill 
Cocks.  He  saith,  also,  that  tame  Partridges  use  to  tread 
the  wild ;  and  those  which  are  new  taken  or  conquered  by 
others  promiscuously.  This  libidinous  Heat  maketh  them 
so  quarrelsome,  that  oftentimes  it  leads  to  their  being  taken. 
For  when  the  Fowler  cometh  with  his  Call,  out  goeth  the 
Leader  of  the  whole  Flock  to  fight  him ;  and  when  he  is 
caught,  another  followeth  after,  and  so  the  rest  one  after 
another.  Again,  they  take  the  Females  at  the  Time  of  the 
Copulation ;  for  then  forth  they  go  against  the  female 

1  Merops  apiaster,  LINN. — Bee-eater.  ^Elian  says,  that  the  young  of 
this  bird  exceeds  in  piety  the  young  of  the  Stork  in  the  care  with  which 
they  feed  their  parents  when  worn  out  with  age ;  which  Cuvier  explains 
from  their  remaining  a  long  time  in  the  same  retreats  with  them. — 
Wern.  Club.  % 


224  History  of  Nature.  [  BOOK  X , 

Fowl  that  with  their  scolding  they  may  drive  her  away. 
There  is  not  to  be  found  in  any  other  living  Creature  the 
like  amount  of  Lust.  If  the  Hens  stand  over-against  the 
Cocks,  the  Air  that  passeth  from  them  causes  them  to  con- 
ceive. For  so  hot  are  they  in  that  Season,  that  they  gape 
and  hang  out  the  Tongue.  And  if  the  Males  fly  over  them, 
with  the  Breath  that  cometh  from  them  they  conceive :  and 
many  Times  if  they  do  but  hear  their  call.  And  so  effec- 
tually does  their  Lechery  overcome  their  Affection  to  their 
Young,  that  while  they  are  incubating  in  some  secret  Place, 
if  they  hear  the  Fowler's  (Decoy)  Female  coming  towards 
the  Male,  she  returns  the  Song,  and  calls  back  the  Males, 
and  offers  herself  to  his  Pleasure.  Indeed  they  are  borne 
away  with  such  Rage,  that,  as  if  blind  with  the  Trepidation, 
they  will  settle  upon  the  Head  of  the  Fowler.  If  he  begins 
to  approach  the  Nest  of  the  breeding  Hen,  she  will  run  forth 
to  his  Feet,  counterfeiting  that  she  is  very  heavy  and  feeble; 
and  either  in  her  running,  or  some  short  flight,  she  will  sud- 
denly fall,  as  if  she  had  broken  a  Wing  or  her  Leg :  then 
will  she  run  again,  and  when  he  is  just  ready  to  take  her  up, 
yet  will  she  shift  away,  and  so  disappoint  his  Hope,  until  she 
hath  led  him  a  contrary  Way  from  the  Young.  When  she  is 
free  from  Fear,  and  void  of  motherly  Care,  then  will  she  get 
into  a  Furrow  of  the  Ground,  lie  on  her  Back,  catch  a  Clot 
of  Earth  with  her  Feet,  and  with  it  hide  herself.  Partridges 
are  supposed  to  live  sixteen  Years. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 
Of  the  Columba.1 

AFTER  Partridges,  the  Nature  of  Doves  is  to  be  consi- 
dered, since  they  have  in  a  manner  the  same  Habits ;  but 
they  are  highly  chaste,  and  neither  Male  nor  Female  are 

1  Pliny  and  Varro  believe  the  existence  of  no  more  than  two  species 
of  Pigeons :  Columba  livia,  or  Rock-dove ;  and  C.  palumbus,  Ring-dove 
(c.  35) ;  and  the  latter  author  mentions  a  third  sort,  which  he  supposes  to 
be  a  hybrid  between  them,  and  which  we  may  judge  to  be  the  C.  CEnas,  or 
Stockdove.  —  Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  225 

charged  with  Adultery.  They  do  not  violate  the  Bond  of 
Marriage,  but  keep  at  home  together.  They  abandon  not 
their  own  Nests,  unless  they  are  in  state  of  single  Life,  or  a 
Widow.  The  Females  endure  their  imperious  Males,  and 
even  those  which  are  churlish ;  because  they  are  jealous, 
though  their  Nature  is  not  that  Way.  Then  the  Throat  is 
full  of  Complaint,  and  they  peck  them  cruelly  with  their 
Beaks;  and  yet  soon  after,  by  way  of  Satisfaction,  they  kiss 
them,  and  will  make  court  to  them,  by  turning  round  about 
many  Times  with  their  Feet,  and  utter  the  Prayers  of  Venus. 
The  Male  and  the  Female  love  their  Young  alike :  and 
often  there  is  Correction,  because  the  Hen  does  not  more 
frequently  visit  her  Young.  When  they  are  about  to  lay, 
they  comfort  and  minister  to  them.  So  soon  as  the  Eggs 
are  hatched  they  discharge  into  the  Mouths  of  the  Young  a 
salt  kind  of  Earth,  which  they  have  gathered  in  their  Throat, 
to  prepare  their  Stomachs  in  Time  for  Food.  Doves  and 
Turtle-doves  have  this  Property,  that  when  they  drink  they 
do  not  draw  their  Necks  back,  but  take  a  large  Draught  in 
the  manner  of  Cattle. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 
Of  the  Palumbus. 

WE  have  some  Authors  who  affirm  that  the  Palumbus 
lives  thirty  Years,  and  some  to  forty  Years,  with  no  Incon- 
venience but  this :  that  their  Claws  become  overgrown, 
which  is  a  Sign  of  old  Age  ;  but  they  may  be  pared  without 
Danger.  They  have  all  one  and  the  same  manner  of  Tune; 
they  make  three  Rests  in  their  Song,  besides  the  close,  which 
is  a  Moan.  In  Winter  they  are  silent;  in  Spring  they  are 
loud.  Nigidius  is  of  opinion,  that  if  a  Palumbus  is  called  by 
Name  in  a  House  as  she  is  sitting  upon  her  Eggs,  she  will 
leave  her  Nest.  They  lay  after  Midsummer.  Calumbae  and 
Turturs  live  eight  Years. 


VOL.  III. 


226  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 
Of  Sparrows. 

ON  the  other  Hand,  the  Sparrow1  is  very  short-lived,  and 
his  Leachery  is  equal  to  it.  The  Cock  Sparrow  is  reported 
to  live  but  one  Year ;  the  Proof  is,  because  in  the  Beginning 
of  Spring  not  one  of  them  is  found  with  a  black  Bill,  which 
begins  from  the  Summer.  The  Hens  live  somewhat  longer. 
But  to  come  again  to  Doves,  it  is  true  that  they  have  a  cer- 
tain Understanding  of  Glory ;  and  you  would  think  that 
they  have  a  Knowledge  of  their  Colours,  and  their  change- 
able Disposition.  Moreover,  they  seem  to  take  a  Pride  in 
flying  in  the  Air,  and  cutting  the  Air  every  way.  In  which 
Display,  while  they  flap  with  their  Wings  with  much  Noise 
(which  cannot  be  without  the  dashing  of  the  Feathers 
of  their  Wings  against  their  Shoulders),  they  are  exposed  to 
the  Hawks  as  if  they  were  bound ;  for  otherwise,  if  the 
Flight  were  free,  they  were  much  more  swift  of  Wing.  But 
the  Thief  lieth  hid  among  the  Branches,  and  seizeth  him  as 
he  rejoices  in  his  Glory. 

CHAPTER  XXXVII. 
Of  the  Tinnunculus.* 

To  prevent  this  (Danger),  the  Doves  need  to  have  with 
them  the  Bird  which  is  called  the  Tinnunculus,  for  she  de- 
fendeth  them,  and  (by  a  natural  Power)  terrifieth  the  Acci- 
piters,  insomuch  that  they  fly  from  her  Sight  or  Voice.  It  is 
on  this  Account  that  there  is  such  remarkable  Love  among 
the  Doves  to  these  Birds.  And  it  is  said  that  Pigeons  will 
not  leave  their  own  Dovecote  if  in  the  four  Corners  of  it 
there  are  buried  four  of  the  Tinnunculi  in  four  new  earthen 
Pots  well  smeared  over.  But  others  have  used  Means  to 
keep  Pigeons  in  their  Dove-house  (for  otherwise  they  are 

1  Fringilla  domestic^  LINN.     House-sparrow. — Wern.  Club. 
a  Supposed  to  be  the  Cenchris  (B.xxix.  ch.  vi.)-  Falco  cenchris,  Cuv. 
—Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  227 

Birds  that  wander  abroad)  by  slitting  up  the  Joints  of  their 
Wings  with  Gold  ;  for  without  this  Precaution  their  Wounds 
will  be  dangerous.  And  in  Truth,  these  Birds  have  the  Art 
to  flatter  and  entice  one  another ;  and  thus  they  return  to 
their  Homes  the  better  accompanied  on  Account  of  their 
Roguery.  Doves  also  have  served  for  Messengers  in  great 
Affairs  :  as  at  the  Siege  of  Mutina,  Decimus  Brutus  sent  out 
of  the  Town  Letters  tied  to  their  Feet,  to  the  Camp  of  the 
Consuls.  What  good,  then,  did  the  Rampart  and  Watch  in 
the  Siege,  and  the  Nets  stretched  across  the  River,  to 
Antony,  when  the  Messenger  was  able  to  pass  through  the 
Air?  Many  Men  are  gone  mad  in  their  Love  to  these  Birds: 
they  build  Towers  above  the  tops  of  their  Houses  for  them ; 
and  they  reckon  up  their  Origin  and  Nobility,  as  in  one  old 
Example.  L.  Axius,  a  Roman  Knight,  before  the  Civil  War 
with  Pompey,  sold  every  pair  (of  Pigeons)  for  four  hundred 
Denarii,1  as  M.  Varro*  reports.  Besides  this,  they  have 
rendered  their  Country  noble ;  for  Campania  is  supposed 
to  produce  by  far  the  greatest.  Their  manner  of  flying  leads 
me  to  the  Consideration  of  the  Flight  of  other  Fowls. 

CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 
Of  the  Pace  and  Flight  of  Birds. 

ALL  other  living  Creatures  have  one  certain  and  uniform 
manner  of  going,  each  according  to  its  kind.  Birds  only 
vary  their  Course,  whether  they  go  upon  the  Ground  or  fly 
in  the  Air.  Some  walk  as  Crows  (Cornices) ;  others  hop,  .as 
Sparrows  and  Thrushes  (Passeres,  merulse) ;  some  run,  as 

1  12  lib.  10  sh. 

2  The  care  of  Pigeons  for  profit  entered  more  into  the  rural  economy 
of  the  ancients  than  with  us  of  the  present  day.    They  were  fattened  for 
the  market  under  the  parent ;  their  food  being  made  easy  of  access,  while 
a  few  quill-feathers  were  drawn  from  the  wing,  and  the  thighs  broken. 
It  was  found  that  fastening  the  legs  made  them  more  uneasy,  and  thus 
proved  a  greater  hindrance  to  their  fattening  than  the  fracture.     The 
Romans  had  their  favourite  varieties,  for  which  they  paid  enormous 
prices :  varying  from  one  or  two  to  twelve  or  fourteen  pounds  a  couple. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


228  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

Partridges,  Woodcocks  (Perdices,  Rusticulae);  others,  again, 
throw  out  their  Feet  before  them,  as  Storks  and  Cranes 
(Ciconiae,  Grues);  some  spread  their  Wings  broad,  and  hang 
on  them,  shaking  them  but  now  and  then ;  others  more 
rapidly ;  but  the  utmost  Feathers  only.  Some  Birds  stretch 
out  their  whole  Wings,  and  others  in  their  Flight  keep  them 
in,  for  the  most  part  close.  Some  of  them  give  one  or  two 
Claps  with  their  Wings,  and  are  borne  away  with  the  Air; 
or  they  press  the  Air  as  if  enclosed  within  their  Wings, 
and  shoot  themselves  up  aloft,  straight  forward,  or  fall  flat 
down.  Ye  would  think  some  were  hurled  with  Violence, 
and  others  to  fall  down  plump  from  on  high,  or  to  leap. 
Ducks,  and  such  only  as  are  of  that  kind,  lift  themselves 
up  aloft  presently  from  the  Ground,  and  instantly  mount 
into  the  Sky,  even  out  of  the  very  Water :  which  is  the 
Cause,  that  if  they  fall  into  those  Pits  in  which  we  take  wild 
Beasts,  they  alone  will  make  their  Escape.  The  Vulture, 
and  for  the  most  part  all  heavy  Birds,  cannot  take  flight, 
unless  they  fetch  a  Run,  or  else  rise  from  some  high  Heap. 
And  such  are  directed  in  the  Air  by  their  Tails.  Some  look 
about,  others  bend  their  Necks  ;  some  feed  on  the  Prey 
which  they  have  snatched  away  in  their  Talons.  Most  Birds 
utter  their  Voice  as  they  fly ;  yet  some,  on  the  contrary,  in 
their  Flight  are  always  silent.  Some  fly  half  upright ;  others 
tending  downward  :  some  fly  obliquely ;  to  the  Sides,  to  the 
Bills :  and  some  are  bent  backward,  so  that  if  many  Sorts 
could  be  seen  together,  they  would  appear  to  pass  along  as 
if  they  were  of  a  very  different  Nature. 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 
OftheApu*.1 

THE  Birds  which  they  call  Apodes  (because  they  are 
without  the  use  of  the  Feet),  and  others,  Cypseli,  are  very 
strong  on  the  Wing.  They  are  a  kind  of  Swallows.  They 

J  Cypselus  apus,  Cuv.  The  Swift.  —  Strong  on  the  wing:  plurimum 
volant;  probably  referring  to  a  supposition  repeated  in  most  books  on 
natural  history,  that  the  Swift  spends  more  time  on  the  wing  than  other 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  229 

build  their  Nests  in  Rocks.  These  are  the  same  that  are 
seen  over  all  the  Sea :  for  however  distant  the  Ships  may  be 
from  Land,  and  their  Course  ever  so  continued,  these  Apodes 
will  always  be  flying  about  them.  All  other  kinds  alight 
and  perch :  these  never  rest,  but  when  they  are  in  their 
Nest.  Either  they  hang  or  lie  along.  Their  Shifts  are 
equally  various,  and  chiefly  when  they  feed. 

CHAPTER  XL. 
Of  the  Caprimulgus1  and  Platea. 

THE  Birds  called  Caprimulgi  have  the  Appearance  of  the 
bigger  Merula ;   and  they  are  Night-Thieves ;   for  by  Day 

kinds  of  Swallows;  which  is  not  the  fact.     Their  efforts  in  flight  are 

for  a  time  more  strenuous ;  but  they  spend  more  hours  in  rest  than  the 

kindred  species  —  Wern.  Club. 

1  Caprimulgus  Europceus,  LINN.     Goat-Sucker,  or  Night  Jar.    The 

ancient  superstition  attached  to  this  bird,  bears  much  resemblance  to  that 

of  the  more  modern  Vampire :  — 

"  There  is  a  class  of  birds,  of  greedy  kind — 
Not  Harpeys  they,  and  yet  of  kindred  mind ; 
The  head  is  large,  and  fierce  with  staring  eye, 
The  beak  well  formed  for  rapine,  wings  that  fly 
With  hoary  feathers ;  feet  that  grasp  the  prey 
With  claws  like  fish-hooks  ;  from  the  light  of  day 
They  shrink  affrighted ;  but  when  darkness  shrouds 
The  face  of  Nature  with  its  veil  of  clouds, 
Their  flight  begins ;  where  infants  sink  in  sleep 
Uncared  for  by  the  nurse,  they  glide,  and  deep 
Within  their  tender  entrails  fix  their  claw, 
And  tear  them  with  their  beak ;  they  fill  their  maw 
With  milk  but  newly  drawn,  and  reeking  blood ; 
And  ravenously  obscene  they  swill  the  flood. 
From  horrid  sounds  that  fill  the  air  by  night, 
And  strike  the  listening  mortals  with  affright, 
They  take  the  name  of  Strix ;  but  whence  they  came  — 
If,  with  the  muttered  charm  of  some  old  dame, 
By  melancholy  verse  transform'd ;  or  fowl 
From  the  first  hand  of  Nature  (like  the  owl)." 

Ovii>'s  Fasti,  vi. 

The  effect  of  such  an  awful  visit  could  only  be  obviated  by  a  magical 

sacrifice. — Wern.  Club. 


230  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

they  cannot  see.  They  enter  the  Sheep-folds,  and  fly  to  the 
Goats'  Udders,  to  suck  the  Milk  from  their  Teats ;  and  from 
the  Injury  so  done  to  it,  the  Udder  wasteth  away,  and  the 
Goats  which  have  been  so  milked  are  rendered  blind. 

There  is  a  Bird  named  Platea.1  Their  Manner  is  to  fly  at 
those  which  use  to  dive  in  the  Sea,  and  so  bite  them  by  the 
Heads  that  they  compel  them  to  let  go  their  hold  of  the 
Fish  they  have  caught.  This  Bird,  when  his  Belly  is  full  of 
Shell-fish  that  he  hath  devoured,  and  hath  by  the  Heat  of 
his  Crop  concocted  them,  vomits  them  up  again,  and  then 
picketh  out  the  Meat,  leaving  the  Shells  behind. 

CHAPTER  XLI. 
The  Ingenuity  of  Birds. 

THE  Hens  of  Country-houses  possess  some  Religion.2 
When  they  have  laid  an  Egg  they  fall  a  trembling,  and 
shake  themselves.  They  turn  about,  also,  to  be  purified,  and 
with  some  Sprigs  of  a  Bush  they  purify  by  Lustration  them- 
selves and  their  Eggs. 

CHAPTER  XLII. 
Of  Carduelis,3  Psittacus,  of  Birds  that  speak. 

THE  Carduelis  is  the  smallest  of  Birds ;  and  they  execute 
Commands,  not  only  with  their  Voice,  but  also  with  their 
Feet  and  Mouth,  as  if  they  were  Hands.  In  the  Territory  of 
Arelate,  there  is  a  Bird  called  Taurus,4  because  it  loweth  like 
a  Bull,  although  otherwise  a  small  Bird.  There  is  another 
also  named  Anthus,5  which  imitates  the  neighing  of  Horses ; 
and  if  by  the  Approach  of  Horses  it  is  driven  from  their 
Grass  on  which  it  feeds,  it  will  neigh,  and  so  be  revenged  of 
them.  But  above  all  other  Things  they  repeat  human  Lan- 

1  Platalealeucorodia,Ijiyw.     Spoonbill. — Wern.  Club. 

2  See  B.  viii.  ch.  i.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  FHngilla  carduelis,  LINN.     Goldfinch.  — Wern.  Club. 

4  Ardea  stellaris,  LINN.     Bittern.  —  Wern.  Club. 

5  Some  have  supposed  this  to  be  Emberiga  citrinella,  LINN.  ;  the  Yel- 
low Amraer:  but  it  is  more  probably  Anthus  pratensis,  Cuv.     Titlark. — 
Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  231 

guage,  and  the  Psittaci1  even  hold  a  Conversation.  This  Bird 
cometh  from  India,  where  they  call  it  Sittace.  It  is  green  all 
over  the  Body,  only  it  hath  a  distinct  Collar  about  the  Neck 
of  vermilion  red.  The  Parrot  salutes  Emperors,  and  pro- 
nounces what  Words  she  heareth ;  she  is  also  very  wanton 
under  the  Influence  of  Wine.  Her  Head  is  as  hard  as  her 
Beak.  When  she  learns  to  speak,  she  must  be  beaten  about 
the  Head  with  a  Rod  of  Iron  :  for  otherwise  she  careth  for 
no  Blows.  When  she  taketh  her  Flight  downward,  she 
alighteth  upon  her  Bill,  and  leans  upon  it,  and  by  that 
means  favoureth  her  Feet,  which  are  but  feeble. 

There  is  a  kind  of  Pica  (Magpie)  of  less  excellency,  be- 
cause she  does  not  come  from  so  far ;  but  she  pronounceth 
what  is  taught  her  more  freely  and  distinctly.  These  take  a 
Love  to  the  Words  they  speak ;  for  they  not  only  learn 
them,  but  they  delight  in  them :  insomuch  that  they  study 
them  inwardly,  and  by  their  careful  thinking  upon  what 
they  learn,  they  show  how  attentive  they  are.  It  is  known 
that  they  have  died  for  Grief  that  they  could  not  conquer 
the  Difficulty  of  some  Words ;  as  also,  that  unless  they  hear 
the  same  Words  repeated  often,  their  Memory  fails  to  retain 
them.  If  they  are  in  search  of  a  Word,  and  chance  te  hear 
it  pronounced,  they  will  show  wonderful  Signs  of  Joy.  Their 
Beauty  is  not  ordinary,  although  not  very  lovely.  But  they 
are  handsome  enough  in  the  Power  to  imitate  human  Speech. 
It  is  said,  that  none  of  their  kind  are  able  to  learn,  except 
such  only  as  feed  upon  Mast;  and  among  them,  those  acquire 
the  more  easily  that  have  five  toes  to  their  Feet:  but  not 
even  these  unless  in  the  two  first  Years  of  their  Age.  Their 
Tongue  is  broader  than  ordinary :  as  they  are  all  in  every 
separate  kind  that  counterfeit  Man's  Voice :  although  this 
happens  to  almost  all  Birds.  Agrippina,  the  Wife  of  Clau- 
dius Caesar ,  had  a  Turdus  (Thrush)  at  the  Time  I  compiled 
this  Book,  which  imitated  Man's  Speech ;  a  Thing  never 
known  before.  The  young  Ccesars,  also,  had  a  Sturnus 
(Starling)  and  Nightingales  taught  to  speak  Greek  and 

1  Psittacus  Alexandra  LINN.     Parrot.  —  Wern.  Club. 


232  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

Latin.  Moreover,  they  would  study  their  Lessons  all  Day, 
and  continually  come  out  with  new  Words  formed  into  a  long 
Speech.  To  teach  them,  these  Birds  must  be  in  a  Place 
apart,  where  they  can  hear  no  other  Voice  to  mingle  with 
what  they  learn ;  and  one  is  to  sit  by  them,  who  must  repeat 
often  what  he  would  have  them  fix  in  their  Memory,  and 
please  them  also  with  giving  them  Meat. 

CHAPTER  XLIII. 
The  Understanding  of  Ravens  (Conn). 

LET  us  not  defraud  the  Ravens  also  of  their  due  Praise, 
as  witnessed  not  only  by  the  Knowledge  but  the  Indignation 
of  the  People  of  Rome.  When  Tiberius  was  Prince,  there 
was  a  young  Raven  hatched  in  a  Nest  upon  the  Temple  of 
Castor  (and  Pollux),  which  took  his  Flight  into  a  Shoe- 
maker's Shop  overagaiiist  the  Temple,  and  thus  was  com- 
mended to  the  Master  of  the  Shop  by  the  Obligation  of 
Religion.  This  Raven  in  Time  became  accustomed  to  Man's 
Speech,  and  every  Morning  would  fly  to  the  Rostra,  and 
turning  to  the  Forum,  he  would  salute  Tiberius,  and  after 
him  Germanicus  and  Drusus,  the  Ccesars,  by  their  Names ; 
and  presently  the  People  of  Rome  that  passed  by.  And 
when  he  had  so  done,  he  would  fly  again  to  the  Warehouse. 
This  Practice  he  continued  for  several  Years  together,  to  the 
Wonder  of  all.  The  Master  of  the  nearest  Shoemaker's 
Shop,  either  through  Envy  of  his  Neighbour,  or  some  sudden 
fit  of  Anger  (as  he  wished  it  to  appear)  because  the  Raven 
had  made  a  Spot  upon  a  Pair  of  his  Shoes  with  his  Dung, 
killed  the  Bird  ;  at  which  the  People  took  such  Indignation, 
that  they  first  drove  him  out  of  that  Neighbourhood,  and 
not  long  after  murdered  him  ;  and  the  Funeral  of  the  Raven 
was  solemnly  performed  with  all  the  ceremonial  Obsequies. 
For  the  Bier  was  formed  and  bedecked,  and  so  carried  upon 
the  Shoulders  of  two  Ethiopians,  with  a  Piper  going  before, 
with  Crowns  of  all  kinds,  as  far  as  to  the  funeral  Fire ; 
which  was  piled  at  the  right  Hand  of  the  Appian  Way,  at 
the  secoHd  Stone,  in  a  Field  called  Rediculi,  Thus  the 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  233 

People  of  Rome  regarded  the  ready  Wit  of  this  Bird  a  suffi- 
cient Cause  to  justify  a  sumptuous  Funeral,  and  also  to 
excuse  the  Murder  of  a  Citizen  of  Rome  in  that  City, 
wherein  many  Princes  have  died,  and  no  IV3an  solemnized 
their  Funerals :  one  Instance  of  which  is,  that  no  one 
avenged  the  Death  of  Scipio  JEmiUanus,  after  he  had  de- 
stroyed both  Carthage  and  Numantia.  This  happened  the 
fifth  Day  before  the  Calends  of  April,  in  the  Year  when 
M.  Svrvilius  and  C.  Cestius  were  Consuls.  Even  at  this 
Time,  when  I  am  writing,  there  is  in  the  City  of  Rome  a 
Crow  (Comix)  belonging  to  a  Roman  Knight,  who  brought 
it  from  Bsetica,  which  was  an  admirable  Bird  for  the 
exceeding  black  Colour  of  its  Feathers,  and  also  for  pro- 
nouncing many  Words  formed  into  a  Sentence  ;  and  it  learns 
more  and  more  every  Day.  It  is  not  long  since  that  there 
arose  a  Report  of  a  Man  in  Erizena,  a  Country  of  Asia, 
whose  Name  was  Craterus  Motioceros :  who  used  to  hunt  by 
the  Help  of  Ravens,  which  he  carried  with  him  into  the 
Woods,  perching  upon  his  Shoulders  and  his  Hunting- 
horns  :  and  these  would  seek  out  and  put  up  others,  and 
bring  them  to  him  in  their  Company  ;  so  that  when  he 
returned  homeward  out  of  the  Forest,  the  wild  ones  'also 
would  accompany  him.  Some  have  thought  it  worth  the 
setting  upon  Record,  that  a  Raven  was  seen,  when  she  was 
thirsty,  to  cast  Stones  into  the  Bucket  belonging  to  a 
Sepulchre,  in  which  there  was  some  Rain-water  remaining,* 
but  which  he  was  not  able  to  reach:  and  being  afraid  to  go 
down  into  it,  he  thrust  in  so  many  Stories  that  he  was  enabled 
to  drink  as  much  as  he  pleased. 

CHAPTER  XLIV. 
Of  the  Birds  of  Diomedes. 

NEITHER  will  I  pass  over  the  Birds  (called)  Diomedeae,1 
which  Juba    nameth    Cataractae ;    and    he   says   they    have 

1  This  appears  to  be  Lestris  cataractes,  Cuv. ;  Skua,  or  a  kindred 
species.  ^Elian  speaks  of  it  as  a  kind  of  Heron :  B.  i.  ch.  i.  —  Wern. 
Club. 


234  History  of  Nature.  [Boon  X . 

Teeth ;  with  Eyes  of  the  Colour  of  Fire ;  but  otherwise  they  are 
white.  They  have  always  two  Leaders,  one  to  lead  the  Host, 
and  the  other  to  guard  the  rear.  With  their  Bills  they  dig 
Furrows,  over  which  they  strew  Bundles  of  Sticks,  and  cover 
them  with  the  Earth  that  they  have  before  thrown  out ;  and 
in  these  Recesses  they  breed.  Every  one  of  these  Trenches 
hath  two  Doors :  one  looking  toward  the  East,  through 
which  they  go  out  to  feed  ;  and  the  other  looking  west- 
ward, by  which  they  return.  When  these  Birds  discharge 
themselves,  they  always  fly  against  the  Wind.  They  are 
found  only  in  one  Place  of  all  the  World,  which  is  an 
Island,  ennobled,  as  we  have  written  before,  for  the  Tomb 
and  Shrine  of  Diomedes,  opposite  the  Coast  of  Apulia.  These 
Birds  are  like  the  Fulicae.  They  annoy  Strangers  that  come 
thither  with  their  Cries  ;  but  they  fawn  upon  Greeks  only,  as 
if  they  give  such  friendly  Welcome  to  the  Race  of  Diomedes. 
Every  Day  they  fill  their  Throat  and  Wings  with  Water,  arid 
so  wash  and  purify  the  Temple;  and  hence  arose  the  Fable, 
that  the  Companions  of  Diomedes  were  turned  into  the 
Shapes  of  these  Birds. 

CHAPTER  XLV. 
What  Animals  cannot  learn  anything. 

AND  now  that  we  are  in  this  Discourse  on  Ingenuity,  I 
must  not  omit  to  note,  that  among  Birds,  the  Swallows 
(Hirundines),  and  of  land  Animals  the  Mouse  (Mures), 
are  very  untoward  in  being  brought  to  learn.  Whereas 
Elephants  do  what  they  are  commanded.  Lions  draw  under 
the  Yoke :  Seals  (Vituli)  in  the  Sea,  and  very  many  sorts 
of  Fishes  grow  to  be  tame. 

CHAPTER  XLVI. 
The  manner  of  Birds  in  their  drinking. 

BIRDS  drink  by  sucking ;  and  those  which  have  long- 
Necks  make  Pauses  between,  with  the  Head  thrown  back- 
ward, as  if  they  would  pour  the  Water  into  themselves.  The 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  235 

(Bird)  Porphyrio1  alone  seemeth  to  bite  the  Water  as  he 
drinketh.  And  this  Bird  hath  the  Property  hy  himself  to  dip 
all  his  Meat  at  Times  in  Water,  and  then  with  his  Foot  in 
the  Place  of  a  Hand,  to  reach  it  to  his  Bill.  The  best  of  his 
kind  are  in  Comagene.  Their  Bills  and  very  long  Thighs 
are  red. 

CHAPTER  XLVII. 

Of  the  Himantopos^  the   Onocrotalis,  and  other 
foreign  Birds. 

LIKE  in  that  respect  to  the  Porphyrio,  is  the  Himan- 
topos ;  which  is  far  less,  but  full  as  long-legged.  They  are 
bred  in  Egypt,  and  stand  upon  three  Toes.  Their  chief 
feeding  is  upon  Flies.  In  Italy  they  will  not  live  many 
Days.  All  the  heavier  Fowls  live  on  Fruits.  They  that  fly 
high  prey  only  upon  Flesh.  Among  Water-fowls  the  Mergi 
are  accustomed  to  devour  what  other  Birds  disgorge.  The 
Onocrotali3  much  resemble  Swans,  and  they  might  be 
thought  to  be  not  altogether  different,  but  that  they  have 
within  their  Throat  another  kind  of  Receptacle,  into  which 
these  insatiable  Fowls  gather  all  they  can  get,  so  wonderful 
is  its  Capacity.  Now  when  they  have  accomplished  their 
Ravening,  they  return  it  from  thence  by  little  and  little  into 
their  Mouth,  from  whence  it  is  conveyed  to  the  true  Belly, 
after  the  manner  of  a  ruminating  Creature.  These  Fowls  are 
sent  from  the  parts  of  Gallia  lying  nearest  the  North  Ocean. 
In  Hercinia,  a  thick  Forest  of  Germany,  we  have  heard  that 
there  are  unaccustomed  kinds  of  Birds,  with  Feathers  shin- 
ing like  Fire4  by  Night.  In  other  respects,  I  have  nothing  to 
say  of  them  worth  the  Writing,  except  that  they  are  of  some 
Excellency  for  being  brought  from  far. 

1  Fulica  porphyrio,  LINN.    A  species  of  Coot.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Himantopus  melanopterw,  Cuv.    Stilt  Plover.  — Wern.  Club. 

3  Pelicanus  onocrotolus,  Cuv.   Pelican. — Wern.  Club. 

4  Gesner  makes  a  supposition  that  these   birds  may  be  Garrulus 
Bohemicus,  LINN.    The  Bohemian  Chatterer. — Wern.  Club. 


236  History  of  Nature.  [BOOK  X. 

CHAPTER  XLVIII. 
The  Names  and  Nature  of  many  Birds. 

OF  Water- fowl,  the  Phalerides1  in  Seleucia  of  the  Par- 
thians,  and  also  in  Asia,  are  the  most  praised.  Again,  the 
Phasianse2  of  Colchis,  which  have  two  Ears,  consisting  of 
Feathers,  which  they  set  up  and  lay  down  :  the  Numidian 
Fowls,  in  a  part  of  Africa  called  Numiclia,  as  also  throughout 
Italy.  Apicius,  the  deepest  of  all  Gluttons,  taught  that  the 
Tongue  of  the  Phoenicopterus,3  was  a  most  delicate  piece  of 
Meat.  The  Attagen4  of  Ionia  is  very  much  commended. 
When  this  Bird  is  taken,  she  becomes  mute;  but  otherwise 
she  is  vocal :  and  in  old  Time  she  was  reputed  a  rare  Bird. 
But  now  they  are  caught  in  Gallia  and  Hispania,  and  also 
among  the  Alps  :  where  also  are  the  Phalacracoraces,5  which 
were  peculiar  to  the  Balearic  Islands :  as  the  Pyrrhocorax6 
with  the  yellow  Bill,  was  (supposed  to  breed  only)  among 
the  Alps;  and  the  Lagopus,7  a  dainty  Bird  for  the /Table. 
This  Name  it  took,  because  its  Feet  are  covered  with  Hair 
like  the  Hare's-foot :  otherwise  it  is  all  over  white,  and  of 
the  size  of  a  Pigeon.  Beyond  the  Ground  you  will  hardly  get 
her  to  feed  :  neither  will  she  be  made  tame  while  she  lives : 
and  if  killed,  the  Body  presently  putrifies.  There  is  also 
another  of  the  same  Name,  which  differs  from  Quails  only  in 

1  Gallinula  chloropus,  Cuv.  Water-hen  ;  but  Belon  supposes  it  one  of 
the  larger  Divers.  —  Wern.  Club. 

2  Phasianus  colchicus.     Pheasant.  —  Wern.  Club. 

3  P.  ruber,  LINN.     Flamingo.  —  Wern.  Club. 

4  There  appears  to  be  some  doubt  which  species  of  Tetrao  this  was. 
Cuvier  supposes  the  Attagen  of  Aldrovandus  to  be  the  female  of  Tetrao 
bonasza,  LINN.  ;  but  the  true  Attagen  to  be  probably  T.  alchata,  LINN.,  the 
bird  which  Dr.  Kitto  has  thought  the  Quail  of  the  Israelites.    Martial 
speaks  highly  of  its  excellency  at  table  : 

"  Inter  sapores  fertur  alitum  primus 
lonicarum  gustus  Attagenarum." — Xenia,  lix. 

5  P.  carbo,  Cuv.     Cormorant.  —  Wern.  Club.. 

6  Fregilus  graculw,  Cuv.     Cornish  Chough.  —  Wern.  Club. 

7  Tetrao  lagopus,  LINN.    Ptarmigan. — Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  237 

bigness;  and  with  a  Dipping  of  Saffron  it  is  a  very  delicate 
Food.  M.  Egnatius  Calvinus,  Prefect  of  the  parts  about  the 
Alps,  reporteth,  that  he  hath  seen  there  the  Ibis,  a  Bird 
proper  to  the  Land  of  Egypt. 

CHAPTER  XLIX. 
Of  new  Birds,  and  such  as  are  fabulous. 

DURING  the  Civil  Wars  at  Bebriacum,  beyond  the  Po, 
there  came  these  new  Birds  (for  so  they  are  still  called)  into 
Italy.  They  are  a  kind  of  Turdi,  somewhat  less  than  House- 
pigeons  (Columbse),  pleasant  to  eat.  The  Balearic  Islands 
send  us  another  Porphyrio,  better  than  that  before-named.1 
There  also  the  Buzzard  (Buteo),  a  kind  of  Hawk,  is  held  as 
excellent  for  the  Table.  Likewise  the  Vipio,  for  so  they  call 
the  lesser  Crane.  As  for  the  Fowls  called  Pegasi,  with 
Heads  like  Horses';  and  the  Gryphae  (Griffins),  with  long 
Ears  and  a  hooked  Beak,  I  take  them  to  be  Fables  :  and  yet 
they  say  that  the  Pegasi  are  in  Scythia,  and  the  Gryphae 
(Griffins)  in  Ethiopia.  Moreover,  I  think  the  same  of  the 
Tragopanades,  which  many  affirm  to  be  greater  than  the 
Eagle,  having  crooked  Horns  on  each  side  of  the  Head,  of 
the  colour  of  Iron,  and  the  Head  only  purple.  Neither  do 
the  Syrens  obtain  Faith,  although  Dino,  the  Father  of 
Clitarthus  the  celebrated  Writer,  affirms  that  they  exist  in 
India:  and  that  with  their  Singing  they  will  lull  People  into 
deep  Sleep,  and  then  tear  them  in  Pieces.  He  that  will 
give  Credit  to  these  Things  will  not  deny  that  Dragons,  in 
Truth,  taught  Melampus,  by  licking  his  Ears,  to  understand 
the  Language  of  Birds;  or  the  Things  that  Democritas 
telleth,  who  nameth  the  Birds,  of  whose  Blood  mingled 
together  there  is  engendered  a  Serpent ;  which  whoever 
eateth  shall  know  what  Birds  say  one  to  another:  and  the 
Things  he  telleth  particularly  of  that  one  Bird,  the  Galerita : 2 
although  without  these  there  is  an  immense  Collection  to 

O 

occupy  Life  about  Auguries.     Homer  maketh  mention  of  a 
1  Chap.  xlvi.  a  Alauda  arvensis;  Field  Lark. — Wern.  Club. 


238  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X. 

kind  of  Birds  called  Scopes  : l  but  I  cannot  readily  conceive 
in  my  Mind  those  satyrical  Gesticulations  of  theirs  when 
they  are  perched,  which  so  many  talk  of:  neither  are  these 
Birds  known  at  the  present  Time.  And  therefore  it  is  better 
to  write  of  those  we  certainly  know. 

CHAPTER  L. 

Who  first  invented  to  cram  Hens.     Of  Aviaries,  and  who  first 
invented  them. 

THE  Inhabitants  of  Delos  began  the  cramming  of  Hens. 
And  from  thence  arose  that  Plague  of  eating  the  Birds  so 
fat,  as  to  be  larded  with  their  own  Body.  Among  the  old 
Statutes  ordained  to  repress  inordinate  Suppers,  I  find  in 
one  Law  made  by  C.  Fannius,  the  Consul,  eleven  Years  be- 
fore the  third  Punic  War,  That  no  Man  should  place  (on  his 
Table)  more  than  one  Hen,  which  should  not  be  fattened  ; 
which  Head  or  Injunction  was  afterwards  taken  from  this 
and  inserted  in  all  the  other  Laws.  But  a  Bye-path  was 
found  out  to  deceive  the  Meaning,  by  feeding  the  Barn-door 
Fowls  also  with  a  Paste  soaked  in  Milk,  by  which  their 
Flesh  was  rendered  much  more  tender.  It  is  not  always 
that  Hens  only  are  selected  for  fattening ;  but  they  are  only 
thought  well  crammed  when  they  are  fat  in  the  Skin  about 
the  Neck.  Afterwards  the  Skill  of  the  Cooks  began  to  look 
to  their  Haunches  ;  and  that  they  may  be  divided  along  the 
Chine,  and  be  extended  from  one  Leg,  so  as  to  take  up  the 
whole  Sideboard.  The  Parthians  also  have  taught  our 
Cooks  their  Fashions.  And  yet  for  all  this  fine  dressing 
out  of  Meat,  there  is  nothing  that  wholly  pleaseth ;  for  one 
praises  nothing  but  the  Haunch,  and  in  another  Place  the 
Breast  only  is  commended.  The  first  that  invented  an 
Aviary  in  which  to  shut  up  all  kinds  of  Fowls,  was  M.  Lenius 

1  The  Scops  is  described  by  ^Elian  (B.  xv.  ch.  xxviii.)  as  a  very  small- 
eared  owl,  of  a  lead  colour,  with  white  spots.  The  ridiculous  gesticu- 
lations which  were  doubted  by  Pliny,  are  affirmed  by  ^Elian ;  who  says 
that  fowlers  imitated  them,  and  by  so  doing  attracted  its  attention,  and 
succeeded  in  catching  it.— -Wern.  Club. 


BOOK  X.]  History  of  Nature.  239 

Strabo,  of  the  Equestrian  order,  at  Brundusium.  And  by 
his  Example  we  began  to  confine  Animals  within  Prisons  ;^ 
to  which  Creatures  Nature  had  assigned  the  wide  Air. 

CHAPTER  LI. 
Of  jEsop's  Platter. 

BUT  in  this  Relation  the  most  distinguished  is  the 
Platter  of  Clodius  JEsopus,  the  Actor  of  Tragedies ;  which 
was  valued  at  six  hundred  Sestertia.1  In  this  he  served  up 
all  kind  of  Birds  remarkable  for  Song  or  capable  of  human 
Speech ;  and  they  cost  him  six  hundred  Sesterces  a-piece. 
And  it  was  no  Pleasure  that  guided  him  in  this,  beyond  the 
Fact  that  he  would  eat  the  Imitators  of  Man  :  without  any 
Consideration  that,  in  Truth,  all  his  own  rich  Revenues  had 
been  procured  by  his  Tongue  :  a  Father  verily  worthy  of  a 
Son  who,  as  we  said  before,  devoured  those  Pearls.2  And, 
to  speak  the  Truth,  it  is  hard  to  judge  which  of  the  two 
committed  the  greatest  Baseness ;  unless  that  it  is  less  to 
sup  on  the  greatest  Riches  of  Nature  than  on  Men's 
Tongues. 

CHAPTER  LII. 

The  Generation  of  Birds ;  and  besides  Birds,  what  four- 
footed  Beasts  lay  Eggs. 

THE  Generation  of  Birds  seemeth  to  be  simple ;  and  yet 
therein  are  to  be  found  some  wonderful  Things.  For  four- 
footed  Animals  also  produce  Eggs ;  as  Chamaeleons,  Lizards, 
and  such  as  we  named  among  Serpents.  Of  Fowls,  those 
that  have  hooked  Claws  are  less  fertile,  and  among  these, 
only  the  Cenchris  layeth  above  four.  Nature  hath  assigned 
this  to  the  Class  of  Fowls,  that  the  Powerful  should  be  less 
fruitful  than  those  which  fly  from  the  others.  Struthio 
Cameli  (Ostriches),  Gallinae  (Hens),  Perdices  (Partridges), 

1  600,000  sestertii,  150,000  denarii. 
»  See  B.  ix.  ch.  xxxv. — Wern.  CM. 


240  History  of  Nature.  [BooK  X . 

and  Sali,1  are  great  layers.  Their  Embrace  is  performed  two 
Ways:  for  either  the  Female  croucheth  to  the  Ground,  as  do 
the  Hens  ;  or  they  stand  up,  as  the  Cranes.  Of  Eggs,  some 
are  white,  as  those  of  Doves  and  Partridges;  others  are  pale, 
as  those  of  Water-fowl :  some  spotted,  as  in  the  Turkey- 
hens  (Meleager),  others,  again,  reddish ;  as  those  of  Phea- 
sants (Phasiani),  and  Cenchrides. 

All  Birds'  Eggs  within  the  Shell  are  of  two  Colours.  In 
Water-fowls,  the  Yolk  is  more  than  the  White,  and  the  same 
is  more  duskish  than  in  others.  The  Eggs  of  Fishes  are  of 
one  Colour,  and  in  them  there  is  no  White.  Birds'  Eggs  are 
brittle,  by  reason  of  the  Heat :  Serpents'  Eggs  are  more 
tough,  because  of  the  Cold  :  but  those  of  Fishes  are  soft, 
from  the  Liquid.  Those  of  such  Creatures  as  live  in  Water 
are  round  :  others  are,  for  the  most  part,  pointed  at  the  top. 
Birds  lay  their  Eggs  with  the  roundest  End  foremost :  the 
Shell  being  soft;  but  presently  they  harden  according  as  the 
Portions  protrude.  Horatius  Flaccus  is  of  opinion,  that  the 
longer  the  Egg  is,  the  better  they  taste.  The  rounder  Eggs 
produce  Hens,  the  others  yield  Cocks.  The  Navel  of  the  Egg 
is  beneath  the  top ;  or  it  is  a  prominent  Drop  in  the  Shell. 

CHAPTER  LIII. 

The  Propagation  of  Eggs :  the  Sitting  of  Birds,  and  their 
manner  of  Embrace. 

SOME  Birds   associate  in  breeding  at  all  Times  of  the 

O 

Year,  as  the  Barn-door  Fowls ;  and  they  lay  with  only  the 
Intermission  of  two  Months  in  Mid-winter.  Of  those,  Pul- 
lets lay  more  than  old  Hens,  but  the  Eggs  are  less,  espe- 
cially the  first  and  last.  So  fruitful  are  they,  that  some  of 
them  will  lay  threescore  Eggs:  some  lay  every  Day;  others, 
twice  a  Day  :  and  some  will  so  over-lay,  that  they  become 
worn  out,  and  die.  The  Hens  called  Hadrianae  are  ac- 
counted best.  Doves  (Columbse)  lay  ten  Times  in  the  Year, 
and  sometimes  eleven :  and  in  Egypt  they  continue  even  in 

1  What  these  are  seems  uncertain.     Holland  supposed  them  Linnets. 
—  Wern.  Club. 


^LJ<C^ 


RETURN    BIOSCIENCE  &  NATURAL  RESOURCES  LIBRARY 

TO  —^     2101  VALLEY  LIFE  SCIENCES  BLDG.     642-2531 


LOAN  PERIOD  1      2 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


- 


r»M    i 


>»h-ft  MM 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA,  BERKELEY 

FORM  NO.  DDO,  60m,  1 1/94  BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


v     -,< 
<  .  c^  « 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRA! 


<  <r 

^  ^S 


? 


«.   «?.••<  V.- 


.-  .-<«%•€:-•  *;a* 

"-^r;---^-<!B?ii 
••.<^-  ••> 

'jcr^'V  -• 
<:<-.*.'  •_    c-«&'^ 


'•^'v      ^HM